ON 


.CT; 


'HE  Romans 


» 


■''      Jf 


M"       AC- 


'2.  /'o '  *^/<j 


r 


-0^ 


Shelf.. 


PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


Section    .  rA  w  I  K/' 

Number     V .      I 


'ic 


-<     .^ 


i.'     ^ 


V        «<'       j<        V*'       '*       ^       jf       jir       ,*" 


^       jr-       -^ 


*        ^       V 


•«  ^ 


•r  ,v 


*        -«^'        4-       •*'        -< 
r       ^      JT       if      < 


jT  W  tt>  .  * 

*       ^      It: 


*  <  <■ 


^  _     ^'  _^;      -:^- 


*r 


.V  >'  :'' 


«■         •'        -*:; 


i^         * 


^  -  -  :^ 


»>         4         y 


Iff       --* 


-^       Jf 


-•%         ji^*         ■^         *» 


.V  ^(;-  Jt- 


-*•  -jf  '**-         jf 


*  <         < 


AN 


AMERICAN  COMMENTARY 


ON    THE 


KEW   TESTAMENT. 


EDITED  BY 

ALVAH  HOVEY,  D.D.,  LL.D. 


^^^-4 


PHILADELPHIA . 

AMERICAN  BAPTIST  PUBLICATION  SOCIETY, 

1420  Chkstnut  Street. 


COMMENTARY 


ON    THE 


ACTS  OF  THE  APOSTLES. 


BY 

HORATIO  B.  HAOKETT,  D.U., 

PROFESSOR   OF    BIBLICAL   LITERATURE   IN    NEWTON   THEOLOGICAL    INSTITUTIOX. 


A.   JSTJE^V  EniTION', 

REVISED   AND    GREATLY    ENLARGED    BY  THE  AUTHOR. 

EDITED  BY 

ALVAH   HOVEY,  D.D.,  LL.D., 


IN  CONSULTATION   WITH 


EZRA  ABBOT,  LL.D. 


PHILADELPHIA : 
AMERICAN  BAPTIST  PUBLICATION  SOCIETY, 

1420  Chestnut  Street. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1882,  by  the 

AMERICAN    BAPTIST   PUBLICATION   SOCIETY, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


KLECTROTYPED    BY 

Westcott  &  Thomsok, 

PHI/  *"»IJ'HIA, 


THE   AUTHOE 


Is  Perniitted  to  Inscrite  tWs  VolumQ 

TO 

AUGUSTUS  THOLUCK,  D.D., 

WHOSE  WRITINGS  IN  ILLUSTRATION  OF  THE  SACRED  WORD,  AND  WHOSE 

PERSONAL  INSTRUCTIONS,  HAVE  CAUSED  HIS  INFLUENCE  TO  BE 

FELT  AND  HIS  NAME  TO  BE  HONORED   IN  FOREIGN 

COUNTRIES  AS  WELL  AS  IN  HIS  OWN. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION. 


It  has  been  the  writer's  endeavor  to  present  to  the  reader  in  this  volume  the 
results  of  -the  present  state  of  biblical  study  as  applied  to  the  illustration  of  the 
Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Although  our  language  contains  already  some  valuable 
works  devoted  to  the  same  general  object,  it  is  hoped  that  the  dependence  of  the 
work  here  offered  to  the  public  on  the  original  text,  and  the  advantage  taken 
of  the  latest  investigations  in  this  department  of  criticism,  will  render  it  not  su- 
perfluous. 

Of  the  importance  of  an  acquaintance  with  the  contents  of  the  Acts  it  must 
be  unnecessary  to  speak.  A  single  reflection  will  render  this  sufiiciently  obvious. 
No  person  can  be  prepared  to  read  the  Epistles  of  the  New  Testament  with  the 
greatest  advantage  until  he  has  made  himself  familiar  with  the  external  history 
of  the  apostle  Paul  and  with  his  character  and  spirit,  as  Luke  has  portrayed  them 
in  his  narrative.  Those  portions  of  the  Acts,  constituting  the  greater  part  of  the 
whole,  which  relate  to  the  great  apostle  must  be  thoroughly  mastered  before  any 
proper  foundation  is  laid  for  the  exegetical  study  of  the  Epistles.  It  is  the  object 
of  these  Notes  to  assist  the  reader  in  the  acquisition  of  this  knowledge  and  disci- 
pline ;  to  enable  him  to  form  his  own  independent  view  of  the  meaning  of  the 
sacred  writer  in  this  particular  portion  of  the  New  Testament,  and,  at  the  same 
time,  furnish  himself  to  some  extent  with  those  principles  and  materials  of  crit- 
icism which  are  common  to  all  parts  of  the  Bible.  If  the  plan  of  the  work  and 
the  mode  in  which  it  is  executed  are  such  as  to  impart  a  just  idea  of  the  process 
of  biblical  interpretation,  and  to  promote  a  habit  of  careful  study  and  of  self- 
reliance  on  the  part  of  those  who  may  use  the  book,  it  will  be  a  result  much 
more  important  than  that  all  the  opinions  advanced  in  it  should  be  approved  ; 
it  is  a  result  beyond  any  other  which  the  writer  has  been  anxious  to  accomplish. 
The  grammatical  references  and  explanations  will  enable  the  student  to  judge  of 
the  consistency  of  the  interpretations  given  with  the  laws  of  the  Greek  language. 
The  authorities  cited  will  show  the  state  of  critical  opinion  on  all  passages  that 
are  supposed  to  be  uncertain  or  obscure.  The  geographical,  archaeological,  and 
other  information  collected  from  many  diflferent  sources  will  unfold  the  relations 
of  the  book  to  the  contemporary  history  of  the  age  in  which  it  was  written,  and 

7 


8  PREFACE    TO    THE    FIRST    EDITION. 


serve  to  present  to  the  mind  a  more  vivid  conception  of  the  reality  of  the  scenes 
and  the  events  which  the  narrative  describes. 

No  single  commentary  can  be  expected  to  answer  all  the  purposes  for  which  a 
commentary  is  needed.  The  writer  has  aimed  at  a  predominant  object,  and  that 
has  been  to  determine  by  the  rules  of  a  just  philology  the  meaning  of  the  sacred 
writer,  and  not  to  develop  the  practical  applications  or,  to  any  great  extent,  the 
doctrinal  implications  of  this  meaning.  With  such  a  design,  no  one  will  object  to 
the  use  which  has  been  made  of  the  labors  of  foreign  scholars  ;  it  would  have 
been  a  matter  of  just  complaint  not  to  have  used  them,  although  with  a  different 
aim  it  would  be  equally  inexcusable  not  to  have  brought  into  view  more  frequently 
the  connections  which  exist  between  the  Acts  and  the  practical  religious  literature 
contained  in  our  own  language. 

I  am  indebted  to  various  friends  for  advice  and  co-operation  in  the  performance 
of  this  labor.  Among  these,  it  becomes  me  to  mention  in  particular  the  Rev.  B.  B. 
Edwards,  D.  D.,  professor  at  Andover.  It  is  doubtful  whether  I  should  have  un- 
dertaken the  work,  or  persevered  in  it,  had  it  not  been  for  his  generous  sympathy 
and  encouragement. 

The  author  can  recall  no  happier  hours  than  those  which  he  has  spent  in  giv- 
ing instruction  on  this  book  of  the  New  Testament  to  successive  classes  of  theo- 
logical students.  May  the  fruits  of  this  mutual  study  be  useful  to  them  in  the 
active  labors  of  the  sacred  work  to  which  they  are  devoted  !  They  are  now  sent 
forth  into  a  wider  sphere ;  and  here,  also,  may  God  be  pleased  to  own  them  as  a 
means  of  contributing  to  a  more  diligent  study  and  a  more  perfect  knowledge  of 
his  Holy  Word! 

Newton  Theological  iNSTiTtrrioKi 
October  31, 1851. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  REVISED  EDITION. 


The  present  edition,  as  compared  with  the  former,  has  been  in  parts  rewritten, 
and  also  enlarged  by  the  addition  of  about  a  hundred  pages.  In  the  interval 
since  the  work  was  first  published  the  writer  has  continued  to  study  the  Acts 
both  in  a  private  way  and  occasionally  as  the  teacher  of  theological  classes.  As 
the  result  of  this  further  labor,  the  view  on  some  passages  has  been  modified ;  ex- 
pressions that  were  found  to  be  obscure  have  been  made  plainer ;  new  points  in 
the  text  have  been  elucidated ;  former  explanations  of  a  debatable  character, 
according  to  the  apparent  evidence  in  the  case,  have  been  placed  in  a  stronger 
light  or  advanced  with  less  confidence ;  and,  in  general,  pains  have  been  taken 
in  this  revised  form  to  render  the  notes  not  less  critical  than  before,  and  yet 
freer  and  more  varied  in  their  contents.  The  last  six  years,  too,  have  been 
signally  fruitful  in  the  appearance  of  valuable  works  relating  to  the  Acts, 
either  directly  exegetical  or  subsidiary  to  that  end.  The  reader  will  find 
ample  proof  in  the  following  pages  of  the  extent  of  my  indebtedness  to  these 
contributions  to  biblical  literature,  and,  at  the  same  time,  will  appreciate 
the  difficulty  of  using  the  abundant  material  with  independence  and  judg- 
ment. 

It  has  been  of  some  service  to  me  that  since  the  publication  of  the  first  edition 
I  have  been  enabled  to  visit  the  countries  in  which  the  Saviour  and  the  apostles 
lived  and  the  cross  gained  its  earliest  victories.  The  journey  has  made  it  tenfold 
more  a  labor  of  love  to  trace  again  the  footsteps  of  Paul  and  his  associates,  and 
should  add  something  to  the  interpreter's  power  to  unfold  the  history  of  their 
sufferings  and  their  triumphs. 

Not  to  render  the  Commentary  too  heterogeneous,  it  has  seemed  best  to  dis- 
card the  idea  of  a  supplement  for  the  discussion  of  certain  miscellaneous  topics, 
as  was  proposed  at  first.  As  a  substitute  for  such  an  appendage,  the  points 
which  it  was  designed  to  embrace  have  been  enlarged  upon  more  fully  in  the 
present  notes,  and  references  have  been  given  to  appropriate  works  in  which 
the  student  who  desires  will  find  more  complete  information.  I  will  only  add 
that  the  Greek  text  has  been  reviewed  more  carefully  in  this  edition,  and,  un- 
less I  have  erred  through  some  inadvertence,  all  the  variations  which  aflfect  the 

9 


10  PREFACE    TO    THE    REVISED    EDITION. 

sense  materially  have  been  brought  to  the  reader's  notice.  At  the  suggestion 
of  various  friends,  the  Greek  words  in  the  notes  have  been  translated  in  all 
cases  where  the  remarks  might  otherwise  be  obscure  to  the  English  reader,  and 
thus  the  explanations  will  be  readily  understood  by  all  into  whose  hands  the 
work  may  fall. 

May  the  divine  blessing  rest  upon  this  renewed  endeavor  to  illustrate  this  por- 
tion of  the  Holy  Scriptures  ! 

Newton  Centre,  March  1,  1858. 


EDITOR'S    PREFACE. 


The  Editor  has  the  very  great  pleasure  of  presenting  to  the  public  a  new  edi- 
tion of  Dr.  Hackett's  Commentary,  a  standard  work  on  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles — a 
work  which  has  merited  and  received  the  highest  commendation  from  biblical 
scholars  in  Europe  and  America,  and  which  for  thoroughness  of  investigation, 
critical  acumen,  and  beauty  of  diction  is  unsurpassed  by  any  commentary  on  the 
same  book  with  which  the  Editor  is  acquainted. 

In  preparing  this  Commentary  for  the  use  of  persons  who  are  not  familiar  with 
the  original  text  on  which  it  is  founded,  the  Editor,  in  consultation  with  Prof 
Ezra  Abbot,  LL.D.,  has  made  it  his  aim — (1)  to  preserve  in  its  integrity  every- 
thing written  by  Dr.  Hackett :  to  do  this  has  been  a  pleasure  as  well  as  a  duty, 
and  great  care  has  been  taken  in  this  respect ;  (2)  to  omit  such  Greek  words  or 
sentences  as  could  be  spared  without  diminishing  the  clearness  or  value  of  the 
Author's  notes,  or  to  substitute  for  them  the  words  of  the  Common  Version  when- 
ever this  would  be  a  help  to  the  reader ;  (3)  to  insert  in  brackets,  generally  over 
his  own  initials,  A.  H.,  a  few  brief  notes  relating  to  the  text  or  to  its  meaning. 
The  Editor  is  responsible  for  everything  in  brackets,  and  Dr.  Hackett  for  the  rest. 
Since  the  second  edition  of  this  Commentary  was  published,  the  critical  editions 
of  the  New  Testament  by  Tregelles,  Tischendorf  (VIII.),  Westcott  and  Hort,  and 
the  text  adopted  by  the  Anglo-American  Revisers,  have  been  issued,  and  it  has 
seemed  advisable  to  make  reference  on  many  doubtful  passages  to  the  readings 
found  in  these  works,  as  well  as  to  the  principal  manuscripts  on  which  they  are 
based.  And  (4)  to  notice  instances  in  which  the  fourth  edition  of  Meyer's  com- 
mentary on  the  Acts  (now  translated)  differs  from  the  earlier  editions  used  by 
Dr.  Hackett  in  this  Commentary.  The  changes  made  by  Meyer  in  his  fourth 
and  last  edition  are  somewhat  numerous,  and  are  for  the  most  part  favorable  to 
the  views  of  Dr.  Hackett. 

To  have  examined  in  detail  the  later  objections  to  the  authenticity  or  trust- 
worthiness of  The  Acts  would  have  increased  the  size  of  the  Commentary  beyond 
the  prescribed  limits,  without  adding  greatly  to  its  value.  But  it  niay  be  proper 
to  refer  the  reader  to  The  Beginnings  of  Christianity,  by  Dr.  Fisher,  as  con- 
taining, especially  in   chapters  xv.  and   xvi.,  important  replies   to   these   objec- 

11 


12  EDITOR'S  PREFACE. 


tions,  and  to  express  the  belief  that  nothing  has  been  discovered  by  the  most 

recent  scholarship  which  ought  to  weaken  in  the  least  out'  confidence  in  this  part 

of  the  New  Testament  as  being  fully  entitled  to  its  ancient  place  in  the  canon  of 

Holy  Scripture. 

Although  Dr.  Abbot  has  been  consulted  in  respect  to  the  kind  of  notes  which 

might  be  wisely  inserted  in  this  volume,  he  is  in  no  degree  responsible  for  the 

views  expressed  in  any  of  them ;  but  the  work  has  had  the  benefit  of  his  accurate 

and   practised  eye  in  reading   the  proofs — a  service  which  he  was  induced  to 

render  by  his  high  regard  for  the  Author  of  the  Commentary,  with  whom  he  was 

formerly  associated  in  the  great  work   of  preparing   the  American  edition   of 

Smith's  Dictionary  of  the  Bible. 

ALVAH  HOVEY. 

Newton  Centre,  Mass.,  March  5, 1882. 


INTRODUCTION. 


§1.  THE   WRITER   OF   THE   ACTS. 

The  evidence  that  the  book  of  Acts  was  written  by  Luke,  to  whom  the  Christian 
world  are  accustomed  to  ascribe  it,  is  of  a  threefold  character.  It  will  be  sufficient  for 
the  object  here  in  view  merely  to  indicate  the  line  of  argument  which  establishes  the 
correctness  of  that  opinion.  A  more  complete  and  systematic  view  of  the  evidence 
must  be  sought  in  works  which  treat  professedly  of  the  formation  and  transmission  of 
the  Canon  of  the  Scriptures. 

In  the  first  place,  we  have  the  explicit  testimony  of  the  early  Christian  writers  that 
Luke  wrote  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Irenseus,  who  became  Bishop  of  Lyons  in  A.  D. 
178,  and  who  was  born  so  early  that  he  was  intimate  with  those  who  had  seen  the 
apostles,  says  expressly  that  Luke  was  the  author  of  the  Acts ;  he  quotes  from  him 
various  single  passages,  and  in  one  place  gives  a  distinct  summary  of  the  last  twelve 
chapters  of  the  book  {Adv.  Hceres.,  3.  14.  1).  He  treats  this  authorship  of  the  work  as 
a  matter  which  he  had  no  occasion  to  defend,  because  no  one  of  his  contemporaries  had 
called.it  in  question.  From  the  generation  which  separated  Irenoeus  from  the  age  of 
Luke  we  have  only  a  few  scanty  remains ;  but  these,  although  they  contain  expressions' 
which,  according  to  the  admission  of  nearly  all  critics,  presuppose  an  acquaintance  with 
the  Acts,  are  silent  respecting  the  writer.  To  have  mentioned  him  by  name  would  have 
been  at  variance  with  the  informal  mode  of  citing  the  Christian  Scriptures  which  dis- 
tinguishes the  writings  of  that  early  period.  The  next  witness  is  Clemens  of  Alexandria, 
who  flourished  about  A.  D.  190.  This  Father  not  only  speaks  of  Luke  as  having  com- 
posed the  Acts  in  his  Stromata  (lib.  5),  but  is  known  to  have  written  a  commentary  on 
it,  which  has  not  been  preserved.  Tertullian,  who  lived  about  A.  D.  200,  olfers  the  same 
testimony.  He  has  not  only  quoted  the  Acts  repeatedly,  but  named  Luke  as  the  author 
in  such  a  way  as  makes  it  evident  that  he  merely  followed  in  this  the  universal  opinion 
of  his  age  [Dc  Jejun.,  c.  10;  De  Prcescript.  Hceret.,  c.  22;  De  Bapt.,  c.  10,  etc.).  Euse- 
bius  wrote  about  A.  D.  325.  He  has  recorded  both  his  own  belief  and  that  of  his  time 
in  the  following  important  statement :  "  Luke,  a  native  of  Antioch,  by  profession  a 
physician,  was  mostly  Paul's  companion,  though  he  associated  not  a  little  with  the 
other  apostles.  He  has  left  us  examples  of  the  art  of  healing  souls,  which  he  acquired 
from  the  apostles,  in  two  divinely-inspired  books ;  first,  in  the  Gospel  which  he  testifies 
to  have  written  according  to  what  eye-witnesses  and  ministers  of  the  word  delivered  to 
him  from  the  beginning,  all  which,  also,  he  says  that  he  investigated  from  the  first;* 

1  See  the  passapies,  in  Kirchhofer's  Snmmlung  zur  Geschichte  des  N.  T.  Canons,  p.  161,  sq.,  in 
Lardner's  Credibility,  and  in  similar  works. 

*  As  the  relative  may  be  neuter  or  masculine,  many  take  the  sense  of  the  Greek  to  be,  all 
whom  he  accompanied ;  but  the  manifest  allusion  to  Luke  1  :  2,  3  renders  the  other  the  more 
obvious  translation. 

13 


14  INTRODUCTION. 


and,  secondly,  in  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  which  he  composed,  not  from  report,  as 
in  the  other  case,  but  according  to  his  own  personal  observation"  {Hist.  EccL,  3.  4). 

It  would  be  superfluous  to  pursue  this  testimony  farther.  It  may  be  proper  to  add 
that  no  trace  of  any  opposition  to  it  or  dissent  from  it  has  come  down  to  us  from  the 
first  ages  of  the  church.  Some  of  the  early  heretical  sects,  it  is  true,  as  the  Marcionites, 
Manicheans,  Severians,  rejected  the  religious  authority  of  the  Acts  ;  but  as  they  did  this 
because  it  contradicted  their  peculiar  views,  and  as  they  admitted  without  question  the 
source  from  which  their  opponents  claimed  to  receive  it,  their  rejection  of  the  book, 
Under  such  circumstances,  becomes  a  conclusive  testimony  to  its  genuineness. 

In  the  second  place,  the  relation  in  which  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  stands  to  the 
Gospel  which  is  ascribed  to  Luke  proves  that  the  author  of  the  two  productions  must 
be  the  same  individual.  The  writer  introduces  his  work  as  a  continuation  or  second 
part  of  a  previous  history,  and  dedicates  it  to  a  certain  Theophilus,  who  can  be  no  other 
than  the  person  for  whose  special  information  the  Gospel  was  written.  As  to  the  iden- 
tity of  the  writer  of  the  Acts  with  the  writer  of  the  Gospel  attributed  to  Luke,  no  well- 
founded  question  has  been,  or  can  be,  raised.  Consequently,  the  entire  mass  of  testi- 
mony which  proves  that  Luke  the  Evangelist  wrote  the  Gospel  which  bears  his  name 
proves  with  equal  force  that  he  wrote  also  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Thus  the  Acts 
may  be  traced  up  to  Luke  through  two  independent  series  of  witnesses.  And  it  may 
be  confidently  asserted  that,  unless  the  combined  historical  evidence  from  this  twofold 
source  be  admitted  as  conclusive  in  support  of  Luke's  claim  to  the  authorship  of  the 
Acts,  there  is  then  no  ancient  book  in  the  world  the  author  of  which  can  ever  be  ascer- 
tained by  us. 

In  the  third  place,  the  literary  peculiarities  which  distinguish  the  Gospel  of  Luke 
mark  also  the  composition  of  the  Acts  and  show  that  it  must  have  come  from  the  same 
hand.  The  argument  here  is  founded  on  a  different  relation  of  the  Gospel  to  the  Acts 
from  that  to  which  we  have  just  adverted.  Luke  being  acknowledged  as  the  author  of 
the  Gospel,  we  know  from  that  source  what  the  characteristics  of  his  style  are ;  and  it 
is  maintained  that  these  re-appear  in  the  Acts  to  such  an  extent  that  we  can  account  for 
the  agreement  only  by  referring  the  two  productions  to  the  same  writer.  The  reality 
of  the  resemblance  here  asserted  is  conceded  by  critics  of  every  name.  It  will  be  neces- 
sary to  restrict  the  illustration  of  it  to  a  few  examples.^  In  Luke's  Gospel,  verb?  com- 
pounded with  prepositions  are  more  numerous  than  in  the  other  Evangelists ;  they  are 
found  in  the  same  proportion  in  the  Acts.  Matthew  has  avv  three  times ;  Mark,  five 
times ;  John,  three  times,  or,  according  to  another  reading,  but  twice ;  while  Luke  em- 
ploys it  in  his  Gospel  twenty-four  times,  and  in  the  Acts  fifty-one  times.  Luke  has  used 
oTraf  in  his  two  books  thirty-five  times ;  whereas  it  occurs  in  all  the  others  but  nine 
times.  nopevea-Qai  is  found  in  the  Gospel  forty-nine  times  and  in  the  Acts  thirty-eight 
times,  but  is  rarely  found  in  other  parts  of  the  New  Testament.  The  construction  of 
eItzeIv  and  lalelv  with  7r|o6c,  instead  of  the  dative  of  the  person  addressed,  is  confined 
almost  exclusively  to  Luke.  No  other  writer,  except  John  in  a  few  instances,  ever  says 
eiTvelv  TTpdc,  and  ?.a2.elv  npoQ  occurs  out  of  Luke's  writings  only  in  1  Cor.  14:6;  Heb.  5  :  5 
and  11  :  18.  As  in  Luke's  Gospel,  so  in  the  Acts,  we  have  a  characteristic  use  of  6e  nai 
to  express  emphasis  or  gradation  ;  a  similar  use  of  koI  avrd^  or  avroi ;  the  insertion  of 
the  neuter  article  before  interrogative  sentences ;  the  omission  of  6e  after  /nev  ovv ;  the 
uniform  preference  of  'lepovaaTiijfi  to  'lepoadlvfia  ;  and  still  others.     Credner,  in  his  Intro- 

1  They  are  drawn  out  more  or  less  fully  in  Gersdorf  s  Beitraege,  p.  160,  sq. ;  Credner's  E'mleitung 
in  das  neue  Testament,  p.  130,  sq. ;  Ebrard's  Kritik  der  evangelischen  Gcschichte,  p.  671,  ed.  1850  ; 
Guerioke's  Gesammtgeschichte  des  N.  T.,  p.  166,  .9q. ;  Lekebusch's  Composition  und  Entstehung  der 
Apostelgeschichte,  p.  37,  sq. ;  and  Dr.  Davidson's  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament,  vol.  i.  p.  190, 
and  vol.  ii.  p.  8. 


INTRODUCTION.  15 


duction  to  the  New  Testament,  has  enumerated  not  fewer  than  sixty-five  distinct  idioms 
which  he  considers  as  peculiar  to  Luke's  diction  as  compared  with  that  of  the  other 
New-Testament  writers ;  and  nearly  all  these  he  points  out  as  occurring  at  the  same 
time  in  both  the  Gospel  and  the  Acts.  It  is  impossible,  then,  to  doubt,  unless  we  deny 
that  any  confidence  can  be  placed  in  this  species  of  criticism,  that  if  Luke  wrote  the 
Gospel  which  we  accredit  to  him,  he  must  also  have  written  the  Acts. 

§  2.     BIOGRAPHICAL  SKETCH  OF  LUKE. 

According  to  Eusebius,  as  already  quoted,  and  Jerome,  who  may  be  supposed  to 
represent  the  opinion  of  their  times,  Luke  was  a  native  of  Antioch.  As  he  appears  in 
the  Acts  to  have  spent  so  much  time  at  Philippi,  some  modern  writers  have  conjectured 
that  he  may  have  been  a  native  or  an  inhabitant  of  that  city.  The  historical  testimony 
deserves  more  regard  than  an  inference  of  that  nature.  That  he  was  a  Gentile  by 
birth  appears  to  be  certain  from  Col.  4  :  11,  14,  where  Paul  distinguishes  him  from 
those  whom  he  denominates  those  who  are  of  the  circumcision  [ol  ovreg  ek  nepirofiyg).  His 
foreign  extraction  is  confirmed  also  by  the  character  of  his  style,  which  approaches 
nearer  to  the  standard  of  classical  Greek  than  that  of  any  other  writer  of  the  New 
Testament,  with  the  exception  of  the  apostle  Paul.  This  feature  of  his  language  ren- 
ders it  probable  that  he  was  of  Greek  origin.  Some  have  inferred  this  also  from  his 
Greek  name  ;  but  it  was  not  uncommon  for  Jews,  as  well  as  Romans  and  other  foreigners, 
to  assume  such  names  at  this  period.  Whether  he  was  a  proselyte  to  Judaism  before 
his  conversion  to  Christianity,  or  not,  is  a  question  on  which  critics  differ.  The  sup- 
position that  he  adopted  first  the  Jewish  religion,  and  had  done  so  perhaps  in  early  life, 
accounts  best  for  his  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  opinions  and  customs  of  the  Jews, 
his  knowledge  of  the  Septuagint,  and  the  degree  of  Hebraistic  tendency  which  shows 
itself  in  his  style.  It  appears  from  Col.  4  :  14  that  Luke  was  a  physician ;  and  the 
general  voice  of  antiquity,  in  accordance  with  that  passage,  represents  him  as  having 
belonged  to  the  medical  profession.  The  effect  of  his  following  such  an  employment 
can  be  traced,  as  many  critics  think,  in  various  passages  of  Luke's  writings.  (Comp.  the 
note  on  28  :  8.)  The  fact  that  he  was  trained  to  such  a  pursuit — that  he  was  a  man, 
therefore,  of  culture  and  observing  habits  of  mind — is  an  important  circumstance.  It 
has  been  justly  remarked  that,  as  many  of  the  miracles  which  the  first  promulgators  of 
the  gospel  wrought  in  confirmation  of  its  truth  were  cases  of  the  healing  of  maladies, 
Luke,  by  virtue  of  his  medical  skill  and  experience,  was  rendered  peculiarly  competent 
to  judge  of  the  reality  of  such  miracles.' 

Of  the  manner  in  which  the  writer  of  the  Acts  was  brought  to  a  knowledge  of  the 
gospel  w^e  have  no  information.  The  suggestion  of  some  of  the  later  Fathers,  that  he 
was  one  of  the  seventy  disciples,  is  not  only  without  ground,  but  opposed  to  his  own 
statement  in  the  introduction  of  his  Gospel,  where  he  distinguishes  himself  from  those 
who  had  been  personal  attendants  on  the  ministry  of  Christ.  It  is  evident  that  after 
his  conversion  he  devoted  himself  to  public  Christian  labors,  for  the  most  part  in  con- 
nection with  the  apostle  Paul,  whom  he  accompanied  from  place  to  place  and  aided  in 
his  efforts  for  the  extension  of  the  gospel.  The  first  explicit  allusion  which  he  makes 
to  himself  occurs  in  16  :  10,  sq.,  where  he  gives  an  account  of  the  apostle's  departure 
from  Troas  to  Macedonia.  In  that  passage  Luke  employs  the  first  person  plural,  and 
thus  shows  that  he  was  one  of  the  companions  of  Paul  on  that  occasion.  He  goes  with 
the  apostle  from  Troas  to  Philippi,  and  speaks  of  himself  again  in  20  :  6  as  one  of  the 

1  I  have  made  no  allusion  in  the  text  to  2  Cor.  8  :  18 ;  for  it  is  barely  possible  that  the  author 
of  our  narrative  can  be  meant  there  as  "the  brother  whose  praise  is  in  all  the  churches."  See 
De  Wette's  note  on  that  passage  in  his  Exegetisches  Handbiich  zum  X.  Testament. 


16  INTRODUCTION. 


several  individuals  who  sailed  with  Paul  from  the  same  city  on  his  last  journey  to  Jeru- 
salem. Whether  Luke  had  been  separated  from  Paul  during  the  interval,  or  remained 
with  him,  cannot  be  certainly  known.  It  is  eminently  characteristic  of  the  sacred 
writers  that  they  keep  themselves  out  of  view  in  their  narratives.  Hence  some  have 
argued  that  we  are  not  to  infer  that  Luke  was  necessarily  absent  when  he  employs  the 
third  person,  but  rather  that  it  was  a  sort  of  inadvertence,  as  it  were,  against  his  design 
that  he  has  now  and  then  disclosed  his  personal  connection  with  the  history.  The  other 
opinion  is  the  surer  one.  We  cannot  be  certain  that  Luke  was  in  the  company  of  Paul, 
except  at  the  times  when  his  language  shows  that  he  was  personally  concerned  in  what 
he  relates.  It  is  clear,  even  according  to  this  view,  that  Luke,  in  addition  to  his  accom- 
panying Paul  on  his  first  journey  from  Troas  to  Philippi,  remained  with  him,  without 
any  known  interruption,  from  the  period  of  his  leaving  Philippi  the  second  time  to  the 
end  of  his  career.  He  goes  with  the  apostle  to  Jerusalem,  where  the  latter  was  appre- 
hended and  given  up  to  the  custody  of  the  Romans  (20  :  6,  sg. ;  21  :  1,  sq.) ;  he  speaks 
of  himself  as  still  with  him  at  the  close  of  his  imprisonment  at  Csesarea  (27  :  1) ;  pro- 
ceeds with  him  on  his  voyage  to  Rome  (27  :  1,  sy.)  ;  and,  as  we  see  from  the  Epistles 
which  Paul  wrote  while  in  that  city,  continued  to  be  associated  with  him  down  to  the 
latest  period  of  his  life  of  which  any  record  remains.  The  apostle  mentions  Luke  as 
residing  with  him  at  Rome  in  Col.  4  :  14;  Phil.  24;  and  2  Tim.  4  :  11.  Of  his  sub- 
sequent history  nothing  authentic  has  been  preserved.  The  traditions  which  relate  to 
this  period  are  uncertain  and  contradictory.  According  to  Gregory  Nazianzen,  whom 
several  later  writers  follow,  he  suffered  martyrdom  ;  according  to  others,  and  those 
whose  testimony  has  greater  weight,  he  died  a  natural  death. 

?3.    AUTHENTICITY   OF   THE   ACTS. 

The  foregoing  sketch  shows  us  how  ample  were  Luke's  means  of  information  in  re- 
gard to  the  subjects  of  which  his  history  treats.  Of  most  of  the  events  which  he  has 
recorded  he  was  an  eye-witness.  The  materials  which  compose  the  body  of  the  work 
lay  within  the  compass  of  his  own  personal  knowledge.  The  particulars  which  he  com- 
municates respecting  Paul's  life  and  labors  before  his  own  acquaintance  with  him  he 
could  have  learned  at  a  subsequent  period  in  his  intercourse  with  that  apostle.  His  ex- 
tensive journeyings  could  hardly  fail  to  have  brought  him  into  connection  with  most  of 
the  other  persons  who  appear  as  actors  in  the  history.  Some  of  his  information  he  de- 
rived, no  doubt,  from  written  sources.  The  official  documents  Avhich  he  has  inserted 
(15  :  23,  sq. ;  23  :  26,  sq.)  were  public,  and  could  have  been  copied.  We  assume  nothing 
at  variance  with  the  habits  of  antiquity  in  supposing  that  the  more  extended  discourses 
and  speeches,  which  Luke  himself  did  not  hear,  may  have  been  noted  down  by  others  at 
the  time  of  their  delivery,  or  soon  afterward,  while  the  impression  made  by  them  was 
still  vivid.  If  the  writer  of  the  Acts  had  any  occasion  for  the  use  of  such  reports,  his 
travels  from  one  country  to  another  must  have  given  him  access  to  the  persons  who 
could  furnish  them.^ 

We  are  to  recollect,  further,  that  the  declaration  which  Luke  makes  at  the  com- 
mencement of  his  Gospel  applies  equally  to  the  Acts.  It  was  his  habit,  as  we  learn 
there,  to  avail  himself  of  every  possible  source  of  inquiry,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  cer- 
tainty of  what  he  wrote.     With  such  opportunities  at  his  command,  and  with  such  a 

1  Some  critics,  as  Schleierniacher,  Bleek,  De  Wette,  have  thrown  out  the  idea  that  Luke  may 
have  derived  those  parts  of  the  Acts  in  which  the  narrator  employs  the  first  person  iilural  from 
a  history  of  Paul's  missionary  labors  written  by  Timothy.  (See  the  note  on  20  :  0.)  Among  the 
writers  who  have  shown  the  untenableness  of  that  hypothesis  are  Ebrard,  Kritik,  u.  s.  w.,  p. 
732,  sg. ;  Lekebusch,  Composition,  u.  s.  w.,  p.  131,  sq. ;  and  Davidson,  Introduction,  vol.  ii. 
p   9,  sq. 


INTRODUCTION.  17 


character  for  diligence  in  the  use  of  them,  the  writer  of  the  Acts,  considered  simply  in 
the  light  of  an  ordinary  historian,  comes  before  us  with  every  title  to  confidence  which 
can  be  asserted  in  behalf  of  the  best-accredited  human  testimony. 

But  this  is  not  all.  We  have  not  only  every  reason  to  regard  the  history  of  Luke  as 
authentic,  because  he  wrote  it  with  such  facilities  for  knowing  the  truth,  but  because  we 
find  it  sustaining  its  credit  under  the  severest  scrutiny  to  which  it  is  possible  that  an 
ancient  work  should  be  subjected. 

First.  This  history  has  been  confronted  with  the  Epistles  of  the  New  Testament,  and 
it  has  been  shown  as  the  result  that  the  incidental  correspondences  between  them  and 
the  Acts  are  numerous  and  of  the  most  striking  kind.  They  are  such  as  preclude  the 
supposition  of  their  being  the  result  of  either  accident  or  design.  It  is  impossible 
to  account  for  them,  unless  we  admit  that  the  transactions  which  Luke  records  really 
took  place  in  the  manner  that  he  has  related.  It  is  the  object  of  Paley's  Horce  Paulinas 
to  develop  this  argument ;  and  the  demonstration  of  the  truth  of  the  Acts,  and  of  the 
New  Testament  in  general,  which  he  has  furnished  in  that  work,  no  objector  has  ever 
attempted  to  refute. 

Secondlij.  The  speeches  in  the  Acts  which  purport  to  have  been  delivered  by  Peter, 
Paul,  and  James  have  been  compared  with  the  known  productions  of  these  men  ;  and  it 
is  found  that  they  exhibit  an  agreement  with  them,  in  point  of  thought  and  expression, 
which  the  supposition  of  their  common  origin  would  lead  us  to  expect.  The  speeches 
attributed  to  Peter  contain  peculiar  phrases  and  ideas  which  impart  a  characteristic 
similarity  to  them  as  compared  with  the  other  speeches,  and  wJiicli  appear  again  in  his 
Epistles,  but  in  no  other  portion  of  the  New  Testament.  In  like  manner,  the  speeches 
of  Paul  evince  an  affinity  both  to  each  other  and  to  his  Epistles,  in  the  recurrence  of 
favorite  words,  modes  of  construction,  and  turns  of  thought,  such  as  belong  to  no  other 
writer.  We  have  but  one  address  from  James,  but  even  here  we  discover  striking  points 
of  connection  with  the  Epistle  which  bears  his  name.  Occasion  will  be  taken  in  the 
course  of  the  Commentary  to  illustrate  this  peculiar  feature  of  the  history. 

Thirdly.  We  have  a  decisive  test  of  the  trustworthiness  of  Luke  in  the  consistency 
of  his  statements  and  allusions  with  the  information  which  contemporary  writers  have 
given  us  respecting  the  age  in  which  he  lived  and  wrote.  The  history  which  we  read  in 
the  Acts  connects  itself  at  numerous  points  with  the  'social  customs  of  different  and  dis- 
tant nations;  with  the  fluctuating  civil  affairs  of  the  Jews,  Greeks,  and  Romans;  and 
with  geographical  or  political  divisions  and  arrangements,  which  were  constantly  under- 
going some  change  or  modification.  Through  all  these  circumstances,  which  underlie 
Luke's  narrative  from  commencement  to  end,  he  pursues  his  way  without  a  single  in- 
stance of  contradiction  or  collision.  Examples  of  the  most  unstudied  harmony  with 
the  complicated  relations  of  the  times  present  themselves  at  every  step.  No  writer  who 
was  conscious  of  fabricating  his  story  would  have  hazarded  such  a  number  of  minute 
allusions,  since  they  increase  so  immensely  the  risk  of  detection ;  and  still  less,  if  he 
had  ventured  upon  it,  could  he  have  introduced  them  so  skilfully  as  to  baffle  every  at- 
tempt to  discover  a  single  well-founded  instance  of  ignorance  or  oversight.  It  adds  to 
the  force  of  the  argument  to  remark  that  in  the  pages  of  Luke  every  such  allusion  falls 
from  him  entirely  without  effort  or  parade.  It  never  strikes  the  reader  as  farfetched  or 
contrived.  Every  incident,  every  observation,  flows  naturally  out  of  the  progress  of  the 
narrative.  It  is  no  exaggeration  to  say  that  the  well-informed  reader  who  will  study 
carefully  the  book  of  the  Acts,  and  compare  the  incidental  notices  to  be  found  on  almost 
every  page  with  the  geography  and  the  political  history  of  the  times,  and  witii  the  cus- 
toms of  the  different  countries  in  which  the  scene  of  the  transactions  is  laid,  will  receive 
an  impression  of  the  writer's  fidelity  and  accuracy  equal  to  that  of  the  most  forcible 
treatises  on  the  truth  of  Christianity. 
2 


18  INTRODUCTION. 


The  objections  which  sceptical  writers  have  urged  against  the  authenticity  of  the 
Acts  relate  chiefly  to  the  supernatural  character  of  its  narrations.  It  does  not  belong 
to  the  province  of  biblical  criticism  to  reply  to  such  objections.  They  have  adduced 
also  a  few  instances  of  alleged  offence  against  history  or  chronology  or  archseology,  but 
these  result  from  an  unnecessary  interpretation.  We  may  understand  the  passages 
which  are  said  to  contain  the  inconsistency  in  a  diflFerent  manner,  and  thus  remove  en- 
tirely the  occasion  for  it. 

H.  OBJECT  AND  PLAN  OF  THE  BOOK. 

The  common  title  of  the  Acts — npa^EiQ  tuv  anoaroluv — is  ancient,  but  is  supposed 
generally  to  have  been  prefixed,  not  by  the  author,  but  by  some  later  hand.  It  is  read 
differently  in  different  manuscripts.  It  is  too  comprehensive  to  describe  accurately  the 
contents  of  the  book.  The  writer's  object,  if  we  are  to  judge  of  it  from  what  he  has 
performed,  must  have  been  to  furnish  a  summary  history  of  the  origin,  gradual  increase, 
and  extension  of  the  Christian  Church,  through  the  instrumentality,  chiefly,  of  the 
apostles  Peter  and  Paul.  In  fact,  we  have  not  a  complete  history,  but  a  compendium 
merely,  of  the  labors  of  these  two  apostles,  who  were  most  active  in  their  eflbrts  to 
advance  the  gospel,  while  the  other  apostles  are  only  referred  to  or  named  incidentally 
in  connection  with  some  particular  occurrence.  It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  Luke  has 
recorded  all  the  facts  which  were  known  to  him  respecting  the  early  spread  of  Christi- 
anity. On  what  principle  he  proceeded  in  making  his  selection  from  the  mass  of 
materials  before  him  we  cannot  decide  with  certainty.  He  may  have  been  influenced 
in  part  by  the  personal  relation  which  he  sustained  to  the  individuals  introduced  and 
the  events  described  by  him.  It  is  still  more  probable  that  the  wants  of  the  particular 
class  of  readers  whom  he  had  in  view  may  have  shaped,  more  or  less  consciously,  the 
course  of  his  narrative;  and  these  readers,  in  the  absence  of  any  surer  indication,  we 
may  consider  as  represented  by  Theophilus,  who  was  in  all  probability  a  convert  from 
heathenism,  (See  note  on  1  :  1.) 

In  writing  for  such  readers,  w^e  should  expect  that  Luke  would  lean  toward  those 
aspects  of  the  history  which  illustrated  the  design  of  God  in  reference  to  the  heathen ; 
their  right  to  participate  in  the  blessings  of  the  gospel  without  submitting  to  the  forms 
of  Judaism;  the  conflict  of  opinion  which  preceded  the  full  recognition  of  this  right; 
and  the  success  more  particularly  of  those  apostolic  labors  which  were  performed  in  be- 
half of  heathen  countries.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  contents  of  the  Acts  exhibit  a 
predilection  for  this  class  of  topics ;  and  to  that  extent  the  book  may  be  said  to  have 
been  written,  in  order  to  illustrate  the  unrestricted  nature  of  the  blessings  of  the  gospel. 
On  the  other  hand,  it  should  be  observed  that  this  predilection  is  merely  such  as  would 
spring  naturally  from  the  writer's  almost  unconscious  sympathy  with  his  Gentile  readers, 
and  is  by  no  means  so  marked  as  to  authorize  us,  according  to  the  view  of  some  writers, 
to  impute  to  him  anything  like  a  formal  purpose  to  trace  the  relation  of  Judaism  to 
Christianity, 

In  accordance  with  this  trait  of  the  Acts  here  alluded  to,  we  have  a  very  particular 
account  of  the  manner  in  which  Peter  was  freed  from  his  Jewish  scruples.  The  recep- 
tion of  the  first  heathen  converts  into  the  church  is  related  at  great  length.  The  pro- 
ceedings of  the  Council  at  Jerusalem  with  reference  to  the  question  whether  circumcision 
should  be  permanent  occupy  one  of  the  leading  chapters  of  the  book.  And  the  indi- 
vidual of  the  apostles  who  preached  chiefly  to  the  Gentiles,  and  introduced  the  gospel 
most  extensively  into  heathen  countries,  is  the  one  whom  the  writer  has  made  the 
central  object  of  his  history,  and  whose  course  of  labor  he  has  described  in  the  full- 
est manner. 


INTRODUCTION.  19 


Luke  has  pursued  no  formal  plan  in  the  arrangement  of  the  Acts.  The  subject  of 
his  history,  however,  divides  itself  naturally  into  two  principal  parts.  The  first  part  treats 
of  the  apostolic  labors  of  Peter,  and  hence  particularly  of  the  spread  of  Christianity 
among  the  Jews,  occupying  the  first  twelve  chapters ;  the  second,  of  the  labors  of  Paul, 
and  hence  the  promulgation  of  the  gospel  in  Syria,  Asia  Minor,  Greece,  and  Rome,  occu- 
pying the  remaining  chapters.  But  the  book  contains  other  topics  which  are  related  to 
these  only  in  a  general  way.  The  following  division  marks  out  to  view  the  different 
sections  more  distinctly:  1.  Outpouring  of  the  Spirit  on  the  day  of  Pentecost,  and  the 
antecedent  circumstances  ;  2.  Events  relating  to  the  progress  of  the  gospel  in  Judea 
and  Samaria ;  3.  The  transition  of  the  gospel  to  the  heathen,  in  the  conversion  of  Cor- 
nelius and  others;  4.  The  call  of  the  apostle  Paul,  and  his  first  missionary  tour;  5. 
The  Apostolic  Council  at  Jerusalem ;  6.  The  second  missionary  tour  of  Paul ;  7.  His 
third  missionary  tour,  and  his  apprehension  at  Jerusalem ;  8.  His  imprisonment  at 
Caesarea,  and  voyage  to  Rome. 

§5.    TIME   AND   PLACE  OF   WRITING  THE  ACTS. 

The  time  when  the  Acts  was  written  could  not  have  been  far  distant  from  that  of 
the  termination  of  Paul's  imprisonment  at  Rome,  mentioned  at  the  close  of  the  history. 
The  manner  in  which  Luke  speaks  of  that  imprisonment  implies  clearly  that  at  the 
time  when  he  wrote  the  apostle's  condition  had  changed ;  that  he  was  no  longer  a 
prisoner,  either  because  he  had  been  liberated  or  because  he  had  been  put  to  death. 

It  does  not  affect  the  present  question  whether  we  suppose  that  he  was  imprisoned 
twice  or  only  once.  (See  note  on  28  :  3L)  If  we  suppose  that  he  was  set  at  liberty,  we 
have  then  a  most  natural  explanation  of  the  abrupt  close  of  the  book  in  the  fact  that 
Luke  published  it  just  at  the  time  of  the  apostle's  release,  or  so  soon  after  that  event 
that  the  interval  furnished  nothing  new  which  he  deemed  it  important  to  add  to  the 
history.  On  the  other  hand,  if  we  suppose  that  Paul's  captivity  terminated  in  his 
martyrdom,  it  is  not  easy  to  account  for  the  writer's  silence  respecting  his  death,  except 
on  the  ground  that  it  was  so  recent  and  so  well  known  in  the  circle  of  his  readers  that 
they  did  not  need  the  information.  Thus,  in  both  cases,  the  time  of  writing  the  Acts 
would  coincide  very  nearly  with  the  end  of  the  Roman  captivity  of  which  Luke  has 
spoken. 

The  question  arises  now,  Do  we  know  the  time  when  that  captivity  ended,  whether 
it  may  have  been  by  acquittal  or  by  death  ?  Here  we  must  depend  upon  the  surest 
chronological  data  which  exist,  though  it  is  not  pretended  that  they  are  certain.  Ac- 
cording to  a  computation  which  has  received  the  assent  of  most  critics,  Paul  was  brought 
as  a  prisoner  to  Rome  in  the  year  A.  D.  61  or  62.  In  the  year  64  followed  the  conflagra- 
tion in  that  city,  which  was  kindled  by  the  agency  of  Nero,  but  which,  for  the  sake  of 
averting  the  odium  of  the  act  from  himself,  he  charged  on  the  Christians.  This  led  to 
the  first  Christian  persecution,  so  called,  which  is  mentioned  by  Tacitus  (Annal.,  15.  44), 
Suetonius  [Ker.,  16),  and  possibly  Juvenal  [Serm.,  1.  146,  sq.).  If  now  Paul  was  set  at 
liberty  after  his  confinement  of  two  years,  it  must  have  been  just  before  the  commence- 
ment of  Nero's  persecution— that  is,  in  the  year  A.  D.  63,  or  near  the  beginning  of  64. 
But  if,  according  to  the  other  supposition,  the  two  years  were  not  completed  until  the 
persecution  commenced,  he  must,  in  all  probability,  as  the  leader  of  the  Christian  sect, 
have  soon  shared  the  common  fate,  and  so  have  been  put  to  death  about  the  year  64. 
Hence  we  may  consider  this  date,  or  the  close  of  A.  d.  63,  as  not  improbably  the  time 
when  Luke  wrote,  or  at  least  published,  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

But  if  Luke  wrote  the  book  thus  near  the  expiration  of  the  two  years  that  Paul  was 
a  prisoner  at  Rome,  it  is  most  natural  to  conclude  that  he  wrote  it  in  that  city.     This 


20  INTRODUCTION. 


was  also  the  opinion  of  many  of  the  early  Christian  Fathers.  The  probability  of  this 
conclusion  is  greatly  strengthened  by  the  fact  that  Luke  makes  no  mention  of  Paul's 
liberation  or  martyrdom,  as  the  case  may  have  been.  At  Rome  every  reader  of  the 
apostle's  history  knew,  of  course,  what  the  result  of  his  captivity  there  was ;  and  if  Luke 
wrote  it  at  that  place,  the  absence  of  any  allusion  to  his  fate  would  not  seem  to  be  so 
very  surprising.  On  the  contrary,  if  Luke  wrote  it  at  a  distance  from  the  scene  of  the 
apostle's  captivity,  the  omission  would  be  much  more  extraordinary. 

§  6.    CHRONOLOGY  OF  THE  ACTS. 

The  subject  of  the  chronology  of  the  Acts  is  still  attended  Avith  uncertainties  which 
no  efforts  of  critical  labor  have  been  able  wholly  to  remove.  "After  all  the  combina- 
tions," says  Schott,'  "  which  the  ingenuity  of  scholars  has  enabled  them  to  devise,  and 
all  the  fulness  of  historical  learning  which  they  have  applied  to  the  subject,  it  has  been 
impossible  to  arrive  at  results  which  are  satisfactory  in  all  respects."  The  source  of  the 
difficulty  is  that  the  notations  of  time  are  for  the  most  part  entirely  omitted,  or,  if  they 
occur  here  and  there,  are  contained  in  general  and  indefinite  expressions.  We  must 
content  ourselves,  therefore,  with  endeavoring  to  fix  the  dates  of  a  few  leading  events 
which  may  be  ascertained  with  most  certainty,  and  must  then  distribute  the  other 
contents  of  the  book  with  reference  to  these,  on  the  basis  of  such  incidental  inti- 
mations as  may  be  found  to  exist,  or  of  such  probable  calculations  as  we  may  be 
able  to  form. 

1.    The  Year  of  Paul's  Conversion. 

The  date  of  this  event  is  very  uncertain,  but  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  approxi- 
mate to  it  by  means  of  the  following  combination.  In  Gal.  1  :  15-18,  it  is  stated  that 
Paul  went  up  to  Jerusalem  from  Damascus  three  years  from  the  time  of  his  conversion, 
and  we  learn  from  2  Cor.  11  :  32  that  Damascus,  when  Paul  made  his  escape  from  it  on 
that  occasion,  was  in  the  hands  of  Aretas,  King  of  Arabia.  As  this  city  belonged  to 
the  Romans,  it  is  remarkable  that  it  should  have  been  just  at  that  time  wrested  from 
them,  and  the  circumstances  under  which  such  an  event  took  place  must  have  been 
peculiar.  It  is  conjectured  that  a  juncture  like  this  may  have  led  to  that  occurrence. 
Josephus  relates  that  an  army  of  Herod  Antipas  had  been  defeated  about  this  time  by 
Aretas,  King  of  Arabia.  Upon  this,  the  Emperor  Tiberius,  who  was  a  friend  and  ally 
of  Herod,  directed  Vitellius,  Roman  Governor  of  Syria,  to  collect  an  adequate  force, 
and  to  take  Aretas  prisoner  or  slay  him  in  the  attempt.  Before  Vitellius  could  execute 
this  order  news  came  that  the  emperor  was  dead,  and,  as  a  consequence  of  this,  the 
military  preparations  on  foot  were  suspended.  This  sudden  respite  afforded  Aretas  an 
opportunity  to  march  upon  Damascus  and  reduce  it  to  his  possession.  The  city,  how- 
ever, supposing  him  to  have  become  master  of  it,  could  not  have  remained  long  in  his 
power.  We  find  that  the  difficulties  with  Arabia  were  all  adjusted  in  the  first  years  of 
the  reign  of  Caligula,  the  successor  of  Tiberius — i.  e.  within  A.  d.  37-39 ;  and  the  policy 
of  the  Romans  would  lead  them,  of  course,  to  insist  on  the  restoration  of  so  important 
a  place  as  Damascus.  If,  now,  we  place  the  escape  of  Paul  in  the  last  of  these  years  (so 
as  to  afford  time  for  the  incidental  delays),  and  deduct  the  three  years  during  which  he 
had  been  absent  from  Jerusalem,  we  obtain  A.  d.  36  as  the  probable  epoch  of  the 
apostle's  conversion.  It  is  in  favor  of  this  conclusion,  says  Neander,  that  it  gives  us 
an  interval  neither  too  long  nor  too  short  for  the  events  which  took  place  in  the  church 
between  the  ascension  of  Christ  and  the  conversion  of  Paul.  Among  others  who  fix 
upon  the  same  year,  or  vary  from  it  but  one  or  two  years,  may  be  mentioned  Eichhorn, 

^  Erorterung  einiger  chronologischen  Punkte  in  der  Lebentgeschichte  des  Apostel  Paul,  §  1. 


INTRODUCTION.  21 


Hug,  Hemsen,  Schott,  Guericke,  Meyer,  De  Wette,  Anger,^  Ebrard,  Alford,  Howson.* 
This  date  determines  that  of  Stephen's  martyrdom,  which  took  place,  apparently,  not 
long  before  Paul's  conversion,  and  also  that  of  Paul's  first  journey  to  Jerusalem  and 
his  subsequent  departure  to  Tarsus. 

2.  The  Death  of  Herod  Agrippa. 
This  occurred  at  Csesarea  in  the  year  A.  D.  44.  The  statements  of  Josephus  are  de- 
cisive on  this  point.  He  says  that  Agrippa,  who,  under  Caligula,  had  reigned  over  only 
a  part  of  Palestine,  received  the  entire  sovereignty  of  his  grandfather,  Herod  the  Great, 
on  the  accession  of  Claudius — viz.  in  the  year  A.  d.  41  [Antt,  19.  5.  1),  and,  further,  that 
at  the  time  of  his  death  he  had  completed  the  third  year  after  this  extension  of  his 
power  [AnfL,  19.  8.  2).  This  date  fixes  the  position  of  several  other  important  events ; 
such  as  the  execution  of  James  the  elder,  the  arrest  and  deliverance  of  Peter,  the  return 
of  Paul  to  Antioch  from  his  second  visit  to  Jerusalem,  and  his  departure  on  his  first 
missionary  excursion. 

3.  The  Third  Journey  of  Paul  to  Jerusalem. 
In  Gal.  2  :  1  the  apostle  speaks  of  going  up  to  Jerusalem  after  fourteen  years,  which 
sre  to  be  computed,  in  all  probability,  from  the  time  of  his  conversion.  It  has  been 
made  a  question  whether  this  journey  is  to  be  understood  as  the  second  or  third  of  the 
several  journeys  which  Paul  is  mentioned  in  the  Acts  as  having  made  to  Jerusalem. 
The  general  o])inion  is  that  it  should  be  understood  of  the  third — first,  because  the 
object  of  that  journey,  as  stated  in  15  :  1,  sq.,  coincides  exactly  with  that  which  occa- 
sioned the  one  mentioned  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians ;  and  secondly,  because  the 
circumstances  which  are  described  as  having  taken  place  in  connection  with  the  journey 
in  15  :  1,  «y.,  agree  so  entirely  with  those  related  in  the  Epistle.'  Supposing,  then,  the 
identity  of  the  two  journeys  to  be  established,  we  add  the  fourteen  years  already  men- 
tioned to  the  date  of  Paul's  conversion — viz.  36 — and  we  have  A.  D.  50  as  the  year  when 
he  went  up  to  Jerusalem  the  third  time  after  he  had  become  a  Christian.*  With  this 
year  coincides  that  of  holding  the  Council  at  Jerusalem.  Paul  departed  on  his  second 
missionary  tour  soon  after  his  return  to  Antioch  from  this  third  visit  to  Jerusalem,  and 
hence  we  are  enabled  to  assign  that  second  tour  to  the  year  A.  D.  61, 

4.    The  Procuratorship  of  Felix. 

The  time  of  this  officer's  recall,  on  being  superseded  by  Festus  (see  24  :  27),  is  as- 
signed by  most  critics  to  the  year  A.  d.  60  or  61.  The  names  of  both  these  men  are 
well  known  in  secular  history,  but  it  so  happens  that  we  meet  with  only  indirect  state- 

^  Be  temporum  in  Actis  Apostolorum  ratione,  p.  121,  sq. 

*  Wieseler  {Chronologie  des  Apostolischen  Zeitalters,  pp.  175-213)  assigns  Paul's  conversion  to  a.  d. 
40.  It  was  gratifying  to  me  to  find  that,  with  this  exception,  all  his  other  dates  agree  with  tliose 
which  I  had  been  led  to  adopt  before  consulting  his  able  treatise. 

*  The  reasons  for  this  conclusion  are  well  stated  by  Hemsen,  in  his  Der  Apostel  Paulus,  u.  s.  w., 
p.  52,  sq.,  translated  by  the  writer  in  the  Christian  Review,  1841,  p.  66.  sq.  Dr.  Davidson  has  dis- 
cussed the  question  with  the  same  result  in  his  Introduction,  vol.  ii.  pp.  112-122.  See,  also,  Cony- 
beare  and  Howson,  Life  and  Epistles  of  St  Paul,  vol.  i.  p.  539,  sq.  (2d  ed.),  and  Jowett  On  Gala- 
tians, p.  252. 

*  It  is  proper  to  apprise  the  reader  that  some  reckon  the  fourteen  years  in  Gal.  2  :  1  from  the 
apostle's  first  return  to  Jerusalem  (Gal.  1  :  18) ;  and  in  that  case  his  third  journey  to  that  city 
would  be  dated  three  years  later.  But  few,  comparatively,  adopt  this  view.  The  apostle's  conver- 
sion is  the  governing  epoch,  to  which  the  mind  of  the  reader  naturally  turns  back  from  Gal.  2  : 1, 
as  well  as  from  Gal.  1  :  18. 


22  INTRODUCTION. 


ments  relating  to  the  point  which  concerns  us  here.  It  is  generally  agreed  that  these 
statements  justify  the  following  opinion.  It  is  certain  that  Felix  could  not  have  been 
recalled  later  than  the  year  62.  Josephus  states  {Antt.,  20.  8.  9)  that  Felix,  soon  after 
his  return  to  Rome,  was  accused  before  the  emperor,  by  a  deputation  from  the  Jews  in 
Palestine,  of  maladministration  while  in  office,  and  that  he  would  have  been  condemned 
had  it  not  been  for  the  influence  of  his  brother  Pallas,  who  stood  high  at  that  time  in 
the  favor  of  Nero.  This  Pallas  now,  according  to  Tacitus  [Ann.,  14.  65),  was  poisoned 
by  Nero  in  the  year  62.  The  only  circumstance  which  impairs  the  certainty  of  this 
conclusion  is  that  Tacitus  states  {Ann.,  13.  14)  that  Pallas  had  lost  the  favor  of  Nero 
some  time  before  this,  and  had  been  entirely  removed  from  public  business.  Hence 
some  have  placed  the  appointment  of  Festus  as  successor  of  Felix  several  years  earlier 
than  A.  D.  61.  But  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  the,  disgrace  of  which  Tacitus  speaks 
may  have  been  only  temporary,  and  that  Pallas  may  afterward  have  recovered  his  in- 
fluence with  the  emperor.  Since  it  is  certain,  according  to  Tacitus  himself,  that  the 
death  of  this  favorite  did  not  occur  till  A.  d.  62,  it  can  be  more  easily  supposed  that 
Nero  was  again  reconciled  to  him  than  that  this  revengeful  tyrant  should  have  suffered 
him  to  live  several  years  after  he  had  become  odious  to  him.  De  Wette,  Anger,  Meyer, 
Wieseler,  and  others,  admit  this  supposition,  under  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  to  be 
entirely  natural. 

It  is  less  easy  to  fix  the  limit  on  the  other  side.  The  general  belief  is  that  Festus 
eould  not  have  succeeded  Felix  earlier  than  A.  D.  60  or  61.  Josephus  relates  [Antt,  20. 
8.  11)  that  Festus,  after  having  entered  on  his  office,  permitted  a  deputation  of  the 
Jews  to  repair  to  Eome,  in  order  to  obtain  the  decision  of  Nero  in  a  controversy  be- 
tween himself  and  them,  and  that  Poppsea,  the  wife  of  Nero,  interceded  for  them,  and 
enabled  them  to  gain  their  object.  But  this  woman  did  not  become  the  wife*  of  Nero 
until  the  year  62  (Tac,  Ann.,  14.  49  ;  Suet.,  Ner.,  35) ;  and  hence,  as  Festus  must  have 
been  in  Judea  some  time  before  this  difficulty  with  the  Jews  arose,  and  as,  after  that, 
some  time  must  have  elapsed  before  the  case  could  be  decided  at  Rome,  Festus  may 
have  received  his  appointment  in  the  year  60  or  61,  The  best  recent  authorities,  as 
Winer,  De  Wette,  Anger,  Meyer,  Wieseler,  adopt  one  or  the  other  of  these  years. 

We  reach  very  nearly  the  same  result  from  what  Josephus  says  of  his  journey  to 
Eome  in  behalf  of  the  Jewish  priests  whom  Felix  had  sent  thither  for  trial  before  his 
removal  from  office.  He  informs  us  in  his  Life  (§  3)  that  he  made  his  journey  in  the 
twenty-sixth  year  of  his  age,  and,  as  he  was  born  in  the  first  year  of  the  reign  of  Calig- 
ula— i.  €.  A.  D.  87  [Life,  §  1) — he  visited  Rome  on  this  occasion  about  63.  His  narra- 
tive, without  being  definite,  implies  that  Felix  at  this  time  had  not  only  been  recalled, 
but  must  have  left  Palestine  two  or  three  years  earlier  than  this.  Festus  was  the  im- 
mediate successor  of  Felix. 

It  is  the  more  important  to  settle  as  nearly  as  possible  some  epoch  in  this  portion  of 


1  Some,  as  Neapder,  Wieseler,  object  to  the  stricter  sense  of  yw-f,  in  the  passage  of  Joseplms, 
but  it  is  defended  by  Schrader,  Meyer,  and  others,  as  the  more  obvious  sense,  whether  we  con- 
sider the  historical  facts  or  the  usage  of  tlie  word.  Neander  (Pflanzung,  u.  s.  w.,  vol.  i.  p.  493) 
expresses  himself  with  much  hesitation  respecting  tliis  date  of  the  succession  of  Felix  and 
Festus.  It  is  important,  for  the  purpose  of  laying  up  in  the  mind  a  connected  view  of  the  his- 
tory, to  settle  upon  the  precise  years  as  nearly  as  possible ;  and  we  ought  not  to  deprive  ourselves 
of  this  advantage  merely  because  some  of  the  conclusions,  or  the  grounds  of  them,  cannot  be 
placed  entirely  beyond  doubt.  It  is  admitted  that,  of  the  dates  proposed  in  the  above  scheme  of 
chronology,  the  second  (that  of  Herod's  death)  and  the  last  in  a  lower  degree  (that  of  Paul's  ar- 
rival at  Rome)  are  the  only  ones  that  can  be  brought  to  a  state  of  comparative  certainty.  In 
regard  to  tlie  others  I  have  not  meant  to  claim  for  them  anything  more  than  the  character  of  an 
approximation  to  the  truth. 


INTRODUCTION.  23 


the  apostle's  history,  since  there  would  be  otherwise  so  much  uncertainty  as  to  the 
mode  of  arranging  the  events  in  the  long  interval  between  this  and  Paul's  third  journey 
to  Jerusalem.  Upon  this  date  depends  the  year  of  the  apostle's  arrest  in  that  city  on 
his  fifth  and  last  visit  thither,  before  he  was  sent  to  Rome.  His  captivity  at  Cajsarea, 
which  followed  that  arrest,  continued  two  years,  and  must  have  commenced  in  the 
spring  of  A.  D.  58  or  59. 

5.  The  Arrival  of  Paul  in  Rome. 
The  extreme  limit  beyond  which  we  cannot  place  this  event  may  be  regarded  as 
certain.  It  could  not  have  been  later  than  the  year  62 ;  for  after  64,  when  the  Chris- 
tians at  Rome  began  to  be  persecuted  by  the  Roman  Government,  their  situation  was 
such  that  the  apostle  could  not  have  remained  there  and  preached  the  gospel  for  two 
years  without  molestation,  as  stated  by  Luke  at  the  end  of  the  Acts.  It  is  impossible 
to  obtain  a  more  definite  result  than  this  from  secular  history.'  But  the  date  in  ques- 
tion follows  as  a  deduction  from  the  one  considered  in  the  last  paragraph.  It  is  evi- 
dent from  the  Acts  that  Paul  proceeded  to  Rome  almost  immediately  after  the  entrance 
of  Festus  on  his  office ;  and  if  this  took  place  in  A.  D.  60  or  61,  he  must  have  arrived  in 
Rome  early  in  the  spring  of  61  or  62.  Hence,  if  he  arrived  even  in  A.  D.  62,  he  could 
have  remained  two  years  in  captivity  and  then  have  regained  his  freedom  (if  we  adopt 
that  opinion),  since  Nero's  persecution  of  the  Christians  did  not  commence  till  the 
summer  of  A.  D.  64. 

g  7.   THE  CONTENTS   IN  CHRONOLOGICAL   ORDER. 

A.  D. 

33. — Ascension  of  Christ.  Appointment  of  Matthias  as  an  apostle.  Outpouring  of 
the  Spirit  at  Pentecost.  The  gift  of  tongues  conferred.  Discourse  of  Peter. 
Three  thousand  are  converted. — Pilate,  under  whom  the  Saviour  was  crucified, 
is  still  procurator  of  Judea.     Tiberius  continues  emperor  till  A.  D.  37. 

33-35. — Peter  and  John  heal  the  lame  man.  They  are  arraigned  before  the  Sanhedrim 
and  forbidden  to  preach.  Death  of  Ananias  and  Sapphira.  The  apostles  are 
scourged.  Deacons  appointed.  Apprehension  and  martyrdom  of  Stephen. 
Saul  makes  havoc  of  the  church. 
36. — Persecution  scatters  the  believers  at  Jerusalem.  Philip  preaches  the  gospel  in 
Samaria.  Hypocrisy  of  Simon  the  Magian.  Baptism  of  the  eunuch.  The 
word  is  made  known  in  Phoenicia,  Cyprus,  and  at  Antioch  in  Syria.  Christ 
appears  to  Saul  on  the  way  to  Damascus.     Conversion  of  Paul. 

37-39. — Paul  spends  these  three  years  at  Damascus  and  in  Arabia.  During  the  same 
time  other  laborers  spread  the  gospel  in  Judea,  Galilee,  and  along  the  coast  of 
the  Mediterranean. — Caligula  becomes  emperor  in  A.  D.  37. 
39. — Paul  escapes  from  Damascus,  and  goes  to  Jerusalem  for  the  first  time  since  his 
conversion.  Barnabas  introduces  him  to  the  disciples.  He  remains  there  fifteen 
days,  but  is  persecuted,  and  departs  thence  to  Tarsus. 

40-43. — During  this  period  Paul  preaches  in  Syria  and  Cilicia.  Churches  are  gathered 
there.  Barnabas  is  sent  to  search  for  him,  and  conducts  him  to  Antioch.  In 
the  meantime  Peter  visits  Joppa,  Lydda,  and  Csesarea.  Dorcas  is  restored  to 
life.  Cornelius  is  baptized.  Peter  defends  himself  for  visiting  the  heathen. — 
Claudius  becomes  emperor  in  the  beginning  of  A.  D.  41.  On  his  accession  he 
makes  Herod  Agrippa  I.  king  over  all  Palestine. 

^  Whether  this  result  is  confirmed  by  tw  (TTparoTreSdpxv  in  28 :  16  depends  on  the  explanation  of 
the  article.     (See  the  note  on  that  passage.) 


24  INTRODUCTION. 

A.  D. 

44. — Paul  labors  "a  whole  year"  with  Barnabas  at  Antioch.  Agabus  predicts  a 
famine  in  Judea.  James  the  elder  is  beheaded  at  Jerusalem.  Peter  is  cast  into 
prison  ;  his  liberation  and  flight. — Herod  Agrippa  dies  at  Csesarea  in  the  sum- 
mer of  this  year.     Judea  is  again  governed  by  procurators. 

45. — Paul  goes  to  Jerusalem  the  second  time,  on  the  alms-errand,  accompanied  by 
Barnabas.  He  returns  to  Antioch,  and  under  the  direction  of  the  Spirit  is  set 
apart  by  the  church  to  the  missionary  work.  In  the  same  year,  probably,  he 
goes  forth  with  Barnabas  and  Mark  on  his  first  mission  to  the  heathen, 
46,47. — He  was  absent  on  this  tour  about  two  years.  He  proceeds  by  the  way  of 
Seleucia  to  Salamis  and  Paphos  in  Cyprus ;  at  the  latter  place  Sergius  Paulus 
believes,  and  Elymas  is  struck  blind.  Crossing  the  sea,  he  lands  at  Perga, 
where  John  Mark  abruptly  leaves  him.  He  preaches  in  the  synagogue  at 
Antioch.  Labors  with  success  at  Iconium.  At  Lystra  he  is  about  to 
be  worshipped  as  a  god,  and  afterward  is  stoned.  Escapes  to  Derbe.  Re- 
traces his  way  to  Perga.  Sails  from  Attaleia,  and  comes  again  to  Antioch 
in  Syria. 

48,  49. — Here  he  abode,  it  is  said,  "  a  long  time."  We  may  assign  these  two  years 
to  that  residence.  He  extended  his  labors,  no  doubt,  to  the  neighboring 
regions. 

50. — Apostolic  Council  at  Jerusalem.  Paul  makes  his  third  journey  to  that  city,  in 
company  with  Barnabas  and  others,  as  delegates  from  the  church  at  Antioch. 
Returns  to  Antioch  with  the  decrees.     Paul  and  Barnabas  separate. 

61-54. — The  apostle's  second  missionary  tour.  Silas,  Timothy,  and  I^uke  are  associated 
with  him.  Paul  revisits  the  churches  in  Syria  and  Cilicia.  Plants  the  churches 
in  Galatia.  At  Troas  he  embarks  for  Europe,  and,  among  other  places,  visits 
Philippi,  Thessalonica,  Berea,  Athens,  Corinth.  In  this  last  city  he  remained 
at  least  a  year  and  a  half.  Labored  with  Aquila  at  tent-making.  Left  the 
synagogue  and  preached  to  Greeks.  He  is  arraigned  before  Gallio.  In  this  city 
Paul  wrote  the  First  and  Second  Epistles  to  the  Thessalonians.^  In  the  spring, 
probably,  of  A.  d.  64  he  leaves  Corinth,  embarks  at  Cenchrese,  touches  at  Ephe- 
sus,  lands  at  Csesarea,  and  from  there  goes  for  the  fourth  time  to  Jerusalem,  and 
thence  to  Antioch.  We  may  allot  three  years,  or  three  and  a  half,  to  this 
journey. — Felix  became  procurator  of  Judea  in  A.  D.  62.  In  A.  d.  63,  Claudius 
bestowed  on  Herod  Agrippa  II.  the  former  tetrarchy  of  Philip  and  Lysanias, 
with  the  title  of  king.     In  A.  d.  54,  Nero  succeeded  Claudius  as  emperor. 

54-57. — In  the  autumn  of  A.  d.  54  according  to  some,  or  early  in  A.  d.  55  according  to 
others,  Paul  entered  on  his  third  missionary  tour.  He  goes  through  Galatia 
and  Phrygia  to  Ephesus,  where  he  spends  the  greater  part  of  the  next  three 
years.  Just  before  his  arrival  Apollos  left  Ephesus  for  Corinth.  Certain  dis- 
ciples of  John  are  baptized.  Nearly  all  Asia  hears  the  gospel.  The  exorcists 
defeated.  An  uproar  at  Ephesus.  The  Asiarchs  befriend  Paul.  During  this 
sojourn  here  Paul  wrote  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  and  the  First  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians.  Within  the  same  time  he  made,  probably,  a  short  journey  to 
Corinth,  either  directly  across  the  jEgean  or  through  Macedonia.  While  on 
this  excursion,  some  suppose  that  he  wrote  the  First  Epistle  to  Timothy,  and 
after  his  return  to  Ephesus  that  to  Titus. 

1  The  reasons  for  assigning  the  different  Epistles  to  the  times  and  places  mentioned  are  stated 
in  the  body  of  the  Commentary. 


INTRODUCTION.  25 


A.  D. 


68,  59.— In  the  spring  of  A.  d.  58,  or  perhaps  A.  d.  57  (if  this  tour  began  in  54),  the 
apostle  leaves  Ephesus  and  proceeds  to  Macedonia,  where  he  writes  his  Second 
Epistle  to  the  Corinthians.  He  spent  the  summer  in  that  region,  and  travelled 
probably  as  far  west  as  lllyricum.  In  the  autumn  or  early  winter  of  this  year 
he  arrives  at  Corinth,  and  remains  there  three  months.  The  Jews  plot  his'  de- 
struction. At  this  time  he  wrote  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans.  In  the  ensuing 
spring  he  returns  through  Macedonia  to  Troas,  where  he  preached  and  "  broke 
bread."  Miraculous  recovery  of  Eutychus.  At  Miletus  he  addressed  the  Ephe- 
sian  elders.  Landing  at  Ptolemais,  he  proceeded  to  Cjesarea,  and  thence  to 
Jerusalem,  which  is  his  fifth  and  last  visit  to  that  city.  This  journey  occupied 
about  four  years. 

68  or  59.— At  Jerusalem,  Paul  assumes  a  vow,  to  conciliate  the  Jewish  believers.  He 
is  seized  by  the  Jews  in  the  temple,  but  is  rescued  by  Lysias  the  chiliarch. 
Speech  to  the  mob  from  the  stairs  of  the  castle.  His  Roman  citizenship  saves 
him  from  the  torture.  He  stands  before  the  Sanhedrim,  and  narrowly  escapes 
with  his  life.  Forty  Jews  conspire  against  him.  Lysias  sends  him  as  a  state 
prisoner  to  Felix  at  Caesarea. 

69-61.— His  captivity  here  continues  two  years.  He  pleads  his  cause  before  Felix,  who 
detains  him  in  the  hope  of  a  bribe.  The  Jews  renew  their  charge  against  him 
before  Festus.  Paul  is  compelled  to  appeal  to  Caesar.  He  speaks  in  the  pres- 
ence of  King  Agrippa,  and  is  pronounced  innocent.— Felix  was  superseded  by 
Festus  in  A.  d.  60  or  61. 

62-64.— In  the  autumn  of  a.  d.  60  or  61,  Paul  embarked  at  Ca?sarea  for  Rome,  and  ar- 
rived there  early  in  the  following  spring.  He  remains  in  custody  two  years. 
During  this  period  he  wrote  the  Epistles  to  the  Ephesians,  Colossians,  Philip- 
pians,  Philemon,  and,  if  he  suffered  martyrdom  at  this  time,  the  Second  Epistle 
to  Timothy,  just  before  his  death.  The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  was  written, 
probably,  in  this  latter  part  of  the  apostle's  life.  Most  of  those  Avho  maintain 
that  Paul  was  imprisoned  twice  at  Rome  suppose  (the  correct  opinion,  as  it 
seems  to  me)  that  he  wrote  the  First  Epistle  to  Timothy  and  that  to  Titus  in  the 
interval  between  his  first  and  second  captivity,  and  his  Second  Epistle  to 
Timothy  in  the  near  prospect  of  his  execution,  after  his  second  arrest. 


C  OMMEISTT^R^' 


FOR  THE  READER. 


The  works  on  the  Greek  language  to  which  most  frequent  reference  has  been  made  are  the 
following : 

W.,  Winer's  Grammatik  des  nevdestamentUehen  Sprachidioms,  sixth  edition,  1855  (the  divis- 
ions in  the  English  translation,  fourth  edition,  sometimes  differ). 

S.,  Prof.  Stuart's  Grammar  of  the  New  Testament  Dialect,  second  edition. 

K.,  Kuehner's  Greek  Grammar,  translated  by  I^dwards  and  Taylor. 

C,  Crosby's  Greek  Grammar. 

B.,  Buttmann's,  Robinson's  translation. 

Mt.,  Matthi^'s,  third  edition  of  the  original,  or  Blomfield's  translation. 

Dnld.,  Gr.,  Donaldson's  Complete  Greek  Grammar  (London,  1848). 

Bernh.,  Synt.,  Bernhardy's  Wissenschaftliche  Syntax. 

Hart.,  ParlkL,  Hartung's  Lehre  von  den  Partikeln,  u.  s.  w. 

Kl.,  Devr.,  Devarius,  De  Gr.  Ling.  Partieulis,  edidit  Klotz. 

Lob.,  Phryn.,  Phrynichi  Eclogce  Nominum,  edidit  LOBECK. 

Tittm.,  Synm.,  Tittmann,  De  Synonymis  in  N.  Testamento. 
'  Pape,  Lex.,  Handworlerbuch  der  Griechischen   Sprache,  von  Dr.  W.  Pape  (Braunsschweig, 
1842). 

K.  and  P.,  Lex.,  Passnw,  Handworterbuch  der  Gr.  Sprache,  neu  bearbeitet,  u.  s.  w.,  von  Dr. 
RosT  und  Dr.  Palm  (Leipzig,  1841-56). 

Some  other  names,  especially  those  of  commentators  or  critics,  mentioned  often,  as  well  as 
titles  of  books  quoted  oftjen,  have  been  abbreviated.  A  list  of  such  contractions  will  be  found 
at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

28 


THE  ACTS  OF  THE  APOSTLES. 


CHAPTER    I. 


THE  former  treatise  have  I  made,  O  «Theophiliis,  of 
all  that  Jesus  began  both  to  do  and  teach. 


1    The  'former  treatise  I  made,  O  Theophilus,  con- 
cerning all  that  Jesus  began  both  tu  do  and  to  teach. 


Or.  flrtt. 


Ch.  1  :  1-3.  RELATION  OF  THE  ACTS 
TO  THE  GOSPEL  OF  LUKE. 

1.  MeV,  solitarium — i.  e.  without  any  follow- 
ing Se.  This  omission,  which  occurs  in  the 
liest  writers,  is  very  common  in  this  book. 
(See  V.  18 ;  3:13;  19  ;  4 ;  26  :  4,  etc.  K.  §  322. 
R.  4 ;  W.  ?  63.  I.  2.  e.)  The  writer  frames  the 
clause  in  which  he  refers  to  his  first  history 
iniv)  as  if  he  had  intended  to  add  here  (fie) 
that  he  would  now  relate  how  extensively  the 
name  of  Jesus  had  been  made  known,  and  by 
what  means.  Being  led,  by  the  allusion  to  the 
ascension  of  Christ,  to  state  the  circumstances 
of  that  event,  he  drops  the  proposed  antithesis 
and  leaves  the  subject  of  the  book  to  unfold 
itself  from  the  course  of  the  narrative. — npM- 
Toi/  { first)  stands  for  the  stricter  irporepov  {for- 
vier),  like  the  interchange  of  first  and  for- 
mer in  English.  (Comp.  John  1 :  15,  30 ;  15  :  18 ; 
and  perhaps  Luke  2:2.) — Treatise,  "his- 
tory," as  in  Herod.  (6.  19),  and  thence  on- 
ward.— Theophilus.  He  appears  from  Luke 
1  :  3  to  have  been  a  man  of  rank,  since  most 
excellent,  when  prefi.xed  in  the  Acts  to  the 
name  of  a  person,  refers,  not  to  character,  but 
to  station.  (See  23  :  2G  ;  24  :  3 ;  26  :  25.)  From 
the  fact  that  Lulce  wrote  his  Gospel  confessedly 
for  Gentile  readers,  and  that  both  tlicre  and 
here  he  has  uniformly  supplied  such  informa- 
tion respecting  Jewish  customs  and  places  as 
tlicy  would  need,  we  may  conclude  that  The- 
ophilus belonged  to  that  class  of  readers,  and 
that  he  was  not,  therefore,  a  Jew  or  a  resident 
in  Palestine.  Tiie  manner  in  which  the  book 
terminates  (see  Introduct.,  p.  21)  favors  tlie 
supposition  that  he  may  have  lived  at  Rome 
or  in  Italy.  Some  have  urged  it  as  an  argu- 
ment for  that  opinion  that  Luke  has  merely 
enumerated  tlie  names  of  places  in  Italy  as  if 
liis  readers  were  familiar  with  them ;  but  the 
jiroof  is  not  conclusive.  He  takes  for  granted 
a  similar  knowledge  of  the  geography  of  Asia 


Minor  and  Greece.  He  inserts  no  e.xplanatory 
notices  in  this  part  of  the  liistory,  unless  we 
are  to  except  16  :  12;  27  :  12. — Which  Jesus 
both  did  and  taught  from  the  beginniug 

— viz.  of  his  career,  mv  (of  which)  stands  by 
attraction  for  a  (which).  Began  carries  back 
the  mind  to  the  commencement  of  the  Sav- 
iour's history,  and  is  equivalent  in  sense  to 
from  the  beginning.  Hence  this  verb 
marks  the  limit  of  the  narrative  in  one  di- 
rection, as  until  what  day  does  in  the  other. 
This  adverbial  sense  belongs  usually  to  the 
participle  (Mt.  g  558),  but  may  be  admitted  also 
in  the  verb.  (Hmph.i  adopts  this  analysis  in 
his  second  edition.)  It  gives  tlie  same  result, 
though  less  directly,  if  we  consider  the  expres- 
sion as  elliptical :  which  he  began  and  pro- 
ceeded both  to  do,  etc.  (Comp.  v.  22;  Matt. 
20  :  8 ;  Luke  23  :  5.  See  W.  §  66.  1.  c.)  Otlier 
explanations  have  been  proposed.  Meyer  finds 
in  it  an  implied  contrast  between  the  labors  of 
Clirist  and  those  of  the  apostles.  He  laid  the 
foundation ;  they  were  to  build  upon  it  and 
finish  what  lie  began.  This  seems  to  me  far- 
fetched. (But  in  his  last  edition  Meyer  retracts 
this  opinion,  and  saj's  justly  that  'iTjrroO*  (Jesus) 
with  tliat  contrastive  force  would  naturally 
precede  the  verb.)  Olshausen  tliinks  tliat 
Luke  intended  to  suggest  by  began  (^pfaro) 
that  Christ  only  commenced  his  work  on 
earth ;  that  he  still  continues,  and  will  com- 
plete, it  in  heaven.  Baumgarten^  (p.  8,  sq.) 
contends  for  the  same  view,  and  deduces  from 
it  what  lie  supposes  to  be  Luke's  special  design 
in  writing  tlie  Acts — viz.  to  represent  the  Sav- 
iour after  liis  ascension  as  still  acting  through 
the  apostles,  and  thus  carr}-ing  forward  by  their 
agency  the  merely  incipient  labors  of  liis  life 
on  earth.  Of  course,  this  activity  of  Christ,  who 
is  ever  present  with  liis  people  (Mait.  28 :2o).  could 
not  fail  to  be  recognized  in  the  historj^  (as  in 
3  :  26;  4  :  30;    19  :  13,   etc.) ;    but   it  is  impos- 


'-•1  Covjmentnni  071  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  by  W.  G.  Humphry,  B.  D.,  late  Fellow  of  Trinity  College,  Cam- 
bridge, etc.  (London,  18,54). 
-Die  Apostelgeschichte  Oder  der  Entwickelungsgang  der  Kirehe  von  Jerusalem  bit  Rom.  von  M.  Baumgarten  C1852). 

29 


30 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


2  "Until  the  day  in  which  he  was  taken  up,  after 
that  he  thnnigh  the  Holy  tihost  'had  given  command- 
ments unto  the  apostles  whom  he  had  chosen  : 

a  "To  whom  also  he  shewed  himself  alive  after  his 
■passion  by  many  infallible  proofs,  being  seen  of  them 


2  until  the  day  in  which  he  was  received  up,  after 
that  he  had  given  commandment  through  tlii'  Holy 

SSpirit  utito  the  apostles  whom  he  had  chosen:  to 
whom  he  also  'shewed  himself  alive  after  his 
passion  by  many  proofs,  ajipearing  unto  them  by  the 


oMark  16  :  IS) ;  Luke  9  :  51 ;  24  :  51 ;  ver.  il;  1  Tim.  3  :  16.... 6  Matt.  28  :  19  ;  Mark  16  :  15  ;  John  25  :  21 ;  oh.  10:41,  42.... c  Mark 
16:  14;  Luke24:;j6;John20:19,  26;  21:1,14;  I  Cor.  15  :  5. 1  Gr.  pretented. 


sible  that  the  writer,  with  that  object  in  view, 
should  have  left  it  to  be  so  obscurely  intimated. 
This  alleged  contrast  between  Luke's  Gospel  as 
simply  a  beginning  and  the  Acts  as  a  continu- 
ation of  Christ's  personal  work,  so  far  from 
being  put  forward  with  prominence,  as  we 
sliould  expect,  is  not  distinctly  drawn  out  in 
a  single  passage.  The  truth  is,  as  Lekebusch 
remarks  (Composition,  u.  s.  w.,  p.  203),  the  nar- 
rative contains  no  hint  of  any  such  relation  of 
the  two  histories  to  each  other,  unless  this  be 
found  in  began ;  and  even  this  word,  as  we 
have  seen,  admits  much  more  naturally  of  a 
different  explanation.  A  caution  against  re- 
garding this  verb  as  superfluous  here,  or  in  any 
passage,  can  hardly  be  needed.  (See  W.  ^  65. 
7.  d.) 

2.  What  day  (^s  vfiepai)  =the  day  in  which 
(t^s  ^H€>as  iJ),  as  in  Matt.  24  :  38 ;  Luke  1  :  20.— 
Had  given  command,  I  understand,  with 
Mej^er  and  others,  as  referring  to  Christ's  com- 
mand to  preach  the  gospel  to  all  the  world,  as 
recorded  in  Matt.  28  :  19,  and  which,  from  its 
memorable  character,  Luke  could  assume  as 
well  known  to  his  readers.  De  Wette  supposes 
it  to  be  the  command  in  v.  4 ;  but  we  have  then 
an  unnecessary  repetition  of  the  same  thing, 
and,  contrary  to  the  natural  order,  the  allusion 
first  and  the  fuller  notice  last.  Some  have  pro- 
posed to  extend  the  meaning  of  the  word  so  as 
to  embrace  all  the  instructions  which  Christ 
gave  to  the  apostles  in  relation  to  their  future 
work,  but  the  term  is  too  specific  for  so  general 
an  idea ;  and,  besides,  the  obvious  implication 
is  that  the  giving  of  the  command  was  some- 
thing almost  immediately  antecedent  to  the 
ascension.— Through  the  Holy  Spirit,  his 
influence,  guidance.  This  noun,  as  so  used, 
may  omit  the  article  or  receive  it,  at  the  option 
of  the  writer,  since  it  has  the  force  of  a  proper 
name.  (W.  ?  19.  1.  See  also  EUicott's  note  on 
Gal.  4:6.)  [Besides  the  careful  statement  of 
Winer  as  to  the  New  Testament  use  of  the  ar- 
ticle (?  19),  see  Buttmann's  Gram,  of  the  N.  T. 
Greek  (Thayer's  translation),  pp.  85-90;  Green's 
Gram,  of  the  New  Test.,  ch.  ii.  p.  28,  f  ;  and  Bih. 
Sac.  1SS2,  pp.  159-190 :  "  The  Article  in  the  Re- 
vised Version,"  by  Prof.  W.  S.  Tyler.  The  rule 
given  by  Winer  for  the  present  case  is  that  "  ap- 
pellatives, which,  as  expressing  definite  objects, 


should  have  the  article,  are  .  .  .  employed  in 
certain  cases  without  it.  This  omission,  how- 
ever, only  takes  place  when  it  .  .  .  leaves  no 
doubt  in  the  mind  of  the  reader  whether  the 
object  is  to  be  understood  as  definite  or  indefi- 
nite." Among  the  words  that  may  thus  take 
or  omit  the  article  are  "sun,"  "earth,"  "heav- 
en," "  God,"  "  Lord,"  "  Holy  Spirit ;"  and  their 
meaning  is  essentially  the  same  whether  used 
with  or  without  the  article.  It  has  indeed  been 
said  that  the  designation  "Holy  Spirit,"  with- 
out the  article,  refers  to  the  operations  of  the 
Spirit,  and  with  the  article  to  the  Spirit  as  a 
person ;  but  this  distinction  is  precarious.  In 
English  the  appellative  "  Holy  Scripture  "  may 
be  used  either  with  or  without  the  article,  after 
the  analogy  of  the  Greek  words  that  are  virtually 
propernames. — A.H.]  These  words  attach  them- 
selves naturallyto  the  participle(E.V., had  given 
command)  which  they  accompany,  and  it  is 
forced,  as  well  as  unnecessary,  to  connect  them 
with  the  verb  in  the  next  clause.  This  passage, 
in  accordance  with  other  passages,  represents 
the  Saviour  as  having  been  endued  abundantly 
with  the  influences  of  the  Spirit,  and  as  having 
acted  always  in  conformity  with  its  [his]  dictates. 
(See  10  :  38 ;  Luke  4:1;  John  3 :  34,  etc.)  That 
subjection  was  one  of  the  laws  of  his  depend- 
ent nature.  That  he  revealed  the  command 
through  the  Holy  Spirit  cannot  be  meant, 
for  the  history  shows  that  he  gave  this  direction 
to  them  in  person. — Whom  he  had  chosen. 
The  aorist  stands  often  for  our  pluperfect  after 
a  relative  or  a  relative  expression.  ( W.  ?  40.  5.) 
— Was  taken  up — i.  e.  into  heaven.  (Comp. 
Mark  16  :  19  and  Luke  24  :  51.)  The  abbre- 
viation shows  how  accustomed  the  early  disci- 
ples were  to  recur  to  this  event. 

3.  To  whom  also.  Also  joins  showed 
himself  to  whom  he  had  chosen.  The 
persons  whom  Christ  had  selected  as  his  apos- 
tles were  the  same  to  Avhom  also  he  shewed 
himself,  etc.  Thus  they  not  only  received 
their  office  directly  from  Christ,  but  were  able 
to  testify  from  their  own  personal  knowledge  to 
the  reality  of  his  resurrection.  (Comp.  2  :  32 
and  3  :  15.  See  note  on  v.  22.)— After  he  had 
suffered— viz.  the  death  of  the  cross.  (See 
Heb.  13  :  12  and  1  Pet.  3  :  18.)  The  term  oc- 
curs thus  absolutely  in  3  :  18  and  17  :  3  (comp. 


Ch.  L] 


THE  ACTS. 


81 


forty  days,  and  speakiug  of  the  things  pertaining  to 
the  kingdom  of  liod : 

4  "And,  being  assembled  together  with  them,  com- 
manded them  that  thev  slioiild  not  depart  from  Jeru- 
salem, but  wait  for  the  promise  of  the  i-ather,  'which, 
sailh.  he,  ye  have  heard  of  me. 

5  'For  John    truly  baptized  with  water;  ■'but    ye 


space  of  forty  days,  and  speaking  the  things  con- 

4cerning  the  kingdom  of  tiod:  and,  'being  assembled 

together  with  them,  he  charged  them  not  to  depart 

from  Jerusalem,  but  to  waii  for  the  promise  of  the 

5  Father,  which,  said  he,  ye  heard  from  me  :  for  John 


a  Luke  21 :  43,  49. . .  .b  Luke  24  :  49  ;  John  14  :  16.  26,  27  ;  15  :  26  ;  16  :  7  ;  ch.  2  :  3:f. . .  .c  Matt.  3  :  11 ;  ch.  II  :  16  ;  19  :  4. . .  .<2  Joel 
3  :  18;  cb.  2  :  4 ;  11  :  15. 1  Or,  tatlng  with  them 


also  26,  23),  and  is  a  striking  lasage.  It  arose 
probably  out  of  tlie  impression  which  the  pain- 
ful nature  of  Christ's  sufferings  had  made  on 
the  first  disciples.— In  many  proofs,  or  if,  jis 
De  Wette  suggests,  tlie  idea  of  the  verb  mingles 
with  that  of  the  noun,  in  many  convincing 
manifestations.  TtK^^pi.ov  {proof)  does  not 
occur  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament,  and  is 
a  very  expressive  term.  Plato  uses  it  to  denote 
the  strongest  possible  logical  proof,  as  opposed 
to  that  which  is  weaker,  and  Aristotle  employs 
it  to  signify  demonstrative  evidence.  The  lan- 
guage seems  to  show  that  the  first  Christians 
had  distinctly  revolved  the  question  whether 
the  Saviour's  resurrection  was  real  or  not,  and 
had  assured  themselves  of  its  reality  by  evi- 
dence which  did  not  admit  in  their  minds  of 
the  shadow  of  a  doubt.  Our  infallible  proofs" 
(E.  V. ;  Gen.  V :  infallible  tokens — both  founded 
on  Beza's  certissimis  sirjnls)  does  not  express  the 
sense  too  strongly.  (Compare  the  idea  with  1 
John  1 : 1.)— During  forty  days  appearing 
to  them  (as  in  all  the  earlier  E.  Vv.) — i.e.  from 
timo  to  time,  as  related  by  the  Evangelists ;  not 
pjiss.  seen  by  them  (E.  V.).  on-Tai/d/aefos  (not  else- 
where in  N.  T.)  agrees  best  as  middle  witli  the 
active  sense  of  the  other  verbs,  and  with  1  Kings 
8:8  (Sept.).  (See  Tromm's  Concord.,  s.y.)  Wahl 
(Clav.  Apocr.,  s.  opau)  should  not  have  put  down 
the  use  in  Tob.  12 : 9  as  certainly  passive.  Some 
have  argued  too  positively  from  this  word  that 
Christ  rose  from  the  grave  with  a  glorified  body. 
It  represents  his  appearing  to  the  disciples,  per- 
liaps,  as  occasional  and  sudden  (comp.  u<l)&ri  in 
7  :  26),  but  does  not  decide  whether  the  state 
out  of  which  he  appeared  was  a  spiritual  and 
invisible  one,  or  merely  some  place  of  retire- 
ment after  a  temporary  absence.  The  Saviour 
had  accomplished  the  great  eitd  of  his  earthly 
work  when  lie  rose  from  the  dead,  and  after 
that,  until  his  ascension,  appears  to  have  min- 
gled only  at  times  with  his  followers.  Some 
mystery  rests,  no  doubt,  on  the  last  days  of  his 
life ;  but  the  idea  that  he  possessed  a  spiritual 
body  before  he  returned  to  heaven  appears  to 
me  irreconcilable  with  Luke  24  :  39  and  John 
20  :  27.  (See  the  article  on  our  Lord's  resurrec- 
tion body  in  Bibl.  Sac,  vol.  ii.  p.  405,  sq.)  [There 
are  four  views  as  to  the  body  of  Jesus  during 


the  fortj'^  days  between  his  resurrection  and  his 
ascension:  (1)  That  it  was  his  natural  body,  un- 
clianged  in  its  relations  to  his  spiritual  being, 
but  simply  reanimated,  as  were  those  of  the 
widow's  son  and  Jairus's  daughter,  tiie  change 
to  a  spiritual  body  being  effected  afterward  at 
his  Jiscension.  This  view  Dr.  Hackett  evidently 
favors.  It  supposes  that  Jesus  spent  a  very  large 
part  of  the  forty  days  in  some  unknown  place 
or  places  of  retirement;  from  which  coming 
forth  occasionally  and  presenting  himself  to 
his  disciples,  he  is  said  to  have  appeared  to 
them.  (2)  That  it  was  his  "natural  body,"  un- 
cliangcd  at  the  moment  of  reanimation,  butiui- 
dergoing  through  the  forty  days  a  gradual  pro- 
cess of  transformation  into  the  spiritual  body 
with  which  he  ascended  into  heaven.  (3)  That 
it  was  the  same  bodj'  which  was  laid  in  tiie 
tomb,  "  but  endued  with  new  powers,  proper- 
ties, and  attributes."  (See  EUicott,  The  Life  of 
our  Lord,  Lee.  VIII.,  note  3.)  This  view  ap- 
pears to  afford  the  most  natural  explanation 
of  the  language  of  the  sacred  writers.  (4)  Tliat 
it  was  an  ethereal  body,  something  between 
matter  and  spirit.  This  appears  to  be  incon- 
sistent with  tlie  passages  referred  to  above  by 
Dr.  Hackett.— A.  II.] 

4,  5.  THE  PROMISE  OF  THE  SAVIOUR 
TO  SEND  THE  SPIRIT. 

4.  Being  assembled  (E.  V.) — i.  e.  with 
them,  as  mentioned  in  Luke  24  :  49;  not  as- 
sembling them  (Kuin.,  Olsh.,  and  earlier 
E.  Vv.).  Nearly  all  tlie  later  critics  reject  the 
middle  sense  as  unproved. — To  aAvait  the 
promise,  its  fulfilment,  realization.  (Comp. 
Gal.  3:14.)  Not  promise  = //(a<  promi.fed — 
i.e.  the  promised  Holy  Spirit  (Rob..  X.  T.  Lex.), 
which  is  less  congruous  with  the  following  verb. 
(See  W.  ?  34.  3.)  It  is  said  to  be  the  promise  of 
the  Father,  because  it  was  foretold  in  the  Old 
Testament  that  lie  would  bestow  it.  (See  2 :  16 ; 
Joel  3  :  1,  2.)— >Vhich  you  heard  from  me, 
as  recorded  in  Luke  24  :  49.  (See  also  John 
15  :  26;  16  :  13.)  For  the  verb  with  tlie  accus- 
ative and  genitive,  see  K.  ?273.  R.  18;  W.  ?  30. 
7.  c.  The  style  of  discourse  changes  suddenly 
from  the  indirect  to  tlie  direct,  as  in  17  :  3;  23  : 
22.  and  often.     (W.  ?  63.  II.  2. ;  S.  ?  196.  2.) 

5.  With  water,  as  the  element  by  which, 


32 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


shall  be  baptized  with  the  Holy  Ghost  not  many  days 
hence. 

6  When  they  therefore  were  come  together,  they 
asked  ol'  him,  saying,  "Lord,  wilt  thou  at  this  time 
*restore  again  the  kingdom  to  Israel? 

7  And  he  said  unto  them,  •'It  is  not  for  you  to  know 
the  times  or  the  seasons,  which  the  Father  hath  put  in 
bis  own  power. 


inde  d  baptized  with  water  ;  but  ye  shall   be  bap- 
tiz  d  'in  the  Holy  Spirit  not  many  days  hence. 

6  They  therefore,  when   thry  were  come  together, 
asked  him,  saying.  Lord,  dost  thou  at  this  time  re- 

7  store  the  kingdom  to  Israel?   And  he  said  unto  them, 
It  is  not  lor  you  to  know  times  or  seasons,  which  the 


a  Matt.  24  :  3. . .  .6  Isa.  1  :  ^6 ;  DaD.  7  :  27  ;  Amos  9  :  II ...  .c  Matt.  24  :  36 ;  Mark  13  :  .32  ;  1  Thess.  5:1.- 


in  the  Holy  Spirit,  as  the  element  in  which, 
the  baptism  is  performed.  The  insertion  of  iv 
(in)  may  be  slightly  localizing  with  reference 
to  a  copious  impartation  of  the  Spirit's  gifts  and 
influences.  [The  preposition  iv  is  always  ex- 
pressed when  baptism  in  the  Holy  Spirit  is 
spoken  of,  btit  often  omitted  when  baptism  in 
water  is  referred  to — jierhaps  because  the  local 
sense  is  sufficiently  exj)ressed  by  the  verb  when 
followed  by  the  customary  element  for  ijunier- 
sion,  while  it  needs  to  be  made  certain  when 
that  element  is  spiritual. — A.  H.]  Not  after 
these  many  days,  after  not  many,  a  few. 
This  mode  of  inverting  the  signification  of  an 
adjective  is  frequent  in  Luke's  style.  If  this 
assurance  was  given  on  the  day  of  the  ascen- 
sion, only  ten  days  were  now  to  pass  before  the 
promised  effusion  of  the  Spirit.  (Comp.  v.  3 
with  2  :  1.)  But  if,  as  maintained  below,  we 
are  to  distinguish  the  meeting  in  v.  4  from  that 
in  V.  6,  we  cannot  decide  exactly  how  long  the 
interval  was,  not  knowing  on  which  of  the 
forty  days  (v.  3)  the  earlier  interview  took 
place.  These,  being  the  pronoun  which  points 
out  what  is  near  at  hand  (iKflvo^,  what  is  more 
remote),  represents  the  days  as  closely  connect- 
ed with  the  present.  It  is  not  superfluous,  there- 
fore, but  strengthens  the  idea  of  the  brevity  of 
the  interval. 

6-11.  HIS  LAST  INTERVIEW  WITH 
THE  DISCIPLES,  AND  HIS  ASCENSION. 

6.  They  therefore  (the  them  in  v.  4) 
having  come  together  on  a  subsequent  oc- 
casion (Calv.,  Olsh.,  E.  v.,  and  earlier  E.  Vv. 
except  Wicl.  and  Rhem.),  or  they  who  came 
together  at  the  time  spoken  of  in  v.  4  (Vulg., 
Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Alf.).  [In  his  last  edition— the 
fourth — Meyer  holds  that  this  is  a  different 
interview  from  the  one  spoken  of  in  v.  4,  thus 
agreeing  with  Dr.  Hackett.— A.  H.]  I  incline 
to  the  first  view,  because,  as  Olshausen  sug- 
gests, Luke  in  his  Gospel  (24  :  49  as  compared 
with  V.  50)  appears  to  assign  the  direction  to 
remain  at  Jerusalem  to  an  earlier  interview 
than  the  one  which  terminated  in  Christ's  as- 
cension (as  even  De  Wette  admits  in  his  Si/nop. 
Evanrf.,  p.  298),  and  because  <TvvfK^6vri<;  (having 
come  together),  when  understood  of  the  same 


assembling,  becomes  so  nearly  tautological  after 
assembling  Avith  them  in  v.  4.  oSc  (there- 
fore) depends  naturally  on  v.  3.  The  kingdom 
of  God  having  been  the  subject  of  so  much 
discourse  between  Christ  and  the  apostles,  they 
therefore,  in  this  last  interview,  asked  him, 
etc.  Hence  no  necessary  inference  can  be  drawn 
from  this  particle  (as  Alf.  urges)  against  suppos- 
ing a  separation  after  tlie  coming  together  in 
V.  4. — If  in  this  time  thou  dost  restore. 
Their  inquiry  indicates  an  established  faith  in 
him  as  the  Messiah,  but  betrays,  at  the  same 
time,  an  expectation  that  his  kingdom  would 
be  to  some  extent  a  temporal  one — that  it  would 
free  the  nation  from  their  dependence  on  the 
Romans  and  restore  to  them  their  ancient  pros- 
perity and  power.  This  worldly  view  may 
have  been  the  preponderant  one  in  the  ques- 
tion which  they  ask,  though  we  are  to  suppose, 
of  course,  that,  after  having  been  so  long  asso- 
ciated with  Christ,  they  had  far  more  intelli- 
gent views  respecting  the  spiritual  nature  of 
the  Messiah's  mission  than  the  great  mass  of 
the  Jews  entertained,  ei  {If)  introduces  a  di- 
rect question,  which  is  contrary  to  classical 
usage,  though  not  uncommon  in  tlie  New  Tes- 
tament and  the  Septuagint.  (K.  ^344.  5.  i. ;  W. 
§57.2.)  Originally  ei  may  have  involved  a 
suppressed  thought  in  such  cases :  saying,  We 
desire  to  know  if,  etc.  (See  Meyer  on  Matt.  12  : 
10.) — Dost  restore  is  present  for  an  immediate 
future.     ( W.  HO-  2 ;  K.  §  255.  R.  4.) 

7.  Times  or  occasions.  (See  Tittm.,  De 
Synon.  N.  T.,  p.  39.)  It  is  one  thing  to  know 
the  general  period  of  an  event ;  another,  to 
know  the  precise  time  of  its  occurrence. — 
Which  the  Father  arranged,  or  fixed,  in 
his  own  power — i.  e..  in  tlie  sovereign  exer- 
cise of  it.  (Comp.  Matt.  21 :  23.  De  Wet.,  Mey., 
Hmph.)  The  implied  inference  is  that  he  may 
be  expected  to  reserve  the  knowledge  of  such 
decisions  to  himself.  All  the  E.  Vv.  (as  for  as 
I  know)  render  hath  put  (defended  also  by 
A\f.)  as  =  hath  kept.  The  perfect  would  be  the 
more  obvious  form  with  that  meaning,  though 
the  aorist,  put,  "placed,"  may  imply  the  same. 
The  question  of  the  discii)les,  as  Bengel  ob- 
serves, relates  merely  to  the  time  when  Christ 


Ch.  I.] 


THE  ACTS. 


33 


8  "Rut  ye  shall  receive  power,  'after  tliat  the  Holv 
Ohost  is  come  upon  you:  aud  "^v"  shall  he  wiine-^se's 
unto  me  holh  in  .leriisaleia,  and 'in  all  .iiul.ea,  and  in 
Samaria,  and  unto  the  Jttermost  part  of  the  earth 

9  •'And  when  he  had  spoken  these  things,  while  they 
beheld,  "-he  was  taken  up;  and  a  C.„ud  received  hiiii 
out  of  their  sight. 

Ki  And  while  they  looked  steadfastly  toward  heaven 
as  he  went  up,  heboid,  two  men  stood  by  them  /in 
white  apparel ; 

11  Which  also  said,  »Ye  men  of  (ialilee,  why  stand 
ye  gazing  up  into  heaven?  this  same  Jesus,  vvhich  is 
taken  up  from  you  into  heaven,  ''shall  so  come  in  like 
manner  as  ye  have  seen  him  go  into  heaven. 


8  Father  hath  'set  within  his  own  authority.  But  ye 
shall  receive  power,  when  the  Holv  .'-pirit  is  come 
upon  you:  and  ye  shall  be  mv  wi'tnesses  b  th  in 
.lerusalem,  and  in  all  .ludica  and  Samaria,  and  unto 

9  the  uttermost  part  of  the  e.irth.  Aud  when  he  had 
said  the.se  things,  as  they  w.  re  l.iokiug,  le  was  taken 
i.p;  and  a  cloud  received  him  out  of  their  sight. 

10  And  while  th  y  were  looking  stedfastlv  into  h  ateu 
as  he  went,  behold,  two  men  stood  bv  them  in  white 

11  apparel;  who  also  said.  Ye  men  of  t.alilee  why 
stand  ye  looking  into  heaven?  this  .iesus,  who  was 
recfivid  up  Ironi  you  into  h.  aven,  shall  so  come  in 
iike  manner  as  ye  beheld  him  going  into  heaven 


n:-2T,  Jc.lml4:3;  IThess.l:  iO;  4:16;  -.iThes,.  1:10;  Kev.  ^  7._-!jl  Or,  i;pii;|,e  Ji^  '•'■*'  '"""•  '*  =  •*"'  ^'"'^  ''^■""^  '■""« 


would  estalilisih  his  kingdom  ;  and  his  answer, 
as  here  given,  he  confines  to  the  same  point. 
Tlieir  remaining  misconceptions  jis  to  the  na- 
ture of  that  kingdom  were  soon  to  be  removed 
more  effectually  than  by  any  formal  instruc- 
tion. 

8.  But  marks  the  opposition  between  what 
was  denied  to  the  disciples  on  the  one  hand, 
and  what  was  to  be  granted  to  them  on  the 
other.— Power,  "  efficiency  "—t.  c.  every  need- 
ful qualification  to   render   them   efficient  in 
their  apostolic  sphere.    (See  Luke  24  :  49.)    Tlie 
power  of  working  miracles   is   included,    but 
does  not  exhaust  the  idea.— When  the  Holy 
Spirit.     This  clause  designates  the  time  when 
they  should  receive  this  power,  as  well  as  the 
source  of  it.    The  construction  is  that  of  the 
genitive  absolute.     The  dependence  of  Tr^unaro? 
onSvva,iiv  (we  miss  the  article  in  that  case)  is 
less  easy,  but  is  preferred  by  some.— Read  ^oO  | 
for    |Uoi   after  eVeo-i^e.     [(■.  e.   ye   shall    be    my  i 
witnesses,  not  witnesses  (or  me.— A.  H.] 
Uttermost— (.  e.  part.     Compare  the  language 
here  with  Matt.  28  :  19;  Mark  16  :  15.'    It  is  im-  | 
possible  that  the  disciples  sliould  not  have  un-  j 
derstood  from  it  that  their  sphere  of  labor  was  ' 
to  be  coextensive  with  tlie  world.      (See  the  ! 
remarks  on  2  :  39.)     The  foregoing  conversa- 
tion may  have  taken  place  on  Olivet  (see  v.  12) 
or  during  the  walk  thither.  [ 

9.  Saying  these  things,  and  still  others 
(i.uke  24:51).      His    last  accents   were    those    of  I 
love  and  benediction.— Was  taken  up—/,  e. 
into  the  air;  not  yet  into  heaven,  on  account 
of  the  next  verb;   hence  dillcrent,  also,  from! 
was  taken  up  in  v.  2.  wiiich   represents  the 
act  as  compk-ted.— Received  up  (lit.  "under."  j 
with  the  cloud  as  it  were  bencatii  him),  and  at  \ 
the  same  time,  by  a  pregnant  construction,  nwai/. 
hence  followed  by  otto  (from).     (See  W.  ?  G6.  2.) 
This  verb  describes  the  close  of  the  scene,  as  far 
as  it  was  visible  to  the  spectators. 

10.  As  they  were  gazing  toward  heav- 


en.  This  compound  imperfect  is  stronger  than 
the  simple,  both  as  to  the  duration  of  the  act 
and  the  prominence  given  to  it.  The  student 
should  note  this  usage;  though  not  rare  in  the 
cla.ssics,  it  is  still  more  common  in  the  New 
Testament.  (See  Green's  Gr..  p.  103 ;  K.  jj  23,s. 
R.  7.)  Kuinoel  refers  into  heaven  to  Avent 
up,  which  separates  the  words  from  tlieir  nat- 
ural connection,  and  leaves  were  gazing  with- 
out any  indirect  object,  as  in  3:4,  12;  14  :  9, 
and  elsewhere.— Then  behold  =  Heb.  vfhin- 
neh.  (Comp.  Matt.  9  :  10 ;  Luke  2  :  15;  24  :  4.) 
This  Hebraistic  use  of  Koi  in  the  apodosis  of  a 
sentence,  after  an  expression  or  idea  of  time, 
is  frequent  in  the  New  Testament.  (See  Brud.l 
Gr.  Concord.,  p.  456;  W.  ^53.  3.  f)— Men,  in 
form ;  really,  angels.  (See  Mark  16  :  a ;  Luke 
24:4.)— Were  standing  while  the  disciples 
gazed  ;  pluix'rf  =  imperf  in  this  verb. 

11.  Who  also  said,  as  well  as  appeared  to 
them.     (See  on  v.  3.)— Why  stand   ye,  etc. 
The  precise  import  of  this  address  of  the  angels 
is  not  certain.     As  compared  with  such  pas- 
sages  as  Luke  24  :  5,  25,  26,  and  others,  it  may 
j  suggest  that  the  apostles  should  have  been  pre- 
I  pared  in  some  measure  for  the  event  which  had 
I  filled  them  with  such  astonisliment.     They  had 
been  distinctly  apprised  by  Ciirist  (see  John  6  : 
62;  20  :  17)  that  he  must  ascend  again  to  God. 
from  whom  he  came ;  and  the  wonders  which 
they  had  seen  in  their  intercoui-se  with  him 
should  have  diminished  their  surprise  at  what 
had  taken  place.   The  inquiry,  as  so  understood, 
leads  naturally  to  the  announcement  which  fol- 
lows.    It  should  abate  the  astonishment  of  the 
disciples  at  what  had  taken  place  to  know  that 
it  was  not  the  only  event  of  the  kind  which 
was  to  enter  into  the  history  of  the  Sa\nour; 
he  whom  they  had  seen  ascend  into  heaven  was 
destined  to  come  again  in   like  manner.     Ac- 
cording to  Calvin,  the  disciples  linger  on  the 
spot,  distressed  at  the  Saviour's  sud(len  depart- 
ure froin  them,  and  still  gazing  upward,  not 


34 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


12  "Tlien  returned  they  unto  Jerusalem  from  the  |  12  Then  returned  they  unto  'erusaleni  from  the 
mount  called  Olivet,  which  is  from  Jerusiileiu  a  sab-  mount  called  (jlivet,  which  is  nigh  unto  Jciusaleui, 
bath  day  s  journey.  I 


a  Luke  24  :  b'2. 


without  a  hope  that  possibly  he  might  reap- 
pear. The  address  of  the  anj^els  reproves  them 
for  this  expLH-tatioii,  and  at  the  same  time  con- 
soles them  with  the  assurance  of  his  return  at 
some  future  time.  Meyer's  view  is  nearly  tlie 
same. — In  like  manner,  lit.  in  what  man- 
ner— i.e.  visiljly,  and  in  the  air  (Bug.,  De  Wet., 
Mey.,  Olsh.).  Tlie  expression  is  never  employed 
to  affirm  merely  the  certainty  of  one  event  as 
compared   with   another.     The  assertion   that 


21  :  1  we  have  mount  of  the  olives.  Jose- 
plms  employs  the  designation  wliich  occurs 
here  in  A)ilt.,  7.  9.  2.  Olive  trees  still  grow  on 
tlie  mount  of  ascension,  and  thus  vindicate  tlie 
propriety  of  the  ancient  name.  On  their  re- 
turn to  Jerusalem  the  disciples  must  have 
passed  Gethsemane.  What  new  thouglits 
would  crowd  upon  their  minds  as  they  gazed 
at  the  spot  after  the  scene  just  witnessed  i — e^oi', 
having,  amounting  to;  not^oirexoi',  distant^ 


MOUNT    OF 

the  meaning  is  simply  that  as  Clirist  had  de- 
parted so  also  he  would  return  is  contradicted 
by  every  passage  in  which  the  phrase  occurs. 
(See  7  r28;  Matt.  23  :  37  ;  I>uke  13  :  34;  2  Tim. 
3  :  8.) 

12-14.  RETURN  OF  THE  DISCIPLES  TO 
.JERUSALEM. 

12.  From  the  mount  (definite  frf>m  the  an- 
nexed clause,  thoujdi  tlic  article  could  be  used  ; 
see  Ltike  19  :  29)  which  is  called  Olivet. 
We  are  indebted  for  tliis  beautiful  name  to  the 
Latin  Olivctum  (in  Vulg.) — (.  e.  a  place  set  with 
olives;  hence  the  exact  import  of  eAoiaii'.  This 
Avord  is  so  accentuated  also  by  Lclim.,  Tsch., 
Mey.,  even  in  Luke  19  :  29  and  21  :  3S.  instead 
of  cAaiii'  in  the  common  editions.     In  Matt. 


OLIVES. 

as  often  represented.  A  Sabbath-day's  journey 
was  the  distance— about  three-quarters  of  a 
mile — to  which  "the  traditions  of  the  elders" 
restricted  the  Jews  in  travelling  on  the  Sabliath. 
In  Luke  24  :  TiO,  51  it  is  said  that  our  Saviour 
led  the  discijiles  as  far  as  to  Bethany,  and  tliat 
there,  while  in  the  act  of  blessing  them,  he  was 
parted  from  them  and  carried  ii))  into  heaven. 
It  was  at  Bethany,  therefore,  or  in  the  vicinity 
of  Bethany,  tiiat  the  ascension  took  place.  That 
account  is  entirely  consistent  with  this.  Beth- 
any was  on  the  eastern  declivity  of  the  Mount 
of  Olives,  and,  as  appears  from  Mark  11:1  and 
Luke  19  :  29,  was  reckoned  as  a  part  of  it ;  so 
that  the  disciples,  in  returning  from  that  place 
to  the  city,  took  their  way  naturally  across  the 


Ch.  L] 


THE  ACTS. 


35 


13  And  when  they  were  come  in,  they  went  up  "into 
an  upper  room,  where  abode  both  'Peter,  and  James, 
and  John,  and  Andri.'W,  Philip,  and  Thomas,  Bartholo- 
mew, and  Matthew,  James  lite  son  of  Alphieus,  and 
"Simon  Zelotes,  atjd  ■'Judas  the  brother  of  James. 

14  «Thesf  all  continued  with  one  accord  in  prayer 
and  supplication,  with  /the  women,  and  Mar^'  the 
mother  uf  Jesus,  and  with  'his  brethren. 


13  a  sabbath  day's  journey  off.  And  when  they  were 
come  in,  they  went  up  into  the  ui)per  chamber, 
where  they  were  abiding;  both  I'eter  and  John  and 
James  and  Andrew,  Philip  and  Thotnas,  Bartholo- 
mew and  Matthew,  James  the  son  of  Alphieus,  and 

14  .Simon  the  Zealot,  and  .1  udas  the  ^son  of  James.  These 
all  with  one  accord  continued  stedfastly  in  prayer, 
-with  the  women,  and  Mary  the  mother  of  Jesus, 
and  with  his  brethren. 


acb.   9:37,   39;    20:8 6  Matt.   10:2,  3,  4 c  Luke  6: 

g  .Malt.  13  :  55. 1  Or,  brutber. 


mountain.  (See  Rob.,  Bihl.  Res.,  vol.  ii.  p.  100 ; 
or  p.  431  in  ed.  of  185G.)  Luke  specifics  here 
the  distance  of  Olivet  from  the  city,  instead  of 
that  of  Bethany,  which  was  about  two  miles 
(conip.  John  11  :  18),  because  the  former  was 
better  known  to  most  of  his  readers,  and  con- 
veyed a  sufficiently  definite  idea  of  the  scene 
of  tlie  ascension. 

13.  Had  entered  (tense  as  in  v.  2),  into  the 
city,  probably,  not  the  house.  What  precedes 
suggests  the  place,  rather  than  what  follows. — 
Into  the  upper  room,  of  some  private  house, 
not  of  the  temple.  The  opinion  that  it  was 
the  latter  some  have  supposed  to  be  required 
by  Luke  24  :  53.  But  continualbj,  as  used 
there,  need  not  signify  anything  more  than  a 
frequent  resort ;  they  were  in  the  temple  always 
on  the  occasions  when  men  in  their  state  of 
mind  would  naturally  repair  thither.  (See  2  : 
46;  Luke  2  :  37.)  Even  De  Wette  allows  thq,t 
the  passages  involve  no  discrepancy.  As  the 
disciples  must  have  been  well  known  as  the 
followers  of  Christ,  we  cannot  well  suppose 
that  the  Jewish  rulers  would  have  allowed  them 
to  occupy  an  apartment  in  the  temple.  The 
upper  room,  either  directly  under  the  flat  roof 
or  upon  it  with  a  roof  of  its  own,  was  retired, 
and  hence  convenient  for  private  or  social  wor- 
ship. The  Hebrews  were  accustomed  to  use  it 
for  such  purposes.  (See  20  :  8,  and  Dan.  6  :  10, 
Sept.)  Travellers  describe  such  rooms  at  the 
present  day  as  airy  and  spacious.  (Sec  Bibl.  Res., 
vol.  ii.  p.  229,  ed.  185G.)  On  the  formation  of 
imtpi^v,  see  W.  ^  IG.  2. — Where  were  abid- 
ing. Weakened  in  E.  V.  (abode),  as  if  it  were 
the  simple  imperf.  (See  on  v.  10.)  We  could 
understand  this  of  constant  residence,  but  more 
naturally  here  of  frequent  resort  for  religious 
conference  and  prayer  (De  Wet.). — James  of 
Alphreus — i.  e.  son :  James  the  son  of 
Alphcpus  ;  but  after  Judas  we  supply  broth- 
er: Judas  the  brother  of  James.  (SeeJude 
1.)  The  nature  of  the  relationship  in  such  a 
case  is  not  determined  by  the  construction,  but 
is  left  to  the  knowledge  of  the  reader.  (W. 
g  30.  3;  C.  ?  389.)— The  Zealot  =  Kananite 
in  Matt.  10 :  4,  from  the  Hebrew  kanna.     He 


is  stipposed  to  have  received  this  epithet  on  ac- 
count of  his  former  zeal  as  a  supporter  of  Juda- 
ism. As  there  was  another  Simon  among  tlie 
apostles,  he  appears  to  have  retained  the  name 
after  he  became  a  disciple,  as  a  means  of  dis- 
tinction, though  it  had  now  ceased  to  mark  the 
trait  of  character  from  which  it  arose.  It  has 
been  said  that  he  took  the  appellation  from  his 
having  belonged  to  a  political  sect  known  as 
the  zealots,  who  are  mentioned  by  Josephus ; 
but  the  party  distinguished  by  that  name  in 
Jewish  history  did  not  appear  till  a  later 
period. 

14.  With  one  mind.  The  term  character- 
izes the  entire  iiarmony  of  their  views  and  feel- 
ings. (Comp.  Rom.  15  :  G.)— Unto  the  (work 
of)  prayer,  where  the  points  out  that  as  the 
appropriate  way  in  which  they  were  occupied. 
And  the  supplication  the  best  editors  re- 
gard as  an  addition  to  the  text.  It  serves 
merely  to  strengthen  the  expression.  ((5omp. 
Phil.  4  :  G.)— With  women.  Among  them 
may  have  been  those  who  followed  Christ 
from  Galilee.  (See  Luke  23:55;  24:10.)  It 
is  incorrect  to  suppose  that  they  are  meant  ex- 
clusively. The  absence  of  the  article  forbids 
that  restriction. — And  (among  them  especially) 
Mary.  Kai  (and)  combines  often  a  part  with 
its  whole  for  the  sake  of  prominence.  This  is 
the  last  time  that  tlie  mother  of  Jesus  is  named 
in  the  New  Testament. — His  brethren  may 
mean  his  brethren  in  a  strict  sense,  or  more  gen- 
erally liis  kuuwieii,  relatives.  The  same  question 
arises  in  regard  to  Matt.  13  :  55,  though  the 
closer  relationship  there,  as  well  as  here,  is  the 
more  obvious  one,  and  finds  very  strong  sup- 
port from  Matt.  1  :  25.  [Tliat  is,  if,  as  Dr. 
Hackctt  appears  to  have  been  satisfied,  the 
common  text  of  that  passage  is  correct.  But 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  the 
Anglo-Am.  Revisers  omit  her  first-born, 
and  read  till  she  had  brought  forth  a  son. 
If  their  view  of  the  text  be  adopted,  the  pas- 
sage has  no  bearing  on  the  point  in  question. 
The  reading  of  Luke  2  :  7,  however,  is  sure ; 
and  it  is  said  there  that  she  hrouglU  forth  her 
first-born  son,  etc.      This,   witli    tlie   evidence 


36 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


15  H  And  in  those  days  Peter  stood  up  in  the  midst 
of  the  disciples,  and  said,  (the  nmuber  "of  names  to- 
gether were  about  an  hundred  and  twenty,) 

16  Men  and  brethren,  this  scripture  must  needs  have 
been  fulfilled,  'which  the  Holy  v^ihost  by  the  mouth  of 
I>avid  spake  before  concerning  Judas,  'which  was 
guide  to  them  that  took  Jesus. 

17  For  ''he  was  numbtred  with  us,  and  had  obtained 
part  of  «this  ministry. 

IS  /Now  this  man  purchased  a  field  withsthe  reward 


15  And  in  these  days  Peter  stood  up  in  the  midst  of 
the  brethren,  and  saiil  land  there  was  a  multitude 
of  'persons  iiitliicrinl  together,  about  a  hundred  and 

16  twenty),  Brethren,  it  was  needful  that  the  scrijjtiir! 
should  be  fulfilled,  which  the  Holy  .-pirit  spake  i  e- 
fore  by  the  mouth  of  l/avM  concerning  Judas,  who 

17  was  guide  to  them  that  took  Jesus.  For  he  was 
numbered  among  us,  and  received  his -portion  in  this 

18  ministry.  (Now  this  man  obtained  a  field  with  the 
reward  of  his  iniquity ;   and  falling  headlong,  he 


:  4....6  P9.  41  ;9 
20  :  U  ;  n  : 


John  13:18 c  I/Uke  22  :  47  :  John   18:3 d  M.att. 

I /  Matt.  27  :  5,  7,  8. . .  g  Matt.  26  :  15  ;  2  Pet.  2  :  16. 


from  other  source.s,  seems  to  be  more  consist- 
ent with  the  opinion  that  his  brethren  were 
either  the  sons  of  Joseph  and  Mary,  or  of 
Joseph  by  an  earlier  marriage,  tlian  with  any 
other  opinion. — A.  H.]  The  brethren  of  Jesns 
had  not  beheved  on  him  at  first  (see  John  7  :  5), 
but  we  discover  here  that  they  had  now  joined 
the  circle  of  his  followers. 

15-22.  THE  ADDRESS  OF  PETER  ON 
THE  CHOICE  OF  A  NEW  APOSTLE. 

15.  In  those  days  is  indefinite  as  a  nota- 
tion of  time.  The  same  language  in  Matt.  3  : 1 
marks  an  interval  of  thirty  years.  (Comp.  also 
Ex.  2  :  11.)  Here  a  short  time  only  could  have 
elapsed,  as  the  ascension  of  Christ  forms  the 
limit  on  one  side  and  the  day^of  Pentecost  on 
the  other. — re.  It  is  worth  remarking  that  this 
particle  rarely  occurs  in  the  New  Testament 
out  of  the  Acts  and  the  writings  of  Paul. — 
Names  =  men,  as  in  Rev.  3:4;  11  :  13.  The 
term  may  have  acquired  this  sense  from  the 
practice  of  taking  the  census  by  registration  or 
enrollment,  inasmuch  as  the  names  on  such  a 
record  are  equivalent  to  persons. — eVl  to  avTo — 
lit.  unto  the  same  place,  implying  an  ante- 
cedent motion.  It  means,  not  that  they  were 
so  many  collectively,  but  that  so  many  came 
together  at  this  time.  (See  2:1;  3:1;  1  Cor. 
11  :  20;  14  :  23.)— A  hundred  and  twenty. 
We  are  to  understand  these  hundred  and  twentij 
as  the  number  of  the  disciples  at  Jerusalem, 
not  as  the  entire  number  of  those  who  had  be- 
lieved. (See  1  Cor.  15  :  6.) 

16.  Men  is  not  superfluous,  but  renders  the 
address  more  respectful.  It  is  a  compliment  to 
be  recognized  as  men.  (See  2  :  29,  37;  7:2; 
13  :  15,  and  often.) — Was  necessary.  The 
tense  is  past,  because  the  speaker  has  his  mind 
on  the  part  of  the  prediction  already  accom- 
jjlished. — This  refers  to  the  doulile  citation  in 
V.  20.  The  parenthetic  character  of  vs.  IS,  19 
accounts  for  the  distance  of  the  antecedent, 
which  in  this  case  follows  the  iironoun.  (See 
K.  ?332.  8).- Which  the  Holy  Spirit  spake 
beforehand,  etc.  We  have  a  similar  testi- 
mony to  the  inspiration  of  the  Scriptures  from 


the  same  apostle  in  2  Pet.  1 :  21. — Concerning 

Judas  belongs  by  both  position  and  construc- 
tion to  spake  before,  not  to  have  been  ful- 
filled, fv  or  €771  would  have  followed  the  lat- 
ter verb.— Who  became  (not  was,  E.  V.) 
guide,  who  acted  so  base  a  part,  though  pro- 
fessedly a  friend.  (See  Matt.  26  :  47  ;  John  IS  : 
2,  sq.) 

17.  Here  the  second  passage  in  v.  20  was  be- 
fore the  speaker's  mind.  That  passage  cc^ntem- 
plates  the  case  of  an  office  transferred  from  one 
person  to  another;  and,  since  forfeiture  implies 
previous  jiossession,  it  is  the  object  of  for  he 
was,  etc.  (oTL  .  .  .  iv  iiixlv),  to  remind  us  that  Ju- 
das had  fulfilled  that  condition  of  the  passage : 
for  he  was  numbered  among  us — i.  e.  the 
apostles.  (For  that  limitation  of  us,  see  the 
next  clause,  and  also  v.  26.)  The  full  connec- 
tion, therefore,  is  this :  The  prophecy  speal^s 
of  a  ministry  which  anotlier  shall  take  ;  Judas 
held  such  an  office,  for  he  was  numbered, 
etc. ;  so  that  the  words  apply  to  him.  To  ren- 
der on  "although"  (Hmpb.)  is  not  allowable. — 
The  lot,  or  office,  of  this  ministry  whicli 
we  possess — i.  c.  the  apostlesliip.  (Comp.  Rom. 
11  :  13.)  Lot  loses  often  its  figurative  sense,  so 
as  to  denote  a  possession  without  any  reference 
to  the  mode  of  its  attainment.  Our  word 
"clergy"  comes  from  this  term,  being  founded 
on  the  idea  of  the  order  as  one  divinely  ap- 
pointed. 

18.  This  verse  and  the  next  are  considered 
by  most  critics  as  an  exjjlanatory  remark  of 
Luke  (Calv.,  Kuin.,  Ol.sh.,  Ilmpli.),  not  as  a 
part  of  Peter's  address.  The  reader  miglit  need 
this  information,  but  those  who  listened  to  tlie 
apostle  may  be  supposed  to  have  been  familiar 
with  the  fate  of  Judas.  It  is  evident  tliat  in- 
somuch   that,  etc.  (olo-Te   KArji^tjvat    .    .    .    aV/iiOTOs), 

tliough  appro])riate  to  tlie  history,  could  hardly 
have  belonged  to  the  discourse.  For  in  v.  20 
appears  to  demand  thi.s-  view  of  tlie  interven- 
ing verses,  tiiv  avv  does  not  forbid  this  suppo- 
sition (Alf.),  since  Luke  certainly  could  adjust 
his  own  words  to  the  context,  as  well  as  those 
of  Peter,  reported  by  liim.    Some  such  horrible 


Ch.  I.] 


THE   ACTS. 


37 


of  iniquity  ;   and  falling  headlong,   he  hurst  asunder 
in  the  uiidst,  and  all  his  bowels  gushed  out. 


burst  asunder  in   the   midst,   and    all   his    bowels 


end  of  the  traitor  was  to  be  inferred  {ovv,  there- 
fore) from  the  phrase  this  Scripture  (see  on 
V.  20);   and   it  was   not  at  all    unnatural   that 
.Luke  should  interrupt  the  speech  at  this  point, 
and  inform  us  how  remarkably  the  death  of 
Judas  agreed  with  this  predietion.     Further,  it 
is  strange  that  the  citation  in  v.  20  should  be 
kept  back  so  long  after  this  in  v.  IG,  except  on 
the  view  that  Luke  inserted  what  intervenes. 
Bengel  restricts  the  parenthesis  to  the  explana- 
tion  respecting  Aceldama.     /ucV  stands  alone, 
as    in   V.  1. — Purchased,   or    caused  to  be  pur- 
chased,  gave   occasion   for   it— i.  e.  it  was   in 
consequence  of  his  act,  and  with  the  money 
gained  by  his  treachery,  that  the  field  was  pur- 
chased, as  rehited  in  Matt.  27  :  6,  sq.    The  great 
body  of  critics  adopt  this  view  of  the  meaning 
(Bez.,  Bretsch.,  Kuin.,  Frtz.,  Thol.,i01sh.,  Ebr., 
Mey.,  Rob.).     This  briefer  mode  of  expression 
is  common  in  every  language,  and  may  be  em- 
ployed without  obscurity  where  the  reader  is 
presumed  to  be  foniiliar  with  the  fiicts  in  the 
case,  or  when  the  nature  of  the  act  itself  •sug- 
gests the  proper  modification.     The  following 
are  analogous  examples  in  the  New  Testament. 
Matt.  27:60:  "And  Joseph   laid  the  body  of 
CJirist  in   his  own  new  tomb,  which  he  had 
liewn  out  in  a  rock  "— i.  e.  caused  to  be  hewn 
out  for  him  ;  John  4:1:  "And  when  the  Lord 
knew  that  the  Pharisees  heard  that  Jesus  made 
and  baptized  more  disciples  than  Jolm  "— ('.  c. 
through  his  disciples ;  for  lie  himself  baptized 
not.     (See  7  :  21 ;  16  :  22;  Matt.  2  :  16;  1  Cor. 
7  :  16;  1  Tim.  4  :  16.)      These  cases  are  plain 
and    no  one    refuses  to  admit    the  causative 
sense    (not    directly    expressed,    but    implied) 
whiih   belongs  to  the  verb   in  such  passages. 
The  principle  which  this  mode  of  speaking^in- 
volves,  the  law  recognizes  even   in   regard  to 
actions  in  its  well-known  maxim.  Qui  facit  per 
a/iiuii,  facit  per  se  ("  Who  does  a  thing  by  an- 
other docs  it  himself").    It  is  only  by  refusing 
to  extend  this  usage  to  Ur^iraTo  that  such  writ- 
ers as  Strauss  make  out  their  allegation  of  a 


j  want  of  agreement  between  this  passage  and 
:  Matt.  27  :  5.     Fritzsche's  suggestion''^  as  to  the 
,  reason  why  Luke  expressed  himself  in  this  un- 
usual manner  deserves  notice.     lie  finds  in  it 
I  a  studied,  significant  brevity,  a  sort  of  accrba 
I  irrisio  ("bitter  mockery"),  bringing  the  motive 
!  and  the  result  into  pointed  antithesis  to  eacli 
j  other:  This  man  thought  to  enrich  hiiuself  by 
I  his  treachery,  but  all  tliat  he  gained  was  tluit 
j  he  got  for  himself  a  field  where  blood  was  paid 
for  blood.— irp.j.'n?  (on  the  face)  is  strictly  the 
!  opposite  of  iiTTTiot  (on  (he  back).     His  falling  in 
i  that  position  may  have  occasioned  the  burst- 
I  ing  asunder;  that  view  agrees  well  with  yex-oMei-ot, 
j  though  rrpjii/i/s  admits  also  of  the  vaguer  sense 
headlonff.—i\dKr,<rf  is  the  first  aorist  from  Aitr^oi 
(W.  ?15;  K.  j}230.)-In  Matt.  27  :  5  it  is  said 
that  Judas,  after   having  brought  his  money 
and  thrown  it  down  in  the  temple,  went  anil 
hanged  or  strangled  himself     Objectors  have 
represeiated  that  account  also  as  inconsistent 
with  this,  but  without  reason.     Matthew  does 
not  say  that  Judas,  aftei-  having  hanged  him- 
self, did  not  fall  to  the  ground  and  burst  asiui- 
der;  nor,  on  the  contrary,  does  Luke  say  that 
Jud;is  did  not  hang  himself  before  he  fell  to  the 
ground ;    and    it    is  obvious   tliat  the   matter 
should  have  been  so  stated,  in  order  to  warrant 
the  charge  of  inconsistency.     We  have  no  cer^ 
tain  knowledge  as  to  the  mode  in  which  we 
are  to  so  combine  the  two  accounts  as  to  con- 
nect the  act  of  suicide  with  what  happened  to 
the  body.     It  has  been  tliought  not  improbable 
that  Judas  may  have  hung  himself  from  the 
limb  of  a  tree  on  the  edge  of  a  precipice  near 
the  Valley  of   Hinnom,   and    tliat,   the  rojie 
breaking  liy  wliich   he  was  susf)ended,  he  fell 
to  the  earth  and  was  dashed  to  pieces.^     It  will 
be  observed  that  Luke's  statement  is  entirely 
abrupt  and  supposes  some  antecedent  history. 
In  this  respect  Matthew's  accoiuit,  instead  of 
involving  any  contradiction,  becomes,  in  fact, 
confirmatory   of   the  other.      It    shows,   first,' 
that  Luke  was  aware  that  something  preceded 


>  In  unpublished  Nolex  on  (lie  Gospetx 

3  TlKtZ  ilf'/S"'  T"""  :,'  '■""'  ^""'"■"""•'■-  P'"7>^""-.'  "rf'V''^  Carol  FY.  A.  F):U.che,  p.  799. 
it  Ifeltt   atlheexnl^^^^^^^^^^  '"""^'^  up  to  the  rocky  terraces  which  hangover 

u,  1  lell  that  the  explanation  proposed  above  is  entirely  natural.     I  was  more  tha.,  ever  satisfied  with  it      T 

Ss'and  i™il  fr  '     "k  ■'  T^  '^^^'^J-"-"  ^^^t-    Trees  Mill  flourish  o.,  the  margin  of  these  preci 


38 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


19  And  it  was  known  unto  all  the  dwellers  at  Jeru- 
salem: insomuch  as  that  tield  is  called  in  their  proper 
tongue,  Aceldama,  that  is  to  say.  The  field  of  blood. 

20  For  it  is  written  in  tlie  book  of  Psalms,  "Let  his 
habitation  be  desolate,  and  let  no  man  dwell  therein  : 
and  'his  bishoprick  let  another  take. 

21  Wherefore  of  these  men  which  have  corapanied 
with  us  all  the  time  that  tlie  Lord  Jesus  went  in  and 
out  among  us, 


19  gushed  out.  And  it  became  known  to  all  the  dwell- 
ers at  Jerusalem  ;  iu>omucli  that  in  their  langiutge 
that  tield  was  called  Akeldania,  th  .t  is,  Ihe  field  of 

20  blood.)     For  it  is  written  in  the  book  of  Fsalms, 

Let  his  habitation  be  made  desolate, 
And  let  no  man  dwell  therein : 
and. 

His  'office  let  another  take. 

21  Of  the  men  therefore  wlio  have  companied  with  us 


aPs.  69:  25.... 6  Ps.  109  : 


which  he  has  omitted  to  mention ;  and  sec- 
ondly, it  puts  us  in  the  way  of  so  combining 
events  as  to  account  better  for  the  incomplete 
representation  in  the  Acts  than  would  other- 
wise have  been  po.ssible. 

19.  And  it  became  known — viz.  that  he 
came  to  so  miserable  an  end. — Aceldama  = 
chakal  dSma  belongs  to  the  Aramaean  or  Syro- 
Chaldaic  spoken  at  that  time  in  Palestine.  (On 
that  language,  see  BiU.  Repos.,  vol.  i.  p.  317,  sq.) 
It  was  for  a  twofold  reason,  therefore,  says 
Lightfoot,  that  the  field  received  this  appella- 
tion :  first,  because,  as  stated  in  Matt.  27  :  7,  it 
had  been  bought  with  the  price  of  blood ;  and 
secondly,  because  it  was  sprinkled  with  the 
man's  blood  who  took  that  price.  This  is  the 
common  view,  and  so  in  the  first  edition ;  but 
I  incline  now  to  doubt  its  correctness.  First, 
falling  headlong,  io  v.  18,  does  not  define  at 
all  where  Judas  fell ;  secondly,  that  field  here 
recalls  naturally  field  above  merely  as  the  field 
purchased  with  "  the  reward  of  iniquity  ;"  and 
thirdly,  if  Judas  fell  into  the  Valley  of  Hin- 
nom,  no  spot  there  at  the  foot  of  the  rocks 
could  well  have  been  converted  into  a  place 
of  burial.  Nor  does  the  conciliation  with 
Matt.  27  :  7  demand  this  view.  Luke  may  be 
understood  here  as  saying  that  "  the  field  of 
blood  "  which  the  priests  purchased  with  the 
inoney  paid  to  Judas,  whether  situated  in  one 
place  or  another,  was  called  Aceldama,  because 
the  fact  of  the  traitor's  bloody  end  was  so  no- 
torious. Matthew  (27 :  e)  mentions  another  rea- 
son for  the  appellation,  wliich  was  that  the 
money  paid  for  the  field  was  the  "  price  of 
blood  " — not  a  different,  but  a  concurrent,  rea- 
son, showing  that  the  ill-omened  name  could 
be  used  with  a  double  emphasis.  Tradition 
has  placed  "  the  potter's  field  "  (Matt.  27 :  e)  on  the 
side  of  the  hill  which  overlooks  the  Valley  of 
Hinnom.  It  may  have  been  in  that  quarter, 
for  argillaceous  clay  is  still  found  there,  and 
receptacles  for  the  dead  appear  in  tlie  rocks, 
proving  that  the  ancient  Jews  were  accustomed 
to  burv  there.i 


20.  The  writer  returns  here  to  the  address. 
For  specifies  the  prophecy  to  wliich  this 
points  in  v.  16;  hence  namely  (as  in  Matt. 
1  :  18).  (See  B.  ^  149;  K.  §  324.  2.)  The  first 
passage  is  Ps.  69  :  25  slightly  abridged  from  the 
Septuagint,  with  an  exchange  of  their  for  his. 
Its  import  is.  Let  his  end  be  disastrous,  his 
abode  be  desolate,  and  shunned  as  accursed. 
It  is  impossible  to  understand  tlie  entire  Psalm 
as  strictly  Messianic,  on  account  of  v.  5 :  "  O 
God,  thou  knowest  my  fooHshness,  and  my 
sins  are  not  hid  from  thee."  It  ai)pears  to  be- 
long rather  to  the  class  of  Psalms  which  de- 
scribe general  relations,  which  contain  proph- 
ecies or  inspired  declarations  which  are  verified 
as  often  as  individuals  are  placed  in  the  partic- 
ular circumstances  which  lay  within  the  view, 
not  necessarily  of  the  writer,  but  of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  at  whose  dictation  they  were  uttered. 
When  Peter,  therefore,  declares  that  this  proph- 
ecy which  he  applies  to  Judas  was  spoken  with 
special  reference  to  him  (see  v.  16),  lie  makes 
the  impressive  announcement  to  those  whom 
he  addressed  that  the  conduct  of  Judas  had 
identified  him  fully  witli  sucli  persecutors  of 
the  righteous  as  the  Psalm  contemj)lates ;  and 
hence  it  was  necessary  that  he  sliould  suffer 
the  doom  deserved  by  those  who  sin  in  so  ag- 
gravated a  manner. — The  other  ^^assage  is  Ps. 
109  :  8  in  the  words  of  the  Seventy.  We  are 
to  apply  here  the  same  principle  of  interpreta- 
tion as  before.  That  Psalm  sets  forth,  in  like 
manner,  the  wickedness  and  desert  of  those 
who  persecute  the  people  of  God ;  and  hence, 
as  Judas  had  exemplified  so  fully  tliis  idea,  he 
too  must  be  divested  of  his  office,  and  its  honors 
be  transferred  to  another. 

21.  Therefore,  since,  as  foretold,  the  place 
of  the  apostate  must  be  filled. — Of  these  men, 
etc.,  depends  properly  on  one,  in  v.  22,  where  tlio 
connection,  so  long  interrupted,  is  reasserted  by 
these.  —  In  every  time.  The  conception 
divides  the  period  into  its  successive  parts. — 
In  which  he  came  in  unto  us,  and  went 
out — «.  e.  lived  and  associated  with  us.      Tlio 


1 1  have  taken  the  liberty  to  repeat  a  few  sentences  here  already  published  in  another  work.  (See  JIhixfin- 
tiovjs  of  Scripture  suggested  by  a  Tour  throvgh  the  Holy  Land,  p.  2(JG.)  1  have  taken  a  similar  liberty  in  a  few 
Other  passages. 


Ch.  I.] 


THE  ACTS. 


39 


w  "Pecinnine  fnmi  the  ban  ism  of  John,  unto  that         all  the  time  that  the  Lord  Jesus  went  in  and  went 
""     •    '-    ■       S  .   ■       '       ,__ ,   — ustone  be     22  out  UimonK  us,  beginning  liom  the  baptism  ot  John, 


same  dav  that  '-he  was  taken  up  I'roni  us,  m 
ordained  'to  be  a  witness  with  us  of  his  resurreciion. 

•2:J  And  tliey  api)oihted  two,  Joseph  called ''Barsabas, 
who  was  huriiamed  Justus,  and  Matthias. 

24  And  thty  prayed,  and  said,  Thou,  Lord,  "which 
knowe^t  the  hearts  oi  all  men,  shew  whether  of  these 
two  thuu  hast  chosen. 


ntu  the  day  that  he  was  receiv  d  up  from  us,  of 
these  must  one   become  a  witness  with   us  of  his 

21!  resurrection.  And  they  put  fo.ward  two,  Juseph 
called    liarsabbas,  who  was   sunianied  Justus,  and 

24  .Matthias.  And  they  prayed,  and  .said.  Thou,  Lord, 
who  knowestthe  hearts  of  all  men,  shew  of  these 


aMwk  11        5vcr  9.. ..c  John  15:27;  ver.  8;  ch.  4  :  3»....<i  ch.  1.5  :  22....e  1  Sam.  16  :  7  ;  1  Chr.  2»  :  9  ;  29  :  17  ;  Jer.  11:20; 
17  :  10;  ch.  15  :  8;  Kev.  2:  23. 1  Or,  o»er 


entire  life  or  course  of  life  is  described  b^  one 
of  its  most  frequent  acts.  It  is  a  Hebrew  mode 
of  speaking  (comp.  Deut.  2cS  :  19;  31  :  2,  etc.), 
and  is  used  proi)erly  of  tliose  wbo  sustain 
official  relations  or  perform  public  labors. 
(See  9  :  28.)  An  exact  construction  of  the 
Greek  would  have  placed  unto  us  after  the 
first  verb,  and  inserted /rowi  us  after  the  second. 
(W.  ?(in.  3.) 

22.  Beginning  and  continuing  unto,  etc. 
The  supplementary  idea  was  too  obvious  to 
need  to  be  e.Ki)rcssed.  (See  \V.  ^  6G.  I.  c.) — 
From  the  baptism  of  John — i.  e.  from  its 
beginning,  as  a  well-known  epoch.  The  history 
shows  that  he  had  been  baptizing  a  few  months 
before  our  Lord  made  his  public  ajjpearance, 
and  C(jntinued  to  do  so  for  a  time  afterward 
(see  John  3  :  27) ;  but  that  difference,  for  the 
purpose  of  so  general  a  designation,  was  unim- 
portant. Not  from  the  close  of  John's  baptism 
(Hmph.),  since  Jesus  called  the  other  apostles 
earlier,  and  not  from  his  own  baptism  by  John 
(Kuin.),  since  the  phrase  does  not  admit  of  that 
restriction.  (Comp.  18  :  25 ;  Mark  11  :  30 ;  Luke 
7  :  29,  etc.)— To  be  a  Avitness,  etc.  The  resur- 
rection is  singled  out  as  the  main  point  to  which 
the  testimony  of  the  apo.stles  related,  because, 
that  being  established,  it  involves  every  other 
truth  in  relation  to  the  character  and  work  of 
Christ.  It  proves  him  to  be  the  Son  of  God, 
the  Justifier  and  Redeemer  of  men,  their  Sov- 
ereign and  Judge.  (See  4  :  33  ;  John  5  :  22 ; 
Rom.  1:4;  4  :  24 ;  10  :  9 ;  Gal.  1  :  1,  etc.) 
Hence,  Paul  mentions  it  as  one  of  the  proofs 
of  his  apostleship,  and  of  his  qualifications 
for  it,  that  he  had  seen  Christ  after  his  resur- 
rection.   (See  1  Cor.  9  :  1.) 

23-26.  THE  APPOINTMENT  OF  MAT- 
THIAS AS  AN  APOSTLE. 

23.  The  act  here  is  that  of  those  addressed 
(see  v.  15),  not  that  of  the  apostles  merely. — 
They  placed  two— i.  e.  before  them,  in  their 
midst  (see  5  :  27  ;  6:6);  or,  according  to  some, 
appointed  two  as  candidates  (De  Wet.). — 
Justus.     It  was  not  uncommon  for  the  Jews 


at  this  period  to  assume  foreign  names.  (See  on 
13  :  9.)  Barsabas  is  mentioned  only  here. 
Some  have  conjectured,  without  reason,  that 
he  and  Barnabas  (4 :  m)  were  the  same  person. 
Matthias  als(j  appears  only  in  this  transaction. 
The  traditional  notices  of  him  are  not  reliable. 
(See  Win.,  Rcalw.}  vol.  ii.  p.  61.) 

24.  Praying  they  said  (n-pocrtufoMtvoi  ein-oi'), 
they  prayed,  saying.  The  particii>le  con- 
tains the  principal  idea.  It  may  be  suppo.sed 
to  be  Peter  who  uttered  the  prayer,  since  it  was 
he  who  suggested  the  appointment  of  a  succes- 
sor to  Judtus.- Thou,  Lord,  etc.  Whether  this 
prayer  was  addressed  to  Christ  or  God  has  been 
disputed.  The  reasons  for  the  former  opinion 
are  that  Lord,  when  taken  absolutely  in  tlie 
New  Testament,  refers  generally  to  Christ  ;2  that 
Christ  selected  the  other  apostles  as  stated  in  v. 
2 ;  that  the  first  Christians  were  in  the  habit  of 
praying  to  him  (see  on  7  :  59 ;  9  :  14) ;  and  that 
Peter  says  to  Christ,  in  John  21  :  17,  "  Lord, 
thou  knowcst  all  things,"  which  is  the  import 
exactly  of  nap^ioyvCxna  (heart-knower).  Tlie 
reasons  for  the  other  opinion  do  not  invali<late 
these.  That  heart-knower  is  u.sed  of  God  in 
15  :  8  shows  only  that  it  docs  not  apply  exclu- 
sively to  Christ.  The  call  of  Peter  in  15  :  7, 
which  is  ascribed  to  God,  was  a  call,  not  to  the 
apostleship,  but  to  preach  the  gosi)el  to  the 
heathen  ;  and  even  if  tliat  case  were  parallel  to 
this,  it  would  be  an  instance  only  of  the  com- 
mon usage  of  referring  the  same  or  a  similar 
act  indiscriminately  to  Christ  or  God.  This 
latter  remark  ajiplies  also  to  such  passages  as  2 
Cor.  1:1;  Eph.  1  :  1 ;  2  Tim.  1:1.  To  deny 
that  Peter  would  ascribe  omniscience  to  Christ 
because  in  Jer.  17  :  10  it  is  said  to  be  the  ]>rc- 
rogative  of  God  to  know  the  heart  contradicts 
John  21  :  17.  Some  have  supposed  the  apostle 
intended  to  quote  that  passage  of  the  prophet, 
but  the  similarity  is  too  slight  to  ])rove  surli  a 
design;  nor,  if  tlie  idea  of  heart-knower 
were  drawn  from  that  .source,  would  the  ai)pli- 
cation  of  it  here  conform  necessarily  to  its  ap- 
plication   there. — iva   (omitted    in  E.  V.  after 


1  BiblischM  Realworterbiich,  von  Dr.  Georg  Benedict  Winer  (3d  ed.  1848\ 

«See  Professor  Stuart's  article  ou  the  meaning  of  this  title  in  the  New  Testament,  Bibl.  Rejws.,  vol.  i.  p. 
733,  sq. 


40 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


25  "That  he  may  take  part  of  this  ministry  and 
apostleship,  from  which  Judas  by  transgression  fell, 
that  he  might  go  to  his  own  place. 

26  And  they  gave  forih  their  lois;  and  the  lot  fell 
upon  Matthias;  and  he  was  numbered  with  the  eleven 
apostles. 


25  two  the  one  wh^  m  thou  hast  chosen,  to  take  the 
place  in  this  niinistiy  and  apostleship.  from  which 
Judas  fell  away,  that  he  might  go  to  his  > wn  place. 

2(!  And  they  gave  lots  'for  them  ;  and  the  lot  lell  upon 
Matthias;  and  he  was  numbered  with  the  eleven 
apostles. 


Cranm.)  belongs  to  6i',  which  one,  or  perhaps 
in  apposition,  whom — viz.  one  that  he,  etc. 
Tynd.  and  Gen.  render  that  the  one  may 
take,  etc. 

35.   For  lot  (icAijpov),  see  on   v.  17. — This 
mini.stry  and  (tliat)  an  apostleship.     And 

Uai)  adds  a  second  terra  explanatory  of  the 
first — i.  e.  essentially  an  instance  of  liendiadys 
(Mey.,  De  Wet.),  the  ministry  of  this  apos- 
tleship.    From  which  he  went  aside,  as 

opposed  to  the  idea  of  adhering  faithfully  to  the 
character  and  service  which  his  apostleship  re- 
quired of  him ;  "  ad  normam  Hebr.  soor  sq. 
mt»i=deserere  niunus"  (Wahl).  That  he 
might  go  unto  his  own  place.  The  clause 
is  telle,  depending  on  went  aside.  So  long  as 
Judas  retained  his  office,  he  was  kept  back,  as 
it  were,  from  his  proper  destiny.  He  must  re- 
linquish it,  therefore,  in  order  to  suffer  his  just 
deserts.  In  this  way  the  apostle  would  state 
strongly  the  idea  that  the  traitor  merited  the 
doom  to  which  he  had  been  consigned.  The 
following  comment  of  Meyer  presents  the  only 
view  of  the  further  meaning  of  the  passage 
which  has  any  respectable  critical  support : 
"What  is  meant  here  by  his  own  place  is 
not  to  be  decided  by  the  usage  of  place  in 
itself  considered  (for  totto?  may  denote  any 
place),  but  merely  by  the  context.  That  re- 
quires that  we  understand  by  it  "Gehenna," 
which  is  conceived  of  as  the  place  to  which 
Judas,  in  virtue  of  his  character,  properly  be- 
longs. Since  the  treachery  of  Judas  was  in 
itself  so  fearful  a  crime,  and  was  still  further 
aggravated  by  self-murder  (which  alone,  ac- 
cording to  Jewish  ideas,  deserved  punishment 
in  hell),  the  hearers  of  Peter  could  have  had 
no  doubt  as  to  the  sense  to  be  attached  to  own 
place.  This  explanation  is  demanded  also  by 
the  analogy  of  Rabbinic  passages — e.  g.  Baal 
Turim  on  Num.  24  :  25  (see  Lightfoot,  Hor. 
Hebr.,  ad  loc.) :  Balaam  ivit  in  locum  suum — 
i.  e.  in  Gehennam."  De  Wette  assents  entirely 
to  this  interpretation.  Own  place,  therefore, 
"  is  a  euphemistic  designation  of  the  place  of 
punishment,  in  which  the  sin  of  Judas  ren- 
dered it  just  that  he  should  have  his  abode" 
(Olsh.). 

26.    And    they    placed    (probably  =  Heb. 
nathan,  as  often  in  the  New  Testament)  their 


lots  in  a  vase  or  something  similar,  or  perhaps 
gave  them  to  those  whose  busine-ss  it  was  to 
collect  them,   avrdv  (T.  E..),  their,  or  avraU  (Lch., 
Tsch.),  for  them,  refers  to  the  candidates,  be- 
cause the  lots  pertained   to  them.      The  two 
names  were  probably  written  on  slijis  of  parch- 
ment, perhaps  several  duplicates  of  them,  and 
then  shaken  up ;  the  one  fir.?t  drawn  out  de- 
cided the  choice.     The  idea  of  throwing  up  the 
lots  agrees  better  witli  ^aWdv  icAjjpous  tlian  with 
this  exi:)ression. — Fell,  came  out,  without  refer- 
ence to  any  jjarticular  process. — The  lot.    Defi- 
nite, because  it  was   the   decisive   one. — Was 
numbered  together  with  the  eleven  apos- 
tles— i.  e.  was  recognized  as  one  of  their  order, 
and  had  the  character  of  an  apostle  henceforth 
accorded    to    him.     Hesychius    sanctions  this 
sense  of  the  verb,  though   it  means  properly 
"  to  vote  against,"  "  condemn,"  which   is  out 
of  the  question  here.     De  Wette  renders  "  was 
chosen,"  "elected,"   which   not  only   deviates 
from  the  classic  usage,  but  ascribes  the  result 
to  tlieir  own  act,  instead  of  to  a  divine  inter- 
position.    The  subsequent  appointment  of  Paul 
to  the  apostleship  did  not  discredit  or  al^rogate 
this  decision,  but  simply  enlarged  tlie  original 
number  of  the  apostles.  (See  Guericke's  remarks 
on  this  point  in  his  Church  History,  Prof.  Shedd's 
translation,  p.  47.)     [The  appointment  of  Mat- 
thias has  sometimes  been  regarded  as  an  un- 
authorized  transaction :  (1)  Because  the  spirit 
of  inspiration  was  not  yet  given  to  the  apostles, 
or  to  any  of  the  disciples;  (2)  Because  there  is 
no  further  reference  to  Matthias  (by  name)  in 
j  the  New  Testament,  or  certain  trace  of  his  work 
!  in  early  tradition ;  (3)  Because  the  full  numl)er 
of  apostles  (twelve)  was  completed  by  the  Lord's 
■  choice  of  Paul ;    (4)    Because  the  method  of 
I  selection   here   adopted  (by   casting   lots)   was 
i  never   afterward   resorted   to   by  the   apostles. 
I  But  to  these  objections  to  the  validity  of  the 
transaction  it  has  been  answered  :  (1)  That  the 
!  resort  to  lots  was  perhaps  justified  by  the  want 
j  of  inspiration,  which  would  liave  rendered  it 
I  unnecessary  ;    (2)  That  several   other  apostles 
1  are  not  referred  to  by  name  in  the  later  writ- 
ings of  the  New  Te.stament,  or  by  any  trust- 
I  worthy  early  traditions;  (3)  That  Paul  may  be 
[  regarded  as  an  extra  apostle  for  the  Gentiles  or 
i  as  filling  the  place  made  vacant  by  the  early 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


41 


CHAPTER    II, 


AND  when  "the  day  of  Pentecost  was  fully  come, 
'they  were  all  with  one  accord  in  one  place. 

2  And  suddenly  there  came  a  sound  from  heaven  as 
of  a  rushing  mighty  wind,  and  'it  tilled  all  the  house 
where  they  were  sitting. 

3  And  tliere  appeared  unto  them  cloven  tongues  like 
as  of  fire,  and  it  sat  upon  each  of  them. 


1  An'I)  when  the  day  of  Pentecost  'was  now  come, 

2  they  were  all  together  in  one  place.  Aud  suddenly 
there  came  from  heaven  a  sound  as  of  the  rushing 
of  a  mighty  wind,  and  it  tilled  all  the  house  where 

3  they  were  sitting.  And  there  appeared  unto  them 
tongues  -parting  asunder,  like  as  of  lire;  and  il  sat 


a  Lev.  23  :  15;  Deut.  16  :  9;  ch.  20  :  16 6  ch.  1  :  14 c  ch.  4:  31.- 


Or,  distributing  themselvtt 


.  Gr.  wtu  being  fulfilled 2  Or,  parting  among  therit 


niartyrdoin  of  James  the  Less ;  (4)  That  there 
was  no  occasion  for  the  use  of  lots  after  the  ef- 
fusion of  the  Spirit  at  Pentecost.  After  noticing 
certain  grounds  of  doubt  as  to  the  validity  of 
this  election,  Dr.  Ripley  says :  "  Still,  the  trans- 
action was  performed  in  a  very  devout  manner, 
with  a  practical  referring  of  it  to  Divine  Prov- 
idence." And  it  may  probably  be  added  that 
the  space  given  to  this  transaction  in  a  very  con- 
densed history,  tlie  positive  statement  that  Mat- 
thias was  numbered  with  the  apostles,  and  the 
total  absence  of  any  hint  of  a  mistake  on  the 
l)art  of  the  apostles  and  disciples  in  what  they 
did,  are  valid  arguments  for  Dr  Hackett's  view. 
—A.  H.] 

1-4.  DESCENT  OF  THE  HOLY  SPIRIT. 

1.  When  the  day  of  Pentecost  was  fully 
come,  arrived.  (See  Luke  1)  :  51.)  The  action 
of  the  verb  (lit.  to  be  completed)  refers  not  to 
the  day  itself,  but  to  the  completion  of  the 
interval  which  was  to  pass  before  its  arrival 
(Olsh.,  Bmg.).  Some  translate  Avhile  it  is 
completed — /.  e.  in  the  coui-se  of  it,  on  that 
day  (Mey.,  De  Wet.).  The  present  infinitive  is 
consistent  with  this  view  or  that. — The  Pente- 
cost (lit.  the  fiftieth)  the  Greek  Jews  employed 
as  a  proper  name.  ( See  20  :  16 ;  I  Cor.  10:8;  2 
Mace.  12  :  32.)  Day  or  feast  determined  the 
form.  This  festival  received  its  name  from  its 
occurring  on  the  fiftieth  day  from  the  second 
day  of  the  passover ;  so  that  the  interval  em- 
braced a  circle  of  seven  entire  weeks — i.  e.  a 
week  of  weeks.  It  is  usually  called  in  the  Old 
Testament,  with  reference  to  this  circumstance, 
the  festival  of  weeks.  Its  observance  took  place 
at  the  close  of  the  gathering  of  the  harvest,  and 
was  no  doubt  mainly  commemorative  of  that 
event.  (See  Jahn's  Archxnl.,  ^355.)  According 
to  the  later  Jews,  Pentecost  was  observed  also 
as  the  day  on  whicli  the  law  was  given  from 
Sinai;  but  no  trace  of  this  custom  is  found  in 
the  Old  Testament  or  in  the  works  of  Philo  or 
Josephus.  It  is  generally  supposed  that  this 
Pentecost,  signalized  by  the  outpouring  of  the 
Spirit,  fell  on  the  Jewish  Sabbath,  our  Saturday. 
According  to  the  best  opinion,  our  Lord  cele- 


brated his  last  passover  on  the  evening  which 
began  the  fifteenth  of  Nisan  (Num. as ; a);  and 
hence,  as  he  was  crucified  on  the  next  day, 
which  was  our  Friday,  the  fiftietii  day,  or 
Pentecost  (beginning,  of  course,  with  the  even- 
ing of  Friday,  the  second  day  of  the  passover), 
would  occur  on  the  Jewish  Sabbath.  (See  Wiesl., 
Chronolofjle,  u.  s.  w.,  j).  19.) — All  the  believei-s 
then  in  Jerusalem.  (Sec  1  :  15.) — biio^vna&6v  == 
6iiioi/(ux"s.  with  one  accord.  Its  local  sense, 
together,  becomes  superfluous,  followed  by  in 
one  place.    (See  on  1  :  15.) 

2.  As  of  a  mighty  wind  (lit.  blast)  rush- 
ing along;  not  genit.  absolute,  but  dependent 
on  sound,  )5xos.  (See  v.  3.).  nvori  =  irveCiia.  The 
more  uncommon  word  is  chosen  here,  perhajis 
on  account  of  the  dilferent  sense  of  irvivtua  in 
this  connection — e.  g.  v.  4.  As  used  of  the 
wind,  •j>ip«T&ai  denotes  often  rapid,  violent,  iikj- 
tion.  (See  the  proofs  in  Kypke's  Obss.  Sitcr., 
vol.  ii.  p.  11,  and  in  Kuin.,  ad  loc.)  Filled — 
i.  e.  the  sound,  which  is  the  only  natural  subject 
furnished  by  the  context. — House  is  probably 
the  house  referred  to  in  1  :  13 ;  not  the  temple, 
for  the  reasons  there  stated,  and  because  the 
term  employed  in  this  absolute  way  does  not 
signify  the  temple  or  an  apartment  of  it.  [The 
note  of  Canon  Cook  on  filled  all  the  house 
reads  thus:  "As  a  bath  is  filled  with  \v:itcr, 
that  they  might  be  baptized  with  the  Ilnly 
Ghost,  in  fulfilment  of  1 :5;  Chrysostom,  Horn, 
iv.  2,  on  the  Acts,  and  Hom.  ii.  13,  on  the  as- 
cension and  the  beginning  of  the  Acts."  We 
are  not  to  suppose  that  a  sound  like  that  wliich 
would  have  been  made  by  a  mighty  wind  rush- 
ing against  the  outside  of  the  building,  or  rush- 
ing through  the  adjacent  street,  filled  all  the 
house,  but  rather  that  a  sound  which  seemed 
like  that  of  a  rushing  wind  that  entered  and 
filled  the  whole  house  filled  it.  In  other  words, 
the  Spirit's  presence  seems  to  have  been  signi- 
fied and  revealed  by  a  sound  that  came  with  that 
presence  into  the  house  and  filled  it.  The  aud- 
ible sign  filling  the  room  announced  the  Power 
represented  bv  it  as  doing  the  same. — A.  H.^ 

3.  And  there  appeared  to  them  tongues 
distributed — i.e.  anion;;  them — and   one — 


42 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


4  And  "they  were  all  filled  with  the  Holy  Ghost,  and 
began  Ho  tipeak  with  other  tongues,  as  the  Spirit  gave 
them  utterance. 


4  upon  eacli  one  of  them.  And  they  were  all  filled 
with  the  Holy  i-pirit,  and  began  to  .speak  with  other 
tongues,  as  the  !?pirit  gave  them  utterance. 


acb.l  :5....&  Mark  16  :  17  ;  ch.  10:-16;  19:6;  1  Cor.  12  :  10,  M,  30;  13  : 1 ;  14  ;  2,  etc. 


i.  e.  tongue — sat  upon  each  of  them.  So  Bng., 
Olsh.,  Wahl,  De  Wet.,  Bnig.,  Hmph.,  Rob.,  and 
most  of  the  later  critics,  as  well  as  some  of  the 
older.  (Meyer  comes  over  to  this  view  in  his 
last  ed.)  The  distributive-  idea  occasions  the 
change  of  number  in  sat.  (W.  ^  58.  4.) — To 
them  belongs  strictly  to  the  verb,  but  ex- 
tends its  force  to  the  participle.  According  to 
this  view,  the  fire-like  apjjearance  presented  it- 
self at  first,  as  it  were,  in  a  single  body,  and 
then  suddenly  parted  in  this  direction  and 
that ;  so  that  a  portion  of  it  rested  on  each  of 
those  present.  It  could  be  called  a  tongue,  in 
that  case,  from  its  shape,  as  extended,  pointed, 
and  may  have  assumed  such  an  appearance  as 
a  symbol  of  the  miraculous  gift  which  accom- 
panied the  wonder.  Tliis  secures  to  distrib- 
uted its  proper  meaning  (see  v.  45 ;  Matt.  27  : 
35;  Luke  23  :  34,  etc.),  and  explains  why  the 
first  verb  is  plural,  while  the  second  is  singular. 
Calvin,  Heinrichs  (also  Alf ),  and  many  of  the 
older  commentators,  render  the  participle  dis- 
parted, cleft  (as  in  the  E.  Vv.  generally),  and 
suppose  it  to  describe  the  fiame  as  exhibiting 
in  each  instance  a  tongue-like,  forked  appear- 
ance. The  objection  to  this  view  is  that  it  rests 
upon  a  doubtful  sense  of  the  word,  and  espe- 
cially that  it  offers  no  explanation  of  the  change 
from  the  plural  verb  to  the  singular.  De  Wette, 
after  others,  lias  adduced  passages  here  from  the 
Rabbinic  writers  to  show  that  it  was  a  common 
belief  of  the  Jews  that  an  appearance  like  fire 
often  encircled  the  heads  of  distinguished  teach- 
ers of  the  law.  To  this  it  has  been  added  that 
instances  of  a  similar  phenomenon  are  related 
bj^  the  Greek  and  Roman  writers.  We  are  di- 
rected by  such  coincidences  to  an  important 
fact  in  the  history  of  the  divine  revelations, 
and  that  is  that  God  has  often  been  pleased  to 
reveal  himself  to  men  in  conformity  with  their 
own  conceptions  as  to  the  mode  in  which  it  is 
natural  to  expect  communications  from  him. 
The  appearance  of  the  star  to  the  Magians  may 
be  regarded  as  another  instance  of  such  accom- 
modation to  human  views. 

4.  Were  all  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit 
(anarthrous,  as  in  1  :  2),  a  phrase  referring 
usually  to  special  gifts  rather  than  moral  qual- 
ities, and  to  these  as  transient  rather  than  per- 
manent. (Comp.  4  : 8,  31 ;  13  :  9,  etc.)  [It  will 
be  instructive  to  compare  all  the  other  passages 
in  which  this  expression  is  found — viz.  Luke 


1  :  15,  41,  67 ;  Acts  4  :  8,  31 ;  9  :  17 ;  13  :  9— or 
the  equivalent  expression  "  full  of  the  Holy 
Spirit " — viz.  Luke  4:1;  Acts  6:3;  7  :  55  ;  11  : 
24 — together  with  those  which  apparently  refer 
to  the  same  endowment — viz.  Acts  2  :  17  ;  6:8; 
8  :  17,  sq. ;  10  :  44,  46 ;  11  :  15,  16 ;  19  :  6.  A 
study  of  these  passages  leads  to  the  conclusion 
that  "  being  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit,"  or 
"  being  baj^tized  in  the  Holy  Spirit,"  implies 
a  reception  from  the  Si)irit  of  extraordinary 
powers,  in  addition  to  ordinary  sanctifying 
grace.  These  extraordinary  powers  might  be 
permanent,  as  the  gift  of  prophecy  to  the  apos- 
tles, or  they  might  be,  and  generally  were,  tem- 
porary, as  the  gift  of  miracles. — A.  H.] — Began 
(like  our  "proceeded")  to  speak,  as  soon  as 
the  symbol  rested  on  them.  This  use  of  apxo- 
fiai  (to  begin)  as  introducing  what  is  next  in 
order  has  not  been  duly  recognized  in  the  New 
Testament.  With  other  tongues — i.  e.  than 
their  native  tongue.  That  Luke  designed  to 
state  here  that  the  disciples  were  suddenly  en- 
dued with  the  power  of  speaking  foreign  lan- 
guages, before  unknown  to  them,  would  seem 
to  be  too  manifest  to  admit  of  any  doubt.  It 
is  surprising  that  such  a  writer  as  Neander 
should  attempt  to  put  a  different  construction 
on  the  text.  He  objects  that  the  miracle  would 
have  been  superfluous,  inasmuch  as  the  apostles 
are  not  known  to  have  employed  this  gift  of 
tongues  in  preaching  the  gospel.  It  may  be 
replied,  first,  that  we  have  not  sufficient  infor- 
mation concerning  the  labors  of  the  apostles 
to  affirm  that  they  may  not  have  employed  the 
endowment  for  that  purpose;  and  secondly, 
that  we  are  not  obliged  to  regard  such  a  use  of 
it  as  the  only  worthy  object  of  the  miracle.  It 
may  have  been  designed  to  serve  chiefly  as  an 
attestation  of  the  truth  of  the  gospel,  and  of 
the  character  of  the  apostles  as  divine  messen- 
gers. It  is  certain,  at  least,  that  Paul  enter- 
tained that  view  of  the  tongues  spoken  of  in 
1  Cor.  14  :  22 :  "  Wherefore  tongues  are  for  a 
sign,  not  to  them  that  believe,  but  to  them  tliat 
believe  not."  The  effect  produced  on  this  oc- 
casion (see  V.  12)  shows  how  well  suited  such 
a  miracle  was  to  impress  the  minds  of  those 
who  witnessed  it.  A  miracle,  too,  in  this  form, 
may  have  had  a  symbolic  import  which  added 
to  its  significancy.  It  was  necessary  that  even 
the  apostles  should  be  led  to  entertain  more  en- 
larged views  respecting  the  comprehensive  de- 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


43 


.">  And  there  were  dwelling  at  Jerusalem  Jews,  de- 
vout men,  out  of  every  nation  under  heaven. 

()  Now  when  this  was  noised  abroad,  the  multitude 
came  together,  and  were  confounded,  because  that 
every  man  heard  them  speak  in  his  own  language. 


5     Now  there  were  dwelling  at  Jerusalem  Jews,  de- 
t)  voul  men,  from  every  nation  under  lieaven      And 
when  this  sound  was  heard,  the  multitude  came  to- 
gether, and   were  confounded,  because  that  every 
man   heard   them   speaking  m   his  own   language. 


sign  of  the  New  Dispensation.  This  sudden 
possession  of  an  ability  to  proclaim  the  salva- 
tion of  Christ  to  men  of  all  nations  (even  if 
we  allow  that  it  was  not  permanent)  was  adapt- 
ed to  recall  their  minds  powerfully  to  the  last 
command  of  the  Saviour,  and  to  make  them 
feel  that  it  was  their  mission  to  publish  his 
name  to  the  ends  of  the  earth.  Such  a  mode 
of  conveying  instruction  to  them  was  not  more 
indirect  than  that  employed  in  the  vision  of 
Peter  (io:9,  «j.),  which  was  intended  to  teach 
the  same  truth.  But  we  are  not  left  to  argue 
the  question  on  grounds  of  this  natixre :  the 
testimony  of  Luke  is  explicit  and  decisive. 
Even  critics  who  would  explain  away  the 
reality  of  the  miracle  admit  that  it  was  the 
writer's  intention  to  record  a  miracle.  Thus 
Meyer  says:  "The  other  tongues  are  to  be 
considered,  according  to  the  text,  as  absolutely 
nothing  else  than  languages  which  were  differ- 
ent from  the  native  language  of  the  speakers. 
They  were  Galileans,  and  spoke  now  Parthian, 
Median,  Persian,  etc.,  therefore  foreign  lan- 
guages, and  those  too — the  point  precisely 
wherein  appeared  the  wonderful  effect  of  the 
Spirit — unacquired  languages  (new  tongues  in 
Mark  16  :  17) — i.  e.  not  previously  learned  by 
them.  Accordingly,  the  text  itself  defines  the 
sense  of  tongues  as  that  of  languages,  and 
excludes  as  impossible  the  other  exjjlanations, 
different  from  this,  which  some  have  attempted 
to  impose  on  the  word." — According  as,  in 
respect  to  manner,  since  the  languages  were 
diverse. 

5-13.    IMPRESSION   OF   THE  MIRACLE 
ON  THE  MULTITUDE. 

5.  «e,  now,  transitive. — Dwelling,  whether 
for  a  season  or  permanently  ;  hence  more  gen- 
eral than  sojourning  (v.  10;  17  :  21),  but  not 
excluding  the  sojourners  there.  No  doubt 
many  of  the  Jews  in  question  liad  fixed  their 
abode  at  Jerusalem,  as  it  was  always  an  object 
of  desire  with  those  of  them  who  lived  in 
foreign  countries  to  return  and  spend  tlie  close 
of  life  in  the  land  of  their  fathers.  The  preva- 
lent belief  that  the  epoch  had  now  arrived 
when  the  promised  Messiah  was  about  to  ap- 
pear must  have  given  increased  activity  to  that 
desire.  The  writer  mentions  this  class  of  Jews  \ 
in  distinction  from  the  native  inhabitants,  be-  ' 
cause  the  narrative  which  follows  rejiresents 
that  many  were  present  who  understood  dif-  j 


ferent  languages.  The  number  of  these  stran- 
gers was  tlie  greater  on  account  of  the  festival 
which  occurred  at  that  time. — Devout,  God- 
fearing. (See  8:2;  Luke  2  :  25.)  This  sense  is 
peculiar  to  the  Hellenistic  Greek.  The  term  is 
applied  to  those  only  whose  piety  was  of  the 
Old-Testament  type. — Of  those— i.  e.  being — 
under  heaven.  The  strong  expression  here 
is  a  phrase  signifying  froiu  many  and  distant 
la)uls.  A  phrase  of  this  kind  has  an  aggregate 
sense,  which  is  the  true  one,  while  that  deduced 
from  the  import  of  the  separate  words  is  a  false 
sense. 

6.  When  this  was  noised  abroad  (yei'Ofxci/T); 
.  .  .  rauTT)?).  These  wortis  are  obscure.  The 
princii)al  interpretations  are  the  following:  (1) 
i^iof^s  Taunjs  (this  voice  or  sound)  refers  to  other 
tongues  in  v.  4,  and  the  implication  is  that 
the  voices  of  those  who  spoke  were  so  loud 
as  to  be  heard  at  a  distance,  and  in  this  way 
were  the  occasion  of  drawing  together  the  mul- 
titude. This  interpretation  secures  to  this  a 
near  antecedent,  but  has  against  it  that  voice 
is  singular,  and  not  plural,  and  that  the  parti- 
ciple is  hardly  congruous  with  the  noun  in  that 
sense.  Neander,  who  adopts  this  view,  regards 
voice  as  a  collective  term.  (2)  4>wvii  has  been 
taken  as  synonymous  with  ^w'i :  now  when 
this  report  arose — i.  c.  the  rejiort  concerning 
this.  The  meaning  is  good,  but  opposed  to 
the  usage  of  the  noun,  while  it  puts  this  in 
effect  for  concerning  this,  which  is  a  hard  con- 
struction. Many  of  the  older  critics  and  the 
authors  of  nearly  all  the  E.  Vv.  understood  the 
expression  in  this  way.  (3)  We  may  regard 
voice  as  repeating  the  idea  of  sound  in  v. 
2:  now  luhen  this  sound — that  of  the  descend- 
ing Spirit  —  occurred.  (For  that  signification 
of  <f>o)v^,  comp.  John  3:8;  Rev.  1  :  15  ;  9  : !) ; 
14  :  2,  etc. )  ytvonivrit  appears  to  answer  to  tye'rero 
in  V.  2,  and  favoi-s  this  explanation.  The  ob- 
jection to  it  is  that  this  forsakes  the  nearer 
for  a  remoter  antecedent ;  but  that  may  occur 
if  the  latter  be  more  prominent,  so  as  to  take 
the  lead  in  the  writer's  mind.  (See  W.  ^  23.  1.) 
This  meaning  agrees  with  the  context.  The 
participial  clause  here  may  involve  the  idea  of 
cause  as  well  as  time  ;  and  we  may  understand, 
therefore,  that  the  sound  in  question  was  audi- 
ble beyond  the  house  where  the  disciples  were 
assembled — that  it  arrested  the  attention  of 
those  abroad,  and   led  them   to   seek  out  the 


44 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


7  And  they  were  all  amazed  and  marvelled,  saying 
one  to  another,  Behold,  are  not  all  these  which  speak 
"Ualilteans  ? 

8  And  how  hear  we  every  man  in  our  own  tongue, 
wherein  we  were  born  ? 

9  Parthians,  and  Medes,  and  Elamites,  and  the  dwell- 
ers in  Mesopotamia,  and  in  Judoea,  and  Cappadocia,  in 
Pontus,  and  Asia, 

lu  Phrygia,  and  Pamphylia,  in  Egypt,  and  in  the 


7  And  they  were  all  amazed  and  marvelled,  saying, 
Behold,   are   not  all    these   who   speak   Oalilieans  / 

8  And  how  hear  we,  every  man  in  our  own  language, 

9  wherein  we  were  born?  Parthians  and  Medes  and 
Elamites,  and  the  dwellers  in  Mesopotamia,  in  Ju- 

10  dtea  and  Cappadocia,  in  I^ontus  and  Asia,  in  i^hrygla 
and  Pamphylia,  in  Egypt  and  the  parts  of  Libya 
about  Cyrene,  and  sojourners  from  Kome,  botli  Jews 


scene  of  the  wonder.  So  Hess,'  Schrader, 
Meyer,  De  Wette,  Alford,  and  others.  The 
house  (v.  2)  may  have  been  on  one  of  the  ave- 
nues to  the  temple,  thronged  at  this  time  by  a 
crowd  of  early  worshippers  (v.  15). — Were 
hearing.  (Imperf.) — Every  alone  (v.  8)  or 
with  one  distributes  often  a  plural  subject. 
(See  14  :  29  ;  Matt.  18  :  35  ;  John  16  :  32.  K. 
g  266.  3.) — iSicf,  his  own,  usually  emphatic. 
(W.  §  22.  7.)— Dialect  =  tongue.  (See  v.  11.) 
The  term  in  its  narrower  sense  here  would  be 
too  narrow ;  for,  though  some  of  the  languages 
differed  only  as  dialects,  it  was  not  true  of  all 
of  them. — Them  speak.  We  are  not  to  un- 
derstand by  this  that  they  all  sjioke  in  the  lan- 
guages enumerated,  but  that  one  of  them  em- 
ployed this,  and  another  that.  In  so  brief  a 
narrative  the  writer  must  have  passed  over 
various  particulars  of  the  transaction.  We 
may  suppose  that  at  this  time  the  apostles 
had  left  the  room  where  they  assembled  at 
first,  and  had  gone  forth  to  the  crowd  col- 
lected in  the  vicinity. 

7.  Not,  which  leads  the  sentence,  belongs 
properly  to  are.  (Comp.  7  :  48.  W.  §  61.  4.)— 
AH  (T.  R.)  was  inserted  here  probably  from 
v.  12. — These,  emphatic. — Galileans.  They 
were  known  as  Galileans,  because  they  were 
known  as  the  disciples  of  Christ.  Had  the 
different  speakers  belonged  to  so  many  differ- 
ent countries,  the  wonder  would  have  been  di- 
minished or  removed. 

8.  How,  since  they  were  all  Galileans.  The 
object  of  hear  follows  in  v.  11 ;  but,  the  con- 
nection having  been  so  long  suspended,  the 
verb  is  there  repeated.  Every,  a.s  in  v.  6. — 
In  which  we  were  born.  This  remark  ex- 
cludes the  possibility  of  Luke's  meaning  that 
the  tongues  were  merely  an  ecstatic  or  impas- 
sioned style  of  discourse. 

9.  In  the  enumeration  of  the  countries  named 
in  this  verse  and  the  next  the  writer  proceeds 
from  the  north-east  to  the  west  and  south. 
Parthians.  Parthia  was  on  the  north-east  of 
Media  and  Hyrcania  and  north  of  Aria,  sur- 
rounded   entirely    by    mountains.  —  Medes. 


Media  bordered  north  on  the  Caspian  Sea, 
west  on  Armenia,  east  on  Hyrcania,  and  south 
on  Persia.  Elamites— »'.  e.  the  inhabitants 
of  Elymais  or  Elam,  which  v/as  east  of  the 
Tigris,  north  of  Susiana  (annexed  to  it  in  Dan. 
8  :  2),  and  south  o*"  Media,  of  which  Ptolemy 
makes  it  a  part.— Judea.  It  has  excited  the 
surprise  of  some  that  Judea  should  be  men- 
tioned in  this  catalogue,  because,  it  is  said,  no 
part  of  the  wonder  consisted  in  hearing  Ara- 
maean at  Jerusalem.  But  we  need  not  view 
the  writer's  design  in  that  light.  It  was  rather 
to  inform  us  in  how  many  languages  the  dis- 
ciples addressed  the  multitude  on  this  occasion ; 
and  as,  after  all,  the  native  Jews  formed  the 
greater  part  of  the  assembly,  the  account  would 
have  been  deficient  without  mentioning  Judea. 
It  has  been  proposed  to  alter  the  text  to  Idu- 
mea,  but  there  is  no  authority  for  this. — The 
catalogue  now  passes  from  Capi)adocia  and  Pon- 
tus, on  the  east  and  north-east,  to  the  extreme 
west  of  Asia  Minor.  Asia.  Phrygia  being  ex- 
cluded here,  Kuinoel  and  others  have  supposed 
Asia  to  be  the  same  as  Ionia ;  but  Winer  says 
it  cannot  be  shown  that  in  the  Roman  age 
Ionia  alone  was  called  Asia.  He  thinks,  with 
an  appeal- to  Pliny,  that  we  are  to  understand 
it  as  embracing  Mysia,  Lydia,  and  Caria,  with 
Ephesus  as  the  principal  city.  (See  his  Rcalw., 
vol.  i.  p.  96.)  Others,  as  Bottger,^  whom  De 
Wette  follows,  understand  Mysia,  vEolis,  Ionia, 
Lydia,  Caria.  All  admit  that  the  term  denoted 
not  so  much  a  definite  region  as  a  jurisdiction, 
the  limits  of  which  varied  from  time  to  time 
according  to  the  plan  of  government  which  the 
Romans  adopted  for  their  Asiatic  jarovinces. 

10.  Phrygia  was  separated  by  the  Taurus 
from  Pisidia  on  the  south,  with  Bithynia  on 
the  north,  Caria,  Lydia,  and  Mysia  on  the  west, 
Galatia,  Cappadocia,  and  Lycaonia  on  the  east. 
— Pamphylia  was  on  the  Mediterranean,  ad- 
jacent on  other  sides  to  Cilicia,  Caria,  and  Pi- 
sidia.— The  parts  of  Libya  toward  Cy- 
rene. Libya  was  an  extensive  region  on  tlie 
west  of  Egypt.  One  of  the  principal  cities  there 
was  Cyrene  (now  Grenna),  on  the  sea,  origi- 


1  Geschichle  nnd  Sc.kriflen  der  Apostel  Jesii,  vol.  i.  p.  24  (Zurich,  1820). 
*  Hchauvlalz  der  Wirksamkeil  des  Apostels  Paulus,  u.  s.  w.,  p.  23. 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


45 


parts  of  Libya  about  Cyrene,  and  strangers  of  Rome, 
Jews  and  proselytes, 

11  Cretes  and  Arabians,  we  do  hear  them  speak  in 
our  tongues  the  wonderful  works  of  (iod. 

12  And  they  were  all  amazed,  and  were  in  doubt, 
saying  one  to  another,  What  meaneth  this? 

13  Others  mocking  said,  These  men  are  full  of  new 
wine. 


Hand  proselytes,  Cretans  and  Arabians,  we  do  hear 
them  speaking  in  our  tongues  the  mighty  works  of 

12  (iod.     .Vnd   they   were  all   amazed,   and   were   jier- 
ple.ved,  saying  one  to  another,  What  meaneth  this? 

13  But  others  mocking  said.  They  are  tilled  with  new 
wine. 


nally  aGreek  colony,  but  where  at  this  time  the 
Jews  constituted  a  fourth  pail  of  the  popula- 
tion. (See  Jos.,  Antt.,  14.  7.  2.)  It  was  the 
native  place  of  Simon,  who  bore  the  Saviour's 
cross  to  Golgotha  (Luke  23  :  26).  Tiiis  part  of 
Africa  comes  into  view  in  making  the  voyage 
from  Malta  to  Ale.xandria.— The  Romans  so- 
journing at  Jerusalem.  (Comp.  17  :  21.) — Both 
Jews  and  proselytes  a  few  critics  restrict  to 
Romans  merely,  but  most  (De  Wet.,  Mey., 
Wiesl.)  refer  them  to  all  the  preceding  nouns. 
The  Jews  generally  adopted  the  languages  of 
the  countries  wliere  tliey  resided.  The  prose- 
lytes were  originally  heathen  who  had  em- 
braced Judaism.  The  words  sustain  the  same 
grammatical  relation  to  Cretans  and  Ara- 
bians, or,  at  all  events,  are  to  be  repeated 
after  them..  The  last  two  names  follow  as  an 
after-thought,  in  order  to  complete  the  list. 
[Proselytes,  or  Gentile  converts  to  Judaism,  were 
evidently  somewhat  numerous  at  this  time. 
Many  of  them  remained  uncircumcised,  and 
were  called  "  proselytes  of  the  gate."  These, 
like  Cornelius,  were  worshippers  of  the  true 
God  and  well  prei)ared  to  listen  to  the  gospel 
of  his  grace.  Others  were  circumcised  and  al- 
lowed to  take  part  in  the  great  religious  festi- 
vals, as  well  as  in  the  daily  temple-service. 
At  a  later  period  a  Gentile  became  a  "proselyte 
of  righteousness"  by  circumcision,  baptism, 
and  an  offering  (Corban).  Only  the  last  two 
ceremonies  were  required  of  women.  The  bap- 
tism of  men  is  thus  described :  "  When  the 
wound  [of  circumcision]  was  healed,  he  was 
stripped  of  all  his  clothes,  in  tlie  presence  of 
three  witnesses  who  had  acted  as  his  teachers, 
and  who  now  acted  as  his  sponsors,  the '  fathers ' 
of  the  proselyte  (Ketubh.  xi.,  Erubh.  xv.  1),  and 
led  into  the  taitk  or  pool.  As  he  stood  there, 
up  to  his  neck  in  water,  they  repeated  the  great 
commandments  of  the  law.  These  he  promised 
aiid  vowed  to  keep;  and  then,  with  an  accom- 
panying benediction,  he  plunged  under  the 
water.  To  leave  one  handbreadth  of  liis  body 
unsubmerged  would  have  vitiated  the  wliole 
rite."  (Smith's  Diet,  of  the  Bible,  "Proselytes"). 
This,  however,  appears  to  have  been  a  later 
usage.  There  is  no  sufficient  evidence  that 
proselyte  baptism  was  introduced  as  early  as 
the  time  of  Christ.    (See  Baptist  Quarterly,  1 872, 


pp.  301-.332,  "Jewish  Proselyte  Baptism,"  by 
Dr.  Toy.)— A.  H.] 

11.  The  declarative  form  whicli  the  Englisli 
Version  assigns  to  the  sentence  here  (we  do 
hear)  is  incorrect.  The  question  extends  to 
of  God.  (See  on  v.  8.)  [Tischendorf,  Trcgelles, 
Meyer,  and  others  agree  with  Dr.  Hackett  in 
making  the  question  begiiniing  with  v.  8  in- 
clude this  verse;  but  Westcott  and  Hort  and 
the  Anglo-American  Revisers  suppose  that  tlie 
question  embraces  only  v.  8,  wliile  this  verse  is 
declarative.  It  seems  impossible  to  assign  any 
conclusive  reason  for  either  view  in  preference 
to  the  other.  The  meaning  is  the  same  with 
the  one  as  with  the  otlier.  A  nice  rhet(jrical 
sense  may  lead  to  preference. — A.  H.] — ^The 
great  things  of  God,  done  by  him  through 
Christ  for  tlie  salvation  of  men.  (Comp.  v. 
38.) 

12.  Amazed  describes  their  astonishment 
at  the  occurrence  in  general;  in  doubt,  their 
perplexity  at  l)eiiig  unable  to  account  for  it. — 
What  may  this  perhaps  mean?  iv  attaches 
a  tacit  condition  to  the  inquiry,  if,  as  we  think, 
it  must  import  something.  (See  W.  ?  42.  1 ; 
K.  ^  2G0.  4.)  This  is  the  question  of  the  more 
serious  party.  The  hesitating  form  of  it  indi- 
cates the  partial  conviction  which  the  miracle 
had  wrought  in  tlicir  minds. 

13.  Others  .  .  .  said.  Among  those  who 
scoffed  may  have  been  some  of  the  native  in- 
habitants of  the  city,  who,  not  understanding 
the  foreign  languages  spoken,  regarded  the  dis- 
course of  the  aj>ostles  as  senseless  because  it 
was  unintelligible  to  tliem. — XAeuo^oi-Tes  is  not 
so  well  supported  as  aiaxAeui^orrf?.  and  expresses 
the  idea  less  forcibly.  Calvin  :  "  Nihil  tam  ad- 
mirabile  esse  potest,  qtiod  non  in  ludibrium  ver- 
tant,  qui  nulla  Dei  cura  tanguntur." — on,  that^ 
declarative. — SAveet  wine  iyXevKov^),  not  new, 
as  in  the  E.  V.  after  all  the  earlier  E.  Vv.  The 
Pentecost  fell  in  June,  and  the  first  vintage  did 
not  occur  till  August.  It  is  true  //leiikos  desig- 
nated properly  tlie  sweet,  unfermcnted  juice  of 
the  grape,  but  it  was  applied  also  to  old  wine 
preserved  in  its  original  state.  Tlie  ancients 
had  various  ways  of  arresting  fermentation. 
One  of  them,  in  use  among  the  Greeks  and 
Romans,  was  this :  "An  amphora  was  tikon 
and  coated  with  pitch  witliin  and  without;  it 


46 


THE  ACTS. 


rciT.  II. 


14  1[  But  Peter,  standing  up  with  the  eleven,  lifted 
up  his  voice,  and  said  unto  them,  Ye  men  of  .ludtea, 
and  all  yi  that  dwell  at  Jerusalem,  be  this  known  unto 
you,  and  hearken  to  my  words : 

15  For  these  are  not  drunken,  as  ye  suppose,  "seeing 
it  is  hut  the  third  hour  of  the  day. 

16  But  this  is  that  which  was  spoken  by  the  prophet 
Joel; 

17  'And  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  last  days,  saith 
God,  "I  will  pour  out  of  my  Spirit  upon  all  flesh:  and 
your  sons  and  <iyour  daughters  shall  prophesy,  and 
your  young  men  shall  see  visions,  and  your  old  men 
shall  dream  dreams : 


14  But  Peter,  standing  up  with  the  eleven,  lifted  up 
his  voice,  and  spake  forth  unto  them,  .\(ii/ini),  Ye  men 
of  Judiea,  and  all  ye  that  dwell  at  ..erusaleui,  be  this 

15  known  unto  you,  and  give  ear  unto  my  words.  I  or 
these  are  not  drunken,  as  ye  sujipu^e ;  seeing  it  is  hul 

16  the  third  hour  of  the  day ;  but  this  is  that  which  hath 
been  spoken  through  the  prophet  Joel ; 

17  And  it  shall  be  in  the  last  days,  saith  God, 

I  will  pour  forth  of  my  Spirit  upon  all  flesh: 
And  your  sons  and  your  daughters  shall  proph- 
esy, 
And  your  young  men  shall  see  visions, 
And  your  old  men  shall  dream  dreams: 


ol  Thess.  5:7...  5  Isa.  44:3;  Ezek.  11  :  19;  .16:  27;  Joel  2  :  28,  29;  Zech.  12  :  10 ;  John  7  :  38 cch.  10  :  45..  ..d  ch.  21  :  9. 


was  filled  with  mustum  lixivium — i.e.  the  juice 
before  the  grapes  had  been  fully  trodden — and 
corked  so  as  to  be  iierfectly  air-tight.  It  was 
then  immersed  in  a  tank  of  cold  fresh  water 
or  buried  in  wet  sand,  and  allowed  to  remain 
for  six  weeks  or  two  months.  The  contents, 
after  this  process,  were  found  to  remain  un- 
changed for  a  year,  and  hence  the  name  a^l 
yAevKos — i.  e.  semper  mustum  "  {Diet,  of  Aiitt., 
art.  "  Vinum  "^).  Jahn  says  that  sweet  wine 
was  produced  also  from  dried  grapes  by  soak- 
ing them  in  old  wine  and  then  pressing  them 
a  second  time.  (See  his  Archxol.,  g  69.)  This 
species  of  wine  was  very  intoxicating. 

14-36.  THE  DISCOURSE  OF  PETER. 

The  address  embraces  the  following  points, 
though  interwoven  somewhat  in  tlie  discus- 
sion :  first,  defence  of  the  character  of  the  apos- 
tles (14,  15) ;  secondly,  the  miracle  explained  as 
a  fulfilment  of  prophecy  (i«-2i) ;  thirdli),  this 
effusion  of  the  Spirit  an  act  of  the  crucified 
but  now  exalted  Jesus  (30-33) ;  and  fourthly,  his 
claim  to  be  acknowledged  as  the  true  Messiah 

(22-29  and  34-36). 

14.  With  the  eleven — i.  e.  in  their  name, 
and  with  their  concurrence  in  what  he  said. 
As  the  multitude  was  so  great,  it  is  not  improb- 
able that  some  of  the  other  apostles  addressed 
different  groups  of  them  at  the  same  time. 
(See  on  v.  6.)  On  such  an  occasion  they  would 
all  naturally  pursue  a  very  similar  train  of  re- 
mark.— Men  of  Judea  are  the  Jews  born  in 
Jerusalem ;  ye  that  dwell  are  the  foreign 
Jews  and  Jewish  converts.  (See  on  v.  5.) — 
Hearken  =  Heb.  hattzen,  a  Hellenistic  word. 

15.  For  justifies  the  call  to  attention.  It 
brings  forward  a  refutation  of  the  charge  which 
had  been  made  against  them. — These  whom 
they  had  heard  speak  (see  v.  4,  sq.),  and  who 
were  then  present ;  not  the  eleven  merely  with 
Peter  (Alf.). — The  third  hour — i.  e.  about  nine 
o'clock  A.M.,  according  to  our  time.  This  was 
the  first  hour  of  public  prayer,  at  which  time 
the  morning  sacrifice  was  offered  in  the  temple. 


During  their  festivals  the  Jews  considered  it 
unlawful  to  take  food  earlier  than  this ;  still 
more,  to  drink  wine.  (See  Light.,  Hot.  Hebr., 
ad  loc.)  The  other  hours  of  prayer  were  the 
sixth  (10 : 4)  and  the  ninth  (3:i). 

16.  But  this  (which  you  witness)  is  that 
which  was  said.  The  Greek  identifies  the 
prophecy  with  its  fulfilment.— Through  the 
prophet,  because  he  was  the  messenger,  not 
the  author  of  the  message.  The  expression 
recognizes  the  divine  origin  of  the  book  which 
bears  his  name.  (See  the  note  on  1  :  16.) — 
Tischendorf  has  no  adequate  reason  for  omit- 
ting Joel  after  prophet.  [It  is  retained  in  his 
8th  ed.  as  well  as  by  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort, 
Revisers'  text,  and  fully  justified  by  K  A  B  C 
E  I  P.— A.  H.]. 

17.  The  citation  which  follows,  from  Joel  3  ; 
1-5  (2  :  28-32  in  E.  V.),  runs  for  the  most  part 
in  the  words  of  the  Seventy.  The  two  or  three 
verbal  deviations  from  the  Hebrew  serve  either 
to  unfold  more  distinctly  the  sense  of  the  orig- 
inal passage  or  to  enforce  it.  It  is  the  object  of 
the  prophecy  to  characterize  the  Messianic  Dis- 
pensation under  its  two  great  aspects^that  of 
mercy,  and  that  of  judgment.  To  those  who 
believe,  the  gospel  is  "a  savor  of  life  unto  life;" 
but  to  those  who  disbelieve,  it  is  "a  savor  of 
death  unto  death."  (See  2  Cor.  2  :  16.)  Under 
its  one  aspect  it  was  to  be  distinguished  by  the 
copious  outpouring  of  the  Divine  Spirit  on 
those  who  should  acknowledge  Christ;  and 
under  its  other  aspect  it  was  to  be  distinguished 
by  the  signal  punishment  awaiting  those  who 
should  disown  his  authority  and  reject  him. — 
And  it  shall  come  to  pass, etc.,  stands  for  Heb. 
v?hayah  ah&r'e  ken,  rendered  more  closely  in  the 
Septuagint  by  and  it  shall  be  after  these 
things.  Peter's  expression  denotes  always  in 
the  New  Testament  the  age  of  the  Messiah, 
which  the  Scriptures  represent  as  the  world's 
last  great  moral  epoch.  The  prophet  designates 
the  same  period  under  a  more  general  phra.se. 
Again,  Peter  places  saith  Ciiod  at  the  begin- 


1  Dictionary  of  Greek  and  Roman  Antiguiliei,  edited  by  W.  Smith,  London.    The  abbreviation  in  the  text  refers 
always  to  this  work. 


(11.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


47 


18  And  on  my  servants  and  on  my  handmaidens  I 
will  pour  out  ill  those  days  of  my  Spirit;  "and  they 
snail  prophesy : 

I'.l  'And  I  will  shew  wonders  in  heaven  above,  and 
signs  in  the  earth  beneath ;  blood,  and  tire,  and  vapor 
of  swolce : 


18  Yea  and  on  my  'servants  and  on  my  -hand  maid- 

ens in  tliose  days 
Will  I  pour  forth  of  my  Spirit;  and  they  shall 
prophesy. 

19  And  I  will  shew  wonders  in  the  heaven  above, 
And  signs  on  the  earth  beneath  ; 

lilood,  and  tire,  and  vapor  of  smoke: 


ooh.  21  :  4,  9,  10;  1  Cor.  12  :  10,  28;  U:  1,  etc.... 6  Joel  2  :  30,  31.- 


-1  Gr.  bondmen 2  Or.  bondmatdens. 


ning  of  the  declaration ;  the  prophet,  at  the 
close  of  it.  The  position  of  the  words  here 
fixes  attention  at  once  ui)on  the  source  of  the 
prophecy,  and  prepares  the  mind  to  listen  to  it 
as  God's  utterance.— Will  pour  out  is  future,  a 
later  Greek  form.  (W.  ?  13  :  3 ;  K.  g  154.  R.  1.) 
— And  (consequential)  thus  they  shall 
prophesy.  Tliis  verb  in  tlie  New  Testament 
signities  not  merely  to  foretell  future  events, 
but  to  communicate  religious  truth  in  general 
under  a  divine  inspiration.  It  corresponds  in 
this  use  to  nlbhmo  in  the  original  passage. 
(See  Gesen.,  Lex.,  s.  v.)  The  order  of  the  next 
two  clauses  in  the  Hebrew  and  Septuagint  is 
the  reverse  of  that  adopted  here — viz.  first, 
your  old  men  shall  dream  dreams,  then 
your  young  men  .  .  .  see  visions.  Heng- 
stenbergi  suggests  that  the  change  may  have 
been  intentional,  in  order  to  place  the  youth 
with  the  sons  and  daughters  and  to  assign  to 
the  aged  a  place  of  honor. — Shall  dream 
with  dreams.  The  dative,  as  in  4  :  17 ;  23  : 
24.  (W.  ^  54.  3.)  Some  authorities  have 
ci/uirfta,  the  ace.  dreams,  which  was  proba- 
bly substitutcil  for  the  other  as  an  easier  con- 
struction. 

18.  (coiye  =  Heb.  vfgam  annexes  an  emphatic 
addition:  and  even  (Hart.,  Partik.,  xo\.  i.  p. 
396). — My,  wliicli  is  wanting  in  the  Hebrew,  is 
retained  here  from  the  Septuagint.  The  prophet 
declares  that  no  condition  of  men,  however 
ignoble,  would  exclude  them  from  the  promise. 
The  apostle  cites  the  prophet  to  that  effect,  but 
takes  occasion  from  the  language — my  ser- 
vants, which  describes  their  degradation  in  the 
eyes  of  men — to  suggest  by  way  of  contrast 
their  exalted  relationship  to  God.  Bengel : 
"  Servi  secundum  camera  .  .  .  iidem  .servi 
Dei"  ("servants  according  to  the  flesh  .  .  .  also 
servants  of  God").  Similar  to  this  is  the  lan- 
guage of  Paul  in  1  Cor.  7  :  22 :  "  For  he  that  is 
called  in  the  Lord,  hcing  a  servant,  is  the  Lord's 
fVeeman ;  likewise  also  he  that  is  called,  heimj 
free,  is  Christ's  servant."  If  we  cast  the  eye 
back  over  this  and  the  preceding  verse,  it  will 
be  seen  that  the  effusion  of  the  Spirit  was  to  be 
universal  as  to  the  classes  of  persons  that  were 


to  participate  in  it ;  in  other  words,  it  was  to  be 
without  distinction  of  sex,  age,  or  rank. — The 
modes  of  divine  revelation  and  of  the  Spirit's 
operation  whicii  are  specified  in  this  pas.sage 
were  among  the  more  extraordinary  to  which 
the  Hebrews  were  accustomed  under  the  ancient 
Economy.  These,  after  having  been  suspended 
for  so  long  a  time,  were  now,  at  the  opening  of 
the  Christian  Dispensation,  renewed  in  more 
than  their  former  power.  The  prophecy  re- 
lates chiefly,  I  think,  to  these  special  commu- 
nications of  the  Spirit,  which  were  granted  to 
the  first  Christians.  The  terms  of  the  proph- 
ecy direct  us  naturally  to  something  out  of  the 
ordinary  course ;  and  when  we  add  to  this  that 
the  facts  recorded  in  the  Acts  and  the  Ei)istles 
sustain  fully  that  view  of  the  language,  it  must 
appear  arbitrary,  as  well  as  unnecessary,  to  re- 
ject such  an  interpretation.  Yet  the  propliecy 
has  indirectly  a  wider  scope.  It  portrays  in 
reality  th«  character  of  the  entire  dispensation. 
Those  special  manifestations  of  the  Spirit  at  the 
beginning  marked  the  Economy  as  one  that  was 
to  be  eminently  distinguished  by  the  Spirit's 
agency.  They  were  a  pledge  that  those  in  all 
ages  who  embrace  the  gospel  should  equal  the 
most  favored  of  God's  ancient  people ;  they  en- 
joy a  clearer  revelation,  are  enlightened,  sanc- 
tified, by  a  Spirit  more  freely  imparted,  may 
rise  to  the  same  or  higher  religiotis  consolations 
and  attainments. 

19.  The  apostle  now  holds  up  to  ■s'iew  the 
other  side  of  the  subject.  He  adduces  the  part 
of  the  prophecy  which  foretells  the  doom  of 
those  who  reject  Christ  and  spurn  his  salvatior. 
Having  appealed  to  the  hopes,  the  apostle  turns 
here  to  address  himself  to  the  fears,  of  men  ; 
he  would  persuade  them  by  every  motive  t<i 
escape  the  punishment  which  awaits  the  unbe- 
lieving and  disobedient.  (See  vs.  40  and  43,  be- 
low.) In  the  interjiretation  of  the  pa.ssage  before 
us,  I  follow  those  who  understand  it  as  having 
primary  reference  to  the  calamities  which  God 
inflicted  on  the  Jews  in  connection  with  the 
overthrow  of  Jerusalem  and  the  destruction  of 
the  Jewish  state  and  nation.  The  re;isons  for 
this  opinion  are  briefly  these:  (1)  The  law  of 


1  Chriffniogy  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  a  Oimmentary  on  the  Predictions  of  the  Messiah  by  the  Prophets,  vol  iii.  p.  140 
(Dr.  Keith's  translation). 


48 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


20  "The  sun  shall  be  turned  into  darkness,  and  the 
moon  into  blood,  before  that  great  and  notable  day  of 
the  Lord  come : 

21  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  that  'whosoever  shall 
call  on  the  name  of  the  Lord  shall  be  saved. 


20  The  sun  shall  be  turned  into  darkness, 
And  the  moon  into  blood, 

Before  the  day  ot  the  Lord  come, 
That  great  and  notable  i/c// : 

21  And  it  shall  be,  that  whosoever  shall  call  on  the 

name  of  the  Lord  shall  be  saved. 


a  Matt.  24  :  29  :  Mark  13  :  24 ;  Luke  21  :  25 h  Rom.  10  :  13. 


correspondence  would  lead  us  to  apply  this  part 
of  the  prophecy  to  the  same  period  to  which 
the  other  part  has  been  applied — i.  e.  to  the 
early  times  of  the  gospel.  (2)  The  expression, 
the  day  of  the  Lord,  in  v.  20,  according  to  a 
very  common  use  in  the  Hebrew  prophets,  de- 
notes a  day  when  God  comes  to  make  known 
his  power  in  the  punishment  of  his  enemies — 
a  day  of  the  signal  display  of  his  vengeance  for 
the  rejection  of  long-continued  mercies  and  the 
commission  of  aggravated  sins.  The  subversion 
of  the  Jewish  state  wa.s  such  an  occasion.  It 
appropriates  fully  every  trait  of  that  significant 
designation.  (3)  Part  of  the  language  here  co- 
incides almost  verbally  with  that  in  ISIatt.  24  : 
29 ;  and  if  the  language  there,  as  understood  by 
most  interpreters,  describes  the  downfall  of  the 
Jewish  state,^  we  may  infer  from  the  similarity 
that  the  subject  of  discourse  is  the  same  in  both 
places.  (4)  The  entire  phraseology,  when  con- 
strued according  to  the  laws  of  prophetic  lan- 
guage, is  strikingly  appropriate  to  represent  the 
unsurpassed  horrors  and  distress  which  attended 
the  siege  and  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  and  to 
announce  the  extinction  of  the  Jewish  power  and 
of  the  glory  of  the  Jewish  worship  which  that 
catastrophe  involved.  Yet  here  too  (see  on  v. 
18)  we  are  to  recognize  the  wider  scope  of  the 
prophecy.  The  destruction  of  the  Jews  is  held 
forth  by  the  apostle  as  a  type  of  the  destruction 
which  is  to  come  upon  every  rejecter  of  the 
gospel.  (See  v.  21.)  For  the  sake  of  contrast, 
Peter  inserts  the  words  above,  signs,  below, 
which  are  not  in  the  Hebrew.  Wonders  in 
heaven,  signs  on  the  earth,  means  prodigies, 
celestial  and  terrestrial,  such  as  may  appear  in 
the  air  or  on  the  earth  ;  in  other  words,  prodigies 
of  every  sort  and  of  the  most  portentous  kind. 
The  idea  is  that  calamities  were  to  ensue  equal 
in  severity  and  magnitude  to  those  which  the 
most  fearful  portents  are  supposed  to  announce. 
The  mode  of  speaking  is  founded  on  the  popu- 
lar idea  that  when  great  events  are  about  to  oc- 
cur wonderful  phenomena  foretoken  their  ap- 
proach. Hence  what  tlie  prophet  would  affirm 
is  that  disasters  and  judgments  were  coming 
such  as  men  are  accustomed  to  associate  with 
the  most  terrific  auguries ;  but  he  does  not  mean 


necessarily  that  the  auguries  themselves  were  to 
be  expected,  or  decide  whether  tlie  popular  be- 
lief on  the  subject  was  true  or  false. — Blood, 
fire,  vapor  of  smoke,  stand  in   apposition 
with  wonders  and  signs,  and  sliow  in  what 
they   consisted.      Blood,  perhaps,    rained  on 
the  earth  (De  Wet.),  or  as  in  Egypt  (Ex.  7 :  i7),  in- 
fecting the  streams  and  rivers  (Hng.) ;  fire — 
i.  e.  appearances  of  it  in  the  air — and  vapor 
of  smoke,  dense  smoke,  hence  =  Hob.  te^aeroth 
ashan;  pillars,  or  clouds,  of  smoke,  which 
darken  the  heavens  and  earth.    Many  have  sup- 
posed these  terms  to  signify  directly  slaughter 
and  conflagration,  but  tlicir  grammatical  rela- 
tion to  wonders  and  signs  decides  that  they 
are  the  portents  themselves,  not  tlie  calamities 
I  portended.    That  view,  too,  confounds  the  day 
of  the  Lord  with  the  precursors  of  tlie  day. 
I      20.    The     sun     shall     be    turned    into 
I  darkness.     Its  light  shall  be  witiidrawn  ;  the 
i  heavens  shall  become  black.     A  daj'  is  at  hand 
;  which  will  be  one  of  thick  gloom,  of  sadness 
j  and  woe.     (For  the  frequency  and  significance 
I  of  this  figure  in  the  prophets,  see  Ezek.  32  :  7 ; 
1  Isa.  13  :  10;  Amos  5  :  18,  20,  etc.) — The  moon. 
i  Repeat  here  shall  be  turned.   The  moon,  too, 
{  shall  give  forth  signs  of  the  coming  distress.    It 
I  shall  exhibit  an  appearance  like  blood.     Men 
I  shall  see  there  an  image  of  the  carnage  and 
i  misery  which  are  to  be  witnessed  on  earth. ^ 
i  Notable,  illustrious,  signal  in  its  character 
as  an  exliibition  of  divine  justice.     It  conveys 
the  idea  of  nora  (Heb.),  fearful,  but  is  less 
definite. 

21.  Every  one  whosoever.  (For  ov  with 
this  expansive  effect,  comp.  v.  39 ;  3  :  22, 23  ;  7  : 
3,  etc.)  The  mercy  is  free  to  all  who  fulfil  the 
condition.  (See  the  note  on  v.  39.) — Shall 
have  called  upon.  Subj.  aor.  after  01/  =  fut. 
exact,  in  Latin.  The  act  in  this  verb  must  be 
past  before  the  future  in  shall  be  saved  can 
be  present.  (See  W.  ?  42.  1.  3.  b.)— The  name 
of  the  Lord — i.  e.  of  Christ.  (Comp.  v.  36 ; 
9  :  14  ;  22  :  16 ;  Rom.  10  :  13.)  Not  simply  upon 
him,  but  upon  him  as  possessing  the  attributes 
and  stistaining  to  men  the  relations  of  wliich 
his  name  is  the  index.  (Compare  the  note  on 
22  :  16.) — Shall  be  saved,  from  the  doom  of 


1  This  view  is  defended  in  the  Bibllotheca  Sacra,  1843, 
452,  sq. 


p.  531,  sq.,  and  controverted  in    the  same  work,  1850,  p. 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


49 


22  Ye  men  of  Israel,  hear  these  words ;  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth, a  man  approved  of  (iod  among  you  "by  miracles 
and  wonders  and  signs,  which  (iod  did  hy  him  in  the 
midst  of  you,  as  ye  yourselves  also  know  : 

2a  Him,  '•being"  delivered  by  the  determinate  coun- 
sel and  foreknowledge  of  Ciod,  <^ye  have  taken,  and  by 
wicked  hands  have  crucified  and  slain  : 

24  ''Whom  tjod  hath  raised  up,  having  loosed  the 


22  Ye  men  of  Israel,  hear  these  words:  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth, a  man  approved  of  (iod  unto  you  \ry  'mighty 
works  and  wonders  and  signs,  which  God  did  by  him 
in  the  midst  of  you,  even  as  ye  yourselves  know; 

2i!  him,  being  delivered  up  by  the  determinate  counsel 
and  foreknowledge  of  Liod,  ye  by  the  hand  of  -taw- 

24 less  men  did  crucify  and  slay:  whom  (iod  raised  up, 
having  loosed  the  pangs  of  death  :  because  it  was  not 


a  JoliD  3:2:  14  :  10,  11  :  ch.  10  :  38;  Hcb.  'i  :  4. ...6  Matt.  2fi  :  24 ;  Luke  22  :  22 ;  24  :  44 ;  ch.  3  :  18;  4  :  28....cch.  5  :  30. ...d  ver.  32;  ch. 
3  :  15;  4  :  10:  10  :  40;  13  :  30,  34;  17  :  31 ;  Koni.  4  ;  24  ;  8  :  II;  1  Cor.  6  :  14:  16  :  15:  2  (or.  4  :  14 ;  Gal.  1:1;  Kph.  1  :  211;  Col.  2  :  12; 
I  Ttaeas.  1  :  10;  Heb.  13  :  20  ;  1  Pet.  1  :  21. 1  Gr.  poviert 2  Or,  men  without  the  law 


those  who  reject  Christ,  and  be  admitted  to  the 
joys  of  his  kingdom. 

22.  Israelites  =  Jews  in  N.  T.;  licre  both 
the  native  and  foreign  Jews. — Na^wpaioK  =  No^a- 
paloi.  The  ftjrmer  was  the  broader  Syriac  pro- 
nunciation, as  heard  especially  in  Galilee. 
Hence  Peter's  rustic  speech  (Matt.  26  :  73)  be- 
trayed him  in  the  very  words  of  his  denial. 
(See  Win.,  Chakl.  Gr.,^  p.  12.)  The  epithet  is 
added  for  the  sake  of  distinction,  as  "Jesus" 
was  not  an  uncommon  name  among  the  Jews. 
— A  man  from  God  (as  the  source  of  the  ap- 
proval) accredited  unto  you  (not,  as  in  E.  V., 
among  you);  shown  forth,  confirmed  (25  : 
7) — viz.  in  lii.s  Messianic  character.  The  mean- 
ing is  that  in  the  miracles  which  Christ  per- 
formed he  had  God's  fullest  sanction  to  all  that 
lie  did  and  taught — that  is,  to  his  claim  to  be 
received  as  the  Son  of  God,  the  |)romised 
Saviour  of  men.  Some  put  a  comma  after 
God  and  render  a  man  (sent)  from  God, 
accredited  as  such  by  miracles,  etc.  The 
ultimate  idea  remains  the  same,  since  to  sanc- 
tion his  mission  as  from  God  was  the  same 
thing  as  to  sustain  his  truth  as  to  what  he 
claimed  to  be.  But  the  first  is  the  more  correct 
view,  because  it  renders  the  ellipsis  (sent,  not 
apt  to  be  omitted)  iinneces.sary,  and  because  (as 
Alf.  suggests)  the  point  to  be  established  was 
that  the  Messiah  was  identical  with  a  man 
whom  they  had  seen  and  known.  We  have 
ojrd  after  the  participle,  instead  of  vit6,  because 
the  approbation  was  indirect — i.  e.  testified 
through  miracles.  (See  W.  ?  47.  4 ;  Bernh., 
Si/nt.,  p.  223.) — Miracles  and  wonders  and 
signs  form  obviously  an  intensive  expression, 
but  they  are  not  synonymous  with  each  other. 
Miracles  are  called  powers,  because  thej'  are 
wrought  by  divine  power;  prodigies,  because' 
they  appear  inexplicable  to  men ;  and  <rnn.e:a 
(signs),  because  they  attest  the  character  or 
claims  of  tho.se  who  perform  them  (2  Cor.  12 :  12). 
(See  Olsh.  on  Matt.  8  :  1).  It  cannot  be  said 
that  the  terras  are  used  always  Avith  a  distinct 
consciousness  of  that  difference. — o's  (which) 


is  attracted  into  the  case  of  its  antecedent. — 
Also  after  as  good  authorities  omit.  If  re- 
tained, it  must  connect  know  with  did — what 
he  did  ye  also  know  ;  or  else  strengthen  your- 
selves, also  yourselves  as  well  as  we. 

23.  Him  is  both  resumptive  and  emphatic. 
(See  Matt.  24  :  13 ;  1  Cor.  G  :  4.  W.  ?  23.  4).— 
According  to  the  established  (firmly  fixed, 
see  Luke  22  :  22)  counsel,  plan  ;  the  dative  is 
that  of  rule  or  conformity.  (W.  ^  31.  0.  b. ;  K. 
g  285.3.)  Counsel  and  foreknowledge  may 
differ  here  as  antecedent  and  consequent,  since 
God's  foreknowledge  results  properly  from  his 
purpose. — iKSoTov,  delivered  up  to  you — i.e.  by 
Judas. — Have  taken  {\<xfi6vm)  the  best  editors 
rcgardasan  addition  to  the  text. — By  the  hands 
(Sia  xetpi"- <i«'OM'u>')  or  hand  (if  after  Grslj.,  Lclim., 
Tsch.,  and  others,  we  read  \(i-p6i)  of  lawless 
ones  (partitive,  hence  without  the  article;  see 
on  5  :  16) — /.  e.  of  the  heathen,  as  Pilate  and 
the  Roman  soldiers.  (Comp.  AVisd.  17.  2 ;  1  Cor. 
9  :  21.)  The  indignity  which  Christ  suffered 
was  the  greater  on  account  of  his  being  cruci- 
fied by  the  heatlien.  (See  3  :  13.)  ivotnov  (law- 
less) may  agree  with  x"P""'  (hands),  lawless 
hands  ;  but,  as  the  adjective  must  refer  still  to 
the  heathen,  it  is  not  so  easy  a  combination  as 
the  other. — Having  fastened  to  the  cross — i.e. 
with  nails  driven  through  the  hands  and  feet 
(John  20 :  25, 27).  (See  Byuoeus,  De  Mode  Christi,  L. 
III.  c.  6,  and  Jahn's  Archirol.,  ^  262.)  [Also  Amer. 
addition  to  the  art.  "  Crucifixion  "  in  Smith's 
Did.  of  the  Bible. — A.  H.]  He  imputes  the  act 
of  crucifixion  to  the  Jews  because  they  were  the 
instigators  of  it.  (Comp.  4  :  10 ;  10  :  39.)— dfeiAore 
(ye  slew)  is  first  aorist,  an  Alexandrian  form. 
(W.  ?  13-  1 ;  S.  ?  63.  11.  R.) 

24.  Raised  up,  not  into  existence,  as  in 
3  :  22,  but  fn^n  the  dead.  The  context  de- 
mands this  sense  of  the  verb.  (See  v.  32.) — 
The  pains  of  death.  Quoted  apparently 
from  the  Sei>t.  for  Hob.  chrrJr  mavcth  in  Ps. 
18  :  5,  cords  of  death.  Having  loosed 
agrees  better  with  the  Helirew  idea;  but,  taken 
less  strictly,  having  ended,  it  is  not  inappro- 


1  Grammnr  of  thf  Clialdee  Language  as  contained  in  (he  Bible  and  the  Targums,  translated  from  the  German  by 
the  writer  (Audover,  1845). 
4 


50 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


pains  of  death :  because  it  was  not  possible  that  he 
should  be  holden  of  it. 

2f)  For  David  sijeaketh  concerning  him,  "I  foresaw 
the  Lord  always  before  my  face,  for  he  is  on  my  right 
hand,  that  I  should  not  be  moved  : 

26  Therefore  did  my  heart  rejoice,  and  my  tongue 
was  glad;  moreover  also  my  flesh  shall  rest  in  hope: 

27  Because  thou  wilt  not  leave  my  soul  in  hell,  neither 
■wilt  thou  suffer  thine  Holy  One  to  see  corruption. 


25  possible  that  he  should  be  holden  of  it.     For  David 
saitli  concerning  him, 

I  beheld  the  Lord  always  before  my  face; 
For  he  is  on  my  right  liand,  that  1  should  not  be 
moved : 
25        Therefore  my  heart  was  glad,  and  my  tongue  re- 
joiced ; 
Moreover  my  flesh  also  shall  'dwell  in  hope  : 
27        Becau.se  thou  wilt  not  leave  my  soul  in  Hades, 
Neither  wilt  thou  give  thy  Holy  One  to  see  cor- 
ruption. 


-1  Or,  tabernacle. 


priate  to  pangs.  We  may  conceive,  in  the  lat- 
ter case,  of  the  pains  of  deatli  as  not  ceasing 
altogether  with  the  life  which  they  destroy, 
but  as  still  following  their  victim  into  the 
grave.  Hence,  though  the  Greek  expression, 
as  compared  with  the  Hebrew,  changes  the 
figure,  it  conveys  essentially  the  same  thought, 
and  may  have  been  adopted  because  it  was 
so  familiar  to  the  foreign  Jews.  Some  con- 
tend that  oiSlvai  means  cords  in  the  Hellenistic 
Greek  (Kuin.,  Olsh.) ;  but  the  assertion  is  des- 
titute of  proof.  In  that  case,  too,  Luke  would 
liave  said  their  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  in- 
stead of  his,  out  of  regard  to  the  figure.  Oth- 
ers have  found  an  allusion  in  the  word  to  the 
resurrection  as  a  birth  (see  Col.  -1  :  18),  and 
hence  to  death  as  enduring  (so  to  speak)  the 
pangs  inseparable  from  giving  back  the  dead 
to  life.  It  is  strange  that  Meyer  should  revive 
this  almost  forgotten  interpretation. — Because 
it  was  not  possible,  since  the  divine  pur- 
pose cannot  fail.  The  confirmatory  because 
shows  that  to  be  the  nature  of  the  impossibil- 
ity in  the  writer's  mind. 

25.  The  quotation  is  from  Ps.  16  :  8-11,  in 
accordance  with  the  Septuagint.  It  will  be 
observed  that  in  vs.  29-31  Peter  takes  pains  to 
show  that  the  portion  of  the  Psalm  under  con- 
sideration there  could  not  have  referred  to 
David,  but  had  its  fulfilment  in  Christ.  In  13  : 
36,  Paul  too  denies  the  applicability  of  that 
passage  to  David,  and  insists  on  its  exclusive 
reference  to  the  Messiah.  We  may  conclude, 
therefore,  that  they  regarded  the  entire  Psalm 
as  Messianic ;  for  we  have  in  it  but  one  speaker 
from  commencement  to  end,  and  in  other  re- 
spects such  a  marked  unity  of  thought  and 
,  structure,  that  it  would  be  an  arbitrary  pro- 
cedure to  assign  one  part  of  it  to  David  and 
another  to  Christ.  (See  Prof  Stuart's  interpre- 
tation of  this  Psalm  in  Bibl.  Repon.,  1831,  p.  51, 
sq.) — Concerning,  in  reference  to,  him. — 
I  saw  the  Lord  before  me  (where  npo  is 
intensive  merely),  looked  unto  him  as  my  only 
helper  and  support;  not  foresaw  (E.  V.,  after 
the  Genv.  V.),  or  saw  beforehand  (Tynd.).     The 


verb  answers  to  Heb.  shivvethe,  I  placed,  ex- 
cept that  this  marks  more  distinctly  the  effort 
made  in  order  to  keep  the  mind  in  that  post- 
ure.— Because  states  why  the  eye  is  thus 
turned  unto  Jehovah. — ix  Sf^iiiv  (on  my  right 
hand)  describes  one's  position  as  seen  off  from 
the  right.  A  protector  at  the  right  hand  is  one 
who  is  near  and  can  afford  instantly  the  succor 
needed. — Iva  is  telic,  in  order  that.  [The  mean- 
ing and  use  of  iva  are  carefully  discussed  by 
Winer  (§  53.  G.  p.  457,  sq.,  Thayer's  transl.)  and 
by  Buttmann  (G;-o»i.  of  the  N.  T.  Greek,  Thayer's 
transl.,  p.  235,  sq.).  The  latter  maintains  that 
there  are  manjr  predicates  and  constructions  in 
the  New  Testament  "  in  which  the  idea  of  pur- 
pose decidedly  recedes  into  the  background,''^  and 
"  where  the  difference  between  the  two  rela- 
tions (the  telic  and  the  ecbatic)  [or  that  of  pur- 
pose and  that  of  result — in  order  that,  so  that] 
disappears,  and  it  is  nearer  to  the  ecbatic  sense 
[so  that]  than  to  its  original  final  sense."  But 
in  the  writings  of  Luke  it  almost  always  re- 
tains its  original  telic  sense. — A.  H.] 

26.  €v4>pdv»ri  (was  glad).  (On  the  augment 
in  verbs  which  begin  with  eS,  see  W.  ^  12.  1.  3 ; 
K.  ^  125.  R.  1.).— My  tongue  stands  for  Heb. 
kebhodhe,  my  glory — i.  e.  soul — whose  dignity 
the  Hebrews  recognized  in  that  way.  The 
Greek  has  substituted  the  instrument  which 
the  soul  uses  in  giving  expression  to  its  joy. 
We  may  render  botli  verbs  as  present  if  we 
suppose  them  to  describe  a  permanent  state 
of  mind.  (K.  ^  256.  4.)— But  further  also, 
climacteric,  as  in  Luke  14  :  26. — My  flesh, 
body  as  distinguished  from  the  soul. — Shall 
r/sst — viz.  in  the  grave,  as  defined  by  the  next 
verse. — In  hope  =  Heb.  labhetah,  in  confi- 
dence— i.  e.  of  a  speedy  restoration  to  life. 
The  sequel  exhibits  the  ground  of  this  confi- 
dent hope. 

27.  Because  (not  that)  thou  wilt  not 
abandon  my  soul  into  Hades.  My  soul, 
according  to  Hebrew  usage,  an  emphasized  i>ro- 
noiin.  Hades  =  Heb.  Sheol  denotes  properly 
the  place  of  the  dead,  but  also,  by  a  frequent 
personification,  death  itself,  considered  as  a  ra- 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


51 


28,  Thou  hast  made  known  f o  me  the  ways  of  life ; 
thoii  shall  make  me  full  of  joy  with  thy  countenance. 

29  Men  (ind  brethren,  let  nie  freely  speak  unto  you 
■of  the  patriarch  David,  that  he  is  both  dead  and 
buried,  and  his  sepulchre  is  with  us  unto  this  day. 

ao  Therefore  being  a  prophet,  'and  knowing  that 
God  had  sworn  with  an  oath  to  him,  that  of  the  fruit 
of  his  loins,  according  to  the  flesh,  he  would  raise  up 
Christ  to  s.it  on  his  throne; 

31  He  seeing  this  before  spake  of  the  resurrection 
of  Christ,  'that  his  soul  was  not  left  in  hell,  neither 
his  flesh  did  see  corruption. 


28  Thou  niadest  known  unto  me  the  ways  of  life; 
Thou  shall  make  me-  full  of  gladness  'with  thy 

countenance. 

29  Brethren,  1  may  .say  unto  you  freely  of  the  patriarch 
David,  that  he  both  died  and  was  l)uried,  and  his 

30  tomb  is  with  us  unto  this  day.  Heing  therefore  a 
prophet,  and  knowing  that  dod  had  sworn  with  an 
oath  to  him,  that  of  trie  fruit  of  his  loins  -he  would 

31  set  one  upon  his  throne;  he  foreseeing  l/il.s  spake  of 
the  resurrection  of  the  Christ,  that  neither  was  he 


al  Kings  2  :  10 :  ch.  13  :  36 6  2  Sam.  7  :  12,  13:  Ps.  132  ;  II  ;  Luke  1  :-»2,  69:  Rom.  1  :  3  ;  2  Tim.  2  ;  8 c  Ps.  16  :  10;  ch.  13  : 

1  Or,  in  thy  presence 2  Or,  one  should  sit 


pacious  destroyer.  (See  Gesen.,  Heb.  Lex.,  s.  v.) 
The  sense  then  may  be  expressed  thus :  Thou 
wilt  not  give  me  up  as  a  prey  to  death ;  he  shall 
not  have  power  over  me,  to  dis.solve  the  body 
and  cause  it  to  return  to  dust.  On  the  ellipti- 
cal aSov,  see  K.  g  2G3.  b.  Later  critics  (Lchm., 
Tsch.)  read  uSriv,  after  ABCD  and  other  au- 
thorities.— To  see,  experience,  as  in  Luke 
2,  2G. 

28.  Thou  didst  make  known  to  me  the 
ways  of  life — i.e.  tlui.sc  wliich  lead  from  deatli 
to  life.  The  event  was  certain,  and  hence,  though 
future,  could  be  spoken  of  as  past.  The  mean- 
ing is  that  God  would  restore  him  to  life  after 
liaving  been  put  to  death  and  laid  in  the  grave. 
Kuinoel,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  concede  that  this  is 
the  sense  which  Peter  attached  to  the  words; 
and  if  so,  it  must  be  the  true  sense.  The  Greek 
here  expresses  the  exact  form  of  the  Hebrew. — 
With  itierd,  nut  =  Sta,  %)  thy  presence — i.  e. 
with  thee  where  thou  art;  viz.  in  heaven.  The 
Redeemer  was  a.ssured  that  he  would  not  only 
escape  the  power  of  death,  but  ascend  to  dwell 
in  the  immediate  presence  of  God  on  high.  It 
was  for  that  "joy  set  before  him,  that  he  en- 
dured the  cross,  despising  the  shame,  and  is  set 
down  at  the  right  hand  of  the  throne  of  God  " 

(Heb.  12  :  2). 

29.  The  object  of  the  remark  here  is  to  show 
that  the  pa.ssage  cited  above  could  not  have  re- 
ferred to  David. — i$6v,  SC.  60-T1,  not  eVrw,  it  is 
lawful,  proper.— With  freedom,  without 
fear  of  being  thought  deficient  in  any  just  re- 
spect to  his  memory.  His  death  w;us  recorded 
in  the  Old  Testament;  no  one  pretended  that 
he  had  risen,  and  the  Psalm,  therefore,  could 
not  apply  to  him. — David  is  called  patriarch, 
as  being  the  founder  of  the  royal  family.  This 
title  in  its  stricter  use  belonged  to  the  founders 
of  the  nation. — Among  us,  here  in  the  city. 
The  sepulchre  of  David  was  on  Mount  Zion, 
where  most  of  the  kings  of  Jiidah  were  buried. 
(See  on  5  :  6.)  The  tomb  was  well  known  in 
Peter's  day.  Josephus  says  that  it  was  opened 
by  both  Hyrcanus  and  Herod,  in  order  to  rifle 
it  of  the  treasures  which  it  was  supposed  to 


contain.  The  mosque,  still  shown  as  Nebv 
Duuid,  on  the  southern  brow  of  Zion,  cannot 
be  far  from  the  true  site. 

30.  A  prophet — i.  e.  divinely  inspired  (see 
i  on  v.  17),  and  so  competent  to  utter  the  predic- 
tion.— Therefore,  since,  unless  David  meant 
himself,  he  must  have  meant  the  Messiah. — 
And  knowing — viz.  that  which  follows.  This 
knowledge  he  received  from  the  prophet  Na- 
than, as  related  in  2  Sam.  7  :  12-lG.  (See  also  Ps. 
132  :  11 ;  89  :  35-37.)  The  resurrection  of  Christ 
in  its  full  historical  sense  involved  two  points: 
first,  his  restoration  to  life;  and  secondly,  his 
elevation  to  permanent  regal  power.  Peter  in- 
serts the  remark  made  here  to  show  that  David, 
in  predicting  the  main  fact,  had  a  view  also  of 
Christ's  office  as  a  Sovereign. — To  cause  one 
to  sit,  place  him  (comp.  1  Cor.  G  :  4.  Whl., 
Mey.,  De  Wet.),  or  (intrans.  oftener  in  N.  T.) 
that  one  should  sit  (Rob.).  [Gloag  (and 
Dickson)  translate  Meyer's  words  (4th  ed.),  in- 
correctly, to  sit  on  his  throne;  for  zu  sctzen  auf 
seinem  Thron  means,  not  to  sit,  but  to  scat  or 
place  on  his  throne.  Dr.  Hackett's  language 
tlierefore  represents  correctly  Meyer's  latest 
view. — A.  H.]  This  descendant  was  to  occupy 
the  throne  as  ruler  in  Zion,  as  Messiah.  (Comp. 
Ps.  2  :  6.)  The  Greek  omits  nva  (one)  often 
before  the  infinitive.  (K.  ?  238.  R.  3.  e.)— After 
his  loins  the  received  text  adds  that  he 
would  raise  up  the  Messiah  after  the 
flesh.  Scholz  retains  the  words,  but  most  edit- 
ors omit  them  or  mark  them  as  unsupported. 

31.  Seeing  this  before  repeats  the  idea 
both  of  prophet  and  of  knowing.  Hav- 
ing the  knowledge  derived  from  the  sources 
which  these  terms  specify,  David  could  speak  of 
the  Messiah  in  the  manner  here  represented.  The 
Christ  is  the  official  title,  not  a  proper  name. 
— Neither  was  left  (Tsch.)  or  was  not  left 
behind  (given  up)  unto  Hades  (T.  R.);  aorist 
here  (note  the  fut.  in  v.  27),  because  the  speaker 
thinks  of  the  prediction  as  now  accomplished. 
His  soul  (T.  R.)  sliould  probably  [almost  cer- 
tainly, witli  N  A  RC'  D  and  all  the  later  editors. 
— A.  H.]  be  dropped  after  the  verb. 


52 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IL 


32  "This  Jesus  hath  God  raised  up,  'whereof  we  all 
are  witnesses. 

33  Therefore  ''being  by  the  right  hand  of  God  ex- 
alted, and  ''having  received  of  the  Father  the  promise 
of  the  Holy  (ihost,  he  ■'hath  shed  forth  this,  whicli  ye 
now  see  and  hear. 

34  tor  David  is  not  ascended  into  the  heavens;  but 
he  saith  himself,  /The  Lord  said  unto  my  Lord,  Hit 
thou  on  my  right  hand, 


32  left  in  Hades,  nor  did  his  flesh  see  corruption.  This 
Jesus  did  God  raise  up,  i  whereof  we  all  are  witnesses. 

33  Being  therefore  -by  the  right  hand  of  (.od  e.\alted, 
and  having  received  of  the  Father  the  promise  of 
the   Holy  .-spirit,  he  hath  poured  forth  this,  which 

34  ye  see  and  hear.  For  David  ascended  not  into  the 
heavens:  but  he  saith  himself. 

The  Lord  said  unto  my  Lord,  Sit  thou  on  my  right 
hand. 


over.  24....ftch.  1  :  8..  ..c  oh.  5  :  31  ;  Phil.  2:9;  Heb.  10:  12.... d  John  14:  2fi;  15:  26;  16:  7.  13;  ch.  1  : 
4  :  8..../PS.  110  :  1 ;  Matt.  22  :  44  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  25;  Kph.  1  :  20;  Heb.  1  :  13. 1  Or,  of  whom 


4....ech.  10:45;  Eph. 
...2  Or,  at 


32.  This  (looking  back  to  v.  24)  Jesus,  the 

subject  of  such  a  prophecy. — Whose  (masc.  as 
Wicl.  after  Vulg.;  comp.  5  :  32;  13  :  31),  or,  as 
the  verb  suggests  a  natural  antecedent  (neut.), 
of  which — viz.  his  resurrection — we  all  are 
witnesses  (Mey.andE.V.).  (See note  on  1 :22.) 

33.  The  exaltation  of  Christ  appears  here 
(therefore)  as  a  necessary  consequent  of  the 
resurrection.  (See  on  vs.  28,  30.)— Having 
been  exalted  to  the  right  hand  of  God 
(Neand.,  De  Wet.,  Olsli.,  Bmg,  Whl.,  Rob.); 
not  by  the  right  hand  (Calv.,  Kuin.,  Mey., 
Alf ,  E.  Vv.).  The  connection  (see  especially 
vs.  34,  35,  and  comp.  5  :  31)  directs  us  quite  in- 
evitably to  the  first  sense;  and,  though  the 
local  dative  whither  may  not  occur  in '  the 
New  Testament  out  of  this  passage  and  5:  31, 
yet  all  admit  that  it  is  one  of  the  uses  of  the 
later  Greek  generally,  and  was  not  unknown  to 
the  earlier  Greek  poetry.  (See  Bernh.,  Synt., 
p.  94.)  AViner  says  (^  31.  5)  that  we  may  trans- 
late here  to  the  right  hand  without  any  hesita- 
tion.— Having  received  the  promise — i.  e. 
its  fulfilment  in  the  bestowal— of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  genit.  of  the  object.  (See  on  1  :  4.) — 
Poured  out.  The  effusion  of  the  Spirit  which 
is  ascribed  to  God  in  v.  17  is  ascribed  here  to 
Christ.^See  refers  to  the  general  spectacle  of 
so  many  speaking  in  foreign  tongues,  or  possi- 
bly to  the  tongues  of  fire  visible  on  the  speakers. 
— Hear  refers  both  to  the  languages  spoken  and 
to  what  was  spoken  in  them. 

34.  For  confirms  being  exalted.  The  ex- 
altation was  not  only  incident  to  the  resurrec- 
tion, but  was  the  subject  of  an  express  predic- 
tion ;  and  that  prediction  could  not  apply  to 
David,  for  he  did  not  ascend  to  heaven — 
i.  e.  to  be  invested  with  glory  and  power  at  the 
right  hand  of  God.  The  order  of  thought,  says 
De  Wette,  would  have  been  plainer  thus :  For 
David  says.  Sit  at  my  right  hand,  etc. ; 
but  he  himself  did  not  ascend  into  heav- 
en— i.  e.  he  says  this,  not  of  himself,  but  of  the 
Messiah.— Saith— viz.  in  Ps.  110  :  1.  In  Matt. 
22  :  43  and  Mark  12  :  36  the  Saviour  recognizes 
David  as  the  author  of  the  Psalm,  and  attrib- 


utes to  him  a  divine  inspiration  in  speaking 
thus  of  the  Messiah.  He  cites  the  same  pas- 
sage as  proof  of  David's  acknowledged  inferi- 
ority to  himself — Ka&ov  (imperf.)  is  for  the  purer 
Ka*7)<7o.  (W.  ?  14.  4  ;  Mt.  ?  236.)  On  my  right 
hand  (see  on  v.  25)— i.  e.  as  the  partner  of  my 
throne.  The  following  remarks  of  Professor 
Stuart^  are  pertinent  here  :  "In  tlie  New  Testa- 
ment, when  Clirist  is  I'epresented  as  sitting  at 
the  right  hand  of  Divine  Majesty  (Heb.  i :  s),  or  at 
the  right  hand  of  God  (Aota2:3:iandHcb.  lo:  12),  or 
at  the  right  of  the  throne  of  God  (net.  12:2), 
participation  in  supreme  dominion  is  most  clear- 
ly meant.  (Comp.  1  Pet.  3  :  22 ;  Rom.  8  :  34 ; 
Mark  16  :  19  ;  Phil.  2  :  6-11 ;  Eph.  1  :  20-23.) 
At  the  same  time,  the  comparison  of  these 
passages  will  show  most  clearly  that  Clirist's 
exaltation  at  the  right  hand  of  God  means  his 
being  seated  on  the  mediatorial  throne  as  the  result 
and  reward  of  his  sufferings  (see  particularly 
Phil.  2  :  6-11,  and  comp.  Heb.  12  :  2),  and  tliat 
the  phrase  in  question  never  means  the  original 
dominion  which  Christ,  as  Logos,  or  God,  pos- 
sesses. The  sacred  writers  never  sjieak  respect- 
ing the  Logos,  considered  simply  in  his  diimie 
nature,  as  being  seated  at  the  right  hand  of 
God,  but  only  of  the  Logos  incarnate,  or  the 
Mediator,  as  being  seated  there.  So,  in  Heb. 
1  :  3,  it  is  after  the  expiation  made  by  the  Son 
of  God  that  he  is  represented  as  seating  himself 
at  the  right  hand  of  the  Divine  Majesty.  And 
tliat  this  mediatorial  dominion  is  not  to  be  con- 
sidered simply  as  the  dominion  of  the  divine 
nature  of  Christ  as  such  is  plain  from  the  fact 
that  when  the  mediatorial  office  is  fulfilled  the 
kingdom  of  the  Mediator  as  such  is  to  cease. 
Moreover,  that  the  phrase  to  sit  at  the  right 
hand  of  God,  or  of  the  throne  of  God,  does 
not  of  itself  mean  original  divine  dominion  is 
clear  from  the  fact  that  Christ  assures  his  faith- 
ful disciples  they  shall  sit  down  with  him  on 
his  throne,  even  as  he  sat  down  with  the  Father 
on  his  throne.  (Rev.  3 :  21).  It  is  exaltation,  then, 
in  consequence  of  obedience  and  sufferings, 
which  is  designated  by  the  phrase  in  ques- 
tion." 


1  Commentary  on  l/ie  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews,  p.  559,  sq.  (1833). 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


53 


35  Until  I  make  thv  foes  thy  footstool. 

36  Therefore  let  all  the  house  of  Israel  know  assured- 
ly, that  <  lod  "hath  made  that  same  Jesus,  whom  ye  have 
crucified,  both  Lord  and  (_  hrist. 

37  UNow  when  they  heard  thix,  Hhey  were  pricked 
in  their  heart,  and  said  unto  I'eter  and  to  the  rest  of 
the  apostles,  Men  and  brethren,  what  shall  we  do? 

3s  Then  Peter  said  unto  them,  "^Kepent,  and  be  bap- 
tized every  one  of  you  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  for 
the  remission  of  sins,  and  ye  shall  receive  the  gift  of 
the  Holy  Ghost. 

39  For  the  promise  is  unto  you,  and  ''to  your  chil- 


35  Till  I  make  thine  enemies  the  footstool  of  thy 

feet. 

36  Let  'all  the  house  of  Israel  therefore  know  assuredly, 
that  God  hath  made  him  both  Lord  and  Christ,  this 
Jesus  whom  ye  crucified. 

37  Now  when  they  heard  this,  they  were  pricked  in 
their  heart,  and  .said  unto  Peter  and  the  rest  of  the 

38 apostles.  Brethren,  what  shall  we  do?  And  I'eter 
Miui  unto  them,  Hepent  ye,  and  be  baptized  every 
one  of  you  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  unto  the  le- 
mission  of  your  sins;  and  ye  shall  receive  the  gift 

39  of  the  Holy  Spirit.    For  to  you  is  the  promise,  and 


...5  Zech.  12:  10;  Luke  3  :  10  ;  ch.  9:6;  16  :  .30...  .c  Luke  U  :  iT,  cb.  3:  19.... d  Joel  2:28;  ch.  3:25.- 

every  house. 


-lOr, 


35.  Until,  etc.  The  dominion  here  which 
Christ  received  belonged  to  him  as  Mediator ; 
and  it  is  to  cease,  therefore,  when  the  objects 
of  his  kingdom  as  Mediator  are  accomplished. 
(Comp.  1  Cor.  15  :  23-28.)  Tlie  verse  recognizes 
distinctly  that  limitation. 

36.  All  the  house  (race)  of  Israel.  oIkos 
(house)  appears  to  omit  the  article,  as  having 
the  nature  of  a  proper  name.  (W.  §  17.  10.) — 
That  God  made  him  both  Lord  and 
Christ — to  wit,  this  one,  the  Jesus  whom, 
etc.  This  one,  the  Jesus  is  in  apposition 
with  him. 

37-42.  EFFECT  OF  THE  DISCOURSE  IN 
THE  CONVERSION  OF  THREE  THOU- 
SAND. 

37.  Not  all,  but  many,  of  those  addressed 
must  be  understood  here.  This  necessary  lim- 
itation could  be  left  to  suggest  itself.  Were 
pierced  in  the  heart,  dative  of  the  sphere  in 

which  (Rom.  4  :  20  ;  1  Cor.  14  :  m).    (W.  §  31,  3.)     SoiUe 

editions  have  KapSiav  (heart),  accusative  of  the 
part  affected.  [This  reading  is  adopted  by 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo- 
Am.  Revisers,  with  X  A  B  C  and  other  docu- 
ments.— A.  H.]  The  verb  expresses  forcibly 
the  idea  of  pungent  sorrow  and  alarm. — What 
shall  we  do?  The  answer  to  the  question 
shows  that  it  related  to  the  way  of  escape 
from  the  consequences  of  their  guilt. — For 
men,  see  on  1  :  16. 

38.  Upon  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  as 
the  foundation  of  the  baptism — i.  e.  with  an 
acknowledgment  of  him  in  that  act  as  being 
what  his  name  imports  (see  on  v.  21) — to  wit, 
the  sinner's  only  hope,  his  Redeemer,  Justifier, 
Lord,  final  Judge.  (For  inl  with  this  force,  see 
"W.  §  48.  c.)  We  see  from  v.  40  that  Luke  has 
given  only  an  epitome  of  Peter's  instructions 
on  this  occasion.  The  usual  formula  in  rela- 
tion to  baptism  is  into  the  name  as  in  8  :  16 ; 
19  :  5.  It  may  have  been  avoided  here  as  a 
matter  of   euphony,  since  «i«   follows  in  the 


next  clause  (De  Wet.).— In  order  to  the  for- 
giveness   of  sins    (Matt.  26:215;  Luke  3  :  3)  WC   COIl- 

nect  naturally  with  both  the  preceding  verbs. 
This  clause  states  the  motive  or  object  which 
should  induce  them  to  repent  and  be  baptized. 
It  enforces  the  entire  exhortation,  not  one  part 
of  it  to  the  exclusion  of  the  other.  [Observe 
(1)  that  forgiveness  of  sins  is  here  conditioned 
on  repentance.  Hence  the  doctrine  that  sin- 
ners are  forgiven  unconditionally,  in  view  of 
the  Saviour's  propitiatory  death,  is  an  error. 
Though  mercy  is  offered,  the  wrath  of  God 
abideth  on  him  that  believelh  not.  (See  John 
3  :  36.)  If  one  may  be  said  in  a  certain  sense 
to  have  been  forgiven  from  eternity  in  con- 
sideration of  the  Lamb  slain  from  the  founda- 
tion of  the  world,  it  is  because  he  was  looked 
upon  as  having  exercised  repentance  toward 
God  and  faith  in  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  Out 
of  Christ  the  sinner  is  unforgiven.  (2)  That 
repentance  and  the  prescribed  expression  of  it 
by  baptism  are  closely  united.  Peter  did  not 
feel  it  necessary  to  provide  for  exceptional  cases 
in  this  address  to  the  people.  He  saw  that  the 
inward  change  and  the  ritual  confession  of  it 
were  so  knit  together  by  nature  that  it  was 
enough  for  him  to  state  them  in  their  proper 
order  and  sequence.  Repentance  and  the  first- 
fruits  of  repentance  were  generally  inseparable. 
The  former  could  not  be  genuine  without  man- 
ifesting itself  in  the  latter.  And  in  the  circum- 
stances of  that  day  a  willingness  to  be  bap- 
tized was  no  slight  evidence  of  a  new  heart. 
—A.  H.] 

39.  To  your  children — unto  your  de- 
scendants (see  13  :  33) ;  not  your  little  one.i 
(Alf ),  with  an  appeal  to  v.  17,  for  the  sons  and 
daughters  there  are  so  far  adult  as  to  liave 
visions  and  to  prophesy. — To  all  those  afar 
off — J.  e.  the  distant  nations  or  heathen.  So, 
among  others,  Calvin,  Bengel,  Olshausen,  Har- 
less,i  De  Wette,  Neander,  Lange.'^  The  ex- 
pression was  current  among  the  Jews  in  that 


'  Commentar  iiher  den  Brief  Pauli  an  die  Ephesier,  p.  213,  sq. 
2  Das  apOitoUsche  Zeitalter,  zweiter  Band,  p.  42  (1853). 


54 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


dren,  and  "to  all  that  are  afar  off,  even  as  many  as  the 
Lord  our  God  shall  call. 

4M  And  with  many  othtir  words  did  he  testify  and 
exhort,  saying,  Save  yourselves  from  this  untoward 
generation. 

41  II  Then  they  that  gladly  received  his  word  were 
baptized:  and  the  same  day  there  were  added  untv 
tUein  about  three  thousand  souls. 

42  'And  they  continued  stedfastly  in  the  apostles' 


to  your  children,  and  to  ail  that  are  afar  off,  eirn  as 

40  many  as  the  Lord  our  tiod  shall  call  unto  him.  And 
with  many  other  words  he  testified,  and  e.\horted 
them,   saying,   Save   yourselves   from   this  crooked 

41  generation.  They  then  'that  received  his  word 
were  baptized:  and  there  were  added  unlo  them  in 

42  that  day  about  three  thousand  souls.  And  they 
continued  stedfastly  in  the  apostles'  teaching  and 


och.  10  :45;  11  :  15,  18;  14:  «;  15:3,  8,  14;  Eph.  2  :  i:),  17.... i.  ver.  46;  oh.  1  :  14  ;  Rom.  12  :  12; 

10  :  25. 1  Or,  Iiaving  received 


b.  6:  18;  Col.  4:2;  Heb. 


sense.  (Comp.  Zech.  6  :  15  ;  Isa.  49  : 1 ;  57  :  19 ; 
Eph.  2  :  13,  17,  where  see  Dr.  Hodge  in  his 
recent  Cominentary.)  Even  the  Rabbinic  writ- 
ers employed  it  as  synonymous  with  the 
heathen.  (Schott.,  Hor.  Heb.,  vol.  i.  p.  761.) 
It  has  been  objected  that  this  explanation  sup- 
poses Peter  to  have  been  already  aware  that 
the  gospel  was  to  be  preached  to  the  Gentiles ; 
whereas  it  is  said  he  afterward  hesitated  on  the 
subject,  and  needed  a  special  revelation  to  point 
out  to  him  his  duty.  (See  10  :  10,  sq.)  But  the 
objection  misstates  the  ground  of  the  hesita- 
tion ;  it  related  to  the  terms  on  which  the  Gen- 
tiles were  to  be  acknowledged  as  Christians,  not 
to  the  fact  itself.  On  this  point  how  is  it  pos- 
sible that  he  should  have  doubted  ?  The  Jews 
in  general  who  exjiected  a  Messiah  at  all  be- 
lieved in  the  universality  of  his  reign.  The 
prophets  foretold  distinctly  that  the  Gentiles 
under  him  should  form  one  people  with  the 
Jews,  that  they  should  both  acknowledge  the 
same  God  and  be  acknowledged  of  him.  (See 
e.  g.  Mic.  4  :  1,  sq. ;  Amos  9  :  12 ;  Isa.  2  :  2,  sq. ; 
40  :  5 ;  54  :  4,  s^.,  etc.)  Add  to  this  that  the 
Saviour  himself  before  his  ascension  had 
charged  his  disciples  to  go  into  all  the  world 
and  preach  the  gospel  to  every  creature.  The 
relation  in  which  the  Gentile  believers  were  to 
stand  to  Judaism — how  far  they  were  to  prac- 
tise its  rites,  and  in  that  respect  assimilate  to 
the  Jews — was  not  so  well  understood.  On  that 
question,  it  is  true,  they  needed  and  received 
further  instruction  as  to  the  course  to  be  pur- 
sued. Those  who  rt>ject  the  foregoing  explana- 
tion suppose  all  that  are  afar  off  to  denote 
the  foreign  Jews.  But  they  are  included  al- 
ready in  you,  since  many  of  those  addressed 
were  pilgrims  who  had  come  to  Jerusalem  to 
celebrate  the  present  feast  This  sense  of  the 
phrase  renders  it  superfluous. — Whomsoever 
the  Lord  shall  have  called.  For  the  verbal 
form,  see  the  note  on  v.  21.  The  expression 
imports  that  as  many  would  secure  a  part  in 
the  promise  as  it  should  prove  that  the  divine 
purpose  had  embraced. 

40.  Copies  fluctuate  between  Sie/napTi/'pero  and 
fite/oiapTupaTo.  The  imperfect  agrees  best  with 
the  next  verb. — Save  yourselves.    For  this 


middle  sense,  see  W.  ?  39.  2. — From  this  per- 
verse (Phil.  2 :  15)  generation — *.  e.  from  i)artici- 
pation  in  their  guilt  and  doom.  (Comp.  1  Cor. 
11  :32;  Gal.  1  :  4.) 

41,  Therefore  —  viz.  in  consequence  of 
Peter's  exhortation. — They  (who  were  men- 
tioned as  penitent  in  v.  37)  having  received 
his  word — viz.  that  in  v.  38,  sq.  (De  Wet., 
Mey.).  Many  adopt  the  substantive  construc- 
tion :  they  who  received  (Bug.,  Kuin.,  E. 
Vv.).  The  first  view  identifies  those  wlio  be- 
lieve here  more  distinctly  with  those  in  v.  37 
who  evince  such  a  preparation  for  the  exercise 
of  faith,  and  may  be  preferable  on  that  account ; 
but  the  use  of  the  participle  in  other  respects 
(as  we  saw  on  1  :  G)  involves  an  ambiguity. 
Gladly  elicits  a  correct  idea,  but  is  hardly 
genuine. — Souls,  persons.  (See  v.  43;  3  :  23 ; 
7  :  14 ;  27  :  37.)  The  frequency  of  this  sense 
may  be  Hebraistic,  but  not  the  sense  itself. — 
Were  baptized.  Not  necessarily  at  once 
after  the  discourse,  but  naturally  during  tlie 
same  day,  if  we  unite  the  next  clause  (the 
same  day ;  see  on  8  :  1)  closely  with  this.  But 
the  compendious  form  of  the  narrative  would 
allow  us,  with  some  editors,  to  place  a  colon 
between  the  two  clauses ;  and  then  the  baptism 
could  be  regarded  as  subsequent  to  were 
added  to,  taking  place  at  such  time  and 
under  such  circumstances  as  the  convenience 
of  the  parties  might  require.  It  is  proper  to 
add  (against  Alf.)  that  the  pools  so  numerous 
and  large  which  encircled  Jerusalem,  as  both 
those  still  in  use  and  the  remains  of  others  tes- 
tify at  the  present  day,  afforded  ample  means  for 
the  administration  of  the  rite.  The  liabits  of 
the  East,  as  every  traveller  knows,  would  present 
no  obstacle  to  such  a  use  of  the  public  reservoirs. 

42.  Constantly  applying  themselves 
unto  the  teaching  of  the  apostles. 
They  sought  to  know  more  and  more  of  the 
gospel     which    they     had     embraced. — >tai    rij 

KOivmvia    (comp.    etxov    KOiva.    \W  V.  44),    and    UUtO 

the  communication,  distribution — /.  e.  of 
money  or  other  supplies  for  the  poor  (Ileinr., 
Kuin.,  Olsh.,  Bmg.,  Hmph.) ;  the  fellowship 

— i.  e.  the  community,  oneness  of  spirit  and 
effort  which  bound  the  first  Christians  to  each 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


55 


doctrine  and  fellowship,  and  in  breaking  of  bread, 
and  in  prayers. 

■13  And  fear  came  upon  every  soul :  and  "many  won- 
ders and  signs  were  done  by  the  apostles. 


ifellowshlp,    in    the    breaking   of   bread    and    the 
prayers. 
43     And  fear  came  upon  every  soul:  and  many  won- 


a  Mark  16  :  17  ;  ch.  4  :  33 ;  5  :  12.- 


-1  Or,  in  fellowship 


other  (Bng.,  Mey.,  Rob.);  the  communion, 

meals  in  common  {agapx,  which  were  followed 
by  the  Lord's  Supper  (Bez.,  Grot.,  De  Wet.) ; 
the  sacrament  itself  (Lightf.,  Est.,  Wlf.).  I 
prefer  the  first  sense  of  this  doubtful  word,  be- 
cause all  the  other  nouns  denote  an  act,  not  a 
state  of  mind  or  feeling ;  because  the  participle 
applies  to  an  act  rather  than  an  abstract  qual- 
ity (which  are  objections  to  the  second  sense) ; 
because  this  use  of  the  term  is  justified  by 
Rom.  15  :  26;  2  Cor.  8  :  4,  especially  Heb.  13  : 
16 ;  and  because,  as  the  contributions  would 
naturally  be  made  at  their  meetings,  the  sev- 
eral nouns  relate  then  to  a  common  subject — 
viz.  their  religious  assemblies.  It  may  be  added 
that  their  liberality  toward  the  poor  was  so 
characteristic  of  the  first  Christians  that  this 
sketch  of  their  religious  habits  nught  be  ex- 
pected to  include  that  particular.  Koinonia  in 
the  sense  of  our  communion,  the  Lord's  Supper, 
appears  not  to  have  prevailed  before  the  fourth 
century  (Suicer,  Thesaur.,  s.  v.,  as  cited  by 
Hmph.),  and  hence  the  last  of  the  meanings 
given  above  may  be  laid  out  of  the  account 
here.  The  meals  in  common,  or  aYan-at,  were 
known  to  be  a  part  of  the  /cAa<ns  toD  aprov  (see 
below),  and  consequently  would  not  need  to  be 
specified  in  this  connection  by  a  separate  term. 
The  E.  V.  unites  airoaroKuiv  with  both  nouns : 
"the  apostles'  doctrine  and  fellowship"  (also 
Tynd.,  Cranm.,  Gen.).  With  that  combination 
we  should  have  had  regularly  the  genitive  after 
the  second  noun,  without  a  rejtetition  of  the 
article.  (Sec  W.  ^  19.  3.  c.)  Some  assume  a 
hendiadys  :  "  the  communion  in  the  breaking 
of  bread  "  (Vulg.,  Wicl.,  Blinf ).  The  analysis 
is  not  only  awkward,  but  opposed  by  the  be- 
fore breaking.  The  breaking  of  the 
bread  denotes  tlic  brcakhig  of  the  bread  as  per- 
formed at  tlie  Lord's  Supper.  (See  20  :  7,  11 ;  1 
Cor.  10  :  10.)  The  expression  itself  may  desig- 
nate an  ordinary  meal,  as  in  Luke  24  :  35 ;  but 
that  here  would  be  an  unmeaning  notice.  There 
can  be  no  doubt  that  the  Eucliarist  at  this  pe- 
riod was  preceded  uniformly  by  a  common  re- 
past, as  was  the  case  when  the  ordinance  was 
instituted.  Most  scholars  hold  that  this  was 
the  prevailing  usage  in  the  first  centuries  after 
Christ.  We  have  traces  of  that  practice  in  1 
Cor.  11  :  20,  sq.,  and,  in  all  probability,  in  v.  46, 
below.    The  bread  only  being  mentioned  liere, 


the  Roman  Catholics  appeal  to  this  passage  as 
proving  that  their  custom  of  distributing  but 
one  element  (the  cup  they  withhold  from  the 
laity)  is  the  apostolic  one.  It  is  a  case,  obvi- 
ously, in  wliich  the  leading  act  of  the  transac- 
tion gives  name  to  the  transaction  itself.  ["  The 
prayers  "  (Revised  Version)  is  a  manifest  im- 
provement on  the  Common  Version,  since  the 
Greek  article  ought  generally  to  be  represented 
in  translation.  And  Luke  refers,  without 
doubt,  to  the  services  of  prayer  which  the  dis- 
ciples held,  or,  if  not  to  distinct  services  of 
prayer,  to  the  prayers  which  held  a  very  im- 
portant place  in  their  social  meetings.  ^See 
0  :  4.)— A.  H.J 

43-47.  BENEVOLENCE  OF  THE  FIRST 
CHRISTIANS;  THEIR  JOY,  THEIR  IN- 
CREASE. 

43.  Unto  every  soul,  of  those  who  heard 
of  the  events  just  related — viz.  the  descent  of 
the  Spirit,  the  miracle  of  tongues,  the  conver- 
sion of  such  a  multitude.  (Corap.  5 : 5.) — Fear, 
religious  awe.  (See  Luke  1  :  05.) — Many,  in 
this  position,  belongs  to  both  nouns.  (See  17  : 
12.  W.  I  59.  5.)  Through  the  apostles,  as 
instruments,  while  the  power  was  God's.  (See 
V.  22  and  15  :  12.) — Were  Avrought  (imperf.), 
during  this  general  period.  [Two  or  three  re- 
marks are  suggested  by  the  statement  that  m\v- 
acles  were  wrought  ihrnur/?!  the  apostle.?.  (1)  We 
are  not  to  suppose  that  the  divine  energy  was 
literally  transmitted  through  them — /.  e.  through 
their  wills,  hands,  handkerchiefs — to  the  per- 
sons restored  by  it ;  but  we  must  infer  from  the 
narrative  that  the  miracles  were  wrought  in 
answer  to  their  believing  word,  or  at  least  were 
so  connected  with  them  as  to  ratify  tlieir 
authority  as  ambassadors  of  Christ  (3:i6;4:i0; 
9  :  34,  40).  (2)  Nearly  all  the  miracles  wrought 
at  the  apostles'  word  were  gracious.  Evil 
spirits  were  cast  out  (5 :  i6;  le :  18;  19 :  12),  the  lame 
and  the  sick  were  healed  (3 :6-io;  14:8-13),  and 
the  dead  were  raised  to  life  (9:36-40;  20:9,  10). 
The  only  exceptions  are  the  deatii  of  Ananias 
and  Sapphira  and  the  temporary'  blindness  of 
Elymas.  (3)  The  faith  which  led  the  apostles 
to  ask  for  miracles  must  have  been  distinguished 
from  that  which  tliey  possessed  in  common 
with  all  true  Christians.  It  was  a  special  t'har- 
ism,  a  prophetic  assurance  as  to  the  will  of 
God.— A.  H.J 


56 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IL 


44  And  all  that  believed  were  together,  and  "had  all 
things  common ; 

45  And  sold  their  possessions  and  goods,  and  'parted 
them  to  ail  men,  as  every  luau  had  need. 

4(5  'And  they,  continuing  daily  with  one  accord  ''in 
the  temple,  and  'breaking  bread  from  house  to  house, 
did  eat  their  meal  with  gladness  and  singleness  oi 
heart, 

47  Praising  God,  and  /having  favor  with  all  the  peo- 


44  ders  and  signs  were  done  'by  the  apostles^.  And  all 
that  believed  were  together,'and  had  all  things  com- 

4o  nion  ;  and  they  sold  their  possessions  and  goods,  and 
parted  them  to  all,  according  as  any  man  had  net^d. 

46  And  day  by  day,  continuing  stedlastly  with  one  ac- 
cord in  the  temple,  and  breaking  bread  at  home,  they 
did  take  their  lood  with  glaUness  and  singleness  of 

47  heart,  praising  uod,  and  having  favor  with  all  the 


och.  4  :  32,  34 1  Isa.  58  :  7 cell.  1  :  14 d  l.uke  24  :  53  ;  ch.  5  :  42 e  ch.  20  :  7 /  Luke  2  :  52  ;  oh.  4  :  33  ;  Rom.  14  :  18. 

lOr, through 2  .Mauy  aucieut  authorities  add  in  Jenwotem;  and  jreo* /eor  uios  upon  aiJ. 


44.  €771  TO  avTo,  not  harmonious  (Calv.,  Kuin.), 
but  together — I.  e.  they  met  daily  in  one 
place,  as  explained  in  v.  40.  (See  on  1  :  15.) — 
And  they  had  all  things  common,  looked 
npon  their  possessions  not  as  their  own,  but 
held  them  as  subject  to  the  use  of  the  church 
as  they  were  needed.  The  next  words  refer  to 
the  act  of  disposing  of  their  property,  and  hence 
these  describe  the  antecedent  principle  or  spirit 
which  prompted  the  act.  The  remark  is  de- 
fined by  ovSf  els  .  .  .  iKfyiv  .  .  .  etvoi  in  4  :  32 : 
neither  did  any  one  say,  etc. 

45.  Their  estates  (lands)  and  other  pos- 
sessions.—Them— i.  e.  the  proceeds  of  the 
sale.  (W.  ^  22.  3.) — As  any  one  from  time  to 
time  had  need,  iv,  with  the  indicative,  in  a 
relative  sentence,  denotes  a  recurring  act.  (W. 
2  42.  3.  a.)  As  this  clause  qualifies  also  sold 
(imperf.  as  done  again  and  again),  it  shows 
that  they  did  not  alienate  their  property  at 
once,  but  parted  with  it  as  occasion  required. 

46.  bfio^vtiaSov,  as  in  v.  1. — From  house  to 

house  (xaT  oiKov)  (comp.  Kara  ttoAiv  in  Tit.  1  :  5) 
— i.  e.  in  different  houses,  some  in  one,  some 
in  another,  or  perhaps  in  different  houses  suc- 
cessively (E.  v.,  Kuin.,  N'eand.),  or  at  home, 
in  private.  (See  Phil.  v.  2.)  (Olsh.,  De  Wet., 
Mey.,  Gen.  V.)  Even  in  the  latter  case  we  may 
suppose  that  they  met  in  separate  parties  at  dif- 
ferent places  ;  not  necessarily  (as  Mey.)  all  in  a 
single  place  at  once.  Both  renderings  are  just- 
ifiable. The  latter  may  be  more  exact  in  form, 
since  it  brings  out  more  strongly  an  apparent 
contrast  between  the  public  worship  and  their 
more  private  services.  [See  Jacob,  Tfie  Ecd. 
Polity  of  the  N.  T.,  p.  191,  sq.  He  remarks  on 
this  expression  that  "  the  use  of  the  singular 
number,  and  without  the  article,  shows  that 
when  St.  Luke  wrote  his  narrative  the  cttstom 
of  meeting  in  these  worship-rooms  for  united 
devotions  had  become  perfectly  common  and 
familiar;  otherwise,  he  would  have  written 
KOTO  Toil?  oIkous.  Just  as  we  would  say,  "All  the 
people  in  the  city  were  at  church,"  meaning  in 
the  different  churches  of  the  place ;  whereas  a 
stranger,  unused  to  this  citstom,  would  say 
"  they  were  in  the  churches." — A.  H.]     iv  in 


the  place  of  koto  would  have  removed  the  am- 
biguity. Neander  (Pflamung,  u.  s.  w.,  vol.  i.  p. 
36)  observes  that  a  single  room  would  hardly 
have  contained  the  present  number  of  converts. 
He  supposes  that,  in  addition  to  their  daily  re- 
sort to  the  temple,  they  met  in  smaller  comi)a- 
nies  at  different  i:)laces,  that  they  here  received 
instruction  from  their  teachers  or  one  another 
and  prayed  and  sang  together,  and  as  the  mem- 
bers of  a  common  family  closed  their  interview 
with  a  repast,  at  which  bread  and  wine  were 
distributed  in  memory  of  the  Saviour's  last 
meal  with  his  disciples.  In  conformity  with 
this  view,  breaking  bread  may  refer  to  their 
breaking  bread  in  connection  with  the  sacra- 
ment, and  did  eat  their  meat  to  their  re- 
ception of  food  for  ordinary  purposes. — With 
simplicity  of  heart,  with  childlike  affection 
toward  God  and  one  another. 

47.  Favor,  approbation  (Luke 2: 52). — Those 
Avho  are  saved,  or,  more  strictly,  are  be- 
coming saved  from  day  to  day,  since  tlie 
present  tense  denotes  a  process  going  on.  (See 
1  Cor.  1  :  18  and  2  Cor.  2  :  15.)  The  Greek 
should  have  been  the  jjerfect  participle,  to 
signify  that  they  had  already  secured  their 
salvation ;  and  the  future  participle,  to  signify 
that  they  were  certain  of  its  completion.  (See 
Green's  Gr.,  p.  28.)  The  expression  implies  a 
certainty  resulting  not  so  much  from  God's 
purpose  as  from  hitman  conduct.  The  doc- 
trine is  that  those  who  embrace  tlie  gospel 
adopt  the  infallible  means  of  being  saved. 
[The  expression  here  used,  "  those  that  were  being 
saved,"  is  in  perfect  accord  with  the  language  of 
Paul  in  2  Cor.  4  :  16  :  "  Though  our  outward  man 
is  decaying,  yet  our  inward  man  is  renewed  "  (or 
is  being  renewed)  "  day  by  day  ;"  and  in  Col.  3 : 
10:  "And  have  put  on  the  new  man,  who  is 
being  renewed  unto  knowledge  aff  er  the  image 
of  him  that  created  him."  (Comp.  2  Cor.  3  : 
18.)  Luke's  phraseology  agrees  with  the  doc- 
trine of  progressive  sanctification,  or  of  growtli 
in  grace,  rather  than  with  the  theory  of  "the 
higher  Christian  life"  as  strenuously  advocated 
by  some  at  the  present  day.  (See  the  Editor  5; 
little  vol.   entitled  The  Doctrine  of  the  Higher 


Ch.  III.] 


THE   ACTS. 


57 


pie.    And  "the  Lord  added  to  the  church  daily  such  as 
should  be  saved. 


people.    And  the  Lord  added  'to  them  day  by  day 
those  that  were  -saved. 


CHAPTER    III. 


Now  Peter  and  John  went  up  together  'into  the  tem- 
ple at  the  hour  of  prayer,  'ticiinj  the  ninth  huur. 
2  And  ''a  certain  man  lame  from  his  mother's  womb 
was  carried,  whom  they  laid  daily  at  the  gate  of  the 


1  Now  Peter  and  John  were  going  up  into  the  tem- 

2  pie  at  the  hour  of  prayer,  brin<i  the  ninth  Uniu-.  A  ml 
a  certain  man  that  was  lame  from  his  mother  s  woiiil) 
was  carried,  whom  they  laid  daily  at  the  door  of  the 


ach.  5:  14;  11  :  •il....5ch.  2  :  46....cPs.  55:  17 d  ch.  14  :  8. 1  Gr.  together.  ...2  Ot,  being  »aved 


Chr.  Life  Compared  with  the  Teaching  of  the 
Holy  Scn2)tureii.)  —  A.  H.]  — Added  (imperf. 
with  reference  to  daily)  brings  to  view  God's 
agency  in  that  acceptance  of  the  gospel  which 
ensures  salvation.  [To  the  church  is  un- 
noticed by  Hackett,  doubtless  becau.se  he  con- 
sidered it  a  gloss.  It  is  omitted  by  Lach.,  Tsch., 
Treg.,  West,  and  Hort.  after  X  A  B  C.  When 
this  is  omitted,  the  phrase  translated  together 
stands  in  the  Greek  text  at  the  close  of  this 
verse  and  just  before  the  words  Now  Peter 
and  John  (3 :  i) ;  so  that  it  may  be  joined  with 
either.  The  editors  just  named  connect  it  with 
this  verse  and  with  the  verl)  was  adding,  thus  : 
And  the  Lord  was  adding  together  day 
by  day  those  that  were  being  saved.  For 
together  the  Revised  Versit)n  has  to  them, 
and  Alf.  to  their  number. — A.  H.] 


1-10.  HEALING  OF  THE  LAME  MAN 
BY  PETER  AND  JOHN. 

1.  Together  {inl  t6  airo),  in  company.  (See 
1  :  15.)  [And  note  in  brackets  at  the  close  of 
Cliapter  II.— A.  H.]— Were  going  up,  because 
the  temple  was  on  Mount  Moriali,  and  even 
from  the  gate  where  the  miracle  occurred  (v.  3) 
a  flight  of  stci)s  led  to  the  Court  of  the  Israel- 
ites.— The  ninth.  This  was  our  three  o'clock 
p.  M.,  at  which  time  the  evening  sacrifice  was 
offered.  (See  on  2  :  15.)  The  apostles  and  other 
believers  at  Jerusalem  had  not  yet  withdrawn 
from  the  Jewisli  worship  (see  also  21  :  23,  sq.), 
and  it  is  probable  that  most  of  them  continued 
to  adhere  to  the  services  of  the  temple  until  the 
destruction  of  the  temple  abolished  them.  But 
the  spirit  with  which  they  performed  these  ser- 
vices was  no  longer  the  Jewish  spirit.  Instead 
of  regarding  their  compliance  with  the  ordi- 
nances of  the  law  as  an  act  of  merit,  they  recog- 
nized Christ  as  "  the  end  of  the  law  for  right- 
eousness to  every  one  that  believeth."  They 
viewed  the  sacrifices  which  continued  to  be 
offered,  not  as  having  any  efficacy  to  procure 
the  remission  of  sin,  or  as  typical  of  an  atone- 
ment still  to  be  made,  but  as  realized  already  in 
the  death  of  Christ,  and  lienoc  as  mementoes, 
as  often  as  they  beheld  them  or  participated  in 


them,  of  the  "one  sacrifice  for  sins"  effected 
"  through  the  offering  of  the  body  of  Jesus 
Christ."  As  in  the  case  of  circumcision,  so 
undoubtedly  the  Jewish  Christians  relinquish- 
ed the  other  rites  of  Judaism  only  by  degrees. 
They  were  brought  fully  to  this  in  part  by 
obtaining  a  clearer  insight  into  the  relation  of 
the  ancient  Economy  to  the  new,  and  in  part  by 
the  occurrence  of  national  circumstances  which 
hastened  the  result.  From  the  Jewish  syna- 
gogues, on  the  contrary,  they  must  have  sepa- 
rated at  once  as  soon  as  their  cistinctive  views 
became  known.  It  was  impossible  to  avow  the 
Christian  faith  and  remain  connected  with  those 
communities.  (Compare  the  note  on  9  :  2.)  We 
have  seen  in  the  second  chapter  that,  in  con- 
nection with  the  worship  of  the  temple,  the  be- 
lievers at  Jerusalem  maintained  separate  re- 
ligious worship  among  themselves. 

2.  [Lame  from  his  mother's  womb.  He 
was  now  above  forty  years  old  (4:22).  An  ac- 
count of  this  particular  cure  was  probably  in- 
serted by  Luke  in  his  narrative,  because  the 
lameness  was  congenital,  and  was  therefore 
deemed  more  incurable  than  any  lameness  oc- 
casioned by  disease  or  by  accident.  Hence  the 
miraculous  character  of  the  event  was  indu- 
bitable, and  the  people  were  moved  by  it. — 
A.  H.] — Was  carried  along  (relative  imperf.), 
just  then,  as  tlie  apostles  arrived. — They  laid 
is  imperf.  with  reference  to  the  custom  of  5>la- 
cing  the  cripple  here.— The  one  called  B  eau- 
tiful.  Most  interpreters  think  that  this  was 
the  gate  described  by  Josephus  {Bel.  Jiul.,  5.  5. 
3;  Antt.,  15.  11.  3)  as  composed  chiefly  of  Co- 
rinthian brass,  and  as  excelling  all  tlie  other 
gates  of  the  temple  in  the  splendor  of  its  ap- 
pearance, though  it  is  not  mentioned  by  him 
under  this  particular  appellation.  If  this  be  so, 
the  gate  then  was  on  the  east  side  toward  Olivet 
{the  eastern,  says  Jos.),  and  was  an  inner  gate 
leading  from  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles  into  the 
Court  of  the  Israelites.  It  is  not  against  tliis 
that  Josephus  speaks  also  of  this  gate  as  the  one 
without  the  temple;  for  he  must  mean  (the  term 
is  not  Upov)  the  one  exterior  to  the  temple  strictly 
SO  called,  the  sanctuary  ;  not  (as  May.)  opening 


58 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  hi. 


temple  which  is  called  Beautiful,  "to  ask  alms  of  them 
that  entered  into  the  temple ; 

•i  Who  seeing  I'eter  and  John  about  to  go  into  the 
temple  asked  an  alms. 

4  And  I'eter,  fastening  his  eyes  upon  him  with  John, 
said.  Look  on  us. 

5  And  he  gave  heed  unto  them,  expecting  to  receive 
something  oi  them. 

I)  Then  Peter  said,  Silver  and  gold  have  I  none ;  but 
such  as  I  have  give  I  thee:  'in  the  name  of  Jesus 
(.  hrist  of  Nazareth  rise  up  and  walk. 

7  And  he  took  him  by  the  right  hand,  and  lifted  him 
up:  and  immediately  his  feet  and  ankle  bones  received 
strength. 

«  And  he  "^leaping  up  stood,  and  walked,  and  entered 
with  them  into  the  temple,  walking,  and  leaping,  and 
praising  Ood. 


temple  which  is  called  Beautiful,  to  ask  alms  of  them 
3  that  entered  into  the  temple ;  who  seeing  I'eter  and 

John  about  to  go  into  the  temple,  asked  to  rtcei>e 
4 an  alms.     And  I'eter,  fastening  his  eyes  upon  liim, 

5  with  John,  said,  hook  on  us.  And  he  gave  heed 
unto   them,  expecting  to   receive   something   from 

6  them,  hut  Peter  said,  Silver  and  gold  have  1  none; 
but  what  1  have,  that  give  1  thee,     in  the  name  of 

7  Jesus  (.  hrist  of  Nazareth,  walk.  And  he  took  him 
by  the  right  hand,  and  raised  him  up:  and  imme- 
diately his  feet  and  his  ankle-bones  received  strengt  h. 

8  And  leaping  up,  he  stood,  and  began  to  walk ;  and 
be  entered  with  them  into  the  temple,  walking, 


a  Johu  9  :  8 6  ch.  4  :  10 c  Isa.  35  : 


from  without  into  the  enclosure  of  the  sacred 
precincts.  Tlie  folds  of  tliis  brazen  gate  were 
fifty  cubits  liigli  and  forty  broad,  and  were 
covered  witli  plates  of  gold  and  silver.  Luke's 
epithet  Beautiful  could  not  have  had  a  more 
pertinent  application.  Some  have  thought  that 
tlie  gate  to  which  he  refers  must  have  been  one 
of  the  outer  gates,  because  what  is  related  in  v. 
11,  sq.,  took  place  in  Solomon's  porch,  which 
was  in  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles.  But  we  may 
suppose,  as  Lightfoot  suggests,  that  the  apostles, 
having  been  with  the  lame  man  into  the  temple 
— i.  e.  the  Court  of  the  Israelites  (see  v.  8) — 
were  returning,  and  had  reached  the  Court  of 
the  Gentiles  when  the  concourse  of  the  people 
there  spoken  of  took  place. — In  order  to  ask, 
telle.  This  use  of  the  infinitive  with  toO  to  de- 
note the  object  for  which  an  act  is  performed 
(comp.  18  :  10  ;  26  :  18 ;  Mark  4  :  3,  etc.)  results 
naturally  from  the  nature  of  the  genitive  as  the 
whence-case.  The  older  writers  supplied  evexa  or 
xdpiv,  but  the  construction  is  neither  elliptical 
nor  Hebraistic.  (W.  ?  44.  4.  b. ;  S.  ?  165.  3.  2 ;  K. 
§308.  2.  b.) — Those  entering  into  the  tem- 
ple— i.  e.  the  court  where  tlie  Jews  worshipped, 
if,  as  suggested  above,  the  lame  man  sat  at  the 
gate  of  that  court.  The  temple  here  too  may 
be  the  temple  in  its  aggregate  sense  ;  not,  per- 
force, the  outer  court  (Mey.).  If  a  noun  fol- 
lows an  intransitive  verb  compounded  with  a 
preposition,  it  is  common  to  repeat  the  preposi- 
tion before  the  noun.  (See  vs.  3,  8  ;  22  : 0 ;  Matt. 
7  :  23,  etc.     W.  ?56.  2.) 

3.  Who  (os),  stands  often  where  this  one 
(oStos)  would  be  the  ordinary  contiective.  (K. 
g  334.  3.) — To  receive  (omitted  in  v.  2)  is  not 
strictly  pleonastic,  but  e.xpands  the  idea  of 
asked.  (W.  ?  63.  4.  d.)  It  is  left  out  of  some 
copies,  but  is  genuine. 

4.  Look  upon  us.  Their  object  appears  to 
have  been  to  gain  his  attention  more  fully  to 
their  words ;  so  that,  as  they  said,  "  In  the  name 


of  Jesus  Christ,"  etc.  (v.  6),  he  might  under- 
stand to  whom  he  was  indebted  for  the  benefit 
conferred  ujion  him. 

5.  iirdxfv  auTois,  sc.  TOf  vovv,  Fixcd  his  mind 
upon  them.  (Comp.  Luke  14  :  7.)  Tlie  man's 
eager  expectation  looked  through  his  counte- 
nance.— Something,  in  the  way  of  alms.  Wo 
have  no  evidence  that  he  recognized  Peter  and 
John  as  the  disciples  of  Christ  and  expected 
that  they  would  heal  his  infirmity.  Their  ad- 
dre.ss  to  him  in  the  next  verse  precludes  that 
supposition. 

6.  In  the  name—?,  e.  we  speaking  in  his 
name,  by  virtue  of  his  authority.  (Comp.  16  : 
18.)  The  language  of  Christ,  on  the  contrary, 
when  he  performed  a  miracle,  was  I  say  to 
thee,  or  to  that  effect.  (See  Luke  5  :  24.) — 
Of  Nazareth  is  added  for  the  sake  of  dis- 
tinction, as  in  2  :  22. — Walk  is  imperative 
present,  and  not  aorist,  like  rise  up,  because  it 
denotes  a  continued  act.  (Comp.  8  :  26 ;  13  :  8, 
etc.  W.  i  43.  3.  b. ;  S.  §  141.  5.)  [It  ought  per- 
haps to  be  stated  that  the  three  words  rise  up 
and  are  omitted  by  Tsch.,  West,  and  Hort, 
Revisers'  text,  and  bracketed  by  Treg.  They 
are  wanting  in  N  B  D,  and  probably  formed  no 
part  of  the  autograph  of  Luke. — A.  H.] 

7.  Having  taken  him  by  the  right  hand, 
and  thus  encouraged  him  to  obey  their  com- 
mand. (See  Mark  9  :  27.)  His  exemplifies  the 
rule  that  a  genitive  which  belongs  to  two  op 
more  nouns  usually  precedes  them.  (W.  g  30. 
3.  4.) — Feet,  ankles.  This  particularity  has 
been  reckoned  among  the  traces  of  a  j)rofes- 
sional  habit  f(jr  wliich  -Luke  is  distinguished. 
(See  on  28  :  8.) 

8.  Leaping  forth,  from  the  place  where  he 
sat,  and  up  only  as  involved  ;  not  from  his  bed 
(Mey.,  but  dropped  in  his  last  ed.),  since  sat 
(v.  10)  shows  that  he  was  not  reclining. — Stood, 
for  the  first  time  since  he  was  born  (v.  2).^ 
Walked  to  and  fro,  as  if  to  make  trial  of  his 


Ch.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


59 


9  "And  all  the  people  saw  him  walking  and  praising 

God:  ,        ,  .  ,   I    X  <•       1 

10  And  thev  knew  tliat  it  was  he  whicli  'sat  for  alms 
at  the  I5t*aiit"ifiil  gate  of  the  temple:  and  tliey  were 
filled  with  wonder  and  amazement  at  that  whieh  had 
happened  unto  him.  .      ,    ,    u  1 1 

11  And  as  the  lame  man  whieh  was  healed  held 
Peter  and  .lolin,  all  the  people  ran  together  unto  them 
in  the  porch  nhat  is  called  Solomon's,  greatly  wonder- 

VI  IT  And  when  Peter  saw  il,  he  answered  unto  the 
people,  Ye  men  of  Israel,  why  marvel  ye  at  this?  or 
why  look  ve  so  earnestly  on  us,  as  though  by  our  own 
power  or  holiness  we  had  imide  this  man  to  walk  ? 

1:3  <*The  (iod  of  Abraham,  and  of  Isaac,  and  ot  Jacob, 
the  Ood  of  our  fathers, 'hath  glorified  his  son  Jesus; 
whom  ye  /delivered  up,  ai.d  nlenicd  him  in  the  pres- 
ence of  Pilate,  when  he  was  determined  to  let  hun  yo. 


9  and  leaping,  and  praising  fJod.     And  all  the  people 

10  saw  him  walking  and  praising  (iod:  and  they  took 
knowledge  of  him,  that  it  was  he  who  sat  for  alms 
at  the  1  eautiful  (.ate  of  the  temple:  and  they  were 
tilled  with  wonder  and  amazement  at  that  which 
had  haijpened  unto  him. 

11  And  as  he  held  Peter  and  John,  all  the  people  ran 
together  unto  them  in  the  'porch  that  is  called  Solo- 

12mon's,  greatly  wondering  And  when  I'eter  saw  it, 
he  answered  unto  the  people,  Ve  men  of  Israel,  why 
marvel  ye  at  this  ^man?  or  why  fasten  ye  your  eyes 
on  us,  as  though  bv  our  own  power  or  godliness  we 

13  had  made  him  to  walk?  The  i.od  of  Abraham,  and 
of  Isaac,  and  of  Jacob,  the  (jod  of  our  lathers,  hath 
glorified  his  -'Servant  Jesus;  whom  ye  delivered  up, 
and  denied  before  the  face  of  I'ilale,  when  he  had 


ooh.  4:  16,  21.... 6  Like  John  9  :  8.... c  John  10:: 
•17  :  M;  Miiik  15  :  11  ;  Luke  23  :  18.  20,  21 ;  Joh 
in  ver.  26 ;  »  :  27,  :«.     See  Matt.  12  :  18     ' 


•  ch.  5  :  12. . .  .d  ch.  5  :  .10. . .  .e.  John  7  :  39 ;  12  :  16  ;  17  :  1 . .  - .  /  Matt    27  :  2     .  .g  Matt. 

18:40;  19:15;  ch.  13:28. 1  Or,  i)omco....2  Or,  J/iinff. . . . J  Or,  Child:  and  so 

I.^a.  42  :  1  :  52  :  13  .  53  :  11. 


newly-found  strength.— Into  the  temple,  its 
inner  part,  beyond  the  gate  where  the  hune  man 
had  been  healed.  (See  on  v.  2.)— In  walking, 
etc.,  Luke  writes  as  if  he  were  giving  tlie  recital 
of  some  eye-witne.ss. 

10.  They  recognized  him  (upon  attentive 
scrutiny,  hence  imperf.)  that  this  one,  etc. 
The  sui3ject  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  attract- 
ed here  into  the  principal  clause,  and  then  re- 
peated in  this  one.  (So  in  4  :  13 ;  9  :  20 ;  13  : 
32;  16  :  3,  etc.)  The  subject  of  the  second 
clause  becomes  in  this  way  more  prominent. 
(W.  ?  6G.  5;  B.  ^  151.1.  6.  7.)  The  ordinary 
construction  would  omit  him  after  recog- 
nized, and  make  the  sentence  after  that  the 
object  of  the  verb.— For  the  alms  which  he 
solicited. 

11-26.  THE  TESTIMONY  OF  PETER 
AFTER  THE   MIRACLE. 

11.  While  he  is  holding  them  fast,  or 
keeping  near  to  them.  This  latter  signif- 
ication, says  De  Wette,  has  not  been  fully 
proved,  but  arises  naturally  out  of  the  other. 
Meyer  adheres  more  correctly  to  the  first  mean- 
ing: the  man,  in  the  ardor  of  his  gratitude, 
clung  to  his  benefactors,  and  wotild  not  be 
separated  from  them.  He  is  considered  the 
correct  reading,  instead  of  the  lame  man 
that  was  healed  in  the  common  te.\t  (Grsb., 
Mey.,  Lchm.).  The  addition  has  been  trans- 
ferred to  the  English  Version.— Porch  .  .  . 
Solomon's.  (See  John  10  :  23.)  This  hall, 
or  porch,  was  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  temple, 
in  the  Court  of  the  Heathen.  The  general 
opinion  is  that  it  was  called  the  porch  of 
Solomon  because  it  occupied  the  site  of  a  porch 
which  had  been  connected  with  the  tirst  temple. 
Liicke'  thinks  that  it  may  liave  been  a  struc- 
ture built    by   Solomon    himself,    which    had 


escaped  the  destruction  of  the  first  temple. 
Tholuck'^  expresses  the  same  belief.  It  accords 
with  this  view  that  Josephus  (Antt.,  20.  9.  7) 
calls  the  porch  "  Solomon's  work."  In  popular 
speech,  says  Lightfoot,  the  Jews  sometimes 
meant  the  entire  Court  of  the  Gentiles  when 
they  spoke  of  Solomon's  porch.— ti really 
wondering  agrees  with  people  a-s  a  collective 
term.     (Coiiip.  5  :  16.) 

12.  Seeing  their  astonishment.— Proceed- 
ed to  speak  (Hebraistic;  see  5  :  8),  or  perhaps 
answered  unto  the  people  (De  Wet.,  Mey.), 
since  their  looks  of  wonder  seemed  to  ask  for 
some  explanation  of  the  miracle.  (See  v.  11.) 
— en-i  TouTtf)  may  be  neuter  at  this  thing  (see 
v.  10,  E.  Vv.),  but  more  probably  masculine,  at 
this  one  (Mey.,  De  Wet.),  which  prepares  the 
way  for  him,  like  the  succession  of  this  one 
and  him  in  v.  16.  [In  his  last  edition  Meyer 
considers  this  pronoun  neuter  ■-=  at  this,  refer- 
ring to  V.  10,  where  the  astonishment  and  sur- 
prise were  occasioned  by  ivliat  luul  happened  to 
the  lame  man.— A.  H.]— Upon  us,  emphatic, 
as  distinguished  from  Chri.st  or  God,  to  whom 
the  miracle  ought  to  have  tiu-ned  their  thoughts. 
— Look  ye  takes  its  object  in  the  dative  (see 
also  10  :  4 ;  14  :  9),  or  in  the  accusative  with  eis. 
(Comp.  V.  4;  1  :  10;  6  :  15.)— As  by  our  own 
(inherent  or  self-acquired)  power,  or  (since 
power  had  been  exerted)  piety,  as  the  rea.son 
of  its  being  conferred  on  them.— Had  made, 
etc. ;— having  effected  (ecbatic  infinitive) 
that  he  should  walk.  (W.  ?  44.  4;  S.  ? 
1(35.  3.) 

13.  Glorified,  honored  ;  not  by  the  miracle 
at  this  time  (Mey.),  but  by  all  the  mighty  works 
which  attested  his  mission.  (See  2  :  22.) — nalia, 
not  son  =  v\.6<!,  but  servant  =Y{.eh.  ebhedh,  whidi 
was  one  of  the  jirophetic  appellations  of  the 


1  Commentar  ilber  dns  Ei'angelium  des  Johnnnes,  vol.  ii.  p.  3G1. 
«  Commentar  zum  Evangelium  Johannes,  p.  256  (.sechste  Aullage). 


60 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  III. 


14  Put  ye  denied  "the  Holy  Onp  ''and  the  Just,  and 
desired  a  murderer  to  be  granted  unto  you ; 

15  Ai  d  killed  the  Prince  of  life,  "whom  God  hath 
raised  from  the  dead;  ''whereof  we  wre  witnesses. 

16  «AHd  his  name  through  faith  in  his  name  hath 
made  this  man  stiong,  whom  ye  tee  and  know  :  yea, 
the  faith  which  is  by  him  hath  given  him  this  perfect 
soundness  in  the  presence  of  you  all. 

17  And  now,  brethren,  1  wot  that/through  ignorance 
ye  did  it,  as  did  also  your  rulers. 


14determ'ned  to  release  him.  But  ye  denied  the  Holy 
and  Kighteous  (»ne,  and  asked  for  a  murderer  to  be 

1.5 granted  unto  you,  and  killed  the  iPriuee  of  life; 
whom  (iod  raised  from  the  dead;  ^whereof  we  are 

10  witnesses.  And  ^by  laith  in  his  name  hath  his  name 
made  this  man  strong,  whom  ye  behold  and  know: 
yea,  the  faith  which  is  through  him  hath  given  him 
this  perfect  soundness  in  the  presence  of  you  all. 

17  And  now,  brethren,  I  know  that  in  ignorance  ye 


a  Ps.  16:  10;  Mark  1  :  2t;  Luke  1  :  35 :  ch.  2  :  27  ;  4  :  27. ..  .i  ch.  7  :  52 ;  22  :  U  ;  Heb.  2;  10;  5:9;  1  John  5:11. 
2;  32....e  Matt.  9  :  22 ;  ch.  4  :  10 ;  14  :  9..../  Luke  2:)  :  34  ;  John  16  :  3  ;  uh.  13  :  27  ;  1  Cor.  2:8;  1  Tim.  1  :  13. 
2  Or,  of  whom 3  Or,  oh  the  ground  of 


]Messiah,  especially  in  the  secoitd  part  of  Isaiah. 
(See  Matt.  12  :  18,  as  compared  with  Isa.  42  :  1, 
sq.)  The  term  occurs  again  in  this  sense  in  v. 
26 ;  4  :  27,  30.— ^eV,  as  in  1  :  1.  The  antithetic 
idea  may  have  been  that  in  v.  17.— Ye  deliv- 
ered up — viz.  to  Pilate. — Denied,  refused  to 
acknowledge  a.s  Messiah. — Him.  It  will  be 
seen  that  the  writer  drops  here  the  relative 
structure  of  the  sentence. — \Vheii,or  although, 
he  decided — viz.  that  it  was  just  to  release 
him.  (See  Luke  23  :  16;  John  19  :  4.)  «eiVou 
refers  here  to  the  nearer  noun,  and  performs 
the  proper  office  of  toutov.  (W.  §  23.  1.)  It  is 
not  uncommon  for  Greek  writers  to  interchange 
these  pronouns. 

14.  But  contrasts  their  conduct  with  that  of 
Pilate. — The  Holy  One  is  a  Messianic  title,  as 
in  Luke  4  :  34. — to;-  iiKaioi/,  the  Just  One.  The 
epithets  mark  the  contnist  between  his  charac- 
ter and  that  of  Barabbas. — A  murderer,  not 
merely  a  man,  but  a  man  who  was  a  murderer. 
(See  Matt.  27  :  16,  sq. ;  Mark  15  :  7,  sq.) 

15.  But  the  Prince  of  life,  or  the  author 
of  life — i.  e.  as  De  Wette  remarks,  of  life  in 
the  fullest  sense  in  which  the  Scriptures  ascribe 
that  property  to  the  Saviour;  viz.,  spiritual  or 
Christian  life  (comp.  John  1:4;  Heb.  2  :  10), 
and  also  natural  or  physical  life.  (Comp.  John 
5  :  26;  11  :  25.)  Olshausen  and  Meyer  suppose 
the  main  idea  to  be  that  of  spiritual  life ;  but 
the  evident  relation  of  life  to  killed  shows 
that  the  other  idea  is  certainly  not  to  be  ex- 
cluded. A  terrible  aggravation  in  this  murkier 
was  that  he  whom  they  deprived  of  life  was 
himself  the  One  who  gives  life  to  all. — From 
the  dead.  The  article  is  usually  omitted  after 
*f  {nut  of),  but  inserted  after  aTrd  {from).  (W. 
^  19.) — Of  whom  (13  31),  or  of  which,  we  are 
witnesses.     (See  note  on  2  :  32.) 

16.  Upon  the  faith  in  his  name  enter- 
tained by  us — i.  e.  on  account  of  their  faith  as 
the  ground  or  condition,  God  had  performed 
this  act.  Some  construe  eni  {upon)  as  telic: 
upon  the  faith  as  the  object — i.  e.  in  order  to 
produce  faith  in  the  lame  man  and  in  others 
(Olsh.,  Hniph.).     This  latter  meaning  not  only 


strains  the  preposition,  but  overlooks  the  man- 
ifest parallelism  in  sense  between  this  clause 
and  the  following,  and  the  faith. — 'ov6fiaTo%  is 
the  genitive  of  the  object,  and  the  expression  is 
like  faith  in  God  in  Mark  11  :  22  and  faith  in 
Jesus  in  Rom.  3  :  22.  (W.  §  30. 1.)— Whom  you 
see,  entirely  restored  now  to  bodily  vigor,  and 
know,  as  a  person  who  was  formerly  infirm, 
helpless. — His  name — /.  e.  he  invoked  by  an 
appeal  to  him  as  that  which  his  name  repre- 
sents (see  on  2  :  21) — made  strong  (a  definite 
past).  The  reason  for  expressing  the  idea  in 
this  manner  is  evident  from  v.  6. — The  faith 
that  is  wrought  in  us  through  him  (De  Wet., 
Mey.,  Win.).  The  apostles  here,  it  will  be  ob- 
served, ascribe  the  origin,  as  well  as  the  efficacy, 
of  their  faith  to  Christ.  (Comp.  1  Pet.  1  :  21.) 
This  second  clause  of  the  verse  repeats  essen- 
tially the  idea  of  the  first,  in  order  to  affirm 
more  emphatically  that  it  was  not  their  own 
power,  but  the  power  of  Christ,  which  had 
performed  the  miracle. — In  the  presence  of 
you  all,  and  hence  they  must  acknowledge 
that  no  other  means  had  been  used  to  eflect  the 
miracle. 

17.  Having  set  before  them  their  aggravated 
guilt,  the  apostle  would  now  suggest  to  them 
the  hope  of  mercy.  Brethren,  Peter  says 
here,  because  he  would  conciliate  his  hearers ; 
but  in  V.  12,  where  the  object  is  reproof,  crimi- 
nation, he  says  more  formally,  though  court- 
eously, men  of  Israel.  One  of  the  marks  of 
truth  would  be  wanting  without  this  accordance 
between  the  style  and  the  changing  montal 
moods  of  the  speaker. — That  ye  acted  in  ig- 
norance— (■.  e.  of  the  full  criminality  of  their 
conduct.  They  had  sinned,  but  their  sin  was 
not  of  so  deep  a  dye  that  it  could  not  have  been 
still  more  heinous.  The  language  of  Peter  con- 
cedes to  them  such  a  palliation  of  the  deed  as 
consisted,  at  the  time  of  their  committing  it,  in 
the  absence  of  a  distinct  conviction  that  he 
whom  they  crucified  was  the  Lord  of  life  and 
glory  (see  13  :  27  and  1  Cor.  2:8);  but  it  does 
not  exonerate  thOm  fnun  the  guilt  of  having 
resisted  the  evidence  that  this  was  his  character, 


Ch.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


61 


18  But  "those  things,  which  Ciod  before  had  shewed 
'by  the  mouth  of  all  his  projihets,  that  Christ  should 
sutler,  he  hath  so  fulfilled. 

19  If  "Repent  }'e  therefore,  and  be  converted,  that 
your  sins  may  be  blotted  out,  when  the  times  of  re- 
freshing shallcome  from  tlie  presence  of  the  1-ord ;' 


18  did  it,  as  did  also  your  rulers.  But  the  things  which 
liod  foreshewed  by  the  mouth  of  all  the  i)rophels, 

19  that  his  t  hrist  sho"uld  sutler,  he  thus  fultillea.  He- 
pent  ye  therefore,  and  turn  again,  that  your  sins 
may  be  blotted  out,  that  so  there  may  eom'e  seasons 


a  Luke  24  :  «  ;  ch.  26  :  22.... i  Ps.  22;  Isa.  50  :  6;  53  :  5,  etc. ;  Dan.  9  :  26;  1  Pet.  1  :  JO,  H c  ch.  •> :  38. 


which  had  been  furnished  by  his  miracles,  his 
life,  doctrine,  and  resurrection.  TheSaviour  liim- 
self,  in  liis  dj'ing  prayer,  urged  the  same  exten- 
uation in  belialf  of  his  murderers:  "Fatlier, 
forgive  them,  for  they  know  not  what  they  do." 
Compare  also  the  language  of  Paul  in  1  Tim.  1 : 
13 :  "  Wlio  was  before  a  blasplicmer,  and  a  per- 
secutor, and  injurious ;  but  I  obtained  mercy  be- 
cause I  did  it  ignorantly  in  unbelict." — As  also 
your  rulers,  wlio  were  not  present,  and  hence 
are  distinguished  from  tliose  addressed. 

18.  But — /.  e.  wliile  they  did  tliis  they  ac- 
complislied  a  divine  purpose.— All  the  proph- 
ets, instead  of  being  talvcn  strictly,  may  be 
viewed  as  a  phrase :  the  prophets  as  a 
whole.  For  tliis  restricted  use  of  all  in  such 
general  expressions,  see  Matt.  3:5;  Marie  1  : 
37  ;  Jolm  3  :  26.  Most  of  the  books  of  the  Old 
Testament  foretell  distinctly  the  sufferings  and 
death  of  the  Messiah.  (Comp.  Luke  24  :  27.) 
Olshausen  regards  tlie  entire  history  of  the 
Jews  as  typical,  and  in  that  view  maintains 
that  all  the  ancient  prophets  prophesied  of 
Christ. — That  the  Christ  (who  was  to  eome) 
would,  or  must,  sutfer  (De  Wet.).  After 
verbs  which  signify  "to  declare,"  "believe," 
and  the  like,  the  infinitive  implies  often  the 
idea  of  necessity  or  obligation.  (W.  ?  45,  3.  b.) 
[The  true  text,  according  to  X  B  C  D  E  and 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Ilort,  Revisers' 
text,  and  others,  reads  his  Christ  instead  of 
the  Christ. — A.  H.] — So  refers  to  the  previous 
verse :  thus,  in  this  way — viz.  by  their  agency. 
(Comp.  13  :  27.)  It  is  incorrect  to  understand 
it  of  the  accordance  between  the  fulfilment  and 
the  prediction. 

19.  Repent  therefore,  since  your  guilt  is 
not  such  as  to  exclude  you  from  the  mercy  pro- 
cured by  tlie  Saviour  whom  you  have  crucified. 
— Turn — (.  e.  from  your  present  cour.se  of  cha- 
racter unto  Christ  (9:35;n:2i),  or  unto  God 
(u:  15;  15: 19).  What  is  required  here  includes 
faith  as  a  constituent  part  of  tlie  act  to  be  per- 
formed. [The  word  translated  repent  has  a  deep 
spiritual  significance.  It  is  an  exhortation,  not 
merely  to  sorrow  for  sin,  but  rather  to  a  com- 
plete change  of  mind,  in  thought,  feeling,  and 
purpose.     It  is  the  act  by  which  the  soul,  under 


the  regenerating  influence  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
renounces  self  and  trusts  in  Christ,  dies  to  sin 
and  the  law,  and  rises  to  a  new  life  in  God.  Tlie 
following  \ev\y(turn  again)  points  to  the  same 
act  of  the  soul,  but  perhaps  with  a  morc  dis- 
tinct reference  to  its  manifestation  in  conduct; 
so  that  the  order  of  thought  is  naturally  ex- 
pressed by  the  order  of  words.— A.  H.] — That 
your  sins  may  be  blotted  out,  obliterated 
as  it  were  from  the  book  or  tablet  where  they 
are  recorded,  ((^omp.  Col.  2  :  14 ;  Isa.  43  :  25.) 
— In  order  that  (tclic;  comp.  Matt.  G  :  5)  the 
times  of  refreshing  may  come — i.  e.  to  you 
personally,  that  you  may  have  part  in  the 
blessings  of  the  Messiah's  kingdom,  for  which 
men  can  be  prepared  only  by  repentance  and 
the  pardon  of  their  sins,  ai-  after  b)iu»9  followed 
by  the  conjunctive  represents  the  act  of  the 
verb  as  dependent — /.  e.  in  this  case  on  their 
compliance  with  the  exhortation.  (W.  ^42.  G; 
Hart.,  Parfik.,  vol.  ii.  p.  2S9.)  onio^  as  a  particle 
of  time,  71'hen  (as  in  E.  V.),  is  foreign  to  the 
New  Testament  idiom.  (See  Green's  Gr.,  p.  77.) 
We  must  discard  that  translatiim  here.  Schole- 
field  {Hints,^  etc.,  p.  40)  j)leads  faintly  for  re- 
taining it,  but  admits  that  the  weight  of  evi- 
dence is  against  it.  It  is  not  entirely  certain 
whether  times  of  refreshing  refers  to  the 
present  consolations  of  the  gospel,  or  to  tlie 
blessedness  which  awaits  the  followers  of  Christ 
at  the  end  of  the  world,  when  he  shall  return 
and  receive  them  to  himself  in  heaven.  The 
expression,  in  itself  considered,  would  very 
aptly  descrilje  the  i:)eace  of  mind  and  joy  which 
result  from  a  consciousness  of  pardon  and  rec- 
onciliation to  God.  So  one  class  of  commen- 
tators undei'stand  it.  Others  think  that  the 
time  here  meant  must  coincide  with  that  in 
the  next  ver.se,  and  hence  suppose  the  apostle 
to  have  in  view  Christ's  second  coming,  when 
tho.se  who  have  Iwlieved  on  him  shall  enter 
upon  their  eternal  rest  in  heaven.  (Comp.  Heb. 
4  :  9-11.)  Taken  thus,  the  image  of  the  future 
state  in  ii-ai^rfeios  is  that  of  relief  or  refreshment 
of  the  wearied  sotd  after  toils  and  sorrows,  and 
is  strikingly  similar  to  Paul's  rest,  relaxation 
— rest  which  God  allots  to  the  afflicted  in  the 
day  of  final  recompense.    (See  2  The.ss.  1:7.) 


1  Jfin/s/or  frnprnvemenlx  in  the  Authorized  Version  of  the  Xeir  Testament,  by  the  late  Rev.  James  .ScholefieUl,  Pro- 
fessor of  Greek  in  the  University  of  Cambridge,  England  (4th  ed.,  1857;. 


62 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  III. 


20  And  he  shall  send  Jesus  Christ,  which  before  was     20  of  refreshing  from  the  presence  of  the  Lord ;  and 
preached  unto  you :  that  he  may  send  the  Christ  who  hath  been  ap- 


This  is  the  interpretation  of  Chrysostom,  01s- 
hausen,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  and  otliers.  The 
order  of  the  clauses  decides  nothing  against 
the  latter  opinion,  since  it  may  be  as  natural  in 
this  instance  to  think  first  of  the  etfect,  and 
then  to  assign  the  cause  or  occasion,  as  the  re- 
verse. It  is  in  favor  of  this  opinion  that  it  re- 
fers may  come  and  shall  send  to  the  same 
period  or  event,  as  the  close  succassion  of  the 
verbs  would  lead  us  to  expect.— From  the 
presence  of  the  Lord,  since  the  blessings 
in  question  (a  Hebrew  idiom)  are  laid  up  where 
he  is  (see  2  :  28),  and  must  be  received  thence. 
liOrd,  which  may  refer  to  Christ  or  God  (see 
on  1  :  24),  applies  to  the  latter  here,  since  it 
prepares  the  way  for  the  subject  of  the  next 
verb. 

20.  And  that  (dependent  still  on  ottws)  he 
may  send  forth — viz.  from  heaven.  (See  v. 
21;  conip.  he  shall  show,  who  is  the  bless- 
ed and  only  Potentate,  etc.,  Seifei  6 /xaxapio? 
KoX  iJ.6i'o<;  6ui'd<rT>)s,  k.  t.  A.,  in  1  Tiui.  6  :  15.) — Be" 
fore  appointed  or  prepared  for  yon — i.  e. 
from  eternity.  (See  1  Pet.  1 :  20.)  Announced 
before  is  a  less  approved  reading.  Nearly  all 
critics  understand  this  passage  as  referring  to 
the  return  of  Christ  at  the  end  of  the  world. 
The  similarity  of  the  language  to  that  of  other 
passages  which  announce  that  event  demands 
this  interpretation.  The  apostle  enforces  his 
exhortation  to  repent  by  an  apjjeal  to  the  final 
coming  of  Christ,  not  because  he  would  repre- 
sent it  as  near  in  point  of  time,  but  because  that 
event  was  always  near  to  the  feelings  and  con- 
sciousness of  the  first  l>clievers.  It  was  the  great 
consummation  on  which  the  strongest  desn-es 
of  their  soul  were  fixed,  to  which  their  thoughts 
and  hopes  were  habitually  turned.  Tliey  lived 
with  reference  to  this  event.  They  labored  to 
be  prepared  for  it.  They  were  constantly,  in 
the  expressive  language  of  Peter,  looking  for 
and  (in  their  impatience  as  it  were)  hastening 
the  arrival  of  the  dn;/  of  God  (2  Pet.  3 :  12).  It  is 
then  that  Christ  will  reveal  himself  in  glory ; 
will  come  to  take  "  vengeance  on  them  that 
obey  not  the  gospel,''  "  and  to  be  admired  in  all 
them  that  believe  "  {2  Theas.  1 ;  8) ;  will  raise  the 
dead  (John  5 :  28, 29},  invcst  the  redeemed  with  an 
incorruptible  body  (Piiii.  a  ;2i),  and  introduce 
them  for  the  first  time,  and  for  ever,  into  the 
state  of  perfect  holiness  and  happiness  prepared 
for  them  in  his  kingdom.  The  ap(Mles,  as  well 
as  the  first  Christians  in  general,  comprehended 
the  grandeur  of  that  occasion.     It  filled  their 


circle  of  view  ;  stood  forth  to  their  contempla- 
tions as  the  point  of  culminating  interest  in 
their  own  and  the  world's  history  ;  threw  into 
comparative  insignificance  the  present  time, 
death,  all  intermediate  events  ;  and  made  them 
feel  that  the  manifestation  of  Christ,  with  its 
consequences  of  indescribable  moment  to  all 
true  believers,  was  the  grand  object  which  they 
were  to  keep  in  view  as  the  end  of  their  toils, 
the  commencement  and  perfection  of  their 
glorious  immortality.  In  such  a  state  of  in- 
timate sympathy  with  an  event  so  habitually 
present  to  their  thoughts,  they  derived,  and 
itmst  have  derived,  their  chief  incentives  to 
action  from  the  prospect  of  that  future  glory. 
As  we  should  expect,  they  hold  it  up  to  the 
people  of  God  to  encourage  them  in  affliction, 
to  awaken  them  to  fidelity,  zeal,  perseverance, 
and,  on  the  other  hand,  appeal  to  it  to  warn 
the  wicked  and  impress  upon  thent  the  neces- 
sity of  preparation  for  the  revelations  of  the 
final  day.  For  examples  of  this  habit,  the 
reader  may  see  17  :  30,  31 ;  1  Tim.  6  :  13,  sq. ; 
2  Tim.  4:8;  Tit.  2  :  11,  sq. ;  2  Pet.  3  :  11,  sq., 
etc.  Some  have  ascribed  the  frequency  of  such 
passages  in  the  New  Testament  to  a  definite  ex- 
pectation on  the  part  of  the  apostles  that  the 
personal  advent  of  Christ  was  nigh  at  hand ; 
but  such  a  view  is  not  only  unnecessary,  in 
order  to  account  for  such  references  to  the  day 
of  the  Lord,  Irat  at  variance  with  2  Thess.  2  :  2. 
The  apostle  Paul  declares  there  that  the  ex- 
pectation in  question  was  unfounded,  and  that 
he  himself  did  not  entertain  it  or  teach  it  to 
others.  But,  while  he  corrects  the  opinion  of 
those  at  Thessalonica  who  imagined  that  the 
return  of  Christ  was  then  near,  neither  he  nor 
any  other  inspired  writer  has  informed  us  how 
remote  that  event  may  be  or  when  it  will  take 
place.  That  is  a  point  which  has  not  been  re- 
vealed to  men  ;  the  New  Testament  has  left  ii 
in  a  state  of  uncertainty:  "The  day  of  the 
Lord  .so  cometh  as  a  thief  in  the  night ;"  and 
men  are  exhorted  to  be  always  prepared  for  it. 
It  is  to  be  acknowledged  that  most  Cliristians 
at  the  present  day  do  not  give  that  prominence 
to  the  resurrection  and  the  judgment,  in  their 
thoughts  or  discourse,  which  the  New-Testa- 
ment writers  assign  to  them  ;  but  this  fact  is 
owing  not  necessarily  to  a  difference  of  opinion 
in  regard  to  the  time  when  Christ  will  come, 
but  to  our  inadequate  views  and  impressions 
concerning  thegrandeur  of  that  occasion  and  the 
too  prevalent  worldliness  in  the  church,  which 


Ch.  III.] 


THE   ACTS. 


63 


21  "Whom  the  heaven  must  receive  until  the  times 
of 'lestitutioii  of  all  thing's,  "^wliich  (.od  hatli  spuken 
by  the  mouth  ol  all  his  holy  prophets  since  the  world 
began. 

SI  For  Moses  truly  said  unto  the  fathers,  <'A  prophet 
sliall  the  Lord  vour  t.od  raise  up  unto  you  of  your 
brethren,  like  linto  nie :  him  shall  ye  hear  in  all 
tilings  whatsoever  he  shall  say   unto  you. 

'.':i  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  //m/  every  soul,  which 
will  not  hear  that  prophet,  shall  be  destroyed  from 
among  the  people. 


21  pointed  for  you,  fvn  .lesus:  whom  the  heaven  must 
receive  until  the  times  of  restoration  ol  all  things, 
whereof  (lod  spake  by  the  nuiuth  of  his  holy  prophets 

22  that  have  been  IVoni  of  old  .Moses  indeed  said,  .V 
prophet  shall  the  Lord  (iod  raise  up  unto  you  from 
among  your  brethren,  Mike  unto  me;  to  him  shall 
ye  hearken  in  all  things  whatsoi'ver  he  shall  speak 

23  "unto  you  .\nd  it  shall  be,  that  every  soul,  which 
shall  not  hearken  to  thai  prophet,  shall  be  utterly 


ocl>.  I  :  11.. ..6  Matt.  17  :  II. ...c  Luke  1  :  JO....<i  Deut.  18 :  15,  18,  19;  ch.  7:37.- 


-1  Or,  at  be  raUed  up  me 


is  tlie  cause  or  cnnscqttcnce  of  such  deficient 
view.s.  If  modern  Christians  sympatliized  more 
fully  with  the  sacred  writers  on  tliis  subject,  it 
would  t)rinj;  both  their  conduct  and  their  style 
of  rehgious  instruction  into  nearer  correspond- 
ence with  the  lives  and  teaching  of  the  prim- 
itive e.xami>les  of  our  faith. 

21.  Whom  the  heavens,  indeed,  must 
(according  to  the  divine  i)Ian)  receive,  not 
reldui,  wliich  the  usage  of  the  verb  forbids. 
Tlujugli  the  ascension  liad  taken  i)lace,  we 
liave  it  is  necessary  (SeD,  and  not  it  was 
necessary  (e5ei)»  because  the  necessity  of  the 
event  is  a  permanent  fact.  Meyer  explains  S^l 
as  in  effect  an  imperfect,  an  instance  merely  of 
the  rhetorical  present  for  the  past.  [In  his  last 
ed.  Meyer  adopts  Hackctt's  view,  thus:  "SeJ 
does  not  stand  for  efiet,  as  if  Peter  wished  hix- 
toricdUji  to  nnrrnte  tiie  ascension  ;  but  the  present 
tense  i)laces  before  the  eyes  the  necessity  of  the 
elevation  of  Christ  into  heaven  as  an  absolute 
relation,  which  as  such  is  constantly  present 
until  the  fimoiisla." — A.  H.]  De  Wette  shifts 
tiie  iieciiliarity  of  the  expresson  from  must  to 
receive,  and  renders  whom  it  is  necessary 
the  heavens  should  receive.  lie  alleges  for 
tliis  future  sense  that  the  ascension  could  be 
vieweil  as  still  incomplete  because  it  was  so  re- 
cent. But  the  apostle,  having  just  referred  to 
Christ  as  already  in  heaven,  whence  lie  is  to  ap- 
l>ear  again  (v.  20),  would  not  be  apt  to  speak  in 
the  very  next  words  as  if  he  thought  of  him 
as  still  lingering  on  the  eartli.  Many  of  the 
Jews  believed  that  when  the  Messiah  appeared 
he  would  remain  permanently  among  men. 
(See  John  12  :  34.)  Peter  corrects  here  that 
misapprehension:  the  Saviour  must  return  to 
lieaven  and  reign  there  for  a  season  before 
his  final  manifestation.  The  iiev  (which  no 
Si  fdlows)  has  this  antithesis  in  until  the 
times,  etc.  (De  Wet.) :  Christ  would  not  be  ab- 
sent always,  but  for  a  certain  time  only;  not  in 
the  preceding  shall  send,  etc.  (Alf.),  since  that 
would  make  this  the  5«  clause,  not  the  liiv,  as  it 
is  IK1W. — Until  (diu-ing  is  incorrect)  the  times 
of  the  restoration  of  all  things — i.  e.  to  a 
state  of  primeval  ortler,  purity,  and  happiness, 


such  as  will  exist  for  those  who  have  part  in  the 
kingdom  of  Christ  at  his  second  coming.  The 
expression  designates  the  same  epoch  as  times 
of  refreshing  (Olsh.,  Mcy.,  De  Wet.).— Which 
God  spake  of,  announced.  (Comp.  v.  24.) 
The  rehitive  refers  to  times  as  the  principal 
word,  and  stands  l)y  attraction  for  oOs  or  n<pi  iiv. 
It  does  not  refer  to  all  things— the  accom> 
plishment  of  all  things  which,  etc.,  for  tlie 
word  rendered  restoration  will  not  bear  that 
meaning.— From  the  heginning.  From  the 
earliest  times  of  proplietic  revelation.  Such  a 
period  of  restoration  to  holiness  and  happiness 
is  the  explicit  or  implied  theme  of  prophecy 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the  OKI  Testa- 
ment. Some  omit  the  expression  or  put  it  in 
brackets,  but  the  evidence  for  it  preponderates. 

22.  For  here  (T.  R.  and  E.  V.)  should  be  left 
out.  Unto  the  fathers,  also,  is  supposed  to 
be  a  gloss. — fi*v  here  responds  to  5e  in  v.  24 : 
Moses  on  the  one  hand,  as  well  as  all  the 
prophets  on  the  other. — Said— viz.  in  Deut. 
18  :  IS,  sq.  The  translation  is  partly  that  of  the 
Seventy,  partly  new.  In  7  :  37,  Stephen  cites 
this  passage  as  having  the  same  import  which 
Peter  ascribes  to  it  here.  Their  mode  of  apply- 
ing it  shows  that  the  Jews  were  agreed  in  refer- 
ring it  to  the  Messiah.  That  this  was  the  cur- 
rent interpretation  may  be  argued  also  from 
John  4  :  25.  (See  Hengstenberg's  rein;trks  in 
his  Christol.,  vol.  i.  p.  07,  sq.) — Will  raise  up, 
cause  to  appear  =  Ilel).  yakrm. — Like  me.  The 
context  of  the  original  passage  (comp.  vv.  15, 
IG  with  vv.  17,  18)  indicates  that  the  resem- 
blance between  them  was  to  consist  chiefly  in 
their  office  as  mediator.  The  meaning  is : 
Since  the  Israelites  had  been  unable  to  endure 
the  terrors  of  the  Divine  Majesty,  God  would  at 
some  future  time  send  to  them  another  inetlia- 
tor,  through  whom  he  wouhl  communicate 
with  them  as  he  had  done  through  Moses 
(Heng.).  (See  also  Gal.  3  :  19;  Heb.  9  :  15.)— 
Whatsoever.     (See  2  :  21.) 

23.  Peter  interrupts  the  sentence  here  to  in- 
sert and  it  shall  be,  which  is  not  in  the  He- 
brew. It  serves  to  call  attciitinn  more  strongly 
to  what  follows. — Shall  be  utterly  destroyed 


64 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  III. 


24  Yea,  and  all  (he  prophets  from  Samuel  and  those 
that  follow  after,  as  many  as  have  spoken,  have  like- 
wise foretold  of  these  days. 

25  "Ye  are  the  children  of  the  prophets,  and  of  the 
covenant  which  (iod  made  wiih  our  fathers,  saying 
unto  Abraham,  *And  in  thy  seed  shall  all  the  kindreds 
of  the  earth  be  blessed. 

26  'Unto  you  tirst  God,  having  raised  up  his  Son 
Jesus,  ■'.sent  him  to  bless  you,  nn  turning  away  every 
one  of  you  from  his  iniquities. 


24  destroyed  from  among  the  people.  Yea  and  all  the 
Ijrophets  from  Samuel  and  them  that  followed  after, 
as  many  as  have  s])<)ken,  they  also  told  of  these  days. 

25  Ye  are  the  sons  of  the  prophets,  and  of  the  covenant 
which  God  'made  with  your  fathers,  saying  unto 
Abraham,  And  in  thy  seed  shall  all  the  families  of 

2Gthe  earth  be  blessed.  Unto  you  tirst  (iod,  having 
raised  up  his  Servant,  sent  him  to  bless  you,  in 
turning  away  every  one  of  you  from  your  iniquities. 


ach.  2  :  39;  Rom.  9  :  4,  8  ;  15  :  8;  Gal.  3  :  26 h  Oen.  12  :  3;  18  :  18  ;  22  :  18 ;  26  :  4  :  28  :  14-  Gal.  3  :  8 c  Matt.  10  :  5 ; 

Luke  24  :  47  ;  ch.  13  :  32,  33,  46 d  ver.  22 e  Matt.  1  :  21. 1  Gr.  covenanted. 


from  the  people.  This  expression  occurs 
often  in  the  Pentateuch,  where  it  denotes  tlie 
sentence  or  punishment  of  death.  Tlie  apostle 
uses  it  here  evidently  to  denote  tJie  punishment 
which  corresponds  to  that  in  relation  to  the 
soul — i.  e.  as  De  Wette  explains  it,  exclusion  from 
tlie  kingdom  of  God.  Peter  has  substituted  this 
expression  here  for  the  Heb.  edhrosh  inciiamo, 
as  rendered  in  the  Septuagint:  I  will  exact 
vengeance  from  him.  Tlie  only  ditference 
is  that  the  Heljrew  affirms  the  purpose  of  God 
to  punish,  while  the  Greek  employed  by  Peter 
defines  at  the  same  time  the  nature  or  mode  of 
tlie  punishment. 

24.  All  the  prophets,  etc.,  stands  concisely 
for  all  the  prophets  from  Samuel,  both  he 
and  they  who  followed.  The  appositional 
clause  is  here  merged  in  the  genitive.  From 
Samuel  shapes  the  construction,  instead  of  the 
remoter  prophets.  (Conip.  Luke  24  :  27.  W. 
§67.  2.)  The  literal  translation,  from  Samuel 
on,  and  those  who  followed,  involves  a 
tautology,  the  second  clause  being  comprehend- 
ed in  the  first.  Samuel  is  mentioned  next  after 
Moses,  because  so  few  prophets  appeared  in  the 
interval  between  them,  or  so  few  whose  names 
are  recorded.  Tliey  stand  in  the  .same  proxim- 
ity to  eacli  other  in  Ps.  90  :  6.  We  have  no  rec- 
ord of  all  that  the  prophets  taught,  and  the 
apostle's  assertion  here  that  Samuel  also  bore 
testimony  to  Clirist  does  not  need  to  be  con- 
firmed bj'  specific  passages. — As  many  as 
spake  (prophesied)  shows,  as  related  to  the 
next  clause  (note  likewise),  how  uniformly 
the  theme  of  a  coming  Messiah  had  been  held 
forth  in  the  instructions  of  the  ancient  messen- 
gers of  God.  Yet  the  object  may  be  to  charac- 
terize the  teaching  of  the  prophetic  order  as 
such,  and  not  of  eveiy  single  individual.  (See 
note  on  v.  18.) 

25.  Ye  are  the  sons  of  the  prophets, 
and  of  the  covenant — /.  e.  are  those  in  the 
first  case  to  whom  the  predictions  respecting 


the  Messiah  especially  appertain,  and  in  the 
second  are  those  to  whom  God  would  first  (v. 
2G)  offer  the  mercies  which  he  covenanted  to 
bestow  on  Abraham's  spiritual  seed — viz.  such 
as  believe,  and  thus  "  walk  in  the  steps  of  liis 
faith."  (See  Rom.  4  :  12.)  Sons  in  this  sense 
of  participation,  appurtenance,  is  a  common 
Hebraism.  (See  Matt.  8:12;  John  4  :  22 ;  Rom. 
9  :  4,  etc.)  Its  ordinary  significance,  sons,  de- 
scendants, would  be  incongruous  with  cove- 
nant, and  should  not  be  retained,  therefore,  in 
connection  with  prophets. — Saying,  etc. — viz. 
in  Gen.  12  :  3.  God  repeated  the  i)romise  to 
Abraham  and  the  other  patriarclis  at  various 
times.  (See  Gen.  18  :  18;  22  :  18 ;  26  :  4,  etc.)— 
In  thy  seed— viz.  the  Messiali  (v.  26),  as  one 
of  his  posterity,  agreeabh'  to  Paul's  view  in  Gal. 
3  :  16. 

26.  Unto  you.  Dependent  on  sent  (see 
13  :  26  ;  28  :  28) ;  not  for  yon,  dat.  comm.  (Mey.). 
[Meyer's  last  ed.  agrees  with  Dr.  Hackett. — A. 
H.],  dependent  on  having  raised  up. — npinov, 
first,  in  the  order  of  time.  (Coiiip.  13  :46: 
Luke  24  :  47 ;  Rom.  1  :  16.)  Here  too  Peter 
recognizes  the  fact  that  the  gospel  was  to  be 
preached  to  the  heathen.  (See  on  2  :  39.) — 
Having  raised  up,  as  in  v.  22. — TTaX&a,  ser- 
vant, as  in  V.  13.— The  E.  V.  follows  the  com- 
mon text,  which  inserts  Jesus  after  his  ser- 
vant, but  contrary  to  tlie  best  authorities 
(Grsb.,  Tsch.,  Mey.). — Blessing  applies  the 
idea  of  tlie  preceding  be  blessed  to  the  Jews, 
and  requires  you  to  be  read  with  emphasis. — 
In  turning  away,  etc.,  states  how  he  blesses 
tliem  :  in  that  he  turns  away  each  one 
from  your  sins— to  wit,  by  his  gospel,  which 
secures  the  pardon  and  sanctification  of  those 
who  accept  it.  (See  on  2  :  47.)  Tliis  verb  has 
elsewliere  an  active  sense  in  the  New  Testament. 
Some  (Kuin.,  De  Wet.)  disregard  that  usage  and 
render  in  that  each  one  turns  nway,  etc.  This  is  op- 
posed also  to  blessing,  which  represents  Christ 
here  as  the  actor — men  rather  as  recipients. 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


65 


CHAPTER     IV. 


AND  as  they  spake  unto  the  peoijle,  the  priests,  and 
the  captain  of  the  temple,  and  the  Saddiicees,  came 
upon   them, 

2  "Hoiiig  grieved  that  they  taiiglit  the  people,  and 
preached  through  Jesus  the  resurrection  from  the 
dead. 

:<  And  they  laid  hands  on  them,  and  put  them  in 
hold  unto  the  next  day:  for  it  was  now  eventide, 
•i  Howbeit  many  of  them  which  heard  the  word  be- 


1  And  as  they  spake  unto  the  people,  Ulie  priests 
and  the  captain  of  the  temple  and  the  >adducees 

2 came  upon  them,  being  sore  troubled  b  cause  ihey 
taught  the  p  ople,  atid  proclaimed  in  .Jesus  the  resur- 

3  reel  ion  from  the  dead.  Ami  they  laid  hands  on  them, 
and  put  them  in  ward  unto  the  morrow:  for  it  was 

4  now  eventide.    But  many  of  them  tuat  heard  the 


a  Matt.  22  :  28 ;  Acta  23  :  8.- 


-1  Some  ancient  authorities  read  the  ehitf  priett*. 


1-4.  THE  IMPRISONMENT  OF  PETER 
AND  JOHN. 

1.  €ire<rTi)(rai/  (came  upon)  implies  common- 
ly a  hostile  purpose.  (See  G  :  12 ;  17  :  5 ;  Luke 
20  :  1.)  The  arrest  appears  to  have  taken  place 
while  the  apostles  were  still  speaking. — The 
priests  who  officiated  in  the  temple  at  the 
time,  or  some  of  their  number.  The  jmests 
were  divided  into  twenty-four  classes,  each  of 
which  had  charge  of  the  temple-service  for  a 
week  at  a  time.  (See  1  Chron.  24  :  3,  s^. ;  2 
Chron.  8  :  14 ;  and  also  Jos.,  Antt.,  7.  14.  7.) 
The  particular  duties  from  day  to  day  were  as- 
signeii  to  individuals  by  lot.  (See  Luke  1  :  9.) 
During  the  observance  of  the  festivals  the  num- 
ber of  priests  was  increased,  as  the  labors  to  be 
performed  were  greater.  (Win.,  Rcnlw.,  vol.  ii. 
p.  273. )  It  is  possible  that  the  feast  of  Pente- 
cost (2 :  i)  had  not  yet  terminated. — The  com- 
mander of  the  temple  was  an  officer  having 
a  body  of  Lcvites  under  his  command,  who 
preserved  order  about  the  temple,  and  in  that 
respect  performed  a  sort  of  militarj'  service. 
(See  Jahn's  Archxol.,  ?  365.)  In  5  :  20  the 
Levites  so  employed  are  called  his  seiinuts. 
Josephus  speaks  repeatedly  of  this  guard  (e.  g. 
Bell.  Jud.,  6.  5.  3),  whose  commander  he  desig- 
nates in  the  same  manner.  In  2  Mace.  3  :  4  he 
is  termed  the  guardian  of  the  temple.  We  read 
of  commanders  of  the  temple  in  Luke  22  : 
.52,  which  is  best  explained  by  supposing  that 
the  temple-guard  was  divided  into  several 
companies,  each  of  which  had  its  commander, 
though  this  title  belonged  distinctively  to  the 
chief  in  command.— The  Sadducees.  The 
Sfidducces  as  a  sect,  since  those  who  acted  in 
this  instance  represented  the  spirit  of  the  party. 
(Comp.  Matt.  9  :  11 ;  12  :  14 ;  Mark  8:11;  Jolin 
8:3.)  Meyer  supposes  the  article  to  i)oint  out 
those  of  them  who  were  present  at  this  time. 
It  was  probably  at  the  instigation  of  this  class 
of  men  that  the  apostles  were  now  appre- 
hended. 

3.  Being  indignant.     Restricted  by  some 

(Mey.,   Do  Wet.)   to  the  nearest  noun,   since 

the  motive  assigned    for  the    interference    in 

preached,  etc.,  applies  only  to  the  Sadducees, 

6 


who  denied  the  doctrine  of  a  resurrection^ 
(See  23  :  8  ;  Matt.  22  :  23.)  But  perhaps  we 
may  regard  because  they  taught  the  peo- 
ple as  more  comprehensive  than  preached 
.  .  .  the  resurrection,  etc.,  instead  of  being 
merely  defined  by  it,  and  in  that  case  may 
refer  the  participle  to  the  priests  as  well  as  the 
others.  The  priests,  though  they  might  not 
share  the  hostility  of  the  Sadducees  to  the  doc- 
trine of  a  future  state  (see  on  23  :  8),  would 
naturally  be  indignant  that  their  office  as 
teachers  should  be  assumed  by  men  like 
Peter  and  John  (see  Matt.  21  :  23),  and  es- 
pecially that  the  Jesus  whom  they  themselves 
had  crucified  should  l)e  proclaimed  as  the 
Messiah.  (See  5  :  2S.)  Are  announcing  in 
Jesus  the  resurrection — i.e.  in  his  example, 
in  the  fact  of  his  alleged  restoration  to  life. 
(Comp.  ev  rjixiv  in  1  Cor.  4  :  G.)  This  is  the  best 
and  the  generally -approved  interpretation 
(Bng.,  Kuin.,  De  \Vet.,  Mey.).  Othei-s  ren- 
der ar6  announcing  the  resurrection  in 
virtue  of  Jesus,  Ijy  his  power.  (See  1  Cor. 
15  :  22.)  The  E.  Versiim,  through  Jesus, 
while  the  earlier  E.  Vv.  have  in  him,  appears 
to  express  that  meaning.  But  it  was  not  so 
much  the  general  resuiTcction  as  that  of  Ciirist 
liimself  which  the  apostles  proclaimed  at  this 
stage  of  their  ministry.  (See  1  :  22;  2  :  24;  3  : 
15,  etc.)  The  single  concrete  instance,  how- 
ever, as  the  Sadducees  argued,  involved  the 
general  truth,  and,  if  substantiated,  refuted 
their  creed. 

3.  Into  prison.  (Comp.  in  the  common 
prison,  in  5  :  18.)  This  word  denotes  a  place 
of  custody  (see  Pape,  Lex.,  s.  v.)  as  well  as  the 
act,  though  the  latter  is  the  proper  force  of 
such  a  termination.  (K.  f  233.  b.  a.)— Unto 
the  morrow,  as  the  limit.  (See  Matt.  10  :  22; 
1  Thess.  4  :  15.) — For  it  was  already  even- 
ing, and  hence  no  judicial  examination  could 
take  place  until  the  ne.xt  day.  It  was  three 
o'clock  when  the  apostles  went  to  the  temple. 
(Comp.  3  :  1.) 

4.  The  word,  the  well-known  message  of 
Christ. — iyevri&ri  =  iyevero,  became — (.  e.  in  con- 
sequence of  the  present  addition.    The  use  of 


66 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


lieved ;  and  the  number  of  the  men  was  about  five 
thousand. 

0  K  And  it  came  to  pass  on  the  morrow,  that  their 
rulers,  and  elders,  and  scribes, 

6  And  "Annas  the  high  priest,  and  Caiaphas,  and 
John,  and  Alexander,  and  as  many  as  were  of  the 
kindred  of  the  high  priest,  were  gathered  together 
at  Jerusalem. 


word  believed ;  and  the  number  of  the  men  came  to 

be  about  five  thousand. 
5     And  it  came  to  pass  on  the  morrow,  that  their 

rulers  and  elders  and  scribes  were  gathered  together 
6iu  Jerusalem;  and  Annas  the  high  priest  itui  there, 

and  Caiaphas,   and  John,   and  Alexander,  and   as 

many  as  were  of  the  kindred  of  the  high  priest. 


a  Luke  3:2;  Joba  11  : '. 


this  form  is  peculiar  to  the  later  Greek.  (W. 
§  15;  Lob.,  Ad  Phryn.,  p.  108.)— The  number 
of  the  men  who  had  embraced  the  gospel  up 
to  this  time  (Kuin.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Alf.).  (See 
1:15;  2:41.)  A  retrospective  remark  like 
this  was  entirely  natural  after  having  sjioken 
of  the  many  who  believed  at  this  time.  Some 
suppose  the  new  converts  alone  to  have  amount- 
ed to  five  thousand  ;  but  that  is  less  pi-obable, 
as  the  apostles  could  hardly  have  addressed  so 
great  a  multitude  in  such  a  place.  Men  com- 
prehends, probably,  both  men  and  women, 
like  souls  in  2  :  41.  (Comp.  Luke  11 :  31.)  An 
emphasized  or  conscious  restriction  of  the  terra 
to  men  would  be  at  variance  with  that  religious 
equality  of  the  sexes  so  distinctly  affirmed  in 
the  New  Testament.     (See  Gal.  3  :  28.) 

5-7.  THEIR  ARRAIGNMENT  BEFORE 
THE  SANHEDRIM. 

5.  Their  before  rulers  refers  to  the  Jews, 
as  implied  in  vv.  1  and  4  (De  Wet.,  Win.) ;  not 
to  the  beliavers,  as  if  to  contrast  their  conduct 
with  that  of  their  rulers  (Mey.  formerly,  but 
now  as  above) ;  and  certainly  not  to  the  apostles 
(Stiei-i). — Their  rulers,  etc.  The  Sanhedrim 
is  here  described  by  an  enumeration  of  the 
three  orders  which  composed  that  body — viz. 
the  chief  priests,  who  are  mentioned  last  in 
this  instance ;  the  elders,  or  heads  of  families ; 
and  the  scribes,  or  teachers  of  the  law.  (Comp. 
5  :  21 ;  Matt.  2;  4 ;  26  :  59.)  Rulers  designates 
the  Sanhedrists  in  general,  since  they  were  all 
rulers,  while  and  annexes  the  respective  classes 
to  which  they  belonged  :  and  (more  definitely, 
conip.  1  :  14)  the  elders,  etc.  It  was  unneces- 
sary to  repeat  the  artic^le,  because  the  nouns 
have  the  same  gender.  (W.  ?  1^-  4  ;  S.  ?  89.  9.) 
[For  an  able  though  brief  account  of  the  San- 
hedrim the  reader  is  referred  to  Kitto's  Biblical 
Oijclopeedia,  edited  by  W.  L.  Alexander,  under 
the  word  "  Sanhedrim,"  or  to  an  article  on  the 
same  topic  in  McClintock  and  Strong's  Cyclo- 
piedia,  etc.,  founded  on  the  one  in  Kitto.  Still 
briefer,  but  giving  the  principal  facts,  is  the 
article  in  Smith's  Diet,  of  the  Bible.  The  origin 
of  this  Jewish  court  is  now  generally  assigned 
to  "a  period  subsequent  to  the  Macedonian 


supremacy  in  Palestine."      "The   earliest  liis- 
torical  trace  of  its  existence,"   though    under 
another  name,  is  supposed  to  be  found  in  2 
Mace.  1  :  10 ;  4  :  44  ;  11  :  27.     Dr.  Hackett  has 
named  the   classes    of  men   which   composed 
this  great  tribunal   of  the  Jews.      They  were 
probably  distributed  as   follows :    twenty-four 
priests,    twenty-four    elders,    and    twenty-two 
scribes    or    lawyers.      Only    men    who    were 
morally   and    pliysically    without    fault   were 
eligible  to  membership.    They  must  be  middle- 
aged,  tall,  good-looking,  wealthy,  and  learned." 
They  must  also  be    fathers,   and    must  have 
passed  through  various  lower  offices.     The  first 
place  provided  for  this  council  appears  to  have 
been  a  hall  named  Gazith,  in  the  centre  of  the 
south  side  of  the  temple-court ;  a  later  one  was 
located,  it  is  said,  on  the  east  side  of  the  temple- 
j  mount. — A.  H.] — Unto  Jerusalem,  as  some 
of  the  rulers  may  have  lived  out  of  the  city 
I  (Mej'.,  De  Wet.),  especially  at  that  season  (see 
[2:1),  when  the  heat  had  begun  to  be  severe. 
!  eis  is  not  put  loosely  for  iv  (Kuin.) ;  for  the  dis- 
j  tinctive  force  of  the  prepositions  may  always 
j  be  traced,  and  the  notice  merely  that  they  as- 
!  sembled  in  Jerusalem   would  be  unnecessary. 
i  The  substitution  of  iv  (in)  for  els  {unto)  in  the 
I  text  (Lchm.,Tsch.)  is  unwarranted.  [Lach.,Treg., 
!  West,  and  Hort,  with  the  Anglo- Am.  Revisers, 
I  insert  iv  (in),  and  are  supported  by  A  B  D  E  ; 
I  while  Tsch.  (8th  ed.)    decides  for  eis  [into),  in 
agreement  with  X  P.     The  former  seems  there- 
fore to  be  much  better  sustained  than  the  latter ; 
and  there  is  nothing  in  the  context  or  structure 
of  the  sentence  recommending  one  more  than 
the  other. — A.  H.] 

6.  Those  named  here  are  prominent  individ- 
uals among  the  rulers  (v.  5),  not  a  separate 
class.  Annas  the  high  priest.  The  actual 
high  priest  at  this  time  was  Caiaphas  (see  John 
11  :  49),  but  Annas,  his  father-in-law,  had  held 
the  same  office,  and,  according  to  the  Jewish 
custom  in  such  cases,  retained  still  the  same 
title.  He  is  mentioned  first  perhaps  out  of  re- 
spect to  his  age,  or  because  his  talents  and  ac- 
tivity conferred  upon  him  a  personal  superiority. 
(See  John  18  :  13.)     It  is  entirely  unnecessary 


1  Die  Reden  der  Apostel  nach  Ordnung  und  Zasammenhang  ausgelegi,  von  Kudolf  Stier  (zwei  Bande). 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


67 


7  And  when  they  had  set  them  in  the  midst  they 
asked,  "Bv  what  power,  or  bv  what  name,  have  ye  done 
this? 

S  'Then  Peter,  filled  with  the  Holy  Ghost,  said  unto 
them,  Ye  rulers  of  the  people,  and  elders  of  Israel, 

9  If  we  this  day  be  examined  of  the  good  deed  done 
to  the  impotent  man,  by  what  means  be  is  made  whole ; 


7  And  when  they  had  set  them  in  the  midst,  they  in- 
quired. By  what  power,  or  in  what  name,  have  ye 

Sdoiie  this?  Then  I'eler,  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit, 
said  uuto  them,  Ye  rulers  of  the  people,  and  elders, 

9  if  we  this  day  are  examined  concemin};;  a  good  deed 
done  to  an  impotent  man,  'by  what  means  this  man 


a  Ex.  2:  14;  Matt.  21 :  23 ;  ch.  7  :2T....&  Luke  12:  11,  12.- 


to  charge  Luke  with  committing  an  error  here, 
as  Zeller  so  confidently  affirms.^  It  is  a  familiar 
usage  in  every  language  to  speak  of  "  the  gov- 
ernor," "  the  president,"  "  the  senator,"  and  the 
like,  though  the  person  so  termed  is  no  longer 
in  office. — John  and  Alexander.  We  know 
nothing  positive  fif  these  men  beyond  the  inti- 
mation here  that  they  were  priests  and  active  at 
this  time  in  public  affairs.  Alexander  is  an- 
other instance  of  a  foreign  name  in  use  among 


priest.  (See  on  9  :  1.)  Some  vary  the  meaning 
of  yefous,  and  translate  as  many  as  were  of 
the  class  of  the  chief  priests.  This  sense 
renders  the  description  of  the  different  branches 
of  the  Sanhedrim  more  complete,  but  assigns  a 
forced  meaning  to  the  noun. 

7.  Them — viz.  the  apostles,  last  mentioned 
in  V.  3. — In  the  midst,  before  them,  so  as  to 
be  within  the  view  of  all.  (Comp.  John  8:3.) 
It  is  said  that  the  Jewish  Sanhedrim  sat  in  a 


the  Jews.  (See  1  :  23.)     It  is  improbable  that  he    circle  or  a  semicircle,  but  we  could  not  urge  the 
was    the    Alexander    mentioned    in  Josephus    expression   here  as  any  certain  proof  of  tliat 


(Antt.,  18.  8.  1),  who  was  a  brother  of  Philo 
and  Alabarch  of  the  Jews  at  Ale.xandria.  In 
that  case  he  must  have  been  visiting  at  Jeru- 
salem, and  hence  was  present  in  the  council  as 
a  guest  only,  or  else  had  not  yet  removed  to 
Egypt.  And  as  many  as  were  of  the  pon- 
tifical family — i.  c.  those  nearly  related  to  the 
high  priests  =  pontifical  family,  embra- 
cing, as  that  title  was  applied  among  the  Jews, 
the  high  jn-iest  properly  so  called,  his  predeces- 
sors in  office,  and  the  heads  of  the  twenty-four 
sacerdotal  classes.  (See  on  v.  1.)  Many  points 
relating  to  the  organization  of  the  Sanhedrim 
are  irretrievably  obscure,  but  it  is  generally 
agreed  that  the  twenty-four  priestly  orders 
were  represented  in  that  body.  (See  Win., 
Realw.,  vol.  ii.  p.  271.)  The  attendance  of  so 
many  persons  of  rank  on  this  occasion  evinced 
the  excited  state  of  the  public  mind  and  gave 
importance  to  the  decisions  of  the  council. 
This  is  Meyer's  view  of  the  meaning.  [In  his 
last  ed.  Meyer  agrees  with  Ilackett,  saying, 
"  Besides  Caiaphas,  John,  and  Alexander,  all 
the  other  relatives    of   the  high    priest   were 


custom. — By  what  power,  efficacy;  not  by 
u'hat  right,  authority,  which  would  require 
e|ou(n'a,  as  in  Matt.  21  :  23.  (See  Tittm.,  Synm., 
p.  158.) — Or  (in  other  words)  in  virtue  of 
what  uttered  name.  This  appears  to  be  a 
more  specific  form  of  the  same  inquiry. — This 
— viz.  the  cure  of  the  lame  man.  Olshausen 
understands  it  of  their  teaching,  which  is  not 
only  less  appropriate  to  the  accompanying 
words,  but  renders  the  answer  of  the  apostles 
in  vs.  9,  10  irrelevant. 

8-12.  TESTIMONY  OF  PETER  BEFORE 
THE  COUNCIL. 

8.  ("illed  with  the  Holy  Spirit — i.  e. 
anew.  (See  v.  31 ;  2:4.)  Peter  was  thus  ele- 
vated above  all  human  fear,  and  assisted  at  the 
same  time  to  make  such  a  defence  of  the  truth 
as  the  occasion  re(iuired.  The  Saviour  had 
authorized  the  disciples  lo  expect  such  aid 
under  circumstances  like  the  present.  (See 
Mark  13  :  11 ;  Luke  21 :  14, 15.  For  the  absence 
of  the  article,  .see  on  1  :  2.) 

9,  If  we  are  examined,  as  is  confessedly 
the  case.     «i  (if),  in  the  protasis  with  the  indie- 


brought  into  the  ai^senibly."— A.  H.]  But  a  i  ative,  affirms  the  condition,  and  is  logically 
narrower  sense  of  high  priest's  kindred  equivalent  to  inti,  since.  (K.  iJ  339.  I.  a. ;  W. 
may  be  adopted.  It  appears  to  me  more  simple  ?  41.  b.  2.)  The  occasion  for  the  present  defence 
to  understand  that  John  and  Alexander  were  was  a  reproachful  one  to  the  Jews,  and  hence 
related  to  Annas  and  Caiaphas,  and  that  the  as  !  the  speaker  alludes  to   it  thus  dubiously,  in 


many,  etc.,  were  the  other  influential  members 
of  the  same  family.  That  the  family  of  Annas 
was  one  of  great  distinction  appears  in  the  fact 
that  five  of  his  sons  attained  the  office  of  high 


order  to  state  the  case  with  as  little  offence  as 
possible.  The  apodosis  begins  at  be  it  known. 
— In  respect  to  a  good  deed,  benefit  con- 
ferred on  an  infirm  man.     (Comp.  John  10  : 


1  Theolor/ische  Ja/irbuchrr  (Jahrgang  1849),  p.  60.  It  is  due  to  the  reader  to  place  before  him  some  examples  of 
this  writer's  style  of  criticism.  His  articles  on  the  composition  and  character  of  the  Acts,  published  in  dif- 
ferent numbers  of  the  periodical  named  above,  are  considered  as  remaikable  for  the  industry  and  acuteness 
which  they  display  in  setting  forth  the  internal  difficulties  that  are  sui)posed  to  embarrass  Luke's  history.  The 
articles  have  been  thrown  into  a  volume,  but  I  have  not  seen  them  in  that  form. 


68 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


10  Be  it  known  unto  you  all,  and  to  all  the  people  of 
Israel,  "that  by  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Kazareth, 
■whom  ye  crucified,  'whom  Cod  raised  from  the  dead, 
even  by  him  doth  this  man  stand  here  before  you  whole. 

11  <rhis  is  the  stone  which  was  set  at  nought  of  you 
builders,  which  is  become  the  head  of  the  corner. 

12  ''Neither  is  there  salvation  in  any  other :  for  there 
is  none  other  name  under  heaven  given  among  men, 
whereby  we  must  be  saved. 


10  is  'made  whole ;  be  it  known  unto  you  all,  and  to  nil 
the  people  of  Israel,  that  in  the  naiiieof  Je-us  Christ 
of  Isazareth,  whom  ye  crucified,  whom  Cod  raised 
from  the  dead,  even   in  -him  doth  this  man  stand 

11  here  before  you  whole.  He  is  the  stmie  which  was 
set  at  nought  of  you  the  builders,  which  was  made 

12  the  head  of  the  corner.  And  in  none  other  is  there 
salvation  :  for  neither  is  there  any  other  name  under 
heaven,  that  is  given  among  men,  wherein  we  must 
be  saved. 


och.  3  ;  6,  16 h  ch.  2  :  24 c  Ps.  118  :  22;  Is 


28  :  16;  Matt.  21  :  42 d  Matt.  1  :  21  ;  ch.   10  :  43  ;  1  Tim. 

aaved....'i  Or,  this  name 


32.)  Observe  that  neither  noun  has  the  article. 
av&piuTTov  is  the  objective  genitive.  (Comp.  3  : 
16 ;  21 :  20  ;  Luke  6:7.  S.  ?  99. 1.  c. ;  K.  §  265. 
2.  b.) — Whereby,  hoiv  (De  Wet.,  Mey.),  not  bi/ 
wham  (Kuin.).  Tlie  first  sense  agrees  best  with 
the  form  of  tlie  question  in  v.  7. — This  one. 
The  man  who  had  been  healed  was  present. 
(See  vs.  10,  14.)  He  may  have  come  as  a  spec- 
tator, or,  as  De  Wette  thinks,  may  have  been 
summoned  as  a  witness.  Neander  conjecttires 
that  he  too  may  have  been  taken  into  custody 
at  the  same  time  with  the  ajjostles. — Has  been 
made  Avhole.  The  subject  of  discourse  de- 
termines tlie  meaning  of  the  verb. 

10.  By  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  (the 
latter  appellative  here),  through  tlieir  invoca- 
tion of  his  name.  The  question  how  (v.  9)  is 
here  answered. — Of  Nazareth  identifies  the 
individual  to  whom  the  ajjostle  applies  so  ex- 
alted a  name.  (See  on  2  :  22.) — Whom  God 
raised,  etc.,  is  an  adversative  clause  after 
whom  ye  crucified,  but  omits  the  ordinary 
disjunctive.  (For  this  asyndetic  construction, 
see  W.  ?  60.  2;  K.  ?  325.)  It  promotes  com- 
pression, vivacity  of  style.  (For  the  anarthrous 
vsKpiiv,  dead,  see  on  3  :  15.) — In  this  may  be 
neuter  =  in  this  name  (Mey.);  or  masculine, 
in  this  one  (Kuin.,  De  Wet.),  which  is  more 
natural,  since  whom  is  a  nearer  antecedent, 
and  this  one  follows  in  the  next  verse  (and  so 
also  Mey.  at  present).  Stands  (E.  Y.) ;  perf.  = 
present.     (See  on  1  :  10.) 

11.  This  one — viz.  Christ,  wlio  is  the  prin- 
cipal subject,  though  a  nearer  noun  intervenes. 
(See  7  :  19.  W.  §  23.  1 ;  S.  ?  123.  N.  1.  Com- 
pare the  note  on  3  :  13.  For  the  passage  re- 
ferred to,  see  Ps.  118  :  22.)  The  words,  as  Tho- 
luck'  remarks,  appear  to  have  been  used  as  a 
proverb,  and  hence  are  susceptible  of  various 
applications.  The  sense  for  this  place  may  be 
thus  given :  The  Jewish  rulers,  according  to 
the  proper  idea  of  their  office,  were  the  builders 
of  God's  spiritual  house,  and  as  such  should 
have  been  the  first  to  acknowledge  the  Messiah 
and  exert  themselves  for  the  establishment  and 


extension  of  his  kingdom.  That  which  they 
had  not  done  God  had  now  accomplislied,  in 
spite  of  their  neglect  and  opposition.  He  had 
raised  uji  Jesus  from  the  dead,  and  thus  con- 
firmed his  claim  to  the  Messiahship;  he  had 
shown  him  to  be  the  true  Author  of  salvation 
to  men,  the  Corner-stone,  the  only  sure  Foun- 
dation on  which  they  can  rest  their  hopes  of 
eternal  hfe.  (Comp.  Matt.  21  :  42;  Luke  20: 
17.)  The  later  editors  consider  oiKo&6fi<av  more 
correct  than  oUoSohovvtwi'. — Which  became 
the  head  of  the  corner.  Predicated,  like 
that  was  set  at  nought,  of  the  stone,  as 
identical  with  this  one.  Head  of  the  cor- 
ner is  the  same  as  chief  comer  stone  in  1  Pet. 
2  :  6.  (Comp.  Isa.  28  :  16.)  It  refers,  prob- 
ably, not  to  the  copestone,  but  to  that  which 
lies  at  the  foundation  of  the  edifice,  in  the 
angle  where  two  of  the  walls  come  together, 
and  which  gives  to  the  edifice  its  strength  and 
suj^port.     (See  Gesen.,  Heb.  Lex.,  s.  rosh.  4.) 

13.  The  salvation  which  the  gospel  brings, 
or  which  men  need.  (Comp.  John  4  :  22.  For 
the  article,  see  W.  ^  18. 1.)  The  contents  of  the 
next  clause  render  it  impossible  to  understand 
the  term  of  the  cure  of  the  lame  man.  It  was 
not  true  that  the  apostles  proclaimed  the  name 
of  Christ  as  the  one  on  which  men  should  call, 
in  order  to  be  healed  of  their  diseases. — For 
neither  is  there  any  other  name.  It  has 
just  been  said  that  Christ  is  the  only  Saviour. 
It  is  asserted  here  that  he  is  such,  because  no 
other  has  been  provided. — Which  is  given, 
since  the  gospel  is  the  fruit  of  mercy. — Among 
men,  as  the  sphere  in  which  the  name  is  knoAvn ; 
not  dat.  comm.  for  men.  (See  W.  ?  31.  6.)  The 
latter  is  a  resulting  idea,  but  not  the  expressed 
one. — In  which  we  (as  men,  and  hence  true 
of  the  human  race)  must  be  saved.  It  is 
necessary.  (Sel)  is  stronger  than  it  is  lawful 
(ef«o-Tt),  and  means  not  may,  but  must,  as  the 
only  alternative,  since  God  has  appointed  no 
other  way  of  salvation.  The  apostle  would 
exclude  the  idea  of  any  other  mode  of  escape 
if  this  be  neglected.     (See  Heb.  2:3.)     [The 


1  Uebersetzung  und  Auslegung  der  Psalmen,  p.  496. 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


69 


i:i  1[  Now  wlien  they  saw  tlie  boldness  of  Peter  and 
John,  "and  ])ercvived  that  they  were  unlearned  and 
ignorant  men,  they  marvelled  ;  and  they  took  know- 
ledge of  them,  that  they  had  lieeii  with  .lesiis. 

U  And  heholding  tne  man  wliieh  was  healed  'stand- 
ing with  them,  they  could  say  nothing  against  it. 

15  But  when  they  had  commanded  them  to  go  aside 
out  of  the  council,  "they  conferred  among  themselves, 

Ki  Saying, 'What  shall  we  do  to  these  men?  for  that 
indeed  a  notable  miracle  hath  been  done  by  them  (.v 
"manifi'st  to  all  them  that  dwell  in  Jerusalem;  and  we 
cannot  deny  it. 

17  But  that  it  spread  no  further  among  the  people, 


13  Now  when  they  beheld  the  boldiie--s  of  Peter  and 
John,  and  had  prrceivcd  ihat  they  were  uiilean.ed 
and  ignorant  men,  they  marvelled:  and  ihey  took 
knowledge  of  them,  that  they  had  been  with  Jesus. 

14  And  seeing  the  man  who  was  healed  standing  with 
l.)them,  they  could  s  ly  nothing  against  it.     Hut  when 

they  had  couimarided  them  to  go  a.--ide  out  of  the 
IGciiuiicil,  they  conferred  among  themselves,  sayii.g, 
What  shall  we  do  to  these  men?  for  that  indeed  a 
notable  'miracle  hath  been  wrought  through  them, 
is  manifest  to  all  that  dwell  in  .lerusalem  ;  and  we 
17  cannot  deny  it.  Hut  that  it  spread  no  further  among 
the  people,  let  us  threaten  them,  that  they  speak 


oMatt.  11  :  -25;  1  Cor.  1  :  «....6ch.  3  :  J1....C  John  11  :  47....dcli.  a  :  9,  10.- 


-I  6r.  «t0n. 


interpretation  of  tliis  important  verse  bj'  Dr. 
Hackett  is  a  model  of  brevity  and  clearness. 
It  is  the  only  one,  I  think,  that  fully  answers 
to  the  langiitige  of  Peter.  And  the  truth  which 
it  brings  to  light  attbrds  a  perfect  explanation 
of  the  fact  that  the  apostles  made  the  Lord 
Jesus,  and  especially  his  death  on  the  cross,  the 
central  theme  of  their  preaching.  It  also  ac- 
counts for  their  zeal  in  preaching  the  word, 
and  especially  for  the  marvellous  devotion  of 
Paul  to  his  great  mission  of  carrying  "  the 
good  news"  of  salvation  through  Christ  to  the 
heathen. — A.  H.] 

13-18.  DECISION  OF  THE  SANHEDRIM. 

13.  Beliolding  (d6<opoOi'T€!)  is  the  appropri- 
ate word  here.  It  denotes  not  seeing  merely 
(like  /SAeiroi'Tes,  V.  14},  bvit  scciiig  earnestly  or 
with  admiration.  (Tittin.,  Si/nm.,  p.  121.) — 
Having  perceived,  from  intimations  at  the 
time,  such  as  their  demeiinor,  language,  pro- 
nunciation (Str.)  (ctjinp.  Matt.  2G  :  73),  or 
having  ascertained  by  previous  inquiry 
(Mey.,  Alf.).  Meyer  in  his  last  edition  pre- 
fers the  first  meaning  to  the  second.  The 
tense,  it  will  be  observed,  diffei-s  from  that  of 
the  other  iiarticipk'. — Unlearned  and  igno- 
rant, illiterate — I.  e.  untaught  in  the  lejirn- 
ing  of  the  Jewish  schools  (sec  John  7  :  15),  and 
obscure,  plebeian  (Kuin.,  Olsh.,  DeWet.).  It 
is  unnecessary  to  regard  the  terms  as  synony- 
mous (E.  v.,  Mey.,  Rob.).  Their  self-possession 
and  intelligence  astonished  the  rulers,  being  so 
much  superior  to  their  education  and  rank  in 
life.i — And  they  recognized  them  that 
they  were  with  Jesus  during  his  ministry, 
were  among  his  followers  (Wicl.,  Tynd.);  not 
had  been  (E.  V.).  Their  wonder,  says  Meyer, 
assisted  their  recollection  ;  so  that,  as  they  ob- 
served the  prisoners  more  closely  (note  the 
impcrf.),  they  remembered  them  as  persons 
whom  they  had  known  before.  Many  of  the 
rulers  had  often  been  present  when  Christ 
t;iught  publicly  (see  Matt.  21 :  23 ;  Luke  18  :  18 ; 
John  12  :  42,  etc.),  and  must  have  seen   Peter 


and  John.     That  the  latter  was  known  to  the 
high  priest  is  e.vpressly  said  in  John  18  :  15, 

14.  The  order  of  the  words  here  is  atlmi- 
rably  picturesque. — With  them — viz.  the  apos- 
tles, not  the  rulers.  (Comp.  them,  just  before.) 
— Standing  there,  and  by  his  presence,  since 
he  was  so  generally  known  (see  3  :  IG),  utter- 
ing a  testimony  which  they  could  not  refute. 
Bengel  makes  the  attitude  signiiicant:  stand- 
ing _AV"to '«/<',  no  longer  a  crii)ple. — Had  noth- 
ing to  object,  against  the  reality  of  the  mir- 
acle or  the  truth  of  Peter's  declaration. 

15.  Having  commanded  them  to  de- 
part out  of  the  council.  The  delibera- 
tions of  the  assembly  were  open  to  others, 
though  the  apostles  were  excluded ;  and  hence 
it  was  easy  for  Luke  to  a.scertain  what  was 
said  and  done  during  their  absence.  Some 
of  the  many  priests  who  afterward  believed 
(see  6  :  7)  may  have  belonged  to  the  council  at 
this  time,  or,  at  all  events,  may  have  been 
present  as  siwctators.  It  is  not  improljable 
that  Saul  of  Tarsus  was  there,  or  even  some 
of  the  Christian  party  who  were  not  known  in 
that  character. 

16.  For  that  a  notorious  miracle  -a  deed 
undeniably  of  that  character — has  been  done. 
yvuiarov  [notable),  in  the  sense  of  widehj  knoxon, 
adds  nothing  to  the  text,  since  it  merely  repeats 
the sub-sequent  manifest. — Through  them,  and 
hence  accredited  (see  on  2  :  22)  as  the  agents  of 
a  higher  jwwer. — Manifest  agrees  with  that  a 
notable,  etc.,  and  is  the  predicate  nominative 
after  iari  undei-stood. — We  are  not  able  to 
deny  it.  (See  3:9,11.)  They  would  have 
suppressed  the  evidence  had  it  been  ixissible. 

17.  That  it  (;'.  e.  the  sign)  may  not  spread. 
With  a  knowledge  of  the  miracle  the  people 
would  associate  inevitably  the  doctrine  which 
the  miracle  confirmed.  The  suljject  of  the 
verb  involves  the  idea  of  teaching,  but  it 
would  be  arbitrary  to  supply  that  word  as  the 
direct  nominative.  Some  have  supposed  the 
last  clause  in  the  verse  to  recjuire  it.  — Let  us 


Walch  maintains  this  distinction  in  his  Dissertalionea  in  Acta  Apostolorum,  p.  59,  sq.  (Jena,  1766). 


70 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


let  us  straitly  threaten  them,  that  they  speak  hence- 
forth to  no  man  in  this  name. 

18  "And  they  called  them,  and  commanded  them  not 
to  spealc  at  all  nor  teach  in  the  name  of  Jesus. 

19  But  Peter  and  .John  answered  and  said  unto  them, 
'Whether  it  he  right  in  the  sight  of  (iod  to  hearken 
unto  you  more  than  unto  dod,  judge  ye. 

'20  '^I'or  we  cannot  but  speak  the  things  which  ■'we 
have  seen  and  heard. 

21  So  when  they  had  further  threatened  them,  they 
let  them  go,  finding  nothing  how  they  might  punish 
them,  'because  of  the  people  :  for  all  men  glorified  God 
for  /that  which  was  done. 

22  lor  the  man  was  above  furty  years  old,  on  whom 
this  miracle  of  healing  was  shewed. 


IS  henceforth  to  no  man  in  this  name.  And  they 
cal.ed  them,  and  charged  them  not  to  speak  at  all 

19  nor  teach  in  the  name  of  Jesus.  But  I'eter  and 
John  answered  and  said  unto  them.  Whether  it  be 
ri}.htin  the  sightof  <i<id  to  hearken  unto  you  rather 

20 than  unto  tiod,  judge  ye:  for  we  cannot  but  speak 

21  the  things  which  we  saw  and  heard.  And  they, 
when  they  had  further  threatened  them,  let  thein 
go,  finding  nothing  how  they  might  punish  them, 
because  of  the  i>eople;  for  all  men  glorified  Ood  for 

22  that  which  was  done.  For  the  man  was  more  than 
forty  years  old,  on  whom  this  'miracle  of  healing 
was  wrought. 


acb.  5  :  40 i  cb.  5  :29. 


.cch.  1  :8;  2:  32...  .d  oh.  22  :15;  1  John  1  :  l,3....e  Matt.  21  ;  26 ;  Luke  20  :  6,  19  ;  22  :  2 ;  ch.  5:  26 
/  ch.  3  :  7,  8 1  Gr.  sign. 


severely  (lit.  with  a  threat)  threaten  them. 

Winer  (g  54.  3)  regards  this  conibi nation  of  a 
verb  and  noun  as  an  expedient  for  expre.ssing  the 
infinitive  absolute  w^ith  a  finite  verb  in  Hebrew. 
(See  Gesen.,  Ileb.  Gr.,  §  128.  3.)  But  we  meet 
with  the  idiom  in  ordinary  Greek.  (See 
Thiersch,  De  Pent.  Vers.,  p.  1G9.)  The  fre- 
quency of  the  construction  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment is  undoubtedly  Hebraistic.  [Sci'crdy,  or 
lit.  ivlth  a  threat,  is  omitted  by  the  best  editors, 
Lach.,  Treg.,  Anglo-Ain.  Revisers,  in  agree- 
ment with  K  A  B  D.  The  only  uncial  copies 
that  are  quoted  for  it  by  Tscli.  8  ed.  are  E  P. 
There  is  therefore  very  slight  reason  to  suppose 
that  it  was  written  by  Luke. — A.  H.] — Upon 
this  name,  as  the  basis  of  their  doctrine  or 
authority.    (Comp.  v.  18 ;  5  :  28,  40.    W.  §  48.  c.) 

18.  TO  (the)  before  it&iyy^a&ai  (to  speak), 
points  that  out  more  distinctly  as  the  object 
of  the  prohibition.  It  is  not  a  mere  sign  of 
tlie  substantive  construction.  (W.  §  44.  3.  c.) — 
Nor  to  teach  upon  the  name  of  Jesus 
specifies  the  part  of  their  preaching  which  the 
rulers  were  most  anxious  to  suppress.  The 
other  infinitive  does  not  render  this  super- 
fluous. 

19-22.  THE  ANSWER  OF  PETER  AND 
JOHN. 

19.  In  the  sight  of  God  (Hebraistic),  whose 
judgment  is  true,  and  which  men  are  bound 
to  follow  as  the  rule  of  their  conduct. — To 
hearken  unto,  to  obey.  (See  Luke  10  :  IG ; 
10  :  31 ;  John  8  :  47.) — niAAov,  not  more,  but 
rather.  (See5:29.)  The  question  was  whetlier 
they  should  obey  men  at  all  in  opposition  to 
God,  not  whether  they  should  obey  him  more 
or  less.     (See  further  on  5  :  29.) 

20.  For  we  cannot,  etc.  confirms  the 
answer  supposed  to  be  given  to  their  appeal  in 
whether  it  is  right,  etc.  AVe  must  obey 
God,  for  we  cannot  (morally — i.  e.  in  accord- 
ance with  truth  and  duty)  not  speak — ;'.  e. 
withhold,  suppress— our  message.    The  double 


negation  states  tlie  idea  strongly.  The  impos- 
sibility which  they  felt  was  that  of  refraining 
from  giving  publicity  to  their  knowledge;  it 
was  not  sufficient  tliat  they  taught  no  eiTor. 
To  be  silent  would  have  been  treachery. — ■ 
Which  Ave  saw  and  heard — i.  e.  during  the 
life  of  tlie  Saviour,  when  they  beheld  his 
mighty  works  and  listened  to  his  instructions. 
The  verbs  are  in  the  aorist,  not  perfect  (as  in 
E.  v.). 

21.  Having  threatened  them  further — 
i.  e.  than  they  had  done  already.  (See  v.  18.) — ■ 
Finding  nothing,  no  means,  opportunity. — 
Namely,  how,  on  what  pretence.  (Comp. 
22  :  30;  Luke  1  :  G2;  9  :  4G,  etc.)  This  use  of 
the  article  before  single  clauses  distinguishes 
Luke  and  Paul  from  the  other  writers  of  the 
New  Testament.  It  serves  to  awaken  attention 
to  the  pro[)osition  introduced  by  it.  (See  W. 
I  20.  3.) — Because  of  the  people  belongs  to 
the  participle  (Mey.),  rather  than  to  let  them 
go.  The  intervening  clause  breaks  off  the 
words  from  the  latter  connection.  The  idea, 
too,  is  not  that  they  were  able  to  invent  no 
charge  against  the  apostles,  but  none  which 
they  felt  it  safe  to  adopt,  because  the  people 
were  so  well  disposed  toward  the  Christians. 

22.  For  he  was  of  more  years,  etc.  The 
cure  Avrought  was  the  greater  the  longer  tlie 
time  during  which  the  infirmity  had  existed, 
eriv  (years)  depends  on  was  (^i^)  as  a  genitive 
of  proi>erty.  (K.  §  273.  2.  c. ;  C.  ?  387.)— Than 
forty  years,  governed  by  Tt\(i.6vtav  fmore)  as 
a  comparative.  (Comp.  25  :  G.)  De  Wette  as- 
sumes an  ellipsis  of  ;?,  which  puts  the  numeral 
in  the  genitive,  because  that  is  the  case  of  the 
preceding  noun.  Bitt  most  grammarians  rep- 
resent 1)  as  suppressed  only  after  jrAcof,  TrA6iu>, 
and  the  like.  (Comp.  Matt.  26  :  53  as  correctly 
read.  K.  ?  748.  R.  1 ;  Mt.  §  455.  A.  4.)— The 
healing,  the  act  of  it  which  constitute<i 
the  miracle;  genitive  of  apposition.  (W. 
g  48.  2.) 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


71 


23  If  And  being  let  go,  "they  went  to  their  own  com- 
pany, and  reported  all  that  the  chief  priests  and  elders 
had  said  unto  them. 

24  And  when  they  heard  that,  they  lifted  up  their 
voice  to  (iixl  with  one  accord,  and  said,  Lord,  'thou  ml 
<iod,  which  liast  made  heaven,  and  earth,  and  the  sea, 
and  all  thai  in  them  is: 

2">  Who  Ijv  the  mouth  of  thy  servant  David  hast 
said,  «\Vhy  did  the  heathen  ragej  and  the  people  imag- 
ine vain  things? 

2i)  Tlie  kings  of  the  earth  stood  up,  and  the  rulers 
•were  gathered  together  against  the  Lord,  and  against 
his  Christ. 


23     And  being  let  go,  they  came  to  their  own  com- 
pany, and  reported  all  that  the  chief  priests  and  tie 
24eldeis  had  said  unto  them.     Anil  llujy,  when  they 
heard  it,  lifted  up  their  voice  to  <.oil  with  one  ac- 
cord, and  said,  O  M.onl,  -tliou  that  didst  make  the 
heaven  and  the  earth  and  the  sea,  and  all  that  in 
25 them  is:  ^wlio  by  the  Holy  iSjjirit,  hi/  the  mouth  of 
our  father  David  thy  servant,  didst  .-ay, 
Why  did  the  (ientiles  rage, 
And  the  jieoples  ■'imagine  vain  things? 
26        The  kings  of  the  earth  .set  themselves  in  array. 
And  the  rulers  were  gathered  together. 
Against  the  Lord,  and  against  his  ^Anointed: 


och.  II  :  12 4  '2  Kings  19  :  15 c  Ps.  2  :  1. 1  Or,  itaster 2  Or,  thou  art  he  that  did  make 3  The  Greek  text  ia  thii 

clause  13  soiuewbat  uucertalD 4  Or,  tnedUale....&  Gr.  Chrut. 


23-31.  THE  APOSTLES  RETURN  TO 
THE  DISCIPLES,  AND  UNITE  WITH 
THEM    IN    PRAYER   AND   PRAISE. 

23.  Unto  their  own  friends,  in  the  faith. 
(Conip.  24:23;  Tit.  3:14.)  Nothing  in  the 
context  requires  us  to  limit  the  term  to  the 
apo.stles. — The  chief  priests  (those  of  the 
first-class)  and  the  elders.  This  is  another 
mode  of  (U'sijj;nating  the  Sanhcdrnn.    (See  v.  5.) 

24.  With  one  accord  must  denote,  as  else- 
where (i:i4;  2:46;  7:57, etc.),  a  concort  of  hearts, 
not  of  voi(;es.  If  they  all  joined  aloud  in  the 
prayer,  the  proof  must  not  l)e  drawn  from  this 
word  or  from  lifted  up  their  voice — which 
could  be  said  though  hut  one  uttered  tlie  wortis 
while  the  others  assented — but  rather  from  the 
nature  of  the  service.  The  prayer  on  this  oc- 
casion was  chiefly  praise,  and,  as  the  words 
quoted  were  so  familiar  to  all,  it  is  quite  pos- 
sible that  they  recited  them  together.  (See 
16  :  25,  and  the  remarks  there.)  Baumgarten's 
view  {Apostcl(icsc/iichte,  u.  s.  w.,  p.  93)  may  be 
near  the  truth :  the  whole  company  sung  the 
second  Psalm,  and  Peter  then  applied  the  con- 
tents to  their  situation  in  the  terms  recorded 
here. — SeinroTa  (Lord)  is  applied  to  God  as  ab- 
solute in  power  and  authority.  It  is  one  of  the 
titles  of  Christ  also.  (See  2  Pet.  2:1;  Jude  4.) 
— Thou  art  the  God,  or  thou  the  God, 
nominative  of  aildress.  The  latter,  says  Meyer, 
accords  best  with  the  fervid  state  of  their 
minds. 

25.  By  the  mouth,  etc. — viz.  in  Ps.  2  :  1,  2. 
By  citing  tliis  jiassage  the  disciples  c.vpress  their 
confidence  in  the  success  of  tlie  cause  for  which 
they  were  j)ei'secuted ;  for  it  is  the  object  of  tiie 
second  Psalm  to  set  forth  the  ultimate  and  com- 
plete triumph  of  tlie  gospel,  notwithstanding 
the  opposition  which  the  wicked  may  array 
again.st  it.  The  contents  of  tiie  Psalm,  as  well 
as  the  other  quotations  from  it  in  the  New 
Testament,  (confirm  its  Messianic  character. 
(See  13  :  33 ;  Heb.  1  :  5  and  5  :  5.) — iva  ri  (why; 


is  abbreviated  for  Iva  ri  yefjjTai  (why  is  it).  (W. 
g  25. 1 ;  K.  §  344.  R.  6.)  The  question  challenges 
a  reason  for  conduct  so  wicked  and  futile.  It 
expresses  both  astonishment  and  reproof. — 
Raged,  or,  which  is  nearer  to  the  classic 
sense,  showed  themselves  restive,  refrac- 
tory. The  aorist  may  be  u.sed  here  to  denote 
a  recurrent  fact.  (K.  §  250.  4.  b.)  The  active 
form  is  used  only  in  the  Septuagint  (Pape, 
Lex.,  s.  v.).  The  application  to  this  particular 
instance  does  not  exhaust  the  proi)hecy.  The 
fulfilment  runs  parallel  with  tlie  history  of  the 
contiicts  and  triiuuphs  of  the  cause  of  truth. 
— Peoples,  masses  of  men,  whether  of  the 
same  nation  or  of  different  nations.  Hence 
this  term  includes  the  Jews,  whom  i^vy]  would 
exclude. — Vain,  abortive,  since  such  must  be 
the  result  of  all  opposition  to  the  plans  of  .le- 
hovah. 

26.  Stood  up,  stood  near,with  a  hostile 
design,  which  results,  however,  from  the  con- 
nection, not  the  word  itself. — Assembled.  In 
Hebrew,  sat  together,  with  the  involved  idea 
in  both  ca.ses  that  it  was  for  the  ]>uri)ose  of 
C(jmbination  and  resistance. — His  Christ,  his 
Anointed  One,  answering  to  M<slii'/ii>  in  the 
Psalm.  The  act  of  anointing  was  performed 
in  connection  with  the  .setting  apart  of  a 
prophet,  priest,  or  king  to  his  office,  and,  ac- 
cording to  tlie  Hebrew  symbology,  denoted 
his  receiving  the  spiritual  gifts  and  endow- 
ments w'hich  he  needed  for  the  performance 
of  his  duties.^  (Comp.  the  note  on  0  :  G.)  The 
act  accompanied  consecration  to  the  office  as- 
sumed, but  was  not  the  direct  sign  of  it,  as  is 
often  loosely  a.sscrted.  It  is  with  reference  to 
this  import  of  the  symbol  that  the  Saviour  of 
men  is  called  The  Christ — i.e.  the  Anointed — by 
way  of  eminence,  becatise  he  possessed  the 
gifts  of  the  Spirit  without  measure,  was  fur- 
nished in  a  perfect  manner  for  the  work  which 
he  came  into  the  world  to  execute.  (See  on 
1:2.) 


1  Biibr's  SymbMk  des  MosaUchen  Calttu,  vol.  ii.  p.  171,  sq. 


72 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


27  For  "of  a  truth  against  'thy  holy  child  Jesus, 
•whom  thou  hast  anointed,  both  Herod,  and  Pontius 
Pilate,  with  the  (ientiles,  aud  the  people  of  Israel, 
were  gathered  together, 

28  "^i-or  to  do  whatsoever  thy  hand  and  thy  counsel 
determined  before  to  be  done. 

2'J  And  now.  Lord,  behold  their  threatenings:  and 
grant  unto  thy  servants,  «that  with  all  boldness  they 
may  speak  thy  word, 

SO  By  stretching  forth  thine  hand  to  heal ;  /and  that 
signs  and  wonders  may  be  done  «'by  the  name  of  *thy 
holy  child  Jesus. 

31  If  And  when  they  had  prayed,  'the  place  was 
shaken  where  they  were  assembled  together;  and 
they  were  all  filled  with  the  Holy  ijhost,  *and  they 
spake  the  word  of  God  with  boldness. 

82  And  the  multitude  of  them  that  believed  'were 
of  one  heart  and  of  one  soul :  ""neither  said  any  oj'i/ieni 


27  for  of  a  truth  in  this  city  against  thy  holy  Servant 
Jesus,  whom  th^u  didst  anoint,  both  Herod'aid  Pou- 
tiu.s  I'ilate,  wiih  the  dentiles  and  the  peoples  of  Is- 

28  rael,  were  gathered  together,  to  do  whatsoever  thy 
hand  and  thy  counsel  fnreordained  to  come  to  pass. 

29  And  now.  Lord,  look  upon  their  threatenings:  aud 
grant  unto  thy  'servants  to  s])eak  thy  word  with  all 

30  boldness,  while  thou  stretchest  forth  thy  hand  to 
heal ;   and   that  signs  and   wonders  may   be  done 

31  through  the  name  of  thy  holy  i^ervant  Jesus.  And 
when  they  had  piayed,  the  place  was  shaken  wh  re- 
in they  were  gathered  together;  and  they  were  all 
tilled  with  the  Holy  Spirit,  and  they  spake  the  word 
of  tied  with  boldness. 

.32  And  the  multitude  of  them  that  believed  were  of 
one  heart  and  soul:  and  not  one  uj  them  said  that 
aught  of  the  things  which  he  possessed  was  his  own ; 


oMatt.  26:  3;   Luke  22:2;   23:  1,  8.... ft  Luke  1  :35....c  Luke  4:  18;   John  10  :  36...  .d  ch.  2  :  23;  3  :  18.  ...e  vers.  13,    31  :  ch.  9  ;  27 ; 

13  :  46;  U  :  3;  19  :  8 ;  26  :  26  ;  28  :  :jl  :  Eph.  6  :  19 /  ch.  2  :  43  :  5  :  12 g  <ih.  3  :  6,  16 ft  ver.  27 i  ch.  2  :  2.  4;  16  :  26 k  ver. 

29....Jch.  5  :  12;  Rom.  15  :  5,  6  ;  2  Cor.  13  :  11  ;  Phil.  1  :  27  ;  2  :  2  ;  1  Pet.  3:8 m  ch.  2  :  44. 1  (ir.  bondservants. 


27.  For  illustrates  the  significance  of  the 
prophecy.  It  had  been  spoken,  not  without 
meaning:  for  in  truth,  etc.  —  After  of  a 
truth  we  are  to  read  in  this  city.  The  words 
are  left  out  of  the  E.  V.,  and  I  believe  of  all  the 
earlier  translations  into  English,  except  the  two 
made  from  the  Vulgate.  They  are  to  be  re- 
tained. They  are  found  in  A  B  D  E,  and  more 
than  twenty  others,  supported  by  the  unani- 
mous voice  of  ancient  versions,  and  many  eccle- 
siastical writers."  (See  Green's  Developed  Criti- 
cism,'^ etc.,  p.  94.) — Against  thy  consecrated 
servant.  (See  on  3  :  13.) — Didst  anoint,  with 
that  rite  inaugurate  as  king. — And  peoples 
of  Israel  (see  on  v.  25),  either  because  the 
Jews  who  put  the  Saviour  to  death  belonged 
to  different  tribes,  or  because  so  many  of  them 
had  come  to  Jerusalem  from  distant  lands  (conip. 
2  :  5),  and  so  represented  different  nationalities 
(Mey.).  It  is  not  at  all  probable  that  the 
singular  and  the  x^lural  are  confounded  here 
(Kuin.). 

28.  In  order  to  do  in  reality,  though  not 
with  that  conscious  intention  on  their  part. — 
j)  x«''p  denotes  the  power,  tj  /SouA^  the  counsel, 
purpose,  of  God.  Determined  adapts  itself 
per  zeugma  to  both  nouns.  The  verbal  idea  re- 
quired by  the  former  would  be  executed. 

29.  Lord — i.  e.  God,  which  is  required  by 
God  in  V.  24,  and  thy  servant  in  v.  30.  (Comp. 
on  1  :  24.) — Look  upon  their  threats,  in 
order  to  see  what  grace  his  servants  needed 
at  such  a  crisis.  They  jiray  for  courage  to  en- 
able them  to  preach  the  word,  not  for  security 
against  danger. — Entire,  the  utmost.  (See  13  : 
10 ;  17  :  11,  etc.)  In  tliat  sense  wis  (all)  does  not 
require  the  article.    (W.  §  18.  4  ;  K.  g  246.  5.) 


30.  In  that  thou  dost  stretch  forth  thy 
hand  for  healing,  the  effect  of  which  as  a 
public  recogniti(jn  of  their  character  on  the 
part  of  God  would  be  to  render  them  fearless  ; 
or,  as  some  ])refer,  the  construction  may  denote 
time,  while  thou  dost  stretch  forth,  etc. ;  so 
that  in  the  latter  case  they  ask  that  they  may 
declare  the  truth  with  power  as  well  as  with 
courage.  —  And  that  signs  and  wonders 
may  be  wrought  (Kuin.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.). 
The  clause  is  telic  and  related  to  stretch  forth, 
like  for  healing.  Some  make  it  depend  on 
give,  which  is  too  remote,  and  others  repeat 
in  that  after  and  (xai). — Thy  child,  or  thy 
servant. 

31.  The  place  was  shaken.  They  would 
naturally  regard  such  an  event  as  a  token  of  the 
acceptance  of  their  prayer,  and  as  a  pledge  that 
a  power  adetjuate  to  their  protection  was  en- 
gaged for  them. — Were  all  filled  with  the 
Holy  Spirit,  etc.  They  were  thus  endued 
both  with  courage  to  declare  the  word  of  God 
and  with  miraculous  power  fc^r  confirming  its 
truth.  They  had  just  prayed  for  assistance  in 
both  respects. 

32-37.  THE  BELIEVERS  ARE  OF  ONE 
MIND,  AND  HAVE  ALL  THINGS  COMMON. 

32.  li  (but),  slightly  adversative,  turns  otir 
attention  from  the  apostles  (v.  31)  to  the  church 
at  large.— The  multitude  of  those  who 
believed,  like  the  nndtitude  of  the  disciples  in 
6  :  2.  This  description  of  the  union  of  heart 
and  the  liberality  which  distinguished  the  dis- 
ciples applies  to  all  of  them,  as  the  unqualified 
nature  of  the  language  clearly  intimates.  Meyer 
supposes  tliose  only  to  be  meant  who  are  men- 
tioned as  new  converts  in  v.  4  ;2  but  the  mind 


1  A  Course  of  Developed  CrUicum  on  Passages  of  the  New  Testament  materially  affected  by  various  Readings,  by  Rev. 
Thomas  Sheldon  Green,  late  Fellow  of  Christ's  College,  Cambridge,  etc.  (London,  IS.ifi). 

-  I  am  not  surpri.sed  to  find  that  Meyer  has  corrected  this  opinion  in  his  new  edition.  [In  his  last  ed.  he 
says  :  "These— i.  e.  the  multitude,  etc.— are  designated  as  /laiiiig  bwume  btUtvers,  in  reference  to  verse  -4;  but  in 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


73 


that  aiijilit  of  the  thin<;s  which  he  possessed  was  his 
own;  but  tliey  had  all  things  conniion. 

:w  Ami  witii  "fjroat  power  gave  the  apostles  'witness 
of  the  resurrection  of  the  Lord  Jesus:  and  "great  grace 
was  upon  them  all. 

M  Neither  was  there  any  among  them  that  lacked: 
■'for  as  many  as  were  possessors  of  lands  or  houses 
sold  them,  and  brought  the  prices  of  the  things  that 
were  sold, 

:iT  «And  laid  tfifm  down  at  the  apostles'  feet:  /and 
distribution  was  made  unto  every  man  according  as 
he  had  need. 

3ti  And  Joses,  who  by  the  apostles  was  surnamed 


33  but  they  had  all  things  common.  And  with  gre:it 
power  gave  the  apostles  their  witiie.s.s  of  ihe  resur- 
rection of  the  Lord  .lesus' ;  and  great  grace  was  u.  »m 

34  them  all  I'or  neither  wa-s  there  among  them  any 
that  lacked:  for  as  many  as  were  iH>.ssessors  of  lands 
or  houses  sold  them,  and  brought  the  price-  of  the 

35  things  that  were  sold,  and  laid  them  at  the  ajMjstles' 
feet:  and  distribution  was  made  unto  each,  a  cord- 
ing as  any  one  had  need. 

3G  And  .loseph,  who  by  the  apostles  was  surnamed 
Baruabus  i,which  is,  being  interpreted,  Son  of  -ex.- 


ach.  1  :8....6ch.  1  :  22....coh.  2  :  47. 


.dch.  2  :  45 e  ver.  37;  ch.  5  :  2 /  ch.  2  :  45  ;  6  :  1.- 

add  Christ 2  Or,  cotisoiatiun. 


-I  Same  ancient  authorities 


doe.s  not  recall  readily  so  distant  a  remark. — 
ov&i  e's,  not  even  one. — Said  that  it  was  his 
own— i.  e.  insisted  on  his  right  to  it  so  long  as 
others  were  destitute.  (See  v.  34.) — Common, 
in  the  use  of  their  property ;  not  necessarily  in 
the  possession  of  it.  (Conip.  the  note  on  2  :  44, 
sq.)  "It  is  proper  to  remark,"  says  Bishop 
Blomfield,!  "that  although  an  absolute  com- 
munity of  goods  existed,  in  a  certain  sense, 
amongst  the  first  company  of  believers,  it  was 
not  insisted  upon  by  tlie  apostles  as  a  necessary 
feature  in  the  constitution  of  the  Christian 
Church.  We  find  many  precepts  in  the  Epis- 
tles which  distinctly  recognize  tlie  difference  of 
rich  and  poor   and   mark   out  the   respective 


(Grot.,  Kuin.,  Olsh.).  It  is  better,  with  De 
Wette,  Meyer,  Alford,  and  others,  to  retain  the 
ordinary  sense:  diviiie  favor,  grace,  of  which 
their  liberality  was  an  effect.  (Coiup.  2  Cor. 
9  :  14.) 

34.  For  (a  proof  of  tiioir  reception  of  such 
grace)  there  was  no  one  needy,  left  to  .suf- 
fer, among  them. — Estates,  landed  pos.se.s- 
sions.  (See  5  :  3-8;  Matt.  2()  :  3<;:  Mark  14  : 
32.) — iruAoOi'Te?  eiiepov,  sold  and  brought.  Tliis 
combination  illnstrates  the  occasitmal  use  of  the 
present  ])articiple  as  an  imperfect.  (W.  ^  45.  1. 
a.;  S.  ^  173.  2.) 

35.  Placed  them  at  the  feet  of  the 
apostles.      (See  v.  37  ;  5  :  2.)     The  frapiency 


duties  of  each  class,  and  the  apostle  Paul,  in    of  the  act  is  determined  by  that  of  the  jirevious 


particular,  far  from  enforcing  a  community  of 
goods,  enjoins  those  who  were  affluent  to  make 
a  contribution  every  week  for  those  who  were 
poorer  (i  Cor.  16:2,3).  Yet  the  spirit  of  this 
primitive  system  should  pervade  the  church 
in  all  ages.  All  Christians  ought  to  consider 
their  worldly  goods,  in  a  certain  sense,  as  the 
common  property  of  their  brethren.  There  is 
a  part  of  it  whicli  by  the  laws  of  God  and  na- 
ture belongs  to  their  brethren,  who,  if  they  can- 
not implead  them  for  its  wrongful  detention 
before  an  earthly  tribunal,  have  their  right 
and  title  to  it  written  by  tlie  finger  of  God  him- 
self in  the  records  of  the  gospel,  and  will  see  it 
established  at  the  judgment-day." 

33.  With  great  power,  with  convincing 
effect  on  the  minds  of  men.  (See  Matt.  9  :  29; 
Luke  4  :  32.)  Among  the  elements  of  this 
power  we  are  to  reckon,  no  doubt,  the  miracles 
which  the  disciples  performed;  but  the  singular 
imniber  forbids  the  supposition  that  poAver 
can  refer  to  miracles,  except  in  tliis  indirect 
manner. — Grace  some  understand  of  the  favor 
which  the  Christians  enjoyed  with  the  people 
in  consequence  of   their  liberality  (see  2  :  47) 


verb.  This  appears  to  have  been  a  figurative 
expression,  signifying  to  commit  entirely  to 
their  care  or  disposal.  It  may  have  arisen 
from  the  Oriental  custom  of  laying  gifts  or 
tribute  liefore  tlic  footstool  of  kings. — Distri- 
bution was  made.  The  verb  is  impersonal. 
— As  any  one  had  need  occurs  a.s  in  2  :  45. 

36.  Se  (and)  subjoins  an  example  in  illus- 
tration of  what  is  said  in  vv.  34,  35. — [Joses. 
Rather  Joseph,  according  to  the  oldest  MSS. 
and  the  critical  editors.  XABDE,  together 
with  the  Vulgate  and  Syriac  versions,  have  Jo- 
seph, wliile  there  is  very  little  early  autliority  for 
Joses. — A.  II.] — Barnabas  is  the  individual 
of  this  name  who  became  subsequently  so  well 
known  as  Paul's  a.ssociate  in  missionary  labors. 
(See  13  :  2,  sq.)  The  appellation  wliich  lie  rts 
ceived  from  the  apostles  describes  a  particular 
trait  in  his  style  of  preaching.  Most  supixise  it 
to  be  derived  from  Bfir-nl/hhoonh  (Syro-Chaldaic) 
— i.  e.  ".son  of  propliecy  " — but  in  a  more  re- 
stricted sense  of  the  phrase  as  equivalent  to 
son  of  consolation,  since  prophecy  in- 
cludes also  hortatory,  consolatory  discourse. 
(Comp.  1  Cor.  14  :  3.     F'or  other  conjecttires, 


such  a  way  that  it  is  not  merely  those  many  fv.  4)  that  are  meant,  but  Ihey,  and  at  the  same  time  all  others  uho 
kail  till  now  become  believers.    This  is  required  by  the  iinilliiude,  which  denotes  the  Christian  people  generally,  as 
contrasted  with  the  apostles."     Hacketf  s  interpretation  is  simple  and  sutlicient.— A.  H.] 
1  Lectures  on  the  Acts  0/  the  Apostles  (.third  edition),  p.  2S. 


74 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


Barnabas,  (which   is,   being   interpreted,  The  son   of 
consolation,)  a  Levite,  mul  of  the  country  of  Cyprus, 
37  "Having  land,  sold  U,  and  brought  the  money,  and 
laid  il  at  the  apostles'  feet. 


hortation',  a  Levite,  a  man  of  Cyprus  by  race,  hav- 
ing a  field,  sold  it,  and  brought  the  money,  and  laid 
it  at  the  apostles'  feet. 


CHAPTER  V. 


BUT  a  certain  man  named  Ananias,  with  Sapphira 
his  wife,  sold  a  possession, 

2  And  kept  back  ptiii.  of  the  price,  his  wife  also  being 
privy  to  it,  'and  brought  a  certain  part,  and  laid  U  at 
the  apostles'  feet. 

3  <^but  Peter  said,  Ananias,  why  hath  <Satan  filled 
thine  heart  to  lie  to  the  Holy  Ghost,  and  to  keep  back 
pari  of  the  price  of  the  land? 


1  But  a  certain  man  named  Ananias,  with  Sapphira 

2  his  wife,  sold  a  possession,  and  kept  back  paii  of  the 
price,  his  wife  also  being  privy  to  it,  and  brought  a 

Sceriain  part,  and  laid  it  at  the  apostles'  feet.  But 
Peter  said,  Ananias,  why  hath  Satan  filled  thy  heart 
to  'lie  to  the  Holy  Spirit,  and  to  keep  back  jjarl  of 


vers.  .34,  35;  ch.  5  :  1,  2 5  ch.  4  :  37 c  Num.  30  :  2 :  Deul.  23  :  21 ;  Eccles.  5  :  4 d  Luke  22  :  3. 1  Or,  deceive 


see  Kuinoel,  ad  lac.) — A  Levite.  He  was 
probably  a  Levite,  in  distinction  from  a 
priest — i.  e.  a  descendant  of  Levi,  but  not  of 
the  family  of  Aaron.  [See  also  the  important 
treatise  of  Samuel  Ives  Curtiss,  Jr.,  on  The  Le- 
vitical  Priests :  A  Contribution  to  the  Criticism  of 
the  Pentateuch,  which,  in  addition  to  its  value 
as  a  defence  of  tlie  Mosaic  origin  of  the  Penta- 
teuch, sets  forth  very  clearly  the  principal  facts 
pertaining  to  the  priests  and  the  Levites. — A.  H.] 
— Cypriote  by  race  describes  him  as  a  Jew 
born  in  Cyprus.     (Comp.  18  :  2,  24.) 

37.  He  having  land.  It  is  not  said  that 
this  estate  was  in  Cyprus,  but  that  is  natu:ally 
inferred.  The  Levites,  as  a  tribe,  had  no  r;-art 
in  the  general  division  of  Canaan  (see  Nvmi. 
18  :  20) ;  but  tliat  exclusion  did  not  destroy  the 
right  of  individual  ownersiiip'  within  the  forty- 
eight  cities  and  the  territory  adjacent  to  them, 
which  were  assigned  to  the  Levites  (Num.  35 :  --a). 
(Comp.,  e.  g.,  Lev.  25  :  32;  Jer.  32  :  8.)  After 
the  Exile  they  would  naturally  exercise  the 
same  right  even  out  of  Palestine.  —  The 
money,  which  is  the  proper  sense  of  the 
plural.     (Comp.  8  :  18-20;  24  :  26.) 


1-11.  THE  FALSEHOOD  OF  ANANIAS 
AND   SAPPHIRA,  AND   THEIR  DEATH. 

1.  We  enter  on  a  new  chapter  here  in  a  two- 
fold sense  of  the  expression.  As  Olshausen  re- 
marks, "  the  history  of  the  infant  church  has 
presented  hitherto  an  image  of  unsullied  light ; 
it  is  now  for  the  first  time  that  a  shadow  falls 
upon  it.  We  can  imagine  that  a  sort  of  holy 
emulation  had  sprung  up  among  the  first 
Christians ;  that  they  vied  with  each  other  in 
testifying  their  readiness  to  part  with  every- 
thing superfluous  in  their  possession,  and  to 
devote  it  to  the  wants  of  the  church.  This 
zeal  now  bore  away  some,  among  others,  wlio 
had  not  yet  been  freed  in  their  hearts  from  the 
predominant  love  of  earthly  things.     Such  a 


person  was  Ananias,  who,  having  sold  a  portion 
of  his  pr(jperty,  kept  back  a  part  of  the  UKjney 
which  he  received  for  it.  The  root  of  his  sin 
lay  in  his  vanity,  his  ostentation.  He  coveted 
the  reputation  of  ai^pearing  to  be  as  disinterest- 
ed as  the  others,  while  at  heart  he  was  still  the 
slave  of  Mammon,  and  so  must  seek  to  gain  by 
hypocrisy  what  he  could  not  deserve  by  his 
benevolence." — But  puts  the  conduct  of  An- 
anias in  contrast  with  that  of  Barnabas  and  the 
other  Christians. — A  possession,  of  the  na- 
ture defined  in  v.  3. 

2.  Kepi  back — reserved  for  himself— from 
the  price.  The  genitive,  which  in  classical 
Greek  usually  follows  a  partitive  verb  like  this 
(K.  §  271.  2),  depends  oftener  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment on  a  preposition.  (W.  ^  30.  7.  c.) — Being 
conscious  of  it  to  herself,  aware  of  the  res- 
ervation just  mentioned  (comp.  v.  9.) ;  not  know- 
ing it  as  well  as  he,  since  it  is  the  object  of  also 
to  hint  the  collusion  of  the  parties. — A  certain 
part,  which  he  pretended  was  all  he  had  re- 
ceived. 

3.  Why  demands  a  reason  for  his  yielding 
to  a  temptation  which  he  ought  to  have  re- 
pielled.  The  question  recognizes  his  freedom 
of  action.  (Comp.  James  4  :  7.)  The  sin  is 
charged  upon  him  as  his  own  act  m  the  next 
verse.  —  Has  filled,  possessed,  thy  heart. 
(Comp.  John  13  :  27.)— That  thou  shouldst 
deceive  the  Holy  Spirit — /.  e.  the  apostles, 
to  whom  God  revealed  himself  by  the  Spirit. 
The  infinitive  is  telic  [denoting  purpose,  in 
order  that]  (Mey.,  De  Wet.),  and  the  purpose 
is  predicated,  not  of  Ananias,  but  of  the 
tempter.  Satan's  object  wtis  to  instigate  to 
the  act,  and  that  he  accomplished.  Some  make 
the  infinitive  ecbatic  [denoting  result,  or  that], 
and,  as  the  intention  of  Ananias  was  frustrated, 
must  then  render  that  thou  shouldst  at- 
tempt to  deceive.  This  is  forced  and  un- 
necessary.—  The  land,  the  estate,  field. 
(See  4  :  34.) 


1  See  Saalschiitz,  Das  Musaische  Recht,  vol.  i.  p.  149. 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


75 


4  Whiles  it  remained,  was  it  not  thine  own?  and 
after  it  was  sold,  was  it  not  in  thine  own  power?  why 
hast  thou  contrived  this  thing  in  thine  heart?  thou 
hast  not  lied  unto  men,  but  unto  tiod. 

5  And  Ananias  hearing  these  words  "fell  down,  and 
gave  up  the  ghost:  and  gre.it  fear  came  on  all  them 
that  heard  these  things. 

6  And  the  young  men  arose,  'wound  him  up,  and 
carried  lUm  out,  and  buried  him. 


4  the  price  of  the  land?  While  it  remained,  did  it  not 
remain  thine  own  .'  and  after  it  was  .sold,  was  it  not 
in  thy  power?  How  is  it  that  thou  hast  conceived 
this  thing  in  thy  heart?  thou  hast  not  lied  unto  men, 

5  but  unto  >jod.  And  Ananias  hearing  these  words  fed 
down  and  gave  up  the  ghost :  and  great  fear  came 

Cupon  all  that  heard  it.  And  the  'young  men  aro.-e 
and  wrapi»ed  him  round,  and  they  carried  him  out 
and  buried  him. 


overs.  10,  11. ...6  John  19  :  40.- 


-1  Gr.  younger. 


4.  Did  it  not,  while  it  remained  unsokl, 
remain  to  you  a.s  yotir  own  property?  and 
when  sold  was  it  not—/,  e.  the  money  re- 
ceived for  it— in  your  own  power?  This 
language  makes  it  evident  that  the  community 
of  goods,  as  it  existed  in  the  church  at  Jeru- 
salem, was  purely  a  voluntary  thing,  and  not 
required  by  the  apostles.  Ananias  was  not 
censured  because  he  had  not  surrendered  his 
entire  property,  but  for  falseliood  in  professing 
to  have  done  so  when  he  had  not. — rl  on  stands 
concisely  for  ri  i<ni.v  on,  as  in  v.  9 ;  Mark  2  :  16 ; 
Luke  2  :  40  (Frtz.,  :Mey.,  De  Wet.).  It  is  a 
classical  idiom,  but  not  common.  —  Didst 
thou  put  in  thy  heart?  conceive  the  tiling. 
(Comp.  19  :  21.)  Tl^e  expression  has  a  Hebra- 
istic coloring  (comp.  sem  al-lcbh  in  Dan.  1  :  8 
and  Mai.  2:2),  though  not  unlike  the  Homeric 
£»-  <t>pe<T\  t>€<ri>at.  The  aorist  (not  perf.,  as  in  E. 
V.)  represents  the  wicked  thought  as  consum- 
mated.—Thou  hast  not  lied,  etc.,  is  an  in- 
tensive way  of  saying  that  the  peculiar  enor- 
mity of  his  sin  consisted  in  its  being  committed 
against  God.  David  takes  the  same  view  of  his 
guilt  in  Ps.  51  :  6.  Ananias  had  attempted  to 
deceive  men  as  well  as  (Jod;  but  that  aspect 
of  his  conduct  was  so  unimportant,  in  compar- 
ison with  the  other,  that  it  is  overlooked,  de- 
nied. (Comp.  Matt.  10  :  20 ;  1  Tliess.  4  :  8.  See 
W.  'i  59.  8.  b.)  It  is  logically  correct  to  trans- 
late not  so  much  ...  as,  but  is  incorrect  in 
form  and  less  forcible.  Hast  lied  governs  the 
dative  here,  as  in  the  Septuagint,  but  never  in 
the  classics.     (W.  ?  31.  5.) 

5.  Lit.  breathed  out  his  soul,  crpired. — 
And  great  fear  came  upon  all,  etc.  Luke 
repeats  this  remark  in  v.  11.  It  applies  here 
to  the  first  death  only,  the  report  of  which 
spread  rapidly  and  produced  everywhere  the 
natural  effect  of  so  awful  a  judgment.  Some 
editoi-s  (Lchm.,  Mey.,  Tsch.)  strike  out  these 
things  after  heard.  It  is  wanting  in  A  B  D, 
Vulg.,  ct  «/.,  and  may  have  been  inserted  from 
V.  11.  [It  is  also  wanting  in  N  and  is  rejected 
by  Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  Anglo-Am.  Revisers, 
but  is  retained  by  West,  and  Hort.— A.  H.] 
If  it  be  genuine,  however,  it  may  refer  to  a 
single  event,  especially  when  that  is  viewed 


in  connection  with  its  attendant  circumstances. 
The  plural  does  not  show  that  the  writer  would 
include  also  the  death  of  Sapphira— i.  e.  that 
he  speaks  here  proleptically— which  is  De 
Wette's  view. 

6.  The  younger  men  =  young  men  (vecwi- 
(TKoi)  in  V.  10.  They  were  prolxihly  the  younger 
men  in  the  assembly,  in  distinction  from  the 
older  (Neand.,  De  Wet.,  Alf.).  It  devolved  on 
them  naturally  to  perfjrm  this  service,  both  on 
account  of  their  greater  activity  and  out  of  re- 
spect to  their  superiors  in  age.  So  also  Walch 
decides  {Disscrtationcs,  etc.,  p.  79,  s</.).  Some 
have  conjectured  (Kuin.,  Olsh.,  Mey.)  that  they 
were  a  class  of  regular  assistants  or  offuiers  in 
the  church.  That  opinion  has  no  sujiport,  un- 
less it  be  favored  by  this  pa.ssage. — avveanikav 
(wound  .  .  .  up)  is  less  certain  than  has  been 
commonly  supposed.  The  E.  V.  renders  wound 
ly;  shrouded  or  covered,  which  is  adopted  also 
by  Kuin.,  De  Wet.,  Alf.,  anil  others.  Host  and 
Palm  (Lex.,  s.  v.)  recognize  this  as  the  last  of 
their  definitions,  but  rely  for  it  quite  entirely 
on  this  passage  and  Eurip.,  Trorul.,  382.  Walch 
{Dissertationes,  etc.,  p.  79,  ,sr/.)  argues  in  favor  of 
this  signification,  and  with  success,  if  it  be  true, 
according  to  his  assumption,  that  Trepio-Tc'AAeii'  and 
(ro(TTiKK€iv  denote  the  same  thing  as  used  of  the 
rites  of  burial.  The  Vulgate  has  amoverunt, 
which  the  older  E.  Vv.  appear  to  have  followed : 
thus,  moved  awaij  (Wicl.);  put  apart  (Tynd., 
Cranm.)  ;  took  apart  (Gen.) ;  removed  (Rhem.). 
This  sense  is  too  remote  from  any  legitimate 
use  of  the  verb  to  be  defendetl.  A  third  ex- 
planation, which  kei>ps  neiirer  both  to  the  ety- 
mology and  the  ordinary  meaning,  is  placed 
together— laid  out  or  composeii — his  stiffened 
limbs,  so  as  to  enable  the  bearers  to  take  up 
and  carry  the  body  with  more  convenience. 
Jileyer  insists  on  this  view,  and  contends  that 
irrTrAois  «rufe<7ToArj<r(ii'  ill  Eurip.,  as  referred  to 
above,  can  be  translateil  only  were  laid  oiU 
(dressed  at  the  same  time)  in  rohrx.  It  is  cer- 
tain that  no  mode  of  preparing  the  body  which 
was  formal  at  all,  requiring  delay,  could  have 
been  observed  in  an  emergency  like  the  pres- 
ent.—7/ai;(«(7  carried  forth,  out  of  the  house  and 
beyond  the  city.    Except  in  the  case  of  kings 


76 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


7  And  it  was  about  the  space  of  three  hours  after, 
when  his  wife,  not  knowing  what  was  done,  came  in. 

H  And  i'eter  answered  unto  lier.  Tell  me  whether  ye 
sold  the  land  for  so  much?  And  she  said,  Yea,  for  so 
much. 

y  Then  Teter  said  unto  her.  How  is  it  that  ye  have 
agreed  together  "to  tempt  the  fipirit  of  the  Lord  ?  be- 
hold, the  feet  of  them  which  have  buried  thy  husband 
are  at  the  door,  and  shall  carry  thee  out. 

10  'Then  fell  she  down  straightway  at  his  feet,  and 
yielded  up  the  ghost:  and  the  young  men  came  in,  and 
found  her  dead,  and,  carrying  her  forth,  burit-d  her  by 
her  husband. 

11  'And  great  fear  came  upon  all  the  church,  and 
upon  as  many  as  heard  these  things. 


7  And  it  was  about  the  space  of  three  hours  after, 
when  his  wife,  not  knowing  what  was  done,  came 

Sin.  And  Peter  answered  unto  her.  Tell  me  whether 
ye  sold  the  land  for  so  much.     And  she  said.  Yea, 

9  for  so  much.  But  I'eter  xriiil  unto  her.  How  is  it 
that  ye  have  agieed  together  to  try  the  ^pirit  of  the 
Lard?  behold,  the  feet  of  them  who  have  buried  thy 
husband  are  at  the  door,  and  they  shall  carry  thee 

10  out.  And  she  fell  down  immediately  at  his  feet,  and 
gave  up  the  ghost:  and  the  young  men  came  in  and 
found  her  dead,  and  they  carried  her  out  and  buried 

11  her  by  her  husband.  AnH  great  fear  came  upon  the 
whole  church,  and  upon  all  that  heard  these  things. 


o  ver.  3;  Matt.  4  :  7 b  ver.  5 c  ver.  5;  ch.  2  :  43  ;  19  :  17. 


or  other  distinguished  persons,  the  Jews  did  not 
bury  within  the  walls  of  their  towns,  (See 
Jahn's  ArdixoL,  \  20G.)  This  circumstance  ac- 
counts for  the  time  which  elapsed  before  the 
return  of  the  bearers.  It  wiis  customary  for 
the  Jews  to  bury  the  dead  much  sooner  than 
is  common  with  us.  The  reason  for  this  des- 
patch is  found  partly  in  the  fact  that  decompo- 
sition takes  place  very  rapidly  after  death  in 
warm  climates  (comp.  John  11  :  39),  and  partly 
in  the  peciiliar  Jewish  feeling  respecting  the 
defilement  incurred  by  contact  with  a  dead 
body.  (See  Num.  19  :  11,  sq.)  The  interment 
in  the  case  of  Ananias  may  have  been  hastepod 
somewhat  by  the  extraordinary  occasion  of 
liis  death ;  but,  even  under  ordinary  circum- 
stances, a  person  among  the  Jews  was  ;  rni- 
monly  buried  the  same  day  on  which  he  died. 
(See  Win.,  Jieahv.,  vol.  ii.  p.  10.)  Even  among 
the  present  inhabitants  of  Jerusalem,  says 
Tobler,!  burial,  as  a  general  rule,  is  not  de- 
ferred more  than  three  or  four  hours. 

7.  Now  it  came  to  pass  .  .  .  an  interval 
of  about  three  hours  .  .  .  then,  etc.  An 
interval,  etc.,  is  not  here  the  subject  of  was 
or  came  to  pass  (=  e-yeVero),  but  forms  a  paren- 
thetic clause,  and  Kai  (see  on  1  :  10)  introduces 
the  apodosis  of  the  sentence  (Frtz.,  De  Wet., 
May.).  For  the  same  construction,  comp.  Matt. 
15  :  32  ;  Mark  8  :  2  (in  the  correct  text) ;  Luke 
9  :  28.  (See  W.  ^  62.  2.)  The  minute  specifica- 
tion of  time  here  imparts  an  air  of  reality  to 
the  narrative. — Came  in — i.  e.  to  the -place  of 
assembly. 

8.  Answered  her,  addressed  her.  He- 
braistic, after  the  manner  of  Heb.  anah.  (See 
on  3  :  12.)  De  Wette  inclines  to  the  ordinary 
Greek  sense,  answered — i.  e.  upon  her  saluta- 
tion.— Tocrovzov  is  the  genitive  of  price — for  so 
much,  and  no  more — pointing,  says  Meyer,  to 
the  money  which  lay  there  within  sight.  Kui- 
noel's  better  view  is  that  Peter  named  the  sum  ; 


but,  it  being  unknown  to  the  writer,  he  substi- 
tutes for  it  an  indefinite  term  like  our  "so 
much  "  or  "  so  and  so."  This  sense  is  appropri- 
ate to  the  woman's  reply. 

9.  Why  is  it  that  it  was  agreed,  con- 
certed, by  you?  The  dative  occurs  after  the 
passive,  instead  of  the  genitive  with  vn6,  when 
the  agent  is  not  only  the  author  of  the  act,  but 
the  person  for  whose  benefit  the  act  is  per- 
formed. (K.  iJ  28-t.  11.)  — To  tempt,  put  to 
trial,  the  Spirit,  jis  possessed  by  the  apostles, 
whether  he  can  be  deceived  or  not.  (See  on  v. 
3.) — Behold,  the  feet  of  those  who  buried 
th'.  husband.  Behold  directs  attention  to 
th'i  "ound  of  their  footsteps  as  they  approached 
the  door.  Wtiat  occurred  before  their  entrance 
occupied  but  a  moment. 

10.  Straightway,  immediately,  after  this 
declaration  of  Peter.  It  is  evident  that  the 
writer  viewed  the  occurrence  as  supernatural. 
The  second  death  was  not  only  instantaneous, 
like  the  first,  but  took  place  precisely  as  Peter 
had  foretold.  The  woman  lay  dead  at  the 
apostle's  feet  as  the  men  entered  who  had  just 
borne  her  b;i>b3nd  to  the  grave. 

lie  (See  note  oii  v.  5.)  Great  fear  came, 
etc.  To  produce  this  impression  both  in  the 
church  and  out  of  it  was  doubtless  one  of  the 
objects  which  the  death  of  Ananias  and  Saji- 
phira  was  intended  to  accomplish.  The  piniish- 
ment  inflicted  on  them,  while  it  displayed  the 
just  abhorrence  with  which  God  looked  upon 
this  particular  instance  of  prevarication,  was 
important  also  as  a  i:)ermanent  testimony  against 
similar  offences  in  every  age  of  the  church. 
"  Such  severity  in  the  beginning  of  Christi- 
anity," says  Benson,'^  "  was  highly  i^roper,  in 
order  to  prevent  any  occasion  for  like  punish- 
ments for  the  time  to  come.  Thus  Cain,  the 
first  murderer,  was  most  signally  punished  by 
the  immediate  hand  of  God ;  thus,  upon  the 
erecting  of  God's  temporal  kingdom  among  the 


>  Denkbimter  aus  Jerusalem,  von  Dr.  Titus  Tobler,  p.  32o  (St.  Gallen,  18.53). 
3  History  of  the  First  Planting  oj  the  Christian  Iteiiyion,  etc.,  vol.  1.  p.  105. 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


77 


12  II  And  "by  the  hands  of  the  apostles  were  many 
signs  and  wonders  wrought  among  the  people ;  ('anil 
they  were  all  with  one  accord  in  Solomon  s  porch. 

13  And  'of  the  rest  durst  no  man  join  him-elf  to 
them  :  ''but  the  people  magnified  them. 

14  And  believers  were  the  more  added  to  the  Lord, 
multitudes  both  of  men  and  worn'  n.) 

15  Insomuch  that  they  brought  forth  the  sick  into  the 
streets,  and  laid  Ikem  on  beds  and  couches,  «that  al  the 


12  And  by  the  hands  of  the  apostles  were  many  signs 
and  wonders  wrought  among  the  people;  and  they 

13  were  all  with  one  ace  rd  in  Solomon  s  porch.  But 
of  the  rest  durst  no  man  join  himself  to  iheiu:  how- 

14  belt  the  people  magniiied  them;  land  belies ers  werj 
the  more  added  to  the  Lord,  multitudes  both  of  men 

15  and  women ;  insomuch  that  they  even  carried  oiit 
the  sick  into  the  streets,  and  laid  them  on  beds  and 
-couches,  that,  as  i  eler  came   Ljy,  at  the  least  his 


I  ch.  S  :  43  ;  14  :  3  ;  19  :  11 ; 
•J  :  47;  4:  21.... e  Matt.  9  : 
pallets 


Rom.   15:19;    2   Cor.   12:12;    Heb.   2:4. ...6ch.  3:11;   4  :  32... .c  John  U  :  22 ;    12:42:    19:38...  d  ch. 
!1  ;  14  :  36;  ch.  19  :  12. 1  Or,  and  there  were  the  more  added  lo  them,  believing  on  the  Lord 2  Or, 


Jews,  Nadab  and  Abihu  were  struck  dead  for 
off^'ring  strange  lire  before  the  Lord  ;  and  Korah 
and  his  company  were  swallowed  up  alive  by 
the  earth  for  opposing  Moses,  the  faithful  ser- 
vant of  God ;  and  the  two  hundred  and  fifty 
men  who  otfered  incense  upon  that  occasion 
were  consumed  bj'  a  fire  which  came  out  from 
the  Lord ;  and,  lastly,  Uzzah,  for  touching  the 
ark,  fell  by  as  sudden  and  remarkable  a  divine 
judgment  when  the  kingdom  was  going  to  be 
established  in  the  house  of  David,  to  teach 
Israel  a  reverence  for  God  and  divine  things. 
Nay,  in  establishing  even  human  laws,  a  severe 
punishment  upon  the  first  transgressors  doth 
oft  prevent  the  punishment  of  others,  who  are 
deterred  from  like  attempts  by  the  suifering  of 
the  first  criminals." 

12-16.  THE  APOSTLES  STILL  PREACH, 
AND  CONFIRM  THEIR  TESTIMONY  BY 
MIRACLES. 

13.  And,  now,  continuative. — Many  in  this 
position  qualifies  the  two  nouns  more  strongly 
than  when  joined  with  the  first  of  them,  as 
in  2  :  43.  The  first  and  last  places  in  a  Greek 
sentence  may  be  emphatic.  (K.  g  348.  6.)  [It 
i9»doubtful  whether  many  {noWd)  had  the  last 
place  in  Luke's  autograph.  The  principal  edi- 
tors, with  X  A  B  D  E,  etc.,  put  it  after  signs 
and  wonders,  hut  before  among  the  peo- 
ple. Were  wrought,  it  may  be  added,  is 
according  to  decisive  evidence  in  the  imperfect 
tense  =  were  being  wrought,  describing  a  suc- 
cession of  miraculous  events.  The  tcxtus  recep- 
tus  gives  the  verb  in  the  aorist,  but  upon  very 
insuflacient  manuscript  authority. — A. II.]  And 
they  were  all  with  one  mind  in  Solo- 
mon's porch— I.  e.  from  day  to  day.  It  was 
their  custom  to  repair  thither  and  preach  to 
the  people  whom  they  found  in  this  place  of 
public  resort.  All  refers  to  the  apostles  men- 
tioned in  the  last  clause  (Kuhi.,  Olsh.,  Alf ). 
Some  understand  it  of  all  the  believers  (Bng., 
De  Wet.,  Mey.),  in  disregard  both  of  the  nat- 
ural antecedent  and  of  the  improbability  that 
so  many  would  assemble  at  once  in  such  a 
place.  The  apostles  or  individuals  of  them  are 
meant  certainly  in  v.  42 ;  and,  from  the  simi- 


larity of  that  passage  to  this,  we  naturally  infer 
that  Luke  speaks  of  the  same  class  of  persons 
here  as  there. 

13.  But  of  the  rest,  who  did  not  belong  to 
the  party  of  the  apostles,  who  were  not  C'hris- 
tians  ;  the  same,  evidently,  who  are  called  the 
people  just  below. — No  one  ventured  to 
associate  with  them  (see  9  :  2i];  10  :  28) — 
viz.  the  apostles ;  lit.  join  himself  to  them. 
So  deeply  had  the  miracles  wrought  by  the 
apostles  impressed  the  Jewish  multitude  that 
they  looked  upon  those  who  perf(jrmed  them 
with  a  sort  of  religious  awe  and  were  afraid  to 
mingle  freely  with  them.  The  rest,  taken  as 
above,  need  not  include  any  but  unbelievers, 
even  if  we  confine  all  to  the  apostles.  If  we 
extend  all  to  the  disciples  generally,  the  notion 
that  the  others  are  believers  as  well  as  unbeliev- 
ers (Alf)  falls  away  still  more  decisively.  That 
the  apostles  should  have  inspired  their  fellow- 
Christians  with  a  feeling  of  dread  disturbs  all 
our  concei)tions  of  their  relations  to  each  other, 
as  described  or  intimated  elsewhere. — A  comma 
is  the  proper  point  after  them.— But,  as  op- 
posed to  what  they  refrained  from  doing. — 
Magnified  them,  regarded  them  with  wonder 
and  extolled  them. 

14.  This  verse  is  essentially  parenthetic,  but 
contains  a  remark  .which  springs  from  the  one 
just  made.  One  of  the  ways  in  which  the  peo- 
ple testified  their  regard  for  the  Christians  was 
that  individuals  of  them  were  constantly  pass- 
ing over  to  the  side  of  the  latter.— And  still 
more.  (Comp.  9  :  22;  Luke  5  :  15.)— The 
Lord — here  Christ — many  connect  with  be- 
lievers ;  but  a  comparison  with  11  :  24  shows 
that  it  depends  rather  on  the  verb. — Multi- 
tudes both  of  men  and  women.  The  ad- 
ditions were  so  great  that  Luke  counts  them  no 
longer,     (^ee  1  :  15;  2  :  41 ;  4:4.) 

15.  Insomuch  binds  this  verse  to  v.  13.  We 
have  here  an  illustration  of  the  extent  to  wliioh 
the  people  carried  their  confidence  in  the  apos- 
tles.—Along  the  streets.  (See  W.  ?  49.  d.)— 
Upon  beds  and  pallets.  The  latter  was  a 
cheaper  article  used  bv  the  connnon  people. 
(See  Diet.  o/Aiitt.,  art.  "  Lectus;"  and  R.  and  P., 


78 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


least  tie  shadow  of  Peter  passing  by  might  overshadow 
some  of  them. 

16  There  came  also  a  multitude  out  of  the  cities 
round  about  unto  Jerusalem,  bringing  "sick  folks,  and 
them  which  were  vexed  with  unclean  t^pirits:  and  they 
were  healed  every  on''. 

17  1i  'Then  the  high  priest  rose  up,  and  all  they  that 
were  with  him,  (which  is  the  sect  of  the  !Sadducees,j 
and  were  filled  with  indignation, 

1,S  ■'And  laid  their  hands  on  the  apostles,  and  put 
them  in  the  common  prison. 

19  Kut  ''the  angel  of  the  Lord  by  night  opened  the 
prison  doors,  and  brought  them  forth,  and  said, 


10  shadow  might  overshadow  some  one  of  them.  And 
there  also  came  together  the  multitude  from  the 
cities  round  about  Jerusalem,  bringing  sick  folk, 
and  them  that  were  vexed  with  unclean  spirits: 
and  they  were  healed  every  one 

17  But  the  high  ])riest  rose  up,  and  all  they  that  were 
with  him  (who  were  the  sect  of  the  Sadducees),  and 

18  they  were  tilled  with  jealousy,  and  laid  hands  on  the 

19  apostles,  and  put  them  in  public  ward.  Kut  an  angel 
of  the  Lord  by  night  opened  the  prison  doors,  and 


I  Mark  16:  17,  18;  John  14  :  12 6  ch.  4  :  1,  2,  6 c  Luke  21  :  12 d  ch.  12  :  7  ;  16  :  26. 


Lex.  s.  <rKi>7rous.)  The  rich  and  the  poor  grasped 
the  present  opportunity  to  be  healed  of  their  dis- 
eases. Instead  of  beds  many  read  little  beds, 
with  reference  to  tlieir  portable  size.  We  may 
adopt  that  reading,  and  yet  distinguish  the 
terms  as  before;  for  these  couches  need  not 
have  been  larger  than  the  others,  in  order  to  be 
more  valuable. — As  Peter  was  passing. 
The  genitive  does  not  depend  on  shadow, 
but  is  absolute. — ic(Iv  =  Kal  Uv,  at  least,  so 
much  as  {vel  certe).  (Comp.  Mark  6  :  5G;  2 
Cor.  11  :  16.)  The  separate  parts  can  hardly 
be  traced  in  this  idiom.  Some  evolve  them 
from  an  ellipsis :  in  order  that,  if  Peter  came, 
he  might  touch  some  of  them,  even  if  it  were 
only  his  shadow  (Mey.).  (See  Klotz,  AdDevar., 
vol.  ii.  p.  139,  sq.) 

16.  a<Tdtvtl<:  (sick)  omits  the  article  here,  but 
has  it  in  v.  15.  It  is  there  generic,  here  parti- 
tive:  sick,  sc.  persons.  (K.  g  24-1.  8.)  Vexed, 
etc.,  being  added  to  sick  persons,  distinguishes 
the  possessed  or  demoniacs  from  those  affected 
by  ordinary  maladies.  (Comp.  8  :  7.)— Un- 
clean—i.  e.  morally  corrupt,  utterly  wicked. 
(Comp.  19  :  12.) 

17-25.  RENEWED  IMPRISONMENT  OF 
THE  APOSTLES,  AND  THEIR  ESCAPE. 

17.  But  (6e)  this  success  (v.  16)  calls  forth 
persecution.— Rising  up,  not  from  his  seat  in 
the  council  (for  the  council  is  not  said  to  have 
been  in  session),  but  as  it  were  mentally,  be- 
coming excited,  proceeding  toiact.  Kuinoel 
calls  it  redundant.  (See  further  on  9  :  18.)— 
The  high  priest  is  probably  Annas,  who  was 
before  mentioned  under  that  title.  Some  sup- 
pose Caiaphas,  the  actual  high  priest,  to  be  in- 
tended. (See  on  4  :  6.)— Those  with  him  are 
not  his  associates  in  tlie  Sanhedrim  {for  they 
are  distinguished  from  these  in  v.  21),  but,  ac- 
cording to  the  more  obvious  relation  of  the 
words  to  sect  of  the  Sadducees,  those 
with  him  in  sympathy  and  opinion — i.  e. 
members  of  the  religious  sect  to  which  he  be- 
longed.    (Comp.  14  :  4.)     [The  word  translated 


sect  (a'ipco-ts)  occurs  morc  frequently  in  this  book 
than  in  any  other  part  of  the  New  Testament. 
Here  it  is  applied  to  tlie  Sadducees  as  a  religious 
party ;  in  15  :  5  and  26  :  5,  to  the  Pharisees ;  and 
in  24  :  5-14  and  28  :  22,  to  the  Christians.  In 
Gal.  5  :  20  the  same  word  is  translated  parties, 
and  in  1  Cor.  11  :  19  factions  (margin,  heresies) ; 
while  in  2  Pet.  2  :  1  it  is  rendered  heresies  in  the 
text,  but  sects  in  the  margin.  It  is  the  original 
of  the  English  term  "  heresy."  Thus,  in  the 
New  Testament,  it  generally  denotes  a  religious 
party  separated  from  others  by  its  creed  or 
opinion.  The  distinctive  belief  of  the  party 
may  be  right  or  wrong,  but  it  will  naturally  be 
stigmatized  as  error  by  those  who  reject  it.  Hence 
the  word  "  sect"  carries  with  it,  even  in  the  New 
Testament,  an  intimation  of  popular  disap- 
proval, though  it  may  be  applied  to  the  fol- 
lowers of  Christ. — A.  H.]  Josephus  states  that 
most  of  the  higher  class  in  his  day  were  scep- 
tics or  Sadducees,  thougli  the  mass  of  the  people 
were  Pharisees. — Indignation  (i3  :  45),  not  en- 
vy.    A  Hebraistic  sense. 

18.  Upon  the  apostles — viz.  Peter  (v.  29) 
and  others  of  them,  but  probably  not  the  en- 
tire twelve.  They  were  lodged  in  the  public 
prison,  so  as  to  be  kept  more  securely.  It  is 
far-fetched  to  suppose  that  Sr)iao<n'a  {public)  was 
meant  to  sitggest  that  they  were  treated  as  com- 
mon malefactors. 

19.  The  account  of  a  similar  escape  is  more 
fully  related  in  12  :  7,  s*/.- During  the  night, 
and  not  far  from  its  close,  as  the  two  next  verses 
seem  to  indicate.  Fritzschei  concedes  this  sense 
of  Sia  here,  also  in  16  :  9  and  17  :  10,  but  pro- 
nounces it  entirely  abnormal.  Classic  usage,  it 
is  true,  would  require  through  the  night,  its  en- 
tire extent,  and  it  would  then  follow,  strangely 
enough,  that  the  doors  of  the  prison  must  have 
stood  open  for  hours  before  tlie  apostles  went 
forth  from  their  confinement.  Meyer  insists  on 
that  as  the  true  meaning  here.  It  is  more  rea- 
sonable to  ascribe  to  Luke  a  degree  of  inaccuracy 
in  the  use  of  the  preposition.  (See  W.  §  47.  i.) 


1  Fritzschiorum  Opuseula  Academica,  p.  163. 


Cn.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


21)  Oo,  stand  and  speak  in  the  temple  to  the  people 
"all  the  words  of  this  life. 

■_'l  And  «  lien  they  heard  thai,  they  entered  into  the 
temple  early  in  the  niorninj;,  and  taught.  'Hut  the 
liigli  priestcanie,  and  they  tliat  were  with  him,  and 
culled  the  council  together,  and  all  the  senate  of  the 
children  of  Israel,  and  sent  to  the  prison  to  have 
them  bj-ouglu. 

22  Kut  when  the  officers  caine,  and  found  them  not 
in  the  prison,  they  returned,  and  told, 

2;{  laying.  The  prison  truly  found  we  shut  with  all 
safety,  and  the  keepers  standing  without  before  the 
door.s :  but  when  we  had  opened,  we  found  no  man 
within. 

24  Kow  when  the  high  priest  and  "the  captain  of  the 


20  brought  them  out,  and  said,  Oo  ye,  and  stand  and 
speak  in  the  temple  to  the  people  all  the  words  of 

21  this  Life.  And  when  they  heard  //'/>■,  they  entered 
into  the  temple  about  daybreak,  and  taught,  but 
the  high  priest  came,  and  they  that  were  with  him, 
and  called  the  council  together,  and  all  the  senate 
of  the  children  of  Israel,  and  sent  to  the  prison- 

22  house  to  have  them  brought.  Hut  the  otticers  that 
came  found  them  not  in  the  prison;  and  they  re- 

23  turned,  and  told,  saying.  The  prison-house  we  found 
shut  in  all  safety,  and  the  keepers  standing  at  the 
doors:  but  when  we  had  (ipened,  we  found  no  luau 

24  within.     Now  when  the  captain  of  the  temple  and 


a  John  6:  68;  17  :  3;  1  John  5  :  U...  .6  oh.  4  :  5.  6....cLuke22  :  4;  ch.  4:  1. 


An  extreme  purism  in  some  cases  is  one  of 
Meyer's  faitlts  as  a  critic.  [By  a  mistranslation 
Gloag  (and  Dickson)  represent  Meyer  as  giving 
the  same  interpretation  to  this  expression  as 
Dr.  Hackett,  tluis  :  "  Per  noctcm—i.  e.  during  the 
night ;  so  that  tlie  opening,  the  bringing  out  of 
tlte  prisoners,  and  the  address  of  tlie  angel  oc- 
curred during  the  course  of  the  night,  and  to- 
ward morning  dawn  the  apostles  repaired  to 
the  temple."  But  Meyer  wrote,  '^Per  noctem — 
/.  €.  the  night  through  (die  Nacht  hindurch) ;  so 
that,"  etc.  It  seems  proper  to  mention  this 
mistake  in  a  translation  which  is  generally 
correct  and  is  likely  to  be  in  the  hands  of 
many  persons. — A.  H.] — Ojiened  the  doors  (see 

12  :  10),  which  were  then  closed  again.  (See  v. 
23.) — Having  brought  them  forth,  while 
the  keepers  were  at  their  post  (v.  23),  but  were 
restrained  by  a  divine  power  from  seeing  them 
(see  on  12  :  10),  or,  at  all  events,  from  interpos- 
ing to  an'e.st  them. 

20.  Go  and  speak  are  present,  because  they 
denote  acts  already  in  progress.  The  prisoners 
were  to  proceed  on  tlieir  way  to  the  temple, 
and  to  persist  there  in  proclaiming  the  offensive 
message.  (See  on  3  :  6.) — The  words  of  this 
life,  eternal   life,  which  you  preach.    (Comp. 

13  :  26.  W.  ?  34.  2.  b.)  olshausen  refers  this 
to  the  angel :  this  life  of  which  I  speak  to 
you;  Lightfoot,  to  the  Sadducces:  this  life 
which  they  deny.  According  to  some,  this 
belongs  to  the  entire  expression,  these  words 
of  life,  agreeing  as  a  Hebraism  with  the  de- 
pendent noun,  instead  of  the  governing  one. 
(See  Green's  Gr.,  p.  205.)  An  adjective  may  be 
so  used,  but  not  the  pronoun. 

21.  At  early  dawn.  The  temple  had 
already  opened  its  gates  to  the  worshippers 
and  the  traffickers  (John2:  i4, »?.)  accustomed  to 
resort  thither.  Hence  the  apostles  could  begin 
their  work  of  instruction  as  soon  as  they  ar- 
rived. The  people  of  the  East  commence  the 
day  much  earlier  than  is  customary  with  us. 
The  arrangements  of  life  there  adjust  them- 


selves to  the  character  of  the  climate.  During 
a  great  part  of  the  year  in  Palestine  tlie  heat  be- 
comes oppressive  soon  after  sunrise,  and  the  in- 
habitants, therefore,  assign  their  most  import- 
ant duties  and  labors  to  the  early  hours  of  the 
day.  Nothing  is  more  common  at  the  present 
time  than  to  see  the  villagers  going  forth  to 
their  employment  in  the  fields  while  the  night 
and  the  day  arc  still  struggling  with  each  other. 
Worship  is  often  perf(jrmed  in  the  synagogues 
at  Jerusalem  l:)efore  the  sun  appears  above 
Olivet. — Having  come — (.  e.  to  the  place  of 
assembly,  which  was  probably  a  rocm  in  the 
temple  (see  G  :  14 ;  Matt.  27  :  3,  sq.),  and  whence, 
I  apparently,  the  chief  priest  and  his  coadjutors 
sent  out  a  summons  (called  .  .  .  together,  <ravi- 
K(i\e<Tav)  to  their  colleagues  to  hasten  together. 
On  some  occasions  the  Sanhedrists  met  at  the 
house  of  the  high  priest.  (See  Matt.  26  :  57.) — 
And  all  the  eldership,  senate  connected 
with  the  Sanhedrim.  (Comp.  4  :  5 ;  22  :  5.)  The 
prominence  thus  given  to  that  branch  of  the 
council  exalts  our  idea  of  its  dignity.  The 
term  reminds  us  of  men  who  were  venerable 
for  their  years  and  wisdom.  Kuinoel  would 
emphasize  ni^av,  as  if  the  attendance  of  that 
order  was  fitil  at  this  time,  but  was  not  always 
so.  Some  (Lightf ,  Olsh.,  Str.,  Mey.)  think  that 
tins  was  not  an  ordinary  session  of  the  San- 
licdrim,  but  that  the  elders  of  the  nation  at 
large  were  called  upon  to  give  their  advice  in 
the  present  emergency. 

22.  The  servants  who  executed  the  orders 
of  the  Sanhedrim.  (See  v.  26.)  Some  of  the 
temple-guard  may  have  acted  in  this  capacity. 
(See  on  4:1.)" 

24.  The  priest,  by  way  of  eminence  (1 
Mace.  15:1;  Jos.,  Antt.,  6.  12.  1);  hence  = 
high  priest,  as  the  same  functionary  is  termed 
in  V.  17  and  4  :  6. — On  the  high  priests,  see  4  : 
6. — Were  perplexed  concerning  them — i.  e. 
the  words  reported,  not  the  apostles  (Mey.,  Alf.). 
Words  is  the  more  obvious  antecedent;  and, 
besides,  nothing  would  embarrass  the  rulers  so 


80 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


temple  and  the  chief  priests  heard  these  things,  they 
doubted  of  tlieni  whereiiuto  this  would  grow. 

2n  Then  came  one  and  told  them,  saying.  Behold, 
the  men  whom  ye  put  in  prison  are  standing  in  the 
temple,  and  teaching  the  people. 

2tj  Then  went  the  captain  with  the  officers,  and 
brought  them  without  violence:  "for  they  feared  the 
people,  lest  they  should  have  been  .stoned. 

27  And  when  they  had  brought  them,  they  set  (hem 
before  the  council :  and  thi^  high  priest  asked  them, 

28  laying,  *Did  not  we  straitly  command  you  that 
ye  should  not  teach  in  this  name?  and,  behold,  ye 
have  filled  Jerusalem  with  your  doctrine,  i^and  intend 
to  bring  this  man's  ''blood  upon  us. 

29  If  Then  Peter  and  the  u/her  apostles  answered  and 
said,  "=VVe  ought  to  obey  (jod  rather  than  men. 


the  chief  priests  heard  these  words,  they  were  much 
perplexed  concerning  theiu  whereuuto  this  would 

25  grow.  And  there  came  one  and  told  them,  Fehold, 
the  men  whom  ye  put  in  the  prison  are  in  the  tem- 

26  pie  standing  and  teaching  the  |  eople.  Then  went 
the  captain  with  the  orticers,  and  brought  them,  hut 
without  violence;   for  "they  feared  the  peojile,  lest 

27  they  should  be  stoned.  And  when  they  had  brought 
them,  they  set  them  before  the  council.    And  the 

28  high  priest  asked  them,  saying.  We  straitly  charged 
you  not  to  teach  in  this  name:  and  behold,  ye  have 
filled  Jerusalem  with  your  teaching,  and  intend  to 

29  bring  this  man's  blood  upon  us.  But  I'eter  and  the 
apostles  answered  and  said,  We  must  obey  bod  rather 


o  Matt.  21  :  26....6ch.  4:  18....cch.  2  :  23,  36;  3  :  15 ;  7  :52....d  Matt.  23  :  35;  27  :  25....e  ch.  4  :  19. 


much  as  the  circulation  of  such  reports  at  this 
precise  moment. — What  this  would  become, 
how  it  would  affect  the  public  mind  in  regard  to 
the  Christians  and  their  doctrine.  This  refers 
to  the  miraculous  liberation,  and  confirms  what 
was  said  of  them. 

26-28.  THEY  ARE  ARRESTED  AGAIN 
AND  BROUGHT  BEFORE  THE  COUNCIL. 

26.  For  captain,  or  commander,  see  on 
4  :  1. — That  they  might  not  be  stoned  we 
are  to  connect  probably  with  without  vio- 
lence :  I'hey  brought  them  without  vio- 
lence that  they  might  not  be  stoned. 
For  they  feared  the  people  forms  a  paren- 
thetic remark,  the  logical  force  of  which  is  the 
same  as  if  it  had  stood  at  the  close  of  the  sen- 
tence. The  E.  Versions  generally  (also  Mey.) 
attach  the  last  clause  to  feared  instead  of 
brought,  but  the  jiroper  connectives  after 
verbs  of  fearing  are  fiv,  fiiiTrus,  and  the  like, 
and  not  IVa  ,x.rj.  (See  W.  g  56.  2.  R.)  Tischen- 
dorf  puts  a  comma  after  violence,  instead 
of  a  colon,  as  in  some  editions. 

28.  Straitly  command.  (See  the  note  on 
4  :  17.)— Upon  (as  tlieir  authority,  see  4  :  18) 
this  name,  which  they  left  unspoken  as  well 
known,  or  perhaps  disdained  to  mention. — To 
bring  this  man's  blood — i.  e.  fix  upon  us 
the  guilt  of  having  shed  his  blood  as  that  of 
an  innocent  person.  (Comp.  Matt.  23  :  35.) — 
This  man  is  not  of  itself  contemptuous  (comp. 
Luke  28  :  47 ;  John  7  :  46),  but  could  have  that 
turn  given  to  it  by  the  voice,  and  was  so  ut- 
tered probably  at  this  time. 

29-32.  THE  ANSWER  OP  PETER,  AND 
ITS  EFFECT. 

29.  And  the  other  apostles.  Peter  spoke 
in  their  name.  (See  2 :  14.) — To  obey  . . .  men. 
The  Jews,  though  as  a  conquered  nation  they 
were  subject    to  the    Romans,   acknowledged 


the  members  of  the  Sanhedrim  as  their  legiti- 
mate rulers;  and  the  injunction  which  the 
Sanhedrim  imposed  on  the  apostles  at  this 
time  emanated  from  the  highest  human  au- 
thority to  which  they  could  have  felt  that  they 
owed  allegiance.  The  injunction  which  this 
autliority  laid  on  the  apo.stles  claslied  with 
their  religious  convictions,  their  sense  of  the 
rights  of  the  Infinite  Ruler,  and  in  this  con- 
flict between  human  law  and  divine  they  de- 
clared that  the  obligation  to  obey  God  was 
paramount  to  every  other.  The  apostles  and 
early  Christians  acted  on  the  principle  that 
human  governments  forfeit  their  claim  to  obe- 
dience when  they  require  what  God  has  plain- 
ly forbidden  or  forbid  what  he  has  required. 
They  claimed  the  right  of  judging  for  them- 
selves what  was  right  and  what  was  wrong, 
in  reference  to  their  religious  and  their  polit- 
ical duties,  and  they  regulated  their  conduct  by 
that  decision.  It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  in 
4  :  19  they  propound  this  princii)le  as  one 
which  even  their  persecutors  could  not  con- 
trovert— i.  e.  as  one  which  commends  itself  to 
every  man's  reason  and  unperverted  moral 
feelings.i  In  applying  this  principle,  it  will 
be  found  that  the  apostles  in  every  instance 
abstained  from  all  forcible  resistance  to  the 
public  authorities.  They  refused  utterly  to 
obey  the  mandates  which  required  them  to 
violate  their  consciences,  but  they  endured 
quietly  the  penalties  which  the  executors  of 
the  law  enforced  against  them.  They  evaded 
tlie  pursuit  of  their  oppressors  if  they  could 
(2  Cor.  II :  32, 33),  sccrcted  tlicmselves  from  arrest 
(12 :  19),  left  their  prisons  at  the  command  of 
God ;  yet  when  violent  hands  were  laid  upon 
them,  and  they  were  dragged  before  magistrates, 
to  the  dungeon,  or  to  death,  they  resisted  not 
the  wrong,  but  "  followed  his  steps,  who,  when 


1  Socrates  avowtd  this  principle  when  in  his  defence  he  said  to  his  judge'',  "But  1  will  obey  God  rather  than 
you"  iV\at.,  Apol.,  29  D);  and,  unle-s  the  plea  be  valid,  he  died  as  a  felon,  and  not  as  a  martyr.  (See  other 
heathen  testimonies  to  the  same  elfeut  in  Weisteiu's  Souum  Testa meiUum,  vol.  ii.  p.  478.) 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


81 


30  "The  riod  of  our  fathers  raised  up  Jesus,  whom  ye 
slew  and  ''hanged  on  a  tree. 

31  <^llini  hath  tiod  exalted  with  his  right  hand  tn  be. 
<'a  Prince  and  «a  Saviour, /ior  to  give  repentance  to 
Israel,  and  forgiveness  of  sins 

'A'l  And  awe  are  his  wi  nesse.i  of  these  things ;  and  so 
is  also  the  Holy  Ghost,  ''whom  Cod  hath  given  to  them 
that  obey  him 

3:i  \  '  \\lieu  they  heard  that,  they  were  cut  to  the  heart, 
and  took  counsel  to  slay  them. 

'i\  Then  stood  there  up  one  in  the  council,  a  Phari- 
see, named  *Gamaliel,  a  doctor  of  the  law,  had  in  repu- 


Siithan  men.    The  God  of  our  fathers  raised  up  Jesus, 

31  whom  ye  slew,  hanging  him  on  a  tree,  l.im  did 
God  e.'ialt  'with  his  right  hand  in  be  a  i  lince  and  a 
Paviour,  for  to  give  re])entaiicc  to  Lsrael,  and  remis- 

32  siou  of  sins.  And  we  aiv  witin's>t's-  of  these  -iihings  ; 
■•and  SI)  is  the  Holy  ."-pirit,  whom  ood  hath  given  to 
them  that  obey  him. 

33  hut  they,  when  they  heard  this,  were  cut  to  the 

34  heart,  and  were  minded  to  slay  them.  Kut  there 
stood  up  one  in  the  council,  a  i  harisee,  named  (ia- 
nialiel,  a  doctor  of  the  law,  had  in  honor  of  all  the 
people,  and  commanded  to  put  ihe  men  forth  a  little 


och.  3:  13,  15;  2i:  }*.... bch.  10;. 19;  13  ■.■19;  Gal.  3  :  13 ;  1  Pet.  2;  24....cch.  2  :  33,  36;  Phil.  2:9;  Heb.  2  ;  10;  12  :  2....(J  ch.  3  :  15.... 

e  Malt.  1  ;  21 /  l.uke  24  ;  47  ;   ch.  :1  :  26;  13  ;  38;    Eph.  1:7;    Col.   1  :  14.... g  Johu   15  :  26,  27 A  ch.  2:4;  10  :  44 tch.  2  :  37  ; 

7  :  54 A;  ch.  22  :  3. 1  Or,  at 2  Some  ancient  authorities  udd  in  him 3  Gr.  sayings.... i  Some  ancient  authorities  reiid  and  God 

hath  given  the  Holy  Ghost  to  them  that  obey  him. 


he    suffered,  threatened    not,  but    committed 
himself    to    liim    tliat    judgeth    rigliteously " 

(l  Pet.  2  :  22,23). 

30.  Our  fathers  recalls  to  mind  the  series 
of  promises  which  God  had  made  to  provide  a 
Saviour.  (Comp.  3  :  25.) — Raised  up,  sent 
into  the  world.  (Comp.  3  :  22 ;  13  :  23.)  So 
Calvin,  Bengel,  De  Wette,  and  others.  Some 
supply  from  the  dead,  raiKcd  %ip  from  the 
dead;  but  that  idea,  being  involved  in  ex- 
alted, l)elow,  would  introduce  a  repetition  at 
variance  with  the  brevity  of  the  discourse. — 
Whom  ye  slew  (26:21)  by  hanging,  not  slew 
and  hanged  (E.  V.). — Wood,  tree  =  cross,  a 
Hebraism.  It  occurs  especially  where  the  Jews 
are  spoken  of  as  having  crucified  the  Saviour 

(l0:39;  13  :  29). 

31.  Prince  and  Saviour  belong  as  predi- 
cates to  this  one  :  this  one  (as,  who  is)  a  j)rincc 
and  a  Saviour;  not  to  the  verb:  c.rnlted  to  he  a 
prince,  etc.  (E.  V.). — To  his  right  hand.  (See 
note  on  2  :  33.) — To  give  repentance — i.  c. 
the  grace  or  dispo.-^ition  to  exercise  it.  (Comp. 
3  :  16 ;  18  :  27  ;  John  16  :  7,  8.)  Some  under- 
stand it  of  the  opportunity  to  repent,  or  the 
provision  of  mercy  which  renders  reiientance 
available  to  the  sinner  (De  Wet.).  The  expres- 
sion is  too  concise  to  convey  naturally  that 
idea,  and  place  of  repentance  is  employed  for 
that  purpose  in  Heb.  12  :  17.  In  both  cases  the 
exaltation  of  Christ  is  represented  as  securing 
the  result  in  question,  because  it  was  the  con- 
summation of  his  work,  and  gave  effect  to  all 
that  preceded. 

32.  /liipTupej  (witnesses)  governs  here  two 
genitives,  one  of  a  person,  the  other  of  a  thing. 
(See  Phil.  2  :  30 ;  Heb.  13  :  7.  W.  ?  30.  3.  R.  3 ; 
K.  I  275.  R.  6.)  Since  their  testimony  was  true, 
they  must  declare  it ;  no  human  authority  could 
deter  them  from  it.  (Comp.  4  :  20.)— And  the 
Holy  Spirit  (««)  too  is  his  witness.  [The  im- 
portant MSS.  NAB  D*  33  and  others  omit  hi 
{ako) ;  so  do  the  editors  Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg., 
West,   and  Hort.  and  Anglo-Am.  Revisers. — 

G 


A.  H.] — To  those  who  obey  him — i.  e.  by 

receiving  the  gosjjel.  (Comp.  6  :  7.)  Many 
suppose  the  apostle  to  refer  chiefly  to  the 
special  gifts  which  the  Spirit  conferred  on  so 
many  of  the  first  Christians,  in  order  to  con- 
firm their  faith  as  the  truth  of  God.  What 
took  place  on  the  day  of  Pentecost  was  a  tes- 
timony of  this  nature,  and  that  or  some  equiv- 
alent sign  was  repeated  on  other  occasions. 
(Comp.  10  :  45 ;  19  :  6  ;  Mark  16  :  20.)  But  to 
that  outward  demonstration  we  may  add  also 
the  inward  witness  of  the  Spirit,  which  believ- 
ers receive  as  the  evidence  of  their  adoption. 
(Comp.  Rom.  8  :  16 ;  Gal.  4  :  G ;  1  John  3  :  24.) 
Neander  interprets  the  language  entirely  of  this 
internal  manifestation.  Since  the  Holy  Spirit 
testified  to  the  gosi>el  in  both  ways,  and  since 
the  remark  here  is  unqualified,  we  have  no  rea- 
son to  consider  the  expression  less  extensive 
than  the  facts  in  the  case. 

33.  Were  convulsed  with  rage — lit.  were 
saw)i  asunder,  torn  in  pieces.  The  E.  V.  supplies 
"to  the  heart"  after  the  verb  (see  7  :  54),  but 
the  Greek  text  has  no  such  reading.  Some  ren- 
der sawed  their  teeth,  gnashed  them,  which  would 
require  tous  oSdv-raf  as  the  expressed  object  of 
the  verb. — Resolved,  determined  (see  27  :  39 
and  John  12  :  10) ;  but  on  the  rejjresentation 
of  Gamaliel  they  recalled  their  purpose.  The 
issue  was  averted,  and  hence  the  tense  is  im- 
perfect. [The  imperfect  tense  would  perhaps 
justify  us  in  translating  were  resolving,  were 
coming  to  a  determination. — A.  H.]  Instead 
of  passing  a  formal  vote,  it  is  more  probable 
that  they  declared  tlieir  intention  by  some  tu- 
multuous expression  of  their  feelings.  The 
verb  may  denote  the  act  as  well  as  the  result 
of  deliberation,  took  counsel,  consulted;  but 
men  exasperated  as  they  were  would  not  be 
likely  to  pay  much  regard  to  parliamentary 
decorum. 

34-39.  THE  ADVICE  OF  GAMALIEL. 

34.  TiVtos  governs  \aw  as  allied  to  words  de- 
noting judgment,  estimation.     (See  W.  ?  31.  6. 


82 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


tatiou  among  all  the  people,  and  commanded  to  put 
the  apostles  forth  a  little  space  ; 

:i5  And  said  unto  them,  Ye  men  of  Israel,  take  heed 
to  yourselves  what  ye  intend  to  do  as  touching  these 
men. 

3ij  For  before  these  days  rose  up  Theudas,  boasting 
himself  to  be  somebody  ;  to  whom  a  number  of  men, 
about  four  hundred,  joined  themselves:  who  was  slain  ; 
and  all,  as  many  as  obeyed  him,  were  scattered,  and 
brought  to  nought. 


35  while.  And  he  said  unto  them.  Ye  men  of  Israel, 
take  heed  to  yourselves  as  touching  these  men,  what 

36  ye  are  about  to  do.  tor  belore  these  days  rose  up 
Theudas,  giving  himself  out  to  be  somel  ody ;  to 
whom  a  number  of  men,  about  four  hundred,  joined 
themselves:  who  was  slain;  and  all,  as  many  as 
obeyed  him,  were  dispersed,  ;ind  came  to  nought. 


b. ;  Mt.  ^  388.)  The  character  which  Luke 
ascribes  to  Gamaliel  in  this  passage  agrees 
with  that  wliich  he  bears  in  the  Talmud.  He 
appears  tliere  also  as  a  zealous  Pharisee,  as  un- 
rivalled in  that  age  for  his  knowledge  of  the 
law,  as  a  distinguished  teacher  (see  22  :  3),  and 
as  possessing  an  enlarged,  tolerant  spirit,  far 
above  the  mass  of  his  countrymen.  He  is  said 
to  have  lived  still  some  fifteen  years  or  more 
after  this  scene  in  the  council.  (See  Herz., 
Encyk.,  vol.  iv.  p.  65G.1) — Ppa^v  {short)  refers  ev- 
idently to  time  (in  Wicl.,  for  a  while),  not  to 
space  (E.  V.). 

35.  Said.  What  follows  is  probably  an 
outline  of  the  sjieech. — As  touching  these 
men  some  join  with  take  heed — take  heed 
unto  yourselves  in  respect  to  these  men 
(E.  v.);  others  with  what  ye  are  about  to 
do  in  respect  to  these  men  (Kum.,  De  Wet., 
Mey.j.  Both  constructions  are  admissible  (W. 
§  55.  4) ;  but,  as  to  do  something  in  respect 
to  one  is  not  uncommon  in  Greek  (see  exam- 
ples in  Wetst.,  N.  T.),  it  is  better  to  recognize 
an  instance  of  that  expression  here. 

36.  Before  these  times.  This  is  not  the 
first  time  that  zealots  or  seditionists  have  ap- 
peared ;  they  may  have  come  forth  with  great 
pretensions,  but  ere  long  have  closed  their 
career  with  defeat  and  ignotniny.  For  the 
sake  of  effect  (observe  for),  Gamaliel  ptits  the 
case  as  if  the  prisoners  would  turn  out  to  be 
persons  of  this  stamp ;  but  before  closing  he  is 
careful  to  remind  his  associates  that  there  was 
another  possibility.  (See  v.  39.) — Theudas. 
Josephus  mentions  an  insurrectionist  named 
Theudas  who  appeared  in  the  reign  of  Claudius, 
some  ten  years  after  the  delivery  of  this  speech. 
Gamaliel,  therefore,  mtist  refer  here  to  another 
man  of  this  name;  and  this  man,  since  he 
preceded  Judas  the  Galilean  (v.  37),  could  not 
have  lived  much  later  than  the  reign  of  Herod 
the  Great.  The  year  of  that  monarch's  death, 
as  Josephus  states,  was  remarkably  turbulent ; 
the  land  was  overrun  with  belligerent  parties, 


under  the  direction  of  insitrrectionary  chiefs, 
or  fanatics.  Josephtis  mentions  but  three  of 
these  disttirbers  by  name ;  he  passes  over  the 
others  with  a  general  allusion.  Among  those 
whom  the  Jewish  historian  has  omitted  to  name 
may  have  been  the  Theudas  whom  Gamaliel 
has  here  in  view.  The  name  was  not  an  un- 
common one  (Win.,  Reahv.,  vol.  ii.  p.  609) ; 
and  it  can  excite  no  surprise  that  one  Theudas 
who  was  an  insurgent  shotild  have  appeared  in 
the  time  of  Augustus,  and  another  fifty  years 
later,  in  the  time  of  Claudius.  Josephus  gives 
an  account  of  fotir  men  named  Simon  who  fol- 
lowed each  other  within  forty  years,  and  of 
three  named  Judas  within  ten  years,  who  were 
all  instigators  of  rebellion.  This  niode  of  rec- 
onciling Luke  with  Josephus  is  approved  by 
Lardner,  Bengel,  Kuinoel,  Olshausen,  Anger, 
Winer,  and  others.'^  Another  very  plausible 
supposition  is  that  Luke's  Theudas  may  have 
been  identical  with  one  of  the  three  insurgents 
whom  Josephtis  designates  by  name.  Sonntag, 
who  agrees  with  those  who  adopt  this  view,  has 
supported  it  with  much  learning  and  ability.* 
He  maintains  that  the  Theudas  mentioned  by 
Gamaliel  is  the  individual  who  occurs  in  Jose- 
phus under  the  name  of  Simon,  a  slave  of 
Herod,  who  attempted  to  make  himself  king  in 
the  year  of  that  monarch's  death.  He  urges 
the  following  reasons  for  that  opinion :  first, 
this  Simon,  as  he  was  the  most  noted  among 
those  who  disturbed  the  public  peace  at  that 
time,  would  be  apt  to  occur  to  Gamaliel  as  an 
illustration  of  his  point;  secondly,  he  is  de- 
scribed as  a  man  of  the  same  lofty  pretensions 

(eii'at     aftos     eATriVa?    Trap*    ovTtvovv  =  Aeywf    eli'ai    Tiva, 

iavTov) ;  thirdly,  he  died  a  violent  death,  wliich 
Josephus  does  not  mention  as  true  of  the  other 
two  insurgents ;  fourthly,  he  appears  to  liave 
had  comparatively  few  adherents,  in  coiiformitj' 
with  Luke's  about  four  hundred ;  and  lastly, 
his  having  been  originally  a  slave  accounts  for 
the  twofold  appellation,  since  it  was  very  com- 
mon amonc;  the  Jews  to  assume  a  different 


1  Herzog's  RmJ-EncyMopadie  fiir  protestantische  Theologie  iind  Kirche  [1st  edition]. 

2  Jost,  the  Jewish   historian  (Gexchic/ite  der  Ismelitni,  Band  ii.,  Anh.,  p.  76\  assents  to  this  explanation,  and 
admits  the  credibility  of  Luke  as  well  as  of  Josephus. 

3  In  the  Theoloffische  Siudien  und  Kriliken  (1S37),  p.  G22,  sq ,  translated  by  the  writer  in  the   Bibliolhera  Hacra 
(1848.1,  p.  409,  sq. 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


37  After  this  man  rose  up  Judas  of  Galilee  in  the 
days  of  the  taxing,  and  drew  away  much  people  after 
him  :  he  also  perished  ;  and  all,  even  as  many  as  obeyed 
him,  were  dispersed. 

as  And  now  1  say  unto  you,  Refrain  from  these  men, 
and  let  them  alone  :  "for  if  this  counsel  or  this  work 
be  of  men,  it  will  come  to  nought: 

39  'Rut  if  it  be  of  Cod,  ve  cannot  overthrow  it; 
lest  haply  ye   be  found   eveu  no  tight  against  God. 


3/  After  this  man  rose  up  Judas  of  Galilee  in  the  days 
ot  the  enrolment,  and  drew  away  .■<.,„te  <,/  the  people 
after  him :    he   also  perished ;   and  all,  as  many  as 

38  obeyed  him,  were  scattered  abroad.  And  now  1  say 
unto  you,   l{efrain  from  these  men,  and  let  them 

on     -M  ?■  ''^'"  if,  this  counsel  or  this  work  be  of  men,  it 

39  will  be  overthrown  :  but  if  it  is  of  (iod,  ve  will  not 
be  able  to  overthrow  them;  lest  haply  ye  be  found 


a  ProY.  21  :  30  ;  Isa.  8  :  10  ;  .Matt.  15  :  13.... 6  Luke  21  :  15;  1  Cor.  1  :  25...  .c  ch.  7  :  51 ;  9  :  5  ; 


name  on  changing  their  occupation  or  mode 
of  life.     It  is  very  pos.sible,  therefore,  that  Ga- 
maliel speaks  of  him  as  Theudas,  because,  hav- 
ing borne  that  name  so  long  at  Jerusalem,  he 
was  best  known  by  it  to  the  members  of  the 
Sanhech-im ;  and  that  Josephus,  on  the  contrary, 
who  wrote  for  Romans  and  Greeks,  speaks  of 
him  as  Simon,  because  it  was  under  that  name 
that   he   set  himself  up  as  king,  and  in  that 
way  acquired  his   foreign   notoriety.      (Tacit., 
Hk.,  5.  9.)— There  can  be  no  valid  objection  to 
either  of  the  foregoing  suppositions ;  both  are 
reasonable,  and  both  must  be  disproved  before 
Luke  can  be  justly  charged  with  having  com- 
mitted an  anachronism  in  this  passage. — Was 
some   one   of  importance.    tIi  (some   one) 
has  often  that  emphatic  force.     (W.  I  25.  2.  c.) 
37.    Judas-  the  Galilean,  etc.    Josephus 
mentions  this  Judas  the  Galilean,  and  his  ac- 
count of  him  either  confirms  or  leaves  unde- 
nied  every  one  of  the  particulars  stated  or  in- 
timated by  Luke.  (See  Bell.  Jud.,  2.  8.  1;  A7itt., 
18.  1.  6;  20.  5.  2.)     He  calls  him   twice  the 
Galilean,   though  he    terms    him  also    the 
Gaulonite   in  AntL,  18.  1.  1,   from  the  fact 
that  he  was  born  at  Gamala,  in  Lower  Gaul- 
onitis.     He  was  known  as  the  Galilean,  be- 
cause   he    lived  subsequently  in   Galilee   (De 
Wet.),  or  because  that  province  may  have  in- 
cluded Gaulonitis.     The  epithet  served  to  dis- 
tinguish him  from  another  .Tudas,  a  revolution- 
ist, who  appeared  some  ten  years  earlier  than 
this.— In  the   days  of  the   registration— 
i.  e.  in  this  instance  of  persons  and  property 
with  a  view  to  taxation  (Jos.,  Antt.,  15.  1.  1). 
The  oiroypa*^  in  Luke  2  :  2,  which  is  so  care- 
fully   distinguished    from    this    tumult,    and 
which   took   place   at  the  birth   of  Christ,   is 
supposed    generally    to    have   been    a   census 
merely  of  the  population.    We  learn  from  Jo- 
sephus that  soon  after  the  dethronement  of 
Archelaus,   about   the  year  a.  d.  6   or  7,  the 
Emperor  Augustus  ordered  a  tax  to  be  levied 
on  the  Jews.    The  payment  of  that  tax  Judas 
instigated  the  people  to  resist,  on  the  ground  of 
its  being  a  violation  of  their  allegiance  to  Je- 
hovah  to  pay  tribute  to  a  foreign  power.  (Comp. 


Matt.  22  :  17.)  He  took  up  arms  in  defence  of 
this  principle,  and  organized  a  powerful  oppo- 
sition to  the  Roman  Government.— And  he 
also,  etc.  Josephus  relates  that  this  rebellion 
was  effectually  suppressed,  and  that  many  of 
those  who  had  taken  part  in  it  were  captured 
and  crucified  by  the  Romans.  He  says  nothing 
of  the  fate  of  Judas  him.self— Were  dispersed 
describes  very  justly  such  a  result  of  the  enter- 
prise. Coponius  was  then  Procurator  of  Judea, 
and  Quirinus  [Quiriniu.sJ,  or  Cyrenius  (Luke  2:  a),' 
was  Proconsul  of  Syria. 

38.  And  now,  in  the  light  of  such  ex- 
amples.—Let  them  alone,  not  suffer  them 
to  depart.— From  men,  in  distinction  from 
God  (v.  39).  (Comp.  Matt.  21  :  25.)— This 
counsel,  this  plan,  enterprise,  or  (more 
correctly)  work,  since  it  was  already  in  prog- 
ress.—Will  be  frustrated— i.  c.  without  any 
interference  on  your  part. 

39.  In  if  it  is  of  God  (comp.  if  it  be,  just 
before)  the  speaker  reveals  his  sympathy  with 
the  prisoners.  (See  on  4  :  9.)   Without  declaring 
the  truth  to  be  on  their  side,  he  at  least  argues 
the  question  from  that  ^loint  of  view.— Lest 
haply,  etc.     Critics  differ  as  to  the  dependence 
of  this  clause.     Some  supply  before  it  see  to  it 
or  an  equivalent  word  (see  Luke  21  :  34) :   Take 
heed  lest  ye  be  found  (in  the  end)  also  fighting 
against    God,    as   well    as    men   (Grot.,    Kuin., 
Rob.).      Others  find  the  ellipsis  in   Ye  cannot^ 
destroy  them  (more  correct  than   avro,   it)   and, 
therefore,  I  say,  should  not  attempt  it,  lest  ye 
also,  etc.  (Bng.,  Mey.).     Also  in  both  cases  in- 
cludes, naturally,  the  idea  both  of  the  impiety 
and  the  futility  of  the  attempt.     De  Wette  as- 
sents to  those  who  connect  the  words  with  let 
them  alone,  in  the  last  verse.   [The  true  read- 
ing appears  to  be  a<|.eT€  avrov^.    So  Lach.,  Tsch., 
Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  after  X  A  B  C.      But 
this  does  not  necessarily  affect  the  interpreta- 
tion.   (Comp.  Matt.  15  :  14.)— A.  H.]     This  is 
the  simplest  construction,  as  MJiTore  (lest)  fol- 
lows appropriately  after  such  a  verb,  and  the 
sense  is  then  complete  without  supplying  any- 
thing.    In  this  case  some  editors  would  put 
what  intervenes  in  brackets ;  but  that  is  incor- 


1  [The  future  tense,  will  not  be  able,  etc.,  is  the  best-supported  reading.-A.  H.]" 


84 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


40  And  to  him  they  agreed :  and  when  they  had 
"called  the  aposties,  'and  beaten  them,  they  com- 
manded that  ihey  should  not  speak  in  the  name  of 
Jesus,  and  let  them  go. 

41  ii  And  they  departed  from  the  presence  of  the 
council,  'rejoic  ng  that  they  were  counted  worthy  to 
sutler  shame  for  his  name. 

42  And  daily  "^in  the  temple,  and  in  every  house, 
•they  ceased  not  to  teach  and  preach  Jesus  Christ. 


40  even  to  be  fighting  against  God.  And  to  him  they 
agreed :  and  when  they  had  called  the  apostles  unto 
them,  they  beat  them  and  charged  them  not  to  speak 

41  in  the  name  of  Jesus,  and  let  them  go.  They  there- 
fore departed  from  the  presence  of  the  council,  re- 
joicing that  they  were  counted  worthy  to  sutler  dis- 

42  honor  for  the  Name.  And  every  day,  in  the  temple 
and  at  home,  they  ceased  not  to  teach  and  to  preach 
Jesus  as  the  Christ. 


och.  4:  18.... 5  Matt.  10  :  17  ;  23  :  34  ;  Mark  13  :  9. . .  .c  Matt.  5  :  12  ;  Rom.  5  :3;  2  Cor.  12  :  10;  Phil.  1  :  29  ;  Heb.  10:34;  James 
1  :  2  ;  1  Pet.  4  :  13,  16. ...d  oh.  2  ;  46....ech.  4  :  20,  29. 


rect,  inasmuch  as  the  caution  here  presupposes 
the  alternative  in  but  if  it  is  of  God. — The 

advice  of  Gamaliel  was  certainly  remarkable, 
and  some  of  the  early  Christian  Fathers  went 
so  far  as  to  ascribe  it  to  an  unavowed  attach- 
ment to  the  gospel.  The  supposition  has  no 
historical  supijort,  and  there  are  other  motives 
which  explain  his  conduct.  Gamaliel,  as  Ne- 
ander  remarks,  was  a  man  who  had  discern- 
ment enough  to  see  that  if  this  were  a  fanatical 
movement,  it  would  be  rendered  more  violent 
by  oi-)position ;  that  all  attempts  to  suppress 
what  is  insignificant  tend  only  to  raise  it  into 
more  importance.  On  the  other  hand,  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  apostles  sjioke  and  acted  may 
have  produced  some  impression  upon  a  mind 
not  entirely  prejudiced,  and  so  much  the  more 
since  their  strict  observance  of  the  law  and  their 
hostile  attitude  toward  Sadduceeism  must  have 
rendered  him  favorably  disposed  toward  them. 
Hence  the  tliought  may  have  arisen  in  his  mind 
that  possibly,  after  all,  there  might  be  some- 
thing divine  in  their  cause. 

40-43.  THE  APOSTLES  SUFFER  JOY- 
FULLY FOR  CHRIST,  AND  DEPART  TO 
PREACH  HIM  ANEW. 

40.  Were  persuaded  by  him — i.  e.  to  spare 
the  lives  of  tlie  apostles,  whom  they  had  (see  v. 
33)  resolved  to  put  to  death.  They  could  not 
object  to  the  views  of  Gamaliel,  they  were  so 
reasonable ;  they  were  probably  influenced  still 
more  by  his  personal  authority.  Still,  their 
rage  demanded  some  satisfaction :  tliey  must 
punish  the  heretics,  if  they  could  not  slay 
them. — Having  scourged.  The  instrument 
frequently  used  for  this  purpose  was  a  whip,  or 
scourge,  consisting  often  of  two  lashes  "knotted 
with  bones,  or  heavy  indented  circles  of  bronze, 
or  terminated  by  hooks,  in  which  case  it  was 
aptly  denominated  a  scorpion"  {Diet,  of  Antt., 
art.  "Flagrum").  The  punishment  was  in- 
flicted on    the    naked    back    of   the   sufferer. 


(Comp.  16  :  22.)  A  single  blow  would  some- 
times lay  the  flesh  open  to  the  bones.  Hence, 
to  scourge  a  person  {SeCpoi)  meant  properly  to 
excoriate,  flay  him.  Paul  says  that  he  suffered 
this  punishment  five  times  (2  Cor.  11:24).  It  is 
affecting  to  remember  that  the  Saviour  was 
subjected  to  this  laceration. 

41.  oi  iiiv.  The  antithesis  does  not  follow. — 
ou*-,  illative — i.  e.  in  consequence  of  their  release. 
[See  the  Revised  Version,  above,  for  the  proper 
translation. — A.  H.] — That,  because,  appends 
an  explanation  of  the  participle  rejoicing,  not 
of  the  verb. — In  behalf  of  the  name — i.  e. 
of  Jesus,  which  is  omitted,  either  because  it  has 
occurred  just  before,  or  more  properly  because 
"  the  name  "  was  a  familiar  expression  among 
the  disciples,  and  as  such  required  no  addition. 
(Comp.  3  John  7.)  It  is  a  loss  to  our  religious 
dialect  that  the  term  in  this  primitive  sense  has 
fallen  into  disuse.  The  common  text,  indeed, 
reads  his  after  name  (Greek),  but  without 
sufficient  authority. — Were  counted,  etc. — a 
bold  oxymoron :  were  accounted  worthy 
to  be  disgraced.  For  an  explanation  of  the 
paradox,  see  Luke  16  :  15.  The  verbs  refer  to 
different  standards  of  judgment. 

42.  From  house  to  house,  or  at  home, 
refers  to  their  private  assemblies  in  different 
parts  of  the  city,  as  distinguislied  from  their 
labors  in  the  temple.  Those  who  reject  the 
distributive  sense  in  2  :  46  reject  it  also  here. 
[See  Jacob,  Eccl.  Pol.  of  N.  T.,  p.  191,  sq.—A.  H.] 
Ceased  not  to  teach,  in  defiance  of  the  pro- 
hibition which  I1I0WS  as  well  as  words  had  just 
now  enforced  on  them  (v.  40).  The  Greek  in 
such  a  case  employs  a  participle,  not  the  infini- 
tive, as  the  complement  of  the  verb.  (K.  §  310. 
4.  f. ;  W.  §  45.  4.)— Announcing  the  glad 
tidings  of  the  Christ  (first  as  emphatic) 
Jesus,  the  latter  the  subject  here,  the  former 
the  predicate.  (Comp.  9  :  20-22.)  This  clause 
defines  the  preceding  one. 


Ch.  VI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


85 


CHAPTER    VI. 


AND  in  those  days,  "when  the  number  of  the  disci- 
ples was  multiplied,  there  arose  a  murmuring  of 
the  ''i.irecians  against  the  Hebrews,  because  tlieir  wid- 
ows were  neglecied  'in  the  daily  ministration. 

•I  Then  the  twelve  cal;ed  the  multitude  of  ihe  disci- 
ples uniQlhem,a.x\Oi  said,  ■'it  is  not  reason  that  we  should 
leave  the  word  of  t.od,  and  serve  tables. 

i  Wherefore,  brethren,  4ook  ye  out  among  you  seven 
men  of  honest  report,  full  of  the  Holy  i.host  and  wis- 
dom, whom  we  may  appoint  over  this  business. 

4  Hut  we /will  give  ourselves  continually  to  prayer, 
aud  to  the  ministry  of  the  word. 

ach   2-  41-  4-  4-  5  :  1*;  ver.  7.... 5  oh.  9  :  '^9:  11  ;  20 cch.  4  :  35...  <i  Ex.  18  :  17 e  Deut.  1  :  i:t ;  ch.  1  :  V!l  ;  16  :  2;  1  Tim.  3:7 

/  ch.  -2  :  42.-^ ^1  Ur.  BeUenUta 2  Ur.  pleasing 3  Or,  minister  to  tablet. ...i  Some  aucieat  aulliuritieti  read  But,  brethren,  loot  y« 

oat  from  among  yon. 


1  Now  in  these  days,  when  the  number  of  the  dis- 
ciples was  multiplying,  there  arose  a  muriuuring  of 
the  Uirecian  Jews  against  the  Hebrews,  i  ecau  e  their 
widows  were  neglected   in   the  daily  ministration. 

2  And  the  twelve  called  the  multitude  of  the  disciples 
unto  them,  and  said.  It  is  not  -tit  that  we  should  lor- 

3  sake  tlie  word  of  uod,  and  ''serve  tables.  -tLooK  ye 
out  therefore,  brethren,  from  among  you  se^eu  men 
of  good  report,  full  of  the  spirit  and  of  wisdom,  whom 

4  we  may  appoint  over  this  business,  i.ul  we  w  iii  con- 
tinue stediastly  in  prayer,  and  in  the  ministry  ol  the 


1-7.  APPOINTMENT  OF  ALMS-DISTRIB- 
UTERS IN  THE  CHURCH  AT  JERUSALExM. 

1.  In  these  days.  (See  on  1 :  15.)  We  may 
assign  the  events  in  this  chapter  to  the  year  a.  d. 
35.  They  relate  more  or  less  directly  to  the  his- 
tory of  Stephen,  and  niust  have  taken  placeshort- 
ly  before  his  death,  which  was  just  before  Paul's 
conversion. — Was  multiplied  =  becoming 
numerous. — riov  'EWrivKTToiv  should  be  rendered, 
not  Greeks,  but  Hellenists.  They  were  the 
Jewish  lueinbers  of  the  church  who  spoke  the 
Greek  language.  The  other  i^arty,  the  Hebrews, 
were  the  Palestine  Jews,  who  spoke  the  Syro- 
Chaldaic,  or  Aranijean.  (See  Win.,  Cludd.  Gr., 
p.  19,  sq.) — Were  overlooked  is  imperfect,  be- 
cause the  neglect  is  charged  as  one  that  was 
common. — Ministration,  distribution  of  alms 
— i.  e.  either  of  food  or  the  money  necessary  to 
procure  it.  OLshausen  argues  for  the  former 
from  the  adjective  daily. 

2.  The  twelve.  Matthias  must  have  been 
one  of  them,  and  the  validity  of  his  choice  as  an 
apostle  is  placed  here  beyond  doubt.  (See  on 
1  :  26.) — The  multitude,  mass,  of  the  dis- 
ciples. It  has  been  objected  that  they  had 
beconae  too  numerous  at  this  time  to  assemble 
in  one  place.  It  is  to  be  recollected,  as  De 
Wette  suggests,  that  many  of  those  who  had 
been  converted  were  foreign  Jews,  and  had  left 
the  city  ere  this. — That  we,  forsaking  the 
word  of  God,  etc.  It  is  not  certain,  from  the 
narrative,  to  what  extent  this  labor  of  providing 
for  the  poor  had  been  performed  by  the  apostles. 
The  following  remarks  of  Rothe  present  a  rea- 
sonable view  of  that  question  :  "  The  apostles 
at  first  appear  to  have  applied  themselves  to 
this  business,  and  to  have  expended  personally 
the  common  funds  of  the  church.  Yet,  occu- 
pied as  they  were  with  so  many  other  more  im- 
portant objects,  they  could  have  exercised  only 
a  general  oversight  in  the  case,  and  must  have 
committed  the  details  of  the  matter  to  others. 


Particular  individuals  may  not  have  been  ap* 
pointed  for  this  purpose  at  the  beginning ;  aud 
the  business  may  have  been  conducted  m  an 
informal  manner,  without  any  strict  supervision 
or  immediate  direction  on  the  part  of  the  apos- 
tles. Under  such  circumstances,  especially  as 
the  number  of  believers  was  increasuig  every 
day,  it  could  easily  happen  that  some  of  the 
needy  were  overlooked ;  aud  it  is  not  surprising 
that  the  Hellenistic  Oiristians  had  occasion  to 
complain  of  the  neglect  of  the  widows  and 
other  poor  among  them."i  The  complaint, 
therefore,  implied  no  censure  of  the  apostles, 
but  was  brought  naturally  to  them,  both  on  ac- 
count of  their  position  in  the  church  and  the* 
general  relation  sustained  by  them  to  the  sys- 
tem tinder  which  the  grievance  had  arisen.— 
To  serve  tables,  provide  for  them.  (Comp. 
Luke  4  :  39;  8  :  3.)  Some  render  the  noun 
money-tables,  counters,  as  in  John  2  :  15 ;  but 
tlie  verb  connected  with  it  here  forbids  that 
sense.  The  noun  is  plural,  because  several 
tallies  were  supported.  "  Locutio  indignitatem 
aliquam  exprimlt ;  antitheton  mirdsterium  verbi  " 
(Bug.). 

3.  Look  ye  out,  etc.  The  selection,  there- 
fore, was  made  by  the  body  of  the  church ;  the 
apostles  confirmed  the  choice,  as  we  see  from 
we  will  appoint,  and  from  the  consecration 
in  V.  6.  [But  the  selection  was  restricted  to 
members  of  the  church  who  were  ( 1 )  of  good 
repute  (comp.  1  Tim.  3:2;  Tit.  1  : 6,  7),  and  (2) 
full  of  the  Spirit  and  of  wisdom.  The  word 
Holy  is  omitted  by  Lach.,  Tsch..  Treg.,  We.st. 
and  Hort,  Revisers'  text,  with  X  B  C]'^  p  etc. — 
A.  H.]  KaTaaTTjcTiaixev  (T.  R.),  Ave  may  appoint 
(E.  v.),  is  a  spurious  form. — Testified  to,  of 
good  repute.  (See  10  :  22  and  IG  :  2.) — Busi- 
ness— lit.  an  affair  which  is  held  to  be  neces- 
sary. 

4.  Prayer,  the  (service  of)  prayer.  The 
article  points  out  the  importance  of  the  duty 


*  Die  Anjdnge  der  ChrisUichen  Kirche  und  ihrer  Verfaasung,  p.  164. 


86 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VI. 


5  ^  And  the  saying  pleased  the  whole  multitude: 
and  they  chose  Stephen,  "a  man  full  of  faith  and  of 
the  Holy  bhost,  and  *I^hilip,  and  l^rochorus,  and  Mi- 
canor,  and  Timon,  and  Parmenas,  and  <=>;icolas  a  pros- 
elyte of  Antioch  : 

li  Whom  they  set  before  the  apostles:  and  "^when 
they  had  prayed,  'they  laid  their  hands  on  them. 

7  And /the  word  of  Cod  increased;  and  the  number 
of  the  discipk-s  multiplied  in  Jerusalem  greatly  ;  and 
a  great  company  »of  the  priests  were  obedient  to  the 
faith. 


5  word.  And  the  saying  pleased  the  whole  multitmle: 
and  they  chose  Stephen,  a  man  full  of  faith  and  of 
the  Holy  Spirit,  and  Philip,  and  I'rochorus,  and  M- 
canor,  and   Timon,  and   larmenas,  and   >vicolas  a 

6  proselyte  of  Antioch:  whom  they  set  before  the 
apostles:  and  when  they  had  prayed,  they  laid  their 
hands  on  them. 

7  And  the  word  of  (iod  increased;  and  the  number 
of  the  disciples  multiplied  in  Jerusalem  exceedingly ; 
and  a  great  company  ol  the  priests  were  obedient  to 
the  faith. 


och.  11  :  'H 1  ch.  8  :  5,  26;  21  :  8....C  Rev.  2  :  6,  15 d  ch.  1  :  24 ech.  8  :  17  ;  9  :  17  ;  13  :  3  ;  1  Tim.  4  :  14;  5  :  22;  2  Tim. 

1:6 /  ch.  12  :  24  ;  19  :  20  ;   Col.  1  :  6 g  Joliu  12  :  42. 


(i:i4).  Prayer,  evidently  in  this  connection 
for  the  success  of  the  word,  is  recognized  as 
their  legitimate  work,  as  much  as  preaching. — 
We  will  give  ourselves.  This  remark  does 
not  imply  that  they  had  been  diverted  already 
from  their  proper  work,  but  that  they  wished 
to  guard  against  that  in  future  by  committing 
this  care  to  others.  They  now  saw  that  it  re- 
quired more  attention  than  they  had  bestowed 
upon  it. 

5.  A  man  full  of  faith  and  of  the  Holy 
Spirit.  We  may  retain  kyiov  (Holy),  but  the 
word  is  uncertain.  [This  remark  was  doubt- 
less intended  for  the  word  Holy  in  verse  3  (see 
Ridded  note),  for  the  adjective  here  is  not  ques- 
tioned.— A.  H.]  The  same  terms  describe  the 
cliaracter  of  Barnabas  in  11  :  24.— Of  Philip 
we  re&d  again  in  8  :  8,  sq. ;  21  :  8.  The  others 
are  not  known  out  of  this  passage.  That  Nico- 
laus  was  the  founder  of  the  sect  mentioned  in 
Rev.  2  :  6  is  a  conjecture  without  proof.  Many 
have  supposed  that  the  entire  seven  were  chosen 
from  the  aggrieved  party.  Gieseler  thinks  that 
three  of  them  may  have  been  Hebrews,  three 
Hellenists,  and  one  a  proselyte  {Ch.  Hist.,  I  25). 
Their  Greek  names  decide  nothing.  (See  on 
1  :  23. )  The  distributers  would  be  taken  natu- 
rally from  both  sides,  but  in  what  proportion 
we  cannot  tell.  It  would  depend  on  their  per- 
sonal traits,  after  all,  more  than  on  their  nation- 
ality, whether  they  were  able  to  satisfy  the  dis- 
affected.— Luke  does  not  term  the  men  dea- 
cons, thovigh  we  have  an  approach  to  that  ap- 
pellation in  V.  2.  In  21  :  8  they  are  called  the 
Seven.  Some  of  the  ancient  writers  regarded 
them  as  the  first  deacons;  others,  as  entirely 
distinct  from  them.  The  general  opinion  at 
present  is  that  this  order  arose  from  the  insti- 
tution of  the  Seven,  but  by  a  gradual  extension 
of  the  .sphere  of  duty  at  first  assigned  to  them. 
[It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  precise  duties  of 
deacons  in  the  apostolic  churches.  But  that 
there  were  persons  bearing  this  title  and  en- 
trusted with  some  kind  of  service  in  the 
churches  is  evident  from  Phil.  1  :  1  and  1 
Tim.  3  :  8-12.    The  view  which   has  most  in 


its  favor  is  that  they  were  helpers  of  the  pas- 
tors, especially  in  visiting  the  sick,  providing 
for  the  poor,  jind  entertaining  strangers.  Only 
those  who  were  grave,  sincere,  benevolent,  spir- 
itual, could  perform  such  service  with  the  high- 
est benefit  to  the  cause.  But  they  were  not  re- 
quired to  be,  like  the  pastors  of  the  churches, 
"apt  to  teach,"  though  many  of  them  doubt- 
less possessed  this  gift  also.  Their  service  was 
therefore  similar  to  that  which  the  Seven  were 
expected  to  render,  and  in  principle  the  ap- 
pointment of  the  Seven  was  the  introduction 
of  diaconal  service.  The  latter  would  easily 
grow  out  of  the  former.  But  when  Paul  wrote 
to  Timothy,  miraculous  gifts  were  no  longer 
very  frequent  or  necessary  in  the  cluirches ; 
hence,  neither  bishops  nor  deacons  were  re- 
quired to  be  men  "full  of  the  Holy  Spirit" — 
i.  e.  possessed  of  supernatural  gifts.  For  the 
office  of  "  deaconess,"  see  notes  on  Rom.  10  :  1, 
2  and  1  Tim.  3  :  11.— A.  H.] 

6.  Laid,  etc. — viz.  the  apostles.  The  nature 
of  the  act  dictates  this  change  of  the  subject. 
[So,  likewise,  does  the  expression  whom  we 
will  appoint  in  verse  3,  the  statement  whom 
they  (the  brethren)  set  before  the  apostles 
— evidently  for  some  purpose  wholly  unsug- 
gested,  unless  the  apostles  performed  the  laying 
on  of  hands — and  the  ijrobability  that  the  apos- 
tles offered  prayer  on  the  occasion. — A.  H.] 
The  imposition  of  hands,  as  practised  in  ap- 
pointing persons  to  an  office,  was  a  symbol  of 
the  impartation  of  tlie  gifts  and  graces  which 
they  needed  to  qualify  them  for  the  office.  It 
was  of  the  nature  of  a  prayer  that  God  would 
bestow  the  necessary  gifts,  rather  than  a  pledge 
that  they  were  actually  conferred. 

7.  The  prosperity  related  here  is  a  proof  that 
harmony  had  been  restored,  and  that  the 
prayers  and  labors  of  the  ajxistles  had  suf- 
fered no  interruption. — The  word  of  God 
grew,  spread  and  strengthened  itself  as  a 
system  of  belief  or  doctrine.  The  next  clause 
repeats  the  idea  concretely  by  stating  how  rap- 
idly the  recipients  of  this  faith  were  mnlri- 
plied.     (See  note  on  12  :  24.) — And  a  great 


Ch.  VI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


87 


»  And  i^tcphen,  full  of  faith  and  power,  did  great 
wonders  and  miracles  anionK  the  peojile. 

9  *i  Then  there  arose  certain  of  the  synagogue,  which 
is  called  '/le  si/iiit;/ur/ur  of  the  Libertines,  and  (  yrenians, 
and  Alexandrians,  and  of  them  of  Cilicia  and  of  Asia, 
disputing  with  Stephen. 

M  And  "they  weie  not  able  to  resist  the  wisdom  and 
the  spirit  by  which  he  spake. 


8  And  Stephen,  full  of  grace  and  power,  wrought 

9  great  wonders  and  signs  among  the  people,  ilut 
there  arose  certain  of  them  that  were  of  the  syna- 
gogue called  t/ii^  si/niit/iifiiif  of  the  Libertines,  and  of 
the  (yrenians,  and  of  the  Alexandrians,  and  of  them 

10 of  Cilicia  and  Asia,  disputing  with  Stephen.  And 
they  were  not  able  to  withstand  the  wisdom  and 


a  Luke  21  :  15 :  ch.  5  :  :<9 :  see  Kx.  4:12;  Isa.  54  :  IT. 


multitude  of  priests.  According  to  Ezra 
2  :  oG-39,  tlic  i)riests  amounted  to  four  thou- 
sand two  hundred  and  eiglity-nino  at  the  time 
of  the  return  from  Babylon ;  tliey  must  have 
been  still  more  numerous  at  this  period.  Such 
an  acce.s.sion  of  such  converts  was  a  signal 
event  in  the  early  history  of  the  churcli. — 
The  faith,  faith  system — i.  e.  the  gospel. 
(Comp.  Rom.  1:5;  Gal.  1 :  23,  etc.)  This  mode 
of  epitomizing  the  ptlan  of  salvation  confirms 
tlie  Protestant  view  of  it,  in  opposition  to  that 
of  the  Catholics.     (See  Rom.  11  :  G.) 

8-15.  THE  ZEAL  OF  STEPHEN,  AND 
HIS   VIOLENT   APPREHENSION. 

8.  Full  of  grace — i.  e.,hy  metonymy,  of 
gifts  not  inherent,  but  conferred  by  divine 
favor.  (See  v.  3.)  This  is  the  correct  word 
rather  than  faith,  which  some  copies  insert 
from  V.  5. — Power,  etficiency  (i  :  s),  which 
was  one  of  the  gifts,  and,  as  inthcated  by  the 
next  words,  included  an  ability  to  work  mir- 
acles.— Did  (imperf.)  shows  that  he  repeated 
the  miracles. 

9.  Certain  from  the  synagogue  so 
called  of  the  Libertines — t.  e.  Ubertini 
fn-edmcn ;  viz.  Jews,  or  the  sons  of  Jews,  who, 
having  been  slaves  at  Rome,  had  acquiretl  their 
freedom,  and,  living  now  at  Jerusalem,  main- 
tained a  separate  synagogue  of  their  own. 
When  Pompey  overran  Judea,  about  b.  c.  63, 
he  carried  a  vast  inimber  of  the  Jews  to  Rome, 
where  they  were  sold  into  slavery.  Most  of 
these,  or  their  children,  the  Romans  afterward 
lil)erated,  as  they  found  it  inconvenient  to  have 
servants  who  were  so  tenacious  of  the  peculiar 
rites  of  their  religion.  The  Jews  usually  named 
their  synagogues  from  the  countries  whence 
those  who  attended  them  liad  come;  and  hence 
Luke  inserts  here  the  so  called,  in  order  to 
reconcile  the  ear,  as  it  were,  to  this  almost 
unheard-of  designation.  Some  contend  that 
A(/3epTiV<i>i>  is  also  a  patrial  name,  Lihertinian,'! — 
i.  e.  Jews  from  a  place  named  Libertum.  Not 
only  has  the  participle  no  apparent  force  in  this 
ca.sc,  but  the  existence  of  such  a  town  is  alto- 
gether uncertain. — And  Cyrenians,  etc.  The 
construction  here  is  doul)tful.  The  simplest 
view  is  that  which  repeats  ruvU  (certain)  be- 
fore each  of  the  genitives  with  the  implication 


that  the  Cyrenians,  Alexandrians,  Cilicians, 
and  Asiatics  formed  so  many  distinct  syna- 
gogues— i.  e.  including  the  Libertines  five  ditfer- 
ent  assemblies  in  all  (De  Wet.,  Mey.).  Tlie 
Rabbinic  writers  say — with  some  exaggeration, 
no  doubt — that  Jerusalem  contained  four  hun- 
dred and  eighty  synagogues.  The  would  be 
I)ropcr  before  Cyrenians  and  Alexan- 
drians, but,  as  they  refer  to  towns  well 
known,  could  be  omitted,  as  bcfr>re  Egyp- 
tians in  7  :  22  and  Thessalonians  in  20  :  4. 
— Them  of  Cilicia  may  be  simply  =  Cili- 
cians, and  the  article  docs  not  arise,  neces- 
sarily, out  of  a  different  relation  to  certain. 
Some  repeat  from  the  synagogue  as  well  as 
certain  before  the  successive  genitives,  with 
the  same  result,  of  course,  as  to  the  number  of 
synagogues.  It  is  awkward  to  supply  so  many 
words,  and  also  to  shut  up  the  so  called  to 
the  first  clause,  as  we  must  in  that  case,  since  it 
is  so  plainly  inappropriate  to  the  other  names. 
!  According  to  others,  we  are  to  connect  Cyre- 
I  nians  and  Alexandrians  with  Libertines, 
!  understanding  these  three  cliusses  to  constitute 
one  synagogue,  and  the  Cilicians  and  Asiatics 
to  constitute  another.  (See  W.  §  19.  5,  marg.) 
It  may  be  objected  to  this  (though  no  interpre- 
tation is  wholly  unencumbered)  that  it  unites 
so  called  too  closely  (for  the  reason  given 
above)  with  the  second  and  third  noun,  and 
also  that  so  large  a  number  of  foreign  Jews  aa 
the  populous  cities  referred  to  would  be  likely 
to  send  to  Jerusalem  could  not  meet  conveni- 
ently in  a  single  place  of  worship.  Wie.seler 
{Chronologie,  p.  63),  in  support  of  his  opinion 
that  Paul  acquired  his  Roman  citizenship 
(22 :  28)  as  libertinus,  or  the  descendant  of  a  Uh- 
ertinm,  would  take  and  before  Cyrenians  as 
explicative — namely,  to  wit;  so  that  they 
were  all  lihertini,  and  belonged  to  one  syna- 
gogue. This  is  extremely  forced  and  arbitrary. 
— Among  the  Cilicians  who  disputed  with 
Stephen  may  have  been  Saul  of  Tarsus.  (See 
7  :  58.) — For  the  extent  of  Asia,  see  on  2  :  9. 

10.  The  Spirit.  (See  v.  5.)— In  with  AVhich 
he  spake  [the  verb  is  imperf,  denoting  c<m- 
tinuous  action  =  was  speaking. — A.  H.],  the 
relative  belongs  in  sense  to  both  nouns,  but 
agrees  with  the  nearest.     (Comp.  Luke  21  :  15. 


THE   ACTS 


[Ch.  VI. 


11  "Then  they  suborned  men,  which  said,  We  have 
heard  hira  speak  blasphemous  words  against  Moses, 
and  againsi  dod. 

12  And  they  stirred  up  the  people,  and  the  elders, 
and  the  scribes,  and  came  upon  hnu,  and  caught  him, 
and  brought  him  ti>  the  council, 

18  And  set  up  false  witnesses,  which  said,  This  man 
ceaseth  not  to  speak  blasphemous  words  against  this 
holy  place,  and  the  law  : 

14  'For  we  have  heard  him  say,  that  this  Jesus  of 
Nazareth  shall  ''destroy  this  place,  and  shall  change 
the  customs  which  Moses  delivered  us. 

15  And  all  that  sat  in  the  council,  looking  stedfastly 
on  him,  saw  his  face  as  it  had  been  the  face  of  an 
angel. 


11  the  Spirit  by  which  he  spake.  Then  they  suborned 
men,  who  said,  we  ha\e  heard  him  speak  blas- 
phemous  words    against    Mo.ses,   and    iKj'iinsf  dod. 

12  And  they  stirred  up  the  people,  and  the  elders,  and 
the  scribes,  and  came  upon  him,  and  seized  him, 

13  and  brought  him  into  the  council,  and  set  up  false 
witnesses,  who  said.  This  man  ceaseth  not  to  speak 

14  words  against  this  holy  place,  and  the  law :  for  we 
have  heard  him  say,  that  this  .  esus  of  Nazareth 
shall  destroy  this  place,  and  shall  change  the  cus- 

15  toms  which  Moses  delivered  unto  us.  And  all  that 
sat  in  the  council,  fastening  thuir  eyes  on  him,  saw 
his  face  as  it  had  been  the  lace  of  an  angel. 


a  1  Kings  21  :  10,  13;  Matt.  '26  :  59,  60 6  ch.  25  :  8 c  Dau.  »  :  ! 


Stephen  experienced  the  truth  of  the  promise 
recorded  in  tliat  passage.) 

11.  Secretly  instructed,  suborned.  It  was 
concerted  between  them  wliat  should  be  .said, 
and  to  what  point  it  should  be  directed. — Blas- 
phemous, in  the  judicial  sense,  which  made  it 
a  capital  offence  to  utter  such  words.  Contempt 
of  Moses  and  his  institutions  was  contempt  of 
Jehovah,  and  came  within  the  scope  of  the  law 
against  blasphemy  as  laid  down  in  Deut.  13 : 6-10. 
It  was  on  this  charge  that  the  Jews  pronounced 
the  Saviour  worthy  of  death.  (See  Matt.  26  : 
60,  sq.) 

12.  The  elders  and  the  scribes — i.  e. 
those  of  these  classes  who  belonged  to  the  San- 
hedrim. The  appeal  was  made  more  especially 
to  them,  because,  in  addition  to  their  influence, 
they  were  mostly  Pharisees,  and  the  present  ac- 
cusation was  of  a  nature  to  arouse  especially  the 
spirit  of  that  sect.  Hence  they  take  the  lead  at 
this  time,  rather  than  the  Sadducees. — Caught. 
The  subject  here  is  strictly  certain,  etc.  (see  v. 
9),  but  we  think  of  them  naturally  as  acting  in 
concert  with  those  whom  they  had  instigated  to 
join  with  them. 

13.  Placed  before  them,  introduced  (see  4  : 
7) ;  others,  set  up,  procured. — False  wit- 
nesses. They  accused  Stephen  of  having 
spoken  contemptuously  of  the  law  and  the 
temple,  and  of  having  blasphemed  Moses  and 
God.  Their  testimony  in  that  form  was  grossly 
false.  It  was  opposed  to  everything  which 
Stephen  had  said  or  meant.  Yet,  as  Neander 
and  others  suggest,  he  had  undoubtedly  taught 
that  the  Christian  Dispensation  was  superior  to 
that  of  Moses ;  that  the  gospel  was  designed  to 
supersede  Judaism ;  that  the  law  was  unavail- 
ing as  a  source  of  justification ;  that  henceforth 
true  worship  would  be  as  acceptable  to  God  in 
one  place  as  another.  In  the  clearness  with 
which  Stephen  apprehended  these  ideas,  he  has 
been  justly  called  the  forerunner  of  Paul.    His 


accusers  distorted  his  language  on  these  points, 
and  thus  gave  to  their  charge  the  only  sem- 
blance of  justification  which  it  po.ssessed. — For 
this  man,  see  5  :  28. — Does  not  cease  betrays 
the  exaggerating  tone  of  a  "swift  witness." — 
The  holy  place  is  the  temple  (21:28;  Ps. -4:3,  etc.), 
in  some  part  of  which  they  were  assembled,  as 
appears  from  this  in  the  next  verse. 

14.  Who  said,  etc.  They  imputed  to  Stephen 
these  words,  as  authorizing  the  inference  in  v.  13. 
— This  [in  the  Greekj  repeats  Jesus  with  atone 
of  contempt. — Will  destroy,  etc.  It  is  not 
impossible  that  he  had  reminded  them  of  the 
predictions  of  Christ  respecting  the  destruction 
of  the  city  and  the  temple. — This  place,  be- 
cause the  present  session  was  held  in  some  room 
or  court  of  the  temple. — Customs  required  to 
be  observed,  hence  laws,  as  in  15  :  1 ;  21  :21, 
etc. — Delivered  may  apply  to  what  is  written 
as  well  as  what  is  oral  (R.  and  P.,  Lex.,  s.  v.). 

15.  Looking  stedfastly,  etc.  They  were 
all  gazing  upon  him,  as  the  principal  object 
of  interest  in  the  assembly,  and  so  much  the  more 
at  that  moment  in  expectation  of  his  reply  to 
so  heinous  a  charge.  The  radiance,  therefore, 
which  suddenly  lighted  up  the  countenance 
of  Stephen  was  remarked  by  every  one  present. 
That  what  they  saw  was  merely  a  natural  ex- 
pression of  the  serenity  which  pervaded  his 
mind  can  hardly  be  supposed.  As  if  the  face 
of  an  angel  seems  to  overstate  the  idea,  if  it 
be  reduced  to  that;  for  the  comi)arison  is  an 
unusual  one,  and  the  Jews  supposed  the  visible 
appearance  of  angels  to  correspond  with  their 
superhuman  rank.  (Comp.  1  :  10 ;  Matt.  28  :  3; 
Luke  24  :  4  ;  Rev.  18  : 1,  etc.)  The  countenance 
of  Stephen,  like  that  of  Moses  on  Iiis  descent 
from  the  mount,  shone,  probably,  with  a  pre- 
ternatural lustre,  proclaiming  him  a  true  wit- 
ness, a  servant  of  him  whose  glory  was  so  fitly 
symbolized  by  such  a  token.  The  occasion  was 
worthy  of  the  miracle. 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


89 


CHAPT 

1-53.  DISCOURSE  OF  STEPHEN  BE- 
FORE THE  SANHEDRIM. 

The  speaker's  main  object  may  be  considered 
as  twofold :  first,  to  show  that  the  charge 
against  him  rested  on  a  false  view  of  the  An- 
cient Dispensation — not  on  his  part,  but  on 
that  of  his  accusers ;  and  secondly,  that  the 
Jews,  instead  of  manifesting  a  true  zeal  for  the 
temple  and  the  law  in  their  opposition  to  the 
gospel,  were  again  acting  out  the  unbelieving, 
rebellious  spirit  which  led  their  fathers  so  often 
to  resist  the  will  of  God  and  reject  his  greatest 
favors.  It  appears  to  me  that  the  latter  was 
the  uppermost  idea  in  Stephen's  mind,  both 
because  it  occupies  so  much  space  in  the  body 
of  the  address  (vv.  27,  39-14),  and  because,  near 
the  close  of  what  is  said  (v.  51,  sq.),  it  is  put  for- 
ward very  much  as  if  he  regarded  it  as  the  con- 
clusion at  which  he  had  been  aiming.  It  may 
be  objected  that  this  view  renders  the  discourse 
aggressive,  criminatory,  in  an  unusual  degree  ; 
but  we  are  to  remember  that  Stephen  (see  on  v. 
5-1)  was  interrupted,  and  but  for  that,  in  all 
probability,  after  having  exposed  the  guilt  of 
his  hearers,  he  would  have  encouraged  them  to 
repent  and  believe  on  the  Saviour  whom  they 
had  crucified.  (Bmg.  has  a  remark  to  the  same 
effect.)  Yet  both  parts  of  the  speech,  as  so  un- 
derstood, converge  to  one  point — viz.  that  the 
speaker  was  not  guilty  of  maligning  the  Ancient 
Economy  :  first,  because  even  under  that  Dis- 
pensation the  divine  favor  was  bestowed  inde- 
pendently of  the  law ;  and  secondly,  because 
the  teachers  of  that  Economy  held  up  the  same 
view  of  its  spiritual  nature  and  encountered  a 
similar  opposition. 

In  the  interpretation  of  the  speech  I  proceed 
on  the  principle  that  most  of  Stephen's  hearers 
were  so  well  accjuainted  with  his  peculiar  views, 
with  his  arguments  in  support  of  them,  and  his 
mode  of  illustration,  that  they  had  no  occasion 
to  be  distinctly  reminded  of  his  doctrine  at  this 
time.  (See  the  note  on  6  :  13.)  Hence,  Stephen 
could  assume  that  the  bearing  of  the  different 
remarks  or  occurrences  brought  forward  in  the 
address  would  suggest  itself  to  the  minds  of  his 
judges  ;  without  pausing  to  tell  them  this  means 
that  or  (hat  means  this,  he  could  leave  them  to 
draw  silently  the  conclusions  wliich  he  wished 
to  establish.  Stephen  illustrates  his  subject 
historically.  Th.at  mode  of  argument  was  well 
chosen.  It  enabled  him  to  show  the  Jews  that 
their  own   history,  in   which   they  gloried  so 


ER    VII. 

nmch,  condemned  them ;  for  it  taught  the  in- 
etficacy  of  external  rites,  foreshadowed  a  more 
perfect  spiritual  system,  and  warned  them 
against  the  example  of  those  who  resist  the 
will  of  God  when  declared  to  them  by  his 
messengers.  Stephen  pursues  the  order  of 
time  in  his  narrative;  and  it  is  important  to 
remark  that  feature  of  the  discourse,  because 
it  explains  two  peculiarities  in  it :  first,  that  the 
ideas  which  fall  logically  under  the  two  heads 
that  have  been  mentioned  are  intermixed,  in- 
stead of  being  presented  separately ;  and 
secondly,  that  some  circumstances  are  intro- 
duced which  we  are  not  to  regard  as  signif- 
icant, but  as  serving  merely  to  maintain  the 
connection  of  the  history. 

But  the  adtlress  is  so  discursive  and  complex, 
and  the  purport  of  it  has  been  so  variously 
represented,  that  it  is  due  to  the  subject  to 
mention  some  of  the  other  modes  of  analysis 
that  have  been  proposed. 

The  ft)llowing  is  Neander's  view  of  it.  Ste- 
phen's jn-nuary  object  was  certainly  apolo- 
getical  ;  but,  as  he  forgot  himself  in  the  sub- 
ject with  which  he  was  inspired,  his  apologetic 
efforts  relate  to  the  truths  maintained  by  him, 
and  impugned  by  his  adversaries,  rather  than 
to  himself.  Hence,  not  satisfied  with  defend- 
ing, he  developed  and  enforced,  tlie  truths  he 
had  proclaimed,  and  at  the  same  time  reproved 
the  Jews  for  their  unbelief  and  their  opposition 
to  tiie  gospel.  Stephen  first  refutes  the  charges 
made  agamst  him  of  enmity  against  the  people 
of  God,  of  contempt  of  their  sacred  institutions, 
and  of  blaspheming  Closes.  He  traces  the  pro- 
cedure of  the  divine  providence  in  guiding  the 
people  of  God  from  the  times  of  tlieir  progen- 
itors ;  he  notices  the  promises  and  their  pro- 
gressive fulfilment  to  the  end  of  all  the  prom- 
ises— the  advent  of  the  Messiah,  and  the  work 
to  be  accomplished  by  him.  But  with  this 
narrative  he  blends  liis  charges  against  the 
Jewish  nation.  He  shows  that  their  ingrati- 
tude and  unbelief  became  more  flagrant  in  pro- 
portion as  the  promises  were  fulfilled  or  given 
with  greater  fulness  ;  and  their  conduct  in  the 
various  preceding  periods  of  the  development 
of  God's  kingdom  was  a  specimen  of  the  dis- 
position they  now  e\'inced  toward  the  publi- 
cation of  the  gospel.' 

According  to  Olshausen,^  the  speaker  recapit- 
ulated the  Jewish  history  at  such  length  simply 
in  order  to  testify  his  regard  for  the  national  in- 


1  Quoted  from  Ryland's  translation  of  T/te  Planting  and  Tiaininff  of  the  Christian  Church. 
*  Commentar  Hber  das  Neue  Testament,  vol.  ii.  p.  719. 


90                                                  THE 

ACTS.                                     [Ch.  VII. 

riiHEN  said  the  high  priest.  Are  these  tilings  so? 

X     2  Aud  he  said,  "Meu,  brethren,  and  fathers,  heark- 

1  And  the  high  priest  said.  Are  these  things  so? 

2  And  he  said, 

ach.  22  :  1. 

stitutions,  to  conciliate  his  hearers,  and  show 
indirectly  that  he  could  not  have  uttered  the 
blasphemous  words  imputed  to  him.  (See  G  :  11.) 
That  those  addressed  saw  their  own  moral 
image  reflected  so  distinctly  from  the  narra- 
tive results  from  the  subject,  not  from  the  speak- 
er's intention. 

Luger  develops  the  course  of  thought  in  this 
way :  Stephen  is  accused  of  blaspheming  the 
temple  and  the  law;  he  vindicates  himself  by 
exhibiting  the  true  significance  of  the  temple 
and  the  law.  The  main  points  are,  first,  that  the 
law  is  not  something  complete  by  itself,  but  was 
added  to  the  promise  given  to  Abraham — yea, 
contains  in  itself  a  new  promise,  by  the  fulfil- 
ment of  which  the  law  is  first  brought  to  com- 
pletion. Secondly,  the  temple  cannot  be  ex- 
clusively the  holy  place ;  it  is  one  in  a  series  of 
places  which  the  Lord  has  consecrated,  and  by 
this  very  act  foreshadowed  that  future  com- 
pletion of  the  temple  to  which  Solomon  and 
the  prophets  point.  Thirdly,  it  being  a  cause 
of  special  offence  to  the  Jews  that  the  Jesus  re- 
jected by  them  should  be  represented  as  the 
Perfecter  of  the  law  and  the  temple,  Stephen 
showed  that  no  objection  against  him  could  be 
derived  from  that  fact,  since  the  messengers  of 
God  had  been  treated  with  the  like  contempt  at 
all  periods.  Fourthly,  these  three  topics  are 
presented,  not  after  each  other,  but  in  each 
other.  The  history  of  Israel  forms  the  thread 
of  the  discourse,  but  this  is  related  in  such  a 
manner  that  examples  of  the  different  points 
come  into  view  at  every  step.^ 

Baur's  exposition  of  the  plan  has  been  highly 
commended.  The  contents  of  the  discourse 
divide  themselves  into  two  parallel  parts:  on 
the  one  side  are  presented  the  benefits  which 
God  from  the  earliest  times  conferred  on  the 
Jewish  nation ;  on  the  other  side  is  exhibited 
in  contrast  their  conduct  toward  him.  Hence 
the  main  thought  is  this :  The  greater  and  more 
extraordinary  the  favors  which  God  from  the 
beginning  bestowed  on  the  Jews,  the  more  un- 
thankful and  rebellious  from  the  beginning  was 
the  spirit  which  they  manifested  in  return  ;  so 
that  where  a  perfectly  harmonious  relation 
should  have  been  found  the  greatest  alienation 
appeared.  The  greater  the  effort  which  God 
made  to  elevate  and  draw  the  nation  to  him- 


self, the  more  the  nation  turned  away  from 
him.  In  presenting  this  view  of  the  Jewish 
character,  the  speaker  defended  indirectly  his 
own  cause.  He  was  accused  of  having  spoken 
reproachfully,  not  only  against  the  law,  but  in 
particular  against  the  temple.  Hence,  the  direc- 
tion which  he  gave  to  the  speech  enabled  him 
to  show  that  the  idolatrous  regard  of  the  Jews 
for  the  temple  exemplified  in  the  highest  de- 
gree that  opposition  between  God  and  them- 
selves which  had  been  so  characteristic  of 
them  from  the  first.^ 

It  may  be  added  that  tlie  peculiar  character 
of  the  speech  impresses  upon  it  a  seal  of  au- 
thenticity, for  no  one  would  think  of  framing 
a  discourse  of  this  kind  for  such  an  occasion. 
Had  it  been  composed  ideally  or  after  some 
vague  tradition,  it  would  have  been  thrown 
into  a  different  form ;  its  relevancy  to  the 
charge  which  called  it  forth  would  liave  been 
made  more  obvious.  As  to  the  language  in 
which  Stephen  delivered  it,  opinions  are  di- 
vided. His  disputing  with  the  foreign  Jews 
(6 : 9)  would  indicate  that  he  was  a  Hellenist 
(comp.  9  :  29),  and  in  that  case  he  spoke  prob- 
ably in  Greek.  The  prevalence  of  that  lan- 
guage in  Palestine,  and  especially  at  Jerusa- 
lem, would  have  rendered  it  intelligible  to 
such  an  audience.*  The  manner,  too,  in  which 
the  citations  agree  with  the  Septuagint  favors 
this  conclusion. 

1-16.  History  of  the  Patei.^echs,  or  Age 
OF  THE  Promises. 

1.  Then  {&i)  binds  this  verse  to  6  :  14. — Are 
then  these  things  so,  as  the  witnesses  testify? 
Hence  this  was  the  question  to  which  Stephen 
replied,  and  must  furnish  the  key  to  his  an- 
swer. We  must  C(instrue  the  speech  so  as  to 
find  in  it  a  refutation  of  the  charge  in  6  :  13. 
ti  is  direct  here,  as  in  1  :  6.  apa.  =  "  rebus  ita 
comparatis,"  under  these  circumstances.  (See 
Klotz,  Ad  Devar.,  vol.  ii.  p.  176.)  The  ques- 
tion is  asked  in  view  of  the  accusation.  The 
particle  is  not  to  be  struck  out  of  the  text,  as 
in  some  editions.  [It  is  elided  by  Lach.,  Tsch., 
Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo-Am.  Revisers, 
on  what  apjiears  to  be  satisfactory  evidence — 
e.  <7.  X  A  B  C— A.  H.] 

2.  Brethren  are  the  spectators,  fathers  the 
members  of  the  council,   like  our  "  civil  fa- 


1  Ueher  Zweck,  Inhalt,  vnd  Eitjenthumlic/ikeii  der  Rrde  des  Stfphanus,  von  Friedrich  Luger. 
*  Pavlus,  sein  Lehen  vnd  Wirkrn,  seine  Briefe  und  seine  Lehre.  p.  42. 

s  In  proof  of  this,  see  Hug'j  EinleUung  in  das  Neue  Testament,  vol.  ii.  p.  27,  sq.,  fourth  edition,  and  the  Biblical 
Beposilory  (1832),  p.  530. 


C:i.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


91 


cii  ;  The  (iod  of  glory  appeared  unto  our  father  Abra- 
ham, when  he  was  in  Mesopotamia,  before  he  dwelt  in 
Cliarraii, 

•'!  And  said  unto  him,  "Get  thee  out  of  thy  country, 
and  from  tliy  kindred,  and  come  into  the  land  which  I 
shall  shew  tliee. 

4  Then  'came  he  out  of  the  land  of  the  C'halda.'ans, 
and  dwelt  in  Charran:   and   from   thence,  when   hi^ 


Brethren  and  fathers,  hearken.    The  <iod  of  glory 
appeared  unto  our  father  Abraham,  when  li    »;is  in 

3  .<iesoi)otamia,  liefore  lie  dwelt  in  llaraii,  and  said 
unto  him,  et  thee  out  of  thy  land,  and -froni  tliy 
ki  dred,  and  come  into  tlie  land  which  l  shall  shew 

4  thee.  1  hen  came  he  out  of  the  land  of  the  (  lial- 
dccaiis,  and  dwelt  in  ilarau :  and  from  thence,  when 


a  Gen.  12:  I. ...6  Guu.  Il::fl:  U:  4,  5. 


thers."  (Comp.  22  :  1.)  Men  qualifies  both 
nouns.  (See  on  1  :  IG.)  The  English  Version 
makes  three  distinct  classes,  instead  of  two. — 
The  God  of  the  glory  (the,  because  peculiar 
to  him)  =  hakkabhodh  in  the  Old  Testament,  or, 
among  the  later  Jews,  hashshekenah — i.  e.  the 
light  or  visiljle  splendor  amid  which  Jehovah 
revealed  himself;  the  symbol,  therefore,  of  his 
presence  (Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Blmf.),  (Comp.  Ex. 
25  :  22  ;  40  :  34 ;  Lev.  9:6;  Ezek.  1  :  28 ;  3  :  23 ; 
Heb.  9  :  5,  etc.)  Appeared  (i5i/><^)  points  to 
that  sense  here.  (See  also  v.  55.)  Paul  speaks 
of  this  symbol  in  Rom.  9  :  4  as  one  of  the  pe- 
culiar distinctions  with  which  God  honored 
the  Hebrew  nation.  Those  miss  the  sense  who 
resolve  the  genitive  into  an  adjective,  the  glo- 
rious God  (Kuin.,  Hmph.). — When  he  was 
in  3Iesopotainia.  Irapcrf.,  as  often  in  nar- 
ration. (W.  ^  4G.  0.)  Abraham  resided  first  in 
Ur  of  the  Chaldees  (Gen.  n:28),  wliich  lay  prob- 
ably in  the  extreme  North  of  Mesopotamia, 
near  the  sources  of  the  Tigris.  The  Chaldee 
branch  of  Peleg's  family,  to  which  Terah  and 
his  sons  belonged,  spread  themselves  originally 
in  that  region. ^  Xcnophon  found  Chaldeans 
here  in  his  retreat  from  Babylonia  with  the 
Ten  Thousand.  (See  further  on  v.  4.)  —  In 
Charran.  Charran  =  Charan  (Gen.  ii  :3i)  was 
also  in  the  north  of  Mesopotamia,  but  south 
of  Ur.  It  was  the  later  Carrse  of  the  Greeks 
and  Romans,  where  Crassus  was  defeated  and 
slain  by  the  Parthians.  Its  position  tallies 
remarkably  with  the  sacred  narrative.  The 
ruins  have  been  identified  a  few  miles  south 
of  ITrfa,  on  a  road  from  the  north  to  the  south- 
ern ford  of  the  Euphrates.  It  is  a  perversion 
of  the  text  to  suppose  Stephen  so  ignorant  of 
the  geography  here  as  to  place  Charran  on  the 
west  of  the  Euphrates.  His  meaning  evidently 
is  that  Abraham's  call  in  that  city  was  not  the 
first  which  he  received  during  his  re.sidence  in 
Mesopotamia.  We  have  no  account  of  this 
first  communication  to  the  patriarch  in  the 
Old  Testament,  but  it  is  implied  distinctly  in 
Gen.  15  :  7  and  Neh.  9  :  7.  Philo  and  Josephus 
relate  the  history  of  Abraham  in  accordance 
with  the  statement  here  that  he  was  called 
twice. 


3.  Said  unto  him,   in  Ur,  liefore  the  mi- 
gration   to   Charran.  —  Go    forth    from    thy 

country,  etc.     This  is  quoted  from  Gen.  12  : 
1,  sq.,   where   it  appears  as  the  language  ad- 
dressed to  Abraham  when   God  api)eareil  to 
him  at  Charran.     But  his  earlier  call  had  the 
same  object  precisely  as  the  later;  and  hence 
Stephen  could  employ  the  terms  of  the  second 
communication,   in   order  to  characterize  the 
import  of  the  first.     And  hither,  with  an  im- 
j  Iterative  force ;  the  term  adapted  to  tlie  spe^iker's 
I  position,  like  this,  in  v.  4. — Whichever  (see 
on  2  :  21),  since  he  "went  forth  not  knowing 
wliither  he  goes"  (Heb.  n:8). 
j      4.  Then,    after  tliis   command.  —  Having 
I  gone  forth  from  the  land  of  the  Chal- 
dees, which,  therefore,  did  not  extend  so  far 
south  as  to  include  Charran.     It  is  barely  pos- 
sible that  having  gone  forth  may  reach  for 
ward  to  removed  (the  change  of  sulyect  there 
j  is  against  it),  and  in  that  case  the  second  re- 
'  nioval  would  have  been  a  part  of  the  journey 
from    Chaldea.      (Comp.    Gen.   11  :  31.)      The 
early   history  of  the   Chaldees  is  too  ob.scure 
to  allow  us  to  define  the  limits  of  their  terri- 
tory.     (See    Herz.,    Encijk.,    vol.  ii.  p.  617.) — 
i  Land  of  the  Chaldeans  .suggests  a  region 
I  rather  than  a  city,  and  Ur  (for  which  the  Sept. 
renders  "country"  in  Gen.  11  :  28)  was  prob- 
ably the  name  of  a  district  among  the  steppes 
of  Northern  Mesopotamia.     Some  would  idert- 
tify  Ur  with  the  modern  Urfa,  the  Edessa  of 
I  the  Greeks ;  but,  though  the  name  (dropping 
I  the  last  syllable)  may  seem  to  favor  that  com- 
I  bination,  the  surer  etymology  derives  Urfa  (as 
j  a  corrujition)  from  the  Syriac  Urhoi,  and  thus 
I  destroys  all  connection  between  Ur  and  Urfli. 
(See  Tuch,  p.  284,  and  Delitzsch,  p.  407,  Vher 
die  Genesis.)     Had  Ur,  either  as  a  city  or  re- 
gion, been   in   Babylonia,  as  some  conjecture, 
\  Charran,  so  far  to  the  west,  would  have  l>een 
I  out  of  the  wav  in   a   migration  to  Canaan. — 
After  his  father  Avas  dead.     According  to 
Gen.  11  :  32,  Terah  died  at  Haran  at  the  age  of 
two  hundred  and  five,  and   according  to  the 
usual  inference  drawn  from  Gen.  11  :  26  he  was 
only  seventy  years  old  at  the  birth  of  Abra- 
ham ;  so  that,  since  Abraham  left  Charran  at 


1  J"or  the  ethnography  of  the. subject,  see  Knobel's  VSlkertaffl  der  Genesis,  p.  170,  sq. 


92 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


father  was  dead,  he  r^moyed  him  into  this  land,  where- 
in ye  now  dwell. 

5  And  he  gave  him  none  inheritance  in  it,  no,  not  40 
muck  iiji  to  set  his  foot  on  :  "yet  he  promised  that  he 
would  give  it  to  him  for  a  possession,  and  to  his  seed 
after  him,  when  as  yet  he  had  no  child. 


his  father  was  dead,  God  removed  him  into  this  land, 
5  wherein  ye  now  dwell :  and  he  ga\e  him  none  in- 
heritance in  it,  no.  not  >o  much  as  to  set  his  foot  on : 
and  he  promised  that  he  would  give  it  to  him  in 
possession,  and  to  his  seed  after  him,  when  as  yet  he 


a  Gen.  U  :  1 ;  13  :  15;  15  :  3,  18;  17  :  8 ;  26  :  3. 


seventy-five  (Gea.u-.t),  Terah,  instead  of  being 
dead  at  that  time,  must  have  lived  (205  —  [70  + 
75]  =)  sixty  years  after  his  son's  departure  from 
Charran.  Here,  again,  some  writers  insist  that 
Stephen  has  shown  a  gross  ignorance  of  the 
patriarchal  history.  But  this  apparent  dis- 
agreement admits  of  a  ready  solution  if  we 
suppose  that  Abraham  was  not  the  oldest  son, 
but  that  Haran,  who  died  before  the  first  mi- 
gration of  the  family  (Gen.  11 :  28),  was  sixty  years 
older  than  he,  and  that  Terah,  consequently, 
was  one  hundred  and  thirty  years  old  at  the 
birth  of  Abraham  (130  +  75  =  205).  The  rela- 
tion of  Abraham  to  the  Hebrew  history  would 
account  for  his  being  named  first  in  the  gene- 
alogy. We  have  otlier  instances  entirely  par- 
allel to  this.  Thus  in  Gen.  5  :  32  and  else- 
where Japheth  is  mentioned  last  among  the 
sons  of  Noah,  but  according  to  Gen.  9  :  24  and 
10  :  21  he  was  the  oldest  of  them.  Lightfoot 
has  shown  that  even  some  of  the  Jewish 
writers,  who  can  be  suspected  of  no  desire  to 
reconcile  Stephen  with  the  Old  Testament, 
concede  that  Abraham  was  the  youngest  son 
of  Terah.  The  learned  Usher  founds  his  sys- 
tem of  chronology  on  this  view.  The  other 
explanations  are  less  probable.  It  appears 
that  there  was  a  tradition  among  some  of  the 
Jews  that  Terah  relapsed  into  idolatry  during 
the  abode  at  Haran,  and  that  Abraham  left 
him  on  that  account — i.  e.  as  the  TalmudLsts 
express  it  after  his  spiritual  death.  Kuinoel, 
Olshausen,  and  others,  think  that  Stephen  may 
have  used  was  dead  in  that  sense ;  so  that 
the  notice  of  Terah's  natural  death  in  Gen.  11  : 
32  would  be  proleptic — i.  e.  in  advance  of  the 
exact  order  of  the  history.  The  tradition  of 
Terah's  relapse  into  idolatry  may  have  been 
well  founded.  Bengel  offers  this  suggestion : 
"Abram,  dum  Thara  vixit  in  Haran,  domum 
quodammodo  paternam  habuit  in  Haran,  in 
terra  Canaan  dtintaxat  peregrii^um  agens ;  mor- 
tuo  autem  patre,  plane  in  terra  Canaan  domum 
unice  habere  coepit"  ["While  Terah  lived  in 
Haran,  Abram  had  in  a  manner  a  paternal 
home  in  Haran,  though  living  as  a  stranger  in 
the  land  of  Canaan  ;  but  when  his  father  was 
dead,  he  began  manifestly  to  have  his  only 
home  in  the  land  of  Canaan  "].    The  Samaritan 


Codex  reads  one  hundred  and  forty-five  in  Gen. 
11  :  32,  which  would  remove  the  difficulty,  had 
it  not  been  altered  probably  for  that  very  pur- 
pose. The  Samaritan  text  has  no  critical  au- 
thority when  opposed  to  the  Masoretic.i 
Caused  him  to  remove,  to  migrate,  by 
a  renewed  command.  (See  Gen.  12  :  1,  sq.) — 
Into  Avhich,  because  ye  dwell  (KaToiKtlre), 
implies  an  antecedent  motion. — You,  instead 
of  we,  because,  as  a  foreign  Jew,  Stephen  ex- 
cludes himself. 

5.  And  he  gave  to  him  (during  his  life)  no 
inheritance  in  it,  no  actual  jio-ssession,  but 
a  i:)romise  only  that  his  jjosterity  should  occupy 
it  at  some  future  period.  It  is  not  at  variance 
with  this  that  he  subsequently  purchased  the 
field  of  Ephron  as  a  burial-ijlace  ( Gen.  23:3, ««.) ; 
for  he  acquired  no  right  of  settlement  by  that 
purchase,  but  permission  merely  to  bury  "his 
dead,"  wliich  he  sought  as  a  favor  becatise  he 
was  "  a  stranger  and  a  sojourner  "  in  the  land. 
Lest  the  passage  should  seem  to  conflict  with 
tliat  transaction,  some  (Kuin.,  Olsh.)  would 
render  not  iovK  as  not  yet  (outtoj)  and  gave 
as  pluperfect,  De  Wette  agrees  witli  Meyer  in 
restricting  the  remark  to  the  period  of  Abra- 
ham's first  arrival  in  Canaan.  He  purchased 
the  field  of  Ephron  near  tlie  close  of  his  life. — 
Not  even  a  foot-breadth,  a  single  foot. 
(Comp.  Deut.  2  :  5.)— That  he  would  give 
it  to  him  for  a  possession,  not  necessarily 
in  his  own  jierson,  but  in  that  of  his  descend- 
ants. The  country  might  be  said  to  be  Abra- 
ham's in  prospect  of  that  reversion.  So,  in 
Gen.  46  :  4,  God  says  to  Jacob  on  his  descent 
into  Egj^pt :  "  I  will  bring  thee  up  again  " — i.  e. 
him  in  his  posterity.  Others  understand  pos- 
session of  Abraham's  own  residence  in  tlie 
Land  of  Promise. — When  he  had  no  child. 
This  clause,  as  well  as  the  general  connection, 
recalls  to  mind  the  strength  of  Abraham's 
faith.  It  was  in  that  way  that  he  pleased  God 
and  obtained  the  promise,  and  not  by  legal  ob- 
servances ;  for  circumcision  had  not  yet  been 
instituted  or  the  law  given.  Paul  reasons  in 
that  manner  from  Abraham's  history,  both  in 
Rom.  4  :  9,  sq.,  and  in  Gal.  3  :  17,  sq.  Stephen 
may  have  expanded  his  speech  at  this  point  so 
as  to  have  presented  distinctly  the  same  con- 


1  See  Gesenius,  De  Pentaleuchi  Samarilani  Origine,  Indole,  et  Auctoritate.- 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


93 


6  And  God  spake  on  this  wise,  "That  his  seed  should 
sojourn  in  a  stian^re  land  ;  and  that  they  should  bring 
tlieni  into  bondage,  and  entreat  them  evil  'four  hun- 
dred years. 

7  And  the  nation  to  whom  they  shall  be  in  bondage 
will  I, judge,  said  (iod:  and  after  that  shall  they  come 
forth,  and  i^.^crve  nie  in  this  place. 

8  ''And  he  gave  him  the  covenant  of  circumcision : 
«and  so  .-Vmiliam  begat  Isaac,  and  circumcised  him  the 
eighth  day;  .^and  Isaac  begat  Jacob;  and  ejacob  begat 
the  twelve  patriarchs. 


6  had  no  child.  And  God  spake  on  this  wise,  that  hia 
seed  should  .sojourn  in  a  strange  land,  and  tluit  they 
should  bring  them  into  bondage,  ami  entreat  them 

7  evil,  four  hundred  years.  And  the  nation  to  wliich 
they  shall  be  in  bondage  will  1  judge,  said  (iod:  and 
after  that  shall  they  come  forth,  and  serve  me  in 

S  this  place.  And  lie  gave  him  the  covenant  of  cir- 
cumcision: and  no  Abraham  begat  Isaac,  and  circum- 
cised him  the  eighth  day ;  and  Isaac  be.gut  Jacob,  and 


oOen.  15: 13,  16.... i  Ex.  12:40;  Gal.  3:  17....cEx.  3  :  12.... d  Gen.  IT  :  9,  10,  11 e  Gen.  21 :  2,  3,  4..../  Gen.  25:26. 

g  Geu.  29  :  31,  etc. ;  30  :  5,  etc. ;  35  :  18,  23. 


elusion ;  or,  as  remarked  in  the  first  analysis, 
most  of  his  hearers  may  have  been  so  familiar 
with  the  Cliristian  doctrine  on  tlie  subject  that 
they  perceived  at  once  that  import  of  his  allu- 
sions. 

6.  The  speaker  quotes  here  the  passage  to 
which  lie  had  merely  alluded. — Now  (Si)  sub- 
joins this  fuller  account  of  the  promise ;  not 
btit,  although  he  was  childless  (Mey.,  taken 
back  in  his  last  ed.). — Thus,  to  this  effect — 
viz.  in  Gen.  15  :  13-16. — Shall  be,  not  should 
(E.  v.).  The  citation  mingles  the  indirect  form 
with  the  direct. — Strangers  shall  enslave, 
strangers,  as  the  subject,  being  involved  in  in 
a  strange  land.  (See  W.  ?  64.  3.  b.)— Four 
hundred  years,  in  agreement  with  Gen.  15  : 
13 ;  but  both  there  and  here  a  round  number, 
since  in  Ex.  12  :  40  "the  sojourning  of  Israel 
who  dwelt  in  Egypt"  is  said  to  have  been  four 
hundred  and  thirty  years.  But  here  arises  a 
chronological  question  to  which  it  is  necessary 
to  advert.  In  Gal.  3  :  17,  Paul  speaks  of  the 
entire  period  from  Abraham's  arrival  in  Canaan 
until  the  giving  of  the  law  as  embracing  only 
four  hundred  and  thirty  years — a  calculation 
which  allows  but  two  hundred  and  fifteen  years 
for  the  sojourn  in  Egypt;  for  Isaac  was  born 
twenty-five  years  after  that  arrival,  was  sixty 
yeai-s  old  at  the  birth  of  Jacob,  and  Jacob  was 
one  hundred  and  thirty  years  old  when  he  went 
to  reside  in  Egypt  (430  -  [25  -f-  60  +  130]  =  215). 
The  Seventy,  in  Ex.  12  :  40,  and  Josephus,  in 
Atitt.,  2.  15.  2,  follow  the  same  computation. 
There  are  two  solutions  of  this  difficulty.  One 
is  that  the  Jews  had  two  ways  of  reckoning  this 
period,  which  were  current  at  the  same  time ; 
that  it  is  uncertain  wliich  of  them  is  the  correct 
one,  and  for  all  practical  purposes  is  wholly  un- 
important, since,  when  a  speaker  or  writer,  as 
in  this  case  of  Stephen,  adopted  this  mode  or 
that,  he  was  understood,  not  to  propound  a 
chronological  opinion,  but  merely  to  em]>loy  a 
familiar  designation  for  the  sake  of  definiteness. 
The  other  solution  is  that  the  four  hundred  and 


thirty  years  in  Ex.  12  :  40  embrace  the  period 
from  Abraham's  immigration  into  Canaan  until 
the  departure  out  of  Egypt,  and  that  the  sacred 
writers  call  this  the  period  of  sojourn  or  servitude 
in  Egypt  a  potion — i.  e.  from  its  leading  charac- 
teristic.^ Tliey  could  describe  it  in  this  manner 
with  so  much  the  more  propriety,  because  even 
during  the  rest  of  the  time  the  condition  of  the 
patriarchs  was  that  of  exiles  and  wanderers. 
The  current  chronology,  Usher's  system,  adopts 
two  hundred  and  fifteen  as  thenumber  of  years 
during  which  the  Hebrews  dwelt  in  Egypt. 

7.  I  (emphatic,  as  one  able  to  punish)  Avill 
judge  (Hebraistic),  imjilying  the  execution  of 
the  sentence. — After  these  things,  after  both 
so  long  a  time  and  such  events.  These  things 
refers  to  will  judge,  as  well  as  to  the  other 
verbs. — And  shall  worship  me  in  this 
place.  This  clause  is  taken  from  a  different 
passage — viz.  Ex.  3  :  12,  which  records  the  dec- 
laration that  God  would  bring  the  Israelites 
where  Moses  then  was.  But,  as  the  words 
there  also  relate  to  the  deliverance  from  Egypt, 
Stephen  could  use  them  to  express  more  fully 
the  idea  in  Gen.  15  :  16.  In  the  communication 
to  Moses,  place  refers  to  Sinai  or  Horeb,  but  is 
applied  here  very  properly  to  Canaan,  since  the 
worship  in  the  desert  was  a  pledge  of  its  per- 
formance in  the  Promised  Land.  Shall  wor- 
ship may  intimate  that  God  accepted  tlieir 
worship  before  they  had  any  temple  in  which 
to  offer  it. 

8.  The  covenant  of  circumcision — ?'.  e. 
the  one  of  which  circumcision  is  the  sign. 
(Comp.  niqn  of  circumcision  in  Rom.  4  :  11.) — 
And  thus  (ovtm?) — i.  e.  agreeably  to  the  cove- 
nant, God  gave  the  promised  child,  and  Abra- 
ham observed  the  appointed  rite.  Such  briefly 
were  the  contents  of  the  covenant  fsee  Gen. 
17  :  2,  ,«7.),  and  begat  and  circumcised  very 
naturally  recall  them  here,  ovtu?  as  merely 
then  (Mey.\  in  lieu  of  5e  or  koI  in  this  speech 
elsewhere,  expresses  too  little  in  such  a  place. 
[Changed  by  Meyer  in  his  last  ed. :  "  So — i.  e. 


1  Baumgarten,  in  common  with  others,  inclines  to  this  view  in  his  TheologUcher  Cammentar  zum  Penlatetich, 
vol.  i.  p.  190. 


94 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


9  "And  tlie  patriarchs,  moved  with  envy,  sold  Joseph 
into  Egypt:  'but  <iod  was  with  liini, 

10  Aiid  delivered  him  out  of  all  his  afflictions  <^and 
gave  him  favor  and  wisdom  in  the  sight  of  l^haraoh 
king  of  Egypt;  and  he  made  him  governor  over  Egypt 
and  all  his  house. 

11  ''Now  there  came  a  dearth  over  all  the  land  of 
Egypt  and  (Jiiinaan,  and  great  attliction  :  and  our  fa- 
thers found  no  sustenance. 

12  «But  when  Jacob  heard  that  there  was  corn  in 
Egypt,  he  sent  out  our  fathers  first. 

i;>  /And  at  th.'  second  time  Joseph  was  mad  >  known 
to  his  brethren ;  and  Joseph's  kindied  was  made  known 
unto  Pharaoh. 

14  »Then  sent  Joseph,  and  called  his  father  Jacob  to 
him,  and  ''all  his  kindred,  threescore  and  fifteen  souls. 


9  Jacob  the  twelve  patriarchs.     And  the  patriarchs, 

moved  with  jealousy  against  Joseph,  sold  him  into 

lu  Egypt:  and  ijod  was  with  him,  and  deliveied  him 

out  of  all  his  afflictions,  and  gave  him  favor  and 

wisdom  before  Pharaoh  king  of  Egyi)t;  and  he  made 

11  him  governor  over  Egypt  and  all  his  house.  Now 
there  came  a  famine  over  all  Egypt  and  Canaan,  and 
great  affliction  :  and  our  fathers  found  no  sustenance. 

12  Hut  when  oacob  heard  that  there  was  corn  in  Egypt, 
IS  he  sent  forth  our  fathers  the  first  time.     And  at  the 

second  time  Joseph  was  made  known  to  his  breth- 
ren;  and  Jo.sephs  race  became  manifest  unto  Pha- 
14  raoh.     And  Joseph  sent,  and  called  to  him  Jacob  his 
father,  and  all  his  kindred,  threescore  and  fifteen 


Gen.  37  :  4,  11,  28;  Ps.  105:  17.... 6  Gen.  39  :  2,  L'l,  23... c  Gen.  41  :  37  ;  42  :  6....d  Gen.  41  :  54.... e  Gen.  42  :  1..../  Gen. 
45  :  4,  16 g  Geu.  45  :  9,  27 A  Geu.  46  :  27  ;  Deut.  10  :  22. 


standing  in  tliis  new  relation  to  God  ...  as 
the  bearer  of  tlie  covenant  of  circumcision." — 
A.  H.] — On  the  eighth  day,  etc.  (See  Gen. 
21:4.) 

9.  Sold  (5  :  8)  into  Egypt — i.e.  to  be  carried 
thither;  tluis  concisely  in  Gen.  45  :  4  (Heb.  and 
Sept.). — God  was  with  him,  though  he  was 
exposed  to  such  envy  and  injustice.  It  was  a 
memorable  instance  in  which  the  rejected  of 
men  was  approved  of  God  and  made  the  pre- 
server of  his  people.  (See  on  V.  37.)  The  anal- 
ogy between  Jo.scph's  history  in  this  respect  and 
that  of  Christ  must  have  forced  itself  on  Ste- 
phen's hearers. 

10.  Favor  (with  the  king)  and  wisdom, 
both  the  gifts  of  God,  but  the  latter  helping  in 
part  to  secure  the  former.  Meyer,  contrary  to 
his  first  opinion,  understands  favor  of  the  di- 
vine favor  toward  Josepli ;  but  the  two  nouns 
belong  alike  to  before  Pharaoh,  and  asso- 
ciate themselves  readily  as  cause  and  effect. 
The  wisdom  was  that  which  Joseph  displayed 
as  an  interpreter  of  dreams,  as  the  king's  coun- 
sellor and  minister. — His  house,  the  palace 
of  the  sovereign,  from  which,  in  the  East,  all 
the  acts  of  government  emanate.  In  other 
words,  Joseph  was  raised  to  the  office  of  vizier, 
or  prime  minister. 

12.  For  the  history,  see  Gen.  42  :  1,  sq. — ovra. 
(being,  translated  Avas),  instead  of  the  in- 
finitive after  heard,  represents  the  plenty  in 
Egypt  as  indubitable,  notorious.  (K.  ?  311.  1.) 
The  place  of  the  abundance  was  well  known, 
and  in  Egypt  after  the  participle  (T.  R.)  is  a 
needless  corruption  for  into  Egypt,  which  be- 
longs to  the  next  verb. — Sent  our  fathers 
first,  while  Jacob  himself  remained  still  in 
Canaan.     (See  v.  15.) 

13.  Was  recognized  by  his  brethren 
(De  Wet.,  Mey.),  on  declaring  his  name  to 
them.  (Comp.  Gen.  45  : 1.)  The  reflective  sense, 
made  himself  known  (Rob.),  would  be  ex- 


ceptional, and  is  not  required  here. — And  the 
race  of  Joseph  was  made  known  to 
Pharaoh — L  e.  the  fact  of  their  presence,  their 
arrival.  (See  Gen.  45  :  16.)  It  does  not  mean 
tliat  the  king  ascertained  now  Joseph's  Hebrew 
origin,  for  he  knew  that  already  (Gen.  4i :  12),  nor 
that  Joseph's  brethren  were  presented  to  him. 
The  introduction  took  place  at  a  later  period. 
(See  Gen.  47  :  2.) 

14.  In  seventy-five  souls — i.e.  (consisting) 
in,  etc.  (For  e^,  see  W.  ^  48.  3.)  From  so 
feeble  a  beginning  the  Hebrews  soon  grew  to  a 
mighty  nation.  (See  v.  17.)  Stejihen  would 
suggest  to  the  mind  that  contrast.  According 
to  Gen.  46  :  27,  Ex.  1  :  5,  and  Deut.  10  :  22, 
Jacob's  family  at  this  time  contained  seventy 
persons ;  but  the  Septuagint  has  changed  that 
number  in  the  first  two  passages  to  seventy-five. 
In  Gen.  46  :  26  the  Hebrew  says  that  Jacob's 
descendants,  on  his  arrival  in  Egypt,  were 
sixty-six,  and  in  the  next  verse  adds  to  these 
Jacob  himself,  Joseph,  and  his  two  sons,  thus 
making  the  number  seventy.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  Septuagint  interpolates,  in  v.  27,  And  sons 
of  Joseph  were  born  to  him  in  the  land  of  Egypt, 
nine  soids ;  and  adding  these  nine  to  the  sixty- 
six  in  v.  26  makes  the  number  seventy-Jive.  It 
is  evident  from  this  interpolation  that  the 
Seventy  did  not  obtain  their  number  by  add- 
ing the  five  sons  of  Ephraim  and  ]SIanasseh 
(1  chron.  7 :  14-23)  to  the  seveuty  persons  mentioned 
in  the  Hebrew  text.  That  mode  of  accounting 
for  their  computation  has  frequently  been  as- 
signed. If  sons  be  taken  in  its  wider  sense, 
those  sons  and  grandsons  of  Joseph  may  have 
been  among  the  nine  whom  they  added  to  the 
sixty-six,  but  it  is  not  known  how  they  reck- 
oned the  other  two.  They  may  have  included 
some  of  the  third  generation,  or  have  referred 
to  other  sons  of  Joseph,  of  whom  we  have  no 
account.  But,  in  whatever  way  the  enumera- 
tion arose,  its  existence  in  the  Greek  version 


Ch.  \ll.] 


THE  ACTS. 


95 


15  "So  Jacob  went  down  into  Egypt,  'and  died,  he, 
and  our  fathers, 

16  And  "were  carried  over  into  Sychem,  and  laid  in 


15  souls.    And  Jacob  went  down  into  Egy))t;  and  he 
IGdied,  himself,  and  our  fathers;  and  they  were  car- 
ried over  unto  .'j'heeheui,  and  laid  in  the  tomb  thaf 


a  Geo.  46  :  5. . .  .i  Geo.  49  :  33  ;  Ex.  1  :  6 c  Ex.  13  :  19  ;  Josb.  24  :  32. 


shows  that  it  was  current  among  the  Jews. 
That  it  was  an  erroneous  one  is  incapable  of 
proof,  for  we  do  not  know  on  what  data  it  was 
founded.  At  all  events,  Stephen  could  adapt 
himself  to  the  popular  way  of  speaking  with 
entire  truth  as  to  the  idea  which  he  meant  to 
convey ;  for  his  object  was  to  affirm,  not  that 
the  family  of  Jacob,  when  he  went  down  to 
Egypt,  consisted  of  just  seventy-five  persons,  in 
distinction  from  seventy-six  or  seventy,  or  any 
other  precise  number,  but  that  it  was  a  mere 
handful  compared  with  the  increase  which 
made  them  in  so  short  a  time  "  as  the  stars  of 
heaven  for  multitude."  (See  Deut.  10  :  22.)  That 
among  those  whom  Joseph  is  said  to  have 
called  into  Egypt  were  some  who  were  already 
there,  or  were  born  at  a  subsequent  period, 
agrees  with  Gen.  46  :  27  ;  for  it  is  said  that  "  the 
sons  of  Joseph  "  were  among  "  the  souls  of  the 
house  of  Jacob  that  came  into  Egypt"  with 
him.  That  representation  si^rings  from  the 
Hebrew  view,  which  regarded  the  descendants 
as  existing  already  in  their  progenitor.  (Comp. 
Gen.  46  :  15 ;  Heb.  7  :  9,  10.)  It  is  equivalent 
here  to  saying  that  the  millions  to  which  Israel 
had  grown  on  leaving  Egypt  were  all  comprised 
in  some  seventy-five  persons  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  residence  there. ^ 

16.  It  is  mentioned  in  Gen.  50  :  13  that  Jacob 
was  buried  in  Abraham's  sepulchre  at  Hebron 
(see  Gen.  23  :  19),  and  in  Josh.  24  :  32  that  the 
bones  of  Joseph  were  laid  in  Jacob's  tomb  at 
Shechem,  or  Sychem  ;  as  to  the  burial  of  Jacob's 
other  sons,  the  Old  Testament  is  silent.  In  this 
passage,  therefore,  our  fathers  may  be  taken 
as  the  stibject  of  were  carried  over  without 
himself.  Such  brevity  was  natural  in  so  rapid 
a  sketch,  and  not  obscure  where  the  hearers 
were  so  familiar  with  the  subject  in  hand. 
That  Joseph's  brothers  were  buried  with  him 
at  Sychem  rests,  doubtless,  on  a  well-known 
tradition  in  Stephen's  time.  "According  to 
Josephus  {AntL,  2.  8.  2),  the  sons  of  Jacob 
were  buried  at  Hebron.  According  to  the 
Rabbins  (Light.,  Wetst.),  the  Israelites  took 
the  bones  of  their  fathers  with  them  to  Pales- 
tine, but  say  nothing  of  Sychem ;  since,  how- 
ever, they  do  not  include  the  eleven  patriarchs 
among  those  who  were  buried  at  Hebron,  they 
probably  regarded  Sychem  as  the  place  of  their 
burial"  (De  Wet.).    Jerome,  who  hved  but  a 


day's  journey  from  Sychem,  says  that  the  tombs 
of  tlie  twelve  were  to  be  seen  there  in  his  time. 
— In  the  tomb,  etc.,  presents  a  more  serious 
difficulty.  It  is  clear  from  Gen.  33  :  19  that 
Jacob  purchased  the  family  tomb  at  Sychem, 
and  from  Gen.  23  :  1,  sq.,  that  Abraham  pur- 
chased the  one  at  Hebron.  On  the  otlier  hand, 
according  to  the  present  text.  Stephen  appears 
to  have  confounded  the  two  transactions,  rej)re- 
senting,  not  Jacob,  but  Abraham,  as  having 
purchased  the  field  at  Sychem.  It  is  difficult 
to  resist  the  impression  that  a  single  word  of 
the  present  text  is  wrong,  and  that  we  should 
either  omit  Abraham  or  exchange  it  for  Jacob. 
— Bought,  without  a  subject,  could  be  taken 
as  impersonal:  one  purchased  =  Avas  pur- 
chased. (See  W.  'i  58.  9.)  That  change  would 
free  the  passage  from  its  perplexity.  It  is  true, 
manuscripts  concur  in  the  present  reading,  but 
this  may  be  an  instance  where  the  internal  evi- 
dence countervails  the  external.  The  error  lies 
in  a  single  word ;  and  it  is  quite  as  likely, 
judging  a  priori,  that  the  word  2)roducing  the 
error  escai:)ed  from  some  early  copyist  as  that 
so  glaring  an  eiTor  was  committed  by  Stejihen, 
for  as  a  Jew  he  had  been  brought  up  to  a  know- 
ledge of  the  Scriptures,  had  jiroved  himself 
more  than  a  match  for  the  learned  disi)utants 
from  the  synagogues  (s :  lo),  and  is  said  to  have 
been  "  full  of  the  Holy  Spirit "  (6 :  5).  Some  at- 
tribute the  difficulty  to  the  concise,  hurried 
style  of  the  narrative.  Biscoe  states  that  opin- 
ion in  the  following  terms:  "Tlie  Hebrews, 
when  reciting  the  history  of  their  forefathers 
to  their  brethren,  do  it  in  the  briefest  manner, 
because  it  was  a  thing  well  known  to  tliem. 
For  which  reason  they  made  use  of  frequent 
ellipses,  and  gave  but  hints  to  bring  to  tlieir 
remembrance  what  they  aimed  at.  Tliis  may 
be  the  case  here  ;  and,  as  nothing  is  more  esisy 
than  to  supply  the  words  tliat  are  wanting,  so, 
when  supplied,  the  narration  is  exactly  agree- 
able to  history  delivered  in  the  Old  Testament : 
'And  were  carried  into  Sychem,  and  were  laid,' 
— i.  e.  some  of  them ;  Jacob  at  least — '  in  the 
sepulchre  that  Abraham  bought  for  a  sum  of 
money,'  and  others  of  them  'in  that  (bought) 
from  the  sons  of  Emmor,  tlie  father  of  Sychem.' 
Here  we  repeat  merely  and  in  that  before 
from  the  sons,  which  words  were  easily  un- 
derstood and  supplied  by  those  to  whom  Ste- 


1  See  Hengstenberg'a  Authenlie  des  Penlateuches,  vohii.  p.  357,  sq. 


96 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


"the  sepulchre  that  Abraham  bought  for  a  sum  of 
money  of  the  sous  of  Lmnior  Itm  jniker  of  Sychem. 

17  itut  when  'the  time  of  the  promise  drew  nigh, 
whie'h  Ood  had  sworn  to  Abraham,  ''the  p.  ople  grew 
and  multiplied  in  Egypt, 

IS  Till  another  king  arose,  which  knew  not  Joseph. 

19  The  same  dealt  subtilly  with  our  kindred,  and 
evil  entreated  our  fathers,  ''so  that  they  cast  out  their 
young  children,  to  the  end  they  might  not  live. 


Abraham  bought  for  a  price  in  silver  of  the  sons  of 

17  'Hamor  in  Shechem.  but  as  the  time  of  the  promise 
drew  nish,  which  (jod  vouchsafed  uutoAbrah  m,  the 

18  people  grew  and  multiplied  iu  Lgypt,  till  there  arose 

19  another  king  over  ligypt,  who  knew  not  Joseph.  The 
same  dealt  subtilly  with  our  race,  and  evil  entreated 
our  fathers,  that  -they  should  cast  out  their  babes  to 


a  Gen.  23  :  16  ;  33  :  19 6  Gen.  15  :  13 ;  ver.  6 c  K.\.  1  :  7, 


Pa.  105  :  24,  25....dE.'C.  1  :  22.- 


-1  Gr.  Emmor..*.'l  Or,  he. 


phen  addressed  himself."^  Again,  some  have 
deemed  it  sufficient  to  say  that  Stephen  was 
not  an  inspired  teacher  in  the  strict  sense  of  tlie 
expression,  and  that,  provided  we  have  a  true 
record  of  tlie  discourse  on  the  part  of  Luke,  we 
may  admit  an  error  in  the  discourse  itself,  with- 
out discrediting  the  accuracy  of  tlie  sacred 
writers.  Dr.  Davidson  thinks  that  Luke  must 
have  been  aware  of  the  discrepancy,  and  has 
exhibited  his  scrupulous  regard  for  the  truth 
by  allowing  it  to  remain,  instead  of  correcting 
it.  Calvin  sanctions  a  still  freer  view :  "In 
nomine  Abrahte  erratum  esse  palam  est ;  quare 
hie  locus  corrigendus  est "  ["  In  the  name  of 
Abraham  there  is  evidently  an  error;  where- 
fore this  passage  should  be  corrected  "]. — Em- 
mor,  the  father  of  Sychem.  (See  on  1  :  13, 
[where  it  is  stated  that  the  connection  or  known 
facts  of  the  case  must  be  considered  in  supply- 
ing the  omitted  noun,  whether  son,  or  father, 
or  brother. — A.  H.].) 
17-46.    The  Age  of  Moses,   or  the  Jews 

UNDER   THE    LaW. 

17.  Not  when,  but  as,  in  the  degree  tliat ; 
hence,    drew    near,    was    approaching. — 

The  time  of  the  (fulfilment  of  the)  promise  (v. 
7).  (See  on  1  :  4.) — Instead  of  ^ixo<t€v  (T.  R.), 
sware,  we  are  to  read  probably  i>iJio\6yrtix€v, 
declared  (Lchm.,  T.sch.,  Mey.).  [Also  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort.— A.  H.] — Grew  and  multi- 
plied represent  the  growth  in  power  as  con- 
sequent on  the  increase  of  numbers;  not  a 
citation,  but  reminiscence,  probablj',  of  Ex. 
1  :  7,  20. 

18.  Until,  for  this  signal  prosperity  had  its 
limit.  Though  baffled  in  his  first  scheme,  Pha- 
raoh tried  other  means  more  effectual.  (See  on 
v.  19.) — Who  knew  not  Joseph,  had  no  re- 
gard for  his  memory  or  services ;  not  was 
ignorant  that  such  a  person  had  lived  (Mey.). 
How  could  the  author  of  such  important  re- 
forms have  been  forgotten  among  a  people  ad- 
dicted, like  the  Egyptians,  to  recording  their 
national  events  ?  It  has  been  supposed  that  a 
new  dynasty  may  have  ascended  the  throne  at 
this  time.    According  to  Sir  J.  G.  Wilkinson,^ 


this  "  new  king"  was  Amosis,  or  Ames,  first  of 
the  eighteenth  dynasty,  or  that  of  the  Dios- 
politans  from  Thebes.  Some  hold  (e.  g.  Heeren, 
Jost)that  the  Hyksos,  or  shepherd-kings,  had  just 
been  expelled  from  Egypt,  and  that  the  oppres- 
sor of  the  Hebrews  was  the  first  native  prince 
who  reigned  after  that  event.  The  present 
knowledge  of  Egyptian  history  is  too  imperfect 
to  admit  of  any  positive  conclusion  on  such  a 
point.  (For  the  later  views  and  literature,  see 
on  "  Ancient  Egypt "  in  Herz.,  Encyk.,  vol.  i. 
p.  138,  sq.) 

19.  Treating  subtly  our  race.  (See  Ex. 
1  :  10 ;  Ps.  115  :  25.  His  jiolicy  is  characterized 
in  this  manner,  because  his  object,  without  be- 
ing avowed,  was  to  compel  the  Hebrews  to  de- 
stroy their  children,  that  they  might  not  grow 
up  to  experience  the  wrctclied  fate  of  their 
parents. — Oppressed  our  fathers,  in  order 
that  they  should  cast  out  their  infants, 
that  these  might  not  be  preserved  alive. 
Both  verbs  (Gr.)  are  telle.  The  first  states  tlie 
king's  object  in  the  oppression ;  the  second, 
the  object  of  the  exposure  on  the  part  of  the 
parents.  It  was  using  the  parental  instinct  for 
destroying  the  child ;  it  was  seething  the  kid  in 
the  mother's  blood  [milk].  For  toO  noielv  (that 
they  should  make — i.e.  their  children — out- 
casts), see  on  3  :  2.  The  plan  of  the  Egyptians 
failed ;  for  "  the  more  they  afflicted  the  He- 
brews, the  more  they  multiplied  and  grew " 
(Ex.  1 :  12) — i.  e.  they  spared  their  children,  in- 
stead of  putting  them  to  death,  and  continued 
to  increase.  Pharaoh  after  tliis  took  a  more 
direct  course  to  accomplish  his  object :  he  issued 
a  decree  that  all  the  male  children  of  the  He- 
brews should  be  killed  at  birth  or  thrown  into 
the  Nile.  (See  Ex.  1  :  16-22.)  The  sense  is  dif- 
ferent if  we  make  toO  Troter^  ecbatic :  so  that 
they  cast  out  their  infants,  etc.  Accord- 
ing to  this  view,  the  king's  policy  was  in  part 
successful;  the  Hebrews  exposed  their  children 
of  their  own  accord,  that  they  might  not  see 
them  doomed  to  so  hopeless  a  bondage.  But 
the  infinitive  construction  with  toO  (the)  is 
rarely  ecbatic ;  and,  furtlier,  had  tlie  Hebrews 


1  The  Acts  0/  the  .Apostles,  confirmed  from  other  Authors,  p.  395,  ed.  1840. 
8  Manners  and  Customs  of  the  Ancient  Egyptians,  vol.  i.  p.  42,  sq.  (2d  ed.). 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


97 


20  "In  which  time  Moses  was  born,  and  'was  exceed- 
ing fair,  and  nourislied  up  in  his  latlier  s  Ijouse  three 
mouths: 

"21  And  'wlien  he  was  cast  out,  Pharaoli's  daughter 
took  him  up,  and  nourished  him  lor  lier  own  son. 

22  And  Moses  was  learned  in  all  the  wisdom  of  the 
Egyptians,  and  was ''mighty  in  words  and  in  deeds. 

24  «Aud  when  he  was  full  f  rty  years  old,  it  came 
into  his  heart  to  visit  his  brethren  the  children  of 
Israel. 

24  And  seeing  one  '/  fhfni  suffer  wrong,  he  defended 
fiiiii,  and  avenged  him  that  was  oppressed,  and  smote 
the  Egyptian  : 

2.1  For  he  supposed  his  brethren  would  hnve  under- 
stood how  that  i.od  by  his  hand  would  deliver  Ihem: 
but  they  understood  not. 


20  the  end  they  might  not  'live.  At  which  season  Mo- 
ses was  born,  and  was  ^exceeding  fair;  and  be  was 

21  nourished  three  months  in  his  lathers  house:  a  d 
when  he  was  cast  out,  Iharaoh  s  daughter  took  him 

22  uj),  and  nourished  him  for  her  own  son.  And  .Moses 
was  instructed  in  all  the  wisdom  of  the  Egyptians; 

23  and  he  was  mighty  in  his  words  and  works,  hut 
when  he  was  well-nigh  forty  years  old,  it  came  into 
his  heart  to  visit  his  brethren  the  children  of  Israel. 

21  And  seeing  one  of  thtm  sutler  wrong,  he  defended 
him,  and  avenged  him  that  was  opines.sed,  smiting 

25  the  Egypiian:  and  he  supposed  that  his  brethren 
understood  how  that  Uod  by  his  hand  was  giving 


oEx.  2  :  2....6Heb.  U  :  23....cEx.2  :  3-10....  d  Luke  24  :  19....e  Ex.  2  :  11,12.- 


-I  Gr.  be  preserved  alive. . .  .2  Or,  fair  unto  God. 


destroyed  their  children  as  a  voluntary  act,  a 
subsequent  decree  for  murdering  them  would 
have  been  unnecessary  (Ex.  i :  16-22).  It  is  harsh 
to  make  toO  Troier;-  epexegetical :  oppressed 
them  (viz.  bya  decree)  that  they  must  cast 
out,  etc.  It  is  difficult  with  this  sense  to  see 
the  force  of  treating  subtly  (Ka,ra<jo4>L<TaiJ.tvo%). 
Besides,  tlie  history  shows  that  the  Egyptians 
were  to  execute  the  inhuman  order  (ex.  1 :  22), 
not  the  Hebrews.  The  object  of  putting  Moses 
in  the  ark  was  to  save,  not  destroy,  him. 

20.  In  which  time — viz.  this  season  of  op- 
pression.— Fair  for  (iod — >.  e.  in  his  view  who 
judges  truly.  (Comp.  a  city  great  for  God 
in  Jon.  3  :3,  Sept.)  It  is  a  form  of  the  Hebrew 
superlative.  (W.  ?  36.  3;  Green's  Gr.,  p.  277. 
For  the  dative,  see  on  S  :  34.)  .Josci>hus  (Antt., 
2.  9.  7)  speaks  of  the  extreme  beauty  of  Moses. 
(See  also  Heb.  II  :  23.) — His  father,  named 
Aniram  (ex.  6  :  20). 

21.  Him  (aiiToc),  with  the  participle,  is  not 
an  accusative  absolute,  but  depends  on  the 
verb,  and  is  then  repeated.  (Comp.  Mark  9  : 
28.)  It  is  changed  in  some  of  the  best  copies 
to  auToO.  [The  latter  reading  is  much  better 
supported  than  the  former,  having  X  A  B  C  D. 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo-Am. 
Revisers  approve  it.  With  tliis  reading  the 
English  Version  is  correct. — A.  H.] — Took  up, 
not  from  the  water  or  the  ark,  but  like  toUere 
lihcrns.  adopted.  This  use  both  of  the  Greek 
and  the  Latin  word  is  said  to  have  arisen  from 
the  practice  of  infanticide  among  the  ancients. 
After  the  birth  of  a  child  the  father  took  it  up 
to  his  bosom,  if  he  meant  to  rear  it ;  otlierwise, 
it  was  doomed  to  perish. — As  a  son,  apposi- 
tional  like  7  before  that  which  a  person  or 
thing  becomes  (W.  ?  32.  4.  b.) ;  not  telic,  to  be 
a  son  (Mey.),  since  the  relation  was  an  imme- 
diate one,  and  not  prosi)ectivc  merely. 

22.  Was  instructed  in  all  the  wisdom, 
made  familiar  with  it;  dative  of  the  resjiect  or 
manner.    Tiscliendorf  reads  in  before  wisdom. 

7 


Some  render  was  trained  by  the  wisdom  as 

the  means  of  culture;  dative  of  the  instrument 
(De  Wet.,  Mey.).  This  may  be  easier  grammat- 
ically, but  looks  like  modernizing  the  idea. 
The  accusative  would  be  the  ordinary  case  after 
this  passive  (was  taught  the  wisdom);  but 
it  could  be  interchanged  with  the  dative.  (See 
W.  I  32.  4.) — Mighty  in  words.  In  point  of 
mere  fluency  he  was  inferior  to  Aaron  (ex.  ♦ :  10), 
but  excelled  him  in  the  liigher  mental  attri- 
butes on  which  depends  mainly  the  orator's 
power  over  the  minds  of  others.  His  recorded 
speeches  justify  Stephen's  encomium.  —  For 
deeds,  comp.  v.  3G.  [Probably  it  should  read 
in  his  words  and  deeds. — A.  H.] 

23.  By  him,  dative  of  the  agent.  [Lit. 
But  when  a  fortieth  yearly  time  was 
fulfilled  by  him.— A.  II.]  (See  on  5  :  9.)— 
A  fortieth  annual  time — ('.  e.  when  he  was 
forty  years  old.  (See  the  note  on  v.  30.) — It 
came  upon  his  heart  =  Heb.  alnh  nl-libh. 
(See  Jer.  3  :  10.) — To  visit  his  brethren,  in 
order  to  show  liis  sympathy  for  them  and  min- 
ister to  their  relief.  The  Hebrews  lived  apart 
from  the  Egyptians,  and  Closes  as  a  member 
of  the  royal  fiimily  may  have  had  hitherto  but 
little  intercourse  with  his  countrymen. 

24.  Wronged,  injured — viz.  by  blows,  which 
the  Hebrew  was  then  receiving,  as  stated  in  the 
history.  (See  Ex.  2  :  11.) — Wrought  redress, 
avenged.  (See  Luke  18  :  7.) — The  one  over- 
powered— lit.  exhausted,  worn  out,  implying 
a  hard  contest,  and  (the  participle  is  present)  a 
rescue  just  in  time  to  ward  olf  the  fatal  blow. 
— By  smiting  the  Egyptian  (who  did  the 
wrong)  so  as  to  kill  liim,  see  v.  28. 

25.  Was  supposing  in  this  interposition, 
and  as  the  reason  for  it.  Tliis  use  of  ««',  for 
(E.  v.),  is  one  of  its  metahatic  [transition- 
making]  offices.  (Hart.,  Partkl.,  vol.  i.  p.  107.) 
On  what  ground  Moses  exjiectcd  to  be  known 
so  readily,  we  are  not  informed.  He  may  liave 
thought  that  his  history,  so  full  of  providential 


98 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


26  "And  the  next  day  he  shewed  himself  unto  them 
as  they  strove,  and  would  have  s  t  them  at  one  again, 
saying,  Sirs,  ye  are  brethren ;  why  do  ye  wrong  one  to 
another? 

27  But  he  that  did  his  neighbor  wrong  thrust  him 
away,  saying,  'Who  made  thee  a  ruler  and  a  judge 
over  us? 

28  Wilt  thou  kill  me,  as  thou  didst  the  Egyptian 
yesterday  ? 

29  'Then  fled  Moses  at  this  saying,  and  was  a 
stranger  in  the  lai.d  of  Madian,  where  he  begat  two 
sons. 

80  ^And  when  furty  years  were  expired,  there  ap- 
peared to  him  in  the  w  Iderness  of  mount  iSina  an 
angel  of  the  Lord  in  a  flame  of  fire  in  a  bush. 

31  When  Moses  saw  il,  he  wondered  at  the  sight: 
and  as  he  drew  near  to  behold  it,  the  voice  of  the  Lord 
came  unto  him, 


26  them  ideliverance;  but  they  understood  not.  And 
the  day  following  he  appeared  unto  them  as  they 
strove,  and  would  have  set  them  at  one  again,  say- 
ing. Sirs,  ye  are  brethren  ;  why  do  ye  wrong  one  to 

27  another/  But  he  that  did  his  neighbor  wrong  thrust 
him  away,  saying.  Who  made   thee  a  ruler  and  a 

28  judge  over  us?    Wouldest  thou  kill  me,  as  thou 
29killedst  the  Egyptian  yesterday?    And  Mo.ses  fled 

at  this  saying,  and  became  a  sojourner  in  the  land 

30  of  Midian,  where  he  begat  two  sons.  And  when 
forty  years  were  fulfilled,  an  angel  appeared  to  him 
in  the  wilderness  of  mount  Sinai,  in  a  flame  of  fire 

31  in  a  bush.  And  when  Mo.ses  saw  it,  he  wondered  at 
the  sight:  and  as  he  drew  near  to  behold,  there 


iF.x.  2  :  13.... 6  See  Luke  12:  14;  oh.  4  :  7 c  Ex.  2  :  15,  22:  4  :  20  ;  18  :  3,  4....d  Rx.  3  ;  2.- 


-l  Or,  salvation. 


intimations,  liad  pointed  him  out  to  the  Israel- 
ites as  their  predestined  deliverer.  Stephen 
makes  the  remark  evidently  for  the  purpose  of 
reminding  the  Jews  of  their  own  similar  blind- 
ness in  regard  to  the  mission  of  Christ.  (Comp. 
V.  35.) — Not  would  deliver  (E.  V.) — lit.  gives 
deliverance  ;  present  either  because  the  event 
was  so  near  (see  on  1  :  6),  or  because  the  deliver- 
ance begins  with  this  act  (Mey.). 

26.  Appeared,  showed  himself,  with  the 
involved  idea,  perhaps,  that  it  was  unexpected. 
— To  them — ;'.  e.  two  of  his  countrymen  (Ex. 
2:13).  The  expression  is  vague,  because  the 
facts  arc  supposed  to  be  familiar. — Set  them 
at  one,  «,/y/«/  them  unto  jjeace,  reconciliation. 
— v/ids  after  6<tt€  should  be  left  out. — For  ivari, 
see  on  4  :  25. —  Men  belongs  to  brethren 
— men  related  as  hretliren  are  ye  (comp.  1  :  IG; 
2  :  29-37)— not  =  Sirs  as  the  nominative  of  ad- 
dress (E.  v.).  Tiie  relationship  aggravated  the 
outrage.  It  was  more  unseemly  than  when  the 
combatants,  as  on  the  day  before,  had  been  He- 
brew and  Egyptian.  With  the  same  appeal 
Abraham  says  to  Lot,  "  Let  there  be  no  strife, 
I  pray  thee,  between  thee  and  me,  and  between 
my  hcrdmen  and  thy  herdmen ;  for  we  are 
men  brethren  "  (Gen.  13  :  8  in  Heb.  and  Sept.). 

29.  At  this  word,  which  sliowed  that  his 
attempt  to  conceal  the  murder  had  failed.  (See 
Ex.  2  :  12.)  His  flight  was  now  necessary  to 
save  his  life ;  for  "  when  Pharaoh  heard  this 
thing,  he  sought  to  slay  Moses." — In  the  land 
of  Madiam,  or  Midian.  "This  would  .seem," 
says  Gesenius,  "  to  have  been  a  tract  of  country 
extending  from  the  eastern  shore  of  the  Elan- 
itiq  Gulf  to  the  region  of  Moab  on  the  one 
liand,  and  to  the  vicinity  of  Mount  Sinai  on 
the  other.  The  people  here  were  nomadic  in 
their  habits,  and   moved  often  from  place  to 


place."  It  is  common  for  y^  {land)  to  omit  the 
article  before  the  name  of  a  country.  (See  v. 
36;  13:  19.    W.  g  19.) 

30.  Forty  years  havingbeen  completed. 
Stephen  follows  the  tradition.  It  was  said  that 
Moses  lived  forty  years  in  Pharaoh's  palace, 
dwelt  forty  years  in  Midian,  and  g<iverned  Is- 
rael forty  years.  That  he  was  one  hundred  and 
twenty  years  old  at  the  time  of  his  death,  we 
read  in  Dent.  34  :  7. — In  the  desert  of  the 
mount  Sinai,  in  the  desert  where  this  mount 
was  situated.  According  to  Ex.  3  :  1,  this  ap- 
pearance of  the  angel  took  place  at  Horeb. 
Both  names  are  given  in  the  Pentateuch  to 
the  same  locality.  Of  this  usage  the  common 
explanation  has  been  that  "  Sinai "  designated 
a  range  of  mountains,  among  which  Horeb 
was  the  particular  one  from  which  the  law 
was  given.  Dr.  Robinson  assigns  reasons  for 
thinking  that  "Horeb"  was  the  general  name 
and  "Sinai"  the  specific  one.  (See  his  Bibl. 
Res.,  vol.  i.  p.  120,  ed.  1856.)  Hengstenberg, 
Winer,  Ewald,  and  otliers  reject  the  old  opin- 
ion.— In  the  fiery  flame  of  a  bush. — Fire 
supplies  the  place  of  an  adjective.  (Comp.  9  : 
15 ;  2  Thess.  1  :  8.    W.  ?  34.  3.  b. ;  S.  ?  117.  6.) 

31.  To  observe,  contemplate — viz.  tlie  vis- 
ion (see  V.  32) ;  not  to  understand,  learn  the 
cause,  which  would  be  unsuital)le  in  tlie  next 
verse. — The  voice  of  the  Lord.  It  will  be 
seen  that  the  angel  of  Jehovah  in  v.  30  (comp. 
Ex.  3  :  2)  is  here  called  Jehovah  liimself.  Ex- 
amples of  a  similar  transition  from  the  one 
name  to  the  other  occur  often  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. It  has  been  argued  from  this  usage,  as 
well  as  on  other  grounds,  that  the  Revcaler, 
under  the  ancient  dispensation,  was  identical 
with  the  Revealer  or  Logos  of  the  New  Dis- 
]iensation.i 

1  The  subject  is  an  interesting  one,  but  does  not  fall  properly  within  our  present  limits.  The  reader  will  find 
it  di.scii.ssed  in  Smith's  Scn'/i/iire  Te.slinwni/  /n  the  Messiah,  vol.  i.  p.  4S2,  sq.,  and  in  Hengstenherg's  C'lrixtnluriy,  vol. 
i.  p.  165,  sq.    Valuable  supplementary  matter  (for  the  object  is  to  deal  only  with  the  later  objections;  will  be 


Cii.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


99 


'.'•2  Sai/ing  "l  am.  the  God  of  thy  fathers,  the  (jod  of 
Abraham,  and  the  dod  of  Isaac,  jind  the  (iod  of  Jacob. 
Then  .Moses  trembled,  and  durst  not  behold. 

33  *Then  said  the  Lord  to  him,  I'ul  oil'  thy  shoes 
from  thy  feel:  lor  ihe  place  wi.ere  thou  staudest  is 
holy  ground. 

■H  'I  have  seen,  I  have  seen  the  altlictioii  of  my  peo- 
ple which  is  in  Egypt,  and  i  have  heard  their  groaning, 
and  am  come  down  to  deliver  them.  And  now  come,  i 
will  send  thee  into  Egypt. 

;i6  This  -Moses  whom  they  refused,  saying,  Who  made 
thee  a  ruler  and  a  judge  .'  the  same  did  (lod  send  tu  be 
a  ruler  and  a  deliverer  ''by  the  hand  of  the  angel  which 
apf>eared  to  him  in  the  bush. 

aii  «lle  brought  them  out,  after  that  he  had /shewed 
wonders  and  signs  in  the  land  of  JCgypt,<'and  in  the 
Red  sea,  *and  in  the  wilderness  forty  years. 

37  ^[  This  is  that  Moses,  which  said  unto  the  chil- 


32  came  a  voice  of  the  Lord,  I  am  the  God  of  thy  fa- 
thers, the  tiod  of  Abraham,  and  of  Isaac,  and  of  Ja- 
cob.   And  Jlo.ses  trembled,  and  durst  not  behold. 

33  And  the  Lord  said  unto  him,  Loose  the  shoes  from 
thy  feet:   for   the  place  whereon   thou   standest  is 

34  lioly  ground.  I  have  surely  seen  the  attiiction  of 
my  people  which  is  in  Egypt,  and  have  heard  llieir 
groaning,  and   1  am  come  down   to  deliver  them: 

35  and  now  come,  1  will  send  thee  into  Egypt.  This 
-Mo.ses  whom  they  reluseti,  saying,  Who  made  thee  a 
ruler  and  a  judge'.'  him  hath  iiod  sent  to  he  both  a 
ruler  and  a  'deliverer  with  the  hand  of  the  angel 

30  who  appeared  to  him  in  the  bush.  This  man  led 
them  forth,  having  wrought  wonders  and  signs  iu 
Egypt,  and  in  the  Ked  sea,  and  in  the  wilderness 

37  forty  years.    This  is  that  ^Uoses,  who  said  unto  the 


a  Matt.  22:32;  Ueb.  11  :  16.... 5  Km.  3:5:  Josh.  5:  15....cKx.  3  :  7....d  Kx.  U  :  19 ;  Num.  20  :  16....e  Ex.  12  :  41 ;  33  :  1.... 
/  Kx.  7-11  i  14;  Pa.  10a  :  2J g  Kx.  14  :  21,  27-2»....A  Ex.  16  :  1,  35. 1  Gr.  redeemer. 


32.  I  am  the  God,  etc.  In  this  way  Jeho- 
■vah  declares  himself  to  be  the  true  God,  in  op- 
position to  the  idols  of  the  heathen,  and  espe- 
cially the  author  of  those  promises  to  the  jja- 
triarchs  wliich  were  now  on  the  eve  of  being 
fulfilled. — Durst  not  behold — i.  e.  the  sight. 
In  Ex.  3  :  G  it  is  said  further  that  "  Moses  hid 
his  face  " — an  act  prompted  by  his  sense  of  the 
holiness  of  liiin  in  whose  presence  he  stood. 
(Comp.  1  Kings  19  :  13.) 

33.  Loose  the  sandal  of  thy  feet.  San- 
dal is  a  distributive  singular,  for  the  plural. 
(W.  ^  27.  1.)  It  was  a  mark  of  reverence  in 
the  East  to  take  off  the  shoes  or  sandals  in  the 
l)resence  of  a  superior,  so  as  not  to  approach 
him  with  the  dust  which  would  otherwise 
cleave  to  the  feet.  On  this  principle,  the  Jew- 
isli  priests  officiated  barefoot  in  the  tabernacle 
and  the  temple.  Hence,  too,  none  enter  the 
Turkish  mosques  at  present  except  with  naked 
feet,  or,  in  the  case  of  foreigners,  with  slippers 
worn  for  the  occasion. — In  is  holy  ground 
Lugcr  finds  a  special  reference  to  vv.  30,  32. 
The  God  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob  was 
present,  and  where  he  appears  the  place  is  holy, 
though  it  be  in  the  wilderness. 

34.  Truly  I  .saw.  ;««.-  €!«o>'  =  Heb.  raoh 
raifhc,  and  so  in  the  following  verbs  the 
tense  is  aorist :  I  heard  wlion  they  groaned 
and  came  down  (not  am  come)  when  I 
saw  and  heard.  In  Hebrew  the  infinitive 
absolute  before  a  .finite  verb  denotes  the  re- 
ality of  the  act,  or  an  effect  of  it  in  tlie  highest 
degree ;  after  the  verb,  it  denotes  a  continuance 
or  repetition  of  the  act.  (See  Gesen.,  Hcb.  Gr., 
g  128.  3;  W.  §45.  8.)  The  easier  Greek  con- 
struction for  this  idiom  is  that  noticed  on  4  :  17. 
For  I  will  send  (T.  R.)  read  I  send  (Tsch., 


Mey.),    but  with    a    future    sense.      (See  W. 
f  13.  1.) 

35.  This  (toOtoi')  is  here  emphatic.  This 
(oStos)  introduces  the  next  three  verses  with 
the  same  effect. — Denied.  The  verb  is  plural, 
because,  though  the  rejection  was  one  person's 
act  (v.  27),  it  revealed  the  spirit  of  the  nation. 
— As  a  raler  and  redeemer.  (Comp.  5  : 
31.)  Stephen  selects  the  words  evidently  with 
reference  to  the  parallel  which  he  would  insti- 
tute between  Moses  and  Christ. — In  the  hand 
stands  for  Heb.  beyadh,  by  the  hand,  agency 
(comi).  Gal.  3  :  19),  since  it  was  through  the 
angel  in  the  bush  that  God  called  Moses  to  de- 
liver his  people.  Tischendorf  [also  Lach.,  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort,  after  X 13  C  D  E,  correctly,  with- 
out doubt. — A.  H.]  reads  avv  x^tpi  (unusual,  but 
well  supported),  tvith  the  hand — /.  e.  attended  by 
the  angel's  aid  and  power,  an  adjunct  of  the 
same  rather  than  the  verb. — The  bush  (tjj 
/SdTif.)  is  feminine  here  and  in  Luke  20  :  37,  but 
masculine  in  Mark  12  :  2(5. 

36.  Led  them  forth,  out  of  Egypt.  Hence 
we  cannot  render  jroi>j<7-av,  afterhe  had  shown, 
performed  (E.  V.),  because  the  miracles  in  the 
de.sert  were  not  antecedent  to  the  Exodus.  The 
participle  expresses  here  an  accompanying  act 
of  led  forth,  performing  (Vulg.  /(icicns), 
since  the  leading  forth  formed  a  general  epoch 
with  which  the  associated  events,  whether  his- 
torically prior  or  subsequent,  could  be  viewed 
as  coincident  in  point  of  time.  On  the  force 
of  the  participle  in  such  a  case,  see  on  21  :  7. — 
For  the  difference  between  wonders  and  signs, 
see  on  2 :  22.  Lachmann  inserts  t^  before  yjj,  but 
on  slight  evidence. — AiYuwro.  is  more  correct  than 

KiyviTTOv  (T.  R.). 

37.  A  prophet,  etc.    For  the  explanation 


found  in  Kurtz's  article,  Der  Engel  de.i  Herrn,  in  Tholuck's  LiUemrUicher  Anzeiger,  1846,  Nos.  11-14,  and  inserted, 
for  substance,  in  the  author's  Geschichle  des  alien  Buiules,  vol.  1.  pp.  121-126. 


100 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  Vil 


dren  of  Israel,  "A  prophet  shall  the  Lord  your  God 
raise  up  unto  you  of  your  brethren,  like  unto  me ;  'him 
shall  ye  hear. 

38  "This  is  he,  that  was  in  the  church  in  the  wilder- 
ness with  ''the  angel  which  spake  to  him  in  the  mount 
Sina,  and  with  our  fathers :  «who  received  the  lively 
/oracles  to  give  unto  us : 

39  To  whom  our  fathers  would  not  obey,  but  thrust 
him  from  them,  and  in  their  hearts  turned  back  again 
into  Egypt, 

40  I'saying  unto  Aaron,  Make  us  gods  to  go  before 


children  of  Israel,  A  prophet   shall  God   raise   up 
unto  you  fVom  among  your  brethren,  'like  unto  me. 

38  This  is  he  that  was  in  the  -church  in  the  wilderness 
with  the  angel  who  spake  to  him  in  the  mount  !^inai, 
and  with  our  fathers :  who  received  living  oracles 

39  to  give  unto  us:  to  whom  our  fathers  would  not  be 
obedient,  but  thrust  him  from  them,  and   turned 

40  back  in  their  hearts  unto  Egypt,  saying  unto  Aar  n, 
Make  us  gods  which  shall  go  before  us:  for  as  for 


a  Deut.   18  :  15,   18;  ch.  3  :  22....5  Matt.   17:5....cEx.  19  :  3,  17 d  Isa.  63:9;   Gal.  3  :  19  ;   Heb.  2:2....cEx.  21  :  1 ;   Deut. 

5  ;  27,  31;  33  :  4;  Jobu  I  :  17 /  Kom.  3  :  2....y  Ex.  32  .  1. 1  Or,  as  he  ruised  up  me 2  Or,  congregation. 


of  this  prophecy,  see  on  3  :  22.  No  one  can 
doubt  that  Stephen  regarded  Christ  as  the 
prophet  announced  by  Moses;  yet  it  will  be 
observed  he  leaves  that  unsaid,  and  relies  on 
the  intelligence  of  his  hearers  to  infer  his 
meaning.  Here  is  a  clear  instance  in  which 
the  speech  adjusts  itself  to  those  suppressed  re- 
lations of  the  subject  on  which,  as  I  suppose, 
its  adaptation  to  the  occasion  so  largely  de- 
pended. By  quoting  this  prediction  of  Moses, 
Stephen  tells  the  Jews  in  effect  that  it  was  they 
who  were  treating  the  lawgiver  with  contempt ; 
for,  while  they  made  such  pretensions  to  re- 
spect for  his  authority,  they  refused  to  acknow- 
ledge the  prophet  whom  he  foretold  and  had 
commanded  them  to  obey.  Lord  and  our  be- 
fore God  (T.  R.)  are  doulDtful.  Him  shall  ye 
hear  was  inserted  probably  from  3 :  22  (Lchm., 
Tsch.,  Mey.). 

38.  Who  was  (lit.  became,  entered  into 
connection)  with  the  angel  and  with  our 
fathers.  The  meaning  is  that  he  brought  the 
parties  into  association  with  each  other,  acted 
as  mediator  between  God  and  the  people.  (See 
Gal.  3  :  19.)  This  fact  is  mentioned  to  show 
how  exalted  a  service  Moses  performed,  in  con- 
trast with  the  indignity  which  he  experienced 
at  the  hands  of  his  countrymen.  He  was  a 
type,  Stephen  would  say,  of  the  Jesus  despised, 
crucified,  by  those  whom  he  would  reconcile 
unto  God. — In  the  congregation — i.  e.  of  the 
Hebrews  assembled  at  Sinai  at  the  time  of  the 
promulgation  of  the  law.  So  all  tlie  best 
critics  and  the  older  E.  Versions  (Tynd.,  Cran., 
Gen.,  Rhem.)  translate  this  word.  It  is  evi- 
dent that  ecdesia  here  affords  no  countenance 
to  the  idea  that  the  Hebrew  nation,  as  such, 
constituted  the  church  under  the  Ancient  Econ- 
omy. [The  word  rendered  church  (eKKXriaia) 
signifies,  in  classical  Greek,  "  an  assembly  of 
the  citizens  summoned  by  the  crier,"  or  "a  leg- 
islative assembly."  It  is  used  in  the  Septuagint 
to  denote  the  people  of  Israel  when  called  to- 
gether  in   an  assembly  (neut.  31:30;  Josh.  8:35;  Judg. 

21:8;  Heb.  2: 12).  It  is  cmploved  by  the  writers 
of  the  New  Testament  about  ninety  times  to 


denote  a  society  of  Christians  who  meet  to- 
gether for  worship,  who  duly  observe  the  or- 
dinances, and  who  maintain  discipline  among 
themselves.  But  these  writers  furnisli  no  evi- 
dence that  the  various  churches,  scattered 
through  the  provinces  and  cities  of  Western 
Asia  and  South-eastern  Europe,  were  in  any 
sense  one  organized  body  or  society.  In  certain 
passages  the  word  "church"  may  pediaps  sig- 
nify a  regular  assembly  of  disciples  meeting  for 
social  worship,  but  not  large  enough  to  be  or- 
ganized into  an  independent  society  (e.  g.  Rom. 
16  :  5;  Philem.  1).  In  other  passages  it  seems 
to  be  used  of  the  whole  company  of  believers 
in  Christ,  ideally  considered  as  a  great  spiritual 
assembly  (Eph.  5:23, ««.).  In  one  place  (A<:ts9:3i) 
it  may  represent  all  the  Christians  in  certain 
provinces.  The  expression  "Jewish  Chiu'ch" 
is  sometimes  used,  even  by  Baptist  writers  as 
accurate  as  Dr.  O.  S.  Stearns  (perhaps  in  accom- 
modation to  the  practice  of  others),  in  a  sense 
not  strictly  warranted  by  the  Scriptures. — A.  H.] 
— Lively  characterizes  oracles  with  reference, 
not  to  their  effect  (comp.  Rom.  8:3;  Gal.  3 :  21 ), 
but  their  nature  or  design  :  life-giving  ora- 
cles, commands.  (Comp.  Rom.  7  :  12.)  The 
inadequacy  of  the  law  to  impart  life  does  not 
arise  from  any  inherent  defect  in  the  law  itself, 
but  from  the  corruption  of  human  nature. 

39.  Turned  Avith  their  hearts  unto 
Egypt — i.  e.  longed  for  its  idolatrous  worship, 
and  for  the  sake  of  it  deserted  that  of  Jehovah 
(Calv.,  Kuin.,  DeWet.,  Mey.).  The  next  words 
are  epexegetical,  and  require  this  explanation. 
Some  have  understood  it  of  their  wishing  to 
return  to  Egypt;  but  that  sense,  though  it 
could  be  expressed  by  the  language,  not  only 
disregards  the  context,  but  is  opposed  to  Ex. 
32  :  4  and  Neh.  9  :  18.  The  Jews  are  there  rep- 
resented as  worehipping  the  golden  calf  for 
having  brought  them  out  of  Egypt,  and  not 
as  a  means  of  enabling  them  to  return  thither. 

40.  Gods  who  shall  go  before  us  -to 
wit,  as  guides,  jjrotectors.  This  is  a  literal 
translation  from  Ex.  32  :  1.  llie  plural  is  b»st 
explained   as  that  of   the   pluralis  cxceileiUix, 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


101 


us  :  for  a.s  for  this  Moses,  which  brought  us  out  of  the 
land  of  Egypt,  we  wot  not  wliat  is  become  of  him. 

•41  ".And  they  made  a  calf  in  tliose  days,  and  ottered 
sacrifice  unto  the  idol,  and  rejoiced  in  the  works  of 
their  own  hands. 

42  Then  *God  turned,  and  gave  them  up  to  worship 
'the  host  of  heaven  ;  as  it  is  written  in  the  book  of  the 
prophets,  ''O  ye  house  of  Israel,  have  ye  offered  to  me 
slain  beasts  and  sacrifices  bi/  tfie  space  of  forty  years  in 
the  wilderness? 

4:{  Yea,  ye  took  up  the  tabernacle  of  Moloch,  and 
the  star  of  your  god  Kemphau,  figures  which  ye  made 


this   Moses,  who  led   us   forth  out  of  the  laud  of 

41  Egypt,  we  know  not  what  is  become  of  him.  And 
they  made  a  calf  in  tho.'^e  days,  and  brought  a  sacri- 
fice unto  the  idol,  and  rejoiced  in  the  works  of  their 

42  hands.  15ut  dod  turned,  and  gave  them  up  to  serse 
the  hoiit  of  heaven;  as  it  is  written  iu  the  book  of 
the  prophets, 

L)id  ye  otl'er  unto  me  slain  beasts  and  sacrifices 
torty  years  in  the  wilderness,  ()  house  of  Israel? 

43  And  ye  took  up  the  tabernacle  of  lUoloch, 
And  the  star  of  the  god  Kephuu, 


a  Deut.  9  :  16 ;  Ps.  106  :  19. 


since  Aaron  made  but  one  image  in  compli- 
ance with  this  demand  of  the  people  (called 
gixh,  elohim,  in  Ex.  32  :  8),  and  since  the  He- 
brews would  naturally  enough  transfer  the 
name  of  the  true  God  to  the  object  of  their 
idolatrous  worship.  De  Wette  hesitates  be- 
tween this  view  and  that  of  gods  as  abstract, 
deity,  divine  power.  The  latter  is  better,  per- 
liaps,  than  Meyer's  categorical  plural — gods, 
such  as  the  calf  represented. — For  as  to  this 
Moses  who  led  iis  forth,  etc.  This  is  con- 
temptuous, like  hte.  The  nominative  absolute 
strengthens  the  sarcasm.  (W.  §29. 1.)  For  al- 
leges the  disappearance  of  ISIoses  as  a  reason 
why  they  should  change  tlieir  worship ;  possibly, 
because  it  freed  them  from  his  opposition  to 
their  desires,  but  more  probably  because,  wheth- 
er he  had  deserted  them  or  had  perished,  it 
showed  that  the  God  whom  he  professed  to 
serve  was  unworthy  of  their  confidence. 

41.  Made  a  calf  (f/oLoo-xoTroi'^o-ai')  is  elsewhere 
unkiupwii  to  the  extant  Greek.  They  selected 
the  figure  of  a  calf,  or  more  correctly  bullock, 
as  their  idol,  in  imitation,  no  doubt,  of  the 
Egyptians,  who  worshipped  an  ox  at  Meiuphis, 
called  Apis,  and  another  at  Heliopolis,  called 
Mnevis.  (Win.,  Realw.,  i.  p.  644  ;  Herz.,  En- 
cyk.,  vol.  vii.  p.  214.)  Mummies  of  the  animals 
so  worshipped  are  often  found  in  the  catacombs 
of  Egypt.  —  Rejoiced,  made  merry,  refers 
doubtless  to  the  festive  celebration  mentioned 
in  Ex.  32  :  G.— The  works  is  plural,  because 
the  idol  wa-s  the  product  of  their  joint  labors. 
Meyer  supposes  it  to  include  the  various  im- 
plements of  sacrifice,  in  addition  to  the  image 
(in  his  la,st  edition,  tvnrks  such  as  this). 

42.  Turned  away,  withdrew  his  favor.— 
Gave  up  (Rom.  i :  24)  =  suffered  in  14:16;  he 
laid,  for  the  present,  no  check  upon  tlieir  in- 
clinations. In  consequence  of  this  desertion, 
they  sunk  into  still  grosser  idolatry. —  The 


host  of  heaven — ;.  e.  the  sun,  moon,  and 
stars.  This  form  of  worship  is  called  Sabaism, 
from  tsabba  (Heb.),  as  applied  to  the  heavenly 
bodies. — In  the  book  of  the  prophets— i.  e. 
the  twelve  minor  prophets,  whom  the  Jews 
reckoned  as  one  collection.  Tlie  passage  is 
Amos  5  :  25-27.— Have  ye  offered,  etc.  This 
sign  of  a  cjuestion  requires  a  negative  answer, 
and  that  answer  is  to  be  understood  in  a  rela- 
tive sense.  (See  W.  ?  57.  3.)  Did  ye  offer 
unto  me  sacrifices  and  offerings  ? — /.  c. 
exclusively.  Tlie  reply  is  left  t<j  their  cuii- 
sciences.  Even  during  the  eventful  period  in 
the  wilderness,  when  tlie  nation  saw  so  much 
of  the  power  and  goodness  of  God,  they  de- 
serted his  worship  for  that  of  other  gods,  or, 
while  they  professed  to  serve  him,  united  liis 
service  witli  that  of  idols.  The  question  ends 
here. 

43.  And  ye  took  up,  etc.  Tlie  tacit  answer 
precedes:  No,  ye  apostatized,  and  took  up 
the  tabernacle  of  Moloch — (.  c.  to  carry  it 
with  them  in  their  marches  or  in  religious  pro- 
cessions. This  tabernacle  was  intended,  no 
doubt,  to  resemble  the  one  consecrated  to  Je- 
hovah. Stephen  follows  the  Septuagint.  Mo- 
loch stands  there  for  Heb.  MaUcrkcni — /.  e.  the 
idol  worshipped  as  your  king,  which  was  tlie 
Moloch  of  the  Aniorites.  The  Seventy  supply 
the  name  of  the  idol  as  well  known  from  tra- 
dition. But  there  is  almost  eijual  authority, 
says  Baur,'  for  reading  Milkom,  a  proper  name. 
That  variation  would  bring  the  Greek  into  still 
closer  conformity  with  the  Hebrew. — The  star 
of  the  god — (.  e.  an  image  resembling  or  rep- 
resenting a  star  worsliipped  by  them  as  a  god. 
— By  Remphan  (also  written  Rcphnn,  Ranipha, 
Romphn)  the  Seventy  express  kiyyoon  (Heb.), 
which,  like  most  of  the  ancient  translators,  they 
took  to  be  a  proper  name.  Some  of  the  ablest 
modern  scholars''  defend  the  correctness  of  that 


1  Der  ProphH  Amos  erkldrl,  von  Dr.  Gustav  Baur,  p  .'iG2. 
'  See  especially  ifovers,  Ueber  tlie  Phcmizier,  vol  i.  p.  289,  . 
proper  name  iu  various  Oriental  languages. 


He  maintains  that  kiyyoon  may  be  traced  as  a 


102 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIL 


to  worship  them :  and  I  will  carry  you  away  beyond 
Babylon. 

44  Our  fathers  had  the  tabernacle  of  witness  in  the 
wilderness,  as  he  had  appointed,  speaking  unto  Moses, 
"that  he  should  make  it  according  to  the  fashion  that 
he  had  seen. 

45  'Which  also  our  fathers  that  came  after  brought 
in  with  Jesus  into  the  possession  of  the  (ientiles,  ''whom 
tiod  drave  out  before  the  face  of  our  fathers,  unto  the 
days  of  David ; 


The  figure-  which  ye  made  to  worship  them  : 
And  I  will  carry  you  away  beyond  Babylon. 

44  Our  fathers  had  the  tabernacle  of  the  testimony  in 
the  wilderness,  even  as  he  appointed  who  spake  linto 
Moses,  that  he  should  make  it  according  to  the  figure 

45  that  he  had  seen.  Which  also  our  fathers,  in  their 
turn,  brought  in  with  'Joshua  when  they  entered 
on  the  ])ossession  of  the  nations,  whomt.'od  thrust 
out  before  the  face  of  our  lathers,  unto  the  days  of 


o  Ex.  25  :  40 ;  28  :  30  ;  Heb.  8:5 6  Josh.  3  :  14 c  Neh.  9  :  24  ;  P3.  44  :  2  ;  78  •  55 ;  ch.  13  :  19.- 


translation.  In  this  case  the  Greek  name  must 
have  sprung  from  a  corruiJt  pronunciation  of 
the  Hebrew  name.  (See  Gesen.,  Lex.,  p.  463.) 
According  to  others,  klyyoon  sliould  be  rendered 
statue,  or  statues,  and  the  idol  would  then  be 
unnamed  in  the  Hebrew.  So  Gesenius,  Robin- 
son {N.  T.  Lex.,  s.  v.),  and  others.  Admitting 
that  sense,  it  was  unnecessary  for  Stephen  to 
correct  the  current  version  ;  for  he  adduced  the 
passage  merely  to  establish  the  charge  of  idol- 
atry, not  to  decide  what  particular  idol  was 
worshipped.  Whether  the  star-god  to  which 
they  paid  their  homage  was  Saturn,  Venus,  or 
some  other  planet  cannot  be  determined. — The 
figures,  in  apposition  with  tabernacle  and 
star.  The  term  was  so  much  the  more  appro- 
priate to  the  tabernacle,  as  it  contained  probably 
an  image  of  Moloch.  —  /ncToiKti  (will  carry 
away)  is  the  Attic  future. — Beyond  Baby- 
lon, where  the  Hebrew  and  Septuagint  have 
beyond  Damascus.  The  idea  is  the  same, 
for  the  prediction  turned,  not  upon  the  name, 
but  the  fact — viz.  that  God  would  scatter  them 
into  distant  lands.  The  Babylonian  Captivity 
was  the  one  best  known,  and,  besides,  in  being 
exiled  to  the  remoter  place  the  Jews  were  trans- 
ported beyond  the  nearer. 

44.  The  tabernacle  of  witness  =  OAeZ 
haedhooth  (Num.^  :  i5;  17 :  23),  the  tabcrnacle  of 
the  testimony,  or  law,  so  called  because  it 
contained  the  ark  in  which  the  tables  of  the 
Decalogue  were  kept.  The  law  is  termed  a 
testimony,  because  it  testifies  or  declares  the 
divine  will.  Biihr's  explanation  (Symbolik,  vol. 
i.  p.  80)  is  different :  the  tabernacle  was  a  testi- 
monj'  or  witness  of  the  covenant  between  God 
and  his  people. — That  he  should  make  it 
according  to  the  pattern  which  he  had 
seen — viz.  on  Mount  Sinai.  (See  Ex.  25  :  9,  40.) 
By  this  reference  Stephen  reminds  the  Jews  of 
the  emblematical  import,  consequently  the  sub- 
ordinate value,  of  the  ancient  worship.  Moses, 
under  the  divine  guidance,  constructed  the 
earthly  tabernacle,  so  as  to  have  it  image  forth 
certain  heavenly  or  spiritual  realities  that  were 
to  be  accomplished  under  "  the  better  covenant 
of  which  Jesus  is  the  Mediator."    Here  we  have  i 


the  rudiments  of  the  view  which  pervades  the 
Epistle  to  the  Hebrews.  (See  especially  Heb.  8  : 
5.)  What  was  true  of  tlie  tabernacle  was  true 
also  of  the  first  and  the  second  temple :  tliey 
were  built  after  the  same  model,  and  were 
in  like  manner  antitypes,  or  shadoivs  of  the 
heavenly.  That  application  of  the  remark 
could  be  left  to  suggest  itself.  [Anything  like  a 
full  account  of  the  Jewish  tabernacle  would  re- 
quire more  space  than  can  be  given  to  it  in  this 
Commentary  ;  but  the  reader  will  do  well  to 
consult  the  treatise  of  Edw.  E.  Atwater  on  the 
History  and  Significance  of  the  Sacred  Tabernacle, 
also  chap.  iv.  of  Fergusson  on  The  Temple  of  the 
Jews,  and  the  articles  on  the  tabernacle  in 
Smith's  Diet,  of  the  Bible,  Kitto's  Biblical  Cy- 
clopaedia, edited  by  W.  L.  Alexander,  and 
McClintock  and  Strong's  Cyclopsedia,  etc. — 
A.  H.] 

45.  Also  adds  brought  in  to  should 
make. — Having  received  (the  tabernacle) 
— viz.  from  Moses  or  his  contemporaries,  since 
those  who  entered  Canaan  were  a  later  genera- 
tion ;  not  inherited  (A\i.),  a  false  meaning,  and  not 
who  came  after,  successors  (E.  V.,  retained  from 
Cranm.),  since  that  substantive  construction 
would  require  the  article.  (See  Pape,  s.  v.) — 
With  Joshua,  as  their  leader,  under  liis  guid- 
ance.— Into  the  possession  of  the  heathen, 
the  territory  inliabited  by  them.  (Comp.  let  the 
land  be  given  unto  us  for  a  possession  in 
Num.  32  :  5.)  iv  (in)  shows  that  the  idea  of 
rest  predominates  over  that  of  motion.  Meyer 
and  De  Wette  translate  on  taking  possession 
of  the  heathen,  on  their  subjugation.  The 
other  meaning  is  better,  because  it  suj)plies  an 
indirect  object  after  brought  in,  and  adheres 
to  the  prevalent  passive  sense  of  possession. 
(See  Rob.,  Lex.,  s.  v.) — Unto  the  days  of 
David  belongs  to  brought  in,  employtHl  sug- 
gestively :  brought  the  tabernacle  into  the  land, 
and  retained  it  until  (inclusive)  the  days  of 
David.  Some  join  tlie  words  with  whom 
God  drave  out,  which  exalts  a  subordinate 
clause  above  the  princii)al  one  and  converts  the 
aorist  into  an  imperfect :  was  expelling  from 
Joshua  until  David. 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


103 


46  "Who  round  favor  be  ore  God,  and  'desired  to 
find  a  tabernacle  for  tbe  dod  of  .lacob. 

47  "Hut  Solomon  built  him  an  Iiouse. 

4»  Howbeit  rfthe  most  High  dwelleth  not  in  temples 
made  with  bauds;  as  suith  the  prophet, 

4!)  "Heaven  i.\  my  throne,  and  earth  is  my  footstool: 
what  liouse  will  ye  build  me?  saith  the  Lord:  or  what 
is  the  place  of  my  rest  ? 

50  Hath  not  my  hand  made  all  these  things? 

51  ^  Ye  /still'necked  and  »uncircumcised  in  heart  and 
ears,  ye  do  always  resist  the  Holy  Ohost:  as  your 
fathers  'Hit,  so  du  ye. 

52  AWhich  of  the  prophets  have  not  your  fathers 
persecuted.*  and  they  have  slain  them  which  shewed 
before  of  the  coming  of  'the  Just  One;  of  whom  ye 
have  been  now  the  betrayers  and  murderers: 

5;!  *Who  have  received  the  law  by  the  disposition  of 
angels,  and  have  not  kept  U. 


4f)  David  ;  who  found  favor  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  ask- 

47  ed  to  find  a  habitation  for  the  *"0d  of  Jacob,    liut 

48  .Solomon  built  liim  a  house.  Howbeit  the  Most 
High  dwelleth  not  in  houses  made  with  bands;  as 
saith  the  i)rophft, 

49  The  heaven  is  my  throne. 

And  the  earth  the  footstool  of  my  feet : 

What  manner  of  house  will  ye  build  me?  saith 

the  l>ord: 
Or  what  is  the  place  of  my  rest? 

50  Did  not  my  hand  make  all  these  things? 

51  Ye  stilfnecked  and  uncircumcised  in  heart  and 
ears,  ye  do  always  resist  the  Holy  Spirit:  as  your 

52  fathers  did,  so  do  ye.  Which  of  the  prophets  did 
not  your  fathers  persecute?  and  they  killed  theiu 
who'shewed  before  of  the  coming  of  the  Righteous 
One ;  of  whom  ye  have  now  become  betrayers  and 

53 murderers;  ye  who  received  the  law  'as  it  was  or- 
dained by  angels,  and  kept  it  not. 


a  1  a»m.  16:  1  ;  '2  Sam.  7:1;  Ps.  89  :  1!) ;  ch.  13  :  22....  6  1  Kings  8  :  17  ;  1  Chron.  22  :  7  ;  Pa.  1.12:  4,  5....C1  Kings  6  :  1  ;  8  :  20 ;  1  Chroo. 

17  :  12;  2  Chroa.  3:1 d  1  Kings  8  :  27  ;  2  Chron.  2:6;  6  :  18 ;  oh.  17  :  24....e  I.<a.  66  :  1,  2;  Matt.  5  :  St.  3."i ;  23  :  22 /  Kk.  :«  :  9; 

33  :  3:  Isa.  48  :  4 g  l,ev.  26  :  41  :  Deut.   10  :  16 ;  Jer.  4:4;  6  :  10  ;  9  ;  26 ;  Kick.  44  :  9... ft  2  Chron.  :16  :  16 ;  .Matt.  21  :  3a:  23  :  :t4,  37; 

1  Tliees.  2  :  15 i  cli.  3  :  14 k  K\.  20  :  1  ;  Gal.  3  -  19 ;  Heb.  2  :  2. 1  Or,  as  the  ordinance  o/  angeU    Ur.  unto  ordinances  o/angeU. 


46.  Who  found  favor,  etc.  (Corap.  13  : 
22.)  The  tacit  inference  may  be  that,  had  the 
temple  been  so  important  us  tlie  Jews  supposed, 
God  would  not  have  withheld  this  honor  from 
his  servant. — Asked  for  himself,  as  a  privi- 
lege. We  have  no  record  of  this  prayer,  tliough 
it  is  implied  in  2  Sam. ,7  :  4,  s<j.,  and  in  1  Chron. 
22  :  7.  In  the  latter  passage  David  says,  "  As 
for  me,  it  was  in  my  mind  to  build  an  house 
unto  the  name  of  the  Lord  my  God."  In  that 
frame  of  sjiirit  he  indited  the  hundred  and 
thirty-second  P.salin.— To  find  .  .  .  Jacob 
coincides  with  Ps.  132  :  5  (Sept.).  To  express 
the  object  of  David's  request,  Steplien  avails 
himself  of  the  language  contained  in  that  pas- 
sage. Translate,  a  habitation  (=oikoi'  in  v. 
47,  place,  of  abode,  temple)  for  the  God  of 
Jacob  ;  not  tabernacle  (  =  (TKrivri  in  v.  44),  as 
in  the  E.  Version.  The  tabernacle  existed 
already,  and  it  w;is  not  that  structure,  but  a 
temple,  which  David  was  anxious  to  build. 
The  confusion  arises  from  rendering  the  dif- 
ferent Greek  terms  by  the  same  word. 

47-53.  Period  of  the  Temple  and  the 
Prophets. 

47.  But  (Se,  adversative).  What  was  denied 
to  David  was  granted  to  Solomon.  (See  2 
Chron.  G  :  7,  8.)  Yet  even  the  builder  of  the 
temple  acknowledged  (2  ciu-on.  6 :  is)  that  God  is 
not  confined  to  any  single  place  of  worship. 
The  tenor  of  the  speech  would  be  apt  to  remind 
the  hearers  of  that  admission. 

48.  Howbeit  .  .  .  dwelleth.  The  temple 
was  at  length  built,  but  wa.s  never  designed  to 
circumscribe  the  presence  of  the  Infinite  Archi- 
tect (see  V.  50)  or  to  usurp  the  homage  that  be- 
longs to  him  alone.  The  remark  here  was 
aimed,  doubtless,  at  the  superstitious  reverence 
with  which  tlie  Jews  regarded  the  temple,  and 
at  their  proneness  in  general  to  exalt  the  forms 


of  religion  above  its  essence.    For  not  in  tliis 
position,  see  on  2  :  7.     Temples  is  probably  a 
gloss   from   17  :  24. — As    saith,  etc.     To  give 
greater  effect  to   his   rei)roof,   Stephen   quote* 
the  testimony  of  the  prophet — viz.  Isa.  iHi  :  1,  2.. 
51.  Tlicre  is  no  evidence  that  Steplien  wa» 
interrupted  at  this  point.     Many  critics  assiuue 
that  without  reason.     The  sharper  tone  of  rep- 
rehension to  which  the  speaker  rises  here  be- 
longs to  the  place;  it  is  an  application  of  the- 
course  of   remark  which  precedes.     We  have- 
no  right  to  ascribe  it  to  Stephen's  irritation  at 
perceiving  signs  of  impatience  or  rage  ou  the 
part  of  his  hearers. — Uncircumcised,  etc. — 
i.e.  destitute  of  the  disjjositioii  to  hear  and  love 
the  truth,  of  which  their  circumcision  should 
have  been  the  sign.     (Comp.  Lev.  26 :  41 ;  Jer.  (5 : 
10;  Rom.  2  :  2!).)     F(jr  the  heart,  .see  2  :  37.— 
Ye   do   always    resist    the    Holy   Spirit, 
under  whose  influence  the  messengei's  of  God 
I  — e.  g.  Christ  and  the  apostles — spoke  to  them. 
!  To  reject  their  testimony  was  to  reject  that  of 
1  the  Spirit  himself.     What   follows  ajjpears  to 
j  restrict  the  language  to  that  meaning. — Also 
you,   wliere   so    would  state  the  comparison 
more  exactly.     (See  W.  jJ  53.  5.) 
I      52.  Whom  of  the  prophets,  etc.    Steplien 
j  would  describe  the  general  conduct  of  the  Jews 
I  toward  their  prophets ;  he  does  n(jt  affirm  that 
I  there  were  no  exceptions  to  it.     Other  passag&s, 
i  as  2  Chron.  36  :  15,  16,  Matt.  23  :  37,  and  Luke 
I  13  :  33,  34   make    the    .same  representation. — 
j  Those  who  announced  beforehand,  etc., 
1  designates  the  prophets  with  reference  to  the 
leading  subject  of  their  jn-edictions.     (See  on 
3  :  21-24.)— The   Just    One    (3  :  u),  slain   by 
I  them   as   a  malefactor. — Now,  ;is  the  climax 
of  the  nation's  guilt.— Traitors.     (See  3  :  13.) 
j      53.  Those  wlio  were  thus  guilty  'v.  52)  act«d 
I  in  the  character  of  those  who  (oWivcf,  such 


104 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


54  If  "When  they  heard  these  things,  they  were  cut 
to  the  heart,  and  they  gnashed  on  him  with  iheir  teeth. 

55  But  he,  (-being  tiiil  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  looked  up 
stedfastly  into  heaven,  and  saw  the  glory  of  (jod,  and 
Jesus  standing  on  the  right  hand  of  ood, 

56  And  said.  Behold,  "i  see  the  heavens  opened,  and 
the  ^-^on  of  man  standing  on  the  right  hand  of  tiod. 

57  Then  they  cried  out  with  a  loud  voice,  and 
stopped  their  ears,  and  ran  upon  him  with  one  accord, 

58  And  "cast  /vim  out  of  the  city,  /and  stoned  lUm  : 


54  Now  when  they  heard  these  things,  they  were  cut 
to  the  heart,  and  they  gnashed  on  him  with  their 

55  teeth.  But  he,  being  full  of  the  lioly  .-pirit,  looked 
up  stedfastly  into  heaven,  and  saw  the  glory  of  Ood, 

5Gand  Jesus  standing  on  the  right  hand  of  Viod,  and 
said,  Behold,  I  see  the  heavens  opened,  and  the  Son 

57  of  man  standing  on  the  right  hand  of  dod.  But  they 
cried  out  with  a  loud  voice,  and  stopped  their  ears, 

5S  and  rushed  upon  him  with  one  accord  ;  and  they  cast 
him  out  of  the  city,  and  stoned  him :  and  the  wit- 


och.  5  :33 6  ch.  6:5 c  Ezek.  1:1;  Matt.  3  : 


16;  ch.  10  :  II d  Duq.  7  :  13 e  1  Kings  '21  :  13;  i.ute  4  :  29  ;  Heb.  13  :  12 

. . . ./  Lev.  24  :  16. 


as)  received,  etc.— The  law  as  (el?  predica- 
tive sign;  see  on  v.  21)  ordinances  (plural 
with  reference  to  law  as  an  aggregate  of  single 
acts)  of  angels,  the  latter  not  as  the  authors 
of  them,  in  which  sense  they  were  God's,  but 
as  communicated  through  them.  (Comp.,  in 
Heb.  2  :  2,  the  word  spoken  through  angels, 
and  especially,  in  Gal.  3  :  19,  ordained  on  the 
part  of  God  through  angels.)  Tlie  elliptical 
explanation,  reckoned  unto  ordinances,  as 
of  that  rank  or  class,  affords  the  same  mean- 
ing, but  is  not  so  simple.  (See  W.  ^  32.  4.  b.) 
Some  translate  upon  the  ministrations, 
agency  of;  but  that  both  strains  the  use  of 
the  preposition  (not  necessary  even  in  Matt. 
12  :  41)  and  employs  the  noun  differently 
from  Rom.  13  :  2  (not  elsewhere  in  New  Testa- 
ment). The  presence  of  angels  at  the  giving 
of  the  law  is  not  expressly  stated  in  the  Old 
Testament,  but  is  alluded  to  in  Gal.  3  :  19  and 
Heb.  2  :  2.  Philo  and  Josephus  testify  to  the 
same  tradition.  The  Seventy  translate  Deut. 
33  :  2  in  such  a  manner  as  to  assert  the  same 
fact.  It  is  implied,  perhaps,  in  Ps.  68  :  18. 
The  Jews  regarded  this  angelic  mediation  as 
both  ennobling  the  law  and  as  conferring 
special  honor  on  themselves,  to  whom  the  law 
was  given.  (For  a  striking  proof  of  this  Jewish 
feeling,  see  Jos.,  Anff.,  15.  5.  3.)  From  another 
point  of  view — viz.  that  of  Christ's  superiority 
to  angels — this  angelic  intervention  showed  the 
inferiority  of  the  law  to  the  gospel,  which  is 
the  view  taken  in  Heb.  2  :  2,  and  probably  in 
Gal.  3  :  19. — And  yet  ye  kept  it  not.  Law, 
as  the  principal  word,  supplies  the  object,  and 
not  Siarayai  (E.  V.).  In  this  vcrsc,  therefore, 
we  have  the  apostle's  idea  in  Rom.  2  :  23, 
where  he  says  that  the  Jews  gloried  in  the 
law,  while  they  dishonored  God  by  their  vio- 
lations of  it. 

54-60.  THE  DEATH  OF  STEPHEN. 

54.  It  is  disputed  whether  Stephen  finished 
his  speech  or  not.  The  abrupt  manner  in 
which  he  closes,  and  the  exasperation  of  the 
Jews  at  that  moment,  render  it  probable  that 
he  was  interrupted.  Hearing,  as  present, 
favors  the  same  view,  but  is  not  decisive.    (See 


5:5;  13  :  48.) — For  were  cut  to  the  heart, 

see  on  5  :  33. 

55.  Full  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  The  Spirit 
revealed  to  his  soul  this  scene  in  heaven.  It 
was  not  a  vision  addressed  to  the  senses.  It  is 
needless,  therefore,  to  inquire,  as  Meyer  now 
admits,  whether  our  martyr  could  see  the 
opened  sky  through  the  roof  or  a  window. — 
For  the  glory  of  God,  see  on  v.  2.— Stand- 
ing, instead  of  sitting,  as  at  other  times.  The 
Saviour  had  risen,  in  order  to  intimate  his 
readiness  to  protect  or  sustain  his  servant 
(Bng.,  Kuin.,  Mey.).  It  appears  to  me  doubt- 
ful whether  we  are  to  attach  that  or  any  other 
significancj'^  to  the  particular  attitude  in  which 
he  appeared. 

56.  Behold,  etc.  This  declaration  would 
tend  to  exasperate  them  still  more.  Tliey  are 
now  told  that  he  whom  they  had  crucified,  and 
whom  they  were  ready  to  slay  anew  in  the  ijer- 
son  of  his  followers,  was  exalted  to  supreme 
dominion  at  the  right  hand  of  God.  (See  re- 
marks on  2  :  34.) 

57.  Crying.  Among  other  things,  perhaps, 
that  he  should  be  silent,  or  that  he  should  be 
put  to  death.  (Comp.  19  :  32 ;  Matt.  27  :  23 ; 
John  19  :  12.)— Stopped,  etc.  They  affected 
to  regard  his  words  as  blasphemous,  and 
stopped  their  ears  as  an  expression  of  their 
abhorrence. — Ran  upon  him,  etc.  Under  the 
Roman  laws,  the  Jews  had  no  power  to  inflict 
capital  punishment  without  the  sanction  of  the 
procurator  or  his  proxy.  (See  John  18  :  31.) 
Nearly  all  critics  at  present  concur  in  that 
view.  Hence  the  stoning  of  Stephen  was  an 
illegal,  tumultuous  proceeding.  The  Roman 
governors  connived  often  at  such  irregularities, 
provided  the  Roman  interest  or  power  suffered 
no  detriment.  As  Pilate  was  deposed  in  a.  d. 
35  or  36,  some  have  thought  that  his  ofiice 
may  have  been  still  vacant  (see  on  6:1),  and 
that  the  Jews  took  greater  liberty  on  that  ac- 
count. 

58.  Out  of  the  city,  because  a  place  so 
holy  was  not  to  be  defiled  with  blood.  (See 
Lev.  24  :  14.  Comp.  the  note  on  14  :  19.)  [At 
what  place  outside  the  city  walls  is  not  cer- 


Ch. 

VII.] 

THE 

ACTS. 

105 

and  "the  witnesses  laid  down  their 
man  s  feet,  whose  name  was  iSaul. 

clothes  at  a  young 

n esses 

1 

laid 

down 

their 

garments 

at 

the 

feet 

of  a 

a  Deut.  13  :  9,  10 ; 

17  :  7  ;  ch. 8 : 

1;  22 

:20. 

tainly  known.  But  in  Conder's  Tent -Work  in 
Palestine,  vol.  i.  pp.  371-376,  important  reasons 
are  assigned  for  believing  that  it  was  a  spot 
known  by  tradition  as  "The  Place  of  Stoning." 
This  place  is  situated  near  the  main  road  to 
Shecheni,  on  the  ea.st  side,  a  little  north  of 
the  Damascus  gate.  The  writer  says :  "  The 
stony  road  comes  out  from  the  Damascus  gate, 
and  runs  beside  the  yellow  cliff,  in  which  are 


Jesus  was  crucified,  as  well  as  the  spot  where 
Stephen  was  stoned. — A.  H.] — And  the  wit- 
nesses laid  off  their  garments,  that 
they  might  have  the  free  use  of  their  arms 
in  hurling  the  stones.  The  law  of  Moses 
required  the  witnesses  in  the  case  of  a 
capital  offence  to  begin  the  work  of  deatU 
(See  Deut.  13  :  10;  17  :  7.)  The  object  of  the 
law,  it  has  been  suggested,  may  have  been  to 


PL.\CE   OF   STONING. 


excavated  caverns.  .  .  .  Above  the  cliff,  which 
is  some  thirty  feet  high,  is  the  rounded  knoll 
without  any  building  on  it,  bare  of  trees,  and 
in  spring  covered  in  part  with  scanty  grass, 
while  a  great  portion  is  occupied  by  a  Moslem 
cemetery.  To  the  north  are  olive-groves ;  to 
the  west,  beneath  the  knoll,  is  a  garden.  .  .  . 
The  place  is  bare  and  dusty,  surrounded  by 
stony  ground  and  by  heaps  of  rubbish,  and  ex- 
posed to  the  full  glare  of  the  summer  sun. 
Such  is  the  barren  hillock  which,  by  consent 
of  Jewish  and  Christian  tradition,  is  identified 
with  the  Place  of  Stoning,  or  of  e.xecution  ac- 
cording to  the  Jewish  laws."  Mr.  Conder  sup- 
poses that  this  knoll  was  the  Calvarj'  on  which 


prevent  inconsiderate  or  false  testimony.  Many 
would  be  shocked  at  the  idea  of  shedding  blood 
who  would  not  scruple  to  gain  a  private  end 
or  to  gratify  their  malice  by  misrepresentation 
and  falsehood. — At  his  feet,  for  .safekeeping. 
(Comp.  22  :  20.)  Their  selecting  Saul  for  this 
purpose  shows  that  he  was  already  known  as  a 
decided  enemy  of  the  Christians.  His  zeal  and 
dialectic  skill  in  the  controversy  witji  Stephen 
(see  on  6  :  9)  could  not  have  failed  to  establish 
his  claim  to  that  character. — A  young  man,  a 
designation  which  the  Greeks  could  apply  to  a 
person  till  he  was  forty  years  old,  but  perliaps 
in  common  speech  would  rarely  extend  beyond 
the  age  of  thirty.     This  term,  therefore,  is  very 


106 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


59  And  they  stoned  Stephen,  "calling  upon  God,  and 
saying,  Lord  Jesus,  're  eive  my  spirit. 

60  And  he  "^kneeled  down,  and  cried  with  a  loud 
voice,  "^I^ord,  lay  not  this  sin  to  their  charge.  And 
when  he  had  said  this,  he  fell  asleep. 


59  young  man  named  Saul.  And  they  stoned  Stephen, 
calling  upon  thu  Lwil,  and  saying,   Lord  Jesus,  re- 

GOceive  my  spirit.  And  he  kneeled  down,  and  cried 
with  a  loud  voice.  Lord,  lay  not  this  sin  to  their 
charge.  And  when  he  had  said  this,  he  fell  asleep. 
And  Cjaul  was  consenting  unto  his  death. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

AND  «Saul  was  consenting  unto  his  death.    And  at       1     And  there  aro.se  on  that  day  a  great  persecution 
that  time  there  was  a  great  persecution  against  the 


ch.  9:  14 tPs.  31  :5;  Luke  23  :  46....C  ch.  9  :  40  ;  20  :36;  21  :5 d  Matt.  5  :  44  ;  Luke  6: 


23  :  34 ech.  7  :58;  22  :  20. 


indefinite  as  an  indication  of  Saul's  age  at  the  time 
of  this  occurrence.  In  all  probability,  he  was 
not  far  from  thirty  wlien  he  was  converted — 
not  mucli  less,  as  the  Sanhedrim  would  hardly 
have  entrtxsted  so  important  a  commission  to  a 
mere  youth  (see  9  :  1,  sg.),  and  not  more,  as  his 
recorded  life  (closing  about  a.  d.  6-4)  would 
otherwise  be  too  short  for  the  events  of  his 
history. • 

59.  Calling  upon— viz.  Christ.  Lord 
Jesus,  just  before,  supplies  the  only  natural 
object  after  this  participle.  "  That  the  fir.st 
Christians  called  on  Jesus,"  says  De  Wette — 
i.  e.  addressed  prayer  to  him — "  is  evident  from 
9  :  14,  21 ;  22  :  16 ;  comp.  2  :  21 ;  Rom.  10  :  12, 
sg."  See  further  on  9  :  14. — As  the  dying  Sav- 
iour said  to  the  Father,  "Into  thy  hands  I 
commend  my  spirit,"  so  the  dying  Steplien 
said  now  to  the  Saviotir,  receive  my  spirit. 
[The  Greek  term  for  Lord  (xvpios)  signifies  one 
who  has  absolute  potver,  authority,  or  control  over 
persons  or  things.  It  is  properly  translated  lord, 
master,  oivner,  etc. — e.  g.  lord  of  a  realm,  master 
of  a  slave,  owner  of  a  vineyard.  It  is  some- 
times applied,  as  a  form  of  respectful  Oriental 
address,  to  persons  having  no  real  claim  to  the 
title.  But  it  is  used  most  frequently  in  Scrip- 
ture as  a  designation  of  God  the  Supreme  Ruler, 
or  of  Jesus  Christ  his  Son,  who,  as  Mediatorial 
King,  is  Head  over  all  things  to  tlie  church. 
"  In  the  Greek  version  of  the  Old  Testament  it 
represents  the  Hebrew  Adonai  one  hundred  and 
fourteen  times ;  Adonai  Elohim,  twenty-nine 
times ;  El,  forty-one  times  ;  Jnh,  twenty -two 
times;  Jehovah,  more  than  fifteen  hundred 
times"  [Moses  Stuart).  In  the  New  Testament 
it  is  used  as  one  of  the  distinctive  appellations 
of  God  the  Father  and  of  Jesus  Christ,  being 
generally  applied  in  the  Gospels  to  God,  and  in 
the  Epistles  of  Paul  to  Jesus  Christ,  and  being 
used,  like  proper  names,  either  with  or  without 
the  article.    "There  are  those  who  teach  that, 


with  the  exception  of  words  borrowed  from  the 
Old  Testament,  .  .  .  Paul  never  designates  God, 
but  always  Ch-ist,  by  the  term  Lord.  But, 
omitting  instances  of  doubtful  interpretation, 
...  it  is  at  once  evident  that  in  tlie  words 
'and  to  each  as  the  Lord  gave'  (icor. 3:5),  the 
Lord  must  signify  God,  because  of  the  words 
tlrat  follow,  especially  the  words  'according 
to  the  grace  of  God  which  was  given  to  me' 
(v.  10).  On  the  contrary,  I  hold  that  in  the  ex- 
pression '  when  we  are  judged,  we  are  cliastened 
by  the  Lord'  (i  cor.  ii  :32),  the  reference  is  to 
Christ,  because  of  10  :  22  compared  with  21." 
(Grimm,  Lexicon  of  the  N.  T.,  sub  voce.  See,  be- 
sides Grimm,  Cremer,  Biblico-Thcologicnl  Lex. 
of  the  N.  T.,  under  Ku'pios,  and  Stuart  in  Bibl. 
Repos.,  i.  pp.  733-776.)— A.  H.] 

60.  Establish  not  this  sin  to  tlicm, 
reckon  or  count  it  not  to  them  (Rob.,  De  Wet.). 
Christ  had  set  an  example  of  this  duty,  as  well 
as  enjoined  it  by  precept.  No  parallel  to  tliis 
prayer  of  Stephen  can  be  foimd  out  of  Cliris- 
tian  history.  The  Greeks  expressed  a  deliortat(jry 
command  or  wish  by  /mj  with  the  subjunctive 
aorist  wlien  the  act  was  one  not  yet  com- 
menced. (Comp.  on  10  :  15.)  Tliis  is  Her- 
mann's rule.  (See  Mt.  ?  511.  3;  K.  ?  259.  5.) 
—Fell  asleep,  died.  (Comp.  13:36;  1  Cor. 
15  :  18,  etc.)  Heathen  writers  emploj^ed  the 
verb  occasionally  in  that  sense;  but  its  deriva- 
tive, cemetery  (Koi/nTiT^ptoi/) — i.  e.  a  place  where 
the  body  sleeps  in  tlie  hope  of  a  resurrection — 
was  first  used  by  Christians.  It  marks  the  in- 
troduction of  the  more  cheerful  ideas  which 
the  gospel  has  taught  men  to  connect  with  the 
grave. 

1-3.  THE  BURIAL  OF  STEPHEN. 

1.  The  first  sentence  here  would  have  closed 
more  properly  the  last  chapter. — Consenting, 
approving  with,  them^viz.  the  murderers  of 
Stephen  ;  so  that  he  shared  their  guilt  witliout 


1  For  information  in  regard  to  the  early  life  and  training  of  the  apostle  Paul  (a  topic  important  to  a  just  view 
of  his  character  and  history  i,  the  student  may  consult  Dr.  Davidson's  I'llruduction  to  the  New  Testamfnt,  vol.  ii  p. 
122,  sq.;  Conybeare  and  Howson's  Life  and  EpittlKi  of  St.  Paul,  vol.  i.  p  40,  .57.  (2d  ed.) ;  Selectiom  from  Geninin 
Literature  (Edwards  and  Park\  p.  .31,  .fq. ;  l^chrader's  Der  Apostel  Pau/vs,  zweiter  Theil,  p.  14,  xq  ;  H'  m.sen's  Das 
Lebeii  des  Apostels,  u.  s.  w.  erstes  Kapitel ;  and  Tholuck's  VermiscIUe  Hc/tri/ltn,  Band  ii.  p.  272,  sq. 


Ch.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


107 


church  which  was  at  Jerusalem ;  and  "they  were  all 
scattered  abroad  throughout  the  regions  of  Judxa  and 
Samaria,  excupt  the  apostles. 

2  Aud  devout  men  carried  Stephen  to  hin  burial,  and 
'mad  •  great  lamentation  over  him. 

3  As  lor  Saul,  <^he  made  havock  of  the  church,  enter- 
ing into  every  house,  and  haling  men  and  women 
committed  t/iem  to  prison. 

4  Therelore  ''they  that  were  scattered  abroad  went 
everywhere  preaching  the  word. 


against  the  church  which  was  in   .Jerusalem;   and 

they    were    all    scattered    abroad    throughout    the 

regions  of  Jud;ea  and  Samaria,  e.xcept  the  apostles. 

2. And  devout  men  buried   Steplien,  and  made  great 

3  lamentation  over  him.  Hut  Saul  laid  waste  the 
church,  entering  into  every  house,  and  dragging 
away  men  and  women  committed  them  to  prison. 

4  They  therefore  that  were  scattered  abroad  went 


1  ch.  11  ■  19. . .  .6  Gen.  23  :  2 :  50  :  10  ;  2  Sam.  3  : 


:  4  ;  26  :  10,  U  ;  1  Cor.  15  ;  9  ;  Oal.  1  :  13 ;  Hbil. 


participating  so  directlj"^  in  the  act.  In  Rom. 
1  :  32,  Paul  lays  it  down  as  one  of  the  worst 
marks  of  a  depraved  mind  that  a  person  can 
bring  himself  to  applaud  thus  coolly  the  sins 
of  others,  and  in  22  :  20  he  says  that  he  himself 
had  exhibited  that  mark  of  depravity  in  rela- 
tion to  the  death  of  Stephen.  Luke  here  re- 
cords, probably,  a  confession  which  he  had 
often  heard  from  the  lips  of  the  apostle.  For 
was  with  the  participle,  see  on  1  :  10.  —  On 
that  day  (comp.  11  :  19) ;  not  indefinite,  at 
that  time,  which  would  require  the  noun  to  be 
plural.  The  stoning  of  Stephen  was  the  signal 
for  an  immediate  and  universal  persecution. — 
All  need  not  be  pressed  so  as  to  include  every 
individual.  (See  on  3  :  18.)  Zeller  clings  to  the 
letter,  and  then  argues  against  the  truth  of  the 
narrative  from  the  improbability  of  such  a 
panic.  Many  of  those  who  fled  returned, 
doubtless,  after  the  cessation  of  the  present 
danger.  It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  the 
church  which  we  find  existing  at  Jerusalem 
after  this  was  made  up  entirely  of  new  mem- 
bers.— Throughout  the  regions.  They  fled 
at  first  to  different  places  in  Judea  and  Sama- 
ria ;  but  some  of  them,  probably  the  foreign 
Jews,  went  afterward  to  other  countries.  (See 
V.  4  and  11 :  19.)  [Except  the  apostles.  Two 
reasons  have  been  assigned  for  their  remaining 
in  Jerusalem.  Canon  Cook  suggests  that  they 
did  so  because  they  "  were  not  e.xposed  to  this 
persecution,  being  Hebrews,  regular  attendants 
at  the  temple-service,  revered  and  beloved  for 
their  miracles."  Meyer  says  that  they  remained 
"  because  of  their  great  steadfastness.  In  the 
absence  of  more  special  divine  intimation,  they 
resolved  to  remain  still  at  the  centre  of  the 
theocracy."  The  latter  view  is  preferable  to 
the  former. — A.  H.] 

2.  Bore  away  together — (".  e.  to  the  grave 
-joined  to  bury,  or  simply  buried,  as  the 
force  of  the  preposition  is  not  always  trace- 
able in  this  verb.  (See  Pape,  s.  v.) — Now  (5e) 
carries  back  the  mind  to  Stephen  after  the  di-  , 
gression  in  v.  1 ;  not  but,  in  spite  of,  the  perse- 
cution, for  it  was  not  only  permitted  among  1 


the  Jews,  but  required,  that  the  bodies  of  those 
executed  sliould  be  buried.— Devout  men  are 
pious  Jews  (see  on  2:5)  wlio  testified  in  this 
way  their  commiseration  for  Stephen's  fate  and 
their  conviction  of  his  innocence.     The  Chris- 
tians would  not  have  been  allowed ^to  perform 
such   an   office ;    they   too  would   have   been 
[  designated  as  disciples  or  brethren. — Lamen- 
I  tation,    as    expressed    in    the    Oriental    way 
!  by    clapping    the   hands   or   smiting    on    the 
I  breast. 

I      3.  Now  (Se)  presents  Saul  again  as  the  prin- 
1  cipal  person,  or  possibly  but  (E.  V.),  contrasting 
I  his  conduct  with  that  of  the  devout. — Into 
I  the  houses,  one  after  another.  The  preposition 
marks  both  direction  and  succession. — Drag- 
ging, bearing  off  with   violence.    (Comp.   14  : 
19 ;  17  :  6.    See  Tittm.,  Si/nm.,  p.  57,  sq.)     We  see 
the  man's  ferocious  spirit  in  his  manner.    "  Hal- 
ing," in  the  English  translation,  is  an  old  word 
for  hauling  or  hawling. — Not  only  men,  but 
women.     Rc])cated  also  in  9  :  2  and  22  :  4  as  a 
great  aggravation  of  his  cruelty. 

4-8.  THE  GOSPEL  IS  PREACHED  IN 
SAMARIA. 

4.  Those  therefore  dispersed,  taken  as 
a  substantive.  (Comp.  1  :  (J.)  The  clause  Ls 
illative  [or  inferential]  as  well  as  resumptive, 
since  it  was  in  consequence  of  the  persecution 
(v.  1)  that  the  disciples  were  led  to  now  fields 
of  labor. — Went  abroad— lit.  through  ;  i.  e. 
different  places.  Luke  intimates  the  circuit  of 
their  labors  more  fully  in  11  :  19.  [Preach- 
ing the  word.  The  word  is  the  trutli  in  re- 
spect to  Christ  and  .salvation;  and  preaching 
is  announcing  this  word  as  good  news.  The 
violent  dispersion  of  these  earnest  di.sciples  re- 
sulted in  a  rapid  diffusion  of  tlic  gos|x;l.  In  a 
simple,  unofficial,  but  effective  way  the  mes- 
sage of  life  was  carried  to  multitudes  wlio 
might  not  have  heard  it  for  a  long  time  if 
the  members  of  the  church  in  Jerusalem  had 
been  suffered  to  abide  peaceably  in  that  city. 
Thus  even  persecution  has  been  made  to  fur- 
ther the  cause  which  it  sought  to  destroy. — 
A.  H.] 


108 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


5  Then  "Philip  went  down  to  the  city  of  Samaria, 
and  preached  Christ  unto  them. 

ti  And  the  people  with  one  accord  gave  heed  unto 
those  things  which  Philip  spake,  hearing  and  seeing 
the  miracles  which  he  did. 

7  For  'unclean  spirits,  crying  with  loud  voice,  came 
out  of  many  that  were  possess  d  u-illi  tftem :  and  many 
taken  with  palsies,  and  that  were  lame,  were  healed. 

8  And  there  was  great  joy  in  that  city. 

9  But  theie  was  a  certain  man,  called  Simon,  which 


Sahout  preaching  the  word.  And  Philip  went  down 
to  the  city  of  .'^amaria,  and  proclaimed  unto  them 

6  the  Christ.  And  the  multitudes  gave  heed  with 
one  accord  unto  the  things  that  were  spoken  by 
Philip,  when  they  heard,  and  saw  the  signs  which 

7  he  did.  U'or /ro»i  many  of  those  who  had  unclean 
spirits,  they  came  out,  crying  with  a  loud  voice: 
and   many  that  were  palsied,  and  that  were  lame, 

8  were  healed.    And  there  was  much  joy  in  that  city. 

9  But  there  was  a  certain  man,  Simon  by  name,  who 


acb.  6:  5. ...b  Mark  16  :  IT.- 


-1  Or,  For  many  of  Ihoae  who  had  unclean  spirits  that  cried  with  a  loud  t 


:  came  forth 


5.  This  is  the  Philip  ineutioned  in  6  :  5  and 
21  :  8  ;  not  the  apostle  of  that  name,  for  he  re- 
mained still  at  Jerusalem.  (See  v.  1.)  Having 
come  down,  because  he  journeyed  from  Je- 
rusalem (v.  15) ;  to  go  to  that  city  was  to  go  up. 
— Unto  the  city  of  Samaria,  genitive  of  ap- 
position (Qrot.,  Kuin.,  Win.,  Rob.),  or  a  city 
in  that  country  (Olsh.,  Neand.,  De  Wet.,  Mey.). 
That  the  capital  was  called  Samaria  at  this  time, 


not  the  cause,  but  the  time  or  occasion.  (K. 
'i  289.  1.  2.) 

7.  For  from    many   who   had    unclean 
spirits,   they   (the  spirits)  went  forth,  etc. 

Many  [-noKKMv)  depends  on  from  (e|)  in  the 
verb  (Mey.,  De  Wet.).  (Comp.  16:39;  Matt. 
10  :  14.)  Some  (Bng.,  Kuin.)  make  spirits  the 
subject  of  the  verb,  and  supply  them  after 
having  (Revis.  had).    The  other  is  the  more 


RUINS   OF  COLONN.\DE   OF   SAM.\RIA. 


as  well  as  Sebnste,  we  see  from  Jos.,  Antt.,  20. 6.  2. 
City  (noKiv),  with  that  reference,  may  omit  the 
article,  because  Samaria  defines  it.  (Comp.  2 
Pet.  2:6.  W.  ?  19.  2.)  It  would  be  most  natu- 
ral to  repair  at  once  to  the  chief  city,  and  it 
was  there  that  such  a  man  as  Simon  INIagus 
(see  V.  9)  would  be  most  apt  to  fix  his  abode. — 
Multitudes,  in  v.  6,  indicates  a  populous  city. 
If  it  was  not  the  capital,  it  may  have  been 
Sychar,  where  the  Saviour  preached  with  so 
much  effect  (Olsh.).  (See  .Tohn  4  :  5,  ftq.) — Unto 
them.  The  antecedent  lies  in  city.  (Comp. 
18  :  11 ;  Matt.  4  :  23 ;  Gal.  2:2.    W.  ?  67.  1.  d.) 

6.  Attended,  listened  with  eager  interest; 
not  believed  (Kuin.),  which  anticipates  the  re- 
sult in  V.  12. — When  they  heard,  and  saw, 
etc.     In  (iy)  with  the  infinitive  denotes  here, 


natural  order. — Crying  with  a  lond  voice, 

and  testifying  to  the  Messialisbiji  of  Jesus  or 
the  truth  of  the  gospel.  (Com(i.  >fark  3  :  11 ; 
Luke  4:  41.)  The  expression  would  suppose 
the  reader  to  be  acquainted  with  the  fuller  ac- 
count of  such  cases  in  the  history  of  Christ. 
Some  understand  the  cry  here  to  have  been  an 
exclamation  of  rage  or  indignation  on  the  part 
of  the  demons,  because  they  were  compelled  to 
release  their  victims. — And  many,  etc.  Here, 
too  (see  on  5  :  16),  ordinary  disea.ses  are  distin- 
guished from  deiuoniacal  possession. 

9-13.  SIMON  THE  SORCERER,  AND  HIS 
PROFESSED  BELIEF. 

9.  Simon.  For  the  hi.story  of  this  impostor, 
his  character,  and  the  traditions  of  the  church 
respecting  him,  the  reader  is  referred  to  Nean- 


Cii.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


109 


beforetime  in  the  same  city  "used  sorcery,  and  be- 
witched the  i)eoi)le  of  .Samaria,  'giving  out  that  him- 
self was  some  great  one :  ,      ,       ,  ^ 

10  To  whom  they  all  gave  heed,  from  the  least  to 
the  greatest,  saying.  This  man  is  the  great  power  of 

U  And  to  him  thev  had  regard,  because  that  of  long 
time  he  had  liewitched  them  with  sorceries. 

12  Hut  when  they  believed  rhilip  preaching  the 
things  'concerning  the  kingdom  of  ijod,  and  the 
name  of  Jesus  Christ,  they  were  baptized,  both  men 
and  women.  ,     .        u 

la  Then  Simon  himself  believed  also:  and  when  he 
was  tiaplized,  he  continued  with  I'hilip,  and  won- 
dered, beholding  the  miracles  and  signs  which  were 
done.  ,  , 

14  Now  when  the  apostles  which  were  at  Jerusalem 
heard  that  Samaria  had  received  the  word  of  Uod,  they 
sent  unto  them  Peter  and  John: 


beforetime  in  the  city  used  sorcery,  and  amazed  the 
'people  of  Samaria,  giving  out  that  himself  was  .some 

10  great  one :  to  whom  they  all  gave  heed,  from  the  least 
to  the  greatest,  saving,  This  man  is  that  power  of  ood 

11  which  is  called  v. feat.  And  they  gave  heed  to  him, 
because  that  of  long  time  he  had  aniaztd  them  with 

12  his  .sorceries.  I5ut  when  they  believed  l^hilip  preach- 
ing good  tidings  concerning  the  kingdom  ol  uod  and 
the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  they  were  baptized,  both 

13  men  and  women.  And  .>imon  also  himself  believed  : 
and  being  baptized,  he  continued  with  I^hilip;  and 
beholding  signs  and  great  -miracles  wrought,  he  was 
amazed. 

14  Now  when  the  apostles  who  were  at  Jerusalem 
heard  that  Samaria  had  received  the  word  of  Uod, 


1  ch.  13  :  6. . .  .6  ch.  5  :  36. . .  .c  ch.  1  :  3.- 


-1  Gr.  nation 2  Gr.  poieert. 


der's  Church  History,  vol.  i.  p.  454,  or  his  Plant- 
ing of  the  Church,  p.  46,  sq.  (See  note  on  v.  24.) 
—Was  there  before— i.  e.  the  arrival  of 
rhilip— and  had  been  for  a  long  time.  (See  v. 
11.) — Using  sorcery  states  in  what  character 
and  by  what  arts  lie  secured  so  much  power. — 
Bewitching  the  nation,  either  because  he 
traversed  the  cf)untryor  drew  to  himself  crowds 
in  the  city  wliere  he  dwelt. 

10.  From  small  unto  great— i.  e.  both 
young  and  old.  (See  Heb.  8:11;  Jon.  3  :  5, 
Sept.)  The  expression  has  been  called  a  Hebra- 
ism, but  e.\aiupk's  of  it  occur  in  Greek  writers 
(Mey.).— This  one  is  the  great  power  of 
God— i.  e.  through  him  is  exhibited  that  power ; 
they  sujiposed  him  to  perform  wonders  which 
evinced  his  possession  of  superhuman  gifts. 
The  language  is  similar  to  that  in  Rom.  1 :  16, 
wliere  the  gospel  is  said  to  be  God's  power 
unto  salvation  [see  Bib.  Snc,  vol.  xxxix.  p. 
171. — A.  II.] — i.  e.  an  instrumentality  exhib- 
iting the  power  of  God  in  the  salvation  of  men. 
Tliis  is  the  more  obvious  view  of  the  sense,  and 
is  the  one  commonly  received.  Neander  would 
ascribe  to  the  words  a  theosophic,  concrete  mean- 
ing. He  supposes  the  Samaritans  to  have  rec- 
ognizetl  Simon  "as  more  than  a  man:  the  great 
power  which  at  first  emanated  from  the  invis- 
ible God,  and  through  which  he  created  every- 
thing else,  had  now  appeared  in  a  bodily  form 
on  tlie  earth."  It  appears  to  be  exacting  too 
much  from  the  language  to  understand  it  in 
that  manner.  Saying  that  himself  was 
some  great  one,  in  v.  9  (comp.  5  :  36;  Gal. 
2  :  6),  would  not  show  that  he  himself  carried 
his  pretensions  so  far ;  and  the  people  are  not 
likely  to  have  conceded  to  him  more  than  he 
claimed.  —  The  variation  17  Ka\oviJ.evri  fieydAr) 
(which  is  called  great — ;'.  e.  is  truly  so,  de- 
serves the  epithet)  is  well  supported  (Grsb., 
Mey.,  Tsch.).      [Also  Lach.,  Treg.,  West,  and 


Hort,  Anglo-Am.  Revisers,  witli  xABCDE, 
etc.— A.  H.]  De  Wette  thinks  called  a  gloss, 
added  to  weaken  the  idea :  called  great,  but 
not  so  in  reality. 

11.  For  a  long  time.  The  dative  stands  for 
the  ordinarv  accusative,  as  in  13  :  20 ;  John  2  : 
20 ;  Rom .  16  :  25.  { W.  >(  31 .  9 ;  S.  ?  106.  4.)— They 
had  been  bewitched  by  his  sorceries  (lit. 
put  beside  themselves),  not  he  had  bewitched 
them  (Vulg.,  E.  V.).  Tlie  perfect  ((eara^ivai,  says 
Scholefield  (ITlntx,  etc.,  p.  40),  does  not  admit  a 
transitive  sense.  (See  also  Brud.,Conc.,s.  v.).  [The 
form  here  used  is  transitive.  See  1  Mace.  10 :  20; 
11 :  34.— A.  II.]  It  was  necessary  that  men  delud- 
ed to  sucli  an  extent  should  be  reclaimed  by  ar- 
guments addressed  to  the  senses.  (See  vv.  6, 7, 17.) 

13.  And  Simon  also  himself  believed— 
viz.  the  word  preached  ;  i.  c.  professed  to  be  a 
disciple,  and  was  baptized  in  that  character. 
The  verb  describes  him  with  reference  to  his 
supposed  or  apparent  state,  not  his  actual  posi- 
tion. He  may  have  been  not  wholly  insincere 
at  first,  but  soon  showed  that  he  had  no  correct 
views  of  the  gospel,  that  he  was  a  stranger  to 
its  power.  (See  on  v.  18.)— Miracles,  or  pow- 
ers, differs  from  signs,  as  explained  on  2  :  22. 
Editors  hesitate  between  miracles  and  great 
signs  and  signs  and  great  miracles. 

14-17.  PETER  AND  JOHN  ARE  SENT 
TO   SAMARIA. 

14.  There  is  no  inadvertence  here.  The 
apostles  had  remained  at  Jerusalem  (v.  1). — 
Samaria  may  be  the  name  of  the  city  or  the 
country.  (See  on  v.  5.)  The  ap!)lication  here 
would  not  control  it  there.  Neander  refers  it 
to  the  country.  In  that  ca.se,  as  Philip  had 
preached  at  one  place  only,  we  must  regard  the 
idea  as  generalized:  his  success  there  was  hailed 
as  the  pledge  of  success  in  all  Samaria. — Unto 
them,  in  that  city  or  country;  the  antecedent 
implied,  as  in  v.  5. 


110 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIIL 


lo  Who,  when  they  were  come  down,  prayed  for 
them,  "tliat  they  might  receive  the  >loly  i.hust: 

It)  (For  ''as  yet  he  was  fallen  upon  none  of  them  : 
only  "^they  were  baptized  in  ''the  name  of  the  Lord 
Jesus.  I 

17  Then  "laid  they  l/ieii-  hands  on  them,  and  they  re- 
ceived the  Holy  (jhost. 

18  And  when  Simon  saw  that  through  laying  on  of 
the  apostles'  hands  the  Holy  Ghost  was  gi\en,  he  of- 
fered them  money, 

19  Saying,  dive  me  also  this  power,  that  on  whomso- 
ever I  lay  hands,  he  may  receive  the  Holy  (.host. 

'M  But  1  eter  said  unto  him,  Thy  money  perish  with 
thee,  because  /thou  hast  thought  thaU'the  gift  of  Ood 
may  be  purchased  with  money. 


15  they  sent  unto  them  Peter  and  .lohn :  who,  when 
they  were  come  down,  prayed  for  them,  that  thev 

If)  might  receive  the  Holy  Spirit:  for  as  yet  it  was 
fallen  upon  none  of  them:  only  they  had  been  bap- 

17  tized  into  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  Then  laid 
they  their  hands  on  them,  and  they  received  the 

18  Holy  Spirit.  Kow  when  Simon  saw"  that  through 
the  laying  on  of  the  apostles'  h;ind.s  the  'Holy  Spirit 

19  was  given,  he  oflf'ered  them  money,  saying,  Give  me 
also  this  power,  that  on  whomsoever  I  lay  my  hands, 

20  he  may  receive  the  Holy  Spirit.  But  I'eter  said  unto 
him,  Thy  silver  perish  with  thee,  because  thou  hast 


.ich.  19  :  2 c  Matt.  28  :  19;  ch.  2  :  38 d  eh.  10  :  48; 

see-.*  Kiugs  5  :  16  ...jch.  2  ;  3b  ;  10  ;  45  ;  11  :  17. 


19  :  5 ech.  6:6;  19  :  6;  Heb.  6  :  2 /  Matt.  10  :  8; 

■1  Some  auuii'Dt  authorities  omit  Holj/. 


15.  Having  come  down.  Their  impart- 
ing the  Spirit  was  consequent  on  the  journey 
hither  (pos^  /(oc),  but  is  not  said  to  have  been 
the  object  of  it  (propter  hoc).  That  none  but 
the  apostles  were  empowered  to  bestow  this 
gift  has  been  affirmed  by  some  and  denied  by 
others.  (See  1  Tim.  4  :  14.)  If  it  was  a  pre- 
rogative of  tiie  apostles  (who  had  no  successors 
in  the  churcJi),  the  inference  would  be  that  it 
ceased  with  the  extinction  of  that  order.  The 
Roman  Catholics  and  those  who  entertain 
Roman  Catholic  views  appeal  to  this  scrip- 
ture as  showing  the  inferiority  of  the  pastor  to 
the  bishop. — Prayed,  etc.  The  Samaritans 
had  received  already  the  converting  influences 
of  the  Spirit;  and  hence  the  object  of  the 
prayer  was  that  their  faith  might  be  confirmed 
by  a  miraculous  attestation.  (See  on  5  :  32.) — 
on-u?  (that),  with  the  finite  verb,  circumscribes 
the  infinitive.  (Comp.  25  :  3;  Matt.  8  :  34,  De 
Wet.)  Better  here  as  telic,  since  prayer  may 
be  viewed  as  a  necessary  condition  of  the  gift. 
(Comp.  V.  24.) 

17.  Laid  is  the  imperfect  of  a  repeated  act. 
For  the  import  of  the  symbol,  see  on  6  :  6. — 
And  they  received  the  Holy  Spirit,  as  the 
Author  of  the  endowments  conferred  on  them. 
Among  these  may  have  been  the  gift  of  tongues 
(see  2:4;  10  :  46),  and  also  that  of  prophecy,  as 
well  as  the  power  of  working  miracles.  Mid- 
dleton's  rule  is  that  the  anarthrous  nveOna 
(Spirit)  denotes  only  some  effect  or  actual 
operation  of  the  Spirit,  while  to  n-ceDna  (the 
Spirit)  signifies  the  Divine  Person  in  general, 
without  reference  to  any  particular  instance  or 
mode  of  operation.  (See  Green's  Or.,  p.  229.) 
The  distinction  affects  no  question  of  a  doc- 
trinal nature ;  it  may  agree  well  enough  with 
some  passages,  but  is  i)urely  arbitrary  in  its  ap- 
plication to  others.  The  true  principle  is  that 
stated  on  1  :  2. 

18-34.  THE  HYPOCRISY  OF  SIMON,  AND 
ITS  EXPOSURE. 


18.  &ea<Td.iJi(voi  (wliich  means  to  see  with 
interest,  or  desire)  has  less  external  .support 
than  iSUiv  (to  see).  Meyer  retains  the  former, 
on  the  principle  that  the  more  common  word 
would  displace  the  less  common,  instead  of  the 
reverse.  [In  his  last  ed.  Meyer  accepts  IS^v  as 
the  original  word.  So  Lach.,  Tseli.,  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort.  The  evidence  in  its  favor  is 
convincing. — A.  H.]  The  ambition  or  cupidity 
of  Simon  had  slumbered  for  a  time,  but  was 
now  aroused  at  the  sudden  prospect  of  obtain- 
ing a  power  which  would  enable  him  to  gratify 
his  selfish  desires,  which  would  place  at  his 
command  unbounded  wealth  and  influence. 
He  had  seen  Philip  perform  miracles,  but  had 
seen  no  instance  until  now  in  which  that  power 
had  been  transferred  to  others.  The  interval 
between  this  development  of  his  true  character 
and  his  profession  of  the  Christian  faith  was 
probably  not  long. — Offered  to  them  money. 
This  act  has  originated  our  word  .•^inxmy,  which 
Webster  defines  as  "  the  crime  of  buying  or 
selling  ecclesiastical  preferment,  or  the  corrupt 
presentation  of  any  one  to  an  ecclesiastical 
benefice  for  money  or  reward."  It  is  fortu- 
nate for  us  that  our  religious  institutions  in  this 
country  require  us  to  obtain  our  knowledge  of 
the  term  from  a  lexicon. 

19.  To  me  also,  that  I  may  possess  it  like 
you;  not  to  me  as  well  as  to  others,  since  no 
example  of  such  transfer  was  known  to  him. — 
Upon  whomsoever.  (See  on  2  :  21.) — This 
power  refers  to  v.  18 — this  power,  authority, 
which  he  had  seen  them  exercise — not  to  the 
clause  following.  Hence  iva  is  not  definitive, 
to  wit,  that,  but  telic.  In  order  that. 

20.  May  thy  money  Flit,  thy  silver']  with 
thee  /^  =  and  thou)  perish— lit.  be  for  de- 
struction, consigned  thereto.  Tliis  is  the 
language  of  strong  emotion ;  it  expresses  the 
intense  abhorrence  which  the  proposal  excited 
in  the  mind  of  Peter.  That  it  was  not  a  delib- 
erate wish  or  an  imprecation  is  evident  from  v. 


Cn.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


Ill 


21  Thou  hast  neither  part  nor  lot  in  this  matter:  for 
thy  lieart  is  not  ri^ht  in  tlie  >iKlit  of  >.od. 

12  Kepent  tlierel'ore  of  ihi-;  tliy  wiclvi'ilness,  and  pray 
God,  "if  perhaps  the  thought  of  thine  lieart  may  be 
forgiven  thee. 

■Ja  I'or  I  pereeive  that  tliou  art  in  'the  gall  of  bitter- 
ness, and  (71  the  bond  of  iniijuity. 

24  Then  answered  t-imon,  and  said,  'Pray  ye  to  the 
Lord  for  me,  that  none  of  these  things  which  ye  have 
Epoken  come  upon  lue. 


21  thought  to  obtain  the  giftof  (iod  with  money.  Thou 
hast  neither  part  nor  lot  in  tliis  'matter;  for  thy  heart 

22  is  not  right  before  dod.  Kepent  therefore  of  this  thy 
wickedness,  and  pray  t  he  Lord,  if  jierhaps  the  thought 

2.'! (if  thy  lieart  shall  be  forgiven  thee,  i  or  I  see  that 
thou  2art  in  the  gall  of  bitterness  and  in  the  bond 

24  of  iniquity.  And  Sinicui  answered  and  said,  I'ray 
ye  for  me  to  the  Lord,  that  none  of  the  things  whicb 
ye  have  spoken  come  upon  me. 


a  Daa.  4  :  27  ;  2  Tim.  2  :  25 b  Heb.  12  :  15 c  Gen.  20:  7,  17  ;  Ex.  8:8:  Num.  21  :  7  ;  1  King!i  13  :  6 :  Job  42  :8:  James  3  :  16. 

1  Ur.  word 2  Or,  wilt  become  yaU  (or,  a  yali  root}  of  bitterness  and  a  bond  of  iniquiti/ 


22,  where  the  apostle  points  out  to  Simon  the 
way  to  escape  the  danger  announced  to  liiin. 
With  thee  some  take  to  mean  with  thee 
who  art  in  tlie  way  to  destruction — i.  e.  may 
thy  money  share  the  doom  to  whicli  thou  art 
devoted.  But  tlie  clause  contains  only  one 
verb,  and  it  is  violent  to  make  it  thus  ojitative 
and  declarative  at  the  same  time. — Because 
thou  didst  think,  deem  it  possible  (aor.,  be- 
cause the  pr()|>(isal  made  was  the  sin),  to  ac- 
quire (not  pa.ssivc,  as  in  the  Eng.  V.)  the  gift 
of  (.iod  with  money.  The  gift  stands  op- 
posed to  to  acquire  with  money,  and  hence 
means  that  whicli  God  bestows  gratuitously  on 
those  who  are  rpialiticd  to  receive  it,  not  that 
which  it  is  his  prerogative  to  give  in  distinction 
from  men. 

21.  Thou  hast  no  part  nor  lot.    The  first 
term  is  literal,  the  second  figurative;  they  are 
conjoined,   in   order  to    affirm   the    exclusion  ' 
spoken    of   with    more    emphasis.  —  In    this  j 
word,  doctrine  or  gospel,   which  we  preach  , 
(Olsh.,  Neand.),  or    in    this    thing— viz.  the  | 
gift    of    the    Spirit    (Bng.,    Mey.,    De    Wet.). 
[Meyer's  last  ed.  says  "  in  this  word  " — (.  e.  in  j 
the  power,  or  authority,  to  be  a  medium  of  j 
the    Spirit. — A.  H.]      The   first  sense  accords  I 
better  with  the  usage  of  the  word,  and  is  also 
stronger  and  more  comprehensive ;  for  if  the 
state  of  his  heart  was  such  as  to  exclude  him 
from  the  ordinary  benefits  of  the  gospel,  much 
more  mu.st  it  render  him  unfit  to  receive  the 
higher  communications  of  the  Spirit,  or  to  be 
honored  as  the  medium  of  conferring  them  on 
others. 

22.  Repent,  etc.,  occurs  in  xemfii  prxctnnnti 
for  repent  and  turn  from  this  thy  wicked- 
ness. (Comp.  repentance  from  dead  works,  in 
Heb.  r>  :  1.  W.  ?  GG.  2.)— For  the  received  God 
after  pr.iy,  most  manuscripts  read  the  Lord. 
— If  perhaps  the  thought  of  thy  heart 
shall  be  forgiven  thee.  Some  idea  like  and 
thm  see  If  appears  to  lie  between  the  impera- 
tive and  the  indicative  future.  (See  W.  ?  41.  p. 
268.)  Some  attribute  the  problematical  form 
of  the  expression  to  an  uncertainty  on  the 
part  of  Peter  whether  the  man  had  sincerely 


repented  or  would  repent  of  his  sin.  That 
view  assigns  the  qualifying  effect  of  apa  (per- 
haps) to  the  first  clause,  instead  of  the  second, 
where  it  stands.  Others,  more  correctly,  find 
the  ground  of  it  in  the  aggravated  nature  of 
the  sin,  or  in  the  apostle's  strong  sense  of  its 
aggravated  nature,  leading  him  to  doubt  wheth- 
er he  ought  to  represent  the  pardon  as  certain, 
even  if  he  repented. — The  thought,  wicked 
purpose ;  a  vox  media. 

23.  For  I  see  that  thou  art  in  the  gall 
of  bitterness.  The  gall  of  noxious  reptiles 
was  considered  by  the  ancients  as  the  source 
of  their  venom  ;  and  hence  gall,  with  an  al- 
lusion to  that  fact,  becomes  an  expressive  meta- 
phor to  denote  the  malice  or  moral  corruption 
of  the  wicked.  (Comp.  this  with  Job  20  :  14; 
Rom.  3  :  13.)  Root  of  bitterness,  in  Heb. 
12  :  15,  is  a  difi'ercnt  figure.  Bitterness  de- 
scribes a  quality  of  gall,  and  is  equivalent  to 
an  adjective,  bitter  gall  (sec  on  7  :  30) ;  so  that, 
transferring  the  idea  from  the  figure  to  the  sub- 
ject, the  expression  imports  the  same  as  malig- 
nant, aggravated  depravity. — And  in  the  bond 
of  iniquity — i.  e.  not  only  wicked  in  principle, 
but  confirmed  in  the  habit  of  sin,  bound  to  it 
as  with  a  chain. — ti.%  (lit.  unto)  belongs  also  to 
the  second  clause,  and  in  both  cases  implies 
the  idea  of  abandonment  to  the  influence  or 
condition  spoken  of 

24.  Pray  ye,  etc.  We  may  infer  from  Luke's 
silence  as  to  the  sub.scqucnt  history  of  Simon 
that  the  rebuke  of  the  apostles  alarmed  only 
his  fears — that  it  produced  no  reformation  in 
his  character  or  his  course  of  life.  This  con- 
clusion would  be  still  more  certain,  if  it  were 
true,  as  some  maintain,  that  this  Simon  was 
the  person  whom  Joscphus  mentions  under 
the  same  name  as  the  wicked  accomplice  of  the 
Procurator  Felix  (Antt.,  20.  7.  2).  Neander 
held  at  one  time  that  they  were  the  same,  but 
afterward  receded  from  that  opinion.  So  com- 
mon a  name  is  no  proof  of  their  identity,  and 
it  is  proof  against  it  that  this  Simon,  according 
to  Justin  Martyr,  belonged  to  Samaria,  while 
the  other  is  said  to  have  been  a  native  of 
Cyprus. 


112 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


25  And  they,  when  they  had  testified  and  preached 
the  word  of  the  Lord,  returned  to  Jerusalem,  and 
preached  the  gospel  in  many  villages  of  the  taniar- 
itans. 

26  And  the  angel  of  the  Lord  spake  unto  Philip, 
saying,  Arise,  and  go  toward  the  south  unto  the  way 
that  goeth  down  Irom  Jerusalem  unto  Oaza,  which  is 
desen. 


25  They  therefore,  when  they  had  testified  and  spoken 
the  word  of  the  Lord,  returned  to  Jerusalem,  and 
preached  the  gospel  to  many  villages  of  the  ^amar- 
itans. 

26  But  an  angel  of  the  Lord  spake  unto  Philip,  say- 
ing, Arise,  and  go  'toward  the  south  unto  the  way 
that  goeth  down   from  Jerusalem  unto  Uaza;   the 


1  Or,  at  noon 


25-35.  CONVERSION  OF  THE  ETHIO- 
PIAN. 

25.  And  they — viz.  Peter  and  John,  prob- 
ably unattended  by  Philip. — Preached  (euTjyye- 
Ai'ffaKTo,  T.  R.)  may  state  the  result  of  their 
labors  while  they  had  been  absent,  or  what  took 
place  on  their  return  to  Jerusalem.  The  latter 
view  agrees  best  with  the  order  of  the  narra- 
tive, and  is  reqiured  if  we  read  were  return- 
ing and  were  preaching  (Lchm.,  Mey.,  Tsch.). 
[Add  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo-Am.  Re- 
visers after  X  A  B  C  D  E.— A.  H.]  This  verb, 
according  to  a  later  Grecism  (Lob.,  Ad  Phri/n., 
p.  267),  may  take  its  object  in  the  accusative, 
as  well  as  the  dative.  (Comp.  v.  40 ;  14  :  15, 
21;  16:10;  Luke  3: 18;  Gal.  1:9.    W.  ^2.1.) 

26.  But  (6e)  answers  to  fieV  in  v.  25. — Spake, 
etc.  Philip  appears  to  have  received  this  direc- 
tion in  Samaria  (v.  1.3),  and  soon  after  the  de- 
parture of  the  apostles.  Zeller  conjectures 
{Theol.  Jahrb.,  1851)  that  he  had  come  back  to 
Jerusalem  in  the  mean  time ;  but  the  terms  of 
the  communication  are  against  that  view. — 
Arise  involves  an  idiom  explained  in  the  note 
on  9  :  18. — Go.  For  the  tense,  see  on  3  :  6. — 
Down  to  the  south,  because  in  Samaria  he 
was  so  far  to  the  north  of  Jerusalem.  This 
expression  points  out,  not  the  direction  of  the 
road  from  Jerusalem  to  Gaza,  but  that  in  which 
Philip  was  to  travel,  in  order  to  find  the  road. 
The  collocation  joins  the  words  evidently  to 
the  verb,  and  not,  as  some  have  represented,  to 
the  clause  which  follows. — Gaza  was  about 
sixty  miles  south-west  from  Jerusalem. — This 
is  desert.  Some  refer  the  pronoun  to  Gaza, 
and,  as  that  city  was  demolished  a  short  time 
before  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  they  sup- 
pose that  Luke  by  desert  would  describe  its 
condition  in  consequence  of  that  event.  This 
is  the  opinion  of  Hug,  Scholz,  Meyer  (former- 
ly), Lekebusch.  and  others.  But,  unless  Luke 
wrote  the  Acts  later  than  a.  d.  64  or  65  (see 
Introduction,  ^  5),  this  explanation  cannot  be 
correct;  for  Gaza  was  not  destroyed  by  the 
Romans  till  after  the  commencement  of  the 
Jewish  war  which  resulted  in  the  overthrow 
of  Jerusalem.     Most  of  the  critics  who  contend 


I  for  a  later  origin  of  the  book  derive  their  chief 
I  argument  for  it  from  this  assumed  meaning  of 
I  desert.     But  further,  even  supposing  Luke  to 
i  have  written  just  after  the  destruction  of  Gaza, 
j  it  appears  improbable  that  the  novelty  merely 
1  of  the  event  would  lead  him  to  mention  a  cir- 
I  cumstance  so  entirely  disconnected  with   his 
!  history.    Others  refer  this  to  way,  but  differ 
j  on  the  question  whether  we  are  to  ascribe  the 
I  words  to   Luke  or  the  angel.     According  to 
:  Bengel,   Olshausen,  Winer   (Rcalw.,  i.  p.  395), 
j  Die  Wette,  and  others,  they  form  a  parenthetic 
j  remark  by  Luke,  who  would  give  the  reader  an 
idea  of  the  region  which  was  the  scene  of  so 
memorable  an  occurrence.     I  prefer  this  opin- 
I  ion  to  any  other.    According  to  some,  the  words 
belong  to  the  communication  of  the  angel,  and 
were  intended  to  point  out  to  the  evangelist  the 
particular  road  on  which   he  would  find  the 
eunuch.     In  that  case  it  seems  to  me  that  the 
relative  pronoun  would  have  introduced  them 
more  naturally  than  this  (yet  see  W.  ^  22.  4) ; 
and  besides,  if  it  were  so  that  any  one  road  to 
Gaza  was  known  as  "desert"  beyond  others, 
Luke   may   have  inserted  the  epithet  for  the 
reader^s  information,  as  well  as  the  angel  for 
the  sake  of  Philip.    "  There  were  several  ways," 
says  Dr.  Robinson,  "  leading  from  Jerusalem  to 
Gaza.     The  most  frequented  at  the  i)resent  day, 
although  the  longest,  is  the  way  by  Ramleh. 
Anciently  there  ai)pear  to  have  been  two  more 
direct  roads — one  down  the  great  Wady  es-Surar 
by  Beth-Shemesh,  and  then  passing  near  Tell 
es-Safieh ;  the  other  through  Wady  el-Musurr 
to  Betogabra  or  Eleutheropolis,  and  thence  to 
Gaza  through  a  more  southern    tract"    {Bibl. 
Res.,  ii.  p.  640,  or  p.  514,  ed.  1850).     Another 
route  still  proceeded  by  the  way  of  Bethlehem 
and  Bethzur  to  Hebron,  and  then  turned  across 
the  plain  to  Gaza.    It  passed  through  the  south- 
ern part  of  Judea,  and  hence  through  a  region 
actually  called   "the  desert"    in   Luke  1:80. 
This   description   would   apply,   no  doubt,   to 
some  part  of  any  one  of  the  roads  in  question. 
The    Hebrews   termed    any   tract   "a  desert" 
which  was  thinly  inhabited  or  unfitted  for  till- 
age.    (See  more  on  v.  36.)     Lange^  spiritualizes 


1  Das  apo.stoUsche  Zeilaller,  zweiter  Band,  p.  109. 


Ch.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


113 


27  And  he  arose  and  went:  and   behold,  "a  man  of   ! 
Kthiopia,  an  eiiniicli  of  great  aiitliority  under  (  andate 
queen  of  the  Klliiopians,   who  had  ihe  charge  ol   uli 
her  treasure,  and  'had  come  to  Jerusalem  for  to  wor- 
ship, 

2h  Was  returning,  and  sitting  in  his  chariot  read 
Esaias  the  j)roiihet. 

■i".»  Then  the  Spirit  said  unto  Philip,  Go  near,  and 
join  thyself  to  this  chariot. 

m  And  Philip  ran  thither  to  Aim,  and  heard  him 
r-'ad  the  i)rophet  l-j>aias,  and  said,  L'nderstandest  thou 
what  thou  readest? 


27  same  is  desert.  And  he  aro.se  and  went:  and  be- 
hi)ld,  a  man  of  Kthioiiia,  a  eunuch  of  great  authority 
under  (  andace,  <iueen  of  the  1-thiopians,  who  was 
over  all  her  treasure,  who  had  come  to  .lerusalein 

i.f  for  to  worship;  ami  he  was  returning  and  sitting 
in  liis  chariot,  and  was  reading  the  prophet  Isaiah. 

2'J  .And  the  Spirit  said  unto  I'hilip,  Go  near,  and  join 

:i  I  thyself  to  this  chariot.  .\nd  i  hilip  ran  to  hiui,  and 
heard  him   reading   Isaiah   the  pruplict,  and  said, 


a  Zeph.  3  :  10 ft  Juhn  12  :  20. 


the  expression  :  this  is  desert  (morally),  the  an- 
gel's reason  why  the  evangelist  should  seek  to 
enlighten  also  this  l)enightecl  region. 

27.  All  Ethiopian  may  refer  to  the  country 
wliere  he  resided  (com p.  2  :  9)  or  to  his  extrac- 
tion. Hence  some  suppose  that  the  eunuch 
was  a  Jew  who  lived  in  Ethio])ia,  hut  most  that 
he  was  a  heathen  convert  to  .Judaism.  Observe 
the  meaning  (jf  Ethiopians  in  the  ne.xt  clause. 
It  wa.s  customary  for  proselytes,  a.s  well  as  for- 
eign Jews,  to  repair  Ut  .lertisalem  for  worship. 
(Comp.  20  :  2;  Jolin  12  :  20.)— A  eunuch,  in 
the  proper  import  of  the  word;  not  a  minister 
of  state,  courtier,  to  the  exclusion  of  that  im- 
l>ort,  l)ecause  it  would  then  render  of  great 
authority  superfluous.  The  latter  term,  a 
sintc  officer,  is  a  noun  both  in  form  and  usage 
(De  Wet.,  Rob.),  and  is  not  to  be  translated  as 
an  adjective  with  eunuch  (Kuin.,  Mey.')- — 
Candace,  the  queen  of  the  Ethiopians. 
P^tliiopia  was  the  name  of  the  jiortion  of  Africa 
known  to  the  tmcientsscjuth  of  Egyi)t,  of  which 
Meroe,  a  fertile  island  formed  by  two  branches 
of  the  Nile,  constituted  an  important  part. 
Win.,  Rt'dlw.,  ii.  j).  439 :  "  It  is  evident  both 
from  Strabo  and  Dio  that  there  was  a  (lueen 
named  Candace  in  Ethioina  who  fought  against 
the  Romans  ai)out  tlie  twenty-secontl  or  twenty- 
third  year  of  the  reign  of  Augustus  Ca?sar.  (Dio 
calls  her  tjueen  of  the  Etiiiopians  (hvcUing  above 
J'^UVPf)  It  is  clear  also  from  Pliny,  who  flour- 
ished in  the  reign  of  the  Emperor  Vespasian, 
that  there  was  a  queen  of  Ethiopia  named 
Candace  in  his  time;  and  he  adds  that  this  had 
been  the  name  of  their  queens  now  for  many 
years.  It  is  beyond  all  doubt,  therefore,  that 
tliere  was  a  (juecn  of  Ethiopia  of  this  name  at 
the  time  when  Philip  is  said  to  have  converted 
[baptized]  the  eunuch.  Eusebius  tells  us  that 
this  country  continued  to  lie  governed  by 
women  even  to  his  time."  (See  Biscoe,  p.  47.) 
"Candace"  was  the  name,  not  of  an  individual, 
but  of  a  dynasty,  like  "  Pharaoh  "  in  Egypt  or 
"Caesar"   among  the  Romans. — Over   (as   in 


12  :  20)  the  treasure. — In  order  to  wor- 
ship proves,  not  that  he  was  a  Jew,  but  that 
he  was  not  a  heathen. 

28.  Was  reading,  aloud,  as  we  .see  from  v. 
30,  and  probably  the  Greek  text,  not  the  He- 
brew, since  the  Septuagint  was  used  mostly  out 
of  Palestine.  It  is  still  a  ctistoni  among  tlic  Ori- 
entals, when  reading  privately,  to  read  audibly, 
although  they  may  have  no  particular  intention 
of  being  heard  by  others.*  It  was  common  for 
the  Jews  to  be  occupied  in  this  way,  especially 
when  they  were  travelling  (Schottg.,  Ilor.  Heb., 
ii.  p.  443). — It  is  not  imjiroljablc  that  the  eunuch 
had  heard  at  Jerusalen>  of  the  deatii  of  Jesus 
and  of  the  wonderful  events  connected  with  it 
— of  his  claim  to  be  the  Me.ssiah,  and  the  exist- 
ence of  a  numerous  ixirty  who  acknowledged 
him  in  that  character.  Hence  he  may  have 
been  examining  tlie  prophecies  at  the  time  that 
Philip  approaclied  him,  with  reference  to  the 
(piestion  how  far  they  had  been  accomplished 
in  the  history  of  the  person  concerning  whom 
such  reports  had  re-aclied  him.  The  extraordi- 
nary means  which  God  emjiloyed  to  bring  the 
Ethiopian  to  a  knowledge  of  the  gospel,  and 
the  readiness  with  which  he  embraced  it, 
authorize  the  belief  that  in  this  way,  or  some 
otlicr,  his  njind  had  been  specially  prepared  for 
tlie  recei)tion  of  the  truth. 

29.  Attach  thyself  to  this  chariot,  keep 
near  it,  follow  it.  He  heard  the  eiuiuch  read 
for  a  time  unobserved  before  he  addressed 
him. 

30.  Dost  thou  understand  then  what 
thoa  readest?  ye  serves  to  render  tlie  ques- 
tion more  defmite.  The  answer  after  apa  is 
more  commonly  negative.  (Comp.  Lvike  IS  : 
8.  Klotz,  Ad  Dcvar..  ii.  p.  180.  sq.;  W.  ?  57.  2.) 
This  is  given  as  the  rule  for  ]irose. — yi.vJ>aKei>:  &. 
avayivui<TKii<;  ((jhibskels  ltd  finfujindskcls)  is  a  paron- 
omasia (comp.  2  Cor.  3  :  2),  and  is  too  striking 
to  be  accidental.  Philip  spoke,  no  doubt,  in 
Greek,  and  would  arouse  the  mind  tlirough  the 
ear. 


1  [Meyer's  last  ed.  agrees  with  Dr. 
'  Sec  Jowctt's  Kesearcheji  in  Syria, 


Hackctt's  c.xplauatioD. — A.  H.] 
p.  443. 


114 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


31  And  he  said,  How  can  I,  except  some  man  should  i  31 
guide  me?     And  he  desired  Pliilip  that  he  would  come  j 
up  and  sit  with  him.  [ 

:-t2  Tlie  place  of  the  scripture  which   he   read   was  j  32 
this,  "He  was  led  as  a  sheep  to  the  slaughter  ;  and  like  j 
a  lamb  dumb  belore  his  shearer,  so  opened  he  not  his 
mouth:  1 

33  In  his  humiliation  his  judgment  was  taken  away.  1 
and  who  shall  declare  his  generation?  lor  his  life  is  j  33 
taken  from  the  eaith. 

34  And  the  eunuch  answered  Philip,  and  said,  I  pray  j 
thee,  of  whom  speaketh  the  prophet  this?  of  himself,  j  34 
or  of  some  other  man?  1 

35  Then  Philip  opened  his  mouth,  'and  began  at  the  {  35 
same  scripture,  and  preached  unto  him  Jesus.  ' 


Understandest  thou  what  thou  readest?  And  he 
said,  How  can  1,  except  some  one  shall  guide  me? 
And  he  besought  Philip  to  come  up  and  sit  with 
him.  Now  the  place  of  the  scripture  which  he  was 
reading  was  this. 

He  was  led  as  a  sheep  to  the  slaughter; 

And  as  a  lamb  before  his  shearer  is  dumb. 

So  he  openeth  not  his  mouth  : 

In  his  humiliation  hisjudgment  was  taken  away: 

His  generation  who  shall  declare? 

Por  his  life  is  taken  from  the  earth. 
And  the  eunuch  answered  Philip,  and  said,  I  pray 
thee,  of  whom  .speaketh  the  prophet  this?  of  him- 
self,  or  of   some   other?      And   Philip   opened   his 
mouth,  and  beginning  from  this  scripture,  preached 


.b  Luke  24  :  27  :  ch.  18  :  28. 


31.  For  how  could  I—?  The  form  of  the 
reply  attaches  itself  to  the  implied  negative 
which  precedes.— Should  guide,  instruct, 
similar  to  Jolin  16  :  1.3. 

32.  NoAV  the  contents  (comp.  1  Pet.  2  :  6) 
of  the  passage  (De  Wet.,  Mey.) ;  not  of  the 
scripture  in  general,  section,  because  scrip- 
ture, being  limited  by  the  relative  clause, 
must  denote  the  particular  place  ivhich  he  vas 
reading.  (Comp.  v.  35;  Luke  4  :  21.)— Was 
this— viz.  Isa.  53  :  7,  8,  quoted  almost  verbatim 
from  the  Septuagint.— Was  led— i.  e.  Heb. 
cbficdii,  the  servant  of  Jehovah,  or  the  Messiah.— 
And  as  a  lamb,  etc.  This  comparison  repre- 
sents the  uncomplaining  submission  with  which 
the  Saviour  yielded  himself  to  the  power  of  his 
enemies.  TJie  death  of  Christ  was  so  distinctly 
foretold  in  this  passage  that  Bolingbroke  was 
forced  to  as.sert  that  Jesus  brought  on  his  own 
crucifixion  by  a  scries  of  preconcerted  measures, 
merely  to  give  the  disciples  who  came  after 
him  the  triumph  of  an  appeal  to  the  old 
prophecies.^ 

33.  In  his  humiliation,  etc.,  admits  most 
readily  of  this  sense:  In  his  humiliation— 
i.  c.  in  the  contempt,  violence,  outrage,  which 
he  suffered— his  judgment  was  taken  away 
— viz.  the  judgment  due  to  him ;  he  had  the 
rights  of  justice  and  humanity  withheld  from 
him.  The  Hebrew  yields  essentially  the  same 
meaning:  Through  violence  and  punish- 
ment he  was  taken  away — i.  e.  from  life 
(De  Wet.). — And  his  generation  who  shall 
fully  declare? — i.  e.  set  forth  the  wickedness 
of  his  contemporaries  in  their  treatment  of 
him  (Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Rob.).  The  Hebrew  sus- 
tains fully  that  translation.  It  is  possible,  also, 
to  render  the  Greek  and  the  original  thus: 
Who  shall  declare  his  posterity,  the 
number  of   his  spiritual    descendants  or   fol- 


lowers? The  prophet  in  this  case  points,  by 
an  incidental  remark,  from  the  humiliation  of 
Christ  to  his  subsequent  triumj>h,  or  glorifica- 
tion. Hengstenberg  prefers  the  last  meaning." 
[The  same  is  true  of  Meyer  in  his  last  ed.,  thus: 
"  But  his  offspring  who  shall  describe? 
— i.  e.  How  indescribably  great  is  the  multi- 
tude of  those  belonging  to  him,  of  whom  he 
will  now  be  the  family  Head  (comp.  Phil.  2  : 
10) !  for  .  .  .  his  life  is  taken  away  from 
the  earth  ;  so  that  he  enters  upon  liis  heav- 
enly work  relieved  from  the  trammels  of 
earth." — A.  H.] — For  his  life  conforms  to 
the  first  sense  of  the  clause  which  precedes 
better  than  to  the  second. 

34.  Addressing  (see  3  :  12),  or  answer- 
ing, in  further  reply  to  the  question  in  v.  30 
(Mey.).  Tlie  passage  from  Isaiah  is  cited  for 
the  information  of  the  reader,  and  this  verse 
follows  historically  after  v.  31.— Of  himself, 
etc.  The  perplexity  of  the  eunuch  in  regard 
to  the  application  of  the  prophecy  indicates 
that  he  was  a  foreigner  rather  than  a  Jew. 
The  great  body  of  the  Jewish  nation  under- 
stood this  poi-tion  of  Isaiah  to  be  descriptive  of 
the  character  and  sufferings  of  the  Messiah.'' 
"  The  later  Jews,"  says  Gesenius,  "  no  doubt 
relinquished  this  interpretation,  in  consequence 
of  their  controversy  with  the  Christians." 

35.  Opening  his  mouth  is  an  imperfect 
Hebraism — /.  c.  was  not  peculiar  to  the  Hebrew 
or  Hellenistic  writers,  but  most  common  in 
them.  (See  W.  I  3.)  It  arises  from  the  Orien- 
tal fondness  for  the  minute  in  descrijjtion,  the. 
circumstantial.  The  expression  occurs  properly 
before  important,  weighty  remarks.  (Comp.  10  : 
.34  ;  Jol)  3:1;  .32  :  20.,— And  beginning  from 
the  same  scripture  is  elliptiial  for  and  be- 
ginning from  this  passage  and  proceeding 
thence  to  others.     (W.  g  G6.  I.e.) 


1  Chalmers,  Evidences  of  Christ i/inih/,  chap.  vi. 

^  For  a  fuller  view  of  the  original  passage,  the  reader  is  referred  to  Hengstenberg's  Christology,  vol.  i.  p.  518, 
iq.,  and  to  Professor  Alexander's  Commentary  on  haiah. 
3See  the.proofs  in  Hengstenberg's  Christoloyy,  vol.  i.  p.  484,  .sj,  and  Schottgen's  llora  Hebraicce,  vc!.  ji.  p.  647,«5, 


Ch.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


115 


3f)  And  as  they  went  on  thpir  way,  they  came  unto  a 
certain  water:  and  the  eunuch  said,  !^ee,  /leie  ix  water; 
"what  doth  hinder  me  to  l)e  baptized? 

37  And  I'liilip  said,  'If  thou  believesl  with  all  thine 
heart,  thou  niayest.  And  he  answered  and  said,  '1  be- 
lieve that  Jesus  Christ  is  the  .^oii  of  tiod. 

38  And  he  commanded  the  chariot  to  stand  still :  and 


3G  unto  him  Jesus.  And  as  they  went  on  the  way, 
they  came  unto  a  certain  water;  and  the  eunuch 
sailh,  Hehold,  here  u:  water;  what  doth  hinder  me  to 

3S  be  baptized?!    And  he  commanded  the  chariot  to 


a  ch.  10  :  47....  6  Malt.  28  :  19:  M.irk  IB  :  16 c  .Matt.  16  :  IS  :  Jolin  6  :  69  :  9  :  35.  38;  II  :  '27:  ch.  9  :  20;  1  John  4  :  15  :  5  ;  5,  13. 

1  Siiiue  aiiLiiiit  iiiithcirities  insert,  »  hulli  or  ju  pan.  vcr.  37  And  Philip  said,  If  (Aou  htlievtst  with  all  Ihy  heart,  thou  mayett.     And  ha 
answered  and  said,  I  believe  that  Jesus  Christ  is  the  Son  of  God. 


36-40.    THE    BAPTISM    OF    THE    EU- 

Nccir. 

3G.  On  their  way,  along  (5 ;  15)  the  way. 
— Unto  a  certain  water,  not  some,  as  the 

genitive  woiilil  follow  that  partitive  sense.  (C. 
g  362.  ^.) — What  hinders  (what  ohjection  is 
there)  that  I  should  be  baptized?  This  is 
the  modest  expression  of  a  desire  on  the  part 
of  the  eunuch  to  declare  his  faith  in  that  man- 
ner, provided  the  evangelist  was  willing  to  ad- 
minister the  ordinance  to  him.  (Comp.  10  :  47.) 
As  Dc  Wctte  remarks,  the  question  presupposes 
that  Pliilip,  among  other  tilings,  had  instructed 
him  in  regard  to  the  nature  and  necessity  of 
baptism.  As  the  road  on  which  the  euituch 
journeyed  is  unknown  (see  on  v.  26),  it  cannot 
be  ascertained  where  he  was  baptized.  It  may 
interest  the  reader  to  state  some  of  the  conjec- 
tures.    Eusebius  and  Jerome  concur  in  saying 

that  it  took  place  at  Bothzur  (josh.  15  ;  58;  Neh.  3  :  16), 

near  Hebron,  about  twenty  miles  south  of  Jeru- 
salem. The  site  has  been  identified,  bearing 
still  tlie  ancient  name.  The  water  there  at 
present  i.ssues  from  a  perennial  source,  a  part 
of  which  runs  to  waste  in  the  neighboring 
fields,  and  a  part  is  collected  into  a  drinking- 
trough  on  one  side  of  the  road,  and  into  two 
small  tanks  on  the  other  side.  It  was  formerly 
objected  fliat  no  chariot  could  have  passed  here, 
on  account  of  the  broken  nature  of  the  ground; 
but  travellers  have  now  discovered  the  traces 
of  a  paved  road  and  the  marks  of  wheels  on 
the  stones.  (See  Ritter's  Erdkundc,  xvi.  1.  p. 
26G,  and  Wilson's  Lands  of  the  Bible,  i.  p.  381.) 
The  writer  found  himself  able  to  ride  at  a  rapid 
pace  nearly  all  the  way  between  Bethlehem  and 
Hebron.  The  veneration  of  early  times  reared 
a  chapel  on'  the  spot,  the  ruins  of  which  arc 
still  to  be  seen.  Von  Raumer  defends  the  gen- 
uineness of  this  primitive  tradition.  In  the 
age  of  the  crusaders  the  baptism  was  transferred 
to  Ain  Haniyeh,  about  five  miles  south-west  of 
Jerusalem.  A  fountain  here  on  the  hillside, 
which  irrigates  freely  the  adjacent  valley,  is 
known  among  the  Latins  as  "St.  Philip's 
Fountain."  One  of  the  ancient  roads  to  Gaza 
passed  here,  but  appears  to  liave  been  less  trav- 


elled than  the  others.  Dr.  Robinson  thinks 
that  the  parties  must  have  been  nearer  to  Gaza 
at  the  time  of  the  baptism,  and  would  refer  the 
transaction  to  a  wady  in  the  plain  near  Tell  el- 
HiLsy.  {Bibl.  Res.,  ii.  p.  G41 ;  or  p.  514,  1856.) 
[Dr.  Thomson  ( The  Land  and  the  Book,  new 
ed.,  1880)  supposes  that  Philip  set  out  from 
Samaria,  and  on  that  hypothesis  remarks : 
"  He  would  then  have  met  the  ciiariot  some- 
where south-west  of  Latron.  There  is  a  fine 
stream  of  water,  called  Marubah,  deep  enough 
in  some  places  even  in  June  to  satisfy  the  ut- 
most wishes  of  our  Baptist  friends.  This  Ma- 
rubah is  merely  a  local  name  for  the  great  Wady 
Silrar,  given  to  it  on  account  of  copious  foun- 
tains which  supply  it  with  water  during  sum- 
mer."— A.  H.] 

37.  This  verse  is  wanting  in  the  best  author- 
ities. The  most  reliable  manuscripts  and  ver- 
sions testify  against  it.  The  few  copies  that 
contain  the  words  read  them  variously.  Meyer 
suggests  that  they  may  have  been  taken  from 
some  baptismal  liturgy,  and  were  added  here 
that  it  might  not  appear  as  if  the  eunuch  was 
baptized  without  evidence  of  his  faith.  Most 
of  the  recent  editors  e.xpunge  the  verse.  (In 
regard  to  the  passage,  see  Green's  Developed 
Criticism,  p.  97,  and  Tregelles  On  the  Te.rt  of  the 
K.  T.,  p.  269.)  Yet  the  interpolation— if  it  be 
such — is  as  old,  certainly,  as  the  time  of  Ire- 
na^us;  and  Augustine,  in  the  fourth  century, 
though  he  objected  to  a  certain  misuse  of  the 
text,  did  not  pronounce  it  spurious.  (See 
Humphry's  note  here.)  Those  who  contend 
for  the  words  remind  us  that  the  oldest  manu- 
scripts represent  a  later  age  than  that  of  these 
Fathers.  Bornemann  puts  them  in  brackets, 
as  entitled  still  to  some  weight. — The  Son  of 
God  is  tlie  jiredicate  after  is. 

38.  And  he  ordered  (viz.  the  charioteer; 
that  the  carriage  should  stop — lit.  stand. 
An  in.'itnu'tive  use  of  the  word  for  0  :  7.  The 
eunuch's  equipage  corres]ioniled  with  his  rank. 
— And  both  went  down  into  the  water, 
not  here  unto  it  (which  fit  may  also  mean), 
for  it  stands  opposed  to  out  of  the  water  (e« 
ToO  vSaTot),  in    the  next  verse;    besides,  they 


'  Paldstina,  von  Karl  von  Raumer  (1850),  p.  411,  sq. 


116 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


they  went  down  both  into  the  water,  both  Philip  and 
the  eun\ich  ;  and  he  baptized  him. 

39  And  when  they  were  come  up  out  of  the  water, 
"the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  t  auglit  away  1  hilip,  that  the 
eunuch  saw  him  no  more :  and  he  went  on  his  way  re- 
joicing. 

4li  liut  Philip   was  found   at  Azotus:    and   passing 


stand  still :  and  they  both  went  down  into  the  water, 
both  Philip  and  the  eunuch;  and  he  baptized  him. 

39  And  when  they  came  up  out  of  tlie  water,  the  .-pirit 
of  the  Lord  caught  away  Philip;  and  the  eunuch 
saw  him  no  more,  for  he  went  on  hi.s  way  rejoicing. 

40  But  Philip  was  found  at  Azotus:  and  passing  through 


a  1  Kings  18  :  12 ;  2  Kings  2  :  16 ;  Ezek.  3  :  12,  14. 


would  have  occasion  to  enter  the  stream,  or 
pool,  in  order  to  be  baptized  into  it.  (Comp. 
was  baptized  into  the  Jordan,  in  Mark 
1  :  9.  See  Rob.,  Lej-.,  p.  118.)  [Dr.  Pluniptre, 
in  EUicott's  New  Test.  Chxinientary,  says:  ''The 
Greek  preposition  {>,.  e.  eU)  might  mean  simply 
'unto  the  water,' but  the  universality  of  immer- 
sion in  the  practice  of  the  early  church  supports 
the  English  Version." — A.  H.]  The  preposition 
in  ^caTe^T)crav  (wcnt  down)  may  refer  to  the 
descent  from  the  higher  ground  to  tlie  water. 


clause,  but  is  put  here  for  the  sake  of  brevity. 
— Tradition  says  that  the  eunuch's  name  was 
Indich,  and  that  it  was  he  who  first  preached 
the  gospel  in  Ethiopia.  It  is  certain  that 
Christianity  existed  there  at  an  early  period, 
but  its  introduction,  says  Neander,  cannot  be 
traced  to  any  connection  with  his  labors. 

40.  But  Philip,  etc.,  not  was  =  riv  (Kuin.), 
but  was  found  at  (lit.  unto,  from  the  idea 
of  the  journey  thither)  Azotus — i.  e.  was  next 
heard   of   there,   after  the  transaction   in   tlie 


C.tlSAKEA. 


or  to  the  entrance  into  the  water,  but  not  to 
the  descent  from  the  chariot,  for  this  verb  cor- 
responds to  avefiri<Tav  in  V.  39,  they  went  up, 
whereas  the  eunuch  only  returned  to  the  car- 
riage. 

39.  Out  of  the  water  («  toO  iiSoros),  where 
some  render  from,  which  c<iiifi)un(ls  eV  with 
djTo.— The  Spirit  of  the  Ijord  seized  (hur- 
ried away)  Philip.  The  exjn-ession  asserts 
that  he  left  the  eunuch  suddenly,  under  the 
impulse  of  an  urgent  monition  from  above,  but 
not  that  the  mode  of  his  departure  was  miracu- 
lous in  any  other  respect.  This  last  certainly 
is  not  a  necessary  conclusion. — For  he  went 
his  way,  returned  to  his  country,  rejoicing. 
Rejoicing    belongs     In^ncuUy   to    a    sejjarate 


desert.  This  place  was  the  ancient  Ashdod,  a 
city  of  the  Philistines,  near  the  sea-coast.  The 
ruins  consist  of  a  movind  covered  with  broken 
pottery,  and  of  a  few  pieces  of  marble.  (See 
Amos  1  :  8.)  A  little  village  not  far  off,  called 
Esdud,  perjietuates  the  ancient  name. — Cities 
does  not  depend  on  the  participle,  but  on  the 
verb,  as  in  v.  25.  Among  the  towns  through 
which  he  passed  between  Azotus  and  Ciesarea 
must  have  been  Lydda  and  Joppa.  Caisarea 
was  Philip's  home.  Here  we  find  him  iigain, 
after  the  lapse  of  more  tlian  twenty  years,  when 
the  Saul  who  was  now  "  breatliing  menace  and 
murder  against  the  disciples"  was  entertained 
by  him  as  a  ('hristian  guest.  (See  21 :  8.) — Luke's 
narrative  brings  us  frequently  to  Cuesarca.     It 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


117 


through  he  preached  in  all  the  cities,  till  he  came  to 
Ctesarea. 


he  preached  the  gospel  to  all  the  cities,  till  he  caiue 
to  Cauiarea. 


CHAPTER    IX. 


AND   "Saul,    yet    breathing   out    threatenings   and 
slaughter  against  the  disciples  of  the   Lord,  went 
unto  the  higli  priest, 

2  And  desired  of  him  letters  to  Damascus  to  the  sj'n- 
agogues,  that  if  he  found  any  of  this  way,  whether 
they  were  men  or  women,  he  might  bring  them  bound 
uuto  Jerusalem. 


1  But  Saul,  yet  breathing  threatening  and  slaughter 
against  the  disciples  of  the  Lord,  w  enl  unto  the  high 

2 priest,  aud  asked  of  liiiii  letters  to  Damascus  unto 
the  synagogues,  that  if  lie  found  ;<ny  that  we'C  cf 
the  \Vay,  whether  men  or  women,  he  might  briug 


I  cti.  8  :  3 ;  Gal.  1 :  13 ;  1  Tim.  1  :  13. 


wiis  about  si.xty  iuIIps  north-west  from  Jerusa- 
lem, on  tlie  Mediterranean,  south  of  Carmel. 
It  wa.s  tlie  ancient  Tower  of  Si  nit  o,  which  Herod 
tlie  Greiit  had  rebuilt  and  named  "Coesarea" 
in  honor  of  Augustus.  It  was  now  the  resi- 
dence of  tlie  Roman  procurators.  Its  inhabi- 
tants were  mostly  heathen  ;  the  Jewish  popula- 
tion was  small.  (For  an  account  of  this  city  in 
its  splendor  and  in  its  present  state  of  desola- 
tion, see  Conyijeare  and  Howson's  Life  atid 
Epistles  of  St.  Paul,  vol.  ii.  p.  34-t,  sq.) 


1-9.  CHRIST  APPEARS  TO  SAUL  ON 
THE  WAY  TO  DAMASCUS. 

1.  But  turns  the  attention  again  to  Saul. — 
Yet  connects  this  vei-se  with  8  :  3. — Breathing 
menace  and  murder.  In  26  :  11,  heintj  ex- 
ccediiKjly  until.  The  figure  is  founded  apparently 
on  the  fact  that  a  perst)n  under  the  e.vcitement 
of  strong  emotion  breathes  harder  and  (piicker, 
pants,  struggles  to  give  vent  to  the  passion  of 
which  he  is  full  (Wetst.,  Kyp.,  Kuin.,  Olsh.). 
To  breathe  of  soniethimj  [irvtlv  tico?),  to  be  redo- 
lent, is  a  dilFerent  e.xpression.  The  genitive  in 
this  construction  denotes  properly  that  from  or 
out  of  which  one  breathes,  as  the  cause,  source; 
the  accusative,  that  which  one  breathes,  as  the 
substance,  element.  (See  W.  jJ  30.  9.  c ;  Mt.  ? 
370.)  Meyer  translates  itJ^nveuv,  i>ihall)if/;  but 
i»  in  this  compound  was  generally  lost.  (See 
Tromm's  Concord.,  s.  v.)  [In  his  last  ed.  Meyer 
e.\i)re.s.ses  a  different  opinion,  in  sub.stantial 
accord  with  that  of  Dr.  Hackett,  thus:  "In 
iid.Tfftiii'  observe  the  coinpuuiul,  to  which  ayaiiist 
tite  (H.^cijilc!,  belonging  to  it,  corresponds;  so 
that  the  word  signities  to  hrenthe  hard  nt  or 
»(/""*  an  object." — A.  H.] — The  high  priest. 
If  Saul  w;is  converted  in  .\.  n.  .'J(i,  the  high 
priest  w;us  Jonatiian.  the  successor  of  Caiaphas 
(deposed  in  .\.  ».  35),  and  a  son  of  Ananus,  or 
Annas;  but  if  ho  was  converted  in  .\.  d.  37  or 
38,  the  high  priest  was  Theophilus,  another  son 
of  Anna-s. 

2.  Letters,  which  were  not  merely  com- 
mendatory, but  armed  him  with  full  pt)wer  to 


execute  his  object.  (See  v.  14;  2G  :  12.)  Fo« 
the  apostle's  age  at  this  time,  see  on  7  :  5H> 
The  Jews  in  every  country  recognized  the  San- 
hedrim as  their  highest  ecclesiastical  tribunals 
In  20  :  10  (comp.  v.  14,  below),  Paul  says  that 
he  received  his  authority'  from  the  high 
priests  ;  and  in  22  :  5,  from  the  presbytery  ; 
which  are  merely  dilierent  modes  of  designat- 
ing the  Sanhedrim.  (See  on  4  :  5.)  He  says 
here  that  he  had  his  commission  froiu  the 
high  priest,  which  harmonizes  entirely  with  the 
other  passages,  since  the  high  priest  represented 
the  Sanhedrim  in  this  act.  On  receiving  Saul's 
application,  he  may  have  convened  that  body, 
and  have  been  formally  instructed  to  issue  the 
letters.  The  proi>osal  was  sufficiently  import- 
ant to  engage  the  attention  of  the  entire  coiin- 
cil.— To  Damascus  states  the  local  designa- 
tion of  the  letters.  This  ancient  capital  of 
Syria  was  still  an  important  city  and  had  a 
large  Jewish  jiopulation.  It  lay  itorth-east  of 
Jerusalem,  distant  aiioutone  hundred  and  forty 
miles,  making,  for  those  times,  a  rapid  journey 
of  five  or  si.\  days.  The  route  of  Saul  on  this 
expedition  can  only  be  conjectured.  If  the 
Roiuan  roads  in  Syria  had  been  opened  as  early 
as  this,  he  went,  prol)ably  for  the  sake  of  de- 
spatch, by  the  way  of  Bethel  or  Goplma  to 
Neapolis,  crossed  the  Jordan  near  Scythopolis, 
the  ancient  Bethshean  (now  Bci.san),  and  pro- 
ceeded thence  to  Gadara,  a  Roman  city,  and  so 
through  the  modern  Hainan  to  Dama.scus.  By 
another  track,  which  cuinc-ided  in  part  witli 
the  preceding,  he  pa.s.sed  along  the  base  of 
Tabor,  crossed  the  Jordan  a  few  miles  above 
the  Sea  of  Tiljerias  (where  Jacol/s  Bridge  now 
is),  and  then  either  ascended  to  Cre.sarea  Phil- 
ippi,  at  the  foot  of  Hcrmon,  or  turned  more 
abruptly  to  the  right,  and  traversed  the  desert, 
as  before,  on  the  ea.-*t  of  Anti-Lebanon.  (For 
the  details,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson's  Life 
and  £))("s7/o-  >f  I'lnd,  veil.  i.  p.  .S3 :  Scribncr,  1854.) 
— Unto  the  synagogues — /.  c.  the  officers  of 
them,  who  were  the  rulers  of  the  synagogue 
(Luke  8: 49),  and  the  elders  associated  with  them 
(Luke  7 :3).     The  fomicr  term  was  sometimes  ap- 


118 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


3  And  "as  he  journeyed,  he  came  near  Damascus: 
and  suddenly  there  shi'ned  round  about  hiiu  a  light 
from  heaven : 

4  And  he  fell  to  the  earth,  and  heard  a  voice  saying 
unto  him,  ^^aiil,  !<aul, 'why  persecutest  thou  me? 

5  And  he  said.  Who  art  thou.  Lord?  And  the  Lord 
said,  1  am  Jesus  whom  thou  persecutest:  'it  is  hard  for 
thee  to  kick  against  the  pricks. 

G  And  he  trembling  and  astonished  said.  Lord,  ''what 
wilt  thou  have  me  to  do?  And  the  Lord  siiid  unto 
him.  Arise,  and  go  into  the  city,  and  it  shall  be  told 
thee  what  thou  must  do. 


3  them  bound  to  .Jerusalem.  And  as  he  journeyed,  it 
came  to  pass  that  he  drew  nigh  unto  Damascus:  ai.d 
suddenly  there  shone  round  about  him  a  light  out 

4 of  heaven:  and  he  fell  upon  the  earth,  and  heard  a 
voice  saying  unto  him,  .Saul,  traul,  wliy  persecute-t 

5  thou  me?    And  he  said.  Who  art  thou,  Lord?    And 

6  he  Mill,  I  am  Jesus  whom  thou  persecutest :  but  rise, 
and  enter  iuto'the  city,  and  it  shall  be  told  thee  what 


ocli.  22  :  6;  2fi  :  12;  1  Cor.  16  :  8 6  Matt.  25  :  40,  etc cch.  5  :  39 d  Luke  3  :  10  ;  ch.  2  :  37  ;  16  :  :M. 


plied  to  thein  both.  (See  13  :  15;  Mark  5  :  22.) 
These  rulers  formed  a  college,  whose  province 
it  was,  among  other  duties,  to  punish  those  who 
deserted  the  Jewish  faith.  (De  Wet.,  Hcb.  Archx- 
ol.,  ?  244.)  Hence  it  belonged  to  them  to  dis- 
cipline those  who  joined  the  Christian  party, 
or,  as  it  was  proposed  in  this  instance  to  carry 
them  to  Jerusalem,  it  was  their  duty  to  aid  Saul 
in  his  efforts  to  apprehend  the  delinquents.— 
The  way — ;.  e.  kot'  t^oxv",  of  the  (well-known 
Christian)  way,  in  regard  to  faith,  manner  of 
life,  etc.  (Comp.  19  :  9,  23 ;  22  :  4 ;  24  :  14,  22. 
See  the  idea  expressed  more  fully  in  16  :  17 ; 
18  :  25.  W.  §  18.  1.)  Way  depends  on  that 
were  (E.  V.)  under  the  rule  of  appurtenance, 
property.    (K.  ?  273.  2  ;  C.  ?  387.) 

3.  Now  while  he  journeyed,  it  came  to 
pass  (Hebraistic)  that  he,  etc.  —  Damascus 
(Aa^Lo<r«c<i;)  depends  on  the  verb  (K.  ?  284.  3.  2), 
not  the  dative  of  the  place  whither.— A  light 
gleamed  around  him.  The  preposition  in 
the  verb  governs  him.  In  22  :G  it  is  repeated, 
according  to  the  rule  stated  on  3  :  2.  In  22  :  G, 
Paul  says  that  the  light  Avhich  he  saw  was  a 
poiverfnl  light,  and  in  20  :  13  that  it  exceeded 
the  splendor  of  the  sun  at  noonday.  That 
Luke's  statement  is  the  more  general  one, 
wliile  the  intenser  expressions  occur  in  Paul's 
recital,  is  what  we  should  expect  from  the 
truth  of  the  history. 

4.  Having  fallen  to  the  earth,  probably 
from  the  animal  which  he  rode.  (See  22  :  7.) — 
Heard,  etc.  (See  also  22:7;  2G  :  14.)  The 
necessary  inference  is  that  Saul  heard  audible 
words,  and  not  merely  that  an  impression  was 
made  tipon  him  as  if  he  heard  them.  It  was  a 
part  of  the  miracle  that  those  who  accompanied 
him  lieard  the  voice  of  the  speaker,  but  failed 
to  distinguish  the  words  uttered.  The  commu- 
nication was  intended  for  Saul,  and  was  under- 
stood, therefore,  by  him  only. 

5.  Who  art  thou.  Lord?  He  did  not 
know  yet  that  it  was  Christ  who  addressed 
him.  Hence  Lord  has  the  significance  which 
belongs  to  it  as  recognizing  the  fact  that  an 
angel,  or  perhai)s  God  himself,  was  now  speak- 
ing to  him  from  heaven.     To  suppose  it  used 


by  anticipation — i.  e.  as  denoting  liim  who 
proved  to  be  Christ  —  makes  it  Luke's  word, 
and  is  unnatural.  Yet  Saul's  uncertainty  could 
have  been  but  momentary  :  "  Conscientia  ii)sa 
facile  diceret,  Jesunt  esse  "  ["  His  own  conscience 
would  readily  suggest  that  it  was  Jesus  "]  (Bng.). 
— The  remainder  of  the  verse,  as  it  stands  in 
the  common  text — viz.  it  is  hard,  etc. — lias 
been  transferred  to  this  place  from  2G  :  14.  (See 
Green's  developed  Criticism ,  p.  98.) 

6.  Most  of  the  manuscripts  begin  this  verse 
with  but.  The  sentence  trembling  ...  to 
do?  (which  the  English  translation  has  cop- 
ied) is  wanting  in  the  best  authorities.  It  rests 
chiefly  itpon  some  of  the  early  versions.  The 
words  And  the  Lord  said  unto  him  have 
been  derived  from  22  :  10. — But  (iAAi)  occurs 
often  before  a  command  abruptly  given.  (Comp. 
10  :  20 ;  2G  :  16.  W.  ?  53.  7  ;  K.  ^  322 ;  R.  12.)— 
And  it  shall  be  told  thee,  etc.  It  would 
appear  from  the  speech  before  Agri})pa  (see  26  : 
16-18)  that  Christ  may  have  made  to  Saul  at 
this  time  a  fuller  communication  than  Luke  has 
reported  in  this  place.  The  verb  here  (it  shall 
be  told  thee,  etc.)  does  not  exclude  that  sup- 
position ;  for  it  may  import  that  on  his  arrival 
in  the  city  he  should  be  confirmed  in  what  he 
had  now  heard,  or  instructed  further  in  regard 
to  his  future  labors.  But  some  prefer  to  con- 
sider Paul's  narrative  before  Agrij)pa  as  the 
abri-dged  account.  The  messagis  wiiich  An- 
anias delivered  to  Saul  (intimatetl  here  in  v. 
15,  but  recorded  more  fully  in  22  :  14-1(5)  was  a 
message  from  Christ;  and,  as  the  apostle  makes 
no  mention  of  Ananias  in  2()  :  16,  ,st/.,  it  is  very 
possible  that  he  has  tliere,  for  thesakeof  brevity, 
passed  over  the  intermediate  agency  and  referred 
the  words  directly  to  C'hrist  which  Christ  com- 
municated to  him  tlirough  Ananias.  Tliis  would 
be  merely  api)lying  the  common  maxim,  Quod 
(juis  per  (ilium  facil,  id  ij).ie  fecisse  pnUttur 
["  What  one  does  througii  another,  that  he  is 
supposed  to  have  done  himself  "J. —  W)i<it  tiiim 
vimt  do  is  the  answer,  iirobahlj',  to  Saul's  ques- 
tion tL  TToiijiTu),  W/iat  !ih(dl  I  do/  recorded  in  22:9. 
Must  refers,  not  to  duty,  but  the  divine  pui-- 
pose,  destination.     (See  22  :  10.) 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


119 


7  And  "the  men  whicli  jourueyed  with  him  stood 
speechlfss,  hearing  a  Noice,  but  >eeiug  no  uiau. 

8  And  Saul  arose  Iroui  the  earth;  and  wlieu  his  eyes 
were  opened,  he  saw  no  man  :  but  they  led  hiui  by  the 
hand,  and  brought  Uiiu  into  Damascus. 


7  thou  must  do.  And  the  men  that  journeyed  with 
him  stood  speechless,  hearing  the  'voice,  but  behold- 

8iug  no  man.  And  Saul  aruse  Irom  the  earth;  and 
when  his  eyes  were  opened,  he  s;iw  nothing;  and 
they  led  him   by  the  band,  and  brought  him  into 


a  Oaa.  10  :  7  ;  xee  ch.  22  :  9;  26  :  13.- 


7.  Were  standing  (see  on  1  :  10)  speech- 
less, having  stopiicd  in.stuntly,  overcoiue  by 
amazeiiieiit  and  terror.  (Coiiip.  were  afraid,  in 
22  :  9.)  The  adjective  is  more  correctly  written 
ivtoi.  (W.  'i  5.  1.)  Thi.s  verb  often  means  to 
stand,  not  as  opposed  tt)  other  attitudes,  but  to 
be  fixed,  stationary,  us  opposed  to  the  idea  of 
motion.  (Conip.  b  :  38 ;  Luke  5  :  2.  See  the 
Cl(uis.  Lexx.,  s.  V.)  In  this  sense  the  passage  is 
entirely  consistent  with  20  :  14,  where  it  is  said 
that  when  they  heard  the  voice  they  all  fell  to  the 
ground.  Plainly,  it  was  not  Luke's  object  to 
say  that  they  stood  erect,  in  distinction  from 
kneeling,  lying  prostrate,  and  the  like,  but 
that,  overpowered  by  what  they  saw  and  heard, 
they  were  fixed  to  the  spot— they  were  unable 
for  a  time  to  speak  or  move.  The  conciliation 
which  some  adopt  (Bng.,  Kuin.,  Bmg.)  is  that 
they  fell  to  tlie  ground  at  first,  but  afterward 
rose  up  and  stood.  It  is  unnecessary  to  urge 
this  view;  but  Zeller's  objection  to  it  —  that 
fidTrjKeKjav,  as  pluperfect,  excludes  a  previous 
falling — is  ungrammatical. — Hearing  indeed 
the  voice.  The  genitive  after  this  verb  points 
out  the  source  or  cause  of  the  hearing  ;  the  ac- 
cu.sative  (see  v.  4),  that  which  one  hears.  (See 
tiie  note  on  v.  1.)  In  22  :  9,  Paul  .says,  in  refer- 
ence to  the  same  occurrence,  ttji/  5«  itxavjiv  ovk 
TjKovaav  ToC  AaAoOfTos  jiAoi,  wliich  we  may  render 
hut  tlhcy  understood  not  the  voice  of  him  speak- 
ing to  me.  In  adding  ivho  spake  the  writer 
shows  that  he  had  in  mind  the  sense  of  (tiiovriv 
(voice),  and  not  the  mere  sound.  To  hear 
(oKoi/w),  like  the  corresponding  word  in  other 
languages,  means  not  only  to  hear,  but  to 
hear  so  as  to  understand.  Of  the  latter 
usage  the  New  Testament  furnishes  other  clear 
examples.  1  Cor.  14  :  2 :  "  For  he  that  speak- 
eth  in  an  unknown  tongue,  speaketh  not  unto 
men,  but  unto  God  ;  for  no  man  understands 
him  " — lit.  no  one  funreth.  (("omp.  v.  10,  where 
Iteareth  pai«es  into  un<lerstand<tli.)  Mark  4  : 
33:  "And  with  many  sucii  parables  spake  he 
the  word  unto  them,  as  they  were  able  to 
understand  it  "—lit.  w  they  were  aide  to  hear. 
Some  reckon  here  John  0  :  00,  Gal.  4  :  21, 
and  other  passages.  (For  instances  of  this 
sense  in  the  classics,  see  Rob.,  Lex.,  s.  v.)  The 
same  usage  exists  in  the  Hebrew.  One  of 
the  definitions  of  shnnia  (see  Gesen.,  Lex.,  s.  v.) 
is  to  understand.     In   Gen.   42  :  23   it   is  said 


that  Joseph's  brethren  "  knew  not  that  he 
lieard  them" — i.e.  understood,  in  the  K.  V. — 
"  for  he  spoke  unto  them  by  an  interpreter." 
(See  also  Gen.  11  :  7.)  The  English  language 
has  the  same  idiom.  We  say  that  a  person  is 
not  heard,  or  that  we  do  not  hear  him,  when, 
though  we  hear  his  voice,  lie  speaks  so  low  or 
indistinctly  that  we  do  not  understand  him. 
The  intelligence  of  the  writer  of  the  Acts  for- 
bids the  idea  of  a  palpable  contradiction  in  the 
two  passages.  Since  in  22  :  9  we  have  ifMov^v 
(voice)  in  the  accusative  case,  and  here  in  v.  7 
in  the  genitive,  ^lavr]^,  some  would  attribute  to 
the  latter  a  partitive  sen.se — /.  e.  something  of 
the  voice,  or  indistinctly.  But  the  dillcrence 
does  not  hold ;  for,  in  22  :  7,  I'aul  says  of  him- 
self I  heard  a  voice  ((/x-^vs  genitive),  where  he 
cannot  mean  that  he  hud  only  u  confused  per- 
ception of  what  was  said  to  him.  Some  prefer 
to  vary  the  sense  of  (^lufij — viz.  noise  or  .sound 
in  this  place,  but  voice  in  22  :  9.  But,  allowing 
the  word  to  admit  of  that  distinction  (see  on 
2  :  6),  it  is  much  less  common  than  the  pro- 
jiosed  variation  in  to  hear,  and  much  less  prob- 
able here,  since  the  use  of  the  verb  would  be 
varied  in  pa.ssages  so  remote  from  each  other, 
whereas  <l>myij  would  liavc  difTcrcnt  senses  in 
almost  successive  verses. — But  seeing  no  one 
who  could  have  uttered  the  voice.  This  appears 
to  be  denied  of  Saul's  companions,  in  opposi- 
tion to  what  was  true  of  him— viz.  that  simul- 
taneously with  the  light  he  Jiad  seen  a  personal 
manifestation  of  Christ.  (Comp.  v.  17  ;  22  :  18.) 
That  he  saw  the  speaker  as  well  as  heard  him, 
we  may  infer  from  the  language  of  Barnabas  in 
v.  27,  and  that  of  Ananias  in  v.  17  and  22  :  14. 
To  the  fact  of  his  having  a  view  of  the  glorified 

I  Saviour  at  this  time  Paul  alludes,  probably,  in 
1  Cor.  9  :  1,  where  he  mentions  his  having  seen' 

I  the  Lord  as  an  evidence  of  his  equality  with  the 
other  apostles.  (See  the  note  on  1  :3.)  Xeande:, 
De  Wette,  Meyer.  Osiander,  Thiersch,  and  others 
find  such  an  allu.sion  in  that  passage. 

8.  And  when  his  eyes  Avere  opened — 
i.  e.  his  eyelids,  which  he  had  spontaneously 
clo.sed  when  struck  with  the  gleaming  light. 
This  expression  refers  usually  to  the  recovery 
of  one's  eyesight,  as  in  Matt.  9  :  30 ;  John  9  : 
10,  20,  etc. — Saw  no  one — /.  e.  of  his  com- 
panions, because  ho  was  lunv  blind;  or,  which 
is  a  better  reading,  saw  nothing,  and  hence 


120 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


9  And  he  was  three  days  without  sight,  and  neither 
did  eat  nor  drink. 

10  1i  And  tliere  was  a  certain  disciple  at  Damascus, 
"named  Ananias  ;  and  to  him  said  the  I>ord  in  a  vision, 
Ananias.     And  he  said,  Behold,  1  am  /lere,  Lord. 

11  And  the  Lord  x>ii<l  unto  him.  Arise,  and  go  into 
the  street  which  is  called  Straight,  and  inquire  in  the 
house  of  Judas  for  unt  culled  Saul,  'of  Tarsus :  for,  he- 
hold,  he  prayeth, 

r2  And  hath  seen  in  a  vision  a  man  named  Ananias 
coming  in,  and  putting  /lis  hand  on  him,  that  he  might 
receive  his  sight. 


9  Damascus.  And  he  was  three  days  without  sight, 
and  did  neither  eat  nor  drink. 

10  Now  there  was  a  certain  disciple  at  Damascus, 
named  Ananias;  and  the  Lord  said  unto  him  in  a 
vision,  Ananias.     And  he  said,  Behold,  1  <iiii  lien', 

11  Lord.  And  the  I  ord  saiil  unto  him,  Arise,  and  go 
to  the  street  which  is  called  Straight,  and  inquire 
in  the  house  of  .hidas  for  one  n»med  Saul,  a  man  of 

12 Tarsus:  for  behold,  he  prayeth;  and  he  haih  .seen 
a  man  named  Ananias  coming  in,  and  laying  his 


och.  -n:  12....6ch.  21  :39;  22  :  3. 


being  unable  to  see  at  all,  must  be  led  by  the 
hand;  not  no  one  from  whom  the  voice  came 
(Bng.),  since  we  must  have  here  an  explanation 
of  the  next  clause. 

'  9.  Without  sight  (subjective  negative),  not 
seeing,  as  opposed  to  a  possible  idea  of  the 
reader  that  Saul  might  have  regained  his  sight 
ere  this ;  whereas  ov  (objective),  in  the  next 
clause,  states  the  liistorical  fact.  (W.  ^  55.  5.) 
Meyer,  in  his  last  edition,  recalls  his  remark 
that  the  negatives  are  interchanged  here. 


D.\MASCtTS — STRAIGHT   STREET. 

,  10-18.    ANANIAS    IS    SENT    TO    SAUL, 
AND   BAPTIZES   HIM. 

10.  That  Ananias  was  one  of  the  seventy 
disciples  is  an  unsupported  conjecture  of  some 


of  the  older  writers. — The  Lord — /.  e.  Clirist. 
(See  V.  17.) — Behold  me  =  Heb.  Hlnnenc.  Tliis 
answer  implies  that  the  person  hears  and  waits 
to  listen  further.  (Comp.  Gen.  22  :  1,  7 ;  27  :  1; 
1  Sam.  3  :  8,  etc.) 

11.  For  arise,  see  on  v.  18. — puVrji',  street, 
or  more  strictly  alley,  lane  (com]).  Luke  14  : 
21)  =  o-TtcwTTos  (narrow  passage)  in  the  later 
Greek.  (See  Lob.,  Ad  J'liri/ii.,  p.  40,  and  R.  and 
P.,  Lex.,  s.  V.) — Which  is  called  Straight. 
The  princijial  street  in  Damascus  at  present 
runs  through  the  city  from  east  to  west,  and  is 
remarkably  straight  in  some  parts,  as  well  as 
narrow.  The  Oriental  Christians  say  that  this 
is  the  street  in  wliich  Saul  lodged.  The  traces 
of  a  triple  colonnade  are  reported  to  be  found 
in  the  adjacent  houses  on  both  sides  of  the 
street;  and  if  so,  they  show  that  the  present 
street,  thougli  not  so  wide,  follows  at  least  the 
line  of  an  aiu-ient  street  of  the  city.  But  even 
in  that  case  it  may  be  questioned  wlietlier  pv/unj 
would  be  applied  to  a  thoroughfare  adorned  with 
works  of  so  much  splendor. — A  native  of 
Tarsus  (22 : 3).  (See  on  v.  30.) — For  he  prays. 
The  act  is  then  taking  place,  and  is  mentioned 
as  a  reason  why  Ananias  might  be  sure  of  a 
favorable  reception.  He  is  informed  of  the 
vision  also  because  that  served  in  like  manner 
to  prepare  the  way  for  his  visit. 

12.  And  saw  a  man  (made  known  to  liim 
in  the  vision  as)  Ananias  by  name,  a  brevil- 
oquence  liivc  that  in  15  :  !). — Placing  hand 
upon  him,  as  a  sign  of  the  benefit  which  he 
was  to  be  the  medium  of  communicating. 
(Comp.  on  G  :  G.)  The  expression  is  indefinite, 
like  that  in  12  :  1.  Lachmann  tliinks  the 
authority  sufficient  to  read  his  hands,  as  in 
V.  17.  [Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo- 
Am.  Revisei-s,  also  give  the  plural  hands, 
eitlier  with  or  without  the  article,  rei)res('nted 
properly  in  English  by  his.  His  hands  may 
therefore  he  accepted  as  tlie  true  reading. — A. 
H.] — Might  look  up,  open  his  eyes  and  see. 
This  sense  is  not  common  out  of  the  New  Tes- 
tament. It  is  found  (a  case  not  usually  cited) 
at  the  close  of  Pint.,  De  sera  Num.  viiidicta. 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


121 


13  Then  Ananias  answered,  Lord,  I  have  heard  by 
many  of  this  man,  "how  much  evil  he  hath  done  to 
tliy  saints  at  .lerusalem  : 

14  And  here  he  hath  authority  from  the  chief  priests 
to  bind  all  'that  call  on  thy  name. 

I.')  Hut  the  Lord  said  unto  hini,  Co  thy  way:  for  "^he 
is  a  chosen  vessel  unto  nie,  to  bear  my  name  before 
''the  (Jentiles,  and  «kings,  and  the  children  of  IsraeL 

1C>  For /I  will  shew  him  how  great  things  he  must 
suffer  for  my  names  sake. 

17  I'And  Ananias  went  his  way,  and  entered  into  the 
house;  and ''putting  his  hands  on  him  said,  Brother 
Saul,  the  Lord,  rvim  .lesus,  that  apiH;ared  unto  thee  in 
the  way  as  thou  earnest,  hath  se.it  me,  that  thou 
mighiest  receive  thy  sight,  aiid  'Ijc  filled  with  the 
Holy  (jhost. 


13  hands  on  liim,  that  he  might  receive  his  sight.  But 
Ananias  answered.  Lord,  I  have  heard  from  many 
of  this  man,  how  much  evil  he  did  to  thy  saints  at 

14 Jerusalem:  and  here  he  hath  authority  fioui  the 
chief  priests  to  bind  all  that  call  upon   thy  name. 

l-i  Hut  the  Lord  said  unto  him.  (Jo  thy  way:  for  he  is 
a  'chosen  ve.ssel  unto  me,  to  bear  my  name  before 
the  tientiles  and  kings,  and  the  children  of  Israel: 

16  for  I  will  shew  him  how  many  things  h.-  must  sutler 

17  for  my  name's  sake.  And  Ananias  departed,  and 
entered  into  the  house;  and  laying  his  hands  on 
him  said,  Hrother  .■^aul,  the  Lord,  I'l-en  Jesus,  who 
appeared  un.o  thco  in  the  way  which  thou  earnest, 
hatU  scut  me,  that  thou  mayest  receive  thy  sight, 


a  ver.  1....6  ver.  ?1  :  ch.  7  :  59:  22  :  IB;  1  Cor.  1:2;  2  Tim.  2  :22....cch.  1:1  :  2:  22  :  21  :  26  :  17  ;  Rom.  1:1:1  Cor.  15:  10;  Gal.  1  :  15 ; 

Kph.  3:  7,  »;  1  Tim.  2:7:2  Tim.   1  :  ll....d  llom.   I  :  5;  11  :  13;  Giil.  2:  7.  8 e  uli.  25:  22,  2:1:  26  :  1.  etc- . .  /  i:b.  20  :  23  ;  21  :  II ; 

2  Cor.  II  :23....ffcU.  22  :  12,  13 ft  cli.  8  :  17.  ...i  cU.  2  ;  4  ;  4  :  31  ;  8  :  17  ;  13  :  52. 1  Gr.  ucsscl  of  elcclluit. 


13.  The  reply  of  Anania.s  shows  how  tearful 
a  notoriety  a.s  a  persecutor  Saul  had  ac(]uircd. 
(Comp.  2fi  :  10.,' — How  great  evils. — Unto 
thy  saints — /.  c.  those  conseorated  t(j  hiiu,  and 
so  his.  This  term  as  ai>iilied  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment refers  to  the  normal  or  prescribed  standard 
of  Christian  character,  ratlier  than  the  actual 
one.  (See  1  Cor.  1  :  2,  as  compared  with  I  Cor. 
8:2;  11  :  21,  etc.)  It  belongs  to  all  who  pro- 
fess to  be  discijjles,  and  does  not  distinguish 
one  class  of  them  as  superior  to  others  in  point 
of  excellence. 

14.  Hath  authority.  Ananias  may  have 
received  Icders  fnnii  tlie  Christians  at  Jerusa- 
lem, or  thiise  who  came  with  Saul  may  have 
divulged  the  oljject  of  the  journey  since  their 
airival. — Those  who  call  upon,  invoke  in 
l>niyer,  thy  name.  (Coiup.  2  :  21;  V:  50;  1 
Cor.  1  :  2.)  This  i)artici{)le  is  middle,  not  pas- 
sive. The  Greek  for  (hose  on  u'lioin  thy  )tniiie  is 
called  would  be  like  that  in  lo  :  17.  The  e.v- 
jiression  here  is  the  one  wiiich  the  Seventy 
commonly  use  to  translate  kuni  hh'csh'an,  a  well- 
known  formula  in  the  Old  Testament. signifying 
(o  worship.  Gesenius  {Lc.c,  p.  938)  says  with 
reference  to  this  phrase :  To  call  on  the  name  of 
God  is  to  invoke  his  name — i.  e.  to  praise,  cel- 
ebrate, worship  God.  Of  course,  we  are  to 
attach  the  .same  meaning  to  the  words  in  the 
New  Testament.  Hence  this  language,  wliich 
states  a  fact  so  characteristic  of  the  first  Cliris- 
tian«  that  it  fi.xed  upon  them  the  name  of 
rnllers  upon  CInist,  shows  that  they  were  ac- 
customed to  offer  to  him  divine  honor.  (See  on 
7  :  59.) 

15.  A  vessel  (2  cor. «:  7),  instrument,  of  choice 
—I.  e.  a  chosen  instrument.  For  this  use  uf 
tiie  genitive,  see  on  7  :  30.  The  similar  exam- 
ples in  Greek  belong  rather  to  poetry.  It  is  a 
common  idiom  in  Hebrew.  (Geseii.  Ileh.  Gr., 
I  104.)— To  bear  continues  the  metaphor  in 


vessel  (Alf.).— Kings,  rulers  of  the  highest 
class.  (Comp.  17  :  7 ;  John  19  :  15.)  Paul 
.stood  as  a  witness  for  Christ  before  the  Gov- 
ernors of  Cyprus,  Achaui,  and  Judea,  and  be- 
fore Herod  Agrippa,  and  probably  Nero. — 
Children  of  Israel.  The  progress  of  the 
narrative  will  show  how  faithfully  he  exocMitcd 
this  part  of  his  mission.  Though  lie  was  the 
great  apostle  of  the  Gentiles,  lie  never  ceased  to 
l)reach  to  his  countrymen. 

IG.  For  I  will  show  him.  by  experience — 
will  cause  him  to  learn  in  the  coui-se  of  his 
life  CBng.,  ]\Iey.).  According  to  De  Wette,  it 
means  that  God  would  teach  liim  by  revelation  ; 
but  this  verb  is  not  employed  to  denote  the 
communication  of  knowledge  in  that  manner. 
The  statement  here  confirms  the  declaration 
that  Saul  would  aecomiilisli  so  nuicli  for  (he 
cause  of  Christ,  for  (yip)  he  was  to  suffer  much, 
and  his  labors  would  be  efficient  in  proportion 
to  his  sufferings. 

17.  Said,  etc.  Tlie  address  of  Ananias  to 
Saul  is  reported  more  fully  in  22  :  14,  ay/.  He 
salutes  him  as  brother  (a5cA<i>«)— not  as  of  the 
same  slock  nationally  (2:2n;  21  :i;  js:  n),  but  as 
having  now  "obtained  like  precious  faith" 
with  himself.  He  could  api)ly  that  title  to  .Saul 
with  confidence  after  having  received  such  in- 
formation in  regard  to  the  state  of  his  mind  and 
the  sphere  of  l;ii>or  to  which  Christ  liad  called 
him.— Jesus,  who  appeared,  .  .  .  earnest. 
Luke's  account  of  the  connniuiic'ation  to  .Ana- 
nias passes  over  this  ]>art  of  it.— Which  (^)  in 
this  clause,  in  which,  omits  the  preposition, 
because  the  antecedent  has  it  'a  s)iecics  of  at- 
traction). (Comp.  lo  ir/ilch  I  linrr  rallrd  in  1.'^  : 
2.  Mat.  ?  595.  4.  c.) — And  inayest  be  tilled 
with  the  Holy  Spirit—/,  e.  receive  abun- 
dantly tiie  extraordinary  gifts  an<l  (lualitica- 
tions  which  he  would  need  as  an  apostle. 
(Comp.  Gal.  2  :  7,  sq.    See  the  note  on  1  :  «.) 


122 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


18  And  immediately  tliere  fell  from  his  eyes  as  it 
had  been  scales;  and  "he  received  siglit  forthwith,  and 
arose,  and  was  baptized. 

19  And  when  he  had  received  meat,  he  was  strength- 
ened. "Then  was  i^aiil  certain  days  with  the  disciples 
which  were  at  Damascus. 

20  And  straightway  he  preached  Christ  in  the  syna- 
gogues, ''that  he  is  the  f^on  of  dod. 

■Jl  Hut  all  that  heard  him  wfre  amazed,  and  said; 
'Is  not  this  he  that  destroyed  them  which  called  on  this 
name  in  Jerusalem,  and  "came  hither  for  that  intent, 
I  hat  he  might  bring  them  bound  unto  the  chief 
priests? 

•1-1  Hut  Paul  increased  the  more  in  strength,  ^and 
confounded  the  Jews  which  dwelt  at  Damascus,  prov- 
ing that  this  is  very  Christ. 

23  H  And  after  that  many  days  were  fulfilled,  nhe 
Jews  took  counsel  to  kill  him  : 


18 and  be  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit.  And  straight- 
way there  fell  from  his  eyes  as  it  were  scales,  and 
he  received  his  sight  ;  and  he  arose  and  was  bap- 

19tized;  and  he  took  X'<od  and  was  strengthened. 
And  he  was  certain  days  with  the  disciples  who 

20  were  at  Damascus.  And  straightway  in  the  syna- 
gogues he  jjroclaimed  Jesus,  that  he  is  the  Son  of 

21  God.  And  all  that  heard  him  were  amazed,  iind 
said.  Is  not  this  he  that  in  Jerusalem  made  havock 
of  them  who  called  on  this  name'.'  and  he  had  come 
hither  lor  this  intent,  that   he  mii;ht   bring  them 

22  bound  before  the  chief  priests  liit  Saul  increased 
the  more  in  strength,  and  confounded  the  Jews  who 
dwelt  at  Damascus,  jiroving  tluit  this  is  the  Christ. 

23  And  when  many  days  were  fulfilled,  the  Jews  took 


acli.26  :  20...  .6  cli.  8  :  37...  .c  ch.  8:3;  ver.  1;  Gal.  1  :  13,  23...  .d  cii.  18  :  28....e  cli.  23  :  12;  23  :  3;  2  Cor.  11  :  26. 


18.  There  fell  off  from  his  eyes  as  if 
scales.      This  means   that   he  experienced  a 
sensation  as  if  sucli  had  been  the  fact.     As  if 
sliows  that  it  was  so  in   appearance,  not  in 
realitj^     (Comp.  2:3;  6  :  15,  etc.)     The  nature 
of  the  injury  which  his  eyes  had  suffered  we 
cannot  determine,  but  it  is  certain  that  the  re-  ; 
covery  from  the  injury  was  instantaneous  and  i 
complete.      We  may  suppose  that   Lulve  had  j 
often    heard    Paul    relate   how  he  felt  at  that  i 
moment. — Having  risen  up,  and  (if  need  be)  ! 
gone  forth   to  the  place  of  baptism,     (t'onip.  | 
Luke  4  :  38.     See  Rob.,  Lex.,  s.  v.  ii.  1.  a),  or  ' 
simply   having   made  himself  ready—*,  e.  ' 
without  delay.     (Comp.  Luke  15  :  18.)     On  this  i 
Hebraistic  use  of  the  word,  see  Gesen.,   Lex.,  j 
p.  919 ;  W.  ?  65.  4.  c.     It  is  impossible  to  infer  i 
from  it  that  he  was  baptized  in  the  house  of  \ 
Judas,  or  that  he  was  not.     Damascus  at  the  | 
present  day  abounds  in  water,  and  all  the  bet-  ; 
ter  houses  have  a  reservoir  in  their  court  or  ! 
stand  beside  a  natural  or  an  artificial  stream,  j 
(See    Robinson,    vol.    iii.     p.   400.)  —  Having  i 
taken  food,  after  the  fast  of  the  three  days.  . 
(See  V.  9.)  ; 

19-23.  THE  LABORS  OF  PAUL  AT  ; 
DAMASCUS.  j 

19.  With  the   disciples,  in  private  inter- 
course with  them. — Certain  days  denotes  too 
brief  a  period  to  apply  to  the  entire  residence  at  | 
Damascus  (Neand.,  Dc  Wet..  Mey.). 

20.  And    immediately,   after    the    days  j 
spent  in  the  society  of  the  Christians  there.—  \ 
Preached  Jesus  that  he  is,  etc.  =  preached 
that  Jesus  is,  etc.    (See  on  3  :  10.)     Jesus  is  | 
the  individual  or  personal  name  of  the  Saviour ; 
and  it  was  the  apostle's  object  to  estal)lish  the 
identity  of  Jesus  with  the  Son  of  God  or  the 
promised  Messiah.     (Comp.  v.  22.) 

21.  Who  destroyed,  put  to  death.  (See  22  : 
3.) — This  name — viz.  that  of  Jesus  (v.  20). 
The  form  of  the  remark  adapts  itself  to   the 


narrative. — Hither,  after  a  verb  of  motion; 
here  in  v.  14. — For  that  intent  anticipates  the 
next  clause. — For  chief  priests,  see  on  4  :  (5. 

— The  astonishment  expressed  here  proceeded 
from  the  Jews,  wliom  Paul  addressed  in  the 
synagogues.  Most  (jf  the  Christians  at  Damas- 
cus mttst  have  been  apprised  of  the  change  in 
his  character  l^efore  ho  api)eared  in  jiublic. 

22.  But  Saul  was  more  strengthened — 
i.  e.  in  his  faith.  (See  16  :  5;  Rom.  4  :  20.)  This 
remark  describes  liis  state  after  the  lapse  of 
some  time  subsequent  to  his  conversion.  It  is 
made,  apparently,  not  merely  to  indicate  his 
Christian  progress,  but  to  suggest  why  he 
preached  with  such  convincing  power. — Prov- 
ing that  this  one  is  the  Christ.  This  re- 
calls Jesus,  in  v.  20 — the  more  readily  because 
toOto  intervenes  in  v.  21. 

23-25.  THE  FLIGHT  OF  PAUL  FROM 
DAMASCUS. 

23.  Now  when  many  days  were  ac- 
complished. At  this  place,  jirobably,  we  are 
to  insert  the  journey  into  Arabia,  which  the 
apostle  mentions  in  Gal.  1  :  17.  So  Neander, 
Hemsen,  Meyer,  and  others.  That  Luke  makes 
no  allusion  to  this  journey  agrees  with  the  sum- 
mary character  of  his  history  generally,  in  re- 
lation to  the  early  portion  of  Paul's  life.  It 
will  be  observed  he  does  not  say  that  the 
"  many  days "  were  all  spent  at  Damascus, 
but  that  many  had  elapsed  since  his  first  ar- 
rival, before  tlie  escape  which  took  place  under 
tlie  circumstances  narrated.  Hence  the  lan- 
guage leaves  us  at  lii)erty  to  suppose  that  lie 
jiassed  more  or  less  of  the  intermediate  period 
elsewhere.  The  time  that  Paul  was  absent  in 
Arabia  belongs,  probably,  to  tlie  earlier  part  of 
the  many  days,  rather  than  tlie  latter;  for  in 
Gal.  1  :  17  lie  mentions  Arabia  before  Danuts- 
cus,  as  if  the  former  country  was  the  first  im- 
portant scene  of  his  apostleship.  The  time 
which  he  spent  in  Arabia  formed,  not  iinprob- 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


123 


24  '■liut  their  laying  await  was  known  of  Saul.  And 
they  watched  the  gates  day  and  night  to  kill  him. 

2')  Then  the  diseiples  took  hiiu  by  uight,  and  Met 
him  down  by  the  wall  in  a  basket. 

2(3  And  'when  Saul  was  come  to  Jerusalem,  he  as- 
sayed to  join  himself  to  the  diseiples:  but  they  were 
all  afraid  of  him,  and  believed  not  that  he  was  a  dis- 
cii)le. 

27  ''Cut  Harnabas  took  him,  and  brought  /lim  to  the 
apostles,  and  declared  unto  them  how  lie  had  seen  the 
Lord  in  the  way,  and  that  he  had  spoken  to  him,  "and 


24  counsel  together  to  kill  him  :  but  their  plot  became 
known  to  Saul.     And  they  watched  the  gates  also 

25  (lay  and  night  that  they  might  kill  hiui  :  but  his 
disciples  look  him  by  night,  and  let  him  down 
through  the  wall,  lowering  him  in  a  ba.<ket. 

2G  And  when  lie  was  come  to  Jerusalem,  he  assayed 
to  join  himself  to  the  dis-iples:  and  they  were  ail 
afraid  of  him,  not  believing  that  he  was  a  disciple. 

27  Hut  iiarnabas  took  him,  and  brought  him  to  the 
apostles,  and  declared  uuto  tbeia  buw  he  had  seen 


a  2  Cor.  11  :  32 6  So  Josh.  2  ;  15 ;  1  Sam.  19  :  12 cch.  22  :  17;  Gal.  1  :  17,  18 d  ch.  4  :  36 :  13  :  2 «  vers.  20.22. 


ably,  a  large  part  of  the  three  years  before  his 
ri'tiirn  to  Jerusalem ;  for  that  supposition  ex- 
plains best  the  fact  that  he  was  still  so  unknown 
there  as  a  Christian.  (See  v.  26.)  Some  critics, 
as  Olshaiison,  Ebrard,  Sepp,i  would  i)lace  the 
excursion  into  Arabia  between  v.  25  and  v.  20. 
The  objection  to  that  view  is  that  the  apostle 
must  then  have  come  l)ack  to  Damascus  (re- 
turned again  into  Damascus  in  Gal.  1  :  17), 
in  the  face  of  the  deadly  hostility  on  the  part 
of  the  Jews  which  had  already  driven  him  from 
that  city. 

24.  Became  known  by  Saul,  to  him.  For 
the  dative  after  the  passive,  see  on  5  :  9.  The 
discovery  enabled  the  apostle  to  escape  the 
danger.  —  Were  watching;  the  gates — i.  e. 
with  the  aid  of  soldiers  whom  the  governor 
placed  at  their  disposal,  so  that  the  act  of 
guarding  the  city  could  be  ascribed  to  the 
Jews,  as  in  this  passage,  or  to  the  ethnarch, 
as  in  2  Cor.  11  :  32.  The  Jews  at  this  time 
were  influential  as  well  as  numerous  at  Da- 
mascus, and  could  easily  enlist  the  government 
on  their  side.— Through  the  wall,  and  at  the 
same  time  through  a  window  through  the  wall, 
as  is  stilted  in  2  Cor.  11  :  33 — i.  e.  as  common- 
ly understood  through  the  window  of  a  house 
overhanging  tlie  wall.  (Comp.  Josh.  2  :  15 ;  1 
Sam.  19  :  12.)  Houses  are  built  in  that  manner 
in  Eastern  countries  at  the  present  day.  A  wood- 
cut representing  such  a  wimlow  may  be  seen 
in  Conybeare  and  Howson,  vol.  i.  p.  124.* — In 
a  basket.  Tliat  those  who  aided  Paul's  escape 
should  liave  used  a  biuskct  for  the  purpose  was 
entirely  natural,  according  to  the  present  cus- 
toms of  the  country.  It  is  the  sort  of  vehicle 
which  people  employ  there  now  if  they  would 
lower  a  man  into  a  well  or  raise  him  into  the 
upper  story  of  a  liouse.  (See  Illustmtiom  of 
Scripture,  p.  69.) 


26-31.  PAUL  RETURNS  TO  JERUSALEM, 
AND  P^ROM  THERE  GOES  TO  TARSUS. 

26.  This  is  Paul's  first  journey  to  Jerusalem 
since  his  conversion,  and  took  place  in  a.  d.  39. 
(See  Introduct.,  ^  tJ.  1.)  His  motive  for  this  step, 
as  he  states  in  Gal.  1 :  18,  was  that  he  miglit  make 
the  acquaintance  of  Peter. — To  join  himself, 
etc.,  to  associdte  with  them  as  one  of  their  own 
faith.  —  Were  all  afraid,  etc.  If  Paul  had 
s{)ent  most  of  the  Itust  three  yeare  at  Damasi-us, 
we  should  suppose  that  the  report  of  his  labors 
during  that  time  would  have  reached  Jerusalem 
and  prepared  the  way  for  his  more  cordial  re- 
cei)tion.  On  the  contrary,  if  he  had  been  with- 
drawn for  the  most  part  from  their  knowledge, 
in  the  more  retired  region  of  Arabia,  it  is  less 
surprising  that  they  now  regarded  him  with 
suspicion.  [Especially  if,  with  Davies,  in 
Smith's  Did.  of  the  Bible,  Am.  ed.,  p.  23(3li,  we 
suppose  that  he  was  "seeking  seclusion  (there), 
in  order  that,  by  conferring,  '  )iot  with  fiesh  and 
blood,'  but  with  the  Lord  in  the  Spirit,  he  might 
receive  more  deeply  into  his  mind  the  commis- 
sion given  him  at  his  conversion." — A.  H.]  The 
language,  according  to  either  view,  it  will  be 
observed,  does  not  affirm  that  they  had  never 
heard  of  his  conversion,  but  that  they  could 
not  readily  persuade  themselves  that  it  was 
sincere.  The  sudden  appearance  of  Voltaire 
in  a  circle  of  Christians,  claiming  to  I)e  one 
of  them,  would  have  been  something  like 
this  return  of  Saul  to  Jerusalem  as  a  professed 
disciple. 

27.  Barnabas  stood  liigh  among  the  dis- 
ciples at  Jeru.salem  (4:36;  ii  :22).  No  one  out 
of  the  circle  of  the  apostles  could  have  inter- 
posed a  more  powerful  won!  in  behalf  of  Saul. 
— Unto  the  apostles— viz.  Peter  and  James 
(Oai.  1:19).  The  other  ajiostlas  were  protxibly 
absent  from  Jerusalem  at  this  time. — Related 


1  Da.1  Lfben  C/in'sll,  von  Dr.  Joh.  Nep.   Sep,  Rand  iv.  p.  47. 

'  Possibly  another  explanation  may  be  the  correct  one.  A  few  steps  to  the  left  of  Bab-es-.s;hurkeh,  the  pate 
on  the  east  side  of  Dama.scus,  I  observed  two  or  three  windows  in  the  external  face  of  the  wall,  opening  into 
houses  on  the  inside  of  the  city.  If  Saul  was  let  down  through  such  a  window  (which  belongs  equally  to  the 
house  and  the  walH,  it  would  be  still  more  exact  to  interchange  the  two  expressions— that  is,  we  could  say,  as 
in  the  Acts,  that  he  escapi'd  "  through  the  wall,"  or,  as  in  the  Epislle  to  the  Corinthians,  that  he  escaped 
"through  a  window  through  the  wall." 


124 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


how  he  had  preached  boldly  at  Damascus  in  ths  name 
of  Jesus. 

28  And  "he  was  with  them  coming  in  and  going  out 
at  Jerusalem. 

29  And  he  spake  boldly  in  the  name  of  the  Lord 
Jesus,  and  disputed  against  the  'Oreciaiis:  "^but  they 
went  about  to  slay  him. 

30  Which  wbeu  the  brethren  knew,  they  brought 
him  down  to  Csesarea,  and  sent  him  forth  to  Tarsus. 


the  Lord  in  the  way,  and  that  he  had  spoken  to 
him,  and  how  at  Damasctis  he  had  preached  boldly 

28  in  the  name  of  Jesus.     And  he  was  with  them  going 

29  in  and  going  out  of  Jerusalem,  preaching  boldly  in 
the  name  of  the  Lord  :  and  he  spake  and  disputed 
against  the  Ujrecian  Jews;  but  they  went  about  to 

30  kill  him.  And  when  the  brethren  knew  it,  tbey 
brought  him  down  to  Ca;sarea,  and  sent  him  forth 
to  Tarsus. 


oGal.  1  :  18....5ch.  6:  1;  11  :  20.... ever.  23;  2  Cor.  11  :  26.- 


-1  Gr.  Hellenists. 


fully,  since  they  may  have  heard  a  report  of  the 
occurrence,  but  had  received  no  definite  informa- 
tion concerning  it.  He  could  add,  also,  his  own 
personal  testimony  to  the  truth  of  what  had 
come  to  their  ears. — How  he  had  preached 
boldly.  He  had  been  liimself,  probably,  a  wit- 
ness of  Paul's  zeal  at  Damascus ;  and  for  that  rea- 
son, and  because  his  labors  there  were  more  re- 
cent, he  says  nothing  of  the  residence  in  Arabia. 
— In  the  name  of  Jesus,  as  the  sphere  of  his 
preaching  (Mey.) ;  not  in  virtue  of  authority 
from  him. 

28.  Was  with  them,  during  fifteen  days,  as 
we  learn  from  Gal.  1  :  18. — Going  in  and  go- 


29.  To  the  Hellenists.  (See  note  on  6  : 1.) 
He  addressed  himself  to  them  because  he  him- 
self was  a  foreign  Jew  and  was  familiar  with 
the  Greek,  which  they  also  spoke.  It  has  been 
conjectured  that  one  of  the  festivals  may  have 
been  in  progress  at  this  time,  and  that  these 
Hellenists  had  come  to  Jerusalem  on  that  ac- 
count. (Comp.  John  12  :  20.) — Went  about, 
attempted.  Imperfect,  because  they  were 
seeking  the  opportunity  to  kill  him.  We  are 
not  to  sttppose  that  they  had  ventured  as  yet  on 
any  open  act. 

30.  But  the  brethren  having  ascer- 
tained— viz.   their  hostile  design.      Paul   de- 


ing  out — i.  e.  in  the  exercise  of  his  ministry,  I  parted,  in  conformitj'  with  their  advice.  We 
as  results  from  the  next  clause.  For  the  import  learn  from  22  :  17  that  another  motive  con- 
of  this  Hebraism,  see  on  1  ;  21.  I  curred  with  this :  he  was  informed  in  a  vision 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


125 


31  "Then  had  thechiirclies  rest  throughout  all  .ludsea 
and  lialiluc  and  Samaria,  and  were  edilied  ;  and  walk- 
ing in  the  fear  of  the  Lord,  and  in  the  coiufurt  of  the 
Holy  Ghost,  were  multiplied. 


31  So  the  church  throughout  all  Judica  and  Galilee 
and  Samaria  had  peace,  heing  'edilied;  and,  walk- 
ing -in  the  fear  of  the  Lord  and  -in  the  comfort  of 
the  Holy  Spirit,  was  multiplied. 


aSeecli.  8  :  1. 


-I  Gr.  builded  up. . .  .2  Or,  by 


that  God  would  have  him  occupy  a  different 
Hold  of  labor.  Without  tliat  revelation  he 
might  have  thought  it  best  to  remain,  in  de- 
tiance  of  the  present  danger,  and  notwithstand- 
ing the  importunity  of  his  friends.  (Conip. 
21  :  13.)  It  is  a  mark  of  truth  that  we  find 
Luke  .stilting  the  outward  impulse;  the  apo.stle, 
the  inner  ground. — In  brought  . ,  .  down  the 
preposition  marks  the  descent  to  the  sea-coast. 
— For  Cspsiirea,  see  on  8  :  40.  For  the  route 
liither  from  .Jerusalem,  see  on  23  :  31. — And 
they  sent  him  forth  to  Tarsus.  This  city 
was  the  capital  of  Cilicia,  on  the  river  Cydnus. 
It  possessetl  at  this  time  a  literary  reputation 
wiiich  rivalled  that  of  Athens  and  Alexandria. 
It  had  received  important  political  jjrivileges 
both  from  Antony  and  Augustus,  but  did  not 
enjoy  the  right  of  Roman  citizenshij).  (Sec  the 
note  on  22  :  29.) — We  might  conclude  from  the 
statement  here  that  Paul  went  directly  to  Tar- 
sus by  sea.  That  inference,  it  has  been  said, 
contradicts  Gal.  1  :  21,  where,  speaking  of  his 
joiu'iiey,  Paul  puts  Syria  before  Cilicia,  as  if  he 
went  to  the  latter  country  through  the  former. 
It  is  to  be  noticed  that  these  two  countries  are 
always  named  in  that  order  (.see  15  :  23,  41),  and 
that  order  agrees  with  the  land-route  from  Jeru- 
salem to  Cilicia,  which  was  the  one  more  com- 
monly taken.  Hence,  Paul  may  have  adhered 
to  that  order  in  Gal.  1  :  21  from  the  ft)rce  of  as- 
sociation, though  in  this  instance  he  went  first 
to  Cilicia,  and  from  there  made  missionary  ex- 
cursions into  Syria.  But  if  any  one  prefers,  he 
can  suppose,  with  De  Wette,  that  Paul  took 
ship  at  Ca'sarca,  and  tlien  landed  again  at 
Seleucia;  or,  with  Winer,  Riickert,  and  others, 
that  Syria,  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians,  in- 
cluded a  part  of  the  region  between  Jerusa- 
lem and  Ca'sarea.  The  term  had  sometimes 
that  wider  sense.  Some  have  fixed  on  Caisarea 
[Philippi]  in  the  North  of  Palestine  as  the 
place  meant  here ;  but  in  that  case  the  epi- 
thet whicli  distinguishes  the  less  celebrated 
city  from  the  other  would  have  been  added, 
as  in  Matt.  16  :  13 ;  Mark  8  :  27. —In  these 
regions  of  Syria  and  Cilicia,  Paul  remained 
four  or  five  years;  for  he  went  thither  from 
Jerusalem  in  .\.  n.  39  (see  on  v.  20),  and  left 
for  Antioch  in  a.  d.  43  (see  on  11  :  20).  That  he 
was  occui)ied  during  this  time  in  laboring  for 
the  sjiread  of  the  gospel  is  not  only  to  be  in- 
ferred from  the  character  of  the  man,  but  is  ex- 


pres.sly  state<l  in  Gal.  1  :  21-23.  Further,  in  the 
sequel  of  the  narrative  (is :  23, 41)  we  find  churches 
existing  here,  the  origin  of  which  is  unknown, 
unless  we  suppose  that  they  were  planted  i>y 
Paul's  instrumentality  at  this  time.  It  is  not 
an  irrelevant  reficction  which  Conybeare  and 
Howson  suggest — that  during  this  residence  of 
Paul  in  his  native  land  "some  of  those  Chris- 
tian '  kinsmen,'  wliose  names  are  handed  down 
to  us  (Kom.  16:7,  11,  21)— possiblv  liis  sistcr,  the 
l)laymate  of  his  childhood,  and  his  sister's  son, 
who  afterward  saved  his  life  (23:ig,  »«.)  —  may 
liave  been  gathered  by  his  exertions  into  the 
fold  of  Christ."'  The  ajwstle  rciippears  next 
in  11  :  2.5. 

31-35.  PETER  PREACHES  AT  LYDDA. 
AND  HEALS  A  PARALYTIC. 

31.  The  churches  now  .  .  .  had  peace 
— /.  e.  rest  from  the  persecution  which  they 
had  sutl'ered  since  the  death  of  Stephen.  It 
had  continued  for  three  years  (see  v.  20),  if  the 
subject  of  this  paragraph  be  next  in  order  after 
the  preceding  one.  It  is  not  certain  that  Luke 
mentions  the  cause  of  this  respite.  As  Lard- 
ner,  De  Wette,  and  others  suggest,  it  may  have 
been  owing  to  the  troubles  excited  by  the  order 
of  Caligula  to  have  his  image  set  u])  in  the 
temple.  (Jos.,  Autl.,  18.  8.  2-9.)  The  Jews  may 
have  been  too  much  engrossed  by  their  opjwsi- 
tion  to  that  measure  to  pursue  the  Christians. 
ovv  in  that  case  takes  up  again  the  main  thread 
of  the  liistory  after  the  digression  relating  to 
Paul.  Meyer  makes  it  strictly  illative  from 
vv.  3-30,  as  if  the  jieace  was  the  result  of  Paul's 
conversion  and  labors.  But,  as  he  began  to 
act  on  the  side  of  the  Christians  so  soon  after 
the  death  of  Stephen,  we  should  then  have  too 
brief  an  interval  for  the  persecution.  Copies 
vary  between  churches  and  church,  but  favor 
the  latter.  [E.  (j.  X  A  B  C  and  others;  so  that 
it  is  adopted  by  Lacli.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and 
Hort,  Anglo-Am.  Revisers.  "Observe,"  says 
Meyer,  "with  the  correct  reading,  .  .  .  the 
aspect  of  tinitij,  under  which  Luke,  sitrre;/liig 
the  whole  <hiatiin  of  Chrisleinlom,  comprehends 
the  churches  which  had  been  already  formed 
(oai.  1  :  21)  and  were  in  course  of  formation. 
(Comp.  10  :  5.)  The  external  bond  of  this 
unity  was  the  apostles ;  the  internal,  the  Si)irit ; 
Christ  the  one  Head;  tlie  forms  of  the  union 
were  not  yet  more  fully  developed  than  bv  the 
gradual    institution   of   presbyters  (ii:30)   anJ 


126 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


32  %  And  it  came  to  pass,  as  Peter  passed  "through-  | 
out  all  quarti'r.s,  he  caiue  down  also  to  the  saiuts  which 
dwelt  at  l^ydda. 

3;'.  And  there  he  found  a  certain  man  named  ^neas, 
which  had  kept  his  hed  eight  years,  and  was  sick  of 
the  iialsy. 

:u  And  Peter  said  unto  him,  ^neas,  'Jesus  Christ 
niaketh  thee  whole:  arise,  and  make  thy  bed.  And  he 
arose  immediately. 

3.5  And  all  that  dwelt  at  Lydda  and  «Saron  saw  him, 
and  ■'turned  to  the  l.ord. 

3()  V  Now  there  was  at  Joppa  a  certain  disciple  named 
Tabitha,  which  by  interpretation  is  called  Dorcas:  this 
woman  was  full  <^of  good  works  and  almsdeeds  which 
she  did. 

37  And  it  came  to  pass  in  those  days,  that  she  was 
sick,  and  died:  whom  when  they  had  washed,  they 
laid  /te/  in  /an  upper  chamber. 


32  And  it  came  to  pass,  as  Peter  went  throughout  all 
parts,  he  came  down  also  to  tiie  saints  who  dwelt  at 

33  i^ydda.  And  there  he  found  a  certain  man  named 
yEneas,  who  had  kept  his  'bed  eight  years;  for  he 

34  was  palsied.  And  Peter  said  unto  him,  /Eneas,  Je- 
sus Christ  healeth  thee:  arise,  and  make  thy 'bed. 

35  And  straightway  he  arose.  And  all  that  dwelt  at 
Lydda  ana  in  .Sharon  saw  him,  and  they  turned  to 
the  I>ord. 

36  Now  there  was  at  Joppa  a  certain  disciple  named 
Tabitha,  who  by  interpretation  is  called  -Dorcas: 
this  woman  was  full  of  good  works  and  almsdeeds 

37  which  she  did.  And  it  came  to  pass  in  those  days, 
that  she  fell  sick,  and  died:  and  when  they  had 
washed  her,  they  laid  her   in   an   upper  chamber. 


ach.  8  :  U 6  ch.  3:6,   16;  4  :  10 c  1    Chron.  5  :  16 d  ch.  11  :  21 el  Tim.  2  : 

pallet 2  That  ia,  Gazet'e. 


deacons." — A.  H.] — Galilee.  This  is  our  only 
notice  of  tlie  existence  of  cliurciies  in  that  na- 
tive land  of  the  apostles. — Being  built  up — 
t.  e.  in  faith  and  piety.  (See  1  Cor.  8:1;  14  : 
4;  1  Thess.  5  :  11,  etc.)  It  is  contrary  to  usage 
to  understand  it  of  external  organization.  It 
does  not  refer  to  the  increase  of  numbers,  since 
that  is  the  idea  of  the  verb  which  follows. 
The  E.  V.  makes  this  participle  a  verb,  and 
separates  it  from  its  natural  connection  in  the 
sentence. — Walking.  A  common  Hebraism 
(see  Heb.  halak)  to  denote  a  course  of  conduct. 
— In  the  fear  of  the  Lord,  in  conformity 
with  that  state  of  mind ;  dative  of  rule  or 
manner.  (W.  §  31.  6.  b.) — And  in  the  com- 
fort, etc.  (E.  v.),  belongs,  not  to  walking, 
but  to  were  (or  Avas)  multiplied,  of  which 
it  assigns  the  cause:  and  by  the  aid,  per- 
suasive energy  (Kuin.,  Mey.,  Rob.),  of  the 
Holy  Spirit  Avere  multiplied.  That  sense 
of  7rapoKA>jcrei  (comfort)  [from  the  same  verb  as 
Paraclete,  Cohiforler  (E.  V.) — A.  H.]  is  not  cer- 
tain. De  Wette :  The  power  of  consolatory 
discourse  conferred  by  the  Spirit  on  those  who 
preached.     (Comp.  4  :  36.) 

32.  Peter  may  have  left  Jerusalem  soon  after 
the  departure  of  Paul.  (See  on  v.  27.) — Passing 
through  all  the  believers  in  that  part  of  the 
country.  After  all  supply  saints  (Bng.,Mey., 
DeWet.),  not  places  (Kuin.,  Wiesl.).  (Comp. 
20 :  25 ;  Rom.  15  :  28.)  The  narrative  assumes  that 
the  gospel  had  been  preached  here  already  (see 
8  :  44), and  this  was  a  tour  of  visitation. — Also 
includes  the  saints  at  Lydda  among  the  all. 
In  crossing  the  i)lain  from  Yafa,  or  Joppa,  to 
Ranileh  the  traveller  sees  a  village  with  a  tall 
minaret  in  the  south-east,  and  on  inquiring  the 
name  is  told  that  it  is  Lud  or  Lid.  It  stands 
on  the  ancient  line  of  travel  between  Jerusalem 
and  Cipsarea.  It  is  the  modern  representative 
of  the  Lydda  in  our  text. 

33.  His  name  may  indicate  that  JEneas  was 


a  Greek  or  Hellenistic  Jew.  He  was  probably 
a  believer,  as  faith  was  usually  required  of  those 
who  received  the  benefits  of  the  gospel. — Since 
eight  years,  for  so  long  a  time. — Bed,  pal- 
let, as  in  5  :  15. 

34.  Spread  for  thyself— {.  e.  thy  bed;  not 
in  future  (Kuin.),  but  immediately  (De  Wet., 
Mey.).  Others  had  performed  that  office  for 
him  hitherto.  He  was  now  to  evince  his  res- 
toration by  an  act  which  had  been  the  peculiar 
evidence  of  his  infirmity.  The  oljject  of  the 
verb  suggests  itself;  it  is  not  strictly  an  ellipsis. 

35.  Saw  him,  after  his  recovery,  whom 
they  had  known  before  as  a  confirmed  para- 
lytic.— All  may  be  restricted,  as  suggested  on 
3  :  18. — The  Saron  =  Heb.  hashshnrbn,  the 
Plain.  It  extended  along  the  sea-coast  from 
Joppa  to  Ca?sarea,  about  thirty  miles.  Here 
the  part  nearest  to  Lydda  appears  to  be  meant. 
Some  have  thought  (Win.,  Reahv.,  ii.  p.  383) 
that  Saron  may  designate  here  a  village  of  that 
name.  —  Who,  influenced  by  the  miracle, 
turned  unto  the  Lord  (see  v.  42) ;  not  who 
had  turned  (Kuin.).  In  the  latter  case  the 
import  of  the  remark  would  be  that  the  mir- 
acle was  a  credible  one,  because  it  was  so  well 
attested.  Such  an  apologetic  interest  is  foreign 
to  Luke's  manner. 

36-43.  PETER  VISITS  JOPPA. 

36.  Joppa  (Jon.  1  :  3)  was  north-M'est  from 
Lydda  (see  on  v.  32),  the  present  Japha,  or 
Yafa,  on  the  sea-coast. — Tabitha  =  Ttbheta  is 
Chaldee,  and  means  a  gnzcllc.  We  may  infer 
from  it  her  Jewish  origin.  To  her  Greek  friends 
she  ma_y  have  been  known  also  by  the  other 
name. — And  (especially)  alms,  deeds  of  char- 
ity; and  explicative. 

37.  Having  washed,  they  placed  her 
in  the  upper  chamber,  of  the  house  where 
they  were.  As  tiie  limitation  suggests  itself, 
the  article  is  omitted.  (W.  ?  19.  1.)  It  is  in- 
serted in  V.  39,  because  there  it  points  back  to 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


127 


38  And  forasmuch  as  Lydda  wa-i  ni^li  to  Joppa,  and 
the  disciples  had  heard  tluit  I'eter  was  there,  they  sent 
unto  him  two  men,  desiring  liim  that  he  would  not  de- 
lay to  come  to  them. 

.!!)  Then  I'eter  arose  and  went  with  them.  When 
he  was  come,  they  brought  him  into  the  upper  cham- 
ber: and  all  the  widows  stood  by  him  weeping,  and 
shewing  the  coats  and  garments  which  Dorcas  made, 
while  she  was  with  them. 

4(1  But  I'eter  "put  them  all  forth,  and 'kneeled  down, 
and  prayed;  and  turning  him  to  the  body  <^said,  Tabi- 
tha,  arise.  And  slu;  opened  her  eyes;  and  when  she 
saw  I'eter,  she  sal  up. 

41  And  he  gave  her  his  hand,  and  lifted  her  up,  and 
when  he  had  called  the  saints  and  widows,  presented 
her  alive. 

42  And  it  was  known  throughout  all  Joppa;  ''and 
many  believed  in  the  Lord. 

4:i  And  it  came  to  pass,  that  he  tarried  many  days  in 
Joppa  with  one  'Simon  a  tanner. 


j  38  And  as  Lydda  was  nigh  unto  .loppa,  the  disciple.s 
hearing  that  I'eter  was  there,  sent  two  men  unto 
him.  intreating  him,  I'elay  not  to  conic  on  unto  us. 
j  39  And  I'eter  arose  and  went  with  Ibcni  And  when 
I  he  was  come,  they  brought  him  into  the  upper 
chamber:  and  all  the  widows  stood  by  him  weep- 
ing, and   shewing   the   coats   and    garments   which 

40  Horcas  made,  while  she  was  with  tbeni.  I'.ut  I'l  tcr 
put  them  all  lortli,  and  kneeled  ilown,  and  prayed; 
and  turning  lo  the  body,  he  said,  Tabilha,  ari.se. 
And  she  opened  her  eyes;  and  when  she  saw  1  eter, 

41  she  .sat  up.  And  he  gave  her  bis  hand,  and  raised 
her  up;  and  calling  the  saints  and  widows,  he  |)rc- 

42seiited  her  alive.  And  it  became  known  through- 
out all   Joppa:   and   many    believed   on   the    1-ord. 

43  And  it  came  to  pass,  that  he  abode  many  days  iu 
Joppa  with  one  .>imon  a  tanner. 


CHAPTER    X, 


rPHERE  was  a  certain  man  in  CKsarea  called  Cor-  | 
1  nelius,  a  centurion  of  the  band  called  the  Italian  i 
hand. 


1     Now  there  irn.i  a  certain  man  in  Ctesarea,  rornelius 
by  name,  a  centurion  of  the  band  called  the  Italian 


a  Matt.  9  :  25 6  cb.  7  :  60.... c  Mark  5:  41,4'/;  Jobn  II  :  4.1....d  John  11  :  46;  12  :  II «  ch.  10:6. 


this  place.  It  was  customary  among  the  He- 
brews for  women  to  perform  this  rite ;  but,  as 
Luke  would  specify  here  the  act  rather  than 
the  agency,  he  employs  the  masculine  of  the 
particii>le,  equivalent  to  the  indefinite  "they." 
(W.  ?  27.  6.) 

38.  Nigh  to  governs  Joppa  (dat.)  as  an 
adverb.  The  distance  between  the  places  is 
ten  or  twelve  miles. — Sent.  It  is  not  said 
that  they  sent  for  liim  with  any  definite  ex- 
pectation of  a  mirticle.  It  was  natural  that 
they  should  desire  liis  presence  and  sympathy 
at  such  a  time. 

39.  Into  the  upper  chamber.  The  body 
was  usually  kept  here  when,  for  any  reason, 
the  interment  was  delayed.  (See  Jahn'sytrc/ur- 
oL,  ?  204;  Win.,  nmfw'.,  i.  p.  467.)  They  had 
been  waiting  in  this  instance  for  the  arrival  of 
Peter.— The  widows,  who  had  been  the 
objects  of  her  benevolence,  and  who  now 
mourned  the  death  of  their  benefactress. 
Every  one  must  be  struck  at  the  natural 
manner  in  whicii  this  beautiful  incident  is 
introduced. — Tunics  and  coats,  such  as  were 
worn  by  men  and  women.  The  omission  of 
the  article  (suggestive  of  a  wrong  sense  as  in- 
serted in  E.  V.)  shows  that  they  presented 
specimens  only  of  her  industry.  Some  of  the 
garments  may  have  been  worn  by  those  present, 
and  others  have  iiecn  laid  up  for  future  distri- 
bution.—o<ra,  which  all,  which  so  many,  not 
=  a  simply,  which. — Made  (imi)erf.),  was  ac- 
customed to  make. 

40.  But  having  put  all  forth,  caused 
them  to  retire;  not  with  violence.  (See  Mark 
5  :  40 ;  John  10  :  4.)  The  object  may  have  been 
to  secure  himself  from  observation  and  inter- 


ruption while  he  prayed  with  fervor  and  agony. 
Elisha  pursued  the  same  course — for  the  same 
reason,  probably — when  lie  restored  to  life  the 
Shunammite's  son.  (See  2  Kings  4  :  33;  also 
Matt.  9  :  25.)— Prayed.  Peter  would  address 
his  prayer  to  Christ ;  for  the  apostles  wrought 
their  miracles  in  his  name.  (See  v.  34 ;  3:6, 
16;  4  :  10.) — Arise,  stand  erect.  Peter  speaks 
as  one  who  felt  a.ssured  that  his  praj'er  had  pre- 
vailed.    (See  Matt.  17  :  20.) 

42.  It  became  draws  its  subject  from  the 
context — viz.  the  miracle. — Upon  the  Lord, 
Christ,  whose  gospel  had  been  so  signally  at- 
tested as  true. 

43.  Peter  remained  here  many  days,  be- 
cause the  place  was  large  and  tiie  people 
evinced  a  prciiaration  for  the  reception  of  the 
word. — A  tanner.  The  more  scrupulous  Jews 
regarded  such  an  occupation  as  unclean,  and 
avoided  those  who  pursued  it.  The  conduct 
of  Peter  here  shows  that  he  did  n(jt  carry  his 
prejudices  to  that  extent. 


1-8.  THE  VISION  OF  CORNELIUS  THE 
CENTURION. 

1.  f/coTovTopxi??  (centurion)  is  often  inter- 
changed with  (KaToi'T6.pxo<;  (il  :32;  22:25,  etc.).  The 
first  is  the  prevalent  form  in  the  later  Greek. 
(W.  ^  8.  1.)  The  word  has  a  uniform  termina- 
tion in  some  copies  of  the  text. — Italian  band. 
Some  suppose  this  cohort  to  have  belonged  to 
the  leriio  Itnlicn,  or  Italica  prima,  of  which  we 
read  in  Tacitus  {Hist.,  1.  59,  64,  etc.) ;  but  the 
fact  stated  by  Dio  Cassias  {oo.  24)  Is  overlooked 
— that  this  legion  was  raised  by  Nero,  and  con- 
sequently was  not  in  existent;e  at  this  period 


128 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


2  "A  devout  m.an,  and  one  that  'feared  (lod  with  all 
his  house,  which  gave  much  alms  to  the  people,  and 
prayed  to  Uod  ahvay. 

3  'He  saw  in  a  vision  evidently  about  the  ninth  hour 
of  the  day  an  angel  of  (jod  coming  in  to  him,  and  say- 
ing unto  him,  Cornelius. 

4  A;id  when  he  looked  on  him,  he  was  afraid,  and 
said,  What  is  it,  Lord?  And  he  said  unto  him,  Thy 
prayers  and  thine  aluis  are  come  up  for  a  memorial 
before  tiod. 

n  And  now  send  men  to  Joppa,  and  call  for  one  Simon, 
whose  surname  is  I'eter: 

6  He  lodgeth  with  one  ''Simon  a  tanner,  whose  house 
is  by  the  sea  side :  =he  shall  tell  thee  what  thou  oughtest 
to  do. 


2  'band,  a  devout  man,  and  one  that  feared  God  with 
all  his  house,  who  gave  much  alms  to  the  people,  and 

3  prayed  to  God  alway.  He  saw  in  a  vision  openly,  as 
it  were  about  the  ninth  hour  of  the  day,  an  angel  of 
God  coming  in  unto  him,  and  saying  to  him,  Cor- 

4  nelius.  And  he,  fastening  his  eyes  upon  him,  and 
being  affrighted,  said.  What  is  it.  Lord?  And  he 
said  unto  him.  Thy  prayers  and  thine  alms  are  gone 

5  up  for  a  memorial  before  God.  And  now  send  men 
to  .Joppa,  and  fetch  one  Simon,  who  is  surnanied 

6  Peter:  he  lodgeth  with  one  Simon  a  tanner,  whose 


a  ver.  22  ;  ch.  8  :  2  ;  22  :  12 6  ver.  35 c  ver.  30;  ch.  11  :  13 d  ch.  9  :  « e  oh.  11  :  U. 1  Or,  cohort. 


of  our  narrative.  While  no  ancient  writer  has 
leftany  notice  confirming  Luke's  accuracy  in  this 
passage,  it  so  happens  that  an  inscription  in  Gru- 
teri  informs  us  that  vohinteer  Italian  cohorts  [a 
volunteer  Italian  cohort]  served  in  Syria— i.  e. 
Italian  or  Roman  soldiers  who  enlisted  of  their 
own  accord,  instead  of  being  obliged  to  perform 
military  service.  (See  Bid.  ofAiitt.,  art.  "  Velo- 
nes.")  It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  Roman 
cohorts,  instead  of  being  incorporated  always 
with  a  particular  legion,  existed  often  sepa- 
rately. It  is  probable  that  such  an  independ- 
ent cohort  was  now  stationed  at  Csesarea,  called 
the  Italia?!  because  it  consisted  of  native  Ital- 
ians, Vt'hereas  the  other  cohorts  in  Palestine 
were  levied,  for  the  most  part,  from  the  country 
itself.  (See  Jos.,  Antt.,  14.  15.  10;  Bell.  Jud.,  1. 
17.  1.  Coinp.  the  note  on  27  :  1.)  It  is  worthy 
of  remark,  as  Tholuck^  suggests,  that  Luke 
places  this  Italian  cohort  precisely  here.  Gas- 
area  was  the  residence  of  the  Roman  procurator 
(see  on  8  :  40),  and  it  was  important  that  he 
should  have  there  a  body  of  troops  on  whose 
fidelity  he  could  rely. 

2.  Devout  and  fearing  God.  All  the  cen- 
turions in  the  Now  Testament  appear  in  a  favor- 
able light  (Ilmph.).  (See  27  :  3 ;  Matt.  8:5; 
Luke  7  :  2.)  The  one  here  was  a  worshipper  of 
Jehovah,  but  had  not  submitted  to  circumcision 
or  avowed  publicly  the  Jewish  faith.  The  opin- 
ion that  he  was  a  proselyte  disagrees  with  vv. 
28,  34  ;  11  :  1,  8  ;  15  :  7,  for  those  passages  show 
that  he  was  regarded  by  the  Jews  at  this  time 
as  belonging  still  to  a  heathen  community. 
Cornelius  was  one  of  those  men,  so  numerous 
in  this  effete  age  of  idolatry,  who  were  yearn- 
ing for  a  better  worship,  and  under  that  im- 
pulse had  embraced  the  pure  theism  of  the 
Old  Testament,  so  much  superior  to  every 
other  form  of  religion  known  to  them.  They 
attended  the  synagogues,  heard  and  read  the 
Scriptures,  practised  some  of  the  Jewish  rites, 


and  were  in  a  state  of  mind  predisposing  them 
to  welcome  the  gospel  of  Christ  when  it  was  an- 
nounced to  them.  This  class  of  persons  fur- 
nished the  greater  part  of  the  first  Gentile  con- 
verts.— The  people — viz.  of  the  Jews.  (Comp. 
V.  42;  26  :  17,  23 ;  28  :  17.)  Perhaps  Luke  7  :  5 
brings  to  view  one  of  the  ways  in  which  he  ap- 
plied his  benefactions. 

3.  In  a  vision  may  be  understood  of  an  in- 
ner or  of  an  outward  vision  (Neand.). — Evi- 
dently, distinctly,  applies  better  to  a  iJcrcep- 
tive  act  than  to  an  act  of  consciousness.  Saw 
is  ambiguous  in  that  respect. — About  the 
ninth  hour,  in  the  course  of  it;  accusative 
of  time  how  long.  (Bernh.,  St/nt.,  p.  IIG.) 
This  hour  was  one  of  the  Jewish  hours  of 
prayer  (a:  i). 

4.  Wliat  is  it  which  is  designed  or  desired? 
— For  Lord,  see  the  remark  on  9 : 5. — Prayers 
and  alms,  which  belong  to  one  verb  here,  are 
assigned  to  two  verbs  in  v.  31. — For  a  memo- 
rial, as  such  (see  on  7  :  21) — i.e.  he  was  now  to 
receive  evidence  of  his  being  remembered,  in- 
asmuch as  God  was  about  to  open  a  way  for  liis 
attainment  of  the  peace  of  mind  which  he  had 
so  anxiously  sought. 

5.  Joppa  was  about  thirtj'  miles  south  of 
Ccesarea. — Send  (/ufran-e/un/zat)  is  middle,  because 
he  was  to  execute  the  act  through  the  agency 
of  others.  (K.  g  250.  R.  2 ;  B.  ?  135.  8.)  Simon 
.  .  .  Peter.  Both  names  are  given,  so  as  to 
prevent  mistake  as  to  the  individual  whom  the 
messengers  were  to  find.  This,  too,  is  the 
reason  for  describing  so  minutely  his  place 
of  abode. 

6.  By  the  sea-shore — viz.  tliat  of  the  Med- 
iterranean. Luke  states  a  fact  here ;  the  ground 
of  it  we  learn  from  other  sources.  The  sani- 
tary laws  of  the  ancients,  it  is  said,  required 
tanners  to  live  out  of  the  city  :  "  Non  solum  ob 
mortua  animalia,  quorum  usum  ipsa  eorum 
opificii  ratio  efflagitabat,  sed  etiam  ob  foetidos 


1  Copied  in  Ackerman's  Numismalic  Illustrations  nflfie  Narrative  Portions  of  the  New  Testament,  p.  34. 
*Die  Glaubwiirdi(/keit  iter  Ecangdisclien  Gescluclite,  p.  174. 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


129 


7  And  when  the  angel  which  spake  unto  Cornelius 
was  departed,  he  called  two  of  his  household  servants, 
and  a  devout  soldier  of  thcni  that  waited  on  hiiu  con- 
tinually ; 

8  And  when  he  had  declared  all  these  things  unto 
them,  he  sent  them  to  Joppa. 

9  ^  On  tlic  nioirow,  as  they  went  on  their  journev, 
and  drew  ui\i\\  unto  the  city,  "Peter  went  up  upon  the 
housetop  to  pray  about  tlie  sixth  hour: 

10  And  he  became  very  hungry,  and  would  have 
eaten  :  but  while  they  niade  ready,  he  fell  into  a 
trance, 


7  house  is  by  the  sea  sid  •.  And  when  the  angel  that 
spake  unto  him  was  departed,  he  called  two  of  his 
household-servants,  and   a  devout  soldier  of  them 

8  that  waited  on  him  continually;  and  having  re- 
hearsed all  things  unto  theni,  he  sent  them  to 
Joppa. 

9  Sow  on  the  morrow,  as  they  were  on  their  jour- 
ney, and  drew  nigh  unto  the  citv,  Peter  went  up 
upon  the  housetop  to  pray,  about  the  sixth  hour: 

10 and  he  became  hungry,  and  desired  to  eat:  but 


a  ch.  11  :  5,  etc. 


in  eorum  officinis  et  aedibiis  odores  etsordes" 
["Not  only  because  of  the  dead  animals  which 


EXTERIOK   OF   SUPPOSKD    Ilur.-.|:    ul     SIM(J.\    THE 
TANNER. 

the  nature  f)f  their  business  called  them  to  use, 
but  also  because  of  the  disagreeable  odor 
and  filth  of  their  premises  "].  ( Walch,  Dis- 
sertuliones,  etc.,  vol.  i.  p.  125.)  The  con- 
venient prosecution  of  their  business  re 
quired  that  tlicv  should  be  near  the  water 
He  shall  tell  thee,  etc.,  at  the  close  of 
this  verse  in  the  common  text,  was  inserted 
in  conformity  with  9:6;  10  :  32. 

7.  And  when  the  angel,  etc.  He  de- 
spatched the  messongers,  therefore,  on  the 
same  day,  althou^di  it  was  so  far  advanced 
(v. s).  ((''omi>.  immediately  in  v.  33.)— 
Which  spake  (i  Ka\i,u)  must  be  taken  a^ 
imperfect.  (C'omp.  John  9:8;  De  Wet.) 
— Of  those  {?.  e.  soldiei-s)  who  waited 
upon  him,  who  stood  ready  to  jierform' 
those  personal  services  which  he  might  re- 
quire. Kuinoel's  idea  is  that  they  acted  ai, 
a  house-sentr\'^DevoHt  accords  with  the 
descrii)tion  of  the  centurion's  family  in  v.  2. 

9-16.  THE  VISION  OF  PETER. 

9.  On  the  morrow,  after  their  departure 
from  Tiesarea.— ITpon  the  housetop,  the 
roof,  which,  according  to  the  Oriental  man- 
ner, was  Hat  or  but  slightly  inclined.  It  wt\s 
the  jilace  often  chosen  for  the  perfonnance  of 
religious  duties.  (Jahn's  ArchxoL,  '6  24.)  The 
9 


sittiation  does  not  expose  one  necessarily  to  pub- 
lic view.  A  wall  or  balustrade  three  or  four  feet 
high  slu-rounds  many  of  the  roofs  in  the  East, 
where  a  i^erson  may  sit  or  kneel  without  being 
observed  by  otlicrs.  Moses  required  (oeut.  22:8) 
that  every  house  should  have  such  a  protection. 
10.  npoairmov  occurs  oiily  here.  Tlie  law  of 
analogy  shows  it  to  be  intensive,  very  hungry. 
—Desired  to  cat,  not  would  have  eaicn. 
—While  they  now  (not  Imt)  were  prepar- 
i"g— '•  e.  lor  the  evening  repast.  (See  v.  9.) 
The  pronoun  refers  to  those  in  the  family 
where  Peter  was  entertained.— Ecstasy  =  in 
Spirit  (kcv.  1 :  10) — L  e.  a  tnutcc,  or  rapture,  where- 
by (if  we  may  so  express  it)  he  was  transported 
out  of  himself  and  put  into  a  mental  state  in 
which  he  could  discern  objects  beyond  the  ap- 
prehension of  man's  natural  powers.  (See  11  : 
5;  22  :  17.)— In  the  mode  of  instruction  which 


EASTERN    HOUSETOP. 


God  employed  in  this  instance,  he  adapted  him- 
self to  the  peculiar  circumstances  in  which 
Peter  was  placed.  "  The  divine  light  that  was 
making  its  way  to  his  spirit  revealed  itself  in 
the  mirror  of  sensible  images  which  proceeded 
from  the  existing  state  of  his  bodily  frame" 
{Neand.). 


180 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


11  And  "saw  heaven  opened,  and  a  certain  vessel 
descending  unto  him,  Jis  it  liad  been  a  great  sheet  knit 
at  the  four  corners,  and  let  down  to  tlie  earth : 

12  Wherein  were  all  manner  of  fniirfouted  lieasts  of 
the  eartli,  and  wild  beasts,  and  creeping  things,  and 
fowls  of  the  air. 

i'4  And  there  came  a  voice  to  him,  Rise,  Peter;  kill, 
and  eat. 

14  But  Peter  said,  Not  so,  Lord;  'foj-  I  have  never 
eaten  any  thing  that  is  common  or  unclean. 

15  And  the  voice  xpak-e  unto  him  again  the  second 
time,  "^What  (jod  hath  cleansed,  Ihul  call  not  thou 
common. 

16  This  was  done  thrice :  and  the  vessel  was  received 
up  again  into  heaven. 

17  Now  while  Peter  doubted  in  himself  what  this 
vision  which  he  had  seen  should  mean,  beliold,  the 
men  which  were  sent  from  Cornelius  had  made  in- 
quiry for  Simon's  house,  and  stood  before  the  gate, 


11  while  they  made  ready,  he  fell  into  a  trance;  and 
he  beholdeth  the  heaven  opened,  and  a  certain  \es- 
sel  descending,  as  it  were  a  great  sheet,  let  down  by 

12  four  corners  upon  the  earth  :  wherein  were  all  man- 
ner of  fourfooted  beasts  and  creeping  things  of  the 

13  earth  and  fov\is  of  the  heaven.     And  there  came  a 

14  voice  to  him,  KL^e,  I'eter;  kill  and  eat.  But  1  eter 
said,  Is'ot  so,  Lord ;  for  1  have  never  eaten  any  thing 

15  that  is  conmion  and  unclean.  And  a  voice  cmne 
unto  him  again  the  second  time.  What  God  hath 

16  cleansed,  make  not  thou  common.  And  this  was 
done  thrice :  and  straightway  the  vessel  was  re- 
ceived up  into  heaven. 

17  Now  while  Peter  was  much  perplexed  in  himself 
what  the  vision  which  he  had  seen  might  mean,  be- 
hold, the  men  that  were  sent  by  Coriii-Uus,  having 
made  inquiry  for  Kimon's  house,  stood  before  th« 


;  11 ;  ver.  28;   Rom.  U  :  14,  17,  20; 


11.  Beholds,  with  wonder.  (See  on  4  :  13.) 
— A  certain  vessel,  receptacle,  which  is  de- 
scribed more  definitely  as  a  great  sheet. — 
Bound  by  four  corners,  or  ends  (anarthrous, 
since  the  number  was  not  definite  of  itself), 
and  (thus)  let  down  upon  the  earth.  The 
conception  of  the  scene  suggested  by  the  text 
is  that  of  the  slieet  upheld  by  cords  attached  to 
its  four  points,  and  suspended  from  above  by 
an  unseen  power.  This  is  the  common  view, 
and,  I  think,  the  correct  one.  Meyer  under- 
stands corners  of  the  four  corners  of  heaven — 
i.  e.  east,  west,  north,  and  south — to  which  the 
four  ends  of  the  sheet  were  fastened.  Neander 
inclines  to  tliat  interpretation.  Corners  with 
such  a  reference  would  seem  to  demand  the 
article,  as  much  as  the  translation  into  English 
and  German. —  Lachmann  expunges  bound, 
and,  after  ABC  and  some  other  authorities 
[as,  at  present,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort, 
Anglo- Am.  Revisers. — A.  H.] ;  but  probably 
the  omission  of  the  words  in  11  :  5  led  to  their 
omission  here. 

12.  All  the  quadrupeds — i.  e.  as  to  their 
varieties,  not  individually.  The  text  here  is 
confused.  Of  the  earth  is  to  be  retained,  no 
doubt,  but  should  follow  creeping  things 
(Lchm.,  Mey.,  Tsch.). — And  wild  beasts  be- 
fore and  creeping  things  is  not  found  in  the 
controlling  manuscripts.  It  is  evident  that  the 
text  in  11  :  6  has  influenced  the  text  in  this 
passage. 

13.  Rise.  (See  on  9  :  18.)  Yet  Peter  may 
have  been  kneeling  or  reclining  at  that  moment 
(Mey.). — Slay  and  eat — i.  e.  any  one  of  the 
creatures  exhibited  to  him,  without  regard  to 
the  distinction  of  clean  or  unclean. 

14.  All  (niv),  preceded  by  the  negative,  is  a 
Hebraism  for  nothing  (ovSev).  (Comp.  Matt. 
24  :  22;  Rom.  3  :  20;  Ei)h.  5  :  5.)  The  two 
modes  of   expression    present   the  idea  from 


different  points  of  view.  That  of  the  Hebrews 
excepts  everything  from  the  action  of  the  verb ; 
that  of  the  Greeks  subjects  nothing  to  it.  (Ge- 
sen.,  Ileb.  Gr.,  ^149.  1;  W.  ?26.  l.j— Common 
(koivov)  is  the  opposite  of  holy  (aycov).  As  tliis 
sense  was  unusual,  the  more  explicit  unclean 
follows. 

15.  What  God  cleansed — i.  e.  declared  by 
this  symbolic  act  to  be  clean.  The  aorist  and 
perfect  should  not  be  confounded  here.  Verbs 
in  Hebrew  have  often  this  declarative  sense. 
(Comp.  Lev.  13  :  3,  8,  13;  16  :  30;  Ezek.  43  :  3; 
Jer.  1  :  10,  etc.  See  Gesen.,  Heb.  Lex.,  s.  tahar.) 
An  ai>i)roximating  usage  exists  in  Greek. — 
Call  not  thou  common.  Thou  is  con- 
trasted with  God.  It  is  not  usual  to  insert 
the  first  or  second  personal  pronoun  as  the 
subject  of  a  verb,  unless  it  be  emphatic.  (K. 
^  .302.  1 ;  B.  ?  120.  14.)  The  imperative  is  pres- 
ent because  he  was  connnitting  the  prohibited 
act  at  the  time.     (Comp.  tlie  note  on  7  :  00.) 

16.  This  refers  to  the  repetition  of  the  voice, 
not  to  the  vision  as  seen  three  times.  Those 
wlio  understand  it  in  the  latter  way  overlook 
again  a  second  time,  just  before.  The  com- 
mand was  reiterated,  in  order  to  impress  the 
words  more  deeplv  on  the  mind  of  Peter. 

17-22.  THE  MESSENGERS  ARRIVE  AT 
JOPPA. 

17.  Doubted,  was  perplexed,  uncertain. 
— What  it  might  be,  signify.  (Comp.  Luke 
8:9;  John  10  :  G.)  He  must  have  been  con- 
vinced that  such  a  revelation  -ms  not  designed 
merely  to  announce  the  abolition  of  a  ceremo- 
nial custom,  but  it  was  not  yet  evident  to  him 
liow  much  the  principle  compreliendod,  and 
especially  in  wliat  practical  manner  he  was  to 
exlHt)it  liis  liberation  from  the  scruples  bv 
wliich  lie  had  been  boimd  hithert(\ — Which 
he  had  seen.  (Comp.  on  1  :  2.)— Then  be- 
hold, as  in  1 :  10. — Siipumijaavrei,  a  strengthened 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


131 


18  And  called,  and  asked  whether  Simon,  which  was 
surnanied  I'eter,  were  lodged  there. 

19  1i  While  I'eter  thuuglit  on  the  vision,  "the  Spirit 
said  unto  him,  Mehold,  three  men  seek  thee. 

2U  'Arise  therefore,  and  net  thee  down,  and  go  with 
them,  doubting  nothing:  lor  1  have  sent  them. 

21  Then  I'eter  went  down  to  the  men  which  were 
sent  unto  him  from  (  orneliiis ;  and  said,  Hehold,  I  am 
he  whom  ye  seek:  what  in  the  cause  wherefore  ye  are 
come  ? 

22  And  they  said,  "^rornelius  the  centurion,  a  just 
man,  and  one  that  feareth  liod,  and  ''of  good  report 
among  all  the  nation  of  the  .lews,  was  warned  from 
(io<l  by  an  holy  angel  to  send  for  thee  into  his  house, 
and  to  hear  words  of  thee. 

23  Then  called  he  them  in,  and  lodged  tfipm.  And  on 
the  morrow  I'eter  went  away  with  them,  «and  certain 
brethren  from  .Ioi)pa  accompanied  him. 

'24  And  the  morrow  after  they  entered  into  Ctesarea. 
And  t'ornelius  waited  for  them,  and  had  called  to- 
gether his  kinsmen  and  near  friends. 

"2.5  And  as  Teter  was  coming  in.  Cornelius  met  him, 
and  fell  down  at  his  feet,  and  worshipped  /lim. 


18  gate,  and  called  and  asked  whether  Simon,  who  was 
19 surnanied   l^eter,  were  lodging  there.     And  while 

I'eter  thought  on  the  vision,  the  Spirit  said  unto 
20  him.  Heboid,  three  men  .seek  thee.     Hut  aris-,  and 

get  thee  down,  and  go  with  them,  nothing  doubl- 
21ing:  for  1  have  sent  them.     And  I'eter  \>ent  down 

to  the  men,  and  said,  isehold,  I  am  he  whom  ye 

seek:   what  is   the  cause  wherefore   ye   are  come.' 

22  And  they  said,  Cornelius  a  centurion,  a  righteous 
man  and  one  that  feareth  God,  and  well  reported 
of  by  all  the  nation  of  the  Jews,  was  warned  of  Hnd 
by  a'  holy  angel  to  send  for  thee  into  his  house,  and 

23  to  hear  words  from  thee.  So  he  called  them  in  and 
lodged  them. 

.•\nd  on  the  morrow  he  arose  and  went  forth  with 
them,  and  certain  of  the  brethren  from  .loppa  ac- 

24companied  bim.  .^ndon  the  morrow  'they  eniered 
into  Ca'sarea.  And  Cornelius  was  waiting  for  them, 
having  called  together  his  kinsmen  antl  his  near 

25  friends.  And  when  it  came  to  pass  that  I'eter  en- 
tered, Cornelius  met  kiiu,  and  fell  down  at  his  feet, 


icli.  11  :  12 6  ell.  15  :  7....C  vers.  1,  2,  eU....(2ctt.  22  :  I2....e  ver.  45;  ch.  11  :  12. 1  Some  socieat  autborities  read  Ae. 


sense,  having  inquired  out.  The  tannerwas 
an  oljsfure  nuiii,  and  not  to  be  found  in  a  mo- 
ment.— Unto  the  gate,  which  opened  directly 
into  the  house  or  court ;  not  the  porch,  vesti- 
bule, since  tlie  more  splendid  houses  only  had 
that  appendaf,'e  (De  Wet.).  (Coinp.  Matt.  20 :  71.) 

18.  And  called  (see  v.  7),  having  called, 
some  one,  or,  witliont  any  oliject,  having 
called,  announced  their  presence. —  If  he 
lodges.  The  present  tense  turns  the  question 
into  a  direct  form.  The  u-se  of  the  two  names 
ayain  (v.  5)  is  not  unmeaning.  So  many  per- 
sons were  called  "Simon"  that  the  strangers 
must  be  minute  in  their  inquiry. 

19.  Biev^viJ-ovixivov  is  Stronger  than  cV^ujiovjieVou 
in  the  common  text:  earnestly  considering. 
The  first  is  the  better-attested  word. — Three 
before  men  should  be  omitted.  It  was  added 
from  V.  7 ;  11  :  11. 

20.  But  turns  the  discourse  to  a  new  point. 
(Comp.  9  :  (>.)— Making  no  scruple — i.  c.  to 
go  with  them,  although  they  are  heathen. — 
Inspirit  in  v.  19.— Sent  them,  not  perfect 
(E.Y.). 

21.  Which  were  sent  from  Cornelius 
to  him  dclines  men  ;  and  since,  in  the  public 
reading  of  the  Scriiitures,  a  new  section  began 
liere,  the  words  were  necessary,  in  order  to  sug- 
gest the  connection.  This  accounts  for  our  find- 
ing them  in  a  few  copies.  The  preponderant 
testinufny  is  against  them. 

22.  Of  good  report  occurs  as  in  6  :  3. — Was 
divinely  instructed.  (Comp.  Matt.  2  :  12.) 
In  the  classics  this  word  refers  to  a  communi- 
cation made  in  reply  to  a  question,  but  in  the 
New  Testament  and  the  Septuagint  it  drops  that 
relative  sense. — Words,  instruction.  (Comp. 
shall  speak  to  thee  in  v.  32.)    The  first  ac- 


count   of  the  vision  («■.  i, ««.)  omits  this   par- 
ticular. 
23-33.  PETER  PROCEEDSTOC.es AREA. 

23.  On  the  morrow,  after  the  arrival  of 
the  messengei-s. — Certain  of  the  brethren. 
They  are  the  six  men  mentioned  in  11  :  12. 
We  are  not  informed  of  their  object  in  ac- 
companying the  apostle.  They  may  have  gone 
a-s  his  i>ersonal  friends  njerely,  or  from  a  natu- 
ral desire  to  know  the  result  of  so  extraordinary 
a  summons.  In  his  defence  before  the  church 
of  Jerusalem  (.see  11  :  1,  sq.),  Peter  appealed  to 
these  brethren  to  confirm  his  statements.  Some 
have  conjectured  that  he  may  have  foreseen  the 
necessity  of  that  justification,  and  took  the 
precaution  to  secure  the  presence  of  those  who 
would  be  acknowledged  as  impartial  Jewisli 
witnesses. 

24.  On  the  morrow,  after  leaving  Joppa. 
(Comp.  v.  9.)  Thirty  miles  (see  on  v.  5)  was 
more  than  a  single  day's  journey  in  the  Eitst. 
It  must  be  the  truth  which  brings  out  such  ac- 
curacy in  these  details. — For  <;«  in  the  verb  re- 
peated before  the  noun,  see  on  3  :  2.— His  near 
friends,  his  intimate  friends.  Thecla.ssieal 
writers  combine  the  words  with  tJiat  meaning 
(Kypk.,  Wet.st.). 

25.  Now  as  it  came  to  pass  that  Peter 
was  entering,  Cornelius  having  met  him 
— viz.  at  the  door  or  in  the  court  of  the  house. 
The  first  interview  appears  to  have  taken  place 
there,  and  tlien  the  centurion  and  the  apistle 
proceeded  to  the  room  where  the  company  were 
a.ssembled.  (See  v.  27.) — Upon  the  feet — viz. 
of  Peter,  which  he  may  have  emliraced  at  tlie 
same  time.  (Comp.  Matt.  28  :9.) — Fell  down, 
paid  reverence — viz.  by  prostrating  himself 
in  the  Oriental  manner.    Since  Cornelius  ac- 


132 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


26  But  Peter  took  him  up,  saying,  "Stand  up;  I  my- 
self also  am  a  man. 

27  And  as  he  talked  with  him,  he  went  in,  and  found 
many  that  were  come  together. 

28  And  he  said  unto  them.  Ye  know  how  'that  it  is 
an  unlawlWl  thing  lor  a  man  that  is  a  Jew  to  keep 
company,  or  come  unto  one  of  another  nation  ;  but 
eGod  hath  shewed  me  that  1  should  not  call  any  man 
common  or  unclean. 


26  and  worshipped  him.     But  Peter  rai.sed  him  up, 

27  saying,  ;Stand  up;  1  myself  also  am  a  man.  And  as 
he  talked  with  him,  he  went  in,  and  tindeth  many 

28 come  together:  and  he  said  unto  them.  Ye  your- 
selves know  'how  that  it  is  an  unlawful  thing  for  a 
man  that  is  a  Jew  to  join  himself  or  come  unto  one 
of  anol  her  nation  ;  and  iiH  unto  me  hath  Liod  shewed 
that  I  should  not  call  any  man  common  or  unclean : 


oeh.  U:  H,   15;   Kev.  19: 10; 


.&  John  4:9;  18  :  28;  ch.  11  :  3;  Gal.  2  :  12,   U....cch.  15  :8,  9;   Eph.  3:6.- 
h&w  unlawful  it  is  for  a  ■man  etc. 


knowledgcd  Jehovah  as  the  true  God,  and 
must  have  regarded  him  as  the  only  proper 
object  of  worship,  it  is  difficult  to  believe  that 
he  intended  this  as  an  act  of  religious  homage. 
The  description  of  his  character  in  v.  2  and  v. 
22  cannot  be  easily  reconciled  with  the  im- 
putation of  such  a  design.  (See  more  on  the 
next  verse.) 

36.  Raised  him  up,  caused  him  to  rise  by 
the  command  addressed  to  him. — I  also  my- 
self am  a  man,  as  well  as  you.  Peter  may 
have  been  surjjrised  at  such  a  mode  of  saluta- 
tion from  a  Roman,  whose  national  habits  were 
so  diflerent ;  he  had  reason  to  fear  that  the  cen- 
turion had  mistaken  his  character — was  exceed- 
ing the  ijroper  limits  of  the  respect  due  from 
one  man  to  another.  He  recoiled  at  the  idea  of 
the  possibility  of  having  a  homage  tendered  to 
him  which  might  partake  of  the  reverence  that 
belongs  only  to  God.  In  other  words,  it  is  more 
probable  that  Peter,  in  his  concern  for  the  divine 
honor,  warned  the  centurion  against  an  act 
which  he  apprehended,  than  that  the  centurion 
committed  an  act  so  inconsistent  with  his  re- 
ligious faith.  That  inconsistency  is  so  much  the 
less  to  be  admitted,  because  Peter  had  just  been 
represented  in  the  vision  so  distinctly  as  a  man. 
The  apostles  claimed  no  ability  to  know  the 
hearts  or  thoughts  of  men,  except  as  their  ac- 
tions revealed  tliem.  Compare  with  this  con- 
duct of  Peter  that  of  Paul  and  Barnabas  at 
Lystra  (u :  i4, ««.).  The  Saviour,  on  the  contrary, 
never  repressed  the  disposition  of  his  disciples 
to  think  highly  of  his  rank  and  character.  He 
never  reminded  them  of  the  equality  of  his 
nature  with  their  own,  or  intimated  that  the 
honor  paid  to  him  was  excessive.  He  received 
their  homage,  whatever  the  form  in  which  they 
offered  it,  however  excited  the  state  of  mind 
which  prompted  it.  This  different  procedure 
on  the  part  of  Christ  we  can  ascribe  only  to 
his  consciousness  of  a  claim  to  be  acknow- 
ledged as  divine. 

27.  Conversing  with  him  (Whl.,  Rob.). 
(Comp.  talked  in  20  :  11 ;  24  :  20;  Luke  24  : 
14,  15.)  Some  render  accompanying  him, 
which  is  too  self-evident  to  be  stated  so  form- 
ally.    The    first  sense  is   peculiar   to  Luke. — 


Went  in,  perhaps  into  an  upper  room.     (See 
on  1  :  13.) 

28.  i?  may  qualify  the  adjective,  hoAV,  in  what 
degree  (Mey.),  or  the  verb,  how  it  is  (know- 
ledge and  fact  accordant). — a^eixnov,  unlawful. 
The  Jews  professed  to  ground  this  view  on  the 
laws  of  Moses  ;  but  they  could  adduce  no  ex- 
press command  for  it,  or  just  construction  of 
any  command.  No  one  of  the  N.  T.  writers 
employs  this  word,  except  Peter  fiere  and  in  1 
Pet.  4 :  3. — To  associate  with  (5 :  15),  or  come 
unto,  one  of  another  nation.  The  second 
verb  evolves  the  sense  of  the  first.  Strangers 
is  applied  to  the  Philistines  in  1  Sam.  13  :  3-5 
(Sept.),  and  to  the  Greeks  in  1  Mace.  4  :  12.  It 
has  been  said  that  Luke  has  betrayed  here  an 
ignorance  of  Jewish  customs,  since  the  Jews, 
though  thej'  refused  to  eat  with  the  uncircum- 
cised  (Gal.  2 :  12),  did  not  avoid  all  intercourse  with 
them.  But  the  objection  presses  the  language 
to  an  extreme.  We  are  to  limit  such  general 
expressions  by  the  occasion  and  the  nature  of 
the  subject.  The  intercourse  with  the  Gentil«s, 
represented  here  as  so  repugnant  to  Jewish 
ideas,  was  such  intercourse  as  had  now  taken 
place :  it  was  to  enter  the  houses  of  the  heatlien, 
partake  freely  of  their  hospitality,  recognize 
their  social  equality.  In  accordance  with  this, 
we  find  to  associate  with  exchanged  for 
didst  eat  with  in  11  :  3;  the  word  there  may 
be  supposed  to  define  the  word  here.  De  Wette 
objects  that  the  act  of  eating  lias  not  been  men- 
tioned ;  but  it  is  not  mentioned  anywhere,  and 
yet  the  subsequent  accusation  against  the  apos- 
tle alleges  it  as  the  main  ofTence.  The  act  was, 
doubtless,  a  repeated  one.  (See  v.  48.)  An  in- 
stance of  it  may  have  preceded  the  utterance 
of  the  words  here  in  question.  Nothing  would 
be  more  natural,  at  the  close  of  such  a  journey, 
than  that  the  travellers  should  be  supplied  with 
the  means  of  refreshment  before  entering  form- 
ally on  the  object  of  the  visit.  Considered  in 
this  light,  Peter's  declaration  in  this  vci"se  agrees 
entirely  with  that  of  Joso])lius  (Cont.  A}>.,  2. 
28) :  "  Those  foreigners  (i.\\6(l>v\oi.)  who  come  to 
us  without  submitting  to  our  laws,  Moses  per- 
mitted not  to  have  any  intimate  coiinectioiK» 
with  us."     (See  also  lb.,  2.  36.    Comp.  John  18 : 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


133 


29  Therefore  came  I  unto  yon  without  gainsaying,  as 
soon  as  1  was  sent  for:  I  ask  therelbi'e  fur  what  intent 
ye  liave  sent  fur  me? 

;{i(  And  (  oriieliiis  said,  Tour  days  ago  I  was  fasting 
until  this  lioiir;  and  at  the  ninth  hour  I  jirayed  in  my 
house,  and,  tiehuld,  "a  man  stood  before  me  'in  briglit 
clothing, 

M  And  said,  Cornelius,  'thy  prayer  is  heard,  •'and 
thine  alms  are  had  in  remembrance  iu  the  sight  of 
Ood. 

'A'l  Send  therefore  to  Joppa,  and  call  hither  Simon, 
whose  surname  is  I'eter;  he  is  lodged  in  the  house  of 
o«»?  Simon  a  tanner  by  the  sea  side:  who,  when  he 
Cometh,  shall  speak  unto  thee. 

;«  Immediately  therefore  1  sent  to  thee;  and  thou 
hast  well  done  that  thou  art  come.  Now  therefore  are 
we  all  here  present  before  (iod,  to  hear  ail  things  that 
are  commanded  thee  of  Ood. 


29  wherefore  also  I  came  without  gainsaying,  when  I 
was  sent  for.     I  ask  therefore  with  wliat  intent  ye 

30 .sent  for  me.  And  Cornelius  said,  lour  days  ago, 
until  this  hour,  1  was  keeping  the  ninth  hour  of 
prayer  iu  my  house;  and  behold,  a  man  stood  be- 

31  fore  me  in  bright  apparel,  and  saith.  t  ornelius,  thy 
prayer  is  heard,  and  thine  alms  are  had  in  remeni- 

32orance  in  the  sight  of  dod.  ."^end  therefore  to.loppa, 
and  call  unto  thee  Simon,  who  is  surnamed  I'eler; 
he  lodgeth  in  the  house  of  Simon  a  tanner,  by  the 

33 sea  side.  I'orthwith  therefore  I  sent  to  thee;  and 
thou  hast  well  done  that  thou  art  come.  Now 
therefore  we  are  all  here  present  in  the  sight  of 
Ciod,  to  hear  all  things  that  have  been  commuuded 


acb.  1  :  10 b  MaU.  28:  3;  Mark  16  :  5;  Luke  24  :  4.  ...e  rer.  4,  etc.;  Dan.  10  :  12 d  Heb.  6  :  10. 


28.) — And  (in  opposition  to  that  Jewish  feel- 
ing) God  shoAved  me — viz.  h\  the  vision. 

29.  Therefore  I  also  came — /.  e.  he  was 

not  only  instructed,  but  obeyed  the  instruction. 
Also  connects  came  with  showed. — Without 
gainsaying  (ii'aiTippiiTu.s)  =  without  delay 
(di-afic^t^oAu)?)  (Hesych.).  It  is  a  hiter  CJreek 
word. — With  what  reason,  for  what  object; 
dative  of  the  ground  or  motive.'  (W.  §  31.  G.  c.) 
Peter  was  already  apprised  that  Cornelius  had 
sent  for  him,  in  consequence  of  a  revelation, 
but  would  desire,  naturally,  to  hear  a  fuller  state- 
ment of  the  circumstances  from  the  centurion 
himself  The  recital  may  have  been  neces.sarj', 
also,  for  the  information  of  those  who  had  as- 
sembled. 

30.  Four  days  ago,  etc.,  has  received  dif- 
ferent explanations.  (1)  From  the  fourth 
day  ^prior  to  the  vision)  was  I  fasting  unto 
this  hour — i.  c.  unto  an  hour  corresponding  to 
that  which  was  then  passing;  viz.  the  nintli 
(Hnr.,  Ncand.,  De  Wet.).  According  to  this 
view,  Cornelius  had  been  fa-sting  four  days  at 
the  time  of  the  angel's  appearance  to  him. 
(2)  From  the  fourth  day  (reckoned  back- 
ward from  tiie  present)  unto  this  hour — i.  e. 
he  was  observing  a  fa.st  wliicli  began  four  days 
before  and  extended  up  to  the  time  then  pres- 
ent. It  was  on  the  first  of  the  days  that  he 
saw  the  angel.  But  was,  as  pa.st,  represents 
the  fast  as  liaving  terminated,  and  so  would  ex- 
clude this  hour.  Meyer  in  liis  second  edition 
abanilons  this  view  for  tlie  ne.xt.  (3)  From 
the  fourth  day  (reckoning  Inickward  as  before) 
— (■.  c.  four  days  ago  unto  this  hour  in  wliich 
lie  was  then  speaking  (Bug.,  Kuin.,  Olsh.). 
The  fast  commenced  with  the  day  and  had 
continued  unbroken  until  the  ninth  hour,  when 
the  angel  ajipeared.  Tliis  view  agrees  with  the 
number  of  days  which  had  elapsed  since  the 
angel's  communication — viz.  four — and  allows 
time  enough  for  the  abstinence  to  justify  the 


use  of  fasting. — riin-nv  (was)  is  an  imperfect 
middle,  rare  out  of  the  later  Greek.  (W.  ^  14. 
2.  b ;  B.  g  108.  IV.  2.)— And  during  the  ninth 
hour  (accusative,  as  in  v.  3),  so  that  (this  = 
ninth)  it  was  about  three  o'clock  in  the  after- 
noon when  I'eter  arrived  at  C;esarea. — A  man 
in  bright  clothing  =  an  angel  of  God,  in 
V.  3.     (See  1  :  11.) 

31.  Was  heard  (not  is  in  E.  Y.),  and  .so 
were  (not  are)  remembered.  (Comix  also 
v.  4.)  He  is  assured  now  of  the  approval  of 
his  acts;  the  acts  were  ai)i)roved  when  he  per- 
formed them. — Thy  prayer  refers  more  esi)e- 
cially  to  his  prayer  at  this  time.  But  the  an- 
swer to  this  prayer  was  an  answer  to  his  other 
prayers,  since  the  burden  of  them  had  doubtless 
been  that  God  would  lead  him  to  a  clearer 
knowledge  of  the  truth  and  enable  him  to  at- 
tain the  repose  of  mind  which  a  conscience  en- 
lightened, but  not  yet  "  purged  from  a  sense  of 
evil,"  made  it  impossible  for  him  to  enjoy.  Hence 
prayers,  in  v.  4,  could  be  exchanged  here  for 
the  singular. 

32.  Send,  therefore,  because  in  this  way 
he  would  olitain  tlie  evidence  that  he  was  ap- 
proved.— jueToxciAecTot  (call  for  thcc)  exemplifies 
the  usage  of  the  middle  noticed  on  v.  5. — The 
verbal  accuracy  here;  as  compared  with  v.  5,  is 
natural.  There  was  but  one  way  to  report  the 
words  of  sucli  a  message.  Tlie  angel's  voice 
and  mien  had  left  an  impression  not  to  be  ef- 
faced. 

33.  Immediately  agrees  with  the  narrative 
in  v.  7. — Thou  hast  done  well  (see  3  John  G), 
a  common  plinuse  expressive  of  the  gratification 
wliich  a  person  derives  from  the  act  of  anotiier 
(Wetst.,  Raph.).  For  the  construction,  comp. 
Phil.  4  :  14.— In  the  sight  of  God,  witli  a 
con.sciousness  of  his  presence,  and  hence  pre- 
pared tt)  hear  and  obey  his  message.  This  is  a 
reason  why  Peter  should  speak  with  freedom 
and  confidence.     "Terra  bona;    inde    fructus 


134 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


*  34  ^  Then  Peter  opened  his  mouth,  and  said,  "Of  a 
truth  I  perceive  that  uod  is  no  respecter  of  persons: 

35  But  'in  every  nation  he  that  feareth  him,  and 
worketh  righteousness,  is  accepted  with  him. 

36  The  word  which  God  sent  unto  the  children  of 
Israel,  '■preaching  peace  by  Jesus  Christ:  (.''he  is  Lord 
of  all :  1 

37  That  word,  /  say,  ye  know,  which  was  published 


34  thee  of  the  Lord.    And   Peter  opened  his  mouth, 
and  said, 

Of  a  truth  I  perceive  that  God  is  no  respecter  of 

35  persons;  but  in  every  nation  he  that  feareth  him, 
and  worketh   righteousness,  is  acceptable   to   him. 

3G  iThe  word  which  he  sent  unto  the  children  of  Is- 
rael, preaching    -good    tidings   of   peace    by   Jesus 
37  Christ  (he  is  Lord  of  all; — that  saying  ye  yourselves 


o  Deut. 

10:  17: 

2  Chron.  19  :  7 ;  Job  3*  :  19 ;  Rom.  2:  11;  Gal.  2:6;  Eph.  6:9;  Col.  3:25;  1  Pet.  1  :  17....Jch.  15:9;  Rom.  2:13,27; 

3;  22 

29;  10 

12,  13;  1  Cor.  12  :  13;  Gal.  3  :  28;  Eph.  2  :  13,  18;  3  :  6 c  Isa.  57  :  19 ;  Eph.  2  :  14,  16,  17  ;  Coi.  1  :  20 d  Matt.  28  :  18; 

Rnni. 

10:  12; 

1  Cor.  15  :  27  ;  Eph.  1  :  20,  22  ;  1  Pet.  3  :  22  ;  Rev    17  :  14  ;  19  :  16. 1  Many  aorient  authorities  read  Be  sent  the  word 

unto. 

...2  Or, 

the  gospel. 

celerrimus"  ["Good    soil;    thence   the    most 
sj^eedy  fruit"]  (Bng.). 
34-43.  THE  ADDRESS  OF  PETER. 

34.  See  the  remark  on  opened  his  mouth 
in  8  :  35. — Trpoo-wTroA^TrTij?  is  a  word  coined  to  ex- 
press concretely  the  idea  of  the  Heb.  nasa 
panem,  respecter  of  persons — ('.  e.  here  j)«r- 
tial  in  the  way  of  regarding  one  man  as  better 
than  another,  on  the  ground  of  national  de- 
scent. 

35.  Is  acceptable  to  him — i.  e.  his  right- 
eousness, his  obedience  to  the  divine  will,  as 
far  as  it  extends,  is  as  fully  approved  of  God, 
though  he  be  a  Gentile,  as  if  he  were  a  Jew. 
It  is  evident  from  I  perceive,  that  he  that 
feareth  him  and  worketh  righteousness 
describes  the  centurion's  character  before  his 
acceptance  of  the  gospel,  and,  consequently, 
that  acceptable  to  him  applies  to  him  as  a 
person  still  destittite  of  faith  in  Christ.  That 
Peter  did  not  intend,  however,  to  represent  his 
righteousness,  or  that  of  any  man,  prior  to  the 
exercise  of  such  faith,  as  sufficient  to  justify 
him  in  the  sight  of  God,  is  self-evident ;  for  in 
V.  43  he  declares  that  it  is  necessary  to  believe 
on  Christ,  in  order  to  obtain  "  the  remission  of 
sins."  (Comp.  also  15  :  11.)  The  antithetic 
structure  of  the  sentence  indicates  the  mean- 
ing. He  that  feareth  him,  etc.,  is  the  oppo- 
site of  respecter  of  persons — i.  e.  God  judges 
man  impartially ;  he  approves  of  what  is  excel- 
lent in  those  of  one  nation  as  much  as  in  those 
of  another ;  he  will  confer  the  blessings  of  his 
grace  as  readily  upon  the  Gentile  who  desires 
to  receive  them  as  upon  the  Jew.  In  other 
words,  since  the  apostle  has  reference  to  the 
state  of  mind  which  God  requires  as  prepara- 
tory to  an  interest  in  the  benefits  of  the  gospel, 
the  righteousness  and  the  acceptance  of  which 
he  speaks  must  also  be  preparatory — i.  e.  rela- 
tive, and  not  absolute.* 

36.  The  construction  is  uncertain,  but  the 
most  simple  is  that  which  makes  word  {\6yov) 
depend  on  ye  know  (v.  37)  in  apposition  with 


word  {pfiixa) :  The  word  which  he  sent  .  .  . 
(I  say)  ye  know  the  thing  that  was  done, 

etc.  So,  essentially,  Kiiinoel,  Meyer,  Winer, 
and  others.  (See  W.  ?  62.  3.)  Others  refer 
word  to  what  precedes,  and  supply  accord- 
ing to  ((card)  or  take  the  accusative  as  abso- 
lute :  the  word  (viz.  that  God  is  thus  impar- 
tial) which  he  sent,  etc.  (Bng.,  Olsh.,  De 
Wet.).  That  mode  of  characterizing  the  con- 
tents or  m&ssage  of  the  gospel  is  unusual.  The  ' 
structure  of  the  sentence  is  no  smoother  in  this 
case  than  in  the  other.  A  recent  writer^  has 
proposed  to  construe  preaching  as  a  predicate 
of  he  that  fears  God  is  acceptable  to 
him,  .  .  .  having  announced  (to  him)  as 
glad  tidings,  peace,  etc.  But  the  participle 
in  this  position  cannot  be  separated  without 
violence  from  the  subject  of  sent,  nor  is  the 
accusative  in  anj'  other  instance  retained  after 
this  verb  in  the  passive.  (Comp.  Matt.  11:5;  Heb. 
4  :  2.)  The  construction  would  be  correct  in 
principle,  but  is  not  exemplified. — Sent  to  the 
sons  of  Israel — ;'.  e.  in  the  first  instance,  as 
in  3  :  26 ;  13  :  26.  That  priority  Peter  concedes 
to  the  Jews. — Peace,  reconciHation  to  God 
procured  through  Christ  (comp.  Rom.  5 : 1,  10), 
not  union  between  the  Jews  and  Gentiles  (De 
Wet.) — an  effect  of  the  gospel  too  subordinate 
to  be  made  so  prominent  in  this  connection. 
The  apostle  restates  the  idea  in  v.  43. — This 
one  is  Lord  of  all.  All  (navrtov)  is  mascu- 
line, not  neuter.  Peter  interposes  the  remark 
as  proof  of  the  universality  of  this  plan  of  rec- 
onciliation. The  dominion  of  Clirist  extends 
over  those  of  one  nation  as  well  as  of  another ; 
they  are  all  the  creatures  of  his  power  and  care, 
and  may  all  avail  themselves  of  the  provisions 
of  his  grace.  (Comp.  Rom.  3  :  29,  30  ;  10  :  12.) 
37.  Ye  know,  etc.,  implies  that  they  had 
already  some  knowledge  of  the  life  and  works 
of  Christ.  The  fame  of  his  miracles  may  have 
extended  to  Csesarea  (see  Matt.  15  :  21 ;  Mark 
7  :  24),  or  Philip,  who  resided  there  (8:«»),  may 
have   begun  to  excite  public   attention   as   a 


1  Neander's  remarks  on  this  passage,  in  his  Planting  of  the  Christian  Church,  deserve  attention.    See  the  closa 
of  the  second  section  or  book. 

2  In  the  Iheulogische  Studien  und  Kritiken,  1850,  p.  402,  sq. 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


135 


throughout  all  Judiea,  and  "began  from  Galilee,  after 
the  baptism  which  John  preached; 

38  How  '(iod  anointed  Jesus  of  Nazareth  with  the 
Holy  Ghost  and  with  power:  who  went  about  doing 
good,  and  healing  all  that  were  oppressed  of  the  devil; 
«for  God  was  with  him. 

39  And  •'we  are  witnesses  of  all  things  which  he  did 
both  in  the  land  of  the  Jews,  and  in  Jerusalem;  "whom 
they  slew  and  hanged  on  a  tree: 

4U  Him  /<jod  raised  up  the  third  day,  and  shewed 
him  openly ; 
41  i'Not  to  all  the  people,  but  unto  witnesses  chosen 


know,  which  was  published  throughout  all  Judtea, 
beginning   trom  ijalilee,  after   the   baptism   which 

38  John  preached;  eivH  .Jesus  ot'  Isazareth,  how  that 
(iod  anointed  him  with  the  Holy  ."Spirit  and  with 
power:  who  went  about  doing  good,  and  healing  ail 
that  were  oppressed  of  the  devil ;  lor  dod  was  with 

39  him.  And  we  are  witnesses  of  all  things  which  he 
did  both  in  the  country  of  the  Jews,  and  in  Jeru- 
salem ;    whom  also   they  slew,  hanging   him   on   a 

40  tree.     Him  (iod  raised  up  the  third  day,  ai.d  gave 

41  him  to  be  made  manifest,  uoi  to  all  the  people,  but 


oLuke  4  :  14....6  Luke  4  :  18  ;  ch.  2  :  22  j  4  :  27  ;  Heb.  1  :9....c  John  3  :  2....d  ch.  2  :  32 e  ch.  5:30..../ch.  2:  24.... 9  John 

14  :  17,  TZ  ;  cli.  13  :  31. 


preacher  of  the  gespel.  Some  think  that  Cor- 
neUus  was  the  centurion  who  was  present  at 

the    crucifixion    of    Christ    (Matt.  27:44;  Mark  15  :  39; 

Luke  23: 47),  since  it  was  customary  to  march  a 
portion  of  the  troops  at  CKsarea  to  Jerusalem 
for  tlie  preservation  of  order  during  the  festi- 
vals. It  is  impossible  to  refute  or  confirm  that 
opinion.  Peter  proceeds  to  communicate  to 
them  a  fuller  account  of  the  Saviour's  history, 
and  of  tlie  nature  and  terms  of  his  salvation. 
— Word  (pfifia)  =  word  {\6yov)  in  v.  3G  (Kuin., 
Mey.),  or  thiixj  (De  Wet.),  which  is  more  con- 
gruous with  happened,  and  associates  the 
word  witli  the  indulntable  facts  on  which  it 
rested. — After  the  bajjtism — /.  e.  the  completion 
of  John's  ministry.  The  Saviour  performed 
some  public  acts  at  an  earlier  period,  but  did 
not  enter  fully  on  his  work  till  John  had  fin- 
islied  his  preparatory  missi(jn.  The  ditference 
was  so  slight  that  it  was  sufficiently  exact  to 
make  the  beginning  or  the  close  of  the  fore- 
runner's career  the  starting-point  in  that  of 
Christ.     (See  on  1  :  22.) 

38.  Jesus  transfers  the  mind  from  the  gos- 
pel-history t(j  the  personal  subject  of  it.  The 
appnsitiniuil  construction  is  kept  up  still.  From 
Nazareth,  as  the  place  of  his  residence.  (See 
Matt.  2  :  23.)— How  God  anointed  him  with 
the  Holy  Spirit,  etc.  (See  note  on  1  :  2  and 
on  4  :  2G.)  Power  is  defined  by  what  follows 
as  power  to  perform  miracles.  —  Went  from 
place  to  place.  (Comp.  8  :  4.) —  Healing 
those  oppressed  by  the  devil.  His  tri- 
umph over  this  form  of  Satanic  agency  is 
singled  out  as  the  highest  exhibition  of  his 
W(jnder-working  power.  [Compare  the  briefer 
exposition  of  Canon  Cook  :  "  Three  accusatives 
are  put  forward — 1st,  the  word,  in  v.  36;  2d, 
the  word,  in  v.  37  ;  3d,  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  in  v. 
38 — all  of  them  governed  by  ye  know.  And  it 
is  to  be  noted  that  the  word  in  v.  37  is  quite  dis- 
tinct from  that  in  v.  36,  in  apposition  with  it, 
and  exi)lanatory  of  its  meaning.  Ye  know  .  .  . 
the  teaching  or  message  which  God  sent;  ye 
know,  again,  .  .  .  the  matter,  or  the  fact,  the 


subject  or  basis,  of  the  teaching  which  took 
place  throughout  all  Judea,  the  area  of  our 
Lord's  teaching  and  miracles.  Once  more  ye 
know  Jesus  of  Nazareth." — A.  H.] 

39.  Are  {iatniv)  sujiplies  the  correct  word 
after  we  (rj^iei?),  but  is  not  genuine.— Both  in 
the  country  of  the  Jews  and  in  Jerusa> 
lem,  the  capital  of  the  nation  and  its  territ(jry 
here  oppo.sed  to  each  other.  The  Jews  inhal>ited 
not  only  Judea,  but  Galilee  and  a  region  on  the 
east  of  the  Jordan. — Whom  also,  an  addi- 
tional fact  (Luke  22: 24)  ill  tlic  Saviour's  history 
(De  Wet.),  showing  the  extent  of  their  ani- 
mosity and  violence.  Winer  (^  GO.  3)  suggests 
a  brachylogy  :  whom  (of  which  also  we  are 
witnesses)  they  slew,  etc.  This  is  too  com- 
plicated.—By  hanging.  (See  note  on  5  :  30.) 
Here  again  the  E.  Vei-sion  represents  the  Sa- 
viour as  put  to  death  before  he  was  suspended 
on  the  cross. 

41.  Not  unto  all  the  people—/,  e.  of  the 
Jews.  (Comp.  on  v.  2.) — But  unto  witnesses 
before  appointed  by  God.  The  choice  of 
the  apostles  is  a.scribed  indifferently  to  him  or 
to  Christ  (i:2).  jrpd  (before)  in  the  participle 
represents  tlie  selection  as  made  before  Christ 
rose  from  the  dead,  not  as  purposed  indefinitely 
before  its  execution. — The  exception  here  made 
to  the  publicity  f)f  the  Saviour's  appearance  ac- 
cords with  the  narrative  of  the  evangelists ;  they 
menti<m  no  instance  in  which  he  showed  him- 
self to  any  excejjt  his  personal  followers.  Paley 
founds  the  following  just  remarks  on  that  rep- 
resentation of  the  sacred  writers :  "  The  history 
of  the  resurrection  would  have  come  to  us  with 
more  advantage,  if  they  had  related  that  Jesus 
had  appeared  to  his  foes  as  well  as  his  friends, 
or  even  if  they  asserted  the  public  appearance 
of  Christ  in  general  unqualified  terms,  without 
noticing,  as  they  liave  done,  the  presence  of  his 
disciples  on  each  occasion,  and  noticing  it  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  lead  their  readers  to  sup- 
pose that  none  but  disciples  were  present.  If 
their  point  had  been  to  have  their  story  be- 
lieved, whether  true  or  false,  or  if  tlicy  had 


136 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


before  of  God,  even  to  us,  "who  did  eat  and  drink  with 
him  after  he  rose  from  the  dead. 

42  And  '•he  commanded  us  to  preach  unto  the  people, 
and  to  testify  "^that  it  is  he  which  was  ordained  of  Ood 
iu  be  the  Judge  ''of  quick  and  dead. 

43  <^To  him  give  all  the  prophets  witness,  that  through 
his  name /whosoever  believeth  in  him  shall  receive  re- 
mission of  sins. 

44  11  While  Peter  yet  spake  these  words,  fthe  Holy 
Ghost  fell  on  all  them  which  heard  the  word. 

45  ''And  they  of  the  circumcision  which  believed 
were  astonished,  as  many  as  came  with  I'eler,  'because 
that  on  the  Gentiles  also  was  poured  out  the  gift  of 
the  Holy  Ghost. 


unto  witnesses  that  were  chosen  before  of  God,  eren 
to  us,  who  did  eat  and  drink  with  liim  after  he  rose 

42  from  the  dead.  And  he  charged  us  to  preach  unto 
the  people,  and  to  testify  that  this  is  he  who  is  or- 
dained of  Cod  to  he  the  .ludge  of  quick  and  dead. 

43  To  him  bear  all  the  prophets  witness,  that  through 
his  name  every  one  that  believeth  on  him  shall  re- 
ceive remission  o.  sins. 

44  While    1  eter   yet  spake   these   words,   the    Holy 
45 Spirit  fell  on  all  them  who  heard  the  word.     And 

they  of  the  circumcision  who  believed  were  amazed, 
as  many  as  came  with  I'eter,  because  that  on  the 
Gentiles  also  was  pouied  out  the  gift  of  the  Holy 


a  Luke 

24 

30 

43  :  Joh 

n  21 

13 

...b  Matt 

28 

:19 

20  ,■  ch. 

:  8. 

...c  John 

.5 

22 

27 

ch. 

17 

:31. 

..d  Rom. 

14 

9,  10 

2  Cor 

.=) 

10 

2  • 

im. 

4:1; 

1  Pet. 

4  :5.... 

e.  Isa 

,53 

:11;  Jer. 

31 

34 

Duu.  9 

24; 

Mio 

7  . 

18 

Zech. 

13: 

1  ; 

Mai. 

4:2;  ch. 

26 

22... 

./  ch. 

15 

9; 

26 

IB; 

Horn. 

10 

:  11 

Gal.  3 

22.. 

■■9 

ch.  4:31; 

8: 

15, 

6,  n  ;  11 

:1b. 

...A 

ver. 

23 

ich 

" 

18 

;  Ga 

.3:  14. 

been  disposed  to  present  their  testimony,  either 
as  personal  witnesses  or  as  historians,  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  render  it  as  specious  and  unobjec- 
tionable as  they  could — in  a  word,  if  they  had 
thought  of  anything  but  the  truth  of  the  case 
as  they  understood  and  believed  it, — they  would, 
in  their  account  of  Christ's  several  appearances 
after  his  resurrection,  at  least  have  omitted  this 
restriction.  At  this  distance  of  time,  the  ac- 
count, as  we  have  it,  is  jjerhaps  more  credible 
than  it  would  have  been  the  other  way,  because 
this  manifestation  of  the  historian's  candor  is  of 
more  advantage  to  their  testimony  than  the  dif- 
ference in  the  circumstances  of  the  account  would 
have  been  to  the  nature  of  the  evidence.  But  this 
is  an  effect  which  the  evangelists  could  not  fore- 
see, and  is  one  which  by  no  means  would  have  f<  )1- 
lowed  at  the  time  when  they  wrote."— Who  ate 
and  drank  with  him.  (See  Luke  24 :  43 ;  John 
21  :  13.)  Hence  they  testified  to  a  fact  which 
they  had  been  able  to  verify  by  the  most  pal- 
pable evidence.  (Comp.  thenoteon  1  :  3.)  After 
he  rose  from  the  dead  belongs  to  the  clause 
which  immediately  precedes.  It  was  after  his 
resurrection  that  they  had  this  intercourse  witli 
him.  The  punctuation  of  some  editors  refers 
the  words  incorrectly  to  v.  40. 

42.  To  preach  to  the  people,  as  above. 
Peter  alludes  to  the  sphere  of  their  ministry 
which  they  were  directed  to  occupy  at  first. 
(Comp.  1:8;  3  :  26,  etc.)— That  himself,  and 
no  other.  (W.  §  22.  4.)— Judge  of  the  living 
and  dead — i.  e.  of  all  who  shall  be  on  tlie 
earth  at  the  time  of  his  final  appearance  (i  Thess. 
4 :  n),  and  of  all  who  have  lived  previously  and 
died.  For  other  passages  which  represent  Christ 
as  sustaining  this  ofl[ice  of  universal  judge,  see 
17  :  31 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  1 ;  1  Pet.  4  :  5.  Olshausen  and 
some  others  understand  the  living  and  dead  to  be 
the  righteous  and  wicked ;  but  we  are  to  attach  to 
the  words  that  figurative  sense  only  when  the 
context  (Matt.  8 :  22)  or  some  explanatory  adjunct 
(Eph.  2:1)  leads  the  mind  distinctly  to  it. 


43.  For  this  one  (dat.  comm.)  testify  all 
the  prophets.  (Comp.  on  3  :  24.) — Whoso- 
ever helieveth,  etc.,  states  the  purport  of  their 
testimony.  This  clause  presents  two  ideas — 
first,  that  the  condition  of  pardon  is  faith  in 
Christ ;  and  secondh^,  that  this  condition  brings 
the  attainment  of  pardon  within  the  reach  of 
all:  every  one,  whether  Jew  or  Gentile,  Avho 
believes  on  him  shall  receive  remission 
of  sins.  (See  Rom.  10  :  11.)  For  the  explana- 
tion of  his  name,  see  on  2  :  21. 

44-48.  CORNELIUS  AND  OTHERS  RE- 
CEIVE THE  SPIRIT,  AND  ARE  BAP- 
TIZED. 

44.  Still  speaking.  Hence,  Peter  had  not 
finished  his  remarks  when  God  vouchsafed  this 
token  of  his  favor.  (See  11  :  15.)  The  Spirit 
— i.  e.  as  the  author  of  the  gifts  mentioned  in 
v.  46.  The  miracle  proved  that  the  plan  of 
salvation  which  Peter  announced  was  the  di- 
vine plan,  and  that  the  faith  which  secured  its 
blessings  to  the  Jew  was  sufficient  to  secure 
them  to  the  Gentile.  A  previous  submission 
to  the  rites  of  Judaism  was  shown  to  be  un- 
necessary. It  is  worthy  of  note,  too,  that 
those  who  received  the  Spirit  in  this  instance 
had  not  been  baptized  (comp.  19  :  5),  nor  had 
the  hands  of  an  apostle  been  laid  upon  them. 
(Comp.  8  :  17.)  This  was  an  occasion  when 
men  were  to  be  taught  by  an  impressive  exam- 
ple how  little  their  acceptance  with  God  de- 
pends on  external  observances.— All  restricts 
itself  to  the  Gentiles  (v.  27),  since  they  were  prop- 
erly the  hearers  to  whom  Peter  was  speaking, 
and  not  the  Jews. 

45.  They  of  the  circumcision — i.  e.  the 
Jewish  brethren  mentioned  in  v.  23.  (Comp. 
11:2;  Rom.  4:12;  Col.  4  :  11.)— Believed 
(nio-Toi  =  »rt(rT€i5oi'Tes).  (See  16  :  1 ;  John  20  :  27.) 
"  Verbal  adjectives  in  to?,  which  have  usually  a 
passive  signification,  have  often  in  poetry,  and 
sometimes  in  prose,  an  active  signification." 
(See  K.,  Ausfuhr.  Gr.,  g  409. 3.  A.  1.)-^  That  also 


Ch.  XL] 


THE  ACTS. 


137 


46  For  they  heard  them  speak  with  tongues,  and 
magnify  tlotl.     Tlien  answered   l^eter, 

47  (an  any  man  Ibrliid  water,  that  these  should  not 
be  baptized,  which  liave  received  tlie  Holy  Ohost  "as 
well  as  we? 

4.S  'And  he  commanded  them  to  be  baptized  'in  the 
name  of  the  Lord.  Then  prayed  they  him  to  tarry 
certain  days. 


46  Spirit.    For  they  heard  them  speak  with  tongues, 

47  and  magnify  (iod.  Then  answered  I'eter,  Can  any 
man  forbid  the  water,  that  these  should  not  be  baj)- 
tized,  who  have  received  the  Holy  Spirit  as  well  as 

48  we?  And  he  commanded  them  to  be  baptized  in 
the  name  of  .Jesus  Christ.  Then  prayed  they  him 
to  tarry  certain  days. 


CHAPTER    XI, 


AND  the  apostles  and  brethren  that  were  in  .Tudsea 
heard  that  the  Gentiles  had  also  received  the  word 
of  God. 

2  And  when  Peter  was  come  up  to  .Jerusalem,  ''they 
that  were  of  the  circumcision  contended  with  him, 


1  Now  the  apostles  and  the  brethren  that  were  in 
Judiea  heard   that  the  (ientiles   also  had   received 

2  the  word  of  (iod.    And  when  Peter  was  come  up  to 
Jerusalem,  they  that  were  of  the  circumcision  c.ju- 


ach.  11  :  17;  15:  8,  9;  Rom.  10  :  12.... i  1  Cor.  1  :  17...  .c  ch.  2  :  38;  8  :  16....dch.  10  :  45  ;  Gal.  2  :  12. 


upon  the  heathen,  as  well  as  upon  the  Jews. 
The  a.^^ertioii  is  universal,  because  this  single 
instance  o.^tablislied  tiio  principle. 

40.  Were  hearing  them,  while  they  spoke. 
— >Vith  tongues,  new ;  before  unspoken  by 
them.  The  fuller  description  in  2:4  prepares 
the  way  fi)r  the  conciser  statement  here. 

47.  Can  perhaps  any  one  forbid  the 
water  that  these  should  not  be  baptized? 
The  article  may  contrast  iiSuip  and  nveOixa  with 
each  other,  or  more  naturally  designate  the 
water  as  wont  to  be  so  applied.  The  import 
of  the  question  is  this:  Since,  although  uncir- 
cumcised,  they  have  believed  and  received  so 
visible  a  token  of  their  acceptance  with  God, 
what  should  hinder  their  admission  into  the 
church?  Wlio  can  object  to  their  being  bap- 
tized, and  thus  acknowledged  a,s  Christians  in 
full  connection  with  us?  As  forbid  (kuAuu)) 
involves  a  negative  idea,  m^  (not)  could  be 
omitted  or  inserted  before  should  be  bap- 
tized. The  distinction  may  be  that  the  in- 
finitive with  uri  expresses  the  result  of  the 
hindrance;  without  (urj,  that  which  the  hin- 
drance would  prevent.  (See  Woolsey  On  the 
Alcestt's,  V.  11.)  n>)  after  such  verbs  has  been 
said  to  be  superfluous  (K.  ?  318.  10),  or  simply 
intensive  (Mt.  ^  534.  3).  Klotz  {Ad  Devar.,  ii.  p. 
668)  suggests  the  correct  view.  (See  also  Bernh., 
Si/)it.,  p.  364.)  [Some  writers  have  inferred 
.sprinkling  or  pouring  from  forbid  water: 
"Tlie  water  was  to  be  brought  to  the  converts ; 
and  this  suggests  affusion,  not  immersion  "  ( Can- 
on Cook).  Better  thus  :  "  Tlie  water  is  in  this 
animated  language  conceived  as  the  element 
offering  itself  for  the  baptism.  So  urgent  now 
appeared  the  necessity  for  completing,  on  the 
human  side,  the  divine  work  that  had  miracu- 
lously appeared"  (Meyer). — A.  H.] — As  also 
Ave  received— viz.  (see  11  :  15)  in  the  be- 
ginning. 


48.  Commanded  that  the  rite  should  be 
performed  by  otliers ;  he  devolved  the  service 
on  his  attendants.  Peter's  rule  in  regard  to  the 
administration  of  bajitism  may  have  been  simi- 
lar to  tliat  of  Paul.  (See  1  Cor.'  1:14.)  [The  best 
text  reads:  And  he  commanded  them  to 
be  baptized  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ. 
Thus  the  name  of  Jesus  is  represented  as  the 
spiritual  element  in  which  the  act  of  baptism 
takes  place,  just  as  in  2  :  38  it  is  si)oken  of  as 
the  divine  ba-sis  or  authority  for  that  act,  and 
as  in  19 : 5  it  is  conceived  of  as  the  end  to  which 
baptism  relates.  But  in  none  of  tliese  pa.ssages 
is  the  verbal  formula  used  by  administrators 
given.— A.  H.]  —  To  tarry— i.  e.  with  them. 
(Comp.  28  :  14.) 


1-18.  PETER  JUSTIFIES  HIMSELF  AT 
JERUSALEM  FOR  HIS  VISIT  TO  CORNE- 
LIUS. 

1.  Peter,  Jolin,  and  James  were  among  the 
apostles  now  at  Jerusalem  (s :  i4;  12 : 2),  and  no 
doubt  others. — Throughout  (comp.  15  :  23) 
Judea,  since  the  brethren  belonged  to  dif- 
ferent churches  in  this  region.  (See  Gal.  1  : 
22.) — The  heathen,  while  still  uncircumcised. 
(See  V.  3.) 

2.  When  he  went  up.  There  is  no  evi- 
dence that  Peter  was  summoned  to  Jerusalem 
to  defend  his  conduct.  He  had  reason  to  fear 
that  it  would  be  censured  until  the  particulars 
of  the  transaction  were  known,  and  he  may 
have  hastened  his  return,  in  order  to  furnish 
that  information. — They  of  the  circumcis- 
ion are  the  Jewish  believers,  as  in  10  :  45,  not 
here  a  party  among  them  more  tenacious  of 
circumcision  than  the  others.  It  is  implied 
that  this  tenacivy  was  a  Jewish  characteristic. 
The  narrower  sense  of  the  expression  occurs  in 
some  places. 


138 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XL 


3  Saying,  "Thou  wentest  in  to  men  uncircumcised,  I 
*and  didst  eat  with  tiiem. 

4  But  Peter  reliearsed  the  matter  from  the  beginning, 
and  expounded  it  =by  order  unto  them,  saying, 

5  ■'I  was  in  the  city  of  Joppa  praying:  and  in  a  trance 
I  saw  a  vision,  A  certain  vessel  descend,  as  it  liad  been 
a  great  sheet,  let  down  from  heaven  by  four  corners  ; 
and  it  came  even  to  me: 

6  Upon  the  which  when  I  had  fastei.ed  mine  eyes,  I 
considered,  and  saw  fourfooted  beasts  of  the  earth, 
and  wild  beasts,  and  creeping  things,  and  fowls  of  the 
air. 

7  And  I  heard  a  voice  saying  unto  me.  Arise,  Peter ; 
slay  and  eat. 

8  But  I  said,  Not  so,  Lord:  for  nothing  common  or 
unclean  hath  at  any  time  entered  into  my   mouth. 

9  But  the  voice  answered  me  again  from  heaven, 
What  God  hath  cleansed,  ttial  call  not  thou  common. 

10  And  this  was  done  three  times:  and  all  were 
drawn  up  again  into  heaven. 

11  And,  behold,  immediately  there  were  three  men  j 
already  come  unto  the  house  where  I  was,  sent  from 
Csesarea  unio  me. 

12  And 'the  spirit  bade  me  go  with  them,  nothing 
doubting.  Moreover /these  six  bretliren  accompanied 
me,  and  we  entered  into  the  man's  house: 

V6  J'And  he  shewed  us  how  he  had  seen  an  angel  in 
his  house,  which  stood  and  said  unto  him.  Send  men  to 
Joppa,  and  call  for  Simon,  whose  surname  is  Peter; 

1-1  Who  shall  tell  thee  words,  whereby  thou  and  all 
thy  house  shall  be  saved. 

15  And  as  I  began  to  speak,  the  Holy  Ghost  fell  on 
them,  ^as  on  us  at  the  beginning. 

10  Then  remembered  1  the  word  of  the  Lord,  how 
that  he  said,  vlohn  indeed  baptized  with  water;  but 
*ye  shall  be  baptized  with  the  Holy  Ghost. 


3 tended  with  him,  saying.  Thou  wentest  in  to  men 

4  uncircumcised,  and  d'idst  eat  with  them.  But  Peter 
began,  and  expounded  the  umttfi-  unto  them  in  order, 

5  saying,  1  was  in  the  city  of  Joppa  praying:  and  in 
a  trance  I- saw  a  vision,  a  certain  vessel  descending, 
as  it  were  a  great  sheet  let  down  from  heav  n  by 

G  tour  corners;  and  it  came  even  unto  me:  upon  the 
which  when  1  had  fastei  ed  mine  eyes,  1  considered, 
and  saw  the  four-footed  beasts  of  the  earth  and  wild 
beasts  and  creeping  things  and  fowls  of  the  heaven. 

7  And  1  heard  also  a  voice  saying  unto  me.  Rise,  I'e- 

8ter;  kill  and  eat.  But  L  said,  Not  so.  Lord:  for 
nothing  common  or  unclean  hath  ever  entered  into 

9  my  mouth.  But  a  voice  answered  the  second  time 
out  of  heaven.  What  (iod  hath  cleansed,  make  not 

10  thou  common.     Aid  this  was  done  thrice:  and  all 

11  were  drawn  up  again  into  heaven.  And  behold, 
forthwith  three  men  stood  before  the  house  in 
which   we   were,   having   been   sent   fmm   (icsiirea 

12  unto  me.  And  the  Spirit  bade  me  go  with  them, 
making  no  distinction.  And  these  six  brethren 
also    accompai  led   me;    and   we  entered  into    ihe 

13  man's  house:  and  he  told  us  how  he  had  seen  the 
angel  standing  in  his  house,  and  saying.  Send  to 
Joppa,  and  fetch  Simon,  whose  surname  is  Peter; 

14  who  shall   speak   unto   thee   words,  whereby   thou 
15 Shalt  be  saved,  thou  and  all  thy  house.     And  as  I 

began  to  speak,  the  Holy  Spirit  fell  on  them,  even 

16 as  on  us  at  the  beginning.    And  1  remembered  the 

word  of  the  Lord,  how  that  he  said,  John  indeed 

baptized  with  water;  but  ye  shall  be  baptized  'in 


loh.  10:28....6  Gal.  2:  12....C  Luke  1  :  .3. . .  .rf  cti.  10:9,  etc....  e  John  Ifi:  13;  cti.  10  :  19  ;  15  :  7  . ../ ch.  10  :  23....(j  ch.  10-30 
....Ach.  i:  4....iMaU.  3  ;  11;  John  1  :  26,  3:i ;  ch.  1  :  5 ;  19:  4....*  I.sa.  44  :  3 ;  Joel  2  ;  28 ;  3  :  18. 1  Or,  with  their 


3.  (See  the  remarks  on  10  :  28.)  Notice  the 
ground  of  the  complaint.  It  was  not  that 
Peter  had  preached  to  the  heathen,  but  that 
he  had  associated  with  them  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  violate  his  supposed  obligations  as  a  Jew. 
(Comp.  the  note  on  2  :  39.)  We  may  infer  that 
he  had  avoided  that  degree  of  intimacy  wlien 
he  himself  entertained  the  Gentile  messengers. 

(l0:23). 

4.  Commencing— i,  e.  proceeding  to  speak 
(see  on  2  :  4),  or,  beginning  with  the  first 
circumstances,  he  related  unto  them,  etc. 
This  repetition  of  the  history  shows  the  im- 
portance attached  to  this  early  conflict  between 
the  gospel  and  Judaism.  j 

5.  For  the  omission  of  the  before  city,  see  on 
8  :  5. — Vision  denot&s  here  what  was  seen,  and 
differs  from  its  use  in  10  :  3. — Let  down,  sus- 
pended, by  four  corners — i.  e.  by  means  of 
cords  fastened  to  them.  Luke  abbreviates  here 
the  fuller  expression  in  10 :  11.  [For  Dr.  Hack- 
ett's  exposition  of  vv.  6-11,  see  his  notes  on 
10  :  11-16,  where  the  same  narrative  is  given. 
—A.  H.] 

12.  By  a  mixed  construction,  SiaKpivSixtvov 
agrees  with  the  suppressed  sulsjcct  of  <rvve\delv, 
instead  of  noi.  (C.  ^627.  p.;  Mt.  ?  536.)— These 
six  brethren.  (See  10  :  23.)  TJiey  liad,  there- 
fore, accompanied  Peter  to  Jerusalem,  either  as 


witnesses  for  him  or  for  his  own  vindication, 
since  tliey  had  committed  the  same  offence. 

13.  The  angel,  known  to  the  reader  from 
the  previous  narrative  (10:3,22).  Tliose  ad- 
dressed had  not  heard  of  the  vision,  and  must 
have  received  from  Peter  a  fuller  account  of  it 
than  it  was  necessary  to  repeat  here. — Men  has 
been  transferred  to  this  place  from  10  :  5. 

14.  All  thy  family.  The  assurance  embraces 
them  because  they  were  prepared,  as  well  as 
Cornelius,  to  welcome  the  apostle's  message. 
(Comp.  10  :  2.)  This  part  of  the  communica- 
tion has  not  been  mentioned  before. 

15.  Began  is  not  superfluous  (Kuin.),  but 
shows  how  soon  the  Spirit  descended  after  he 
began  to  speak.  (See  on  10  :  44.  W.  ?  67.  4.) 
—In  the  beginning—?',  e.  on  the  day  of  Pen- 
tecost. The  order  of  IJie  narrative  indicates 
that  the  conversion  of  Cornelius  took  place 
near  the  time  of  Paul's  arrival  at  Antioch. 
Some  ten  years,  therefore  (see  on  v.  26),  had 
passed  away  since  the  event  to  which  Peter 
alludes.     (Comp.  on  15  :  7.) 

16.  And  I  remembered  the  declaration 
of  the  Lord— /.  c.  had  it  brouglit  to  mind  with 
a  new  sense  of  its  meaning  and  application. 
(Comp.  Matt.  26  :  75  ;  John  12  :  16.)  The  Sa- 
viour had  promised  to  bestow  on  his  disciples 
a  higher  baptism  than  that  of  water  (see  1:5; 


Ch.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


139 


17  "Forasmuch  then  as  God  gave  tlieni  the  like  ^ift 
as  hf  (lid  unto  us,  who  believed  on  the  l^ord  ,(esus 
Christ;  'what  was  I,  that  I  could  withstand  (iod? 

18  When  they  heard  these  things,  they  lield  their 
peace,  and  glorified  tjod,  saying,  "Then  hath  Liod  also 
to  the  (ientiles  granted  repeiitaoce  unto  life. 

Ill  II  ''Now  they  which  were  scattered  abroad  upon 
the  persecution  that  arose  about  Stephen  travelled  as 
far  as  I'hcnice,  and  Cyprus,  and  Antioch,  preaching 
the  word  to  none  butunto  the  Jews  only. 

20  And  some   of  them   were  men  of  Cyprus  and 


17  the  Holy  Spirit.  If  then  Ood  gave  unto  them  the 
like  gift  as  /if  diil  alsci  unto  us,  when  we  believed  on 
the  Lord  Jesus  Clirist,  who  wxs  I,  that  I  could  with- 

18  stand  (iod?  And  when  they  heard  these  things, 
they  held   their  peace,   and   glorified  Cod,  saying, 

Then  to  the  Centiles  also  hath  Cod  granted  repent- 
ance unto  life. 

19  They  therefore  that  were  scattered  abroad  upon 
the  tribulation  that  arose  about  Stephen  travelled  a.s 
far  as  I'hiunicia,  and  Cypru.s,  and  Antioch,  s|ieaking 

20  the  word  to  none  save  only  to  Jews.     But  there  were 


tch.  15:8,  9.... bob.  10  :  47.... c  Rom.  10  :  12,  13;  15:9, 16 deb.  8:1. 


Luke  24  :  49) ;  and  the  result  proved  that  he 
designed  to  extend  the  benefit  of  that  promise 
to  the  heathen  who  should  l)clieve  on  him,  as 
well  as  to  the  Jews. — How  he  said.  (See  on 
1:5.) 

17.  Gave,  as  mentioned  in  10  :  44. — Also 
connects  us  with  them. — Having  believed 
refers  to  both  pronouns  (DeWet.,Mey.) — i.e.  they 
all  received  the  same  gift  in  the  same  character; 
viz.  that  of  believers.  Bengel  (to  whom  Mey. 
assents  now)  limits  the  participle  to  us. — eyw  Se 
TIC  riiJ.riv,  K.  T.  A.,  combines  two  questions  (W. 
g  ()().  5) :  Who  then  was  I?  Was  I  able  to 
withstand  Ciod? — /.  c.  to  disregard  so  distinct 
an  intimation  of  his  will  that  the  heathen 
should  be  recognized  as  worthy  of  all  the  priv- 
ileges of  the  gospel,  without  demanding  of 
them  any  other  qualification  than  faith  in 
Christ.  Able  suggasts  that  such  opjwsition 
would  have  been  as  i)rcsumptuous  and  futile  as 
a  contest  between  man's  power  and  infinite 
power.  Se  with  n's  strengtliens  the  (piestion,  as 
in  2  Cor.  G  :  14.  It  is  left  out  of  some  copies, 
but  not  justly. 

18.  Were  silent,  refrained  from  further 
opposition  (v.  2).  (Comp.  21  :  14.)— tJlorified 
(eSofa^oi',  imp.)  expresses  a  continued  act.  The 
suchh'u  change  of  tenses  led  some  to  write  the 
aorist  (cSofao-oi-).  [The  critical  editors  now  give 
the  aorist  rather  than  the  imperfect  tense  of 
the  verb. — A.  11.] — Therefore  then  (apaye; 
comp.  Matt.  7  :  20;  17  :  2()).  More  pertinent 
here  than  the  interrogative  whether  then 
(opoye,  8  :  30).  The  accentuation  varies  in  dif- 
ferent editions. — For  granted  repentance  see 
the  note  on  5  :  31. — eU  ^u^r,  ecbatic,  unto  life — 
i.  c.  such  repentance  as  secures  it.  (Comp.  2 
Cor.  7  :  10.) 

19-24.  THE  GOSPEL  IS  PREACHED  AT 
ANTIOCH. 

19.  Those  therefore  dispersed  recalls  the 
reader  to  an  earlier  event  in  the  history.  (See 
8  :  4.)— From  (as  an  effect  of)  the  persecu- 
tion. (Whl.,  Win.,  Mey.  Comp.  20  :  9;  Ltike 
19  :  3.)  Tliis  is  better  than  to  render  since 
the  persecution.  It  is  more  natural  to  be 
reminded  here  of  the  cause  of  the  dispersion 


than  of  the  time  when  it  bq;an. — Upon  Ste- 
phen, on  his  account,  ((."omp.  4  :  21 ;  Luke 
2  :  20.    W.  g  48.  c.)— Travelled   as   far  as. 

(See  8  :  4,  40.) — Ph(enicia,  in  this  age,  lay 
chiefly  between  the  west^-rn  slope  of  Lebanon 
and  the  sea,  a  narrow  plain  reaching  from  the 
river  Elcuthcrus,  on  the  north,  to  Carmel,  on  the 
south.  Its  limits  varied  at  difi'erent  times. 
Among  tlie  Phanician  cities  were  Tyre  and 
Sidon  ;  and  the  statement  here  aci:ounts  for  the 
existence  of  the  Christians  in  those  places,  men- 
tioned so  abruptlj'  in  21  :  4 ;  27  :  3. — Antioch. 
Here  we  have  the  first  notice  of  this  important 
city.  Antioch  was  the  capital  of  Syria,  and 
the  residence  of  the  Roman  governors  of  that 
province.  It  was  founded  by  Seleucus  Nicator, 
and  named  after  his  father,  Antiochus.  It 
stood  "  near  the  abrupt  angle  formed  by  the 
coasts  of  Syria  and  Asia  Minor,  and  in  the 
opening  where  the  Onjntcs  passes  between  the 
ranges  of  Lebanon  and  Taurus.  By  its  harbor 
of  Seleucia  it  was  in  communication  with  all 
the  trade  of  the  Mediterranean,  and  through 
the  open  country  behind  Lebanon  it  was  con- 
veniently approaclied  by  the  caravans  from 
Mesopotamia  and  Arabia.  It  was  almost  an 
Oriental  Rome,  in  which  all  tlie  forms  of  the 
civilized  life  of  the  empire  found  a  representa- 
tive" (Conybc\ire  and  Ilowson,  i.  p.  149).  (See, 
further,  on  13  :  4.)  It  is  memorable  in  the  first 
Christian  age  as  tlie  seat  of  missionary  opera- 
tions for  the  evangelization  of  the  heathen. 

20.  Whether  the  preachers  came  to  Antioch 
before  the  conversion  of  Cornelius  or  afterward 
the  narrative  docs  not  decide.  Some  prefer  to 
place  the  arrival  after  his  baptism,  lest  Peter 
might  not  seem  to  be  the  first  who  preached  the 
gospel  to  the  Gentiles.  (See  the  note  on  15  :  7.) 
— But  (£e')  distinguishes  the  course  pursued  by 
certain  of  them  from  that  of  the  other  scat- 
tered ones.  The  general  fact  is  first  stateil,  and 
tlien  the  exception.  —  Men  of  Cyprus—/,  c. 
Jews  bom  in  Cyprus.  (See  2  :  5,  9.) — Unto  the 
Greeks,  opposed  to  Jews,  in  the  forc.i^oing 
verse.  Tiie  received  text  has  Hellenists 
('EAAijp-KTTas)  (see  on  G  :  1),  and  the  nnuss  (if  ex- 
ternal testimony  favors  that  reUding.     [West. 


140 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XL 


Cyrene,   which,    when   they   were  come   to  Antioch, 
spake  unto  <"tlie  (irecians,  preaching  the  Lord  Jesus. 

21  And  'the  hand  of  the  Lord  was  witli  theiu  :  and  a 
great  number  believed,  and  "^turned  unto  the  Lord. 

22  K  Then  tidings  of  these  things  came  unto  the  ears 
of  the  church  which  was  in  Jerusalem  :  and  they  sent 
forth  ''I  arnabas,  that  he  should  go  as  far  as  Antioch. 

2:i  Who,  when  he  came,  and  had  seen  the  grace  of 
God,  was  glad,  and  '"exhorted  them  all,  tliat  with  pur- 
pose of  heart  ihey  would  cleave  unto  the  Lord. 

24  I"or  he  was  a  good  man,  and  /full  of  the  Holy 
Ghost  and  of  faith  :  sand  much  people  was  added  unto 
the  Lord. 

25  Then  departed  Barnabas  to  ''Tarsus,  for  to  seek 
Saul: 

20  And  when  he  had  found  him,  he  brought  him 


some  of  them,  men  of  Cyprus  and  Cyrene,  who,  when 
they  were  come  to  Antioch,  spake  unto  the  Uireeks 

21  also,  preaching  the  Lord  Jesus.  And  the  hand  of 
the  1-ord  was  with  them:  and  a  great  number  that 

22  believed  turned  unto  the  Lord.  And  the  report 
concerning  them  came  to  the  ears  of  the  church 
which  was  in  Jerusalem:  and  they  .sent  forth  liar- 

23nabas  as  far  as  Antioch:  who,  when  he  was  come, 
and  had  seen  the  grace  of  (iod,  was  glad;  and  he 
exhorted  them  all,  -that  with  purpose  of  heart  they 

2-1  would  cleave  unto  the  Lord:  fur  he  was  a  good  man, 
and  full  of  the  Holy  Spirit  and  of  faith :  and  much 

25peo|ile  was  added  unto  the   Lord.     And  lie  went 

26  torth  to  Tarsus  to  seek  for  Saul :  and  when  he  had 


och.6:  1;  9  :  29....6  Luke  1  :  66;  ch.  2  :  47. ..  .c  oh.  9  :  35.  ...d  ch.  9  :  27.  ...e  ch    13  :  43  ;  14  :  22... ./ ch.  6  :  5. ..  .3  ver.  21;  ch.  5  :  14 

ft  ch.  9  :  30 1  Manv  ancieut  authurities  read  Grecian  Jews 2  Some  aueient  aulhoriiles  read  that  they  would  cleave  unto  the  pur- 
pose 0/  their  heart  in  the  Lord. 


and  Hort  also  adopt  it. — A.  H.]  Wordsworth's 
note!  presents  the  evidence  on  that  side  in  a 
strong  liglit.  On  the  contrary,  the  internal 
argument  ajipears  to  demand  Greeks  ('eaatj- 
vai).  Some  of  the  oldest  versions  and  a  few 
manuscripts  support  that  as  the  original  word. 
The  majority  of  critics,  in  view  of  this  twofold 
evidence,  decide  for  Greeks  (Grsb.,  Lchm., 
Tsch.,  De  Wet.,  Mey.).  It  would  have  been 
nothing  new  to  have  preached  at  this  time  to 
the  Greek-speaking  Jews.  (See  e.  g.  2:9;  9  : 
29.)  If  we  accept 'EAArji/as,  the  Greeks  addressed 
at  Antioch  must  have  been  still  heathen  in 
part,  and  not  merely  Jewish  proselytes.  No 
other  view  accounts  for  Luke's  discrimination 
as  to  the  sphere  of  the  two  classes  of  preachers. 
—Men  of  Cyrene.     (See  on  2  :  10.) 

21.  For  hand  c^f  the  Lord,  comp.  4  :  30 ; 
Luke  1  :  6G. — With  them  who  preached  at 
Antioch.  The  subject  of  discourse,  both  in 
the  last  verse  and  the  next,  requires  this  refer- 
ence of  the  pronoun. 

23.  Came  to  the  ears  (lit.  was  heard 
into  the  ears)  is  a  Hebraism,  says  De  Wctte, 
without  any  instance  exactly  parallel  in  He- 
brew.—  Tidings,  the  report.  Of  these 
things  excludes  the  idea  that  it  was  a  com- 
munication sent  from  the  brethren  at  Antioch. 
— Sent  forth  derives  its  subject  from  in  Jeru- 
salem. (Comp.  Gal.  2  :  2.)  That  he  should 
go — i.e.  with  the  direction  that  he  should  go 
(comp.  20  :  1)  ;  left  out  of  some  of  the  early 
versions  as  if  unnecessary.  (See  W.  ?  65.  4.  d.) 
[Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and 
Anglo-Am.  Revisers,  witli  X  A  B,  omit  this 
verb.— A.  H.]— Barnabas.  (See  4  :  36 ;  9  : 
27.) 

23.  The  grace,  or  favor,  of  God,  as 
manifested  in  the  conversion  of  the  heathen. 
— Exhorted  all  who  had  believed.    We  find 


him  exercising  here  the  peculiar  gift  for  which 
he  was  distinguished.  (See  on  4  :  36.)  With 
the  purpose  of  the  heart — i.  e.  a  jjurpose 
sincere,  earnest. 

24.  Because  he  was  a  man  good  and 
full  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  etc.  This  descrip- 
tion states  why  lie  exerted  himself  so  strenu- 
ously to  establish  the  converts  in  their  faith. 
Sent  forth,  in  v.  22,  is  too  remote  to  allow  us  to 
view  it  as  the  reason  why  they  selected  him  for 
such  a  service. — And  much  people  was  add- 
ed, etc.  The  labors  of  Barnabas  resulted  also 
in  the  accession  of  new  believers. 

25,  26.  PAUL  ARRIVES  AT  ANTIOCH, 
AND  LABORS  THERE. 

25.  Our  last  notice  of  Paul  was  in  9  :  30. — 
In  order  to  seek  out,  find  by  inquiry  or  ef- 
fort. It  was  not  known  at  what  precise  point 
the  apostle  was  laboring.*  (See  Gal.  1  :  21.) — 
When  he  had  found  indicates  the  same  tin- 
certainty.  Barnabas  would  naturally  direct  his 
steps  first  to  Tarsus,  whither  he  would  proceed 
by  sea  from  Seleticia  (see  on  13  :  4)  or  track  his 
way  through  the  defiles  of  the  intervening 
mountains.  Conybeare  and  Howson :  "The 
last  time  the  two  friends  met  was  in  Jerusalem. 
In  the  period  since  that  interview  '  God  had 
granted  to  the  Gentiles  repentance  unto  life' 
(v.  18).  Barnabas  had  'seen  the  grace  of  God' 
(v.  S3),  and  under  his  own  teaching  '  a  great  mul- 
titude '  (v.  24)  had  been  '  added  to  the  Lord.'  But 
he  needed  assistance;  he  needed  the  presence 
of  one  whose  wisdom  was  greater  than  his 
own,  whose  zeal  was  an  example  to  all,  and 
whose  peculiar  mission  had  been  miraculously 
declared.  Saul  recognized  the  voice  of  God  in 
the  words  of  Barnabas,  and  the  two  friends 
travelled  in  all  haste  to  the  Syrian  metrop- 
olis." 

26.  A  whole  year — viz.  that  of  a.  d.  44, 


1  The  New  Testament  in  the  Original  Greek,  with  Notes,  by  Chr.  Wordsworth,  D.  D.,  Canon  of  Westminster  (Lon- 
don, 1857). 


Cir.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


141 


unto  Antioch.  And  it  came  to  pass,  that  a  whole  year 
they  assembled  themselves  with  the  church,  and  taught 
much  people.  And  the  disciples  were  called  Christians 
first  in  Antioch. 

21  U  And  in  these  days  came  "prophets  from  Jerusa- 
lem unto  Antioch. 

■JS  And  there  stood  up  one  of  them  named  'Agahus, 
and  signified  l)y  the  Spirit  that  there  should  be  great 
dearth  throughout  all  the  world:  which  came  to  pass 
in  the  days  of  Claudius  t'cesar. 


found  him,  he  brought  him  unto  Antioch.  And  it 
came  to  pa.ss,  that  even  lor  a  whole  year  they  were 
gathered  together  'with  the  church,  and  taught 
much  people;  and  that  the  disciples  were  called 
Christians  first  in  Antioch. 

27  Now  in  these  days  there  came  down  prophets  from 

28  Jerusalem  unto  Antioch.  And  there  stood  up  one  of 
them  named  Agabus,  and  signified  by  the  ."Spirit 
that  there  should  l^e  a  great  famine  over  all  -the 
world:  which  came  to  pass  in  the  days  of  Claudius. 


och.  2  :  17;  13  :  1 ;  15  :  .32 ;  21  :  9;  1  Cor.  12  :  28;  Eph.  4  :  11 4  ch.  21  :  10.- 


-1  Or.  in. . .  .2  Gr.  the  inhabited  earth. 


since  it  was  the  year  which  preceded  Paul's 
second  journey  to  Jerusalem,  at  the  time  of 
the  famine.  (See  on  12  :  25.)  The  apostle  had 
spent  the  intervening  years,  from  a.  d.  39  to  44, 
in  Syria  and  Cilieia.  (See  on  9  :  30.)  They 
came  together  in  the  church,  tlie  public 
assembly — i.  e.  for  the  purpose  of  worsiiip  and, 
as  we  see  from  tlie  next  clause,  for  preaching 
the  word:  and  taught  a  great  multitude 
(comp.  14  :  21),  many  of  whom,  no  doubt,  tliey 
won  to  a  reception  of  the  truth.  Meyer  ex- 
plains came  together  of  the  hospitality  shown 
to  the  teachers,  with  an  appeal  to  jNhitt.  25  :  35. 
But  the  context,  which  should  indicate  that 
sense,  is  opposed  to  it  here.  [Meyer's  last  ed. 
says :  To  he  browjht  together — i.  e.  to  join  them- 
selves for  common  work  "  —  an  explanation 
almost  identical  witli  Dr.  Hackett's. — A.  H.] — 
And  the  disciples  Avere  first  named 
Christians  at  Antioch.  Thus  ten  years  or 
more  elapsed  after  the  Saviour  left  the  earth 
before  the  introduction  of  this  name.  Its  origin 
is  left  in  some  uncertainty.  Xpiimavoi.  has  a 
Latin  termination,  like  'Hpiohiavoi,  in  Matt.  22  : 
16  and  Mark  3  :  6.  We  see  the  proper  Greek 
form  in  Na^wpaios,  in  2  :  22,  or  'iToAiKd?,  in  10  :  1. 
Hence  some  infer  (Olsh.,  Mcy.)  that  it  must 
have  been  the  Roman  inhabitants  of  the  city, 
not  the  Greeks,  who  invented  the  name.  The 
argument  is  not  decisive,  since  Latinisms  were 
not  unknown  to  the  Greek  of  this  period.  It 
is  evident  tliat  the  Jews  did  not  apply  it  first  to 
the  disciples,  for  they  would  not  have  admitted 
the  implication  of  the  term — viz.  that  Jesus  was 
the  Messiah.  It  is  improbable  that  the  Chris- 
tians themselves  assumed  it ;  such  an  origin 
would  be  inconsistent  with  its  infrequent  use 
in  the  New  Testament.  It  occurs  only  in 
26  :  28 ;  1  Pet.  4  :  16,  and  in  both  places  pro- 
ceeds from  those  out  of  the  church.  The 
worthy  name  by  which  ye  are  called,  in  James 
2  :  7.  may  be  the  Christian  name.  The  be- 
lievers' at  Antioch  had  become  numerous ; 
they  consisted  of  Gentiles  and  Jews;  it  was 
evident  that  they  were  a  distinct  community 
from  the  latter;  and  probably  the  lieatlien, 
whether  thev  were  Greeks  or  Romans  or  na- 


tive Syrians,  needing  a  new  appellation  for  the 
new  sect,  called  them  Christians,  because  the 
name  of  Christ  was  so  prominent  in  their  doc- 
trine, conversation,  and  worship.  The  term 
may  not  have  been  at  first  opprobrious,  but 
distinctive  merely.  [The  last  ed.  of  Meyer 
agrees  with  Dr.  Hackett :  "  The  origin  of  the 
name  must  be  derived  from  the  heathen  in 
Antioch."  In  a  note  he  remarks  :  "  Ewald  (p. 
441,  etc.)  conjectures:  from  the  Roman  magis- 
trates;" but  evidently  witliout  approving  this 
conjecture. —A.  H.] 

27-30.  BARNABAS  AND  SAUL  ARE 
SENT   WITH   ALMS  TO   JERUSALEM. 

27.  In  these  days — t.  e.  about  the  time 
that  Paul  himself  came  to  Antioch;  for  it  is 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  an  interval  of  some 
extent  occurred  Ijctween  the  prediction  and  the 
famine. —  Prophets,  inspired  teachers. 
(See  on  2  :  17.)  Agabus,  at  least,  possessed 
the  prophetic  gift,  in  the  strict  sense  of  that 
expression. 

28.  Having  stood  up,  in  order  to  declare 
his  message  more  formally. — Agabus  is  known 
only  from  this  passage  and  21  :  10. — 3Iade 
known  (see  25  :  27),  not  intimated  merely. — 
Famine  (Ai/Ltoi-),  in  the  later  Greek,  is  mascu- 
line or  feminine;  hence  some  copies  have  a 
masculine  adjective,  great ;  others,  a  feminine 
(See  W.  ?  8.  2.  1  ) — Was  about  to  be  contains 
a  double  future,  as  in  24  :  15 ;  27  :  10.  The  read- 
ing varies  in  24  :  25.  As  one  of  its  uses,  the  first 
infinitive  in  such  a  case  may  represent  the  act 
as  fixed,  certain;  the  second,  as  future.  The 
fomine  that  was  to  take  place  was  decreed. 
(See  Mt.  ^  498.  e;  C.  ^  583.)— Over  all  the 
inhabited  land — (.  e.  Judea  and  the  adjacent 
countries,  or,  according  to  some,  the  Roman 
Empire.  The  Greek  and  Roman  writers  em- 
ployed the  inliabited  (land)  (^  oiKov^evri)  to  de- 
note the  Greek  and  the  Roman  world,  and  a 
Jewish  writer  would  naturally  employ  such  a 
term  to  denote  the  Jewish  world.  Josephus 
appears  to  restrict  the  word  to  Palestine  in 
Antf.,  8.  13.  4.  Speaking  of  the  efforts  of  Ahab 
to  find  the  prophet  Elijah,  he  says  that  tlie 
king    sent    messengers    in     pursuit    of    him 


142 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XII. 


29  Then  the  disciples,  every  man  according  to  his 
ability,  determined  to  send  "relief  unto  the  brethren 
which  dwelt  in  Judtea: 

Hd  'Which  also  they  did,  and  sent  it  to  the  elders  by 
the  hands  of  Uaruabas  and  ISaul. 


29  And  the  disciples,  every  man  according  to  his  abilitj', 
determined  to  send  'relief  unto  th     brethren  that 

30  dwelt  in  Judiea:  which  also  they  did,  sending  it  to 
the  elders  by  the  hand  of  Barnabas  and  Saul. 


N 


OW  about  that  time  Herod  the  king  stretched  forth 
his  hands  to  vex  certain  of  the  church. 


CHAPTER    XII. 

1     Now  about  that  time  Herod  the  king  put  forth 


a  Rom.  15  :  26 ;  1  Cor.  16  : 1  ;  2  Cor.  9  :  1. . .  .6  ch.  12  :  25.- 


-1  Gr.  for  ministry. 


throughout  all  the  earth,  or  land — i.  e.  of 
the  Jews.  Ancient  vvritens  give  no  account  of  any 
universal  famine  in  the  reign  of  Claudius,  but 
they  speak  of  several  local  famines  which  were 
severe  in  particular  countries.  Josephus  {AiM., 
20.  2.  6;  lb.,  5.  2)  mentions  one  which  prevailed 
at  that  time  in  Judea  and  swept  away  many  of 
the  inhabitants.  Helena,  Queen  of  Adiabene, 
a  Jewish  pro.selyte,  who  Wit.s  then  at  Jerusalem, 
imported  provisions  from  Egypt  and  Cyprus, 
which  she  distributed  among  the  people  to 
save  them  from  starvation.  This  is  the  famine, 
probably,  to  which  Luke  refers  here.  The 
chronology  admits  of  this  supposition.  Ac- 
cording to  Josephus,  the  famine  which  he  de- 
scribes took  place  when  Cuspius  Fadus  and 
Tiberius  Alexander  were  procurators — i.  e.  as 
Lardner  suggests,  it  may  have  begun  about  the 
close  of  A.  D.  44  and  lajsted  three  or  four  years. 
Fadus  was  sent  into  Judea  on  the  death  of 
Agrippa,  which  occurred  in  August  of  the 
year  a.  d.  44.  If  we  attach  the  wider  sense  to 
the  word  {oiKovy.evy)v),  the  prediction  may  im- 
port that  a  famine  should  take  place  through- 
out the  Roman  Empire  during  the  reign  of 
Claudius  (the  year  is  not  specified  below),  and 
not  that  it  should  prevail  in  all  parts  at  the 
same  time.  (So  Wordsworth,  Notes,  p.  58.) — 
In  (lit.  upon)  the  reign  of  Claudius.  On 
cn-i  {upon)  in  such  chronological  designations, 
see  K.  I  273.  4.  b.  The  Greek  idiom  views  the 
events  as  resting  upon  the  ruler  as  their  source 
or  author ;  the  English  idiom,  as  taking  place 
under  his  guidance  or  auspices. — Caesar  after 
Claudius  (T.  R.)  is  not  warranted. 

29.  Of  the  disciples  depends  by  attrac- 
tion on  every  one.  The  ordinary  construction 
would  be  (Mey.,  De  Wet.) :  The  disciples  in 
proportion  as  any  one  was  prospered 
determined  each  of  them,  etc.  The 
apostle  Paul  prescribes  the  same  rule  of  con- 
tribution in  1  Cor.  10  :  2.  For  the  augment  in 
•jCiTropeZro  (was  prospered),  see  on  2  :  26.  For 
every  one  after  a  plural  verb,  see  on  2  :  6. — 
For  relief — lit.  ministration ;  i.  e.  to  their 
wants.  The  act  here  suggests  the  idea  of  its 
result  or  object. — To  send — i.  e.  something. — 


In  Judea.  Not  the  capital  merely,  but  other 
parts  also,  since  the  famine  was  general  and  be- 
lievers were  found  in  ditferent  places.  (See  v.  1 
and  Gal.  1  :  22.) 

30.  Also  connects  did  with  determine : 
they  executed  their  determination. — Unto  the 
elders,  either  those  at  Jerusalem,  who  could 
easily  forward  the  supplies  to  the  destitute  else- 
where, or  those  in  Judea  at  large,  whom  the  mes- 
sengers visited  in  person.  The  latter  idea  presents 
itself  very  readily  from  Judea,  just  before,  and 
has  also  this  to  commend  it — that  Paul  would 
have  had  an  opportunity  to  preach  now  in  that 
province,  as  mentioned  in  2G :  20.  (See  note  there. ) 
— For  the  office  of  the  presbyters,  see  on  14  :  23. — 
Bapva/Sa  is  the  Doric  genitive  (of  Barnabas). 
(Comp.  19  :  14 ;  Luke  13  :  29 ;  John  1  :  43,  etc. 
W.  ?  8.  1 ;  K.  f  44.  R.  2.)— Meyer  finds  a  con- 
tradiction between  this  passage  and  Gal.  2  :  1, 
as  if  Paul  could  not  have  gone  to  Jerusalem  at 
this  time,  because  he  has  not  mentioned  it  in 
the  Epistle.  It  is  impossible  to  see  why  the 
reason  commonly  assigned  for  this  omission 
does  not  account  for  it.  Paul's  object  in  writ- 
ing to  the  Galatian*  does  not  require  him  to 
enumerate  all  his  journeys  to  Jerusalem.  In 
the  first  chapter  there  he  would  prove  that  as 
an  apostle  he  was  independent  of  all  human 
authority ;  and  in  the  second  chapter,  that  the 
other  apostles  had  conceded  to  him  that  inde- 
pendence. He  had  no  occasion,  therefore,  to 
recapitulate  his  entire  history.  Examples  of 
the  facts  in  his  life  were  all  that  he  needed  to 
bring  forward.  He  was  not  bound  to  show 
how  often  he  had  been  at  Jerusalem,  but  only 
that  he  had  gone  thither  once  and  again,  under 
circumstances  which  showed  in  what  character 
he  claimed  to  act  and  how  fully  the  other  apos- 
tles had  acknowledged  this  claim. 


1,  2.  RENEWED  PERSECUTION  AT  JE- 
RUSALEM, AND  DEATH  OF  JAMES. 

1.  About  that  time—?,  c  when  Barnabas 
and  Saul  went  to  Jerusalem,  as  has  just  been 
related.     (See  on  v.  25.)— Herod.     This  Herod 


Cii.  XI r.] 


THE  ACTS. 


143 


2  And  he  killed  James  "the  brother  of  John  with  the 
sword. 

;i  And  because  he  saw  it  pleased  the  Jews,  he  pro- 
ceeded furtlier  to  take  I'eter  also.  ^Then  were  'the 
days  of  unleavened  bread.) 

4  .\ lid  "'when  he  had  apprehended  him,  he  put /(/»» 
in  prison,  and  delivered  him  to  four  (luateinions  of 
.'iokliers  to  keep  him  ;  iuleudiug  after  La-ster  to  bring 
him  forth  to  the  people. 

r)  I'eter  therefore  was  kept  'in  prison :  but  prayer 


2  his  liands  to  afflict  certain  of  the  church.  And  he 
killed  .lames  the  brother  of  John  with  llie  sword. 

3  And  when  he  saw  that  it  pleased  the  .lews,  he  pro- 
ceeded to  sei/.e  Peter  also     And  Hul-^i-  were  the  days 

4  of  unleavened  bread.  And  wlien  he  liad  taken  him, 
he  put  him  in  prison,  and  delivered  him  to  four 
((uaternions  of  soldiers  to  f^uard  him ;  intending 
after  tlie  I'assover  to  bring  him  fortli  to  the  people. 

5  I'eter  therefore  was  kept  in  the  prison:  but  prayer 


a. Matt.  4  :  21  ;  20  :  23.... i  Ex.  12  :  14,  15  ;  23  :  15.... c  John  21  :  18. 


Wii.s  Hcrocl  Agrippa  I.,  son  of  Aristobiilus,  and 
gfanilson  of  Herod  the  Great.  On  the  acces- 
.'sion  of  Caligula  lie  received,  as  king,  the  for- 
mer possessions  of  Philip  and  Ly.sanias  (see 
Lulce  3  :  1);  at  a  later  period,  the  tctrarohy  of 
Antipiis;  and  in  the  year  A.  D.  41,  Samaria  and 
Judea,  which  were  conferred  on  him  by  Clau- 
dius ;  so  tiiat,  Hive  his  grandfather  Herod,  he 
swayed  the  sceptre  at  this  time  over  all  Pales- 
tine.'— Stretched  forth  his  hands  does  not 
mean  attempted  (Kuin.),  but  put  forth 
violent  hands.  (Coinp.  4:3;  5:18;  21: 
27.) — To  oppress,  multrent.  The  E.  Version 
derives  "vex"  from  Tyndale. — Of  the  church 
(lit.  from),  since  the  idea  of  origin  passes  read- 
ily into  that  of  property,  adherence.  (W. 
g'47.  4.) 

2.  Slew  him  with  the  sword,  beheaded 
him.  The  article  fails,  because  the  idea  is 
general,  abstract.  (Comp.  9  :  12.  W.  ?  19.  1.) 
On  the  mode  of  execution  among  the  Jews,  see 
Jahn's  ArvlucuL,  i/i  257.  Agrippa  had  the  power 
of  life  and  death,  since  he  administered  the 
government  in  the  name  of  the  Romans.  (See 
the  note  on  7  :  59.)  The  victim  of  his  violence 
was  James  the   Elder,  a  son  of  Zebedee  and 

brother     of     John      (Matt.  4:21 ;  10  :  2;  Mark  1  :  19,  etc.). 

He  is  to  be  distinguished  from  James  the 
Younger,  the  kinsman  of  the  Lord  (oai.  1:19), 
who  is  the  individual  meant  under  this  name 
in  the  remainder  of  the  history  (v.i7;i5:i3;2i:i8). 
The  end  of  James  verified  the  i)rediction  that 
he  should  drink  of  his  Master's  cup.  (See 
Matt.  20  :  23.)  Eusebius  (2.  9)  records  a  tradi- 
tion that  the .  apostle's  accuser  was  converted 
by  his  testimony  and  beheaded  at  the  same 
time  with  him.  "The  accuracy  of  the  sacred 
writer,"  says  Palcy,  "  in  the  expressions  which 
lie  uses  here,  is  remarkable.  There  was  no 
portion  of  time  for  thirty  yeiirs  before,  or  ever 
afterwaM,  in  which  there  was  a  king  at  Jeru- 
salem, a  person  exercising  that  authority  in 
Judea,  or  to  whom  that  title  could  be  applied, 
except  the  last  three  years  of  Herod's  life, 
witiiin  which  period  the  transaction  here  re- 
corded took  place."    The  kingdom  of  Agrippa 


II.,  who  is  mentioned  in  25  :  13,  did  not  em- 
brace Judea. 
3-5.  THE  IMPRISONMENT  OF  PETER. 

3.  Seeing  that  it  is  pleasing,  etc.  The 
motive  of  Agrippa,  therefore,  was  a  desire  to 
gain  public  favor.  Josephus  {Antt.,  19.  7.  3) 
attributes  to  this  ruler  the  same  trait  of  charac- 
ter; he  describes  him  as  eager  to  ingratiate  him- 
self with  the  Jews.— He  apprehended  still 
further  Peter  also,  an  imitation  of  the  Heb. 
v<i)j\j(m'ph  with  the  inlinitive.  (Comp.  Luke 
20  :  11,  12.  W.  ?J54.  5;  Gesen.,  Ileh.  Gr.,  g  139.) 
— The  days  of  unleavened  bread — i.  e.  the 
festival  of  the  i>a.ssover,  which  continued  seven 
days,  and  wiis  so  named  because  during  that 
time  no  leaven  was  allowed  in  the  houses  of 
the  Jews.  The  common  text  omits  the  before 
days,  which  the  best  editors  insert  as  well 
attested.  It  is  not  grammaticallv  necessary. 
(W.  §  W.  2.) 

4.  Also  carries  the  mind  back  to  to  take 
{(rvWafidv),  in  v.  3,  the  idea  of  which  appre- 
hended (TTiao-a?)  repeats. — To  four  quater- 
nions, four  companies  of  four,  who  were  to  re- 
lieve each  other  in  guarding  the  prison.  The 
Jews  at  this  time  followed  the  Roman  practice  of 
dividing  the  night  into  four  watches,  consisting 
of  three  hours  each.  Of  the  four  soldiers  em- 
ployed at  the  same  time,  two  watched  in  the 
prison  and  two  before  the  door,  or  perhaps,  in 
this  case  (see  on  v.  10),  were  all  stationed  on 
the  outside. — x>Ieaning,  i)ut  disa])pointtHl  in 
that  purpose. — After  the  passover — i.  e.  not 
the  pa'Jchal  supper,  but  the  festival  which  it 
introduced.  (Comp.  Luke  21  :  1 ;  .John  0:4.) 
The  rea.^^on  for  deferring  the  execution  was  tliat 
the  .stricter  Jews  regarded  it  as  a  profanation  to 
put  a  person  to  death  during  a  religious  festival. 
Agrippa  himself  may  have  entertained,  or  af- 
fected to  entertain,  that  scruple. — To  bring 
him  up — i.  e.  for  trial  and  execution.  (Comp. 
Luke  22  :  (>6.)  But  Herod  was  nearer  his  end 
than  Peter. — For  the  people  (dat.  comm.) — 
i.e.  that  they  might  be  gratilied  with  his  de^th. 

3.  Therefore,  committed  to  such  a  guard. 
— In  the  prison,  mentioned  in  v.  4. — Intent, 


*  See  Introductiun,  J  6.  2. 


144 


THE  ACTS. 


LCh.  XIL 


■was  made  without  ceasing  of  tlie  church  unto  God  for 
him. 

6  And  when  Herod  would  have  brought  hini  forth, 
tiie  same  night  I'eter  was  sleeping  between  two  sol- 
diers, bound  with  two  chains:  and  the  keepers  before 
the  door  kept  tlie  prison. 

7  And,  behold,  "the  angel  of  the  Lord  came  upon 
him,  and  a  light  shined  in  the  prLson  :  and  he  smote 
Peter  on  the  side,  ai  d  raised  him  up,  saying,  Arise  up 
quickly.     And  his  chains  fell  oft'  from  hi.-,  hands. 

M  And  the  angel  said  unto  him,  bird  thyself,  and 
bind  on  thy  sandals.  And  so  he  did.  And  he  saith 
unto  him,  Cast  thy  garment  about  thee,  and  follow 
me. 

y  And  he  went  out,  and  followed  him  ;  and  'wist  not 
that  it  was  true  which  was  done  by  the  angel;  but 
thought  ''he  saw  a  vision. 

10  When  they  were  past  the  first  and  the  second 
ward,  they  came  unto  the  iron  gate  that  leadeth  unto 
the  city;  ''which  opened  to  them  of  his  own  accord: 


was  made  earnestly  of  the  chur  h  unto  (iod  for  him. 

6  And  when  Herod  was  about  to  bring  him  Ibrth,  the 
same  night  I'eter  was  sleeping  between  two  soldiers, 
bound  with  two  chains;  and  guards  before  the  door 

7  kept  the  prison.  And  behold,  an  angel  of  the  Lord 
stood  by  him,  and  a  light  shined  in  the  cell:  and 
he  smote  1  eter  on  the  side,  and  awoke  him,  saying, 
Kise  up  quickly.     And  his  cliains  fell  oft'  from  his 

8  hands.  And  the  angel  said  unto  him,  tiird  thyself, 
ai  d  bind  on  thy  sandals.  Aid  he  did  so.  Aiid  he 
saith  unto  him,  (  ast  thy  garment  about  thee,  and 

9  follow  me.  And  he  went  out,  and  followed;  and  he 
knew  not  that  it  was  true  which  was  doi  e  'by  the 

10  angel,  but  thought  he  saw  a  vision.  And  when 
they  were  past  the  first  and  the  second  ward,  they 
came  unto  the  iron  gate  that  leadeth  into  the  city  ; 


och.  5:  19.... 6  Ps.  126  :  1....C  cli.  10  :  3,  17  ;  11  :  5....d  ch.  16  :  26.- 


.  Or,  through 


earnest,  not  unceasing,  constant.  [Better,  tlie 
adverb,  intently,  earnestly  (eKTevCn).  SoLacli., 
Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  etc.— A.  H.]  (See 
Luke  22  :  44 ;  1  Pet.  4:8.)  It  is  a  word  of  the 
later  Greek.  (Loh.,  Ad  Phryn.,  p.  311.)  All  the 
English  translators  from  Wiclif  downward 
adopt  the  temporal  sense. — Church.  The 
members  of  the  church  were  so  numerous  that 
they  must  have  met  in  different  companies. 
One  of  them  is  mentioned  in  v.  12. 

6-11.  THE  MIRACULOUS  LIBERATION 
OF  PETER. 

6.  In  that  night,  preceding  the  day  when 
he  was  to  liave  been  executed. — Bound  with 
two  chains.  The  Roman  mode  of  chaining 
prisoners  was  adopted  in  this  case,  and  was  the 
following  :  "  The  soldier  who  was  appointed  to 
guard  a  particular  prisoner  had  the  chain  fast- 
ened to  the  wrist  of  his  left  hand,  the  right  re- 
maining at  liberty.  The  prisoner,  on  the  con- 
trary, had  the  chain  fastened  to  the  wrist  of  his 
right  hand.  The  prisoner  and  the  soldier  who 
had  the  care  of  him  were  said  to  be  tied  (alli- 
gati)  to  one  another.  Sometimes,  for  greater 
security,  the  prisoner  was  chained  to  two 
soldiers,  one  on  each  side  of  him"  {Diet,  of 
Antiq.,  art.  ^^  Catena").  Paul  was  bound  with 
two  chains  on  the  occasion  mentioned  in  21  : 
33. — And  keepers  before  the  door  (perhai)s 
two  at  one  station  and  two  at  another)  w^ere 
guarding  the  prison,  not,  after  v.  5,  were 
keeping  guard  (Raph.,  Walch). 

7.  In  the  abode  =  the  prison.  This  was 
an  Attic  euphemism  which  passed  at  length 
into  the  common  dialect. — Having  smitten, 
in  order  to  rouse  him  from  sleep. — Arise 
(acauTa)  is  a  sccoiid  aorist  imperative.  (Coinp. 
Eph.  5  :  14.)  Grammarians  represent  the  form 
as  poetic  in  the  earlier  Greek.  (K.  ^  172.  R.  5; 
W.  ?  14.  1.  h.)— His  chains  fell  off  from 
his    hands,   or ,  wrists.     Hand    (x«t»    the 


Greeks  could  use  of  the  entire  fore-arm  or  any 
part  of  it. 

8.  Gird  thyself.  For  convenience,  he  had 
unbound  the  girdle  of  his  tunic  while  he  slept. 
The  garment  {'nxaTiov)  which  he  threw  around 
him  was  the  outer  coat,  or  mantle,  worn  over 
the  tunic  (xt-riiy).  There  was  no  occasion  for 
a  precipitate  flight,  and  the  articles  which  he 
was  directed  to  take  would  be  useful  t(j  him. 
Note  the  transition  to  the  i^resent  in  the  last 
two  imperatives. 

9.  True,  actual,  as  distinguished  from  a 
dream  or  vision.  Peter's  uncertainty  arose 
from  the  extraordinary  nature  of  the  interpo- 
sition ;  it  was  too  strange  to  be  credited.  He 
was  bewildered  by  the  scene,  unable  at  the 
moment  to  comprehend  that  what  he  saw  and 
did  was  a  reality. 

10.  Having  passed  through  the  first 
and  second  watch — ;'.  c.  as  Walch  [De  viiicnlis 
Petri)  suggests,  flrst  through  the  two  soldiers 
stationed  at  Peter's  door  (v.  e),  and  then  through 
two  others  near  the  gate  which  led  into  the 
city.  He  supposes  the  two  soldiers  to  whom 
Peter  was  bound  (v.  a)  were  not  included  in  the 
sixteen  (v.  4),  since  their  office  would  not  re- 
quire them  to  remain  awake,  and  consequently 
to  be  changed  during  the  night,  like  the  others. 
A  more  common  opinion  is  that  the  first 
watch  was  a  single  soldier  before  the  door, 
and  the  second  another  at  the  iron  gate,  and 
that  these  two  soldiers,  with  the  two  by  the 
side  of  Peter,  made  up  the  quaternion  then  on 
duty.  But  having  passed  through  suggests 
a  plural  sense  of  watch,  and  must  be  said 
loosely,  if  applied  to  a  single  person.  This 
participle  after  went  out,  in  v.  9,  indicates  a 
different  position  of  the  first  watch  from  that 
of  the  two  soldiers  who  guarded  Peter  in  his 
cell.  Some  liave  proposed  that  explanation. 
The  numeral  renders  the  article  unnecessary. 


Ch.  XII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


145 


and  they  went  out,  and  passed  on  through  one  street ; 
and  forthwith  the  angel  departed  from  him. 

11  Ai  d  when  I'eter  was  come  to  himself,  he  said. 
Now  I  know  of  a  surety,  that  "the  Lord  hath  sent  his 
angel,  and  'hath  delivered  me  out  of  the  hand  of 
ilerod,  and  from  all  the  expectation  of  the  people  of 
the  Jews. 

12  And  when  he  had  considered  the  thing,  «he  came 
to  the  house  of  Mary  the  mother  of  ■'John,  whose  sur- 
name was  Mark  ;  where  many  were  gathered  together 
'praying. 

i;{  And  as  Peter  knocked  at  the  door  of  the  gate,  a 
damsel  came  to  hearken,  named  Rhoda. 

14  And  when  slie  knew  I'eter's  voice,  she  opened  not 
the  gate  for  gladness,  but  ran  in,  and  told  how  i^eter 
stood  before  the  gate. 

15  And  they  said  unto  her,  Thou  art  mad.  But  she 
constantly  attirmed  that  it  was  even  so.  Then  said 
they,  /It  is  his  angel. 


■which  opened  to  them  of  its  own  accord :  and  they 
went  out,  and   passed  on  through  one  street;   and 

11  straightway  the  angel  dei)arted  from  him.  And 
when  I'eter  was  come  to  himself,  he  said,  Now  I 
know  of  a  truth,  that  the  Lord  hath  sent  forth  his 
angel  and  delivered  me  out  of  the  hand  of  Ilerod, 
and  from  all  the  expectation  of  the  people  of  the 

12  Jews.  And  when  he  had  considered  IIih  lliiixj,  he 
came  to  the  house  of  .Mary  the  mother  of  John 
whose  surname  was  .Mark;  where  many  were  galh- 

ISered  together  and  were  praying.  And  when  he 
knocked  at  the  door  of  the  gate,  a  maid  came  to 

14  answer,  named  Lhoda.  And  when  she  knew  Pe- 
ter's voice,  she  opened  not  the  gate  for  joy,  but  ran 

15  in,  and  told  that  Peter  stood  before  the  gate.  And 
they  said  unto  her,  Thou  art  mad.  But  she  con- 
lidently  affirmed  that  it  was  even  so.     And  they 


aPs.  34  :  7;  Dan.  3  :  28  ;  6  ;  •.!2  ;  Heb.  1  :  14....J  Job  5:  19;  Ps.  33  :  18,  19;  34:22;  41  :  2  ;  97  :  10;  2  Cor.  1  :  10  ;  2  Pet.  2  : 
cch.  4  :  -ii dclj.  15  :  37....e  ver.  5 /  Gen.  48  :  16 ;  Matt.  18  :  10. 


(W.  I  19.  2.)  That  Peter  passed  the  watch  un- 
opposed, or  perhaps  unobserved  (see  v.  18),  was 
a  part  of  the  miracle.  (See  on  5  :  19.) — Unto 
the  iron  gate,  etc.  The  precise  situation  of 
tlic  prison  is  unknown.  The  iron  gate  may 
liave  formed  the  termination  of  a  'court,  or 
avenue,  which  connected  the  prison  with  the 
town.  De  Wette,  after  Liglitfoot,  Walch,  and 
others,  thinks  that  the  prison  was  in  a  tower 
between  the  two  walls  of  the  city,  and  that  this 
was  the  outer  gate  of  the  tower.  Others  have 
proposed  other  conjectures. — Of  itself  is  equiv- 
alent to  an  adverb,  spontaneously.  (K.  I  264. 
3.  c;  B.  {i  123.  G.)  The  gate  opened  without 
any  visible  cause. — Went  forward  one  street, 
or  lane  (9 :  ii).  The  angel  accompanied  him 
tintil  he  was  beyond  the  reach  of  pui-suit. — 
Immediately,  on  having  come  thus  far. 

11.  Having  come  to  himself,  recovered 
from  the  confusion  of  mind  into  which  he  had 
been  thrown. — Sent  forth,  from  heaven.— 
From  all  the  expectation,  of  the  Jews, 
who  were  so  eager  for  his  execution,  and  look- 
ing forward  to  it  with  confidence. 

12-17.  PETER  REPAIRS  TO  THE  HOUSE 
OF  MARY,  WHERE  SOME  OF  THE 
BELIEVERS  HAD  ASSEMBLED  FOR 
PRAYER. 

13.  Having  become  aware  (i4:6),  con- 
scious to  him.self  of  the  state  of  things.  ( Wlil., 
Alf ,  Mey.)  Luke  reminds  us  of  this  fact  again 
(see  v.  11),  as  if  it  might  appear  strange  that 
Peter  acted  with  so  much  deliberation.  Some 
render  considering — i.  e.  either  what  he  should 
do  or  where  he  should  find  an  assembly  of  the 
disciples.  Both  the  meaning  and  the  tense  of 
tlie  participle  favor  this  explanation  less  than 
the  other.— John  .  .  .  Mark.  This  John  Mark 
is  called  simjily  John  in  13  :  5,  13,  and  Mark 
in  15  :  39.  He  is  supposed  to  have  been  the 
10 


same  Mark  whom  Peter  terms  his  son  in  1  Pet. 
5  :  13 — i.  e.  in  a  spiritual  sense,  converted  by  his 
instrumentality.  There  is  no  reason  for  ques- 
tioning his  identity  with  the  evangelist  who 
wrote  the  Gospel  of  Mark.  (See,  further,  on 
v.  25.) — Praying.  One  of  the  objects  for 
which  they  were  praying  was  the  safety  of 
Peter  (v.  5;. 

13.  A  maid-servant.  Her  Greek  name, 
Rhoda,  does  not  disprove  her  Jewish  origin. 
(See  on  1  :  23.)  The  porter  among  the  Jews 
was  commonly  a  female.  (See  John  18  :  KJ.) 
That  the  person  sIkjuUI  be  known  after  so  long 
a  time  shows  how  minute  was  Luke's  informa- 
tion.— To  hearken  {viraKov<Tai).  This  was  the 
classical  term  signifying  to  answer  a  knock  or 
call  at  the  door. 

14.  And  having  recognized  his  voice 
(3 :  10;  4:  i,f).  Petor  may  be  supposed  to  have 
announced  his  name,  or  to  have  given  it  in 
reply  to  her  intpiiry. — For  gladness.  Noth- 
ing could  be  more  lifelike  than  the  description 
of  the  scene  wliich  follows.  Rhoda,  in  the 
excess  of  her  joy,  forgets  to  open  the  door, 
runs  into  the  house,  declares  the  news,  while 
Peter  is  left  in  the  street  still  knocking  and  ex- 
posed to  arrest.  The  passage  has  all  the  vivid- 
ness of  the  recital  of  an  eye-witness.  Mark  was 
undoubtedly  in  the  house  at  the  time,  and  may 
have  communicated  the  circumstances  to  Luke 
at  Antioch,  or  Luke  may  have  obtained  his  in- 
formation from  Barnabas,  who  was  a  relative 
of  the  fomily.     (See  Col.  4  :  10.) 

15.  Suaxvpiitro,  affirmed  confidently. — It 
is  his  angel — /.  i\  his  tutelary  angel,  with  his 
form  and  features.  It  was  a  common  belief 
among  the  Jews,  says  Lightfoot,  that  every 
individual  has  a  guardian  angel,  and  that 
this  angel  may  assume  a  visible  apjicarance 
resembling  that  of  the  person  whose  destiny  is 


146 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XII. 


Ifi  But  Peter  continued  knocking:  and  when  they 
had  opened  tlie  door,  and  saw  him,  they  were  aston- 
ished. 

17  But  he,  "beckoning  unto  them  with  the  hand  to 
hold  their  peace,  declared  unto  them  how  the  Lord  had 
brought  him  out  of  the  prison.  And  he  said,  Uo  shew 
these  things  unto  James,  and  to  the  brethren.  And  he 
departed,  and  went  into  another  place. 

18  Now  as  soon  as  it  was  day,  there  was  no  small  stir 
among  the  soldiers,  what  was  become  of  Peter. 

19  And  when  Herod  had  sought  for  him,  and  found 
him  not,  he  e.\amined  the  keepers,  and  commanded 
that  t/icy  should  be  put  to  death.  And  he  went  down 
from  J  udea  to  C'iesarea,  and  there  abode. 


16  said.  It  is  his  angel.  But  Peter  continued  knock- 
ing: and  when  they  had  opened,  they  saw  him,  and 

17  were  amazed.  1  ut  he,  beckoning  unto  them  with 
the  hand  to  hold  their  peace,  declared  unto  them 
how  the  Lord  had  brought  him  forth  out  of  the  prison. 
And  he  said,  Tell  these  things  unto  .lames,  and  to 
the  brethren.     And  he  departed,  and  went  to  an- 

18  other  place.  Now  as  soon  as  it  was  day,  there  was 
no  small  stir  among  the  soldiers,  what  was  become 

19  of  Peter.  And  when  Herod  had  sought  for  him, 
and  found  him  not,  he  exaniin  d  the  guards,  and 
commanded  that  they  should  be  'put  to  death.  And 
he  went  down  from  Judtea  to  C'aisarea,  and  tarried 
there. 


a  cb.  13  :  16  I  19  :  :<3  ;  21  :  40.- 


-1  Gr.  led  away  to  deaths 


committed  to  him.  This  idea  appears  here,  not 
as  a  docrine  of  the  Scriptures,  but  as  a  popular 
opinion  which  is  neither  affirmed  nor  denied. 

17.  Having  motioned   with    the    hand 
downward,  as  a  signal  that  he  would  speak 
and  wished  them  to  hear.     Their  joy  was  so 
tumultuous  that  he  could  make  them  under- 
stand a  gesture  better  than  a  word. — To  hold 
their  peace.     His  object  was  not  to  prevent 
their  being  overheard,  and  so   discovered,  by 
their  enemies,  but  to  secure  to  himself  an  op- 
portunity to  inform  them  how  he   had  been 
liberated. — The  Lord,  as  the  angel  had  been 
sent  by  him.     (See  vv.  7,  11.)— James  is  dis- 
tinguished from  the  others  on  account  of  his 
office  as  pastor  of  the  church  at  Jerusalem. 
(See  on  v.  2.)— And   (probably  on  the  same 
night)    having    gone    forth — i.  e.   from   the  j 
house,  as  the  context  most  readily  suggests;  \ 
hence  into  another  place  is  indefinite,  and  j 
may  denote  unto  another  place,  in  the  city 
or  out  of  it.    It  is  mo.st  probable  that  he  left  the 
city  for  a  time,  as  he  must  have  foreseen  (see 
V.  19)  that  vigorous  efforts  would  be  made  to 
retake  and  destroy  him.     We  find  him  at  Jeru- 
salem again  a  few  years  after  this.     (See  15  :  7.) 
He  may  have  returned  even  sooner  than  tliat, 
as  Agrippa  lived  but  a  short  time  after  this 
occurrence.     Catholic  writers  and  some  others 
hold  that  Peter  proceeded  to  Rome  at  this  time, 
and  labored  for  the  Jews  there  as  the  apostle  of 
the  Circumcision  (oai.  2 : 7 ;  i  Pet.  1 : 1).     If  this  be 
true,  he  must  have  then  been  the  founder  of  the 
church  in  that  city,  or,  at  all  events,  have  es- 
tablished a  relation  to  it,  personal  and  official, 
stronger  than  that  of  any  other  teacher.     It  is 
entirely  adverse  to  this  view  that  Paul  makes 
no  allusion  to  Peter  in  his  Epistle  to  the  Ro- 
mans, but  writes  with  a  tone  of  authority  which 
his  avowed  policy,  his  spirit  of  independence 
(2  Cor.  10 :  16),   would  not  liavc  suffered  him  to 
employ  had  it  belonged  more  properly  to  some 
other  apostle  to  instruct  and  guide  the  Roman 
church.     The  best  opinion  from  traditionary 
sources  is  that  Peter  arrived  at  Rome  just  before 


the  outbreak  of  Nero's  persecution,  where  he  soon 
perished  as  a  martyr.  It  is  related  that  he  was 
placed  on  the  cross,  at  his  own  request,  with 
his  head  downward,  as  if  unworthy  to  suffer 
in  the  posture  of  the  Master  whom  he  had  de- 
nied. [Compare,  on  this  question.  Was  Peter  in 
Borne  and  Bishop  of  the  Church  at  Borne?  by  J. 
EUendorf,  translated  in  Bib.  Sacra,  xv.  pp.  569- 
621  and  xvi.  pp.  82-106 ;  also  Schaff's  Hist,  of 
the  Apostolic  Church  (New  York,  1854),  pp.  348- 
374.— A.  H.] 

18,  19.  TRIAL  AND  EXECUTION  OP 
THE  SOLDIERS. 

18.  When  day  had  come.  If  the  soldiers 
to  whom  Peter  was  bound  had  been  changed 
at  the  expiration  of  each  watch  (see  on  v.  10), 
why  did  they  not  ascertain  the  escape  sooner  ? 
Wieseler  {Chronologie,  u.  s.  w.,  p.  220)  replies 
that  the  flight  took  place  in  the  last  watch,  not 
long  before  break  of  day.  This  is  doubtful,  as 
it  would  abridge  so  much  the  time  allowed  for 
the  interview  at  the  house  of  Mary  and  for  the 
departure  from  the  city.  The  question  requires 
no  answer  if  Walch's  opinion,  as  stated  in  v. 
10,  be  well  founded.— Stir,  commotion,  jiar- 
taking  of  the  nature  both  of  inquiry  and  alarm. 
The  former  part  of  the  idea  leads  the  way  to  the 
question  which  follows.  There  was  reason  for 
fear,  because  the  soldiers,  in  such  a  case,  were 
answerable  for  the  safety  of  the  prisoner,  and, 
if  he  escaped,  were  liable  to  suffer  the  punish- 
ment which  would  have  been  inflicted  on  him. 
(Comp.  16  :  27  ;  Matt.  28  :  14.)  Soldiers  would 
include  naturally  the  entire  sixteen  (v.  4),  though 
the  four  who  wer6  on  guard  at  the  time  of  the 
escape  had  most  reason  to  tremble  for  their 
lives. — What  then  (syllogistical,  since  he  was 
gone)  was  become  of  Peter? 

19.  Having  examined,  tried,  them  for  a 
breach  of  discipline.  (See  4:9;  Luke  23  :  14.) 
— We  need  not  impute  to  Herod  such  barbarity 
as  that  of  putting  to  death  the  entire  detach- 
ment.— Keepers  may  be  understood  of  those 
who  were  more  immediately  responsible  for 
the  prisoner's  safety.— To  be  led  away— i.  e. 


Ch.  XII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


147 


20  ^  And  Herod  was  highly  displeased  with  tlieiu  of 
Tyre  and  Sidon  :  but  they  came  with  one  accord  to 
hini,and,  having  made  Ulastus  the  king's  cliamberlaiu 
their  friend,  desired  i>eace;  because  "their country  was 
nourished  by  tl>e  king's  coiin/ri/. 

'il  Ard  upon  a  set  day  Herod,  arrayed  in  royal  ap- 
parel, sat  upon  his  throne,  and  made  an  oration  unto 
them. 

22  And  the  people  gave  Sishout,  saying.  It  is  the  voice 
of  a  god,  and  not  of  a  man.  , 


20  Now  he  was  highly  displeased  with  them  of  Tyre 
and  Sidon:  and  tliey  came  with  one  accord  to  him, 
and,  having  made  l.lastus  the  king's  chamberlain 
their   friend,  they  asked    for   peace,  because   their 

21  country  was  fed  from  the  kings  country.  And 
upon  a  set  day  Herod  arrayed  himself  in  royal  ap- 
parel, and  sat  on  the  'throne,  and  made  an  oratioa 

22  unto  them.    And  the  people  shouted,  saying,  The 


a  1  Kings  5  :  9,  11 ;  Ezek.  27  :  17. 


-1  Or,  judgment-teat 


to  execution.  The  word  was  a  vox  solennis  in 
this  sense,  as  Losner,  Kypke,  and  others  have 
shown.  The  Romans  employed  duccre  in  the 
same  absolute  way.— And  he  went  down, 
etc.  Herod  resided  usually  at  Jerusalem,  and 
went  now  to  C\e.sarea,  as  Josephus  informs  us, 
to  preside  at  the  public  games  in  honor  of  the 
Emperor  Claudius. 

20-24.  DEATH  OF  HEROD  AGRIPPA 
AT  C.ESAREA. 

20.  The  reader  should  compare  the  narra- 
tive of  this  event  with  that  of  Josephus  in 
Antt.,  19.  8.  2.  The  Jewish  historian  has  con- 
firmed Luke's  account  in  the  most  striking 
manner.  He  also  makes  Cajsarea  the  scene  of 
the  occurrence ;  he  mentions  the  assembly,  the 
oration,  the  robe,  the  impious  acclamations  of 
the  people,  the  sudden  death  of  Herod,  and 
adds  to  the  rest  that  his  terrible  end  was  a 
judgment  inflicted  upon  him  for  his  impiety. 
— Was  highly  displeased  may  refer  to  an 
open  war  or  violent  feeling  of  hostility.  As 
Josephus  makes  no  mention  of  any  actual  out- 
break between  Agripjia  and  the  Phoenicians, 
the  latter  is  probably  the  sense  of  the  word 
here.  The  Pha-nicians  may  either  have  ap- 
prehended a  war  as  the  result  of  Agrippa's 
anger,  or  they  may  have  been  threatened  with 
an  interruption  of  the  commerce  carried  on 
between  them  and  the  Jews. — Came  unto 
him — i.  e.  in  the  person  of  their  representa- 
tives;  lit.  were  present,  the  antecedent  motion 
being  applied.  (W.  §  50.  4.) — Having  per- 
suaded, brought  to  their  interest. — Blastus, 
judging  from  his  name,  may  have  been  a  Greek 
or  a  Roman.  His  influence  with  the  king  wtis 
the  reason  why  they  were  so  anxious  to  obtain 
his  mediation.  A  bribe  may  have  quickened 
his  symiiathy  with  the  strangers. — Over  his 
bedchamber,  his  chamberlain.  His  office 
placed  him  near  the  king's  person,  and  enabled 
him  to  hold  the  keys  to  his  heart  (Bmg.). — 
Desired  peace — i.  e.  according  to  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case  sought  to  avert  a  rupture  of 
it,  or,  if  it  was  already  impaired,  to  effect  its 
restoration.  Their  desire  for  this  result  may 
have  been  increased  by  the  existing  famine. — 
Because  their  country  was  sustained,  etc. 


The  Tyrians  and  Sidonians  were  a  commercial 
people,  and  procured  their  supplies  of  grain 
chiefly  from  Palestine  in  exchange  for  their 
own  merchandise.  This  relation  of  the  two 
countries  to  each  other  had  existed  from  early 
times.  (See  1  Kings  5:9;  Ezra  3:7;  Ezek. 
27  :  17.) 

21.  On  an  appointed  day,  which,  accord- 
ing to  Josephus,  was  the  1st  of  August,  and  the 
second  day  of  the  public  games. — Arrayed,  etc. 
The  circumstances  related  by  Joscplius  may  be 
combined  (Conybeare  and  How.son,  i.  p.  158) 
with  Luke's  account,  as  follows:  "On  the  sec- 
ond day  of  the  festival  Agrippa  came  into  the 
theatre.  The  stone  seats,  rising  in  a  great  semi- 
circle, tier  above  tier,  were  covered  with  an  ex- 
cited multitude.  The  king  came  in  clothed  in 
magniflcent  robes,  of  wliicli  silver  was  the 
costly  and  brilliant  material.  It  was  early  in 
the  day,  and  the  sun's  rays  fell  upon  the  king ; 
so  that  the  eyes  of  the  beholders  were  dazzled 
with  the  brightness  which  surrounded  him. 
Voices  from  the  crowd,  here  and  there,  exclaimed 
tliat  it  was  the  apparition  of  something  divine. 
And  when  he  spoke  and  made  an  oration  to 
them,  they  gave  a  shout,  saying,  '  It  is  the  voice 
of  a  god,  and  not  of  a  man.'  But  in  the  midst 
of  this  idolatrous  ostentation  an  angel  of  God 
suddenly  smote  him.  He  was  carried  out  of 
the  theatre  a  dying  man,  and  on  the  Gth  of 
August  he  was  dead." — Upon  the  seat,  or 
throne,  provided  for  him  in  the  theatre.  (See 
on  19:29.)  Spoke  publicly,  because,  though 
lie  directed  his  speech  to  the  deputies,  he  was 
heard  also  by  the  people  who  were  present 
(v.  22).  The  PhoBnicians  were  there  as  suppli- 
ants for  peace,  and  the  king's  object  now  was 
to  announce  to  them  his  decision.  The  giving 
audience  to  ambassadors  and  replying  to  them 
in  public  was  not  jincommon  in  ancient  times. 
— Unto  them — ;'.  e.  the  Tyriaiis  and  Sidonians, 
as  represented  by  their  agents.  The  pronoun 
does  not  refer  to  the  common  people  iS^^o?). 
(See  W.  g  22.  3.  1.)  It  was  the  messengers,  not 
the  Coesareans,  who  awaited  the  king's  an- 
swer. 

22.  Shouted  thereupon,  again  and  again. 
It  enhanced  the  eloquence,  no  doubt,  that  what 


148 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


23  And  immediately  the  angel  of  the  Lord  "smote 
him,  because  'he  gave  not  God  the  glory  :  aud  he  was 
eaten  of  worms,  and  gave  up  the  ghost. 

24  f  But  'the  word  of  God  grew  and  multiijlied. 

25  And  Barnabas  and  Saul  returned  from  Jerusalem, 
when  they  had  fulfilled  their  ministry,  and  •'took  with 
them  'John,  whose  surname  was  Mark. 


23  voice  of  a  god,  and  not  of  a  man.  And  immediately 
an  angel  of  the  Lord  smote  him,  because  he  gave 
not  God  the  glory :  aud  he  was  eaten  of  worms,  and 
gave  up  the  ghost. 

24  But  the  word  of  God  grew  and  multiplied. 

2.5  And  Barnabas  and  Saul  returned  'from  Jerusalem, 
when  they  had  fultilled  their  ministration,  taking 
with  them  John  whose  surname  was  Maik. 


CHAPTER    XIII, 


NOW  there  were  /in  the  church  that  was  at  Antioch 
certain  prophets  and  teachers:  as  ^Barnabas,  and 
Simeon  that  was  called  Niger,  and  ''Lucius  of  Cyrene, 
and  Manaen,  which  had  been  brought  up  with  Herod 
the  tetrarch,  and  Saul. 


1  Now  there  were  at  Antioch,  in  the  church  that 
was  Iherf,  prophets  and  teachers,  Barnabas,  and 
Symeon  that  was  called  Niger,  and  1-ucius  of  C  y- 
rene,  and  Manaen  the  foster-brother  of  Herod  the 


a  1  Sam.  25  :  38  ;  2  Sam.  24  :  17 i  Ps.  115  :  1...  c  Isa.  55  :  11 ;  ch.  6  :  7  :  19  :  20 ;  Col.  1:6 d  ch.  l.T  :  5.  l.S ;  15  :  37 e  ver.  12' 

..../  ch.  11  :  27  ;  14  :  26;  15  :  35 £r  ch.  11  :  22-26.... ft  Eom.  16  ;  21. 1  Mauy  ancieut  authorities  read  to  Jcmaalcm. 


they  had  heard  accorded  with  their  wishes.  In 
such  a  city  the  bulk  of  the  assembly  would  be 
heathen  (see  on  8  :  40),  and  of  a  god  may  be 
taken  in  their  sense  of  the  term. 

23.  Because  he  gave  not  glory  to  God — 
i.  e.  did  not  repel  the  impious  flattery ;  was  will- 
ing to  receive  it.  Some  editors  insert  the  l)e- 
fore  glory. — And  having  been  eaten  with 
worms,  he  expired.  In  ascribing  Agrippa's 
death  to  such  a  cause,  Luke  makes  it  evident 
that  he  did  not  mean  to  represent  it  as  instan- 
taneous. His  statement,  therefore,  does  not 
oppose  that  of  Josephus,  who  says  that  Herod 
lingered  for  five  days  after  the  first  attack,  in 
the  greatest  agony,  and  then  died.  It  is  evident 
also,  for  the  same  reason,  that  Luke  did  not 
consider  the  angel  as  the  author  of  Herod's 
death  in  any  sucli  sense  as  to  exclude  the  inter- 
vention of  secondary  causes. 

24.  But  contrasts  slightly  the  fate  of  Herod, 
the  persecutor  of  the  church,  with  the  prosper- 
ity of  the  church  itself. — The  Avord  of  God 
grew,  was  diffused  more  and  more,  and  in- 
creased—i.  e.  {coiwp.  6  :  1)  was  embraced  by 
increasing  numbers.  Word  suggests  the  com- 
plex idea  of  doctrine  and  disciples,  and  the 
verbs  which  follow  divide  the  idea  into  its 
parts. 

25.  BARNABAS  AND  SAUL  RETURN 
TO  ANTIOCH. 

25.  Tliis  verse  appears  to  be  introductory  to 
the  subject  of  the  next  cha]>ter.  It  was  proper 
to  apprise  the  reader  that  Barnabas  and  Saul 
returned  to  Antioch  (see  11  :  30),  since  the  nar- 
rative of  what  next  occurred  in  that  city  im- 
plies that  they  were  there,  and  no  mention  has 
been  made  of  their  return.  Paul  and  Barnabas 
made  this  journey  to  Jerusalem  probably  near 
the  beginning  of  tlie  year  a.  d.  45 ;  for  tlie  famine 
commenced  at  the  close  of  the  preceding  year 
(see  on  11  :  28),  and  the  supplies  collected  in 
anticipation  of  that  event  would  naturally  be 
forwarded  before  the  distress  began  to  be  severe. 


That  the  journey  took  place  about  tliis  time  re- 
sults also  from  its  being  mentioned  in  connec- 
tion with  Herod's  death.  The  two  friends  ap- 
pear to  have  remained  at  Jerusalem  but  a  short 
time,  as  may  be  inferred  from  the  object  of  their 
mission,  and  still  more  decisively  from  tlie  ab- 
sence of  any  allusion  to  this  journey  in  Gal.  2: 
1,  sq. — John.  John  was  a  relative  of  Barnabas, 
as  we  learn  from  Col.  4  :  10,  and  tliis  relation- 
ship may  have  led  to  the  present  connection. 
He  appears  next  in  the  history  as  their  associate 
in  missionary  labors  (is :  5). 


1-3.  BARNABAS  AND  SAUL  ARE  SENT 
TO  PREACH  TO  THE  HEATHEN. 

1.  The  narrative  mentions  three  different 
journeys  of  Paul  among  the  lieathen  ;  the  ac- 
count of  the  first  of  these  commences  liere. — 
Certain  (ti^s  ;  probably  not  genuine)  would 
indicate  that  those  named  were  not  all  tlie 
teachers  at  Antioch. — In  Kara  tt)v  iKK\ri<riav  the 
preposition  may  be  directive  as  well  as  local : 
in  the  church  and  for  its  benefit.  The  office 
supplied  a  correspondent  (xara)  want.  Or  the 
idea  may  be  that  of  distribution  :  such  teachers 
belonging  to  the  different  churches  (comp.  14  : 
23),  the  writer's  mind  passes  along  the  series  to 
those  at  Antioch. — Prophets  (see  on  2  :  17)  is 
the  specific  term  ;  teachers,  the  generic.  The 
prophets  were  all  teachers,  but  the  reverse  was 
not  true.  (Comp.  note  on  14  :  23.)— Symeon 
is  otherwise  unknown.  He  was  evidently  a 
Jew,  and  lience  in  his  intercourse  with  Gentiles 
(see  on  v.  9)  was  called  also  Niger.  The  latter 
was  a  familiar  name  among  the  Romans,  and 
is  a  precarious  reason  for  inferring  ( Alf.)  that  he 
was  an  African  proselyte. — Lucius  may  be  the 
Lucius  who  is  mentioned  in  Rom.  16  :  21.  Some 
have  thouglit  tliat  Luke,  the  writer  of  the  Acts 
(no  doubt  a  native  of  Antioch),  may  be  intend- 
ed here ;  but  Lucius  and  Lucianus,  or  Lu- 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


149 


2  As  they  ministered  to  the  L"rd,  and  fasted,  the 
Holy  (fhost  said,  "Separate  me  liarnabas  and  Saul  for 
the  work  'whereiinto  I  have  called  them. 

3  And  <^\vhcn  they  had  fasted  and  prayed,  and  laid 
their  hands  on  them,  they  sent  Ikeiii  away. 


2tetrarch,  and  Saul.  And  as  they  ministered  to  the 
Lord,  and  fasted,  the  Holy  Spirit  said,  .^ejiarate  lue 
Uarnabas  and  .>aul  for  the  work  whereimto  I  have 

3  called  them.  Then,  when  they  had  fasted  and  prayed 
and  laid  their  hands  on  them,  they  sent  them  away. 


a  Num.  8  :  14;  ch.  9:  15;  22  :21;  Kom.  1:1;  Gal.  I  :  15;  2  :9....6  Matt.  9:38;  ch.  14  :  26;  Rom.  10  :  15 ;  Euh.  3  :  7,  8  •  1  Tim 
2  :  7;  2Tim.  1  :  11;  Heb.  5:  4....ccb.  6:  6. 


cas,  are  different  names.  (See  W.  ^  16.  4.  R.  1.) 
—Of  Cyreue.     (See  on  2  :  10.)— Manaeu  = 

Heb.  Mcnahein  (2  Kings  15 :  14)  occurs  only  here. 
—Herod  the  tetrarch.  This  Herod  was  the 
one  who  put  to  death  John  the  Baptist — a  son 
of  Herod  the  Great,  and  an  uncle  of  Agrippa, 
whose  death  has  just  been  related.  He  was 
now  in  exile  on  the  banks  of  the  Rhone,  but, 
though  divested  of  his  office,  is  called  tetrarch, 
because  he  was  best  known  under  tliat  title. 
(See  on  4:6.)  There  are  two  views  as  to  the 
import  of  o-uVTpo<|)05.  One  is  that  it  means  com- 
rade— lit.  one  brought  up,  educated,  with  another. 
It  was  very  common  for  persons  of  rank  to  as- 
sociate other  children  with  their  own,  for  the 
purpose  of  sharing  their  amusements  and 
studies,  and  by  their  example  serving  to  excite 
them  to  greater  emulation.  Josephus,  Plutarch, 
Polybius,  and  others  speak  of  this  ancient  prac- 
tice. So  Calvin,  Grotius,  Schott,  Baumgarten, 
and  others.  The  more  approved  opinion  is  that 
it  means  coUaclaneus,  nourished  at  the  same 
breast,  foster-hrotlier.  Kuinoel,  Olshausen,  Tho- 
luck,  De  Wette,  and  others,  after  Walch  {De 
Menachemo),  adopt  that  meaning.  The  mother 
of  Manaen,  according  to  this  view,  was  Herod's 
nurse.  In  either  case  the  relation  is  mentioned 
as  an  honorary  one. 

2.  Ministered  refers  here  to  the  rites  of 
Christian  worship,  as  prayer,  exhortation,  fast- 
ing. (See  vv.  3,  15 ;  14  :  23.)  [The  word  which 
is  here  translated  ministered  {\ii.TovpyowTo>v)  is 
found  in  only  two  other  passages  of  the  New 
Testament — viz.  in  Heb.  10  :  11,  where  it  refers 
to  religious  service  in  the  temple  and  is  followed 
by  an  expression  which  denotes  the  "  offering 
of  sacrifices,"  and  in  Rom.  15  :  27,  where  it  re- 
fers to  charitable  service  in  temporal  things. 
The  corresponding  noun  (Aeiroupyia)  is  used  in 
the  same  way — first  of  rendering  direct  service 

to   God    in    the    temple    (l.ukel  :23and  Heb.  9:6;  comp. 

Phil.  2: 17;  Heb.  8:6) ;  and  secondlv,  of  giving  pe- 
cuniary help  to  those  in  need  (2Cor.  9: 12;  Phii. 
2 :  30).  The  derived  adjectives  are  also  significant 
of  botli  kinds  of  service.  Yet  the  ministry  of 
direct  worship  may  be  regarded  as  the  leading 
sense  of  tliese  words ;  so  that  service  in  worldly 
things  is  represented  by  them  as  in  a  true  sense 
religious.— A.  H.] — They— ;'.  e.  the  prophets 
and  teachers.     The  participation  of  others  in 


the  service  is  not  asserted  or  denied.  It  is  pos- 
sible that  they  were  observing  a  season  of  prayer 
with  reference  to  this  very  question.  What  were 
their  duties  in  relation  to  the  heathen?  [Meyer 
insists  forcibly  tliat  they  refers  to  the  church, 
including  the  five  named,  and  not  to  the  latter 
only.  Thus:  "The  reference  of  avrCiv  (they), 
not  to  tlie  collective  church,  but  to  the  prophets 
and  teachers  named  in  v.  1,  .  .  .  is  not,  on  ac- 
count of  separate  me,  and  of  v.  3,  to  be  ap- 
proved. The  wliole  highly-important  mission- 
ary act  would,  according  to  this  view,  have  been 
performed  only  in  the  circle  of  five  persons,  of 
whom,  moreover,  two  were  the  missionaries 
destined  by  the  Spirit,  and  the  church  as  such 
would  have  taken  no  part  at  all,  not  even  being 
represented  by  its  presbyters  —  a  j>roceeding 
which  neither  agrees  with  the  fellowship  of 
the  Spirit  in  the  constitution  of  the  apostolic 
church,  nor  corresponds  with  the  analogous 
concrete  cases  of  tlie  clioice  oi  an  apostle  (cb.  1) 
and  of  the  deacons  (ch.6).  (Conip.  also  14  :  27, 
wliere  the  missionaries,  on  their  return,  make 
their  report  to  the  church.") — A.  H.] — Sepa- 
rate noiv  for  me— i.  e.  for  the  Holy  Spirit. 
The  Spirit  makes  the  revelation,  selects  the 
missionaries,  assigns  to  them  their  work.  The 
personality  of  the  agent  may  be  inferred  from 
such  acts.  The  command  in  this  form  was  ad- 
dressed to  the  associates  of  Barnabas  and  Saul, 
but  the  latter  would  liear  the  same  voice  point- 
ing out  to  them  their  duty  and  directing  them 
to  perform  the  service  laid  upon  them. — Now 
(a>j)  strengthens  the  command.  (See  15  :  30 ; 
Luke  2  :  15.  K.  §  315.  1.)  The  verb  contains 
the  idea  both  of  selection  and  consecration. — 
Unto  which  (o),  without  the  preposition,  be- 
cause the  antecedent  has  it.  (Comj).  Avhich 
thou  earnest  R.  V.,  >j  riP\ov,  in  9  :  17.)^I  have 
called  has  a  middle  sense.  (W.  ^  39.  3.)  The 
nature  of  this  work— not  stated  here — we  learn 
from  the  subsequent  narrative :  they  were  to  go 
into  foreign  countries  and  publish  the  gospel  to 
Jews  and  Gentiles.  The  great  object  of  the 
mission  was  doubtless  to  open  more  effectually 
"  the  door  of  faith  to  the  lieathen." 

3.  Then  having  fasted,  etc.  This  was 
a  different  fast  from  that  spoken  of  in  v.  2, 
and  observed,  probably,  by  the  body  of  the 
church.      [According  to  the  words  of  Christ 


150 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


4  H  So  they,  being  sent  forth  by  the  Holy  Ghost,  de- 
parted unto  Seleucia;  and  from  thence  they  sailed  to 
"Cyprus. 


4     So  they,  being  sent  fortli  by  the  Holy  Spirit,  went 
down  to  Seleucia ;  and  from  thence  they  sailed  to 


preserved  in  Matt.  9  :  14,  15  (also  Mark  2  : 
18-20;  Luke  5  :  33-35),  fasti7ig  is  a  natural  ex- 
pression, not  of  satisfaction,  but  of  sorrow,  of 
trouble.  And  it  is  never  appropriate  unless  it 
is  spontaneous.  But  even  when  it  is  spon- 
taneous, it  should  not  be  paraded  in  public 
with  outward  shows  of  mortification  (Matt.  6: 
16-18).  Hence  the  impossibility  of  a  genuine 
national  fast,  unless  it  be  in  time  of  great  ca- 
lamity. But  Jesus  does  not  in  any  of  these 
passages  condemn  fasting  on  the  part  of  Chris- 
tians. We  cannot,  indeed,  be  certain  that  he 
anywhere  enjoins  it  on  his  followers  as  a  duty ; 
for  Matt.  17  :  21  is  jjrobably  a  gloss  added  to  the 
true  text,  while  the  words  "  and  fasting,"  in 
Mark  9  :  29,  are  at  least  doubtful ;  but  the  ex- 
ample of  Christ    and  of   ajiostolic  Cliristians 

(Matt.  4  :  1,  sg. ;  Acts  10  :  30;  13  :  2,  3 ;  14  :  23),  together  witll 

the  prediction  of  Jesus  (Matt.  9:  is),  the  implied 
approval  of  Paul  (i  cor.  7 : 5),  and  the  Saviour's 
direction  as  to  the  proper  manner  of  fasting 
(Matt.  6:16-18),  provc  bcyoiid  a  doubt  that  fasting 
has   its   place  at  times   in  the  best   forms   of 
Christian    living.  —  A.   H.]  — On    laid    their 
hands   on  them,  see  G  :  G.     The  act  was  a 
representative  one,  and,  though  performed  by  \ 
a  part,  involves  the  idea  of  a  general  participa-  I 
tion.      Paul   was   already   a  minister  and   an  1 
apostle  (see  Gal.  1  :  1,  sq.,  where  he  claims  this  i 
character  from  the  outset),  and  by  this  service  i 
he  and  Barnabas  were  now  merely  set  a^iart  for 
the  accomplishment  of  a  specific  work.     They 
were  summoned  to  a  renewed  and  more  syste- 
matic prosecution  of  tlie  enterprise  of  convert- 
ing the   heathen.      (See  on  9  :  30 ;    11  :  20.)— 
Sent  away.     That  the  subject  of  this  verb 
includes  the  Antiochian  Cliristians  in  general 
may  be  argued  from  the  analogous  case  in  15  : 
40.     The  brethren  commended  Paul  to  God  as 
he  departed  on  his  second  mission. 

4-12.  THE  JOURNEY  TO  CYPRUS,  AND 
ITS  RESULTS. 

4.  Being  sent  forth.  We  may  place  this 
mission  in  the  year  a.  d.  45.  It  does  not  appear 
that  they  remained  long  at  Antioch  before  their 
departure.  (See  the  note  on  12  :  25.) — Unto 
Seleucia.  Seleucia  lay  west  of  Antioch,  on 
the  sea-coast,  five  miles  north  of  the  mouth  of 
the  Orontes.  It  was  situated  on  the  rocky  emi- 
nence forming  the  southern  extremity  of  the 
hilly  range  called  Pieria.  The  harbor  and  mer- 
cantile suburb  were  on  level  ground  toward  the 


west.  A  village  called  Antakia  and  interesting 
ruins  point  out  the  ancient  site.  "The  inner 
basin,  or  dock  (there  were  two  ports),  is  now  a 
morass ;  but  its  dimensions  can  be  measured, 
and  the  walls  that  surround  it  can  be  distinctly 
traced.  The  position  of  the  ancient  floodgates, 
and  the  passage  through  which  the  vessels  were 
moved  from  the  inner  to  tlie  outer  harbor,  can 
be  accurately  marked.  The  very  piers  of  the 
outer  harbor  are  still  to  be  seen  under  the  water. 
The  stones  are  of  great  size  —  some  of  them 
twenty  feet  long,  five  feet  deep,  and  six  feet 
wide — and  are  fastened  to  each  other  with  iron 
cramps.  The  masonry  of  ancient  Seleucia  is 
still  so  good  that  not  long  since  a  Turkish  pacha 
conceived  the  idea  of  clearing  out  and  repair- 
ing the  harbor."  (See  autliorities  in  Conybeare 
and  Howson.)  Those  piers  were  still  unbroken, 
tliis  great  seaport  of  the  Seleucids  and  the 
Ptolemies  was  as  magnificent  as  ever,  under 
the  sway  of  the  Romans,  when  Paul  and  Bar- 
nabas passed  through  it  on  their  present  mis- 
sion. Whether  they  came  down  {KariiX&ov) 
from  the  interior  to  the  coast  by  land  or  by 
water  is  uncertain.  The  windings  of  the  river 
make  the  distance  about  forty-one  miles,  but 
by  l^md  it  is  only  sixteen  miles  and  a  half  At 
present  the  Orontes  is  not  navigable,  in  conse- 
quence of  a  bar  at  the  mouth  and  other  obstruc- 
tions; but  Strabo  says  (IG.  2)  that  in  his  time 
they  sailed  up  tlie  stream  in  one  day.  The 
road,  though  it  is  now  mostly  overgrown  with 
shrubs,  was  then  doubtless  a  well-worn  track 
like  the  road  from  the  Piraeus  to  Athens,  or 
from  Ostia  to  Rome.  At  Seleucia  tlie  two  mis- 
sionaries with  their  companion  went  on  board 
(aneTrXevaav,  Sailed  from)  oiie  of  the  numerous 
vessels  which  must  have  been  constantly  ply- 
ing between  tliat  port  and  the  fertile  Cyprus. 
"As  they  cleared  the  port  the  whole  sweep  of 
the  bay  of  Antioch  opened  on  their  left — the 
low  ground  by  the  mouth  of  the  Orontes,  the 
wild  and  woody  country  beyond  it,  and  then 
the  peak  of  Mount  Casius,  rising  symmetri- 
cally from  the  very  edge  of  the  sea  to  a  lieight 
of  five  thousand  feet.  On  the  right,  in  the 
soutli-wcst  horizon,  if  the  day  was  clear,  tliey 
saw  the  island  of  Cyprus  from  the  first.  Tlie 
current  sets  northerly  and  north-east  between 
the  island  and  the  Syrian  coast.  But  witli  a 
fair  wind  a  few  liours  would  enable  them  to 
run  down  from  Seleucia  to  Salamis;  and  tlie 


Ch.  XIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


151 


5  And  when  (hey  were  at  Palamis,  "they  preached 
the  word  of  (iwi  in  the  synagogues  of  the  Jews  :  and 
they  had  also  Mohu  to  their  minister. 

»;  And  when  they  had  gone  through  the  isle  unto 
Paphos,  they  found  'a.  certain  sorcerer,  a  false  prophet, 
a  Jew,  whose  name  was  Bar-jesus: 


5  Cyprus.  And  when  they  were  at  Salamis,  they  pro- 
claimed the  word  of  bod  in  the  synagogues  of  the 
Jews:  and  they  had  also  .John  as  their  attendant. 

6  And  when  they  had  gone  through  the  whole  island 
uuto  I'aphos,  they  found  a  certain  'sorcerer,  a  fal-so 


aver.  46....6ch.  12  :  25;  15:  37 c  ch.  8  :  ».- 


-I  Gr.  Magut :  as  in  Matt.  2:1,7,  16. 


land  would  rapidly  rise  in  forms  well  known 
and  familiar  to  Barnabas  and  Mark "  (Cony- 
beare  and  How.son,  i.  p.  169).  The  fact  that 
Barnabas  wa.s  a  native  of  Cyprus  (4:36)  may 
have  induced  them  to  give  this  direction  to 
their  journey. 

5.  And  having  arrived  in  Salamis.  Tliis 
town  was  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Cyprus,  "  on 
a  bight  of  the  coast  to  the  north  of  the  river 
Pedi;cus.  A  large  city  by  the  sea-shore,  a  wide- 
spread plain  with  corn-lields  and  orchards,  and 
the  blue  distance  of  mountains  beyond,  com- 
posed the  view  on  whicli  tlie  eyes  of  Barnabas 
and  Saul  rested  when  they  came  to  anclior  in 
the  bay  of  Salamis." — The  synagogues  indi- 
cates that  the  Jews  here  were  numerous,  since 
in  other  places  where  they  were  few  they  had 
only  one  synagogue.  (Comp.  17  :  1 ;  18  :  4.) 
This  intimation  is  confirmed  by  ancient  testi- 
mony. In  the  time  of  Trajan  (a.  d.  IIG),  the 
Jews  in  Cyprus  were  so  powerful  that  they  rose 
and  ma.ssacred  two  hundred  and  forty  thousand 
of  the  Greek  inhabitants  (Dio  Cass.,  08.  32).  In 
revenge  for  this  slaughter,  Hadrian,  who  was 
afterward  emi)eror,  landed  on  the  island  and 
either  put  to  death  or  expelled  the  entire  Jew- 


from  the  time  of  Alexander  Severus — i.  e. 
about  A.  D.  230)  represents  a  public  road  as 
extending  from  Salamis  to  Paphos.  If  that 
road  existed  at  this  earlier  period,  Paul  arrived 
at  Paphos  in  a  sliort  time  and  withmit  difficulty. 
The  present  Balfa  occupies  the  site  of  tl»at  city. 
— Found  a  certain  Magian,  which  was  his 
professional  title,  since  it  stands  for  Elymas  in 
V.  8;  not  sorcerer  (E.  V.),  which  would  be  op- 
probrious.— False  prophet  is  the  narrator's 
term  for  dcscriljing  liim  ;  he  was  a  fortune- 
teller, but  his  art  was  an  imposition.  It  may 
appear  singular  that  a  person  of  his  character 
should  so  mislead  and  captivate  the  prudent 
Sergius.  But  the  incident  presents,  in  fact,  a 
true  picture  of  the  times.  At  that  period  (I 
abridge  Conybeare  and  Howson's  paragraph 
here)  impostors  from  the  East  pretending  to 
magical  powers  had  great  influence  over  the 
Roman  mind.  The  East,  but  recently  thrown 
open,  was  the  land  of  mystery  to  the  Western 
nations.  Reports  of  the  strange  arts  practised 
tliere,  of  the  wonderful  events  of  whicli  it  was 
the  scene,  excited  almost  fanatically  the  imag- 
ination both  of  the  pojmlace  and  the  aristoc- 
racy of  Rome.    Svrian  fortune-tellers  crowded 


ish   population.     At  the  time  of  Paul's   visit  i  the  cajiital  and  appeared  in  all  the  haunts  of 


many  of  the  Cyprian  Jews  must  have  resided 
at  Salamis,  wliich  was  tiie  seat  of  a  lucrative 
commerce. — And  they  had  also  John  (see 
12  :  2'))  as  an  assistant — in  what?  Also,  as 
I  think,  recalls  most  naturally  preached  the 
word  ;  and  the  answer  would  be  that  he  as- 
sisted them  in  the  declaration  of  the  word. 
(Comp.  20  :  IG;  Luke  1  :  2;  1  Cor.  4  :  1.)  But 
the  view  of  most  critics  is  different :  they  sup- 
pose John  to  have  had  charge  of  tlie  incidental 
cares  of  the  i)arty,  so  as  to  leave  Paul  and  Bar- 
nabas more  at  liberty  to  preach  the  gospel.  We 
are  not  informed  how  long  they  remained  at 
Salamis  or  what  success  attended  their  labors. 

6.  And  having  passed  through  the 
whole  island  unto  Paphos,  which  was  at 
the  otlier  end  of  (Cyprus.     The  city  intended 


business  and  amusement.  Tlic  strongest  miiuls 
were  not  superior  to  their  influence.  Marius 
relied  on  a  Jewish  prophetess  for  regulating  tlie 
progress  of  his  campaigns.  Pompey,  Crassus, 
and  Csesar  sought  informatiim  from  Oriental 
astrology.  Juvenal  paints  to  us  tlie  Emiieror 
Tiberius  "sitting  on  the  rock  of  Cai>ri  with  his 
flock  of  Chalda^ans  round  liim."  The  astrol- 
ogers and  sorcerers,  says  Tacitus,  are  a  class  of 
men  who  "  will  always  be  di.searded  and  always 
cherished."  [With  this  .statement  may  be  com- 
pared the  treatise  of  Tiioluck  on  the  Nature  and 
Moral  Influence  of  Heathenism  (translated  for  the 
Biblical  Rcjiository,  vol.  ii.  p.  286),  where  many 
illustrations  are  given.  The  multitude  of  sooth- 
sayers at  this  period  is  said  to  have  been  enor- 
mous.      "The    Indians,    Persians,    Egyptians, 


here  was  jNVto  Paphos,  in  distinction  from  the  Gauls,  and  Germans  had  their  sootlisayers; 
old  city  of  that  name,  which  was  several  miles  and  among  the  Romans  this  art  had  been  car- 
farther  south.  The  distance  from  east  to  west  ried  to  such  an  extent  that  Fabricius  enumer- 
was  not  more  than  a  hundred  miles.  The  ;  ates  toward  a  hundred  different  modes  of  divi- 
Peutingerian    Table*    (whicli    dates    probably  j  nation."     (See  also  TJhlhorn,    The  Conflict  of 

I  See  Forbiger's  Hatulbuch  der  Allen  Geugraphit,  vol.  i.  p.  469,  sq. 


152 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


7  Which  was  with  the  deputy  of  the  country,  Sergius 
Paulus,  a  prudent  man  ;  who  called  for  Barnabas  and 
Saul,  and  desired  to  hear  the  word  of  (iod. 

8  But  "Elynias  the  sorcerer  (for  so  is  his  name  by  in- 
terpretation) withstood  theiUj  seeking  to  turn  away 
the  deputy  from  the  faith. 

9  Then  Saul,  (who  also  is  called  Paul,)  'tilled  with 
the  Holy  Ghost,  set  his  eyes  on  him, 


7  prophet,  a  Jew,  whose  name  was  Bar-Jesus ;  who 
was  with  the  proconsul,  Sergius  Paulus,  a  man  of 
understanding.  The  same  called  unto  him  1  ar- 
nabas  and  Saul,  and  sought  to  hear  the  word  of 

8(jod.  But  Ely  mas  the  'sorcerer  for  so  is  his  name 
by  interpretation)  withstood  them,  seeking  to  turn 

9  aside  the  proconsul  from  the  faith,  hut  .'^aul,  who 
is  also  culled  Paul,  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit,  fas- 


o  Ex.  7  :  II ;  2  Tim.  3  : 


-1  Gr.  Magus:  as  in  Matt.  2  :  1,  7,  16. 


Christianity  with  Heathenism,  pp.  63,  316,  etc. ; 
Pressense,  Early  Years  of  Christianity,  p.  66, 
etc.:  C.  Scribner,  1870;  Dollinger,  Tfie  Gentile 
and  the  Jew,  vol.  ii.  passim. — A.  H.] 

7.  Who  was  with  the  proconsul  Sergius 
Paulus.  It  would  not  have  been  correct  to 
apply  this  title  to  the  governor  of  every  lioman 
province,  or  even  to  the  governor  of  the  same 
province  at  different  periods.  It  was  so  difficult 
to  observe  accuracy  in  the  use  of  the  varying 
titles  given  to  Roman  magistrates  that  several 
of  the  classic  authors  of  this  ijeriod  have,  be- 
yond all  question,  misapplied  them  in  various 
instances.  Luke  was  exposed  to  error  in  this 
passage  on  the  right  hand  and  on  the  left.  On 
the  establishment  of  the  empire,  Augustus  di- 
vided the  provinces  into  two  classes.  Those 
which  required  a  military  force  he  retained  in 
his  own  hands,  and  the  others  he  committed  to 
the  care  of  the  Senate  and  the  Roman  people. 
The  officers  or  governors  sent  into  the  emijeror's 
provinces  were  styled  proprajtors  or  legates 
{propraetores,  legati,  or  ai-TKrTpoTTjyoi,  jrpeo-^euTai)  ; 
those  sent  into  the  people's  provinces  were 
called  proconsuls  { proconsules,  av^viraroi).  Cy- 
prus, then,  must  have  been  a  senatorian  prov- 
ince at  this  time,  or  Luke  has  assigned  to  Ser- 
gius a  false  title.  But,  further,  the  same  province 
was  often  transferred  from  one  jurisdiction  to 
another.  Thus,  in  the  present  instance,  Au- 
gustus at  first  reserved  Cyprus  tq  himself  and 
committed  its  administration  to  proprietors, 
or  legates.  Strabo  informs  us  of  that  circum- 
stance, and  there  leaves  the  matter.  Hence  it 
was  supposed  for  a  long  time  that  Luke  had 
committed  an  oversight  here,  or  had  styled 
Sergius  proconsul  without  knowing  the  exact 
import  of  the  appellation.  But  a  passage  was 
discovered  at  length  in  Dio  Cassius  (53.  12) 
which  states  that  Augustus  subsequently  re- 
linquished Cyprus  to  the  Senate  in  excliange 
for  another  province,  and  (54.  4)  that  it  was 
governed  henceforth  by  proconsuls  :  And  so 
proconsids  also  began  to  be  sent  to  those  nations. 
Coins,  too,  have  been  found,  struck  in  the  reign 
of  Claudius,  which  confirm  Ltike's  accuracy. 
Bishop  Marsh  mentions  one  on  which  this  very 
title  procomid  {ivSviraTOi)  is  applied  to  Cominius 
Proclus,  a  governor  of  Cyprus.     It  was  in  the 


reign  of  Claudius  that  Paul  visited  this  island. 
(For  similar  confirmations  of  our  history,  see 
on  18  :  12;  19  :  38.)— Prudent,  intelligent, 
discerning.  It  may  have  been  his  possession 
of  this  quality  that  prompted  him  to  seek  the 
acquaintance  of  Elymas ;  he  may  have  hof)ed 
to  gain  from  him  that  deeper  knowledge  of 
futurity  and  of  the  mysteries  of  nature  whicli 
the  human  mind  craves  so  instinctively.  It  cer- 
tainly was  proof  of  his  discernment  that  he 
was  not  deceived  by  the  man's  pretensions — 
that,  on  hearing  of  the  arrival  of  Paul  and 
Barnabas,  he  sent  ft)r  them,  and  on  the  strength 
of  the  evidence  whic'h  confirmed  their  doctrine 
yielded  his  mind  to  it. — Desired  earnestly. 
— The  word  of  God  designates  the  new  doc 
trine  from  Luke's  point  of  view  (Mey.). 

8.  £lynias  is  an  Arabic  word  which  means 
the  wise.  It  was  a  title  of  honor,  like  the  3Ia- 
gian  (o  nayoj),  to  wliich  it  is  here  put  as  equiv- 
alent. He  was  born,  perhaps,  in  Araljia,  or  had 
lived  there,  and  may  have  assumed  this  name 
in  a  boastful  spirit,  or  may  have  received  it 
from  others  as  a  conq>liment  to  his  skill. ^ 
Seeking  to  turn  aside  the  proconsul 
from  the  faith — i.e.  from  adoi)ting  it;  for 
he  was  not  yet  a  believer.     (See  v.  12.) 

9.  The  also  Paul  (6  xal  iiaOAo?)  =  the  (one) 
also  called  Paul. — The  (o)  is  the  article 
here,  not  a  pronoun.  (W.  {5 18.  1.)  The  origin 
of  this  name  is  still  disputed.  Among  the  later 
critics,  Olshausen  and  Meyer  adhere  to  the  older 
view — that  Paul  assumeil  it  out  of  respect  to 
Sergius  Paulus,  who  was  converted  by  his  in- 
strumentality. But  had  the  writer  connectwl 
the  name  with  that  event,  he  would  have  in- 
troduced it  more  naturallj'  after  v.  12.  He 
makes  use  of  it,  it  will  be  observetl,  before 
speaking  of  the  proconsul's  conversion.  Ne- 
ander  objects,  further,  that  it  was  customary 
among  the  ancients  for  the  pupil  to  adopt  the 
name  of  the  teacher,  not  the  teaclier  to  adopt 
that  of  tlie  pupil.  There  is  force,  too,  in  liis 
remark  that,  according  to  tliis  view,  the  apostle 
would  seem  to  recognize  the  salvation  of  a  dis- 

I  tinguished  person  as  more  important  tlian  that 

of  others ;  for  that  Sergius  was  his  first  c(jnvert 

I  from  heathenism,  and  received  this  honor  on 

I  that  account,  assumes  incorrectly  that  he  had 


Cii.  XIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


lo3 


10  And  said,  O  full  of  all  subtilty  and  all  mischief, 
"» liiia  child  of  the  devil,  ihnu  enemy  of  all  righteous- 
ness, wilt  thou  liOt  cease  to  persert  the  right  ways  of 
the  Lord? 

11  And  now,  behold,  'the  hand  of  the  Lord  I'.v  upon 
thee,  and  thou  shult  he  blind,  not  seeing  the  sun  for  a 
season.  And  imiiiediaiely  there  fell  on  iiiin  a  mist  and 
a  darkness;  and  he  went  about  seeking  some  to  lead 
him  by  the  hand. 

12  Then  the  deputy,  when  he  saw  what  w.as  done, 
believed,  being  astonished  at  the  doctrine  of  the  Lord. 

13  Now  when   I'aul  and  his  company  loosed  from 


lu  tened  his  eyes  on  him,  and  said,  O  full  of  all  guile 
and  all  villany,  thou  son  of  the  devil,  thou  enemy 
of  all  righteousne.ss,  wilt  thou  not  cease  to  ix-Tvert 

11  the  right  ways  of  the  Lord?  And  now,  i  ehold,  the 
lumd  of  the  Lord  is  upon  thee,  a  d  thou  shall  bo 
blind,  not  seeing  the  sun  'for  a  season.  And  imme- 
diately there  fell  on  him  a  mist  and  a  darkness; 
aiid  he  went  about  seeking  soiue  to  lead  hi\ii  by  the 

12  hand.  Then  the  proconsul,  when  he  saw  what  wa.s 
done,  believed,  being  astonished  at  the  teaching  of 
the  Lord. 

Vi     .Now  l^aul  and  bis  company  set  sail  from  raphes, 


a  Matt.  13  :  38;  John  8  :  44 :  I  Johu  3:8 6  E.<c.  9  :  3  ;  1  Sam.  5  :  6.. 


-1  Or,  unfit 


preached  hitlierto  to  none  but  those  of  his  own 
nation.  It  is  more  probable  that  Paul  acquired 
this  name  like  other  Jews  in  that  age,  who, 
when  they  ass(jciated  with  foreigners,  had  often 
two  names — the  one  Jewish,  the  other  foreign  ; 
sometimes  entirely  ilistinct,  as  Onias  and  Mene- 
laus,  Hillel  and  Pollio,  and  sometimes  similar  in 
sound,  as  Tarphon  and  Trypho,  Silas  and  Sil- 
vanus.  In  like  manner,  the  ai>ostle  may  have 
been  known  as  Saul  among  the  Jews  and  Paul 
among  the  heathen ;  and,  being  a  native  of  a 
foreign  city,  as  Lightfoot  suggests,  he  may  have 
borne  the  two  names  from  early  life.  This  ex- 
planation of  the  origin  of  the  name  accounts 
for  its  introduction  at  tliis  stage  of  the  history. 
It  is  here  ft)r  the  first  time  that  Luke  speaks 
directly  of  Paul's  labors  among  the  heathen ; 
and  it  is  natural  that  he  should  apply  to  him 
the  name  by  which  he  was  chieHy  known  in 
that  sphere  of  liis  ministry.  According  to  some, 
the  name  changes  liere,  because  Luke  has  fol- 
lowed, hitherto,  written  memoranda,  in  which 
tiie  apostle  was  called  Saul  (Neand.,  Alf). 
This  hypothesis  is  unnecessary  and  improb- 
able. Luke  liad  no  need  of  such  memoirs,  as  he 
could  learn  from  Paul  himself  all  that  lie  has 
related  of  him;  and,  further,  the  style  of  what 
l)recedes,  instead  of  indicating  a  ditferent  hand, 
is  homogeneous  with  that  which  follows.  Zel- 
ler,  though  he  denies  that  Luke  wrote  the  Acts, 
maintains  that  a  single  author  must  have  writ- 
ten it. — Filled  with,  etc.  He  was  thus  im- 
pelled to  expose  the  man's  wickedness  and  to 
announci'  iiis  |)unisiiment. 

10.  Siibtilty,  deceit,  refers  to  his  occupa- 
tion; mischief,  wickedness,  to  his  character. 
— Son  of  the  devil.  Thekindredshipisthat  of 
disposition,  moral  resemblance.  (See  John  H  : 
4L)  The  second  noun  is  sufficiently  definite  to 
omit  the  article.  CSV.  g  19.  1.)  It  lias  the  arti- 
cle, however,  in  other  passages,  except  1  Pet.  5  : 
8,  where  it  stands  in  ai)position. — Wilt  thou 
not  cease  to  pervert — i.  e.  U)  misrepresent, 
malign — the  right  ways  of  the  Lord? — viz. 
those  which  he  requires  men  to  follow,  as  re- 
pentance,  faitli,  obedience.     It   was   Christian 


truth,  the  gospel,  which  he  opposed.  Most 
critics  prefer  the  interrogative  form  of  the  sen- 
tence as  more  forcible  than  the  declarative.  Not 
denies  cease  =  persist  (W.  ^  57.  3j,  and  implies 
the  ordinary  affirmative  answer.  Right  sug- 
gests, possibly,  a  contrast  with  the  impostor's 
own  ways,  so  full  of  deceit  and  obli(juity. 

11.  Hand  of  the  Lord.  Here  God,  per- 
haps, as  the  phra.-ie  is  common  in  tiie  Old  Tes- 
tament.— Upon  thee — viz.,  i.  e.,  for  j)unish- 
ment;  in  a  gt)od  sense,  in  11 :  21. — Not  seeing 
states  a  consecjuence ;  hence  fi^,  not  ov. — Until 
a  season,  a  certain  time.  (Comj).  Luke  4  :  Vi.) 
The  intlii'tion  woidd  be  tempcjrary,  either  be- 
cause the  object  (see  next  verse)  did  not  reijuire 
it  to  be  permanent,  or  because  the  mildness 
might  conduce  to  the  man's  repentance. — A 
mist  and  darkness,  related  as  cause  and 
eifoct,  or  by  degrees — lirst  one,  and  then  the 
other.  —  Seeking  states  his  hal)it  (imperf.) 
during  tiie  ])cri(Kl  of  his  blindness. 

12.  lleing  astonished  at  the  doctrine 
of  the  Lord — i.  e.  its  contirmation  by  sucii 
a  miracle.  (Comp.  Mark  1  :  27.)  [Not  merely, 
periiaps,  at  "  its  confirmation  by  such  a  mira- 
cle," but  at  the  doctrine  concerning  Christ, 
which  was  so  new  and  extraordinary  in  itself, 
as  well  as  so  wonderfully  attested  by  tlie  mir- 
acle. The  brevilo(iuence  of  Luke  would  be 
fully  accounted  for  by  this  view.  It  would 
probably  be  incorrect  to  say,  with  Canon  Cook, 
that  "the  doctrine  concerning  the  Lord  im- 
pressed the  i)roconsurs  mind  more  than  the 
miraculous  visitation."  Teaching  and  miracle 
went  together,  and  the  wonder  wits  due  to  their 
combined  influence. — A.  H.] 

13-15.  TIIFA'  PROCEED  TO  PERGA, 
AND  THENCE  TO  ANTIOCH   IN  PISIDIA. 

13.  Loosed,  having  put  to  sea — lit.  /mv- 
im/  gone  up  (note  the  etymology),  because  the 
sea  ai)pear8  higher  than  the  land.  Paplu)s  was 
on  the  sea-shore,  aii<l  they  would  embark  at 
that  place. — Paul  and  his  companions  (oi 
jrcpi  Tov  IloOAoi' — lit.  those  nhout  Paid).  About 
(ntpl)  presents  the  name  after  it  as  the  central 
object  of  the  group.     (See  John  11  :  19.     W. 


154 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


Paphos,  they  came  to  Perga  in  Painphylia:  and  "John 
departing  from  them  returned  to  Jerusalem. 

14  1\  liut  when  they  departed  from  Perga,  they  came 
to  Antioch  in  Pisidia,  and  '^^ent  into  the  synagogue 
on  the  sabbath  day,  and  sat  down. 

15  And  <^after  the  reading  of  the  law  and  the  proph- 
ets the  rulers  of  the  synagogue  sent  unto  them,  saying, 
Ye  men  and  brethren," if  ye  have  ''any  word  of  exhorta- 
tion for  the  people,  say  on. 


and  came  to  Perga  in   Paniphylia:   and  John   de- 

14  parted  fiom  them  and  returned  to  Jerusalem.  1  ut 
they,  passing  through  from  Perga,  came  to  Antioch 
of  l^isidia;  and  they  went  into  the  synagogue  on 

15  the  sabbath  day,  and  sat  down.  And  after  the 
reading  of  the  law  and  the  prophets  the  rulers  of 
the  synagogue  sent  unto  them,  saying,  brethren,  if 
ye  have  any  word  of  exhortation  for  the  people,  say 


.6  ch.  16  :  13;  17  :  2  ;  18  :  4 c  Luke  4  :  16  ;  ver.  27 d  Heb.  13  :  22. 


§  53.  i.)  Hitherto  the  order  has  been  Barnabas 
and  Saul ;  but  from  this  time  Paul  appears  in 
the  narrative  as  the  principal  person,  and  Bar- 
nabas as  subordinate. — Came  unto  Perga. 
They  must  have  "  sailed  past  the  promontories 
of  Drepanum  and  Acainas,  and  then  across  the 
waters  of  the  Painphylian  Sea,  leaving  on  the 
right  the  cliffs  (six  hundred  feet  high)  which 
form  the  western  boundary  of  Cilicia  to  the 
innermost  bend  of  the  bay  of  Attaleia."  Perffa 
was  the  chief  city  of  Pampliylia,  situated  on 
the  Oestrus,  about  seven  miles  from  its  mouth. 
A  bar  obstructs  the  entrance  of  this  river  at 
the  present  time,  but  Strabo  (14.  4)  says  ex- 
pressly that  it  was  navigable  in  his  day  as  far 
up  as  Perga.  The  ruins  of  this  city  are  to  be 
seen  still,  sixteen  miles  north-east  of  the  mod- 
ern Adalia,  or  Satalia.  They  consist  of  "  walls 
and  towers,  columns  and  cornices,  a  theatre 
and  a  stadium,  a  broken  aqueduct,  and  tombs 
scattered  on  both  sides  of  the  site  of  the  town. 
Nothing  else  remains  of  Perga  but  the  beauty 
of  its  natural  situation,  between  and  upon  the 
sides  of  two  hills,  with  an  extensive  valley  in 
front,  watered  by  the  river  Oestrus,  and  backed 
by  the  mountains  of  tlie  Taurus."! — And  John, 
etc.  Why  John  Mark  left  them  so  abruptly  is 
unknown.  It  is  certain  from  15  :  38  (see  the 
note  there)  that  his  reason  for  turning  back 
was  not  one  which  Paul  approved.  He  re- 
turned, not  to  Antioch,  but  Jerusalem,  where 
his  home  was  (12 :  12). 

14.  They — t.  e.  they  themselves,  unac- 
companied by  their  former  associate. — From 
Perga.  The  stay  at  Perga,  therefore,  was 
brief;  they  did  not  even  preach  there  at  this 
time.  (Oomp.  14  :  25.)  What  occasioned  this 
singular  haste?  Very  po.ssibly,  as  Oonybeare 
and  Howson  suggest,  they  arrived  there  in  the 
spring  of  tlie  year,  and  in  order  to  prosecute 
their  journey  into  the  interior  were  obliged  to 
advance  without  delay  :  "  Earlier  in  the  season 
the  passes  would  have  been  tilled  with  snow. 
In  the  heat  of  summer  the  weather  would  have 
been  less  favorable  for  the  expedition.  In  tlie 
autumn   the  disadvantages  would   liave  been 


still  greater,  from  the  approaching  difficulties 
of  winter."  On  the  journey  from  the  coast  to 
the  interior,  Paul  may  have  encountered  some 
of  the  "perils  of  robbers"  and  "perils  of 
rivers  "  to  which  he  alludes  in  2  Cor.  11  :  20. 
The  maurauding  habits  of  the  people  on  tlie 
mountains  which  he  now  crossed  were  noto- 
rious in  all  ancient  history.  The  country 
swarmed  with  banditti  of  the  most  desperate 
character.  The  physical  character  of  the 
region  exposed  him,  also,  to  the  otlier  class 
of  dangers.  The  streams  here  are  numerous 
and  violent  beyond  those  of  any  other  tract 
in  Asia  Minor.  Torrents  "burst  out  at  the 
base  of  huge  cliffs  or  dash  down  Avildly 
through  narrow  ravines."  (See  Oonybeare  and 
Howson  for  fuller  information  on  these  points.) 
— To  Antioch.  Antioch,  which  lay  north  froin 
Perga,  was  on  the  central  table-land  of  Asia 
Minor,  on  the  contines  of  Pisidia  and  Phrygia. 
It  was  built  by  the  founder  of  the  Syrian  An- 
tioch. Under  Augustus  it  rose  to  the  rank  of 
a  colony.  It  was  now  an  important  city,  in- 
habited bj'  many  Greeks,  Romans,  and  Jews, 
in  addition  to  its  native  population.  The  site 
of  Antiocli  was  first  identified  by  Mr.  Arundel 
in  1833.— Day,  of  the  Sabbath—;,  c.  the 
rest-seas(^h.  The  plural  arose,  probably,  from 
the  fact  that  such  a  season  included  often  more 
than  one  day.     (See  W.  i  27.  3.) 

15.  After  the  reading,  etc.  The  practice  of 
reading  the  Scriptures  in  this  manner  grew  up, 
probably,  during  the  Exile.  (Win.,  liealw.,  ii. 
p.  548.)  Law  here  designates  the  Pentateuch  ; 
prophets,  tlie  other  books  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. (See  Matt.  5 :  17  ;  Luke  16 : 1(5,  etc.)  The 
Psalms  formed  sometimes  a  third  division.  (See 
Luke  24: 44.)  The  rulers  of  the  synagogue 
(see  on  9  :  2)  sent  unto  them  a  servant 
(Luke 4: 20).  It  may  liave  been  known  that  they 
were  teachers,  or,  as  Hemsen  suggests,  they 
may  have  occupied  a  seat  which  indicated  that 
such  was  their  office.— In  you,  in  your  minds. 
(Oomp.  Gal.  1  :  16;  Phil.  1  : 5.)— Exhortation. 
The  object  was  to  incite  them  to  a  stricter  ob- 
servance of  the  law. 


1  Sir  C.  Fellows's  Asia  Minor,  pp.  190-193, 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


155 


10  Then  Paul  stood  up,  and  "beckoning  with  his 
hand  said,  Men  of  Israel,  and  'ye  that  fear  God,  give 
audience. 

17  The  <  iod  of  this  people  of  Israel  'chose  our  fathers, 
and  exalted  the  people ''when  they  dwelt  as  strangers 
in  the  land  of  ICgypt,  "and  with  an  high  arm  brought 
he  them  out  of  it. 

IS  .\nd  /about  the  time  of  forty  years  suffered  he 
their  manners  in  the  wilderness. 

19  .And  wlien  'he  had  destroyed  seven  nations  in 
the  land  of  Chanaan,  "he  divided  their  land  to  them 
by  lot. 

2U  And  after  that  'he  gave  unlo  Ihem  judges  about  the 


16  on.  And  Paul  stood  up,  and  beckoning  with  the 
hand  sai'l. 

Men  of  Israel,  and   ye  that  fear  (iod,  hearken. 

17  The  <iod  of  this  peo|)le  Israel  chose  our  fathers,  and 
e.xalted  the  people  when  they  sijourned  in  the  lai  d 
of  Kgy|)t,  and  with  a  high  arm  led  he  them  forth 

18  out  of  it.  And  for  about  the  time  of  forty  veal's  'as 
a  nursing-father  bare  he  them  in  the  wilderness. 

19  And  when  he  had  destroyed  .seven  nations  in  the 
land  of  <  anaan,  he  gave  ihi-m  their  land  for  an  in- 
heritance, for  about  four  hundred  and  (ifty  years: 

20  and  after  these  things  he  gave  llitiii  judges  until 


ach.  12  :  17....6  vers.  26.  42.  4.1;  eh.  10  :  35 c  Deut.  7  :  fi,  7 d  Ex.  1  :  1 ;  Ps.  105  :  23,  24;  ch.  7  :  17 

16  :  35;  Num.  14  :  33,  34  :  Ps.  95  :  9,  10;  ch.  7  :  36 g  Deut.  7  :  1 ft  Josh.  14  :  1,  2;  Pa.  78:  55... 

authorities  read  suffered  he  their  manners.    See  Deut.  1  :  31. 


..e  Ex.  6:6:  13  :  14,  16..../ Kx. 
i  Jud.  2  :  16. 1  Mauy  aucieut 


16-41.  THE  DISCOURSE  OF  PAUL  AT 
ANTIOCH. 

The  topics  arc — first,  the  goodness  of  God  to 
Israel,  especially  in  having  promised  to  send  to 
thciu  a  Saviour  (ifi-25) ;  secondly,  Jesus  has  been 
proved  to  be  this  Saviour  by  his  death  and  res- 
urrection, in  accordance  with  the  prophecies 
of  the  Old  Testament  (26-37) ;  and  thirdly,  it  is 
the  duty  of  men  to  receive  him  in  this  charac- 
ter, since  they  can  be  saved  in  no  other  way 

(38-4l). 

16.  Beckoning  with  his  hand  (comp.  on 


Palestine  at  that  time. — In  (the)  land,  anar- 
throus, as  above. — Assigned  to  them  as  a 

possession.  Hellenistic  for  the  nii)hil  of 
nachnl}  Their  land,  Ijy  promise,  gift ;  or,  better, 
henceforth  theirs  and  that  of  their  descendants. 
20.  After  these  things — viz.  the  conquest 
and  <)ccupati(jn  of  the  country.  —  During 
about  four  hundred  and  fifty  years  he 
gave  judges.  For  the  dative,  see  on  8  :  II. 
This  number  is  the  sum  of  the  years  a.ssigned 
in  the  Old  Testament  to  the  administration  of 
the  judges,  from  the  time  of  Joshua  to  the 


12  :  l(j)  was  the  customary  gesture  on  rising  to  i  death  of  Eli,  added  to  the  sum  of  the  yeare 


speak.  It  betokened  respect  for  the  audience 
and  a  request  for  attention. — Who  fear  God, 
as  in  10  :  2 — i.  e.  Gentiles  who  were  friendly  to 
Judaism,  but  uncircumcised.  Thej'  occui)ied, 
it  is  said,  a  separate  place  in  the  synagogue. 
The  contents  of  the  address  show  that  the 
Israelites  greatly  outnumbered  that  class  of  the 


during  which  the  nation  was  subject  to  foreign 
opl)ressoi-s.  Hence  it  would  be  very  natural 
for  the  Jews  to  speak  of  four  hundred  and  fifty 
years  as  the  pro.\imate  number  of  years  during 
which  the  judges  ruled.  But,  whether  tlie 
computation  arose  in  that  way  or  some  other, 
it  was  certainly  in  use  among  the  Jews;   for 


liearers.  This  discourse  deserves  the  more  at-  Josephus  (Antt.,  8.  2.  1)  gives  the  time  from 
tcntion  as  furnishing  so  copious  an  illustration  j  the  departure  out  of  Egypt  till  the  building  of 
of  the  apostle's  manner  of  preaching  to  the  ■  the  temple  as  five  liundrcd  and  ninety-two 
Jews.  j  years.     If  wo  deduct  from  that  the  forty  years 

17.  Exalted,  made  them  numerous  and  :  in  the  wilderness,  twenty-five  for  the  ailminis- 
powerful.— In  the  land  (ivyfi).  For  the  ab-  \  tration  of  Joshua  (Antt.,  5.  1.  29;  not  .stat-ed  in 
sence  of  the  article,  see  on  7  :  29.— With  a  high  I  the  Old  Testament),  forty  for  Saul's  reign  (see 
arm— i.e.  one  raised  on  high,  and  soever  ready  !  v.  21),  forty  for  David's,  and  four  under  Solo- 
to  protect  and  defend  them,    (t'omp.  E.x.  G  :  G.) 

18.  Carried  them  as  a  nurse  (in  the  arms 


as  it  were ;  iTpo<j>o(t>6pT)<Tev  =  is  Tpo<{>'o<;  e^d<TTa<Tfi'),  Sus- 
tained, cared  for  them.  The  term  is  derived, 
probably,  from  Deut.  1  :  .31.  Most  of  tiie  later 
editors  prefer  this  to  endured  their  manners 
(eTpono<i>6pr)<T€v).     It  suits  tlic  Connection  better 


mon  (1  Kings  6:  i),  wc  havc  for  the  period  of  the 
judges  four  hundred  and  forty-tliree  years, 
which  the  apostle  could  call,  in  round  num- 
bers, about  four  hundred  and  fifty  years. 
It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  Paul  has  followed 
liere  a  mode  of  reckoning  which  was  ctirrent 
lit  that  time,  and  which,  being  a  well-known 


than  the  other  word,  since  what  the  apostle  [  received  chronology,  whether  correct  or  incor- 
would  bring  to  view  here  is  not  so  much  the  I  rect  in  itself  considered,  was  entirely  correct 
forbearance  of  God  toward  his  peoj)le  as   his  1  for  his  object,  which  was  not  to  settle  a  (piestion 


interposition,  his  direct  efforts,  in  their  behalf 
It  is  well  attested,  also,  though  the  evidence  is 
not  decisive. 

19.  Seven  nations.     (See  their  names  in 
Deut.  7:1.)    They  were  the  principal  tribes  in 


about  dates,  but  to  recall  to  the  minds  of  those 
whom  he  addressed  a  particular  portion  of  the 
Jewish  liistory.  The  Hebrews  had  still  an- 
other computation,  as  appears  from  1  Kings 
6  :  1.    The  time  from  the  Exodus  to  tlie  build- 


1  For  the  origin  of  such  Hebraisms,  see  the  writer's  Hebrew  Exercises,  p.  96. 


156 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIIL 


space  of  four  hundred  and  fifty  years,  "until  Samuel 
the  prophet. 

21  'And  afterward  they  desired  a  king:  and  God 
gave  unto  them  Saul  the  son  of  (is,  a  man  of  the  tribe 
of  Benjamin,  by  the  space  of  forty  years. 

'il  And  ''vvheii  he  had  removed  him,  '^he  raised  up 
unto  them  David  to  be  their  king;  to  whom  also  he 
gave  testimony,  and  said,  "1  have  found  David  the  sun 
of  Jesse, /a  man  after  mine  own  heart,  which  shall  fulfil 
all  my  will. 

2;^  ffOf  this  man's  seed  hath  God  according  *to  his 
promise  raised  unto  Israel  'a  Saviour,  .Jesus: 

24  *\Vhen  John  had  first  preached  before  his  com- 
ing the  baptism  of  repentance  to  all  the  people  of 
Israel. 

2.T  And  as  John  fulfilled  his  course,  he  said,  'Whom 
think  ye  that  1  am  ?    1  am  not  he.    But,  behold,  there 


21  Samuel  the  prophet.  And  a."terward  they  asked  for 
a  kihg:  and  dod  gave  unto  them  .■~aul  the  son  of 
Kish,  a  man  of  the  tribe  of  i;enjaiuin,  lor  the  sjiace 

22  of  forty  years.  And  when  he  had  removed  him,  he 
raised  up  David  to  be  their  king;  to  whom  also  he 
bare  witness,  and  said,  I  have  found  David  the  son 
of  Jesse,  a  man  after  my  heart,  who  shall  do  all  my 

2;3iwill.  Of  this  man's  seed  hath  God  according  to 
24  promise  brought  unto  Israel  a  Saviour,  Jesus;  when 

John  had  first  preached  2i,efore  his  coming  the  bap- 
25tism  of  repentance  to  all  the  people  of  Israel.    Ai.d 

as  John  was  fulfilling  his  course,  he  said,  What  sup- 


il  Sam.  3 -.20.... 6  1  Sam.  8:5;  10  :  1....C  I  Sam.   15:  23,  26,  28;  1«  :  1  ;  Hos.   13  :  ll....dl  Sara.  16:  13;  2  Sam.  2:4;  5  :3....e  Ps. 

89:  20 /I  Sam.  13  :  14;  ch.  7  :  46 g  Isa.  U  :  1  ;  l.uke  1  :  32,  69;  ch.  2  :  :S0:  Rom.  1:3 hi  Sam.  7  :  12;  Ps.  132  ;  II i  Matt. 

1  :  21  ;  Rom.  11  :  26 k  Matt.  3:1;  Luke  3:3 t  Matt.  3:11;  Mark  1:7;  Luke  3  :  IB  ;  John  1  :  20,  27. 1  Gr.  wills 2  Gr.  befur* 

the  face  of  hU  entering  in. 


ing  of  the  temple  is  there  given  as  four  hun- 
dred and  eighty  years,  which  (deducting  the 
other  dates  as  stated  above)  would  allow  but 
two  hundred  and  thirty-one  years  for  the  j^erlod 
of  the  judges.  (In  regard  to  such  differences,  see 
also  on  7:6.)  Some  of  the  best  critics  read 
about  four  hundred  and  fifty  years,  and 
after  these  things.  The  four  hundred  and 
fifty  years  belong,  then,  to  the  preceding  verse, 
and  may  be  the  years  from  the  birth  of  Isaac, 
when  God  showed  that  he  had  chosen  the 
fathers,  to  the  distribution  of  the  land  of  Ca- 
naan. Adding  together  sixty  years  from  the 
birth  of  Isaac  to  that  of  Jacob,  one  hundred 
and  thirty  as  the  age  of  Jacob  on  going  into 
Egypt,  two  hundred  and  fifteen  as  the  sojourn 
there,  and  forty-seven  thence  to  the  settlement 
of  the  tribes,  the  sum  is  four  hundred  and  fifty- 
two.  (See  again  on  7  :  G.)  This  reading  is 
found  in  the  oldest  manuscripts  (ABC)  [also 
X  B  D],etc.,  and  is  approved  by  Griesbach  (par- 
tially), Lachniann,  Luthardt,'  Green,  Words- 
worth, and  others.  The  text  may  have  been 
changed  to  relieve  the  difficulty  (Mey.),  but  it 
is  singular  that  the  three  oldest  witnesses  con- 
cur in  that  variation.  A  summary  decision  is 
not  to  be  pronounced  here.  [It  will  be  noticed, 
however,  that  the  chief  critical  editors — Griesb., 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  Anglo- 
Am.  Revi.sers— adopt  the  reading  which  removes 
the  difficulty.  Their  agreement  is  a  strong  rea- 
son for  believing  that  their  judgment  is  sound. 
— A.  H.] — Unto  Samuel,  who  is  to  be  includ- 
ed, probably,  among  the  judges;  or  eios  may  be 
taken  as  exclusive.  How  long  he  governed  is 
not  mentioned  in  1  Sam.  7  :  15,  nor  in  28  :  3. 
The  tradition  (Jos.,  Antt.,  6. 13.  5),  which  is  not, 
perhaps,  of  much  value,  makes  it  twelve  years. 
«o«  would  allow  us  to  add  these  years  to  four 
hundred  and  fifty,  if  any  one  prefers  that. 


21.  And  thereafter  {KaKtl^ev)  is  here  an  ad- 
verb of  time. — Asked  for  themselves,  etc. 
(See  1  Sam.  8:5;  10 : 1.) — Forty  years,  which 
agrees  with  Josephus  [Antt.,  6.  14.  9).  The  Old 
Testament  does  not  mention  the  length  of  Saul's 
reign. 

22.  Having  removed  him — i.  e.  from  life 
(De  Wet.)  or  from  his  office  (Kuin.).  The  two 
events  were  coincident  in  iioint  of  time.  Saul 
reigned  until  his  death,  though  David  was  an- 
ointed as  prospective  king  during  his  lifetime. 
To  whom  (wdat.  conim.j  also  he  testified, 
saying.  The  dative  depends  on  the  participle. 
The  apostle  quotes  the  substance  of  1  Sam.  13  : 
14  and  Ps.  89  :  21.  This  commendation  is  not 
absolute,  but  describes  the  character  of  David 
in  comparison  with  that  of  Saul.  The  latter 
was  rejected  for  his  disobedience  and  impiety; 
David,  on  the  contrary,  was  always  fiiithful  to 
the  worship  of  Jehovah,  and  performed  his 
commands  as  they  were  made  known  to  him 
by  revelation  or  the  messengers  whom  God  sent 
to  him. 

23.  Jesus  could  not  be  the  Messiah,  unless 
he  were  descended  from  David.  This  man's 
stands  first,  in  order  to  give  prominence  to  his 
descent  from  that  source. —  According  to 
promise,  as  made  to  the  fathers  (v.  32),  not  to 
David  merely. 

24.  John.  The  Jews  acknowledged  John's 
authority  as  a  propliet,  and  were  bound,  there- 
fore, to  admit  his  testimony.  Before  his  en- 
trance— i.  e.  upon  his  public  ministry.  (See 
Matt.  11  :  10;  Luke  7  :  27.)— Baptism  of  re- 
pentance— i.  e.  such  as  required  rejjentance 
on  the  part  of  those  who  received  it.  (See 
19  :  4.) 

25.  Now  as  John  was  finishing  his 
course,  was  near  its  close  (De  Wet.,  Mey.), 
not  while   he  was   completing  it   (Kuin., 


1  In  Keuter's  Repertorium,  p.  205  (Jahrgang  1855). 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


157 


Cometh  one  after  me,  whose  shoes  of  his  feet  I  am  not 
worthy  to  loose. 

lit;  Men  anil  brethren,  children  of  the  stock  of  Abra- 
ham, and  whosoever  among  you  feareth  Ood,  "to  you 
is  the  word  of  this  salvation  sent. 

27  l-"or  they  that  dwell  at  Jerusalem,  and  their  rulers, 
'hoeau.se  they  knew  him  not,  nor  yet  the  voices  of  the 
prophets  'which  are  read  every  sabbath  day, ''they  have 
tultilled  t/iciii  in  condemning  him. 

28  'And  though  they  found  no  cause  of  death  in  him, 
/yet  desired  they  I'ilate  that  ho  should  he  slain. 

2!)  'And  when  they  had  fulfilled  all  that  was  written 
of  him,  '•they  took  him  down  from  the  tree,  and  laid 
him  in  a  sepulchre. 


pose  ye  that  I  am?  I  am  not  he.  Fiut  behold,  there 
Cometh  one  after  me,  the  shoes  of  whose  feet  I  am 

20  not  worthy  to  unluo.^e  Hretliren,  children  of  the 
slock  of  Abraham,  and  those  among  you  that  fear 
(jod,  to  us  is  the  word  of  ihiij  salvulion  st-nl  forth. 

27  I'or  they  that  dwell  in  Jerusalem,  and  their  rulers, 
because  they  knew  him  not,  nor  the  voices  of  the 
proph  ts    which   are   read  every   sabbath,   fultilled 

28 (/((-///  by  coiidenming //(//(.  And  though  they  found 
no  cause  of  death  m  him,  yet  asked  they  of  I'ilate 

29  that  he  should  be  slain.  And  when  they  had  ful- 
filled all  things  that  were  written  of  him,  they 
took   him  down   from   the   tree,  and   laid   him  in 


a  Matt.  10  :  6;  T.uke  «  :  47  ;  ver.  4«;  oh.  :<  :  26 6  Luke  Xt  :  .^  ;  ch.  .^  :  17;  1  Cor.  i  :  8 overs.  14,  15:  ch.  15  :  21 d  Luke  24  :  20.  44  ; 

cb    26:  22;  2S  :  2:) «  .Malt.  27  :  22;  Mark   15  :  18,   14;  l.uke  23  :  21,  22;  John   19  :  6,  16 /cb.  3  :  13,  14 g  Luke  IS  :  31 ;  24  :44; 

JohD  19  :  28,  30,  3«,  37.. ..A  Matt.  27  :  59;  Mark  15  :  46;  Luke  23  :  53;  John  19  :  38. 


OLsh.).  The  forerunner  was  about  to  be  im- 
prisoned when  he  bore  this  testimony  to  his 
Successor. — Whom  do  ye  suppose  that  I 
am?  I  am  not— viz.  the  Me-ssiuh.  The  pred- 
icate is  omitted  as  well  known.  (Comp.  Mark 
U  :  G ;  Luke  21  :  8 ;  John  13  :  19.)  Some  critics 
(Calv.,  Kapli.,  Kuin.)  exclude  the  question,  and 
render  he  whom  (Wi-o  =  ovtii-o)  ye  suppose,  I 
am  not.  Tiiis  punctuation  does  violence  to 
the  pronoun,  while  the  sense  has  no  advantage 
over  the  other.  (See  W.  ^25. 1.) — Comes  after 
me,  etc.  In  this  way  he  would  exi)ress  strong- 
ly his  official  and  j)ersonal  inferiority  to  Christ. 
It  was  an  office  of  the  lowest  servants,  not  only 
among  the  Jews,  but  the  Greeks  and  Romans, 
to  bind  and  unbind  the  sandals  of  their  mas- 
ters.    (See  Jahn's  Archxol.,  jJ  123.) 

26.  Men,  at  the  same  time  brethren;  not 
different  cla.s.scs.— You  includes  botli  Jews  and 
proselytes. — Of  this  salvation,  which  they 
preached  (comp.  5  :  20),  or  procured  by  Jesus, 
named  in  v.  23. — Was  sent  forth — i.  e.  from 
God,  the  Autlior  of  the  word. 

27.  For  confirms  the  implication  in  this 
salvation,  in  v.  26  —  viz.  that  Jesus,  whom 
Paul  preached,  was  the  promised  Saviour;  for 
(yap)  he  had  sutfcred  and  been  put  to  death, 
and  so  had  fulfilleil  what  was  predicted  of  the 
Messiah.  De  Wette,  Winer  (?  57.  6),  and  otliers 
maintain  this  view  of  the  connection.  Meyer 
(followed  ])y  Alf )  opposes  you  in  v.  20  to  they 
that  dwell  here — i.  e.  the  foreign  Jews,  being 
less  guilty,  had  the  message  of  salvation  sent 
to  them,  which  the  other  Jews  had  forfeited. 
This  explanation  arrays  the  passage  against 
other  passages— c.  jr.  2  :  38 ;  3  :  17,  20.  It  was 
not  true  that  those  who  crucified  tlie  Saviour 
excluded  themselves  from  the  offers  of  the 
gospel. — This  one— viz.  Je.<;us— not  having 
known,  failed  to  recognize,  and  the  voices 
of  the  prophets  (not  having  known),  they 
fulfilled  them — viz.  the  projthecies — by  con- 
demning him  to  death.  This  is  the  simple.st 
translation,  and  the  one  most  approved  (Calv., 


Grot.,  Kuin.,  Hniph.).  The  principal  English 
versions  agree  in  this  sense.  Not  having 
known  is  milder  than  denied,  in  3  :  13. 
(See  note  there.)  In  this  case  we  must  sup- 
ply pronouns  after  in  condemning  and  ful- 
filled, which  refer  to  difi'erent  antecetlents. 
The  construction  may  be  harsh,  but  occasions 
no  obscurity.  Meyer  rendci-s :  Since  they 
knew  not  this  one  .  .  .  they  also  fulfilled 
the  voices,  etc.  The  Jews  are  usually  repre- 
sented as  rejecting  Christ  because  they  failed  to 
discern  the  import  of  the  predictions  concern- 
ing him.  The  thought  here  would  be  inverted 
somewhat ;  the  rejection  appears  as  the  reason 
why  they  misunderstand  and  fulfil  the  pro]>h- 
ets.  De  Wette  construes  not  having  known 
{ayvortaavret)  OS  a  Verb  :  They  knew  him  not, 
and  the  voices  .  .  .  fulfilled.  This  anal- 
ysis secures  more  uniformity  in  the  structure 
of  the  sentence ;  but  such  a  use  of  the  parti- 
ciple is  infrequent.  Scholcficld  translates:  Be- 
ing ignorant  of  this  wdhI.  and  the  voices 
of  the  prophets,  .  .  .  fulfilled  it  by  con- 
demning him.  He  a.«signs  in  this  way  a 
nearer  antecedent  to  this  one  (him,  E.  V.), 
but  must  set  aside  the  more  obvious  subject 
Suggested  to  the  mind  by  the  context.  It  is 
not  clear  in  what  sense  he  would  have  us  re- 
gard the  rejection  of  Christ  as  fulfilling  the 
word  or  gospel.  —  Which  are  read  every 
Sabbath,  and  hence  their  ignorance  wtxs  the 
more  inexcusable. 

28.  Although  they  found  no  cause  of 
death,  none  that  justified  it.  (See  28  :  18.) 
They  cliarged  him  with  ])lasphemy  and  sedi- 
tion, but  could  not  establish  the  accusation. 
(See  3  :  13;  Matt.  27  :  24;  Luke  23  :  22.) 

29.  Laid  has  the  same  subject  as  the  otlier 
verbs.  (See  v.  27.)  The  burial,  however,  was 
tlie  particular  act  of  Joseph  of  ArimatJica  and 
Xicodenuis.  (See  John  19  :  38,  nfj.)  What  tlie 
apostle  would  assert  is  tliat  Christ  had  fulfilled" 
the  prophecy  which  announced  that  lie  sliould 
be  put  to  death  and  rise  again.     It  was  not  iiu- 


158 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


30  "But  God  raised  him  from  the  dead : 

31  And  ''he  was  seen  many  days  of  them  which  came 
up  with  him  <^froni  t.alilee  to  Jerusalem,  ■'who  are  his 
witnesses  unto  the  people. 

32  And  we  declare  unto  you  glad  tidings,  how  that 
•the  promise  which  w;is  made  unto  the  fathers, 

33  God  hath  fulfilled  the  same  unto  us  their  chil- 
dren, in  that  he  hath  raised  up  Jesus  again;  as  it  is 
also  written  in  the  second  psalm,  /Thou  art  my  Son, 
this  day  have  I  begotten  thee. 


30a    tomb.      But   God    raised    him    from    the    dead: 

31  and  he  was  seen  for  many  days  of  them  that  came 
up  with  him  from  Galilee  to  Jerusal  m,  who  are 

32  now  his  witnesses  unto  the  people.  And  we  bring 
you   good   tidings  of  the   promise   made   unto   the 

33  fathers,  how  that  God  hath  fulfilled  the  same  unto 
our  children,  in  that  he  raised  up  Jesus ;  as  also  it 
is  written  in  the  second  psalm,  Thou  art  my  Son, 


a  .Matt.  28  :  6  ;  ch.  2  :  24  ;  3  :  13,  15.  ; 
3  :  15;  5  :  32 e  Qea.  3  :  15 


;  5  :  .TO.. ..6  Matt    28  :  16;  ch.  1  :  3;  1  Cor.  15  :  5,  6,  7....cch.  1  :  II. ...d  ch,  1  :  8; 
12  :  3  ;  22  :  18  ;  ch.  26  :  6  ;  Rom.  4  :  13  ;  Gal.  3  :  16. . . .  /  Pa.  2  :  7  ;  Heb.  1  .  5 ;  5  :  5. 


portant  tliat  he  should  discriminate  as  to  the 
character  of  the  agents  in  the  transaction. 
Some  translate  those  who  took  him  down 
placed  him,  etc.  The  participle,  in  that  re- 
lation to  tlie  verb,  would  require  the  article. 

31.  Those  who  came  up  with  him — i.e. 
the  Galilean  disciples  who  attended  him  on  his 
last  journey  to  Jerusalem.  They  knew,  there- 
fore, what  they  testified  ;  their  means  of  know- 
ledge had  been  ample.  This  idea  occurs  in  the 
Acts  often. — Now.  The  resurrection  rested, 
not  on  tradition,  but  on  the  testimony  of  living 
men.  The  English  Version,  after  the  received 
text,  omits  this  particle.  [But  it  is  well  sup- 
ported by  X  A  C  D,  Vulg.,  Cop.,  Syr.,  and  in- 
serted by  Lach.,  Tsch.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo- 
Am.  Eevisers,  and  Treg.  (in  marg.).  Of  its 
importance  no  reader  can  entertain  a  doubt. 
—  A.  H.] — Unto  the  people — i.  e.  the  Jews. 
(See  v.  24;  10  :  42,  etc.) 

32.  And  so  we — i.  e.  in  view  of  these  vari- 
ous proofs  that  Jesus  is  the  Messiah.  (See  vv. 
23,  25,  27,  31.)— Declare  (ivayyiXii6y.eU)  has  a 
double  accusative  only  here.  (W.  §  32.  4.) — 
Glad  tidings  stands  in  the  first  clause  with 
the  usual  effect  of  that  attraction.  (See  on 
3  :  10.) 

33.  Has  completely  fulfilied,  stronger 
than  fulfilled,  in  v.  27,  because  the  resurrec- 
tion, considered  as  involving  the  ascension  and 
exaltation,  was  essentially  the  finisliing  act  in 
the  fulfilm'ent  of  the  promise  relating  to  the 
Messiah. — Having  raised  up  Jesus  means, 
as  Luther,  Schott,  Stier,  De  Wette,  Meyer, 
Hengstenberg,  Tholuck,  and  others  decide, 
having  raised  up  Jesus  from  the  grave, 
not  having  brought  him  into  existence 
(Calv.,  Bug.,  Kuin.,  Olsh.).  The  mind  attaches 
that  sense  to  the  word  most  readily  after  v.  30. 
It  was  unnecessary  to  insert  from  the  dead, 
because  the  context  suggests  tlie  specific  mean- 
ing. (Comp.  2  :  24,  32.)  oi-acrTTio-as,  in  the  sense 
oi  having  raised  up  merely,  expresses  too  little  for 
the  prophecy  whicli  that  event  is  said  to  have 
fulfilled.  The  original  passage  refers,  not  to  the 
incarnation  of  the  Messiah,  but  to  his  inaugu- 
ration or  public  acknowledgment  on  the  part 


of  God  as  the  rightful  Sovereign  of  men.  To 
no  moment  in  the  history  of  Clirist  would  such 
a  prediction  apply  with  such  significance  as  to 
that  of  his  triumphant  resurrection  from  the 
dead.  The  progression  of  the  argument  in  the 
next  verse  demands  this  interpretation.  To 
the  assertion  here  that  God  had  raised  Jesus  to 
life  again,  the  apostle  adds  there  that  this  life 
was  one  which  death  would  invade  no  more. — 
As  also — i.  e.  what  took  place  was  foretold. — 
First  psalm.  The  second  Psalm  in  our  Eng- 
lish Version  is  named  here  the  finst,  because  in 
some  manuscripts  the  Hebrews  reckoned  the 
first  Psalm  merely  as  prefatory.  Second  has 
much  less  support.  [According  to  the  critical 
editors,  this  is  not  now  the  case.  In  favor  of 
second  (fieuTepw)  are  XBCEGHLP,  Avhile 
Tsch.  alleges  for  first  (Trpiiro.)  but  a  single  uncial 
codex — viz.  D.  West,  and  Hort,with  Anglo-Am. 
Revisers,  retain  second.  Dr.  Hackett  as  well  as 
others  may  have  been  influenced  by  the  as- 
sumed improbability  that  first  would  have  been 
substituted,  intentionally  or  vinintentionally, 
for  second.  But  may  not  the  change  have 
been  made  by  a  transcriber  who  trusted  to 
his  memory  for  the  instant,  or,  better,  by  one 
who  was  acquainted  with  "some  manuscripts" 
whicli  treated  the  first  psalm  as  prcfatori/?  I 
perceive  that  Westcott  and  Hort  urge  this  con- 
sideration. They  say :  "  The  authorities  for 
TrpuJTCfj  here  and  for  the  combination  of  the  two 
Psalms  are  in  each  case  Western ;  so  that  a 
'  Western '  scribe,  being  proljaljly  accustomed 
to  read  the  two  Psalms  combined,  would  be 
under  a  temptation  to  alter  second  to  first,  and 
not  vice  versa."  (Comp.  Scrivener,  2d  ed.,  p. 
538.)— A.  H.]— Thou  art  my  Son,  etc.  (ps. 
2:7)  affirms  the  Sonship  of  the  Messiah,  which 
included  his  divine  nature.  (See  Rom.  1:4.) 
Hence  I  have  begotten  thee  cannot  refer  to 
the  origin  of  this  relationship,  but  must  receive 
a  figurative  interpretation ;  either  1  have  be- 
gotten thee  —  brought  thee  into  a  state  of 
glory  and  power  such  as  Christ  a.ssumed  after 
his  resurrection  as  Mediator  at  the  right  hand 
of  God  —  or,  according  to  a  fiiniiliar  Hebrew 
usage,  I  have  declared,  exhibited,  thee  as 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


159 


31  And  as  concerning  that  he  raised  him  up  froin 
the  dead,  miw  no  luoru  to  return  to  corruption,  he  >aid 
on  tliis  wise,  "I  will  give  vou  the  sure  mercies  ol' 
Uavid. 

:i5  Wherefore  he  saith  also  in  another  p.ialm,  >Thou 
Shalt  not  suffer  thine  Holy  Oi  e  to  see  corruption. 

:j(i  Kor  l>a\  id,  after  he  had  served  his  own  genera- 
tion by  the  will  of  God,  'fell  on  sleep,  and  was  laid 
unto  his  fathers,  and  saw  corruption  : 


;U  this  day  have  I  begotten  thee.  And  a.s  concerning 
that  he  raided  him  up  from  the  dead,  now  no  more 
to  returj.  to  corruption,  he  hath  spoken  on  this 
wi.se,  i  will  give  you  the  holy  and  sure  ^/c.v.vin^i  of 

35  David.  Hecuuse  he  saith  also  in  another  pxahii, 
Thou  wilt  not  give  thy  Holy  One  to  see  corruption. 

36  lor  David,  after  he  had  'in  his  own  generation 
served  the  counsel  of  Ood,  fell  on  si.  ep,  and  was 


a  Isa.  55  :  3....fr  Ps.  16  :  10;  ch.  2  :  31....C  I  Kings  2  :  10;  cli.  2  :  2!). 1  Or.  nerved  hit  own  generation  by  the  eountel  of  Cod, 

ftU  on  eleeg    Or,  eerued  hitt  own  generation,  felt  on  sleep  by  the  counsel  of  God 


begotten — i.  e.  as  my  Son ;  viz.  by  the  resur- 
rection from  the  deud.  Tlie  thought  here  is 
entirely  parallel  to  that  in  Rom.  1:4.  As  to 
tlie  tlechirative  sense  of  Hebrew  verbs,  see  the 
note  on  10  :  lo. — To-day  designates  the  pre- 
eise  point  of  time  on  wiiieh  the  prophet's  eye 
was  then  fixed — viz.  that  of  Chri.st's  assumption 
of  his  mediatorial  power,  or  that  of  his  open 
l)roclamation  as  Messiah  on  the  part  of  God 
when  he  raised  him  from  the  dead. 

34.  Further  (a.s  proof)  that  he  raised 
him  up  rroiii  the  dead  as  one  who  would 
die  no  more,  ie  is  progressive,  liaised  up 
repeats  the  idea  of  the  foregoing  having  raised 
up  (v.  33),  for  the  purjHise  of  describing  this  res- 
virreetion  more  fully  :  it  would  be  followed  by 


sueeessor  whose  reign  would  be  perpetual,  the 
throne  of  whose  kingdom  God  would  establish 
for  ever  and  ever.  (See  2  Sam.  7  :  13,  sq.)  It 
was  essential  to  the  accomplishment  of  that 
promise  that  the  Messiali  should  be  exempt 
from  death;  and  hence,  as  Jesus  had  been 
proved  to  be  the  Messiah  by  liis  resurrection, 
that  promise  made  it  eertain  that  he  would 
live  and  reign  henceforth,  without  being 
subject  to  any  interruiition  of  his  existence 
or  pt)wer. 

35.  Therefore  also — i.  e.  because  he  was 
not  mortal,  in  further  confirmation  of  that 
fact. — In  another — i.  e.  Psalm;  viz.  IG  :  10. 
(See  on  2  :  2."),  st/.)  The  inspired  declaration 
that  the   Messiah   should   not  experience  the 


no  return  to  death.  From  the  dead  does  not  '  power  of  death  liad  not  only  been  verified  in 
distinguish  the  two  words  as  to  sense,  but  draws  i  his  resurrection,  but  guaranteed  that  he  would 
attention  more  strongly  to  the  contra.st  between  not  experience  that  power  at  any  future  period, 
the  death  which  lie  had  suffered  and  his  exenip-  — Saith — i.e.  God;  viz.  through  David.  (See 
tion   from  tleatli  in  future.     No  more  to  re-  }  v.  34 ;  1  :  IG,  etc.) 

turn,  etc.,  as  applied  to  Christ,  whose  body  j  38.  For  vindicates  the  reference  of  the  pas- 
underwent  no  change  while  it  remained  in  the  I  sage  to  Ciirist,  since  it  could  not  apply  to  David, 
grave,  must  be  ecpiivalent  to  dieth  no  more,  — ^eV  is  antithetic  to  Se  in  v.  37. — His  own 
in  Ilora.  G  :  9.  The  ili.ssolution  or  corrui)tion  generation,  etc.,  admits  of  a  twofold  transla- 
of  the  body  is  the  ordinary  consequent  of  j  tion.  Generation  may  depend  on  having 
death  ;  and  hence,  in  common  speech,  to  return  1  served  :  having  served  his  own  genera- 
?o  C(«TM/j^'oH  and  <o  (/(c,  or  the  opposite,  ?*o< /o  r<'- I  tion  (l)een  useful  to  it),  according  to  the 
^M/vt  «o  con-M;><(V>«  and  )w<  to  rfic,  are  interchange- t  purpose  of  God  (dative  of  norm  or  rule), 
able  expressions.  Bengel  saw  this  import  of  j  Our  English  translators,  Calvin,  Doddridge, 
the  i)hrase.  (See  W.  ^  GG.  10.)  The  perpetuity  J  Iloljin.son,  and  othei-s,  adopt  this  construction, 
of  Christ's  existence  is  an  important  truth  in  \  Olshausen,  Kuinoel,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  and 
the  Christian  system.  In  Rom.  5  :  10,  Paul  urges  others  refer  purpose  to  the  partic»i)le:  hav- 
it  iLS  a  ground  of  certainty  that  if  men  believe  ing  in  his  own  generation  (dative  of  time), 
on  Christ  they  will  be  finally  saved,  and  in  1  or  for  it  (dat.  comm.).  served  the  purpose, 
Rom.  G  :  9  its  a  pledge  that,  ina.smuch  as  lie'  pl4tn,  of  GoA — i.e.  as  an  instrument  for  the 
"dies  no  more,  we  shall  live  with  him."  (See  j  e.xerution  of  his  designs.  (Coinp.  v.  22.) 
also  .Tohn  14  :  19;  Heb.  7  :  25,  etc.)  This  inci-  Generation,  if  connected  witli  the  participle, 
dental  agreement  of  the  address  with  Paul's  '  secures  to  it  a  pei-sonal  object,  and  in  that  way 
circle  of  doctrine  speaks  for  its  genuineness.—  I  forms  a  much  easier  expression  than  purpose 
That  (oTt)  is  the  sign  of  quotation  [but  is  nat-  '  with  the  participle.  The  main  idea  of  the 
urally  omitted  in  translation.— A.  H.].  I  will  clause  is  that  David,  like  other  men,  had  but 
give,  etc.,  expros.ses  the  sulistuntial  sense  of  '  one  generation  of  contemporaries- that  he  ac- 
Isa.  55  :  3:  I  will  give  to  you,  i)erform  unto  complished  for  that  his  allotted  work,  and  then 
you,  the  holy,  inviolable  promises  of  David  I  yielded  to  the  universal  law  which  consigns  the 
—I.  e.  made  to  him— the  sure.  The  language  race  to  death.  Some  join  by  the  purpose,  or 
is  very  nearly  that  of  the  Seventy.  One  of  ;  will,  with  fell  asleep,  which  renders  the  re- 
these  promises  was  that  David  should  have  a  ,  mark   much   less  significant.  — And  he  was 


160 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


37  But  he,  whom  God  raised  again,  saw  no  corrup- 
tion. 

38  1[  Be  it  known  unto  you  therefore,  men  and  breth- 
ren, that  "through  tliis  man  is  preached  unto  you  the 
forgiveness  of  sins : 

3y  And  'by  him  all  that  believe  are  justified  from  all 
things,  ifrom  which  ye  could  not  be  justified  by  the  law 
of  Moses. 

40  Beware  therefore,  lest  that  come  upon  you,  which 
is  spoken  of  in  =the  prophets; 

41  Behold,  ye  despisers,  and  wonder,  and  perish  :  for 
I  work  a  work  in  your  days,  a  work  which  ye  shall  in 
no  wise  believe,  though  a  man  declare  it  unto  you. 


37  laid  unto  his  fathers,  and  saw  corruption :   but  ho 

38  whom  Ijod  raised  up  saw  no  corruption.  le  it 
known  unto  you  therefore,  brethren,  that  through 
this  man  is  proclaimed  unto  you  remission  of  sins: 

39  and  by  him  every  one  that  believeth  is  justified 
from  all  things    frcni  which  ye  could  not  be  justi- 

40  fied  by  the  law  of  Moses,  leware  therefore,  lest 
that  come  upon  you,  which  is  spoken  in  the 
prophets ; 

41  i  ehold,  ye  despisers,  and  wonder,  and  'perish ; 
lor  I  work  a  work  in  your  days, 

A  work  which  ye  shall  in  no  wise  believe,  if  one 
declare  it  unto  you. 


a  Jer.  31  :34;  Dan.  9  :  21;  Luke  24:  47;  1  John  2  :  12.... 6  Isa.  53  :  11;  Kom.  3  : 

• 1  Or,  vanish  away 


i:  8:3;  Heb.  7  :  19 c  Isa.  29:  14;  Hab.  1  :  5. 


added  unto  his  fathers.  This  expression 
recognizes  the  existence  of  the  soul  in  a  future 
state  (Bng.,  Olsh.,  Doddr.).  Gesenius  says  tliat 
it  is  distinguished  expressly  botli  from  deatli 
and  burial  in  Gen.  25  :  8  ;  35  :  29  ;  2  Kings  22  : 
20.  (See  Lex.,  s.  (fsa/»/i.)— Saw  corruption,  as 
to  his  mortal  part.     (Comp.  2  :  31.) 

38.  Therefore  {ovv),  illative.  Jesus  has 
been  shown  to  be  the  Messiah,  and  he  is, 
therefore,  the  Author  of  pardon  and  salva- 
tion to  those  who  believe  on  him. — Through 
this  one  belongs  to  forgiveness  rather  tlian 
the  verb:  through  this  one  the  forgiveness 
of  sins  (having  been  procured)  is  announced 
unto  you.  (Coinp.  10  :  36;  Luke  24  :  47.) 
The  next  verse  reaffirms  and  amplifies  the  proji- 
osition. 

39.  The  sentence  here  depends  still  on  that 
(oTi-,  V.  38).  A  comma  is  the  proper  point  be- 
tween this  verse  and  the  last.  The  apostle  de- 
clares now — first,  that  the  forgiveness  which 
Christ  has  procured  is  not  partial,  but  extends 
to  all  the  sins  of  the  transgressor;  secondly, 
that  all  men  need  it,  since  no  other  way  of 
pardon  remains  for  those  who  are  condemned 
by  the  law ;  and  thirdly,  since  faith  in  Christ  is 
the  only  condition  annexed  to  it,  this  salvation 
is  free  to  all.— And  that  from  all  things— 
i.  e.  sins — from  which  (=  a(t>'  Hiv  by  attraction) 
ye  were  not  able  by  the  law  of  Moses  to 
be  justified,  etc.  We  cannot  suppose  this  to 
mean,  according  to  a  possible  sense  of  the  words, 
that  the  gospel  merely  completes  a  justification 
which  the  law  has  commenced  or  accomplished 
in  part;  for  such  an  admission  would  be  at 
variance  with  the  doctrine  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment in  regard  to  the  utter  inefficacy  of  all 
legal  obedience  to  cancel  the  guilt  of  trans- 
gression, and  the  necessity  of  an  exclusive  re- 
liance on  the  work  of  Christ  for  our  justifica- 
tion. We  must  adopt  a  different  view  of  the 
meaning.  As  Olshausen  suggests,  we  may  re- 
gard from  which,  after  from  all,  not  as  a 
supplementary  clause,  but  as  explanatory  of 
the  other,  or  coextensive  with  it — viz.  from  all 


sins  from  which  {i.  e.  from  all  which  sins)  ye  were 
unable,  etc.  In  other  words,  the  first  clause 
affirms  the  sufficiency  of  the  gospel  to  justify 
from  all  sins,  while  the  second  clause  affirms 
the  insufficiency  of  the  law  to  the  same  extent 
— i.  e.  to  justify  from  any  sins.  (Comp.  Rom. 
8  :  3,  sq.)  To  represent  this  meaning  to  tlie 
ear,  we  should  read  from  all  with  an  empha- 
sis, and  from  which  ye  could  not  be  jus- 
tified, etc.,  as  parenthetic.  Neander  (Pflanzuiig, 
i.  p.  195)  declares  himself  strongly  for  this 
sense  of  the  words.  Alford's  comment  (similar 
to  Meyer's)  represents  a  different  view  :  "Christ 
shall  do  for  you  all  that  the  law  could  not  do, 
leaving  it  for  inference  or  for  further  teaching 
that  this  was  absolutely  all — that  the  law  could 
do  nothing."  According  to  some,  the  apostle 
concedes  a  certain  value  to  the  rites  of  Juda- 
ism :  they  were  the  appointed  means  of  obtain- 
ing the  pardon  of  offences  which  concerned  the 
ritual  merely  and  social  or  public  relations. 
(See  Lange's  Geschichte  der  Kirche,  ii.  p.  171.) 
This  explanation  rests  on  a  false  view  of  the  na- 
ture of  the  Hebrew  rites.  As  in,  or  by,  this 
one  stands  opposed  to  in,  or  by,  the  law,  it 
belongs  to  is  justified,  not  to  believeth. 

40.  Beware,  therefore,  since  ye  are  thus 
guilty  and  exposed.— Lest  that  spoken,  etc., 
lest  the  declaration  be  fulfilled,  verified  in  your 
case.  The  mode  of  citing  the  prophecy  shows 
that  the  apostle  did  not  regard  it  as  spoken  in 
view  of  that  occasion.— In  the  prophets— i.e. 
the  part  of  the  Old  Testament  which  tlie  Jews 
so  named.  (Comp.  v.  15  ;  7  :  42 ;  John  6  :  45. 
See  W.  §  27.  2.)  The  passage  intended  is  Hab. 
1  :5. 

41.  The  citation  follows  very  nearly  the 
Septuagint,  and  agrees  essentially  with  the 
Hebrew.  In  the  original  passage  the  prophet 
refers  to  a  threatened  invasion  of  the  Jewish 
nation  by  the  Chaldeans,  and  he  calls  upon  liis 
countrymen  to  behold  the  judgment  to  which 
their  sins  had  exposed  them,  and  to  be  aston- 
ished, to  tremble,  on  account  of  it.  Of  this 
language  the  apostle  avails  himself,  in  order  to 


Ch.  XIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


161 


42  And  when  the  .Tews  were  gone  out  of  the  syna- 
posne,  the  (lentiles  hesought  that  these  words  might 
be  preached  to  them  tlie  next  sabl)ath. 

4M  Now  when  the  congregation  was  broken  up,  many 
of  the  Jews  and  religious  proselytes  followed  I'aul  and 
Barnabas:  who,  speaking  to  them,  "persuaded  them  to 
continue  in  ''the  grace  of  (iod. 

44  II  And  the  next  sabbath  day  came  almost  the 
whole  city  together  to  hear  the  word  of  Uod. 


42  And  as  they  went  nut,  they  b  sought  that  these 
words  might  be  spoken  to  them  tlie  next  sabbath. 

4:5  Now  when  the  synagogue  broke  up,  many  of  the 
Jews  and  of  the  devout  proselytes  followed  i'aul 
and  Barnabas:  who,  speaking  to  them,  urged  them 
to  continue  in  the  grace  of  <iod. 

44     And  the  next  sabbath  almost  the  whole  city  was 


.6  Tit.  2  :  11 ;  Heb.  12  :  15 ;  1  Pet.  5  :  12. 


warn  the  Jews  whom  he  addressed  of  the  pun- 
ishment wliich  awaited  thein  if  they  rejected 
the  message  which  they  had  now  heard.  Cal- 
vin :  "  Paiilus  fidelitcr  accommodat  in  usum 
suum  propliet;v;  verba,  quia  sicuti  semel  mina- 
tus  fuerat  Deus  per  ])rophetam  suum  Habacuc, 
ita  etiam  semper  fuit  sui  similis"  ["Paul  ac- 
commodates legitimately  to  his  own  use  the 
words  of  the  prophet;  for  as  at  a  former  time 
God  had  threatened  through  his  prophet,  so  he 
was  always  like  himself"]. — Ye  despisers 
occurs  in  the  Septuagint,  but  not  in  tiic  He- 
brew. The  apostle  could  retain  it  in  perfect 
consonance  with  the  original,  because  it  is  the 
incredulity  of  the  wicked,  their  contempt  of 
God's  threateniiigs,  which  occasions  their  ruin. 
What  suggested  the  word  to  the  Seventy  is  lui- 
certain.  It  is  thought  that  they  may  have  read 
bnf/f'dlu'tn,  deceitful,  proudly  impious,  instead 
of  b(i<i;/oi/cni,  among  the  heathen. — And 
wonder,  be  astonished — t.  e.  at  the  fearful 
certain  destruction  which  God  prepares  for  his 
enemies.  The  spectacle  to  which  the  prophet 
directs  attention  here  is  that  of  the  Chaldeans 
mustering  their  hosts  to  march  against  the 
guilty  Jews. — And  perish,  unable  to  escape 
the  punishment  which  their  sins  have  pro- 
voked. This  word  elicits  an  idea  which  the 
Hebrew  text  involves,  though  it  is  not  ex- 
pressed here.  Paul  has  retained  it  from  the 
Septuagint.— A  work  of  judgment  I  work, 
execute.  The  future  act  is  represented  as  pres- 
ent, because  it  was  near. — The  second  work 
Paul  inserts  for  the  sake  of  emphasis.  The 
copie-s  which  omit  it  were  corrected,  probal^ly, 
after  the  Septuagint. — Which  ye  will  not 
believe,  though  any  one  should  fully 
declare  it  to  you— ».  e.  although  apprised 
ever  so  distinctly  of  their  danger,  they  would 
not  heed  it ;  they  are  infatuated,  they  cling  to 
their  delusive  hopes  of  safety.  The  New  Tes- 
tament, like  most  of  the  later  Greek,  employs 
often  the  subjunctive  aorist  in  the  sense  of  the 
indicative  future.  (W.  §  56.  3 ;  Lob.,  Phryn., 
p.  723,  gq.)  6,  at  the  head  of  the  clause,  is  a 
better  reading  than  (I.  That  the  dative,  how- 
ever, is  not  a  false  construction,  see  Rom.  10 :  16. 
11 


43-49.  THEY  PREACH  A  SECOND  TIME 
AT  ANTIOCH. 

42.  The  best  editions  insert  they  in  place  of 
the  Jews  from  the  synagogue  in  the  com- 
mon text,  and  omit  the  Gentiles  before  be- 
sought. They  must  refer  to  Paul  and  Bar- 
nabas. [The  words  are  rendered  by  Alford, 
Davidson,  Bible  Union:  And  as  they  (Paul 
and  Barnabas)  were  going  out,  they  (the peo- 
ple) besought, etc.—  A.H.J  The  phra.se  translat- 
ed the  ne\t  Sabbath  (ei?  to  nierafu  aafi^aToy)  cor- 
responds evidently  to  the  next  Sabbath  (t<P 
ixofi-ivw  crap^oLTU})  in  V.  44,  and  means  upon  (lit. 
unto,  as  the  limit)  the  next  Sabbath  (Xcand., 
Mey.,  De  Wet.) ;  not  during  the  intermedi- 
ate week,  as  explained  I)y  some  of  the  older 
critics.  fjLiTo^v  has  this  sense  in  the  N.  T.  here 
only,  but  belongs  to  the  later  Greek.  That  the 
apo.stles  were  not  inactive  during  the  interval, 
but  labored  in  private  circles,  may  be  taken  for 
granted. 

43.  When  the  synagogue  was  broken 
up  seems,  at  first  view,  sui)erHuous  after  as 
they  went  out.  The  procedure,  says  Neander, 
may  have  been  tliis :  As  Paul  and  Barnabas 
were  going  out  before  the  general  dispersion  of 
the  assembly,  the  rulers  of  the  synagogue  may 
have  requested  that  they  would  repeat  their 
discourse  on  the  next  Sabbath.  The  people 
having  then  withdrawn,  many  of  the  Jews 
and  proselytes  followed  the  speakers,  for  the 
purpose  of  declaring  their  assent  to  what  they 
had  heard  or  of  seeking  further  instruction. — 
Worshipping—/,  c.  God — not  devout  (E.  Y.) 
above  othei";?,  but  simply  ivonfiijtpers  of  Jeho- 
vah (see  16  :  14),  and  not  of  idols,  as  fonnerly. 
—The  grace  of  God— ;.  e.  the  gospel,  which 
is  the  fruit  of  liis  undeserved  favor. 

44.  Almost  the  entire  city  assembled. 
Where,  is  not  stated.  Paul  and  Barnabas  on 
that  Sabbath  may  have  sjioken  to  different 
audiences.  If  they  both  repaired  to  the  same 
synagogue,  the  crowd  must  have  filled  not  only 
the  synagogue  itself,  but  every  avenue  to  it. 
(Comp.  Mark  2:2,  sq.;  Luke  8:10.)  The 
hearers  on  this  occasion,  were  Gentiles  as  well 
as  Jewsv 


162 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


45  But  when  the  Jews  saw  the  multitudes,  they  were 
filled  with  envy,  and  "si)ake  against  those  things 
which  were  spoken  by  1  aul,  contradicting  and  blas- 
pheming. 

46  Then  Paul  and  Barnabas  waxed  bold,  and  said, 
*It  was  necessary  that  the  word  of  God  should  first 
have  been  spoken  to  you:  but  'seeing  ye  put  it  from 
you,  and  judge  yourselves  unworthy  of  everlasting 
life,  lo,  ''we  turn  to  the  Gentiles. 

47  For  so  hath  the  Lord  commanded  us,  saying,  "l 
have  set  thee  to  be  a  light  of  the  Gentiles,  that  thou 
shouldst  be  for  salvation  unto  the  ends  of  the  earth. 

4S  And  when  the  Gentiles  heard  this,  they  were 
glad,  and  glorified  the  word  of  the  Lord :  /and  as 
many  as  were  ordained  to  eternal  life  believed. 


45  gathered  together  to  hear  the  word  of  'Ood.  But 
when  the  Jesvs  saw  the  multitudes,  they  were  filled 
with  jealousy,  and  contradicted  the  things  which 

4G  were  spoken  by  I'aul,  and  -blasphemed.  And  Paul 
and  Barnabas  spake  out  boldly,  and  said.  It  was 
necessary  that  the  word  of  God  should  first  be  spo- 
ken to  you.  treeing  ye  thrust  it  from  you,  and  judge 
yourselves  unworthy  of  eternal  life,  lo,  we  turn  to 

47  the  Gentiles,  lor  so  hath  the  Lord  commanded  us, 
suyin;/, 

I  have  set  thee  for  a  light  of  the  Gentiles, 
That  thou  shouldest  be  for  salvation  unto  the 
uttermost  part  of  the  earth. 

48  And  as  the  (jentiles  heard  this,  they  were  glad,  and 
glorified  the  word  of  ^uod :  and  as  many  as  were  or- 


och.  18  :  6;  1  Pet.  4:4;  Jude  10 h  Matt.  10  :  6  ;  ch.  :i  :  26  ;  ver.   26;    Rom.   1  :  16 c  Ex.  32  :  10;    Deut.   32  :  21  ;  Isa.  55  :  5  ;  Matt. 

21  :  43;  Rom.  10  :  19 d  ch.  18  :  6  ;  28  :  28 e  Isa.  42  :  6  ;  49  :  6;  Luke  2  :  32 /  ch.  2  :  47. 1  MaDji  ancient  authorities  read  the 

Lord....i  Or,  railed. 


45.  With  indignation,  as  in  v.  17. — Con- 
tradicting is  neither  superfluous  nor  Hebra- 
istic, but,  like  the  participle  united  with  its  finite 
verb  in  the  classics,  emphasizes  spake  against 
(Mey.) :  not  only  contradicting,  but  blas- 
pheming. The  second  participle  defines  the 
extent  or  criminality  of  the  act  stated  by  the 
first.     (W.  ?45-8.) 

46.  Unto  you  it  was  necessary,  because 
the  plan  of  God  required  it.  (Comp.  on  3  :  2G.) 
First,  first  in  time,  as  in  3  :  2G. — And  ye  judge 
yourselves  not  worthy  of  the  eternal  life 
— viz.  which  we  preach.  (See  on  5  :  20.)  This 
mode  of  speaking  is  not  common ;  it  rests  on 
the  just  view  that  a  man's  actions  may  be 
taken  as  his  own  self-pronounced  verdict  as  to 
his  character  and  deserts. — Unto  the  heathen, 
in  that  place.  In  like  manner,  the  Jews  whom 
they  left  to  their  doom  were  those  at  Antioch. 
They  did  not  turn  from  the  Jewish  nation,  as 
euch,  to  labor  In  future  for  the  exclusive  benefit 
of  the  Gentiles.     (See  18  :  5,  sq. ;  19  :  8,  sq.) 

47.  So,  as  they  had  done. — I  have  set  thee, 
etc.  See  Isa.  49  :  6.  The  prophet  announces 
there  that  the  Messiah  whom  God  promised  to 
send  would  be  the  Saviour  of  the  Gentiles  as 
well  as  the  Jews;  that  all  nations  would  be 
called  to  share  in  the  blessings  of  his  kingdom. 
The  i^assage  is  quoted  to  show  that  in  turning 
now  to  the  heathen  they  were  merely  carrying 
out  the  plan  of  God  as  revealed  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment (see  also  Isa.  11  :  1,  10 ;  Rom.  9  :  25,  sq.) ; 
the  announcement  of  his  purpose  in  regard  to 
the  unrestricted  design  of  the  gospel  required 
them,  as  his  messengers,  to  publish  it  to  the 
Gentiles. 

48.  They  glorified,  extolled,  the  word  of 
the  Lord.  They  expressed  their  joy  and  grat- 
itude for  the  mercy  which  had  embraced  them 
in  the  plan  of  salvation,  and  had  given  them 
this  opportunity  to  secure  its  benefits.  We  see 
from  the  next  clause  that  they  received   the 


message  as  well  as  rejoiced  to  hear  it. — And  as 
many  as  were  appointed  unto  eternal 
life  believed.  This  is  the  only  translation 
which  the  philology  of  the  passage  allows.  So 
Calvin,  Kuinoel,  Olshausen,  Usteri,^  De  Wette, 
Winer,  Meyer,  and  others.  In  this  position  the 
demonstrative  part  of  oo-oi  {those  who)  must  be 
the  subject  of  the  first  verb,  and  the  relative 
part  the  subject  of  the  second.  Hence,  it  is 
impossible  to  render  those  who  believed  were  ap- 
jwbited.  Some  translate  the  Greek  participle 
{rtTayixivoi.)  disposed,  inclined ;  but  this  term  as 
passive,  though  it  may  signify  disposed  exter- 
nally— as,  e.  g.,  drawn  up  in  military  order — was 
not  used  to  denote  an  act  of  the  mind.  In  20  : 
13  the  form  is  middle  with  an  accusative  vir- 
tually (see  note  there),  and  in  1  Cor.  16  :  15  the 
form  is  active  with  an  accusative;  those  cases, 
therefore,  so  unlike  this,  are  not  to  be  cited 
here.  ISIr.  Humphry,  after  Whitby  and  others, 
defends  still  that  signification,  and  appeals  for 
proof  of  it  to  2  Mace.  G  :  21.  The  Greek  there, 
however,  does  not  mean  "those  who  were  set 
or  bent  on  mercy"  (Hmph.),  but  "those  ap- 
pointed for  the  distribution  of  unlawful  flesh," 
(See  Wahl's  Clav.  Lihr.  Vet.  Apocrph.,  and  Biells 
Lex.  in  LXX.,  s.  o-wAayxvurinds.)  The  use  of 
Ttraynivoi  in  that  passage  not  only  fails  to  sup- 
port the  alleged  meaning,  but  confirms  the 
other.  Unto  eternal  life  is  not  to  be  torn 
from  its  connection  and  joined  to  believed. 
In  what  sense  men  are  ajipointed  by  God  (comp. 
Rom.  13  : 1)  unto  eternal  life  is  not  taught  very 
distinctly  here,  but  must  be  gathered  from  a 
comparison  with  other  passages.  (For  exam- 
ple, see  Rom.  8  :  28,  sq.  \  9:11;  Eph.  1  :  4,  11 ; 
2  Thess.  2  :  13 ;  2  Tim.  1  :  9 ;  1  Pet.  1  :  2.)  The 
explanations  of  tliis  text  which  have  been  op- 
posed to  the  foregoing  are  forced  and  unsatis- 
factory. Dr.  Wordsworth  (to  give  a  favorable 
specimen)  expounds  it  thus :  Those  who  had 
set,  or  marslialled,  themselves  to  go  forward  in 


1  Enlwickelung  des  PauUnischen  Lehrbegriffes,  p.  271  (1851). 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


163 


49  And  the  word  of  the  Lord  was  published  through- 
out all  the  region. 

.id  Hut  the  Jews  stirred  up  the  devout  and  honorable 
women,  and  the  chief  men  of  the  city,  and  "raised 
persecution  ajrainst  I'aul  and  Jiarnabas,  and  expelled 
them  out  of  their  coasts. 

51  *Hut  they  shook  olf  the  dust  of  their  feet  against 
them,  and  cuuie  unto  Iconium. 

.'12  And  the  disciples  "were  tilled  with  joy,  and  with 
the  Holy  Ghost. 


49dained  to  eternal  life  believed.  .\nd  the  word  of  the 
Lord  was  sjjrcad  abroad  throughout  all  the  region. 

50  Hut  the  .lews  urged  on  the  devout  women  of  honor- 
able estate,  and  the  chief  men  of  the  city,  and  stirred 
up  a  persecution  against  I'aul  and  Hariiabas,  and  cast 

51  them  out  of  their  borders.  Hut  they  shook  otf  the 
dust  of  their  feet  against  them,  and  came  unto  Ico- 

52niuni.  And  the  disciples  were  tilled  with  joy  and 
with  the  Holy  Spirit. 


CHAPTER    XIV, 


ANr>  it  came  to  pass  in  Iconium,  that  they  went  both  [ 
together  into  the  synagogue  of  the  Jew.s,  and  so  j 
spake,  that  a  great  multitude  both  of  the  Jews  and 
also  of  the  drceks  believed. 
2  But  the  unbelieving  Jews  stirred  up  the  Gentiles, 


1  And  it  came  to  pass  in  Iconium,  that  they  entered 
together  into  the  synagogue  of  the  Jews,  and  so  spake, 
that  a  great  iiuiltitude  both  of  Jews  and  of  drceks  be- 

21ieved.    But  the  Jews  that  were  disobedient  stirred 


a  2  Tim.  3  :  11 b  >lutt.  10  :  U ;  Mark  6  :  11;  Luke  9  :  5;  ch.  18  :  6....C  Matt.  5  :  12 ;  Joba  16:  22;  cb.  2  :  46. 


the  way  to  eternal  life  professed  their  faith 
boldly  ill  the  face  of  every  danger. 

49.  And  the  word  of  the  Lord  Avas 
conveyed  through  all  the   region — i.  e.  in 

the  vicinity  of  Antioch.  This  rapid  extension 
of  the  gospel  we  niust  attribute,  in  some  meas- 
ure, to  the  zeal  of  the  recent  converts.  Paul 
and  Barnabas  also  may  liave  visited  personal- 
ly some  of  the  nearest  places ;  for  Luke  may 
have  passed  over  an  interval  between  this  verse 
and  the  next,  during  which  the  missionaries 
could  have  made  such  excursions. 

50-52.  THF.Y  ARE  PERSECUTED,  AND 
DEPART  Tt)  ICONIUM. 

50.  The  devout  women.  They  were  Gen- 
tile women  who  had  embraced  Judaism  (see 
17  :  4),  and  could  be  eiusily  excited  against  a 
sect  represented  as  hostile  to  tlieir  faith.  At 
Damascus,  as  Joseplius  states  (Bell.  Jad.,  2.  20. 
20),  a  majority  of  the  married  women  were 
proselytes.     Honorable   refers  to  their  rank 

(l7  :  12;  Mark  15  :  «)  aS  tllC  wivcS  of  the  first   liieil  of 

the  city.  It  was  the  object  of  the  crafty  Jews  to 
gain  the  men  through  the  influence  of  the 
women,  and  thus  effect  the  e.\pulsion  of  the 
apostles  from  the  city.  Paul  alludes  to  this 
persecution  in  2  Tim.  3  :  II. 

51.  Again!st  them  =for  a  testbnony  against 
them,  in  Luke  9  :  5.  Shaking  off  the  dust  of 
the  feet  imported  disapprobation  and  rt-jection. 
The  act  derived  its  significancy  from  the  idea 
that  those  renounced  in  tliis  way  were  .so  un- 
worthy that  the  very  dust  of  their  land  was  de- 
filing. In  taking  this  course  Paul  followed  the 
direction  of  Christ  given  in  Matt.  10  :  14.— 
Iconium,  to  wliicli  they  came  next,  was  about 
ft)rty-five  miles  south-east  from  Antioch.  It 
was  the  principal  city  of  Lycaonia,  situated  at 
the  foot  of  the  Taurus.  Its  present  name  is 
Konieh.  I^eake,  who  approached  Iconium  from 
the  mountains  which  separate  Antioch  from 
Philomelium,  says  ( Travels  in  Asia  Elinor,  p.  45) : 


"  On  the  descent  from  a  ridge  branching  east- 
ward from  these  mountains,  we  came  in  sight 
of  tlie  vast  plain  around  Konieh,  and  of  the 
lake  which  occupies  the  middle  of  it;  and  we 
saw  the  city,  with  its  moscjues  and  ancient 
walls,  still  at  the  distance  of  twelve  or  fourteen 
miles  from  tis."  "  Konieh,"  says  another  trav- 
eller, "  extends  to  the  east  and  south  over  the 
plain  far  beyond  the  walls,  which  are  about  two 
miles  in  circumference.  Mountains  covered 
with  snow  rise  on  every  side,  excepting  toward 
the  east,  where  a  plain  as  flat  as  the  Desert  of 
Arabia  extends  far  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
eye." 

52.  The  disciples — /.  e.  at  Antioch,  where 
the  persecution  still  continued.  (See  14  :  22.) — 
Were  filled  with  joy  and  the  Holy  Spirit. 
The  relation  is  that  of  effect  and  author.  (See 
Gal.  5  :  20.)  The  idea  suggested  is  that,  though 
they  were  called  to  suffer  as  adherents  of  the 
new  faith,  they  liad  sources  of  consolation 
opened  to  them  which  more  than  counter- 
balanced their  trials. 


1-7.  THEY  PREACH  AT  ICONIUM,  BUT 
ARE  PERSECUTED,  AND  FLEE  TO  LYS- 
TRA. 

1.  Together    ((card  to  ovto — like  ini  rh  auT<5  in 

3 :  1),  not  in  the  same  inanncr,  as  they  were 
wont. — And  they  spake  so — viz.  with  this  effect 
— that  (loffTc)  ft  (frcat  midtitude,  etc.  (Mey.,  De 
Wet.);  not  with  such  power  that.  So  antici- 
pates the  next  clause,  and  makes  it  more 
prominent.  (B.  ^  140.  4.)— Greeks.  As  the 
Greeks  here  were  present  in  tlie  synagogue, 
they  appear  to  have  been  proselytes  (comp. 
13  :  43),  and  hence  were  a  different  class  from 
those  in  13  :  20. 

2.  But  tho.ie  who  disbelieved — viz.  when  the 
others  believed.    Tlie  present  participle  (in-ei- 


164 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV. 


and  made  their  minds  evil  affected  against  the  breth- 
ren. 

;^  Long  time  therefore  abode  they  speaking  boldly  in 
the  Lord,  "which  gave  testimony  unto  the  word  of  his 
grace,  and  granted  signs  and  wonders  to  be  done  by 
their  hands. 

4  But  the  multitude  of  the  city  was  divided  :  and 
part  held  with  the  Jews,  and  part  with  the 'apostles. 

5  And  when  there  was  an  assault  made  both  of  the 
Gentiles,  and  also  of  the  Jews  with  their  rulers,  "^to  use 
them  despitefully,  and  to  stone  them, 

6  They  were  ware  of  il,  and  ''fled  unto  Lystra  and 
Derbe,  cit  ies  of  Ly caouia,  and  unto  the  region  that  lieth 
round  about: 


up  the  souls  of  the  Gentiles,  and  made  them  evil  af- 

Sfected  against  the  brethren.     Long  time  therefore 

they  tarried  l/iert  speaking  boldly  in  the  Lord,  who 

bare  witness  unto  the  word  of  his  grace,  granting 

4  signs  and  wonders  to  be  done  by  their  hands.  But 
the  multitude  of  the  city  was  divided ;  and  part  held 

5  with  the  Jews,  and  part  with  the  apostles.  And 
when  there  was  made  an  onset  both  of  the  (ientiles 
and  of  the  Jews  with  their  rulers,  to  entreat  them 

6  shamefully,  and  to  stone  them,  they  became  aware 
of  it,  and  fled  unto  the  cities  of  Lycaonia,  Lystra 


aMarli  16:20;  Heb.  2  :  4 i  ch.  13:  3 c  2  Tim.  3  :  11 d  Matt.  10:23. 


^oOvTEs,  as  in  some  editions)  is  less  correct  than 
the  aorist. — Rendered  evil,  hostile.  This  sense 
is  found  in  Josephus,  but  not  elsewhere  (Mey.). 
How  the  Jews  produced  this  effect  on  the  minds 
of  the  heathen  we  are  not  told.  They  some- 
times alleged  for  that  purpose  that  the  Chris- 
tians were  disloyal — that  they  had  a  King  of 
their  own,  and  would  prove  dangerous  to  the 
Roman  supremacy.     (See  18  :  5-9.) 

3.  Therefore  —  i.  e.  because  they  had  so 
much  success  (see  v.  1),  notwithstanding  the 
opposition  excited  against  them.  Meyer  re- 
gards the  third  and  fourth  verses  as  an  infer- 
ence from  the  first  and  second :  "  In  conse- 
quence of  that  approbation  (v.  i)  and  this 
hostility  (v.  2)  they  preached  boldly  indeed  for 
a  time,  but  a  dissension  also  arose  among  the 
people." — Long  time.  The  entire  journey 
was  evidently  a  rapid  one,  and  a  stay  here  of 
a  few  months  would  be  comparatively  a  long 
time.  This  is  our  only  notice  respecting  the 
time  SY>ent  at  the  places  visited  on  this  tour. — 
Speaking  boldly  npon  the  Lord — i.  e.  in 
dependence  upon  him.  It  was  their  reliance 
on  Christ  that  inspired  them  with  so  much 
courage.  —  The  best  authorities  omit  and  be- 
tween gave  testimony  and  granted  :  who 
testifies  by  granting  that,  etc.  (Comp.  4  : 
30.) 

4.  The  multitude  of  the  city— i.  e.  the 
Gentile  population.  Some  of  them  may  have 
favored  the  Christian  party,  without  having  at- 
tached themselves  to  it.  (Comp.  19  :  31). — 
Were  with  the  Jews — i.  e.  in  sympathy  es- 
poused their  side.  (See  5  :  17.)  [Here,  and  in 
V.  14,  Barnabas  appears  to  be  called  an  apostle 
in  the  highest  sense  of  the  word  as  applied  to 
men.  The  same  title  is  supposed  to  be  given  to 
Timothy  and  Silvanus  in  1  Thess.  2  :  6,  and, 
possibly,  to  Andronicus  and  Junias  in  Rom. 
16  :  7.  But  the  words  who  all  are  of  note  among 
the  apostles,  in  the  last  passage,  probably  mean 
who  are  highly  esteemed  in  and  by  the  apos- 
tolic circle.  In  the  other  instances  it  will  be 
observed  that  no  one  of  these  companions  of 


Paul  is  anywhere  called  an  apostle  when  spoken 
of  alone.  Only  as  associated  with  Paul,  and  pos- 
sibly then  for  brevity's  sake,  is  the  designation 
given  to  them.  Certainly  they  are  iKjt  to  be 
regarded  as  apostles  in  the  highest  official  sense, 
as  are  the  twelve  and  Paul. — A.  H.] 

5.  Assault,  rather  impulse,  as  in  James 
3  :  4  (Mey.,  Alf ) ;  not  onset  [though  this 
is  given  in  the  Revised  Version],  because 
having  become  aware  (v.  6)  would  then 
be  superfluous,  and  because  the  object  of 
the  flight  was  to  escape  an  attack.  Plot, 
purpose,  is  too  strong  a  sense  of  the  word. 
— With  their  rulers  —  i.  e.  those  of  both 
nations ;  viz.  the  heathen  magistrates  and  the 
officers  of  the  synagogue.  Some  restrict  their 
to  the  Gentiles ;  others,  to  the  Jews.  Here,  at 
tliis  distance  from  Jerusalem,  members  of  the 
Sanhedrim  could  not  well  be  meant  (Rob.). 

6.  Having  become  aware — viz.  of  this 
feeling.  Meyer  lays  no  stress  at  present  on  the 
preposition,  as  if  they  discovered  tlie  danger  as 
well  as  others.  —  In  order  to  stone  them. 
"  Once  was  I  stoned,"  says  Paul  in  2  Cor.  11  : 
25,  which  was  the  instance  mentioned  in  v.  19. 
Hence,  says  Paley,  "  had  this  meditated  assault 
at  Iconium  been  completed;  had  the  history 
related  that  a  stone  was  thrown,  as  it  relates 
that  preparations  were  made  both  by  Jews  and 
Gentiles  to  stone  Paul  and  his  companions  ;  or 
even  had  the  account  of  this  transaction  stopped 
without  going  on  to  inform  us  that  Paul  and 
his  companions  were  '  aware  of  the  danger  and 
fled,' — a  contradiction  between  the  history  and 
the  Epistles  would  have  ensued.  Truth  is  ne- 
cessarily consistent,  but  it  is  scarcely  possible 
that  independent  accounts,  not  having  truth  to 
gviide  them,  should  thus  advance  to  the  very 
brink  of  contradiction  without  falling  into  it." 
— Lycaonia.  The  district  of  Lycaonia  ex- 
tends from  the  ridges  of  Mount  Taurus  and  the 
borders  of  Cilicia,  on  the  south,  to  the  Cappa- 
docian  hills,  on  the  north.  "It  is  a  bare  and 
dreary  region,  unwatered  by  streams,  though 
in  parts  liable  to  occasional  inundations.  Across 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


165 


7  And  there  they  preached  the  gospel. 

8  «i  "And  there  sat  a  certain  man  at  Lystra,  impotent 
in  his  feet,  being  a  cripple  from  his  mother  s  womb, 
who  never  had  walked; 

y  The  same  heard  I'aul  speak  :  who  steadfastly  be- 
holding him,  and  'perceiving  ihat  he  had  faith  "to  be 
healed, 


7  and  Derbe,  and  the  region  round  about :  and  there 
they  preached  the  gospel. 

8  And  at  Lystra  there  .sat  a  certain  man,  impo'ent 
in  his  feet,  a  cripple  from  his  moth  rs  womb,  who 

9  never  had  walked.     The  same  heard  Paul  speaking: 
who,  fastening  bis  eyes  upon  him,  and  seeing  that 


1  cb.  3  :  2 b  Matt.  8  :  10;  9  :  28,  29. 


some  portion  of  this  plain  Paul  and  Barnabas 
travelled  both  before  and  after  their  residence 
in  Iconium.  After  leaving  the  city  the  two 
most  prominent  objects  still  in  view  are  the 
sncnvy  mountains  of  Mount  Argieus,  rising  high 
above  all  the  intervening  hills  in  the  direction 
of  Armenia,  and  the  singular  mass  called  the 
'  Kara-Dagh,'  or  '  Black  Mount,'  south-east- 
ward, in  the  direction  of  Cilicia.  This  latter 
mountain  is  gradually  approached,  and  dis- 
covered to  be  an  isolated  mass,  with  reaches 
of  the  plain  extending  round  it  like  channels 
of  the  sea "  (Conybcare  and  Howson,  i.  p. 
224). — Lystra  and  Derbe  were  not  far  from 
the  base  of  the  Black  Mountain.  Their  exact 
situation  is  not  yet  certainly  known.  Lystra  is 
marked  on  Kiepert's  map  as  nearly  south  of 
Iconium,  about  twenty  miles  distant ;  Derbe,  as 
nearly  east  from  Lystra,  south-east  from  Iconi- 
um. Kiepert  appears  to  have  followed  Leake's 
conjecture  as  to  the  site  of  Lystra,  though  no 
traveller  speaks  of  any  ruins  at  that  place.  Mr. 
Hamilton  agrees  with  Kiepert  in  the  position 
of  Derbe,  because  it  occurs  on  the  line  of  a 
Roman  road,  and  Divle,  the  modern  name,  j 
resembles  the  ancient  one.  Leake,  on  the  con-  I 
trary,  would  place  Derbe  (not  quite  so  far  to  ' 
the  east)  at  Bin-bir-Kilesseh,  a  Turkish  town,  j 
where  some  remarkable  ruins  have  been  found  i 
— am^g  the  rest,  those  of  numerous  churches. 
OtherlPigain,  think  that  these  ruins  mark  the 
site  of  Lystra.  since  they  correspond  better  with 
the  early  ecclesiastical  reputation  of  this  city 
than  that  of  Derbe. — The  region  about  desig- 
nates the  country  in  the  vicinity  of  the  places 
just  named.  A  few  critics  have  proposed  to 
extend  the  term  so  as  to  include  even  Galatia, 
and  would  thus  assign  an  earlier  origin  to  the 
churches  in  that  country  than  it  is  usual  to  as- 
sign to  them.  "  But  the  region  about  (rrtpi'Ywpoi')," 
says  Neandcr,  "  cannot  denote  an  entire  prov- 
ince ;  and  still  less  the  province  of  Galatia,  on 
account  of  its  geographical  situation.  Hence, 
the  supposition  that  Paul  i5reache<l  the  gospel 
to  the  Galatians  on  this  first  missionary-tour 
is  certainly  to  be  rejected."  (See  the  note  on 
16  :  6.) 

7.  And  there — viz.  in  those  cities  and  the 
adjacent    region.  —  Were    publishing    glad 


tidings    implies   that  they  pursued   their  la- 
bors here  for  some  time. 

8-13.  PAUL  HEALS  A  LAME  MAN  AT 
LYSTRA. 

8.  At  Lystra  (iv  Auurpoi?),  neuter  plural,  as 
in  2  Tim.  o  :  11,  but  feminine  singular  in  vv, 
6,  21 ;  IG  :  1.— Sat  (Mey.,  De  Wet.),  because 
he  was  lame  and  had  never  walked ;  others, 
dwelt  (Kuin.,  R(jb.),  which  is  Hebraistic,  and 
rare  in  the  New  Testament. — Had  walked 
(irepurtTraTjiKet).  Some  editors  write  this  pluper- 
fect with  an  augment;  others  more  correctly 
omit  it.     (W.  ^2.  9;  K.  ^  120.  R.  2.) 

9.  Was  hearing,  while  Paul  preached 
The  Jews  at  this  place  were  probably  few,  aa 
no  synagogue  api>ears  to  have  existed  here. 
Hence  the  missionaries  repaired  to  the  market 
or  some  other  place  of  pubhc  resort  (comp. 
17  :  17),  and  there  entered  into  conversation 
with  such  as  they  could  induce  to  listen  to 
them.  The  scene  reminds  us  of  the  manner 
in  which  those  who  carry  the  same  message  of 
salvation  to  the  heathen  at  the  present  day 
collect  around  them  groups  of  listeners  in  Bur- 
mah  or  Hindostan.  It  was  on  one  of  these 
occasions,  as  Paul  was  preaching  in  some  thor-, 
oughfare  of  the  city,  that  the  lame  man  heard 
him ;  his  friends,  perhaps,  had  i»laced  him  there 
to  solicit  alms.  (See  3  :  10  ;  John  9  :  8.)— Who 
looking  intently  upon  him  and  seeing  - 
viz.  from  the  expression  of  his  countenance, 
which  Paul  scrutinized  with  such  rigor.  The 
manner  in  which  the  participles  follow  each 
other  directs  us  to  this  sense.  Some  think  that 
the  apostle  may  have  had  at  tlie  moment  a 
supernatural  insight  into  the  state  of  the  man's 
heart.  The  language  of  the  text  contains  no 
intimation  of  that  nature. — The  faith  of 
being  healed.  The  infinitive  depends  on 
the  noun  as  a  genitive  construction.  (Comp. 
Luke  1  :  57.  See  W.  ?  44.  4.)  The  faith  so  de- 
scrtbed  may  be  faith  that  the  Saviour  whom 
Paul  preached  was  able  to  lieal  him,  or,  which 
accords  better  with  the  mode  of  expression, 
faith  such  as  made  it  proper  that  he  should 
receive  that  benefit.  (See  on  9  :  33.)  The  req- 
uisite degree  of  faith  would  include,  of  course, 
a  persuasion  of  Christ's  ability  to  bestow  the 
favor  in  question.    Paul  may  have  been  refer- 


166 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV. 


10  Said  with  a  loud  voice,  "Stand  upright  on  thy  feet. 
And  he  leaped  and  walked. 

11  And  when  the  people  saw  what  Paul  had  done, 
they  lifted  up  their  voices,  saying  in  the  speech  of 
Lycaonia,  'The  gods  are  come  down  to  us  in  the  like- 
ness of  men. 

12  And  they  called  Barnabas,  Jupiter ;  and  Paul, 
Mercurius,  because  he  was  the  chief  speaker. 

13  Then  the  priest  of  Jupiter,  which  was  before  their 
city,  brought  oxen  and  garlands  unto  the  gr.tes,  "and 
would  have  done  sacrifice  with  the  people. 


10  he  had  faith  to  be  made  whole,  said  with  a  loud 
voice.  Stand  upright  on  thy  feet.    And  he  leaped  up 

11  and  walked.  And  when  the  multitudes  saw  what 
Paul  had  done,  they  lifted  up  their  voice,  saying  in 
the  speech  of  Lycaonia,  The  gods  are  come  down  to 

12  us  in  the  likeness  of  men.  And  they  called  Bar- 
nabas,  iJupiter;   and   Paul,  ^Mercury,  beca\ise   he 

13  was  the  chief  speaker.  And  the  priest  of  'Jupiter 
whose  te.iiipli'.  was  before  the  city,  brought  oxen  and 
garlands  unto  the  gates,  and  would  have  done  sacri- 


olsa.  35  :  6 b  ch.  8  :  10;  28  :  6 c  Dan.  2  : 


-1  Gr.  Zeua. . .  .2  Gr.  Bermes. 


ring  in  his  remarks  to  the  Saviour's  miracles 
of  healing,  in  illustration  of  his  readiness  and 
power  to  bless  those  who  confide  in  him. 

lOo    With    a    loud    voice    (^leydAjj    rfj   <i>tovf]). 

The  article  designates  the  voice  as  that  of  Paul 
(see  V.  11 ;  26  .  24),  while  the  adjective  refers  to 
the  tone  with  which  he  spoke.  With  the  idea 
that  his  voice  was  a  powerful  one,  loud  (/uevdAjj) 
would  have  stood  between  the  article  and  noun, 
or  after  the  noun  with  the  article  (t;})  rei^eated. 
[The  critical  editors  Laeh.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West, 
and  Hort,  omit  the  article  as  an  addition  to  the 
true  text. — A.  H.] — Stand  upright,  etc.  Luke 
makes  no  mention  here  of  any  direct  appeal  to 
the  name  of  Christ  before  the  performance  of 
the  miracle.  (See  on  3: 6.)  That  omission  may 
be  owing  to  the  brevity  of  the  record,  or  the 
tenor  of  Paul's  discourse  may  have  been  so  ex- 
plicit in  regard  to  the  source  of  his  authority 
as  to  render  the  usual  invocation  unnecessary. 
— Leaped,  sjarung  up,  a  single  act.  For  this 
aorist,  see  W.  §  15;  K.  ?  149.  R.  2.  The  imper- 
fect (^AXero)  occurs  in  some  copies,  but  has  no 
adequate  support.  The  next  verb  passes  to  the 
imperfect,  because  it  expresses  a  repeated  act. 

11.  The  multitudes.  Their  conduct  shows 
how  imperfectly  they  had  understood  the  ad- 
dress of  Paul  and  the  object  of  the  miracle. 
They  saw  nothing  beyond  what  was  present 
and  palpable  ;  they  confounded  the  instrument 
of  the  work  with  its  author. — What  he  had 
done.  (See  on  1  :  2.) — In  Lycaonic — i.  e. 
the  native  dialect  of  the  province.  Of  the  na- 
ture of  this  dialect  nothing  is  known  with  cer- 
tainty. No  relic  of  it  remains,  or  at  least  has 
been  identified ;  no  description  of  it  has  been 
handed  down  to  us.  Those  who  have  exam- 
ined the  question  differ  in  their  conclusions. 
According  to  one  opinion,  the  Lycaonic  was 
allied  to  the  Assyrian  ;  according  to  another,  it 
was  a  corrupt  species  of  Greek. i  We  have  no 
reliable  data  for  forming  any  opinion.  Luke 
mentions  that  the   Lystrians  spoke    in    their 


native  tongue  that  we  may  know  why  the 
multitude  proceeded  so  far  in  their  design  be- 
fore Paul  and  Barnabas  interposed  to  arrest  it. 
In  conferring  with  the  people  they  had  used, 
doubtless,  the  Greek,  which  formed  at  that 
period  an  extensive  medium  of  intercourse  be- 
tween those  of  different  nations. 

12.  Jupiter,  Mercury.  They  fixed  upon 
these  gods  because  Jupiter  had  a  temple  there, 
and  Mercury,  who  apjieared  in  the  pagan 
mythology  as  his  attendant,  excelled  in  elo- 
quence.    So  Ovid,  Met.,  8.  626 : 

"Jupiter  hue  specie  mortali  curaque  parente 
Venit  Atlantiades  positis  eaducifer  alls."  ^ 

(See  also  Hor.,  Od.,  1.  10.  1-5.)  Some  suggest, 
as  a  further  reason  for  such  a  distribution  of 
parts,  that  Barnabas  may  have  been  an  older 
man  than  Paul  and  more  imposing  in  his  per- 
sonal appearance.  (Comp.  2  Cor.  10  :  1,  10.) — 
He  who  leads  the  discourse  is  the  chief 
speaker.     (Comp.  14  :  12.) 

13.  The  priest — i.  e.  the  principal  one,  or 
the  one  most  active,  at  this  time.  The  pagan 
worship  at  Lystra  must  have  required  several 
priests. — Of  Jupiter  who  was  before  the 
city — i.  e.  who  had  a  statue  and  temple  there 
consecrated  to  him.  The  temple  of  tl^  tute- 
lary god  stood  often  outside  of  the  ^lls. — 
Garlands,  which  were  to  adorn  the  victims, 
and  perhaps  the  priest  and  the  altar  (De  Wet.). 
(See  Jahn's  Archasol.,  HOI.  5.)  They  had  the 
garlands  in  readiness,  but  had  not  yet  placed 
them  on  the  heads  of  the  animals.  Some  con- 
strue bullocks  and  garlands  as  =  bullocks 
adorned  with  garlands  (De  Wet.,  Rob.). 
With  that  idea  tlie  writer  would  have  used 
naturally  that  expression. — Unto  the  gates 
of  the  city  (Neand.,  Rob.,  Alf.,  Mey.  in  his 
last  ed.),  since  city  jireoedes  and  the  term  is 
plural  (as  consisting  of  parts  or  being  double) ; 
or,  less  probably,  of  the  house  where  the  ajxis- 
tles  lodged  (OLsli.,  De  Wet.). — Would  sacri- 


1  Jablonsky  and  Guhling,  who  wrote  dissertations  on  the  subject,  arrived  at  the  results  stated  above.  (See 
Win.,  Bealu:,  ii.  p.  37.) 

*  ["Hither  Jupiter  came  in  human  form,  and  with  his  parent  came  the  caduceus-bearing  grandson  of  Atlas, 
having  laid  aside  his  wings."] 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


167 


14  Which  when  the  apostles,  Parnabas  and  Paul, 
heard  of,  «the.v  rent  their  clothes,  and  ran  in  among 
the  people,  crying  out, 

lo  And  sayini:,  sirs,  *whydo  ye  these  things?  "We 
also  are  men  of  like  passions  with  you,  and  preach 
unto  you  that  ye  should  turn  from  •'these  vanities 
*unto  "the  living  (iod,  /which  made  heaven,  and  earth, 
and  the  sea,  and  all  things  that  are  therein : 

Id  aU'ho  in  times  past  suffered  all  nations  to  walk  in 
their  own  ways. 

17  *Nevcrlheless  he  left  not  himself  without  wit- 
ness, in  that  he  did  gO(xl,  and  'gave  us  rain  from  heav- 
en, and  fruitful  seasons,  filling  our  hearts  with  food 
and  gladness. 

15  And  with  these  sayings  scarce  restrained  they 


H  fice  with  the  multitudes.  Put  when  the  apostles, 
l^arnabas  and  I'aiil,  heard  of  it,  they  rent  their  gar- 
ments, and  sprang  forth  among  the  inultitude,  cry- 

loing  out  and  saying,  sirs,  why  do  ye  these  things* 
\Ve  also  are  men  of  like  'passions  with  you,  and 
bring  you  good  tidings,  that  ye  should  turn  from 
the.se  vain  things  unto  the  living  <iod,  who  made 
the  heaven  and  the  earth  and  the  .sea,  and  all  that 

If)  in  them  is:  who  in  the  generations  gone  by  sullered 

17  all  the  nations  to  walk  in  their  own  ways.  And  yet 
he  left  not  himself  without  witness,  in  that  he  did 
good,  and  gave  you  from  heaven  rains  and  fruitful 
seasons,  filling  your  hearts  with  food  and  gladness. 

18  And  with  these  sayings  scarce  lestrained  they  the 
multitudes  from  doing  sacrifice  unto  them. 


•  Matt.  26:  65....bcli.  10:  -iB-.-.c  .tiimes  5  :  17;  Rev.  19:  10....<i  I  Sam.  Vi:  21  ;  1  Kings  1(5:  i:t ;  Jer.  14:22:  Amos  2  :  4:  1  Cor.  8  :  4.. 

e  1  Thess.  1  :  9..../  (Jen.  1:1:  Ps.  3:t  :  6;  H«  :  6 ;  Rev.  14  :  7 g  P.s.  81  :  12;  ch.  17  :  30;  1  Pet.  4:3 ft  ch.  17  :  27  ;  Bom.  1  :  20.. 

t  Lev.  26  :  «  ;  Deut.  11:14;  28  :  12  ;  Job  5  :  10  ;  Ps.  65  :  10  ;  68  :  9  ;  147  :  8 ;  Jer.  14  :  22  ;  Matt.  5  :  45. 1  Or,  nature. 


fice,  but  were  disappointed  (De  Wet.),  or  was 
about  to  sacrifice,  since  the  verb  used  (iAiXm) 
may  denote  an  act  on  the  point  of  being  done. 
(See  Mt.  ?  498.  e;  C.  (i  583.) 

14-18.  THE  SPEECH  OF  PAUL  TO  THE 
LYSTRIAXS. 

14.  Having  heard— t.  e.  a  report  of  what 
was  taking  place;  brouglit  to  them,  perhap.s, 
by  some  of  the  convert.s. — Having  rent  their 
garments — /.  e.  according  to  the  Jewisli  cu.s- 
toni,  from  the  neck  in  front  down  toward  the 
girdle.  (See  Jahn's  ArchxoL,  ^  211.)  The  Jews 
and  other  nations  performed  this  act  not  only 
a.s  an  e.\pre.ssion  of  .sorrow,  but  of  abhorrence  on 
liearing  or  seeing  anything  which  they  regard- 
ed a.s  impious.  Garments  may  refer  to  the 
plural  subject  of  the  verb,  but  more  probably 
to  their  outer  and  inner  garments.  (Comp. 
Matt.  26  :  Go.)  — Sprang  forth  unto  the 
crowd — i.  e.  from  the  city,  of  which  we  think 
most  readily  after  city  in  v.  13,  or  from  the 
house,  if  the  people  had  assembled  in  the  street. 
The  preposition  (e$)  in  tiie  verb,  therefore,  does 
n(jt  settle  the  question  in  regard  to  unto  the 
gates.  The  English  translation, '"  ran  in  among 
tiiem,"  rests  upon  a  now  rejected  reading. 

15.  And  connects  what  is  said  with  what 
was  in  the  mind:  Ye  are  men,  and  we  are 
men  like  constituted  with  you.  Pa.s.sing 
over  tlie  first  clause,  the  speaker  ha.stens  at 
once  to  the  main  thought.  Of  like  passions 
means  that  they  liad  the  same  nature,  passi(ms, 
infirmities.  Declaring  to  you  as  glad  tid- 
ings—viz. that  you  should  turn,  etc.  This 
requisition  that  tliey  slKuild  renounce  their 
idols  is  called  glad  tidings,  l>ecause  it  was 
founded  on  the  fiict  that  God  had  provided  a 
way  in  the  gospel  in  which  lie  could  accept 
their  repentance.  You  ivfiaa)  answers  here  to 
the  dative,  as  in  S :  25. — From  these  vanities, 
nonentities,  such  as  Jupiter,  Mercury,  and  the 
like.  These  points  back  to  those  names. 
Paul  and  Barnabas  had  heard  in  what  light 


the  populace  looked  upon  them.  Vanities 
(iiaraiutv)  does  iiot  require  gods.  It  is  used 
like  Heb.  hCtbhiUem,  Ctvumtn,  which  the  Hebrews 
applied  to  tlie  gods  of  the  heathen  as  liaving 
no  real  existence.  (Comp.  1  Cor.  8:4.)  Kuinoel 
renders  the  word  vain  jiracticex,  idolatry,  which 
destroys  the  evident  opposition  between  the 
term  and  the  living  God.— Who  made,  etc. 
This  relative  clause  unfolds  the  idea  of  living. 

16.  Left  them,  withdrew  the  restraints  of 
his  grace  and  })rovidence.  (Comp.  on  7  :  42  and 
17  :  30.)  In  Rom.  1  :  23  the  apostle  brings  to 
view  other  connections  of  this  fact.  The  rea- 
son why  God  abandoned  the  heathen  was  that 
they  first  abandoned  him. — To  walk  (see  on 
9  :  31)  in  their  own  ways,  dative  of  rule  or 
manner.     Ways  iiuludes  lu'lief  and  conduct. 

17.  Although  indeed  he  left  himself 
not  without  witness.  The  desertion  on  the 
part  of  God  wtis  not  such  as  to  destroy  the  evi- 
dence of  their  dependence  on  him,  and  their 
consequent  obligation  to  know  and  acknow- 
ledge him.  The  apostle's  object  does  not  lead 
him  to  press  them  with  the  full  consequences 
of  this  truth.  It  lies  at  the  foundation  of  his 
argument  for  proving  the  accountability  of  the 
heathen,  in  Rom.  1  :  !!>.  aq.  (See  also  17  :  27, 
sq.) — Doing  good,  giving  rain,  filling,  etc., 
are  epe.xegetical  of  with<»ut  witness,  but  the 
second  participle  sperilics  a  mode  of  the  first, 
and  the  third  a  consecinence  of  the  second. — 
You  before  from  heaven  is  the  correct  read- 
ing (Grsb.,  Lchm.,  Mey.),  instead  of  the  re- 
ceived us.  With  food,  including  the  idea  of 
the  enjoyment  afforded  by  such  fruits  of  the 
divine  bounty.  With  that  accessory  idea,  food 
is  not  incongruous  with  hearts,  and  your 
hearts  is  not  a  circumlocution  for  you  (Kuiii.). 
(See  W.  ?  22.  7.)  The  common  text  has  our, 
which  aytjiears  in  the  English  Version. 

18.  Did  not  sacrifice  states  the  result  of 
restrained,  not  the  object:  they  hardly  re- 
strained them  that  they  did  not  sacrifice 


168 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV, 


the  people,  that  they  had  not  done  sacrifice  unto 
them. 

19  f  "And  there  came  thither  certain  Jews  from  An- 
tioch  and  Iconliim,  who  pei-suaded  the  people,  *;ind, 
having  stoned  I'aiil,  drew  kiia  out  of  the  city,  sujjpos- 
iiig  he  had  been  dead. 

ZO  Howbeit,  as  the  disciples  stood  round  about  him, 
he  rose  up,  and  came  into  the  city  :  and  the  next  day 
he  departed  with  Barnabas  to  Derbe. 

21  And  when  they  had  preached  the  gospel  to  that 
city,  "and  had  taught  many,  they  returned  again  to 
Lystra,  and  to  Iconium,  and  Antioch, 


19  But  there  came  Jews  thither  from  Antioch  and 
Iconium:  and  having  i)ersuaded  the  mullilides, 
they  stoned  I'aul,  and  dragged  him  out  of  the  city, 

20  suppo  ing  that  he  was  dead.  But  as  th'  discii  le< 
stood  round  about  him,  he  rose  up,  and  entered  into 
the  city:   iind  on   the  morrow  he  went  torth  with 

21  Barnabas  to  Derbe.  And  when  they  had  preached 
the  gospel  to  that  city,  and  had  made  many  disci- 
ples, they  returned  to  Lystra,  and  to  iconium,  and 


icb.  13  :  45 6  2  Cor.  11  :  25;  2  Tim,  3  :  11 e  Malt.  28  :  19. 


to  them.  (See  the  note  on  10  :  47.)— It  is  in- 
teresting to  coniimre  tliis  speech  at  Lystra  with 
the  train  of  thought  whicli  Paul  has  develojted 
in  Rom.  1  :  19,  sq.  It  will  be  seen  tliat  the 
germ  of  the  argument  there  may  be  traced 
distinctly  here.  The  similarity  is  precisely  such 
as  we  should  expect  on  the  supposition  that  he 
who  wrote  the  Epistle  delivered  the  speecli. 
The  divei-sity  in  the  ditferent  prominence 
given  to  particular  ideas  is  that  which  arises 
from  applying  the  same  system  of  truth  to 
different  occasions. 

19-28.  THEY  PROCEED  TO  DERBE, 
AND  THEN  RETRACE  THEIR  WAY  TO 
ANTIOCH  IN  SYRIA. 

19.  The  Jews  will  be  found,  with  two  excep- 
tions, to  stir  up  every  persecution  which  Paul 
suffers.  (See  on  19  :  23.)— The  crowds.  They 
were  mostly  heathen  (see  on  v.  9),  but  that 
some  Jews  resided  at  Lystra  is  evident  from 
J.6  :  1. — Having  stoned  Paul.  Barnabas  es- 
capes, because  his  associate  here  and  in  the 
other  cities  was  the  iirominent  man.  Tlie  na- 
ture of  the  outrage  indicates  that  the  Jews  not 
only  originated  this  attack,  but  controlled  the 
mode  of  it.  Stoning  was  a  Jewish  punishment. 
In  the  present  instance,  it  will  be  observed,  they 
had  no  scruple  about  shedding  the  blood  of 
their  victim  in  the  city.  It  was  otherwise  at 
Jerusalem.  (See  on  7  :  58.)  An  incidental 
variation  like  this  attests  the  truth  of  tlie  nar- 
rative.— Supposing  that  he  was  dead  inti- 
mates a  mere  belief  as  opposed  to  the  reality. 
A  slight  accent  on  the  first  word  brings  this  out 
as  the  necessary  meaning. 

20.  The  disciples  having  surrounded 
him.  Here  we  learn  incidentally  that  their 
labors  had  not  been  ineffectual.  Kuinoel  de- 
cides too  much  when  he  says  that  the  disciples 
collected  around  Paul  in  order  to  bury  him  ;  it 
may  have  been  to  lament  over  him  or  to  ascer- 
tain whether  he  was  really  dead.  In  that  sor- 
rowirig  circle  stood,  probably,  the  youthful 
Timothy,  the  apostle's  destined  associate  in  so 
many  future  labors  and  perils.  (See  16  :  1 ;  2 
Tim.  3  :  11.) — He  rose  up,  etc.    After  the  ex- 


pression in  v.  19,  we  can  hardly  regard  this  as 
an  instance  of  actual  restoration  to  life.  If  we 
recognize  anything  as  miraculous  liere,  it  would 
be  more  justly  the  apostle's  sudden  recovery 
after  such  an  outrage,  enabling  him  t(5  return 
at  once  to  the  city,  and  on  the  next  day  to  re- 
sume his  journey.  Paul  alludes  to  this  stoning 
in  2  Cor.  11  :  25.  The  wounds  inflicted  on  him 
at  this  time  may  have  left  some  of  those  scars 
on  his  body  to  which  he  alludes  in  Gal.  6  :  17 
i  as  proof  that  he  was  Christ's  servant. — Unto. 
Derbe.  (See  on  v.  6.)  A  few  hours  would  be 
sufficient  for  the  jotirney  hither.  We  have  now 
reached  the  eastern  limit  of  the  present  expe- 
dition. 

21.  Having  made  many  disciples  (Matt. 
28 :  19),  as  the  result  of  the  preacliing  mentioned 
in  the  other  clause.  One  of  the  converts  was 
probably  Gaius,  wlio  is  called  a  Derbean  in  20 : 4. 
Their  labors  in  this  city  appear  to  have  been  un- 
attended by  any  open  opposition.  Hence,  in  2 
Tim.  3  :  11,  Paul  omits  Derbe  fi-om  the  list  of 
places  associated  in  the  mind  of  Timothy 
with  the  "  persecutions,  afflictions,"  which  the 
apostle  had  been  called  to  endure.  Palcy  re- 
fers to  that  omission  as  a  striking  instance 
of  conformity  between  the  Epistle  and  the 
Acts :  "  In  the  apostolic  history  Lystra  and 
Derbe  are  commonly  mentioned  together ;  in  2 
Tim.  3  :  11,  Antioch,  Iconium,  Lystra,  are 
mentioned,  and  not  Derbe.  And  the  distinc- 
tion will  appear  on  this  occasion  to  be  accu- 
rate ;  for  Paul  in  that  passage  is  enumerating 
his  persecutions,  and,  although  he  underwent 
grievous  j)ersecuti(  >ns  in  each  of  the  three  cit- 
ies through  which  he  passed  to  Derbe,  at  Derbe 
itself  he  met  with  none.  The  Epistle,  therefore, 
in  the  names  of  the  cities,  in  the  order  in  which 
they  are  enumerated,  and  in  the  place  at  which 
the  enumeration  stops,  corresponds  exactly  with 
the  history.  Nor  is  there  any  just  reason  for 
thinking  the  agreement  to  be  artificial ;  for  had 
the  writer  of  the  Epistle  sought  a  coincidence 
with  the  history  upon  this  head,  and  searchetl  the 
Acts  of  the  Apostles  for  the  purpose,  I  conceive 
he  would  have  sent  us  at  once  to  Philippi  and 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


169 


22   Confirming  the  souls  of  the  disciples,  ami  "ex-  |  22  to  Antioch,  coufinning  the  souls  of  the  disciples, 


horting  them  to  continue  in  the   faith,  and  that  ''we 
must  through  much  tribulation  enter  into  the  Icing- 
dom  of  Ood. 
23  And  when  they  had  "^ordained  them  elders  in 


exhorting  theiu  to  continue  in  ihe  faitli,  and  iliat 
through  many  tribulations  we  must  eiiier  into  tlie 
23  kingdom  of  ood.    Aud  when  they  had  appointed 


ich.  11  ;  23;  13  :  43.... 6  Matt.  10  :  38;  16  :  24  ;  Luke  22  :  28,  29;  Rom.  8  :  17  ;  2  Tim.  2  :  11,  12;  3:  12.  ...e  Tit.  1  :  5. 


Thessalonica,  where  Paul  suffered  persecution, 
and  where,  from  what  is  stated,  it  may  easily  be 
gathered  that  Timotliy  accompanied  him,  rather 
than  have  appealed  to  persecutions  as  known  to 
Tintothy,  in  the  account  of  which  persecutions 
Timothy's  presence  is  not  mentioned,  it  not  be- 
ing till  after  one  entire  chapter,  and  in  the  his- 
tory of  a  journey  three  or  four  years  subsequent 
to  tliis  (i6:i),  that  Timothy's  name  occurs  in 
the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  for  the  first  time." — 
Turned  back.  Advancing  still  eastward  froin 
tliis  point,  they  would  soon  have  reached  the 
well-known  "  Cilician  Gates,"  through  which 
they  could  have  descended  easily  to  Cilicia,  and 
tlien  have  embarked  from  Tarsus  for  Antioch. 
They  had  the  choice,  therefore,  of  a  nearer  way 
to  Syria ;  but  their  solicitude  for  the  welfare  of 
the  newly-founded  cluirclies  constrains  thein 
to  turn  back  and  revisit  the  places  where  they 
had  preached. 

22,  Coufinning  the  souls  of  the  dis- 
ciples, not  by  any  outward  rite,  btit  by  in- 
struction and  encouragement,  as  we  see  in  the 
next  clause.  (Comp.  15  :  32,  41 ;  18  :  23.)— To 
adhere  to  the  faith  (see  6:7;  13  :  8)— i.  e. 
of  Christ  or  the  gospel.  (Gomp.  3  :  16 ;  20  :  21, 
etc.) — That  depends  on  exhorting,  which  at 
this  point  of  the  sentence  passes  to  the  idea  of 
affirming,  teaching. — 6et  may  mean  it  is  neces- 
sary, because  such  was  the  appointment  of  God 
(9:16;  1  Cor.  15:25),  Or  becau.se  ill  the  nature  of 
tilings  it  was  inevitable.  (Comp.  2  Tim.  3  :  12.) 
The  first  is  the  more  pertinent  view,  since  it 
suggests  a  more  persuasive  motive  to  submis- 
sion and  fidelity  in  the  endurance  of  trials. — 
We,  wlio  are  Christians.  (Comp.  1  Thess.  4  : 
17.)— The  kingdom  of  God— i.  e.  the  state 
of  happiness,  which  awaits  the  redeemed  in 
heaven.  The  expression  can  have  no  other 
meaning  here,  for  those  addressed  were  already 
members  of  Christ's  visible  kingdom,  and  the 
perseverance  to  which  the  apostle  would  incite 
them  has  reference  to  a  kingdom  which  they 
are  yet  to  enter. 

23.  Now  having  appointed  for  them 
elders  in  every  church.  The  verb  used 
here,  to  extend  the  hand  (x^ipoTovelv),  signifies 
properly  to  elect  or  vote  by  extending  the 
hand,  but  also,  in  a  more  general  sense,  to 
choose,  appoint,  without  reference  to  that  for- 


mality.   That  formality  could  not  have  been 

observed  in  this  instance,  as  but  two  individ« 
tials  performed  the  act  in  question.     Wlien  the 
verb  retains  the   idea  of  stretching  forth  the 
hand,  the  act  is  predicated  always  of  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb,  not  of  those  for  wiiom  the  act 
may  be  performed.     Hence  the  interpretation 
having  appointed  for  them  by  their  outstretched 
hands — i.  e.  by  taking  their  opinion  or  vote  in 
that  manner — is  unwarranted ;  for  it  transfers 
j  the  hands   to  the  wrong  persons.      Whether 
Paul  and  Barnabas  appointed  the  presbyters 
j  in  this  case  by  their  own  act  solely,  or  ratified 
I  a  previous  election  of  the  churches  made  at 
I  their  suggestion,  is  disputed.      If  it  be  clear 
[  from  other  sources  that  the  primitive  chtirches 
I  elected  their  officers   by  general   suffrage,  the 
I  verb  here  may  be  understo(jd  to  denote  a  con- 
current appointment,  in  accordance  with  that 
practice ;  but  the  burden  of  proof  lies  on  those 
who  contend   for  such  a  modification  of  the 
meaning.    Neander's  conclusion  on  this  subject 
should  be  stated  here :  "As  regards  the  election 
to  church  offices,  we  are  in  want  of  sufficient 
information  to  enable  us  to  decide  how  it  was 
managed  in  the  early  apostolic  times.     Indeed, 
it  is  quite  possible  that  the  method  of  proced- 
ure differed  under  different  circumstances.    As 
in  the  institution  of  deacons  the  apostles  left 
the  choice  to  tlie  communities  themselves,  and 
as  the  same  was  the  case  in  tlie  choice  of  depu- 
ties to  attend  the  apostles  in  the  name  of  tlie 
communities  (2Cor.  8:19),  we  might  argue  tliat 
a  similar  course  would  be  pursued  in  filling 
other  offices  of  the  church.      Yet  it  may  be 
that  in   many  cases  tlte  apostles  themselves, 
where  they  could  not  as  yet  have  sufficient 
confidence  in  the  spirit  of  the  first  new  com- 
munities,  conferred    the    important   office  of 
presbyters  on  such  as  in  their  own  judgment, 
under  the  light  of  the  Divine  Spirit,  appeared 
to  be  the  fittest  persons.     Their  choice  would, 
moreover,  deserve  in   the  highest  degree  the 
confidence  of  the  communities  (comp.  14  :  23; 
Tit.   1  :  5),   although,    when    Paul    empowers 
Titus  to  set  presiding  officers  over  the  commu- 
nities who  po.ssessed  the  requisite  qttalifications, 
this   circumstance  decides   nothing  as  to   the 
mode  of  choice,  nor  is  a  choice  by  the  com- 
munity itself  thereby  necessarily  excluded.    The 


170 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV. 


every  church,  and  had  prayed  with  fasting,  they  coiu- 
mi-nded  them  to  the  Lord,  on  whom  they  believed. 

24  And  alter  they  had  passed  throughout  l^isidia, 
they  came  to  Pamphylia. 


for  them  elders  in  every  church,  and  had  prayed 

with  lasting,  they  commended  them  to  the  Lord,  on 

24  whom  they  had  believed.    And  they  passed  through 


regular  course  appears  to  have  been  this :  The 
church  offices  were  entrusted  to  the  first  con- 
verts in  preference  to  otiiers,  provided  tliat  in 
other  respects  they  possessed  the  requisite  quali- 
fications. It  may  have  been  the  general  prac- 
tice for  the  presbyters  themselves,  in  case  of  a 
vacancy,  to  propose  another  to  the  community 
in  place  of  the  person  deceased,  and  leave  it  to 
the  whole  bodj^  either  to  approve  or  decline 
their  selection  for  reasons  assigned.  (Clem., 
cap.  44.)  When  asking  for  the  assent  of  the 
community  had  not  yet  become  a  mere  formal- 
ity, this  mode  of  filling  church  offices  had  the 
salutary  effect  of  causing  the  votes  of  the  ma- 
jority to  be  guided  by  those  capable  of  judg- 
ing and  of  suppressing  divisions ;  while,  at  the 
same  time,  no  one  was  obtruded  on  the  com- 
munity who  would  not  be  welcome  to  their 
hearts"  ( Ch.  Hist.,  Dr.  T(jrrcy's  tr.,  vol.  i.  p.  189). 
— Elders  in  every  church.  The  term  is 
plural,  because  each  church  had  its  college  of 
elders  (see  20  :  17 ;  Tit.  1  :  5),  not  because  there  \ 
was  a  church  in  each  of  the  cities.  The  elders, 
or  presbyters,  in  the  official  sense  of  the  term, 
were  those  appointed  in  the  first  churches  to 
watch  over  their  general  disciijline  and  welfare. 
With  reference  to  that  duty,  they  were  called, 
also,  overseers  {eniaKonot) — i.  e.  superintendents, 
or  bishops.  The  first  was  their  Jewish  appel- 
lation, transferred  to  them,  perhaps,  from  the 
similar  class  of  officers  in  the  synagogues  ;  the 
second  was  their  foreign  appellation,  since  the 
Greeks  employed  it  to  designate  such  relations 
among  themselves.  In  accordance  with  this 
distinction,  we  find  the  general  rtile  to  be  this : 
Those  who  are  called  elders  in  speaking  of  Jew- 
ish communities  are  called  bishops  in  speaking 
of  Gentile  communities.  Hence  the  latter  term 
is  the  prevailing  one  in  Paul's  Epistles.  That 
the  names  with  this  difference  were  entirely 
synonymous  appears  from  their  interchange  in 
such  passages  as  20  :  17,  28  and  Tit.  1  :  5,  7.  It 
may  be  argued,  also,  from  the  fact  that  in  Phil. 
1  :  1  and  1  TiuL  3  :  1,  8  the  deacons  are  named 
immediately  after  the  bishops,  which  excludes 
the  idea  of  any  intermediate  order.  Other  ap- 
pellations given  to  these  officers  were  pastors, 
leaders,  presidents  of  the  brethren.  The  presby- 
ters, or  bishops,  were  not,  by  virtue  of  their 
office,  teachers  or  preachers  at  the  same  time, 
nor,  on  the  other  hand,  were  the  two  spheres 
of  labor  incompatible  with  each  other.  We 
see  from  1  Tim.  5  :  17  that  some  of  those  who 


exercised  the  general  oversight  preached  also 
the  word.  (Comp.  also  1  Tim.  3  :  2.)  The 
foregoing  representation  exhibits  the  view  of 
Mosheim,  Neander,  Gieseler,  Eothe,  and  others 
eminent  in  .such  inquiries.  [From  1  Tim  3  :  2 
and  Tit.  1  :  9  (comp.  1  Cor.  12  :  28,  30;  Eph.  4  : 
11),  it  must  be  inferred  that  <mc/i/>i^  was  con- 
sidered in  the  apostolic  age  a  normal  function 
of  the  church  officers  called  elders,  bishops, 
pastors,  etc.  For  the  first  passage  declares 
that  "  the  bishop  must  be  .  .  .  apt  to  teach," 
and  the  second  that  he  must  "  hold  the  faithful 
word,  .  .  ..  that  he  may  be  able  to  exiiort  in 
the  healthful  doctrine  and  convict  the  gainsay- 
ers  ;"  while  it  is  pretty  evident  that  the  Chris- 
tian workers  classified  as  "teachers"  in  1  Cor. 
12  :  28,  30,  and  as  "pastors  and  teachers"  in 
Eph.  4  :  11,  were  identical  in  position  with 
those  frequently  denominated  elders  or  bish- 
ops. But  against  this  view  may  be  urged  the 
language  of  1  Tim.  5  :  17  :  "  Let  the  elders  that 
rule"  (preside)  "well  be  counted  worthy  of 
double  honor,  especially  those  who  labor  in 
the  word  and  in  teaching,"  which  has  been 
thought  to  distinguish  between  presiding  and 
teaching  elders.  Yet  the  word  translated  "  labor  " 
means,  literally,  "  to  beat  out  one's  self  with 
labor;"  and  the  apostle  may  intend  to  say  that 
such  overseers  as  give  themselves  wholhj  and  ex- 
haustively to  their  ministry  should  receive  more 
honor  (in  the  way,  perhaps,  of  compensation) 
than  others.  The  passage  scarcely  proves  that 
any  part  of  the  elders  did  not  preach  at  all. 
Nor  is  this  proved  by  the  circumstance  that  in 
many  of  the  churches  there  were  more  bishops 
than  one ;  for  a  college  of  bishops  might  easily 
find  enough  preaching  to  do  in  a  pagan  city. 
The  only  other  church  officers  besides  bishops 
recognized  in  the  New  Testament  appear  to  be 
deacons,  whose  duties  were  probablj'of  a  partly 
secular  and  partly  spiritual  character.  They 
often  preached  the  gospel  as  evangelists. — 
A.  H.] — Having  prayed  belongs  to  the  fol- 
lowing verb,  not  to  the  subordinate  clause 
which  precedes. — Them  is  defined  by  on 
Avhom  they  had  believed,  and  must  refer 
to  the  believers  in  general,  not  to  the  elders 
merely. 

24.  Having  passed  through  Pisidia. 
Antioch  was  on  tlie  northern  limit  of  Pisidia, 
and  hence  they  traversed  that  district  from 
north  to  south.  Their  journey  was  a  descent 
from  the  mountains  to  the  plain. 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


171 


2o  And  when  they  had  preached  the  word  in  Perga, 
they  went  down  into  Attalia; 

•^li  And  t}ience  sailed  to  Antioch,  "from  whence  they 
had  been  'reconuiiended  to  the  grace  of  liod  for  the 
work  whicli  they  fiiltilled. 

'27  And  when  they  were  come,  and  had  gathered  the 
cliurch  together,  <^they  rehearsed  all  thutOod  had  done 
with  them,  and  how  he  had  ''opened  the  door  of  faith 
unto  the  dentiles. 

28  And  there  they  abode  long  time  with  the  dis- 
ciples. 


25  Pisidia,  and  came  to  Pamphylia.  And  when  they 
had  spoken  the  word  in  Perga,  they  went  down  lb 

2G  Attalia;  and  thence  they  sailed  to' Antioch,  Irom 
whence  they  had  been  committed  to  the  grace  of 

27  God  for  the  work  which  they  had  fullilled  And 
when  they  were  come,  and  had  gathered  the  church 
together,  they  rehearsed  all  things  that  (iod  had 
done  with   them,  and   how  that  he  had  opened  a 

28  door  of  faith  unto  the  Gentiles.  And  they  tarried 
no  little  time  with  the  disciples. 


CHAPTER    XV. 

'certain  men  which  came  down   from  .Tudwa  i    1     And  certain  men  came  down  from  Judsea  and 

taught  the  brethren,  saying,  Except  ye  be  circum- 


ND 

L  taught  the  brethren,  and  said,  /Except  ye  be  cir- 


ach.   13;  1,  3 6  ch.  15:40. 


..cch.  15  •  4,  12;  21  :  19 d  1  Cor.  16  ;  9;  2  Cor.  2  :  12 

/  John  7  :  22 ,  ver  5 ,  Gal.  5:2;  Phil.  3  ;  2 ;  Col.  2  :  8,  11,  16. 


4:3;  Bev.  3  :8....e6al.  2:  12. 


25.  In  Perga.  They  now  preached  in 
Perga,  as  they  appear  not  to  have  done  on 
their  tirst  visit.  (See  on  13  :  13.)  Luke's  si- 
lence as  to  the  result  may  intimate  that  they 
were  favored  with  no  marked  success.  —  To 
Attalia.  Instead  of  taking  ship  at  Perga  and 
sailing  down  the  Cestrus,  which  they  had  as- 
cended on  their  outward  journey,  they  travelled 
across  the  plain  to  Attaleia,  a  seaport  on  the 
Pamphylian  Gulf,  near  the  mouth  of  the  Ca- 
tarrhactes.  The  distance  between  the  two  places 
was  about  sixteen  miles.  (See  on  13  :  13.)  The 
founder  of  Attaleia  was  Attains  Philadelphus, 
King  of  Pergamus.  It  occupied  the  site  of  the 
modern  Satalia,  which  Admiral  Beaufort  de- 
scribes "  as  beautifully  situated  round  a  small 
harbor,  the  streets  appearing  to  rise  behind  each 
other  like  the  seats  of  a  theatre,  .  .  .  with  a  dou- 
ble wall  and  a  series  of  square  towers  on  the 
level  summit  of  the  hill."  (See  a  view  of  the 
town  in  Lewin's  Life  and  Ep.  of  St.  Paul.) 

26.  Sailed  away  unto  Antioch,  though 
they  may  have  disembarked  at  Seleucia,  as  the 
town  and  its  port  are  one  in  such  designations. 
(Comp.  20  :  G.) — From  whence,  etc.  stands  hi 
seiiim  prn'ijiinnti  for  whence,  having  been 
committed  to  the  favor  of  God,  they  were 
sent  forth.  (See  13  :  3.  W.  ?  54.  7.)— For 
the  work  (telic),  for  its  performance. 

27.  How  great  things  (on  their  journey) 
God  wrought  with  them—*,  e.  in  their  be- 
half (i5 : 4;  Luke  1 :  72) ;  not  by  them,  wliich  would 
be  Si*  avTMv,  as  in  15  :  12.  The  phrase  comes 
from  Heb.  'amh  'im.  (Comp.  Josh.  2  :  12 ;  Ps. 
119  :  G5,  etc.)  According  to  ^leycr,  with  them 
is  =  being  with  them,  allied  with  them, 
which  is  les.s  simple. — That  he  opened  to 
the  Gentiles  a  door  of  faith— /.  e.  had  given 
tliem  access  to  tlie  gospel,  participation  in  its 
blessings,  as  well  as  to  the  Jews ;  not  that  he 
had  opened  to  the  apostles  a  door  of  access  to 
the  heathen.    This  metaphor  is  a  favorite  one 

with  Paul  (l  Cor.  16  :  9;  2  Cor.  2  :  12;  Col.  4  :  3),  and  may 


have  become  forailiar  to   Luke   in   his  inter- 
course with  him  (Alf ). 

28.  Abode,  etc  It  is  necessary  to  inquire 
here  how  long  the  apcjstle  was  probably  absent 
on  the  tour  followed  by  this  residence  at  An- 
tioch. We  must  be  content  with  a  somewhat 
vague  answer  to  this  question.  The  Apostolic 
Council  at  Jerusalem  was  held  in  a.  D.  50  (/)i- 
trod.,  ^  6.  3) ;  and,  as  Paul  departed  on  his  first 
mission  in  a.  d.  45  (see  on  13  :  3),  we  must 
divide  the  interval  from  a.  d.  45  to  50  between 
his  journey  among  the  heathen  and  his  subse- 
quent abode  at  Antioch.  The  best  authorities, 
as  Anger,  Wieseler,  Meyer,  Winer,  De  Wette, 
and  others,  agree  in  this  result.  How  we  are 
to  distribute  the  intermerhate  years  is  more  un- 
certain. It  will  be  found  tliat  the  apostle  trav- 
elled more  extensively  during  his  second  mis- 
sionary-tour than  during  the  first;  and,  as  the 
limitations  of  time  in  that  part  of  the  history 
allow  us  to  assign  but  three  years,  or  three  and 
a  half,  to  that  excursion,  we  may  consider  two 
years,  perhaps,  as  sufficient  for  this  journey. 
This  conclusion  would  place  the  return  to  An- 
tioch near  the  close  of  a.  d.  47,  since  the  apostle 
must  have  set  forth  somewhat  late  in  the  year 
A.  D.  45.  (Comp.  the  note  on  12  :  25  with  that 
on  13  :  3.)  Accordingly,  the  years  a.  d.  48  and 
49  would  be  the  period  not  brief  (xp^t^v  ovk 
oAiyoc)  which  Paul  and  Barnabas  sjwnt  at  An- 
tioch between  their  return  and  the  Council  at 
Jerusalem.  While  they  resided  in  that  city, 
for  the  most  part,  they  would  be  able,  both  by 
their  own  personal  efforts  and  their  supervision 
of  the  efforts  of  others,  to  extend  the  gospel  in 
the  regions  around  them. 


1-5.  PAUL  AND  BARNABAS  ARE  SENT 
AS  DELEGATES  TO  JERUSALEM. 

1.  From  Judea  —  /.  e.  from  Jerusalem  in 
Judea.  (Comp.  certain  from  us,  in  v.  24.)  It 
is  barely  possible  that  Luke  may  include  the 


172 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


cumcised  "after  the  manner  of  Moses,  ye  cannot  be 
saved. 

2  When  therefore  Faul  and  Parnabas  had  no  small 
dissension  and  disputation  with  tlieni,  tliey  Uoterniined 
tliat  'l  aid  and  liarnabas,  and  certain  otlier  of  tliem, 
should  go  up  to  Jerusalem  unto  the  apostles  and  elders 
about  this  question, 

3  And  ^beiiig  brought  on  their  way  by  the  church, 
they  passed  through  i^henice  and  Samaria,  ■'declaring 
the  conversion  of  the  bentiles:  and  they  caused  great 
joy  unto  all  the  brethren. 

4  And  when  they  were  come  to  Jerusalem,  they  were 
received  of  the  church,  and  uf  the  apostles  and  ciders, 
and  «they  declared  all  things  that  God  had  done  with 
them. 


cised  after  the  custom  of  Moses,  ye  cannot  be  saved. 

2  And  when  1  aul  and  barnabas  had  no  small  dissen- 
sion and  questioning  with  them,  IIik  hni/iicii  ap- 
pointed that  I'aul  and  l^arnabas,  and  certain  other 
of  them,  should  go  up  to  Jerusalem  unto  the  apos- 

3 ties  and  elders  about  this  question.  They  there- 
fore, being  brought  on  their  way  by  the  church, 
passed  through  both  1  ha'nicia  and  f-aniaria,  declar- 
ing the  conversion  of  the  bentiles:  and  they  caused 

4  great  joy  unto  all  the  brethren.  And  when  they 
were  come  to  Jerusalem,  they  were  received  of  the 
church  and  the  apostles  and  the  elders,  and  they 
rehearsed  all  things  that  God  had  done  with  them. 


a  Gen.  17  :  10;  Lev.  12  -.3 6  Gal.  2  :  1 c  Rom.  15  :  24 ;  1  Cor.  16:  6,  11 d  ch.  14  :  27... e  ver.  12;  ch.  14  :  27 ;  21  :  19. 


other  churches  in  that  country.  We  are  not 
to  confound  this  party  of  Judaizcrs  with  those 
in  Gal.  2 :  12  who  "  came  from  James  "  (i.  e.  the 
church  over  which  he  presided)  and  caused 
Peter  to  dissemble  his  convictions  from  fear 
of  tlieir  censure.  The  notice  in  the  Epistle 
refers  to  a  different  and  later  event.  (See  on 
18:23.)  — Were  teaching.  They  had  not 
broached  the  error  merely,  but  were  inculcat- 
ing it. — That  unless  ye  are  circumcised, 
etc.  Tliis  transition  to  the  direct  style  gives 
vividness  to  the  narrative. — According  to  the 
custom,  law  (tw  i&cL,  see  6  :  14),  dative  of  rule 
or  manner. — Ye  cannot  be  saved.  It  was 
this  enforced  submission  to  tlic  rite  as  necessary 
to  salvation  which  made  the  error  so  fatally 
pernicious.  (Comp.  the  note  on  16  :  3.)  The 
doctrine  in  this  form  was  nothing  less  than  an 
utter  subversion  of  the  scheme  of  Christianity. 
It  denied  the  sufficiency  of  faith  in  Clirist  as 
the  only  condition  of  pardon  and  reconciliation. 
It  involved  the  feeling  that  circumcision  was  an 
act  of  merit,  and  that  those  who  submitted  to  it 
acquired  a  virtual  right  to  the  divine  favor.  In 
a  word,  it  substituted  the  law  of  works  for  the 
gratuitous  justification  which  the  gospel  de- 
clares to  be  the  only  way  in  which  sinners 
can  be  saved.     (See  Gal.  5  :  1,  sq.) 

2.  Dissension,  in  their  views ;  discus- 
sion,  on  tlie  points  which  that  difference  in- 
volved.— Small  belongs  to  both  nouns  (De 
Wet.).  The  adjective  is  not  repeated,  because 
the  words  are  of  the  same  gender.  (W.  §  59.  5.) 
— Them  refers  to  certain  men,  in  v.  1.  Paul 
and  Barnabas  were  the  disputants  on  one  side, 
and  the  individuals  from  Judea  on  the  other. 
It  does  not  appear  that  the  Christians  at  Antioch 
took  any  open  part  in  the  controversy.  The 
heresy  reappeared  among  them  at  a  later 
period,  and  became  so  prevalent  as  to  endanger 
the  safety  of  the  entire  cliurch.  (See  Gal.  2  : 
11,  sfj.)  Even  Barnabas  at  that  time  compro- 
mised the  principle  for  which  he  was  now  so 
earnest. — They — i.  e.  the  brethren  in  v.  1 — ap- 


pointed that  they  should  go  up,  etc.  It 
appears  from  Gal.  2  :  2  that  Paul  went  also,  in 
compliance  with  a  divine  command.  Whether 
the  revelation  was  first  and  the  action  of  the 
church  subsequent,  or  the  reverse,  it  is  impossi- 
ble to  say.  It  may  be  that  Paul  was  instructed 
to  propose  the  mission  to  Jerusalem,  or,  if  the 
mettsure  originated  with  the  church,  that  he 
was  instructed  to  approve  it  and  to  go  as  one 
of  the  delegates.  Either  supposition  harmon- 
izes the  notice  in  Gal.  2  :  2  with  this  passage. — 
Certain  others,  as  delegates.  One  of  them 
may  have  been  Titus,  since  we  read  in  Gal.  2  : 

I  that  he  accompanied  the  apostle  at  this  time. 
Yet  perhaps  taking  along  also  Titus,  in 
that  place,  may  indicate  that  they  travelled  to- 
gether as  friends,  and  not  as  official  associates. 
The  fact,  too,  that,  being  uncircumcised,  he  was 
a  party  m  some  sense  to  this  Jewish  question 
may  have  disqualified  him  for  such  an  ap- 
pointment. A 

3.  They  having  been  sent  forward — ('.  e. 
attended  part  of  the  way  by  some  of  the  church 
as  a  mark  of  honor.  (Comp.  20  :  38  ;  21  :  5 ; 
3  John  0.)  The  word,  says  Meyer,  does  not  in- 
clude the  viatica,  or  supplies  for  the  journey, 
unless  the  context  point  that  out  as  a  part  of 
the  service  rendered,  as  in  Tit.  3 :  13. — Passed 
through  Phoenicia  and  Samaria.     (Sec  on 

II  :  19.)  As  Galilee  is  not  mentioned,  they 
travelled,  probablj',  along  the  coast  as  far  south 
as  Ptolemais  (21:7),  and  then  cro.ssed  the  plain 
of  Esdraelon  into  Samaria. — Unto  the  breth- 
ren in  the  various  towns  on  their  way.  We 
see  here  the  fruits  of  the  seed  which  had  been 
scattered  in  those  regions  (8:5;  11 :  19). 

4.  Were  cordially  received.  (Comp.  18: 
27.)  It  was  not  certain  that,  coming  on  such 
an  errand,  they  would  be  greeted  with  entire 
favor.  It  weakens  the  sense  to  restrict  it  to 
their  official  recognition  as  messengers.     [The 

critical  editors  prefer  irapeSeX'^ria-av  to  a.7rfSfX'^V<"^'', 

followed  by  Dr.  Hackett,  but  the  former  may 
have  the  meaning  which  Dr.  H.  gives,  to  the 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


173 


5  But  there  rose  up  certain  of  the  sect  of  the  Phari- 
sees which  believed,  saying,  "That  it  was  needful  to 
circumcise  theui,  and  to  coiuuiaiid  tkein  to  keep  the 
law  of  -Moses. 

(>  H  And  the  apostles  and  elders  came  together  for  to 
consider  of  this  matter. 

7  And  when  there  had  been  much  disputing.  Peter 
rose  up,  and  said  unto  them,  'Men  awl  brethren,  ye 
know  how  that  a  good  while  ago  God  made  choice 
among  us,  that  the  (ientiles  by  my  mouth  should  hear 
the  word  of  the  gospel,  and  believe. 

8  And  God,  <=which  kuoweth  the  hearts,  bare  them 


5  But  there  rose  up  certain  of  the  sect  of  the  Phari- 
sees who  believed,  saying.  It  is  needful  to  circum- 
cise them,  and  to  charge  them  to  keep  the  law  of 
INloses. 

6  And  the  apostles  and  the  elders  were  gathered  to- 
"gethe;'  to  consider  of  this  matter.     And  when  tliere 

had  been  much  questioning,  I'eter  rose  up,  and  said 
unto  them. 

Brethren,  ye  know  how  that  'a  good  while  ago 

God  made  choice  among  you,  that  by  my  mouth  the 

(ientiles  should  hear  the  word  of  the  gospel,  and  be- 

8  lieve.    And  God,  who  kuoweth  the  heart,  bare  tbem 


(ver.  1 &cb.  10:20;  11  :  IV!.... cl  Chron.  28:9:  ch.  1  :  24.- 


-1  Gr.  from  early  days. 


latter. — A.  H.].  This  was  the  apostle's  third 
visit  to  Jerusalem  since  his  conversion,  and 
was  made  in  tlie  year  a.  d.  50.  (Introd.,  ^  6.  3.) 
— The  church,  in  general,  while  and  adds  the 
prominent  parts.  (See  on  1  :  14.)  The  e.xist- 
ence  of  presbyters  at  Jerusalem  is  first  recog- 
nized in  11  :  30.  Luke  does  not  inform  us  at 
what  time  or  in  wliat  manner  they  were  ap- 
pointed. It  was  evidently  no  part  of  his  inten- 
tion to  unfold  any  particular  scheme  of  eccle- 
siastical polity.  ,  The  information  which  he 
gives  on  that  subject  is  incidental  and  imperfect. 
— Toward  them,  in  their  behalf.  (See  on 
14:27.) 

5.  But  there  arose  (in  the  assembly  at  Je- 
rusalem) some  of  those  from  the  sect  of  the 
Pharisees.  It  is  entirely  natural  that  indi- 
viduals of  this  class  appear  as  the  party  who 
insist  on  circumcision.  The  attachment  to 
forms  which  rendered  them  Pharisees  out  of 
the  church  rendered  them  legalists  in  it.  These 
are  the  persons,  evidently,  of  whom  Paul  speaks 
so  strongly  in  Gal.  2  :  4. — ^Them — viz.  the  Gen- 
tile believers  in  the  comniunication  just  made 
(v.  4). — Some  regard  the  contents  of  this  verse 
as  a  continuation  of  the  report  (v.  4),  as  if  the 
objectors  were  those  at  Antioch,  and  not  at 
Jerusalem ;  but  in  that  case  we  should  have 
expected  and  hwr  or  that  as  the  connective  be- 
tween declared  and  there  rose  up,  etc. 

6-12.  SPEECH  OF  PETER  IN  THE  AS- 
SEMBLY. 

6.  Came  together,  etc.  Tliis  assembly  is 
often  called  the  first  Christian  Council ;  but  we 
must  use  some  license  to  apply  the  term  in  that 
way,  since  a  Council  consists  properly  of  dele- 
gates from  various  churchas,  whereas  two 
churches  only  were  represented  on  this  occa- 
sion.— The  apostles  and  elders  are  men- 
tioned on  account  of  their  rank,  not  as  com- 
posing the  entire  assembly.  It  is  evident  from 
v.  23  tliat  the  other  Christians  at  Jerusalem 
were  also  present,  and  gave  their  sanction  to 
the  decrees  enacted.  (See  also  v.  12,  compared 
with  V.  22.)— In  Gal.  2  :  2,  Paul  states  that,  be- 
sides the  communication  which  he  made  to  the 


believers  in  a  body,  he  had  also  a  private  inter- 
view with  the  chief  of  the  apostles.  That  inter- 
view, we  may  suppose,  preceded  the  public 
discussion.  The  object  of  it  appears  to  have 
been  to  put  the  other  apostles  in  full  iX)S.session 
of  his  views,  and  of  all  the  facts  in  relation  to 
his  ministry  among  the  heathen  ;  so  that,  forti- 
fied by  their  previous  knowledge  of  tlie  case, 
he  might  have  their  support  in  the  promiscuous 
as.sembly,  where  i)rejudice  or  misunderstanding 
might  otherwise  have  placed  him  in  a  false 
light. — This  matter,  subject  of  discussion  (De 
Wet.) ;  not  this  expression,  in  v.  5  (Mey.), 
because  the  dispute  had  an  earlier  origin. 

7.  Since  remote  days,  a  long  time  ago. 
(Comp.  in  the  beginning,  in  11  :  15.)  The 
conversion  of  Cornelius  to(jk  place  during  the 
time  that  Paul  wa.s  at  Tarsus  (see  on  11  :  15) ; 
and  the  several  years,  so  eventful  in  their  cha- 
racter, which  had  elapsed  since  that  period, 
would  appear  in  the  retrospect  a  long  time. — • 
Made  choice  among  us  (the  apostles)  that 
by  my  mouth,  etc.  (Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Win.). 
The  subse(]uent  clause  forms  the  proi)er  object 
of  made  choice.  Some  supply  needlessly 
me  (6|ue)  (Olsli.),  and  otliers  incorrectly  make 
among  us  a  Hebraistic  accusative,  selected 
me  or  us.  (See  W.  ^  32.  3.)  The  me^ining  is 
not  necessarily  that  no  heathen  had  hcitrd  or 
embraced  the  gospel  till  Peter  preachcfl  it  to 
them,  but  that  it  was  he  whom  God  appointed 
to  convey  the  gospel  to  them  under  circum- 
stances which  showed  it  to  be  manifestly  his 
will  that  they  should  be  admitted  into  the 
chtirch  withoitt  circumcision. — For  the  generic 
nations  =  Gentiles,  see  on  11 : 1.  [This  sense 
of  the  word  is  sometimes  called  Jewish,  because 
the  word  was  applied  by  the  Jews  to  all  who 
were  not  Israelites,  with  the  understanding  that 
they  were  idolaters,  ignorant,  for  the  most  part, 
of  the  true  God.  The  adjective  ethnic  is  often 
applied  to  heathen  religions  in  modern  litera- 
ture.—A.  II.] 

8.  The  heart-knowing  God  (who  could 
judge,  therefore,  of  the  sincerity  of  tlieir  re- 
pentance and  faith)  testified  for  them  (dat. 


174 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


■witness,  "giving  them  the  Holy  Ghost,  even  as  he  did 
unto  us; 

y  *And  put  no  diflference  between  us  and  them, 
"purifying  their  hearts  by  faith. 

lu  Now  therefore  vvliy  temjit  ye  (iod,  ''to  put  a  yoke 
upon  the  neck  of  the  disciples,"whicli  neither  our  la- 
thers nor  we  were  able  to  bear? 

11  Hut  «vve  believe  that  through  the  grace  of  the 
Lord  Jesus  (.  hrist  we  shall  be  saved,  even  as  they. 

12  11  Then  all  the  multitude  kept  silence,  and  gave 
audience  to  Barnabas  and  Paul,  declaring  what  mira- 
cles and  wonders  (jod  had  /wrought  among  the  Gen- 
tiles by  them. 


witness,  giving  them  the  Holy  Spirit,  even  as  he  did 

9  unto   us;  and   he  made  no  distinction  between   ua 

10 and   them,  cleansing   their  hearts  by   faith.     Now 

therefore  why  try  ye  God,  that   ye  should   put  a 

yoke  upon  the  neck  of  the  disciples,  which  neither 

11  our  fathers  nor  we  were  able  to  bear?  But  we  be- 
lieve that  we  shall  be  saved  through  the  grace  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,  in  like  manner  as  they. 

12  And  all  the  multitude  kept  silence;  and  they 
hearkened  unto  Barnabas  and  Paul  rehearsing  what 
signs  and  wonders  God  had  wrought  among  the  Gen- 


och.   10:  44.... 5  Rom.  10  :  11..  ..c  ch.   10  :  15;  M  :  43  ;  1   Cor.  1  :2;  1  Pet.  l:Ti....d  Matt.  23  :  4;  Gal.  5:  l....e  Rom.  3:  ! 
Eph.  2:8;  Tit.  2  :  U ;  3  :  4,  5. . . ./  ch.  14  :  27. 


comm.).  The  testimony  consisted  of  the  mirac- 
ulous gifts  wliicli  lie  imparted  to  them.  (See 
10  :  45.)  He  had  tlius  sliovvn  that  ceremonial 
obedience  was  not  essential  to  his  favor ;  for  he 
had  granted  the  sign  of  accei)tance  to  those  who 
were  entirely  destitute  of  tliat  rocomniendation. 

9.  And  made  no  distinction  between 
us,  who  had  practised  the  Jewish  rites,  and 
them,  thoiigli  they  were  still  heathen  in  that 
respect  (without  law,  icor.  9:21).  The  next 
clause  states  how  he  liad  manifested  this  impar- 
tiality.— In  that  by  faith  he  purified  their 
hearts — i.  e.  in  connection  with  their  reception 
of  the  gospel  had  made  them  partakers  of  the 
holiness  which  renders  those  who  possess  it 
acceptable  in  his  sight.  He  had  bestowed  this 
blessing  as  fully  and  freely  on  the  uncircum- 
cised  believing  Gentiles  as  he  had  upon  the 
circumcised  believing  Jews.  Peter  represents 
the  purification  as  effected  by  faith,  in  order  to 
deny  the  error  which  would  ascribe  that  efficacy 
to  circumcision  or  any  other  legal  observance. 
The  Jewish  feeling  was  that  the  heathen  were 
unclean  so  long  as  thej'^  were  uncircumcised. 
The  Spirit  is  the  efficient  Author  of  sanctifica- 
tion ;  but  faitli,  as  used  here,  is  a  belief  of  the 
truth  (2Thes3. 2: 13),  especially  of  that  which  re- 
lates to  the  atonement  of  Christ  (1  John  1 : 7),  and 
the  Spirit  employs  the  truth  as  the  means  of 
sanctification. 

10.  Now  therefore — i.  e.  aftersuch  evidence 
that  God  does  not  require  the  heathen  to  sub- 
mit to  Jewish  rites. — Why  do  ye  tempt  God, 
make  presumptuous  trial  of  his  power  and  pa- 
tience by  demanding  new  proofs  of  his  will. 
(See  5:9;  Matt.  4:7;  1  Cor.  10 :  9.)  This  sense 
is  partly  Hebraistic,  and  we  must  compare  the 
verb  with  the  Hcb.  )iasfih.  in  order  to  obtain  the 
full  idea. — To  put  (=  putting),  etc.,  that  you 
should  place  (=  by  placing)  a  yoke,  etc. 
This  is  a  lax  use  of  tlie  epexegetical  infinitive. 
(W.  ?44. 1.) — Which  neither  our  fathers,  etc. 
"By  this  yoke,"  says  Neander,  "  which  Peter 
represents  as  having  l)ccn  always  so  irksome  to 
the  Jews,  he  certainly  did  not  mean  the  exter- 


nal observance  of  ceremonies  simply  as  such, 
since  he  would  by  no  means  persuade  the  Jew- 
ish Christians  to  renounce  them.  But  he  meant 
the  external  observance  of  the  law,  in  so  far  as 
this  proceeded  from  an  internal  subjection  of" 
the  conscience  to  its  power,  such  as  exists  when 
justification  and  salvation  are  made  to  depend 
on  the  performance  of  legal  requirements. 
Those  in  this  state  of  mind  must  fear  lest  they 
peril  their  salvation  by  the  slightest  deviation 
from  the  law ;  they  suffer  the  painful  scrupu- 
losity which  leads  to  tlie  invention  of  manifold 
checks,  in  order  to  guard  themselves,  by  a  self- 
imposed  constraint,  against  every  possible  trans- 
gression of  its  commands." 

11.  But  marks  this  connection :  With  such 
an  experience  as  to  the  law,  we  no  longer  ex- 
pect salvation  from  that  source,  but  through 
the  grace  of  the  Lord  Jesus  believe  that 
we  shall  be  saved. — Also  they — viz.  the 
heathen  converts.  The  remark  suggests  its 
own  application.  If  the  Jews  had  renounced 
their  own  law  as  unable  to  benefit  them,  and 
had  taken  the  position  of  the  Gentiles,  it  was 
inconsistent  as  well  as  useless  to  require  the 
Gentiles  to  depend  on  the  system  of  the  Jews. 
The  train  of  thought  in  Gal.  2  :  15,  sq.,  is  sin- 
gularly coincident  with  this. — The  reference  of 
they  to  our  fathers  (v.  10)  introduces  an  idea 
irrelevant  to  the  subject. 

12.  Became  silent  recalls  us  to  the  much 
disputing  in  v.  7.  Peter's  address  had  calmed 
the  excitement ;  so  that  they  refrained  from 
speaking  and  gave  Paul  and  Barnaljas  an  op- 
portunity to  be  heard.  (Comp.  had  held 
their  peace,  in  the  next  verse.) — Gave  au- 
dience or  hearkened  (tikovov,  imj)erf.)  im- 
plies a  copious  narration  on  the  part  of  the 
speakers. — Declaring,  etc.  They  gave  this 
prominence  to  the  miracles,  because  these  ex- 
pressed so  decisively  God's  approval  of  their 
course  in  receiving  the  heathen  without  cir- 
cumcision. That  was  now  the  main  point  in 
question.  We  see  from  Gal.  2  :  7.  sq.,  that  the 
narrative  embraced  also  other  topics. 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


175 


13  <[  And  after  they  had  held  tlicir  peace,  ».Tames 
answered,  saying,  Men  and  brethren,  liearken  unto 
me : 

14  *Siincon  hath  declared  how  God  at  the  first  did 
visit  the  lieiitiles,  to  take  out  ol'  them  a  pe  .pie  lor  his 
name. 

1")  And  to  this  agree  the  words  of  the  prophets;  as 
it  is  written, 

Ki  =AMer  this  I  will  return,  aid  will  build  again  the 
tabernacle  of  David,  which  is  fallen  down  ;  and  I  will 
build  again  the  ruins  thereof,  and  I  will  set  it  up  : 

17  That  tlic  residue  of  nun  might  seek  after  the 
Lord,  and  all  the  Gentiles,  upon  whom  my  name  is 
called,  saith  the  Lord,  who  doeth  all  these  things. 


13  tiles  by  them.    And  after  they  had  held  their  peace, 
Jamesanswered,  saying, 

14  lirethren,   hearken   unto   me:    Synieon   liath   re- 
hearsed how  tirst  (iod  did  visit  the  Gentiles,  to  take 

15 out  of  them  a  people  for  his  name.     .And  to  this 
agree  the  words  of  the  prophets;   as  it  is  written, 

16  After  these  things  1  will  return, 

I  And  I  will  build  again  the  tabernacle  of  David, 

which  is  fallen ; 
And  I  will  build  again  the  ruins  thereof, 
And  I  will  set  it  up: 

17  That  the  residue  of  men  may  seek  after  the  Lord, 
And  all  the  Gentiles,  upon  whom  my  name  is 

called, 


arh.  12  :  17 b  ver.  7 c  Amos  9: 11,  12. 


13-ai.  SPEECH  OF  THE  APOSTLE 
JAMES. 

13.  The  speaker  is  the  James  mentioned  in 
12  :  17.  Paul  names  him  before  Peter  and 
John  in  GaL  2  :  9,  because  he  was  pastor  of 
the  church  at  Jerusaletn,  and  perliaps  president 
of  tlie  Council. — Proceeded  to  speak  (see  3  : 
12),  or,  very  properly,  answered,  since  the  posi- 
tion of  the  Judaistic  party  challenged  a  reply. 

14.  Syineoii  (see  13  :  1),  as  in  2  Pet.  1  :  1, 
elsewhere  Simon,  after  the  Heb.  variation 
Shciiion  (i  ciir.  4  :  'io)  and  S/iinuon  (oen.  29 :  33).  This 
apostle  is  not  mentioned  aj^iain  in  the  Acts.  His 
speech  in  the  Council  is  the  last  act  of  Peter 
which  Luke  has  recorded. — At  first  answers  to 
since  remote  days  in  v.  7. — Graciously  vis- 
ited, like  jxtkadh  in  its  good  sense. — After  his 
name  (Luke  1 :  59) — i.  e.  who  should  be  called  by  it, 
known  as  his  people  (De  Wet.).  (Comp.  v.  17; 
Deut.  28  :  10 ;  Isa.  G3  :  19 ;  2  Chr.  7  :  14,  etc.) 
But  the  critical  editions  omit  upon  =  after 
(ewt),  and  the  dative  depends  then  on  the  in- 
finitive— i.  e.  for  thy  name,  its  acknowledg- 
ment, honor. 

15.  And  with  this  (not  masculine — viz. 
Peter — Init  neuter— viz.  the  fact  just  stated) 
agree  the  words  of  the  prophets.  As 
an  example  of  their  testimony,  he  adduces 
Amos  9  :  11,  57. 

16.  The  citation  conforms  very  nearly  to  the 
Septuagint. — I  will  return  and  will  rebuild. 
The  expression  imi>lies  a  restoration  of  favor 
after  a  temporary  tdienation.  (Comp.  Jer.  12  : 
15.)  Some  recognize  here  the  Hebraism  which 
converts  the  first  of  two  verlis  into  an  adverb 
qualifying  the  second :  I  will  again  rebuild. 
Meyer,  De  Wette,  Winer  (^  54.  5),  reject  that 
explanation.  It  is  the  less  apposite  here,  as 
re  =  again  (avd)  repeats  the  adverliial  idea  in 
the  three  fc)llowing  verbs. ^ — I  will  rebuild  the 
tabernacle  of  David  which  has  fallen — 
i.  e.  will  restore  the  decayed  splend<ir  of  his 
family;  to  wit,  in  the  person  of  his  Son  after 
thetlesii(Bom.  1: 3),  in  the  Messiah. — Tabernacle 
represents  the  family  as    having  fallen    into 


such  obscurity  as  to  occupy  the  humble  abode 
of  a  booth  or  tabernacle.  The  next  words  of 
the  text  describe  the  same  condition  still  more 
strongly. 

17.  That  (tclic,  because  the  Saviour  must 
be  first  sent)  the  rest  (lit.  those  left  re- 
maining) of  men  and  all  the  heathen 
may  seek  out  the  Lord.  The  Greek 
particle  here  used  {iv)  implies  that  it  de- 
pends on  them  whether  the  purpose  will 
be  attained  or  defeated.  (See  W.  ?  4--  G ;  K. 
^  330.  4.)  The  rest  of  men  are  the  others  of 
them  besides  the  Jews,  and  these  others  are  all 
the  heathen.  The  last  clause  is  explicative, 
not  appositional.  The  Hebrew  has  they — i.  e. 
the  people  of  God — shall  possess  the  residue  of 
Edom — /.  e.  those  of  Edom  reserved  for  mercy 
— and  all  the  (other)  heathen.  The  Seventy  may 
have  conf(junded  some  of  the  original  words 
with  other  similar  words ;  but  the  apostle  fol- 
lowed their  translation  of  the  passage,  as  it 
contained  the  essential  idea  for  which  he  ap- 
pealed to  it.  The  many  foreign  Jews  who 
were  present  were  familiar  with  the  Greek 
Scriptures,  but  not  the  Hebrew. — Upon  whom 
my  name  has  been  called — ('.  e.  given,  ap- 
plied to  them  as  a  sign  of  their  relationship  to 
God.  (Comp.  James  2  :  7.  See  the  references 
on  V.  14.)  Observe  that  the  verb  is  perfect. 
The  application  of  the  name  was  future  when 
the  prophecy  was  uttcretl,  and  was  still  future, 
to  a  great  extent,  when  cited  at  tliis  time ;  but 
the  prediction  was  as  good  as  already  verified, 
because  the  purpose  of  God  made  it  certain. — 
Upon  them  (eir'  airrous)  is  a  Hebraism  founded 
on  the  use  of  'fisher  as  the  sign  of  relation  (Olsh., 
De  Wet.,  Mey.).  (Gcsen.,  Heh.  Gr.,  |121.  1.) 
The  foregoing  citation  from  Amos  was  perti- 
nent in  a  twofold  way  :  first,  it  announced  that 
the  heathen  were  to  be  admitted  with  the  Jews 
into  the  kingdom  of  Chri.st;  and  secondly,  it 
contained  no  recognition  of  circumcision  or 
other  Jewish  ceremonies  as  prerequisite  to  their 
reception. — All  with  these  things  (T.  R.)  ia 
not  approved. 


176 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


18  Known  unto  God  are  all  his  works  from  the  be- 
ginning of  the  world. 

19  Wherefore  "my  sentence  is,  that  we  trouble  not 
them,  which  from  among  the  Oentiles  'are  turned  to 
tiod: 

20  But  that  we  write  unto  them,  that  they  abstain 
=from  pollutions  of  idols,  ajjd  <'fivin  fornication,  and 
Jroin  things  strangled,  'and  from  blood. 

21  1-or  .closes  of  old  lime  hath  iu  every  city  them 
that  preach  him,  /being  read  in  the  synagogues  every 
sabbath  day. 


18  Paith  the  lord,  'who  maketh  these  things  known 

from  of  old. 

19  Wherefore  my  judgment  is,  that  we  trouble  not 
them  who  from  among  the  Gentiles  turn  to  God: 

20  but  that  we  -write  unto  them,  that  they  aV)stain 
from  the  pollutions  of  idols,  and  from  fornication, 

21  and  from  what  is  strangled,  and  from  blood,  lor 
IVioses  from  generations  of  old  hath  in  every  city 
them  that  preach  him,  being  read  in  the  synagogues 
every  sabbath. 


o  see  ver.  28 h\  Thess.  1:9 c  Gen.  35:  2:  Ex.  20  :  3,  23;  Ezek.  20  :  30;  1  Cor.  8:1;  Rev.  2  :  14,  20  ;  9  :  20,  21 d  1  Cor.  8  :9.  18; 

Gal.  ."<  :  19;  Eph.  b:A;  Ca\.A  :  5;  1  Thess.  4:3;  1  Pet.  4:3.... e  Gen.  9  :  4 ;  Lev.  3  :  17  ;  Deut.  12  :  16,  23..../ ch.  13:  15,  27. 1  Or, 


vihodoeth  these  things  which  were  known.... 2  Or,  e7ijoin  them 


18.  The  words  here  are  a  comment  of  James 
on  tlie  prophecy. — Known  from  the  begin- 
ning unto   God  are  all  his  works.     The 

l^resent  call  of  the  Gentiles,  after  having  been 
so  long  foretold,  was  an  evidence  and  illustra- 
tion of  the  truth  here  asserted.  Hence,  the 
apo.stle  would  argue,  if  God,  in  extending  the 
gospel  to  the  heathen  without  requiring  them 
to  be  circumcised,  was  carrying  into  effect  an 
eternal  purpose,  it  became  them  to  acquiesce  in 
it;  their  opposition  to  his  plan  would  be  as 
unavailing  as  it  was  criminal. — The  variations 
of  the  text  in  this  verse  are  numerous,  but 
nearly  all  yield  the  same  meaning.  They  may 
be  seen  in  Griesbach,  Hahn,  Tischendorf,  Green, 
and  others.  Lachmann  adheres  to  the  common 
reading,  with  the  exception  of  Lord  for  God, 
and  work  for  works. 

19.  I  (for  my  part,  without  dictating  to 
others)  judge,  decide  as  my  opinion.  On  I 
(eyw),  as  thus  restrictive,  see  W.  §  22.  6.  The 
verb  affords  no  proof  that  the  speaker's  author- 
ity was  greater  than  that  of  the  other  apostles. 
(Comp.  IG  :  4.) — That  we  ought  not  to  dis- 
quiet, molest — i.  e.  impose  on  them  the  yoke 
of  Jewish  ceremonies.  (See  v.  10.)  The  infin- 
itive includes  often  the  idea  of  obligation  or 
necessity.  (W.  g  44.  3.  b.)  Meyer  urges  the 
separate  force  of  (n-opa)  further — i.  e.  in  addition 
to  their  faith,  not  justified,  apparently,  by  u.sage ; 
better,  in  his  last  edition,  thereby,  along  with 
their  conversion. 

20.  That  we  should  write  to  them,  direct 
by  letter,  that  they  abstain. — Pollutions 
of  idols  ^  things  sacrificed  to  idols,  in 
V.  29.  The  parts  of  the  victim  not  used  in 
sacrifice  the  heathen  sold  in  the  market  as 
ordinary  food  or  ate  them  at  feasts.  The  Jews, 
in  their  abhorrence  of  idolatry,  regarded  the 
use  of  such  flesh  as  allied  to  the  guilt  of  parti- 
cipating in  idol-worship  itself.  (See  Rom.  14  : 
15,  sq. ;  1  Cor.  8  :  10,  sq.) — And  from  lornica- 
tion  =  licentiou.sness  (Calv.,  Kuin.,  Olsh.,  Mey., 
De  Wet.)    Repeat  from  before  this  noun.    The 


other  practices,  it  will  be  observed,  relate  to 
things  which  are  not  sinful  per  se,  but  derive 
their  character  from  positive  law  or  from  cir- 
cumstances. The  reason,  probably,  for  associ- 
ating this  immorality  with  such  practices  is  that 
the  heathen  mind  had  become  so  corrupt  as  al- 
most to  have  lost  the  idea  of  chastity  as  a  virtue.' 
Other  senses  of  fornication  {-iropveia),  as  idol- 
atry, incest,  marriage  with  unbelievers,  concu- 
binage, have  been  proposed.  It  is  against  any 
such  unusual  signification  of  the  word  that  it 
occurs  again  in  the  enactment  (v.  29).  The  ob- 
ject of  the  decree  would  require  it  to  be  frame<l 
with  as  much  perspicuity  as  possible,  and  would 
exclude  the  use  of  terms  out  of  their  ordinary 
acceptation.  —  And  from  what  has  been 
strangled — ('.  e.  from  the  flesh  of  animals  put 
j  to  death  in  that  way.  The  Jews  were  not  al- 
lowed to  eat  such  flesh,  because  it  contained 
the  blood.  (See  Lev.  17  :  13,  14 ;  Deut.  12  :  16- 
23.) — And  from  blood,  which  the  heathen 
drank  often  at  tlieir  idolatrous  feasts,  and  at 
other  times  and  in  various  ways  mingled  with 
their  food.  [See  an  instructive  discussion  of 
the  meaning  of  James,  etc.,  in  Fisher's  The 
Beginnings  of  Christianity,  p.  303. — A.  H.] 

21.  Tliis  verse  assigns  a  reason  for  the  pro- 
posed restrictions,  and  that  is  that  the  Jewish 
believers,  being  so  accustomed  to  hear  the 
things  in  question  forbidden,  were  naturally 
sensitive  in  regard  to  them ;  and  hence  it  was 
necessary,  for  the  sake  »{  peace  and  harmony, 
tliat  the  heathen  converts  should  refrain  from 
such  practices.  This  view  of  the  connection 
is  the  most  natural  one.  Calvin,  Hemsen,  01s- 
hausen,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  and  others  agree  in 
it.  Neander  follows  Chrysostom,  who  supposes 
the  words  to  explain  why  it  was  proposed  to 
instruct  the  Gentiles  only :  the  Jews  had  no 
occasion  to  be  informed  what  the  law  required 
of  them,  for  Moses  in  every  city,  etc.  This 
interpretation  not  only  turns  the  mind  abruptly 
from  one  train  of  thought  to  another,  but  ap- 
pears to  concede  more  to  the  advocates  of  cir- 


1  See  Tholuck,  The  Nature  and  dforal  Influence  of  Ilcalhenism,  in  the  Biblical  Repository,  vol.  ii.  p.  441,  sq. 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


177 


22  Then  pleased  it  the  apostles  and  elders,  with  the 
whole  chuieli,  to  send  chosen  men  ot  tlnir  own  com- 
pany to  Antiocli  with  I'aul  and  1  ai  iiabas ;  uanifh/, 
Judas  surnamed  "Baisabas,  and  *ilas, ch iet  men  among 
the  brethren  ; 

23  And  they  wrote  letters  by  tliem  after  this  manner; 
The  apostles  and  elders  ac  ii  brethren  send  greeting 
unto  the  brethren  which  are  of  the  oeiitiles  in  Anti- 
och  and  Syria  and  Cilicia: 

24  I'orasniuch  as  we  have  heard,  that  certain  which 
went  out  from  us  have  troubled  you  with  words,  sub- 
verting your  souls,  saying,  Ye  must  be  circumcised,  and 
keep  the  law:  to  whom  we  gave  no  sack  command- 
ment : 

25  It  seemed  good  unto  us,  being  assembled  with  one 
accord,  to  send  chosen  men  unto  you  with  our  beloved 
Barnabas  and  Paul 


22  Then  it  seemed  good  to  the  apostles  and  the  elders, 
with  the  whole  cliiirch,  to  choose  men  out  of  their 
Company,  and  send  them  to  Antioeh  with  I'aul  and 
I'ariabas;  iiiimi-li/,  Judas  called  liarsabbas,  and  Silas, 

23  chief  men  among  the  brethren  :  and  they  wrote  l/ius 
by  them,  'The  apostles  and  the  elders,  brethren,  unto 
the  brethren  who  are  of  the  liCn;  iles  in  Antioeh  and 

24Syria  and  (.  ilicia,  greeting:  1  orasmueh  as  we  have 
heard  that  certain  -who  went  out  from  us  have 
troubled  you  with  words,  subverting  your  souls;  to 

25  whom  we  gave  no  commandment;  it  seemed  good 
unto  us,  having  come  to  one  accord,  to  choose  out 
men  and  send  them  unto  you  with  our  beloved  Bar- 


ach.  1  :'23....6  ver.  1;  Gal.  2  :  4s  5  :  12  ; 


cuincision  than  the  question  at  issue  would 
allow.  To  have  justified  the  prohibitions  on 
such  ground  would  be  recognizing  the  per- 
petuity of'the  Mosaic  rites,  so  fur  as  the  Jews 
were  concerned ;  and  we  cannot  suppose  that 
the  apostles  at  this  time  either  entertained  that 
view  or  would  give  any  direct  countenance  to 
it  in  the  minds  of  others. 

22-29.  THEY  APPOINT  MESSENGERS 
TO  THE  CHURCHES,  AND  SEND  A  LET- 
TER BY  THEM. 

22.  Then  the  apostles  .  .  .  resolved, 
having  selected  men  from  themselves, 
to  send  them,  etc.  The  participle,  having 
selected  (eKKe^aixevov^),  jmsscs  into  the  accusa- 
tive, because  the  oliject  of  the  governing  verb, 
apostles  (dn-oCTToAois),  serves  at  the  same  time 
as  the  subject  of  the  infinitive.  (K.  ^  307.  R.  2.) 
— Judas  is  known  only  from  this  notice.  Hi.s 
surname  opposes  the  conjecture  that  he  was 
Judas  Thaddeus,  the  apostle.  There  is  no 
proof  that  he  was  a  brother  of  Joseph  Barsa- 
bas,  tlie  candidate  for  the  apostleship  (i :  23). — 
Silas  became  Paul's  associate  in  his  second 
missionary-tour  (v.  4o).  For  Silas  in  the  Acts 
we  have  always  Silvanus  in  the  Epistles. 
The  former  was  his  Jewish  name,  probably ; 
the  latter,  his  Gentile  or  foreign  name.  (See 
on  13  :  9.) — Chief  men,  leading,  eminent 
for  reputation  and  autlKjrity  (Luke 22: 26). 

23.  Writing,  E.  V.  wrote.  The  nomina- 
tive of  a  participle  refers  often  to  a  preceding 
substantive  in  a  different  case,  when  that  sub- 
stantive forms,  in  fiict,  the  logical  subject  of  the 
clause.  (K.  ?  313.  1 ;  W.  ?  G4.  II.  2.)  The  imper- 
sonal expression  at  the  head  of  the  sentence  is 
equivalent  to  a  transitive  verb  witli  the  dative 
as  nominative.  (K.  jJ  307.  R.  0.) — Throughout 
Antioeh  and  Syria,  etc.,  since  the  brctlircn 
were  in  different  places.  "We  see  here  how  ex- 
tensively the  Judaizcrs  had  attempted  to  spread 
their  views.  The  scene  at  Antioeh  (v.  1)  was  only 


an  example  of  what  had  occurred  in  many 
other  places.  [The  several  lands  are  a  unity 
with  reference  to  the  heathen  converts,  and 
hence  the  first  only  requires  the  article  in 
Greek.  Antioeh  is  the  capital,  and  is  named 
separately  on  that  account. — A.  H.]  vVs  to  the 
origin  of  the  churches  in  Syria  and  Cilicia,  see 
on  v.  41. — Greeting  (xoipen/).  It  is  remark- 
able, says  Neander,  that  this  word,  as  a  form 
of  epistolary  salutation,  occurs  only  liere  and 
in  James  1  :  1,  with  the  excei)tion  of  23  :  26, 
where  it  is  a  Roman  who  employs  it.  It  would 
account  for  tlie  coincidence,  if  we  suppose  that 
the  apostle  James  drew  up  this  document.  His 
oflfice  as  pastor  of  the  church  woidd  very  nat- 
urally devolve  that  service  on  him.  The  occur- 
rence of  greeting  here  and  in  the  Epistle, 
Bengel,  Bleek,  and  others  point  out  as  an  in- 
dication that  the  two  compositions  are  from 
the  same  hand. 

24.  From  us,  whicli  accords  with  v.  1. — 
Troubled, ordisquieted,periilexed.  (See  Gal. 
1  :  7.) — Words  may  have,  as  Stier  thinks,  a 
disparaging  force :  with  words  merely,  as  op- 
posed to  the  truth  or  sound  doctrine. — Sub- 
verting your  souls — i.  e.  unsettling,  removing 
tliom  from  the  pure  faith  of  the  gospel.  This 
clause  describes  the  effect  or  tendency  of  tlie 
views  which  those  who  received  the  decrees 
were  urged  by  the  false  teacliers  to  ado])t. — 
That  ye  must  be  circumcised,  and  keep 
the  law.  For  this  power  of  the  infinitive,  see 
on  V.  19.  Must  {&(.lv)  is  not  to  be  supplied.' — 
Whom  we  did  not  command — i.e.  instruct, 
authorize.  Tliis  declaration  may  be  aimed  at  a 
pretence  on  their  part  tliat  they  had  been  sent 
forth  by  the  church  at  Jerusalem,  or  at  least  that 
they  represented  the  sentiments  of  tliat  church. 

25.  Having  met  together  (Vulg.,  Neand.), 
but  better  having  become  of  one  mino, 
unanimous  (Bug.,  Str.,  Mey.).  Kuiiioel  and 
De  Wette  are  undecided.      According   to    the 


12 


-  fThe  clause  may  be  an  interpolation.— A.  H.l 


178 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


2(".  "Men  that  liave  hazarded  their  lives  for  the  name 
of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

27  We  have  sent  tlierefore  Judas  and  Silas, -nho shall 
also  tell  yun  the  same  things  by  mouth. 

2S  For  it  seemed  good  to  the  Holy  (.host,  and  to  us, 
to  lay  upon  you  no  greater  burden  than  these  neces- 
sarv  things; 

TJ  '■That  ye  abstain  from  meats  offered  to  idols,  and 
'from  hlood,  and  from  things  strangled,  and  from  for- 
nication :  from  which  if  ye  keep  yourselves,  ye  shall 
do  well,    lareyewell. 

30  !?o  when  they  were  dismissed,  they  came  to  Anti- 
och:  and  when  they  had  gathered  the  multitude  to- 
gether, they  delivered  the  epistle: 


26  nabas  and  Paul,  men  that  hove  liazarded  their  lives 

27  for  the  name  of  our  Lord  .k-^us  Christ.  We  have 
sent  therefore  Judas  and  .Silas,  who  themselves  also 
shall  tell  you  the  same  things  hy  word  of  mouth. 

28  tor  it  seemed  good  to  the  Holy  Spirit,  and  to  us,  to 
lay  upon  you  no  greater  burden  than  these  neces- 

29  sary  things;  that  ye  abstain  fiom  things  sacrificed 
to  idols,  and  from  blood,  and  from  things  strangled, 
and  from  fornication  ;  from  which  if  ye  keep  your- 
selves, it  shall  be  well  with  you.    tare  ye  well. 

30  .*^o  they,  when  they  were  dismissed,  came  down 
to  Antioch;  and  having  gathered  the  multitude  to- 


1  ch.  13  :  50;  14  :  19;  1  Cor.  15  :  30;  2  Cor.  11  :  23,  26. ...5  ver.  20;  ch.  21  :  25 ;  Rev   2  :  14  20 c  Lev.  17  :  14. 


latter  view,  the  expre.ssion  represents  this  per- 
fect harmony  as  having  been  attained  after 
some  diversity  of  opinion.  (See  v.  5.)  Chosen 
(eKAefa/oieVou?)  O-Xeiiiplifies  again  the  construction 
in  V.  22. — Barnabas  and  Paul.  Tliis  devia- 
tion from  the  usual  order  of  tliese  names  since 
13  :  13,  as  De  Wette  remarks  after  Bleelt,  testi- 
fies to  the  writer's  diplomatic  accuracy.  Paul 
had  spent  but  little  time  at  Jerusalem,  and 
Barnabas  was  still  a  more  familiar  name  there 
(comp.  9  :  27)  than  that  of  the  apostle  to  the 
Gentiles. 

2G.  Men  who  have  given  up,  jeoparded, 
their  lives.  (Comp.  9  :  24 ;  13  :  50 ;  14  :  5, 19.) 
There  was  a  special  reason,  no  doubt,  for  this 
commendation  of  Paul  and  Barnabas.  It  would 
serve  to  counteract  any  attempts  which  the 
Jewish  party  might  make,  or  had  made,  to 
discredit  their  religious  views  and  impair  their 
reputation  as  teachers. 

27.  Therefore— i.e.  in  conformity  witli  the 
conclusion  in  v.  25. — Also  themselves  by 
word  announcing  (when  they  shall  be  pres- 
ent) the  same  things — I.  e.  that  we  now  write 
to  you  (Neand.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.) ;  not  the  sru)te 
things  that  Paul  and  Barnabas  have  tauglit. 
By  word  indicates  clearly  that  the  oral  com- 
munication was  to  confirm  the  contents  of  the 
letter  or  the  written  communication.  '"Judas 
and  Silas,"  says  Stier  (Reden  der  Apostel,  i.  p. 
90),  "  should  certify  that  the  letter  had  actually 
proceeded  from  a  unanimous  resolve  of  the 
church  at  Jerusalem,  and  that  Barnabas  and 
Saul  were  thus  honored  and  beloved  there; 
tliey  should  give  fuller  information  respecting 
the  decrees,  and  answer  every  inquiry  that 
might  be  proposed,  as  living  epistles,  con- 
firmed by  the  letter  and  confirming  it  in  re- 
turn ;  and  thus  by  their  word  they  should  re- 
store again  the  harmony  which  those  unsent 
members  of  their  church  had  disturbed." 

28.  For  it  seemed  good — i.  e.  and  especial- 
ly how  it  seemed  good.  For  specirtes  the  part 
of  the  letter  which  the  writers  had  more  par- 


ticularly in  view  in  the  same  things  (v.  27). 
— To  the  Holy  Spirit  and  to  us  =  to  the 
Holy  Spirit  in  us  (Olsli.).  (See  5  :  3  and 
note  there.)  The  expression  represents  the  two 
agencies  as  distinct  from  each  other,  as  well  as 
consentaneous  (De  Wet.). — Us  includes  all  (see 
V.  23)  who  took  part  in  the  action  of  the  Coun- 
cil. They  were  conscious  of  having  adopted 
their  conclusions  under  tlie  guidance  of  the 
Spirit,  and  claimed  for  them  the  authority  of 
infallible  decisions. — The  (tmv)  renders  neces- 
sary [indvayKe-;)  au  adjective.  (B.  ^  125.(5.)  The 
things  in  question  are  said  to  be  necessary — not 
(excepting  the  last  of  them)  because  they  were 
wrong  in  themselves,  but  because  the  Gentile 
Christians  were  bound  by  the  law  of  charity 
(see  Rom.  14  :  15)  to  avoid  a  course  which, 
while  it  involved  no  question  of  conscience  on 
their  part,  would  offend  and  grieve  their  Jew- 
ish brethren  and  lead  inevitably  to  strife  and 
alienation. 

29.  To  wit,  that  ye  abstain.  For  this  de- 
finitive use  of  the  infinitives,  see  W.  §  44.  1 ;  C. 
?  023.— It  is  not,  perhaps,  accidental  that  forni- 
cation has  here  a  different  position  from  that 
in  V.  20.  (See  also  21  :  25.)— From  which  if 
ye  keep  yourselves  Neander  comi)ares  with 
to  keep  himself  unspotted  from  the 
world,  in  James  1  :  27.  Tlie  similarity  is 
striking,  and  may  indicate  the  same  hand  in 
the  two  passages.  (See  on  v.  23.) — Ye  will  do 
well,  what  is  right  and  commendable.  (See  10  : 
33;  3  John  6.)— Fare  ye  well,  liice  the  Latin 
valcte. 

30-35.  PAUL  AND  BARNABAS  RETURN 
TO  ANTIOCH. 

30.  Therefore,  .since  the  foregoing  decision 
was  preliminary  to  their  departure. — Having 
been  dismissed — i.  e.  in  all  probability  with 
religious  services  (v.  33;  13 : 3),  and  perhaps  with 
an  escort  for  some  miles  on  the  w.ay  (v.3). — 
The  multitude.  (See  v.  12  and  6  :  2.)  Tliey 
call  at  once  an  assembly  of  the  believers  to  hear 
their  rejjort. 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


179 


31  ]V,ich  when  they  had  read,  they  rejoiced  for  the 
consolation. 

*i  And  Judas  and  Silas,  being  prophets  also  them- 
selves, "exhorted  the  brethren  wiih  many  words,  and 
confirmed  t/ietn. 

ii'.i  And  after  they  had  tarried  f/iere  a  space,  they 
were  let  'go  in  peace  from  the  brethren  unto  the  apos- 
tles. 

M4  Notwithstanding  it  pleased  Silas  to  abide  there 
still. 

;«  'Paul  also  and  Barnabas  continued  in  Antioch, 
teaching  and  preaching  the  word  of  the  Lord,  with 
many  others  also. 

3i^  And  .•some  days  after  Paul  said  unto  Barnabas, 
Let  us  go  again  and  visit  our  brethren ''in  every  city 
where  we  have  preached  the  word  of  the  Lord,  unU  see 
how  they  do. 

;{7  And  Barnabas  determined  to  take  with  them 
•John,  whose  surname  was  Mark. 


31  gether,  they  delivered  the  epistle.     And  when  they 

32  had  read  it,  they  rejoiced  for  the  'consolation.  And 
Judas  and  Silas  being  th.-mselves  also  projdiets,  -e-x.- 
horted  the  brethren  with  many  words,  and  confirmed 

33  them.  And  after  they  had  spent  some  time  Ifiere, 
they   were  dismissed   in    peace   from   the  brethren 

35  unto  those  that  hud  .>;ent  them  forth.^  But  Paul 
and  Barnabas  tarried  in  Antioch,  leaching  and 
preaching  the  word  of  the  Lord,  with  many  others 
also. 

36  And  after  some  days  Paul  said  unto  Barnabas,  Let 
us  return  now  and  visit  the  brethren  in  every  city 
wherein  we  proclaimed  the  word  of  the  Lord,  and 

'SI  see.  how  they  fare.  And  Barnabas  was  minded  to 
take  with  them  John  also,  who  was  called  Mark. 


och    I4:2>:  18:23....ft  ICor.  16:11;  Hch.   II  :  ;n....cch.   13  :!.... d  ch.  1.1  :  ♦.  13,    14,  51 ;  14  :  1   6  24  25        e  ch    12  •  12  25-  13  •  5  ■ 

v,?r"  <lV«.',;  l.l?^  V  "  ',  ''''l'"'"J-,  '•"• rr}  "■■■  "A<"-fa«!0rt....2  Or,  com/or«ed....3Some  ancient  authorities  in.se'rt,  with' variations; 

^'^v.  6i  Bu.t%t  seemed  good  uiilo  Sdaa  to  abide  there.  ...iouvuo. 


31.  At  the  consolation  (lit.  upon,  as  the 
cause),  furni.shed  by  the  letter.  They  approve 
of  what  had  been  done;  they  rejoice  at  tlie 
prospect  of  so  happy  a  termination  of  the  dis- 
pute. Some  understand  napcKk^aei  of  exhor- 
tation, which  certainly  is  not  required  by  that 
sense  of  the  verb  in  the  next  verse  (Mey.),  and 
does  not  accord  well  with  the  contents  of  so 
authoritative  a  letter. 

32.  Also  themselves  being  prophets — 
i.  e.  as  well  as  Paul  and  Barnalias,  and  so  com- 
petent to  give  the  instruction  needeil.  — Ex- 
horted—viz.  in  view  of  the  present  danger— 
that  they  should  rely  on  Christ  for  salvation, 
and  not  cleave  to  the  law  of  works.  —  Con- 
firmed shows  the  happy  effect  of  their  la- 
bors. 

33.  With   peace,    the  parting   salutation  i 

(16  :  36;  Mark  5  :  34  ;  Luke  7  :  5o).         ThC     brethren     toolv  I 

leave  of  them  with  the  best  wishes  for  their  j 
safety  and  welfare.  Judas  and  Silas  both  re-  ' 
turned  to  Jerusalem,  as  their  commission  i 
would  require,  but  Silas  must  have  soon  re-  I 
.joined  Paul  at  Antioch,  since  we  find  him  ' 
there  in  v.  40.  Luke  has  i)as.sed  over  that  j 
second  journey.  I 

34.  Gricsbach,  Lachmann,  Tischcndorf,  and 
othei-s  strike  out  this  verse.  Most  of  the  manu- 
scripts omit  it  or  read  it  variously.  It  is  a  gloss, 
probably,  supposed  to  be  requireil  by  v.  40.  If 
the  text  be  genuine,  and  Sihts  remained  at  An- 
tioch, we  must  understand  the  plural  in  v.  33 
as  including  one  or  more  persons  along  with 
Judas,  who  had  also  come  down  from  Jeru- 
salem, though  the  narrative  is  otherwise  silent 
concerning  them. 

35.  Continued.  This  was  the  interval  be- 
tween the  return  to  Antioch  (v.  so)  and  the  de- 
parture on  the  next  missionary-tour  (v.  4o). 
Some   propose   to   insert   here   tlie   scene  de- 


scribed in  Gal.  2  :  11,  sq. ;  but  that  such  a  re- 
action in  favor  of  Judaism  as  appeared  on  that 
occasion  should  have  taken  place  so  soon  after 
the  decision  at  Jerusalem  is  altogether  improb- 
able. [On  that  sujiposition,  Peter  must  have 
come  to  Antioch  almost  directly  from  the  Coun- 
cil, and  must  at  once  have  declared  himself— by 
his  action,  at  least— against  the  decision  which 
he  had  so  strenuously  supported  at  Jerusalem. 
Moreover,  the  statement  in  v.  31  certainly  im- 
plies that  the  Judaistic  question  was  set  at  rest 
j  for  the  present.  It  is  also  clear,  from  16  :  4,  5, 
that  the  churches  generally  were  at  rest  aft«r 
the  adoption  of  the  decrees  ;  and  surely  Antioch 
should  not  be  supposed  to  be  an  exception. — 
A.  H.]  (See  note  on  18  :  23.)  — And  adds 
preaching,  etc.,  to  the  other  participle  as  ep- 
exegetical :  what  they  taught  was  the  glad  tid- 
ings or  the  gospel,  not  instructed  believei-s  and 
preached  to  those  who  had  not  believed  (Alf.l. 
(See  4  :  18;  5  :  42;  11:  2G;  28  :  31.) 

36-41.  PAUL  AND  BARXABAS  RESUME 
THEIR  WORK  IN  DIFFERENT  FIELDS  OF 
LABOR. 

36.  IVoAV  after  certain  days  denotes,  ap- 
parently, a  sliort  period.  (Comp.  9  :  19;  16  : 
12.)— 5^  strengthens  the  exhortation.  (See  13  : 
2.) — Let  us  visit,  etc.,  may  involve  an  attrac- 
tion—viz. that  of  the  suliject  of  the  last  clause 
drawn  into  the  first:  let  us  go  to  see  . 
how  the  brethren  are  (\V.  ?  66.  5) ;  or  an 
ellipsis:  let  us  visit  the  brethren,  and  see 
(as  in  the  E.  V.)  how  they  are.— In  which  = 
where  is  plural,  because  every  city  is  collec- 
tive. (W.  ?21.  3;  K.  ?332.  5.)— How  they 
are,  in  the  mind  of  Paul,  would  have  respect 
mainly  to  their  spiritual  welfiire. 

37.  Determined.  (See  vv.  5,  33  ;  27  :  39.) 
The  feelings  of  Barnabas  may  have  influenced 
him  in  this  decision  more  than  his  judgment, 


180 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


38  But  Paul  thought  not  good  to  take  him  with  them, 
"who  departed  from  them  from  Pamphylia,  and  went 
not  with  them  to  the  work. 

39  And  the  contention  was  so  sharp  between  them, 
that  they  departed  asunder  one  from  the  otlier:  and 
so  Barnabas  took  Mark,  and  sailed  unto  Cyprus  ; 

4U  And  Paul  chose  8ilas,  and  departed,  'being  rec- 
ommended by  the  brethren  unto  the  grace  of  dod. 

41  And  he  went  through  Syria  and  C'ilicia,  "^confirm- 
ing the  churches. 


38  But  Paul  thought  not  good  to  take  with  them  him 
who   withdrew    from   them    from    Pamphylia,   and 

39  went  not  with  them  to  the  work.  And  there  arose 
a  sharp  contention,  so  that  they  parted  asunder  one 
from  the  other,  and  Barnabas  look  Maik  with  him, 

40  and  sailed  away  unto  Cyprus  ;  but  Paul  chose  Silas, 
and  went  forth,  being  commended  by  the  brethren 

41  to  the  grace  of  the  Lord.  And  he  went  througb 
Syria  and  C'ilicia,  confirming  the  churches. 


Aub.  13  :  13.... b  ch.  U  :  26.. ..c  ch.  16  :  5. 


since  he  and  INIark  were  cousins  (dvei^toi.  See 
Col.  4  :  lO;,  Wished  is  an  ancient  reading,  but 
on  the  whole  less  approved,  in  part  because  it 
softens  down  the  altercation,  and.  may  have 
been  added  for  that  reason.  [Yet  the  evidence 
of  early  MSS.  (X  xV  B  C  E  against  H  L  P)  and 
versions  preponderates  so  greatly  in  favor  of 
the  milder  term,  wished,  that  Gricsb.,  Lach., 
Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Ilort,  Anglo-Am.  Re- 
visers, accept  this  as  the  word  written  by  Luke. 
The  narrative  is  clear  and  consistent  with  either 
word. — A.  H.] 

38.  Deemed  it  just,  fitting.  Paul  viewed 
the  question  on  its  etliical  side,  and  not  as  a 
personal  mattcr.^ — Who  departed  from  them 
(13 :  13),  in  dereliction  of  his  duty.  (Comp.  Luke 
8  :  13.)  —  This  one  (emphatic  here),  who 
proved  so  fickle. — It  is  pleasing  to  kno>v  that 
^lark  did  not  forfeit  the  ai)OStle's  esteem  so  as 
to  be  unable  t(j  regain  it.  He  became  subse- 
quently Paul's  companion  in  travel  (Coi.  4:  lo), 
and  in  2  Tim.  4  :  11  elicits  from  him  the  com- 
mendation that  he  was  "  profitable  to  him  for 
the  ministry." 

39.  A  severe  contention  arose.  Barna- 
bas insisted  on  his  purpose;  Paul,  on  his  view 
of  the  merits  of  the  case;  and,  as  neither  would 
yield,  they  parted.  Some  writers  lay  all  the 
blame  on  Barnabas  (Bmg.),  in  spite  of  the  im- 
partiality of  the  text.  There  was  heat,  evi- 
dently, on  both  sides.— So  that  they  depart- 
ed from  one  another.  This  separation  re- 
fers, not  to  the  rupture  of  their  friendship,  but 
to  their  proceeding  in  different  directions,  in- 
stead of  laboring  together  as  heretofore.  The 
infinitive  after  so  that  (wo-re)  is  said  to  repre- 
sent the  act  as  a  necessary  or  logical  sequence 
of  what  precedes ;  the  indicative,  as  an  abso- 
lute or  unconditioned  fact.  (See  Klotz,  Ad 
Devar.,  ii.  p.  772.)  It  deserves  to  be  remarked 
that  this  variance  did  not  estrange  these  breth- 
ren from  their  work  or  occasion  any  perma- 
nent diminution  of  their  regard  for  each  otlier. 
In  1  Cor.  9  :  0,  which  was  written  after  this  oc- 
currence, Paul  alludes  to  Barnabas  as  a  Chris- 
tian teacher  who  possessed  and  deserved  tlio 
fullest  confidence  of  the  cliurches.   The  p;u5.;;ii|,e 


contains  fairly  that  implication.  Even  the 
error  of  Barnabas  in  yielding  to  the  Jewish 
party  (cai.  2:i3)  leads  Paul  to  speak  of  him  as 
one  of  the  very  last  men  (and  Barnabas — 
i.  e.  even  he)  whom  any  one  would  suppose 
callable  of  swerving  from  the  line  of  duty. 
And  who  can  doubt  that  Barnabas  reciprocated 
these  sentiments  toward  the  early,  long-tried 
friend  with  whom  he  had  acted  in  so  many 
eventful  scene.s,  and  whom  he  saw  still  ani- 
mated by  the  same  affection  toward  himself, 
and  the  same  devotion  to  the  cause  of  their 
conuuon  Master?  Luke  does  not  mention  the 
name  of  Barnabas  again  in  the  Acts.  It  is  im- 
possible to  trace  him  farther  with  any  certainty. 
One  tradition  is  that  he  went  to  Milan,  and  died 
as  first  bishop  of  the  church  there;  another  is 
that  after  living  some  years  at  Rome  and  Ath- 
ens he  suffered  martyrdom  in  his  native  Cyprus. 
The  letter,  still  extant,  which  was  known  as 
that  of  Barnabas  even  in  the  second  century, 
cannot  be  defended  as  genuine.  (See  Neander's 
Church  History,  vol.  i.  p.  657.)  That  sucli  a 
letter,  however,  was  ascribed  to  him  at  that 
early  period  shows  how  eminent  a  place  he  oc- 
cupied among  the  Christians  of  his  own  and  the 
succeeding  age. 

40.  Having  chosen  for  himself  (comp. 
V.  22),  not  thereupon — viz.  tliis  disagreement. 
— Having  been  committed  unto  the  grace 
of  God  by  the  brethren.  Perhaps  we  may 
infer  from  this  remark  that  the  believers  at  An- 
tioch  took  Paul's  view  of  the  point  at  issue  be- 
tween him  and  Barnabas. — Went  forth  is  used 
of  going  forth  as  a  missionary  in  Luke  9  :6  and 
in  3  John  7. — The  deiiarture  on  this  second 
tour  we  may  place  in  a.  d.  51 ;  for  if  Paul  went 
to  Jerusalem  in  the  year  50  (see  on  15  :  4),  the 
remainder  of  that  year,  added  (if  any  one 
chooses)  to  the  early  part  of  the  ensuing  year, 
would  sutfice,  probal)ly,  for  the  sojourn  at  An- 
tioch  indicated  Ijy  certain  days  in  v.  3G.  It 
is  impossible  to  be  more  definite  than  this. 

41.  Syria  and  Cilicia  lav  between  Antioch 
and  the  eastern  limit  of  tlie  np^vstle's  first  jour- 
ney. We  have  had  n(.  luvonnt  of  tlie  planting 
of  -car:  churclios  there,  but.  (L.t  y  date,  undoubt- 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


181 


CHAPTER    XVI. 


THEN  came  he  to  "Derbe  and  Lystra:  and,  behold,  a 
certain  disciple  was  there,  ''named  Timotheus,  '^the 
son  of  a  certain  woman,  which  was  a  Jewess,  and  be- 
lieved ;  but  his  father  mis  a  dreek  : 

2  Which  ''was  well  reported  of  by  the  brethren  that 
were  at  Lystra  and  Iconium. 

o  Him  would  Paul  have  to  go  forth  with  him;  and 
«took  and  circumcised  him  because  of  the  Jews  which 
were  in  those  quarters:  for  they  knew  all  that  his 
father  was  a  (jreek. 


1  And  he  came  also  to  Derbe  and  to  Lystra:  and 
behold,  a  certain  disciple  was  there,  named  Timo- 
thy,   ihe  son   of  a  Jewess   who   believiJd;   but   his 

2 father  was  a  (.reek.  The  same  was  well  reported 
of  by  the  brethren  that  were  at  Lystra  and  iconi- 

3  um.  Him  would  Paul  have  to  go  forth  with  him; 
and  he  took  and  circumcised  him  because  of  the 
Jews  that  were  in  those  parts:  for  they  all  knew 


act.  U:6....4oh.  19:22;  Rom.  16  :  21 ;  1  Cor.  4  :  17  ;  Phil.  2  :  19 :  1  Thess.  3:  2;  1  Tim.  1:2;  2  Tim.  1  :2....c2Tim.  1:  ; 
dcb.6:i el  Cor.  9  :  20 ;  Gal.  2:3;  see  Gul.  a  :  2. 


edly,  from  the  period  of  Paul's  residence  in 
that  region,  mentioned  in  Gal.  1  :  21.  (See 
9  :  30  and  note  there.)  —  Confirming  the 
churche.s,  not  candidates  for  admission  to 
them.  (See  14  :  22.)  One  of  these  churches 
naay  have  been  at  Tarsus,  which  Paul  would 
naturally  revisit  at  this  time. 


1-5.  PAUL  AND  SILAS  REVISIT  THE 
CHURCHES  AND  DELIVER  THE  DE- 
CREES. 

1.  Derbe  and  Lystra  are  mentioned  in 
tills  order  (the  reverse  of  that  in  14  :  6),  be- 
cimse  the  missionaries  travel  now  from  east  to 
west. — Luke's  exclamation,  and  behold,  shows 
how  much  this  meeting  with  Timothy  interest- 
ed his  feelings. — There — viz.  at  Lystra.  Some 
refer  the  adverb  to  Derbe ;  but  that  view,  so  far 
from  being  required  by  of  Derbe  (Sepfialo^),  in 
20  :  4,  is  forbidden  by  the  text  there.  Ijystra 
stands  nearest  to  there,  and  is  named  again  in 
the  next  verse,  where  Luke  surely  would  not 
pass  over  the  testimony  of  tho.se  who  had  been 
acquainted  with  Timothy  from  early  life. 
Wieseler  combines  the  two  opinions  by  sup- 
posing tliat  Timothy  r.iay  have  been  a  native 
of  Lystra,  but  was  now  living  at  Derbe. — For 
the  family  and  the  early  education  of  Timothy, 
see  2  Tim.  1:5;  3  :  15.  Paul  terms  him  my 
son  .[lit.  child]  in  1  Cor.  4  :  17,  probably  because 
he  had  been  the  instrument  of  his  conversion. 
(Comp.  1  Cor.  4  :  15 ;  Gal.  4  :  19.  See  the  note 
on  14  :  20.)— Certain  is  to  be  erased  before 
woman.— Believing.  (See  on  10  :  45.)  The 
mother's  name  was  P^unice.  It  was  an  instance 
of  the  mixed  marriages  of  which  Paul  writes 
in  1  Cor.  7 :  17,  sq.—A  Greek,  and  still  a 
heathen,  or  at  all  events  not  a  proselyte  in 
full,  a-s  otherwise  the  son  would  have  been 
circumcised. 

2.  Was  attested,  well  reported  of.  (See 
6:3;  10  :  22.)  Supposing  Timothy  to  have 
been  converted  during  Paul's  first  visit  to 
Lystfa  (see  on  14  :  20),  he  had  now  been  a  dis- 


ciple three  or  four  years.  During  this  time  he 
had  exerted  himself,  no  doubt,  for  the  cause 
of  Christ  both  in  Lystra  and  Iconium,  and 
had  thus  given  proof  of  the  piety  and  talents 
which  rendered  him  so  useful  as  a  herald  of 
the  cross. 

3.  To  go  forth  with  him,  as  a  preacher 
of  tlie  word.  (See  2  Tim.  4  :  o. ) — Having 
taken,  he  circumcised  him,  eitiier  by  his 
own  hand  (Mey.,  De  Wet.)  or  pnjcuring  it  to 
be  done  (Neand.).  The  Jews  had  no  particular 
class  of  persons  who  performed  this  act.  The 
Jewish  custom,  it  is  said,  required  merely  that 
the  administrator  should  not  be  a  heathen. 
(See  Win.,  Realw.,  i.  p.  157.) — On  account  of 
the  Jews,  etc.  It  would  have  repelled  the 
Jews  from  his  ministry  to  have  seen  him  asso- 
ciated with  a  man  whom  they  knew  to  be  un- 
circumcised.  Paul  took  this  course,  therefore, 
in  order  to  remove  that  obstacle  to  his  useful- 
ness. The  history  presents  Paul  here  as  acting 
on  tlie  princii)le  stated  in  1  Cor.  9  :  20 :  Unto  the 
Jews  Ihecamciis  a  Jew,  that  I  might  f/ain  Jews,  etc. 
It  was  under  circumstances  totally  diiferent 
that  he  refused  to  circumcise  Titu.s,  as  related 
in  Gal.  2  :  3,  sq.  He  was  then  in  the  mid.st  of 
those  who  would  have  regarded  the  act  as  rati- 
fying their  doctrine  that  circumcision  was  ne- 
cessary to  salvation.  (See  on  15  :  1.)  In  the 
present  instance  he  knew  (that  admission  is 
due  to  his  character  for  intelligence  as  well  as 
consistency)  that  his  conduct  would  not  be 
misunderstood  or  perverted  ;  that  the  believers 
would  view  it  as  an  acconmaodation  merely  to 
the  prejudices  of  the  Jews ;  and  that  the  Jews 
themselves  were  in  no  danger  of  siijiposing  him 
to  countenance  the  idea  that  their  keeping  the 
law  would  entitle  them  to  the  favor  of  God. — 
Otlier  passages  extend  our  knowledge,  of  tliis 
transaction.  Timothy  was  not  only  circum- 
cised, but  set  apart  to  the  ministry  "  with  the 
laying  on  of  the  hands  of  the  presbytery"  and 
of  the  apostle,  was  endued  with  spet-ial  gifts  for 
the  office  (iTim. «:  u:  2Tim.  i:6),  and  received  at 
the  time  prophetic  assurances  of  the  success 
which  awaited  him  in  liis  new  can  er  (i  Tim.  i :  is). 


182 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


4  And  as  they  went  through  the  cities,  they  deliv- 
ered them  the  decrees  for  to  keep,  "that  were  ordained 
of  the  apostles  and  elders  which  were  at  Jerusalem. 

n  And  'so  were  the  churches  established  in  the  faith, 
and  increased  in  number  daily. 

6  Now  when  they  had  gone  throughout  Phrygia  and 
the  region  of  Galatia,  and  were  forbidden  of  the  Holy 
Ghost  to  preach  the  word  in  Asia, 


4  that  his  father  was  a  Greek.  And  as  they  went  on 
their  way  through  the  cities,  they  deU\ered  them 
the  decrees  for  to  keep,  which  had  been  ordained 
of  the  apostles  and  elders  that  were  at  .lerusalem. 

5  So  the  churches  were  strengthened  in  the  faith,  and 
increased  in  number  daily. 

6  And  they  went  through  the  region  of  Phrygia 
and   (jialatia,   having   been   forbidden   of  the  Holy 


.b  ch.  15  ;  41. 


— For  all  knew  his  father  that,  etc.  The 
structure  of  tlie  sentence  is  like  that  in  3  :  10. 
[That  is,  if  the  textus  recqytus  is  followed,  but 
not  if  the  text  required  by  N  A  B  C  and  other 
documents,  and  approved  by  Griesb.,  Lach., 
Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  is  correct.  For  with 
this  text  the  construction  is  as  follows :  for  all 
knew  that  his  father  was  a  Greek,  the  word 
Greek  being  einjihatic  by  reason  of  its  place  in 
the  clause. — It  should  be  noticed  that  Paul  cir- 
cumcised Timothy,  not  on  account  of  the  Jew- 
ish believers,  who  might  thus  be  led  to  think 
circumcision  important,  but  on  account  of 
Jewish  unbelievers  whom  he  hoped  to  attract 
to  his  ministry. — A.  H.] 

4.  As  they  journeyed  through  the 
cities,  on  the  route  pursued  by  them.  They 
would  visit,  naturally,  all  the  churches  in 
Syria  and  Cilicia  (i6:4i),  and  most  of  those  on 
the  main  land,  gathered  during  the  apostle's 
former  tour.  As  Antioch  and  Perga  were  so 
remote  from  their  general  course,  it  is  possi- 
ble that  they  transmitted  copies  of  the  decrees 
to  those  places.  It  is  not  certain  that  the  word 
had  taken  root  in  Perga.  (See  on  14  :  25.) — 
Delivered  (orally  or  in  writing)  to  them  the 
decrees  to  keep.  The  infinitive  may  be 
telle :  that  they  should  keep  them  ;  or  may  in- 
volve a  relative  clause:  which  they  should 
keep.  (Comp.  which  they  received  to  hold, 
in  Mark  7  :  4.  See  W.  'i  44.  1.)  Them  refers 
to  the  believers  in  these  cities,  not  to  the 
heathen  converts  merely  (Mey.),  since  the  de- 
crees affected  also  the  Jews. 

5.  Therefore — i.  e.  as  the  result  of  this 
visit,  and  of  the  adjustment  of  the  controversy 
which  had  divided  and  enfeebled  the  churches. 
— In  the  number,  of  their  members. 

6-10.  THEY  PROSECUTE  THEIR  JOUR- 
NEY TO  TROAS. 

6.  Phrygia.  (See  on  2  :  10.)  To  reach 
Phrygia  from  Iconium  or  Antioch,  they  would 
direct  their  way  to  the  north-east. — Region  of 
Galatia.  Galatia  was  bounded  on  the  north 
by  Paphlagonia  and  Bithynia ;  on  the  east,  by 
Pontus  and  Cappadocia  (separated  from  them 
by  the  river  Halys) ;  on  the  south,  by  Cappa- 
docia and  Phrygia ;  and  on  the  west,  by  Phry- 
gia and  Bithynia.     Among  the  principal  cities 


were  Ancyra,  made  the  metropolis  by  Augus- 
tus, and  Pessinus.  Kiepert  draws  the  line  of 
Paul's  course  on  his  map  so  as  to  include  these 
places,  on  the  natural  supposition  that  he  would 
aim  to  secure  first  the  prominent  towns.  (See 
on  18  :  1.)  It  is  evident  from  the  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians  (see,  e.  g.,  4  :  19)  that  it  was  the  apos- 
tle Paul  who  first  preached  the  gospel  in  this 
country ;  and,  since  he  found  disciples  here  on 
his  third  missionary-tour  (see  18  :  23),  it  must 
have  been  at  this  time  that  he  laid  the  founda- 
tion of  the  Galatian  churches  (cai.  i:2).  Such 
is  the  opinion  of  the  leading  critics.  (See  note 
on  14  :  6.) — Being  restrained  hy  the  Holy 
Spirit,  etc.  The  act  of  this  participle,  it  will 
be  observed,  was  subsequent  to  that  of  had 
gone  through  and  prior  to  that  of  were 
come  (v.  7).  The  course  of  the  movement 
may  be  sketched  thus :  The  travellers,  having 
passed  through  the  eastern  section  of  Phrygia 
into  Galatia,  proposed  next  to  preach  tlie  word 
in  Proconsular  Asia.  (See  on  2  :  9.)  With  that 
view,  they  turned  their  steps  to  the  south-west, 
and,  crossing  the  north  part  of  Phrygia,  came 
down  to  the  frontier  of  Mysia,  the  first  province 
in  Asia  which  they  would  reach  in  tliat  direc- 
tion. Being  informed  here  that  they  were  not 
to  execute  this  design,  they  turned  again  to- 
ward the  north  and  attempted  to  go  into  Bithy- 
nia, which  was  adjacent  to  Mysia.  Restrained 
from  that  purpose,  they  passed  by  Mysia — i.  e. 
did  not  remain  there  to  preach — and  proceeded 
to  Troas. — This  portion  of  the  apostle's  travels, 
though  they  embrace  so  wide  a  circuit,  admits 
of  very  little  geographical  illustration.  Phrygia 
and  Galatia  are  parts  of  Asia  Minor  of  which 
the  ancient  writers  have  left  but  few  notices, 
and  which  remain  comparatively  unknown  to 
the  present  day.  We  must  infer  from  18  :  23 
that  Paul  gained  disciples  in  Phrygia  at  this 
time,  but  in  what  places  is  uncertain.  Colosse 
was  a  Phrygian  city,  and  may  have  received 
the  gospel  on  this  journey,  unless  it  be  forbid- 
den by  Col.  2  :  1.  The  opinion  of  the  best 
critics  is  that  the  apostle  includes  the  Colos- 
sians  in  that  passage  among  those  who  had  not 
"seen  his  face  in  the  flesh." — The  Spirit  of 
Jesus — i.  e.  which  he  sends.  There  is  no  par- 
allel passage,  unless  it  be  Rom.  8  :  9.    Jesus 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE   ACTS. 


183 


7  After  they  were  come  to  >rysia,  they  assayed  to  go  I 
into  liithyiiiu:  but  the  .Spirit  sulfered  them  not. 

8  And  ihey  passing  by  .Mysia  "came  down  to  Troas.     j 

9  And  a  visi(jn  appeared  to  Paul  in  the  niglit;  Tliere  i 
stood  a  'man  of  Alacedonia,  and  prayed  him,  saying,  | 
Come  over  into  Maccionia,  and  help  us.  i 

10  And  after  he  had  seen  the  vision,  immediately  I 
we  endeavored  to  go  ''into  .Macedonia,  assuredly  gath-  | 
ering  that  the  Lord  had  called  us  for  to  preach  the  j 
gospel  unto  them. 

11  Therefore  loosing  from  Troas,  we  came  with  a 


7  Spirit  to  speak  the  word  in  .\sia;  and  when  they 
were  come  -iver  against  Mysia,  they  assaved  to  go 
into    Hithynia;    and    the   .sj)irit  of   Jesus"  sullered 

8  them  not;  and  passing  by  .Mysia,  they  came  dowu 
y  to   Troas.     And  a  vision  appeared  to'l'aul   in  the 

night;  1  here  was  a  man  of  .Macedonia  standing, 
beseeching  him,  and  saying.  Come  over  into  .Mace- 

lOdonia,  and  help  us.  And  when  he  had  seen  the  vis- 
ion, straightway  we  sought  to  go  forth  into  Mace- 
donia, concluding  that  (.od  had  called  us  for  to 
preach  the  gospel  unto  them. 

11     betting  sail    therefore    from    Troas,   we   made  a 


a  -l  Cor.  1:Vl,1  Tim.  4  :  13 i  ch.  10  :  30. . .  .c  2  Cor.  2  :  13. 


has  been  lost  from  some  copias,  but  belongs  to 
the  text.  Tlie  Spirit,  says  Reuss,  appears  here 
in  a  sphere  of  activity  made  more  prominent 
in  the  Acts  than  in  all  the  other  writings  of 
the  New  Testament:  "Thus,  it  is  the  Spirit 
who  conducts  Philip  in  the  road  to  Gaza  (s :  29) ; 
who  instructs  Peter  to  receive  the  messengers 
of  Cornelius  (10 :  19 ;  11 :  12) ;  who  causes  Barnabas 
and  Paul  to  be  sent  to  the  heathen  (is :  2-4) ;  who 
directs  the  missionaries  in  the  choice  of  their 
route  (16 : 6, 7) ;  who  urges  Paul  to  Jerusalem 
(20 :  22) ;  who  chooses  the  pastors  of  the  churches 

(20  :  28),  etc."  ^ 

8.  Having  passed  by  Mysia,  having  left 
it  aside   with(jut   remaininj;;   to   preavli    there. 


crossed—/,  e.  the  northern  part  of  the  ^Egean. 
—Help  us,  because  the  one  here  represented 
many. 

10.  We  sought — i.  e.  by  immediate  inquiry 
for  a  sliip  (Alf ).  Paul  had  made  known  the 
vision  to  his  associates.  Here,  for  tlie  first 
time,  the  historian  speaks  of  himself  as  one 
of  the  party,  and  in  all  probability  because  he 
joined  it  at  Troas.  The  introduction  would  be 
abrupt  for  the  style  of  a  modern  work,  it  is 
true;  but,  on  the  other  liand,  to  liave  had  from 
Luke  any  formal  account  of  the  manner  in 
which  he  became  connected  with  the  apostle 
would  have  been  equally  at  variance  with  the 
simplicity  and  reserve  wliich    distinguisli   the 


(Comp.  to  sail  by,  in  20  :  IG,  and  to  pass  by,  I  sacred  writers.  Nor  doe.^  it  account  at  all  more 
in  Mark  (J  :  4S.)  Wieseler  {Ghronolofjk,  p.  36),  1  naturally  for  this  .sudden  use  of  the  plural  to 
Alford,  Conyheare  and  Howson  apparently,  and  imagine  (it  is  a  figment  purely)  that  Luke 
others  prefer  this  meaning  here.  Some  render  ;  adopts  here  the  narrative  of  another  writer; 
having  passed  along  3Iysia— *.  e.  the  border  ,  for  we  may  just  as  well  suppose  him  to  speak 
of  .Mysia  Minor,  which  belonged  to  Bitliynia ;  ;  thus  abruptly  in  his  own  name  as  to  albjw 
whereas  Mysia  Major  belonged  to  Proconsular  him  to  introduce  anotlier  person  as  doing  it 
Asia  (De  Wet.).     The  boundary  was  a  ]K)litical  I  without    apprising    us    of  the    change.      (See 


one,  and  no  distinct  frontier  existed  which  the 
travellers  could  have  had  any  motive  for  tra- 
cing so  exactly.— Came  down,  fnnn  the  inner 
highlands  to  tlie  coast.  — Unto  Troas,  the 
name  of  a  district  or  a  city ;  here  tlic  latter, 
called  fully  Alexandria  Troas,  on  the  Helles- 
pont, about  four  miles  from  the  site  of  the  an- 
cient Troy.  It  was  the  transit-harbor  between 
the  north-west  of  Asia  Minor  and  Macedcjnia. 
Paul  i)assed  and  repa.ssed  here  on  two  other  oc- 
casions (20 : 6 ;  2  Cor.  2 :  12).  It  is  corrcct  that  Luke 
represents  Troius  here  as  distinct  from  Mysia. 
Under  Nero,  Troas  and  the  vicinity  formed  a 
separate  territory,  having  the  rights  of  Roman 
freedom  (De  Wet.,  Bottg.). 

9.  A  vision.  Whether  Paul  saw  this  vis- 
ion in  a  dreiun  or  in  a  state  of  ecstasy  (see  10  : 
10 ;  22  :  17)  the  language  docs  not  decide.     In 


marginal  note  on  p.  16.) 

11-15.  PAUL  AND  HIS  ASSOCIATES  AR- 
RIVE IN  EUROPE,  AND  PREACH  AT 
PHILIPPI. 

11.  We  ran  by  a  straight  course.     In  the 

nautical  language  of  the  ancients,  as  in  that  of 

tlie  moderns,  to  run  meant  to  sail  before  the 

i  wind.     (See  27  :  16.)     Luke  observes  almost  a 

j  teclinical  precision  in  the  use  of  such  terms. 

His  account  of  the  voyage  to   Rome  shows  a 

suri'rising     familiarity    with    sea-life.  —  Unto 

Samothrace,  which   they   reached   the  first 

day.     Tliis  island,  the  present  Samothraki,  is 

I  about   halfway  between   Troas   and    Neapolis, 

]  and   is   the   highest   land   in  this   part  of  the 

j  ^gean,  except  Mount  Athos.      The   ordinary 

currents  liere  are  adverse  to  sailing  nortJiwanl, 

but  southerly  winds,   though   they   are  brief. 


the  night  suggests  one  of  the  conditions  of  blow  strongly  at  times,  and  overcome  entirely 
the  first  mode,  but  would  not  be  inconsistent  that  disadvantage.  Witli  such  a  wind,  "  the 
with  the  otlier.- A  man  revealed  to  him  as  a  vessel  in  which  Paul  sailed  would  soon  cleave 
Macedonian.  (Comp.  9 j  12.)  —Having  her  way  through  the  strait  between  Tenedos 
^Histoire  de  la  Tfieologie  Chretienne,  tome  second,  p.  003  iStrasbourg,  1852). 


184 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVL 


straight  course  to  Samothracia,  and  the  next  (hnj  to 
Neapolis ; 

12  And  from  thence  to  "Philippi,  which  is  the  chief 
city  of  that  part  of  Macedonia,  uiid  a  colony:  and  we 
were  in  that  city  abiding  certain  days. 


straiglit  ( ourse  to  Paniothrace,  and  the  day  follow- 
]2iMg  to  Xeapolis:  and  from  thence  to  i  hilippi,  which 
is  a  city  of  Jlacedonia,  the  tirst  of  the  district,  a  Ro- 
man colony  :  and  we  were  in  this  city  tarrying  cer- 


oPUil.  1:1. 


and  the  main,  past  the  Dardanelles,  and  near 
the  eastern  shore  of  Iinbros.  On  rounding  the 
northern  end  of  this  island  they  would  open 
Saniothrace,  which  had  hitherto  appeared  as  a 
higher  and  more  distant  summit  over  the  lower 
mountains  of  Imbros.  Leaving  this  island,  and 
bearing  now  a  little  to  the  west,  and  having  the 
wind  still  (as  our  sailors  say)  two  or  tliree  points 
abaft  the  beam,  they  steered  for  8amotlirace, 
and  vtnder  the  shelter  of  its  high  sh(jre  anchored 
for  the  night."  (See  the  nautical  proofs  in  Cony- 
beare  and  Howson.) — Unto  Neapolis,  a  Tlira- 
cian  city  on  the  Strymonic  gulf,  the  modern 


Gangas,  or  Gangitas.  It  was  at  some  distance 
east  of  the  Strymon,  and  not  on  that  river,  as 
some  have  .said.  The  adjacent  plain  is  memo- 
rable in  Roman  history  as  the  x^lace  where  the 
battle  was  fought  between  the  republicans, 
under  Brutus,  and  the  followers  of  Anthony 
and  Augustus. — Which  is  a  chief  city  of 
the  province  of  Macedonia,  being  a  col- 
ony. First,  or  chief,  designates  it  as  one  of 
tlie  tirst  places  there,  and  colony  explains  the 
ground  of  tlie  epithet.  Augustus  had  sent  a 
colony  thither  (see  Diet,  of  Aiitt.,  s.  colonia), 
wliich   had  conferred    upon    it    new  import- 


Kavalla.  It  was  north-west  from  Samothrace, 
but  even  with  a  soutlierly  wind  could  be  reached 
in  seven  or  eight  hours.  As  the  same  verb  de- 
scribes the  remainder  of  the  journey,  it  might 
seem  as  if  they  merely  touched  here,  but  did 
not  land,  proceeding  along  the  coa.st  to  some 
harbor  nearer  to  Philippi  than  this.  Some 
writers  would  place  the  port  of  that  city  far- 
ther west  than  the  present  Kavalla.  It  is  gen- 
erally agreed,  however,  that  Neapolis  was  the 
nearest  town  on  the  sea,  and  hence,  though  the 
distance  was  not  less  than  ten  miles,  was  iden- 
tical with  Philippi  as  to  purposes  of  travel  and 
trade.  Kavalla  is  the  nearest  port  at  present, 
and  the  shore  appears  to  have  undergone  no 
change,  either  from  recession  or  advance.^ 

12.  Philippi  was  on  a  steep  acclivity  of  the 
Thracian  Hermus,  where  this  range  slopes 
toward  the  sea,  on    the  small  stream  called 


ance.  Some  understand  first  geographically: 
first  as  they  entered  Macedonia,  which  Winer 
calls  the  siniplest  explanation.  That  Neapolis 
lay  farther  east  does  not  clash  with  this  view , 
for  those  who  adojit  it  take  Macedonia  here  in 
the  Greek  sense,  which  assigns  Neapolis  to 
Thrace.  It  is  a  stronger  objection  that  Luke 
would  then  mean  Greek  Macedonia  here,  but 
elsewhere  the  Roman  province  so  named — i.  e. 
Northern  Greece,  in  distinction  from  Acliaia, 
or  Southern  Greece.  (See  on  18  :  5.)  Fiu'ther, 
is  indicates  a  permanent  distinction ;  whereas 
was  wf)uld  have  been  more  natural  to  mark 
an  incident  of  the  journey  (was  first  on  their 
way).  Tlie  proper  capital  of  Macedonia  (hence 
not  first  in  that  sense)  was  Thessalonica.  If 
the  earlier  division  into  four  parts  still  con- 
tinued, Amphipolis  was  politically  first  in  pars 
prima.     "It  may  be  added,"  says   Akerman, 


1  My  tbauks  are  due  to  the  Rev.  Dr.  Hill  of  Athens  for  inquiries  in  relation  to  this  point. 


Cpi.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


185 


1."!  And  on  the  sabbath  we  went  out  of  the  city  by  a  |  13  tain  days.    And  on  the  sabbath  day  we  went  forth 
river  side,  where  prayer  was  wont  to  be  made  ;  and  we  without  the  gate  by  a  river  side,  where  we  supposed 

sat  down,  and  spake  unto  the  women  which  resorted         there  was  a  place  of  prayer;  and  we  sat  down,  and 
tliilher.  spake  unto  the  women  who  were  come  together. 


"in  confirmation  of  the  words  of  Lnlce,  that 
there  are  colonial  coins  of  Pliilippi  from  the 
reign  of  Augustus  to  that  of  Caracalla."  It  is 
frequently  said  that  this  was  the  first  place  on 
the  continent  of  Europe  where  the  gospel  was 
preached ;  but  we  have  no  certain  knowledge 
of  the  origin  of  tlie  church  of  Rome,  and,  very 
possibly,  it  may  have  been  founded  by  some  of 
the  converts  on  the  day  of  Pentecost.  The  church 
at  Philippi  was  the  first  church  in  Europe 
which  the  apostle  Paul  established. — Certain 
days  denotes  apparently  the  few  days  which 
they  spent  there  before  the  arrival  of  the  Sab- 
batii. 

13.  Instead  of  the  received  out  of  the  city, 
the  later  criticism  would  read  out  of  the  gate. 
This  part  of  the  narrative  often  shows  the  pres- 
ence of  the  historian. — Beside  a  river — viz. 
the  Gangas.  The  name  was  unimportant,  but 
could  hardly  fail  to  be  Icnown  to  Luke,  who 
was  so  familiar  with  Philippi.  (See  on  v.  40.) 
["  I  incline  to  think,"  writes  Dr.  Hackett  in 
18G0,  after  visiting  the  site  of  Philippi,  "  that 
we  have  an  intimation  here  that  the  critics  are 
right  who  suppose  that  Luke  stayed  at  Philippi 
until  the  apostle's  second  arrival  here.  Being 
an  inquisitive  man,  as  we  know  from  the  proem 
of  his  Gospel,  no  doubt  he  sought  out  the  name 
of  the  river  on  his  first  arrival,  when  his  curi- 
osity was  still  fresh  ;  and,  had  he  afterward  re- 
membered the  place  merely  as  a  traveller,  he 
would  have  been  led  quite  naturally  to  insert 
the  name  when  he  wrote  his  history.  But  if, 
on  the  contrary,  he  was  there  so  long  that  his 
ear  became  accustomed  to  the  popular  expres- 
sion '  the  river,'  '  water,'  '  stream '  "  (for,  as  tlie 
only  river  in  the  neighborhood,  it  would  prob- 
ably be  thus  referred  to  by  the  people. —A.  H.), 
"  it  is,  then,  conceivable  that  when  he  came  to 
write  out  his  memoranda  or  recollections  he  ! 
would  pass  over  the  name,  and  speak  uncon-  : 
sciously  as  the  old  habit  dictated  "  [Bib.  Sac.,  \ 
xvii.  p.  875).— A.  H.]  The  river  may  possibly  \ 
have  been  the  more  distant  Strymon  (Neand., 
Mey.),  though,  if  §rate  be  the  correct  word,  the 
stream  intended  must  be  a  nearer  one.  In 
summer  the  Gangas  is  almost  dry,  but  in  win- 
ter or  after  rains  may  be  full  and  swollen.  [In 
liis  last  ed.  Meyer  recedes  from  his  earlier  view 
and  adopts  that  of  Dr.  Hackett.  In  the  month 
of  December,  1858,  soon  after  issuing  the  second 
edition  of  this  Commentary,  Dr.  Hackett  had 
the  pleasure  of  visiting  the  sites  of  Neapolis 


and  Philippi.  (See  Bib.  Sac,  xvii.  p.  80G,  etc.) 
He  was  anxious  to  see  the  Gangas  full  of  water, 
and  not  merely  the  dry  bed  of  a  winter-torrent. 
Nor  Avas  he  disappointed :  "  Suddenly,  as  we 
drew  nearer,  a  roaring  noise  broke  ujjon  me. 
There  was  no  visible  cause  for  it;  it  seemed 
almost  as  if  some  convulsion  of  nature  was  at 
hand.  A  few  steps  farther,  and  the  mystery 
was  cleared  up :  there,  rushing  and  pouring 
over  its  rocky  bed,  was  a  wild  winter-torrent, 
which  had  been  formed  by  the  recent  rains. 
The  proper  bed  of  the  stream  measured,  in 
width,  sixty-six  feet.  One-half  of  this  space 
was  covered  with  water,  varying  from  one  and 
a  half  and  two  feet  to  four  and  five  feet.  The 
stones  at  the  bottom  were  rounded  and  worn, 
and  showed  the  action  of  a  still  more  powerful 
current  at  times.  Its  course  was  winding  as  it 
ran  i)ast  Philippi ;  and  it  is  evident  that  the 
direction  of  the  walls  had  been  adjusted  to  that 
of  the  stream.  It  skirts  the  east  or  south-east 
side,  and  then  trends  off  to  the  south-west.  .  .  . 
We  crossed  the  stream,  and  at  the  distance  of 
three  hundred  and  fifty  feet  from  its  margin 
found  a  break  in  the  line  of  the  dilapidated 
walls  which  showed  clearly  where  the  gate  had 
been  on  that  side  of  the  city.  .  .  .  Paul  and  his 
companj^  must  have  entered  the  town  here. 
It  may  be  supposed  to  have  been  out  of  this 
gate  that  they  passed  when  they  went  to  preach 
on  the  river-side ;  for  the  place  on  the  banks, 
as  remarked  already,  was  near  the  gate,  and, 
situated  as  Philippi  was,  no  other  gate  would 
have  brought  them  .so  directly  to  the  river  as 
this." — A.  H.] — Where  (according  to  an  ancient 
usage  in  that  city]  was  wont  to  be  a  place 
of  prayer  (Kuin.,  Neand.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.). 
The  Jews  preferred  to  assemble  near  the  water, 
on  account  of  tlie  lustrations  which  accompa- 
nied their  worship.  Neander  illustrates  this 
usage  from  what  Tertullian  says  of  them  (De 
Jejun.,  c.  16):  '"Per  omne  litus  quocunque  in 
aperto  .  .  .  precem  ad  cfelum  mittunt"  ["On 
every  shore,  in  whatever  open  ])lace,  they  send 
prayers  to  heaven"].  (See  alsj)  ,Ios.,  Antt.,  14. 
10.  23.)  The  place  of  prayer  (irpoo-tix^  here 
appears  to  have  been,  not  an  edifice,  but  a  space 
or  enclosure  in  the  open  air  consecrated  to  this 
use.  The  word  was  so  well  known  as  the  des- 
ignation of  a  Jewish  chapel  or  oratory  that  it 
passed  into  the  Latin  language  in  that  sense. 
The  rendering  Avhere  prayer  was  wont  to 
be  made  (E.  V.)  does  not  agree  easily  with 


186 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


14  IT  And  a  certain  woman  named  Lydia,  a  seller  of 
purple,  of  the  city  of  Thyatira,  which  worshipped 
(lOd,  heard  ns:  whose  "heart  the  Lord  opened,  that 
she  attended  unto  the  things  which  were  ^pokeIl  of 
Paul. 

15  And  when  she  was  baptized,  and  her  household, 
she  besought  us,  sayiug,  If  ye  have  judged  me  to  be 


14  And  a  certain  woman  named  Lydia,  a  seller  of  pur- 
ple, of  the  city  of  Thyatira,  one  that  worshipped 
God,  heard  us:  whose  heart  the  Lord  opened,  to 
give  heed  unto  the   things  which  were  spoken  by 

15  f  aul.  And  when  she  was  baptized,  and  her  house- 
hold, she  besought  us,  saying,  If  ye  have  judged  me 


:  Luke  24  :  45. 


was.  Instead  of  the  substantive  verb,  the 
predicate  would  be  was  made  {yivecr^ai.,  12  :  5, 
or  TToieio-t^oi,  1  Tim.  2 :  i). — In  we  .  .  .  Spake  Lulce 
appears  as  one  of  the  speakers. — The  women 
who  came  together,  for  prayer.  The  ab- 
sence of  a  synagogue  sliows  tliat  the  Jews  here 
were  not  numerous.  Tliose  who  met  for  prayer 
were  chiefly  women,  and  even  some  of  these 
were  converts  to  Judaism. 

14.  Lydia  was  a  very  common  name  among 
the  Greeks  and  the  Romans.  It  is  not  surpris- 
ing, therefore,  that  it  coincided  with  the  name 
of  her  country.  Possibly  she  may  have  borne 
a  different  name  at  home,  but  was  known 
among  strangers  as  Lydia  or  the  Lydian 
(Wetst.).  She  is  said  to  have  been  a  seller 
of  purple  (sc.  cloths)  from  Thyatira.  That 
city  was  on  the  confines  of  Lydia  and  Mysia, 
and  the  I^ydians,  as  ancient  writers  testify,  were 
famous  for  precisely  such  fabrics.  They  pos- 
sessed that  reputation  even  in  Homer's  time. 
(See  11.,  4.  141.)  An  inscription,  "  the  dyers," 
has  been  found  among  tlue  ruins  of  Thyatira. 
— Was  hearing  (Vouei/,  relative  imperf.)  while 
he  discoursed  (u :  9 ;  is :  12),  not  when  the  act 
(opened)  took  place  (Alf). — Whose  heart 
the   Lord  opened— i.  e.  in  conformity  with 

other  passages  (Mali.  U  :  25,  ««.;  Luke  24:45;  tCor.3-6,:), 

enlightened,  impressed  by  his  Spirit,  and  so 
prepared  to  receive  the  truth. — So  as  to  at- 
tend (ecbatic),  or,  less  obvious,  to  attend  (telle). 

15.  When  she  was  baptized.  It  is  left 
indefinite  whether  she  was  baptized  at  once  or 
after  an  interval  of  some  days.— And  her 
house,  family.  "Here,"  says  De  Wette,  "as 
well  as  in  v.  33 ;  18 : 8 ;  1  Cor.  1 :  16,  some  would 
find  a  proof  for  the  apostolic  baptism  of  chil- 
dren ;  but  there  is  nothing  here  which  shows 
that  any  except  adults  were  baptized."  Ac- 
cording to  his  view  (in  Stud,  und  Krit.,  p.  669, 
1830)  of  the  meaning  of  1  Cor.  7  :  14,  it  is  im- 
possible that  baptism  should  have  been  applied 
to  cliildren  in  the  primitive  churches.  In  ar- 
guing from  the  case  of  children  to  that  of  mar- 
ried persons,  one  of  whom  is  an  unbeliever,  in 
order  to  justify  the  continuance  of  the  relation, 
"  the  apostle  must  appeal  to  something  which 
lay  out  of  the  disputed  case,  but  which  had  a 
certain  similarity  and  admitted  of  an  applica- 
tion to  it.    This  something  is  nothing  else  than 


the  relation  which  the  children  of  Christian 
parents  in  general  sustain  to  the  Christian 
Church,  and  the  e.Ypression  '  your  children ' 
refers  to  all  the  Corinthian  Christians.  The 
children  of  Christians  were  not  yet  received 
properly  into  a  Christian  community — were  not 
yet  baptized — and  did  not  take  part  in  the  de- 
votional exercises  and  love-feasts  of  the  church ; 
accordingly,  they  might  have  been  regarded  as 
unclean  {aKa^apra)  witli  as  much  reason  as  the 
unbelieving  converts  could  be  so  regarded.  In 
this  ijassage,  therefore,  we  have  a  ])roof  that 
children  had  not  begun  to  be  baptized  in  the 
time  of  the  apostles."  The  her  household, 
as  Meyer  remarks,  consisted,  probably,  of  wom- 
en who  assisted  Lydia  in  her  business.  "  When 
Jewish  or  heathen  families,"  he  says  further, 
"  became  Christians,  the  children  in  them  could 
have  been  baptized  only  in  cases  in  wliich  they 
were  so  far  developed  that  they  could  profess 
their  faith  in  Christ,  and  did  actually  profess 
it ;  for  this  was  the  universal  requisition  for  the 
reception  of  baptism.  (See  also  vv.  31,  33 ;  18  : 
8.)  On  the  contrary,  if  the  children  were  still 
unable  to  believe,  they  did  not  partake  of  the 
rite,  since  they  were  wanting  in  what  the 
act  presupposed.  The  baptism  of  children  is 
not  to  be  considered  as  an  apostolic  institu- 
tion, but  arose  gradually  in  the  post-apostolic 
age,  after  early  and  long-continued  resistance, 
in  connection  with  certain  views  of  doctrine, 
and  did  not  become  general  in  the  church  till 
after  the  time  of  Augustine.  The  defence  of 
infant  baptism  transcends  the  domain  of  exe- 
gesis, and  must  be  given  up  to  that  of  dogmat- 
ics." Since  a  confession  of  faith  preceded  bap- 
tism, says  Olshausen,  "  it  is  improbable  in  the 
highest  degree  that  by  '  her  household '  (o'kos 
avT^s)  children  of  an  immature  age  are  to  be 
understood  :  those  baptized  with  her  were  rela- 
tives, servants,  grown-up  children.  We  have 
not,  in  fact,  a  single  sure  proof-text  for  the  bap- 
tisiii  of  children  in  the  apostolic  age,  and  the 
necessity  of  it  cannot  be  derived  from  the  idea 
of  baptism."  He  says  on  1  Cor.  1  :  17  that 
"  nothing  can  be  inferred  in  favor  of  infant 
baptism  from  the  word  '  household  '  (oTkos),  be- 
cause the  adult  members  of  the  household 
(comp.  1  Cor.  16 :  15),  or  the  servants  in  it,  may 
alone  be  meant."  Neander  maintains  the  same 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE   ACTS. 


187 


faithful  to  the  Lord,  come  into  my  house,  and  abide 
thfre.    And  "she  constrained  us. 

llj  %  And  it  came  to  pass,  as  we  went  to  prayer,  a 
certain  damsel  'possessed  with  a  spirit  of  divination 
met  us,  which  brought  her  masters  ''much  gain  by 
sooothsaying : 


to  be  faithful  to  the  Lord,  come  into  my  house,  and 

_  abide  thn-r.     And  slje  constrained  us. 

16     And  it  came  to  pass,  as  we  were  going  to  the  place 

of  prayer,  that  a  certain  maid  having  'a  spirit  of 

divination  met  us,  who  brought  her  masters  much 


a  Gen.  19:3;  33  :  11 ;  Judg.  19:21;  Luke  24  :  29  ;  Heb.  li  :  2 6  1  Sa 


cell.  19  :  24. 


-1  Gr.  a  spirit,  a  J'l/tlw 


view  of  this  class  of  passages :  "  Since  baptism 
marked  the  entrance    into  communion   with 
Christ,  it  resulted,  from  the  nature  of  the  rite, 
that  a  confession  of  faith  in  Jesus  as  the  Re- 
deemer would  be  made  by  the  person  to  be 
baptized.     As  baptism  was  closely  united  with 
a  conscious  entrance  on  Christian  communion, 
faith  and  baptism  were  always  connected  with 
one  another ;  and  thus  it  is  in  the  highest  de- 
gree probable  that  baptism  was  performed  only 
in  instances  where  both  could  meet  together, 
and  that  the  practice  of  infant  baptism  was 
unknown  at  this  period.     We  cannot  infer  the 
existence  of  inflmt  baptism  from  the  instance 
of  the  baptism   of  whole    families;    for    the 
passage  in   1   Cor.    IG  :  15   shows   the  fallacy 
of  such  a  conclusion,  as  from  that  it  appears 
that  the  whule  family  of  Stephanus,  who  were 
baptized   by  Paul,   consisted   of  adults.   .   .   . 
From  whom  (if  it  belonged  to  the  first  Chris- 
tian age)  could  the  institution  of  infant  bap- 
tism  have  proceeded?      Certainly  it  did    not 
come  directly   from   Christ  himself      Was    it 
from  the  primitive  church  in  Palestine,  from 
an  injunction  given   by  the  earlier  apostles? 
But  among  the  Jewish  Christians  circumcision 
was  held  as  a  seal  of  the  covenant ;  and  hence 
they  had  so  much  less  occasion  to  make  use  of 
anotlier  dedication  for  their  children.     Could 
it,  then,  have  been  Paul  that  first  introduced 
among  heathen  Christians  this  change  in  the 
use  of  baptism  ?     But  this  would  agree  least  of 
all  with  the  peculiar  Cliristian  characteristics 
of  this  apostle.     He  who  says  of  himself  that 
Christ  sent  him,  not  to  baptize,  but  to  preach 
the  gospel ;  he  who  always  kept  his  eye  fixed 
on   one  thing,   justification    by  faith,   and   so 
carefully  avoided  everytliing  which  could  give 
a  handle  or  a  support  to  tlie  notion  of  justifica- 
tion by  outward  things  (carnal),— liow  could 
he  have  set  up  infant  baptism  against  the  cir- 
cumcision that  continued  to  be  practised  by  the 
Jewish  Christians?     In  this  case  the  dispute 
carried  on  with  the  Judaizing  party  on  the  ne- 
cessity of  circumcision  would  easily  have  given 
an  opportunity  of  introducing  this  substitute 
into  the  controversy,  if  it  had  really  existed. 
The  evidence  arising  from  silence  on  this  topic 
has,  therefore,  the  greater  weight."i     It  mav 


be  proper  to  regard  the  decisions  of  such  men 
as  representing  the  testimony  of  the  present 
biblical  scholarship  on  this  controverted  sub- 
ject.    It  is  the  more  proper  to  accord  to  them 
this  character,  because  they  proceed  from  men 
whose  ecclesiastical  position  would  naturally 
dispose  them  to  adopt  a  different  view— who 
contend  that  infant  baptism,  having  been  in- 
troduced,  is  allowable,  notwithstanding  their 
acknowledgment  that  it  lias  no  scriptural  war- 
rant.—If  ye  have  judged— J.  e.  by  admitting 
her  to  baptism,  and  tiius  declaring  their  confi- 
dence in  her.     If  (ei)  is  preferred  to  since  'JirtC) 
out  of  modesty.— Trusting  to  the  Lord— «.  e. 
having  faith  in  him ;  a  believer.     (Comp.  10  : 
45;  IG  :  1.)— Constrained  us.     Not  that  they 
needed  so  much  entreaty,  but  tliat  she  could 
not  employ  less,  in  justice  to  her  grateful  feel- 
ings.    Some  tliink  that  they  were  reluctant  to 
accept  the  proffered  hospitality,  lest  they  should 
seem  to  be  actuated  by  mercenary  motives.   The 
apostle  was  by  no  means  indifferent  to  that  im- 
putation (20:34;2r;or.  12:17, 19),  but  it  is  iucorrcct 
to  say  that  lie  never  showed  himself  unmindful 
of  it.     He  was  the  guest  of  Gains  at  Corintii 
(Rom.  16:23),  and  was  aided  repeatedly  by  Chris- 
tian friends  when  his  circumstances  made  it 
necessary  (24 :  23 ;  28 :  10 ;  Phii.  4 .  15,  sg.). 

16-18.     HEALING     OF     A     DEMONIAC 
WOMAN. 

16.  Now  it  came  to  pass,  on  a  subsequent 
day  (Neand.,  De  Wet.).— Unto  the  place  of 
prayer,  which  may  omit  tlie  article  as  definite, 
because  it  was  the  only  such  i)lace  there.  But 
some  editors  (Grsb.,  Lchm.)  insert  the.~A  fe- 
male slave  (Gal.  4:22)  haVing  the  spirit  of  a 
pythoness — i.  e.  of  a  diviner  who  was  supposed 
to  have  received  her  gift  of  ]iroiihecy  from 
Apollo.  Luke  describes  tlie  woman  according 
to  her  reputed  character ;  he  does  not  express 
here  his  own  opinion  of  tlie  case.  His  view 
agreed,  no  doubt,  with  that  of  Paul ;  and  wJiat 
that  was  we  learn  from  the  sequel.  To  suppose 
him  to  acknowledge  Apollo  as  a  real  existence 
would  contradict  1  Cor.  8  :  4.  — Procured. 
Winer  (^  38.  5)  says  that  the  active  is  more 
appropriate  here  than  the  middle  (comp.  19  : 
24;  Col.  4:1;  Tit.  2  :  7),  because  the  gain  was 
involuntary  on  her  part.— Unto  her  masters. 


Abridged  from  Ryland's  translation  {Pflanzung,  u.  s.  w.,  Band  i.  p.  278J. 


188 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


17  The  same  followed  Paul  and  us,  and  cried,  saying, 
These  men  are  the  servants  of  the  most  high  God, 
which  shew  unto  us  the  way  of  salvation. 

18  And  this  did  she  many  days.  But  Paul,  "being 
grieved,  turned  and  said  to  the  spirit,  I  command  thee 
in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  to  come  out  of  her.  'And 
he  came  out  the  same  hour. 

19  11  And  <^when  her  masters  saw  that  the  hope  of 
their  gains  was  gone,  -^they  caught  Paul  and  Silas,  and 
«drew  ilieiii  into  the  marketplace  unto  the  rulers, 

20  And  brought  them  to  the  magistrates,  saying, 
These  men,  being  Jews,  /do  exceedingly  trouble  our 
city, 

21  And  teach  customs,  which  are  not  lawful  for  us 
to  receive,  neither  to  observe,  being  Romans. 


17  gain  by  soothsaying.  The  same  following  after 
Paul  and  us  cried  out,  saying,  These  men  are  'ser- 
vants  of  the  Most  High  God.  who  proclaim  unto  you 

IS^the  way  of  salvation.  And  this  she  did  for  many 
days.  But  Paul,  being  sore  troubled,  turned  and 
said  to  the  spirit,  I  charge  thee  in  the  name  of  Je- 
sus Christ  to  come  out  of  her.  And  it  came  out  that 
very  hour. 

19  But  when  her  masters  saw  that  the  hope  of  thi  ir 
gain  was  Sgone,  they  laid  hold  on  Paul  and  Silas, 
and  dragged  them  into  the  marketplace  belore  the 

20  rulers,  and  when  they  had  brought  them  unto  the 
^magistrates,  they  said.  These  men,  being  Jews,  do 

21  exceedingly  trouble  our  city,  and  set  forth  customs 
which  it  is  not  lawful  for  us  to  receive,  or  to  observe, 


a  See  Mark  1  :  25,  34.... 6  Mark  16:  17....cch.  19:  25,  i6....d'l  Cor.  6:  5...  e  Matt.  10:  18..../  1  Kiugs  18  :  17  ;  ch.  17  ; 
1  Or.  bondaervanta 2  Or,  away 3  Gr.  come  out 4  Gr.  prwtors. 


A  slave  among  the  ancients  who  possessed  a 
lucrative  talent  was  often  the  joint-property  of 
two  or  more  owners. — By  divining  {navrevo- 
fievri)  was  the  heathen  term  to  denote  tlie  act. 
Luke  would  have  said,  more  naturally,  by 
prophesying  (irpoc^TjTeiiovo-a),  had  he  been  affirm- 
ing his  own  belief  in  the  reality  of  the  preten- 
sion.— The  woman  was,  in  fact,  a  demoniac 
(see  V.  18) ;  and,  as  those  subject  to  the  power 
of  evil  spirits  were  often  bereft  of  their  reason, 
her  divinations  were  probably  the  ravings  of 
insanity.  The  superstitious  have  always  been 
prone  to  attach  a  mysterious  meaning  to  the 
utterances  of  the  insane.  We  may  take  it  for 
granted  that  the  craft  of  the  managers  in  this 
case  was  exerted  to  assist  the  delusion. 

17.  These  men  are  servants,  etc.  Some 
have  supposed  that  she  merely  repeated  what 
she  had  heard  tlicni  declare  of  themselves,  or 
what  she  had  lieard  reported  of  them  by  others. 
But  the  similarity  of  the  entire  account  to  that 
of  the  demoniacs  mentioned  in  the  Gospels  re- 
quires us  to  refer  this  case  to  the  same  class  of 
phenomena.  (See  Matt.  8  :  29;  Mark  3  :  11 ; 
Luke  4  :  41 ;  8  :  28,  etc.)  According  to  those  pas- 
sages, we  must  recognize  the  acknowledgment 
here  as  a  supernatural  testimony  to  the  mission 
of  Paul  and  his  associates,  and  to  the  truth  of 
the  gospel  which  they  preached. 

18.  The  participle  here  used  {&i.aLirovr\»fL%)  He- 
sychius  defines  by  being  grieved  (Aun-ijiJeis). 
With  that  sense  it  would  refer  to  Paul's  com- 
miseration of  the  woman's  unhappy  condition. 
Taken  as  in  4  :  2,  being  indignant,  it  would 
show  how  he  felt  to  witness  such  an  exhibition 
of  the  malice  of  a  wicked  spirit.  (Comp.  Luke 
13  :  IG.)  The  latter  meaning  directs  the  act  of 
the  participle  to  the  same  object  as  thatof  turned 
and  said.  It  is  better  to  preserve  a  unity  in 
that  respect. — To  the  spirit,  who  is  addressed 
here  as  distinct  from  the  woman  herself.  The 
apostle  deals  with  the  case  as  it  actually  was, 
and  his  knowledge  as  an  inspired  teacher  would 
enable  him  to  judge  correctly  of  its  character. 


19-24.  IMPRISONMENT  OF  PAUL  AND 

SILAS. 

19.  That  the  hope  of  their  gain  went 
forth  —  i.e.  with  the  exorcism  (De  Wet.). — 
Having  laid  hold  upon  Paul  and  Silas. 

Luke  and  Timothy  may  have  been  out  of  reach 
just  at  that  moment  (comp.  17  : 5),  or  may  have 
been  spared  because  they  were  Greeks. — Into 
the  marketplace.  In  ancient  cities  the  seats 
of  the  magistrates  were  erected  commonly  in 
the  markets  or  near  to  them. — Before  the 
rulers,  called,  in  tlie  next  verse,  governors. 
The  chief  magistrates  in  a  Roman  ccilony  were 
the  duumviri  or  quatuorviri,  as  the  number  was 
not  always  the  same.  They  frequently  took, 
however,  the  name  of  prxtom,  as  one  of  greater 
honor,  and  that  in  Greek  was  governors 
(<7TpaT7)7oi).  It  appears,  therefore,  that  the 
magistrates  at  Philippi  affected  this  latter  title. 
It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  this  is  the  only  oc- 
casion in  the  Acts  on  which  Luke  applies  the 
term  to  the  rulers  of  a  city.  Here,  in  a  Roman 
colony,  the  government  would  be  modelled 
naturally  after  the  Roman  form  ;  and  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  narrative  reveals  that  circum- 
stance marks  its  authenticity. 

20.  Being  Jews.  They  say  this  at  the 
outset,  in  order  to  give  more  effect  to  the  sub- 
sequent accusation.  No  people  were  regarded 
by  the  Romans  with  such  contempt  and  liatred 
as  the  Jews.  It  is  not  probable  that  the  Philip- 
pians  at  this  time  recognized  any  distinction 
between  Judaism  and  Christianity ;  they  ar- 
raigned Paul  and  Silas  as  Jews,  or  as  the 
leaders  of  some  particular  Jewish  sect. 

21.  Customs,  religious  practices. — Which 
are  not  lawful,  etc.  The  Roman  laws  suffered 
foreigners  to  worship  in  their  own  way,  but  did 
not  allow  Roman  citizens  to  forsake  their  relig- 
ion for  that  of  other  nations.  This  was  the 
general  policy.  But,  beyond  that,  Judaism  had 
been  Specially  interdicted.  "  It  was  a  religio 
Ucita  for  the  Jews,"  says  Neander,  "but  they 
were  by  no  means  allowed  to  proi)agate  their 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


189 


22  And  the  inullitude  rose  up  toj;ether  against  them  : 
and  the  iiiaKistrates  rent  ott'  their  clothes,  "and  eoiu- 
niauded  to  beat  lliein. 

2'.i  And  when  tliey  had  laid  many  stripes  upon  them, 
they  cast  thmn  into  prison,  charging  the  jailor  to  keep 
them  safely : 

2i  Who,  having  received  such  a  charge,  thrust  them 
into  the  inner  prison,  and  made  their  Tcet  last  in  the 
stocks. 


22  being  Romans.  And  the  multitude  rose  up  together 
against  them:  and  the  'magistrates  rent  their  gar- 
ments ott'  them,  iind  commanded  lo  beat  them  with 

23  rods.  And  when  they  had  laid  many  stripes  upon 
them,  they  cast  them  into  prison,  charging  the  jailor 

24  to  keep  them  safely:  who,  having  received  such  a 
charge,  cast  them  into  the  inner  prison,  and  made 


a  2  Cor.  6:5;  11  :  23,  25  ;  1  Thess.  2  :  2.- 


,  Gr.  praetors. 


religion  among  the  Roman  pagans ;  the  laws 
expressly  forbade  the  latter,  under  severe  pen- 
alties, to  receive  circumcision.  It  was  the  case, 
indeed,  at  this  time,  that  the  number  of  prose- 
lytes from  the  pagans  was  greatly  multiplied. 
This  the  public  authorities  sometimes  allowed 
to  pass  unnoticed,  but  occasionally  severe  laws 
were  passed  anew  to  repress  the  evil"  {Ch. 
Hist.,  vol.  i.  p.  89).  Still,  the  charge  in  this 
instance,  though  formally  false,  since  they  were 
not  making  proselytes  to  Judaism,  was  true 
substantially.  It  was  impossible  that  the  gos- 
pel should  be  preached  without  coming  into 
collision  with  the  Roman  laws.  The  gospel 
was  designed  to  subvert  one  system  of  false  re- 
ligion as  well  as  another.  It  proposed  to  save 
the  souls  of  men,  without  respect  to  the  par- 
ticular government  or  political  institutions  un- 
der wliich  they  lived.  The  apostles,  in  the  pro- 
mulgation of  their  message,  acted  under  a 
liigher  authoritj'  than  that  of  the  Cresars  ;  and 
the  opposition  between  Christianity  and  hea- 
thenism soon  became  apparent,  and  led  to  the 
persecutions  which  the  Roman  power  inflicted 
on  the  church  in  the  first  centtiries. 

22.  And  the  multitude  rose  up  together 
against  them.  The  prisoners  were  now  in 
the  hands  of  the  officers  ;  hence,  we  are  not  to 
think  here  of  any  actual  onset  upon  them,  but 
of  a  tumultuous  outburst  of  rage,  a  cry  on  all 
sides  for  the  punishment  of  the  offenders.  The 
magistrates  hasten  to  obey  the  voice  of  the  mob. 
— Having  torn  off  their  garments,  not  their 
own,  but  those  of  Paul  and  Silas.  The  rulers 
are  said  to  do  what  they  ordered  to  be  done. 
(Comp.  circumcised,  in  v.  3.)  It  was  cus- 
tomary to  inflict  the  blows  on  the  naked  body. 
Livy  (2.  5) :  "  Missique  lictores  ad  sumendum 
supplicium,  nndatos  virgis  credunt"  ["And 
the  lictors,  being  .sent  to  inflict  punishment, 
beat  the  naked  [youths]  with  rods"].— Or- 
dered to  beat  with  rods.  The  verb  declares 
the  UKtde  a-s  well  as  the  act.  Observe  the  oflfi- 
cial  brevity  of  the  expression.  The  imperfect 
describes  the  beating  in  its  relation  to  rose  up 
against,  or  as  taking  place  under  the  ej-e  of 
the  narrator.  For  the  latter  usage,  see  W.  ?  40. 
3.  d. ;  Mt.  ^  505.  II.  1.     In  2  Cor.  11  :  25,  Paul 


says  that  he  was  "thrice  beaten  with  rods." 
This  was  one  of  the  instances ;  the  other  two 
the  history  has  not  recorded.  Such  omissions 
prove  that  Luke's  narrative  and  the  Epistles  of 
Paul  have  not  been  drawn  from  each  other — 
that  they  are  independent  pnjductions. 

23.  Many  stripes  shows  that  no  ordinary 
rigor  would  satisfy  their  exasperated  feelings. 
(See  also  v.  33.)  The  Jewish  law  restricted  the 
blows  to  "  forty  save  one."  The  severity  of  the 
punishment  among  the  Romans  deiiended  on 
the  equity  or  caprice  of  the  judge.  In  regard 
to  the  silence  of  Paul  and  Silas  under  this  out- 
rage, see  on  v.  37. 

24.  Who  having  received  such  a  com- 
mand. We  need  not  impute  to  the  jailer  any 
gratuitous  inhumanity  ;  he  obeyed  his  instruc- 
tions.— Into  the  inner  prison,  the  remotest 
part,  whence  escape  would  be  most  difficult. 
Some  confound  this  prison  with  the  dungeon, 
which  was  under  ground,  and  would  be  dif- 
ferently described.  Walch's  Dissertatio  de  vin- 
citUs  AjtostoU  Paulli  treats  of  this  passage. — And 
secured  their  feet  into  the  block  {=nervus). 
This  was  an  instrument  for  torture  as  well  as 


IN   THIS   STOCKS. 

confinement.  It  was  a  lieavy  piece  of  wood 
with  holes  into  which  the  feet  were  put,  so  far 
apart  as  to  distend  the  limbs  in  the  most  pain- 
ful manner.  Yet  in  this  situation,  with  their 
bodies  still  bleeding  from  tlie  effect  of  their  re- 
cent chastisement,  and  looking  forward  to  tlie 
morrow  only  in  the  expectation  that  it  would 
renew  tlieir  jiains,  they  could  still  rej:>ice;  their 
prison  at  midnight  resounds  with  the  voice  of 


190 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  XVI. 


25  1[  And  at  midnight  Paul  and  Silas  prayed,  and 
sang  praises  unto  (.od;  and  the  prisoners  heard  them. 

2ii  "And  suddenly  there  was  a  great  earthtjuake,  so 
that  the  foundations  of  the  prison  were  shaken  :  and 
immediately  ^^ll  the  doors  were  opened,  and  every 
one's  bauds  were  loosed. 

27  And  the  keeper  of  the  prison  awakening  out  of 
his  sleep,  and  seeing  the  prison  doors  open,  he  drew 
out  his  sword,  and  would  have  killed  himself,  suppos- 
ing that  the  prisoners  liad  been  tied. 

L'S  Rut  Paul  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying,  Do  thy- 
self no  harm  :  for  we  are  all  here. 

29  Then  he  called  for  a  light,  and  sprang  in,  and 
came  trembling,  and  fell  down  before  I'aul  and  Silas, 

30  And  brought  them  out,  and  said,  "^Sirs,  wliat  must 
I  do  to  be  saved  .' 


25  their  feet  fast  in  the  stocks.  Put  about  :iiidnight 
I'aul  and  ."-ilas  were  iiraying  and  singing  liymns 
unto  (iod,  and  tlie  prisontis  were  listening  to  tlieni; 

2Gand  suddenly  tliere  was  a  great  earihrjuake,  sn  that 
the  foundations  of  the  prison-house  were  sliaken  : 
and  immediately  all  the  doors  were  opened;   and 

27  every  one's  bands  were  loosed.  And  the  jailor  be- 
ing roused  out  of  sleep,  and  seeing  the  prison  doors 
oi)en,  drew  his  sword,  and  was  about  to  kill  iiimself, 

28  supposing  that  the  prisoners  had  escaped.  Put  Paul 
cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying,  Do  thyself  no  harm  : 

29  for  we  are  all  here  And  he  called  for  lights,  and 
sprang  in,  and,  trembling  for  fear,  fell  down  liefore 

30  Paul  and  Silas,  and  brought  them  out,  and  said,  isirs, 


och.  ■«  :  31....6ch.  5:  19  ;  12  :  7,  10.  ...c  Luke  3  :  10  ;  oh.  2  :  37  ;  9:6. 


prayer  and  praise.  Neander  cites  here  Tertul- 
lian's  fine  remark :  "  Nihil  crus  sentit  in  nervo, 
qnnni  animus  in  Cit?lo  est"  ["Nothing  the  limb 
feels  in  the  stocks  when  the  mind  is  in  heaven  "1. 
25-29.  AN  EARTHQUAKE  SHAKES 
THE   PRISON. 

25.  Praying,  they  praised  God.  Their 
prayers  and  praises  were  not  distinct  acts  (hence 
the  form  ofthe  expression), but  their  worship  con- 
sisted chiefly  of  thanksgiving,  the  language  of 
which  they  would  derive  more  or  less  from 
the  Psalms.  The  Hebrews  were  so  familiar 
with  the  Old  Testament,  especially  its  devotional 
parts,  that  they  clothed  their  religious  thoughts 
spontaneously  in  terms  borrowed  from  that 
source.  See,  e.  g.,  the  songs  of  Mary  and  Eliz- 
abeth   (Lukel  ;39,  ««.),  and   of    ZachariaS    (Luke  l:  67, 

«?.)  and  Simeon  (Luke  2  ;28,  sg.). — Heard,  lis- 
tened to  them  while  they  sung.  The  imper- 
fect describes  the  act;  the  aorist  would  have 
related  it  merely. 

26.  All  the  doors.  Some  ascribe  this 
opening  of  the  doors  to  the  shock  of  the 
earthquake ;  others,  more  reasonably,  to  the 
power  which  caused  the  earthquake. — And 
the  chains  of  all — i.  e.  the  prisoners  (see 
v.  28) — were  loosened,  (oKttJr/,  were  loosened, 
is  first  aorist  passive  from  aviiqut..  B.  §  108 ;  S. 
§  81.  I.)  That  the  other  prisoners  were  re- 
leased in  this  manner  was,  no  doubt,  miracu- 
lous ;  it  was  adapted  to  augment  the  impression 
of  the  occurrence,  and  to  attest  more  signally  the 
truth  of  the  gospel.  That  they  made  no  effort 
to  escape  may  have  been  owing  to  the  terror  of 
the  scene,  or  to  a  restraining  influence  which  the 
author  of  the  interposition  e.xerted  upon  them. 

27.  Was  about  to  kill  himself.  The 
jailer  adopted  this  resolution  because  he  knew 
that  his  life  was  forfeited  if  the  prisoners  had 
escaped.  (Comp.  12  :  19 ;  27  :  42.) — Supposing 
the  prisoners  to  have  fled,  and  to  be  gone; 
infill,  perfect,  because  the  act,  though  past,  was 
connected  with  the  present.     (W.  |  44.  7.) 


28.  With  a  voice  loud.  (See  note  on  14  : 
10.)— Do  thyself  no  injury.  For  the  mode 
and  tense,  see  on  7  :  GO.  How,  it  has  been 
asked,  could  Paul  have  known  the  jailer's  in- 
tention ?  The  narrative  leaves  us  in  doubt  on 
that  point,  but  suggests  various  possibilities. 
It  is  not  certain  that  the  prison  was  entirely 
dark  (see  on  v.  29),  and  the  jailer  may  have 
stood  at  that  moment  where  Paul  could  dis- 
tinguish his  form,  or,  as  Doddridge  suggests,  he 
may  have  heard  some  exclamation  from  him 
which  disclosed  his  purpose.  The  fact  was  re- 
vealed to  the  apostle,  if  he  could  not  ascertain 
it  by  natural  means. — We  are  all  here.  We 
do  not  know  the  structure  of  the  prison.  The 
part  of  it  where  the  apostle  was,  and  the  posi- 
tion in  which  he  sat,  may  have  enabled  him  to 
see  that  no  one  of  the  prisoners  had  passed 
through  the  open  doors,  or  he  may  have  been 
divinely  instructed  to  give  this  assurance. 

29.  Having  called  for  lights,  which 
could  be  carried  in  the  hand.  The  noun  is 
neuter  and  in  the  plural,  not  singular  (E.  V.). 
The  ordinary  night-lamps,  if  such  had  been 
kept  burning,  were  fastened,  perhai)S,  or  fur- 
nished only  a  faint  glimmer.  Lights  may  be  a 
generic  plural,  but  refers,  more  probably,  to  the 
jailer's  summoning  those  in  his  service  to  pro- 
cure lights,  to  enable  liim  to  ascertain  the  con- 
dition of  the  prison.  The  sequel  shows  that 
the  whole  family  were  aroused. — Fell  down, 
cast  himself  at  their  feet  in  token  of  reverence. 
(See  Mark  3  :  11 ;  Luke  8  :  28.)  He  knew  that 
the  miracle  was  on  their  account. 

30-34.  CONVERSION  OF  THE  JAILER 
AND   HIS   FAMILY. 

30.  Having  led  them  forth  out — /.  e.  of 
the  inner  prison  into  another  room,  not  into 
his  own  house.  (See  v.  34.)— What  must  I 
do  in  order  that  I  may  be  saved?  Their 
answer,  in  the  next  verse,  shows  with  what 
meaning  the  jailer  proposed  this  question.  It 
cannot  refer  to  any  fear  of  punishment  from 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE   ACTS. 


191 


31  And  they  said,  "Pelieve  on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
and  thou  shalt  he  saved,  and  tliy  house 

'.i2  And  they  spalce  unto  him  the  word  of  the  Lord, 
and  to  all  that  were  in  his  house. 

3.'i  And  he  took  them  the  same  hour  of  the  night,  and 
washed  Ikeir^  stripes  ;  and  was  baptized,  he  and  all  his, 
straightway. 


31  what  must  I  do  to  be  saved?  And  they  said,  relieve 
on  the    Lord  Jesus,  and  thou  shalt  be  saved,  thou 

32 and  thy  house.  And  they  spake  the  word  of  'the 
Lord  unto  him,   with  all    that   were  in   his   house. 

33  And  he  took  them  the  same  hour  of  the  night,  and 
washed  their  stripes;  and  was  baptized,  he  and  all 


a  John  3  :  16, 


i:  47  ;  1  John  a:  10. 


-1  Some  ancient  authorities  read  God. 


the  magistrates;  for  he  had  now  ascertained 
that  the  prisoners  were  all  safe,  and  that  he 
was  in  no  danger  from  that  source.  Besides, 
had  he  felt  exposed  to  any  such  danger,  he 
must  have  known  that  Paul  and  Silas  had  no 
power  to  protect  him  ;  it  would  liave  been  use- 
less to  come  to  them  for  assistance.  The  ques- 
tion in  the  other  sense  appears  abrupt,  it  is 
true,  but  we  are  to  remember  that  Luke  has 
recorded  only  parts  of  the  transaction.  The 
unwritten  history  would  perhaps  justify  some 
sucii  view  of  the  circumstances  as  this.  The 
jailer  is  suddenly  aroused  from  sleep  by  the 
noise  of  the  cartliqimke ;  he  sees  the  doors  of 
tlie  prison  open;  the  thought  instantly  seizes 
him,  "  The  prisoners  have  fled !"  He  knows 
the  rigor  of  the  Roman  law,  and  is  on  the 
point  of  anticipating  his  doom  by  self-murder. 
But  the  friendly  voice  of  Paul  recalls  his  pres- 
ence of  mind.  His  thoughts  take  at  once  a 
new  direction.  He  is  aware  that  these  men 
claim  to  be  the  servants  of  God — that  they  pro- 
fess to  teach  the  way  of  salvation.  It  would 
be  nothing  strange  if,  during  the  several  days 
or  weeks  that  Paul  and  Silas  had  been  at 
Philippi,  he  had  heard  the  gospel  from  their 
own  lips,  had  been  one  among  those  at  the 
river-side  or  in  the  market  whom  they  had 
warned  of  their  danger,  and  urged  to  repent 
and  lay  hold  of  the  mercy  offered  to  them  in 
the  name  of  Christ.  And  now  suddenly  an 
event  had  taken  place  which  convinces  him  in 
a  moment  that  the  things  which  he  has  heard 
are  realities ;  it  was  the  last  argument,  perhaps, 
which  he  needed  to  give  certainty  to  a  mind 
already  inquiring,  hesitating.  He  comes  trem- 
bling, therefore,  before  Paul  and  Silas,  and  asks 
them  to  tell  him — again,  more  fully — what  he 
must  do  to  be  saved. 

31.  And  thou  shalt  be  saved  and  thy 
family.  They  represent  the  salvation  as 
ample ;  it  was  free  not  only  to  him,  but  to  all 
the  members  of  his  household  who  accept  the 
proi!ered  mercy.  The  apostle  includes  them, 
because,  as  we  see  from  the  next  verse,  they 
were  present  and  listened  with  the  jailer  to  the 
preaching  of  the  gospel.    As  Meyer  remarks. 


thy  house  belongs  in  effect  to  believe  and  be 
saved,  as  well  as  thou. 

32.  And  they  spake  to  him  the  word  of 
the  Lord,  and  to  all  who  were  in  his 
house.  This  refers  to  the  more  particular 
instruction  respecting  the  way  of  salvation, 
which  they  proceeded  to  give  after  the  gen- 
eral direction  in  the  preceding  verse. — Those 
in  his  family  (toI?  ei-  t^  oUia  avroO)  cannot  em- 
brace infants,  because  they  are  incapable  of  re- 
ceiving the  instruction  which  was  addressed  to 
those  whom  the  expression  designates  here. 

33.  Taking  them  along,  say  Conybeareand 
Howson  correctly,  implies  a  change  of  place. 
The  jailer  repaired  with  Paul  and  Silas  from  the 
outer  room  (see  out  (efw),  in  v.  3U)  to  the  water, 
wJiich  he  needed  for  bathing  tlieir  bodies. — 
Washed  from  their  stripes  stands  concisely 
for  washed  and  cleansed  them  from  their 
stripes.  (W.  ?  47,  5.  b.)  This  verb,  says  Dr. 
Robinson  (Lex.  JV.  T.,  s.  v.),  signifies  to  wash 
the  entire  body,  not  merely  a  part  of  it,  like 
nipto  {vCtttu)).  Trench  says :  "  viirTeiv  {niptein) 
and  n'i//a<7i>ai  {nipsasthni)  almost  always  express 
the  washing  of  apart  of  the  body  (the  hands, 
in  Mark  7:3;  the  feet,  in  John  13  :  5 ;  the  face, 
in  Matt.  6  :  17  ;  the  eyes,  in  John  9:7);  while 
Aouetc  {louein),  which  is  not  so  much  'to  wash  ' 
as  '  to  bathe,'  and  AoCo-tJai  (hmsthai),  or,  in  com- 
mon Greek,  Kovea^ai.  {loucsthai),  '  to  bathe  one's 
self,'  imply  always,  not  the  bathing  of  a  part 
of  the  body,  but  of  the  whole.  (Comp.  H'eb.  10  : 
23 ;  Acts  9  :  37  ;  2  Pet.  2  :  22  ;  Rev.  1:5;  Plato, 
Phxd.,  115  a."i  To  the  same  effect,  see  Tittm., 
Sijnm.  N.  T.,  p.  175.1)— Was  baptized.  The 
rite  may  have  been  performed,  says  De  Wette, 
in  the  same  fountain  or  tank  in  which  the 
jailer  had  washed  them.  "  Perhaps  the  water," 
says  Meyer,  "was  in  the  court  of  the  house; 
and  the  baptism  was  that  of  )mmei*sion,  which 
formed  an  essential  part  of  the  symbolism  of 
the  act.  (See  Rom.  6  :  3,  si].)"  Ancient  houses, 
as  usually  built,  enclosed  a  rectangular  reservoir 
or  basin  (the  impluvium  so  called)  for  receiving 
the  rain  which  flowed  from  the  slightly-inclined 
roof.  Some  stiggest  that  they  may  Jiave  used  a 
Ko\vixpri&pa  (columbethra)  or  swimming-bath,  found 


1  Synonyms  of  the  New  Testament  (p.  216),  by  Richard  Chenevix  Trench,  King's  College,  London  (New  York, 
1857). 


192 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


34  And  when  he  had  brought  them  into  his  house, 
"he  set  meat  before  them,  and  rejoiced,  believing  in 
(jod  with  all  his  house. 

H5  And  when  it  was  day,  the  magistrates  sent  the 
Serjeants,  saying.  Let  those  men  go. 

36  And  the  keeper  of  the  prison  told  this  saying  to 
Paul,  The  magistrates  have  sent  to  let  you  go :  now 
therefore  depart,  and  go  in  peace. 

37  But  Paul  said  unto  them,  They  have  beaten  us 
openly  uncondemned,  'being  Bomans,  and  have  cast 


34  his,  immediat  ly.  And  he  brought  them  up  into 
his  house,  and  set  'meat  before  them,  and  rejoiced 
greatly,  with  all  his  house,  ^'having  believed  in  (..od. 

35  Bnt  when  it  was  day,  the  "magistrates  sent  the 
3G  ■'Serjeants,  saying.  Let  those  men  go.     And  the  jailor 

reported  the  words  to  Paul,  xaying,  The  (^magistrates 

have  sent  to  let  you  go:  now  therefore  come  forth, 

37  and  go  in  peace.     Put  Paul  said  unto  them.  They 

have  beaten  us  publicly,  uncondemned,  men  that 


a  Luke  5  :  29 ;  19  :  6 6  ch.  22  :  25.- 


-1  Gr.  a  table 2  Or,  having  believed  God 3  Gr,  prcetora 4  Gr.  lictors. 


within  the  walls  of  the  prison  (Grsb.,  Rosnm., 
Kuin.).  Such  a  bath  was  a  common  appurte- 
nance of  houses  and  public  edifices  among  the 
Greeks  and  Romans.  Whether  the  Gangas 
flowed  near  the  prison,  so  as  to  be  easily  ac- 
cessible, cannot  be  decided. — And  all  his  are 
evidently  the  all  in  his  house  to  whom  they 
had  just  preached  the  word,  as  stated  in  v.  32. 

34.  Having  brought  them  up  into  his 
house,  which  appears  to  have  been  over  the 
prison. — He  rejoiced  with  all  his  family — 
i.  e.  he  and  all  his  family  rejoiced.  Having 
believed  in  God  states  the  object  or  occa- 
sion of  their  joy.  (Comp.  1  Cor.  1-1  :  18.)  This 
act,  like  that  of  the  verb,  is  predicated  of  the 
jailer's  family  as  well  as  of  himself. 

35-40.  THEY  ARE  SET  AT  LIBERTY, 
AND  DEPART  FROM  PHILIPPI. 

35.  The  sergeants  =  the  rod-bearers  (lictores), 
who  waited  upon  Roman  magistrates  and  exe- 
cuted their  orders.  In  the  colonies  they  carried 
staves  —  not  fasces,  as  at  Rome.  It  deserves 
notice  that  Luke  introduces  this  term  just  here. 
Though  applied  occasionally  to  Greek  magis- 
trates as  bearing  the  staff  of  authority,  it  was 
properly  in  this  age  a  Roman  designation,  and 
is  found  here  in  the  right  place  as  denoting  the 
attendants  of  Roman  oflficers.— -Release  them. 
The  rulers  did  not  command  them  to  leave  the 
city,  but  expected  them,  doubtless,  to  use  their 
liberty  for  that  purpose.  It  is  uncertain  how 
we  are  to  account  for  this  sudden  change  of 
disposition  toward  Paul  and  Silas.  The  mag- 
istrates may  have  reflected  in  the  interval  on 
the  injustice  of  their  conduct  and  have  relented, 
or  possibly,  as  they  were  heathen  and  super- 
stitious, they  had  been  alarmed  by  the  earth- 
quake, and  feared  the  anger  of  the  gods  on 
account  of  their  inhumanity  to  the  strangers. 

36.  The  jailer  reported  these  words 
unto  Paul — i.  e.  from  the  lictors,  who,  there- 
fore, did  not  accompany  him  into  the  prison. 
The  same  verb  occurs  in  v.  38,  of  the  answer 


which  the  lictors  conveyed  to  the  magistrates. 
— That  they  have  sent — sc.  a  message,  or 
messengers. — In  peace,  unmolested.  (See  on 
15  :  33.)  The  jailer  anticiimtes  their  ready  ac- 
ceptance of  the  offer. 

37.  Said  unto  them,  the  lictors — i.  e.  by 
the  mouth  of  the  jailer. — Having  scourged 
us  publicly  '.incondemned,  men  who  are 
Romans.  Almost  every  word  in  this  reply 
contains  a  distinct  allegation.  It  would  be  dif- 
ficult to  find  or  frame  a  sentence  superior  to  it 
in  point  of  energetic  brevity.     Both   the  Lex 

Valeria  and  the  Lex  Porcia  made  it  a  crime  to 
inflict  blows  or  any  species  of  torture  on  a 
Roman  citizen :  "  Facinus  est  vinciri  civera 
Romanum,  scelus  verberari,  prope  i)arricidium 
necari"i  (Cic.  in  Verr.,  5.  G6). — Publicly.  It 
would  have  been  a  crime  to  have  struck  them 
a  single  blow,  even  in  secret ;  they  had  been 
cruelly  scourged  in  open  day,  and  before  hun- 
dreds of  witnesses.  —  Uncondemned.  The 
Roman  laws  held  it  to  be  one  of  the  most 
sacred  rights  of  the  citizen  that  he  should  be 
tried  in  due  form  before  he  was  condemned : 
"  Causa  cognita  multi  possunt  absolvi ;  incog- 
nita quidem  condemnari  nemo  jjotest"^  (Cic.  in 

Verr.,  1.  9).  Even  slaves  had  an  admitted  legal 
as  well  as  natural  right  to  be  heard  in  their  de- 
fence before  they  were  punished.— Romans. 
In  22  :  28,  Paul  says  that  he  was  "  free-born."' 
In  regard  to  the  probable  origin  of  his  Roman 
citizenship,  see  tlie  note  on  22  :  25.  It  ajipears 
that  Silas  possessed  the  same  rights,  but  it  is 
not  known  how  he  obtained  them.  At  first 
view  it  may  appear  surprising  that  Paul  did 
not  avow  himself  a  Roman  at  the  outset,  and 
thus  prevent  the  indignity  to  which  he,  had 
been  subjected.  "  But  the  infliction  of  it,"  says 
Biscoe,  "  was  so  hasty  that  he  had  not  time  to 
say  anything  that  might  make  for  his  defence  ; 
and  the  noise  and  confusion  were  so  great  that, 
had  he  cried  out  with  ever  so  loud  a  voice  that 
he  was  a  Roman,  he  might  reasonably  believe 


1  ["It  is  a  crime  to  bind  a  Roman  citizen;  a  heinous  oflTence  to  scourge  him  ;  almost  a  parricide  to  put  him  to 
death."] 

-  ["  When  a  case  has  been  tried  many  may  be  acquitted ;  but  while  it  is  yet  untried  no  one  can  be  con- 
demned."] 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


193 


us  into  prison  ;  and  now  do  they  thrust  us  out  privily? 
nay  verily  ;  but  let  them  come  themselves  and  letch  us 
out. 

'iS  And  the  Serjeants  told  these  words  unto  the  mag- 
istrates: and  they  feared,  when  they  heard  that  they 
were  Romans. 

39  And  they  came  and  besought  them,  and  brought 
them  out,  and  "desired  t/i^-m  to  depart  out  of  the  city. 

40  And  they  went  out  of  the  prison,  *and  entered 
into  the.  house  of  Lydia :  and  when  they  had  seen  the 
brethren,  they  comforted  them,  and  departed. 


are  Romans,  and  have  cast  us  into  prison  ;  and  do 
they  now  cast  us  out  privily?   nay  verily;  but  let 

38  them  come  themselves  and  bring  us  out.  And  the 
'Serjeants  reported  these  words  unto  the  -magis- 
trates: and  they  feared,  when  they  heard  that  they 

39  were  Romans ;  and  they  came  and  besought  them  ; 
and  when  they  had  brought  them  out,  they  asked 

40  them  to  go  away  from  the  city.  And  they  went  out 
of  the  prison,  and  entered  into  the  house  of  Lydia: 
and  when  they  had  seen  the  brethren,  they  <*com- 
forted  them,  and  departed. 


a  Matt.  8  :  34 6  ver.  U.- 


-1  Gr.  Victors 2  Gr.  prmtori . , ,  ,'i  Or,  exhorted 


that  he  should  not  be  regarded.  Seeing  also 
the  fury  of  the  multitude  (v.  22),  it  is  not  im- 
probable he  might  think  it  most  advisable  to 
submit  to  the  sentence  pronounced,  however 
unjust,  in  order  to  quiet  the  people  and  prevent 
a  greater  evil ;  for  he  was  in  danger  of  bemg 
forced  out  of  the  hands  of  the  magistrates  and 
torn  in  pieces.  But,  whatever  were  the  true 
reasons  which  induced  the  apostle  to  be  silent, 
the  overruling  hand  of  Providence  was  herein 
plainly  visible ;  for  the  conversion  of  the  jailer 
and  his  household  was  occasioned  by  the  exe- 
cution of  this  hasty  and  unjust  sentence." — 
And  do  they  now  send  us  forth  secretly  ? 
Some  render  the  verb  thrust  forth,  which  is 
too  strong  (comp.  9  :  4U)  and  draws  away  the 
emphasis  from  secretly,  to  which  it  belongs. 
— No,  certainly  {ov  ydp),  they  do  not  dismiss 
us  in  tliat  manner.  In  this  use,  ye  (resolving 
ydp  into  its  parts)  strengthens  the  denial,  while 
ipa  shows  the  dependence  of  the  answer  on 
what  precedes :  not  according  to  that — i.  e.  after 
such  treatment.  Klotz  (Ad  Devar.,  ii.  p.  242), 
Winer  (jS  53.  8.  b),  and  others  adopt  this  anal- 
ysis.— They  themselves,  instead  of  sending 
their  servants  to  us. — In  asserting  so  strongly 
their  personal  rights,  they  may  have  been  in- 
fluenced in  part  by  a  natural  sense  of  justice, 
and  in  part  by  a  regard  to  the  necessity  of 
such  a  vindication  of  their  innocence  to  the 
cause  of  Christ  at  Philippi.  It  was  important 
that  no  stain  should  rest  upon  their  reputa- 
tion. It  was  notorious  that  they  had  been 
scourged  and  imprisoned  as  criminals ;  and 
if,  after  their  departure,  any  one  had  sus- 
pected or  could  have  insinuated  that  po.ssibly 
they  had  suffered  not  without  cause,  it  would 
have  created  a  prejudice  against  the  truth.  It 
was  in  their  power  to  save  the  gospel  from  that 
reproach,  and  they  used  the  opportunity.  It 
may  be  proper  at  times  to  allow  the  wicked  or 
misguided  to  trample  upon  our  individual 
rights  and  interests  if  they  choose,  but  those 
13 


who  are  "  set  for  the  defence  of  the  gospel " 
owe  their  good  name  and  their  influence  to 
Christ  and  the  church,  and  have  a  right  to 
invoke  the  protection  of  the  laws  against 
any  invasion  of  their  means  of  public  use- 
fulness. 

38,  Reported  back.  (See  on  v.  36.)— 
Were  afraid.  They  had  cause  for  apprehen- 
sion. (Comp.  22  :  29.)  A  magistrate  who  pun- 
ished a  Roman  citizen  wrongfully  might  be 
indicted  for  treason  ;  he  was  liable  to  suffer 
death  and  the  confiscation  of  all  his  prop- 
erty (Grot.). 

39,  Entreated,  begged  (3 :  a).  This  was  not 
an  une.vampled  humiliation  for  a  Roman  offi- 
cer. Lucian  mentions  a  case  of  false  imprison- 
ment in  which  the  governor  of  a  province  not 
only  acknowledged  his  error,  but  paid  a  large 
sum  of  money  to  those  whom  he  had  injured, 
in  order  to  bribe  them  to  be  silent. 

40,  Unto  Lydia,  whose  guests  they  were 
(v.  15),  and  where  the  disciples  may  have  been 
accustomed  to  meet. — The  brethren,  who 
had  been  converted  at  Philippi,  and  who 
formed  the  beginning  of  the  church  afterward 
addressed  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Philijipians. 
This  cliurch  was  founded,  therefore,  about  A.  D. 
52.  We  have  evidence  in  that  letter  that  no 
one  of  all  the  churches  planted  h\  Paul  pos- 
sessed so  entirely  his  confidence  or  exhibited 
the  power  of  the  gospel  in  greater  purity. — 
Exhorted^viz.  to  be  firm,  to  cleave  to  the 
gospel  (comp.  11  :  23) ;  not  comforted,  wliich 
would  be  too  specific  for  the  occasion. — They 
went  forth.  The  narrator,  it  will  be  seen, 
proceeds  now  in  the  third  person,  and  main- 
tains that  style  as  far  as  20  :  5.  Some  have 
inferred  from  this  that  Luke  remained  at 
Philippi  until  Paul's  last  visit  to  Macedonia. 
We  find  Timothy  witli  the  apostle  at  Berea 
(n :  u),  but  whether  he  accompanied  him  at 
this  time  or  rejoined  him  afterward  cannot  be 
decided.     (See  further  on  17  :  10.) 


194 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


CHAPTER    XVII. 


vrOW  when  they  had  passed  through  Ainphipolis  and 
iM  ApoUonia,  they  eauie  to  Thessalonica,  where  was  a 
synagogue  of  the  Jews  : 

2  And  Paul,  as  his  manner  wiis,  "went  in  unto  them, 
and  three  sabbath  days  reasoned  with  them  out  of  the 
scriptures, 

S  Opening  and  alleging,  'that  Christ  must  needs  have 
suffered,  and  risen  again  from  the  dead ;  and  that  this 
Jesus,  whom  1  preach  unto  you,  is  Christ. 


1  Now  when  they  had  passed  through  Aniphipolia 
and  Apollonia,  they  came   to  Thessalonica,  ^^  here 

2  was  a  synagogue  ol  the  Jews:  and  Paul,  as  his  cus- 
tom was,  went  in  unto  them,  and  for  three  'sabbath 

3  days  reasoned  with  them  from  the  scriptures,  open- 
ing and  alleging,  that  it  behaved  the  Christ  to  sutler, 
and  to  rise  again  from  the  dead  ;  and  that  this  Jesus, 
whom,  said  tie,  1  proclaim  unto  you,  is  the  Christ. 


o  Luke  4:  16;  oh.  9  :  20  ;  13  :  5,  14;  14  :  1 ;  16:  13;  19:  8.... 6  Luke  24  :  26,  46;  ch.  18  :  28  ;  Gal.  3  :  1.- 


1-4.  THEY  PROCEED  TO  THESSALO- 
NICA, AND   PREACH   THERE. 

1.  The  place  which  invited  their  labors  next 
was  T/i£ssalonica,  about  a  hundred  miles  south- 
west of  Philippi.  They  travelled  thither  on 
the  great  military  road  which  led  from  Byzan- 
tium to  Dyrrachium,  or  Aulona,  opposite  to 
Brundusium,  in  Italy.  It  was  the  Macedonian 
extension  of  the  Appian  Way.  They  could 
accomplish  the  journey  in  three  or  four  days 
(Wiesl.). — On  leaving  Philippi  they  came  first 
to  Amphipolis,  which  was  south-we.st,  distant 
about  thirty  miles.  This  place  was  about  three 
miles  from  the  sea,  on  the  eastern  bank  of  the 
Strymon,  which  flowed  almost  round  it  and 
gave  to  it  its  name. — Apollonia,  their  next 
station,  was  about  the  same  distance  south- 
west from  Amphipolis.  They  remained  a 
night,  perhaps,  at  each  of  these  towns. — 
Thessalonica   was    a  rich  commercial  city 


Pind.,  p.  157)  and  read :  From  Philippi  to  Am- 
phipolis, thirty-two  miles  ;  from  Amphipolis  to 
Apollonia,  thirty-two  miles ;  from  Apollonia 
to  Thessalonica,  thirty-six  miles. — The  syna- 
gogue, definite,  because  the  Jews  in  that  re- 
gion may  have  had  but  one  such  place  of  wor- 
ship.    (W.  ^  17.  1.) 

2.  Here,  again,  according  to  his  custom, 
Paul  betakes  himself  first  to  the  Jews.  (Comp. 
13  :  5, 14;  14  : 1.)  Custom  {eltudoi)  has  the  con- 
struction of  a  noun,  but  governs  the  dative  as 
a  verb.  (Comp.  Luke  4  :  16.)  The  genitive 
would  have  been  the  ordinary  case.  (W.  ^  31. 
7.  N.  2.) — From  the  Scriptures.  He  drew 
the  contents  of  his  discourse  from  that  source. 
(W.  §  47.  p.  333.) 

3.  Opening — i.  e.  the  Scriptures — unfolding 
their  sense.  »  (Comp.  Luke  24:32.)  —  Pro- 
pounding, maintaining. — That  the  Mes- 
siah   must    suffer,   in    order    to    fulfil    the 


THESSALONICA. 


near  the  mouth  of  the  Echedorus,  on  the 
Thermaic  Gulf,  about  twenty-eight  miles  near- 
ly west  of  Apollonia.  It  is  now  called  Sa- 
loniki,  having  a  population  of  se\-enty  thou- 
sand, of  whom  thirty  thousand  are  Jews. 
Luke's  record  almost  reminds  us  of  a  leaf 
from  a  traveller's  note-book.  He  mentions 
the  places  in  their  exact  order.  We  turn  to 
the  Itinerarium  Antonini  Augmti  (ed.  Parth.  et 


Scriptures.  (Comp.  3  :  18;  IMatt.  26  :  54,  56; 
Mark  14  :  49.)— And  that  this  one— viz.  he 
who  was  to  die  and  rise  again— is  the  Mes- 
siah Jesus— i.  e.  the  Jesus  called  Messiah— 
whom  I  announce  unto  you.  The  scope 
of  the  argument  is  this  :  The  true  Messiah  must 
die  and  rise  again  ;  Jesus  has  fulfilled  that  con- 
dition of  prophecy,  and  is  therefore  the  prom- 
ised Messiah.     (Comp.  2  :  24,  sq. ;  13  :  27,  sq.) 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


195 


4  "And  some  of  them  believed,  and  consorted  with 
Paul  and  'Silas;  and  of  the  devout  Greeks  a  great 
multitude,  and  of  the  chief  women  not  a  few. 

5  1[  But  the  Jews  which  lielieved  not,  moved  with 
envy,  took  unto  them  certain  lewd  fellows  of  the  baser 
sort,  and  gathered  a  company,  and  set  all  the  city  on 
au  uproar,  and  assaulted  the  house  of  'Jason,  and 
sought  to  bring  them  out  to  the  people. 

6  And  when  they  found  them  not,  they  drew  Jason 
and  certain  brethren  unto  the  rulers  of  the  city,  cry- 
ing, "These  that  have  turned  the  world  upside  down 
are  come  hither  also ; 


4  And  sonic  of  them  were  persuaded,  and  consorted 
with  l^aul  and  Silas;  and  of  the  devout  (.reeks  a 
great  multitude,  and  of  the  chief  women  not  a  few, 

5  Hut  the  Jews,  being  moved  with  jealousy,  took  unto 
them  certain  vile  fellows  of  the  rabble,  and  gather- 
ing a  crowd,  set  the  city  on  an  uproar;  and  assault- 
ing the  house  of  Jason,  they  sought  to  bring  them 

6  forth  to  the  people.  And  when  they  found  then* 
not,  they  dragged  Jason  and  certain  brethren  before 
the  rulers  of  the  city,  crying,  These  that  have  turned 


a  eh.  28:  21....6cb.  15:  22,  27,  32,  40.... c  Kom.  16  :  21....<i  ch.  16:20. 


4.  Certain  of  them — i.e.  of  the  Jews.  (See 
vv.  1  and  2.) — Attached  themselves  (middle 
sense)  to  Paul  and  Silas  (Olsli.,  WhL,  Rob.). 
This  is  tlie  e<usier  sense,  and  receives  support 
from  V.  34  and  14  :  4,  where  we  meet  with  the 
same  tiiought  in  like  circumstances.  Others 
render  were  allotted,  granted  to  them,  as  it  were 
by  divine  favor.  This  may  be  the  surer  philo- 
logical sense,  and  is  adopted  by  Winer  (^  39.  2), 
De  Wette,  Meyer,  and  Alford.— And  of  the 
first  women  (comp.  13  :  50)  not  a  few.  The 
women  were  evidently  "devout"  (ae^o/neVwi/)  or 
proselytes  (comp.  13  :  50),  as  well  as  the  men ; 
so  that  all  those  mentioned  as  converts  in  this 
verse  were  won  to  Christianity  from  the  Jewish 
faith,  not  from  a  state  of  heathenism.  But  in 
1  Thess.  1  :  9,  Paul  speaks  as  if  many  of  the 
Thessalonian  Christians  had  been  idolaters  (ye 
turned  to  God  from  idols).  Hence  it  is 
possible,  as  Paley  conjectures,  that  this  verse 
describes  the  result  of  Paul's  labors  during  tlie 
three  weeks  that  he  preached  in  the  synagogue 
(v.  2),  and  that  an  interval  which  Luke  passes 
over  preceded  the  events  related  in  vv.  5-10. 
During  this  interval  the  apostle,  having  been 
excluded  froiii  the  synagogue  by  the  bigotry  of 
the  Jews,  may  have  preached  directly  to  the 
heathen.  Another  opinion  is  that  he  preached 
to  the  Gentiles  during  the  week-time,  while  on 
the  Sabbath  he  labored  for  the  Jews  in  their 
public  assemblies  (Neand.). 

5-9.  THE  JEWS  ACCUSE  PAUL  AND 
SILAS  BEFORE  THE  MAGLSTRATES. 

5.  Which  believed  not  (T.  R.)  lacks  sup- 
port.—Lewd  fellows,  or  market-loungers 
(mhrostraiii,  subhasUkanl).  Had  it  been  in  the 
East,  where  such  people  loiter  about  the  gates, 
the  term  would  have  been  inappropriate.  It  is 
instructive  to  observe  how  true  the  narrative  is 
t«  the  habits  of  different  nations,  though  the 
scene  changes  so  rapidly  from  one  land  to  an- 
other. But  why  should  the  Jews  seek  such 
coadjutors?  The  reason  is  found  in  their  situ- 
ation: the  Jews  out  of  Judea  had  but  little 


power,  and  must  secure  the  aid  of  the  native 
inhabitants. — Jason  was  their  host  (v.  7;,  and 
also  a  relative  of  Paul,  if  he  was  the  one  men- 
tioned in  Rom.  IG  :  21.  In  the  latter  case  he 
must  have  been  at  Corinth  when  Paul  wrote 
the  Epistle  to  the  Romans.  So  common  a 
name  amounts  to  little  as  proof  of  the  relation- 
ship.—  Sought  to  bring  them  unto  the 
people,  and  at  the  same  time  to  the  rulers 
of  the  city  (v.  e) — i.  e.  into  the  forum,  where 
the  nuigistrates  were  accustomed  to  try  causes 
in  the  i>resence  of  the  people.  (Comp.  16  :  19.) 
They  raised  a  mob  (oxAon-ot^o-ai'Te?),  in  order  to 
arrest  the  offenders,  but  to  the  people  shows 
that  they  expected  the  trial  to  take  place  Ijefore 
an  orderly  assembly. 

6.  But  not  having  found  them,  they 
dragged  Jason  and  certain  brethren 
before  the  city  rulers.  Instead  of  chang- 
ing their  plan  on  failing  to  apprehend  the 
leaders,  they  seized  upon  such  others  as  fell  in 
their  way,  and  treated  them  as  they  had  designed 
to  treat  Paul  and  Silas.  Lange's  remark  is  in- 
correct that  they  would  have  sacriliced  the 
strangers  at  once  to  the  popular  fury,  but  must 
be  more  cautious  in  dealing  with  citizens.  The 
brethren  appear  to  have  been  witli  Jason  at 
the  time  of  the  assault ;  probably  they  were 
some  of  the  Thessalonians  who  had  believed. 
— These  are  Paul  and  Silas,  since  they  are 
those  whom  Jason  entertained. — Are  present 
also  here,  as  they  have  been  in  other  places, 
and  for  the  same  purpose. — Here  and  in  v.  8, 
Luke  terms  the  magistrates  of  Thessalonica 
politarchs ;  and  his  accuracy  in  this  respect 
is  confirmed  by  an  inscription  of  that  place. 
(See  Boeckh's  Corpus,  vol.  ii.  p.  53,  No.  1967.) 
The  inscription,  which  is  of  the  Roman  times, 
gives  a  list  of  seven  magistrates  bearing  tliis 
title.  This  is  the  more  woithy  of  remark  be- 
cause the  title  is  a  very  rare  one,  and  might 
easily  be  confounded  with  that  of  poliarchs, 
which  is  another  appellation  of  magistrates  in 
Greek  cities.' 


1  This  note  is  due  to  President  Woolsey,  in  the  New  Englandir,  vol.  x.  p.  144. 


196 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


7  Whom  Jason  hath  received  :  and  these  all  do  con- 
trarj-  to  the  decrees  of  Csesar,  "saying  that  there  is  an- 
other king,  one.  Jesus. 

8  And  they  troubled  the  people  and  the  rulers  of  the 
city,  when  they  heard  these  things. 

y  And  when  they  had  taken  security  of  Jason,  and 
of  the  others,  they  let  them  go. 

It)  ^  And  'the  brethren  immediately  sent  away  Paul 
and  Silas  by  night  unto  Berea :  who  coming  Ihitbtr  went 
into  the  synagogue  of  the  Jews. 

11  These  were  more  noble  than  those  in  Thessalonica, 
in  that  they  received  the  word  with  all  readiness  of 
mind,  and  '^searched  the  scriptures  daily,  whether 
those  things  were  so. 


7  Uhe  world  upside  down  are  come  hither  also;  whom 
Jason  hath  received:  and  these  all  act  contrary  to 
the  decrees  of  Caesar,  saying  that  there  is  another 

8  king,  one  Jesus.  And  they  troubled  the  multitude 
and  the  rulers  of  the  city,  when  they  heard  these 

9  things.  And  when  they  had  taken  security  from 
Jason  and  the  rest,  they  let  them  go 

10  And  the  brethren  immediately  sent  away  Paul 
and  Silas  by  night  unto  lercea :  who  when  they 
were  come  thither  went  into  the  synagogue  of  the 

11  Jews.  Now  these  were  more  noble  than  those  in 
Thessalonica,  in  that  they  received  the  word  with 
all    readiness  of  mind,  examining   the  scriptures 


7.  All  these— viz.  Paul,  Silas,  and  their 
followers.  The  pronoun  includes  more  than 
its  grammatical  antecedent.  —  The  decrees 
of  Caesar — i.  e.  the  Roman  laws  against  re- 
bellion or  treason.  They  are  said  to  be  the 
decrees  of  the  emperor — i.  e.  of  each  suc- 
cessive emperor — because  they  emanated  from 
him,  guarded  his  rights,  and  had  the  support 
of  his  authority.  The  reigning  emperor  at  this 
time  was  Claudius. — Another  kiug,  sovereign. 
(Comp.  John  19  :  15 ;  1  Pet.  2  :  13.)  [It  is  no- 
ticeable also  that  the  preaching  of  Paul  in  this 
city  must  have  contained  references  to  a  future 
coming  and  reign  of  Christ  which  may  have 
been  laid  hold  of  and  perverted  by  enemies, 
especially  as  they  seem  to  have  been  misunder- 
stood by  some  who  believed.  (See  1  Thess. 
4  :  14 ;  5  :  2,  23 ;  2  Thess.  1  :  7,  8 ;  2  :  1-12.)— 
A.  H.]  The  Greeks  applied  this  term  to  the 
emperor,  though  the  Romans  never  styled  him 
rex. 

8.  Troubled,  etc.  The  statement  alarmed 
them,  because  tlie  existence  of  such  a  party  in 
their  midst  would  compromise  their  character 
for  loyalty  and  expose  them  to  the  vengeance 
of  their  Roman  masters.     (See  on  19  :  40.) 

9.  Having  taken  bail,  or  security.  Said 
to  be  a  law-phrase  adopted  in  Greek  for  satis 
accipere.  What  they  engaged  would  naturally 
be  that,  as  far  as  it  depended  on  them,  the  pub- 
lic peace  should  not  be  violated,  and  that  the 
alleged  authors  of  the  disturbance  should  leave 
tiie  city  (Neand.).  Instead  of  combining  the 
two  objects,  some  restrict  the  stipulation  to  the 
first  point  (Mey.),  while  others  restrict  it  to  the 
last  (Kuin.). — The  others  who  had  been 
brought  before  the  tribunal  with  Jason.  (See 
V.  6.) — LiCt  them  go,  dismissed  them  from 
custody — viz.  the  Thessalonians,  not  the  mis- 
sionaries who  had  escaped  arrest. 

10-13.  PAUL  AND  SILAS  PROCEED  TO 
BERCEA. 

10.  Immediately,  on  the  evening  of  the 
day  of  the  tumult.     Paul  and  Silas  had  spent 


three  or  four  weeks  at  least  in  Thessalonica 
(see  V.  2),  and  very  possibly  some  time  longer. 
(See  on  v.  4.)  We'seler  proposes  six  or  eight 
weeks .  as  the  term  of  their  residence  in  that 
city.  Being  obliged  to  leave  so  hastily,  Paul 
was  anxious  for  the  welfare  and  stability  of 
the  recent  converts,  and  departed  with  the  in- 
tention of  returning  as  soon  as  the  present  ex- 
asperation against  him  should  be  allayed  so  as 
to  justify  it  (i  Thess.  2:18).  Subsequent  events 
frustrated  this  purpose,  and  luider  that  disap- 
pointment he  sent  Timothy  to  them  to  supply 
his  place  (i  xhess.  3  :2).  It  may  be  added  that 
while  Paul  was  here  he  received  supplies  twice 
from  the  church  at  Philippi.  (See  Phil.  4:15, 
16.)  From  this  source,  and  from  his  own  per- 
sonal labor,  he  derived  his  support,  without 
being  dependent  at  all  on  the  Thessalonians. 
(See  1  Tliess.  2  :  9;  2  Thess.  3  :  8.)— During 
the  night.  This  secrecy  indicates  that  they 
were  still  in  tlanger  from  the  enmity  of  the 
Jews.  (Comp.  20  :  3.)— Unto  Berea.  Berea, 
now  Verria,  was  about  forty-live  miles  south- 
west of  Tliessalonica,  on  the  Astrceus,  a  small 
tributary  of  the  Haliacmon.  (See  Forbg., 
Handb.,  iii.  p.  1061.)  The  modern  town  has 
six  thousand  inhabitants,  of  whom  two  hun- 
dred are  Jews,  ten  or  tLfteen  hundred  Turks, 
and  the  rest  Greeks. 

11.  More  noble,  in  their  disposition. — For 
all  without  the  article,  see  on  4  :  29. — From 
day  to  day.  The  (to)  particularizes  the  repeti- 
tion or  constancy  of  the  act.  (W.  §  20.  3.) — If 
these  things  taught  by  Paul  were  so,  as  he 
affirmed — ;.  e.  when  examined  by  the  Scriptures. 
[A  rare  encomium !  And  if  it  was  a  proof  of 
true  nobleness  in  the  Bereans  to  test  the 
apostle's  doctrine  by  comparing  it  with  tlie 
sacred  Scriptures  in  their  possession,  it  must 
be  a  proof  of  true  nobleness  to  do  the  same 
thing  now — to  prove  all  things  and  hold  fast 
that  which  is  good  (i  Thess.  5-.  21  \  to  subject  novel 
opinions  to  a  thorough  comparison  with  the 
established  word  of  God.    The  duty  of  private 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


197 


12  Therefore  many  of  them  believed ;  also  of  hon- 
orable women  which  were  Greeks,  and  of  men,  not  a 
few. 

13  But  when  the  Jews  of  Thessalonica  had  know- 
ledge that  the  word  of  God  was  preached  of  Paul  at 
Berea,  they  came  thither  also,  and  stirred  up  the  peo- 
ple. 

14  "And  then  immediately  the  brethren  sent  away 
Paul  to  go  as  it  were  to  the  sea :  but  yilas  and  Timo- 
theus  abode  there  still. 

In  And  they  that  conducted  Paul  brought  him  unto 
Athens :  and  'receiving  a  commaudiueut  unto  Silas 
and  Timotheus  for  to  come  to  him  with  all  speed,  they 
departed. 

16  1[  Now  while  Paul  waited  for  them  at  Athens, 


12  daily,  whether  these  things  were  so.  Many  of  them 
therefore  believed ;  also  of  the  Greek  women  of  hon- 

13  Oi  able  estate,  and  of  men,  not  a  few.  But  when  the 
Jews  of  Thessalonica  had  knowledge  that  the  word 
of  God  was  proclaimed  of  Paul  at  Bercea  also,  they 
came  thither  likewise,  stirring  up  and  troubling  the 

14  multitudes.  And  then  immediately  the  brethren 
sent  forth  Paul  to  go  as  far  as  to  the  sea:  and  Silas 

15  and  Timothy  abode  there  still.  But  they  that  con- 
ducted Paul  brought  him  as  far  as  Athens :  and  re- 
ceiving a  commandment  unto  Silas  and  Timothy 
that  they  should  come  to  him  with  all  speed,  they 
departed. 

16  Now  while  Paul  waited  for  them  at  Athens,  his 


a  Matt.  10  :  23 &  ch.  18  :  5. 


interpretation  is  therefore  plain.  Whoever  can 
understand  the  words  spoken  by  a  living  teacher 
can,  if  he  will,  interpret  the  same  words  when 
written  in  a  book,  or  compare  tliem  with  other 
written  words.  There  is  also  in  this  passage 
clear  evidence  that  Luke  and  the  Bereans,  and 
the  apostle  likewise,  looked  upon  the  Old-Testa- 
ment Scriptures  as  being  a  suitable  standard  by 
which  to  try  the  preacliing  of  Paul,  and  there- 
fore as  possessing  divine  authority. — A.  H.] 

12.  Many  of  them  believed  [i.  c.  of  the 
Jews  just  described.  A  large  part  of  those 
who  resorted  to  the  synagogue  for  worship 
were  probably  of  Jewish  derivation,  though 
some  of  them  may  have  been  proselytes  from 
heathenism.  —  A.  H.].  Greek  (adj.)  agrees 
with  both  womeu  and  men.  The  men  were 
Greeks  as  well  as  the  women.  (See  the  note  on 
2  :  42.)— For  honorable,  sec  13  :  50. — Few 
(oAi'yot)  may  be  masculine,  because  men  is  the 
nearer  word,  or  out  of  regard  to  the  leading 
gender. 

13.  Also  associates  Berea  with  Thessalonica. 
— There  also  belongs  to  the  participle,  not  to 
the  verb.  They  excited  the  populace  there 
also  as  they  had  done  in  Thes.salonica. — 
Luke's  narrative  implies  that  the  Jews  were 
somewhat  numerous  and  influential  at  Berea. 
Coins  of  this  city  are  still  extant,  and,  unlike 
most  other  examples  of  ancient  money,  have 
on  them  no  pagan  figure  or  symbol.  Akerman 
suggests  {Num.  Illmtr.)  in  explanation  of  this  I 
singular  fact  that  the  magistrates  may  have  re-  [ 
jected  such  devices  as  a  concession  to  the  feel- 
ings of  the  Jewish  population. 

14.  15.  PAUL  ADVANCES  TO  ATHENS.     ' 
14.  To  go  as  it  were  to  the  sea— lit.  to 

journey  as  upon  the  sea  ;  i.  e.  as  if  with  j 
such  a  purpose.  The  Greek  particle  here  used,  j 
(cos)  with  upon  (etri),  unto  (eU),  or  toward  (n-po?),  ] 
denotes  design,  but  leaves  it  uncertain  whether  ! 
the  design  be  executed  or  professed  merely.  (See 
W.  ?  65.  9 ;  K.  ?  290.  R.  2;  B.  ^  149.)  '  Lach-  [ 
mann  would  substitute  unto  (eW)  for  as  {it)— as  I 


far  as  unto  the  sea — but  against  the  evidence. 
[With  Lach.  agree  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort, 
Anglo-Am.  Revisers,  after  X  A  B  E,  many  cur- 
sives, and  the  Vul.,  Syr.,  and  Copt,  versions. 
The  evidence  now  is  therefore  for  rather  than 
against  unto  (eius). — A.  H.]  Some  suppose  the 
movement  here  to  have  been  a  feint  —  that 
Paul's  conductors,  having  set  out  ostensibly 
for  the  sea,  afterward,  in  order  to  elude  pursuit, 
changed  their  course  and  proceeded  to  Athens 
by  land  (Grot.,  Bng.,  Olsh.).  But  in  tliat  event 
they  would  have  passed  through  various  im- 
portant places  on  the  way,  and  Luke  miglit  be 
expected  to  name  some  of  them,  as  he  has  done 
in  v.  1.  The  journey  by  land  would  have  been 
two  hundred  and  fifty-one  Roman  miles  {Itlner. 
Anton.).  [Besides,  if  the  best-supported  text  is 
followed,  the  basis  for  a  conjecture  that  going  to 
the  sea  may  have  been  a  feint  is  taken  away. — 
A.  H.]  With  a  fair  wind  Paul  and  his  party 
could  have  sailed  from  Berea  or  the  mouth  of 
the  H.'diacmon  to  Athens  in  about  three  days 
(Wiesl.) ;  and  the  probability  is  that  they  took 
this  more  expeditious  course  (Win.,  De  Wet., 
Wiesl.,  Mey.).  (For  an  interesting  sketch  of 
the  places  and  objects  which  would  be  seen  on 
such  a  voyage  the  reader  is  referred  to  Cony- 
beare  and  Howson,  i.  p.  403,  s^'.)— Timothy 
was  last  mentioned  in  16  :  1. 

15.  Those  who  conducted — lit.  set  him 
along  on  the  journey,  whether  by  sea  or  land. 
— Having  received  before  their  departure, 
rather  than  receiving  (E.  V.),  which  might 
imply  that  they  returned  in  con.sequence  of  tb.e 
command. — With  all  speed,  or  as  soon  as 
possible  (K.  I  239.  R.  2.  d) — i.  e.  after  perform- 
ing the  service  for  which  they  had  remained. 
Whether  they  rejoined  tlie  apostle  at  Athens  or 
not  is  uncertain.     (See  on  the  next  verse.) 

16-18.  HOW  HE  WAS  AFFECTED  BY 
THE  IDOLATRY  AT  ATHENS. 

16.  While  he  was  waiting  for  them — 
viz.  Silas  and  Timothy.  The  most  natural  in- 
ference from  1  Thess.  3:1  is  that  Timothy,  at 


198                                                 THE 

ACTS.                                   [Ch.  XVII. 

"his  spirit  was  stirred  in  him,  when  he  saw  the  city 
wholly  given  to  idolatry. 

spirit  was  provoked  within  him,  as  he  beheld  the 

a  2  Pet.  2  :  8. 

least,  soon  arrived,  in  accordance  with  Paul's 
expectation,  but  was  immediately  sent  away 
by  the  apostle  to  Tliessalonica.  As  Silas  is  not 
mentioned  in  tliat  passage,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  he  may  have  failed  for  some  reason  to  come 
at  this  time,  or,  if  he  came,  that,  like  Timothy, 
he  may  have  left  again  at  once,  but  for  a  dif- 
ferent destination ;  which  last  circumstance 
would  account  for  the  omission  of  his  name 
in  that  passage  of  the  Epistle.  Our  next  notice 
of  them  occurs  in  18  :  5,  where  they  are  repre- 
sented as  coming  down  from  Macedonia  to  Cor- 
inth ;  and  we  may  suppose  either  that  they  went 
to  that  city  directly  from  Berea,  without  hav- 


otherwise  unknown  to  the  extant  Greek,  but  is 
formed  after  a  common  analogy  {e.  g.  Kara^jreAos, 
KardSevSpos,  KaTa.(j>ofioi,  etc.).  The  epithet  applies 
to  the  city,  not  directly  to  the  inhabitimts.  A 
person  could  hardly  take  his  position  at  any 
point  in  ancient  Athens  where  the  eye  did  not 
range  over  temples,  altai's,  and  statues  of  the 
gods  almost  without  number.  Petronius  says 
satirically  that  it  was  easier  to  find  a  god  at 
Athens  than  a  man.  Another  ancient  writer 
says  that  some  of  the  streets  were  so  crowded 
with  those  who  sold  idols  that  it  was  almost  im- 
possible for  one  to  make  his  way  through  them. 
Pausanias  declares  that  Athens  had  more  im- 


ing  followed  Paul  to  Athens,  or  that  they  re- 
turned from  Athens  to  Macedonia  and  pro- 
ceeded from  there  to  Corinth.  The  latter  view 
assumes  that  Luke  has  passed  over  tlie  inter- 
mediate journey  in  silence.  Such  omissions  are 
entirely  consistent  with  the  character  of  a  frag- 
mentary history  like  that  of  the  Acts.  Still 
other  combinations  are  possible. — His  spirit 
was  aroused  in  him.  (Comp.  15  -.39;  1  Cor. 
13  :  5.)  This  verb  represents  the  apostle  as 
deeply  moved  with  a  feeling  allied  to  that  of 
indignation  at  beliolding  such  a  profanation  of 
the  worship  due  to  God  as  f(irced  itself  upon 
his  view  on  every  side. — Full  of  idols  (Karei- 
6(oAov),  not  given  to  idolatry.     The  word  is 


ages  than  all  the  rest  of  Greece  put  together. 
Wetstein  quotes  Xenophon,  Isocrates,  Cicero, 
Livy,  Strabo,  Lucian,  and  others  as  bearing  the 
same  testimony.  Liike,  therefore,  has  not  ap- 
plied this  epithet  at  random.  The  Greek  lan- 
guage offered  to  him  a  hundred  other  terms 
which  would  have  stated  wliat  was  true  in  re- 
lation to  a  lieathen  city,  but  we  see  that  he  has 
chosen  among  them  all  the  very  one  which  de- 
scribes the  precise  external  aspect  of  Athens 
that  would  be  the  first  to  strike  the  eye  of  a 
stranger  like  Paul.  This  mark  of  accuracy  in 
tlie  writer  those  obliterate,  or  very  nearly  oblit- 
erate, who  make  tlie  expression  refer  to  the  de- 
votion of  the  Athenians  to  idolatry.^ 


1  Hermann  'Ad  Vig  ,  p.  (i^f!,  ed.  18241  turns  aside  to  correct  this  error:  "  KareiSioAos  ttoAis,  Actor.  Apost.   17,  10, 
nou  est,  uti  quidani  opinantur,  simulacris  dedita  urbs,  sed  siinnlacris  referta." 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


199 


17  Therefore  disputed  he  in  the  synagogue  with  the 
Jews,  and  with  the  devout  persons,  and  iu  tlie  marlcet 
daily  witli  them  that  met  with  him. 

18  Then  certaiu  philosophers  of  the  Epicureans,  and 
of  the  Stoics,  encountered  him.  And  some  said.  What 
will  this  babbler  say  ?  other  some.  He  seenieth  to  be  a 
setter  forth  of  strange  gods ;  because  he  preached  unto 
them  Jesus,  and  the  resurrection. 


17  city  full  of  idols.  So  he  reasoned  in  the  synagogue 
with  the  Jews  and  the  devout  persons,  and  in  the 
marketplace  every  day  with   them  that  met    with 

18  him.  And  certain  also  of  the  l.picurean  and  Stoic 
philosophers  encountered  him.  And  some  said, 
v\  hat  would  this  babbler  say?  other  some,  He 
seemeth  to  be  a  setter  forth  of  strange  igods:  be- 


1  Gr.  demons. 


17,  The  apostle's  ordinary  course  was  to  ad- 
dress liiniself  exclusively  at  first  to  his  own 
countrymen  and  the  Jewish  proselytes.  At 
Athens  he  departed  from  this  rule. — There- 
fore— i.  e.  being  aroused  by  the  sight  of  so 
much  idolatry.  The  spectacle  around  him 
urges  him  to  commence  preaching  simultane- 
ously to  Jews  and  Greeks.  Some  adopt  a 
looser  connection:  therefore — i.  e.  being  at 
Athens  (De  Wette).  Some  restrict  therefore 
to  the  second  clause :  his  zeal  impelled  him  to 
preach  in  the  market.  It  is  arbitrary  to  divide 
the  sentence  in  that  manner. — In  the  market 
— i.  e.  of  the  city,  not  the  one  in  which  he  hap- 
pened to  be  (Mey.).  It  is  generally  admitted 
that  the  Athenians  had  i^roperly  but  one  mar- 
ket, although  Leake  has  shown  it  to  be  probable 
that  "  during  the  many  centuries  of  Athenian 
prosperity  the  boundaries  of  the  Agora,  or  at 
least  of  its  frequented  part,  underwent  consider- 
able variation."!  The  notices  of  ancient  writers 
are  somewhat  vague  a.s  to  its  course  and  extent, 
but  it  is  agreed  that  the  site  was  never  so 
changed  as  to  exclude  the  famous  Poecil'  {a-Toa 
jroi(ciA)j),  which,  according  to  Forch hammer's 
Plan,  stood  off  against  the  Acropolis  on  the 
west.  In  this  porch,  as  is  well  known,  the 
philosophers,  rhetoricians,  and  others  were 
accustomed  to  meet  for  conversation  and  dis- 
cussion; and  hence  it  lay  entirely  in  the 
course  of  things  that  some  of  these  men 
should  fall,  as  Luke  states,  in  the  way  of 
the  apostle. 

18.  The  Epicureans.  The  Ejncureans  were 
the  "  minute  philosophers,"  the  Greek  Saddu- 
cees  of  the  age ;  they  admitted  the  existence  of 
gods,  but  regarded  them  as  indolent  beings  who 
paid  no  attention  to  the  actions  or  affairs  of 
men ;  they  had  no  faith  in  a  providence  or  in 
accountability  or  in  any  retrilmtion  to  come. 
Their  great  practical  dogma  was  that  a  wise 
man  will  make  the  most  of  all  the  means  of 
enjoyment  within  his  reach.  Epicurus,  the 
founder  of  the  sect,  had  taught  a  higher  idea 
of  happiness,  but  his  followers  in  the  Roman 
age,  and  earlier  still,  had  reduced  it  to  the 
grossest  sensualism.      The  frivolous   spirit  of 


this  sect  appears,  perhaps,  in  the  first  of  the 
questions  addressed  to  Paul.  —  The  Stoics. 
Tlie  Stoics  were  distinguished  in  some  respects 
for  a  more  reflecting  turn  of  mind ;  they  ex- 
tolled virtue,  insisted  on  subjecting  the  passions 
to  reason,  and  urged  the  importance  of  becom- 
ing independent  of  the  ordinary  sources  of  en- 
joyment and  suffering.  Some  of  the  most  ad- 
mired characters  of  antiquity  belonged  to  this 
school.  But  the  Stoics  were  essentially  fatalists 
in  their  religious  views ;  they  were  self-con-  • 
jjlacent,  boasted  of  their  indifference  to  the 
world,  and  affected  a  style  of  morals  so  im- 
practicable as  to  render  them  almost  neces- 
sarily insincere  or  hypocritical.  In  Epicurean- 
ism, it  was  man's  sensual  nature  which  arrayed 
itself  against  the  claims  of  the  gospel ;  in  Stoi- 
cism, it  was  his  self-righteousness  and  pride  of 
intellect ;  and  it  is  difficult  to  say  which  of  the 
two  systems  rendered  its  votaries  the  more  in- 
disposed to  embrace  the  truth.  It  might  have 
seemed  to  the  credit  of  Christianity  had  it  been 
represented  as  gaining  at  least  a  few  proselytes, 
in  this  centre  of  Grecian  refinemeift,  from  the 
ranks  of  its  .scholars  and  philosophers ;  but 
Luke  has  no  such  triumphs  to  record.  He 
relates  the  case  as  it  was ;  the  apostle  was 
ridiculed,  his  message  was  treated  with  con- 
tempt.—  Encountered  him,  conversed  or 
disputed  with  him  (E.  V.,  De  Wet. ;  comp. 
4  :  15) ;  not  met  irith  him,  as  in  20  :  14  (Bng. 
Mey.),  since  the  form,  as  imperf.,  applies  better 
to  a  discussion  than  to  a  single  contact  of  the 
parties  such  as  Luke  mentions  here.  And  said 
agrees  with  either  sense.  [There  is  Imt  a  sligiit 
difference  between  the  view  of  ^Sleyer  in  his  last 
ed.  and  that  of  Dr.  Hackctt.  For  Meyer  says  : 
"  That  it  was  Epicureans  and  Stoics  who  fell 
into  conflict  with  him,  .  .  .  and  not  Academics 
and  Peripatetics,  is  to  be  explained  .  .  .  from 
the  greater  contrast  of  their  philosophic  tenets 
with  the  doctrines  of  Christianity.  The  one 
had  their  principle  of  pleasure,  and  the  other 
their  pride  of  virtue.  And  both  repudiated 
faith  in  the  Divine  Providence."  Only,  the 
imperfect  tense  of  the  verb  is  favorable  to  the 
translation  given  by  Dr.  Hackett.  —  A.  H.] — 


1  Athens  and  Demi,  p.  217. 


200 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


19  And  they  took  him,  and  bmught  him  unto  Are- 
opagus, saying,  ftiay  we  know  what  this  new  doctrine, 
whereof  thou  speakest,  is? 


19  cause  he  preached  Jesus  and  the  resurrection.  And 
they  took  liold  of  hiiu,  and  brought  him  'unto  -tlie 
Areopagus,  saying,  May  we  know  what  this  new 


1  Or,  be/ore 2  Or,  the  hill  of  Mars 


What  would  this  babbler  say?  does  he 
mean  U)  say.  Tlie  particle  (iv)  sharpens  tlie 
taunt:  if  he  has  any  meaning  (Mey.).  (See 
W.  M2.  1 ;  C.  g  604.)  The  word  translated 
babbler  (<nrepij.o\6yo^)  denotes  strictly  a  seed- 
gatherer,  and  then,  as  used  here,  one  who  picks 
uja  and  retails  scraps  of  knowledge  without 
sense  or  aim,  an  idle  pi-atcr.— Strange,  or 
foreign,  gods,  hitherto  unknown  to  us.  As 
the  expression  is  cited  from  the  mouth  of  the 
Greeks,  we  are  to  attach  to  it  their  sense  of 
demon  (Saiiiovwv),  which  was  different  from 
that  of  the  Jews.  The  noun  may  be  plttral, 
because  it  refers  to  Jesus  as  an  example  of  the 
class  or  category  (see  W.  §  27.  2 ;  S.  ^  95.  2),  or 
it  may  be  founded  on  what  Paul  had  said  to 
them  concerning  God,  especially  his  agency  in 
raising  up  Christ  from  the  dead.  (Comp.  v. 
31.)  The  latter  is  the  best  view  (De  Wet.). 
Both  Jesus  and  the  God  of  whom  they  now 
heard  were  new  to  them.  Many  of  the  older 
critics,  and  some  of  the  ntore  recent,  explain  the 
pltiral  as  embracing  resurrection  (avdaTaaiv), 
supposing  the  Athenians  to  have  understood 
Patil  to  speak  of  some  goddess  when  he 
preached  to  them  the  restirrection.  But  one 
can  hardly  conceive  that  the  apostle  would 
express  himself  so  obscurely  on  this  subject 
as  to  give  them  any  occasion  for  falling  into 
so  gross  a  mistake,  and  we  are  not  authorized 
by  any  intimation  in  the  narrative  to  impute  to 
them  a  wilful  perversion  of  his  langtiage. 

19-21.  PAUL  REPAIRS  TO  MARS'  HILL 
TO  EXPLAIN  HIS  DOCTRINE. 

19.  And  taking  hold  upon  him,  not  with 
violence,  which  would  be  at  variance  with  the 
general  spirit  of  the  transaction,  but  rather  by 
the  hand,  for  the  pttrpose  of  leading  him  on- 
ward. (Comp.  9  :  27  ;  Mark  8  :  23  ;  Luke  9 :  47.) 
— Upon  Mars'  Hill— i.  e.  the  top  of  it.  (Comp. 
10  :  9;  Matt.  4:5;  24  :  16,  etc.)  The  Areopa- 
gus, whither  Paul  was  now  brought,  was  a 
rocky  eminence  a  little  to  the  west  of  the 
Acropolis.  (See  Leake's  Athens,  p.  165.)  The 
object  of  the  movement  was  to  place  the  apos- 
tle in  a  situation  where  he  could  be  heard  by 
the  multitude  to  greater  advantage.  The  fol- 
lowing is  Dr.  Robinson's  description  of  this 
important  locality :  "  This  is  a  narrow,  naked 
ridge  of  limestone  rock  rising  gradually  from 
the  northern  end,  and  terminating  abruptly  on 
the  south   over  against  the  west  end   of  the 


Acropolis,  from  which  it  bears  about  north, 
being  separated  from  it  by  an  elevated  valley. 
This  southern  end  is  fifty  or  sixty  feet  above 
the  said  valley,  though  yet  much  lower  than 
the  Acropolis.  On  its  top  are  still  to  be  seen 
the  seats  of  the  judges  and  parties,  hewn  in  the 
rock ;  and  toward  the  soutli-west  is  a  descent 
by  a  flight  of  steps,  also  cut  in  the  roclv  into 
the  valley  below.  Standing  on  this  elevated 
platform,  surrottnded  by  the  learned  and  the 
wise  of  Athens,  the  multitude  perhaps  being 
on  the  steps  and  the  vale  below,  Paul  had 
directly  before  him  the  far-famed  Acropolis, 
with  its  wonders  of  Grecian  art ;  and  beneath 
him,  on  his  left,  the  majestic  Theseium,  the 
earliest  and  still  most  perfect  of  Athenian 
structtires ;  while  all  around  other  temples 
and  altars  filled  the  whole  city.  On  the  Acrop- 
olis, too,  were  the  three  celebrated  statttes  of 
Minei'va — one  of  olive-wood ;  another,  of  gold 
and  ivory,  in  the  Parthenon,  the  masterpiece 
of  Phidias ;  and  the  colossal  stattte  in  the  open 
air,  the  point  of  whose  spear  was  seen  over  tlie 
Parthenon  by  those  sailing  along  the  gulf" 
{Bibl.  Res.,  i.  p.  10,  sq.).  The  reader  would  do 
well  to  constilt  the  admirable  article  on 
"Athens"  in  Smith's  Dictionary  of  Greek 
and  Roman  Geography.  He  will  find  a  plan 
of  that  city  and  a  view  of  the  Acropolis  re- 
stored, as  seen  from  the  Areopagus,  in  Cony- 
beare  and  Howson's  work.  To  understand  the 
pectiliar  boldness  and  power  of  the  speech  we 
must  have  distinctly  before  us  the  objects  and 
scenes  which  met  the  apostle's  view  at  the 
moment. — Some  translate  k-aX  rov  'Apetov  nayov 
before  the  Areopagus,  instead  of  upon 
Mars'  Hill  (comp.  16  :  19;  18  :  12;  24  :  8), 
and  maintain  that  Patil  was  arraigned  at  this 
time  before  the  celebrated  court  of  that  name, 
and  underwent  a  formal  trial  on  the  charge  of 
having  attempted  to  change  the  religion  of  the 
state.  But  this  opinion  rests  entirely  upon  two 
or  three  expressions  which,  like  the  one  jtist 
noticed,  are  ambiguous  in  themselves;  while 
in  other  respects  the  entire  narrative,  as  well 
as  the  improbability  of  such  a  procedure,  tes- 
tify against  the  idea.  First,  we  find  here  no 
trace  whatever  of  anything  like  the  formality 
of  a  legal  process ;  secondly,  the  professed  ob- 
ject of  bringing  the  apostle  upon  Mars'  Hill 
was  to  ascertain  from  him  what  his  opinions 
were,  not  to  put  him  on  his  defence  for  then* 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


201 


20  For  thou  bringest  certain  strange  things  to  our 
ears :  we  would  know  therefore  what  these  things 
mean. 

21  (For  all  the  Athenians  and  strangers  which  were 
there  spent  their  time  in  nothing  else,  but  either  to 
tell,  or  to  hear  some  new  thing.) 


20  teaching  is,  which  is  spoken  by  thee?  For  thou 
bringest  certain  strange  things  to  our  ears:  we 
rtould    know   therefore   what   these    things    mean. 

21  (Now  all  the  Athenians  and  the  strangers  sojourn- 
ing there   'spent  their  time  in   nothing  else,  but 


1  Or,  ?iad  leisure  for  nothing  else. 


before  they  were  known  ;  thirdly,  the  manner  in 
which  the  affair  terminated  would  have  been  a 
singular  issue  for  a  judicial  investigation  in  the 
highest  court  of  Athens ;  and  finally,  the  speech 
which  Paul  delivered  on  the  occasion  was  pre- 
cisely such  as  we  should  expect  before  a  pro- 
miscuous assembly,  whereas,  if  he  had  stood 
now  as  an  accused  person  before  a  legal  tribu- 
nal, his  plea  has  most  strangely  failed  to  con- 
nect itself,  at  any  single  point,  with  that  pecu- 
liarity of  his  situation.  It  proves  nothing  in 
regard  to  the  question  to  show  that  the  court 
of  the  Areopagus  had  powers  (that  is  admitted) 
which  would  have  given  to  it  jurisdiction  in 
the  case  of  Paul,  supposing  that  he  had  been 
charged  at  this  time  with  subverting  the  estab- 
lished worship,  since  the  narrative  on  which 
we  must  rely  for  our  information  as  to  what 
was  done  not  only  contains  no  evidence  that 
the  Athenians  took  this  serious  view  of  his 
doctrine,  but  ascribes  their  eagerness  to  hear 
him  to  a  mere  love  of  novelty.  (See  v.  21.) 
Calvin,  Kuinoel,  Neander,  Winer,  Olshausen, 
De  Wette,  Meyer,  Baur,  Doddridge,  and  the 
best  critics  generally,  at  present  reject  the  opin- 
ion that  Paul  was  carried  before  the  Areopagus 
for  a  judicial  examination.  The  authority  of 
Chrysostom,  among  the  ancient  critics,  stands 
in  favor  of  it.  A  few  among  the  Germans,  as 
Hess,  Hemsen,  Scholz,  follow  on  that  side,  ex- 
cept that  some  of  them  would  say  (this  is  true 
of  Hemsen)  that  the  Areopagus  was  called  to- 
gether, not  exactly  to  try  the  apostle,  but  to 
hear  from  him  some  account  of  his  doctrine. 
"The  process,"  says  Wordsworth,  "may  have 
been  only  a  preparatory  inquiry.  .  .  .  They 
who  laid  hands  on  him  may  have  intended  to 
frighten  the  apostle  by  the  judicial  associations 
of  the  place,  and  to  drive  him  out  of  the  city." 
Most  of  our  English  commentaries  assume  that 
Paul  was  arraigned  at  this  time  as  a  religious 
innovator.  The  other  ambiguous  expressions 
which  have  been  supposed  to  favor  this  view  will 
be  noticed  in  their  place. — Can  we  know  ? 
Would  it  not  have  been  an  excess  even  of  the 
Attic  politeness  to  have  interrogated  a  pris- 
oner at  the  bar  in  this  manner?  The  object, 
too,  of  the  inquiry,  as  defined  by  the  accom- 
panying terms,  shows  clearly  that  they  did  not 
regard  him  as  occupying  that  position.  | 


20.  Strange,  surprising,  since  the  things 
were  foreign,  unheard  of  before. — Tliou  bring- 
est to  our  ears.  This  phrase,  drawn  from 
common  life,  has  an  appearance  of  reality  in 
this  connection. — What  these  things  mean 
(ri  av  &4\oi).  (See  on  v.  IS.)  The  singular  what 
(tC),  in  apposition  with  these  things  (TaOra), 
should  be  noticed.  It  is  not  i^recisely  like  the 
plural.  "  The  singular  (ti),"  says  Kriiger  {Gr., 
^  61.  8.  2),  "may  stand  in  such  connections  as 
what  are  these  {tC  ravTd  eo-n),  when  the  question 
is.  What  sort  of  a  whole — what  combined  re- 
sult— do  the  particulars  form?"  [It  may  be 
remarked,  however,  that  the  text  is  doubtful. 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  the 
Anglo-Am.  Revisers,  in  accord  with  NAB  and 
several  cursive  MSS.,  give  riva  iJeAei,  instead  of 
Tt  av  iJeAoi.  It  is  difficult  to  decide  between  the 
readings,  but  fortunately  the  meaning  is  nearly 
the  same  with  either. — A.  H.] 

21.  The  object  of  this  verse  is  to  explain  why 
they  addressed  to  him  such  inquiries.  Their 
motive  for  proposing  them  was  that  their  curi- 
osity might  be  gratified. — Noav  all  Athenians. 
The  omission  of  the  article  unites  the  charac- 
teristic more  closely  with  the  name  as  its  in- 
variable attendant.  (K.  §  24G.  5.  a.) — Stran- 
gers, etc. — i.  e.  the  foreigners  permanently 
resident  there  (comp.  2  :  10),  whence  the  same 
cusfomfi,  as  Bcngcl  remarks.  —  Spent  their 
leisure  for  nothing  else.  This  sense  of 
the  verb  is  a  later  usage.  (Lob.,  Ad  Phnjn., 
p.  12.5.)  The  imperfect  does  not  exclude  the 
continued  existence  of  the  peculiarity,  but 
blends  the  reference  to  it  Avith  tlie  history. 
(See  similar  examples  in  27  :  8 ;  John  11  :  18 ; 
18  :  1 ;  19  :  14.  K.  ?  256.  4.  a ;  C.  567.  -, .)— New- 
er, sc.  than  before.  (W.  ?  35.  4;  S.  ^  118.  4; 
K.  ?32.3.  R.  7.)  The  comparative  or  the  posi- 
tive form  of  the  adjective  could  be  used  in  this 
phrase,  btft  the  former  characterizes  their  state 
of  mind  more  forcibly  than  the  latter.  Bengel 
has  hit  the  point  of  the  idiom  :  "  Nova  statim 
sordebant;  noviora  qucerehatitur "  ["New  things 
were  presently  despised ; — newer  things  were 
sought"]. —  It  is  worth  remarking  that  this 
singular  scene  of  setting  up  the  apostle  to 
speak  for  tlie  entertainment  of  the  people  oc- 
curs, not  at  Ephesus  or  Philipjn  or  Corinth, 
but  at  Athens — not  only  the  only  place  in  all 


202 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


his  journeying  where  Paul  met  with  such  a 
reception,  but  just  tlie  place  where  the  incident 
arises  in  perfect  harmony  with  the  disposition 
and  the  tastes  of  the  people.  We  know  from 
the  testimony  of  ancient  writers  that  this  fond- 
ness for  hearing  and  telling  some  new  thing, 
which  Luke  mentions,  was  a  notorious  charac- 
teristic of  the  Athenians.  Their  great  orator 
reproaches  them  with  the  same  pro2)ensity : 
Tell  me,  do  you  wish,  going  about  from  market- 
place to  marketplace,  to  inquire  :  What  new  thing 
is  said  f  etc.  (Philipp.  I.  43.)  The  entirely  in- 
cidental manner  in  which  the  exemplitication 
of  this  trait  comes  forth  in  the  narrative  here 
bears  witness  to  its  authenticity. 

Outline  of  the  Course  of   Thought. — 

The  speech  which  Paul  delivered  at  this  time 
is  remarkable  for  its  adaptation,  not  only  to  the 
outward  circumstances  under  which  he  spoke, 
but  to  the  peculiar  mental  state  of  his  auditors. 
De  Wette  pronounces  it  "a  model  of  the  apol- 
ogetic style  of  discourse."     "  The  address   of 
Paul  before  this  assembly,"  says  Neander,  "  is 
a  living  proof  of  his  apostolic  wisdom  and  elo- 
quence ;  we  perceive  here  how  the  apostle,  ac- 
cording to  his  own  expression,  could  become 
also  a  heathen  to  the  heathen  that  he  might 
win  the  heathen  to  a  reception  of  the  gospel." 
"  The  skill,"  says  Hemsen,  "  with  which  he  was 
able  to  bring  the  truth  near  to  the  Athenians 
deserves  admiration.    We  find  in  tliis  discourse 
of  Paul  nothing  of  an  ill-timed  zeal,  nothing  ! 
like  declamatory  jjomp ;  it  is  distinguished  for  ! 
clearness,  brevity,  coherence,  and  simplicity  of  ! 
representation."    Dr.  Robinson,  speaking  under  1 
the  impression  produced  on  his  mind  by  a  per-  j 
sonal  survey  of  the  scene,  says  that,  "  masterly  "  ; 
as  the  address  is  as  we  read  it  under  ordinary 
circumstances,  "  the  full  force  and  energy  and  j 
boldness  of  the  apostle's  language  can  be  duly  I 
felt  only  when  one  has  stood  upon  the  spot."  i  ' 
The  writer  can  never  forget  the  emotions  of  \ 
thrilling  interest  which  were  excited  in  his  own  i 
mind  as  he  read  and  rehearsed  the  discourse  on 
that  memorable  rock. — We  have  first  the  intro- 
duction, which,  in   the  technical  language  of 
rhetoric,  is  eminently  conciliatory.    The  apos- 
tle begins  by  acknowledging  and  commending 
the  respect  of  the  Athenians  for  religion  (w.  22, 
23).     He  states  next,  at  the  close  of  v.  23,  his 
design,  which   is  to  guide  their  religious  in- 


stincts and  aspirations  to  their  proper  object 
— i.  e.  to  teach  them  what  God  is,  his  nature 
and  attributes,  in  ojjposition  to  their  false  views 
and  practices  as  idolaters.  He  goes  on  then,  in 
pursuance  of  this  purpose,  to  announce  to  them 
— first,  that  God  is  the  Creator  of  the  outward, 
material  universe  (v.  -24) ;  secondly,  that  he  is 
entirely  independent  of  his  creatures,  having 
all-sufficiency  in  himself  (v.  25);  thirdly,  that 
he  is  the  Creator  of  all  mankind,  notwithstand- 
ing their  separation  into  so  many  nations  and 
their  wide  dispersion  on  the  earth  (v.  26) ;  and 
fourthly,  that  he  has  placed  men,  as  individuals 
and  nations,  in  such  relations  of  dependence  on 
himself  as  render  it  easy  for  them  to  see  that 
he  is  their  Creator  and  Sovereign  Disposer,  and 
that  they  are  the  creatures  of  his  power  and 
goodness,  and  that  it  is  their  duty  to  seek  and 
serve  him  (w.  27, 28).  The  ground  has  thus  been 
won  for  the  application  which  follows.  At  this 
point  of  the  discourse,  stretching  forth  his 
hand,  as  we  may  well  suppose,  toward  the  gor- 
geous images  within  sight,  he  exclaims :  "  We 
ought  not,  therefore,  to  suppose  that  the  Deity 
is  like  unto  gold,  or  silver,  or  stone,  sculptured 
by  the  art  and  device  of  men  "  (v.  29).  And  that 
which  men  ought  not  to  do  they  may  not  safely 
do  any  longer.  It  was  owing  to  the  forbearance 
of  God  that  they  had  been  left  hitherto  to  pur- 
sue their  idolatry  witliout  any  signal  manifesta- 
tion of  his  displeasure ;  they  were  7ioiu  required 
to  repent  of  it  and  forsake  it  (v.  30),  because  a 
day  of  righteous  judgment  awaited  tliem  which 
had  been  rendered  certain  by  the  resurrection 
of  Christ  (t.  31).  Here  their  clamors  interrui:>ted 
him.  It  is  not  difficult,  perhaps,  to  conjecture 
what  he  would  have  added.  It  only  remained, 
in  order  to  complete  his  well-known  circle  of 
thought  on  such  occasions,  that  lie  should  have 
set  forth  the  claims  of  Christ  as  the  object  of 
religious  hope  and  confidence — that  he  should 
have  exhoited  them  to  call  on  his  name  and  lie 
saved. — It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  by  casting  the 
eye  back,  that  we  have  here  all  the  parts  of  a 
perfect  discourse — viz.  the  exordium,  the  prop- 
osition or  theme,  the  proof  or  exposition,  the 
inferences  and  application.  It  is  a  beautiful 
sijecimen  of  the  manner  in  which  a  powerful 
and  well-trained  mind  practised  in  public 
speaking  conforms  spontaneously  to  the  rules 
of  the  severest  logic.  One  can  readily  believe, 
looking  at  this  feature  of  the  discour.se,  that  it 


1  Some  object  that  the  speech  has  been  overpraised,  because  Paul  did  not  succeed  in  bringing  it  to  a  forma] 
close.  The  astonishment  which  one  feels  as  he  reads  the  address  is  not  that  the  speaker  was  interrupted  at 
length  when  he  came  to  announce  to  the  Athenians  the  peculiar  doctrines  of  Christiaiity,  but  that  he  could 
command  their  attention  so  long  while  he  bore  down  with  such  effect  011  their  favorite  opinions  and  prejudices, 
exposed  their  error,  and  arraigned  them  as  guilty  of  the  grossest  inconsistency  and  absuidity  of  conduct. 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


203 


22  IT  Then  Paul  stood  in  the  midst  of  Mars'  hill,  and 
said,  Ye  men  of  Athens,  I  perceive  that  in  all  things  ye 
are  too  superstitious. 

23  For  as  I  passed  by,  and  beheld  your  devotions,  I 


22  either  to  toll   or  to  hear  some  new  thing.)    And 
Paul  stood  in  the  midst  of  the  Areopagus,  and  said, 

Ye  men  of  Athens,  in  all  things  1  perceive  that 

23  ye  are  ivery  religious.    For  as  1  passed  along,  and 


1  Or,  somewhat  superstitious. 


was  pronounced  by  the  man  who  wrote  the 
Epistles  to  the  Romans  and  Galatians,  where 
we  see  the  same  mental  characteristics  so 
strongl}''  reflected.  As  we  must  suppose,  at  all 
events,  that  the  general  scheme  of  thoiight — 
the  nexus  of  the  argument — has  been  preserved, 
it  does  not  affect  our  critical  judgment  of  the 
discourse  whether  we  maintain  that  it  has  been 
reported  in  full  or  that  a  synopsis  only  has 
been  given.    On  this  point  opinions  differ. 

22-31.    THE    SPEECH    OF    PAUL     ON 
MARS'   HILL. 

22.  Stood.  Paul  spoke,  of  course,  in  the 
open  air.  A  skilful  hand  has  pictured  to  us 
the  scene :  "  He  stood  on  that  hill  in  the  centre 
of  the  Athenian  city,  and  with  a  fall  view  of  it. 
The  temple  of  the  Eumenides  was  immediately 
below  him ;  and  if  he  looked  to  the  east,  he 
beheld  the  Propylsea  of  the  Acropolis  fronting 
him,  and  the  Parthenon  rising  above  him ;  and 
on  his  left  the  bronze  colossus  of  Minerva,  the 
champion  of  Athens ;  and  the  temple  of  Victory 
to  the  right ;  behind  him  was  the  temple  of 
Theseus ;  and  a  countless  multitude  of 
smaller  temples  and  altars  in  the  Agora 
and  Ceramicus  below  him  "■  (Wordsworth, 
p.  85.  See  also  his  Athens  and  Attica,  ch. 
xi.). — In  the  midst  of  Mars'  Hill  could 
be  said  of  a  place  or  an  assembly.  It  is 
one  of  the  ambiguous  expressions  advert- 
ed to  above  (p.  201),  which  leave  it  un- 
certain whether  Mars'  Hill  is  to  be  vin- 
derstood  of  the  hill  or  the  court  assem- 
bled there. —  Men  of  Athens.  The 
remark  just  made  is  to  be  repeated  here. 
It  is  the  style  of  address  which  Paul 
would  necessarily  use  in  speaking  to  a 
concourse  of  Athenians,  and,  at  the  same 
time,  he  might  use  it  in  speaking  before 
judges.  In  the  latter  case,  however,  the 
Greeks  oftener  said  0  men  judges  (Ji  avSpes 
ii/caffTai).  (See  Stalb.,  Plat.  ApoL,  17.  A.) 
— Ill  every  respect,  as  it  were,  in  every 
pos.sible  mode  of  exhibition. — As  (ws) — /.  e. 
those  who  correspond  to  this  character 
—more  religious  (sc.  than  otliers)  I 
see  you  (De  Wet.,  Win.  See  W.  j?  35. 
4).  For  the  suppressed  term  of  the  oom- 
parisrm,  see  on  v.  21.  .Tosephus  (Contr.  Ap., 
2.  11)  calls  the  Athenians  the   most  devoiU  of. 


the  Greeks.  See  other  testimonies  in  Wetstein, 
The  word  just  translated  more  religious 
(viz.  Seio-tSai/iioi'effTepous,  a  VOX  media)  may  sig- 
nify also  more  superstitious.  It  is  improb- 
able, as  a  matter  of  just  rhetoric,  that  the 
apostle  emploj'ed  it  in  that  reproachful  sense 
at  the  outset  of  his  remarks.  That  he  used 
it  in  a  good  sense  is  evident  for  another  rea- 
son. "  He  proceeds,"  says  Neander,  "  to  de- 
duce their  seeking  after  God  (which  he  doubt- 
less considered  as  something  good)  from  this 
deisidainionia  (comp.  25  :  19j,  or  religious  pro- 
pensity, so  prevalent  among  the  Athenians. 
He  announced  himself  as  one  who  would  guide 
their  deisidainionia,  not  rightly  consci(jus  of  its 
object  and  aim,  to  a  state  of  clear  self-conscious- 
ness by  a  revelation  of  the  object  to  which  it 
thus  ignorantly  tended." 

23.  And  closely  observing  the  objects 
of  your  religious  veneration,  I  found 
also  an  altar.  Sehasmata  denotes,  not  acts 
of  worship,  devotions  (E.  V.),  but  temples, 
images,  altars,  and  the  like.  It  is  a  generic 
term,  under  which  also  arranges  altar  as  one 


AREOP.iGUS,    ATHEXS. 

of  the  class. — Had  been  inscribed  rpluperf.) 
includes  the  present,  and  is  to  be  explained  like 


204 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIL 


found  an  altar  with  this  inscription,  TO  THE  UN- 
KNOVVN  tiOD.  Whom  therefore  ye  ignorantly  wor- 
ship, him  declare  I  unto  you. 


observed  the  objects  of  your  worship,  I  found  also 
an  altar  with  this  inscription,  'to  an  unknown 
GOD.    What  therefore  ye  worship  in  ignorance,  this 


1  Or,  TO  THE  UtfKNO  WJf  GOD. 


the  imperfect  in  v.  21. — To  an  unknown  God 

(dyftuo-Tu  tJecp).  "That  there  was  at  least  one 
altar  at  Atliens  with  this  inscription,"  says 
Meyer,  "  would  appear  as  historically  certain 
from  this  pa^isage  itself,  even  though  other  tes- 
tinionies  were  wanting,  since  Paul  appeals  to  a 
fact  of  his  own  observation,  and  that,  too,  in 
the  presence  of  the  Athenians  themselves." 
But  the  existence  of  such  altars  at  Athens  is 
well  attested  by  competent  witnesses.  Philos- 
tratus,  in  his  Life  of  Apollonius  (6.  2),  says:  "It 
is  more  discreet  to  speak  well  of  all  the  gods,  and 
especially  at  Athens,  where  are  erected  altars  ako 
of  unknown  gods."  Pausanias  (in  his  Description 
of  Attica,  1.  1)  says  that  such  altars  {altars  of 
unknown  gods)  existed  at  Phaleron,  one  of  the 
harbors  of  Athens.  It  has  been  made  a  ques- 
tion how  we  are  to  understand  the  use  of  the 
plural  in  these  passages — whether  as  referring 
to  the  number  of  the  altars  on  which  the  in- 
scription occurred,  or  to  the  number  of  the 
gods  to  whom  the  altars  were  dedicated.  Some 
have  assumed  the  latter  as  the  correct  view, 
and  have  said  that  Paul  has  arbitrarily  changed 
the  i^Iural  into  the  singular,  in  order  to  accom- 
modate the  fact  to  his  purpose,  or  even  that  tlie 
writer,  by  this  inaccuracy,  has  betrayed  him- 
self as  a  person  who  had  no  direct  knowledge 
of  the  circumstances  whicli  he  professes  to  re- 
late. But  even  if  the  inscription  on  these  altars 
was  in  the  plural,  it  does  not  follow  that  Paul 
may  not  have  found  one  having  the  language 
which  he  recites.  Here  would  be  Luke's  posi- 
tive testimony  to  tlie  fact,  and  that  outweighs 
the  mere  silence  of  other  writers.  Such  appears 
to  be  Bengel's  view.  Again,  it  would  not  fol- 
low that  lie  has  necessarily  misrepresented  the 
sense,  admitting  that  he  may  have  substituted 
the  singular  for  the  plural.  The  heathen 
writers  often  employed  gods  to  convey  the  gen- 
eral idea  of  divine  power,  providence,  deity, 
and  the  like.i  With  that  meaning,  the  plural 
could  be  relinquished  for  the  singular  or  the 
singular  for  the  plural,  just  as  an  individual 
pleased.  Here  the  apostle  might  have  preferred 
god,  merely  for  the  sake  of  its  stricter  formal 
accordance  with  the  doctrine  which  he  was 
about  to  advance.  Kuinoel  appears  at  a  loss 
to  decide  whether  the  plural  in  the  case  under 
remark  has  reference  to  the  number  of  the 


altars  or  to  that  of  the  gods.  Some,  as  Calvin 
and  Olshausen,  apparently  concede  that  Paul 
deviated  from  tlie  strict  form  of  the  inscription, 
but  deny  that  he  violated  its  proi:)er  import  or 
availed  himself  of  any  unworthy  artifice. — But 
even  the  appearance  of  a  difficulty  here  van- 
ishes entirely  when  we  give  to  the  language  of 
Philostratus  and  Pausanias  the  interpretation 
which  is  beyond  any  reasonable  doubt  the  cor- 
rect one.  Winer  states  his  view  of  the  case 
thus :  "  It  by  no  means  follows  from  the  pas- 
sages (of  the  writers  above  named)  that  each 
single  one  of  the  altars  mentioned  hy  them  had 
the  inscription  {to)  unknown  gods  in  the  plural, 
but  more  natural  that  each  one  separately  was 
dedicated  {to)  an  unknown  god,  but  this  singular 
the  narrators  were  obliged  to  change  into  the 
plural,  because  they  spoke  of  all  those  altars  in 
a  collective  way.  It  appears,  therefore,  that 
there  were  several  altars  in  different  places  at 
Athens  with  the  inscription  to  an  unknown  god." 
(See  his  Realw.,  i.  p.  111.)  Such  is  the  decision, 
also,  of  Eichhorn,  Hess,  Hemsen,  Meyer,  De 
Wette,  and  others.  It  should  be  added  that 
several  of  the  older  commentators  render  agnosto 
theo,  to  the  unknown  God,  supposing  the  God  of 
the  Jews — i.  e.  .lehovah — to  be  meant.  Such  a 
view  mistranslates  the  Greek  and  violates  all 
historical  probability. — The  precise  historical 
origin  of  the  altars  at  Athens  bearing  this  in- 
scription has  been  disputed.  The  conjectures 
are  various.  One  is  that  they  were  very  ancient 
and  that  it  was  at  length  forgotten  to  whom 
they  had  been  originally  built,  and  that  the 
words  in  question  were  jilaced  on  them  at  a 
later  period  to  apprise  the  people  that  it  was 
unknown  to  what  gods  they  belonged.  If  that 
was  their  character,  it  is  not  easy  to  see  what 
proper  point  of  connection  the  apostle  could 
have  found  for  his  remark  with  such  a  relic  of 
sheer  idolatr3\  Another  is  that  in  some  time 
or  times  of  public  calamity  the  Athenians,  not 
knowing  what  god  they  had  offended — whether 
Minerva  or  Jupiter  or  Mars — erected  these  altars 
so  as  to  be  sure  of  propitiating  the  right  one. 
The  same  objection  may  be  made  as  before, 
since  their  ignorance  in  this  case  relates  merely 
to  the  identity  of  the  god  whom  they  should 
conciliate,  and  involves  no  recognition  of  any 
power  additional  to  their  heathen  deities.     The 


1  For  examples  of  this  interchange,  see  the  passages  collected  by  Pfanner  in  his  Systema  Tkeologice  GentilU 
PuriorU,  p.  102,  and  elsewhere. 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


205 


24  "God  that  made  the,  world  and  all  things  therein, 
seeing  that  he  is  'Lord  of  heaven  and  eanh,  "dwelleth 
not  in  temples  made  with  hands; 

25  Neither  is  worshipped   with    men's   hands,   ''as 


24  set  I  forth  unto  you.  The  (Jod  that  made  the  world 
and  all  things  therein,  he,  being  Lord  of  heaven 
and   earth,   dwelleth    not   in    'temples    made   with 

25  hands ;  neither  is  he  served  by   men  s  hands,  as 


loh.  14  :  15.. ..6  Matt.  U  :  25 c  ch.  7  :  '. 


-1  Or,  tanctuariet 


most  rational  explanation  is  unquestionably 
tliat  of  those  who  suppose  these  altars  to  have 
liad  their  origin  in  the  feeling  of  uncertainty, 
inherent,  after  all,  in  the  minds  of  the  heathen, 
whether  their  acknowledgment  of  the  superior 
powers  was  sufficiently  full  and  comprehensive; 
in  their  distinct  consciousness  of  the  limitation 
and  imperfection  of  their  religious  views,  and 
their  consequent  desire  to  avoid  the  anger  of 
any  still  unacknowledged  god  who  might  be 
unknown  to  them.  That  no  deity  might  pun- 
ish them  for  neglecting  his  worship  or  remain 
uninvoked  in  asking  for  blessings,  they  not 
only  erected  altars  to  all  the  gods  named  or 
known  among  them,  but,  distrustful  still  lest 
they  might  not  comprehend  fully  the  extent 
of  their  subjection  and  dependence,  they  erect- 
ed them  also  to  any  other  god  or  power  that 
might  exist,  although  as  yet  unrevealed  to 
them.— No  one  can  say  that  this  explanation 
ascribes  too  much  discernment  to  the  heathen. 
Not  to  insist  on  other  proofs  which  might  be 
adduced,  such  expressions  as  the  comprehen- 
sive address.  At  o  deorum  qnkqukl  in  cselo  regit, 
etc.  ["But,  all  ye  gods  who  rule  in  heaven," 
etc.]  (Horat.,  Epnd.,  5.  1) ;  the  oft-used  formula 
in  the  prayers  of  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  Si 
deo,  si  dex ;  and  the  superetitious  dread  which 
they  manifested  in  so  many  ways,  of  omitting 
any  deity  in  their  invocations,— prove  the  ex- 
istence of  the  feeling  to  wliich  reference  has 
been  made.  Out  of  this  feeling,  therefore, 
these  altars  may  have  sprung,  because  the  sup- 
position is  .so  entirely  consistent  with  the  genius 
of  polytheistic  heathenism  ;  because  the  many- 
sided  religiousness  of  the  Athenians  would  be  so 
apt  to  exhibit  itself  in  some  such  demonstra- 
tion; and  especially  because  Paul  could  then 
appeal  with  so  much  effect  to  such  an  avowal 
of  the  insufficiency  of  heathenism,  and  to  such 
a  testimony  so  borne,  indirect,  yet  significant, 
to  the  existence  of  the  one  true  God.— Under 
these  circumstances,  an  allusion  to  one  of  these 
altars  by  the  apostle  would  be  equivalent  to  his 
saying  to  the  Athenians  thus :  "  You  are  cor- 
rect in  acknowledging  a  divine  existence  be- 
yond any  which  the  ordinary  rites  of  your 
worship  recognize;  there  is  such  an  existence. 
You  are  correct  in  confessing  that  this  Being 
is  unknown  to  you ;  you  have  no  just  concep-  j 
tions  of  his  nature  and  perfections."    He  could 


add  then  with  truth.  Whom,  therefore,  not 
knowing,  ye  worship,  this  one  I  an- 
nounce unto  you.  Tlie  inverted  order  gives 
point  to  the  declaration.     Not  knowing  has 

the  same  object  as  the  verb,  and  means  having 
no  Just  knowledge  of  him  whom  they  wor- 
shipped; not  iy)iorantly,  as  if  they  did  not 
I  know  whither  their  worship  was  directed. 
j  The  word  points  back  evidently  to  unknown 
{ayvui<n<a).  Later  edit(jrs  read  what  .  .  .  this 
(o  .  .  .  toOto)  instead  of  whom  .  .  .  this  one 
(ov  .  .  .  rovTov) ;  in  which  case  god  (deip)  in  the 
inscription  would  be  taken  more  al)stractly  as 
a  divine  power.  The  external  evidence  is  not 
decisive.  Meyer  defends  the  common  reading 
in  his  first  edition,  and  the  other  in  his  second. 
[Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  the 
Anglo-Am.  Revisers  adopt  the  neuter  on  the 
strong  evidence  of  K«  A®  B  D.— A.  H.]  The 
personal  sense  of  god  may  have  been  thought 
to  concede  too  much  to  heathenism,  and  so 
have  caused  the  pronouns  to  be  changed. 
Worship  (€V(re/3e:Te)  has  Seemed  to  some  a 
strong  term,  as  the  cognate  words  in  the  New 
Testament  always  express  the  idea  of  true 
piety;  but  the  term  occurs  further  only  in  1 
Tim.  5  :  4,  and  denotes  there,  not  the  exercise 
of  piety,  but  of  something  merely  kindred  to 
it— filial  reverence.  It  needs  only  a  similar 
modification  to  adapt  it  to  the  use  required 
here. 

24.  The  God  whom  Paul  announced  is  the 
Maker  of  all  tilings,  and,  as  such,  necessarily 
distinct  from  their  false  gods.  That  is  the 
point  of  connection  between  this  verse  and  the 
preceding.— This  one  (Ijy  his  right  as  Creator) 
being  the  Lord,  Sovereign,  of  heaven  and 
earth.  It  was  self-evident,  therefore,  that  he 
was  not  to  be  confounded  with  any  of  their 
idols,  whose  existence  was  limited  by  the  space 
which  they  occupied. — 3Iade  with  hands  is 
contrasted  with  that  made  the  world,  etc. — 
In  temples.  The  statues  or  images  were  kept 
in  the  recesses  of  the  temple. — Dwelleth.  The 
mass  of  the  heathen  in  practice  make  no  dif- 
ference between  the  symbol  and  its  object ;  the 
block  was  the  god.     (Comp.  19  :  26.) 

35.  The  apostle  illustrates  the  character  of 
the  true  God  still  further  by  another  contrast 
between  liim  and  the  deities  of  the  lieatlien. 
He  is  independent  of  his  creatures ;  he  needs 


206 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


though  he  needed  any  thing,  seeing  "he  giveth  to  all 
life,  and  breath,  and  all  things ;  • 

■20  And  liath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men 
for  to  dwell  on  all  the  face  of  the  earth,  and  hath  de- 


though  he  needed  any  tiling,  seeing  he  himself  giv- 

26eth  to  all  life,  and  breatli,  and  all  things;  and  he 

made  of  one  every  nation  of  men  for  to  dwell  on  all 


a  Gen.  2:7;  Num.  16  :  Ti  ;  Job  12  :  10;  i7  :  3;  a3  :  4 ;  Isa.  42  :  5  ;  57  :  16;  Zcch.  12  :  1. 


nothing  from  them ;  they  can  earn  no  merit  j 
by  serving  him. — And  (after  a  preceding  neg-  j 
ative)  he  is  not  ministered  unto  by  hu-  | 
man  hands,  or  hands  of   men.     Human  i 

is  a  more  correct  reading  tlian  of  men  (T.  R.).  i 
The  verb  here  implies  more  than  mere  wor-  | 
shii).     The  heathen  considered   it  meritorious  I 
to  lavish  wealth  on  the  temples  and  shrines  I 
of  their  idols;    they  brought  to   them  costly  | 
gifts,  and  even  offerings  of  food  and  drink,  as  j 
if  they  stood  in  need  of  svich  things,  and  could 
be  laid  under  obligation  to  their  worshippers. 
The  prayer  of  Chryses,  priest  of  Apollo  {II.,  1. 
37,  sq.),  expresses  the  true  spirit  of  heathenism 
in  this  respect : 

"  If  e'er  with  wreaths  I  hung  thy  sacred  fane, 
Or  fed  the  flames  with  fat  of  oxen  slain, 
God  of  the  silver  bow !  thy  shafts  employ  : 
Avenge  thy  servant,  and  the  Greeks  destroy." 

— As  if  needing  something  besides — i.  e. 

(note  the  compound,  npoaSio/jLevo^)  out  of  him- 
self as  necessary  to  his  perfection. — Since  he 
himself  gives.     Himself  is  emphatic  as  op-  t 
posed  to  the  idea  that  liis  creatures  are  able  to  ■ 
give  to  him. — The  whole — i.  e.  of  the  things  j 
which  they  enjo.y.     In  such  an  expression,  the 
article  (ra)  restricts  the  adjective  to  tlie  class  of  | 
objects  intimated  by  the  preceding  words  or  the  j 
context.     Some  editors  omit  the  article  here,  i 
(Comp.  Rom.  8  :  32;  1  Cor.  9  :  22;  Phil.  3:8, 
etc.)    But  in  most  of  these  passages,  too,  the 
manuscripts  fluctuate.  [ 

2G.  And  he  made  of  one  blood  every  j 
nation  of  men  that  they  should  dwell. 
This  is  the  more  obvious  view  of  the  construc- 
tion, and  is  the  one  which  has  been  generally 
adopted.  Yet  several  of  the  best  critics  (Kuin., 
De  Wet.,  Mey.,  Alf.)  regard  made  here  as  an 
instance  of  its  use  with  an  accusative  and  in- 
finitive, like  that  in  Matt.  5  :  32 ;  Mark  7  :  37, 
and  translate :  and  he  caused  every  nation 
of  men  (sprung)  from  one  blood  to  dwell. 
To  dwell  (KOLToiKfli')  connects  itself  more  easily 
in  til  is  way,  it  is  true,  with  the  rest  of  the  sen- 
tence ;  but  the  facility  tlius  gained  renders  the 
expression  hard  at  of  one  blood ;  so  that  we 
must  supply  a  word  to  make  the  thought  flow 
smoothly.  [Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and 
Hort,  and  Anglo-Am.  Revisers  omit  the  word 
blood  (at/naros)  as  an  addition  to  the  text.  It  is 
wanting  in  X  A  B  and  other  documents. — A.H.] 


The  main  idea,  beyond  question,  is  that  God 
has  created  the  entire  human  race  from  a  com- 
mon stock ;  and  the  more  prominent  way, 
therefore,  in  which  the  translation  first  stated 
brings  forward  this  proposition  appears  to  me 
to  be  a  reason  for  preferring  it.  It  is  an  objec- 
tion to  the  other  mode  that  it  assigns  a  too  sub- 
ordinate place  to  the  principal  thought.  But 
why  does  the  apostle  single  out  thus  the  uni- 
versal brotherhood  of  the  race?  Olshausen 
says  it  was  intended  as  a  reproof  to  the  Athe- 
nians for  their  contempt  of  the  Jews ;  Meyer, 
Neander,  De  Wette,  and  others  consider  it  as 
directed  essentially  against  the  polytheism  of 
the  heathen.  If  all  are  the  children  of  a  com- 
mon parent,  then  the  idea  of  a  multiplicity  of 
gods  from  whom  the  various  nations  have  de- 
rived their  origin,  or  whose  protection  they 
specially  enjoy,  must  be  false.  The  doctrine 
of  the  iniity  of  the  race  is  closely  interwoven 
with  that  of  the  unity  of  the  divine  existence. 
This  more  comprehensive  view  of  the  meaning, 
however,  does  not  exclude  the  other,  since,  if 
all  nations  have  the  same  Creator,  it  would  at 
once  occur  tliat  nothing  can  be  more  absurd 
than  the  feeling  of  superiority  and  contempt 
with  which  one  affects  to  look  down  upon  an- 
other. As  the  apostle  had  to  encounter  the 
prejudice  which  was  entertained  against  him 
as  a  Jew,  his  course  of  remark  was  doubly 
pertinent,  if  adapted,  at  the  same  time,  to  re- 
move this  hindrance  to  a  candid  reception  of 
his  message. — To  dwell  (KaTOLxelv)  is  the  infin- 
itive of  design.  The  various  lands  which  the 
different  families  of  mankind  occupied,  with 
all  the  advantages  connected  with  their  posi- 
tion, God  liad  assigned  to  them.  (Comp.  Deut. 
32:8;  Ps.  115:16.)  Yea,  he  had  proceeded 
from  the  very  first  with  a  view  to  their  welfare. 
He  designed,  in  creating  men,  tliat  they  should 
inhabit  and  possess  the  earth  as  their  own  ; 
that  they  should  all  of  them  enjoy  the  mani- 
fold blessings  allotted  to  them  in  the  various 
places  of  their  abode.  It  was  to  him  that  they 
were  indebted  for  what  they  enjoyed,  and  not 
to  accident  or  tlieir  own  enterprise  or  the  fixvor 
of  some  imaginary  god.  The  remark,  made  as 
applicable  to  all  lands,  has  its  justification  in 
the  fact  that,  notwithstanding  the  inequalities 
which  diversify  the  condition  of  nations,  tliey 
have  severally  tiieir  peculiar  advantages ;  it  is 
natural  for  every  people  to  esteem  their  own 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


207 


teniiined  the  times  before  appointed,  and  "the  bounds 
of  their  hauitation  ; 

■J7  'That  they  should  seek  the  Lord,  if  haply  they 
might  feel  after  him,  and  find  him,  nhough  he  be  uut 
far  from  every  one  of  us : 


the  face  of  the  earth,  having  determinetl  tlifir  ap- 
pointed seasons,  and  the  bounds  ot  their  liabitation; 
27  that  they  should  seek  God,  if  haply  they  might  leel 
after  him,  ai,d  lind  him,  though  lie  is  not  lur  from 


a  Deut.  3'2  :  tj 6  Uuiii.  1  :  20 c  uh.  U  :  17. 


country — in  some  respects,  at  least. — as  the  best.^ 
But  the  remark  was  specially  aimed,  beyond 
duuljt,  at  the  feeling  of  self-congratulation 
with  which  the  Athenians  were  prone  to  con- 
template the  peculiar  felicity  of  their  own  po- 
sition, their  national  renown,  their  past  and 
present  prosperity.  This  view  of  the  meaning 
prepares  the  way  for  the  thought  which  is  next 
introduced. — Having  fixed  the  appointed 
seasons  and  limits  of  their  abode.  The 
second  participle  repeats  the  idea  of  the  first, 
not  supertluously,  but  witli  the  evident  effect 
of  affirming  it  more  strongly.  (The  approved 
reading  is  7rpoo-T€Tay|iiei'ou!,  rather  than  7rpoT£Ta7ju.e- 
vovs,  T.  R.)  The  apostle,  by  adding  this,  admon- 
ishes the  Athenians  that  they,  like  every  other 
people,  had  not  only  received  their  i>eculiar  ad- 
vantages from  the  conunon  Creator,  but  that 
they  could  hold  them  only  during  the  continu- 
ance of  his  good-will  and  favor.  In  assigning 
to  the  nations  their  respective  abodes  he  had 
fixed  both  the  s&LSom  of  their  prosperity  and 
the  liniits  of  their  territory — I.  e.  it  was  he  who 
decided  when  and  how  lung  they  should  flourish 
and  how  far  their  dominion  should  extend. 
We  have  the  same  idea  exactly  in  Job  12  :  23. 
The  remark  was  adapted  both  to  rebuke  their 
spirit  of  self-elation  and  to  warn  them  of  the 
danger  of  slighting  a  message  from  him  wlio 
had  their  destiny  so  perfectly  at  liis  command. 
Some  explain  these  last  words  as  referring  to 
the  limits  which  God  has  assigned  to  the  lives 
of  men  individually  :  they  have  their  appoint- 
ed seasons  and  bounds,  beyond  which  they 
cannot  pass.  But  that  idea  lies  out  of  the 
present  circle  of  view,  as  the  subject  of  dis- 
course here  relates  to  nations,  and  not  to  indi- 
viduals. It  is  also  philologically  inadmissible, 
since  their  can  naturally  refer  to  men  only  as 
connected  with  every  nation. — The  anti-poly- 
tlieistic  aim,  which  forms  to  such  an  extent  the 
ground-tone  of  the  discourse,  is  to  be  recog- 
nized, perhaps,  also  in  this  part  of  it.  The 
separation  of  men  into  so  manv  different  na- 


this  verse  as  true  of  God  is  also  intended  to  be 
denied  in  regard  to  polytheism.  Tlie  concep- 
tion, therefore,  thus  brought  before  the  minds 
of  his  heathen  auditors  was  a  vast  one.  All 
that  power  exerted  in  giving  existence  to  men 
controlling  their  destiny,  exalting  entit-e  na- 
tions or  casting  them  down,  which  they  had 
parcelled  out  among  such  an  infinity  of  gods, 
they  are  now  led  to  concentrate  in  a  single  pos- 
sessor ;  they  obtain  the  idea  of  one  infinite  Cre- 
ator and  Ruler. 

27.  To  seek  (^rjTeZi'),  telic,  that  they  should 
seek.  This  infinitive  attaches  itself  more  par- 
ticularly to  the  part  of  the  sentence  which 
commences  at  should  dwell,  and  states  the 
moral  object  which  God  had  in  view  with  ref- 
erence to  men  in  making  such  provision  for 
their  convenience  and  happmess.  It  was  that 
they  might  Ije  led  by  such  tokens  of  his  good- 
ness to  seek  him — i.  e.  a  more  perfect  know- 
ledge of  him  and  of  their  obligations  to  him. 
Some,  on  the  contrary,  make  the  infinitive 
depend  almost  wholly  on  the  clause  just  be- 
fore, and  find  the  connection  to  be  this — that, 
excited  by  the  proofs  of  liis  power,  as  mani- 
fested in  the  varying  fortunes  of  nations,  they 
should  seek,  etc.  But,  as  already  explained,  the 
controlling  idea  in  that  clause  is  that  of  the 
goodness  of  God  (.subject,  as  to  its  continuance, 
to  the  divine  pleasure) ;  while  that  of  his 
power,  as  displayed  in  the  infliction  of  judg- 
ments, is  only  incidentally  involved.  Again, 
that  clause  is  a  subordinate  one,  as  its  structure 
shows,  and  that  it  should  break  off  should  seek 
so  much  from  the  main  part  of  the  sentence 
would  bo  violent. — If  perhaps  they  might 
feel  after  him  and  find  him.  Feel  after 
(i^»)Aa<^))(Teia>')  (Icnotcs,  properly,  the  motions  of 
a  blind  man  who  gropes  along  after  an  object 
in  the  dark.  On  the  peculiar  iEolic  termina- 
tion, see  W.  ?13.  2.  d;  K.  ?  IIG.  9;  B.  §103. 
marg.  14.  This  verb  is  chosen,  as  well  as  the 
problematical  form  of  the  expression  (ti  apaye), 
because  the  apostle  would  concede  the  compar- 


tions  might  seem  to  oppose  the  idea  of  their  ative  indistinctness  of  the  liglit  wliieh  tlie  liea- 
common  parentage;  that  separation  itself  is  then  have  to  guide  them. — Although  indeed. 
therefore  represented  by  the  apostle  as  having  [  This  clause  is  added  to  show  that  tlie  conce«5- 
been  contemplated  in  the  divine  plan. — It  will  |  sion  just  made  was  not  intended  to  exculpate 
be  observed  that  what  the  apostle  affirms  in  i  the  heathen  for  their  estrangement  from  God. 


'  Tacitus  has  recognized  this  principle  in  his  fine  remark  {Germ.,  ^2) : 
si  pairia  siC' 


"Iiiformem  terris,  asperam  c<«lo,  nisi 


208 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch  XVII. 


28  For  <"in  him  we  live,  and  move,  and  have  our  be- 
ing; 'as  certain  also  of  your  own  poets  have  said,  lor 
we  are  also  his  offspring. 

29  Forasmuch  then  as  we  are  the  offspring  of  God, 
'we  ought  not  to  think  that  the  Godhead  is  like  unto 

fold,  or  silver,  or  stone,   graven    by  art   and  man's 
evice. 

3u  And  ''the  times  of  this  ignorance  God  winked  at ; 
but  'now  commandeth  all  men  every  where  to  repent: 


28 each  one  of  us:  for  in  him  we  live,  and  move,  and 
have  our  being;  ascertain  even  of  your  own  ])oets 

29  have  said.  For  we  are  also  his  ottspring.  l.eing 
then  the  offspring  of  CJod,  we  ought  not  to  think 
that  'the  Godhead  is  like  unto  gold,  or  silver,  or 

30  stone,  graven  by  art  and  device  of  man.  The  times 
of  ignorance  therefore  God  overlooked ;  but  now  he 
-commandeth  men  that  they  should  all  everywhere 


Heb.  1  :  3. ...6  Tit.  1  :  12. ...c  Isa.  40  :  lS..:.d  ch.  14  :  16;  Rom.  3  :  25. ...e  Luke  24 

4  ;  3. 1  Or,  that  which  is  divine. . .  .2  :50me  aucieut  authorities  read  declareth  to 


Tit.  2  :  11,  12;  1  Pet.  1  :  14; 


Although  SO  benighted  as  to  be  comijelled  to 
grope  for  the  object  of  their  search,  it  was  still 
within  reach  ;  they  had  not,  after  all,  so  far  to 
go  for  a  knowledge  of  God  that  they  might  not 
find  it  if  they  would.  (Compare  the  sentiment 
with  14  :  17,  and  especially  with  Rom.  1  :  20.) 

28.  We  live  and  move  and  exist.  The 
different  verbs  present  the  idea  on  every  side. 
We  derive  our  existence  solely  from  God ;  we 
depend  on  him  every  instant  for  life,  activity, 
being  itself.  Without  him  we  should  neither 
continue  to  live,  nor  be  such  as  we  are,  nor 
have  been  at  all.  From  creatures  thus  de- 
pendent the  evidence  of  a  creator  cannot  be 
very  deeply  hidden,  if  they  have  only  a  dispo- 
sition to  seek  for  it. — As  also — i.  e.  the  senti- 
ment is  not  only  true,  but  has  been  acknow- 
ledged.— Among  you — i.  e.  Greeks,  in  distinc- 
tion from  Jews ;  not  Athenians,  in  distinction 
from  other  Greeks.— For  his  offspring  also 
are  we.  Derivation  implies  dependence.  The 
creature  cannot  exist  apart  from  the  Creator. 
The  apostle  brings  forward  the  citation  cor- 
rectly, therefore,  as  parallel  in  sentiment  to  in 
him  we  live,  etc.  He  quotes  it  as  an  avowal 
that  we  owe  our  being  and  its  preservation  to 
a  higher  Power;  the  mythological  idea  of  Ju- 
piter does  not  enter  into  the  meaning.^  The 
genitive  article  (toO)  stands  here  for  the  pro- 
noun. (W.  §  17. 1 ;  S.  f  94. 1.)  The  words  form 
the  first  half  of  a  hexanieter,  and  are  found  in 
Aratus,  a  Cilician  poet,  who  flourished  about 
B.  c  270.  The  celebrated  hymn  of  Cleanthes  to 
Jupiter  (v.  5)  contains  almost  the  same  words 
— viz.  for  we  are  offspring  of  thee.  The  same  idea, 
variously  expressed,  occurs  in  several  other 
Greek  writers.  The  form  of  the  citation  the 
apostle  took,  undoubtedly,  from  Aratus,  but 
says  certain  have  said,  because  he  would 
generalize  the  idea  as  if  he  had  said.  The  truth 
is  so  plain  that  even  your  poetry  recognizes  it. 
(See  on  v.  18.)      According  to  some,  he  uses 


the  plural  because  he  had  in  mind  other  pas- 
sages where  the  thought  is  found,  or,  according 
to  others,  because  he  inferred  that  so  obvious 
a  remark  must  be  a  common  one.  For  also, 
as  Meyer  observes  correctly,  has  no  logical  con- 
nection with  Paul's  speech,  but  is  to  be  viewed 
merely  as  a  part  of  the  citation,  which  it  was 
necessary  to  retain  on  account  of  the  verse. 

29.  Forasmuch,  then,  or  since,  there- 
fore, we  are  the  offspring  of  God.  The  in- 
ference drawn  here  is  that  idolatry  is  supreme- 
ly absurd,  inasmuch  as  it  makes  that  which  is 
destitute  of  life,  motion,  intelligence,  the  source 
of  these  attributes  to  others.  (Comp.  Isa.  44  : 
9,  sq.) — In  we  ought  Paul  connects  himself 
with  them,  and  thus  softens  tlie  rebuke. — A 
thing  graven  stands  in  apposition  with  the 
nouns  which  precede — i.  e.  the  state  or  form 
of  the  materials  just  enumerated,  artificially 
wrought. 

30.  The  relation  of  this  verse  and  the  one 
following  to  the  preceding  verse  is  this  :  Since 
such  is  the  nature  of  idolatry,  you  must  there- 
fore (ovi')  repent  of  it,  because  God  now  lays 
upon  you  his  command  to  this  effect,  in  view 
of  the  retributions  of  a  judgment  to  come. 
The  most  important  word  here  is  winked 
at  {iincpi&Mv).  It  does  not  occur  further  in 
the  New  Testament,  but  is  found  often  in  the 
Septuagint,  where  it  signifies  "to  neglect," 
which  is  its  proper  classical  sense,  then  "  to 
despise,"  but  especially  "to  suffer  to  pass  as 
if  unnoticed,"  "  to  withhold  the  proof  of  no- 
ticing a  thing  which  is,  at  the  same  time,  a 
matter  of  distinct  knowledge  " — a  frequent  sense 
of  the  Hebrew  'alum  in  Hiijhil  and  Hithpael. 
(See  Dent.  22  :  3,  4,  etc.)  In  this  last  significa- 
tion the  verb  represents  perfectly  the  apostle's 
meaning  here.  God  had  hitherto  permitted 
the  heathen  to  pursue  their  own  way  without 
manifesting  his  sense  of  their  conduct,-  eithei 
by  sending  to  them  special  messengers  to  testify 


1  No  more  than  in  the  words  of  Milton : 

"  Fame  is  no  plant  that  grows  on  mortal  soil ; 


But  lives  and  spreads  aloft  by  those  pure  eyes, 
And  perfect  witness  of  all-judging  Jove." 


Ch.  XVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


209 


81  Pecause  he  hath  appointed  a  day,  in  the  which 
"he  will  judge  the  world  in  righteousness  by  dial  man 
whom  he  hath  ordained ;  whireoj'  he  hath  given  as- 
surance unto  all  men,  in  that  'he  hath  raised  him  from 
the  dead. 

:v>.  If  And  when  they  heard  of  the  resurrection  of  the 
dead,  some  mocked:  and  others  said,  We  will  iiear  thee 
again  of  this  mailer. 

'A'i  So  Paul  departed  from  among  them. 

34  Howbeit  certain  men  clave  unto  him,  and  be- 
lieved: among  the  which  u^as  Dionysius  the  Areo- 
pagite,  and  a  woman  named  Damaris,  and  others 
with  them. 


31  repent :  inasmuch  as  he  hath  appointed  a  day,  in 
the  which  he  will  judge  'the  world  in  righteousness 
-by  ^the  man  whom  he  hath  ordained  ;  whereof  he 
hath  given  assurance  unto  all  men,  in  that  ht;  hath 
raised  him  from  the  dead. 

32  Now  when  they  heard  of  the  resurrection  of  the 
dead,  .some  mucked,  but  others  said.  We  will  hear 

Sntbee  concerning   this  yet  again.     Thus  Paul   went 

34  out  from  aniung  them.     But  certain  men  clave  unto 

him,  and  believed:  among  whom  also  was  Dionysius 

the  Areopagite,  ana  a  wuman  named  Damaris,  and 

otiiers  with  them. 


a  ch.  10  :  42  ;  Rom.  2  :  16  ;  14  :  10 6  ch.  2  :  24.- 


-1  Gr.  the  inhabited  earth. . .  .2  dr.  in 3  Or,  a  man. 


against  it,  as  he  did  to  the  Jews,  or  by  inflict- 
ing upon  them  at  once  the  punishment  de- 
served. The  idea  is  virtually  the  same,  there- 
fore, as  that  of  suffered  (doo-e),  in  14  :  16,  and 
gave  them  up  {napeSuiKfv),  in  Rom.  1  :  24.  To 
understand  overlooked  (vTreptSuv)  as  meaning 
that  God  would  not  judge  or  punish  the  hea- 
then for  the  sins  committed  in  their  state  of 
idolatry  would  be  at  variance  with  Paul's  the- 
ology on  this  subject  as  he  has  unfolded  it  in 
Rom.  1  :  20 ;  2:11,  sq.  Not  only  so,  but  the 
repentance  which  the  apostle  now  calls  upon 
them  to  exercise  presupposes  their  guilt. 

31.  Because  states  the  reason  why  the  hea- 
then also,  as  well  as  others,  must  repent :  they 
could  not,  without  this  preparation,  be  safe  in 
the  day  of  righteous  judgment  which  awaited 
them. — In  (the  person  of)  the  man  whom  he 
appointed.  Man  omits  the  article,  because  a 
detlnite  clause  follows.  (W.  ?  21.  4 ;  S.  ?  89. 
3.)  The  dative  of  the  pronoun  (<S)  stands,  by 
attraction,  fir  the  accusative.  —  Having  af- 
forded assurance  to  all,  confirmation — viz. 
of  a  judgment  to  come.  It  is  impossible  to  say 
just  how  much  the  apostle  intended  to  repre- 
sent as  proved  by  the  resurrection  of  Christ. 
He  himself  referred  to  it,  undoubtedly,  in  the 
first  place,  as  establishing  the  possibility  of  such 
a  resurrection  of  all  men  from  the  dead  as  was 
involved  in  his  doctrine  of  a  general  judgment ; 
but  whether  he  had  yet  developed  this  doctrine 
so  far  that  the  Athenians  i)erceived  already  this 
bearing  of  the  fact  is  uncertain.  It  was  enough 
to  excite  their  scorn  to  hear  of  a  single  instance 
of  resurrection.  Again,  the  resurrection  of 
Christ  from  the  dead  confirms  the  truth  of  all 
his  claims ;  and  one  of  these  was  that  he  was 
to  be  the  Judge  of  men.  (See  John  5  :  28,  29.) 
But  whether  the  apostle  meant  to  extend  the 
argument  to  these  and  other  points  we  cannot 
decide,  a.s  he  was  so  abruptly  silenced. 

32-34.  PAUL  IS  INTERRUPTED,  AND 
LEAVES  THE  ASSEMBLY. 

32.  The  apostle  was  heard  with  attention 
until  he  came  to  speak  of  the  resurrection, 
when,   at    the    announcement    of   a    doctrine 

14 


which  sounded  so  strangely  to  the  ears  of  the 
Athenians,  some  of  them  broke  forth  into  ex- 
pressions of  open  contempt. — A  resurrection 
of  the  dead.  Both  nouns  omit  the  article  in 
this  frequent  combination,  except  in  1  Cor.  15  : 
42.  (\V.  ?  19.)  As  we  do  not  know  how  much 
of  Paul's  idea  the  Athenians  liad  apprehended, 
it  is  doubtful  whether  we  are  to  take  the  i)lural 
here  as  generic  or  numerical — i.  e.  whether 
Christ  merely  be  meant,  or  men  in  general. — 
We  will  hear  thee  again  concerning  this 
— viz.  matter.  Not  so  naturally  nuisc,  witli 
reference  to  him,  in  v.  31.  It  is  disputed 
whether  we  are  to  understand  this  as  said 
seriously,  or  as  a  courteous  refusal  to  hear  any- 
thing further  from  him.  The  latter  is  the 
prevalent  view  :  and  so  Kuinoel,  Hemsen,  De 
Wette,  Meyer,  Bloomfield,  Conybeare  and  How- 
son.  The  manner  in  which  Paul  now  left  the 
assembly,  the  immediate  termination  of  his  la- 
bors at  Athens,  and  the  adversative  but  (5e),  in 
V.  34,  favor  this  interpretation.  »Such  a  mode 
of  speaking,  too,  was  entirely  consonant  to  the 
Athenian  character.  Calvin,  Grotius,  Rosen- 
miiller,  Alford,  are  among  those  who  impute  a 
serious  meaning  to  the  language. 

33.  So  —  lit.  and  thus;  i.  e.  after  these 
events,  or  witli  such  a  result.  (Comp.  20  :  11 ; 
28  :  14.) — From  among  them — i.  e.  of  those 
whom  he  had  addressed,  not  from  the  city. 
(Comp.  18  :  1.) 

34.  Howbeit,  rather  but  certain  (Mey., 
De  Wet.),  appears  to  be  contrasted  in  the  writ- 
er's mind  with  what  is  stated  in  v.  32  respect- 
ing the  effect  of  Paul's  speech  ;  the  favorable,  is 
opposed  to  the  unfavorable.  Yet  the  conjunc- 
tive (Se)  may  be  continuative. — Clave,  etc.,  not 
adhering,  but  joining,  attacliing,  themselves, 
to  him. — The  Areopagite — i.  e.  one  of  the 
judges  in  the  court  of  the  Areopagus.  The 
number  of  these  judges  varied  at  different 
times.  Eusebius  and  other  ancient  writers  say 
that  this  Dionysius  became  afterward  bishop 
of  the  church  at  Athens  and  ended  his  life  as 
a  martyr. — And  a  woman,  not  tlie  wife  of 
Dionysius,  as  some  have  said,  for  the  article 


210 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


AFTER  these  things  Paul  departed  from  Athens,  and 
came  to  t'orinth ; 
t  And  found  a  certain  Jew  named  "Aquila,  born  in 
Pontus,  lately  come  from  Italy,  with  his  wife  Priscilla ; 


CHAPTER     XVIII. 

1  Aptkr  these  things  he  departed   from   Athens. 

2  and  came  to  Corinth      And  he  found  a  certain  Jew 
named  Aquila,  a  man  of  Pontus  by  race,  lately  come 


I  Rom.  16  :  3  ;  1  Cor.  16  :  19 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  19. 


and  pronoun  would  then  have  been  added 
(cornp.  5  :  1),  or  at  least  the  article.  (Comp. 
24  :  24.)  It  has  been  inferred,  from  her  being 
singled  out  thus  by  name,  tliat  she  was  a 
woman  of  rank,  but  beyond  this  nothing  is 
known  of  her. 


1-11.  ARRIVAL  OF  PAUL  AT  CORINTH, 
AND  HIS  LABORS  THERE. 

1.  From  Athens.  Wieseler  limits  the  apos- 
tle's stay  at  Athens  to  fourteen  days.  The  esti- 
mate is  necessarily  conjectural.  It  is  certain 
that,  although  Paul  spent  tlie  most  of  the  two 
next  years  in  Corinth  and  the  vicinity,  he  did 
not  direct  his  steps  again  to  that  city.  On  his 
third  missionary-tour  he  came  once  more  into 
this  part  of  Greece,  but  at  that  time  passed  by 
Athens,  certainly  once  and  again,  without  re- 
peating his  visit  thither.  [If  it  be  asked.  Why 
did  he  not  return  again  and  again  to  this  beau- 
tiful city,  "the  eye  of  Greece,"  the  home  of 
art  and  philosophy  and  liberal  tliought?  the 
only  answer  which  his  character  allows  is  this : 
The  people  of  other  cities  were  more  likely  to 
welcome  the  gospel.  "  It  is  a  serious  and  in- 
structive fact  that  the  mercantile  populations 
of  Thessalonica  and  Corinth  received  the  mes- 
sage of  God  with  greater  readiness  than  the 
highly-educated  and  polished  Athenians."  (See 
Conybeare  and  Howson,  vol.  i.  p.  381 :  C.  Scrib- 
ner,' 1854.)— A.  H.]— To  Corinth.  The  dis- 
tance from  Athens  to  Corinth  by  land  is  about 
forty-five  miles.     The  summit  of  the  Acropolis 


travelled.  The  voyage,  says  Wieseler,  could  be 
made  easily  in  two  days.  A  Greek  seaman 
informed  the  writer  that  with  a  very  fair  wind 
he  had  made  the  passage  in  three  hours,  thougli 
on  the  average  in  five  or  six  hours ;  that  in  bad 
weather  he  had  been  five  days  on  the  way. 
The  steamers  between  the  Piraeus  and  Kali- 
maki,  the  eastern  port  of  the  modern  Corinth, 
occupy  usually  four  hours. —  Corinth  at  this 
period  was  the  seat  of  the  Roman  proconsulate 
for  Achaia,  or  the  southern  province  of  Greece. 
"  In  consequence  of  its  situation,"  says  Nean- 
der,  "this  citj^  furnished  a  very  important  cen- 
tral point  for  the  extension  of  the  gospel  in  a 
great  part  of  the  Roman  Empire;  and  hence 
Paul  remained  here,  as  in  other  similar  places, 
a  longer  time  than  was  otherwise  usual  for 
him." 

2.  Aquila.  The  nominative  is  ^gt«i7a.«('AKi;Aat, 
V.  26).  Aquila  and  Priscilla,  or  Prisca  (Rom. 
16:3),  were  Roman  names,  and  it  was  common 
for  Jews  to  assume  such  names  when  they  lived 
out  of  Palestine.  (See  on  13  :  9.)  That  Aquila 
was  born  in  Pontus  harmonizes  with  2  :  9  and 
1  Pet.  1  :  1,  for  we  see  from  those  passages  that 
Jews  resided  in  that  country.  As  we  have 
no  account  of  his  conversion  at  Corinth,  the 
probability  is  that  Aquila  embraced  the  gospel 
at  Rome.  So  Hemsen,  Olshausen,  Neander, 
Wieseler,  and  others  conclude.  Some  allege  a 
certain  Jew  as  proof  that  he  was  still  uncon- 
verted (Mey.,  De  Wet.) ;  but  he  is  introduced 
in  that  manner  on  account  of  wliat  follows. 
The  notice  apprises  us  that  he  was  one  of  the 
ail  Jews  whom  the  decree  banished.  At  this 
early  period  no  distinction  would  be  made  be- 
twoen  Jews  and  Jewish  Cliristians.  Aquila 
.iccompanied  Paul  to  Ephcsus  (w.  \%  26),  and 
was  still  there  when  the  apostle  wrote  the 
First  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  (i  cor.  i6  :  i»). 
We  find  him  at  Rome  again  when  Paul  wrote 
the  Epistle  to  the  Romans  (Rom.  i6: 3,  .7),  and 
at  a  still  later  period  at  Epliesus  a  second  time 
(2  Tim.  4:19).  The  nature  of  his  business  (v.  3) 
led  him  frequently  to  change  the  place  of  his 
residence. — Because  Claudius  had  order- 
ed, etc.  Luke  refers  unquestionably  to  the 
edict  mentioned  by  Suetonius  (Claud.,  c.  25) : 
of  the  one  city  can  be  distinctly  seen  from  that  I  "  Judneos,  impulsore  Chresto,  assidue  tumultu- 
of  the  other.     Came  does  not  show  how  Paul  I  antes  Roma  expulit"  ["The  Jews,  constantly 


COEINTH   AND  ACROCORINTHUS. 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


211 


(because  that  Claudius  had  commanded  all  Jews  to  de- 
part from  Rome:)  and  came  unto  them. 

;;  And  because  he  was  of  the  same  craft,  he  abode 
with  them,  "and  wrought :  for  by  their  occupation  they 
were  tentmakers. 

4  'And  he  reasoned  in  the  synagogue  every  sabbath, 
and  persuaded  the  Jews  aud  the  Oreeks. 

0  And  <^wheu  !>ilas  and  Timotheus  were  come  from 
Macedonia,  I'aul  was  ■'pressed  in  the  spirit,  and  testi- 
fied to  the  Jews  lluit  Jesus  was  Christ. 


from  Italy,  with  his  wife  Priscilla,  because  Claudius 

had  commanded  all  the  Jews  to  depart  from  Rome : 

Sand  he  came  unto  them;  and  because  he  was  of  the 

same  trade,  he  abode  with  them,  and  they  wrought; 

4  for  by  their  trade  they  were  tentmakers.  And  he 
reasoned  in  the  synagogue  every  sabbath,  and  'per- 
suaded Jews  and  Greeks. 

5  Rut  when  Silas  aud  Timothy  came  down  from 
Macedonia,  Paul  was  constrained  by  the  word,  testi- 


och.  20  :  34;  1  Cor.  4  :  12 ;  1  Thess.  2  :  9;  2  Thess.  3:8 I  ch.  17  :  2 c  ch.  17  :  14,  15.... d  Job  32  ;  18 ;  ch.  17  ;  3  ;  ver.  28. 

1  Gr.  sought  to  persuade. 


making  disturbance,  Chrestus  being  the  instiga- 
tor, he  expelled  them  from  Rome"].  Neander 
remai'kson  that  passage  as  follows:  "We  might 
suppose  that  some  factious  Jew  then  living,  of 
this  name,  one  of  the  numerous  class  of  Jewish 
frecdmen  in  Rome,  was  intended.  But  as  no 
individual  so  universally  known  as  the  Chres- 
tus of  Suetonius  seems  to  have  been  considered 
by  that  writer  is  elsewhiire  mentioned,  and  as 
Christos  (Xpicrros)  was  frequently  pronounced 
Chrestos  (Xpijo-rds)  by  the  pagans,  it  is  quite 
probable  that  Suetonius,  who  wrote  half  a 
century  after  the  event,  throwing  together 
what  he  had  heard  about  the  political  expec- 
tations of  a  Messiah  among  the  Jews  and  the 
obscure  and  confused  accounts  which  may 
have  reached  him  resj^ecting  Christ,  was  thus 
led  to  express  himself  in  a  manner  so  vague 
and  indefinite"  {Church  History,  vol.  i.  p.  49). 
The  Roman  liistorian  does  not  mention  the 
year  of  that  exiiulsion,  and  we  may  sui^pose 
it  to  have  been  about  a.  d.  52,  in  accordance 
with  our  i^lan  of  chronology.  Lately  shows 
that  it  was  still  a  recent  event  when  Paul  ar- 
rived at  Corinth.  Some  writers  would  identify 
this  decree  with  that  De  viathematicis  Italia  pel- 
lendis  which  Tacitus  mentions.  (Ann.,  12.  52.) 
The  mathematici,  or,  as  they  are  called,  Chal- 
dxi,  were  banished  on  the  ground  of  their  aid- 
ing conspirators  against  the  emperor  by  the 
use  of  their  art  as  astrologers.  Wieseler  ( Chro- 
nologie,  p.  121,  sq.)  argues  that  the  Jews  may 
have  been  confounded  with  that  class  of  men, 
and  were  con.sequently  banished  by  the  same 
decree.  If  that  point  were  established,  it  would 
furnisii  a  striking  confirmation  of  the  correct- 
ness of  our  chronology ;  for  the  edict  to  which 
Tacitus  refers  can  be  shown  to  have  been  pub- 
lislied  in  a.  d.  52.  But  it  must  remain  uncertain 
whether  the  two  events  have  any  chronological 
connection  with  each  other. 

3.  Wrought,  labored  for  his  subsistence. 
He  reminds  the  Corinthians  of  this  fact  in  1 
Cor.  0  :  6,  sq.,  and  2  Cor.  11  :  7,  sq.—ToT  they 
were  tentmakers  as  to  the  trade,  or 
(with  Tj';  Texfj),  according  to  Lchm.,  Tsch.)  [also 
Treg.,  West,  aud   Hort,  Anglo-Am.    Revisers, 


with  X  A  B  E  L  P,  certainly  the  true  reading. — 
A.  H.]  in  respect  to  the  trade  (which  they 
had).  The  accusative  (rrji'  T«x>'»)fj  would  be  a 
limiting  accusative  like  in  like  manner  (t6v 
TpoTTov)  in  Jude,  v.  7.  (W.  g  32.  G;  K.  g  279.  7.) 
The  Jews,  more  especially  after  the  Exile,  held 
the  mechanic  arts  in  high  estimation.  It  was 
a  proverb  among  them  that  the  father  who 
neglected  to  bring  up  his  son  to  a  trade  taught 
him  to  be  a  thief.  The  composition  of  tent- 
makers (o-KTji'OTrotot)  indicates  a  definite  sense. 
It  is  difficult  to  see  why  some  should  suppose 
it  to  mean  manufacturers  of  tent-cloth.  It  lias 
not  been  shown  that  the  usage  differed  from 
the  etymology.  Tent-making  was  a  common 
trade  in  Cilicia,  the  native  country  of  the  apos- 
tle. A  coarse  species  of  goat's  hair,  called  cil- 
icium,  wa.s  produced  there  in  great  abundance, 
and  was  much  used  for  that  purpose.  A  per- 
son accustomed  to  work  on  that  material  could 
work,  doubtless,  on  any  other.  Paul  had  ac- 
quired the  trade,  in  all  probability,  during  his 
boyhood,  while  he  lived  at  Tarsus. 

4.  Reasoned,  or  discoursed  (SitMyero, 
imperf.),  from  week  to  week ;  whereas  dis- 
coursed (S(.e\ex^,  aorist),  in  v.  19,  refers  to  a 
single  occasion. —  Greeks — i.  e.  Greek  prose- 
lytes who  attended  the  synagogue.  (Comp. 
13  :  43 ;  14  :  1.)  The  apostle  had  not  yet  ad- 
dressed himself  to  the  heathen.     (See  v.  6.) 

5.  In  Now  when  [or  as]  they  came 
down,  Avhen  (is)  is  not  merely  temporal 
(Alf),  but  represents  the  Avas  pressed  etc. 
as  immediately  consequent  on  the  arrival  of 
the  two  friends.  —  Macedonia  denotes  here 
the  Roman  province  of  that  name,  coniprising 
Northern  Greece  as  distinguished  from  Achaia, 
or  Southern  Greece.  (See  on  v.  1.)  It  is  lefl 
uncertain,  therefore,  from  what  particular  place 
Silas  and  Timothy  arrived  at  this  time.  (Comp. 
on  v.  IG.) — Was  pressed,  or  Avas  engrossed 
(lit.  held  together),  with  the  word  (Yulg., 
Kuin.,  Olsh.,  De  Wet.,  Bmg.,  Rob.).  The  ar- 
rival of  his  associates  relieved  him  from  anx- 
iety which  had  pressed  heavily  upon  him 
(comp.  1  Thess.  3  :  G,  sg.),  and  he  could  now 
devote  himself   with   unabated   energy  to   his 


212 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


6  And  "when  they  opposed  themselves,  and  blas- 
phemed, '"he  shook  his  raiment,  and  said  unto  them, 
'■your  blood  be  upon  your  own  heads;  ''I  am  cleau  :  'from 
henceforth  I  will  go  unto  the  Oentiles. 

7  K  And  he  departed  thence,  and  entered  into  a  cer- 
tain man's  house,  named  Justus,  (me  that  worshipped 
God,  whose  house  joined  hard  to  the  synagogue. 

8  /And  Crispus,  the  chief  ruler  of  the  synagogue, 
believed  on  the  Lord  with  all  his  house;  and  many 
of  the  Corinthians  hearing  believed,  and  were  bap- 
tized. 

9  Then  ffspake  the  Lord  to  Paul  in  the  night  by  a 
vision.  Be  not  afraid,  but  speak,  and  hold  not  thy 
peace : 

10  *For  I  am  with  thee,  and  no  man  shall  set  on 


6  fying  to  the  Jews  that  Jesus  was  the  Chri.st.  And 
when  they  opposed  themselves,  and  'blasphemed, 
he  shook  out  his  raiment,  and  said  unto  them,  Vour 
blood  be  upon  your  own  heads;  I  am  clean:  from 

7  henceforth  I  will  go  unto  the  Lientiles.  And  he  de- 
parted thence,  and  went  into  the  house  of  a  certain 
man  named  Titus  Justus,  one  that  worshipped  (Jod, 

8  whose  house  joined  hard  to  the  synagogue.  And 
Crispus,  the  ruler  of  the  synagogue,  -believed  in  the 
Lord  with  all  his  house;  and  many  of  the  Corinth- 

9  ians  hearing  believed,  and  were  baptized.  And  the 
Lord  said  unto  Paul  in  the  night  by  a  vision,  lie 

10  not  afraid,  but  speak,  and  hold  not  thy  peace :  for  I 


och.  13  :  45;  1  Pet.  i:  i....h  Neh.  5  ;  13 ;  Matt.  10:  14;  ch.  13  :  51. 
3  :  18,  19;  33  :  9;  ch.  20  :  26. . .  .e  ch.  13  :  46;  28  :  28..../  1  Cor.  1  ; 
....2  Gr.  believed  the  Lord. 


.c  Lev.  20  :  9,  11,  12;  2  Sum.  1  :  16;  Ezek.  18:13;  33  :  4....<J  Ezek. 
4....pch.  23  ;  11....A  Jer.  1  :  18,  19;  Malt.  28:20. 1  Or,  railed 


work.  He  had  the  support,  also,  of  their  per- 
sonal co-operation.  We  see  from  2  Cor.  1  :  19 
that  Silas  and  Timothy  took  an  active  part  in 
the  proclamation  of  the  gospel  at  Corinth.  "We 
see  also  from  1  Cor.  2  :  3,  where  the  ai)ostle  says 
that  he  was  among  the  Corinthians  "  in  weak- 
ness and  in  fear  and  much  trembling,"  that  he 
was  in  a  state  of  mind  to  need  urgently  the 
presence  and  sympathy  of  such  coadjutors. 
Some  say  it  means  simply  that  Silas  and  Tim- 
othy found  Paul  employed  thus  anxiously 
when  they  arrived  (Mey.,  Alf);  but,  unless 
they  had  something  to  do  with  the  fact,  it 
would  be  unimportant  whether  it  occurred 
before  or  after  their  coming:  its  interest,  in 
that  case,  lay  wholly  in  its  being  a  part  of  the 
ajjostle's  experience.  The  common  text  has 
by  the  Spirit  after  Avas  engrossed :  he 
was  impelled  by  the  Spirit,  or  by  his 
own  spirit,  his  fervent  zeal.  (Comp.  v.  25.) 
The  evidence  decides  for  the  word  (tu  Aoyy) 
as  the  original  term  (Gi-sb.,  Mey.,  Tsch.). 

6.  But  they  opposing  themselves  is  not 
to  be  taken  as  explanatory  of  was  engrossed 
(against  Mey.),  but  as  describing  the  conduct 
of  the  Jews  occasioned  by  the  apostle's  being 
oigrosscd. — Blaspheming,  sc.  his  words,  mes- 
sage. (Comp.  13  :  45;  19  :  9.)— Shaking  out 
his  garments— z.  e.  the  dust  upon  them — as 
a  witness  against  them.  For  the  significancy 
of  the  act,  see  on  13  :  51.— Your  blood—/,  e. 
the  consequences  of  your  guilt.  (Comp.  20  :  26 ; 
Ezek.  33  :  5.)— Upon  your  head-i.  e.  let  it 
come.  (Comp.  Matt.  23  :  35.)— I  am  pure, 
have  discharged  my  duty.  Some  point  the 
text  so  as  to  read,  pure  I  henceforth  will 
turn  unto  the  Gentiles  (Lchm.,  Alf).  The 
two  clauses  utter  the  idea  more  forcibly  than 
one,  and  are  better  suited  to  so  grave  a  declara- 
tion. (Comp.,  also,  20  :  26  and  Matt.  27  :  24.) 
On  the  nature  of  this  desertion  of  the  Jews, 
see  on  13  :  46. 

7.  Having  departed  from  there— i.  e.  the 


synagogue  (see  v.  4),  not  from  the  city  or  from 
the  house  of  Aquila. — Went  into  the  house 
of  a  certain  Justus.  The  meaning  is,  not 
that  he  left  Aquila  and  went  to  lodge  with 
Justus  (Alf),  but  that  he  preacheil  in  future  at 
the  house  of  the  latter,  which  was  so  much  the 
more  convenient  because  it  was  near  the  syna- 
gogue where  they  had  been  accustomed  to  a.s- 
semble.  Paul  pursued  precisely  the  same  course 
at  Ephesus.  (See  19  :  9.)— Worshipping  God 
describes  Justus  as  a  foreigner  who  liad  em- 
braced Judaism,  but  was  not  yet  a  believer. 
He  opened  his  house  for  the  use  of  the  Chris- 
tians, because  he  had  more  sympathy  with 
them  than  with  the  Jews.  His  moral  position 
was  certainly  unique,  and  it  is  easy  to  believe 
that  he  soon  exchanged  it  for  that  of  a  be- 
liever. 

8.  Crispus  was  one  of  the  few  persons  at 
Corinth  whom  Paul  himself  baptized.  (See  1 
Cor.  1  :  14.)— Believed  with  all  his  house. 
Here  is  anotlier  instance  in  which  a  whole 
family  received  tlie  gospel.  (Comp.  16  :  15  ;  1 
Cor.  1 :  16.)  The  Apostolical  Constitutions  (VII. 
46)  say  that  Crispus  became  Bishop  of  J^gina. 
— The  Corinthians  who  believed  were  native 
Greeks,  not  Jews  at  Corinth.— Believed  is  im- 
perfect [denoting  a  continued  act],  from  the  re- 
lation of  the  act  to  hearing. 

9.  By,  or  through,  a  vision,  as  the  me- 
dium of  communication  ;  a  form  was  seen  as 
well  as  a  voice  heard.  (Comp.  9  :  12;  16  :  9 ; 
22  :  18.)— Fear  not.  The  form  of  the  imper- 
ative implies  that  he  was  beginning  to  despond. 
(See  the  note  on  10  :  15.)— Speak— *.  e.  con- 
tinue to  speak.  Observe  the  use  of  the  sub- 
junctive aorist  in  the  next  verb. 

10.  And  no  man— lit.  and  no  one— shall 
attack  thee  (telic)  to  injure  thee—/,  e.  no 
one  shall  attempt  it  with  success  (De  Wet.) ;  or 
ecbatic,  so  as  to  injure  thee.  The  infinitive 
with  tlie  genitive  article  (toC)  denotes  more 
commonly  a  purpose.      The    Jews    made    an 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE   ACTS. 


213 


thee  to  hurt  thee:   for  I  have  much  people  in  this 
city. 

11  And  he  continued  Me/r  a  year  and  six  months, 
teaching  tiie  word  of  liod  among  them. 

12  1[  And  when  ijallio  was  tlie  deputy  of  Achaia,  the 
Jews  made  insurrection  with  one  accord  against  i'aul, 
and  brought  him  to  the  judgment  seat, 

18  .Saying,  This  fellow  persuadeth  men  to  worship 
God  contrary  to  the  law. 

14  And  when  Paul  was  now  about  to  open  /;(«  mouth, 
Gallio  said  unto  the  Jews,  "If  it  were  a  matter  of  wrong 


am  with  thee,  and  no  man  shall  set  on  thee  to  harm 

11  thee:  lor  1  have  much  people  in  this  city.  And  he 
dwelt  tkcre  a  year  and  si.^c  months,  teaching  the 
word  of  God  among  them. 

12  But  when  Gallio  was  proconsul  of  Achaia,  the 
Jews   with   one   accord   rose  up   against   I'aul,  and 

13  brought  him  before  the  judgmenl-seat,  saying.  This 
man  persuadeth  men  to  worship  iiod  contrary  to 

14  the  law.  But  when  Paul  was  about  to  open  his 
mouth,  Gallio  said  unto  the  Jews,  If  indeed  it  were 


ach.  23  :  29;  25  :  11,  19. 


effort  to  destroy  the  apostle  after  this  promise 
(t.  12, »«.),  but  were  defeated. — Because  I  have 
much  people — i.  e.  ruany  who  are  appointed 
to  become  siicli.  (See  13  :  48  and  15  :  17.) 
Hence  tlie  activity  of  the  apostle  mtist  have 
free  scope  until  they  were  converted. 

11.  And  he  abode  a  year  and  six 
months.  It  has  been  questioned  whether 
this  designation  of  time  extends  merely  to 
the  arrest  mentioned  in  v.  12  (Mey.)  or  em- 
braces the  entire  sojourn  at  Corinth.  "  I  re- 
gard the  latter  view,"  says  Wieseler  {Chronol- 
ogic, p.  46),  "  as  undoubtedly  the  correct  one. 
This  appears,  in  the  first  place,  from  the  par- 
ticle and  (re),  which  connects  this  verse  in  the 
closest  manner  with  what  precedes,  and  conse- 
quently with  'The  Lord  said,  Fear  not,  but 
speak  and  be  not  silent ;  .  .  .  and  so  (W.  I  53. 
2)  he  abode  a  year  and  six  months,  teaching 
among  them  the  word  of  God.'  [But  the  con- 
nective re  is  not  so  Well  attested  as  he.  The 
latter  is  found  in  X  A  B,  etc.,  and  adopted  by 
Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  Anglo- 
Am.  Revisers. — A.  H.]  The  main  thought  of 
tiie  words  which  the  Lord  addresses  to  Patil  in 
the  vision  (w. 9,  lo)  is  unquestionably  'Speak  in 
this  city,  and  be  not  silent,'  and  accordingly  the 
period  of  time,  in  v.  11,  during  which  the  apos- 
tle obeys  this  command  of  CJhrist,  must  refer  to 
the  whole  time  in  which  he  had  spoken  at  Cor- 
inth and  was  not  silent — i.  e.  must  include  the 
time  until  his  departure.  In  the  second  place, 
this  follows  from  tiie  general  nature  of  the 
statement :  '  He  abode  there  a  year  and  six 
months.'  (Comp.  Luke  24  :  49.)  "  Anger  (p. 
63)  adopts  the  same  conclusion.  De  Wette 
calls  it  the  prevalent  view,  but  prefers  the 
other.— Among  them,  in  the  city  (v.  10).  (See 
on  8  :  5.) 

13-17.  PAUL  IS  ARRAIGNED  BEFORE 
GALLIO. 

12.  Gallio  was  a  brother  of  Seneca,  the 
celebrated  moralist.  His  original  name  was 
Novatus.  He  assuined  that  of  Gallio  out  of 
gratitude  to  a  distinguished  rlietorician  of  that 
name  who  adopted  him  as  a  son.  Seneca  dedi- 
cated his  books  De  Ira  and  De  Vita  Bcata  to 


this  brother.  In  one  of  his  Letters  (104)  lie 
speaks  of  Gallio  as  having  resided  in  Achaia, 
though  he  does  not  mention  in  wiiat  capacity 
he  was  there.  Luke's  narrative  represents  hiiu 
as  acting  a  part  in  striking  harmony  with  his 
reputed  character.  He  was  known  among  his 
contemporaries  as  the  "  dulcis  Gallio."  He  had 
the  social  qualities  which  make  a  man  a  gen- 
eral favorite.  "  Nemo  mortalium,"  says  Seneca, 
"  uni  tam  dulcis  est,  quam  hie  omnibus  "  ["  No 
mortal  is  as  pleasant  to  one  perst)n  as  he  was 
to  all "]  ( Quxst.  Nat.,  L.  4.  Prjef ).  Luke's  cared 
for  none  of  these  things,  in  v.  17,  indicates 
the  easy  temper  winch  contributes  so  much  to 
personal  j)opularity.  Gallio,  like  his  brother, 
was  put  to  death  by  the  murderous  Nero. — 
Was  the  deputy,  etc. — lit.  was  governing 
Achaia  as  proconsul.  This  province  (see 
on  V.  1)  consisted  of  Hellas  and  the  Pelopon- 
nesus. Here,  too,  we  have  a  striking  example 
of  Luke's  accuracy.  Under  Tiberius  (Tac, 
Ann.,  1.  76)  and  Caligula,  the  two  preceding 
emperors,  Achaia  had  been  an  imperial  i)rov- 
ince,  governed  by  propraetors.  But  Claudius 
had  restored  it  to  the  Senate  (Suet.,  Claud.,  c. 
25),  and  under  that  form  of  administration  its 
governors  were  styled  proconsuls.  Paul  was 
at  Corinth  in  the  reign  of  Claudius.  (Comp. 
the  note  on  13  :  7.) — Before  the  tribunal 
(iirX  TO  /3^/iia).  The  tribunal  O^mi)  was  a  seat 
or  chair  from  which  the  Roman  magistrates 
dispensed  justice.  It  was  sometimes  fixed  in 
one  place  and  was  sometimes  movable,  so  as  to 
accommodate  the  judge,  wherever  he  might 
wish  to  hold  his  court. 

13.  Contrary  to  the  law,  not  of  Uie  Ro- 
mans, but  of  the  Jews  (comp.  and  of  your 
law,  in  V.  15) ;  not  of  both  Romans  and  Jews 
(Lange),  as  the  charge  in  that  form  demanded 
investigation.  What  Luke  has  stated  here  is  a 
summary  of  tlie  charge.  That  the  Jews  went 
more  into  detail  is  evident  from  Gallio's  reply 
in  v.  13. 

14.  Wrong  and  wicked  vill any  designate 
the  act  perhaps  legally  and  ethically — this,  as 
an  offence  against  morality ;  that,  as  an  offence 
against    the    state    or   the  personal  rights  of 


214 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


or  wicked  lewdness,  O  ye  Jews,  reason  would  that  I 
should  bear  with  you  : 

15  But  if  it  be  a  question  of  words  and  names,  and 
of  your  law,  look  ye  to  it;  for  I  will  be  no  judge  of 
such  iiutUers. 

16  And  he  drave  them  from  the  judgment  seat. 

17  Then  all  the  Cireeks  took  "J^osthenes,  the  chief 
ruler  of  the  synagogue,  and  beat  him  before  the  judg- 
ment seat    And  Oallio  cared  for  none  of  those  things. 


a  matter  of  wrong  or  of  wicked  villany,  O  ye  Jews, 
15  reason  would  that  1  should  bear  with' you:  but  if 
they   are   questions    about   woids  ai  d   names   and 
your    own   law,   look    to   it   yourselves;    1   am    not 
Ifi  minded   to  be  a  judge  of  these  matters.    And  he 
17  drave   them    from   the   judgment-seat.      And    they 
all  laid  hold  on  i^osthenes,  the  ruler  of  the  syna- 
gogue,   and    beat    him    before    the   judgment-seat. 
And  Gallio  cared  for  none  of  these  things. 


a  1  Cor.  1 : 1. 


others.— I  would  have  suflered  you,  would 
have  li-stened  patiently  to  your  complaint ;  but, 
the  condition  in  the  protasis  not  being  true,  he 
could  not  now  do  it.  (For  dv  with  the  aorist 
indicative  in  the  subordinate  clause,  see  W.  ^  43. 
2;  B.  ?  139.  3.  2;  K.  g  327.  b.)  Gallio  makes 
known  his  decision  as  a  thing  settled. 

15.  Concerning  a  doctrine  {nepX  \6yov)  and 
names   {ovofidrMv),  because   they  had   accused 
Paul  of  teaching  that  Jesus  was  the  Messiah. 
— For  I  do    not   wish    to    be    judge    of 
these  things.     For  (yap)  (T.  11.)  is  logically 
correct,  but  comes  from  a  copyist.     It  was  out 
of   his  iirovince  to  take  cognizance  of  such 
questions.    The  Roman  laws  allowed  the  Jews 
to  regulate  their  religious  affairs  in  their  own 
way.     Lysias  (23:29)  and  Festus  (25:19)  placed  j 
their  refusal  to  interfere  on  tlie  same  ground.  1 
— The  reply  which   Luke  attributes  to  Gallio  j 
has  been  justl^^  cited  as  a  mark  of  that  candor  ' 
which  distinguishes  the  truth.     A  panegyrist,  a  | 
dishonest  narrator,  says  Paley,  would  betoo  jeal-  I 
ous  for  the  honor  of  his  cause  to  represent  it  as  ! 
treated  superciliously  by  those  of  eminent  rank. 

16.  Drove   them    away,    dispersed   them.  I 
The  verb  shows  that  they  left  reluctantly,  but  | 
not  that  any  violence  was  used.    A  peremptory  j 
refusal,  a  decisive  manner,  would  be  sufficient 
for  the  purpose. 

17.  The  interpretation  of  this  passage  has 
influenced  the  text.  Some  of  the  younger 
manuscripts  insert  the  Jews  after  all,  as  if 
the  Jews,  disappointed  in  tlieir  design  against 
the  apostle,  attempted,  as  their  next  resort,  to 
avenge  themselves  on  one  of  his  principal  fol- 
lowers. But  the  evidence  for  this  reading  is 
entirely  inadequate;  and  it  is  incredible,  also, 
that  Luke  should  mention  Sosthenes  merely  as 
a  ruler  of  the  synagogue,  if  he  had  become  in 
fact  a  Christian.  Tlie  best  authorities  have  all 
without  any  appendage,  and  the  Greeks  in 
the  common  editions  must  be  viewed  as  a  gloss, 
correct  as  an  explanation,  but  textually  sjmri- 
ous.  As  the  Jews  could  have  had  no  motive 
for  maltreating  one  of  their  own  number,  all 
must  be  the  body  of  those  present,  such  as  the 
subalterns  of  the  court  and  the  Greeks  whom  the 
tumult  had  drawn  together.     Sosthenes  was 


probably  the  successor  of  Crispus  (t.  s),  or,  as 
Biscoe  conjectures,  may  have  belonged  to  an- 
other synagogue  in  the  city.  He  appears  to 
have  taken  an  active  part  in  the  prosecution  ; 
and  hence  the  Greeks,  who  were  always  ready 
to  manifest  their  hatred  of  the  Jews,  singled 
him  out  as  the  object  of  their'  special  resent- 
ment. In  winking  at  this,  saj's  De  Wette, 
Gallio  may  have  carried  his  impartiality  too 
far.  If  he  was  the  Sosthenes  who  is  called 
"the  brother"  in  1  Cor.  1:1,  he  must  have 
been  converted  after  this,  and  have  removed 
to  Ephesus.  The  coincidence  in  the  name 
is  the  only  reason  for  supposing  the  same 
person  to  be  meant  in  both  places.  —  Beat 
{irvvTov,  imperf.)  shows  how  thorough  a 
beating  Sosthenes  received.  It  may  not  be 
Avronging  Gallio  to  suspect  tliat  he  looked 
through  his  fingers  and  enjoyed  the  scene. ^ 
None  of  these  things  {ovSev  tovtoiv)  includes 
most  naturally  the  dispute  between  the  Jews 
and  Christians,  as  well  as  the  abtise  of  Sos- 
thenes.— Was  a  care  to  (cVeAei/),  when  used 
as  a  personal  verb,  requires  in  prose  a  neuter 
subject.  (K.  ?  274.  R.  1 ;  Mt.  g  34S.  R.  2.)  The 
indifference  of  Gallio  is  not  mentioned  in  com- 
mendation of  him,  but  as  suggesting  whj'  the 
affair  had  such  a  termination.  Owing  to  the 
proconsul's  disposition,  the  Jews  were  unsuc- 
cessful ;  so  ftir  from  inflicting  any  injury  on 
the  apostle,  their  attempt  recoiled  in  disgrace 
and  violence  uj^on  themselves.  [The  narrative 
of  Luke  bears  the  stamp  of  complete  accuracy. 
Even  his  remark  that  Gallio  cared  for  none 
of  these  things  may  have  been  made  with 
no  intention  of  either  blaming  or  commending 
him.  But,  in  the  light  of  this  remark,  we  can- 
not suppress  the  feeling  that  the  easy-going  in- 
difference of  this  amiable  ruler  to  matters  of 
religion  (as  well  as  to  the  abuse  of  Sosthenes) 
was  inconsistent  with  any  deep  moral  earnest- 
ness. He  could  not  have  been,  in  any  true 
sense,  a  "  seeker  after  God."  He  may  safely  be 
classed  witli  those  who  make  this  world  their 
portion.  It  is  not,  therefore,  surprising  that 
many  interpreters  have  fixed  their  minds  on 
tlie  bearing  of  this  remark  upon  the  attitude 
of  Gallio  toward  religion,  and  have  looked  on 


Ch.  XVIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


215 


18  IT  And  Paul  nfler  this  tarried  l/iere  yet  a  good  while, 
and  then  took  his  leave  of  the  brethren,  and  sailed 
thence  into  Syria,  and  with  him  Priscilla  and  Aquila; 
having  "shorn  his  head  in  *Cerichrea:  for  he  had  a 
vow. 


18  And  Paul,  having  tarried  after  this  yet  many 
days,  took  his  leave  of  the  brethren,  and  sailed 
thence  for  Syria,  and  with  him  Priscilla  and  Aquila ; 
having  shorn  his  head  in  Cenchre;e:  fur  he  had  a 


a  Num.  6:18;  ch.  21 :  24. . .  .6  Bom.  16  : 1. 


him  as  a  specimen  of  those  who  are  careless 
about  God  and  eternal  life. — A.  H.] 

18-22.  PAUL  PROCEEDS  BY  THE  WAY 
OF  EPIIESUS  AND  CESAREA  TO  JERU- 
SALEM, AND  FROM  THERE  TO  ANTIOCH. 

18.  Having  remained  yet  many  days, 
after  the  arrest.  Wliether  tlie  arrest  took  place 
at  the  end  of  the  year  and  a  half  mentioned  in 
V.  11,  or  in  the  course  of  that  time,  is  subject, 
as  we  have  seen,  to  some  doubt.  Even  if  the 
arrest  was  subsequent  to  the  year  and  six 
months,  the  ^iiany  days  here  need  not  ))e  sup- 
posed to  extend  the  sojourn  at  Corinth  beyond 
a  few  additional  months  (Wiesl.).  During  this 
period  the  apostle  planted  churches  in  other 
parts  of  Achaia,  either  by  his  own  personal 
labors  or  by  the  instrumentality  of  his  con- 
verts. (See  2  Cor.  1:1.)  It  was  during  this 
visit  at  Corinth,  also,  that  Paul  wrote  the  First 
and  Second  Epistles  to  the  Thcssalonians. 
That  he  wrote  the  first  of  them  here  appears 
from  several  circumstances :  first,  Paul  had 
been  separated  from  the  Thessalonians  but  "a 
short  time"  (i  xheas.  2: 17) ;  .secondly,  Timothy 
and  Silas  were  with  him  (1  Thes3. 1 : 1),  as  they 
were  according  to  Luke  (i8:5);  thirdly,  the 
apostle  had  been  lately  at  Athens  (1  Thess.  3: 1), 
and  whence,  also,  according  to  pur  narrative 
(18 : 1),  lie  came  directly  to  Corinth  ;  and  finally, 
he  writes  to  the  Tlie.ssalonians  as  recent  con- 
verts whose  knowledge  was  very  imperfect. 
The  date  of  this  Epistle,  therefore,  would  be 
A.  D.  52  or  53.  (See  note  on  18  :  23.)  If  the 
First  Epistle  was  written  at  Corinth,  the  Second 
must  have  been  written  at  the  same  place. 
Timothy  and  Silas  were  still  with  tlie  apostle 
(iTheM.  1: 1) ;  and,  as  the  object  of  the  Second 
Epistle  wa.s  to  correct  a  wrong  impression 
made  by  tlie  First  (comp.  2  Thess.  2  :  1,  sq., 
with  1  Thess.  4  :  16,  sq.,  and  5  :  1,  sq.),  the  in- 
terval between  the  two  must  have  been  short. 
— Having  bid  adieu  (iiroTa|aME»'o«)  is  an  Al- 
exandrian sense.  (See  Lob.,  Ad  Phnjn.,  p.  24.) 
Among  others,  he  now  took  leave  of  Silas,  and 
perhaps  of  Timothy,  though  we  find  the  latter 
with  him  again  at  Ephesus  (19:22).  —  Unto 
Syria,  a.s  his  remoter  destination ;  he  em- 
barked for  Ejiliosvis  in  the  first  instance  (v.  19). 
Having  shorn  the  head  mo.st  critics  under- 
Btand  of  Paul  (Chryst.,  Calv.,  Neand.,  Olsh., 
Hems.,  De  Wet.,  Win.,  Wdsth.) ;  some  of  Aquila 


(Grot.,  Kuin.,  Wiesl.,  Me\^).  Paul  (naCAo?)  is 
the  leading  subject,  and  the  reader  connects 
the  remark  spontaneously  with  him.  It  is 
only  as  an  act  of  reflection,  on  perceiving  that 
Aquila  ('A(ciiAas)  stands  nearer,  that  the  other 
connection  occui-s  to  tiie  mind  as  a  possible  one. 
And  with  him  Priscilla  and  Aquila  may 
intervene  between  having  !!>horn  ami  Paul, 
because  the  clause  is  so  evidently  i)arentlietic, 
and  because  sailed  has  a  tendency  to  draw  its 
several  subjects  toward  itself.  It  is  urged  for 
the  other  view  that  Luke  has  placed  the  man's 
name  after  that  of  tlie  woman,  contrary  to  the 
natural  order;  but  that  no  stress  can  be  laid  on 
that  circumstance  is  clear  from  Rom.  16  :  3  and 
2  Tim.  4  :  19,  where  the  names  follow  each 
other  in  the  same  manner.  Some  principle 
of  association,  as  possibly  that  of  the  relative 
superiority  of  Priscilla,  made  it  customary  to 
speak  of  them  in  that  order. — In  Cenchrenp, 
which  was  the  ea.stern  port  of  Corinth,  distant 
about  ten  miles.  A  church  had  been  gathered 
here  (Rom.  i6:i).  The  modern  name  is  Kikries, 
a  little  south  of  Kalamaki,  and  under  the  trav- 
eller's eye,  therefore,  who  cros.ses  the  isthmus. 
— For  he  had  a  vow — i.  c.  one  resting  upon 
him ;  not  assumed  at  this  time.  This  clause 
states  why  he  shaved  his  head.  The  cutting 
off  of  the  hair  was  a  Jewish  practice,  and  took 
place  at  the  expiration  of  a  vow,  not  at  tlie 
commencement  of  it.  It  is  an  erroneotts 
statement,  therefore,  that  the  apostle  subjected 
himself  to  the  vow  at  this  time  and  went  to 
Jerusalem  to  obtain  absolution  from  it.  Nean- 
der  would  support  that  opinion  from  Josephtis 
(^Bel.  Jud.,  2.  15),  but  he  adopts  for  tiiat  purpose 
an  interpretation  of  the  passage  which  nearly 
all  others  reject.  The  nature  of  Paul's  vow  on 
this  occasion  is  uncertain.  It  could  not  have 
been  a  strict  Nazarite  vow — i.  e.  such  a  vow  ob- 
served in  due  form — for  a  person  cotild  abs(ilve 
himself  from  such  an  obligation  only  at  Jeru- 
salem, where  his  hair,  which  had  grown  during 
the  time  that  he  had  been  a  Nazarite.  was  to  be 
cut  otf  and  burnt  as  an  offering  in  the  temple 
(Num.  6 : 2,  sq.).  (See  Jahu's  Ardi.-eoL,  ?  395.)  We 
liave  no  account  of  any  deviation  from  that  rule. 
Yet  it  is  not  unreasonable  to  suppose  tliat  in 
later  times  the  original  institution  may  have 
been  relaxed  or  modified — that  after  tlie  Jews 
came  to  be  dispersed  it  was  held  to  be .  lawful 


216 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


19  And  he  came  to  Ephesus,  and  left  them  there: 
but  he  himself  entered  into  the  synagogue,  and  rea- 
soned with  the  Jews. 

20  When  they  desired  him  to  tarry  longer  time  with 
them,  he  consented  not; 

21  But  bade  them  farewell,  saying,  "I  must  by  all 
means  keep  this  feast  that  cometh  in  Jerusalem  :'  but 
1  will  return  again  unto  you,  ''if  God  will.  And  he 
sailed  from  Ephesus. 

22  And  when  he  had  landed  at  Csesarea,  and  gone 
up,  and  saluted  the  church,  he  went  dowu  to  An- 
tioch. 


19  vow.  And  they  came  to  Ei)hesus,  and  he  left  then) 
there:  but  he  himself  entered  into  the  synagogue. 

20  and  reasoned  with  the  Jews.     And  when  they  asked 

21  him  to  abide  a  longer  time,  he  consented  not;  but 
taking  his  leave  of  them,  and  saying,  I  will  return 
again  unto  you,  if  (iod  will,  he  set  sail  from  Lph- 

22  esus.  And  when  he  had  landed  at  Casarea,  he 
went  up  and  saluted  the  church,  and  went  down  to 


a  ch.  19  :  21 ;  20  :  16. . .  .i  1  Cor.  4  :  19  ;  Heb.  6:3;  James  4  :  15. 


to  terminate  a  Nazarite  vow  at  other  places, 
adhering  to  the  prescribed  usages  as  near  as  the 
circumstances  allowed.  If  it  was  not  a  vow  .of 
this  peculiar  character,  it  may  have  been  of  the 
nature  of  a  thank-offering,  and  not  subje(;t  to 
the  regulations  to  which  tlie  Nazarite  was  re- 
quired to  conform.  It  must  be  confessed  that 
the  present  knowledge  of  Jewish  antiquities  is 
not  sufficient  to  clear  up  fully  the  obscurity  of 
the  passage.  It  contains,  says  De  Wette,  a  Gor- 
dian  knot  still  untied. 

19.  Unto  Ephesus,  which  was  on  the  Cay- 
ster,  not  far  from  its  mouth.  It  could  be  ap- 
proached at  that  time  by  water,  though  the  site 
of  the  ancient  city  is  now  two  or  three  miles 
from  the  coast.  With  a  favoring  wind,  the 
passage  from  Corinth  to  Ephesus  could  be 
made  in  two  or  three  days.  Cicero  mentions 
that  he  on  one  occasion,  and  his  brother  Quin- 
tus  on  another,  occupied  two  weeks  in  passing 
from  Ephesus  to  Athens  {Ad  Attic.  Ep.,  G,  8.  9 ; 
ib.,  3,  9) ;  but  the  voyage  in  both  instances  was 
retarded  by  extraordinary  delays.  (See  further 
on  28  :  13.)— But  he  himself  (airb?  Se).  This 
emphasis  brings  forward  Paul  again  as  the 
prominent  pereon,  after  the  information  that 
his  companions  stayed  at  Ephesus.  The  order 
of  statement  outruns  the  history  a  little,  as  oc- 
curs in  other  cases.  (Comp.  v.  1.)  Luke  can- 
not well  mean  that  the  apostle  separated  him- 
self from  Priscilla  and  Aquila  and  went  into 
the  synagogue  without  them  (Mey.).  So  unim- 
portant a  circumstance  would  not  be  made  so 
prominent.  Nor  is  it  at  all  probable  that  there 
(ovToC)  was  opposed  in  the  writer's  mind  to  the 
synagogue  aS  being  out  of  the  city  (Alf.) ;  for 
in  that  case  some  intimation  like  without  the 
city  (see  16  :  13),  or  at  least  going  out,  would 
hardly  be  withheld  from  the  reader. 

21.  Some  critics  reject  all  in  this  verse  from 
must  to  Jerusalem  (Bng.,  Grsb.,  Neand., 
Lchm.,  Tsch.) ;  others  defend  the  clause  (Olsh., 
De  Wet.,  Wiesl.,  Mey.,  Bmg.,  Alf.).  The  words 
may  be  doubtful,  but  with  the  present  evidence 
should  not  be  separated  from  the  text.  As 
Meyer  suggests,  they  may  have  been  omitted 


from  riot  perceiving  the  reference  of  [/one  up 
(ava/3(is),  in  V.  22,  and  consequently  any  occa- 
sion for  such  haste  in  prosecuting  tlie  journey. 
— The  coming  feast.  It  must  have  been  one 
of  the  principal  feasts  which  Paul  was  so  anx- 
ious to  keep  at  Jerusalem — in  all  probability, 
the  passover  or  Pentecost.  In  either  case,  we 
discover  here  that  the  apostle  made  the  jour- 
ney in  the  spring  of  the  year.  Wieseler  (p.  48) 
thinks  tliat  it  was  the  later  festival,  Pentecost, 
chiefly  because  Paul  embarked  at  Corinth  in- 
stead of  travelling  through  Macedonia,  as  the 
state  of  navigation  would  liave  rendered  expe- 
dient earlier  in  tlie  season. — For  keep — lit.  do 
(TToi^crai) — comp.  keep — lit.  do — the  passover 
(iTotoiTo  TTaaxa-),  in  Matt.  2G :  18. — At  Jerusalem. 
(See  on  8: 40.) — But  I  will  return  again,  etc. 
The  apostle  soon  fulfilled  that  promise  (i9 :  i). 

22.  And  having  landed  —  lit.  having 
come  down,  from  the  sea  to  the  land. 
(Comp.  27  :  5.)  —  Caesarea  was  the  most 
convenient  seaport  in  tlie  vicinity  of  Ju- 
dea.  (See  further  on  8  :  40.) — Having  gone 
up — i.  e.  to  Jerusalem  (Calv.,  Neand.,  Olsh., 
Mey.,  De  Wet ,  Wiesl.).  This  absolute  use  of 
the  verb  occasions  no  obscurity  after  the  state- 
ment respecting  Paul's  destination  in  v.  21.  A 
few  have  understood  it  as  going  up  into  the  city 
above  the  harbor.  But  to  mention  that  cir- 
cumstance in  addition  to  the  arrival  would 
give  to  it  a  singular  prominence  as  contrasted 
with  the  general  rapidity  of  the  narriitive.— 
Went  down  {Kare^ri),  at  the  close  of  the  verse, 
would  be  inappropriate  to  the  geographical  re- 
lation of  Caisarea  to  Antioch  (Neand.). — The 
church — i.  e.  at  Jerusalem.  It  should  be  no- 
ticed that  this  is  the  fourth  journey  which  Paul 
has  made  to  that  city  since  his  conversion.  No 
doubt  he  arrived  in  season  to  observe  the  feast, 
as  nothing  is  said  of  any  disappointment  in 
that  respect. — Into  Antioch.  How  long  the 
apostle  was  absent  on  the  tour,  which  termi- 
nated with  liis  return  to  Antioch,  can  only  be 
conjectured.  The  year  and  six  months  at  Cor- 
inth (v.  ii)  would  be  likely  to  constitute  the 
greater  portion  of  the  period.    Wieseler  pro- 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


217 


23  And  after  he  had  spent  some  time  there,  he  de- 
parted, and  went  over  ((//  the  country  of  "Cialatia  and 
I'hrygia  in  order,  'strengthening  all  the  disciples. 

2A\\  "And  a  certain  Jew  named  Apollos,  born  at 
Alexandria,  an  elotiuent  man,  and  mighty  in  the  scrip- 
tures, came  to  Ephesus. 

2")  This  man  was  instructed  in  the  way  of  the  Lord; 
and  being  ''fervent  in  the  spirit,  he  spake  and  taught 


23  Antioch.  And  having  si)ent  some  time  llieri',  he  de- 
I)arted,  an<l  went  througli  the  regie. i  of  i  alalia  and 
l^hrygia  in  order,  slablishing  all  the  disciples. 

24  Now  a  certain  .lew  named  Apollos,  an  Alexandrian 
by  race,  'a  learned  man,  came  to  Ephesus;  and  be 

25  was  mighty  in  the  scriptures.  This  man  had  been 
^iustructed  in  the  way  of  the  Lord;  and  being  fer- 


aGal.  1  :-2;  4:  U....ich.  U:! 


15:32,  41.... c  1  Cor.  1  :  12  :  3  :  5,  6 ;  4:6;  Tit.  3  :  I3....<i  Rom.  12  :  11. 1  Or,  an  elo- 

qtient  vian. . .  .2  Gr.  taught  by  word  of  mouth. 


poses  six  months  as  the  time  occupied  between 
leaving  Antioch  and  the  arrival  at  Troas  (le :  h). 
He  would  allow  six  months,  also,  for  the  apos- 
tle's labors  in  Europe  before  his  arrival  at  Cor- 
inth. The  time  which  this  estimate  allows  for 
the  Asiatic  part  of  the  tour  may  be  too  limited. 
The  apostle  visited  extensively  the  churches  in 
Syria  and  Cilicia,  planted  new  churches  in 
Phrygia  and  Galatia,  and  travelled  very  cir- 
cuitously  throughout  his  journey  between  An- 
tioch and  Troas.  It  may  be  safer  to  assign  a 
year  at  least  to  such  varied  labors.  According 
to  this  view,  the  apostle  was  absent  on  his  sec- 
ond mission  about  three  j'ears ;  and  if  we  place 
his  departure  early  in  A.  D.  51,  he  reached  An- 
tioch again  in  the  spring  or  summer  of  54. 
Anger,  Wieseler,  Meyer,  Winer,  and  others 
agree  in  supposing  Paul  to  have  arrived  in  Cor- 
inth in  tlie  autumn  of  A.  d.  52.  The  admission 
of  the  date  fixes  the  main  point  in  this  part  of 
the  chronology. 

23.  DEPARTURE  OF  PAUL  ON  HIS 
THIRD  MISSIONARY-TOUR. 

23.  A  certain  time.  The  time  now  spent 
at  Antioch  was  apparently  short.  It  was  dur- 
ing this  time,  as  most  critics  suppose,  tliat  Peter 
arrived  here  and  the  scene  took  place  between 
Jiim  and  Paul,  of  which  we  have  an  account 
in  Gal.  2  :  11,  sq.  (See  on  15  :  35.)  Neander 
(Pfaiizimg,  i.  p.  351)  agrees  with  those  who  in- 
sert tlie  occurrence  here.  Baumgarten  (ii.  p. 
331)  adds  liimself  to  the  same  class.  The  apos- 
tle's when  Peter  cante,  in  Gal.  2  :  11,  affords  no 
clue  to  the  time.  We  may  assume  that  the 
apostle  went  forth  again  to  the  heathen  about 
the  beginning  of  the  year  a.  d.  55. — In  succes- 
sive order.  Tliis  refers,  prol)ably,  not  to  the 
countries  named,  but  to  the  different  places  in 
tlieiii  where  churches  existed.  In  accordance 
with  the  representation  on  Kiepert's  map,  we 
may  suppose  that  Paul  went  first  to  Tarsus, 
thence  in  a  north-western  direction  through 
Galatia,  and  then,  turning  to  the  south-west, 
passed  through  Phrygia,  and  so  on  to  Ephe- 
sus. That  course  accounts  for  Luke's  naming 
Galatia  before  Phrvgia,  instead  of  the  order  in 
16  :  0. 

24-28.  APOLLOS  COMES  TO  EPHESUS, 


AND  IS  MORE   FULLY  INSTRUCTED  IN 
THE  GOSPEL. 

24.  i\Ieyer  calls  this  section  "a  liistorical 
episode."  Luthardt  says  that  it  is  entirely 
germane  to  the  narrative :  wliile  Paul  labors 
in  Asia,  another  builds  still  farther  upon  the 
foundation  laid  by  him  in  Europe. — Apollos 
=  ApoUonius.  As  a  native  of  Alexandria  lie 
had  received,  probably,  says  Neander,  "  the  Jew- 
ish-Grecian education  peculiar  to  the  learned 
among  the  Jews  of  that  city,  and  had  acquired 
also  great  facility  in  the  use  of  the  Greek  lan- 
guage."— Eloquent  (\6yio-;},  (Olsh.,  De  Wet., 
Mey.),  or  learned  (Neand.).  The  first  sense 
is  the  best,  because  mighty  in  the  scrip- 
tures ascribes  to  him  then  a  ditferent  talent, 
and  because  his  sui)erior  faculty  as  a  speaker 
appears  to  have  been  the  reason  why  some  of 
the  Corinthians  preferred  him  to  Paul.  (See  1 
Cor.  1  :  12 ;  2  :  4 ;  2  Cor.  10  :  10.)  In  the  scrip-' 
tures.  He  was  familiar  with  them,  and  could 
use  them  with  power  as  a  source  of  argument 
and  appeal.  (See  v.  28.)  This  clause  points 
out  the  sphere  of  his  eloquence. 

25.  This  one  was  instructed  in  the  way 
of  the  Lord,  probably  by  some  discii>le  of 
John  who  had  left  Judea  before  the  Saviour 
commenced  his  jiublic  course,  or  possibly  by 
John  himself,  whose  earlier  ministry  Apollos 
may  have  attended.  Some  infer  from  the 
things  concerning  Jesus  that  Apollos  was 
aware  that  Jesus  was  tlie  Messiah  ;  but  the  fol- 
lowing knowing,  etc.,  limits  tliat  expression, 
and,  if  explained  correctly  below,  excludes  a 
knowledge  of  that  fact.  His  ignorance  in  this 
respect  was  one  of  the  defects  in  his  religious 
belief,  and  at  the  same  time  his  views  of  the 
deeper  Christian  doctrines  must  have  been 
meagre  in  comparison  with  those  possessed  by 
the  apostles.  For  the  construction  of  way 
(6560,  see  W.  ?  32.  5 ;  K.  ?  281.  2.— Being  fer- 
vent in  spirit,  zealous  in  his  disposition.  It 
is  less  correct  to  understand  spirit  of  the 
Holy  Spirit,  since  that  gift  appears  in  the  New 
Testament  as  the  proper  fruit  and  seal  of  the 
Christian  faith,  which  Apollos  had  not  yet 
adopted.  (See  Gal.  3  :  2.)  For  other  places 
where  spirit  refers  to  the  mind,  comp.  19  :  21 ; 


218 


THE   ACTS. 


[Cii.  XVIII. 


diligently  the  things  of  the  Lord,  "knowing  only  the 
baptism  of  John. 

26  And  he  began  to  speak  boldly  in  the  synagogue: 
whom  when  Aqiiila  and  i'riscilla  had  heard,  they  took 
him  unto  I /if  IK,  and  expounded  unto  him  the  way  of 
God  more  perfectly. 

27  And  when  he  was  disposed  to  pass  into  Achaia, 
the  brethren  wrote,  exhorting  the  disciples  to  receive 
him  :  who,  when  he  was  come,  'helped  them  much 
which  had  believed  through  grace: 

28  For  he  mightily  convinced  the  Jews,  n7id  that 
publicly,  i^shewing  by  the  scriptures  that  Jesus  was 
Christ. 


vent  in  spirit,  he  spake  and  taught  carefully  the 
things  concerning  .lesus,  knowing  only  the  bajitisni 

26  of  oohn  :  and  he  began  to  speak  boldly  in  the  syna- 
gogue. But  when  1  riscilla  and  Aquila  heard  him, 
they  took  him  unto  them,  and  expounded  unto  him 

27  the  way  of  C.od  more  carefully.  And  when  he  wa.s 
minded  to  pass  over  into  Achaia,  the  brethren  en- 
couraged him,  and  wrote  to  the  disciples  to  receive 
him  :  and  when  he  was  come,  he  'heljjed  them  much 

28  who  had  believed  through  grace  ;  for  he  jjowerfully 
confuted  the  Jews,  -iind  Ihul  publicly,  shewing  by 
the  scriptures  that  Jesus  was  the  Christ. 


CHAPTER    XIX. 


AND  it  came  to  pass,  that,  while  <*Apollos  was  at 
Corinth,  I'aul  having  passed   through  the  upper 
coasts  came  to  Ephesus :  and  finding  certain  disciples, 


1  And  it  came  to  pass,  that,  while  Apollos  was  at 
Corinth,  1  aul  having  passed  through  the  upper 
country  came  to  Ephesus,  and  found  certain  disei- 


ach.  19  :;<.... 6  1  Cor.  3  :  I 


! :   3  :  5,  6.  — 
Hng  publicly 


-1  Or,  helped  much  through  grace  them 


John  11  :  33;  13  :  21 ;  Rom.  12  :  11  (probably) ; 
2  Cor.  2  :  12. — Accurately  (v.  26)— i.  e.  his  doc- 
trine was  correct  as  far  as  his  Iviiowledge  ex- 
tended.—  Knowing  only  the  baptism  of 
John,  wliich  differed  from  that  of  tlie  apos- 
tles mainly  in  these  respects :  first,  that  theirs 
recognized  a  Messiah  who  had  come;  and 
secondly,  that  it  was  attested  by  the  extraor- 
dinary gifts  of  the  Spirit  (i9:6).  Since  John, 
however,  taught  that  the  Saviour  was  about  to 
appear,  and  that  repentance,  faith  in  him,  and 
holiness  were  necessary  to  salvation,  Apollos^ 
though  acquainted  only  with  his  teaching,, could 
be  said  with  entire  truth  to  be  instructed  in 
the  Avay  of  the  Lord.  It  is  not  affirmed  tliat 
he  had  submitted  to  John's  baptism,  but  we  sujv 
150se  that  from  the  nature  of  the  case.  That  he 
was  rebaptized,  Luke  does  not  assert ;  though,  if 
we  regard  his  moral  position  as  analogous  to 
that  of  the  Johanncan  disciples  mentioned  in 
the  next  chapter,  we  should  infer  from  what 
is  related  there  that  such  was  the  fact.  Meyer 
considers  the  cases  dissimilar,  and  denies  that 
Apollos  was  rebaptized. 

26.  Began,  but  did  not  preach  long  with  siich 
imperfect  views.  As  soon  as  Aquila  and  Pris- 
cilla  heard  him  they  proceeded  to  instruct  him 
more  fully. — The  verb  (TrapprjtrKi^eo-dat)  means  to 
speak  boldly.  He  exposed  their  sins,  re- 
quired thetn  to  repent  and  be  prepared  for  the 
kingdom  of  the  IMessiah.  (Comp.  Matt.  3  :  2, 
sq.) — More  perfectly,  inore  accurately. 

27.  Unto  Achaia,  of  which  Corinth  was 
the  capital.  (See  on  v.  1.)  It  was  that  city 
which  he  proposed  to  visit.  (Comp.  19  :  1 ;  1 
Cor.  1  :  12 ;  3:4.)  What  he  heard  from  Pris- 
cilla  and  Aquila  may  have  turned  his  tlioughts 
to  this  field  of  labor. — They  wrote  and  ex- 
horted (lit.  exhorting  they  wrote).  The  participle 
contains  the  principal  idea.  (See  1  :  24.)  Some 
supply  him  after  exhorted  (Calv.,  Kuin.) ;  but 


that  assigns  to  the  verb  and  participle  different 
objects  and  confuses  the  sentence.  Besides, 
Apollos  was  not  averse  to  the  journey  (was 
disposed,  /SoOAojiei'ou),  and  had  no  need  of  ex- 
hortation. In  2  Cor.  3  :  1,  Paul  alludes  to  this 
letter  of  commendation,  or  to  the  practice  of 
granting  such  letters,  exemplified  in  tliis  case 
of  Apollos.— Contributed  (as  a  helper)  much 
to  those  who  have  believed,  and  still  be- 
lieve. (See  W.  'i  40.  4.  a.)  It  is  not  meant  that 
he  confirmed  them  in  their  faith  as  Cliristians, 
but  that  he  co-operated  with  them  in  their  pro- 
mulgation and  defence  of  the  truth.  The  next 
verse  explains  the  remark. — Through  grace 
belongs  to  the  participle  [had  believed]  (De 
Wet.),  not  to  the  verb  [helped]  (Mey.)  The 
natural  sense  is  that  which  results  from  the  order 
of  the  words.  The  doctrinal  idea  is  tliat  of  the 
faith  which  is  through  him,  in  3  :  IG. 

28.  Powerfully  that  the  Messiah  was 
Jesus,  none  other  than  he.     (Comp.  v.  5.) 


1-7.  PAUL  COMES  TO  EPHESUS,  AND 
REBAPTIZES  CERTAIN  DISCIPLES  OF 
JOHN. 

1.  While  Apollos  Avas  at  Corinth.  This 
notice  apprises  us  that  Paul  did  not  arrive  at 
Ephesus  till  after  the  departure  of  Apollos. 
("AjToAAii — the  regular  genitive ;  see  1  Cor.  3  :  4 — 
here  rejects  v  in  the  accusative.  Comp.  21  :  1. 
K.  §  48.  R.  1 ;  W.  ?  8.  2.)— The  upper  parts, 
in  the  interior,  as  compared  with  tlie  coast. 
The  expression  may  be  understood  of  the 
mountains  on  the  frontier  of  Phrygia  and 
Asia,  which  the  apostle  would  cross  on  his 
route. — Certain  disciples.  Luke  ascribes  to 
them  that  character  (comp.  when  ye  be- 
lieved, in  V.  2),  because,  though  their  know- 
ledge was  so  imperfect,  they  were  sincere ;  they 


Ch.  XIX] THE_ACTS. 

2  He  said  unto  them,  Have  ye  received  the  Holy 
(Jhost  since  ve  l)elieved-.'  And  they  said  unto  him, 
a\Ve  have  ii-ot  so  much  as  heard  whether  there  be  any 
Holy  Uhost. 

:i  And  he  said  unto  them.  Into  what  then  were  ye 
baptized?     And  thev  said, 'Unto  John  s  baptism. 

4  Then  said  I'aul,  "Jolin  verily  baptized  with  the 
baptism  of  repentance,  saying  unto  the  people,  that 
they  should  believe  on  him  which  should  come  after 
Lini,  that  is,  on  I  hrist  Jesus.  .     ,  j. 

5  When  they  heard  <A is,  they  were  baptized  ''in  the 
name  of  the  Lord  Jesus. 


219 


2  pies:  and  he  said  unto  thera,  Did  ye  receive  the 
Holy  fSpirit.wheii  ye  believed?  And  they  .<"(./  ui.to 
him,  Nay,  we  did  iiot  so  much  as  hear  whether  'the 

3  Holy  Spirit  was  ijiieii.  And  he  said,  into  what  then 
were  ye  baptized?    And  tliey  said.  Into  ,)ohn's  bap- 

4tisni.  And  I'aul  said,  John  baptized  with  the  bap- 
tism of  repentance,  saying  unto  the  people,  that  they 
should  tielieve  on  him  who  should  come  after  him, 

5  that  is,  on  Jesus.  And  when  they  heard  this,  they 
were  baptized  into  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus. 


aoh.8:16;seelSam.  3:7....6ch.l8:25....cMatt.  3  :  U  ;  John  1  :  15    27    30  ;  ch.  1  :  5  ;   11  :  16 ;  13  :  24.  25.  ...d  ch.  8  :  16. 

1  Or,  there  ie  a  Holy  Spirit 


possessed  the  elements  of  a  true  faith,  and 
acknowledged  the  name  of  Christ  as  soon  as 
the  apostle  made  it  known  to  them.  It  is  prob- 
able that  tiiey  were  strangers  who  had  just  ar- 
rived at  Ephesus,  and  when  the  apostle  found 
tliom  had  not  yet  come  in  contact  with  any 
of  tlie  Christians  there. 

2.  For  if  (ei)  in  a  direct  question,  see  on  1 :  G. 
The  inquiry  appears  abrupt,  because  we  have  so 
broken  an  account  of  the  circumstances  of  the 
case.  Undoubtedly,  something  preceded  which 
led  the  apostle  to  suspect  that  the  men  enter- 
tained inadequate  or  mistaken  views  of  the 
gospel.— The  Holy  Spirit  here  means  the 
Spirit  as  the  author  of  miraculous  gifts,  as  is 
made  evident  by  v.  6.— Did  ye  receive  (note 
the  aorist)  when  ye  believed?  (eAi^ere  niarev- 
cavTCi).  Tlie  jiarticiple  rcfci-s  to  the  same  time 
as  tlie  verb.— But  we  did  not  hear  (when 
baptized)  even  it  there  be  a  Holy  Spirit. 
A  negative  usually  precedes  but  not  with  this 
force  (=No— on  the  contrary),  but  could  be 
omitted  with  the  effect  of  a  imire  earnest  de- 
nial. (See  W.  'i  53.  7.)  The  Holy  Spirit  must 
have  the  meaning  in  their  reply  which  it  had 
in  Paul's  question.  Hence  it  is  unnecessary 
and  incorrect  to  supply  given  (So^ev)  or  poured 
out  {fKxvvoiMei'ov)  after  be.    (Comp.  John  7  :  39.) 

3.  Unto  what,  as  the  object  of  faith  and 
confession,  therefore,  were  ye  baptized? 
— Unto  the  baptism  of  John  sliould  have 
the  sense  here  wliich  it  has  in  other  passages 
(comp.  1  :  22 ;  10  :  37 ;  Matt.  3:7;  Luke  7  :  29, 
etc.)— viz.  the  baptism  which  John  adminis- 
tered, or  such  as  he  administered.  They  may 
have  received  the  rite  from  John  himself,  or 
from  some  one  wliom  lie  had  baptized,  but  who 
had  not  advanced  beyond  the  point  of  know- 
ledge at  wiiich  Ji)hn's  ministry  had  left  his 
disciples.  That  ApoUos  had  baptized  them  is 
not  at  all  probable ;  for  the  presumption  is  that 
he  had  left  Ephesus  before  their  arrival  (see  on 
V.  1),  and  because,  if  he  had  not.  they  would 
have  received  from  him  more  correct  views, 
after  his  own  better  acquaintance  with  Chris- 


tianity. The  answer  of  the  men,  therefore,  was 
not  that  they  had  been  baptized  unto  John  as 
the  Messiah,  and  the  idea  that  their  error  was 
that  of  adhering  to  him  as  tlie  Messiah  has  no. 
support  from  tliis  expression.  That  some,  how- 
ever, at  a  very  early  period  entertained  that 
opinion  of  John  is  a  fact  well  established. 
The  Zabians,  or  Nazorajans,  or  Menda^ans,  as 
they  are  variously  called,  who  were  discovered 
in  the  East  about  tlie  middle  of  the  seventeenth 
century,  are  supposed  to  be  a  remnant  of  that 
sect.  (See  Neand.,  Ch.  Hist.,  vol.  i.  p.  376,  and 
Christian  Review,  January,  1855.) 

4.  Indeed  (ixev)  after  John,  wliicli  some 
editors  reject,  is  genuine  (Mey.,  Tsch.,  De  Wet.). 
The  reply  of  Paul  is  apparently  this  :  "Joh7i  in- 
deed preached  repentance  and  a  Saviour  to  come  (as 
you  know);  but  the  3Iessinh  whom  he  announced 
has  appeared  in  Jesus,  a)id  you  are  now  to  believe 
on  him  as  John  directed." — That  is  presents  the 
adversative  idea,  instead  of  the  ordinary  and 
(Se).  (W.  ?  63.  I.  2.  e;  K.  §  322.  R.  4.)— Bap- 
tized   (e/San-Tio-e)    gOVCms    baptism     Oa77Tto-fi.a), 

on  the  principle  of  affinity  in  point  of  sense. 
(Comp.  Luke  7  :  29.  W.  ?  32.  2 ;  K.  ?  278.  1.)— 
Christ  is  common  before  Jesus,  but  is  un- 
warranted here. 

5.  Now  they  (whom  Paul  addressed)  hav- 
ing heard  were  baptized.  AVliether  Paul 
himself  or  some  assistant  pcrforniwl  tlie  rite  the 
liistory  docs  not  decide.  Tlieir  prompt  recei>- 
tion  of  the  trutii  would  tend  to  sliow  that  the  de- 
fect in  their  former  bajitism  related  not  so  much 
to  any  positive  error  as  to  their  ignorance  in  re- 
gard to  the  proper  object  of  faith.  Some  of  the 
older  writers  maintained  that  Luke  records  these 
words  as  a  C(^ntinttation  of  Paul's  remark  :  Now 
they  (whom  John  addressed)  having  heard  were 
baptized.  It  was  the  object  of  such  commentators 
to  rescue  the  passage  from  those  who  appealed  to 
it,  in  order  to  justify  rebaptism.  They  main- 
tained this  exegesis  not  only  against  the  Anabap- 
tists, but,  as  Baumgarten  mentions,  against  the 
Catholics,  who  disparaged  John's  baptism  for  the 
purpose  of  exalting  the  Christian  sacraments 


220 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  XIX. 


6  And  when  Paul  had  "laid  his  hands  upon  them, 
the  Holy  Ghost  caiue  ou  them;  and  'they  spake  with 
tongues,  and  prophesied. 

7  And  all  the  men  were  about  twelve. 

8  "^And  he  went  into  the  synagogue,  and  spake  boldly 
for  the  space  of  three  months,  disputing  and  persuad- 
ing the  thing.s  ''concerning  the  kingdom  of  tiod. 

9  But  "when  divers  were  hardened,  and  believed  not, 
but  spake  evil  /of  that  way  before  the  multitude,  he 
departed  from  them,  and  separated  the  disciples,  dis- 
puting daily  in  the  school  of  one  Tyraunus. 

10  And  ^his  continued  by  the  space  of  two  years ; 


6  And  when  Paul  had  laid  his  hands  upon  them,  the 
Holy  i<pirit  came  on  them;  and  they  spake  with 

7  longues,  and  prophesied.  And  they  were  in  all 
about  twelve  men. 

8  And  he  entered  into  the  synagogue,  and  spake 
boldly  for  the  space  of  three  montlis,  reasoning  and 
persuading  a.v  to  the  things  concerning  the  kingdom 

9  of  bod.  Jjut  when  some  were  hardened  and  dis- 
obedient, speaking  evil  of  the  Way  before  the  nuil- 
titude,  he  departed  from  them,  and  separated  the 
disciples,  reasoning  daily  in  the  school  of  Tyrannus. 

10  And  this  continued  for  the  space  of  two  years;  so 


ach.  6  :6;  8:  17 6  ch.  2  :  4  ;  10  :  46.  ...c  ch.  17  :  2  ;  18  :  4....d  ott.  1  :  ;j  ;  28  :  i!3....e2  Tim.  1  :  15  ;  2  Pet.  2:2;  Jude  10... 

/  See  ch.  9:2;  22  :  4 ;  24  :  14  ;  ver.  23. . ;  .g  See  <!h.  20  :  31. 


as  distinguished  from  those  of  the  first  dispen- 
sation. Tlie  Council  of  Trent,  for  instance, 
asserted :  "  Si  quis  dixerit  baptismum  Johannis 
eandeni  vim  cum  baptismo  Christi  habuisse, 
Anathema  esto  "  [i.  e.  "  If  any  one  shall  say  that 
the  baptism  of  John  had  the  same  efficacy  as 
the  baptism  of  Christ,  let  him  be  anathema." — 
A.  H.]  (Sess.  VII.,  De  Baptisim,  C.  1).  This  in- 
terpretation not  only  sets  aside  the  more  obvious 
meaning  for  a  remote  one,  but  palpably  mis- 
states the  fact  in  regard  to  John's  baptism  :  he 
did  not  administer  it  in  the  name  of  Jesus.  This 
view  of  the  i)assage  may  be  said  to  be  obsolete 
at  present.  [In  the  name  of  the  Lord 
Jesus.  Better  into,  or  unto,  the  name  of  the 
Lord  Jesus.  Luke  does  not  give  the  formula 
of  Christian  baptism,  but  briefly  indicates  that 
by  their  baptism  they  were  consecrated  to  the 
service  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  (Comp.  Gal.  3  :  27 : 
For  as  many  of  you  as  liave  been  baptized  into  Christ 
have  put  on  Christ.) — A.  H.] 

6.  Compare  this  verse  with  10  :  44-46. — 
With  tongues — ('.  e.  other  (i  -.  4),  or  new  (Mark 
16  :  17). — For  prophesied,  see  on  2  :  17. 

7.  All  the  men,  together.  All  (was),  in  this 
adverbial  sense  {=to  ttSlv,  to.  n-di/Ta),  occurs  es- 
pecially in  connection  with  numerals.  (Comp. 
27  :  35.)  It  is  rare  to  find  the  adjective  with 
this  force  before  the  substantive.  (See  K.  Ausf., 
Gr.,  1 489.  ^ ;  Vig.  ed.  Herm.,  p.  135.)— And  thus 
those  twelve  men  who  came  forward  so  abrupt- 
ly in  our  history  disappear  as  suddenly,  leaving 
us  in  doubt  whence  they  came,  where  they  had 
been,  and  in  some  respects  what  particular 
phase  of  religious  belief  they  represented.  The 
episode  is  one  of  strange  interest  from  the  very 
fact  of  its  suggesting  so  many  questions  the 
solution  of  which  our  imperfect  knowledge 
of  the  first  Christian  age  has  put  beyond  our 
reach. 

8-12.  PAUL  PREACHES  AT  EPHESUS, 
AND  CONFIRMS  THE  WORD  BY  MIRA- 
CLES. 

8.  For  spake  \iO\A\y  =  preached  boldly,  see 
on  18  :  26.— Persuading — /.  e.  them,  persuad- 
ing them  of  the  things.     (Comp.  28  :  23.)     The 


first  accusative  specifies  the  aim  of  the  act.    (K. 
?  279.  4.) 

9.  Divers,  or  some — i.  e.  of  the  Jews,  as  re- 
sults from  synagogue,  in  v.  8.— That  way 
— lit.  the  way ;  i.  e.  of  Christian  belief  and  prac- 
tice; not  concretely,  sect,  party.  (Comp.  v.  23; 
9  :  2.) — Before — i.  c.  in  the  presence  of  the 
multitude.  This  attempt  to  prevent  others 
from  believing  showed  how  hardened  [iaKXri- 
pvvovTo)  they  were  more  fully  than  their  own 
rejection  of  the  gospel. — Separated  the  dis- 
ciples— i.  e.  from  the  Jews  in  the  synagogue. 
— In  the  school — viz.  the  place  where  he 
taught.  This  Tyrannus,  otherwise  unknown, 
was  probably  a  teacher  of  pliilosojihy  or  rhet- 
oric who  occupied  the  apartment  at  other 
hours.  Whether  he  rented  it  to  the  Christians 
or  gave  them  the  use  of  it  is  uncertain. 

10.  By  the  space  of  two  years.  These 
tu'o  years  are  exclusive  of  the  three  months 
mentioned  in  v.  8 ;  for  this  opi)oses  expressly 
the  preaching  in  the  school  of  Tyrannus  to  that 
in  the  synagogue.  It  is  probable  that  they  are 
exclusive,  also,  of  the  time  occupied  by  the 
events  which  took  place  after  v.  21  ;  for  in  20  : 
31,  Paul  reminds  the  Ephesians  that  he  had 
labored  three  years  among  them  ;  so  that  nine 
months,  or  six  months  at  least  (if  we  regard 
three  years  there  as  a  general  expression), 
must  be  added  to  the  two  years  and  three 
months  mentioned  here.  The  retrospective 
remark  in  v.  20  would  be  a  very  natural  one 
for  the  writer  to  make  on  the  completion  of  a 
distinct  period. — It  was  during  this  abode  of 
Paul  at  Ephesus,  and  probably  not  long  after 
his  arrival  there,  that  he  wrote  the  Epistle  to 
the  Galatians.  In  Gal.  4  :  13,  Paul  speaks  of 
the  former  time  (t6  wpoTepov)  when  he  preached 
in  Galatia;  and  hence  (taking  the  expression 
in  its  strict  import)  he  had  been  there  twice 
when  he  wrote  the  Epistle.  He  must  have 
written  it,  therefore,  on  his  third  missionary- 
tour  (at  least,  not  before  it),  since  he  founded 
the  Galatian  churches  on  his  second  tour  (see 
on  16  :  6)  and  confirmed  them  on  his  present 
journey  to   Ephesus.     (See  18  :  23.)    Further, 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


221 


so  that  all  they  which  dwelt  in  Asia  heard  the  word  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,  both  Jews  and  lireeks. 

11  And  "Uod  wrought  special  miracles  by  the  hands 
of  Paul : 

12  'So  that  from  his  body  were  brought  unto  the 
sick  handkerchiefs  or  aprons,  and  the  diseases  departed 
from  them,  and  the  evil  spirits  went  out  of  them. 

1.3  ^  <^Then  certain  of  the  vagabond  Jews,  exorcists, 
''took  upon  them  to  call  over  them  which  had  evil 
spirits  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  saying,  We  adjure 
you  by  Jesus  whom  I'aul  preacheth. 


that  all  they  that  dwelt  in  Asia  heard  the  word  of 

11  the  Lord,  both  Jews  and  dreeks.    And  (iod  wnmght 

12  special  'miracles  by  the  hands  of  1  aul:  insoniiicli 
that  unto  the  sick  were  carried  away  from  hLs  body 
handkerchiefs  or  aprons,  aid  the  diseases  departed 

13  from  them,  and  the  evil  spirits  went  out.  Jiut  cer- 
tain also  of  the  strolling  Jews,  exorcists,  took  upon 
them  to  name  over  those  who  had  the  evil  spirits 
the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  saying,  1  adjure  you  by 


a  Mark  16  :  20;  cb.  14  :  3....6  ch.  5  :  15 ;  see  2  Kings  1 :  29 c  Matt.  12  :  27 d  See  Mark  9:  38;  Luke!):  4»^ 


-1  6r.  powen. 


if  SO  soon,  in  Gal.  1  :  6,  refers  (as,  on  the 
whole,  I  think  it  does)  to  the  brief  interval 
since  Paul  was  among  the  Galatians,  it  follows 
that  he  wrote  his  Epistle  to  them  during  the 
early  part  of  his  sojourn  at  Ephesus.  In  this 
city  Paul  could  obtain  easily  the  knowledge  of 
the  Galatian  heresy  which  gave  occasion  to  the 
letter.  A  partial  conclusion  may  be  drawn  from 
another  argument.  If  we  are  to  place  Paul's 
rebuke  of  Peter  between  his  second  and  third 
journeys  (see  on  18  :  23),  he  could  not  have 
written  to  the  Galatians,  at  all  events,  before  his 
departure  on  this  tour.  The  foregoing  data  are 
not  decisive,  but  furnish  the  best-supported 
opinion.  We  may  refer  the  Epi-stle  to  the 
year  a.  d.  56.  (See  note  on  21  :  17.) — So  that 
all  who  inhabited  Asia — viz.  the  Roman 
province  of  that  name  (2;  9).  Epliesus  was  the 
capital  of  this  province,  the  centre  of  commerce 
and  religious  worship  (v.  26),  to  which  the  people 
resorted  from  all  parts  of  the  country.  Hence 
the  apostle  had  an  opportunity  to  preach  to  a 
vast  number,  in  addition  to  those  who  resided 
in  the  city  ;  and  at  the  same  time,  through  the 
agency  of  those  converted  through  his  labors, 
he  could  have  introduced  the  gospel  into  re- 
gions which  he  did  not  visit  in  person.  It  was 
but  forty  years  after  this  that  Pliny,  in  his  cel- 
ebrated letter  to  Trajan,  says,  even  in  reference 
to  the  more  distant  Bithynia:  "  Multi  omnis 
aetatis,  omnis  ordinis,  utriusque  sexus  etiam, 
vocantur  in  periculum  et  vocabuntur.  Neque 
enim  civitates  tantum,  sed  vicos  etiam  atque 
agros  superstitionis  istius  contagio  pervagata 
est "  ["  :Many  of  every  age,  of  every  rank,  and 
also  of  either  sex,  are  brought,  and  will  be 
brought,  into  peril.  For  the  contagion  of  this 
superstition  has  not  only  spread  tlirough  cities, 
but  also  through  villages  and  country  places." 
— A.  H.] 

11.  Special — \\i.  not  casual ;  i.  e.  uncommon, 
extraordinary.  (Comp.  28  :  2.)  As  the  sequel 
shows  (v.  13),  the  miracles  were  remarkable,  be- 
cause they  were  performed  without  the  personal 
agency  or  presence  of  the  apostle.  They  were 
not  generically  different  from  those  wrought  on 
other  occasions. — By,  or  through,  the  hands 


of  Paul,  not  as  laid  upon  the  sick  (some  of 
the  results  being  involuntary'  on  his  part),  but 
tlirough  his  instrumentality. 

12.  So  that  (because  God  so  wrought  by 
him)  also — i.  e.  among  other  miracles. — Were 
brought,  etc. — (.  e.  were  carried  from  his 
body,  to  which  tlie  articles  had  been  touf^hed 
for  the  purpose  of  receiving  the  healing  power 
that  was  supposed  to  reside  in  him.  (See  Luke 
8  :  46.)  They  resorted  to  this  course,  probably, 
because  the  throng  was  so  great  that  the  sick 
could  not  be  brought  directly  to  the  apostle,  or 
in  some  instances  were  too  intirm  to  be  re- 
moved from  their  houses.  [It  pleased  God  to 
work  the  miracles  tlirough  Paul  in  that  way, 
because  it  was  in  that  way  that  the  Ephesians 
expected  the  miracles,  and  hence  would  receive 
them  as  a  testimony  for  Paul  and  his  teacliing, 
—  A.  H.] — Handkerchiefs  (Lat.  sudaria) — lit. 
siveat-doths.  They  had  their  name  from  the 
use  to  which  they  were  principally  applied. — 
Aprons,  such  as  artisans  and  servants  wore 
when  engaged  about  their  work.  This  too  is  a 
Latin  word  (seynicinctia)  whicli  had  passed  into 
the  later  Greek.  (See  on  11  :  26.) — It  is  evident 
from  the  diseases  and  the  evil  spirits  that 
the  writer  made  a  distinction  between  ordinary 
diseases  and  those  inflicted  by  evil  siiirits. 
(Comp.  on  5:  16;  8:  7.) 

13-17.  THE  DEFEAT  OF  CERTAIN  JEW- 
ISH EXORCISTS. 

13.  The  common  text  has  certain  of  the 
vagabond,  etc.  The  more  approved  reading 
is  certain  also  of  the  vagabond,  etc.  (Grsb., 
Tscli.,  Mey.).  Also  joins  certain  of  with 
Paul,  with  reference  to  the  act  in  to  call : 
they  also  attempted  to  call,  as  he  called. — 
Not  vagabond  opj>robriously,  but  wandering 
from  place  to  place  in  the  practice  of  their  arts. — 
Exorcists.  Tliat  was  their  professed,  reputed 
occupation.  They  appear  to  have  regarded  Paul 
as  one  of  their  own  class,  but  of  a  higher  order. 
They  supposed  he  had  obtained  a  name  more  po- 
tent tlian  any  employed  by  them,  and  that  by 
means  of  it  he  could  perform  in  reality  tlie  won- 
ders to  which  they  merely  pretended. — We  ad- 
jure, etc.,  rather  I  adjure  you  by  the  Jesus. 


222 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


14  And  there  were  seven  sons  of  one  Sceva,  a  Jew, 
and  chief  of  the  priests,  which  did  so. 

15  And  the  e\il  spirit  answered  and  said,  Jesus  I 
know,  and  Paul  I  know ;  but  who  are  ye? 

It)  And  the  man  in  whom  the  evil  spirit  was  leaped 
on  them,  and  overcame  them,  and  prevailed  against 
them,  so  that  they  tied  out  of  that  house  naked  and 
■wounded. 

17  And  this  was  known  to  all  the  Jews  and  Greeks 
al.so  dwelling  at  Ephesus;  and  "fear  fell  on  them  all, 
and  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus  was  magnitied. 

IS  And  many  that  believed  came,  and  ''confessed, 
and  shewed  their  deeds. 

1!)  Many  of  them  also  which  used  curious  arts 
brought  their  books  together,  and  burned  them  be- 
fore all  mfu  ;  and  they  counted  the  price  of  them,  and 
found  it  fifty  thousand  pieces  of  silver. 


14  Jesus  whom  Paul  preacheth.  And  there  were  seven 
sons  of  one  .*ceva,  a  Jew,  a  chief  priest,  who  did  this. 

15  And  the  evil  spirit  an^wered  and  said  unto  them, 
Jesus  I  'know,  and  Paul  1  know;  but  who  are  ye.' 

16  And  the  man  in  whom  the  evil  sj)irit  was  leaj)ed  ou 
them,  and  mastered  both  of  them,  and  prevailed 
against  them,  so  that  they  fled  out  of  that  house 

17  naked  and  wounded.  And  this  became  known  to 
all,  both  Jews  and  tireeks,  that  dwelt  at  Kphesus; 
and  fear  fell  upon  them  all,  and  the  name  of  the 

18  Lord  Jesus  was  magnitied.  Many  also  of  them  that 
had  believed  came,  confessing,  and  declaring  their 

19  deeds.  And  not  a  few  of  them  that  practised  '■'curi- 
ous  arts  brought  their  books  together,  and  burne'd 
them  in  the  sight  of  all :  and  they  counted  the  price 
of  them,  and  found  it  fifty  thousand  pieces  of  silver. 


o  Luliel  ;  65;  7  :  16 ;  cli.  2  :  43  ;  5:5.  11.... 6  Matt.  3:6.- 


-1  Or,  recognize. . . .2  Or,  magical 


For  the  double  accusative,  compare  Mark  5:7; 
1  Thess.  5  :  27.     (See  W.  §  32.  4  ;  C.  §  428.) 

14.  For  the  Doric  form  of  the  name  Sceva 
(2«ce«;i),  see  on  11  :  30. — And  chief  of  the 
priests — lit.  a  chief  priest,  a  priest  of  the 
higher  class.  (See  on  4  :  G.)  — Seven.  The 
numeral  is  too  remote  from  certain  (rtve?)  to 
be  indefinite,  several.  (Sec  on  23  :  23.)  — 
Which  did  so.  [This,  a  participial  expression 
in  the  Greek]  denotes  a  habit.  Tlie  next  verse 
relates  an  instance  of  their  practice. 

15.  The  evil  spirit — viz.  the  one  whom 
they  were  attempting  to  exorcise  on  a  certain 
occasion. — Jesus  I  know — i.e.  the  Jesus  {whom 
you  invoke)  Ikmiw;  i.  e.  his  authority  and  power 
— and  the  Paul  (whom  you  name)  I  know 
well  as  the  servant-messenger  of  God.  (Comii. 
IG  :  17.)  The  article  is  probably  significant 
here,  though,  as  the  nouns  are  proper  names, 
it  may  be  a  little  uncertain. — Ye  precedes  who 
[in  the  Greek  text],  because  it  takes  the  em- 
phasis. 

16.  And  the  man  (impelled  by  the  evil 
spirit)  leaping  upon  them. — Overcame, 
having  overpowered  them,  and  prevailed— 
lit.  was  strong— showed  himself  such  against 
them,  or  both  ;  viz.  by  tearing  off  their  gar- 
ments and  beating  them.  Both  is  more  correct 
than  them  (Grsb.,  Mey.,  Tsch.).— Naked  need 
not  be  taken  in  it^  strict  sense.  It  could  be 
applied  to  those  stripped  partially  of  their  rai- 
ment. (Comp.  John  21 :  7.)— Out  of,  or  from 
out  of,  that  house,  where  the  transaction 
took  place.  The  pronoun  reveals  a  more  def- 
inite scene  in  the  writer's  view  than  he  has  de- 
scribed.— In  the  occurrence  related  here  we  are 
to  recognize  a  special  design  on  the  part  of  God. 
It  was  important,  says  Neander,  that  the  divine 
power  which  accompanied  the  gospel  should 
in  some  striking  manner  exhibit  its  superiority 
to  the  magic  which  prevailed  so  extensively  at 
Ephesus,  and  which  by  its  apparently  great 
effects  deceived  and  captivated  so  many.    It 


would  have  a  tendency  to  rescue  men  from 
those  arts  of  imposture,  and  prepare  their 
minds  for  the  reception  of  the  truth. 

18-20.  MANY  ARE  CONVERTED,  AND 
CONFESS  THEIR  SINS. 

18.  And  many  that  believed,  or  and 
many  of  the  believers  (convinced  by  such  evi- 
dence)— lit.  of  those  who  have  believed,  and  still 
believe.  The  language  ascribes  to  them  a  def- 
inite character,  but  does  not  decide  when  it 
began.  They  were  probably  new  converts  (De 
Wet.,  Alf.),  as  the  confession  made  by  thent 
would  be  inconsistent  with  the  life  required 
of  those  who  had  been  recognized  as  Christians. 
They  were  a  different  class,  also,  from  those 
spoken  of  in  the  next  verse;  hence,  not  the 
jugglers  themselves,  but  their  dupes  —  those 
who  had  confided  in  them  and  been  accessory 
to  the  wicked  delusion.— Came  (imperf.),  one 
after  another.  —  Their  deeds,  superstitious 
practices  (Olsh.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.),  not  their  sins 
in  general  (Kuin.).  It  is  better  to  restrict  the 
meaning  in  this  connection,  especially  as  with 
the  other  sense  the  more  obvious  term  would 
be  sins  (a/napria?),  and  not  deeds  (n-pafei?). 

19.  Many  of  them  also,  better  and 
many  of  those  who  practised  magic  arts 
— lit.  things  overwrought,  curious,  recondite. — 
Their  books,  or  the  books  which  con- 
tained their  mysteries—?",  e.  magical  signs,  for- 
mulas of  incantations,  nostrums,  and  the  like. 
— Burned  (imperf.)  (KarfKaiov)  descrilics  them 
as  throwing  book  after  book  into  the  blazing 
pile.— And  found,  etc.,  and  they  found,  as 
the  sum,  fifty  thousand  (i.e.  drachmas)  of 
silver  money.  It  was  common  in  such  des- 
ignations to  omit  the  name  of  the  coin.  (See 
Bernh.,  Synt.,  p.  187.)  The  Attic  drachm  pa.ssed 
at  this  time  among  the  Jews  and  Romans  for  a 
denarixis,  and  was  worth  about  fifteen  cents ;  so 
that  the  books  amounted  to  seventy-five  hun- 
dred dollars.  Some  supply  shekel  as  the  ellip- 
tical word,  which,  reckoning  that  coin  at  sixty 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


223 


20  "i^o  mightily  grew  the  word  of  (lod  and  prevailod. 

21  *j  '•After  tliese  things  were  ended,  I'aiil  '■|)uri)osed 
in  the  spirit,  wlieii  he  had  passed  through  Macedonia 
and  Achaia,  to  go  to  Jerusalem,  saying,  After  1  have 
been  there,  ''I  must  also  see  Konie. 

22  yo  he  sent  into  Macedonia  two  of  «them  that 


20  So  mightily  grew  the  word  of  the  Lord  and  pre- 
vailed. 

21  Now  after  these  things  were  ended,  Paul  purposed 
in  the  spirit,  when  he  had  passed  through  Macedonia 
and  Achaia,  to  go  to  Jerusalem,  saying,  After  I  have 

22  been  there,  I  must  also  see  Komc.     Aijd  haviiig  sen<^ 


och.  6:  7;   12  :  24 b  Rom.  15  :  25;  Gal.  2  :  l....cch.  20  :  22....d  ch.  18  :  21  ;  23  :  11;  Rom.  15  ;  24-28....  e  ch.  13:5. 


cents,  would  make  the  amount  four  times  as 
great.  But  as  the  occurrence  took  place  in  a 
Greek  city,  and  as  Luke  was  not  writing  for 
Jews,  it  is  entirely  improbable  that  lie  has 
stated  the  sum  in  their  currency.  All  books  in 
ancient  times  were  expensive,  and  especially 
those  which  contained  secrets  or  charms  held 
ill  such  estimation, 

20.  Grew  . ...  and  prevailed,  or  grew  and 
was  strong,  mighty.  The  first  verb  refers  to 
the  general  extension  of  the  gospel ;  the  second, 
to  its  influence  on  the  conduct  of  those  who 
embraced  it.  What  precedes  illustrated  the  re- 
mark in  both  respects.  [Instead  of  the  word 
of  God,  the  better  manuscripts  read  the  word 
of  the  Lord. — A.  H.] — This  verse  presents  a 
striking  coincidence  as  coni]iared  with  1  Cor. 
1()  :  9.  It  was  here  at  Ephesus,  and  about  this 
time,  that  Paul  wrote  the  First  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians.  That  it  was  written  at  Ephesus  is 
certain  from  1  Cor.  IG  :  8.  But  Paul  visited  tliis 
city  only  twice — the  first  time  when  he  touched 
liere  on  his  way  to  Jerusalem  (is,  i9),  and  again 
at  this  present  time  of  his  prolonged  residence 
here.  He  could  not  liave  written  the  Epistle 
on  his  first  visit,  l)ccause  the  church  at  Corinth, 
so  recently  gatliered,  would  not  answer  then  to 
the  character  which  it  bears  in  the  Epistle,  and 
still  more  decisively  because  ApoUos,  who  was 
the  head  of  one  of  the  parties  there  (i  Cor.  i ;  12), 
did  not  proceed  to  Coriiitli  (18:27)  till  shortly 
before  Paul's  second  arrival  at  Ephesus.  Again, 
Paul  speaks  in  1  Cor.  4  :  17  of  having  recently 
sent  Timothy  to  Corinth  (comp.  1  Cor.  16  :  10), 
and  here  in  the  Acts  (19:22)  Luke  speaks  evi- 
dently of  the  same  event,  wliich  he  represents 
as  preparatory  to  the  apostle's  intended  visit  to 
the  same  place.  As  Paul  now  left  Ephesus  in 
the  spring  of  a.  d.  57  (see  note  on  20  :  1),  he 
wrote  his  First  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  a  few 
months  l)efore  his  departure. 

21,  22.  THE  APOSTLE  PROPOSES  TO 
LEAVE  EPHESUS. 

21.  A  new  epoch  begins  here — viz.  that  from 
the  end  of  tlie  year  and  tlirec  months  to  Paul's 
departure.— These  things,  up  to  this  time 
since  the  arrival  at  Ephesus,  not  so  naturally 
those  relating  merely  to  the  exorcism  and  its 
effects.— Purposed  in  the  spirit,  or  placed 
in  his    mind,   purposed.      (See  on  5  :4.)  — 


Macedonia  and  Achaia  occur  here  also  in 
the  Roman  sense.  The  order  of  the  names  in- 
dicates that  the  apostle  intended  at  this  time  to 
have  proceeded  directly  from  Corinth  to  Jeru- 
salem. An  unexpected  event  (see  20  :  3)  com- 
])ellcd  him  tt)  change  his  plan. — I  must  also, 
sq.  It  is  necessary  that  I  should  see  also 
Rome,  not  in  order  to  fulfil  any  revealed  pur- 
pose of  God,  but  to  satisfy  his  own  feelings.  He 
was  anxious  to  visit  the  believers  there,  and  to 
preach  the  gospel  in  that  metropolis  of  the 
world.  (See  Rom.  1  :  11,  14.) — Paley  institutes 
a  striking  comparison  between  this  verse  and 
Rom.  1  :  13  and  15  :  23-28 :  "  The  conformity 
between  the  history  and  the  Epistle  is  perfect. 
In  the  first  pas.sage  of  the  Epistle  we  find  that 
a  design  of  visiting  Rome  had  long  dwelt  in 
the  apostle's  mind ;  here,  in  the  Acts,  we  find 
that  design  expressed  a  considerable  time  before 
the  Epistle  was  written.  In  the  history  we  find 
that  the  plan  which  Paul  had  formed  was  to 
pass  through  Macedonia  and  Achaia ;  after  that, 
to  go  to  Jeru.salem  ;  and  when  he  had  finished 
his  visit  there,  to  sail  for  Rome.  When  tlie 
Epistle  was  written,  he  had  executed  so  much 
of  his  plan  as  to  have  pa,ssed  through  Mace- 
donia and  Achaia,  and  was  preparing  to  pur- 
sue the  remainder  of  it  by  spcccUly  setting  out 
toward  Jerusalem;  and  in  this  point  of  his 
travels  he  tells  his  friends  at  Rome  that  when 
he  had  completed  the  business  which  carried 
him  to  Jerusalem  he  would  come  to  them  when 
he  should  make  his  journey  into  Spain."  Nor 
is  the  argument  to  be  evaded  by  supposing  the 
passages  to  have  been  adjusted  to  each  other  in 
this  manner:  "  If  the  passage  in  the  Epistle 
was  taken  from  that  in  the  Acts,  why  was 
S])ain  put  in  ?  If  the  passage  in  the  Acts  was 
taken  from  that  in  the  Epistle,  why  was  Spain 
left  out  ?  If  the  two  passages  were  unknown 
to  each  other,  nothing  can  account  for  their 
conformity  but  truth." 

22.  Timothy  was  at  Corinth  when  last  men- 
tioned (i8:5).  He  would  be  likely  to  cross  over 
to  Ephesus  on  hearing  of  Paul's  arrival  there. 
But  what  connection  is  there  between  the 
apostle's  sending  Timothy  into  Macedonia  and 
his  own  purpo.se  to  proceed  to  Achaia?  We 
obtain  an  answer  to  that  question  from  1  Cor. 
4  ;  17-19.    We  learn  there  that  Timothy  was 


224 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


ministered  unto  hiui,  Tiraotheus  and  "Erastus;  but  he 
himself  stayed  in  Asia  for  a  season. 

28  And  'the  same  time  there  arose  no  small  stir  about 
=that  way. 

24  Foracertain  man  named  Demetrius,  a  silversmith, 
which  made  silver  shrines  for  Uiana,  brought ''no  small 
gain  unto  the  craftsuieu  ; 

25  Whom  he  called  together  with  the  workmen  of 
like  occupation,  and  said,  Sirs,  ye  know  that  by  this 
craft  we  have  our  wealth. 

21)  Moreover  ye  see  and  hear,  that  not  alone  at  Ephe- 
sus,  but  almost  throughout  all  Asia,  this  Paul  hath 
persuaded  and  turned  away  nuich  people,  saying  that 
Hhey  be  no  gods,  which  are  made  with  hands: 

2/  So  that  not  only  this  our  craft  is  in  danger  to  be 


into  Macedonia  two  of  tbeui  that  ministered  unto 
him,  Timothy  and  Erastus,  he  himself  stayed  in 
Asia  lor  a  while. 

23     And  about  that  time  there  a'ose  no  small  stir  con- 

24ceriiing  ti.e  Way.  i-or  a  certain  man  named  De- 
metrius, a  silversmith,  who  made  silver  shrines  of 
•Diana,  brought  no  liltle  business  unto  the  crafts- 

2-5  men;  whom  he  gathered  together,  with  the  work- 
men of  like  occupation,  and  said,  f^irs,  ve  know  that 

26  by  this  business  we  have  our  wealth."  And  ve  see 
and  hear,  that  not  alone  at  Ephesiis,  but  almost 
throughout  all  Asia,  this  Paul  hath  persuaded  and 
turned  away  much  people,  saying  that  they  are  no 

27 gods,  which  are  made  with  hands:  and  not  only  is 


a  Rom.  16  :  23  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  20 b  2  Cor.  1:8 c  Set  ch.  9  ■  2 

1  Gr.'. 


not  to  stop  in  Macedonia,  but  to  pass  on  to 
Corinth,  the  capitt^I  city  of  Achaia,  and  pre- 
pare the  church  for  the  approaching  visit  of 
the  apostle.  Tlius  "  the  narrative  agrees  with 
the  Epistle ;  and  the  agreement  is  attended  with 
very  little  appearance  of  design.  One  thing  at 
least  concerning  it  is  certain — that  if  this  pas- 
sage of  Paul's  history  had  been  taken  from  his 
letter,  it  would  have  sent  Timothy  to  Corinth 
by  name,  or  at  all  events  into  Achaia." — Eras- 
tus may  be  the  person  of  that  name  in  2  Tim. 
4  :  20,  but,  as  he  travelled  with  Paul,  the  best 
critics  distinguish  him  from  the  Erastus  in 
Rom.  16  :  23  (Neaiid.,  De  Wet.,  Win.).  The 
office  of  the  latter  as  "  treasurer  of  the  city  " 
would  demand  his  more  constant  presence  at 
Corinth. — He  himself  stayed— lit.  he  him- 
self (while  they  departed)  kept  back  unto 
Asia ;  unto  not  hi  (De  Wet.,  Rob.),  and  not /or 
as  dat.  comm.  (Win.),  uncommon  before  a 
proper  name,  but  unto  as  the  direction  toward 
which  (Mey.). 

23-27.  DEIMETRIUS  EXCITES  A  TUMULT 
AT  EPHESUS. 

23.  As  at  Philippi  (i6 :  19),  so  here,  the  Greeks 
instigated  the  riot ;  their  motive  was  the  same 
— fear  of  losing  the  means  of  their  ill-gotten 
wealth.  (See  note  on  14  :  19.) — The  same 
time — lit.  about  that  time;  viz.  that  of  Paul's 
intended  departure.  —  About  that  way,  or, 
concerning  the  way.     (See  on  9:2.) 

24.  For,  etc.,  explains  why  a  tumult  arose. 
—Silver  shrines  (not  for,  in  E.  V.,  but)  of 
Artemis.  These  were  small  portable  images 
resembling  the  temple  at  Ephesus  and  contain- 
ing a  figure  of  the  goddess.  The  manufacture  of 
these  shrines  was  a  lucrative  business,  as  they 
were  in  great  request ;  they  were  set  up  in 
houses  as  objects  of  worship,  or  carried  about 
the  person  as  having  the  supposed  power  to 
avert  disease  and  other  dangers.  They  were 
not  only  sold  here  in  Asia,  but  sent  as  an  arti- 
cle of  traffic  to  distant  countries.  Demetrius, 
it  would  seem,  was  a  wholesale  dealer  in  such 


shrines.  He  executed  orders  for  them,  and  em- 
ployed artisans,  who  received  lucrative  wages 
[see  R.  V.J  for  their  labor. — (Comp.  Trapei^eTo 
with  the  active  form  in  16  :  16.) 

25.  Whom  he  called  together,  etc.,  or 
whom  having  assembled  and  the  other 
workmen  in  his  employ.  The  artisans  (re^w- 
Tat)  performed  the  more  delicate  processes,  and 
the  workmen  (epyaras)  the  rougher  work.  So 
Bengel,  Kuinoel,  Hemsen,  and  Meyer  distin- 
guish the  two  nouns  from  each  other.  It  ap- 
pears improbable  that  Demetrius  would  confine 
his  appeal  to  his  own  men.  It  may  be  better  to 
understand  workmen  of  the  laborers  in  gen- 
eral who  were  devoted  to  such  trades,  whether 
they  exercised  them  on  their  own  account  or 
that  of  some  em})loyer. — Of  like  occupation. 
The  Greek  (ra  ToiaOra)  limits  the  reference  to 
shrines — i.  e.  definitely,  such  things  as  those. 
(Comp.  Matt.  19  :  14 ;  2  Cor.  12  :  2,  3.  K.  jJ  24(1 
4.)  It  is  incorrect  to  extend  the  pronoun  so  as 
to  include  statuary,  pictures,  coins,  and  the 
like  (Blmf). — Ye  know  =  ye  know  well. 
(See  V.  15.) — This  refers  to  making  shrines 
in  Luke's  narrative.  It  stands,  therefore,  for 
some  equivalent  term  or  idea  in  the  speech  of 
Demetrius. — Wealth ,  prosperiti/. 

26.  Of,  or  from  (not  at),  Ephesus  depends 
on  much  people  as  a  genitive  of  possession. 
— Asia  has,  no  doubt,  its  Roman  sense.  The 
effiect  ascribed  here  to  Paul's  labors  agrees  with 
the  statement  in  v.  10. — Turned  away,  or 
turned  aside — i.  e.  from  our  mode  of  wor- 
ship.— That  they  be,  etc.,  that  they  are 
not  gods  Avhich  are  made  by  hands. 
The  mode  of  speaking  illustrates  the  disposi- 
tion of  the  heathen  to  identify  their  gods  with 
the  idols  or  temples  consecrated  to  them.  (See 
on  17  :  24.)  We  can  imagine  the  efi'ect  of  these 
words  on  such  auditors,  uttered  with  a  look 
or  gesture  toward  the  sjilendid  temj)le  within 
sight. 

27.  This  our  craft.  Rather,  this  part, 
branch,  of  our  labor  (Kyp  ,  Mey.).     The  idea 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


225 


set  at  nought;  but  also  that  the  temple  of  the  great 
goddess  Diana  shoidd  be  despised,  and  her  niagnil- 
icenee  should  be  destroyed,  whom  all  Asia  and  the 
world  worshippeth. 

2H  And  when  they  heard  thexe  sayings,  they  were  full 
of  wrath,  and  cried  out,  saying,  Great  is  Diana  of  the 
Kphesians. 

■2\)  And  the  whole  city  was  filled  with  confusion: 
and  having  caught  "Gaius  and  ^Aristarcbus,  men  of 


there  danger  that  this  our  tradi^  come  into  dis- 
repute; but  also  that  the  teni])le  of  the  great  god- 
dess 'Diana  be  nnide  of  no  account,  and  that  she 
should   even   be   deposed    from    her    magniticeuce, 

28  whom  all  Asia  and  -the  world  worshJpi)eth.  And 
when  tliey  heard  this,  they  were  filled  with  wrath, 
and  cried  out,  saying.  Great  is  'Diana  of  the  ICphe- 

29sians.  And  the  city  was  filled  with  the  confusion: 
and  they  rushed  with  one  accord  into  the  theatre, 


oRom.  16:  23  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  14 6  ch.  20  :  4 ;  27  :  2  ;  Col.  4:  10;  Ptailem.  24.- 


-1  Gr.  Artemit....i  6r.  the  inhabited  earth. 


is  that  their  art  as  silversmiths,  of  whatever 
Use  it  might  be  in  other  respects,  would  soon 
he  ruined,  as  to  this  particular  application  of  it. 
—  For  us  (riiJLiv,  dat.  incomni. ),  to  our  detriment. 
Their  receipts  had  declined  perceptibly  already, 
and  at  this  rate  w<nild  soon  be  cut  off  alto- 
gether.— But  also,  etc.,  but  also  the  tem- 
ple of  the  great  goddess  Artemis  is  in 
tihmger,  etc.  Is  in  danger  extends  also  into 
this  clause  and  governs  the  following  inlinitive. 
Great  was  one  of  the  special  titles  of  the  Ephc- 
sian  Diana.  In  regard  to  her  temple,  reckoned 
as  one  of  the  wonders  of  the  world,  the  reader 
will  tind  ample  details  in  Conybeare  and  How- 
son.  The  edifice  in  Paul's  time  had  been  built 
in  place  of  the  one  burnt  down  by  Herostratus 
on  the  night  of  Alexander's  birth,  and  was 
vastly  superior  to  it  in  size  and  grandeur.  No 
ruins  of  it  remain  at  present  on  the  spot ;  but 
the  traveller  sees  some  of  the  columns  in  the 
mosque  of  St.  Sophia,  at  Constantinople,  orig- 
inally a  church,  and  in  the  naves  of  Italian 
cathedrals. — The  words  translated  should  be 
despised  mean  to  come  into  contempt 
(Mey.);  in  redargutiimcni  venire  (Vulg.) — /.  e. 
to  he  confuted,  rejected  (De  Wet.).  The  noiui 
occurs  only  here,  and  its  meaning  must 
be  inferred  from  its  relation  to  the  cognate 
words.  A  result  of  confutation  is  shame,  loss 
of  character ;  and  hence  the  expression  could 
be  used  to  signify  that  they  feared  lest  their 
business  should  lose  its  credit  in  the  public 
estimation. — And  her  magniAcence,  etc., 
and  also  that  her  glory  tvill  be  destroyed,  etc. 
The  discourse  here  changes  from  the  direct 
to  the  indirect,  as  if  he  said  liad  introduced 
tins  part  of  the  sentence.  We  have  a  similar 
transition  in  23  :  24.  (Sec  W.  ?  64.  III.  2.) 
And  (re,  needlessly  exchanged  by  some  for  8e) 
joins  the  clause  with  what  i)recedes,  while  also 
[see  Dr.  Hackett's  translation]  adds  another 
argument  to  enforce  the  speaker's  object. — 
The  world  (i»  oiKovy^ivri).  (Comp.  on  11  :  28.) 
The  temple  at  Ephesus  had  been  built  at  the 
common  expense  of  till  the  Greek  cities  of 
Asia.  Pilgrims  repaired  thither  from  all  na- 
tions and  countries. — The  speech  of  Demetrius 
deserves  attention  for  its  artful  character.  He 
15 


I  takes  care,  in  the  first  place,  to  show  his  fellow- 
craftsmen  how  the  matter  affected  their  own 
1  personal  interest ;  and  then,  having  aroused 
I  their  selfishness,  he  proceeds  to  apjjcal  with  so 
much  the  more  effect  to  their  zeal  for  religion. 
His  main  reliance,  as  Calvin  thinks,  was  upon 
the  first :  "  Res  ipsa  clainat  non  tarn  pro  aris 
il)Sos  quam  pro  focis  i)ugnare,  ut  scilic:etculinam 
habeant  bene  calentem  "  ["The  nature  of  the 
ctise  makes  it  evident  that  they  are  fighting,  not 
so  much  for  their  altars  as  for  their  household 
fires;  that,  forsooth,  (hey  may  have  their 
kitchens  well  warmed"]. 

28-34.  THE  MOB  SEIZE  TWO  OF 
PAUL'S  COMPANIONS  AND  RUSH  TO 
THE  THEATRE. 

28.  Full  of  wrath,  against  Paul  and  the 
Christians. — Cried  out,  continued  crying. 
Tlie  Greeks  lived  so  much  in  the  open  air  De- 
metrius may  have  harangued  his  men  in  pub- 
lic ;  if  in  private,  the  rioters  had  now  gcme  into 
the  street.  Perhaps  they  traversed  the  c'ity  for 
a  time  with  their  outcry  before  executing  tlie 
assault  spoken  of  in  the  next  verse,  and  swelled 
their  number  with  recruits  on  tlie  way. 

29.  And  the  whole  city  was  filled  with 
confusion,  or  tumult,  the  tumult,  if  we 
read  the  article.  The  evidence  for  the  article 
is  not  decisive  [but  it  is  very  strong,  X*  A  B  D^ 
H  L  P  ;  so  that  the  critical  editions  now  all 
insert  it.  On  the  otlier  hand,  the  evidence 
for  whole  Iiefire  city  is  not  decisive. — A.  H.]. 
— And  they  rushed  with  one  accord  into 
the  theatre.  The  subject  of  the  verb  here 
includes  those  who  e.xcited  the  disturbance  and 
those  who  joined  in  it.  They  rushed  to  the 
theatre,  because  it  was  the  custom  of  the  Greeks, 
though  not  of  the  Romans,  to  use  their  theatres 
for  public  business  as  well  as  for  sports.  (See 
on  lii  :  21.)     The  multitude  had  evidently  no 

j  definite  plan  of  action,  and  no  definite  idea  of 
the  cause  of  the  present  excitement.  (See  v. 
32.)  All  they  knew  was  that  some  danger 
threatened  their  religion,  and  under  that  im- 
pression they  hastened  as  with  one  impulse 
(6|nodu/xaJoi')  to  the  usual  place  of  concourse  for 
ftirtlier  iiKpiiry  or  for  consultation.  Remains 
of  the  theatre  at  Epliesus  are  still  visible.    Its 


226 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


Macedonia,  Paul's  companions  in  travel,  they  rushed 
with  one  accord  into  the  theatre. 

:mi  And  when  Paul  would  have  entered  in  unto  the 
people,  the  disciiiles  suffered  him  not. 

31  And  certain  of  the  chief  of  Asia,  which  were  his 
friends,  sent  unto  him,  desiring  /liin  tliat  he  would  not 
adventure  himself  into  the  theatre. 

3'J  Some  therefore  cried  one  thing,  and  some  another : 
fortheasseml)l\-  was  confused  ;  and  the  more  part  knew 
not  wherefore  they  were  come  together. 

'd'.i  And  they  drew  Ale.Kander  out  of  the  multitude, 
the  Jews  putting  him  forward.  And  "Alexander  ''beck- 


having  seized  Gaius  and  Aristarchus,  men  of  Mace- 

30donia,   Paul's  companions    in    travel.      And   when 

Paul  was  minded  to  enter  in  unto  the  people,  the 

31  disciples  suffered  him  not.  And  certain  also  of  the 
lAsiarchs,  being  his  friends,  sent  unto  him,  and  be- 
sought him  not  to  adventure  himself  into  the  thea- 

32  tre.  .Some  therefore  cried  one  thing,  and  some  an- 
other: for  the  assembly  was  in  confusion;  and  the 
more  part  knew  not  wherefore  they  were  come  to- 

33  gether.  -And  they  brought  Alexander  out  of  the 
multitude,  the  Jews  putting  him  forward.     And 


o  1  Tim.  1  :20;  2  Ti 


;  14 5  ch.  12  :  17. 1  i.  e.  officers  having  charge  of  festivals  in  the  RomaD  province  of  Asia 2  Or, 

And  some  of  the  multitude  instructed  Alexander. 


outline  can  be  traced,  showing  its  dimensions 
to  have  been  larger  than  those  of  any  other 
theatre  known  to  us  from  ancient  times.  It 
was  built  on  the  side  of  a  lofty  hill,  with  the 
seats  rising  in  long  succession  one  above  an- 
other, and,  like  similar  edifices  among  the  an- 
cients, was  entirely  open  to  the  sky.  A  recent 
traveller  judges  that  it  was  large  enough  to  con- 
tain thirty  thousand  persons.  The  temple  of 
Diana  could  be  seen  from  it,  at  no  great  dis- 
tance, across  the  marketplace.  Luke  has  vio- 
lated no  probability,  therefore,  in  representing 
so  many  people  as  assembled  in  such  a  place. — 
Having  caught  {avvapTrda-avTf:),  after  having 
seized  along  (out  of  the  house,  prior  to 
rushed,  wpiMr]<7av),  or  (coincident  with  the  verb), 
having  seized  along  when  they  rushed.  (See 
note  on  21  :  7.)  Meyer  prefers  the  first  mode; 
De  Wette,  the  second.  (See  W.  ?  45.  6.  b.  For 
a  different  explanation  of  crvv  in  the  participle, 
see  Rob.,  Lex.,  s.  v.) — Gaius,  or  Cains,  who 
was  a  ^Macedonian,  is  not  the  one  mentioned  in 
20  :  4,  or  in  Rom.  16  :  23  and  1  Cor.  1  :  15 ;  for 
the  former  belonged  to  Derbe ;  the  latter,  to 
Corinth.  —  Aristarchus  was  a  Thessalonian 
(20:4).     (See  further  on  27  :  2.) 

30.  Paul.  Paul  may  have  been  absent  from 
his  abode  at  the  time  of  the  assault,  as  was  tlie 
case  at  Thessalonica  (n  :  e).  Unto  the  people 
in  the  theatre  (v.  31 ).  His  idea  may  have  been 
that  his  appearance  there  in  person,  or  a  decla- 
ration that  he  was  willing  to  have  his  conduct 
examined,  would  allay  the  tumiilt.  (Comp.  v. 
37.)  His  anxiety  must  have  been  the  greater 
from  his  not  knowing  to  what  danger  the 
friends  who  had  fallen  into  the  hands  of  the 
mob  might  be  exposed. — The  disciples,  who 
were,  no  doubt,  native  Ephesians.  They  under- 
stood their  countrymen  too  well  to  encourage 
the  apostle's  inclination. 

31.  The  chief  of  Asia.  The  Asiwchs -were 
ten  men  (Mey.)  chosen  annually  from  the  chief 
towns  in  Proconsular  Asia  to  superintend  the 
games  and  festivals  held  every  year  in  honor 
.of  the  gods  and  the  Roman  emperor.      They 


were  chosen  from  the  wealthier  class  of  citizens, 
since,  like  the  Roman  sediles,  they  were  re- 
quired to  provide  for  these  exhibitions  at  their 
own  expense.  Those  who  had  filled  the  olfice 
once  retained  the  title  for  the  rest  of  life.  One 
of  the  numljer  acted  as  chief  Asiarch,  who  re« 
sided  commonly  at  Ephesus.  The  Bithyniarchs, 
Galatarchs,  Syriarchs,  were  a  similar  class  of 
magistrates  in  other  provinces  of  Western  Asia. 
— Akerman  offers  here  the  following  just  re- 
mark :  "  That  the  very  maintainers  and  presi- 
dents of  the  heathen  sports  and  festivals  of  a 
people  to  whom  the  doctrine  of  Christ  and  the 
resurrection  was  foolishness  were  the  friendti  of 
Paul  was  an  assertion  which  no  fabricator  of  a 
forgery  would  have  ventured  upon.  We  can- 
not penetrate  the  veil  which  antiquity  has 
thrown  over  these  events,  and  are  only  left  to 
conjecture,  either  that  Christianity  itself  had 
supijorters,  though  secret  ones  who  feared  the 
multitude,  in  these  wealthy  Asiatics,  or  that, 
careless  of  the  truth  of  what  the  apostle 
preached,  they  admired  his  eloquence  and 
wished  to  protect  one  whom  they  considered 
so  highly  gifted." 

32.  Therefore  {ovv),  resumptive,  as  in  9 :  31 ; 
8  :  4.  It  puts  forward  the  narrative  from  the 
point  reached  in  v.  29.  The  two  preceding 
verses  relate  to  a  collateral  circumstance. 

33.  And  they  drew,  etc.  Now  out  of 
the  crowd,  from  their  midst,  they — viz.  the 
Jews — urged  forward  Alexander.  "As  the 
Jews  here  lived  in  tlie  midst  of  a  numerous 
Greek  population  who  viewed  them  with  con- 
stant aversion,  any  special  occasion  roused 
their  slumbering  prejudices  into  open  violence, 
and  they  had  then  much  to  suffer.  Hence  the 
Jews  on  this  occasion  feared  that  the  anger  of 
the  people  against  tlie  enemies  of  their  gods — 
especially  as  many  of  tliem  did  not  know  who 
were  really  intended — would  be  directed  against 
themselves,  and  they  were  anxious,  therefore, 
that  one  of  their  number,  a  man  by  tlie  name 
of  Alexander,  should  stand  forward,  in  order 
to  shift  the  blame  from  tliemselves  upon  the 


Ch.  XJX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


227 


oned  vrith  the  hand,  and  would  have  made  his  defence 
unto  the  people. 

:U  Kut  when  they  knew  that  he  was  a  Jew,  all  with 
one  voice  about  the  space  of  two  hours  cried  out,  Great 
is  Diana  of  the  Ephesians. 

80  And  when  the  townclerk  had  appeased  the  people, 
he  said,  Ye  men  of  ICphesus,  what  niau  is  there  that 
knoweth  not  how  that  the  city  of  the  ICphesians  is  a 
worshipper  of  the  great  goddess  Diana,  and  of  the 
image  which  fell  down  from  Jupiter? 


Alexander   beckoned  with    the   hand,  and   would 

34  have  made  a  defence  unto  the  people.  But  when 
they  perceived  that  he  was  a  Jew,  all  with  one 
voice  about  the  space  of  two  hours  cried  out,  <jreat 

35  is  'Diana  of  the  i'^phesians.  And  when  the  town- 
clerk  had  quieted  the  multitude,  he  saith.  Ye  men 
of  Ephesus,  what  man  is  there  who  knoweth  not 
how  that  the  city  of  the  Ephesians  is  temple-keeper 
of  the  great  'Diana,  and  of  the  inmge  which  fell 


1  Gr,  Artemis. 


Christians ;  but  the  appearance  of  such  a  per- 
son, who  himself  belonged  to  the  enemies  of 
their  gods,  excited  in  the  heathen  still  greater 
rage,  and  the  clamor  became  more  violent." 
This  is  the  view  of  Neander,  and  is  the  one 
adopted  by  Kuinoel,  Hemsen,  OLshausen, Winer, 
and  most  others.  Some,  on  the  contrary,  as 
Calvin,  Meyer,  Wieseler,  understand  that  Alex- 
ander was  a  Jewish  Christian,  and  that  the 
Jews,  who  recognized  him  as  such,  pushed  him 
forward,  in  order  to  expose  him  to  the  fury  of 
the  populace.  Would  have  made  his  de- 
fence has  been  said  to  favor  this  opinion ;  but 
it  may  refer  to  a  defence  in  behalf  of  the  Jews 
as  well  as  of  the  Christians.  The  Alexander 
in  2  Tim.  4  :  14  could  hardly  have  been  the 
same  person ;  the  coppersmith  may  have 
been  added  there  to  distinguish  liira  from  tliis 
individual. — The  Jews  thrusting  (putting) 
him  forward.  The  subject  of  this  subordi- 
nate clause  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  principal 
clause  which  i)recedes ;  whereas,  according  to 
the  ordinary  rule,  it  is  only  when  the  subjects 
are  different  that  the  genitive  absolute  is  em- 
ployed. The  participle  irpopaWovTiav  {thriisting) 
would  have  been  regularly  in  the  nominative. 
Exceptions  like  this  occur  in  the  classics.  The 
idea  of  the  secondary  clause  acquires  in  this 
way  more  prominence.  (See  K.  ^  313.  R.  2,  as 
compared  with  ^  312.  3.) 

34.  [A  literal  rendering  would  be :  And  per- 
ceiving that  he  was  a  Jew  there  ^va^  one  voice  from 
all  for  about  two  hours,  crying,  Great  is  Diana, 
etc.  The  Greek  participle  (eniyvovres)  translated 
perceiving]  is  nominative,  as  if  all  cried  out 
(i<l>uii'r)<Tav  anavTe^)  had  followed,  instead  of  one 
voice  from  all  {^lovri  >u'a  .  .  .  U  irai/Twc).  (See 
"W.  §  63. 1. 1.)  The  expression  with  that  change 
would  have  been  more  correct,  but  le.ss  forcible, 
(jii'a  tK  vavTuiv  is  a  calUda  juncttira  which  will  ar- 
rest the  reader's  attention.)—  About  the  space 
of  two  hours.  Their  unintermitted  cry  for 
about  two  hours,  Great  is  Diana  of  the 
Ephesians!  not  only  declared  their  attach- 
ment to  her  worship,  but,  according  to  the 
ideas  of  the  heathen,  was  itself  an  act  of  wor- 


ship. (Comp.  1  Kings  18  :  26 ;  Matt.  6  :  7.)  The 
Mohammedan  monks  in  India  at  the  present 
time  often  practise  such  repetitions  for  entire 
days  together.  Tliey  have  been  known  to  say 
over  a  single  syllable  having  a  supposed  relig- 
ious efficacy  until  they  exhaust  their  strength 
and  are  unable  to  articulate  any  longer. ^ — It 
has  been  remarked  that  the  reverberation  of 
their  voices  from  the  steep  rock  which  formed 
one  side  of  the  theatre  (see  on  v.  29)  must  have 
rendered  the  many-mouthed,  frenzied  exclama- 
tion still  more  terrific. 

35-40.  SPEECH  OF  THE  CITY  RECORD- 
ER, WHO  QUELLS  THE  UPROAR  AND 
DISPERSES  THE  MULTITUDE. 

35.  The  town-clerk  =  the  recorder.  In 
the  cities  of  Asia  Minor,  as  appears  from  notices 
and  inscriptions,  this  was  the  title  of  a  very 
important  magi.strate  with  various  functions, 
though  his  more  immediate  province  was  to 
register  the  public  acts  and  laws  or  to  preserve 
the  record  of  them.  (See  Win.,  Realm.,  i.  p.  649.) 
He  was  authorized  to  preside  over  public  as- 
semblies, and  is  mentioned  on  marl^les  as  acting 
in  that  capacity.  He  stood  next  in  rank  to  the 
munici{)al  chief,  and  performed  his  duties  dur- 
ing the  absence  or  on  the  death  of  that  officer.  A 
recorder,  or  town-clerk,  of  Ephesus  is  often 
mentioned  on  coins  of  that  city.  (See  New 
Englander,  x.  p.  144.)— Had  appeased  the 
people,  or  having  stilled  the  crowd,  by 
showing  himself  to  them  and  making  a  sign 
(i3 :  16)  that  he  wished  to  speak. — In  for  what 
man  is  there,  the  conjunction  refers  to  a  sup- 
pressed thought:  You  have  no  occasion  fortius 
excitement,  for  what  human  being  is  there, 
etc.  Of  men  (comp.  1  Cor.  2: 11),  and  not  man 
(T.  R.),  is  to  be  read  here.  [Literally  :  Who  of 
men  is  there,  etc.— A.  H.]— That  knoweth 
not,  etc.,  or  Avho  does  not  know,  that  the 
city«f  the  Ephesians  is  keeper,  guardian, 
of  the  great  Diana  ;  and  hence  it  was  unbe- 
coming in  them  to  be  so  sensitive,  as  if  their 
reputation  was  at  stake.  Goddess  after  great 
(T.  R.)  sliould  be  omitted.  Worshipper — lit. 
temple-sweeper — became  at  lengtli  an  honorary 


>  See  Tholuck's  Autlegung  der  Bergpredigt  (3d  ed.),  p.  328,  sq. 


228 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


36  Peeing  then  tliat  these  things  eaunot  be  spoken 
against,  ye  ought  to  be  quiet,  and  to  do  notlung  rashly. 

•i7  For  ye  have  brought  liither  these  men,  which  are 
neither  robbers  of  churches,  nor  yet  blasphemers  of 
your  goddess. 

38  Wherefore  if  Demetrius,  and  the  craftsmen  which 
are  with  him,  have  a  matter  against  any  man,  the  law 
is  open,  and  there  are  deputies:  let  them  implead  one 
another. 

39  But  if  ye  inquire  any  thing  concerning  other 
matters,  it  shall  be  determined  in  a  lawful  assembly. 


3G  down  from  i.Tupiter?  f-'eeing  then  that  these  things 
cannot  be  gainsaid,  ye  ought  to  be  quiet,  and  to  do 

37  nothing  rash.  J  or  ye  have  brought  liiilicr  these 
men,  who  are  neither  robbers  of  temples  nor  blas- 

38  phemers  of  our  goddess.  Jf  therefore  Demetrius, 
and  the  craftsmen  that  are  with  him,  have  a  matter 
against  any  man,  -the  courts  are  open,  and  there 

39  are  proconsuls:  let  ti  em  accuse  one  another.  }  ul 
if  ye  seek  any  thing  about  other  matters,  it  shall  be 


1  Or,  heaven 2  Or,  court  days  are  kept 


title,  and  as  such  was  granted  to  certain  Asiatic 
cities  in  recognition  of  the  care  and  expense  be- 
stowed by  them  on  the  temple  and  worship  of 
their  favorite  deities.  It  is  found  on  coins  of 
Ephesus  struck  about  Paul's  time. — The  image 
which  fell — lit.  the  image  fallen  from  Ju- 
piter, and  hence  so  much  the  more  sacred. 
There  was  a  similar  tradition  in  regard  to  a 
statue  of  Artemis  in  Taurus  (Eurip.,  Iph.  T., 
977),  and  also  one  of  Pallas  at  Athens  (Pausan., 
i.  26.  6). 

36.  These  things — viz.  the  established  rep- 
utation of  the  Ephesians  for  their  attachment 
to  the  worship  of  Diana,  and  the  well-known 
origin  of  her  image.  Hence  the  argument  is 
twofold :  They  had  no  reason  to  fear  that  such 
a  people  (temple-keeper)  could  be  induced 
to  abandon  a  religion  which  so  wonderful  an 
event  (fallen  from  Jupiter)  had  signalized. 
— Ye  ought— lit.  it  is  necessary  that  you  ; 
i.  e.  morally,  you  ought. 

37.  For  confirms  the  implication  in  rashly 
— i.  e.  that  they  had  acted  rashly. — These  re- 
fers to  Gains  and  Aristarchus.  (See  v.  29.) 
Paul  was  not  present. — Robbers  of  temples, 
not  of  churches.  It  is  singular  that  the  latter 
translation,  so  incorrect,  should  be  found  in  all 
the  English  versions  except  Wiclif's  and  the 
Rheims,  which,  being  drawn  from  the  Vulgate, 
have  "  sacrilegious."  The  temples  among  the 
heathen  contained  votive  oflFerings  and  other 
gifts,  and  were  often  plundered. — Nor  yet, 
etc. — lit.  nor  blaspheming  your  goddess. 
It  was  the  etfect  of  Paul's  preaching  to  under- 
mine idolatry  and  bring  the  worship  of  Arte- 
mis into  contempt ;  but  as  at  Athens,  so  here, 
he  had  refrained  from  denunciation,  oppro- 
brium, ridiciile,  and  had  opposed  error  by  con- 
tending for  the  truth.  Hence  the  recorder 
could  urge  that  technical  view  of  the  anostle's 
conduct  and  deny  that  he  had  committed  any 
actionable  offence.  It  would  almost  seem  as  if, 
like  the  Asiarchs,  he  was  friendly  at  heart  to 
the  new  sect. 

38.  Wherefore,  better  therefore,  since  the 
men  are  innocent  in  reirard  to  such  crimes  as 


sacrilege   and   blasphemy. — With    him — i.  e., 

his  associates  in  the  complaint  against  Paul. 
(Comp.  5  :  17.)  The  speaker  knew  of  tlieir 
connection  with  the  case  from  something 
which  they  had  done  or  said  in  the  assembly, 
which  Luke  has  not  related.  —  The  law  is 
open — lit.  court-days  are  kept,  observed. 
The  days  are  so  called  because  the  courts  were 
held  in  the  forum.  (Comp.  16  :  19;  17  :  5.)  It 
is  contended  by  some  that  this  adjective  (ayopaioi) 
should  be  marked  as  proparoxytone  in  this 
sense,  but  as  circumflex  when  used  as  in  17  : 
5.  (See  W.  ?  6.  2.)  The  distinction  is  a  doubt- 
ful one. — And  there  are  deputies — i.e.  pro- 
consuls. The  plural  is  generic  (comp.  Matt. 
2  :  20),  as  but  one  such  officer  presided  over  a 
province.  The  coins  of  Ephesus  show  that  the 
proconsular  authority  was  fully  established 
there  in  the  reign  of  Nero.  Akerman  gives 
the  engraving  of  one  which  has  the  head  of 
that  emperor  on  the  obverse,  and  on  the  re- 
verse a  representation  of  the  temple  of  Diana, 
with  the  words:  [Money]  of  the  Ephc.tinn.i,  Nco- 
cori,  uT^chmodes  Aviola,  Proconsul. — Let  them 
implead  each  other  is  a  technical  phrase. 
39.  They  were  a  mob,  ami  could  transact  no 
public  business. —  Inquire,  etc.  But  if  ye 
make  any  demand  (stronger  than  the  siiii]ile 
verb)  concerning  other  things  than  tlioso 
of  a  private  nature. — In  the  [not  a]  lawful 
assembly,  which  this  is  not.  "  Legitimus 
ccetus  est  qui  a  magistratu  civitatis  convocatur 
ct  regitur"!  (Grot.).  [Canon  Lightfoot  says 
that  "  by  a  '  lawful  assembly  '  he  means  one  of 
those  which  were  held  on  stated  days  already 
predetermined  by  the  law,  as  opposed  to 
those  which  were  called  together  on  special 
emergencies  out  of  the  ordinary  course,  though, 
in  another  sense,  these  latter  might  be  equally 
'  lawful.'  An  inscription  found  in  this  very 
theatre  in  which  the  words  were  uttered  illus- 
trates this  technical  sense  of  '  lawful.'  It  pro- 
vides that  a  certain  silver  image  of  Athene  shall 
be  brought  and  'set  at  everv  lawful  (regular) 
assembly  above  tlie  bench  where  the  bovs  sit.'  " 
Occasional  assemblies  might  be  lawful,  if  prop- 


1  "A  legitimate  assembly  is  one  which  is  convoked  by  the  magistrate  of  the  city,  and  over  which  he  presides." 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


229 


40  For  we  are  in  danger  to  be  called  in  quest'on  for 
this  day's  uproar,  there  b-  ing  no  cause  whereby  we 
may  give  an  account  of  this  concourse. 

41  And  when  he  had  thus  spolieu,  he  dismissed  the 
assembly. 


40  settled  in  the  regular  assembly.  Tor  indeed  we  are 
in  danger  to  be  'accused  concerning  this  day's  riot, 
there  being  no  cause /u/'  d :  and  as  touching  it  we 
shall  not  be  able  to  give  account  of  this  concourse. 

41  And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  he  dismissed  the 
assembly. 


CHAPTER    XX. 


AND  after  the  uproar  was  ceased,  Paul  railed  unto  him 
the  disciples,  and  embraced  l/itm,  and  "departed  for 
to  go  iuto  >ia«edouia. 


1     And  after  the  uproar  was  ceased,  Paul  having  sent 
for  the  disciples  and  exhorted  ihem,  took  leave  o-f 


I  1  Cor.  16:5;  1  Tim.  1  :  3. 1  Or,  accused  of  ru>t  concerning  thU  day 


eriy  conducted,  without  undertaking  to  do  what 
belonged  to  those  appointed  beforeliand. — A.  H.] 
40.  For  justifies  the  intimation  in  lawful 
as  to  the  character  of  the  present  concourse. 
— We  are  in  danger.  Tiiey  were  in  danger 
of  being  called  to  account  by  the  proconsul. 
The  Roman  Gt)vernment  watched  every  ap- 
pearance of  insubordination  or  sedition  in  the 
provinces  with  a  jealous  eye.  Tliousands  were 
often  put  to  death  in  the  attempt  to  suppress 
such  movements.  It  was  a  capital  offence  to 
tiike  any  part  in  a  riotous  proceeding.  The 
speiiker's  hint,  therefore,  was  a  significant  one. 
— Uproar  depends  on  concerning:,  not  on  the 
verb.  (The  accent  on  jrepi  is  not  drawn  back, 
though  its  noun  precedes  (B.  ^  117.  3),  because 
an  adjective  phra.se  follows.) — There  being  no 
cause  explains,  ncjt  why  tliey  were  liable  to  be 
arraigned,  but  how  seriously  it  would  terminate 
if  the  affair  should  take  that  direction. — 
Whereby,  or  in  virtue  of  which. — This  speech 
is  the  model  of  a  pojmlar  harangue.  Such 
excitement  on  the  part  of  the  Ephesians  was 
undignified,  as  thej'^  stood  above  all  suspicion 
in  religious  matters  (w.  3.5, 36) ;  it  was  unjustifi- 
able, as  they  could  establish  nothing  against 
the  men  (v.  37);  it  wa.s  unnecessary,  as  other 
me;tns  of  redress  were  open  to  them  (w.  38, 3»); 
and  finally,  if  neither  pride  nor  justice  availed 
anything,  fear  of  the  Roman  power  should  re- 
strain them  (v.  <o).  [The  publication  in  1877  of 
Discooeries  at  Epliesiis,  including  the  Site  and  Re- 
mains of  the  Great  Temple  of  Diana,  by  J.  T. 
Wood,  F.  A.  S.,  has  confirmed  almost  every 
important  comment  of  Dr.  Hackett  on  this 
narrative,  a.s  well  as  the  remarkable  agreement 
of  the  narrative  itself  with  the  religious,  civil, 
and  architectural  condition  of  Ephesus  at  that 
time.  After  calling  attention  to  the  discoveries 
of  Mr.  Wood,  and  especially  to  several  very  in- 
structive inscriptions.  Canon  Lightfoot — a  most 
comjietent  authority  —  remarks:  "With  these 
facts  in  view,  we  are  justified  in  saying  that  an- 
cient literature  has  preserved  no  picture  of  the 
Ephesus  of  imperial  times  .  .  .  comparable  for 
its  lifelike  truthfulness  to  the  narrative  of  St. 


Paul's  sojourn  there  in  the  Acts"  {Cont.  Rev.^ 
1878.  p.  288,  etc.).  The  in.scrii)tions  published 
by  Mr.  Wood  confirm  the  representation  that 
Ephesus  was  called  "  the  temple-warder  of 
Artemis"  and  "the  nurse  of  its  own  Epliesian 
goddess;"  that  Artemis  was  called  "the  great 
goddess,"  and  even  "  the  greatest  goddess ;"  that 
the  making  of  gold  and  silver  shrines  of  the  god- 
dess was  a  flourishing  business  iu  the  city  ;  that 
regular  and  occasional  assemblies  were  held  in 
the  theatre;  and  that  "the  proconsul,"  "the 
recorder,"  and  "  the  Asiarchs  "  were  well-known 
officials,  the  duties  of  the  recorder  being  very 
important  and  often  mentioned.— A.  H.J 


1-6.  PAUL  PROCEEDS  A  SECOND  TIME 
TO  GREECE,  AND  RETURNS  FROM  THERE 
TO  TROAS. 

1.  And  after  the  uproar  =  i\«w  after  the 
tiunult  had  ceased.  This  clause  shows  that  Paul 
left  Ei)hesus  soon  after  the  disturbance,  but 
furnishes  no  evidence,  says  Neander,  that  his 
departure  was  luxstened  by  it.  We  may  con- 
clude that  Paul  "tarried  at  Ephesus  until 
Pentecost,"  pursuant  to  his  intention  expressed 
in  1  Cor.  16  :  8,  and,  consequently,  that  he  left 
that  city  in  the  spring  or  summer  of  A.  D.  57  or 
58.  (Comp.  note  on  IS  :  23  with  that  on  19  : 
10.) — Before  taking  leave  of  Ephesus  we  must 
notice  another  event  which  Luke  has  not  to 
corded,  but  which  belong's  to  this  part  of  the 
history.  In  2  Cor.  12  :  14  (written  on  the  way 
to  Greece)  the  apostle  says :  Behold,  this  third 
time  I  am  ready  to  come  unto  you.  The  connec- 
tion decides  that  third  time  belongs  to  come.  It 
cannot  refer  to  a  third  intention  merely  to  visit 
the  Corinthians ;  for  he  is  saying  that,  as  he 
had  "notljeen  burdensome  to  them  "  hitherto 
when  he  was  among  them,  so  in  his  i)resent 
visit  he  would  adhere  to  the  same  jiolicy. 
Again,  in  2  Cor.  13  :  1,  he  says,  This  third  time 
I  am  coming.  Here  it  is  expressly  said  that  the 
apostle  was  now  on  the  point  of  making  bis 
third  journey  to  Corinth.     The  correct  inter- 


230 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


2  And  when  he  had  gone  over  those  parts,  and  had 
given  them  much  exhortation,  he  came  into  Greece, 


2  them,  and  departed  for  to  go  into  Macedonia.  And 
when  he  had  gone  through  those  pans,  and  had 
given  theiu  much  exhortation,  he  came  into  Greece. 


pretation  of  2  Cor.  1 :  15,  16  presents  no  obstacle 
to  this  construction  of  the  passages  here  re- 
ferred to.  Tlie  sixteenth  of  these  verses  ex- 
plains the  fifteenth.  The  apostle  has  reference 
hi  V.  16  to  a  journey  to  Corinth  which  he  had 
proposed,  but  had  failed  to  execute  —  viz.  a 
journey  into  Macedonia  by  the  way  of  Corinth, 
and  then  a  return  to  Corinth  front  Macedonia; 
and  in  v.  15  he  says  that  this  plan  would  have 
secured  to  the  Corinthians  "  a  second  benefit " 
(SevTfpav  x'ip"')  in  Connection  with  the  tour  pro- 
posed-r-i.  e.  the  benefit  of  his  presence,  not  once 
merely,  but  a  second  time.  There  is  every  rea- 
son to  suppose,  therefore,  that  Paul  had  been  at 
Corinth  twice  when  he  wrote  his  Second  Epistle 
to  the  church  in  that  city.  So  conclude,  among 
others,  Michaelis,  Schrader,Bleek,  Liicke,  Schott, 
Anger,  Riickert,  Credner,  Neander,  Olshausen, 
Meyer,  Wieseler,  Osiander,  Coity.  and  Hws.  But 
where  in  Luke's  narrative  are  we  to  insert  this 
second  journey  to  Corinth?  Of  the  different 
answers  given  to  this  question,  I  regard  that  as 
the  most  satisfactory  which  places  the  journey 
within  the  period  of  Paul's  residence  of  three 
years  at  Ephesits.  It  would  have  been  easy  for 
him  to  have  crossed  over  from  the  one  city  to  the 
other  at  any  time ;  and,  considering  the  urgent 
reasons  for  such  a  visit  furnished  by  the  con- 
dition of  the  Corinthian  church,  one  would 
think  tliat  he  could  hardly  have  refrained  from 
availing  himself  of  the  opportunity.  As  his 
stay  there  was  probably  very  brief  and  unat- 
tended by  any  important  event,  Luke  has  made 
no  mention  of  it.  Schrader,  Kiickert,  Olshausen, 
Meyer,  Wieseler,  Conybeare  and  Howson,  and 
others  intercalate  the  journey  at  this  point. 
Neander  suggests  that  Paul,  at  the  commence- 
ment of  this  missionary-tour,  may  have  ex- 
tended his  travels  before  his  arrival  at  Ephe- 
sus  so  far  as  to  have  included  Greece.  Anger, 
Schott,  and  some  others  think  that  Paul's 
second  visit  to  Corintlt  may  have  been  a  re- 
turn to  that  city  from  some  excursion  which 
he  made  into  the  neigliboring  regions  during 
the  year  and  a  half  of  his  first  sojourn  at  Cor- 
inth (i8:i,  «j.).- — Embraced,  havbtg  embraced, 
them.  How  many  tears  of  affection  must  have 
been  shed !  How  many  prayers  must  have  been 
offered  for  each  other  and  for  the  catise  of 
Christ !  From  such  hints  as  those  in  vv.  37, 
38  and  in  21  :  5,  6,  we  can  call  up  to  ourselves 
an  image  of  the  scene.  They  must  liave  parted 
with  a  presentiment,  at  least,  that  the  apostle 
was  now  taking  his  final  leave  of  Ephesus. 


(See  vv.  25,  38.) — Departed — lit.  went  forth 
to  go  into  Macedonia.  The  direction  which 
the  apostle  took  we  learn  from  2  Cor.  2  :  12,  13. 
He  proceedf^a  to  Troas,  where  he  had  expected 
to  meet  Titus,  whom  he  had  sent  to  Corinth,  in 
order  to  ascertain  the  eli'ect  of  liis  First  Epistle 
to  the  church  in  tliat  city.  It  was  his  mtention, 
apparently,  to  remain  and  labor  for  a  time  at 
Troas,  in  case  the  infonnation  for  which  he 
was  looking  should  be  favorable.  But  not 
finding  Titus  there,  and  being  unable  to  eu- 
dtire  a  longer  suspense,  he  embarked  at  once 
for  Macedonia.  On  his  arrival  there  lie  met 
with  Titus,  and  was  relieved  of  his  anxiety. 
(See  2  Cor.  7:6.) 

2.  Those  parts — i.  e.  the  region  of  Macedo- 
nia.— And  had  given  them,  etc. — lit.  having 
exhorted  them;  viz.  the  believers  [unth  much  dis- 
course]. (See  on  16  :40.)  The  expression  shows 
that  he  now  revisited  the  places  where  he  had 
preached  on  his  first  visit  here — viz.  Philippi, 
Thessalonica,  Berea.  It  was  here  and  now 
that  Paul  wrote  his  Second  Epistle  to  the  Co- 
rinthians. That  he  wrote  the  letter  in  Mace- 
donia is  evident  from  2  Cor.  i) :  2-4.  He  speaks 
there  of  his  boasting  to  the  churches  of  Mace- 
donia of  the  liberality  of  the  Corinthians,  and 
of  the  possibility  that  some  of  the  Macedonians 
would  accompany  him  to  Corinth.  (See,  also, 
2  Cor.  7  :  5.)  The  apostle  now,  as  far  as  we 
know,  was  in  that  country  only  three  times. 
When  he  was  there  first,  he  had  not  yet  been 
at  Corinth  at  all  (i6 :  u) ;  and  when  he  passed 
through  that  province  on  his  last  return  to 
Jerusalem  (v.  s),  he  was  going  in  the  ojjposite 
direction,  and  not  advancing  to  Corinth,  as 
stated  in  the  Epistle.  He  wrote  the  Second 
Epistle  to  tlie  Corinthians,  therefore,  on  tliis 
second  journey  through  Macedonia,  in  the 
summer,  probably,  or  early  autumn,  of  a.  d.  58. 
(See  note  on  21  :  17.)— In  Horn.  15  :  19,  Paul 
speaks  of  liaving  published  the  gospel  as  far  as 
Ilhjrieum,  which  was  a  country  on  the  west  of 
Macedonia.  It  was  at  this  time,  probably,  tliat 
he  penetrated  so  far  in  that  direction.  It  ctnild 
not  have  been  on  liis  first  visit  to  Maecnlonia 
(i6:i2, ««.) ;  for  the  course  of  his  journey  at  that 
time  is  minutely  traced  in  the  Acts,  from  his 
landing  at  Philippi  to  his  leaving  Corinth.  He 
moved  along  the  eastern  side  of  the  peninsula, 
and  was  kept  at  a  distance  from  Illyricum. 
When  he  passed  througli  Macedonia  next  > -i), 
he  had  already  written  the  Epistle  to  tlie  Ro- 
mans.    Lardner  pronounces  this  geographicaJ 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


231 


3  And  there  abode  three  months.  And  "when  the 
Jews  laid  "ait  lor  him,  as  he  was  about  to  sail  into 
Syria,  lie  purposed  to  return  tlirough  iMacedonia. 

4  And  there  aceonipauied  him  into  Asia  Sopater  of 
Berea ;  and  of  the  Thessalonians,  'Aristarchus  and  !^e- 


3  And  when  he  had  spent  three  months  there,  and  a 
plot  was  laid  against  him  by  the  Jews,  as  he  was 
about  to  set  sail  for  Syria,  he  determined  to  return 

4  through  Macedonia.  And  there  accompanied  him 
'as  far  as  Asia  Sopater  of  Bercea,  llie  son  of  i'yrrhus ; 


a  ch.  9  :  23  ;  23  :  12  ;  25  :  3  ;  2  Oor.  H  :  26 b  ch.  19  :  29 ;  27  :  2  ;  Col.  4  :  10. 1  Many  aucient  authorities  omit  as  far 


coincidence  sufficiently  important  to  confirin 
the  entire  history  of  Paul's  travels.  —  Into 
Greece,  which  stands  here  for  Achaia  (is :  12; 
19  :  21),  as  oppo.sed  to  Macedonia.  Wetstein  has 
shown  that  Luke  was  justified  in  that  use  of 
the  term.  Paul  was  proceeding  to  Corinth,  the 
capital  of  the  province.     (Ct)iap.  Rom.  16  :  1.) 

3.  The  three  months  spent  here  preceded 
the  sumiuer  of  this  year.  (See  v.  G.)  The  stay 
was  thus  brief  because  the  apostle  was  anxious 
to  return  to  Jerusalem  (v.  le).  The  Jewish  plot 
was  contemporaneous  with  his  leaving,  but  did 
not  occa.sion  it. — (n-onjo-a?  is  anacoluthic  for  n-ot^- 
crarrt.  See  19  :  24.) — It  was  just  before  his  de- 
parture from  Corinth  that  Paul  wrote  the 
Epistle  to  the  Romans.  That  it  was  written  at 
Corinth  admits  of  being  proved  by  several  dis- 
tinct arguiuents.  One  is  that  Paul  was  the 
guest  of  Gains  at  the  time  ( Kom.  le  :  23) ;  and 
Gaius,  as  wc  learn  from  1  Cor.  1  :  14,  was  one 
of  the  converts  at  Corinth  whom  Paul  baptized. 
Again,  lie  commends  to  tiie  Roman  Christians 
Phffibe,  a  deaconess  of  the  church  at  Cenchrea^ 
(see  on  18  :  18),  who  was  on  the  point  of  pro- 
ceeding to  Rome  (Rom.  i6;i),  ainl  was  probably 
the  bearer  of  the  letter.  Further,  the  apostle's 
situation,  as  disclosed  in  the  Epistle,  agrees 
with  that  in  the  Acts  at  this  time.  Thus  he 
was  on  the  eve  of  departing  to  Jerusalem  (Rom. 
15:25),  was  going  thither  with  contributions  for 
the  Jewish  believers  (Rom.  15  :  25,  26),  and  after 
that  was  meditating  a  journey  to  Rome.  The 
date  of  the  Epistle,  tliercforc,  was  the  spring  of 
A.  D.  58  or  59. — As  he  was,  etc. — lit.  as  he  is 
about  to  embark  for  Syriii,  with  the  intention  of 
going  directly  to  Jerusalem.  (See,  also,  19  :  21.) 
The  effect  of  the  conspiracy  was  to  change  his 
route,  but  not  to  catise  him  to  depart  prema- 
turely. He  came  with  the  design  of  pa.ssing 
only  the  winter  there.  (See  1  Cor.  IG  :  G.) — 
He  purposed,  //  was  thought  best  that  he  should 
return  through  Macedonia.  The  infinitive  de- 
pends on  purpose  {yvMiJ.y{)  as  a  sort  of  apposi- 
tional  genitive.  The  exiiression  indicates  that 
he  took  this  course  as  tlie  result  of  advice  or 
consultation.  [In  his  explanation  of  this  clause 
Dr.  Hackett  follows  tlie  textus  recejdus,  in  which 
judgment,  or  purpose  {yvu>iJiri).  is  the  subject  of 
became  {iyiveTo) — lit.  a  judgment,  or  purpose,  was 
formed  of  his  returning — i.  e.  that  he  should  return 
— through  Macedonia.    And  with  this  text  there 


appears  to  be  an  implication  that  the  judgment 
in  question  was  a  "  result  of  advice  or  consul- 
tation." But  no  such  implication  is  contained 
in  the  best-supported  text  (reading  yi'(0(xi)s  in- 
stead of  yvuifiri),  which  may  be  literally  trans- 
lated he  became  of  (or  came  to  have)  a  judgment 
(or  purpose)  to  return  through  Macedonia.  This 
reading  is  adopted  by  the  recent  editors  and  re- 
quired by  KAB*E.  It  will  be  noticed  that 
the  Revised  Version  does  not  differ  in  sense 
from  the  Common  Version,  and  that  they  re- 
produce the  meaning  of  the  best  Greek  text. 
Whether,  then,  the  apostle's  purpose  wa.s  formed 
with  or  without  consultation  is  wholly  uncer- 
tain.— A.  H.]  How  his  journeying  by  land 
rather  than  by  sea  would  enable  him  to  escape 
the  machinations  of  the  Jews  is  not  perfectly 
clear.  The  opinion  that  he  was  waiting  to 
have  the  navigation  of  the  season  reopen,  but 
was  compelled  to  hasten  his  departure  before 
that  time,  is  certainly  incorrect ;  for  it  is  said 
he  was  on  the  point  of  embarking  when  the 
conspiracy  of  the  Jews  was  formed  or  came  to 
be  known.  It  is  possible  that  the  Jews  intend- 
ed to  a.ssault  him  on  his  way  to  the  ship,  or  else 
to  follow  and  capture  him  after  having  put  to 
sea.  Hemsen's  conjecture  {Der  Apostel  Puulus, 
u.  s.  w.,  p.  4G7)  is  that  he  had  not  yet  fotind  a 
vessel  proceeding  to  Syria,  and  that  his  ex- 
posure at  Corinth  rendered  it  unsafe  for  him 
to  remain,  even  a  few  days  longer,  until  the 
arrival  of  such  an  opportunity. 

4.  Accompanied,  or  followed,  him, 
formed  his  party.  This  could  be  said,  though 
they  did  not  travel  in  company  all  the  time. 
The  verb  belongs  to  all  the  names  which  fol- 
low, but  agrees  with  the  nearest. — The  best 
manascripts  read  Pyrrhus  after  Sopater, 
genitive  of  kindredship  (see  on  1  :  13),  Sopatir 
son  of  Pi/rrhus.  This  addition  distinguishes 
Sopater,  perhaps,  from  Sosipnter,  in  Rom.  IG  : 
21,  since  they  are  but  different  forms  of  the 
i  same  name  (Win.). — Of  the  Thessalonians 
is  a  partitive  genitive. — Aristarchus  was  men- 
tioned in  19  :  29.  Tlie  Gaius  in  that  pa.ssage 
must  be  a  different  person  from  the  one  here, 
since  they  belonged  to  different  countries. 
This  Gaius  is  probably  the  individual  of  this 
name  to  whom  the  apostle  John  wrote  liis 
Third  Epistle.  Some  critics  (Kuin.,  Olsli., 
Neand.)  would  point  the  text  so  as  to  make 


232 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


cundus ;  and  "Gaius  of  Derbe,  and  'Timotheus ;  and  of 
Asia,  'Tychicus  and  "^Trophimus. 

5  These  going  before  tarried  for  us  at  Troas. 

6  And  we  sailed  away  from  Philippi  after  'the  days 
of  uuleavened  bread,  and  came  unto  them /to  Troas  in 
five  days ;  where  we  abode  seven  days. 

7  And  upon  "the  first  day  of  the  week,  when  the  dis- 


and  of  the  Thessalonians,  Aristarchus  and  Secun- 
dus;   and  Ciaius   of  Derbe,  and   Timothy;   and  of 

5  Asia,  Tychicus  and  Trophiiuus.  But  these  'had 
gone    before,   and    were   waiting    for    us   at   Troas. 

6  And  we  sailed  away  fri  m  Philippi  after  the  days 
of  unleavened  bread,  and  came  unto  them  to  Troas 
in  five  days ;  where  we  tarried  seven  days. 

7  And  upon  the  first  day  of  the  week,  when  we  were 


och.  19  :  29 6  ch.  16  :  1 c  Eph.  6  :  21  ;  Col.  4  :  7  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  12  ;  Tit.  3  :  12....dch.  21  :  29 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  20 e  Ex.  12  :  14,  13;  23  :  15 

/  cb.  16  :  8 ;   2  Cor.  2:12;   2  Tim.  i:l'6....g  1  Cor.  16  :  2 ;   Kev.  1 :  10. 1  Idauy  aacieat  autboritieH  read  came,  and  were 

waiting. 


Gaius  one  of  the  Thessalonians,  and  join  of 
Derbe  with  Timothy*  Bitt  that  division  not 
only  puts  and  out  of  its  natural  place,  but 
disagrees  with  16  :  1,  where  Timothy  appears 
as  a  native  of  Lystra. — Secundus  is  otherwise 
unknown. — Luke  supposes  Timothy's  origin 
to  be  familiar  to  the  reader,  and  so  passes  it 
over  (De  Wet.,  Mey.). — Tychicus  is  named 
in  Eph.  6  :  21 ;  Col.  4:7;  Tit.  3  :  12 ;  and  2 
Tim.  4  :  12.  He  was  one  of  the  niost  trusted 
of  Paul's  associates. — Trophimus,  who  was 
an  Ephesian,  appears  again  in  21 :  29  and  2  Tim. 
4  :  20.  He,  and  probably  Aristarchus  (27 : 2), 
went  with  the  apostle  to  Jerusalem.  The  others 
may  have  stopped  at  Miletus,  since  the  language 
in  V.  13  intimates  that  the  party  kejit  togetlier 
after  leaving  Troas.  Consequently,  into  Asia 
would  state  the  destination  of  the  majority  of 
the  travellers  and  would  be  consistent  with  the 
fact  that  two  of  them  went  farther.  [Many 
ancient  authorities  omit  "as  far  as  Asia"  {Re- 
vised Version). — A.  H.]. 

5.  These — viz.  the  seven  mentioned  in  v.  4, 
not  the  two  named  last.  It  is  entirely  arbitrary 
to  limit  the  reference  of  the  pronoun. — Going 
before,  or  having  gone  forward,  from  Corinth 
in  advance  of  Paul  and  Luke.  It  is  barely 
possible  that  they  shipped  at  once  for  Troas, 
but  it  is  more  jirobable  that  they  journeyed 
through  Macedonia,  both  because  followed 
(v.  4)  suggests  a  common  route  of  the  parties, 
and  because  Sopater  and  the  others  may  have 
been  sent  thither  to  finish  the  alms-collection 
which  Paul  had  commenced. — Us.  Luke  re- 
sumes here  the  first  person  plural,  which  has 
not  occurred  since  16  :  17.  (See  the  remarks  on 
16  :  40.) 

6.  We  must  include  the  writer  of  the  narra- 
tive, Paul,  and  possibly  others,  in  distinction 
from  those  who  had  gone  forward  to  Troas. 
As  Timothy  was  one  of  those  who  preceded 
the  apostle,  it  is  evident  that  he  and  the  writer 
of  the  narrative  were  different  persons.  Tho- 
luck,  Lange,!  Ebrard,  and  others  pronounce 
this  passage  sufficient  of  itself  to  disprove  the 
hypothesis  that  Timothy,  not  Luke,  wrote  the 


portions  of  the  Acts  in  which  the  historian 
speaks  as  an  eye-witness. — We  sailed  forth 
from  Philippi — i.  e.  from  its  harbor  on  the 
coast.  (See  note  on  16  :  12.) — After  the  days 
of  unleavened  bread,  the  festival  of  the 
passover  (see  on  12  :  3),  which  no  doubt  they 
observed,  not  in  the  Jewish  spirit  any  longer, 
but  with  a  recognition  of  Christ  as  the  true 
Paschal  Lamb.  (See  Jt)hn  1  :  36  and  1  Cor.  5  : 
7.)  Some  think  that  they  remained  at  Philippi 
for  the  sake  of  the  celebration  (Mey.) ;  but  we 
must  view  that  as  an  inference  altogether,  since 
Luke  mentions  the  passover  only  in  its  chron- 
ological relation  to  the  voyage.  Calvin  sug- 
gests as  the  motive  for  remaining  that  Paixl 
would  find  the  Jews  more  accessible  to  the 
truth  during  the  season  of  such  a  solemnity. — 
In  five  days — lit.  unto  five  days,  as  the  limit 
reached ;  they  were  so  long  on  the  way.  The 
passage  on  the  apostle's  first  journey  to  Europe 
occupied  two  days  only.  (See  16: 11.)  Adverse 
winds  or  calms  would  be  liable,  at  any  season 
of  the  year,  to  occasion  this  variation. — Seven 
days  may  be  indefinite,  o.  iveeKs  time.  (Comp. 
21:4;  28:14.)  They  arranged  it  so  as  to 
bring  a  Sabbath  within  the  time  spent  there. 
If  the  number  be  exact,  then  they  arrived  just 
at  the  close  of  the  week,  since  they  left  the  day 
after  the  Sabbath  (v.  7). 

7-12.  PAUL  PREACHES  AT  TROAS,  AND 
ADMINISTERS  THE  SACRAMENT. 

7.  On  the  first  day  of  the  week,  not  on 
one  of  the  Sahhaths,  Jewish  festivals,  which 
overlooks  the  article,  and  not  on  the  one  of  them 
next  after  their  arrival,  since  that  would  imply 
that  they  passed  more  than  one  such  festival 
here,  contrary  to  Luke's  statement  that  they 
left  on  the  day  following.  In  the  New  Testa- 
ment one  («t?)  stands  generally  for  Jirst  (wpwrot) 
in  speaking  of  the  days  of  the  week.  (See 
Matt.  28  :  1 ;  Mark  16  :  2 ;  J6hn  20  :  19,  etc.  W. 
^  37.  1.)  It  is  an  imitation  of  the  ordinal  sense 
oi-uchadh.  (See  Gesen.,  Hcb.  Gr.,  ?  118.  4.)  The 
passages  just  cited,  and  also  Luke  24  :  1,  John 
20 : 1,  and  1  Cor.  16  :  2,  show  that  week  is  one  of 
the  senses  of  sabbata.     The  Jews  reckoned  the 


1  Das  Leben  Jesu  nach  den  Evangelien  dargeslelU,  Erstes  Buch,  p.  251. 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


233 


ciples  came  together  "to  break  bread,  Paul  preached 
unto  them,  ready  to  depart  on  the  morrow;  and  con- 
tinued his  speech  until  midnight. 

8  And  there  were  many  lights  ''in  the  upper  chamber, 
where  they  were  gathered  together. 

y  And  there  sat  in  a  window  a  certain  young  man 
named  Eutychus,  being  fallen  into  a  deep  sleep :  and 


gathered  together  to  break  bread,  Paul  discoursed 
with  them,  intending  to  depart  on  the  morrow ;  and 

8 prolonged  his  speech  until  midnight.  And  there 
were  many  lights  in  the  upper  chamber,  where  we 

9  were  gathered  together.  And  there  sat  in  the  win- 
dow a  certain  young  man  named  l^utychus,  borne 


ach.  2  :  42,  4C;  1  Cor.  10  :  16 ;  U  :  20,  eu:....6cb.  I  :  13. 


day  from   evening  to   morning,   and  on  that 
principle  the  evening  of  the  first  day  of  the  week 
would    be  our    Saturday   evening.      If   Ltike 
reckons  so  here,  as  many  cumnientators  sup- 
pose, tlie  apostle  then  waited  for  the  expiration 
of  the  Jewish  Sabbatli,  and  held  his  last  relig- 
ious service  with  the  brethren  at  Troas  at  the 
beginning  of  the  Christian   8abbath — ('.  e.  on 
Saturday  evening — and  conseqtiently  resumed 
his   journey  on    Sunday    morning.      But,   as 
Luke    had    mingled    so    much    with    foreign 
nations  and  was  writing  for  Gentile  readers, 
he  would  be  verj^  apt  to  designate  the  tiitie  in 
accordance  with   their   practice;    so  that    his 
evening  or  night  of  the  first  day  of  the  week 
wotild   be  the  end  of  the  Christian  Sabbath, 
and    the    morning  of  his  departure  that  of 
Monday.       Olshausen,     Neander,    De    Wette, 
Meyer,  and  most  other  critics  recognize  here 
a  distinct  trace  of  the  Christian  Sabbath  in  that 
early  age  of  the  church.     (See  also  1  Cor.  IG  : 
2  and  Rev.  1  :  10.)     It  is  entirely  immaterial, 
of  course,  to  the  objects  of  the  day  or  the  valid-  I 
ity  of  the  apostolic  example,  whether  the  first  i 
Christians  began  their  Sabbath  in  the  Jewish  i 
way,  on  Saturday  evening,  or  at  midnight,  a  [ 
few  Iwurs  later.  "  Since  the  sufferings  of  Christ,"  : 
says  Neander,  "appeared  as  the  central  point  of 
all  religious  experience  and  life;  since  his  res-  j 
urrection  was  considered  as  the  foundation  of  j 
all  Christian  joy  and  hope, — it  was  natural  that  , 
the  communion  of  the  church   should   have  i 
specially  distinguished  the  day  with  which  the  I 
memory  of  that  event  had  connected  itself."  { 
But  the  introduction  of  the  Saljbath  was  not  j 
only  in  harmony  with  Christian  feeling,  but, 
as  we  have  good  reason  to  believe,  was  sanc- 
tioned and  promoted  by  the  special  authority 
of  the  apostles.     "  It  is  in  the  highest  degree 
probable,"  says  Meyer,   "that  the  observance 
of  the  Sabbath  rests  upon  apostolic  institution. 
Since  the    gospel    was    extended    among    the 
heathen,  who  had  not  been  accustomed  to  the 
Jewish  Sabbath,  it  was  natural  and  neces.sarj^ 
that  the  apostles  should  instruct  them  in  re- 
gard to  such  a  day,  on  account  of  the  import- 
ance of  the  resurrection  of  Christ;    and  this 
supposition  is  an  indispensable  one,  in  order  to 
account  for  the  very  early  and  general  cele- 


bration of  the  Christian  Sabbath."  In  stipport 
of  the  last  remark,  this  author  refers  to  Justin 
Martyr,  who,  born  at  the  beginning  of  tiie 
second  century,  says  {ApoLl.)  that  the  Chris- 
tians of  his  time,  "  both  in  the  cities  and  the 
country,  were  acctist(jmed  to  assemble  for  wor- 
ship on  the  day  called  Sunday "  (t>/  toO  ^Ai'ou 
AeyoficVj}  »;ioi€po). — Whcii  the  disclples  came 
together,  rather  we  being  assembled,  not 
the  disciples,  the  received  reading,  which  our 
version  follows.  The  latter  term  may  have 
been  inserted  to  provide  an  antecedent  for 
them.  The  use  of  the  pronoun  is  like  that 
in  8  :  5. — For  to  break  bread,  see  on  2  :  42, 
46. 

8.  Many  lights,  better  now  there  were 
many  lamps;  and  hence  the  fall  of  the 
young  man  was  perceived  at  once.  So  Meyer 
explains  the  object  of  the  remark.  But  tliat 
relation  of  the  circumstance  to  the  rest  of 
the  narrative  is  not  clearly  indicated.  It  has 
much  more  the  appearance  of  having  jiroceeiled 
from  an  eye-witness,  who  mentions  the  inci- 
dent, not  for  the  purpose  of  obviating  a  diffi- 
culty which  might  occtir  to  the  reader,  but. 
because  the  entire  scene  to  which  he  refers 
stood  now  witli  such  minuteness  and  vividness 
before  his  mind.  The  moon  wa.s  full  at  the 
passover  (v.  6),  and  after  the  lapse  now  of  some- 
what less  than  three  weeks  only  ajipeared  as  a 
faint  crescent  in  the  early  part  of  the  night 
(Conybeare  and  Howson).  —  In  the  upper 
room,  which,  as  appears  from  the  next  vci-se, 
was  on  the  third  story.  (See  note  on  1  :  13.) — 
Not  where  they  were,  but  where  we 
were,  assembled.  In  the  received  text  the 
verb  is  they  were  (^o-ok).  which  accords  with 
the  variations  in  the  last  verse. 

9.  In  a  window— lit.  upon  the  window, 
the  seat  of  it.  "  It  will  be  recollected  that  there 
were  no  windows  of  glass ;  and  the  window 
here  mentioned  was  a  lattice  of  joinery  or  a 
door,  which  on  this  occasion  was  set  ojien  on 
account  of  tlie  heat  from  the  many  lights  and 
the  number  of  persons  in  the  room.  It  should 
be  observed  that  the  windows  of  such  jilaces  in 
general  reached  nearly  to  the  floor;  they  would 
correspond  well  to  what  our  word  '  window ' 
signified  originally — viz.  windore,  wind-door ;  i.  e., 


234 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


as  Paul  was  long  preaching,  he  sunk  down  with  sleep, 
and  t'M  down  from  the  third  loft,  and  was  taken  up 
dead. 

lU  And  Paul  went  down,  and  "fell  on  him,  and  em- 
bracing /lint  said,  ''Trouble  not  yourselves;  for  his  life 
is  in  him. 

11  When  he  therefore  was  come  up  again,  and  had 
broken  bread,  and  eaten,  and  talked  a  long  while,  even 
till  break  of  day,  .so  he  departed. 

12  And  they  brought  the  young  man  alive,  and  were 
not  a  little  comforted. 

Vi  *l\  And  we  went  before  to  ship,  and  sailed  unto 
Assos,  there  intending  to  take  in  Paul:  for  so  had  he 
appoiiited,  minding  himself  to  go  afoot. 


down  with  deep  sleep;  and  as  Paul  discoursed  yet 
longer,  being  borne  down  by  his  sleep  he  lell  down 

10  from  the  third  story,  and  was  taken  up  dead.  And 
Paul  went  down,  and  fell  on  him.  ai.d  embracing 
him  said,  Make  ye  no  ado;  for  his  life  is  in  him. 

11  And  vvhen  he  was  gnne  up,  and  had  broken  the 
bread,  and  eaten,  and  had  talked  with  them  a  long 

12  while,  even  till  break  of  day,  so  he  departed.  And 
they  brought  the  lad  alive,  and  were  not  a  little 
comforted. 

13  But  we,  going  before  to  the  ship,  set  sail  for  Assos, 
there  intending  to  take  in  Paul :  for  so  had  he  ap- 


o  1  Kings  17  :  21 ;  2  Kings  4  :  34. ...  6  Matt,  9  :  24. 


a  floor  for  the  admission  of  wind  or  air."^ — 
Being  fallen  into,  or  being  overcome 
with,  deep  sleep. — Sunk  down — lit.  hav- 
ing been  borne  down  from  (the  effect  of ) 
the  sleep  into  which  he  had  sunk.  This  sec- 
ond participial  clause  states  a  result  of  the  con- 
dition described  by  the  first.  — Fell  down. 
The  window  projected  (according  to  the  side 
of  the  room  wiiere  it  was  situated)  either  over 
the  street  or  over  the  interior  court ;  so  that,  in 
either  case,  he  fell  from  the  third  story  upon 
the  hard  earth  or  pavement  below. — Was 
taken  up  dead,  which  it  is  entirely  foreign  to 
any  intimation  of  the  context  to  qualify  by 
adding  "in  appearance"  or  "as  they  supposed." 

10.  Fell  upon  him,  and  having  em- 
braced him,  after  the  fashion  of  Elisha  in 
2  Kings  4  :  34.  As  in  that  in.stance,  so  in  this, 
the  act  appears  to  have  been  the  sign  of  a  mir- 
acle.— Trouble  not  yourselves,  or  Do  not 
lament,  which,  according  to  the  Oriental 
habit  and  the  import  of  the  word,  they  were 
doing  with  loud  and  passionate  outcry.  (Comp. 
Matt.  9  :  23;  Mark  5  :  39.  See  on  10  :  15.)— 
For  his  life  is  in  him,  which  he  could  say, 
whether  he  perceived  tliat  it  was  not  extinct  or 
had  been  restored. 

11.  Broken  bread,  the  bread  already  spo- 
ken of  in  v.  7.  The  article,  which  the  T.  R. 
omits,  belongs  here  (Tsch.,  Lchm.,  Mey.).  The 
fall  of  Eutychus  had  delayed  the  Lord's  Sup- 
per, which  Paul  now  proceeds  to  administer. — 
And  eaten,  or  having  eaten,  because,  prob- 
ably, they  connected  a  repast  with  the  sacra- 
ment. (See  on  2  :  42.)— A  long  while  may 
refer  to  the  time  occui)ied  in  the  entire  service, 
or,  more  naturally  in  this  connection,  to  the  re- 
mainder of  the  night  after  the  preceding  inter- 
ruption.—Even  till,  or  until,  daybreak, 
about  five  o'clock  a.  m.  at  that  season  (Alf.). — 
So,  or  thus,  after  these  events.  (Comp.  17  : 
33;  28  :  14.) — Departed,  went  forth — i.  e.  on 
his  journey.  Yet  the  term  may  not  exclude  a 
brief  interval  between  the  religious  services  and 


liis  departure,  and  during  that  time  the  vessel 
could  weigh  anchor  and  start  for  Assos.  (See 
on  V.  13.) 

12.  Brought  the  young  man  into  the  as- 
sembly (Hems.,  Mey.),  not  to  his  home.  The 
subject  of  the  verb  is  indefinite.  This  circum- 
stance is  supplementary  to  what  is  stated  in 
V.  11,  not  subsequent  to  it  in  point  of  time. 
— Alive,  or  living,  which  suggests  as  its  an- 
tithesis that  he  had  been  dead,  or,  at  least, 
that  such  was  their  belief. — Were  comforted, 
or  consoled — viz.  by  his  restoration  to  them. 
Some  understand  it  of  the  effect  of  Paul's  dis- 
course, which  is  incorrect,  as  that  is  not  here 
the  subject  of  remark. — Not  a  little,  very 
much.     Observe  the  litotes. 

13-16.  THEY  PROSECUTE  THE  JOUR- 
NEY TO  MILETUS. 

13.  We — viz.  the  writer  and  the  other  com- 
panions of  the  apostle.  —  Went  before — lit. 
having  gone  forward,  though,  from  the 
circumstances  of  the  case,  it  could  not  have 
been  long  first.  They  may  have  left  as  soon 
as  the  assembly  broke  up,  while  Paul  still  re- 
mained a  short  time  (see  on  v.  11),  or,  in  order 
to  reach  Assos  in  good  season,  may  have  left 
even  before  the  C(jnclusion  of  the  service. 
They  spent  the  entire  week  at  Troas,  as  well 
as  Paul  (see  v.  6),  and  hence  could  not  have 
preceded  liim  before  the  end  of  that  time. — 
Unto  Assos,  which  was  a  coast-town  in  Mys-ia, 
south  of  Troas.— There— lit.  from  there,  be- 
cause the  writer  has  his  mind,  not  on  their  ar- 
rival, but  the  subsequent  dei^arture  or  j^rogress. 
— For  so  (that  they  should  ttike  him  at  that 
place)  he  had  arranged  for  himself,  the 
passive  in  the  sense  of  the  middle.  (W.  ^  39.  3.) 
— Minding  {niWujv)  refers  to  his  intention. — To 
go  afoot.  This  foot-journey,  according  to  the 
best  evidence,  was  about  twenty  miles.  A  paved 
road  extended  from  Troas  to  Assos ;  so  tliat, 
starting  even  as  late  as  seven  or  eight  o'clock  a.m., 
Paul  could  have  reached  Assos  in  the  afternoon. 
A  friend  of  the  writer,  a  native  of  Greece,  stated 


1  Illustrated  Commeittari/,  vol.  v.  p.  206. 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


235 


14  And  when  he  met  with  us  at  Assos,  we  took  him 
in,  and  came  to  Mitylene. 

15  And  we  sailed  thence,  and  came  the  next(/av  over 
against  Ihios;  and  tlie  next  d'ly  we  arrived  at  !?amos, 
and  tarried  at  Trogy Ilium;  and  the  next  day  we  came 
to  Miletus. 


14  pointed,  intending  himself  to  go  'by  land.  And 
when  he  met  us  at  Assos,  we  tooJc  him  in,  and  came 

15  to  Mitylene.  And  sailing  Irom  thence,  we  came  the 
following  day  over  agai..st  thios ;  and  the  next  day 
we  touched  at  Samos;  and  -the  day  after  we  came 


1  Or,  an  foot. . .  .2  .Many  ancient  Hiithorilies  insert  having  tarried  at  Troyyllium. 


that  he  him.self  had  travelled  on  foot  between  |  day,  the  second  from  Troas.— Over  against 
the  two  places  in  five  hours.  The  distance  by  j  — i.  e.  opposite  to— Chios,  the  uiudeni  bcio, 
sea  is  about  forty  miles.  His  object,  it  is  con-  south  of  Lesbos.  The  language  intimates  that, 
jectured,  mav  have  been  to  visit  friends  on  the  |  instead  of  putting  into  the  harbor,  they  lay  off 


ASSUS,    FROM    THE   SE.^. 


way,  or  to  have  the  company  of  brethren  from 
Troas  whom  the  vessel  was  not  large  enough 
to  accrimmodate. 

14.  And  when,  or  as,  he  met  with  us  seems 
to  imply  that  he  found  them  already  there. — ■ 
At  Assos— lit.  unto,  because  the  preceding 
verb  implies  the  idea  of  the  journey  thither 
on  the  part  of  Paul.  Mitylene,  where  they 
appear  to  have  stopped  over-night,  was  on  the 
east  side  of  Lesbos,  the  capital  of  that  island. 
The  distance  from  Assos  by  sea  was  thirty 
miles ;  so  that  the  voyage  hither  from  Troas 
was  an  easy  one  for  a  day.  Castro,  the  present 
capital,  stands  on  the  site  of  the  ancient  city. 
The  name  of  the  island  is  now  Metilino  or 
Metelin,  a  corruption  of  Mitylene. 

15.  The  next  day,  or  on  the  following 


tlie  coast  during  the  night.— And  upon  the 
next  day  (the  third  from  Troas)  we  put  along 
unto  Samos.  This  island  is  still  farther  down 
the  ^Egean.  At  one  point  it  approaches  within 
six  miles  of  the  mainland.  It  retains  still  the 
ancient  name.  They  may  have  touched  here, 
but,  as  appears  fmrn  the  next  clause,  did  not 
.stop  long. — .4nd  tarried — lit.  and  having  re- 
mained at  Trogyllium.  wliicli  was  tlieir  next 
night-station,  since  on  the  following  day, 
being  the  fourth,  they  arrived  at  Miletus.  Tro- 
gyllium most  commentators  suppose  to  be  the 
promontory  and  tlie  town  of  that  name  in  South- 
ern Ionia,  opposite  Samos  wliere  it  is  nearest  to 
the  shore.  There  was  also  an  island  of  tlie  .same 
name  on  the  coast  of  tliis  promontory  (Strab., 
14.  636),  which,  says  Forbiger  (Handb.,  ii.  p. 


236 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


16  For  Paul  had  determined  to  sail  by  Ephesus,  be- 
cause he  would  not  spend  the  time  in  Asia :  lor  "he 
basted,  if  it  were  possible  for  him,  Ho  be  at  Jerusalem 
"the  day  of  Pentecost. 


13  to  Miletus.  For  Paul  had  determined  to  sail  past 
Kphesus,  that  he  might  not  have  to  spend  time  in 
Asia;  for  he  was  hastening,  if  it  were  possible  for 
him,  to  be  at  Jerusalem  the  day  of  I'entecost. 


ach.  18:  21  ;  19  :  21  ;  21  :  4,  12 b  ch.  24  :  17 c  ch.  2  :  1 ;  1  Cor.  IC  :  8. 


170),  was  unquestionably  the  Trogyllium  in- 
tended in  this  passage.  The  apostle  would 
have  been  nearer  to  Ephesus  at  Trogyllium  on 
the  mainland  than  he  was  at  Miletus,  but  a 
better  harbor  or  greater  facility  of  intercourse 
may  have  led  him  to  prefer  the  more  distant 
place  for  his  interview  with  the  elders.  [Tlie 
words  tarried  at  Troyyllium ;  and  are  omitted  by 
the  later  editors,  in  agreement  with  X  A  B  C  E 
and  other  documents. — A.  H.] — Miletus  was 


friends  had  evidently  some  control  of  the  ves- 
sel. The  number  being  so  great,  they  may 
have  chartered  the  craft  (as  is  very  common  in 
the  Levant  at  present) ;  at  all  events,  they  must 
liave  had  sufficient  influence  with  the  captain 
to  induce  liim  to  consult  their  wishes. — Be- 
cause he  would  not,  or,  that  it  might  not 
happen  to  him — /.  e.  that  he  might  avoid  in- 
ducements— to  spend  time  in  Asia.  He 
might    have  gone  to   Ephesus    and    returned 


VIEW   OF   MITYLENE. 


on  the  confines  of  Caria,  twenty-eight  miles 
south  of  Ephesus,  and  ju.st  below  the  moutli 
of  the  IMeander.  They  reached  here  on  the 
fourth  day  from  Troas,  hence  either  on  Wednes- 
day or  Thursday,  some  doubt  existing  (see  on  j 
V.  7)  as  to  the  day  of  the  week  when  they  [ 
sailed  from  Troas. 

IG.  The  external  testimony  requires  KeKpUtL 
instead  of  Upive  (Grsb.,  Lchm.,  Mey.) :  For  he 
had  determined  to  sail  past  Ephesus, 
which  explains  why  they  had  left  that  city  at 
the  north ;  they  were  opposite  to  it  when  at 
Sanios.  As  it  depended  on  his  decision  wheth- 
er they  stopped   or  proceeded,   Paul  and  his 


during  the  time  that  he  remained  at  Miletus ; 
but  he  feared  to  trust  himself  there,  lest  the 
importunity  of  friends  or  the  condition  of  the 
cliurch  might  detain  him  too  long,  or  even  lead 
liim  to  alter  his  purpose. — For  he  hasted,  or 
ivas  hastcninfi,  if  it  were  possible  for  him, 
etc.  More  than  three  of  the  seven  weelcs  be- 
tween the  passover  and  Pentecost  had  elapsed 
already.  One  had  expired  before  they  left  Phil- 
ippi ;  they  were  five  days  on  their  way  to  Troas, 
remained  there  seven  days,  and  were  four  days 
on  the  way  to  Miletus.  -  For  Pentecost,  see  on 
2  :  1. — To  be  {yev(<r&ai) — lit.  to  come  to  be— 
implies  motion,  and  takes  after  it  unto,  at  {tk% 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


237 


17  IT  And  from  Miletus  he  sent  to  Ephesus,  and  called 
the  elder-;  of  the  church. 

18  And  when  they  were  come  to  him,  he  said  unto 
them,  Ye  know,  "from  the  first  day  that  I  came  into 
Asia,  after  what  manner  I  have  been  with  you  at  all 
seasons, 

19  Serving  the  Lord  with  all  humility  of  mind,  and 


17  And  from  Miletus  he  sent  to  Ephesus,  and  called 

18  to  him  tlie  'elders  of  the  church      And  when  they 
were  come  to  liim,  he  said  unto  them, 

Ye  yourselves  know,  from  the  tir^t  day  that  I  set 
foot  in  Asia,  after  what  manner  1  was  with  you  all 

19  the   time,  serving   the   Lord  with  all  lowliness  of 


ach.  18  :  19;  19:  1,  10.- 


-1  Or,  preabytera 


17-35.  THE  ADDRESS  OF  PAUL  TO  THE 

EPHESIAN  ELDERS  AT  MILETUS. 

17.  His  subject  is  fidelity  in  tlie  ministerial 
office — first,  as  illustrated  in  liis  own  example  ; 
and  secondly,  as  required  of  those  whom  the 
Spirit  has  called  to  this  office.  In  vv.  18-21  he 
reminds  his  hearers  of  his  conduct  while  he 
lived  among  them;  in  vv.  19-25  he  informs 
them  that  he  is  about  to  be  separated  from 


ordinary  English  reader,  which  now  it  is  not." 
—Luke  speaks  only  of  the  Ephesian  elders  as 
summoned  to  meet  the  ajxistle  at  Miletus;  but, 
as  the  report  of  his  arrival  must  have  spread 
rapidly,  it  could  not  have  failed  to  draw  to- 
gether others  also,  not  only  from  Ephesus,  but 
from  the  neigliboring  towns  where  churches 
had  been  established.  (See  on  v.  25.) 
18.  Ye  is  emphatic.   (See  on  10  :  15.) — From 


VIEW    OF    THEATRE,    ANCIENT     MILETUS. 


them,  to  meet  no  more  on  earth ;  and  in  vv. 
26-35  he  charges  them  to  be  watchful  for  the 
safety  of  the  flock  which  had  been  entrusted 
to  them,  and  was  to  be  exposed  in  future  to  so 
many  dangers.  —  Elders  =  overseers  (v.  28\ 
(Comp.  note  on  14  :  23.)  Our  English  trans- 
lators render  the  latter  term  "overseers"  in  v. 
28,  contrary  to  their  usual  practice.  "The 
E.  v.,"  says  Mr.  Alford,  very  candidly,  "has 
hardly  dealt  feirly  in  this  case  with  the  sacred 
te.xt,  since  it  ought  there,  as  in  all  other  places, 
to  have  been  '  bishops,'  that  the  fact  of  elders 
and  bishops  having  been  originally  and  apos- 
tolically  synonym  )us  might  be  apparent  to  the 


the  first  day  I  came  unto  Asia  we  are  to 
connect  with  after  what  manner  I  have 
been  with  you,  or  haw  I  avxlucted  (Kuin., 
De  Wet.),  not  with  ye  know  (Mey.).  As 
was  to  be  foreseen,  Meyer  corrects  himself 
here  in  In's  last  edition. — The  duration  of  the 
period  (the  whole  time)  is  stated  in  v.  31.  The 
position  of  the  before  all  or  niliole  is  exceptional, 
as  in  Gal.  5  :  14  and  1  Tim.  1 :  IG.  ^Soo  K.  g  246. 
5.  (3.) 

19.  With  all,  the  iitmo.st  (see  on  4  :  29), 
lowliness  of  mind,  humility ;  its  opposite 
is  minding  high  things  (Rom.  12  ;  le).  (Comp.  Phil. 
2  :  3  an.d  1  Pet.  5  :  5.)     This  use  of  aU,  says  Tho- 


238 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


with  many  tear,?,  and  temptations,  which  hefell  nie  "by 
the  lying  in  wait  of  the  Jews: 

20  And  how  'I  kept  hack  nothing  that  was  profitable 
unfo  yoti,  but  have  shewed  you,  and  have  taught  you 
publicly,  and  from  house  to  house. 

21  <^Testifyiiig  both  to  the  Jews,  and  also  to  the 
Greeks,  "^repentance  toward  God,  and  faith  toward 
our  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

22  And  now,  behold,  «I  go  hound  in  the  spirit  unto 
Jerusalem,  not  knowing  the  things  that  shall  befall  me 
there : 


mind,  and  with  tears,  and  with  trials  which  befell 

20  me  by  the  plots  of  the  Jews;  how  tliat  I  shrank  not 
from  declaring  unto  you  anything  that  was  i>rofit- 
able,  and  teaching  you  publicly,  and  from  house  to 

21  house,  testifying  both  to  Jews  and  to  (  reeks  repent- 
ance toward  dod,  and  faith  toward  our  Lord  Jesus 

22  'Christ.  And  now,  behold,  I  go  bound  in  the  spirit 
unto  Jerusalem,  not  knowing  the  things  that  shall 


.ft  Ter.   27....cch.  18  :  5. 


.d  Mark  1  :  15 ;    Luke  24  :  47  ;   cl 
omit  Christ. 


luck,i  is  eminently  Pauline.  (Comp.  Eph.  1  : 
3-8 ;  4:2;  6  :  18 ;  "2  Cor.  12  :  12 ;  1  Tim.  3:4; 
2  Tim.  4:2;  Tit.  2  :  15;  3  :  2.)— With  tears, 
of  solicitude  for  their  salvation.  (See  v.  31. 
Comp.  2  Cor.  2  :  4  and  Phil.  3  :  18.)  Many 
before  tears,  in  the  common  text,  should  be 
dropped  (Grsl).,  Mey.,  Tsch.). — Temptations, 
trials,  persecutions  which  he  suffered  from  his 
countrymen.  Luke  has  not  spoken  distinctly  of 
these  Jewish  machinations  at  Ephesus,  but  in 
19  :  9  he  describes  a  state  of  feeling  on  the  part 
of  the  Jews,  which  must  have  been  a  prolific 
source  of  hostility  both  to  the  person  of  the 
apostle  and  to  the  objects  of  his  ministry. 
That  his  situation  there  was  one  of  constant 
peril  we  see  from  1  Cor.  15  :  31,  32 ;  16  :  9 ;  and 
2  Cor.  1  :  8-10. 

20.  How  I  kept  back  nothing  depends 
still  on  ye  know  (v.  is),  but  illustrates,  at  tlie 
same  time,  the  intervening  how  I  Avas  with 
you,  etc. :  how  (not  that)  I  kept  back  noth- 
ing of  the  things  expedient — i.  c.  out  of 
regard  to  men's  censure  or  their  favor.  How 
perfectly  this  remark  harmonizes  with  Paul's 
character  we  have  proof  in  such  passages  as  2 
Cor.  4:2;  Gal.  1 :  10 ;  1  Thess.  2  :  4.— But  have 
showed,  etc.  [The  structure  of  the  Greek  is 
different — viz.]  that  I  should,  or  might  (telic, 
as  if  in  denial  of  the  possibility  that  he  could 
mean  to  preach  less  than  the  entire  truth),  not 
announce  unto  you  and  teach  you — viz. 
the  things  expedient  for  them.  But  both 
clauses  contain  a  negative  idea,  and  the  rule 
stated  on  10  :  47  may  apply  here :  he  withheld 
nothing  from  them  that  he  should  (as  the 
effect  of  such  withholding)  not  announce 
and  teach.  In  other  words,  the  iufmitive 
states,  not  the  object  of  kept  back,  as  before, 
but  a  consequence  of  the  suppression  if  unhin- 
dered. (See  W.  g  44.  4.  Comp.  v.  27,  below.) 
— Publicly,  in  public,  as  in  the  synagogue 
(19:8)  or  in  the  school  of  Tyrannus  (19 ; 9). — 
From  house  to  house,  better  in  houses, 
private  assemblies. 


21.  Repentance  toward  God — lit.  the 
repentance  (which  is  meet)  in  respect  to 

(lOd;  i.e.  exercised  toward  him  as  especially 
wronged  by  transgression.  (See  Ps.  51  :  4.)  De 
Wette  supposes  a  breviloquence,  as  in  8  :  22 : 
repentance  (with  a  return)  unto  God. 
(Comji.  2G  :  20.)  The  first  sense  agrees  best 
with  the  u.se  of  unto,  or  in  respect  to  (eJs), 
in  the  next  clause.  "  In  God  the  Father,"  says 
Olshausen,  "lies  expressed  the  idea  of  the  strict 
righteousness  to  which  the  repentance  directs 
itself;  in  Christ,  the  idea  of  the  compassion  to 
which  the  faith  has  reference." — "  It  appears," 
says  Tholuck,  "to  belong  to  the  peculiarities 
of  the  apostle  that  he  in  particular  appeals  so 
often  to  his  blameless  manner  of  life.  The 
occasion  for  this  lies  sometimes  in  the  calum- 
nies of  his  enemies,  as  wlten  he  says,  in  2  Cor. 
1  :  12,  '  For  our  boasting  (/cau'xrio-ts)  is  this,  the 
testimony  of  our  conscience,  that  in  simplicity 
and  godly  sincerity,  not  with  fleshly  wisdom, 
but  by  the  grace  of  God,  we  have  had  our  con- 
versation in  the  world,  and  more  e.specially 
among  you.'  Tlie  eleventh  chapter  shows  what 
adversaries  he  liad  in  view  in  this  self-justifica- 
tion. But  often  these  appeals  spring  only  from 
that  just  confidence  with  which  he  can  call 
upon  others  to  imitate  him,  as  he  himself  imi- 
tates the  Saviour.  Thus,  in  1  Cor.  11  :  1,  he 
cries,  '  Be  ye  followers  of  me,  even  as  I  also  am 
of  Christ;'  and  in  Phil.  3:  17,  'Brethren,  be 
followers  together  of  me,  and  niark  them  who 
walk  so  as  ye  have  us  for  an  ensample.'  Such 
personal  testimonies  are  not  found  in  the  other 
Epistles  of  the  New  Testament,  nor  are  they 
frequent  in  the  writings  of  other  pious  men ; 
on  which  account  we  are  authorized  to  con- 
sider their  occurrence  in  this  discourse  (w.  18-21) 
as  a  mark  of  its  historical  character." 

22.  Bound  in  the  spirit — /.  c.  his  own,  in 
his  mind,  feelings  (ia:2i),  constrained  by  an 
invincible  impulse  or  sense  of  duty  (Hnr., 
Kuin.,  De  Wet.,  Rob.),  so  as  to  be  indifferent 
to  danger  on  the  one  hand  (v.  23),  and  perhaps 


1  Die  Reden  des  Aposle.ls  Paulus  in  der  Aposlelgeschichte,  mil  seinen  Briefen  verglichen,  in  the  Studien  und  Kriliken, 
1839,  p.  305,  sg.    I  have  drawn  several  of  the  notes  on  this  address  from  that  instructive  article. 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


239 


23  Save  that  "the  Holy  Ghost  witnesseth  in  every 
city,  saying  that  bonds  and  attiictions  abide  lue. 

24  But  'none  ol'  these  things  move  nie,  neither  count 
I  my  life  dear  unto  myself,  'so  that  1  might  tinisli  my 
course  with  joy,  ''and  the  ministry,  'which  I  have  re- 
ceived of  the  Lord  Jesus,  to  testify  the  gospel  of  the 
grace  of  God. 


23  befall  nie  there :  save  that  the  IFoly  Spirit  testiiieth 
unto  nie  in  every  city,  saying  that  bonds  and  alHic- 

24  tions  abide  me.  But  I  hold  not  my  life  of  any  ac- 
count, as  dear  unto  myself,  'so  that  1  may  accom- 
plish my  course,  and  the  ministry  which  1  received 
from  tlie  Lord  Jesus,  to  testify  the  gospel  of  the 


och.  21  :  *,   11;  1  Thes8.  3:3 i  ch.  21  :  13  ;  Rom.  8  :  35  ;  2  Cor.  4  :  1B....c2  Tim.  4  :  7. . .  .d  ch.  1  :  17  ;  2  Cor.  4  :  1 e  Gal. 

1:1;  Tit.  1 :  3. 1  Or,  in  comparison  of  accomplishing  my  course 


iniiiioval)le  under  any  remonstrance  or  appeal 
on  the  other  (21 ;  is).  The  expression  may  be 
compared  with  our  mode  of  speaking  when  we 
say  "  bound  in  good  faith,  in  conscience,"  and 
the  like.  Some  understand  spirit  of  the  Holy 
Spirit:  urged  by  his  influence  or  command 
(Calv.,  Kypk.,  Wdsth.).  But  that  meaning  is 
the  more  doubtful  here,  because  the  Iloli/,  in 
the  next  verse,  appears  to  be  added  to  distin- 
guish that  Spirit  from  this.  The  sense  bound 
in  the  spirit — i.  e.  viewing  himself  as  already 
in  chains,  a  prisoner  in  imagination,  though 
not  yet  in  body  (Chrys.,  Grot.,  Bug.,  Conybeare 
and  Howson) — anticipates  the  sequel  of  the 
sentence,  and  is  too  artificial  where  all  the  rest 
is  expressed  with  so  much  simplicity.  Meyer's 
first  explanation  was  bound  on  the  Holy  Spirit 
(Rom.  7: 2;  1  Cor.  7 :  27) — i.  6.  dependent  on  him; 
but  I  am  pleased  to  see  that  in  liis  last  edition 
he  defends  the  first  of  the  views  given  above. 

23.  Save — i.e.  but  knowing. — From  city 
to  city,  as  he  pursued  the  present  journey. — 
Witnesseth,  testifies  fully  to  me,  not  by 
an  inward  revelation  (for  why  should  he  have 
received  that  from  city  to  city?),  but  through 
the  prophetic  announcement  of  others.  Luke 
has  not  recorded  the  instances  ;  they  may  have 
occurred  at  Philij)pi,  at  Troas,  at  Assos.  He 
mentioned  two  such  communications  which 
were  made  to  Paul  after  this.  (See  21  :  4,  11.) 
The  common  text  leaves  out  to  me,  which  be- 
longs after  the  verb. — Await  me,  not  wher- 
ever he  went,  but  at  Jerusalem.  I  go  .  .  . 
unto  Jerusalem  determines  the  place. — Paley 
compares  this  verse  with  Rom.  15  :  30,  which 
Epistle  the  apostle  had  ju.st  written  at  Corinth. 
He  there  entreats  the  Roman  Cliristians  "  to 
strive  togetlier  with  him  in  their  prayers  to 
God  for  him,  that  he  might  be  delivered  from 
them  who  believed  not  in  Judea."  The  two 
passages,  therefore,  "  without  any  resemblance 
between  them  that  could  induce  us  to  suspect 
that  they  were  borrowed  from  one  another, 
represent  the  state  of  Paul's  mind,  with  re- 
spect to  the  event  of  the  journey,  in  terms  of 
substantial  agreement.  They  both  express  his 
sense  of  danger  in  the  approaching  visit  to 
Jerusalem ;  they  both  express  the  doubt  which 


dwelt  upon  liis  thoughts  concerning  what  might 
there  befall  liim." 

24.  None  of  these  things  move  me — lit. 
I  make  account  of  nothing;  /.  e.  which  I 
may  be  called  to  sutfer.  On  the  contrary,  as 
he  says  in  2  Cur.  12  :  10,  "  I  take  pleasure  in 
infirmities,  in  reproaches,  in  necessities,  in  per- 
secutions, in  distresses,  for  Christ's  sake."  An- 
other reading  draws  the  two  clauses  of  the  com- 
mon text  into  one :  but  of  ito  account  do  I  esteem 
my  life  worthy  for  myself.  The  construction  is 
less  simple  than  the  other,  and  may  have  given 
place  to  it  on  that  account  (Tsch.,  Mey.,  Alf ). 
[This  reading  is  very  well  given  in  the  Revised 
Version:  But  I  hold  not  my  life  of  any  ac- 
count, as  dear  unto  myself.  Tlie  reading 
is  without  doul^t  correct,  being  supported  by  J4* 
B  C  D^  and  several  of  the  earliest  versions. — 
A.  H.]— So  that  I  might,  etc.— lit.  thus  (/.  e. 
with  this  aim,  to  wit)  in  order  to  finish  my 
course.  That  he  should  shrink  from  no  dan- 
ger, that  he  should  be  willing  to  offer  up  his 
life  for  the  sake  of  the  gospel,  he  regarded  as 
due  to  his  office,  as  essential  to  his  character  as 
an  approved  minister  of  Christ.  So,  or  thus, 
strengthens  merely  the  telic  force  of  the  con- 
struction. It  occurs  with  tlie  infinitive  liere 
only  (unless  we  add  17  :  14),  and  in  the  phrase 
as  /  may  so  sny  (i^  6770s  ciTrei^,  Heb.  7  :  9).  (W. 
^  44.  1.)  Alford  refers  so  to  dear — held  not 
his  life  so  precious  as  to  finish,  etc.  But  he  must 
arbitrarily  insert  for  that  purpose  the  correlative 
"  so,''  and  even  then  translates  the  common 
reading  only,  and  not  tlie  one  received  into  liis 
text. — Some  critics  (Lchm.,  Mey.,  Tsch.)  [also 
Treg.,  West.  and'Hort,  Anglo-Am.  Revisers, 
with  X  A  B  D,  and  the  Syr.,  Coptic,  Vulg.  Vss. 
— A.  H.]  omit  with  joy  after  my  course.  It 
is  ^^'<^nting  in  several  important  authorities. — 
To  testify  the  gospel,  etc.,  defines  in  what 
the  ministry  consisted.  The  infinitive  may 
depend  on  the  verbal  idea  involved  in  that 
noun  (De  Wet.) :  (commanding  or  requiring) 
that  I  should  testify  fully,  etc.;  or  it  may 
follow  as  epexegetical. — In  the  sublime  lan- 
guage of  this  verse  we  hear  distinctly  the 
voice  of  the  man  who  on  approaching  the 
end  of  his  career  could  say,  "  I  am  now  ready 


240 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


25  And  now,  behold,  "I  know  that  ye  all,  among  whom 
I  have  gone  preaching  the  kingdom  of  (jod,  shall  see 
my  face  no  more. 

26  Wherefore  I  take  you  to  record  this  day,  that  I 
am  'pure  from  the  blood  of  all  iiicn. 

'11  For  "I  have  not  shunned  to  declare  unto  you  all 
■^the  counsel  of  God. 

28  \  «Take  heed  therefore  unto  yourselves,  and  to 
all  the  flock,  over  the  which  the  Holy  Ohost  /hath 


25  grace  of  God.  And  now,  behold,  I  know  that  ye 
all,  iimong  whom  I  went  about  preaching  the  kiiig- 

26dom,  shall  see  my  face  no  more.  Wherefore  1  tes- 
tify unto  you  this  day,  that  I  am   pure  from  the 

27  blood  of  all  men.     lor  I  shrank  not  from  declaring 

28  unto  you  the  whole  counsel  of  (jod.  Take  heed 
unto  yourselves,  and  to  all  the  flock,  in  the  which 


a  ver.  38;  Rom.  15  :  23 5  ch.  18  :  6;  2  Cor.  7  :  2 c  ver.  20 d  Luke  7  :  30 ;  John  15  :  15 ;  Epb.  1  :  11 e  1  Tim.  4  :  16; 

1  ftt.  5:2 /I  Cor.  12  :  28. 


to  be  offered,  and  the  time  of  my  departure  is 
at  liand.  I  have  fought  a  good  fight,  I  liave 
finished  mj'  course,  I  have  kej^t  the  faith. 
Henceforth  tliere  is  laid  up  for  me  a  crown 
of  righteousness,  wliich  the  Lord,  the  right- 
eous judge,  shall  give  me  at  that  day  "  (2  Tim. 
4:6-8).     (Comp.  also  Phil.  2  :  17.) 

35.  And  now  resumes  the  tlioilght  in  v.  22. 
— Know  expresses,  not  an  apprehension  or  a 
presentiment,  but  a  conviction.  For  1  know 
this  (T.  R.)  has  more  against  it  than  for  it. 
Paul's  I  know  having  been  fulfilled,  Zeller 
sees  evidence  of  the  post  eventum  character  of 
the  word  in  that  agreement.  —  That  ye  all 
shall  see  my  face  no  more,  etc.  If  Paul's 
Roman  captivity  closed  with  his  death,  he  cer- 
tainly never  saw  the  Ephesian  elders  after  this 
interview.  "  Nor,  if  we  suppose  him  to  have 
been  liberated,  can  any  contradictory  result  be 
urged  on  that  ground,  since  the  traditions  of 
the  fathers  decide  nothing  in  regard  to  the 
journeys  of  the  apostle  between  his  supposed 
liberation  and  his  second  captivity"  {Meyer). 
It  has  been  proposed  to  emphasize  all,  as  if 
some  of  them,  at  least,  might  hope  to  renew 
their  intercourse  with  him ;  but  the  qualifica- 
tion is  inconsistent  with  vv.  37,  38. — Among 
whom  I  have  gone,  or  among  whom  I 
went  about,  may  intimate  a  wider  circuit  of 
labor  than  tliat  furnished  by  a  single  city.  The 
apostle  either  addressed  those  who  had  come 
from  different  churches  in  the  region  (see  on  v. 
17),  or  at  this  point  of  the  discourse  recognized 
those  before  him  as  representatives  of  these 
churches.  Some  understand  I  went  about  to 
describe  Paul's  labors  in  various  parts  of  Ephe- 
sus,  or  the  visit  wliich  he  made  to  the  houses 
of  the  presbyters.  Tlie  expression  favors  tlie 
wider  view,  says  Neander,  but  is  not  incon- 
sistent with  the  other.  [Preaching  the  king- 
dom of  God,  rather  the  kingdom,  for  tlie 
words  of  God  are  probably  an  addition  to  the 
text.  But  they  are  unnecessary,  for  no  other 
kingdom  than  that  of  God  or  of  Christ  could 
be  called  the  kingdom  by  Paul  in  such  a  con- 
nection as  this.  And  there  is  something  very 
suggestive  in  these  brief  expressions  :  the  wm/, 
the  word,  the  kingdom^  the  brotherhood.      They 


condense  a  great  movement  into  a  term  of 
childlike  simplicity. — A.  H.] 

26.  Wherefore,  or  therefore,  since  it  was 
proper  for  him  to  close  his  ministry  with  sucli 
a  testimony. — I  take  you  to  record  (mapTvpofiat 
=  fnapTvpeu)),  I  testify,  declare  as  a  witness,  as  in 
Gal.  5  :  3  and  Eph.  4  :  17,  and  occasionally  in 
the  classics  (Pape,  Lex.,  s.  v.).  It  means  prop- 
erly obtest,  call  to  witness,  with  the  accusative 
of  a  person. — That  I  am  pure,  etc.  (See  on 
18  :  6.)  The  expression  is  peculiar  to  Paul's 
speeches.  In  this  clause  am  may  have  been 
displaced  from  the  text  (Gr.sb.,  Lach.,  Mey.). 
[It  has  been  restored  by  aU  the  late  editors, 
Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  Anglo-Am.  Re- 
visers, as  well  as  by  those  named  by  Dr.  Hack- 
ett,  and  it  is  justified  by  X  B  C  D  E,  Pesh.,  Coj), 
—A.  H.] 

27.  For  I  have  not  shunned — lit.  for  I 
shrunk  not  back  (wliile  among  you)  that  I 
should  not  declare  unto  you.  (Ccmip.  on 
v.  20.) — All  the  counsel— «.  c.  the  whole 
plan — of  God  as  to  tlie  way  of  saving  men 
unfolded  in  the  gospel. 

28.  Take  heed,  therefore  (.since  in  future 
the  responsibility  will  rest  on  you),  unto 
yourselves  (that  ye  be  faithful)  and  unto 
all  the  flock  (that  they  be  kept  from  error). 
Here  Paul  speaks  just  as  he  writes  in  1  Tim. 
4  :  16. — Over  the  which,  strictly  in  which, 
since  the  bishops  made  part  of  the  flock,  wliile 
tliey  had  the  direction  of  it.— The  Holy  Spirit 
hath  made  may  refer  to  their  having  been 
cliosen  under  the  direction  of  the  Spirit  (13 : 2; 
u  :  23),  or  to  their  having  been  qualified  for  their 
office  by  the  Spirit  (1  cor.  12:8).— To  feed  in- 
cludes the  idea  not  only  of  instruction,  but  of 
government  and  of  supervision  in  general. 
(Comp.  1  Pet.  5  :  2.  See  the  note  on  14  :  23.)— 
The  church,  etc.  The  church  of  the  Lord 
or  God.  The  reading  here  is  disputed.  The 
external  testimony  xircponderates  in  favor  of 
the  Lord,  and  mo.st  of  the  recent  critics  ac- 
cept tliat  as  the  original  word,  as  Griesbach, 
Lachmann,  Bornemann,  Tischendorf,  Meyer, 
Tregelles.  Some,  as  Bengel,  Rinck,  Scliolz, 
Mill,  Alford,  decide  for  God.  The  internal 
argument  is  claimed  on  both,  sides.     It  is  said 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE   ACTS. 


241 


made  you  overseers,  to  feed  the  church  of  God,  "which 
he  liatli  piiroliased  'with  liis  own  blood. 

•Jl)  For  I  know  this,  that  after  my  departing  'shall 
grievous  wolves  enter  iu  among  you,  not  sparing  the 
liock. 

•to  Also  ''of  your  own  selves  shall  men  arise,  speak- 
ing perverse  things,  to  draw  away  disciples  after 
th  m. 

31  Therefore  watch,  and  remember,  that  'by  the 
space  of  three  years  I  ceased  not  to  warn  every  one 
night  and  day  with  tears. 

'42  And  now,  brethren,  I  commend  you  to  God,  and 
/to  the  word  of  his  grace,  which  is  able  ^to  build  you 
up,  and  to  give  you  '•an  inheritance  among  all  them  j 
which  are  sanctified. 


the  Holy  Spirit  hath  made  you  'bishops,  to  feed  the 

church  of  -the  Lord,  which  he  -'purchased  with  his 

29 own  blood.     1  know  that  after  my  departing  grie.- 

ous  wolves  shall  enter  in  among  you,  not  sparing 

30  the  flock;  and  from  among  your  own  selves  shail 
men  arise,  speaking  i)er\erse  things,  to  draw  away 

31  the  disciples  after  them.  Wherefore  watch  ye,  re- 
membering that  by  the  space  of  three  years  I  ceased 
not  to  admonish  every  one  night  and  day  with  tears. 

32  And  now  I  commend  you  to  ■'God,  and  to  the  word 
of  his  grace,  who  is  able  to  build  i/un  up,  and  to  give 
you  the  inheritance  among  all  them  that  are  saucti- 


oEph.  1:7.  14:   Ool.  1  :  U,  Heb.  9:12;  1  Pet.  1  :  19 ;  Rev.  5:  9.... 5  See  Heb.  9:  14.... c  Matt.  7  .  15 ;  2  Pet.  2:  1 

....d  I  Tim.  1:20; 

I  Jnbn  2:  l!»....ech.  19:  10..   ./  Heb.  13:  9.... job.  9  •  ai..  ..A  ch.  26  :  18;  Kph.  1  :  18  ;  Col.  1:  12;  3  :  24;  Heb. 

9  :  15  ;  1  Pet.  i  :  4. 

1  Or,  overseers 2  Some  ancient  autborities,  including  the  two  oldest  MSS.,  read  God 3  Ur.  acquired... 

.1  Some  ancient  au- 

thorities  read  the  Lord. 

that  God  agrees  best  with  the  usage  of  Paul, 
since  in  his  Epistles  church  of  God  occurs 
eleven  times,  church  of  Christ  once,  but  never 
church  of  the  Lord.  It  is  replied  to  this  that 
the  uncommon  expression  is  more  likely  to 
have  been  exchanged  for  the  ordinary  one 
than  tlie  reverse.^  Wordsworth  inclines  to  tJeoO 
(God),  mainly  for  internal  reasons.  (See  Hum- 
phry's note  on  the  other  side.)  The  variations 
the  Lord  God,  the  God  and  Lord,  and  the  Lord 
and  God  are  too  slightly  supported  to  require 
notice. — Which  he  purchased,  or  which  he 
(redeemed  and  thu.s)  ohtnincd  for  himself  (as  a 
possession).  (Comp.  that  he  might  redeem  us 
from  all  iniquity,  and  purify  unto  himself  a  pe- 
culiar people  (Tit.  2  14)  and  a  ])eople  for  posses- 
sion (i  Pet.  2:9). — With  his  own  blood  repre- 
sents the  atonement  as  consisting  pre-eminent- 
ly in  the  sacritice  and  death  of  Christ.  (See 
Matt.  20  :  28 ;  Rom.  3  :  24 ;  Eph.  1  :  7  ;  1  Tim. 
2  :  G ;  Ileb.  9:12;  13  :  12,  etc.) 

29.  This  gives  prominence  to  the  following 
clause.  (Comp.  9:21.) — Shall  enter  in  is  said 
of  th(jse  wlio  should  come  to  tliem  from  other 
places. — After  my  departing,  or  departure, 
not  after  my  decease  (De  Wet.).  The  same  ex- 
pression occurs  in  Herodotus  (9  :  17). — Griev- 
ous— i.  e.  violent,  rapacious — wolves,  which 
represent  here,  not  persecutors,  but  false  teach- 
ers. (See  V.  30  and  Matt.  7  :  15.)  These  men 
would  be  as  far  froiu  corresponding  to  their 
professed  character  as  guardians  of  the  flock 
as  fierce  wolves  are  unlike  the  faithful  shep- 
herd. 

30.  Of  your  own  selves,  or  from  you 
yourselves — ;'.  e.  from  their  own  commimity, 
not  necessarily  from  the  number  of  those  pres- 
ent.— That  the  danger  which  Paul  announced 


was  realized  we  learn  from  the  Epistles  to  Tim- 
othy (see  especially  2  Tim.  2: 17)  and  from  Rev. 
2 :  2.  The  latter  passage  shows  that  some  of 
these  false  teachers,  in  order  to  strengthen  their 
influence,  laid  claim  to  the  authority  of  apos- 
tles. 

31.  Therefore  watch,  since  their  vigilance 
should  be  equal  to  the  dangers  which  threat- 
ened them. — And  remember — lit.  remem- 
bering, etc.  How  they  should  watch,  with 
what  constancy  and  solicitude,  tlicy  had  been 
taught  by  his  own  example.— The  space  of 
three  years  may  be  a  proximate  expression, 
but  must  come  nearer  to  three  years  than  tivo. 
(See  the  note  on  19  :  10.)  In  Rev.  2  :  2,  3  we 
have  an  interesting  i)roof  that  the  apostle's  ad- 
monition was  not  in  vain.  "  Thou  hast  tried 
tltcm,"  it  is  said  of  the  church  at  Ephcsus, 
"  wlio  saj'  that  they  are  apostles  and  are  not, 
and  hast  found  them  liars;  .  .  .  and  for  my 
name's  sake  hast  labored  and  hast  not  fainted." 

32.  I  commend  you  to  God  and  to  the 
word  of  his  grace—*,  e.  in  this  connection 
to  the  power  of  tliis  word,  as  tlie  instrumen- 
tality which  God  employs  for  the  religious  con- 
firmation and  security  of  his  people.  [It  is. 
not,  however,  to  be  supposed  that  "  the  word 
of  his  grace  "  is  the  only  instrumentality  em- 
ployed by  God.  His  Spirit  and  providence  are 
also  directed  to  the  same  end  ;  but  the  word  is 
named  because  of  its  great  importance  in  build- 
ing up  the  people  of  God  in  faith  and  love  and 
holy  activity.— A.  H.]— Brethren  fails  in  so 
many  copies  a.s  to  be  doubtful. — Which  (or 
who)  is  able  it  is  best  to  refer  to  God  as  the 
principal  word  (Calv  ,  Bng.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.), 
not  to  Avord  (Hnr.,  Kuin.).— To  build  you 
up.     To  build  up  further  (a  compound   verb, 


>  For  a  view  of  the  testimonies  in  the  case,  see  Davidson's  Lectures  on  Biblical  Criticism,  p.  17.5,  sq.    He  adopts 
the  /yird  as  the  probable  reading.    Green  (p.  Ill)  comes  to  the  same  conclusion.    [See  also  Dr.  Fzra  Abbot  On 
the  Reading  "rtiiircfi  of  God,"  Ads  ?0:S8,  Bib.  Sac,  1S7G,  p.  313,  sq.,  and  Westcott  and  Ilort,  The  Se:j  Text,  in  Greek, 
Appendix,  p.  OS,  sq. — A.  H.] 
16 


242 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


33  "I  have  coveted  no  man's  silver,  or  gold,  or  ap- 
parel. 

34  Yea,  ye  yourselves  know,  Hhat  these  hands  have 
ministered  unto  my  necessities,  and  to  them  that  were 
with  me. 

35  I  have  shewed  you  all  things,  «how  that  so  labor- 
ing ye  ought  to  support  the  weak,  and  to  remember  the 


33  fied.    I  coveted  no  man's  silver,  or  gold,  or  apparel. 

34  Ye   yourselves   know  that  these  hands  ministered 
unto  my  necessities,  and  to  them  that  were  with 

35  me.     In  all  things  1  gave  you  an  example,  how  that 
so  laboring  ye  ought  to  help  the  weak,  and  to  re- 


o  1  Sam.   12  :  3;  1   Cor.  9  :  12  ;  2  Cor.  7  :  2  ;  11  :  9  ;  12  :  17....6  ch.  18  :  3  ;  1  Cor.  4  :  12  ;  1  Thess.  2:9;  2  Thess.  3  :  8....C  Rom. 
15  :  1  ;  1  Cor.  9  :  12  ;  2  Cor.  11  :  9,  12  ;  12  :  13  ;  Eph.  4  :  28  ;  1  Thees.  4  :  11 ;  5  :  )4 ;  2  Thesa.  3  :  8. 


T.  R.)  is  Pauline,  but  has  less  support  here 
than  to  build  up.  "  This  term  reminds  us  of  Eph. 
2  :  20,  and  can  be  taken  only  in  the  sense  of 
that  passage.  Remarkable,  also,  is  the  expres- 
sion an  inheritance  among  all  them  that 
are  sanctified.  Here  all  gives  prominence 
to  the  idea  of  a  great  company  of  the  holy, 
and  reminds  us  again  of  Eph.  3  :  18.  The  ex- 
pression an  inheritance  among  the  sanc- 
tified— i.  e.  participation  in  the  spiritual  bless- 
ings which  exist  among  them — is  likewise  pe- 
culiarly Pauline,  and  occurs  further  only  in 
the  words  of  Paul  in  26  :  18  and  in  Eph.  1 :  18  " 
( Tholuck). 

33.  He  warns  them  against  avarice,  against 
a  sordid  spirit.— Have  coveted — lit.  coveted 
when  he  was  with  them ,  not  perf.,  as  in  E.  V. 
— Apparel,  raiment.  The  wealth  of  the 
Orientals  consisted  in  part  of  costly  garments ; 
they  trafficked  in  them  or  kept  them  in  store 
for  "future  use.  (See  Ezra  2  :  69 ;  Neh.  7  :  70; 
Job  27  :  16 ;  2  Kings  5  :  26.)  This  fact  accounts 
for  the  allusion  to  the  destructive  power  of  the 
moth,  as  well  as  rust,  in  Matt.  6  :  19  and  James 
5:2. 

34.  And  to  those  that  were  with  me  is 
an  instance  of  varied  construction  :  and  to 
(the  wants  of)  those  w^ith  me.  (W.  §  63.  II. 
1.)  Those  referred  to  here  are  Timothy,  Eras- 
tus,  Luke,  and  others  who  traversed  sea  and 
land  with  the  apostle,  attached  to  him  as  per- 
sonal friends,  and  still  more  as  friends  of  the 
cause  which  they  served.  —  These  hands, 
which  we  may  suppose  him  to  have  held  up 
to  view  as  he  spoke,  and  which  may  have 
been  marked  with  traces  of  the  toil  to  which 
they  were  inured.  (See  the  note  on  17  :  10  and 
18  :  3.) — This  allusion  to  the  apostle's  habit  of 
manual  labor  while  he  was  at  Ephesus  accords 
remarkably  with  1  Cor.  4  :  11,  12.  Luke  has 
said  nothing  of  it  in  his  narrative  of  Paul's 
residence  in  that  city  (i9:i,»j.).  But  in  the 
above-named  passage  of  the  Epistle,  which 
Paul  wrote  just  before  his  departure  from  Eph- 
esus, we  find  him  saying,  ^'Unto  this  present 
hour  ...  we  labor,  working  with  our  own 
hands."  Nothing  could  be  more  undesigned 
than  this  agreement.  "  It  is  manifest  that  if 
the   history   in   this  passage  had  been   taken 


from  the  Epistle,  this  circumstance,  if  it  ap- 
peared at  all,  would  have  appeared  in  its  place 
— that  is,  in  the  direct  account  of  Paul's  trans- 
actions at  Ephesus.  The  correspondence  would 
not  have  been  effected,  as  it  is,  by  a  kind  of  re- 
flected stroke— that  is,  by  a  reference  in  a  sub- 
sequent speech  to  what  in  the  narrative  was 
omitted.  Nor  is  it  likely,  on  the  other  hand, 
that  a  circumstance  which  is  not  extant  in  the 
history  of  Paul  at  Ephesus  should  have  been 
made  the  subject  of  a  fictitious  allusion  in  an 
Epistle  purporting  to  be  written  by  him  from 
that  place,  not  to  mention  that  the  allusion 
itself,  especially  in  time,  is  too  oblique  and  gen- 
eral to  answer  any  purpose  of  forgery  what- 
ever" {Palcy). 

35.  All  things.  Not  all  things  as  the  ob- 
ject of  I  have  shewed  (E.  V.,  Hmph.),  but  ad- 
verbial, in  all  ways — i.  e.  by  doctrine  and  by 
example.  (Comp.  1  Cor.  10  :  33;  Eph.  4  :  15.)— 
So  laboring — viz.  as  I  have  done. — That  you 
ought  to  assist  the  weak,  feeble — i.  e.  the 
poor,  whom  this  mode  of  designation  contrasts 
with  the  rich,  who  are  strong,  powerful  (Chrys., 
Kuin.,  Olsh.,  De  Wet.,  Rob.,  Cony,  and  Hws.). 
The  examples  in  Wetstein  sanction  this  mean- 
ing of  the  weak.  (See  also  Rob.,  Lex.,  s.  v.)  But 
the  stricter  sense  of  the  word  (4:9;  s :  i5;  Matt.  25 : 
39,  etc )  is  entirely  approi^riate :  the  weak — i.  e. 
those  unable,  in  consequence  of  physical  in- 
firmity, to  labor  for  their  own  support.  The 
apostle  would  enforce  here  the  duty  of  indus- 
try and  self-denial,  in  order  to  procure  the 
means  of  relieving  those  who  are  disabled  by 
any  cause  from  taking  care  of  themselves.  He 
holds  up  to  them  his  own  example — his  dili- 
gence in  labor,  his  disinterestedness — as  worthy 
of  their  imitation.  (Comp.  2  Thess.  3  :  7,  sq.) — 
Others  understand  the  weak  of  the  ivenk  in 
their  religious  faith  or  principles.  The  apostle's 
object,  as  they  argue,  was  to  exhort  the  elders 
to  maintain  themselves  by  their  own  labor,  out 
of  regard  to  those  who  would  not  appreciate 
their  claim  to  support,  who  would  take  offence 
at  the  appearance  of  anything  like  a  mercenary 
spirit  in  their  teachers.  So  Calvin,  Bengel, 
Neander,  Meyer,  Tholuck,  and  others.  It  is 
alleged  tliat  this  inteqiretation  is  necessary,  in 
order  to  make  the  cases  parallel — that,  as  Paul 


Ch.  XX] 


THE  ACTS. 


243 


■words  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  how  he  said,  It  is  more  blessed 
to  give  than  to  receive. 

M  1[  And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  he  "kneeled 
down,  and  prayed  with  them  all. 

:i7  And  they  all  wept  sore,  and  ''fell  on  Paul's  neck, 
and  kissed  him, 


member  the  words  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  how  he  him- 
self said,  it  is  more  blessed  to  give  than  to  receive. 

36  And  wlipn  he  had  thus  spoken,  he  kneeled  down, 

37  and  prayed  with  them  all.    And  they  all  wept  sore, 


1  ch.  7  :  60  ;  21  :  0. . .  .6  Gen.  45  :  14  :  46  :  29. 


labored  for  his  own  support,  so  the  object  of 
their  labor  must  be  the  same.  But  so  labor- 
ing does  not  require  that  sort  of  correspond- 
once.  Instead  of  the  same  application  of  the 
fruits  of.  his  industry,  the  so  may  refer  equally 
well  to  the  manner  and  spirit  of  his  labor — i.  c. 
to  his  assiduity  in  it — and  his  benevolence, 
which  he  would  have  them  imitate,  though 
the  class  of  persons  to  be  benefited  in  the  two 
cases  was  different.  The  positive  objections  to 
tills  e.vegesis  are — first,  that  the  language  is  too 
mild,  as  understood  of  such  illiberality ;  sec- 
ondly, that  some  word  or  the  context  should 
define  weak,  qualified  by  in  the  faith  in  Rom. 
14  :  1,  sq.,  and  in  effect  by  in  their  conscience  in 
1  Cor.  8  :  9  (compared  with  v.  7) ;  and  thirdly, 
that  it  destroys  the  opposition  between  the 
giving  of  personal  favors  and  the  reception  of 
them,  as  contemplated  in  the  words  of  Christ. 
The  use  of  the  iveak  in  1  Tliess.  5  :  14  weakens, 
it  is  true,  the  second  objection.  It  may  be 
added  that  Paul,  although  he  waived  his  own 
right  to  a  maintenance  from  those  to  whom  he 
preached,  was  remarkable  for  the  decision  with 
which  he  asserted  that  right  in  behalf  of  others. 
(Comp.  Rom.  15  :  27 ;  1  Cor.  9  :  13,  14 ;  Gal.  6  : 
6 ;  1  Tim.  5  :  17,  18.  See  also  the  Saviour's 
rule  on  this  subject,  in  Luke  10  :  7.)  Hence, 
if  the  explanation  under  remark  were  correct, 
it  would  array  the  author  of  the  speech  against 
tlie  Epistles.  It  would  justify  Zeller's  objec- 
tion that  the  true  Paul,  after  representing  his 
own  assumption  of  the  expenses  of  his  sup- 
port (for  example,  in  1  Cor.  9  :  1-27)  as  unpre- 
scriptive  and  voluntary,  would  not  so  forget 
himself  as  to  impose  his  example  in  that  re- 
spect upon  the  Ephesian  teachers  as  one  wliich 
they  must  follow. — How  he  said,  or  that  he 
himself  said.  Our  English  translation  over- 
looks tlic  emphasis. — It  is  more  blessed  to 
give  than  to  receive.  The  evangelists  have 
not  recorded  this  saying  of  Ciirist.  It  comes 
down  to  us  here  as  an  interesting  specimen  of 
the  many  such  words  that  fell  from  his  lips 
and  were  treasured  up  in  the  memory  of  the 
first  disciples,  but  which  no  similar  application 
lias  rescued  from  oblivion.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  Paul  alludes  to  the  remark  as  familiar  to 
his  hearers.— The  best  authorities  read  rather  to 
give  (^aAAoi/  SiSovai)  instead  of  tlie  inverse  order. 


— Nothing  is  wanting  to  attest  the  Pauline  ori- 
gin of  this  Miletian  speech.  It  agrees  with  Paul's 
history,  reflects  Paul's  character,  bears  the  stamp 
of  Paul's  style.  This  last  point  deserves  a  fuller 
illustration.  The  following  examples  show  tlie 
linguistic  affinity  between  the  discourse  and  the 
apostle's  writings.  To  serve  the  Lord,  God,  or 
Christ  {SovKfvfiv  Tco  KvpCif),  deo)  or  XptcrTiJ)  occurs  in 
V.  19,  above,  six  times  in  Paul,  elsewhere  only 
in  ISIatt.  6  :  24  and  Luke  16  :  13 ;  lowliness  of 
mind  (Tan-eti/o^poo-uVT))  is  found  only  in  v.  19,  five 
times  in  Paul,  and  once  in  1  Pet.  5:5;  shunned, 
or  kept  out  (un-oo-TeAAio)  in  vv.  20,  27  and  in  Gal. 
2  :  12 ;  the  jjrofitablc  (to  (rvix<i>ipov)  in  v.  20,  once 
in  Heb.  12  :  20,  and  three  times  in  the  First 
Epistle  to  the  Corintliians ;  service,  or  ministry 
(SioucoWa),  in  V.  24,  and  twenty-two  times  in  Paul ; 
testify  {ixapTvpofjiai)  in  v.  2G  and  in  Gal.  5  :  3  and 
Eph.  4  :  17;  sparing  (4>eiSoixat.)  in  v.  29,  in  2  Pet. 
2  :  4,  and  seven  times  in  Paul;  warn,  admonish 
{vov&ere'u')  in  V.  31,  and  seven  times  in  Paul; 
laboring  {kottiolv)  in  v.  35,  in  Paul,  on  the  con- 
trary, thirteen  times ;  and  the  hortatory  watch 
(vpijyopeiTe)  in  v.  31,  elsewhere  only  in  1  Cor.  16 : 
13.  (See  Lekebusch,  Composition  der  AjMStel- 
gcschichte,  p.  339.) 

36-38.  PAUL  PRAYS  WITH  THE 
ELDERS,  AND  EMBARKS  AGAIN. 

36.  He  kneeled  down,  or  having  kneeled 
(7:60;  9:40).  This  was  the  attitude  m  prayer 
which  prevailed  among  the  early  Christians, 
except  on  tlie  Sabbath  and  during  the  seven 
weeks  before  Pentecost,  when  tliey  generally 
stood.  They  regarded  the  latter  posture  as  the 
more  appropriate  one  for  the  expression  of 
gratitude,  and  adopted  it,  therefore,  on  joyful  oc- 
casions (Hmph.).  It  cannot  be  shown  that  the 
distinction  was  observed  at  this  early  period. 

37.  The  scene  here  was  a  touching  one  ;  the 
simplicity  of  Luke's  descripticm  heightens  the, 
effect  of  it.  We  feel  instinctively  that  the  eye 
must  have  seen  what  the  pen  has  portrayed  in 
so  natural  a  manner. — And  fell  on  Paul's 
neck,  or  and  having  fallen  upon  the  neck 
of  Paul.  In  the  same  manner  Joseph  mani- 
fested his  strong  affection  for  Benjamin  his 
brother  (Gen.  45:  u),  and  for  Jacob  his  father 
(Gen.  46 :  29),  after  thcir  long  separation  from  each 
other.  It  was  in  accordance  with  Oriental 
manners. — Kissed,  or  kissed  tenderly  (com- 


244 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXL 


38  Sorrow  ing  most  of  all  for  the  words  "which  he 
spake,  that  they  should  see  his  face  no  more.  And 
they  accompanied  him  unto  the  ship. 


38  and  fell  on  Paul's  neck,  and  kissed  him,  sorrowing 
most  of  all  for  the  word  whidh  he  had  spoken,  that 
they  should  behold  his  face  no  more.  And  they 
brought  him  on  his  way  unto  the  ship. 


CHAPTER    XXI. 


AND  it  came  to  pass,  that  after  we  were  gotten  from 
them,  and  had  launched,  we  came  with  a  straight 
course  unto  Coos,  and  the  ((ay  following  unto  Khodes, 
and  from  thence  unto  Patara: 

2  And  finding  a  ship  sailing  over  unto  Phenicia,  we 
went  aboard,  aud  set  forth. 


1  And  when  it  came  to  pass  that  we  were  parted 
from  them,  and  had  set  sail,  we  came  with  a  straight 
course  unto  Cos,  and  the  next  day  unto  Rhodes,  and 

2from  thence  unto  I'atara:  and  having  found  a  ship 
crossing  over  unto  I'hccnicia,  we  went  aboard,  and 


pound)  and  (imperf.)  again  and  again.    The 

evangelist  uses  this  word  to  describe  the  affect- 
ed earnestness  of  the  traitor's  kiss  (Matt.  26:49). 

38.  Words  which  he  spake,  more  accu- 
rately the  word  which  he  had  spoken 
(pluperf.);  dative  by  attraction. — That  (on)  is 
declarative. — See  (t^ewpeiK  =  dedo^tai.  Tittm.,  De 
Syn.,  p.  120),  behold,  contemplate.  It  sug- 
gests the  idea  of  the  interest  and  affection  with 
which  they  looked  ujion  that  countenance  for 
the  last  time.  The  writer's  tact  in  using  this 
word  of  the  Ephesians,  but  shall  see  (oi/ieo-de) 
of  Paul,  in  v.  25,  should  be  noticed. — Accom- 
panied, or  sent  him  forward,  escorted  him, 
unto  the  ship.  (See  the  note  on  15  :  3  and 
the  illustration  on  21  :  5.)  It  is  implied  that 
the  roadstead  where  the  vessel  lay  was  at  some 
distance  from  the  town.  The  site  of  Miletus, 
though  originally  on  the  coast,  has  gradually 
receded,  till  it  is  now  ten  miles  from  the  sea. 
It  must  have  lost  its  maritime  position  long 
before  the  apo.stle's  time,  though  not  so  far 
inland  then  as  at  present. 


1-6.  THEY  CONTINUE  THE  VOYAGE 
TO  TYRE. 

1.  And  it  came  to  pass,  etc.,  Avhen  now 
it  came  to  pass  that  we  put  to  sea.    The 

construction  is  like  that  in  v.  5.  Luke  cer- 
tainly, as  one  of  the  we,  Trophimits  (21:29), 
and  Aristarchus  (27 : 2)  accompanied  Paul  to 
Jerusalem.  As  the  others  who  belonged  to  the 
company  (20 : 4)  are  not  mentioned  again,  the 
probability  is  {ex  silentio)  that  they  proceeded 
no  farther.  Some  suppose  that  Timothy  went 
at  this  time  from  Miletus  to  Ephesus,  and  as- 
sumed or  resumed  the  oversight  of  the  church 
there. — After  we  Avere  gotten  from  them 
— i.  e.  having  departed  from  them  (De  Wet., 
Rob.) ;  less  proliably,  having  torn  ourselves  mvay 
(Chrys.,  Kuin.,  Mey.).  Usage  weakened  the 
etymological   sense,  and  in   Luke   22  :  41    an 


emphasis  appears  to  me  out  of  place. — Hav- 
ing run  straight  shows  that  the  wind  was  in 
their  favor.  (See  on  16  :  11.) — (Ki  is  for  Kwr. 
like  'AttoAAuj,  in  19  :  1.)  Coos.  Cos  was  about 
forty  miles  from  Miletus,  directly  south,  and 
could  have  been  reached  in  six  hours.  It  was 
one  of  the  smaller  islands  of  the  archipelago,  on  • 
the  Carian  coast,  between  the  promontories,  on 
which  stood  Cnidus  and  Halicarnassus.  Its  pres- 
ent name  is  Stanchio,  which  has  arisen  from  a 
slurred  pronunciation  of  es  tan  km,  like  Stambul 
from  es  tanpolin. — Having  rounded  Cape  Crio,  the 
ancient  Triopium,  they  turned  their  prow  east- 
ward and  sailed  along  the  southern  shore  of 
Asia  Minor.  Rhodes  was  at  the  entrance  of 
the  J5gean,  on  the  coast  of  Caria.  The  cele- 
brated Colossus  was  prostrate  at  this  time,  hav- 
ing been  overthrown  by  an  earthquake. — Pa- 
tara was  a  coast-town  of  Lycia,  at  some  distance 
from  the  left  bank  of  the  Xanthus.  "  Now  its 
port  is  an  inland  marsh,  generating  poisonous 
malaria,  and  the  mariner  sailing  along  the  coast 
would  never  guess  that  the  Sand-hills  before 
him  blocked  up  the  harbor  into  which  St.  Paul 
sailed  of  old."i  Patara  was  best  known  for  its 
celebrated  oracle  of  Apollo,  which  in  the  height 
of  its  authority  had  almost  rivalled  that  of  Del- 
phos.  How  near  to  it,  in  the  person  of  these 
wayfaring  men,  was  now  brought  the  Power 
which  was  to  subvert  that  great  delusion  of 
heathenism !  How  soon  afler  this  could  it  be 
said,  in  the  words  of  Milton's  Hymn  on  the  Na- 
tivity of  Christ, 

"  The  oracles  are  dumb ; 
No  voice  or  hideous  hum 
Runs  through  the  arched  roofs  in  words  deceiving. 
Apollo  from  his  shrine 
Can  no  more  divine, 
With  hollow  shriek  the  steep  of  Delphos  leaving. 
No  nightly  trance  or  breathed  spell 
Inspires  the  pale-eyed  priest  from  the  prophetic  cell." 

2.  The  party  take  now  another  vessel.  We 
are  not  informed  of  the  reason  for  this  measure. 
The  vessel  which  had  brought  them  thus  far 


1  novels  in  Lycia,  by  Spratt  and  Forbes,  vol.  i.  p.  31. 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


245 


8  Now  when  we  had  discovered  Cyprus,  we  left  it  on 
the  left  liaiid,  and  sailed  into  Syria,  a  d  landed  at 
Tyre:  for  there  the  ship  was  to  unlade  her  burden. 

4  And  finding  disciples,  we  tarried  there  seven  days: 
"who  said  to  I'aul  through  the  Spirit,  that  he  should 
not  go  up  to  Jerusalem. 


.3  set  sail.  And  when  ive  had  come  in  sight  of  Cyprus, 
leaving  it  on  the  left  hand,  we  sailed  unto  ."?yria, 
and  landed  at  Tyre:  for  there  the  ship  was  to  un- 

4 lade  her  burden.  And  having  tound  tlie  disciples, 
we  tarried  there  seven  days :  and  these  said  to  i  aul 
through  the  Spirit,  that  he  should  not  set  foot  in 


over.  12;  ch.  20  :  ; 


may  have  been  adapted  only  to  sailing  along 
the  shore,  or  they  may  have  engaged  the  use  of 
it  (see  on  20  :  IG)  only  until  they  should  find 
an  opportunity  like  the  present.  Sailing  over, 
crossing  over,  just  as  they  arrived.  This  par- 
tifularity  is  as  graphic  "as  if  taken  from  a 
journal  written  during  the  voyage."  The 
present  participle  denotes  often  an  appointed 
or  approaching  act.  (Comp.  v.  3;  27  :  G.  W. 
^  45.  1.  b.) 

3.  And  when  we  had  discovered,  or 
and  having  had  a  view  of,  Cyprus — lit. 
having  had  it  brought  up  to  sight,  made 
visible  to  us  above  the  horizon.  The  language 
is  that  of  an  eye-witness,  and  of  one  familiar 
with  the  phraseology  of  seamen,  who  are  ac- 
customed to  speak  of  raising  the  land  when 
they  approach  it.  The  opposite  expression  is 
to  conceal  the  kind.  (See  Kriig.,  On  Thuci/d.,  5. 
G5;  Stallb.,  On  Prot.,  338.  A.)  The  correspond- 
ing Latin  words,  says  Mr.  Humphry,  are  aperire 
and  ahscondere.  (Virg.,  uEa.,  3.  275,  291.)  Some 
render  being  shown  Cyprus,  having  it  pointed  out 
to  us  in  tiie  distance  (Rob.) ,  but  the  composite 
form  indicates  a  more  specific  sense.  This  verb, 
which  in  tlie  active  governs  a  dative  and  ac- 
cusative, retains  the  latter  in  the  passive.  (W. 
^  39.  1 ;  K.  ^  281.  3.)— We  left  it,  [or  in  the 
participial  form  of  the  Greek]  having  left  it 
behind. — On  the  left  is  an  adjective,  not  an 
adverb.  (K.  ^  2G4.  3.  a.)  They  passed,  there- 
fore, to  the  south  of  the  island.  They  must 
have  had  a  fair  wind  to  enable  them  to  take 
that  course.  The  view  of  Cyprus  must  have 
carried  back  the  apostle's  mind  to  the  days 
which  he  and  Barnabas  had  spent  there  in  the 
missionary  work. — We  sailed  unto  Syria 
refers  to  the  voyage  to  Tyre;  for  in  the  Ro- 
man age  Syria  included  Phoenicia  (Win.),  of 
of  which  Tyre  was  the  commercial  emporium. 
(For  its  present  state,  see  Rob.,  Bibl.  Res.,  iii. 
392,  sq.)  The  most  important  ruins  lie  at  pres- 
ent beneath  the  sea.  It  was  with  melancholy 
interest  that  I  looked  down  upon  them  through 


the  calm  waters  in  the  long  twilight  which  closed 
the  10th  of  May,  1852. — [The  next  clause]  is  best 
taken  as  brachylogical :  for  having  come  thith> 
er,  the  ship  was  unlading — i.e.  about  to  un- 
lade— the  cargo.  (See  W.  ^  45.  5.)  This  use 
of  the  participle  coincides  essentially  with  that 
in  V.  2.  (See,  further,  jNIatt.  2G  :  28 ;  Luke  22  : 
19.)  Some  understand  thither  of  the  convey- 
ance of  the  freight  from  the  ship  to  the  town  : 
for  thither  (after  the  arrival)  Avas  the  ship 
unlading  the  cargo  (Mey.,  De  Wet.).  The 
writer  would  not  be  likely  to  specify  so  minute 
a  circumstance.  Thitlier  (€«cct<re)  is  not  to  be 
confounded  with  there  (exei).  The  clause  as- 
signs the  reason  (yap)  for  their  stopping  at  this 
port.  The  voyage  from  Patara  to  Tyre  need 
not  have  exceeded  two  days,  if  the  wind  was 
fair  and  the  vessel  in  a  good  condition.  The 
distance  is  three  hundred  and  forty  geograph- 
ical miles. 1 

4.  And  finding— lit.  and  having  found 
— out  the  disciples  who  lived  there,  because, 
being  strangers,  they  must  make  inquiry.  The 
English  Version  overlooks  both  the  preposition 
and  the  article.  The  gospel  had  been  preached 
here  at  an  early  period.  (See  on  11  :  19.)  The 
Saviour  had  performed  some  of  his  miracles  in 
the  vicinity  of  Tyre  and  Sidon.  (See  Matt.  15  : 
21;  Mark  7  :  24.)— We  tarried.  (See  on  10  : 
48.) — Seven  days  may  be  indefinite,  as  was  re- 
marked on  20  :  G.  We  cannot  doubt  that  they 
occupied  the  time  spent  here  in  making  known 
the  word,  and  in  consulting  for  the  welfare  of 
the  Tyrian  church.  —  Who  said  to  Paul 
through  the  Spirit  that  he  should  not  go 
up  unto  Jerusalem— i.  e.  if  he  had  any  re- 
gard to  his  own  safety  or  personal  welfiire,  or 
to  their  affectionate  solicitude  on  his  account. 
(Comp.  besought,  etc.,  in  v.  12.)  They  were  in- 
formed by  the  Spirit  that  bonds  and  afflic- 
tions awaited  the  apostle  at  Jerusalem ;  but  it 
was  not  revealed  to  them  as  the  will  of  God 
that  he  should  desist  from  his  purpose  to  pro- 
ceed thither. 


1  The  writer  embarked  at  Beirut  (on  the  coast,  to  the  north  of  Tyre^  at  half-past  six  o'clock  p.  m.;  the  next 
day,  at  ten  o'clock,  we  arrived  off  against  Larnica,  on  the  i-latid  of  Cyprus,  and  on  the  following  night,  at  two 
o'clock  A.  M.,  came  to  anchor  in  the  harbor  of  Rhodes.  This  was  very  nearly  the  apostle's  track,  except  in  the 
inverse  order.  An  ancient  vessel,  under  circumstances  entirely  favorable,  would  almost  equal  the  speed  ot  a 
Levant  steamer. 


246 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


5  And  when  we  had  accomplished  those  days,  we  de- 
parted and  went  our  way  ;  ahd  they  all  brought  us  on 
our  way,  with  wives  and  children,  till  -we  icme  out  of 
the  city :  and  "we  kneeled  down  on  the  shore,  and 
prayed. 

tj  And  when  we  had  taken  our  leave  one  of  an- 
other, we  took  ship;  and  they  returned  *horae 
again. 

7  And  when  we  had  finished  c«r  cour.se  from  Tyre, 
we  caiue  to  Ptoleiuais,  and  saluted  the  brethren,  and 
abode  with  them  one  day. 

8  And  the  next  day  we  that  were  of  Paul's  company 
departed, and  came  untoCasarea:  and  we  entered  into 
the  house  of  I'hilip  "the  evangelist,  ''which  was  una  of 
the  seven ;  and  abode  with  him. 


5  Jerusalem.  And  when  it  came  to  pas§  that  we  had 
accomplished  the  days,  we  departed  and  went  on 
our  journey  ;  and  they  all,  with  wives  and  children, 
brought  us  on  our  way,  till  we  were  out  of  the  city  : 

6  and  kneeling  down  on  the  beach,  we  prayed,  and 
bade  each  other  farewell;  and  we  went  on  board 
the  ship,  but  they  returned  home  again. 

7  And  when  we  had  finished  the  voyage  from  Tyre, 
we  arrived  at  Ptolemais;  and  we  saluted  the  breth- 

8  ren,  and  abode  with  them  one  day.  And  on  the 
morrow  we  departed,  and  came  unto  Civsarea :  and 
entering  into  the  house  of  Philip  the  evangelist, 
who  was  one  of  the  seven,  we  abode  with  him. 


ach.  20  :36....6  Johu  1  :  ll....cEph.  4  :  II  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  5....dch.  6:5;  8  :  26,  40. 


5.  And  when  we  had  accomplishjed— 
i.  e.  Avhen  it  came  to  pass  that  we  had  ac- 
complished. (See  the  first  clause  in  v.  1.) — 
Those  days,  rather  the  days  named  in  v.  4. 
— All  sending  us  forward,  etc.  (See  on  20  ; 
38.) — Till  out  of  the  city,  quite  out  of  it, 
beyond  the  suburbs,  where  they  could  be  alone 
and  undisturbed. — Upon  the  beach.  The 
word  denotes  a  smooth  shore,  as  distinguislied 
from  one  precipitous  or  rocky.  (Comp.  27  ;  39.) 
[See  also  Matt.  13  :  2.  By  the  kindness  of  a 
friend,  I  am  able  to  refer  also  to  two  passages 
of  Herodotus  which  illustrate  the  special  sense 
of  this  word — viz.  vii.  59  and  vii.  188. — A.  H.] 
Luke  manifests  an  autoptic  accuracy  here.  A 
level,  sandy  beach  extends  for  a  considerable 
distance  on  both  sides  of  the  site  of  the  ancient 
Tyre. — Modern  missionary  life  presents  its  par- 
allels to  the  scene  so  briefly  sketched  in  this 
verse.  The  following  extract  occurs  in  tlie 
journal  of  a  college  friend,  whose  field  of  labor 
is  in  the  region  of  Paul's  birthplace.  Speaknig 
of  his  departure  with  his  family  from  Aintab 
for  a  temporary  absence,  the  missionary  says : 
"  More  than  a  hundred  of  the  converts  accom- 
panied us  out  of  the  city ;  and  there,  near  the 
spot  where  one  of  our  number  had  once  been 
stoned,  we  halted,  and  a  prayer  was  offered 
amid  tears.  Between  thirty  and  forty  escorted 
us  two  hours  farther,  on  horses  and  mules, 
singing  hymns  as  we  proceeded  on  our  way. 
Then  another  prayer  was  offered,  and  with  sad- 
dened countenances  and  with  weeping  they 
forcibly  broke  away  from  us.  It  really  seemed 
as  though  they  could  not  turn  back."' 

7-16."  FROM  TYRE  THEY  PROCEED  TO 
PTOLEMAIS,  AND  THENCE  TO  CiESAREA 
AND  JERUSALEM. 

7.  And  when  we  had  finished,  etc. — lit. 
Now  we,  completing  (thereby)  the  voyage, 
came  down  from  Tyre  to  Ptolemais. 
When  the  participle  and  the  verb  combined  thus 
are  both  in  the  past  tense,  the  act  of  the  participle 


may  be  ■antecedent  to  that  of  the  verb  or  simul- 
taneous with  it.  The  sense  must  decide  this 
ambiguity. — From  Tyre,  in  this  position,  be- 
longs to  the  verb  came  down,  not  to  voyage 
or  course  (E.  V.).  Their  arrival  at  Ptolemais 
terminated  the  sea  part  of  their  journey.  The 
distance  is  a  moderate  day's  journey  by  land.  A 
vessel  with  a  good  breeze  would  make  the  run 
in  a  few  hours.  This  city  was  the  ancient  Accho 
(judg.  1 :  31),  still  called  Akka  by  the  Arabians, 
and  Acre,  or  St.  Jean  d'Acre,  by  Europeans. 
It  is  on  the  Mediterranean,  at  the  north  angle 
of  a  bay  which  bears  the  same  name,  and 
sweeps  in  the  form  of  a  semicircle  toward  the 
south  as  far  as  Mount  Carmel.  The  graceful 
curve  of  the  bay  appears  to  great  advantage 
from  the  top  of  that  mountain. — The  breth- 
ren who  were  there.     (See  on  v.  4.) 

8.  They  now  travelled  by  land.  Issuing 
from  the  south-eastern  gate,  in  ten  minutes 
they  would  cross  the  Belus,  now  the  Nahmen, 
then  for  three  hours  would  proceed  along  the 
beach  with  the  surf  breaking  at  their  feet,  at 
the  base  of  Carmel  would  ford  the  mouth  of 
the  Kishon  (el-Mukatta),  and,  turning  that 
headland,  follow  the  line  of  the  coast  to  Ca;- 
sarea.  The  distance  hither  from  Akka  is  about 
forty  miles. — Thereceivedthat  were  of  Paul's 
company,  before  departed,  is  untenable.  A 
church  reading  began  here,  and  a  more  definite 
subject  than  we  was  needed  to  suggest  the 
connection.  The  gloss  has  passed  into  our 
English  translation.— Unto  Csesarea.  This 
is  the  third  time  that  Paul  has  been  at  Csesarea. 
He  was  there  on  his  journey  from  Jerusalem 
to  Tarsus  (9:  so),  and  again  on  his  return  to 
Antioch  from  his  second  missionary  progress 
(18 :  22).  Philip.  (See  on  8  :  40.)— The  evan- 
gelist. This  title  appears  to  have  been  given 
to  those  who  had  no  stated  pastoral  charge,  but 
travelled  from  place  to  place  and  preached  as 
they  had  op])ortunity.  (See  Eph.  4:11;  2  Tim. 
4  :  5.)    Which  was — better  who  was — of  the 


1  Rev.  B.  Schneider,  in  the  Missionary  Herald,  vol.  xlviii.  p.  201  (1852;. 


Ch.  XXL] 


THE  ACTS. 


247 


9  And  the  same  man  had  four  daughters,  virgins, 
"which  did  prophesy. 

ID  And  as  we  lurried  t/ieri'  many  days,  there  came 
down  from  Jiidrea  a  certain  prophet,  named  'Agabus. 

11  And  when  he  was  come  unto  us,  lie  took  i'auls 
girdle,  and  bound  his  own  hands  and  feet,  and  said. 
Thus  saith  the  Holy  (ihost,  ".-o  shall  the  Jews  at  Jeru- 
salem bind  the  man  that  owneth  this  girdle,  and  shall 
deliver  /lim  into  the  hands  of  the  tientiles. 

12  And  when  we  heard  these  things,  both  we,  and 
they  of  that  place,  besought  him  not  to  go  up  to  Jeru- 
salem. 

i;i  Then  Paul  answered,  "^What  mean  ye  to  weep  and 
to  break  mine  heart?  for  I  am  ready  not  to  be  bound 
only,  but  also  to  die  at  Jerusalem  for  the  name  of  the 
Lord  Jesus. 


9  Now  this  man  had  four  daughters,  virgins,  who  did 

10 prophesy.    And  as  we  tarried  there  some  days,  there 

came  down  from  Judiea  a  ccrlain  prophet,  named 

11  Agabus.  And  coming  to  us,  and  taking  I'aul  s  gir- 
dle, he  bound  his  own  feet  and  hands,  and  said, 
Thus  saith  the  Holy  >pirit.  So  shall  the  Jews  at 
Jeru.salem  bind  the  man  that  owneth  this  girdle, 
and  shall  deliver  him  into  the  hands  of  the  tien- 

12  tiles.  And  when  we  heard  these  things,  both  we 
and  they  of  that  place  besought  him  not  to  go  up 

13  to  Jerusalem.  Then  Paul  answered,  What  do  ye, 
weeping  and  breaking  my  heart.'  for  I  am  ready 
not  to  be  bound  only,  but  also  to  die  at  Jerusalem 


a  Joel  2  :28;  eh.  2  :  17....  6  ch.  11  :  28 ever.  33;  ch.  20:  23....dch.  20  :  24. 


seven  (E.  V.)  recalls  Philip  as  already  known  to 
us  in  another  capacity.  (See  6 :  5.)  But  the  best 
critics  reject  the  Greek  article  (toO)  rendered  who 
or  which;  and  the  participle  (oi-to?),  translated 
was,  becomes  then  ambiguous :  either  causal, 
since  he  was  of  the  seven  (De  Wet.,  Alf.),  or 
simply  historical,  as  in  the  other  case.  (See 
Green's  Gr.,  p.  190.)  It  is  improbable  that  the 
office  merely  influenced  Paul,  and  so  much  the 
le.ss  since,  according  to  this  view,  it  would  be 
the  inferior  oflice  which  Philip  no  longer  held, 
and  not  his  present  one.  The  particij^le  {ovtos) 
follows  the  tense  of  the  otlier  verbs,  and  is 
past.  (W.  ^45.  1.)  Philip,  a.s  an  evangelist, 
had  relinquished  his  service  at  Jerusalem ; 
perhaps  the  occasion  for  it  had  been  only 
temporary. 

9.  And  the  same  man,  or  now  this  one 
had  four  daughters,  etc.  Luke  mentions 
the  fact  as  remarkable,  and  not  as  related  in 
any  way  to  the  history.  It  is  barely  possible 
that  they  too  (see  v.  10)  foretold  the  apostle's 
approaching  captivity. 

10.  And  as  we  tarried — lit.  remaining 
several  days  (comp.  13  :  31 ;  27  :  20),  a  longer 
time  than  in  the  other  places  on  tlie  way.  Hav- 
ing travelled  rapidly  since  he  left  Miletus,  and 
being  now  witlnn  two  days  of  Jerusalem,  the 
apostle  had  no  occasion  to  hasten  his  journey. 
(See  20  :  10.) — Agabus  has  been  mentioned  in 
11  :  28.  He  cannot  well  be  a  diflerent  person, 
a.s  some  have  thought ;  for  not  only  his  name, 
but  office  (prophet)  and  residence  (from  .lu- 
dea),  are  the  same  in  both  instanct\s.  Wheth- 
er he  had  heard  of  Paul's  arrival  and  came  to 
Caesarea  on  that  account  (Bmg.)  must  be  left 
undecided. 

11.  And  bound,  etc.  The  prophet  per- 
formed the  act  on  himself,  not  on  Paul.  The 
pronoun  should  be  his  own  {avrov),  not  A/.* 
(auTou).  (Many  of  the  best  manuscripts  read 
«avToO.)     So  shall  bind,  etc.,  so  shall  bind 


at  Jerusalem  the  Jews.    The  Romans  put 

the  apostle  in  chains,  but  they  did  it  at  the 
mstigation  of  the  Jews. — Agabus,  like  the  an- 
cient prophets,  accompanied  his  predicti(jn 
with  a  symbolic  act  which  served  to  place  the 
event  foretold  more  vividly  before  them ;  the 
scene,  being  thus  acted  out  before  their  eyes, 
was  rendered  present,  real,  beyond  what  any 
mere  verbal  declaration  could  possibly  have 
made  it. 

"Segnius  irritant  animos  demissa  per  aurem 
Quani  qua;  sunt  oculis  subjecta  lidelibus,  et  quae 
Ipse  sibi  tradit  spectator."  ' 

Examples  similar  to  this  are  frequent  in  the 
Old  Testament.  (See  1  Kings  22  :  11 ;  Isa.  20  : 
1,  sq. ;  Jer.  13  :  1,  sq. ;  Ezek.  4  :  1,  sq.,  etc.) 

12.  We — viz.  the  writer,  Trophimus,  Aris- 
tarchus  (see  on  20  :  4),  and  possibly,  others. — 
The  natives  restricts  itself  to  the  Christians 
of  the  place. 

13.  What  mean  ye  is  tlie  language  of  re- 
monstrance :  What  arc  you  doiiKj  that  you  weep, 
etc.  The  same  mode  of  expression  occurs  in 
Mark  11  :  5. — For  I  am  ready,  etc.  Their 
opposition  was  not  only  painful  to  him  (to 
break  mine  heart),  but  was  useless,  for  (yap) 
he  was  not  to  be  shaken  in  his  purpose  (Da 
Wet.) ;  or,  which  agrees  better  with  J  am 
ready,  their  distress  was  unnecessary,  for  he 
deemed  it  a  privilege,  not  a  hardship,  to  suffer 
in  the  cause  of  Christ.  (Comp.  5  :  41.)  [Was 
it  rigiit  for  Paul  to  persist  in  going  up  to  Jeru- 
salem? Agabus  had  uttered  a  true  prediction, 
and  we  may  assume  that  Paul  believed  it  to  be 
true.  But  Agabus  brought  no  command  from 
the  Lord  to  Paul.  Was,  then,  this  prediction 
sent  to  him  as  an  intimation  that  he  ouglit  to 
forbear  rushing  into  such  danger?  Tliis  is  not 
affirmed.  Or  was  it  made  to  him  that  he  might 
be  prepared  for  the  result,  and  accept  it  as  a 
part  of  God's  plan  of  his  life?     Neither  is  this 


1  "Those  things  which  enter  through  the  ear  atfect  our  minds  more  slowly  than  those  that  are  presented  to 
the  faithful  eyes,  and  which  the  spectator  himself  deavers  to  himself." 


248 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


14  And  when  he  would  not  he  persuaded,  we  ceased, 
saying,  "The  will  of  the  Lord  be  doi  e. 

15  And  after  those  days  we  took  up  our  carriages, 
and  went  up  to  Jerusalem. 

16  There  went  with  us  also  cerlahi  of  the  disciples 
of  Cfesarea,  and  brought  with  them  one  JSInasou  of 
Cyprus,  an  old  disciple,  with  whom  we  should  lodge. 

17  *And  when  we  were  cometo  Jerusalem,  the  breth- 
reu  received  us  gladly.  . 


14  for  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  And  when  he 
would  not  be  persuaded,  we  ceased,  saying,  The 
will  of  the  Lord  be  done. 

15  And  after  these  days  we  Hook  up  our  baggage, and 
10  went  up  to  .Jerusalem.    And  there  went  with  us  also 

ceitnm  of  the  disciples  from  Ciesarea,  bringing  (cr/t. 
tfiptn  one  >inasoii  of  Cyprus,  an  early  disciple,  with 
whom  we  should  lodge. 
17     And  when  we  were  come  to  Jerusalem,  the  breth- 


oMatt.  6  :  10;  a6  ;  42  ;   Luke  11:2;  22  :  42 6  ch.  15  :  4.- 


-1  Or,  made  read 


affirmed.  But  the  apostle  may  perhaps  have 
believed  that  the  latter  was  God's  design,  and 
he  may  have  been  right  in  his  belief.  His  own 
purpose  seems  not  to  have  wavered ;  and  it 
surely  may  have  been  the  Spirit  of  Christ  who 
gave  him  courage  to  persevere  in  the  way  he 
had  chosen. — A.  H.] 

15.  The  text  fluctuates  here,  but  the  word 
(eTrio-KEvao-ajiei/oi)  whicli  signifies  having  packed 
up  our  baggage,  having  placed  it  upon  the 
beasts  of  burden,  has  decidedly  the  best  sup- 
port.     (Comp.   €iTL<TKfvaurdix(voi.  vito^vyia,    in   Xcn., 

Hell.,  7.  2.  18.)  This  is  ever  an  imi^ortant  item 
in  Eastern  travelling ;  and  it  was  natural  that 
Luke,  a  companion  of  the  journey,  should 
mention  it.  If  the  alms  which  they  were  car- 
rying to  Jerusalem  (24  :  17)  consisted  in  part  of 
raiment  or  provisions,  the  loading  and  unload- 
ing would  require  more  than  ordinary  atten- 
tion. Another  reading  (a7ro<r)ceuo<ra/ieKot  )  signi- 
fies having  2^^'^^^'^  away  our  baggage — i.  e.  at 
Cajsarea,  where  they  left  it,  or  at  least  the  su- 
perfluous part  of  it  (Olsh.).  The  reason  for 
such  a  step  is  not  obvious.  If  it  was  their 
sea-luggage  and  unnecessary  for  the  rest  of  the 
way,  it  is  surprising  that  they  did  not  leave  it 
at  Ptolemais,  where  they  ended  the  voyage. 
Some  insist  that  if  we  adopt  this  word  rather 
than  the  other  we  may  obtain  from  it  the 
same  meaning :  having  packed  our  baggage  away 
— i.  e.  from  the  place  where  they  had  stored  it 
— in  order  to  carry  it  with  them  (Mey.,  De 
Wet.).  That  appears  to  me  a  f(jrced  interjire- 
tation.     [In  his  last  ed.  Meyer  agrees  with  this 

remark. — A.  H.]       (-napaaKivaaafLivot.  and   aTTOTnfa- 

fLevoi  are  explanatory  variations.)— "The  Eng- 
lish Version,"  says  Mr.  Humphry,  "  uses  the 
word  '  carriage '  in  the  sense  of  '  things  car- 
ried,' baggage,  as  in  Judg.  18  :  21  and  1  Sam. 
17  :  22.  Cranmer  has  '  took  up  our  burdens,' 
and  the  Geneva  Version  '  trussed  up  our  far- 
dels.' " — For  the  route  in  "going  up"  to  Jeru- 
salem, see  on  23  :  31. 

16.  And  there  went  with  us  also  of  the 
disciples  [i.  e.  certain  of  the  disciples,  jim 
being  understood].  (Comp.  John  16 :  17.  W.  ^  64. 
4.) — Bringing  us  to  Mnason  with  whom  Ave 
should  lodge  (Olsh.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.  ayovTt^  .  .  . 


Mvda-tavi  Stands  by  attraction  for  ayovre^  napd  Mva- 

aiovairap  w^eviaduifjLfi').  His relation to tlicm  astlieir 
host  was  more  important  to  them  than  his  name, 
and  presents  itself  first,  therefore,  in  the  order 
of  statement.  Mnason  could  depend  possibly 
on  bringing — bringing  us  to  Mnason  (W. 
^  31.  5) ;  but  the  construction  is  hard.  Some 
render  bringing  Mnason — i.  e.  with  them  from 
Ciesarea,  which  attributes  to  them  an  improb- 
able act,  while  it  leaves  the  dative  equally  ir- 
regular.— An  old — ('.  e.  au  ancient  (not  an  aged) 
— disciple,  one  who  had  long  been  such.  He 
may  have  been  converted  on  the  day  of  Pente- 
cost (comp.  in  the  beginning,  in  11  :  15)  or  have 
been  a  personal  follower  of  Christ. 

17-26.  PAUL  ASSUMES  A  VOW  TO  CON- 
CILIATE THE  JEWISH  BELIEVERS. 

17.  The  ai^ostle  arrives  now  at  Jerusalem — 
for  the  Jifth  time  since  he  left  it  on  his  perse- 
cuting errand  to  Damascus.  It  is  the  last  re- 
corded visit  that  he  ever  made  to  the  Jewish 
capital.  His  present  return  could  not  have 
taken  place  later  than  the  spring  of  a.  d.  59, 
since  we  must  reserve  two  years  for  his  im- 
prisonment at  Ca^sarea  (24 :  27),  and  two  for  his 
imprisonment  at  Rome,  before  we  come  to  A.  d. 
64.  (See  Introduction,  ^6.  5.)  If  we  fix  upon 
this  limitation  on  that  side,  we  have  then  four 
j-ears  as  the  term  of  the  apostle's  third  mission- 
ary excursion,  which  we  may  distribiife  as  fol- 
lows :  He  left  Antioch  about  the  beginning  of 
A.  D.  55  (see  on  18  :  23),  and  reached  Epliesus  in 
the  spring  of  that  year.  Here  he  spent  about 
three  years  (20:31),  and  proceeded  to  Macedonia 
in  the  spring  of  a.  d.  58.  (See  on  20  :  1.)  He 
was  occuj)ied  here  and  in  other  parts  of  North- 
ern Greece  during  the  summer  and  autumn  of 
that  year  (see  on  20  :  2),  and  arrived  at  Corinth 
early  in  the  following  winter.  Having  spent 
the  next  three  months  in  that  city  (20 : 3),  he  re- 
turned to  Macedonia  and  embarked  for  Syria 
in  the  spring  of  a.  d.  59.  Or  our  scheme  of 
chronology  admits  of  a  slightly  different  com- 
bination :  If  we  suppose  two  years  and  six 
months  or  nine  months  to  exhaust  three  years, 
in  20  :  31,  we  may  assign  Paul's  return  to  Jeru- 
salem to  tlie  spring  of  the  preceding  year — viz. 
that  of  A.  D.  58.     The  apostle  may  have  left 


Ch.  XXL] 


THE  ACTS. 


249 


IS  And  the  da'i  followiiif;  Paul  went  in  with  us  unto 
"James;  and  all  the  elders  were  present 

l!i  And  when  he  had  saluted  thetu,  'he  declared  par- 
ticularly what  things  (iod  had  wrought  among  the 
Gentiles  «by  his  nii.iistry. 

•2(1  And  w-heu  they  heard  it,  they  glorified  the  Lord, 
and  said  unto  hini,  Thou  seest,  brother,  how  numy 
thousands  of  .lews  there  are  which  believe;  and  they 
are  all  ''zealous  of  the  law  : 

•J.\  And  they  are  informed  of  thee,  that  thou  teach- 
est  all  the  Jews  which  are  among  the  Gentiles  to  forsake 
Moses,  saying  that  they  ought  not  to  circumcise  Wiei/- 
children,  ueither  to  walk  alter  the  customs. 


IS  ren  received  us  gUidly.  And  the  day  following  Paul 
went  in  with  us  unlo  .lames  ,  and  all  the  elders  were 

19  present.  And  when  hehadsaluied  them,  lie  rehearsed 
one  by  one  the  things  which  God  had  wrought  among 

20  the  tientiles  by  his  ministry.  And  they,  when  they 
heard  it,  glorihed(iod  ;  and  they  said  unto  him.  Thou 
seest,  brother,  how  many  khousand>  there  are  among 
the  .Jews  of  them  who  have  believed  ,  and  they  are 

21  all  zealous  for  the  law  :  and  they  have  been  informed 
concerning  thee,  that  thou  teaehest  all  ihe  .lews 
who  are  among  the  tientiles  to  forsake  Closes,  telling 
them  not  to  circumcise  their  children,  ueither  lo 


och.  15:  13;  Gal.  1  :  19:  2  :  9....6  ch.  15  :  4,  II;  Kom.  15 


:  18.  19....cch.  1  :  17;  20:  21.... doll.  22  :  3;  Kom.  10  :  2  ;  GhI.  1  :  14. 
-1  Gr.  myriads. 


Antiocli  on  his  third  tour  sufficiently  early  in 
A.  D.  5-4  (see  on  18  :  22)  to  have  spent  several 
months  at  Ephesus  before  Pentecost  in  A.  D.  55 ; 
and  he  could  then  have  completed  the  two  re- 
maining years  of  his  residence  in  that  city  at 
Pentecost  in  A.  D.  57.  The  advantage  of  this 
computation  would  be  that  it  frees  us  from  the 
necessity  of  crowding  the  two  years  of  the  apos- 
tle's Roman  captivity  so  near  the  year  a.  d.  64. 
— The  brethren  received  us  gladly.  This 
may  refer  to  the  more  private  friendly  greet- 
ings which  preceded  the  interview  on  the  next 
day.  Luke  may  have  been  struck  with  this 
cordiality  the  more  because  Paul  and  his  friends, 
as  preachers  to  the  heathen,  had  reason  to  ap- 
prehend some  coldness.  (See  the  note  on  15  :  4 
and  Rom  15  :  31.)  The  interview  would  be 
likely  to  take  place  in  the  house  of  Mnason, 
but  the  brethren  is  too  general  to  be  under- 
stood merely  of  him  and  his  family. 

18.  The  notice  here  relates  to  a  more  public 
reception.  —  On  the  following  day,  after 
their  arrival. — With  us — viz.  Luke  and  Paul's 
other  companions.  It  was  now,  probably,  that 
the  gifts  of  the  foreign  churches  were  delivered 
up  to  the  aliiK^ners. — James.  This  is  James 
the  Younger,  who  presided  over  the  chnrcli  at 
Jerusalem.  (Comp.  12  :  17.)  As  no  one  of  the 
other  apostles  is  mentioned  in  this  part  of  the 
narrative,  it  is  probable  that  they  were  either 
not  living  or  were  laboring  in  foreign  lands. — 
The  elders.  The  pa.stor  and  the  presbyters  are 
named  as  the  principal  persons  (see  15  :  6),  not 
as  excluding  others. 

19.  Had  saluted  them — lit.  having  em- 
braced them.  He  had  performed  the  same 
act  of  courtesy  on  his  preceding  visit  to  them. 
(See  18  :  22.)— Through  his  ministry,  in  the 
course  of  his  recent  jmirney. 

20.  How  many  thousands,  rather  how 
many  myriads,  stands  ftralarge  but  indef- 
inite number:  ivhat  multitudes.  (Comp.  1  Cor. 
4  :  15  and  14  :  19.) — Zealous  of  the  law,  or 
zealots  for  the  law,  an  objective  or  causa- 
tive genitive.    (Comp.  Gal.  1 :  14.    K.  §  265.  2.  b.) 


21.  That   thou    teaehest,    etc. — lit.  that 
thou   dost  teach   apostasy  from   Moses, 

etc.  Neander  presents  the  following  just  view 
of  the  transaction  related  here :  "  This  accusation 
against  Paul  was  certainly  false  in  the  form  in 
which  it  was  alleged ;  for  he  opposed  the  ex- 
ternal observance  of  Judaism  only  so  far  as  the 
justitication  and  sanctification  of  men  were  made 
to  depend  upon  it.  It  was  his  i)rinciple  that  no 
one  should  abandon  the  national  and  civil  re- 
lations in  which  he  stood  at  the  time  of  his 
conversion,  except  for  important  reasons ;  and, 
in  accordance  with  this  principle,  he  allowed 
the  Jews  to  adhere  to  their  peculiarities,  among 
which  was  the  observance  of  the  Mosaic  law 
(i  Cor.  7 :  18).  But  it  could  uot  fail  to  happen  that 
those  who  entered  into  Paul's  ideas  of  tlie  re- 
lations of  the  law  to  the  gospel,  and  were  thus 
freed  from  their  scrupulous  regard  for  the 
former,  would  be  led  into  a  freer  line  of  con- 
duct in  this  respect ;  and  individuals  might 
carry  this  disposition  farther  than  Paul  desired. 
It  may  be  that  such  instances  gave  occasion  to 
the  charge  that  he  persuaded  the  Jewish  Chris- 
tians to  release  themselves  from  the  law.  It  is 
indeed  true  that,  when  it  was  once  admitted 
that  circumcision  avails  notliing  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  an  interest  in  the  kingdom  of  God,  this 
rite  must  sooner  or  later  fall  away  of  itself  But 
Paul  would  not  liasten  this  result  by  any  arbi- 
trary or  violent  act ;  he  would  leave  it  to  be  the 
work  of  time,  and  would  have  no  one  break 
away  capriciously  from  the  relations  in  which 
he  has  been  called  to  be  a  Christian.  Hence, 
without  deviating  from  the  principles  of  strict 
sincerity,  he  could  repel  that  accusation  of  the 
Jewish  zealots.  He  was  far  from  entertaining 
the  hatred  against  Judaism  and  the  ancient 
theocratic  nation  with  which  liis  violent  oppo- 
nents charged  liim.  In  conformity  with  the 
principle  avowed  in  his  Epistles — viz.  that  he 
became  a  Jew  to  the  Jews,  sis  he  became  a 
heathen  to  the  heathen  and  weak  to  those  who 
were  weak — he  declared  himself  ready  to  do 
what  James  proposed  to  him,  in  order  to  refute 


250 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


22  What  is  it  therefore?  the  multitude  must  needs 
come  together :  for  they  will  hear  that  thou  art  come. 

23  Do  therefore  this  that  we  say  to  thee :  We  have 
four  men  which  have  a  vow  on  them; 

24  Them  take,  aud  purify  thyself  with  them,  and  be 
at  charges  with  them,  that  they  may  "shave  Me/;' heads: 
and  all  may  know  that  those  things,  whereof  they  were 
informed  concerning  thee,  are  nothing;  but  that  thou 
thyself  also  walkesD  orderly,  and  keepest  the  law. 


22  walk  after  the  customs.    What  is  it  therefore?  they 

23  will  certainly  hear  that  thou  art  come  iJo  there- 
fore this  that  we  say  to  thee:   We  have  four  men 

24  who  have  a  vow  on  them  ;  these  take,  and  purify 
thyself  with  them,  and  be  at  charges  for  them,  that 
they  may  shave  their  heads:  and  all  shall  know 
that  tliere  is  no  truth  in  the  things  whereof  they 
have  been  informed  concerning  thee ;  but  that  thou 


o  Num.  6  :  2,  13,  18 ;  ch.  18  :  18. 


that  accusation.  He  consented  to  refute  it  by 
taking  part  in  the  Jewish  worship  in  a  mode 
which  was  higlily  esteemed  by  pious  Jews." 

22.  What,  therefore,  is  it? — viz.  which 
the  occasion  requires.  (Comp.  1  Cor.  14  :  15, 
IG.) — The  multitude,  etc. — lit.  it  is  en- 
tirely necessary  (inevitable)  that  a  mul- 
titude (viz.  of  the  Jewish  Christians)  should 
come  together;  i.  e.  around  Paul  as  he 
appeared  in  their  public  assemblies,  in  the 
temple  and  elsewhere,  in  order  to  watch  his 
conduct  and  see  whether  their  suspicions  of 
him  were  just.  It  is  not  meant  that  the 
church  would  assenible  in  a  body  for  the  pur- 
pose of  consultation  (Calv.,  Grot.) ;  for  with 
that  idea  we  should  have  had  the  before  mul- 
titude. (Comp.  4  :  32;  15  :  12,  30.)  Nor  does 
the  language  intimate  that  Paul's  advisers  ap- 
preliended  any  violent  outbreak  on  the  part,  of 
the  Jewish  Christians  (Kuin.) ;  the  subsequent 
riot  which  led  to  his  apprehension  originated, 
not  with  them,  bvit  with  the  unbelieving  Jews. 
(Comp.  v.  27.)  [It  may  also  be  noted  that  Treg., 
West,  and  Plort,  and  the  Anglo-Ani.  Revisers 
omit  the  words  n  multitude  must  come  together  as 
an  addition  to  the  original  text.  Treg.  adduces 
B  C*  the  Pcshito  and  Ilarklcan  Syriac,  the  Mem- 
phitic,  Thebaic,  and  Armenian  versions  for  tlie 
omission.  For  the  whole  verse  with  these  words 
omitted,  see  the  Revised  Version  above. — A.  H.] 

23.  This  that,  or  which,  we  say  to  thee 
— viz.  James  and  the  elders  ;  for  the  subject  of 
this  verb  must  be  the  same  as  that  of  said,  in 
V.  20.  The  narrative  does  not  allow  us  to  sepa- 
rate James  from  the  others,  as  if  he  merely  ac- 
quiesced in  the  proposal,  while  the  responsibility 
of  suggesting  it  lay  wholly  with  them  (against 
Cony,  and  Hws.). — The  four  men  were  cer- 
tainly Jews,  and  may  be  supposed,  from  the 
relation  implied  in  we  have,  to  have  been  also 
Jewish  believers. — Which  have,  or  having,  a 
vow  upon  themselves,  which,  as  appears 
from  every  circumstance  of  the  description, 
must  have  been  a  Nazarite  vow.  This  vow 
bound  those  who  assumed  it  to  let  the  hair 
grow,  to  abstain  from  intoxicating  drink,  and 
in  other  respects  to  maintain  a  life  of  ascetic 
rigor  (Num.  6:2,  s«.).     It  was  left  to  their  option 


how  long  they  continued  such  a  vow,  though 
it  seems  to  have  been  customary  among  the 
Jews  of  this  period  to  extend  it  at  least  to 
thirty  days  (Jos.,  Bell.  Jud.,  2.  15.  1).  "  When 
the  time  specified  in  the  vow  was  completed,  the 
Nazarite  offered  a  ram  of  a  year  old  for  a  burnt- 
offering,  a  sheep  of  the  same  age  for  a  sin-olfer- 
ing,  a  ram  for  a  thank-offering,  a  basket  of  un- 
leavened cakes,  and  a  libation  of  wine.  His  hair 
was  shaven  off  at  the  gate  of  the  sanctuarj',  and 
cast  into  the  fire  where  the  thank-oU'ering  was 
burning.  He  offered  as  a  wave-offering  to  God 
the  shoulders  of  the  thank-offering  and  two 
cakes,  which  were  both  given  to  the  priest" 
{Jahn^s  Archieol.,  '<ji_  395). 

24.  Them  take — lit.  these  taking — with 
thyself,  as  associates  in  the  vow. — Purify  thy- 
self with  them,  enter  upon  the  same  course  of 
abstinence  and  religious  consecration.  Cony- 
beare  and  Ilowson  understand  purify  thyself 
of  the  ordinary  ablutions  before  entering  tlie  tem- 
ple; but  in  that  case  with  them  loses  its  sig- 
nificance, since  the  apostle's  purification  would 
have  no  more  relation  to  them  than  to  any 
other  Jews. — And  be  at  charges  with  them, 
strictly  spend  upon  them,  incur  exjjense  on  tlieir 
account.  "As,  in  some  instances,  the  Nazarites 
had  not  sufficient  property  to  enable  tliem  to 
meet  tlie  whole  expense  of  the  offerings,  other 
persons  who  possessed  more  defrayed  the  ex- 
pense for  them  or  shared  it  with  tliem,  and  in 
this  way  were  made  parties  to  the  vow."  The 
Jews  looked  upon  it  as  an  act  of  special  merit 
to  assist  a  Nazarite  in  this  manner.  Joseph  us 
relates  (Antt.,  19.  6.  1)  that  Agrippa  I.,  on  liis 
arrival  at  Jerusalem  after  having  obtained  tlie 
sovereignty  of  Palestine,  paid  the  expense  of 
numerous  indigent  Nazarites  who  were  wait- 
ing to  be  released  from  their  vows.  He  intended 
it  as  a  tliank-offering  for  his  good  fortune. — 
And  all  may  know.  [According  to  the  true 
text,  N  A  B  C  D  E,  and  other  documents,  it 
must  be  translated  with  Dr.  Hackett]  and  all 
shall  know,  by  this  act.  The  readings  {yvaxri  and 
yvMo-oivrai)  rendered  all  may  know  (E.  V.)  are  gram- 
matical corrections,  founded  on  the  false  view 
that  this  clause  depends  on  that,  in  the  previous 
clause.     Thyself  also,  as  well  as  other  Jews. 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


251 


25  As  touching;  the  (ientiles  which  believe,  "we  have 
written  aihl  cuiiciuded  that  they  observe  no  such  thing, 
save  oiilv  that  they  keep  th'-iuselves  from  thintjs  otlered 
to  idols,  and  from  blood,  and  from  strangled,  and  from 
fornication. 

•Id  Then  I'aul  took  the  men,  and  the  next  day  puri- 
fying himself  with  them  'entered  into  th>- temple,  no 
signify  the  acconiplishnient  of  the  days  of  purifica- 
tion, until  that  au  oil'ering  should  be  otlered  for  every 
one  of  theui. 


25thyseir  also  walkest  orderly,  keefing  the  law.  Hut 
as  tooching  the  t  .entiles  who  lia\e  believed,  we 
'wrote,  giving  judgment  that  they  should  keep 
theuLselves  from  things  sacriticed  to  idols,  and  Ironi 
blood,  and  from  what  is  strangled,  and  from  forni- 

2t; cation.  Then  I'aul  -took  the  men,  and  the  ue.\t 
day  purifying  himself  wiih  them  went  into  the 
temple,  declaring  the  fultilment  of  the  days  of  puri- 
fication, until  the  otlering  was  otlered  for  every  one 
of  them. 


acb.  15  :  20,  19.... h  cb.  24  :  18. ...c  Num.  6  :  1.1. 1  Or,  enjoined    Many  anciuuC  authorities  read  sent 2  Or,  took  the  men  tke 

next  day,  and  purifying  hinuelf,  etc. 


25.  As  touching,  etc.  But  (a.s  we  are 
both  aware)  in  regard  to  the  Gentiles  who 
have  believed,  etc.— We — i.  e.  the  apostles 
ami  Christians  at  Jerusalem,  for  the  adoption 
of  the  decree  was  proi)erly  their  act  (contp.  15  : 
22),  and  not  that  of  Paul  and  the  other  delegates 
from  Antiocli,  who  submitted  to  them  the  ques- 
tion wliicli  the  decree  settled  (i5:  i).  The  object 
of  the  reminiscent  remark  in  this  ver.se  was  to 
obviate  any  scruple  that  Paul  might  feel  lest 
the  proposed  measure  should  interfere  with  the 
liberty  of  the  Gentile  converts. — Save  only, 
etc.     (See  the  note  on  15  :  20.) 

26.  Took  refers  to  his  connecting  himself 
with  the  men  (v.  24),  while  purifying  himself 
defines  the  nature  of  the  cunnection.  The 
next  day — I.  e.  on  the  following  day  after  his 
interview  with  James,  and  the  third  since  his 
arrival  at  Jerusalem  (v.  is). — With  them  be- 
longs certainly  to  purifying  himself  (see  v. 
24),  and  perhai>s  to  entered  into — not,  in  the 
latter  case,  necessarily  because  he  now  took 
them  to  the  temple  in  order  to  absolve  them 
at  once  from  their  vow  (Cony,  and  Hws.),  but 
because  it  maj'  have  been  important  that  they 
should  be  present  when  he  declared  liis  inten- 
tion to  assume  their  expenses. — To  signify, 
etc. — i.e.  announcing — viz.  to  the  priests  (into 
the  temple  suggests  the  persons) — the  com- 
pletion [\it.  Jillinr/  out)  of  the  days  of  the 
purification.  In  other  words,  making  known 
the  interval  (viz.  seven  dtiys)  between  this  dec- 
laration and  the  end  of  the  vow  and  the  bring- 
ing of  the  necessary  offerings.  So  essentially 
Stier,  Kuinoel,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  Wordsworth, 
and  others.  The,  before  purification,  de- 
tines  the  purific.ntion  as  that  referred  to  in  puri- 
fying himself  with  them  ;  hence  that  of 
those  associated  in  the  act,  not  that  of  the  men 
merely,  and  not  that  of  Paul  merely  (both  mis- 
takes have  been  made).  The  convenience  of 
the  priests  may  have  required  tliis  notification 
to  entible  them  to  prepare  for  the  concluding 
ceremony  at  the  temple.  Others  (as  Wiesl.) 
explain  accomplishment  of  the  actual  ex- 
piration of  the  days  during  which  the  men's 
vow  was  to  continue.    Such  a  view  leaves  no 


time  for  the  apostle's  partnership  with  them, 
and  thus  conflicts  both  with  purifying  him> 
self  with  them,  and  with  found  me  puri- 
fied in  the  temple,  in  24  :  18.  The  apostle's 
arrest  (v.  27)  was  subsequent  to  his  present  ap- 
pearance in  the  temple,  and  at  the  time  of  the 
arrest,  as  we  see  from  the  words  just  quoted,  he 
was  still  observing  his  part  of  the  vow. — Until 
that  an  offering — rather  until  the  offering 
(known  as  necessary) — was  brought.  Thi.s 
clause  depends  naturally  on  announcing,  etc., 
and,  as  it  formed  a  i)art  of  the  notice  which  Paul 
gave  in  the  temple  (hence  oratio  dirccta),  would 
have  naturally  the  subjunctive  {until  it  should 
be  brought,  as  in  23  :  12,  21;  25  :  21),  in.stead 
of  the  indicative.  It  may  be  an  in.stance,  as 
Meyer  suggests,  in  which  the  direct  form  of 
the  announcement  glides  over  into  the  past 
of  the  narrative.  (See  K.,  Ausfh.  Gr.,  ^  846.) 
Some  carry  Ixick  the  clause  to  entered  into 
thetemple  as  elliptical:  went  into  the  temple 
and  stayed  there  until  the  offering  was  brought. 
In  that  case  we  must  pass  over  the  nearer  point 
of  connection  for  a  remoter  one,  and  must  even 
insert  the  word  in  the  text  which  rendei-s  that 
connection  possible.  Further,  it  is  improbable 
that  Paul  lodged  two  or  three  days  in  the  tem- 
ple ;  and  yet,  as  he  si)caks  of  himself  as  there 
on  the  day  of  the  riot,  in  order  to  bring  the 
final  offerings  (24:18),  it  would  follow,  on  this 
view  of  the  subject,  that  he  had  remaint><l  there 
from  his  first  repairing  to  the  temple  till  tliat 
time.  The  true  em])liasis  of  for  every  one 
lies  in  the  fact  that  Paul  was  to  be  answerable 
for  the  expenses  of  the  offering  of  each  one,  not 
(as  Cony,  and  Hws.)  that  he  would  remain  in 
the  temple  until  each  one's  offering"  was  pre- 
sented. [If  the  course  of  Paul  in  following  the 
advice  of  James  is  called  in  question  as  incon- 
sistent with  his  religious  principles,  and  there- 
fore immoral,  it  may  be  answered — (1)  That  he 
had  all  along  conceded  to  Jewish  Cliristians  a 
right  to  observe  the  Mosaic  law,  and  had  recog- 
nized the  fiict  that  Peter,  James,  and  John  were 
as  truly  entrusted  with  tlie  apostleship  for  the 
circumcision  as  lie  himself  was  with  the  apos- 
tleship for  the  uncircumcision   (Gai.  2:7).     (2) 


252 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXL 


27  And  when  the  seven  days  were  almost  ended, 
"the  Jews  which  were  of  Asia,  when  they  saw  hiiu  i,i 
the  temple,  stirred  up  all  the  people,  and  'laid  hands 
on  hiiu, 

28  Crying  out.  Men  of  Israel,  help:  This  is  the  man, 
'that  teacheth  all  men  every  where  against  the  i)eople, 
and  the  law,  and  this  place:  and  further  brought 
Ci reeks  also  iulo  the  temple,  and  hath  polluted  this 
holy  place. 


27  And  when  the  seven  days  were  almost  completed, 
the  Jews  from  Asia,  when  they  saw  him  in  thr  tem- 
ple, stirred  up  all  the  multitude,  and  laid  hands  on 

28  him,  crying  out.  Men  of  Israel,  help:  This  is  the 
man,  that  teacheth  all  men  everywhere  against  the 
people,  and  the  law,  and  this  place:  and  moreover 
he  brought  Greeks  also  into  the  temple,  and  hath 


och.  24  :  18 6  ch.  26  :  21 c  ch.  24  :  5,  6. 


Tlii.s  conces.sion,  since  he  was  himself  a  Jew, 
might  now  be  openly  made  by  joining  with 
Cliristian  Jews  in  a  ceremony  of  tlie  law,  pro- 
vided his  motive  in  so  doing  was  not  likely  to 
be  misunderstood.  And  we  may  assume  that 
at  thii5  time  any  misunderstanding  of  it  would 
be  very  imi)robable,  since  his  teacliing  as  to 
Gentile  converts  was  well  Icnown.  He  had  in- 
sisted with  cm})hasis  upon  tlie  fact  that  observ- 
ing the  law  <;if  Moses  was  not  a  means  of  sal- 
vation and  must  not  be  required  of  Gentile 
Christians;  he  might,  therefore,  now  safely 
show  that  he  did  not  condemn  his  Jewish 
brethren  for  observing  the  law  of  their  fathers, 
though  doing  this  was  not  a  means  of  salva- 
tion. (3)  This  expression  of  fellowship  with 
them,  while  they  were  walking  by  the  light 
which  they  had  received,  would,  it  was  hoped, 
win  their  good-will  and  perhaps  diminish  the 
bitter  enmity  which  burned  against  him  in 
the  hearts  of  unbelieving  Jews.  Thus,  with- 
out sacrificing  an  iota  of  Christian  principle, 
he  consented  to  live  as  a  Jew  with  the  Jews 
that  he  might  lead  them  into  the  truth.— 
A.  H.] 

27-30.  PAUL  IS  SEIZED  BY  THE  JEWS 
AND  DRAGGED  FROM  THE  TEMPLE. 

27.  And  when  the  seven  days,  etc.,  or  now 
as  the  seven  days,  were  about  to  be  com- 
pleted— i.  c.  in  all  probability  the  seven  days 
announced  to  the  priests  as  the  limit  to  which 
the  vow  of  the  Nazarites  would  extend,  and  as 
the  period,  also,  of  the  ajjostle's  partnership  in 
that  consecration.  This  is  the  readiest  exjilana- 
tion,  and  tlie  one  to  which  niost  critics  assent 
(Bng.,  Kuin.,  Olsh.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Alf.). 
Neander's  idea  is  that  their  vow  embraced  only 
seven  days  in  all,  and  that  Paul  joined  them  on 
the  last  of  these  days.  Against  that  construc- 
tion stands  the  inference  from  which  have  a 
vow  on  tlteni,  in  v.  23,  that  the  vow  had  been 
resting  on  them  for  a  considerable  time  before 
the  apostle's  connection  witli  tliem,  and  also 
that  that  they  may  shave  their  heads  (v.  24)  would 
signify  very  little,  if  the  ceremony  was  to  take 
place  at  the  expiration  of  a  single  week. — 
Wieseler  (p.  105)  lias  revived  the  opinion  of 
some  of  the  older  intcrjjreters — viz.  that  the 


seven  days  were  those  observed  as  the  feast 
of  Pentecost.  His  arguments  are  mainly  two 
— first,  as  obviating  an  objection  that  this 
meaning  suggests  itself  readily  enough  after 
the  information  (20:i6)  that  Paul  was  liastening 
to  keei)  the  Pentecost  at  Jerusalem ;  and  sec- 
ondly, that  the  reckoning  of  the  twelve  days 
between  his  arrival  there  and  his  subsequent 
trial  at  Ca?sarea  demands  this  explanation. 
Conybeare  and  Howson  adopt  the  same  view. 
But  tlie  article  before  seven  days  recalls  quite 
irresistibly  tlie  days  of  the  jmrification  just  spoken 
of,  and  the  twelve  days  mentioned  in  24  :  11 
may  be  computed  in  different  ways  (see  note 
there),  and  hence,  though  compatible  with  that 
theory,  do  not  establish  it.  Above  all,  the  as- 
sumption that  the  Jews  observed  Pentecost  as 
a  hebdomadal  festival  is  too  uncertain  to  be 
made  the  basis  of  an  explanation.  The  law  of 
its  institution  prescribed  but  one  day,  though 
the  later  Jews,  it  would  seem,  added  a  second. 
(Win.,  Realw.,  i.  p.  243.) — The  Jews  which 
were  of  Asia — lit.  the  Jews  from  Asia;  i.e. 
the  province  of  that  name,  where  Paul  had  resid- 
ed so  long  (20 :  31).  Some  of  them  may  have  been 
from  Ephesus,  who  would  recognize  Trophimus 
(v.  29)  as  a  fellow-townsman.  The  Jews  here, 
the  authors  of  this  riot,  were  not  believers,  and 
hence  not  of  the  class  of  Jews  whom  the  apostle 
exjiected  to  conciliate. 

28.  Help — i.  e.  to  apprehend  him,  or  to 
wreak  vengeance  on  him. — And  further,  etc., 
and  further  also.  (Comp.  2  :  2(3.)  It  is  one  of 
Luke's  i)eculiar  phrases. — Greeks  may  be  the 
plural  of  the  class  or  category,  because  what 
Paul  had  done  in  the  case  of  one  he  might  be 
said,  in  point  of  principle,  to  have  done  for 
many ;  or  it  may  have  liecn  an  exaggeration 
for  the  purpose  of  increasing  the  tumult. — 
Into  the  temple — i.  e.  the  part  of  it  inter- 
dicted to  foreigners.  The  outer  court  or  en- 
closure was  called  the  Court  of  the  Gentiles, 
and  could  be  entered  by  them  without  i)rofana- 
tion.  The  second  court,  or  tliat  of  the  Israel- 
ites, was  surrounded  with  marble  pillars,  on 
which,  as  Pliilo  states,  was  inscribed,  in  Latin 
and  Greek,  "  On  penalty  of  death,  let  no  for- 
eigner go  farther." 


Oh.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


253 


29  (For  they  had  seen  hefore  with  him  in  the  city 
"Trophimus  an  Kphesian,  whom  tliey  sui>i)osed  that 
Paul  had  lirouKht  into  tlie  temple.) 

30  And  'all  the  city  was  moved,  and  the  people  ran 
together:  and  they  took  I'aul,  and  drew  him  out  of 
the  temple:  and  forthwith  the  doors  were  shut. 

31  And  as  they  went  about  to  kill  him,  tidings  came 
unto  the  chief  captain  of  tiie  band,  that  all  Jerusalem 
was  in  an  uproar. 

32  'Who  immediately  took  soldiers  and  centurions, 
and  ran  down  unto  them:  and  when  they  saw  the 
chief  captain  and  the  soldiers,  they  left  beating  of 
Paul. 

3:i  Then  the  chief  captain  came  near,  and  took  him, 
and  ''coniniaMded  /lim  to  be  bound  with  two  chains; 
and  demanded  who  he  was,  and  what  he  had  done. 


29  defiled  this  holy  place.  For  they  had  before  seen 
with  him  in  the  city  Trophimus  tlie  i.|ihesian, 
whom  they  supposed  that   I'aul  had   liroughl   into 

30  the  temple.  And  all  the  city  was  moved,  and  the 
people  ran  together:  and  they  laid  hold  un  I'aul, 
and  dragged  him  out  of  the  temple:  and  straight- 

31  way  the  doors  were  shut.  .\nd  as  they  were  seek- 
ing to  kill  him,  tidings  came  up  to  the  'chief  cap- 
tain   of    the    '-'baid,    that    all    Jerusalem    was    in 

32 confusion.  And  forthwith  he  took  soldiers  and 
centurions,  and  ran  down  upon  them  :  and  they, 
when  they  saw  the  chief  eui>tain  and  the  soldiers, 

33  left  off  beating  I'aul.  '1  hen  the  chiel  captain  came 
near,  and  laid  hold  on  him,  and  comma,  ded  him  to 
be  bound  with  two  chains;   and  inquired  who  he 


aah.  20  :  i 6  ch.   26:21 cch.  23:27;    24:7 d  ver.   U  ;  cli.  20:2.1. 1  Or,  military  tribune    Gr.  chiliarch:  aod  so 

throughout  thi:«  book.... 2  Or,  cohort 


29.  Had  seen  before,  on  some  previous  oc- 
casion, or  po.ssibly  had  scoi  awny,  at  a  distance 
(Mey.).  [In  his  fourtli  ed.  Meyer  adopts  the 
temporal  sense,  translating  thus:  "For  there  ivere 
people  who  had  before  (before  they  saw  the  apos- 
tle in  the  temple,  v.  27)  seen  Trophimus  with  him." 
— A.  H.]  In  this  compoiuid  the  preposition 
refers  elsewhere  to  the  future  (out  of  question 
here)  or  to  space,  not  to  past  time  (R.  and  P., 
Lex.).  The  retrospective  sense  lies  so  near  to 
the  use  of  before  (irpo),  and  occurs  so  readily 
here,  that  we  need  not  scruple  to  admit  it. — For 
Trophimus,  see  on  20  : 4.  He  was  a  foreigner 
(Ephesian),  and  not  a  Jew  from  Ephesus. — 
When  they  supposed — were  supposing— etc. 
Tliey  had  seen  Trophimus  in  the  city  with  him, 
and  front  that  rushed  to  the  conclusion  that  he 
had  brought  Greeks  into  the  temple.  "  Zelota3 
putantes,"  says  Bengel,  " stei)e  errant"  ["  Zealots, 
in  supposing,  often  err"]. 

30.  Drew  him,  etc.,  or  dragged  him,  out 
of  the  temple,  so  as  not  to  pollute  it  with 
blood  ( Olsh.,  Mey..  De  Wet.).  They  had  deter- 
mined already  to  kill  him.  Bengel  conjectures 
(whom  Bmg.  follows)  that  they  wished  to  pre- 
vent him  from  taking  refuge  at  the  altar.  But 
the  Mosaic  law  restricted  the  right  of  asylum 
to  those  who  had  been  guilty  of  accidental 
murder.  (See  Ex.  21 :  13,  14.)— The  doors  (of 
tlie  second  court)  were  closed,  probably  by 
the  Levites,  who  had  the  care  of  the  temple. 
(See  the  note  on  4  :  1.)  They  may  have  feared 
that  the  crowd  would  return  or  some  new  dis- 
turbance arise. 

31-40.  THE  ROMAN  COMMANDER  RES- 
CUES PAUL  FROM  THE  HANDS  OF  THE 
JEWS. 

31.  And  as  they  went  about,  etc.,  or  now 
while  they  are  seeking,  to  kill  him.  They 
were  beating  liim  for  that  purpose.  (See  v.  32.) 
But,  a-s  the  onset  had  been  sudden  and  they  were 
not  furnished  witii  weapons,  some  delay  inter- 
vened.   It  w^as  nothing,  iu  all  human  appear- 


ance, but  that  momentary  delay  tliat  saved  now 
the  life  of  the  apostle.  The  Roman  officer  had 
time  to  appear  and  snatch  him  from  impending 
death. — Tidings  came,  etc.,  a  report  went 
up,  to  the  chiliarch  of  the  cohort.  (See 
his  name  in  23  :  20.)  It  was  but  the  work  of  a 
moment  to  convey  to  him  the  information.  He 
had  his  station  in  the  Castle  of  Antonia,  wliich 
was  on  a  rock  or  hill  at  the  north-west  angle 
of  the  tcmi)le-area.  The  tower  at  the  south- 
east corner  of  the  castle  "  was  seventy  cubits 
high,  and  overlooked  the  whole  temple  with 
its  courts.  Tiie  fortress  communicated  with 
the  northern  and  western  porticos  of  the  tem- 
ple-area and  had  flights  of  stairs  descending 
into  both,  by  which  the  garrison  could  at  any 
time  enter  the  court  of  the  temi)le  and  prevent 
tumults"  {Bihl.  Res.,  i.  p.  432).  During  the 
festivals  it  was  customary  to  keep  the  troops 
in  readiness  to  suppress  the  riots  which  were  so 
liable  to  occur  at  such  times.  (Comp.  on  10  : 
37,  and  see  Jos.,  Antt.,  20.  5. 3 ;  Bell.  Jud.,  5. 5.  8.) 
— The  Turkish  garrison  stands  at  present  very 
nearly  on  the  site  of  the  old  castle.  The  trav- 
eller obtains  liis  best  view  of  the  Court  of  the 
Harem,  or  mosque  of  Omar,  tlie  ancient  tem- 
ple-area, from  the  roof  of  this  garrison. 

32.  Centurions,  eacii  with  his  proj)cr  com- 
plement of  men.  The  chiliarch  ordered  out  a 
force  sufficiently  large  to  intimidate  all  opposi- 
tion.— Ran  down  unto — better  upon — them. 
To  that  despatch  Paul  was  indebted  for  liis 
escape.  Note  also  immediately.  This  verb 
corresponds  to  ivcnt  up,  in  v.  31. — Now  Avhen 
they  saw  the  chiliarch,  etc.  They  knew 
the  consequences  too  well  to  run  the  risk  of  a 
collision  with  the  Roman  troops.  (See  on  19  : 
24.) 

33.  To  be  bound  with  two  chains — /.  e. 
to  have  his  arms  fastcncil  to  two  soldiers,  one 
on  each  side  of  him.  Tlie  mode  was  dcscril)e<l 
in  tlie  note  on  12  :  (5. — Who  he  was — lit.  who 
he  might  be,  since  his  name  and  rank  were 


254 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


31  And  some  cried  one  thing,  some  another,  among 
the  multitude:  and  when  he  could  not  know  the  cer- 
tainty for  the  tumult,  he  commanded  him  to  be  car- 
ried into  the  ca.stle. 

3o  And  when  he  came  upon  the  stairs,  so  it  was,  that 
he  was  borne  of  the  soldiers  lor  the  vio.ence  of  the 
people. 

3ii  For  the  multitude  of  the  people  followed  after, 
crying,  "Away  with  him. 

37  And  as  Paul  was  to  be  led  into  the  castle,  he  said 
unto  the  chief  captain,  .May  I  speak  unto  thee?  Who 
said,  Canst  thou  speak  (jreek  ? 

38  'Art  Tiot  thou  that  Egyptian,  which  before  these 
days  madest  an  uproar,  and  leddest  out  into  the  wil- 
derness four  thousand  men  that  were  murderers? 


34  was,  and  what  he  had  done.  And  some  shouted 
one  thing,  some  another,  among  the  crowd:  and 
when  he  could  not  know  the  certainty  lor  the  up- 
roar, he  commanded  him   to  be  brought  into  the 

35 castle.  And  when  he  came  upon  the  stairs,  so  it 
was,  that  he  was  borne  of  the  soldiers  for  the  vio- 

36  lence  of  the  crowd  ;  for  the  multitude  of  the  people 
followed  after,  crying  out.  Away  with  him. 

37  And  as  Paul  was  about  to  be  brought  into  the  cas- 
tle, he  saith  unto  the  chief  captain,  .May  I  say  some- 
thing  unto   thee?     And   he  said.  Dost  thou   know 

38  Greek?  Art  thou  not  then  the  Egyptian,  who  be- 
fore thesi'  days  stirred  up  to  sedition  and  led  out 
into  the  wilderness  the  lour  thousand  men  of  the 


a  Luke  23  :  18  ;  John  19  :  15  ;  ch.  22  :  22. . .  .6  See  ch.  5  :  I 


uncertain. — And   what  he  has  done.    The 

form  of  tlie  inquiry  presupposes  that  he  had 
committed  some  crime.  (W.  §  41.  4.  c.)  He 
put  the  question  to  the  crowd,  as  the  respon- 
sive clamor  sliows  in  the  next  verse. 

34.  Into  the  castle,  ratlier  into  the  garrison 
or  barracks ;  not  the  castle  as  a  whole  (E.  V.), 
but  the  part  of  it  assigned  to  the  soldiers. 

35.  Upon  the  stairs  which  led  up  to  the 
castle.  On  arriving  here  the  crowd  jiressed  on 
Paul,  so  as  to  awaken  the  fear  of  some  outrage 
or  treachery.  Some  think  that  he  was  lifted 
off  his  feet  by  the  throng,  and  then  taken  and 
carried  up  the  stairs. — So  it  was,  or  it  hap- 
pened, that  he  was  borne  (in  their  arms  or 
on  their  shoulders)  by  the  soldiers.  It 
happened  is  not  superfluous.  Was  borne 
alone  would  have  pointed  out  less  distinctly 
the  peril  of  his  situation,  as  evinced  by  their 
adopting  such  a  precaution. 

36.  Now  was  heard  again  the  shout  which 
thirty  years  before  surrounded  the  prjEtorium 
of  Pilate,  "Away  with  him,  away  with  him  " 
(Cony,  and  Hws.).  Away  with  (alpe)  is  im- 
perative present,  because  followed  after  (im- 
perf.)  represents  the  cry  as  a  continued  one. 
(See  22 :  22.  Comp.  away  with  (apov),  in  John 
19  :  15,  where  the  aorist  precedes.) 

37.  Canst  thou  speak  Greek? — lit.  dost 
thou  know  Greek?  The  adverb  stands  in  the 
place  of  the  object  (comp.  oOtw,  in  20  :  13),  and 
to  speak  is  not  to  be  supplied  (Kuin.).  (Comp. 
those  understanding  Si/riac,  in  Xen.,  Cj/r.,  7.  5. 
31,  and  in  Latin  Grxce  nescire.     Mey.,  De  Wet.) 

38.  Art  not  thou,  etc.,  more  precisely,  Art 
thou  not  therefore  the  Egyptian?— i.e.  as  I 
supposed.  The  negative  particle  here  used  (oOk) 
indicates  an  affirmative  answer  with  reference 
to  the  speaker's  former  state  of  mind.  (W.  ?  57. 
3.)  The  commander,  on  being  addressed  in 
Greek,  concludes  that  he  is  mistaken ;  for  it 
was  notorious  (it  would  seem)  that  the  Egyp- 
tian was  unable  to  speak  that  language.  He 
could   not  have  drawn  that  inference  solely 


from  his  Egyptian  origin,  for  the  Greek  was 
now  spoken  more  or  less  in  almost  every  coun- 
try.—Of  this  Egyptian  impostor  Josephus  has 
given  two  different  accounts,  which  need  to  be 
reconciled  with  each  other  as  well  as  with  Luke. 
In  his  Bell.  Jud.  (2. 13. 5)  he  relates  that  a  juggler 
(vorjs),  whom  he  also  denominates  the  Egyp- 
tian, having  procured  for  himself  the  reputa- 
tion of  a  prophet,  led  a  great  multitude  of 
about  thirty  thousand  men  out  of  the  desert 
to  the  Mount  of  Olives,  and  promised  them 
that  the  walls  of  Jerusalem  would  fall  down 
at  his  command  ;  but  Felix  fell  upon  them,  the 
Egyptian  fled  with  a  small  number — lit.  with  a 
few.  Most  of  his  followers  were  slain  or  taken 
prisoners,  and  the  rest  of  the  crowd  (to  Xoi-nhv 
■n\T)&oi)  dispersed.  In  his  Antt.  (20.  7.  6;  he 
wrote  this  work  later  than  his  Jewish  War)  he 
states  that  this  Egyptian  came  to  Jerusalem, 
that  he  persuaded  the  populace  to  go  out  with 
him  to  the  Mount  of  Olives,  where  he  would 
exhibit  to  them  the  wonder  before  mentioned ; 
and  then  he  speaks  of  the  attack  of  Felix,  and 
in  that  connection  says  merely  that  four  hun- 
dred of  the  Egyptian's  people  were  slain  and 
two  hundred  were  taken  captive,  without  any 
further  addition.  "Here,  now,"  says  Tholuck 
{Glaubwiirdigkeit,  p.  169),  "  Joseplius  has  in  all 
appearance  contradicted  himself  in  the  most 
glaring  manner ;  for  in  one  case  the  Egyptian 
brings  the  people  from  the  desert  to  the  Mount 
of  Olives,  in  the  other  from  Jerusalem  ;  in  the 
one  case  the  greater  part  of  tliirty  thousand 
people  are  slain  or  taken  prisoners,  in  the  other 
the  number  of  the  slain  amounts  to  only  four 
hundred — tliat  of  the  prisoners  to  only  two 
hundred.  This  example  serves  to  illustrate 
an  important  rule  of  criticism,  so  often  viola- 
ted by  sceptical  writers  in  relation  to  the  Bible, 
and  that  is  that,  if  the  general  credibility  of 
an  historian  be  acknowledged,  we  are  bound 
to  reconcile  an  apparent  difference  by  interpre- 
tation or  combination.  The  application  of  this 
principle  here  enables  us  to  view  the  matter 


Ch.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


255 


39  But  Paul  said,  «I  am  a  man  irhich  am  a  Jew  of  '  39  Assassins?    Rut  Paul  said,  1  am  a  Jew,  of  Tarsus  in 


Tarsus,  «  cili/  in  Cilicia,  a  citizen  of  no  mean  city 
aiid,  1  beseech  thee,  sutler  me  to  speak  unto  the 
people. 

•Ill  And  when  he  had  given  him  license,  Paul  stood 
CD  the  stairs,  and '•beckoned  witli  tlie  hand  unto  the 
people.  And  when  there  was  made  a  great  silence,  he 
spake  unto  them  in  the  Hebrew  tongue,  saying, 


Cilicia,  a  citizen  of  no  mean  city:  and  I  beseech 
40  thee,  give  me  leave  to  speak  unto  the  (leoplc.  And 
when  he  had  given  him  leave,  Paul,  standing  on 
the  stairs,  beckoned  with  the  hand  unto  the  people; 
and  when  there  was  made  a  great  silence,  he  spake 
unto  them  in  the  Hebrew  language,  saying, 


M 


CH.A.PTER    XXII. 

brethren,  and  fathers,  hear  ye  my  defence  1    1     Brkthren  and  fathers,  hear  ye  the  defence  which 


EX 

wfiic/i  I  iiKik 


now  unto  you. 


I  now  make  unto  you. 


a  ch.  9  :  11  ;  22  :  3. . .  .6  ch.  12  :  17. 


thus.  The  man  had  at  first  a  band  of  sicaril, 
and  a  rabble  had  also  attaclied  themselves  to 
him ;  these  people  he  leaves  behind  on  the 
Mount  of  Olives,  and  leads  thither  out  of  Je- 
ru.salem  an  additional  crowd  ;  so  that  the  entire 
multitude  might  amount  to  about  thirty  thou- 
sand men.  As  usually  happens  in  such  cases, 
curiosity  merely  had  drawn  together  most  of 
them.  Only  a  smaller  company  belonged  to 
the  train  of  his  followers,  and  among  these 
were  the  sicarii ;  the  attack  of  the  Romans 
was  directed  properly  against  these,  of  whom 
Felix  slew  four  hundred,  and  made  two  hun- 
dred prisoners.  With  a  small  number — i.  e. 
with  the  four  thousand  of  whom  Luke  speaks — he 
escaped  into  the  desert ;  the  remaining  mass — 
i.  e.  the  multitude  of  which  the  first  passage  of 
Josephus  speaks — dispersed.  In  this  or  in  a 
similar  way  the  Jewish  historian  may  be  rec- 
onciled with  himself  and  with  the  writer  of 
the  Acts."— Into  the  desert — viz.  between 
Egypt  and  PaLsine,  as  he  came  from  that  di- 
rection.— The  four  thousand.  The  event 
was  so  recent  that  the  precise  number  was 
still  known.  The  same  Felix  was  Procurator 
of  Judca  at  this  time.  (See  23  :  24.) — Murder- 
ers, sicarii,  assassim,  a  Latinism.  They  received 
their  name  from  the  Roman  sica,  a  curved  dag- 
ger adapted  by  its  form  to  be  concealed  beneath 
the  clothes ;  they  could  use  it  for  striking  a 
fatal  blow  in  a  crowd  without  being  observed. 

39.  I  am  a  man,  etc.,  as  analyzed  by  Meyer, 
contains  two  clauses:  I  am  indeed  (^€1')  not 
the  Egyptian,  but  a  JeAV  from  Tarsus.  And 
{Si),  below,  can  hardly  be  antithetic. — Cilicia 
depends  on  city ;  not  in  apposition  with  an 
imi)lied  genitive  in  of  Tarsus  (E.  V.). — Xo 
mean,  not  unnoted.  On  the  contrarj',  says 
Josejjhus  {Antt.,  1.  6.  1),  the  most  important 
city  of  all  Cilicia.  Many  of  the  coins  of 
Tarsus  bear  the  title  of  Autonomous  and  3fe- 
tropolis.     (See  on  9  :  30.) 

40.  Paul  stood,  etc.  "What  nobler  spec- 
tacle," exclaims  Chryscjstom,  "  than  that  of 
Paul  at  this  moment !    There  he  stands,  bound 


with  two  chains,  ready  to  make  his  defence  to 
the  people.  The  Roman  commander  sits  Ijy 
to  enforce  order  by  his  presence.  xVn  enraged 
po{)ulace  look  up  to  him  from  below.  Yet  in 
the  midst  of  so  many  dangers,  how  self-pos- 
sessed is  he,  how  traiKiuil !"  In  the  Hebrew 
tongue — lit.  dialect ;  i.  e.  in  the  Syro-Chaldaic 
or  Aramtean,  as  in  John  5:2;  19  :  13.  (See 
on  G  :  1.)  In  that  language,  if  lie  was  not  more 
intelligible  to  most  of  his  hearers,  he  could  at 
least  "  speak  more  directly  to  the  hearts  of 
the  people." 


1-21.  PAUL'S  SPEECH  OX  THE  STAIRS 
OF  THE  CASTLE. 

1.  As  we  e.xamined  Luke's  account  of  Paul's 
conversion  (9  :  i-is)  in  connection  with  this  ad- 
dress, it  will  be  sufficient,  for  the  most  part,  to 
refer  the  student  to  the  notes  there,  so  far  as 
the  two  narratives  coincide.  I  subjoin  Mr. 
Humphry's  introductory  paragraph  :  "Though 
tlie  subject-matter  of  this  speech  has  been  re- 
lated before,  it  assumes  here  a  fresh  interest 
from  the  manner  in  which  it  is  adapted  to  the 
occasion  and  the  audience.  The  apostle  is  sus- 
pected of  disaffection  to  the  Mosaic  law.  In 
order  to  refute  this  charge,  he  addresses  them 
in  Hebrew;  he  dwells  on  his  .lewisli  education 
and  on  his  early  zeal  for  the  law  ;  he  shows  how 
at  his  conversion  he  was  guided  by  Ananias,  a 
man  devout  according  to  the  law,  and  of  good 
report  among  the  Jews  at  Dama.scus,  and  how 
he  subsequently  worshipped  in  the  temple  at 
Jerusalem.  So  far  they  listen  to  him ;  but  he 
no  sooner  touches  on  the  promulgation  of 
the  gospel  among  the  heathen  (v.  21)  than 
he  is  interrupted,  and  liis  ftite  would  probably 
have  been  the  same  as  Stephen's,  had  he  not 
been  under  the  protection  of  the  Roman  cap- 
tain."— For  brethren  and  fathers,  see  on 
7  :  2.  Some  of  the  rulers  mingled  with  the 
crowd,  whom  Paul  knew  personally  or  recog- 
nized by  some  badge  of  office.  Here  too  (1 :  le) 
men  is  comjilimentary  and  belongs  with  that 


256 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXII. 


2  (And  when  they  heard  that  he  spake  in  the  He- 
brew tongue  to  them,  they  kept  the  more  silence :  and 
he  saith,  i 

3  "l  am  verily  a  man  which  am  a  Jew,  born  in  Tar- 
sus, a  cily  in  (  ilicia,  yet  brought  up  in  this  city,  'at 
the  feet  of  "damaliel,  and  taught  ''according  to  the  per- 
fect manner  of  the  law  of  the  fathers,  and  was  "zealous 
toward  <.od,  /as  ye  all  are  ihis  day. 

4  wAnd  J  persecuted  this  way  unto  the  death,  bind- 
ing and  delivering  unto  prisons  both  men  and  women. 

o  As  also  the  high  priest  doth  bear  me  witness,  and 
*all  the  estate  of  the  elders:  'from  whom  also  i  re- 
ceived letters  unto  the  brethren,  and  went  to  Damas- 
cus, to  bring  them  which  were  there  bound  unto  Jeru- 
salem, for  to  be  punished. 

6  And  *it  came  to  pass,  that,  as  I  made  my  journey, 


2  And  when  they  heard  that  he  spake  unto  them  in 
the  Hebrew  language,  they  were  the  more  quiet :  and 
he  saith, 

3  1  am  a  Jew,  born  in  Tarsus  of  Cilicia,  but  brought 
up  in  this  city,  at  the  feet  of  Gamaliel,  instructed 
according  to  the  strict  manner  of  the  law  of  our 
fathers,  being  zealous  for  God,  even  as  ye  all  are 

4  this  day  :  and  1  persecuted  this  Way  unto  "the  death, 
binding  aid  delivering  into  prisons  both  men  and 

5  women.  As  aNo  the  high  priest  doth  bear  me  wit- 
ness, and  all  the  estate  of  the  elders;  from  whom 
also  I  received  letters  unto  the  brethren,  and  jour- 
neyed to  Damascus,  to  bring  them  also  that  were 
there  unto  Jerusultin  in  bonds,  lor  to  be  punished. 

6  And  it  came  to  pass,  that,  as  1  made  my  journey, 


ach.  21: 

X>; 

2  Cor 

11 

22 

Phil 

3 

:.■>. 

..6Deut. 

33 

3;  2 

Kings 

4  :  38 ;  L 

ike  10 

39.... c 

ah. 

5:34 

d 

ch 

26 

:5. 

ech 

.21 

:  20 

;   fial. 

1  :  14.. 

..f 

Rom. 

10:2... 

■  g  oh. 

8: 

3; 

k6:9,   10, 

11 

Pbil 

3:6 

1  Tim. 

:  13.. 

A  Luke 

22 

:66; 

oh 

4 

6. 

ch 

9 

:  2; 

26  : 

10, 

12 

*oh.  9 

:3; 

2I>:  12 

13. 

force  to  both  nouns. — The  pronoun  my  (ijlov) 
depends,  not  on  hear  {aKov(rare ;  comp.  1  :  4), 
but  on  defence  (anoKoylai). 

3.  Tlie  conunon  rule  would  jilace  verily  (fteV) 
after  the  participle  (yey€vvTrifx4vo<;,  born).  [But 
the  best  editors  reject  tliis  particle  (verily)  as 
an  addition  to  the  text  of  Luke.  The  sense  is 
perfect  without  it,  and  the  MSS.  K  A  B  D  E  and 
others  do  not  have  it. — A.  H.]  It  stands  out  of 
its  place  now  and  then  in  the  best  writers.  (W. 
I  61.  5.)  Tlie  opposition  lies,  evidently,  between 
Paul's  foreign  birth  and  his  education  at  Jeru- 
salem.—  In,  or  of,  Cilicia  depends,  not  on 
city,  understood,  but  on  Tarsus  under  the 
rule  of  possession.  (W.  ?  30.  2.) — Critics  point 
this  sentence  differently.  Many  of  the  older 
commentators,  whom  Meyer  follows,  place  the 
comma  after  Gamaliel,  instead  of  city,  so  as 
to  bring  a  participle  at  the  head  of  the  several 
clauses.  This  division  promotes  the  rhythm  at 
the  expense  of  the  sense.  The  comma  should 
be  put,  undoubtedly,  after  city  (Grsb.,  Lchm., 
De  Wet.).  Tischendorf  follows  this  punctua- 
tion in  his  second  edition  [and  in  his  eighth]. 
At  the  feet  of  Gamaliel  is  appropriate  to 

taught  (TreTraiSeVjOieVos),  but   UOt  tO   brOUght    Up 

(avaTeSpa/jLiiivo^),  tlic  latter  having  respect  to  his 
physical  growth  or  progress  to  manhood ;  the 
former,  to  his  professional  training.  Having 
been  brought  up  in  this  city  forbids  the 
supposition  that  Paul  was  an  adult  when  he 
went  to  reside  at  Jerusalem.  (Comp.,  also,  26  : 
4.)  He  must  have  removed  thither  from  Tar- 
sus in  his  boyliood  or  early  youth.  It  is  sur- 
prising that  Eichhorn  and  Hemsen  shoitld 
maintain,  in  opposition  to  such  evidence,  that 
Paul  did  not  enter  the  school  of  Gamaliel  until 
the  thirtieth  year  of  his  age.  (See  note  on  7  : 
58.)  To  be  taught  at  one's  feet  was  a  proverbial 
expression  among  the  Jews,  founded  on  the  fact 
that  in  their  schools  the  teachers,  whether  they 
stood  or  sat,  occupied  a  higher  place  tlian  the 


pupils.  (Schottg.,  Hor.  Hcbr.,  p.  477.)  Ac- 
cording to  the  perfect  manner  =  after  the 
most  straitest  sect,  in  2G  :  5.  Paul  had  been 
a  Pharisee,  and  in  his  zeal  for  Judaism  had  sur- 
passed all  the  adherents  of  that  sect  who  had 
been  stitdents  with  him  under  Gamaliel.  (See 
Gal.  1 :  13.) — The  paternal  law  (irarpioowoixov) 
=  law  of  the  fathers  (vo/iiou  tmv  iraTipoiv). 
(Comp.  Tw  TriTpoj'o.  &ew,  ill  24:  14.)  —  Toward 
God — lit.  of  God.  The  genitive  (<>£oO)  is  like 
the  genitive  in  21  :  20. 

4.  This  Avay  (19:23)  stands  concisely  for 
those  of  this  way.  (Comp.  9  :  2.)— Unto  the 
death,  rather  unto  death.  Not  the  aim  merely 
(Grot.,  Mey.),  but  result,  of  his  persecution. 
The  facts  in  the  case  justify  the  strongest 
sense  of  the  expression.  (See  v.  20  and  26  : 
10.)  —  Both  men  and  women.  (See  on 
8  :  2.) 

5.  As  also  the  high  priest  doth  bear  me 
witness,  or  testifies  (  =  is  witness),  for  me 
— i.  e.  the  high  priest  at  that  time  (see  on  9  : 
1),  who  was  known  to  be  still  living.  Some 
construe  the  verb  incorrectly  as  future. —  Unto 
the  brethren  =  to  the  synagogues,  in  9  :  2 
— i.  e.  unto  the  Jewish  rulers  of  the  synagogue, 
whom  Paul  recognizes  as  brethren  (as  in  v.  1) 
to  show  that  he  was  not  hostile  to  his  country- 
men or  alienated  from  them  (21 :  28).  (Comp. 
Rom.  9  :  1,  sq.)  Was  journeying,  not  went 
(E.  v.). — To  bring,  etc. — lit.  in  order  to 
bring  also  those  there;  lit.  thither,  because 
the  speaker's  mind  passes  from  where  he  is  to 
them.  Not  the  emigrants  thither  (Mey.,  Alf.), 
since  the  Jews  had  resided  there  too  long  to  be 
viewed  in  that  light. — For  to  be  punished, 
or,  that  they  might  be  punished — viz.  by 
imprisonment  (v.  4;  8:3),  by  stripes  (v.  19;  2«:  11), 
or  by  death  (v.  4;  8: 1). 

6.  And  it  came  to  pass,  etc.,  or  but  it 
happened  to  me  as  I  journeyed  (the  pavt\- 
ciple  as  imperfect)  that,  etc.— To  me  jour- 


Ch.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


257 


and  was  come  nigh  unto  Dainasciis  about  noon,  sud- 
denly there  shone  from  heaven  a  great  light  round 
about  me. 

7  And  I  fell  unto  the  ground,  and  heard  a  voice  saying 
unto  uie,  Saul,  Saul,  why  persecutest  thou  me? 

s  And  1  answered.  Who  art  thou,  Lord?  And  he 
said  unto  nie,  I  am  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  whom  thou  per- 
secutest. 

9  And  "they  that  were  with  me  saw  indeed  the  light, 
and  were  afraid;  but  they  heard  not  the  voice  of  him 
that  spake  to  me. 

10  And  I  .said.  What  shall  I  do,  Lord?  And  the  Lord 
said  unto  me,  -Arise,  and  go  into  Damascus;  and  there 
it  shall  be  told  thee  of  all  things  which  are  appointed 
for  thee  to  do. 

11  And  when  I  could  not  see  for  the  glory  of  that 
light,  being  led  by  the  hand  of  them  that  were  with 
me,  1  came  into  Damascus. 

12  And  'one  .Vnanias,  a  devout  man  according  to  the 
law, 'having  a  good  report  of  all  the  ''Jews  which  dwelt 
there, 

13  Came  unto  me,  and  stood,  and  said  unto  rae, 
Brother  Saul,  receive  thy  sight.  And  the  same  hour 
I  looked  up  upon  him. 


and  drew  nigh  unto  Damascus,  about  noon,  sud- 
denly there  shone  Irom  heaven  a  great  light  round 

7  about  me.  And  1  fell  unto  the  grocind,  and  heard  a 
voice  saying  unto  me,  Saul,  ."^aul,  why  i  erseoulest 

8  thou  me".'  And  1  answered,  Who  art  thou,  l.ora  .' 
And  he  said  nnto  me,  1  am  .lesus  of  Nazareth,  whom 

9  thou  persecutest.  And  they  that  were  with  me  be- 
held indeed  ihe  light,  but  they  heard  not  the  voice 

10  of  him  that  spake  to  me.  Ami  1  said.  What  shall  I 
do,  Lord?  And  the  Lord  said  unto  me,  Arise,  and 
go  into  l)aniascus;  and  there  it  shall  b  •  told  thee  of 

11  all  things  which  are  appointed  for  thee  to  do.  And 
when  1  conld  i  ot  see  for  the  glory  of  that  light,  be- 
ing led  by  the  hand  of  them  that  were  with  me,  I 

12 came  into  Dama.scus.  And  one  Ananias,  a  devout 
man  according  to  the  law,  well  reported  of  by  all 

13  the  Jews  that  dwrlt  there,  came  unto  me,  and  stand- 
ing by  me  said  untu  nie,  brother  .saul,  receive  thy 
sight.    And  in  that  very  hour  1  'looked  up  on  him. 


a  Dan.  10  :  7  ;  ch.  9:  7.... 6  oh.  9  :  I7....cch.  10:  Tl....d  1  Tim.  3  :  7.- 


-1  Or,  received  my  aight  and  looked  upon  him. 


neyiiig  is  not  an  instance  of  the  dative  abso- 
Ivite,  but  depends  on  it  happened.  (Comp.  v. 
17.  W.  §31.2.  R.  2.)— About  mid-day.  (Seeon 
9  :  3.)  Tliiit  lie  should  have  had  siieh  a  vision 
(a  great  light)  at  such  an  hour  made  it  the 
more  iinpos.siI)le  that  lie  should  be  deceived. — 
For  jrepi,  in  7repia<TTpa<|/at,  repeated  before  €/x«,  see 
on  3  :  2. 

7.  The  first  aorist  termination  (en-eo-a),  wliich 
is  changed  in  some  copies  to  the  second  aorist 
[ineaov),  is  ail  Alexandrian  form.  (Comp.  Gal. 
5  :  4.  W.  §  13.  1.  a.)  Transcribers  have  prob- 
ably altered  this  termination  to  the  second 
aorist  in  some  other  passages,  as  John  6  :  10 ; 
Heb.  3  :  17  ;  Rev.  7  :  11.  For  the  same  form  in 
the  classics,  see  K.  ?  154.  R.  2;  B.  ?  114. 

9.  They  that  were  with  me  =  the  men 
that  journeyed  with  him,  in  9  :  7.  (Comi). 
2() :  14.)  So  those  might  be  de.scribed  who  haj)- 
peiicd  to  tie  travelling  with  Saul  in  the  same 
camvan  ;  but  the  common  view  is  more  correct 
— that  they  are  the  men  who  accompanied  him 
as  his  assistants.  He  would  need  the  aid  of 
others  to  enable  him  to  convey  his  prisoners  in 
safety  to  Jerusalem  (v.  ."i). — But  they  heard 
not,  rather  but  the  voice  of  him  who 
spoke  to  me  they  understood  not.  For 
this  translation,  see  the  remarks  on  9  :  7. 

11.  And  when,  etc.,  or  as  now,  I  saAV 
not— I.  ('.  anything;  here  only  without  an  object. 
—For  the  glory,  etc.— lit.  from  the  glory, 
splendor— of  that  light,  wliich  was  "  above  the 
brightness  of  the  sun."  (See  26  :  13.)  "The 
history  (9:9)  mentions  .simply  the  fact  of  his 
blindness,  but  the  apostle  states  its  cause,  as  an 
eye-witness  would  naturally  do"  (Birks,  p.  328).* 


12.  Religious   (ewe^^s)   is    the    authorized 
word,  not  devout  (evAaj3>)s).     [According  to  evi- 
dence now  accessible,  the  latter  instead  of  the 
former  is  the  authorized  word.     Thus  culabcs  is 
given  by  K  B  II  L  P,  and  is  received  into  the 
text  by  all  the  late  editors,  while  euscbes  is  found 
in  but  one  uncial  code.x,  E,  and  is  therefore  re- 
i  jected. — A.  H.]    "  The  historian  (9 :  10)  calls  An- 
i  anias  a  disciple ;  but  the  apostle  '  a  devout  man 
'•  according  to  the  law,  having  a  good  report  of 
I  all  the  Jews  who  dwelt  there.'    Such  a  descrip- 
I  tion   was  admirably  suited  to  his  immediate 
;  object — to  conciliate  his  audience  in  every  law- 
I  ful  way.     How  ct)nsi.stent  it  was  with  the  other 
I  account  appears  from  21  :  20,  in  the  words  of 
!  James:  '  Thou  seest,  brother,  how  many  tliou- 
i  sands  of  Jews  there  are  who  believe,  and  they 
I  arc.  (ill  zealous  of  the  law^  "  (Birks,  p.  329). — That 
I  dwelt — (■.  c.  in  Damascus. 
I      13.  And    stood,   or    standing    near,   in 
order  to  place  his  hands  upon  him.     (Comp. 
9  :  17.)  —  The    recapitulation    here   omits   the 
j  vision  to  Ananias,  related  so  fully  in  the  his- 
1  tory.      (Comp.  9  :  10,  sq.)     The   circumstances 
of  that  event  were  unimportant  to  the  apostle's 
defence,  and  wotild  have  made  his  commission 
to  the  Gentiles  needlessly  prominent  at   this 
I  stage  of  his  address. — Receive  thy  sight — lit. 
look  up  and  see;  and  so  in  the  next  clause, 
i  I  looked  up  upon  him.     We  are  to  think 
of  Paul   as   sitting   there  blind,  and   Ananias 
as    standing    before    him    (Mey.).      The    verb 
does  not  vary  its  meaning,  but  suggests  in  the 
first  instance  wliat   it  asserts  in   the  second. 
The  involved  idea  prevails  over  the  direct  one 
in  such  a  use  as  that  in  9  :  12. 


'  Hurx  Aposloliae,  by  the  Rev.  T.  R.  Birks,  late  Fellow  of  Trinity  College;  Cambridge  (London,  1850). 
17 


258 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXII. 


14  And  he  said,  "The  God  of  our  fathers  'hath 
chosen  thee,  that  thou  shouldest  know  his  will,  and 
«see  "^that  Just  One,  and  "shouldest  hear  the  voice  of 
his  mouth. 

lo  /lor  thou  shalt  be  his  witness  unto  all  men  of 
»what  thou  hast  seen  and  heard. 

id  And  now  why  taniest  thou?  arise,  and  be  bap- 
tized, '■and  wash  away  thy  sins,  "calling  on  the  name 
of  the  Lord. 


14  And  he  said,  The  Ood  of  our  fathers  hath  appointed 
thee  to  know  his  will,  and  to  see  the  Righteous  One, 

15  and  to  hear  a  voice  from  his  mouth.     1-or  thou  shalt 
be  a  witness  for  him  unto  all  men  of  what  thou  hast 

Ifi  seen  and  heard.    And  now  why  tarriest  thou  ?  arise, 
and  be  baptized,  and  wash  away  thy  sins,  calling  on 


och.  3  :  13;  5:30....5ch.  9:  15;   26:  16....cl  Cor.  9:1;  15  :  8....d  ch.  3  :  14  ;  7  :  52....e  1   Cor.  11  :  23  ;  Gal.  1  :  12. 
23  :  ll....guh.  4  :  20 ;  26:  16 A  ch.  2  :  38 ;  Ueb.  10  :  22....t  ch.  »  :  14  ;   Kom.  10:  13. 


14.  The  God  of  our  fathers  is  another  of 
"  those  conciliatory  touches  which  mark  a  real 
discourse." — Hath  chosen  thee,  etc.,  or  ap- 
pointed (destined,  as  in  3  :  20)  thee,  to  know 

his  will,  not  as  to  tlie  way  of  saving  men  (/.  e. 
counsel,  in  20  :  27),  but  as  to  wliat  he  was  to  do 
and  suffer  in  his  future  spliere  of  labor.  (Comp. 
9  :  15,  16.) — And  to  see.  (See  the  last  remark 
on  9  :  7.) — That  Just  One,  or  the  Just  One,  as 
in  3  :  14 ;  7  :  52. 

15.  For  thou  shalt  be  his  witness,  or 
a  witness  for  him,  unto  all  men.  This  is  the 
reason  why  Christ  had  revealed  himself  to 
Paul.  (Comp.  Gal.  1  :  16.)  All  men  takes  the 
place  of  Gentiles  and  kings  and  the  chil- 
dren of  Israel,  in  9  :  15.  The  more  guarded 
phraseology  here  evinces  the  tact  of  the  speaker. 
Paul  would  keep  back  for  the  present  the  of- 
fensive unto  Gentiles,  which,  when  uttered  at 
length  (v.  2i),  was  the  last  word  the  bigoted 
Jews  would  bear  from  him.— The  idea  of  our 
English  "  martyr  "  was  not  attached  to  witness 
(/iopTup  or  fidprvt)  till  a  later  period.  We  see  the 
word  in  its  progress  to  that  signification  in  v.  20 
and  Rev.  17  :  6.  Toward  the  close  of  the  second 
century  it  had  become  so  honorable  a  title  tliat 
the  Christians  at  Lyons  who  had  been  con- 
demned to  suffer  torture  or  death,  fearful  that 
they  might  waver  in  the  moment  of  extremity, 
refused  to  be  called  "  martyrs."  "  This  name," 
said  they,  "properly  belongs  only  to  the  true 
and  faithful  Witness,  the  Prince  of  life,  or  at 
least  only  to  those  whose  testimony  Christ  has 
sealed  by  their  constancy  to  the  end.  We  are 
but  poor,  humble  confessors  —  i.  e.  6/116A0701." 
(Euseb.,  Hi3t.,  5.  2.) — Of  which  {uv)  instead 
of  which  (a),  required  by  the  verb,  arises  from 
the  suppressed  those  things  {UeCvi^v)  after  wit- 
ness. [The  full  expression  would  therefore  be 
of  those  th  ings  which  thou  hast  seen  and  heard.  The 
English  what  represents  both  the  demonstrative 
and  relative — viz.  that  which  or  those  things  which 
— and  so  gives  the  implied  as  well  as  the  ex- 
pressed meaning  of  the  Greek. — A.  H.] 

16.  Arise  stands  opposed  to  tarriest  thou 
— I.  e.  without  delay.  (See  on  9  :  IS.)— Be  bap- 
tized,   or,   with    a    stricter  adherence  to   the 


form,  have  thyself  baptized  (De  Wet.). 
One  of  the  uses  of  the  middle  is  to  express 
an  act  which  a  person  procures  another  to 
perform  for  him.  (W.  g  38.  3 ;  K.  250.  R. 
2.)  This  is  the  only  instance  in  which  the 
verb  occurs  in  this  voice  with  reference  to 
Christian  baptism.  In  the  analogous  case 
(1  Cor.  10  : 2)  tlie  reading  is  middle  or  passive 
[with  a  considerable  predominance  of  author- 
ity in  favor  of  the  passive. —  A.  H.]. —  And 
wash  (bathe)  away  thy  sins.  This  clause 
states  a  result  of  the  baptism  in  language  de- 
rived from  the  nature  of  that  ordinance.  It 
answers  to  for  the  remission  of  sins,  in  2  : 
38 — i.  e.  submit  to  the  rite  in  order  to  be  for- 
given. In  both  passages  baptism  is  represented 
as  having  this  importance  or  efficacy,  because 
it  is  the  sign  of  the  repentance  and  faith  which 
are  the  conditions  of  salvation.  (Comp.  ye  are 
ivashed,  in  1  Cor.  6 :  11.)  [Baptism  represents  the 
new  or  spiritual  birth  by  which  the  subject  of 
it  enters  on  a  life  of  trust  in  Christ  and  peace 
with  God,  or,  more  exactly,  by  which  he  has 
entered  upon  this  new  life.  For  this  entrance 
upon  the  new  life  must,  in  the  order  of  time, 
precede  the  ritual  act  by  which  it  is  voluntarily 
confessed.  Hence,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  every 
proper  subject  of  baptism  is  already  a  believer 
in  Christ,  regenerate,  forgiven,  cleansed,  and 
baptism  simply  bears  witness,  by  a  solemn 
emblematic  rite,  of  that  which  has  been  done 
for  and  by  the  candidate  in  his  spiritual  rela- 
tions to  God.  "  When  any  declaration  or  ser- 
vice is  the  appointed  means  of  professing  faith 
or  obedience,  making  such  profession  or  per- 
forming such  service  is  said  to  secure  the  bless- 
ings which  are  promised  to  the  faith  thereby 
professed"  (Hodge).  The  spiritual  facts  are 
pictured,  as  it  were,  and  so  acknowledged,  by 
the  significant  ordinance  prescribed  by  the 
Lord. — A.  H.]  The  sort  of  outward  washing 
expressed  by  this  verb  has  been  noticed  on 
16  :  33.  Hence,  there  can  be  no  question  as 
to  the  mode  of  baptism  in  this  instance;  for 
if  it  be  maintained  that  baptisai  is  uncertain  in 
its  meaning,  a  definition  is  added  in  apolousai 
which  removes  the  doubt.— Calling  on  the 


Ch.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


259 


17  And  "it  came  to  pass,  tliat,  when  I  was  come  again 
to  Jerusalem,  even  wliile  I  pi'ayed  in  the  temple,  1  was 
in  a  trance ; 

l.s  And  '■saw  him  saying  unto  me,  "Make  haste,  and 
get  thee  quickly  out  of  Jerusalem :  for  they  will  not 
receive  thj'  testiniouy  concerning  me. 

I'J  And  1  said,  Lord,  ''ihey  know  that  I  imprisoned 
and  'beat  in  every  svuagogue  them  that  believed  on 
thee: 

iO  /And  when  the  bio  d  of  thy  martyr  Stephen  was 
shed,  1  also  was  standing  by,  ai.d"  ^consenting  uiito  his 
death,  and  kejit  the  raiment  of  them  that  slew  him. 

•Jl  And  he  said  unto  me.  Depart:  *for  1  will  send 
thvC  far  hence  unto  the  tieiitiies. 

21  And  they  gave  him  audience  unto  this  word,  and 
thru  lifted  up  their  voices,  and  said,  'Away  with  such 
a. fellow  from  the  earth:  for  it  is  not  fit  that  *he  should 
live. 


17  his  name.  And  it  came  to  pas.^,  that,  when  I  had 
returned  to  .lerusalem,  and  while  I  prayed  in  the 

18  temple,  I  fell  into  a  trance,  and  saw  him  .-aying 
unto  me.  Make  haste,  and  get  thee  quickly  out  of 
Jerusalem:   because   they  will  not  receive" of  thee 

19  testimony  concerning  me.  And  1  said,  Lord,  they 
themselves  know  that  I   imprisoned  and   beat  in 

20 every  synagogue  them  that  believed  on  thee:  and 
when  the  blood  of  .Steiihen  thy  witness  was  shed,  ( 
also  was  standing  by,  and  consenting,  and  keeping 

21  the  garments  of  them  that  slew  him.  And  he  said 
unto  me.  Depart:  for  1  will  send  thee  forth  far 
hence  unto  the  Gentiles. 

22  And  they  gave  him  audience  unto  this  word  :  and 
they  lifted  up  their  voice,  and  said.  Away  with  such 
a  fellow  from  the  earth:  for  it  is  not  fit  that  he 


och.  9:  26;  2  Cor.  12:  2.... 6  ver.  14. . . . c  M.itt.  10  :  U....d  ver.  4;  ch.  8  :  3..  ..e  Matt.  10  :  17..../ ch.  7  :  58.  ...j  Lulie  11  :  48  ;  ch.  8  :  1  ; 

Koin.  1  :  :12 Ach.  9  :  16;   l:t  :  2,  4«,  47  ;  IS  :  6;  26  :  17  ;  Eom.  1  :5;  11  :  13;  15  :  16  ;  Gal.  1  :  15,  16;  2  :  7,  8;  Euh.  3  :  7,  8  ;  1  Tim.  2  ;  7; 

2  Tim.  1  :  II ten.  21  :  m....kati.  25  :  21. 


name  of  the  Lord,  or  on  his  name.  Hisname 
siipjilies  essL'iitially  the  i)lace  of  in,  or  upon, 
the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  in  2  :  38.  (See 
the  nnte  on  that  chiuse.)  The  Lord  after 
name  has  mucli  less  support  tlian  his.  The 
proimun  can  refer  only  to  Christ.  (Comp.  on 
'J  :  14.) 

17.  For  this  journey  to  Jerusalem,  see  on  9  : 
10. — It  happened  {iyivtTo)  governs  to  me 
(noi),  as  in  v.  G. — In  while  I  prayed  the  con- 
struction changes  to  the  genitive  absolute.  On 
account  of  this  intervening  clause,  the  accus- 
ative (^le)  accompanies  was  (yfi'/o-i^ot),  though 
happened,  or  came  to  pass  (ty^'v^To),  has  the 
same  logical  subject.  (See  on  15  :  23.  W.  ^  44. 
3.) — On  trance,  or  ecstasy,  see  10  :  10.  Some, 
as  Schott,  Wieseler,  and  others,  would  identify 
this  "  ecstasy  "  witli  the  vision  to  which  Paul 
alludes  in  2  Cor.  12  :  2,  and  would  establish  by 
this  coincidence  the  date  of  the  composition  of 
that  Epistle.  But  as  the  apostle  had  so  many 
similar  revelations  in  the  course  of  his  life,  and 
as  the  character  of  this  vision  is  so  unlike  that 
described  in  2  Cor.  12  :  2,  the  conjecture  that 
they  are  the  same  must  be  pronounced  vague 
and  improbable. 

18.  Quickly  accords  with  Gal.  1  :  18.  On 
this  first  visit  Paul  remained  at  Jerusalem  but 
fifteen  days,  and  received  tliis  command,  prob- 
ably, on  one  of  the  last  of  them.  In  that  pas- 
sage of  the  Epistle  the  ap  >stle  says  nothing 
respecting  this  vision  in  the  temple,  as  it  was 
sufficient  for  his  object  to  mention  the  reason 
for  this  journey  thither  and  the  brevity  of  his 
stay. — For,  or  because,  they  (viz.  his  uncon- 
verted countrymen)  will  not  receive  thy  tes- 
timony— t.  e.  although  he  should  continue  to 
declare  it  to  them.     (See  the  note  on  9  :  30.) 

19.  I  said,  etc.  The  apostle  states  the  rea- 
son here  why  he  supposed  Jerusalem  to  be  his 
proper  field  of  labor.     His  liistory  as  a  con- 


verted blasphemer  and  persecutor  was  noto- 
rious in  that  city ;  the  testimony  of  such  a 
man  might  be  expected  to  have  more  weight 
among  those  who  had  witnessed  the  change  in 
his  character  than  among  those  to  whom  his 
previous  life  was  unknown. 

20.  Of  thy  witness,  not  martyr  (E.  V.). 
(See  on  v.  15.) — I  also,  or  then  (see  on  1  :  10), 
I  myself. — In  respect  to  consenting,  see  the 
note  on  8  :  1.  Unto  his  death  the  critical 
editions  of  the  text  omit  or  put  in  brackets. 
It  is  probably  an  addition  from  8  : 1. — On  kept, 
etc.  {<t>v\a.<T(Tmv,  K.  T.  A.),  scc  7  :  58. 

21.  Depart  is  present,  because  he  was  to 
obey  at  once.  He  proceeded  to  Syria  and  Ci- 
licia  (9 :  30  and  Gal.  1 :  21 ),  and  remained  there  three 
or  four  years  before  his  arrival  at  Antioch.  (See 
on  9  :  30. )  As  he  was  ordered  to  leave  Jerusa- 
lem because  God  would  send  him  to  the  Gen- 
tiles, we  may  infer  (though  this  is  not  the  com- 
mon opinion)  that  he  preached  to  heathen  tis 
well  as  Jews  during  his  sojourn  in  those  re- 
gions. (See  note  on  13  :  3.) — "  Paul  relates  this 
vision  to  show,"  as  Alford  remarks,  "  that  his 
own  inclination  and  prayer  had  been  that  he 
miyhl  preach  the  gospel  to  his  own  peojile,  but  that 
it  was  by  the  imperative  command  of  the  Lord 
himself  that  he  went  to  the  Gentiles." 

22-29.  PAUL  PLEADS  HIS  ROMAN  CIT- 
IZENSHIP, AND  ESCAPES  THE  TORTURE. 

22.  Gave  him  audience,  continued  to  hear. 
—Unto  this  Avord— viz.  that  God  would  send 
him  to  the  heathen. — Away  with  (aXpt)  is 
present,  because  it  was  a  repeated  cry.  (See  on 
21 :37.) — For  the  article  with  such  a  one,  the 
one  such  as  he,  see  on  19  :  25. — For  it  was 
not  fit  he  should  live,  imperfect,  because  he 
had  forfeited  life  long  ago.  (W.  ?  41.  2.)  Meyer 
refers  the  past  tense  to  the  chil larch's  interfe- 
rence :  he  ought  not  to  have  rescued  the  man, 
but  should  have  left  him  to  his  fate.    Some 


260 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXII. 


23  And  as  they  cried  out,  and  cast  off  /heir  clothes, 
and  threw  dust  iuto  the  air, 

24  The  chief  captain  commanded  him  to  he  brought 
into  the  castle,  and  bade  that  he  should  he  examined 
by  scourging;  that  he  might  know  wherefore  they 
cried  so  against  him. 

25  And  as  they  bound  him  with  thongs,  Paul  said 
UMto  the  centurion  that  stood  by,  "Is  it  lawful  for  you 
to  scourge  a  man  that  is  a  Roman,  and  uncondemned  ? 

2(>  When  the  centurion  heard  that,  he  went  and  told 


23  should  live.     And  as  they  cried  out,  and  threw  off 

24  their  garments,  and  cast  dust  into  the  air,  tlie  chief 
captain  commanded  him  to  lie  brought  into  the 
castle,  bidding  that  he  should  be  examined  by 
scourging,  that  he  might  know  for  what  cause  they 

25 so  shouted  against  him.  And  when  they  had  tied 
him  up  'with  the  thongs,  I'aul  said  unto  the  cen- 
turion that  stood  by.  Is  it  lawful  for  you  to  scourge 

26a  mau  that  is  a  Komaii,  and  uncondemned?    And 


-1  Or,  /or 


copyists,  stumbling,  apparently,  at  the  imper- 
fect, wrote  is  not  Jit  {Ka^riKOv  or  Ka^^xei). 

23.  The   Greek   translated    cast   off   their 

clothes  means,  not  throwing  off  their  garments 
as  a  preparation  for  stoning  Paul  (Grot.,  Mey.) 
— for  he  was  now  in  the  custody  of  the  Roman 
captain — but  throwing  them  up,  tossing  them 
about,  as  a  manifestation  and  an  effect  of  their 
incontrollable  rage.  Their  casting  dust  into 
the  air  was  an  act  of  the  same  character. 
This  mode  of  demonstrating  their  feelings  was 
suited,  also,  to  inflame  tlie  populace  still  more, 
and  to  impress  the  tribune  with  the  necessity 
of  conceding  something  to  their  demands.  Sir 
John  Chardin,  as  c^uoted  by  Harmer,i  says  that 
it  is  common  for  the  peasants  in  Persia,  when 
they  have  a  complaint  to  lay  bef(3re  their  gov- 
ernors, to  repair  to  them  by  hundreds  or  a 
thousand  at  once;  they  place  themselves  near 
the  gate  of  the  palace,  where  they  suppose  they 
are  most  likely  to  be  seen  and  heard,  and  there 
set  up  a  horrid  outcry,  rend  their  garments,  and 
throw  dust  into  the  air,  at  the  same  time  de- 
manding justice. 

24.  Commanded  him,  etc.  It  is  not  sur- 
prising that  the  chiliarch  gave  this  order.  He 
had  been  unable  to  follow  Paul's  address,  on 
account  of  his  ignorance  of  the  language ;  and, 
witnessing  now  this  renewed  outburst  of  rage, 
he  concludes  that  the  prisoner  must  have  given 
occasion  for  it  by  some  flagrant  offence,  and  de- 
termines, therefore,  to  e.xtort  a  confession  from 
liim. — And  bade,  or  directing,  that  he  should 
be  examined  by  scourges.  The  plural  re- 
fers to  the  blows  or  lashes  of  the  scourge.  It 
was  proposed  to  torture  him  into  an  acknow- 
ledgment of  his  supposed  crime. — That  he 
might  know,  ascertain.  —  They  cried  so 
against  him,  better  were  so  crying  out 
against  him,  not  cried  (E.  V.). 

25.  And  as  they  bound  him  with  thongs 
lias  received  two  different  explanations.  Some,  as 
De  Wette,  Meyer,  Robinson,  render  But  as  they 
(sc.  the  soldiers ;  see  on  v.  29)  stretched  him  forth 
for  the  thongs — i.  c.  for  the  scourge,  which  con- 
sisted sometimes  of  two  or  more  lashes  or  cords. 


They  placed  the  apostle  in  an  upright  posture, 
so  as  to  expose  him  more  fully  to  the  blows,  or 
caused  him  to  lean  forward,  in  order  to  receive 
them  more  effectually.  The  stripes,  it  will  bo 
remembered,  were  inflicted  on  the  naked  back. 
(See  16  :  22.)  Others  translate //if t/  stretched  him 
forth  with  the  thongs,  against  a  block  or  pillar — 
i.  e.  bound  him  to  it  with  them — preparatory  to 
his  being  scourged.  The  article  in  this  case 
would  designate  the  thongs  as  those  which  it 
was  customary  to  use  on  such  occasions. 
Bottger  (Schauplatz,  pp.  3-6),  who  advocates  the 
view  last  stated,  deduces  a  strong  confirmation 
of  it  from  v.  29.  It  is  said  that  the  chiliarch 
feared  when  he  ascertained  that  Paul  Avas  a 
Roman  citizen,  because  he  had  hound  him ;  but 
that  fear  could  not  relate  to  the  command  in 
21  :  33,  for  he  kept  Paul  in  chains  until  the 
next  day  (v.  so),  and  Felix  left  him.  still  in  that 
condition  at  the  expiration  of  his  term  of  office 
(24 :  27).  It  was  not  contrary  to  the  Roman  laws 
for  a  magistrate  to  bind  a  criminal  or  suspected 
person  for  safekeeping,  although  he  was  known 
to  be  a  Roman  citizen  ;  and  hence  it  is  difficult 
to  see  what  can  be  meant  by  had  hound,  in  v. 
29,  unless  it  be  the  binding  connected  with  the 
scourging  to  which  the  commander  had  ordered 
Paul  to  be  subjected.  That  was  an  outrage 
which  was  not  to  come  near  the  person  of  a 
Roman  even  after  condemnation ;  the  inflic- 
tion of  it,  on  the  part  of  a  judge  or  magistrate, 
exposed  him  to  the  severest  penalty.  (Wdsth. 
concurs  in  this  view.)  Several  critics  {e.  g. 
Kuin.,  Olsh.)  render  the  verb  (npoiTfivav)  de- 
livered, consigned — i.  e.  to  the  scourge — which 
is  too  vague  for  so  specific  a  term. — Unto  the 
centurion  standing  there,  etc.,  having 
charge  of  the  inquisition.  It  was  the  custom 
of  the  Romans  to  commit  the  execution  of 
such  punishments  to  that  class  of  officers. 
(Comp.  Mark  15  :  39.)— And  (that  too)  un- 
condemned, without  previous  trial.  (See  on 
16  :  37.) 

26.  The  word  rendered  take  heed  in  the 
English  Version,  Griesbach  and  others  omit, 
after  decisive  authorities.      It  was  added,  ap- 


I  Observations,  vol.  iv.  p.  203, 


Ch.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


261 


the  chief  captain,  saying,  Take  heed  what  thou  doest : 
for  this  man  is  a  Human. 

■J.7  Then  the  chief  ca|)tain  came,  and  said  unto  him, 
Tell  me,  art  thou  a  Roman  .'     He  said,  Vea. 

is  And  the  chief  captain  answered.  With  a  great 
sum  obtained  I  this  freedom.  And  I'aul  said,  but  1 
was  //re  born. 

29  Then  straightway  they  departed  from  him  which 
should  have  e.vaniined  him;  and  the  chief  captain 
also  was  afraid,  after  he  knew  that  he  was  a  liouian, 
and  because  he  had  bound  him. 


when  the  centurion  heard  it,  he  went  to  the  chief 
captain  and  told  him,  saying,  \\  hat  art  thou  about 

27  to  do.'  for  this  nnin  is  a  lionian.  .\nd  the  chief 
captain  came,  and  said  unto  him.  Tell  me,  art  f  hou 

28  a  Uomau/  And  he  said,  Vea.  And  the  chief  cap- 
tain answered,  U  ith  a  great  sum  olitained  I  thia 
citizenship.     And    I'aul   .said.   But    1   am   a   lionKtn 

29  born.  They  then  who  were  about  to  e.vamine  him 
straightway  departed  from  him  ;  and  the  chief  cap- 
tain also  was  afraid,  when  he  knew  that  he  was  a 
Koman,  and  because  he  had  bound  him. 


parently,  to  give  more  point  to  the  caution. — 
For  this  man  is  a  Roman.  It  may  excite 
snrpri.se  that  the  centurion  believed  Paul's  word 
so  readily.  We  have  the  explanation  of  this  in 
the  fact  that  a  false  claim  of  this  nature  was  eas- 
ily exposed  and  liable  to  be  ])unished  with  death. 
(Suet.,  O/aud.,  c.  25.)  It  was  almost  an  imprece- 
dented  thing  that  any  one  was  so  foolhardy  as 
to  assert  the  privilege  without  being  entitled  to  it. 

27.  Tell  me,  etc.  He  asks  the  question, 
not  from  any  doubt  of  Paul's  veracity,  but  in 
order  to  have  the  report  confirmed  from  his 
own  lips,  and  at  the  same  time  to  elicit  an  ex- 
planation of  so  unexpected  a  fact.  Tlie  inquiry 
indicates  his  surprise  that  a  man  in  Paul's  situ- 
ation should  possess  a  privilege  which  he  him- 
self had  i^rocured  at  such  exj)ense. 

28.  With  a  great  sum, /or  a  great  suvi.  It 
has  been  inferred  from  this  circiunstance,  and 
from  his  name,  that  Lysias  was  a  Greek.  It 
was  very  common  under  the  emperors  to  ob- 
tain the  rights  of  citizenship  in  this  way. 
Havercamp  says,  in  a  note  on  Josephus  {Antt., 
1.  p.  712),  that  a  great  many  Jews  in  Asia 
Minor  were  Roman  citizens  at  this  tinte  who 
had  purchased  that  rank.  It  did  not  always 
require  great  wealth  to  procure  it.  A  few  years 
earlier  than  this,  in  the  reign  of  Claudius,  "  the 
rights  of  Roman  citizenship  were  sold  by  Mes- 
salina  and  the  freedmen  with  shameless  indif- 
ference to  any  purchaser,  and  it  was  currently 
said  that  the  Roman  civitas  (Diet,  of  Antt.,  s.  v.) 
might  be  purchased  for  two  cracked  drinking- 
cups." — Also  [not  represented  in  the  Eng.  Ver.] 
connects  the  fact  of  his  freedom  with  its  origin. 
— I  was  free-born,  or  /  was  bora  a  Roman — 
i.  c.  he  had  inherited  his  rights  as  a  Roman 
citizen.  In  what  way  the  family  of  Paul  ac- 
quired this  distinction  is  unknown.  Many  of 
the  older  commentators  assert  that  Tarsus  en- 
joyed the  full  privileges  of  citizenship,  and  that 
Paul  possessed  them  as  a  native  of  Tarsus.  But 
that  opinion  (advanced  still  in  some  recent 
works)  is  certainly  erroneous.  The  passages  in 
the  ancient  writers  which  were  supposed  to  con- 
firm it  are  found  to  be  inconclusive;  they  prove 


that  the  Romans  freed  the  inhabitants  of  Tar- 
sus from  taxation,  allowed  them  U)  use  their 
own  laws,  tuid  declared  their  city  the  metropolis 
of  Cilicia,  but  they  afford  no  proof  that  the  Ro- 
mans conferred  on  them  the  birthright  of  Ro- 
man citizenship.  Indeed,  the  opinion  to  that 
effect,  could  it  be  established,  so  far  from  sup- 
porting Luke's  credibility^  would  bring  it  into 
question ;  for  it  is  difficult  to  believe  that  the 
chiliarch,  after  being  told  that  Paul  was  a  citi- 
zen of  Tarsus  (21 :39),  would  have  ordered  him 
to  be  scourged,  without  any  further  inquiry  as 
to  his  rank.  It  only  remains,  therefore,  that 
Paul's  father  or  some  one  of  his  ancestors  must 
have  obtained  Roman  citizenship  in  some  one 
of  the  different  ways  in  which  foreigners  could 
obtain  that  privilege.  It  was  conferred  often  as 
a  reward  for  fidelity  to  the  Roman  interest  or 
for  distinguished  military  services;  it  could  be 
purchased,  as  was  mentioned  above ;  or  it  could 
be  acquired  by  manumission,  which,  when  ex- 
ecuted with  certain  forms,  secured  the  full  im- 
munities of  freedom  to  the  emancipated.  In 
which  of  these  modes  the  family  of  Paul  be- 
came free  can  only  be  conjectured.  Some  adopt 
one  supposition;  some,  another.  Nothing  is 
certain  beyond  the  fact  that  Paul  inherited  his 
citizenship. 

29.  Which  should  have  examined  him 
are  soldiers  who  aided  the  centurion  (v.  25). 
Luke  does  not  mention  the  command  of  Lysias 
which  caused  them  to  desist  so  promptly. — 
After  he  knew,  or  having  ascertained, 
that  he  is  a  Roman.  "Ilia  vox  et  iinplo- 
ratio,  'Civis  Romanus  sum,'  qua?  .s^pe  multis, 
in  ultimis  terris,  opem  inter  barbaros  et  salutem 
tulit "  ["  That  voice  and  outcry, '  I  am  a  Roman 
citizen,'  which  often  to  many  in  the  most  dis- 
tant lands  among  barbarians  has  brought  help 
and  safety  "^'  proved  itself  effectual  also  in  this 
instance. — Because  he  had  bound  him. 
Those  who  understand  this  of  his  having 
ordered  him  to  be  chained,  in  21  :  33,  iiuist 
suppose  that  his  present  fear  was  very  tran- 
sient. Loosed,  in  v.  30,  shows  that  Paul  was 
kept  in  chains  during  the  night. 


1  Cic.  in  Verr.  Act.,  2.  5.  57. 


262 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


30  On  the  morrow,  because  he  would  have  known 
the  certainty  wherefore  he  was  accused  of  the  Jews, 
he  loosed  him  from  liin  bands,  and  commanded  the 
chief  priests  and  all  their  council  to  appear,  and 
brought  haul  down,  and  set  him  before  them. 


30  But  on  the  morrow,  desiring  to  know  the  cer- 
tainty, wherefore  he  was  accused  of  the  .lews,  he 
loosed  hiui,  and  commanded  the  chief  priests  and 
all  the  council  to  come  together,  and  brought  Paul 
down,  and  set  him  before  them. 


CHAPTER     XXIII. 


AND  Paul,  earnestly  beholding  the  council,  said.  Men 
and  brethren,  "I  have  lived  in  all  good  conscience 
before  (iod  until  this  day. 

2  And  the  high  priest  Ananias  commanded  them  that 
stood  by  him  'to  smite  him  on  the  mouth. 


1  And  Paul,  looking  stedfastly  on  the  council,  said, 
Brethren,  1  have  lived  before  God  in  all  good  con- 

2  science  until  this  day.    And  the  high  priest  Ananias 
commanded  them  that  stood  by  him  to  smite  hiui 


och.  24  :  16;  1  Oor.  4  :  4;  2  Cor.  1  :  12  ;  4:2;  2  Tim.  1:3;  Heb.  13  :  18 6  1  Kings  22  :  24  ;  Jer.  M  :  2;  John  18  :  22. 


30.  PAUL  IS  EXAMINED  BEFORE  THE 
SANHEDRIM. 

30.  For  the  use  of  the  article  (t6)  before  the 
interrogative  clause,  see  on  v.  21. — Wherefore 
he  was  accused  of  the  Jews,  or  why  he  is 
accused  on  the  part  of  the  Jews,  not  directly 
or  formally,  but,  in  point  of  fact,  by  their  perse- 
cution of  him,  their  clamor  for  his  death.  On 
the  jMrt  of  {-napa)  is  a  more  exact  preposition  for 
this  sense  (W.  §  47.  p.  327)  than  by  {v-n6),  which 
lias  taken  its  place  in  some  manuscripts,  [v-rro 
is  sustained  by  superior  manuscript  testimony, 
N  A  B  C  E,  and  is  given  in  all  the  late  critical 
editions  of  the  Greek  Testament.  The  action 
of  the  Jews  was  virtually  an  accusation  made 
by  them  against  Paul.  The  diplomatic  evi- 
dence need  not  be  overruled. — A.  H.]  Some 
have  joined  of,  or  froyn,  the  Jews  with  to 
know  the  certainty,  etc.,  as  if  it  could  not  fol- 
low a  passive  verb. — From  his  bands,  after 
loosed,  expands  the  idea,  and  was  added  to 
the  text  probably  for  that  purpose.  It  is  des- 
titute of  critical  support.— Having  brought 
down  Paul,  from  his  prison  in  the  castle  (see 
on  21  :  31)  to  the  lower  place  where  the  San- 
hedrim assembled.  According  to  Jewish  tra- 
dition, that  body  transferred  its  sittings  at 
lengtli  from  Gazith,  an  apartment  in  the  inner 
temple  (see  on  6  :  13),  to  a  room  on  Mount 
Zion,  near  the  bridge  over  the  Tyropceon.  It 
was  here,  probably,  that  the  Council  met  at  this 
time;  for  Lysias  and  liis  soldiers  would  not 
have  presumed  to  enter  the  sacred  part  of  the 
temple.  The  Romans  conceded  to  the  Jews 
the  right  of  putting  any  foreigner  to  death  who 
passed  the  forbidden  limits.  (Coiup.  on  21 :  28. 
See  Lewin,  ii.  p.  G72.i) 


1-10.    PAUL'S    SPEECH    BEFORE    THE 
JEWISH  COUNCIL. 

1.  In,  better  with,  all   good  conscience, 

or,  more  strictly,  consciousness — i.  e.  of  integrity 


and  sincerity.  (See  on  20  :  21.) — I  have  lived 
unto  God — i.  e.  for  his  service  and  glory  ;  da- 
tive of  the  object.  (See  Rom.  14  :  18 ;  Gal.  2  : 
19.)  The  verb  refers  to  his  conduct  in  all  re- 
spects, not  specially  to  his  political  or  civil  rela- 
tions. (Comj).  let  your  manner  of  life  he  worthy 
of  the  gospel  (Rev.  Ver.),  in  Phil.  1 :  27.)— Until, 
or  nnto,  this  day,  from  the  time  that  he  be- 
came a  Christian.  As  his  conduct  before  his 
defection  from  Judaism  was  not  in  question 
now,  he  had  no  occasion  to  speak  of  that  part 
of  his  life,  though  he  could  claim  in  some  sense 
to  have  acted  conscientiously  even  then.  (See 
26  :  9.) 

2.  The  high  priest  Ananias.  This  An- 
anias is  to  be  distinguished  from  the  Annas,  or 
Ananus,  of  whom  we  read  in  4  :  6,  Luke  3  :  2, 
and  John  18  :  13.  He  is  unquestionably,  says 
Winer  [Realw.,  i.  p.  57),  the  son  of  Nebedaeus, 
who  obtained  the  office  of  high  priest,  under 
the  Procurator  Tiberius  Alexander,  in  the  year 
A.  D.  48,  and  was  the  immediate  successor  of 
Camydus,  or  Camithus  (Jos.,  Antt.,  20.  5.  2). 
He  filled  this  office  also  under  the  Procurator 
Cumanus,  but,  having  been  implicated  in  a 
disi)ute  between  the  Jews  and  the  Samaritans, 
he  was  sent  by  the  Syrian  proprietor  to  Rome, 
in  A.  D.  52,  in  order  to  defend  himself  before  the 
Emperor  Claudius.  The  subsequent  history  of 
Ananias  is  obscure.  He  either  lost  his  office  in 
consequence  of  this  journey,  or,  whicli  is  more 
probable  (Jos.,  Antt..  20.  G.  3),  he  was  acquitted, 
and  continued  to  officiate  as  high  priest  until  he 
was  superseded  by  Ismael,  son  of  Pliabi,  just 
before  the  departure  of  Felix  from  Judea.  In 
the  latter  case,  says  the  same  writer,  he  was  the 
actual  high  priest  at  the  time  of  tlie  occurrence 
related  here,  and  is  called  high  priest  on  that 
account,  and  not  because  he  had  fi>rmerly  held 
the  office  or  because  he  occupied  it  during  a 
vacancy.— Those  who  stood  near  to  him, 
not  members  of  the  Council  or  spectators,  but 
the  servants  in  attendance.  (See  on  4  :  1.) — To 
strike  his  mouth.     The  mouth  must  be  shut 


'  The  Life  and  Epistles  of  St.  Paul,  by  Thomas  Lewin  of  Trinity  College,  Oxford  (1851). 


Ch.  XXIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


2G3 


3  Then  said  Taiil  unto  Iiiin,  (iod  shall  smite  thee, 
t^oll  tthitfd  wall :  lor  .sittest  thou  to  judge  me  utter  the 
law,  and  "coiiiiiiaudest  me  to  be  smitten  contrary  to 
the  law  * 

4  And  they  that  stood  by  said,  Kevilest  thou  God's 
high  jjriesf.' 

5  Then  said  Taul,  *I  wist  not,  brethren,  that  he  was 
the  high  priest:  lor  it  is  written, 'Thou  shall  not  spe.ik 
evil  of  the  ruler  of  thy  people. 


Son  the  mouth.  Then  said  Paul  unto  him,  Cod  shall 
smite  thee,  thou  whited  wall  ;  and  sittest  thou  lo 
judge  me  according  to  the  law,  and  commande»(  me 
4  lo  be  smitten  contrary  to  the  law  .'  .\nd  they  that 
5 stood  by  said,  Itevilcst  thou  dod's  higli  priest?  .Vud 
I'aul  said,  1  knew  not,  l>rethrcn,  that  he  was  high 
priest'  for  it  is  written,  Ihou  shall  nol  speak  evil 


a  Lev.  19  :  35;  Deut.  25  :  1,  2 ;  John  7  :  61 t  ch.  2*  :  17 c  Kx.  22  :  28;  Ecclca.  10  :  20.  2  Pet.  2  •  10 ;  Jude  8. 


tliat  uttered  such  a  declaration.  It  was  not  to 
be  endured  that  a  man  arraigned  there  as  an 
apostate  froiii  the  religion  of  lii.s  fatliers  sliould 
assert  his  innocence.  This  mode  of  ('iij\)iniiig 
silence  is  practis^ed  in  the  East  at  the  i)ru.sent 
day.  "As  soon  as  the  amba.ssador  came,"  says 
a  traveller  in  Persia,  "  he  punished  the  principal 
offenders  by  causing  them  to  be  beaten  before 
liim  ;  and  those  who  had  spoken  their  minds  too 
freely  he  smote  upon  the  mouth  with  a  shoe." 
lie  relates  another  instance  •  " '  Call  the  Fer- 
asches,'  exclaimed  the  king,  '  let  them  beat  the 
culprits  until  they  die.'  The  Ferasches  ap- 
peared and  beat  them  violently ,  and  when 
they  attempted  to  say  anything  in  their  de- 
fence, they  were  struck  on  the  mouth."  * 

3.  God  shall  smite  thee.  The  apostle 
declares  in  terms  suggested  by  the  outrage  that 
God  would  punish  the  author  of  the  brutal  in- 
sult ;  he  does  not  imprecate  vengeance  on  him 
or  predict  that  he  would  die  by  violence.  As 
Ananias  was  killed  by  an  assassin  (Jos.,  Bell. 
Jud.,  2.  17.  9),  some  have  supposed  Paul's  lan- 
guage to  prefigure  such  an  end. — Thou  whited 
wall — (".  e.  hypocrite,  because,  as  stated  in  the 
next  clause,  he  did  one  thing  while  he  i)ro- 
fe.'ssed  another.  For  the  origin  of  the  expres- 
sion, see  ^fiitt.  23  :  27.  The  Jews  painted  their 
sepulchres  white,  so  as  not  to  defile  themselves 
by  coming  unexpectedly  in  contact  with  them  ; 
lience  they  were  fair  to  the  eye,  while  they  were 
full  of  inward  corruiition.  (Jahu's  Archn-oL, 
{^"207.) — For  sittest  thou,  etc. — lit.  and  dost 
thou  sit  ?  etc.  (The  verb  is  a  later  form  for 
(ca.»i)(Ta4.  Lob.,  Ad  Phryii.  p.  358.)  And  con- 
forms liere  to  its  use  in  questions  designed  to 
bring  out  the  inconsistency  of  another's  views 
or  conduct.  (Comp.  Mark  4-13;  Luke  10  :  29. 
K.  ?321.  R.  1.) — To  judge,  etc.  Judging  me 
according  to  the  law  states  what  was  true 
of  hiiu  in  tfieory;  transgressing  the  law, 
what  was  true  in  point  of  fact. 

5.  I  did  not  know,  at  the  moment,  bear 
in  mind  (ling.,  Wetst.,  Kuin.,  Olsii.,  Wdsth.). 
(Comp.  the  u.*e  of  this  verb  in  Eph.  (5:8;  Col. 
3 :  34.)  Some  understand  that  Paul  did  not  know 
— was  ignorant— that  Ananias  was  now  the  high 


priest,  a  possible  ignorance,  certainly,  since  he 
had  been  absent  from  the  country  so  long,  and 
the  high  2>riest  was  changed  so  freijuently  at 
that  period.  On  the  contrary,  if  the  high 
l)riest  presided  on  such  occasions  or  wore  an 
official  dress,  Paul  could  tell  at  a  glance  who 
that  dignitary  was,  from  his  position  or  his 
costume.  But  this  view  is  liable  to  another 
objection :  it  renders  the  apostle's  apohjgy  for 
his  remark  irrelevant,  since  he  must  have  per- 
ceived, from  the  presence  of  Ananias,  that  he 
was  at  least  one  of  the  rulers  of  the  people,  and 
entitled  to  respect  on  account  of  his  station. 
[A  few  interi)retcrs  (including  Alford  and  Far- 
rar)  have  thought  it  possible  to  account  for 
Paul's  language  on  this  occasion  by  assuming 
that  his  eyesight  was  so  imperfect  as  to  prevent 
his  recognizing  persons  at  a  little  distance  from 
himself.  In  sui)port  of  this  hypothesis,  they 
refer — (1)  to  his  total  blindness,  occasioned  by 
the  intense  light  which  shone  from  heaven  at 
the  time  of  his  conversion  (« :  s),  and  to  the 
l)robability  that  his  eyes  did  not  fully  recover 
from  the  effect  of  that  light.  But  his  sight  was 
restored  by  miracle  (ois),  and  tlierefore,  we 
naturally  infer,  fully  restored.  (2)  To  his 
noteworthy  habit  of  looking  very  earnestly  at 
the  persons  whom  he  was  about  to  address 
(is:9:  14:9;  23 :  i) — a  habit  wluch  luay  have  been 
due  to  imperfect  vision.  Yet  this  habit  is  so 
natural,  and  so  often  observed  in  pul)lic  speak- 
ers, that  it  cannot  be  trusted  as  a  proof  of  im- 
paired sight.  (3)  To  his  words  in  Gal.  4  :  15: 
"For  I_  bear  you  witness,  that,  if  possible,  ye 
would  have  plucked  out  your  eyes  and  given 
them  to  me."  But  Alford,  after  examination, 
remarks:  "The  inference,  then,  of  any  ocular 
disea.se  from  these  words  themselves  seems  to 
me  precarious."  (4)  To  the  possibility  that 
nnite  ophthalmia  may  have  been  "  the  thorn  in 
his  flesh "  from  which  Paul  sought  relief  in 
vain  (f  Cor.  12 : 7, 8)  (The  ablest  argument  for 
this  view  is  in  The  Life  and  Work  of  St.  Paul, 
by  Canon  Farrar,  vol.  i.  Excursus  X.)  But, 
whatever  may  be  thought  of  Paul's  thorn  in 
the  flesh,  the  view  that  the  apostle  made  no 
mistake  in  this  in.stance,  but  continued  to  speak 


•  Morier's  Second  Journey  through  Persia,  pp.  8,  94. 


264 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


6  But  when  Paul  perceived  that  the  one  part  were 
Sadducees,  and  the  other  1  harisees,  he  cried  out  in  the 
council,  Men  and  brethren,  "J  am  a  I'harisee,  the  son 
of  a  Pharisee  'of  the  hope  and  resurrection  of  the 
dead  I  am  called  in  question 

7  And  when  he  had  so  said,  there  arose  a  dissension 
between  the  Pharisees  ai.d  the  badducees:  and  the 
multitude  was  divided. 

8  =For  the  Sadducees  say  that  there  is  no  resurrec- 
tion, neither  angel,  nor  spirit  but  the  Pharisees  con- 
fess both. 


G  of  a  ruler  of  thy  people.  But  when  Paul  perceived 
that  the  one  part  were  Sadducees,  and  the  other 
Pharisees,  he  cried  out  in  the  council.  Brethren,  1 
am  a  Pharisee,  a  son  of  Pharisees:  touching  the 
hope  and  resurrection  of  the  dead  1  asu  called  in 

7  question.  And  when  he  had  so  said,  there  arose  a 
dissension   between   the   Pharisees  and   Sadducees: 

8  and  the  assembly  was  divided,  lor  the  Sadducees 
say  that  there  is  no  resurrection,  neither  angel,  i<or 


tch.  26:5;  Phil.  3  :  5....6  ch.  24  :  15,  21  ;  26  :  6 ;  28:  20 c  Matt.  22  :  23;  Mark  12  :  18,  Luke  20  :  27. 


in  a  spirit  and  tone  of  holy  indignation,  seems 
to  be  the  best  cine  to  an  interpretation  of  his 
language.— A.  H.]  Others  think  that  Paul 
spoke  ironically,  meaning  that  he  did  not 
know  or  acknowledge  such  a  man  as  high 
priest  (Mey.,  Bing.).  The  sarcasm  so  covertly 
expressed  would  not  have  been  readily  under- 
stood, and  the  appeal  to  Scripture  in  that  state 
of  mind  becomes  unmeaning,  not  to  say  ir- 
reverent.— For  it  is  written  connects  itself 
with  an  implied  thought  Otherwise  I  should 
not  have  so  spoken,  for  it  is  written — viz 
in  Ex.  22:  28.  The  passage  applies  to  any 
civil  magistrate,  as  well  as  to  the  high  priest. 
Paul  admits  that  he  had  been  thrown  off  his. 
guard ;  the  insult  had  touched  him  to  tli^ 
quick,  and  he  had  spoken  rashly.  But  what 
can  surpass  the  grace  with  which  he  recovered 
his  self-possession,  the  frankness  with  which 
he  acknowledged  his  error?  If  his  conduct  in 
yielding  to  the  momentary  impulse  was  not 
that  of  Christ  himself  under  a  similar  provoca- 
tion (John  18 :  22, 23),  certainly  the  manner  in  which 
he  atoned  for  his  fault  was  Chnstlike. 

6.  But  when  Paul  perceived,  etc.  Nean- 
der:  "  In  order  to  secure  the  voice  of  the  ma- 
jority among  Ins  judges,  Paul  availed  himself 
of  a  measure  for  promoting  the  triumph  of  the 
truth  which  has  been  oftener  employed  against 
it — the  divide  et  impera  in  a  good  sense :  in  order 
to  produce  a  division  in  the  assembly,  he  ad- 
dressed himself  to  the  interest  for  the  truth 
which  a  great  part  of  his  judges  acknowledged, 
and  by  which  they  really  approached  nearer  to 
him  than  the  smaller  number  of  those  who 
denied  it.  He  could  say  with  truth  that  he 
stood  there  on  trial  because  he  had  testified  of 
the  hope  of  Israel  and  of  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead ;  for  he  had  preached  Jesus  as  the 
One  through  whom  this  hope  was  to  be  ful- 
filled. Tins  declaration  had  the  etfect  of  unit- 
ing the  Pharisees  present  in  his  favor,  and  of 
involving  them  in  a  violent  dispute  with  the 
Sadducees.  The  former  cotild  find  no  fault 
with  him.  If  he'  said  that  the  spirit  of  a  de- 
c«a£:ed  person  or  that  an  angel  had  appeared 
to  him,  no  one  could  impute  that  to  him  as  a 


crime;  what  he  meant  by  this,  and  whether 
what  he  alleged  was  true  or  not,  they  did  not 
trouble  themselves  to  decide." — Of  the  hope, 
etc.,  strictly  for  hope's  sake  and  (that)  a 
resurrection  of  the  dead  (Mcy.,  De  Wet.) 
— J.  e.  by  hendiad^'S,  the  hope  of  the  resurrection 
(Kuin.,  Olsh.).  The  first  mode  of  stating  it 
analj'zes  the  grammatical  figure. 

7.  There  arose  a  dissension,  difference 
of  views  respecting  Paitl's  case.  (See  on  15 : 2.) 
— As  the  effect  of  this  difference,  the  multi- 
tude Avas  divided,  took  opposite  sides. 

Sj  That  there  is  no  resurrection,  nor 
angel  or  spirit.  (See  Mark  12  :  18.)  Nor 
(mi^e)  adds  a  second  denial  to  tlie  first,  while 
or  (/a^re)  expands  this  denial  into  its  parts. 
(See  W.  ^55.  6.)  [It  should,  however,  be  re- 
marked that  Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and 
Hort,  and  tlie  Anglo-Am.  Revisers  adopt  the 
reading  /u.^t€ — jiJjTe  =  neither — nor  This  text  is 
supported  by  N  A  B  C  E. — A.  H.]  Josephus 
confirms  this  statement  as  to  the  belief  of  the 
Sadducees.  In  one  place  (Bell.  Jud.,  2.  8.  14) 
he  says  that  "  the  Sadducees  reject  the  perma- 
nence or  existence  of  the  soul  after  death,  and 
the  rewards  and  punishments  of  an  invisible 
world ;"  and  in  another  place  (Antt.,  18.  1,  4), 
that  "  the  Sadducees  hold  that  the  souls  of  men 
perish  -with  their  bodies."  The  Talmudists 
and  other  Jewish  writers  make  the  same  rep- 
resentation.— Confess  both — i.  e.  according 
to  the  above  analysis,  a  resurrection  and  the 
reality  of  si^iritual  existences,  whether  angels 
or  the  souls  of  the  departed.  Josephus  be- 
longed to  the  sect  of  the  Pharisees,  and  he  rep- 
resents their  opinion  to  have  been  "  that  souls 
have  an  immortal  vigor,  and  are  destined  to  be 
rewarded  or  punished  in  another  state  accord- 
ing to  the  life  here,  as  it  has  been  one  of  virtue 
or  vice ,  that  the  good  will  be  permitted  to  live 
again  (i.e.  in  another  body  on  the  e^irth),  and 
that  the  wicked  will  be  consigned  to  an  eternal 
prison  "  (Antt.,  18.  1.  3).  "  There  was  a  variety 
of  opinions  concerning  the  resurrection,"  says 
Biscoe,  "  among  the  Pharisees  t>r  traditionary 
Jews.  In  this  account  of  it,  which  resembles 
the  heathen  idea  of  transmigration,  Josephus, 


Ch.  XXIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


235 


9  And  there  arose  a  great  cry:  and  the  scviltes /hnl 
iie.n'  of  the  I'hurisees'  part  arose,  and  strove,  saying, 
"We  tii;d  no  evil  in  this  man:  but 'if  a  spirit  or  an 
angel  hath  spoken  to  him,  'let  us  not  tight  against 
(_.od. 

10  And  when  there  arose  a  great  dissension,  the 
chief  captain,  fearing  lest  I'aul  should  have  been 
pulled  in  pieces  of  them,  conmiauded  the  soldiers  to 
go  down,  and  to  take  him  by  force  from  among  them, 
a. id  to  biing  him  into  the  castle. 

11  And  ^the  night  following  the  Lord  stood  by  him, 
and  said.  Be  of  good  cheer,  Paul :  for  as  thou  hast  tes- 
titied  of  me  in  Jerusalem,  so  must  thou  bear  witness 
also  at  Rome. 

12  And  when  it  was  day,  i^certain  of  the  Jews  banded 
together,  and  bound  themselves  under  a  curse,  saying 
that  they  would  neither  eat  nor  drink  till  they  had 
killed  Paul. 


9 spirit:  but  the  Pharisees  confess  both.  .And  there 
arose  a  great  clamor :  and  some  of  the  scribes  of  the 
Pharisees'  part  stood  up,  and  strove,  saying.  We  hnd 
no  evil  in  this  man:  and  what  if  a  spirit  hath  spoken 

10  to  him,  or  an  angel  ?  And  when  there  arose  a  great 
dissension,  thechief  cajitain,  fearing  lest  Paul  should 
be  torn  in  pieces  by  them,  commanded  the  soldiers 
to  go  down  and  take  him  by  force  from  among  them, 
and  bring  him  into  the  castle. 

11  And  the  night  following  the  Lord  stood  by  him, 
and  said.  Be  of  good  cheer:  for  as  thou  hast  testitied 
concerning  me  at  Jerusalem,  so  must  thou  bear  wit- 
ness also  at  Koine. 

12  And  when  it  was  day,  the  Jews  banded  together, 
and  bound  themselves  tinder  a  curse,  saying  that 
they   would  neither  eat  nor  drluk  till  they   had 


ocli.  25  :  25;  26  :  31 b  ch.  22  :  7,  17,  18 c  ch.  5  :  39 d  ch.  18  :  9  ;  27  :  23,  2* e  vers.  21,  30;  cb.  25  :  3. 


as  I  apprehend,  lias  given  us  that  which  comes 
nearest  to  his  own  belief,  or  which  he  was  in- 
clined to  have  tlie  Greek  philosophers  under- 
stand to  be  his  own.  For  he  is  accused  by 
learned  men — and  certainly  not  without  rea- 
son— of  sometimes  accommodating  the  Jewish 
revelation  to  the  sentiments  of  the  heathen,  or 
bringing  it  as  near  to  what  was  taught  by  them 
as  might  be." 

9.  The  scribes,  etc.,  the  scribes  of  the 
party  of  the  Pharisees,  contended,  dis- 
puted violently.  They  appear  as  the  champions 
of  their  party,  because  they  were  the  men  of 
learning  and  accustomed  to  such  debates.— 
But  if  a  spirit  spoke  to  him,  or  an  an- 
gel. Undoubtedly,  a  designed  aposiopesis.  A 
significant  gesture  or  look  toward  the  Saddu- 
cees  expressed  what  was  left  unsaid  —  that  is 
not  an  impossible  thing,  the  matter  then  as- 
sumes importance,  or  something  to  that  effect. 
(See  W.  §  (M.  II.)  For  other  examples  of  apo- 
sioi)esis,  see  Luke  19  :  42  and  22  :  42.  Some 
maintain  that  the  sentence  is  incomplete,  be- 
cause the  remainder  was  unheard  amid  the 
tumult  that  now  ensued.  The  common  text 
supplies  let  us  not  fight  against  God  as  the 
apodosis  ;  but  the  testimonies  require  us  to  re- 
ject that  addition.  It  was  suggested,  probably, 
by  fighting  against  God,  in  5  :  39. 

10.  Lest  Paul,  etc.,  strictly  lest  Paul 
should  be  pulled  in  pieces  by  them,  as 
the  parties  struggled  to  obtain  possession  of 
him,  their  object  being,  on  the  one  side,  to 
protect  him ;  and  on  the  other,  to  maltreat  or 
kill  him. — The  soldiers,  or  the  soldiery, 
some  of  the  troops  stationed  in  the  castle.  (See 
V.  27.) — Ob.serve  the  collateral  and  (re)  before 
to  bring  (dyeti'),  since  the  rescue  and  the  con- 
veyance to  the  garrison  are  parts  of  the  same 
order.  [Paul's  stratagem — if  it  may  be  so  called 
— was  perfectly  right ;  for  he  was  in  the  presence 
of  men  who  knew,  or  ought  to  have  known, 


the  substance  of  Christian  doctrine,  and  he 
simply  called  their  attention  to  a  fundamental 
I)art  of  that  doctrine.  He  reminded  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Great  Ojuncil  that  in  proceeding 
against  him  they  were  assailing  a  bold  defender 
of  truth  which  many  of  them  lield  to  be  of 
vital  importance.  This  it  was  proper  for  the 
Pharisees  to  consider  before  they  gave  their 
voice  against  the  accused.  And  if  it  was  a 
matter  which  they  ought  to  consider,  it  was 
one  which  he  might  fitly  press  upon  their  at- 
tention. If  reflection  led  them  to  oppose  the 
other  members  of  the  Sanhedrim,  and  thus  to 
prevent  a  criminal  act,  so  much  the  better  for 
him  and  for  them.  The  words  of  Paul  in  v.  6 
should  be  compared  with  1  Cor.  15  :  12-20,  where 
the  apostle  assigns  its  place  to  the  doctrine  of 
the  resurrection.  If  he  could  write  thus  to 
Christians,  why  could  he  not  speak  in  a  sim- 
ilar strain  to  the  adversaries  of  Christ? — 
A.  H.] 

11-15.  A  CONSPIRACY  OF  THE  JEWS 
TO  SLAY  PAUL. 

11.  The  Lord — i.  e.  Christ. — Be  of  good 
cheer,  be  courageous  still.  The  tense  is 
present.  Though  he  had  not  begun  to  de- 
spond, he  was  on  the  eve  of  trials  which 
would  expose  him  to  that  danger.  —  Paul 
is  (naOAe),  in  the  T.  R.,  which  the  E.V.  retains, 
to  be  struck  out. — Unto  Jerusalem  and  unto 
Rome  involve  an  ellipsis  like  that  noticed  on 
8  :  40. — Must,  or  is  necessary,  because  such 
was  the  purpose  of  God.  (Comp.  27  :  24.)  Paul 
had  long  cherished  a  desire  to  see  Rome  (i9:2i; 
Rom.  1 :  13),  but,  as  far  as  we  know,  he  was  now 
assured  for  the  first  time  that  such  was  to  be 
his  destiny. 

12.  Banded  together,  having  formed  a 
combination  (Mey.,  Rob.),  which  conspir- 
acy, in  V.  13,  defines  more  precisely. — The 
Jews,  since  this  party  of  them  manifested 
the  Jewish  spirit.     (See  the  last  remark  on  4  . 


266 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


13  And  they  were  more  than  forty  which  had  made 
this  coiispiracy. 

14  And  they  came  to  the  chief  priests  and  elders, 
and  said,  We  have  bound  ourselves  under  a  great 
curse,  that  we  will  eat  nolhing  until  we  have  slain 
Paul. 

15  Now  therefore  ye  with  the  council  signify  to  the 
chief  cajitain  that  he  bring  him  down  unto  you  to- 
morrow, as  though  ye  would  enquire  something  more 
perfectly  concerning  him:  and  we,  or  ever  he  come 
near,  are  ready  to  kill  him. 

16  And  when  Paul's  sister's  son  heard  of  their  lying 
in  wait,  he  went  and  entered  into  the  castle,  and  told 
Paul. 

17  Then  Paul  called  one  of  the  centurions  unto  him, 
and  said,  Bring  this  young  man  unto  the  chief  cap- 
tain :  for  he  hath  a  certain  thing  to  tell  him. 

18  So  he  took  him,  aud  brought  him  to  the  chief 


13  killed  Paul.     And  they  were  more  than  forty  who 

14  nuide  this  conspiracy.  And  they  came  to  the  chief 
j)riests  and  the  elders,  aud  said,  \Ve  have  boui.d  our- 
selves under  a  great  curse,  to  taste  nothing  until  we 

15  have  killed  Paul.  Now  therelore  do  ye  with  the 
council  signify  to  the  cliief  captain  tliat  he  bring 
him  down  unto  you,  as  though  ye  would  judge  of 
his  case  more  e.\actly  :    and  we,  or  ever  he  come 

16  near,  are  ready  to  slay  him.  Put  I'aul's  sister's  son 
heard  of  their  lying  in  wait,  'and  he  came  and  en- 

17  tered  inio  the  castle,  and  told  Paul.  And  Paul 
called  unto  him  one  of  the  centurions,  and  said. 
Bring  this  young  man  unto  the  chief  captain  :  for 

18  he  huth  something  to  tell  him.    So  he  took  him. 


1  Or,  having  come  in  upon  them,  and  he  entered  etc. 


1.)  Certain  of  the  Jews  is  an  unapproved 
reading. 

14.  The  chief  priests  and  the  elders — 

i.  e.  tliose  of  these  classes  who  were  hostile  to 
Paul,  the  Sadducee  members  of  the  Council 
(Mey.,  De  Wet.).  This  limitation  suggests  itself 
without  remark,  after  the  occurrence  which  has 
just  been  related.  —  We  have  bound  our- 
selves, etc. — lit.  we  cursed  ourselves.  The 
expression  points  to  some  definite  ratification 
of  the  atrocious  oath.  The  reflexive  of  the 
third  person  (see  v.  12)  may  follow  a  subject 
of  the  first  or  second  person.  (K.  ^  303.  8 ; 
B.  g  127.  n.  5.) 

15.  With  the  council  —  namely,  the  San- 
hedrim ;  i.  e.  in  the  name  of  that  body,  as  if  it  was 
their  united  request. — To-morrow  has  been 
added  to  the  text  in  some  copies,  because  it  oc- 
curs in  V.  20. — More  perfectly,  or  more  ex- 
actly, than  on  the  former  trial. — Or  ever  he 
come  near,  or  before  he  has  come  near — 
i.  e.  to  the  place  of  assembly.  Their  plan  was  to 
kill  him  on  the  way.  (See  v.  21.) — To  kill  de- 
pends on  ready  as  a  genitive  construction.  (W. 
g  44.  4.) — It  would  be  difficult  to  credit  the  ac- 
count of  such  a  proceeding,  had  Luke  related 
it  of  any  other  people  than  the  Jews.  Here,  as 
Lardner  suggests  ( Credibility,  i.  p.  224),  are  more 
than  forty  men  who  enter  into  a  conspiracy  to 
take  away  Paul's  life  in  a  clandestine  manner, 
and  they  make  no  scruple  to  declare  it  to  tlie 
Council,  relying  upon  their  approbation.  It  is 
clearly  implied  that  these  teachers  of  religion, 
these  professed  guardians  of  the  law,  gave  their 
assent  to  the  proposal ;  they  had  nothing  to  ob- 
ject, either  to  so  infamous  a  design  or  to  tlie 
use  of  such  means  for  accomplishing  it.  But, 
out  of  place  as  such  a  passage  wotild  be  in  any 
other  liistory,  it  relates  a  transaction  in  perfect 
harmony  with  the  Jewish  opinions  and  prac- 
tices of  that  age.  A  single  testimony  will  illus- 
trate this.     Philo,  in  speaking  of  the  course  to 


be  pursued  toward  a  Jew  who  forsakes  the  wor- 
sliip  of  the  true  God,  lays  down  the  following 
principle :  "  It  is  highly  proper  that  all  who 
have  a  zeal  for  virtue  should  have  a  right  to 
punish  with  their  own  hands,  without  delay, 
those  who  are  guilty  of  this  crime;  not  carry- 
ing them  before  a  court  of  judicature  or  the 
Council,  or,  in  short,  before  any  magistrate,  but 
thej'  should  indulge  the  abhorrence  of  evil,  the 
love  of  God,  which  they  entertain,  by  inflicting 
immediate  punishment  on  such  impious  apos- 
tates, regarding  themselves  for  the  time  as  all 
things — senators,  judges,  prajtors,  sergeants,  ac- 
cusers, witnesses,  the  laws,  the  people ;  so  that, 
hindered  by  notliing,  they  may  without  fear 
and  with  all  promptitude  espouse  the  cause  of 
piety."  Josephus  mentions  a  similar  combi- 
nation against  the  life  of  Herod,  into  which  a 
party  of  the  Jews  entered  on  account  of  the  re- 
ligious innovations  which  they  charged  him 
with  introducing  (^-1?)/^,  15.  8.  1-4). 

16-*^2.  THE  PLOT  IS  DISCLOSED  TO 
THE   ROMAN   COMMANDER. 

16.  Paul's  sister's  son,  better  the  son 
of  Paul's  sister.  Whether  the  family  of 
this  sister  resided  at  Jerusalem,  or  the  nepliew 
only,  does  not  appear  from  the  narrative.  His 
anxiety  for  the  safety  of  Paul  may  have  arisen 
from  a  stronger  interest  than  that  j)rompted  by 
their  relationship  to  each  other.  (See  the  note 
on  9  :  30.)  He  was  not  a  bigoted  Jew,  at  all 
events;  for  in  that  case  he  would  have  allowed 
no  tie  of  blood,  no  natural  affcH;tion,  to  interfere 
with  the  supposed  claims  of  his  religion. — 
Having  entered  into  the  castle,  whence 
it  appears  that  his  friends,  as  afterward  at 
Csesarea  (24:23).  had  free  access  to  liim.  Lysias 
may  have  been  tlie  more  indijlgent,  because  he 
would  atone  for  his  fault  in  having  bound  a  Ro- 
man citizen. — Their  lying  in  wait — lit.  the 
ambush,  which  the  Jews  were  {preparing. 

18.  The  prisoner  shows  that  Paul  was  still 


Ch.  XXIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


267 


captain,  and  said,  Paul  the  prisoner  called  me  unto 
hill,  a'  d  jirayeU  ni(!  to  liriiiK  this  youni;  man  unto 
thee,  who  liaih  .soniolliinf;  to  say  unto  thee. 

jy  Then  the  chiel' captain  took  him  l>y  the  liand,  and 
■went  itiilt  hitn  aside  privately,  and  asked  hun,  w  hat  is 
that  thou  hast  to  tell  nie? 

20  And  he  said,  "1  he  .lews  have  agreed  to  desire  thee 
that  thou  woukUt  bring  down  I'aul  to-morrow  into  the 
council,  as  though  they  would  enquire  somewhat  of 
him  more  perleetly. 

'.il  Hut  do  not  thou  yield  unto  them:  for  there  lie  in 
wait  for  him  of  them  more  than  forty  men,  which  have 
bound  themselves  with  an  oath,  that  they  will  neither 
eat  nor  drink  till  they  have  killed  him:  and  now  are 
they  ready,  looking  for  a  promise  from  thee. 

ti  So  the  chief  captain  llii-n  let  the  young  man  de- 
part, and  charged  him,  .Sf«  ilwit  tell  no  man  that  thou 
hast  shewed  these  things  to  me. 

ti  And  he  called  unto  A/ m  two  centurions,  saying. 
Make  ready  two  hundred  soldiers  to  go  toCaisarea,  and 
horsemen  threescore  and  ten,  and  spearmen  two  hun- 
dred, at  the  third  hour  of  the  night , 

2\  And  provide  //"'(//  beasts,  that  they  may  set  Paul 
on,  and  briiig  Unu  safe  unto  ieli.x  the  governor. 

2o  And  be  wrote  a  letter  after  this  manner: 


and  brought  him  to  the  chief  captain,  and  saith, 
Paul  the  prisoner  called  nie  unto  him,  and  asked 
me  to  bring  this  young  man  unto  thee,  w  iiu  hath 
19 something  to  say  to  tliec  And  the  chief  captain 
took  him  by  the  hand,  and  going  aside  asked  him 

20  privately,  What  is  that  thou  hast  to  tell  me?  And 
he  said,  The  .lews  have  agreed  to  ask  thee  to  bring 
down  Paul  to  morrow  unto  the  council,  as  though 
thou  wouldest  inquire  .somewhat  more  exactly  con- 

21  cerning  him.  Do  not  thou  therefore  yield  unto 
them,  for  there  lie  in  wait  for  him  of  them  more 
th.m  forty  men,  who  have  bound  themselves  under 
a  curse,  neither  to  eat  nor  to  drink  till  they  have 
slain  him:  and  now  are  they  ready,  looking  for  the 

22promi.se  from  thee.  .*^o  the  chief  captain  let  the 
young  man   go,  charging   him,  Tell   no   man   that 

23  thou  hast  signilie  i  these  thi  gs  to  me.  And  ho 
called  unto  iiim  two  of  the  centurions,  and  said, 
Make  leady  two  hundred  soldiers  to  go  as  far  as 
Ca'sarea,  and  horstnien  three-core  and  len,  and 
spearmen  two  hundred,  ai  the  third   hour  of  the 

24  night:  and  lie  iiU'ir  llinn  provide  beasts,  that  they 
might  set  Paul  thereon,  and  bring  him  safe  unto 

2.J  ]■  eli.K  the  governor.  And  he  wrote  a  letter  after 
this  form: 


bouitd — r.  e.  by  a  cliahi  to  tlie  arm  of  a  suldicr. 
— >Vho  hath — i.  e,  since  he  has— something 
to  say  to  thee.     (Comp  for  he  hath,  etc.,  in 

V.  17.) 

21.  Lie  in  wait,  which  they  were  doing, 
iiiasmiicli  as  their  i)iot  was  ah'cady  .so  mature. 
(Cump.  riuikiiKj  an  ambush,  in  25  :  3.) — Forty — 
i.  e.  men,  as  in  v.  13. — Are  ready — i.  e.  to  hill 
him.  (Comp.  V.  15.) — Looking  for,  or  aAvait- 
ing,  the  (expected)  promise  from  thee. 
The  word  translated  promise  (eVaweAta)  has 
this  constant  sense  in  the  New  Testament. 

2'Z,  Note  the  change  to  the  direct  style  in 
that  thou  hast  showed  these  things  to 
me.  (W.  (J  G3.  II.  1.  Comp.  Luke  5:  14.)  The 
opposite  change  occurs  in  v,  24. 

23-30.  THE  LETTER  OF  LYSIAS  TO 
FELIX. 

23.  Two  centurions,  more  exactly  some 
two  or  three  of  the  centurions  ;  not  one  or 
two  (Cony,  and  Hws.),  from  the  nature  of  the 
expression,  and  because  less  than  two  would 
be  an  inadequate  command  for  so  large  a  force. 
Though  it  is  not  said  expressly,  the  inference  is 
that  these  officers  were  to  take  charge  of  the 
expedition,  as  well  as  prepare  for  it.  The  pro- 
noun (tU,  a  certain  one,  some  one)  joined  with 
numerals  renders  them  indehnite.  (Comp. 
some  two  of  his  disciples,  in  Luke  7 :  19.  W. 
§25.  2.  b:  K.  ^30.3.  4.)— Soldiers,  who,  as 
they  are  distinguished  from  the  other  two 
classes  nameil,  must  be  the  ordinary,  heavy- 
armed  legionaries. — Spearmen  (SefioAa^ou?)  oc- 
curs only  here  and  in  two  obscure  writers  of 
the  Iron  Age.  "  Its  meaning,"  says  De  Wette, 
"is  a  riddle."  The  proposed  explanations  are 
these :  side-cfuanis,  military  lictors  who  guarded 


prisoners,  so  called  from  their  taking  the  right- 
hand  side  (Suid.,  Bez.,  Kuin.) ;  lancers  (Vulg., 
E.  v.),  a  species  of  light-armed  trooi>s  (Mey.), 
since  they  are  mentioned  once  in  connection 
with  archers  and  peltaists.  Codex  A  reads  spear- 
men, jacidanti's  dcxtra  (Syr.).  (See  De  Wette's 
note  here.) — At  the,  or  from  the,  third  hour — 
/.  e.  nine  o'clock  with  us,  it  being  implied  that 
they  were  to  march  at  that  hour,  as  well  as  be 
ready. 

24.  And  to  provide,  etc.,  and  that  they 
i  should  provide  beasts  of  burden,  as  two 
I  or  more   would   be  needed   for   relays  or  for 
;  the  transportation  of  baggage.     The  discourse 
!  changes  at  tliis  point  from  the  direct  to  the  in- 
direct.    (Comp.  on  19  :  27.) — That  they  may 
set,  or  that  having  mounted  Paul  (cjn  one 
of  them)  they  might  convey  him  in  safety 
unto  Felix.     Throtujh  (Sia)  in  the  verb  refers 
to  the  intermediate  space,  not  to  the  dangers 

I  through  which  they  were  to  pass.     (Comp  18  : 
j  27 ;  27  :  44  ;  1  Pet.  3  :  20.)— Felix  was  the  Pro- 
!  curator  of  Judea,  having   received   this  office 
from  the  Emperor  Claudius,  prcjbably  in   the 
autumn  of  A.  D.  52  (Win.,  Aug.,  Mey.).      lie 
:  was  originally  a  slave,  was  a  man  of  energy 
I  and  talents,  but  avaricious,  cruel,  and   licen- 
I  tious.    Tacitus  (Hist.,  5.  9)  has  drawn  his  cha- 
racter in  a  single  line :  ''  Per  omnem  sajvitiam 
ac  libidinem  jus  regium  servili  ingenio  exer- 
cuit"  ["  With  all  cruelty  and  lust  he  exercisetl 
the  royal  power  in  the  spirit  of  a  slave"].    (See 
further  on  24  :  3-24.) 

25.  Wrote  —  lit.  writing — belongs  to  tlie 
subject  of  naid  (E.  V.  saying),  in  v.  23. — .After 
this  manner,  or  containing  this  outline, 

,  draught — i.  e.  a  letter  to  this  ell'ect.   The  Koman 


268 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


2fi  Claudius  Lysias  unto  the  most  excellent  governor 
Felix  sfudcth  greeting. 

27  "This  man  was  taken  of  the  Jews,  and  should 
have  been  killed  of  them  :  then  came  I  with  an  army, 
and  rescued  him,  having  understood  that  he  was  "a 
Komaii. 

2S  *And  when  I  would  have  known  the  cause  where- 
fore they  accused  him,  1  brought  him  forth  into  their 
council : 

L'y  Whom  I  perceived  to  be  accused  <^of  questions  of 
their  law,  ''but  to  have  nothing  laid  to  his  charge 
worthy  of  death  or  of  bonds. 

;;u  And  «\vhen  it  was  told  me  how  that  the  Jews  laid 
wait  for  the  man,  I  sent  straightway  to  thee,  and  /gave 
commandment  to  his  accusers  also  to  say  before  thee 
what  Ihay  IkiiI  against  him.     i-arewell. 

31  Then  the  soldiers,  as  it  was  commanded  them, 
took  Paul,  aid  brought  him  by  night  to  Autipatris. 


26  Claudius  Lysias  unto  the  most  excellent  governor 

27  Felix,  greeting.  This  man  was  seized  by  the  Jews, 
and  was  about  to  be  slain  of  them,  when  I  came 
upon  them  with  the  soldiers,  and  rescued  him,  hav- 

28  ing  learned  that  he  was  a  Koman.  And'desiring  to 
know  the  cause  wherefore    they  accused   him,  'I 

29  brought  him  down  unto  their  council:  whom  I 
found  to  be  accused  about  questions  of  their  law, 
but  to  have  nothing  laid  to  his  charge  worthy  of 

30  death  or  of  bonds.  And  when  it  was  shewn  to  me 
that  there  would  be  a  plot  -'against  the  man,  I  sent 
him  to  thee  forthwith,  charging  his  accusers  also  to 
speak  against  him  before  thee.^ 

31  So  the  soldiers,  as  it  was  commanded  them,  took 


ich.  21  .33;  24.7.... 6  ch.  2i  :  30....cch.  18.  15;  25:19....d  ch.  26  :  31. . .  .c  ver.   20..../ ch.  24:8;  25:6. 1  Some  ancient  a.n- 

thomKn  omit  I  broit<]ht  him  down  unto  their  couuciV. ..  .2  Miiny  aucieoi  authorities  read  against  the  man  on  their  part 3  Man;  an- 

cieut  aulhuritieii  add  J'arewell. 


law  required  that  a  subordinate  officer,  in  send- 
ing a  prisoner  to  the  proper  magistrate  for  trial, 
should  draw  up  a  written  statement  of  the  case. 
The  technical  name  of  such  a  communication 
was  elof/iuin. 

26.  Most  excellent  is  an  honorary  epithet. 
(See  on  1  :  1  )— Governor  stands  in  the  New 
Testament  for  the  more  specitic  procurator  (i-ai- 
TpoTTo?).  (Comp.  Matt.  27  :  2.)  —  Greeting. 
(6omp.  the  kust  remark  on  15 :  23.) 

27.  This  man  is  the  object  of  rescued, 
which  him  repeats,  on  account  of  the  distance 
of  the  noun  from  the  verb.  (Comp  of  these, 
TouVuf,  in  1  :  22.) — On  the  point  of  being 
killed,  not  should  have  been  (E.  V.). — 
With  an  army,  rather  with  the  military. 
(See  V.  10.) — Having  learned  that  he  is  a 
Roman,  which  is  stated  as  a  reason  why 
Lysias  was  so  prompt  to  rescue  him.  It  was 
not  until  after  he  had  taken  Paul  into  his  cus- 
tody that  he  ascertained  his  rank ;  but,  as  was 
not  unnatural,  he  wished  to  gain  as  much 
credit  as  possible  in  the  eyes  of  his  superior. 
This  deviation  from  truth,  says  Meyer,  testifies 
to  the  genuineness  of  the  letter.  Some  resolve 
having  learned  into  and  I  learned,  as  if  he  learned 
the  fact  that  Paul  was  a  Roman  citizen  after  his 
apprehension.  The  Greek  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment affords  no  instance  of  such  a  use  of  the 
participle.  (See  W.  ?  46.  2. )  Luke  with  his 
inquisitive  habits  (see  his  Gospel,  i :  i)  would 
find  an  opportunity  to  copy  the  letter  during 
his  abode  of  two  years  at  Csesarea. 

28.  Would  have  known,  rather  wishing 
to  know,  or  ascertain  (■ci-ui'ai  and  ^iriyvrnvoLt 
are  both  found),  the  crime  (not  charge),  of 
which,  at  this  stage  of  the  affair,  Paul  was  sup- 
posed to  be  guilty.  The  weaker  sense  of  this 
noun  (Cony,  and  Hws.)  makes  accused  repe- 
ttfious.  —  Wherefore  —  lit.  on  account  of 
which  —  they    were    accusing    him,    not 


formally,   but    by   their  continued  outcrj',   as 
Luke  has  related. — I  brought  him  down,  in 

person,  as  he  must  be  present  to  gain  the  de- 
sired information.     (See  on  22  :  30.) 

29.  Of,  or  concerning,  questions  of 
their  law.  (See  the  note  on  18  :  15.)— As 
death  and  bonds  denoted  the  highest  and 
lowest  penalties  of  the  law,  the  idea  is  that 
Paul  had  no  crime  alleged  against  him  that 
required  his  detention  or  punishment  (Bottg.). 
Every  Roman  magistrate  bef(jre  whom  the 
apostle  is  brought  declares  him  innocent. 

30.  The  writer  falls  out  of  his  construction 
here.  He  says  a  j^lot  having  been  told  me  (fiiji/u- 
iJeiVrj?)  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  as  if 
he  would  have  added  that  was  about  to  be  (t^s 
/ui6A\ou<TT|s),  but  in  the  progress  of  the  thought 
adds  the  infinitive  (tiiWeiv),  as  if  he  had  com- 
menced with  they  having  told  ine  that  a  plot 
{tj.r)vv<TdvToii>  .  .  .  inipovKr}v)  was  about  to  be.  The 
idea  of  the  thing  disclosed  gives  place  to  that 
of  the  persons  who  disclose  it.  (W.  ^  63. 
I.)  [Ale.vander  attempts  a  literal  translation 
of  the  Greek  as  follows  :  ''But  a  plot  against  the 
man  having  been  reported  to  me,  (as)  about  (or 
that  it  was  about)  to  be  (attempted)  by  the  Jews." 
By  the  Jews  is  to  be  removed  from  the  text  (see 
below),  and  it  will  then  read  in  the  simplest 
version :  But  a  j)lot  .  .  .  (as)  about  to  be — /.  e. 
carried  into  effect. — A.  H.]  By  the  Jews, 
after  about  to  be,  the  recent  editors  omit 
(Tsch.,  De  Wet.,  Mey.).— I  sent,  since  the  fu- 
ture act  would  be  past  on  the  reception  of  the 
letter.  (Comp.  Phil.  2  :  28 ;  Philem.  11.  W. 
g  41.  5.  2.) — Before  thee.  ["A  peculiar  phrase 
appropriated  to  judicial  hearing,  as  in  Matt.  28  : 
14  "  {Alexander).] 

31-35.  PAUL  IS  SENT  TO  FELIX  AT 
CJ5SAREA. 

31.  Took — lit.  having  taken — up  answers 
to  luaving  mounted  Paul,  in  v.  24. — By  night, 


Ch.  XXIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


269 


32  On  the  morrow  they  left  the  horsemeu  to  go  with 
him,  and  returiu'il  to  the  castle : 

33  Who,  when  they  came  to  Csesarea,  and  delivered 
the  epistle  to  the  governor,  presented  Paul  also  before 
him. 

34  And  when  the  governor  had  read  the  letter,  he 
asked  of  what  province  he  was.  And  when  he  un- 
derstood that  /ic  icn.s- of  "(ilicia; 

35  '1  will  hear  thee,  said  he,  when  thine  accusers 


32  Paul,  and  hrought  him  by  night  to  Antipatris.  But 
on  the  morrow  they  left  the  lior>emen  to  go  with 

33  him,  and  returned  to  the  castle:  and  they,  when 
they  came  to  (.'iesarea,  and  delivered   the  letter  to 

34  the  governor,  presented  1  aul  al.--o  before  him.  And 
when  he  had  read  it,  he  asked  of  what  province  he 
was;  and  when  he  understood  that  he  was  of  cilicia, 

3o  I  will  hear  thee  fully,  said  he,  when  thine  accusers 


ach.  21  :!)9....6ch.  24  :  1,  10;  25:16. 


rather  during  the  night,  which  would  in- 
chide  the  hours  from  nine  o'clock  p.  m.  (v.  23) 
to  six  A.  M. — Unto  Antipatris,  which  was 
about  thirty-eight  miles  from  Jerusalem,  on 
the  route  to  Csesarea.  It  was  built  by  Herod 
the  Great,  on  the  site  of  a  place  called  Caphar 
Saba,  and  was  named  by  him  Antipatris,  in 
honor  of  his  father  Antipater.  (See  Jos.,  Antt., 
1(3.  5.  2 ;  Bell.  Jud.,  1.  21.  9.)  The  modern  Kefr 
Saba,  about  ten  miles  from  Lud,  the  ancient 
Lydda,  stand.s,  no  doubt,  on  the  same  spot.i 
It  is  an  instance  like  Ptolemais  (21 : 7),  in  whioh 
tiie  original  name  regained  its  sway  on  the  de- 
cline of  the  power  which  imposed  the  foreign 
name.  The  Romans  had  two  military  roads 
from  Jerusalem  to  Antipatris,  a  more  southerly 
one  by  the  way  of  Gibeon  and  Beth-horon,  and 
a  more  northerly  one  by  way  of  Gophna  {Bibl. 
Res.,  ii.  p.  138).  If  Paul's  escort  took  the  latter 
as  the  more  direct  course,  they  would  arrive  at 
Gophna  about  midnight,  and  at  da^direak  would 
reach  the  last  line  of  hills  which  overlook  the 
plain  of  Sharon.  Antipatris  lay  on  a  slight 
eminence  at  a  little  distance  from  the  base  of 
these  hills.  To  perform  this  journey  in  the 
time  allowed  would  require  them  to  proceed  at 
the  rate  of  about  four  miles  an  hour.  As  those 
who  conducted  Paul  had  a  good  road  (traces  of 
the  old  Roman  pavement  are  still  visible),  they 
could  accomplish  a  forced  march  of  that  extent 
in  nine  hours.  Strabo  says  that  an  army,  under 
ordinary  circumstances,  could  march  from  two 
hundred  and  fifty  to  three  hundred  stadia  in  a 
day — i.  e.  an  average  of  about  thirty  miles. 
Forbiger  {Handh.  der  Geog.,  p.  551)  gives  a  table 
of  the  various  distances  of  a  day's  journey 
among  tlie  ancients.  Some  understand  the 
words  to  mean  that  they  brought  him  by  night, 
in  distinction   from   the  day ;    in  which  case, 


they  could  have  occupied  two  nights  on  the 
road.  It  is  suggested  that  the  escort  may  have 
proceeded  to  Nicopolis  the  first  night,  which  was 
twenty-two  Roman  miles  from  Jerusalem,  and, 
remaining  there  the  next  day,  have  arrived  at 
Antipatris  the  night  following.  Biscoe,  Meyer,^ 
Kuinoel,  and  others  adopt  this  opinion.  In 
this  case  on  the  morrow,  in  v.  32,  mast  de- 
note the  morrow  after  the  arrival  at  Antipatris 
on  the  second  night,  instead  of  tlie  morrow  after 
leaving  Jerusalem,  as  the  text  would  more  ob- 
viously suggest.  If  it  be  thouglit  necessary, 
we  may  consider  during  the  night  a.s  apj^ly- 
ing  only  to  the  greater  part  of  the  journey.  It 
would  be  correct  to  speak  of  the  journey,  in 
general  terms,  as  a  journey  by  night,  altliough 
it  occupied  two  or  three  hours  of  the  follow- 
ing day.  This  view,  which  "Winer  maintains 
(Realw.,  1.  p.  65),  allows  us  to  assign  twelve 
hours  to  the  march,  ar.d  the  rate  of  travelling 
would  then  be  a  little  more  than  three  miles 
the  hour. 

32.  They  left  the  horsemen,  etc.  The 
remaining  distance  to  Ca-sarea  was  not  more 
than  twenty-five  miles.  They  were  now  so  far 
from  the  scene  of  danger  that  they  could  with 
safety  reduce  the  escort.  Whether  they  had 
orders  to  do  this  or  acted  on  their  own  dis- 
cretion we  are  not  told.  They  commenced 
their  return  to  Jerusalem  on  the  morrow,  but 
after  so  hurried  a  march  would  travel  leis- 
urely, and  may  have  occupied  two  days  on 
the  way. 

34.  The  governor  appears  in  the  common 
text  without  sufficient  reason. — He  asked— lit. 
having  asked — from  what  province  he  is. 
He  makes  the  inquiry,  perhaps,  because  the 
letter  stated  that  Paul  was  a  Roman  citizen. 

35.  I   will    hear    thee    fully.      Observe 


-  See  the  account  of  a  visit  to  Kefr  Saba  by  the  late  Dr.  Smith,  in  the  Bibliotheca  Sacra,  1843,  p.  478.  xq. :  "  It 
is  a  Muslim  village,  of  considerable  size,  and  wholly  like  the  most  common  villages  of  the  plain,  being  built 
entirely  of  mud.  We  saw  but  one  stone  building,  which  was  apparently  a  mosque,  but  without  a  minaret.  No 
old  ruins,  nor  the  least  relic  of  antiquity,  did  we  anywhere  discover.  A  well  by  which  we  stopped,  a  few  rods 
east  of  the  houses,  exhibits  more  signs  of  careful  workmanship  than  anything  else.  It  is  walled  with  hewn 
stone,  and  is  fifty-seven  feet  deep  to  the  water.  The  village  stands  upon  a  slight  circular  eminence  near  the 
western  hills,  from  which  it  is  actually  separated,  however,  by  a  branch  of  the  plain."  Raumer  (Pa/ai<j«a, 
p.  132,  3d  ed.)  and  Ritter  (ICrdkunde,  xvi.  p.  571)  suppose  Antipatris  to  have  been  at  this  place. 

2  J.  A.  G.  Meyer,  in  his  Versuch  einer  Vertheidigung  und  Erlduterung  der  GtschUhte  Jesu  und  der  Apostel  au» 
Griechischen  und  liomischen  Profunscribenten  (p.  4G1). 


270 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


are  also  come.     And  he  commanded  him  to  be  kept  in 
"Herod  sjudgme lit  liall. 


also  are  come :  and  he  commanded  him  to  he  kept 
in  Herod's  'palace. 


CHAPTER    XXIV. 


AND  after  'five  days  "Ananias  the  high  priest  de- 
scended with  the  eldt-rs,  and  uitli  a  certain  orator 
vaiiied  Tertullus,  who  informed  the  governor  against 
I'aul. 

2  And  when  he  was  called  forth,  Tertullus  began  to 
accuse  him,  saying,  beeiug  that  by  thee  we  enjoy  great 
quietiicss,  and  that  very  worthy  deeds  are  done  unto 
this  nation  by  thy  providence, 

3  We  accept  il  always,  and  in  all  places,  most  noble 
Felix,  with  all  thankfulness. 


I  And  after  five  days  the  high  priest  Ananias  came 
down  with  certain  elders,  and  ivilh  an  orator,  one 
Tertullus;  and  they  informed  the  governor  against 

!  Paul.  And  when  he  was  called,  Tertullus  began  to 
accuse  him,  saying, 

Seeing  that  by  thee  we  enjoy  much  peace,  and 
that  by  thy  providence  evils  are  corrected  for  this 

i  nation,  we  accept  it  in  all  ways  and  in  uU  places, 


iMatt.  27  :  27....6ch.  21  :  27 o  ch.  23  :  2,  30,  35;  25:  2.- 


-1  Gr.  Pratorium. 


the  compound  verb  (Staicou'o-o/iioi).  The  expres- 
sion exhibits  a  singular  conformity  to  the 
proces-ses  of  Roman  law.  The  rule  was,  Qui 
cum  elogio  (see  on  v.  25)  mittuniur,  ex  intcrjro 
audiendi  sunt  ["  Tho.se  who  are  sent  with 
an  elogium  must  be  fully  heard"].  The  gov- 
ernor of  a  i^rovince  was  not  to  give  implicit 
credit  to  tlie  document  with  which  a  prisoner 
was  sent  to  him ;  he  must  institute  an  inde- 
pendent examination  of  the  case  for  himself. 
(See  Bottger,  Brltritfie,  u.  s.  w.,  ii.  p.  8.)  —  In 
Herod's  judgment  hall,  in  the  jirxtorium  of 
Herod — i.  e.  in  the  palace  built  by  him  at  Coe- 
sarea,  and  now  occupied  as  the  residence  of  the 
Roman  procurators.  Paul  was  confined  in  some 
apartment  of  this  edifice,  or  within  its  precincts. 
(See  Win.,  Realw.,  ii.  p.  324.) 


1-9.  TERTULLUS  ACCUSES  PAUL  BE- 
FORE FELIX. 

1.  As  to  Ananias,  see  on  23  :  2. — And,  or 
now,  after  five  days — i.  e.  in  popular  usage  on 
the  fifth  since  Paul's  departure  from  Jerusalem 
(Kuin.,  Mey.,  De.  Wet.),  not  since  his  capture 
there  or  since  his  arrival  at  Csesarea.  The  es- 
caiie  from  the  Jewish  conspiracy  is  nearest  to 
the  mind  here  after  what  has  been  related ;  and 
further,  according  to  Roman  usage,  a  case  re- 
ferred like  this  should  be  tried  on  the  third 
day,  or  as  soon  after  that  as  might  be  possible. 
(Comp.  25  :  17.  See  Bottger,  ii.  p.  9.).  The 
reckoning  in  v.  11  admits  of  this  decision. — 
With  the  elders — i.  e.  the  Sanhedrists,  repre- 
sented by  some  of  their  number.  (Tti'wi',  "  some 
of,"  is  a  gloss.) — Orator  Tertullns.  As  the 
people  in  the  provinces  were  not  acquainted 
with  the  forms  of  Roman  law,  they  employed 
advocates  to  plead  for  them  before  the  public 
tribunals.  Tertullus  was  one  of  this  class  of 
men,  and  may  have  been  a  Roman  or  a  Greek. 
It  is  not  certain  that  "the  proceedings  before 


Felix  were  conducted  in  Latin.  In  ancient 
times  the  Romans  had  attempted  to  enforce 
the  use  of  Latin  in  all  law-courts,  but  the  ex- 
periment failed.  Under  the  emperors  trials 
were  permitted  in  Greek,  even  in  Rome  itself, 
as  well  in  the  Senate  as  in  the  forum ;  and  it  is 
unlikely  that  greater  strictness  should  have 
been  observed  in  a  distant  province"  {Lcwin, 
ii.  p.  G84). — Informed  the  governor  against 
Paul,  lodged  their  complaint.  "The  begin- 
ning of  any  judicial  action,"  says  Geib,  "con- 
sisted in  the  formal  declaration  on  the  part  of 
the  accuser  that  he  wished  to  prosecute  a  par- 
ticular person  on  account  of  a  certain  crime."  ^ 

2.  And  when  he  (Paul)  was  called  forth 
— lit.  he  having  been  called  [there  is  nothing 
answering  to  forth  in  the  Greek  text. — A.  H.], 
after  information  of  the  case  had  been  given 
(informed,  v.  i),  but  before  the  charges  against 
him  were  produced.  The  Roman  law  secured 
that  privilege  to  the  accused.  (See  25  :  16.) 
Nothing  could  be  more  unstudied  than  this 
conformity  to  the  judicial  rule. — Began,  or 
proceeded,  to  accuse.  Tertullus  insisted 
on  three  charges — viz.  sedition  (a  mover  of 
sedition),  heresy  (a  ringleader  of  the  sect 
of  the  Nazarenes),  and  profanation  of  the 
temple  (who  also  hath  gone  about  to  pro- 
fane the  temple).     (See  on  vv.  5,  6.) 

3.  In  this  verse  [which  in  the  original  be- 
gins with  the  speech  of  Tertullus,  Seeing, 
etc.,  E.  v. — A.  IL]  the  participial  clause  forms 
the  object  of  Ave  accept.  (Comp.  T  thank  God 
that  I  speak  with  tongues  more  than  you  all,  in 
1  Cor.  14  :  18.  W.  ?  46.  1.  a.)  Translate  that 
we  enjoy  much  peace  through  thee,  and 
(the  benefit  of)  many  (sc.  ttoWwv]  excellent 
deeds  performed  for  this  nation  by  thy 
prudence,  we  acknowledge,  with  all 
gratitude.  Most  critics  transfer  the  idea  of 
much  to  worthy  deeds  (De  Wet,,  Mey., 
Rob.),  which  term  refers  to  the  general  meas- 
ures of  his  administration.     [According  to  the 


Geschichte  des  liSmisc/ien  Criminal-processes,  p.  115. 


Cii.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


271 


4  Notwithstanding,  that  I  be  not  fiirtlier  tedious 
unto  thee,  1  pray  thee  that  thou  wouUlest  hear  us  of 
tliy  cleiueucy  a  few  words. 

T)  "For  we  liave  found  this  man  a  pestilent  /e/lotv, 
and  a  mover  of  sedition  amon^  all  the  .lews  through- 
out the  world,  and  a  ringleader  of  the  sect  of  tlie 
Nazarenes : 

(i  *\Vho  also  hath  gone  about  to  profane  the  temple: 
whom  we  look,  and  would  «have  judged  according  to 
our  law. 

7  ''Hut  the  chief  captain  Lysias  came  upon  vs,  and 
with  great  violence  took  him  away  out  of  our  hands, 

8  •(.'ommandiu;;  his  accusers  to  come  unto  thee:  by 
examining  of  whom  thy.self  niayest  take  knowledge 
of  all  these  things,  whereof  we  accuse  him. 

'J  .\nd  the  Jews  also  assented,  saying  that  these 
things  were  so. 


4  most  e.xcellent  Felix,  with  all  thankfulness.  But, 
that  I  be  not  further  tedions  unto  thee,  I  intreat 

5  thee  to  hear  us  of  thy  cleniency  a  few  words.  For 
we  have  found  this  man  a  pestilent  fellow,  and  a 
mover  of  insurrections  among  all  tlie  .Tews  through- 
out 'the  world,  and  a  ringleader  of  the  seel  of  the 

fiNaz.renes:    who  moreover  assayed  to  i)rotane  the 

8  temple:  on  whom  also  we  laid  hold.-  from  whom 
thou  wilt  be  able,  by  examining  him  thyself,  to  lake 
knowledge  of  all   these  things,  whereof  we  accuse 

9  him.  And  the  .lews  also  joined  in  the  charge, 
allirmiug  that  these  things  "were  so. 


a  Luke  23  :  2  :  ch.  6:13:  16  :  20  :  17:6;  21  :  28  ;  1  Pet.  2  :  12.  la. . .  .6  oh 
i  (ir.  tlic  inhahitcil  earth 2  Some  ancient  iiuihoriiies  insert 


captain  Lysi 


:  28.  ...c  John    18  :  :il....d  ch.  21 

XII.U  cur ...... .^  .:>vfiii^  aiii....^..  b  » u ...  v.. .  t.....  ........  v  .v..^»  » ..   .......'id  flavc  jtiUgcd  hint  according  to  vui  ilu..     i  (#». 

came,  and  with  great  violence  took  him  away  out  of  our  tiandt*   a  commanding  hia  accaaera  to  come  be/ore  thee. 


ech.  2:t :  :)0. 

law.    7  Hut  the  chief 


text  now  frcncrally  accepted,  a  word  meaning 
reforms  ><ho\i\d  be  substituted  here. — A.  H.]  The 
speaker  employs  the  first  person  phiral,  iK'cause 
he  identities  himself  with  liis  clients. — Always 
ami  in  all  places  some  join  with  are  done  : 
bath  in  n'cnj  ivatj  and  everywhere  (Rob.);  othere 
with  we  accept,  or  acknowlecUjc,  and  render 
both  rt/uvn/.s-  and  everywhere,  not  merely  now  and 
here  (De  Wet.,  Mey.).  The  first  is  the  surer 
sense  of  the  Greek  {-nivrn).  Tlie  best  editors 
write  this  word  without  iota  subscript.  (W. 
§5.  4.  e.) — The  language  of  TertuUus  is  that 
of  gross  flattery.  History  ascribes  to  Felix  a 
very  dilferent  character.  Both  Jose[)hus  and 
Tacitus  represent  him  as  one  of  the  most  cor- 
rupt and  oppressive  rulers  ever  sent  by  the 
Romans  into  Judca.  He  deserved  some  praise 
for  the  vigor  with  whicli  he  suppressed  tlie 
bands  of  robbers  by  which  the  country  had 
been  infested.  The  compliment  had  that  basis, 
but  no  more. 

4.  Notwithstanding,  etc.,  but  that  1  may 
not  hinder,  weary,  thee  too  much,  I  will  be 
brief—/,  e.  in  what  he  proposes  to  advance. 
I'^urther,  or  too  much,  refers,  not  to  the  few 
words  of  his  preamble  (Mey.),  as  if  that  was 
beginning  to  lie  tedious,  but  to  his  subsequent 
plea. — Wouldst  hear,  etc. — lit.  to  hear  us 
briefly,  where  the  ailverb  qualities  the  verb.  It 
is  uniieces.sary  to  supply  about  to  speak  after  t/.s. 

5.  The  sentence  is  irregular.  We  should  have 
expected  we  took  him  at  the  beginning  of  the 
apodosis  (v.  e) ;  but,  instead  of  that,  the  writer 
says  whom  also,  intiuenced,  apparently,  by 
who  also  in  the  clau.se  which  precedes.  (W. 
^4(3.  2.) — For,  or  namely  :  the  case  is  as  follows. 
(Comp.  1  :J0.) — A  pestilent  fellow— lit.  pest, 
like  our  use  of  tlie  word. — A  mover,  etc.,  ex- 
citing disturbance  unto  all  the  Jews — i.e. 
among  tliem  and  to  their  detriment.  The  latter 
itiea  occ;i^ions  the  use  of  the  dative.  The  charge 
is  tliat  he  set  the  Jews  at  variance  with  one  an- 


other, not  that  he  excited  them  to  rebel  against 
the  Romans. — Nazarenes  occurs  here  only  as 
a  term  of  rein-oaeli  (Olsh.).     (See  on  2  :  l2li.) 

6.  Who  also  hath  gone  about,  or  at- 
tempted, etc.  (See'JI  :  I'S.) — The  entire  passage, 
and  would  have  judged  to  by  examining, 
etc.  (vv.  6-8),  is  of  doubtful  authority.  It  is  re- 
jected by  Griesbach,  Bengel,  Mill,  Lachmann, 
Tischendorf,  De  Wette,  and  others.  Manu- 
scripts of  the  first  class  omit  the  words,  and 
otlicrs  contain  them  with  different  variations. 
"If  they  are  genuine,"  says  Meyer,  "it  is  dilli- 
cult  to  see  why  any  one  should  have  left  them 
out ;  for  and  would  have  judged  according 
to  our  law  would  be  no  more  ollensive  in  tlie 
mouth  of  the  advocate  who  speaks  in  the  name 
of  his  client  than  the  preceding  we  took.  The 
indirect  complaint  against  Lysias,  in  v.  7,  was 
entirely  nattiral  to  the  relation  of  the  Jews  to 
this  tribune,  who  had  twice  protected  Paul 
against  them."  It  is  urged  for  the  words  that 
their  insertion  answers  no  ajiparent  object,  and 
that  they  may  have  been  dropped  accidentally 
(Wdsth.). — We  would,  simply  we  wished 
to,  judge,  etc.  We  obtain  a  very  difi'erent 
view  of  their  design  from  21  :  .'$1 ;  2(5  :  21. 

7.  In  the  words  with  much  violence  Ter- 
tuUus misstates  the  fact.  The  Jews  released  Paul 
wit  iiout  any  struggle  on  the  ai>i)ea ranee  of  Lysias. 
(See  21  :  32.)— Before  thee.     (See  on  23  :  30.) 

8.  Of  whom  would  refer  to  Paul,  if  we  ex- 
clude the  uncertain  text  which  precedes,  bu*' 
more  naturally  to  Lysias,  if  we  retain  it. 
(Comp.  V.  22.) — By  examining  maj'  be  used 
of  any  judicial  examination.  It  is  impossible 
to  think  here  of  a  trial  by  torture,  since  both 
Paul  and  Lysias  were  exempt  from  it  in  virtue 
of  their  rank  as  Roman  citizens.  It  was  illegal, 
at  all  events,  to  have  recourse  to  this  measure. 
(See  Conybeare  and  Ilowson's  note,  ii.  p.  322.) 

9.  And  the  Jews  also  assented,  or  as- 
sailed him,  at  the  same  time — viz.  by  a::- 


272 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


10  Then  Paul,  after  that  the  governor  had  beckoned 
unto  him  to  speak,  answered,  1-orasniuch  as  1  know 
that  thou  hast  been  of  many  years  a  judge  unto  this 
nation,  I  do  the  more  cheerfully  answer  for  myself: 

11  Because  that  thou  mayest  understand,  that  there 
are  yet  but  twelve  days  since  I  went  up  to  Jerusalem 
"for  to  worship. 

12  *And  they  neither  found  me  in  the  temple  dis- 
puting with  any  man,  neither  raising  up  the  people, 
neither  in  the  synagogues,  nor  in  the  city  : 


10  And  when  the  governor  had  beckoned  unto  him 
to  speak,  Paul  answered, 

y  orasmuch  as  I  know  that  thou  hast  been  of  many 
years  a  judge  unto  this  nation,  I  do  cheerfully  make 

11  iny  defence ;  seeing  that  thou  canst  take  knowledge, 
that  it  is  not  more  than  twelve  days  since  I  went  up 

12  to  worship  at  Jerusalem  :  aid  neither  in  the  temple 
did  they  tind  me  disputing  with  any  man  or  stirring 
up  a  crowd,  nor  in  the  synagogues,  nor  in  the  city. 


aver.  17  ;  ch   '21  :  26 b  ch.  25  :  8 ;  28  :  17. 


serting  that  the  charges  were  true.  This  is  a 
better  reading  tlian  assented  {<rt>vi^ivTo),  agreed, 
though  we  have  that  word  in  23  :  20. 

10-33.  PAUL'S  DEFENCE  BEFORE  FE- 
LIX. 

10.  Of  many  years,  or  since  many  years. 
As  Felix  became  procurator  probably  in  A.  d. 
52  (see  on  v.  24),  he  had  been  in  office  six  or 
seven  years,  which  was  comparatively  a  long 
time  at  this  period,  when  the  provincial  mag- 
istrates were  changed  so  rapidly.  Some  of 
them  exceeded  that  term  of  service,  but  a  great- 
er number  of  them  fell  short  of  it.  Before  his 
own  appointment  as  procurator  he  had  also 
governed  Samaria  for  some  years,  under  Cu- 
manus,  his  predecessor.  (See  Herz.,  EvcykL, 
iv.  p.  354.)  Nation  depends  on  judge  as  dat. 
comm.,  judge  for  this  nation,  since  the  re- 
lation existed  ideally  for  their  benefit.  (B. 
§  133.  2.  h  ;  W.  §  31.  2.)  Paul  avoids  the  usual 
people,  and  says  nation,  because  he  is  speaking 
to  a  foreigner.  (See  also  v.  17.)— More  cheer- 
fully (T.  R.),  or  cheerfully  (Tsch.)  ;  the  for- 
mer more  correct,  since  the  comijarative,  as 
less  obvious,  was  liable  to  be  displaced.  [Yet, 
while  this  is  true,  the  weight  of  evidence  from 
manuscripts  is  so  much  in  favor  of  cheerfully — 
viz.  N  A  B  E  with  many  important  cursives, 
against  H  L  P — that  all  the  editors,  Lach., 
Tsch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  the  Anglo-Am. 
Revisers,  accept  it. — A.  H.] 

11.  Mayest  understand,  better  since  you 
are  able  to  know — /.  e.  by  inquiry,  or  (Tsch.) 
[also  Lach.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  Re- 
visers] to  ascertain  (iiriyvwvat.).  Paul  adds  this  as 
another  reason  why  he  was  encouraged  to  re- 
ply. The  subject  lay  within  a  narrow  compass. 
Felix  could  easily  ascertain  how  the  prisoner 
had  been  employed  during  the  time  in  which 
he  was  said  to  have  committed  the  crimes  laid 
to  his  charge. — The  common  text  inserts  than 
before  twelve  [  =  not  more  than  tivelve  days],  which 
the  later  editions  omit.  (See  on  4  :  22.)  The 
best  mode  of  reckoning  the  twelve  days  is 
the  following :  First,  the  day  of  the  arrival  at 
Jerusalem  (21 :  17) ;  second,  the  interview  with 
James  (21 :  is) ;  third,  the  assumption  of  the  vow 


(21:26);  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh,  the 
vow  continued,  which  was  to  have  been  kept 
seven  days  (being  interrupted  on  the  fifth) ; 
eighth,  Paul  before  the  Sanhedrim  (22:30;  23: 
1-10) ;  ninth,  the  plot  of  the  Jews  and  the  jour- 
ney by  night  to  Antipatris  (23:12,31);  tenth, 
eleventh,  twelfth,  and  thirteenth,  the  days  at 
Csesarea  (24:1),  on  the  last  of  which  the  trial 
was  then  taking  place.  The  number  of  com- 
plete days,  therefore,  would  be  twelve,  the  day 
in  progress  at  the  time  of  speaking  not  being 
counted.  The  five  days  mentioned  in  v.  1 ,  above, 
agree  with  this  computation,  if,  as  suggested 
there,  we  reckon  the  day  of  leaving  Jerusalem 
as  the  first  of  the  five,  and  that  of  the  arrival 
at  Cpesarea  as  the  last.  So,  essentially,  Wetstein, 
Anger,  Meyer,  De  Wette,  and  others.  Some,  as 
Kuinoel,  Olshausen,  would  exclude  the  days 
spent  at  Ca^sarea,  and  extend  the  time  assigned 
to  the  continuation  of  the  vow.  But  there 
are  .  .  .  since  I  (note  the  tense)  evidently 
represents  the  days  as  reaching  ujj  to  the  pres- 
ent time.  According  to  Wieseler's  hyiiothesis, 
that  Paul  was  apprehended  on  the  second  day 
of  the  vow,  the  seven  days  in  21  :  27,  form  no 
part  of  the  series.  He  distributes  the  time 
as  follows  :  Two  days  on  the  journey  from  Cse- 
sarea to  Jerusalem  (21 :  15) ;  third,  interview  with 
James ;  fourth  {Pentecost),  seizure  of  Paul  in  the 
temple ;  fifth,  the  session  of  the  Sanhedrim  ; 
sixth,  the  departure  by  night  to  Ctesarea; 
seventh,  the  arrival  at  Cajsarea;  twelfth  (five 
days  after  that),  the  journey  of  Ananias 
from  Jerusalem  (24 : 1) ;  and  thirteenth,  his 
arrival  at  Ceesarea  and  the  trial  of  Paul. — 
From  Avhich  =  since  (i^'  ^s)  is  abbreviated 
for  from  the  day  ichich  (dn-b  t^5  vtJLfpai  ^s). — For 
to  worship,  or  in  order  to  worship — /.  e.  in 
the  temple,  which  was  an  object  entirely  dif- 
ferent from  that  imputed  to  him.  For  this  use 
of  the  future  participle,  see  B.  ^  144.  3. 

12.  The  grammatical  analysis  here  requires 
attention.  The  first  neither  extends  to  peo- 
ple, and  or  (not  nor)  connects  merely  the  par- 
ticipial clauses  (disputing,  etc.,  and  raising 
up,  etc.),  not  found  expressed  with  that  verb 
repeated.    Before  the  second  and  third  neither 


Ch.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


273 


13  Neither  can  they  prove  the  things  whereof  they 
now  accuse  nie. 

14  Hut  tliis  I  confess  unto  thee,  that  after  "the  way 
which  they  call  heresy,  so  worship  I  the  'ijod  of  luy 
fathers,  believing  all  things  which  are  written  in  ''the 
law  and  in  the  prophets: 

15  And  ''have  hope  toward  God,  which  they  them- 
selves also  allow,  'that  there  shall  be  a  resurrection  of 
the  dead,  both  of  the  just  and  unjust. 

16  And  /herein  do  i  exercise  myself,  to  have  always 
a  conscience  void  of  oUence  toward  God,  and  toward 
men. 

17  Now  after  many  years  »l  came  to  bring  alms  to 
my  nation,  and  oU'eriugs. 


13  Neither  can  they  prove  to  thee  the  things  whereof 

14  they  now  accuse  me.  Hut  this  I  confess  unto  thee, 
that  after  the  Way  whicli  tliey  call  'a  sect,  so  .serve 
I  the  (jod  of  our  fathers,  believing  all  things  which 
are  according  to  the  law,  and  which  are  written  in 

15  the  prophets:  having  hope  toward  i>od,  whicii  these 
alMt  themselves  -look  for,  that  there  shall  be  a  resur- 

Kirection  both  of  the  just  and  unjust.  Herein  do  I 
also  e.\ercise  myself  to  have  a  conscience  void  of  . 

17  offence  toward  Ciod  and  men  alway.  Now  after 
some  years  1  came  to  bring  alms  to  my  nation,  and 


a  See  Amos  8  :  14  ;  ch.  9  :  2 hi  Tim.  1:3 c  ch.  26  :  22  ;  28  :  2.1 (J  ch.  23  :  «  ;  26  :  6,   7;  28  :  20 e  Dan.   12  :  2:  Johi 

28,  2a /ch.  23  :  1 jr  ch.  11  :  29,30;  20  :  16;  Rom.  15  •  25  ;  2  Cor.  8:4;  Gal.  2  :  10. 1  Or,  herety 2  Or,  accept 


we  are  to  insert  again  found  .  .  .  people  ;  so 

that  both  act.s — the  having  disputed  and  the 
having  excited  a  tumult — are  denied  with  refer- 
ence to  tlie  temple,  the  synagogues,  and  the 
city. — The  disputing  was  not  in  itself  censur- 
able, but  in  this  instance  he  could  urge  that  he 
had  not  even  had  any  religious  discussion  dur- 
ing the  few  days  in  question. — In  the  syn- 
agogues, at  Jerusalem,  where  they  were 
numerous.  (See  on  6  :  9.) — In — i.  e.  through- 
out—the city,  up  and  down  the  streets  (Alf.), 
not  excluding  disputing,  but  referring  espe- 
cially to  raising  up  the  people. 

14.  Having  replied  to  what  was  folsely  al- 
leged, he  states  now  (5e  adversative)  what  was 
true  in  the  case. — That  after,  etc.,  that  ac- 
cording  to,  (those   of)  the  way  (9:2;  is  :  9,  etc.) 

which  (not  in  which)  they  call  a  sect  (aVpeo-ii', 
with  a  shade  of  reproach)  so  (t.  c.  after  their 
mode)  I  worship,  etc.  This  appears  to  me 
more  simple  tlian  to  make  so  prospective :  so 
— viz.  hij  believing  all  things^,  etc.  (Mey.,  De  "Wet.). 
— In  the  law — i.  e.  throughout  the  law,  in 
all  the  bonks  of  Moses.     (See  on  13  :  15.) 

15.  And  have  hope,  or  having  a  hope, 
in  reference  to  God — i.  e.  founded  on  him, 
since  his  word  and  his  promise  furnisli  the  only 
basis  of  su.:h  a  hope.  —  Which  also,  etc., 
which  also  these  themselves  entertain, 
that  it  is  appointed  there  shall  be  (see  on 
10  :  28)  a  resurrection  of  the  dead,  etc. 
These  themselves  are  the  Jews  present,  viewed 
as  representatives  of  the  nation.  Hence  most 
of  his  accusers  here  were  Pharisees,  and  the 
breach  between  them  and  the  Sadducees  (23 : 7) 
had  been  speedily  repaired.  The  dead  {vtKpCiv), 
in  T.  R.,  lacks  the  requisite  sup))ort  (Lchm., 
Tsch).  Both  of,  etc.,  not  only  of  the  just 
(those  acceptetl  as  such  by  faith),  but  of  the  un- 
just. Tlie  resurrection  of  the  wicked,  in  order 
to  be  punished,  is  as  clearly  taught  here  as  that 
of  the  righteous,  to  be  rewarded.  The  apostle 
represents  tliis  hope  as  the  prevalent  Jewish 
faith.     (Comp.  2G  :  7.)     "The  Sadducees,"  says 

18 


Biscoe  (p.  68),  "  were  so  few  in  number  that 
they  were  not  worthy  of  his  notice  by  way  of 
exception.  Josephus  expressly  tells  us  '  that 
they  were  a  few  men  only  of  the  chief  of  the 
nation '  (Antt.,  18.  1.  4) ;  that  they  prevailed 
only  with  the  rich  to  embrace  their  senti- 
ments, and  that  the  common  people  were  all 
on  the  :qde  of  the  Pharisees  (ih.,  13.  10.  G)." 

16.  Herein,  rather  therefore  (comp.  John 
10  :  30) — (.  e.  in  antici[)ation  of  such  a  day. — 
Also  I  myself,  as  well  as  others  who  exem- 
plify tlie  proper  eflfect  of  this  doctrine.  It  is 
impossible,  the  apostle  would  argue,  that  he 
should  entertain  such  a  persuasion  and  yet  be 
guilty  of  the  crimes  imimted  to  him. — Exer- 
cise, strive,  exert  myself. — Void  of  offence — 
that  is,  blameless;  lit.  not  made  to  stumble, 
preserved  from  it,  and  hence  unoffended.  The 
term  is  passive  here,  as  in  Phil.  1 :  10,  but  active 
in  1  Cor.  10  :  32. 

17.  The  defence  here  (Noav  (««)  metabatic) 
goes  back  to  the  specification  in  v.  6. — After 
several  years — i.  e.  of  absence.  It  was  now 
A.  D.  58  or  59.  He  had  made  his  last  visit  to 
Jerusalem  in  the  year  a.  d.  54  or  55. — To  bring 
alms,  or  in  order  to  bring  alms,  which  he 
had  collected  in  the  churches  of  Macedonia  and 
Achaia  for  the  relief  of  the  believers  at  Jeru- 
salem. (See  Rom.  15  :  25,  20 ;  1  Cor.  IG  :  1-4 ; 
2  Cor.  8  :  1-4.)  This  allusion  is  very  abrupt. 
It  is  the  first  and  only  intimation  contained  in 
the  Acts  that  Paul  had  been  taking  up  contri- 
butions on  so  extensive  a  plan.  The  manner 
in  which  the  Epistles  supply  this  deficiency,  as 
Paley  has  shown,  furnishes  an  incontestable 
proof  of  the  credibility  of  the  New  Testament 
writers. —  Offerings  depends  loosely  on  to 
bring:  and  while  there  I  was  making,  or 
would  have  made,  offerings;  which,  after  the 
information  in  21 :  20,  we  naturally  understand 
of  those  that  he  engaged  to  bring  in  behalf  of 
the  Nazarites.  They  are  not  the  oblations  which 
wore  made  during  the  feast  of  Pentecost,  since 
no  connection  would  exist  then  between  of- 


274 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


18  ""Whereupon  certain  Jews  from  Asia  found  me 
purified  in  the  temple,  neither  with  multitude,  nor 
■with  tumult. 

19  »\\  ho  ought  to  have  heen  here  before  thee,  and 
object,  if  they  had  ought  against  me. 

20  Or  else  let  these  -same  hert  say,  if  they  have  four  d 
any  evil  doing  in  me,  while  I  stood  before  the  coui  cil, 

21  Except  it  be  for  this  one  voice,  that  1  cried  stai  d- 
ing  among  them,  ■'Touching  the  resurrection  of  the 
dead  I  am  called  in  question  by  you  this  day. 

22  And  when  Felix  heard  these  things,  having  more 
perfect  knowledge  of  Unit  way,  he  deferred  them,  and 
said.  When  ■'Lysias  the  chief  "captain  shall  come  down, 
I  will  know  the  uttermost  of  your  matter. 


18  offerings :  'amidst  which  they  found  me  purified  in 
the  temple,  with   no  crowd,  nor  yet  with  tumult: 

19  but  l^l^re  urre  certain  .lews  from  Asia — who  ought  to 
have  been  here  before  thee,  and  to  make  accusation, 

20  if  they  had  aught  against  me.  Or  else  let  these  men 
themselves  say  what  wrongdoing  they  found,  when 

21  I  stood  before  the  council,  except  it  be  for  this  one 
voice,  that  I  cried  standing  among  them.  Touching 
the  resurrection  of  the  dead  1  am  called  in  ques- 
tion before  you  this  day. 

22  But  I'elix,  having  more  exact  knowledge  concern- 
ing the  Way,  deferred  them,  saying,  W  hen  Lysias 
the  chief  captain  shall  come  down,  1  will  determine 


tch.  21  :26,  27;  26  :  21....6  ch.  23  :  30;  25  :  16....C  ch.  23  :  6 :  28:  20.... dyer.  ■ 


-1  Or,  in  presenting  which 


ferings  and  the  purification  spoken  of  in  the  | 
next  verse.  I 

18.  Whereupon,  rather  in  which,  the 
business  of  the  offerings.  For  this  use  of 
the  pronoun,  comp.  26  :  12.— They  (sc.  the 
Jews)  found  me  purified  as  a  Nazarite  in 
the  temple.  Purified  must  have  this  sense 
liere,  since  it  points  back  so  evidently  to  21 :  24, 
2G.— Neither  Avith,  etc.,  not  with,  a  mob, 
as  Tertulhis  had  given  out  (v.  5),  but  conduct- 
ing himself  altogether  peaceably. — lie  now  re- 
torts this  charge  of  a  riot  upon  the  true  authors 
of  it.— But  certain  Jews  from  Asia.  It  is 
they  who  excited  a  tumult,  not  I.  The  verb 
could  be  omitted  (a  true  picture  of  the  speak- 
er's earnestness),  because  it  suggests  itself  so 
readily  from  tumult,  and  because  the  details 
of  the  affair  have  been  related  at  such  length 
(21 :  27).  The  common  text  omits  but  (Se),  and 
makes  certain  Jews  the  subject  of  found. 
This  is  incorrect,  as  but  (5e)  must  be  retained. 
Our  English  translation  is  founded  on  the  omis- 
sion of  this  particle.  [The  Revised  Version  (see 
above)  represents  correctly  the  Greek  text  as  in- 
terpreted by  Dr.  Hackett. — A.  H.] 

19.  Who  ought,  etc.,  whom  it  becmne,  to  be 
present,  imi^erfect,  because  they  should  have 
been  there  already  (comp.  Ka^rjKev  in  22  :  22). 
The  instigators  of  the  riot  were  the  persons  to 
testify  how  it  arose.— If  they  had  aught,  bet- 
ter if  they  might  have  anything,  a  possi- 
bility purely  subjective,  and  hence  optative. 

20.  Or,  etc.  (since  the  proper  witnesses  are 
not  here),  let  these  themselves  (see  vv.  1, 
15)  say  what  crime  they  found.  With  if 
(el)  in  the  T.  R.  we  must  read  if  they  found  any, 
etc.  (E.  V.) ;  but  if  is  unauthorized. 

21.  Except  it  be,  etc.,  no  other  offence  than 
(that)  concerning  this  one  expression. 
The  sentence  is  framed  as  if  some  other  offence 
had  preceded  (Mey.,  De  Wet.).  The  Sadducees 
might  object  to  his  avowal  of  a  belief  in  the 
resurrection,  but  the  rest  of  his  countrymen 
would  esteem  that  a  merit,  and  not  a  crime. 
[The  meaning  of  Paul's  confession  is:  "If  they 


can  find  fault  with  me  for  any  definite  action 
that  was  wrong,  it  can  be  for  no  other  than  my 
language  about  the  resurrection  of  the  dead ; 
for  that  language  did  occasion  a  fierce  debate 
and  great  disorder."  Thus,  Paul  frankly  ad- 
mits that  he  had  uttered  a  sentiment  which 
led  to  strife,  but  he  evidently  believes  that 
Felix  knows  how  to  estimate  that  language 
aright.  Is  it  possible  that  he  had  forgotten  his 
i:)rediction  of  God's  judgment  on  the  high 
priest,  especially  if  he  had  seen  it  to  be  an  ill- 
advised  word,  and  had  been  moved  to  apolo- 
gize for  it  on  the  spot?  — A.  H.]— That  I 
cried,  correctly  (^s  eVpafa)  which  I  cried,  an 
attracted  genitive,  instead  of  the  accusative, 
which  this  verb  would  properly  take  as  hav- 
ing a  kindred  sense.  In  Matt  27  :  50  and  Mark 
1  :  20  voice  {<t>u>vfi)  after  the  same  verb  denotes 
the  instrument  of  speech,  not,  as  here,  what 
was  spoken.     (See  W.  §  24.  1.) 

23,  Them— viz.  both  parties,  like  your, 
just  below.— Having  more  perfect  know- 
ledge, etc.,  strictly  knowing  the  things  in 
regard  to  the  way  (the  Christian  sect)  more 
accurately — i.  e.  than  to  give  a  decision 
against  Paul  (comp.  25  :  10)  or  than  the  com- 
plaint against  him  liad  taken  for  granted. 
"Since  Felix,"  says  Meyer,  "had  been  al- 
ready procurator  more  than  six  years,  and 
Christianity  had  spread  itself,  not  only  in  all 
parts  of  Judea,  but  in  CoJ.sarea  itself,  it  is  natu- 
ral that  he  should  have  had  a  more  coo-ect 
knowledge  of  this  religion  than  the  Sanhedrists 
on  this  occasion  had  soitght  to  give  him  ;  hence 
he  did  not  condemn  the  accused,  but  left  the 
matter  in  suspense."  Other  explanations  of 
the  comparative  arc  the  following :  knoicing  the 
case  more  accurately— i.  c.  as  the  result  of  the 
present  trial  (which  would  have  been  a  reason 
for  deciding  it,  instead  of  deferring  it) ;  knowing 
it  more  accurately  than  to  postpone  it — i.  e.  (a 
remark  of  Luke)  Felix  sliould  have  acquitted 
Paul  at  once  (which  brings  a  severe  reflection 
on  his  conduct  into  too  close  connect! in  with 
the  account  of  his  lenity  in  the  next  verse) ; 


Ch.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


275 


23  And  he  coinnianded  a  reritiirion  to  keep  Paul, 
and  to  let  him  liave  liberty,  and  "that  he  sliould  forliid 
none  of  his  acquaiutaiice  to  minister  or  come  unto 
biiu. 

24  And  after  certain  days,  when  Felix  came  with 
his  wilt!  I>rusilla,  which  was  a  Jewess,  he  sent  for 
I'aul,  and  heard  him  concerning  the  faith  in  Christ. 

2")  And  a-s  he  reasoned  of  righteousness,  temperance, 
and  judgment  to  come,  I'elix  trembled,  and  answered, 
tio  thy  way  fortius  time;  when  I  have  aconveuient 
season,  I  will  call  for  thee. 


23  your  matter.  And  he  gave  order  to  the  centurion 
that  he  should  be  kept  in  charge,  ai.d  should  have 
indulgence;  and  not  to  forbid  any  of  his  friends  to 
minister  unto  him. 

24  Hut  after  certain  days,  Feli.\  came  with  Drusilla, 
'his  wife,  who  was  a  .lewess,  and  sent  for  I'aul,  and 
heard   him  concerning   the  faith   in  Christ  Jesus. 

25  And  as  he  reasoned  of  righteousness,  and -temper- 
ance, and  the  judgment  to  come,  leli.v  was  terrified, 
and  answeretl,  (.o  thy  way  for  this  time:  and  when 
I  have  a  convenient  season,  I  will  call  thee  unto  me. 


a  cb.  27  :  3;  -iR:  16. 1  Or.  ikta  own  wife i  Or,  »el/-control 


and  finally,  knowing  the  case  more  exactly — i.  e. 
(joined  with  what  follows)  when  I  thus  know 
it,  after  liearing  the  testimony  of  Lysias,  judg- 
ment shall  be  given.  This  la-st  sense  is  out  of 
tlie  question,  because  it  disregards  utterly  the 
order  of  the  words,  as  well  as  the  proper  mean- 
ing of  the  following  verb  (StayvMaoiiai),  I  will 
know  fully,  not  will  decide. 

23.  The  (not  a),  before  centurion,  desig- 
nates the  centurion  as  tiie  one  who  had  charge 
of  Paul,  and  perhaps  other  prisoners  (see  27  : 1 ; 
28  :  IG),  whether   he   belonged   to  Ctesarea    or 
liad  come  frotu  Jerusalem.     This  officer  is  not 
necessarily   the  one   who   had   conducted  the 
troops   from   Antipatris   (2,1:32),    in   distinction 
from  the  one  who  returned,  since  the  admits  of 
the  other  explanation,  and  since  som^  two,  in 
23  :  32,  leaves  the  number  indefinite.     Hence, 
as  the  article  does  not  identify  the  centurion,  j 
the  inference  to  that  effect  (Blunt,i  p.  323,  and  I 
Birks,  p.  344)  is  not  to  be  urged  as  a  proof  of 
the  verity  of  the  hi.story.— To  keep  Paul  [ac- 
cording to  the  best  authorities,  him,  not  Paid], 
not  middle,  to  keep  him  (E.  V.),  but  that  he  shoidd 
be  kept  as  a piisoinr,  he  guarded.— And  should 
have  respite,  or  alleviation— t.  e.  be  treated 
with  indulgence,  and  not  subjected  to  a  severe 
captivity.     One  of  the  favors  which  he  received 
is  mentioned  in  the  ne.xt  clause.— The  gram- 
matical sul)ject  changes  before  should  forbid, 
of  which  and  («cai;  note  re  between  tlie  otlier 
verbs)   admonishes  the   reader.- Serve   him, 
minister  to  his  wants.— Or  come  unto  him  is 
doubtful,  and  may  bo  borrowed  from  10  :  28. 

24-27.  Paul"  testifies  before  FE- 
LIX AND  DRUSILLA. 

24.  Came— lit.  having  come,  not  to  Cx- 
sarea,  after  a  temporary  absence,  but  to  tlie  place 
of  audience.  (Comp.  o  :  22;  25  :  23.)— With 
Drusilla,  his  wife,  being  a  Jewess,  which 
would  imply  that  she  still  adiiered  to  the  Jew- 
ish religion.  This  Drusilla  was  a  younger 
daughter  of  Agrippa  I.,  who  was  mentioned  in 
12  :  1,  stj.^  and  a  sister  of  Agrippa  II.,  who  is 
mentioned  in  25  :  13.    We  turn  to  Josephus  I 


I  (Antt.,  20.  7.  1,  sq.)  and  read  the  following  ac- 
count of  her:  "Agrippa  gave  his  sister  Drusilla 
in  marriage  to  Azizus,  King  of  the  Emesenes, 
wlio  had  consented  to  be  circumcised  for  the 
sake  of  the  alliance.      But  this   marriage  of 
Drusilla  with  Azizus  was  dissolved  in  a  short 
time  after  this  maimer.     When  Felix  was  pro- 
curator fur  Judea  he  saw  her,  and,  being  capti- 
vated by  her  beauty,  persuaded  her  to  desert  her 
husband,  transgress  the  laws  of  her  country, 
and    marry  himself."     "Here,"  as  Paley  ob- 
serves, "the  public  station  of  Felix,  the  name 
of  his  wife,  and  the  circumstance  of  her  re- 
ligion, all  appear  m  perfect  conformity  with 
the  sacred   writer."     The  fate  of  tliis  woman 
was  singular.     She  had  a  son   by  Felix,  and 
both  the  mother  and  the  son  were  among  th(we 
who  lost  their  lives  by  the  eruption  of  Mount 
Vesuvius  in  a.  d.  79.— Luke  does  not  inform  us 
wliy  Felix  summoned  Paul  to  this  conference. 
We  may  infer,  from  the  presence  of  Drusilla, 
that  it  was  on  her  account.     In  all  probability, 
it  was  to  afford  her  an  opportunity  to  see  and 
hear  so  noted  a  leader  of  the  Christian  sect. 

25.  Of   righteousness,    or    concerning 
justice,  which  the  conduct  of  Felix  had  so 
outraged.      Tacitus   {Ann.,  12.  54)   draws  this 
jMcture  of  him  as  a  magistrate:  "  Relying  upon 
the  influence  of  his  brother  at  court,  the  in- 
liimous  Pallas,  this  man  acted  as  if  he  had  a 
license  to  commit  every  crime  witli  impunity." 
—And  temperance—)",  e.  self-control,  es- 
pecially continence,  chastity.     Here  we  liave 
another  and  double  proof  of  the  apostle's  cour- 
age.    At  the  side  of  Felix  was  sitting  a  victim 
of  his  libertinism,  an  adulteress,  as  Paul  dis- 
coursed   of   immorality  and    a    judgment    to 
come.      The   woman's  resentment   was  to  be 
feared  as  well  as  that  of  the  man.     It  was  the 
imjjlacable  Herodias.  and  not  Herod,  who  d(>- 
manded  the  head  of  Jolm  the  Baptist.— Trem- 
bled—lit.  having  become  alarmed.— For 
this  time,  or  as  to  what  is  now,  for  the 
present  (Kyp..  De  Wet.,  Mey.).     The  construc- 
tion is  that  of  an  adverbial  accusative.    (K. 


1  Undesigned  Coincidences  in  t/ie  mnings  of  the  Old  and  Xew  Testaments,  by  Rev.  J.  J.  Blunt,  London,  1847. 


276 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


26  He  hoped  also  that  "money  should  have  been 
given  him  of  l^aul,  that  he  might  loose  him :  where- 
lore  he  sent  for  him  the  ofteuer,  and  communed  with 
him. 

27  But  after  two  years  Porcius  Festus  came  into 
Felix'  room:  and  Felix,  '■willing  to  shew  the  Jews  a 
pleasure,  left  Paul  bound. 


2fi  He  hoped  withal  that  money  would  be  given  him  of 
Paul:    wherefore  also  he  sent  for  hiin  the  oftener, 

27  and  commvined  with  him.  Hut  when  two  years 
were  fulfilled,  Felix  was  succeeded  by  Porcius  Fes- 
tus; and  desiring  to  gain  favor  with  the  Jews,  Felix 
left  Paul  in  bonds. 


CHAPTEE    XXV. 


NOW  when  Festus  was  come  into  the  province,  after 
three  days  he  ascended  from  Cajsarea  lo.lerusalem. 
2  <^Then  the  high  priest  and  the  chief  of  the  Jews 
informed  him  against  Paul,  and  besought  him, 


1  Fp:stus  therefore,  'havirig  come  into  the  province, 
after  three  days  went  up  to  Jerusalem  from  Csesarea. 

2  And  the  chief  priests  and  the  principal  men  of  the 
Jews  informed  him  against  Paul ;  and  they  besought 


a  Ex.  23  :  8 6  Ex.  23  :  2  ;  ch.  12  :  3  ;  25  :  9,  14. . .  .c  ch.  24  :  1 ;  ver.  15. 1  Or,  having  entered  upon  hit  province 


§  279.  E..  10.) — Place  a  comma  or  colon,  not  a 
period,  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 

26.  Hoped  also,  better  at  the  same 
time  also  (that  he  gave  this  answer)  hoping. 
The  participle  connects  itself  with  answered 
(comp.  23  :  25),  and  is  not  to  be  taken  as  a 
finite  verb. — That  money  will  be  given  to 
him  by  Paul — i.  e.  as  an  inducement  to  re- 
lease him. — That  he  might  loose  him  (E. 
V.)  suggests  a  correct  idea,  but  is  not  genuine. 
Felix  had  conceived  the  hope  that  his  prisoner 
would  pay  liberally  for  his  freedom.  He  may 
have  supposed  him  to  have  ample  resources  at 
his  command.  He  knew  that  his  friends  were 
numerous,  and  had  been  informed  (see  v.  17) 
that  they  were  not  too  poor  or  too  selfish  to 
assist  one  another. 

27.  But  after  two  years,  or  two  years 
now  having  been  completed — i.  e.  since 
Paul's  imprisonment  at  Ctesarea. — Porcius 
Festus,  etc.,  rather  Felix  received  Porcius 
Festus  as  successor.  Luke  wrote  first,  or 
we  might  suspect  him  of  having  copied  Jose- 
phus,  who  says,  but  Porcius  Festus  was  sent  as  a 
successor  to  Felix  {Antt.,  20.  8.  9).  As  to  the 
year  in  which  this  change  in  the  procurator- 
ship  took  place,  see  Introduction,  g  6.  4. — Will- 
ing to  show,  etc.,  rather  and  wishing  to 
lay  up  favor  for  himself  with  the  Jews, 
to  make  himself  popular  among  them,  which 
was  the  more  important  at  this  time,  as  they 
had  a  right  to  follow  him  to  Ptome  and  com- 
plain of  his  administration,  if  they  were  dis- 
satisfied with  it.  His  policy  was  unsuccessful. 
(See  Introduction,  ?  6. 4.)  An  act  like  this  on  leav- 
ing such  an  office  was  not  uncommon.  Thus, 
Albinug,  another  corrupt  Procurator  of  Judea, 
having  heard  that  Gessius  Florus  had  been  ap- 
pointed to  succeed  him,  liberated  most  of  the 
state  prisoners  at  Jerusalem,  in  order  to  conciliate 
the  Jews.— Left  Paul  bound,  or  left  Paul 
behind  chained,  still  a  prisoner,  instead  of 
setting  him  at  liberty.  I  correct  my  former 
note  here  in  view  of  Conybeare  and  Howson's 
suggestion.    As  we  are  not  to  infer  from  respite 


(avitjiv,  not  liberty),  in  24  :  23,  that  Paul  was 
freed  from  his  chains,  bound  does  not  mean 
that  he  was  rebound  after  a  temporary  release. 
Wieseler  (p.  380)  has  shown  that  the  custotlia 
libera  was  granted  only  to  persons  of  rank  ;  and 
hence  Paul  could  not  have  enjoyed  that  favor, 
as  is  proved,  also,  by  his  subjection  to  the  sur- 
veillance of  the  centurion.  Meyer  has  changed 
the  note  in  his  last  edition  to  agree  with  this 
view.  According  to  De  Wette,  Felix  loaded 
Paul  again  with  the  chains  which  he  had  re- 
moved. Lange  (ii.  p.  326)  speaks  of  the  cns- 
todia  libera  as  exchanged  now  for  the  custodia 
militaris. 


1-5.  FESTUS  REFUSES  TO  BRING  PAUL 
TO  JERUSALEM. 

1.  Now^,  therefore,  since  he  was  the  suc- 
cessor of  Felix. — "  The  new  procurator,"  says 
Mr.  Lewin  (ii.  p.  699),  "  had  a  straightforward 
honesty  about  him  which  fonns  a  strong  con- 
trast to  the  piean  rascality  of  his  predecessor. 
He  certainly  did  not  do  all  the  justice  that  he 
might  have  done ;  but,  allowing  somewhat  for 
the  natural  desire  to  ingratiate  himself  with  the 
people  of  his  government,  his  conduct,  on  the 
whole,  was  exemplary,  and  his  firmness  in  re- 
sisting the  unjust  demands  of  the  Jews  cannot 
fail  to  elicit  our  admiration." — After  three 
days — i.  e.  on  the  third,  which  allows  him  one 
day  for  rest  between  his  arrival  at  Csesarea  and 
his  departure  for  Jerusalem. 

2.  If  the  high  priest  (T.  R.)  be  correct,  this 
high  priest  must  have  been  Ismael,  son  of  Phabi, 
who  succeeded  Ananias  (Jos.,  Antt.,  20.  8.  8). 
Two  years  have  elapsed  since  the  trial  before 
Felix  (24 : 1, »?.),  at  which  Ananias  was  so  active. 
Instead  of  the  singular,  some  read  the  high 
priests  (Lchm.,  Tsch.),  which  was  introduced, 
probably,  to  agree  with  v.  15  (De  Wet.,  Alf ). 
[The  plural  is  now  also  approved  by  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort,  Anglo- Am.  Revisers,  and  ia 
justified  by  preponderating  evidence — e.  g. 
X  A  B  C  E  L,  Syr.  and  Cop.  Versions.— A.  H.J 


I 


Ch.  XXV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


277 


3  And  desired  favor  against  him,  that  he  would  send 
for  him  to  Jerusalem,  "laying  wait  in  the  way  to  kill 
him. 

4  Kut  Festus  answered,  that  Paul  should  be  kept  at 
Csesarea,  and  that  he  liimself  would  depart  shortly 
thither. 

5  Let  them  therefore,  said  he,  which  among  you  are 
able,  go  down  with  iiif,  and  accuse  this  man,  'if  there 
be  any  wickedness  in  him. 

6  And  when  he  had  tarried  among  them  more  than 
ten  days,  he  went  down  unto  C;esarea  ;  and  the  next 
day  sitting  on  the  judgment  seat  commanded  Paul  to 
be  brought. 

7  And  when  he  was  come,  the  Jews  which  came 
down  from  Jerusalem  stood  round  about,  "^and  laid 
many  and  grievous  complaints  against  Paul,  which 
they  could  not  prove. 

8"While  he  answered  for  himself,  -^Xeither  against 
the  law  of  the  Jews,  neither  against  the  temple,  nor 
yet  against  <'<esar,  have  I  offended  any  thing  at  all. 

9  Hut  Festus,  'willing  to  do  the  Jews  a  pleasure, 
answered  Paul,  and  said, /Wilt  thou  go  up  to  Jerusa- 
lem, and  there  be  judged  of  these  things  before  me? 


3  liim,  asking  favor  against  him,  that  he  would  send 
for  him  to  Jerusalem ;  laying  a  jdot  to  kill  him  on 

4  the  way.  Howbeit  I'estus  a.swered,  that  Paul  waa 
kept  in  charge  at  Ca'sarea,  and  that  he  hiuiself  was 

5  about  to  depart  lliit/n'r  shortly.  Let  them  therefore, 
saith  he,  who  are  of  power  among  you,  go  down 
with  me,  and  if  there  is  anything  amiss  in  the 
man,  let  them  accuse  him. 

6  And  when  he  had  tarried  among  them  not  more 
than  eight  or  ten  days,  he  went  down  unto  C';esarea; 
and  on  the  morrow  he  sat  on  the  judgment  seat, 

7  and  commanded  I'aul  to  be  brought.  And  when  he 
was  come,  the  Jews  who  had  come  down  from  Jeru- 
salem stood  round  about  him,  bringing  against  him 
many  and  grievous  charges,  which  they  could  not 

8  prove ;  while  Paul  .said  in  his  defence.  Neither 
against  the  law  of  the  Jews,  nor  against  the  tem- 

9  pie,  nor  against  Caesar,  have  1  sinned  at  all.  Lut 
iestus,  desiring  to  gain  favor  with  the  Jews,  an- 
swered Paul,  and  said.  Wilt  thou  go  up  to  Jerusa- 
lem, and  there  be  judged  of  these  things  before  me? 


ach.  23  :  12,  15 b  ch.  18  :  14  ;  rer.  18 


;  Mark  15:3;  Luke  23  :  2,  10  ;  ch.  24  :  5,  13 d  ch.  6  :  13  ;  24  :  12  ;  28  :  17 e  ch. 

24  ;  27 /  ver.  2U. 


— The  chief,  etc.,  the  first  men,  are  the  chief 
prte.its  and  the  elders  in  v.  15,  except  that  the 
high  priest  mentioned  separately  here  would 
be  one  of  the  high  priests  there.  [But  it 
should  be  plural  here  as  well  as  there.]  Be- 
sought, as  imperfect,  shows  their  importu- 
nity. 

3.  And  desired,  etc. — lit.  asking  for  them- 
selves a  favor  against  him;  viz.  that  he 
would  send  for  him, etc. — Laying  wait — i.e. 
making  an  ambush,  arranging  for  it.  (See  23  :  21.) 
They  anticipated  no  obstacle  to  their  plan,  and 
may  have  already  hired  their  assassins  and 
pointed  out  to  them  the  cave  or  rock  whence 
they  were  to  rush  forth  upon  their  victim. 
(Coiiip.  the  note  on  v.  16.) 

4.  Answered — viz.  to  their  second  request. 
(See  note  on  v.  IG.) — That  Paul  was  kept 
as  a  prisoner  at  (lit.  unto)  Csesarea,  as  the 
Jews  were  aware ;  and  hence,  as  the  governor 
was  about  to  proceed  thither,  it  would  be  more 
convenient  to  have  the  trial  at  that  place.  The 
English  Version — viz.  that  Paul  should  be 
kept — conveys  the  idea  of  a  too  peremptory 
refusal.  So  decided  a  tone  would  have  given 
needless  offence.  Was  kept  (rrtpua&ai)  announces 
a  fact  rather  than  a  purpose. —  Unto  (eU)  Cxsarea 
(more  correct  than  in  with  the  dative)  opposes 
tacitly  liis  being  kept  back  unto  Cxsarea  to  his 
removal  thence ;  not  unlike  unto  Asia,  in  19  : 
22. 

5.  Which  among  you  are  able — lit.  the 
powerful  among  you,  your  chief  men,  not 
tliose  who  are  able,  wlio  may  find  it  easy  or  pos- 
sible to  perform  the  journey  (Calv.,  Grot.,  E.  V.). 
Their  attendance  at  the  trial  was  imperative, 
and  tlic  magistrate  would  not  speak  as  if  they 
were  to'  consult  their  convenience  merely  in 


such  a  matter.  Kuinoel  has  shown  that  the 
poiverful  of  Jews  was  common  among  the  Jews 
as  a  designation  of  their  rulers.  (See  Jos.,  Bell. 
\  Jud.,  1.  12.  4 ;  2.  14.  8  and  elsewhere.  Comp. 
also  1  Cor.  1  :  26  and  Rev.  6  :  15.)  Conybeare 
and  Howson,  after  ^leyer,  render  those  who  are 
competent,  are  authorized  to  act  as  prosecutors, 
but  without  offering  any  proof  of  that  abst)lute 
use  of  the  term. — Said  (<(>ij<ri)  should  stand  be- 
fore among  you  {iv  vfj-lv),  not  after  it  (T.  R.). 

6-12.  PAUL  APPEALS  FROM  FESTUS 
TO  CESAR. 

6.  Had  tarried^  etc.— Vit.,  having 71010 spent — 
not  more  than  eight  or  ten  days— i.  e.  hav- 
ing returned  speedily,  as  he  had  intimated 
{shortly,  in  v.  4).  Instead  of  not  more  than 
eight  or  ten  (Grsb.,  Tsch.,  Mey.),  as  above,  the 
received  text  (and  so  E.  V.)  reads  more  than 
ten  days,  as  if  Festus  {Si,  adversative,  hut)  liad 
not  fulfilled  his  word  (v.  4). — The  next  day  = 
0)1  the  m<n-rnu',  in  v.  17. 

7.  Stood  round  about,  stood  around,  him, 
not  the  tribunal  (Kuin.).  (Comp.  against  u'hom 
when  the  accusers  stood  up,  in  v.  18.) — Most  manu- 
scripts omit  against  Paul  after  complaints. 
Tischendorf  writes  laid  against  ((coTa(^epocT€s) ; 
but  others  defend  the  simple  partieii^le  {(j>€pov- 
T€s). — The  heavy  charges  (complaints),  as 
the  defence  of  the  apostle  shows  (v.  s),  w'ere 
heresy,  impiety,  and  treason.  (Comp.  24 : 
5  :6.) 

9.  And  there  be  judged — lit.  there  to  be 
judged  (viz.  by  the  Sanhedrim) — before  me  ; 
/.  e.  in  his  presence,  while  he  should  preside 
(Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Wiesl.),  and  perhaps  confirm 
or  reject  the  decision.  There  are  two  views  as 
to  the  import  of  this  proposal.  One  is  that 
Festus  intended  merely  to  transfer  the  trial 


278 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


10  Then  said  Paul,  I  stand  at  Csesar's  judgment  seat, 
■where  I  ought  to  be  judged:  to  the  Jews  have  1  done 
no  wrong,  as  thou  very  well  knowest. 

11  "l-'or  if  I  be  an  offender,  or  have  committed  any 
thing  worthy  of  death,  I  refuse  not  to  die :  but  if  there 
be  none  of  these  things  whereof  these  accuse  me,  no 
man  may  deliver  me  unto  them.   'I  appeal  unto  Csesar. 

12  Then  l-'estus,  when  he  had  conferred  with  the 
council,  answered,  Hast  thou  appealed  uuto  Ca;sar? 
unto  C'eesar  shalt  thou  go. 

13  And  after  certain  days  king  Agrippa  and  Beruice 
came  unto  Csesarea  to  salute  testus. 


10  But  Paul  said,  I  am  standing  before  Csesar's  judg- 
ment-seat, where  I  ought  to  be  judged  :  to  the  Jews 
have  I  done  no  wrong,  as  thou  also  very  well  know- 

11  est.  If  then  I  am  a  wrong-doer,  and  have  commit- 
ted any  thing  worthy  of  death,  I  refuse  not  to  die: 
but  if  none  of  those  things  is  irue,  whereof  these 
accuse  nie,  no  man  can  'give  me  up  unto  them.     I 

12  appeal  unto  Csesar.  Then  lestus,  when  he  had 
conferred  with  the  council,  answered,  Thou  hast 
appealed  unto  C'sesar:  unto  Ca'sar  shall  thou  go. 

13  5Jow  when  certain  days  were  passed,  Agrippa  the 
king  and  Bernice  arrived  at  Csesarea,  ^and  saluted 


.2  Or,  kaving 


from  Csesarea  to  Jerusalem,  and  the  other  is 
that  he  wished  to  change  the  jurisdiction  in 
the  case — to  surrender  Paul  to  the  Jews  and 
allow  them  to  decide  whether  he  was  innocent 
or  guilty.  The  explanation  last  stated  agrees 
best  with  the  intimations  of  the  context.  The 
reply  of  the  apostle  (,/  stand,  etc.,  in  v.  10), 
and  the  fact  that  he  proceeds  at  once  to  place 
himself  beyond  the  power  of  Festns,  would 
appear  to  show  that  he  regarded  the  question 
(Wilt  thou,  etc.)  as  tantamount  to  being  de- 
prived of  his  rights  as  a  Roman  citizen. 

10.  I  stand  at,  etc.,  or  before  the  tribu- 
nal of  Ca?sar  am  I  standing,  am  under 
Roman  jurisdiction,  since  Festus  was  the  rei> 
resentative  of  the  emperor.  The  answer  of 
Festus,  Unto  Ceesar  hast  thou  appealed,  unto  Ciesar 
shalt  thou  (JO  (v.  n),  is  founded  on  the  apostle's 
subsequent  I  appeal  unto  Cfesar,  and  is  not 
proof  (Wdsth.)  that  Paul  viewed  himself  as 
"already  standing  in  his  own  resolve  before 
Csesar's  judgment-seat."  Where  I  ought  to 
be  judged  (present),  to  be  having  my  trial — 
as  matter  of  right  (Sel),  not  because  it  is  God's 
will.  (Comp.  V.  24  and  24  :  19).— As  thoa 
very  well  knowest,  or  rather  as  also  thou 
perceivest  better — ;'.  e.  than  to  make  such  a 
proposal.  (Comp.  24  :  22.  W.  ?  34.  4.)  Such  a 
comparative  is  very  convenient  as  suggesting 
something  which  it  might  be  less  courteous  to 
express  (Wdsth.).  After  hearing  the  charges 
against  Paul,  and  his  reply  to  them,  Festus 
knew  that  the  prisoner  was  entitled  to  be  set 
free,  instead  of  giving  him  up  to  a  tribunal 
where  his  accusers  were  to  be  his  judges.  The 
temporizing  Roman  confesses  in  v.  18  that  Paul 
was  right  in  imputing  to  him  such  a  violation 
of  his  convictions. 

11.  If  I  be  an  offender,  or  if  therefore 
I  am  unjust,  guilty — i.  e.  in  consequence  of 
past  wrong-doing.  The  verb  expresses  here  the 
result  of  an  act,  instead  of  the  act  itself.  (See 
W.  §40.  2.  c.)  For,  in  the  common  text,  is 
incorrect.  The  clause  is  illative  with  reference 
to  the  assumption  (v.  9)  that  the  Jews  might 
find  him  guilty.     Some  combine  the  present 


and  past  in  afii/cu  {am  mijust),  and  render  if  1 
have  done  and  am  doing  wrong.  (See  K.  §  255. 
R.  1.) — Worthy  of  death  defines  the  degree 
of  guilt.  If  it  was  svich  that  he  deserved  to 
die,  he  was  willing  to  die. — If  there  is  noth> 
ing  of  what  (Gr.)  =if  there  is  none  of  these 
things  which. 

12.  When  he  had  conferred,  etc.,  having 
spoken  with  the  council — i.  e.  the  assessors  or 
judges  (ndpeSpoi,  cousiUarii),  who  assisted  him 
at  the  trial.  It  was  customary  for  the  procon- 
sul, or  his  substitute,  to  choose  a  number  of 
men  whose  office  it  was  to  aid  him  in  the  ad- 
ministration of  justice.  The  proconsul  him- 
self presided,  but  was  bound  to  consult  his  as- 
sessors, and  to  decide  in  accordance  with  the 
views  of  the  majority.  (See  Geib's  Geschichte, 
p.  243,  sq.)  The  subject  of  consultation  in  this 
instance,  doubtless,  was  whether  the  appeal 
should  be  allowed  or  refused.  Writers  on 
Roman  law  inform  us  that  the  provincial 
magistrates  had  a  certain  discretionary  jiower 
in  this  respect.  An  appeal  to  the  emperor  was 
not  granted  in  every  case.  It  was  necessary  to 
consider  the  nature  of  the  accusation,  and  also 
the  amount  of  evidence  \vhich  supported  it. 
Some  offences  were  held  to  be  so  enormous  as 
to  exclude  the  exercise  of  this  right ;  and  when 
the  crime  was  not  of  this  character,  the  evi- 
dence of  guilt  might  be  so  ])alpable  as  to  de- 
mand an  immediate  and  final  decision. — Thou 
hast  appealed  unto  Caesar  is  declarative 
(not  a  question,  as  in  E.  V.),  and  repeats  Paul's 
last  word  before  the  consultation,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  attaching  to  it  the  verdict. — Unto  Cae- 
sar shalt  thou  go,  be  sent,  announces  the 
ready  conclusion  in  regard  to  the  present  ap- 
peal. I  perceive  no  severity  in  this  answer 
(Bug.),  beyond  that  of  the  abrupt  official  form. 
The  prisoner  is  told  that  the  government  would 
carry  out  his  appeal  and  take  measures  to  con- 
vey him  to  Rome.     (See  on  27  :  1.) 

13-22.  FESTUS  CONFERS  WITH  AGRIP- 
PA CONCERNING  PAUL. 

13.  And  after,  etc. — lit.  certain  days  be- 
ing past,   since  the  ajipeal.    Agrippa  the 


Ch.  XXV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


279 


14  And  when  thev  had  been  there  many  days,  Festus 
declared  I'auls  cause  unto  the  king,  saying,  "There  is 
a  certain  man  left  in  honds  by  lelix: 

15  'AlMjut  whom,  when  1  was  at  Jerusalem,  the  chief 
priests  and  tlie  elders  of  the  .Tews  informed  wt,  ilesir- 
iMg  /o  hari-  judgment  against  him. 

It)  'To  whom  I  answered,  It  is  not  tlie  manner  of  the 
Romans  to  deliver  any  man  to  die,  before  that  he  which 
is  accu.sed  haxe  the  accusers  face  to  face,  and  have  li- 
cense U)  answer  for  himself  concerning  the  crime  laid 
against  liini.  j    .  . 

17  Therefore,  when  they  were  come  hither,  ''without 
any  deliiy  on  the  morrow  I  sat  on  tiie  judgment  seat, 
and  commanded  the  man  to  be  brought  forth. 


14  Festus.  And  as  thev  tarried  there  many  days,  Fes- 
tus la'd  Paul's  ca.se  bef  re  the  king,  saying.  There  i.s 

15  a  certain  man  left  a  prisoner  by  I  eli.x  :  about  whom, 
when  I  was  at  .lerusalem,  the  chief  priests  and  the 
elders  of  the  Jews  intormed  iitc,  asking  for  sentence 

16  against  him.  To  whom  1  answered,  that  it  is  not 
the  custom  of  the  Itomans  to  give  uj)  any  man,  be- 
fore that  the  accu.sed  liave  the  accusers  face  to  face, 
and  have  had  ojiportunity  to  make  his  defence  con- 

17 cerning  the  matter  laid  against  him.  When  there- 
fore thev  were  come  together  here,  I  made  no  delay, 
but  on  the  next  day  sat  down  on  the  judgment-seat, 


(Oh.  24  :  27 6  vers.  2,  3 c  vers.  4,  5 d  ver.  ( 


king.  This  Acjrippa  was  a  son  of  the  Agrippa 
whose  tragical  end  has  been  related  in  12  :  20- 
24.  At  his  father's  death,  as  he  was  considered 
too  young  to  succeed  liiin  on  the  throne,  Judea 
was  committed  again  to  the  government  of 
procurators.  He  passed  his  early  life  at  Rome. 
In  A.  D.  50,  on  the  death  of  Herod,  his  uncle, 
he  received  the  sovereignty  of  Chalcis,  and  in 
A.  D.  53  the  dominions  of  Philip  and  Lysanias 
(Luke3:  i),  at  wluch  time  he  assumed  the  title  of 
king.  In  the  year  a.  d.  55,  Nero  added  to  his 
possessions  a  part  of  Galilee,  and  Perea.  He 
died,  after  a  reign  of  nearly  fifty  years,  in  A.  d. 
100.  It  will  be  observed  that,  altliough  Luke 
in  this  passage  styles  Agrippa  a  king,  he  does 
not  style  him  King  of  Judea;  whereas,  in 
speaking  of  his  father  (i2:i,.j.),  he  not  only 
applies  to  him  this  title,  but  mentions  an  in- 
stance of  his  exercise  of  the  regal  power  at 
Jerusalem.  The  facts  stated  above  show  how 
perfectly  this  distinction  conforms  to  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  case.— Bernice  was  the 
eldest  daughter  of  Agrippa  I.,  and  a  sister  of 
Drusilla  (24 :  24).  She  was  noted  for  her  beauty 
and  her  profligacy.  Luke's  accuracy  in  intro- 
ducing her  at  this  stage  of  the  history  is  worthy 
of  remark.  After  a  brief  marriage  with  her 
first  husband  she  became  the  wife  of  Herod, 
her  uncle,  King  of  Chalcis,  and  on  his  death 
remaineti  for  a  time  with  Agrippa,  her  brother. 
She  was  sus{)ected  of  living  with  him  in  a 
criminal  manner.  Her  third  marriage,  with 
Polemon,  King  of  Cilicia,  she  soon  dissolved, 
and  returned  to  her  brother  not  long  before  the 
death  of  the  Emperor  Claudius.  She  could 
have  been  with  Agrippa,  therefore,  in  tlie 
time  of  Festus,  as  Luke  represents  in  our 
narrative.  Her  subse(iiient  connection  with 
Vespasian  and  Titus  made  her  name  familiar 
to  the  Roman  writers.  Several  of  them,  as 
Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  Juvenal,  either  men- 
tion her  expressly  or  alKideto  her, — To  salute 
— in  order  to  salute— Festus.  It  was  their 
visit  of  congratulation.    Agrippa,  being  a  vas- 


sal of  the  Romans,  came  to  pay  his  respects  to 
this  new  representative  of  the  power  on  which 
he  was  dependent. 

15.  Informed— t.  e.  judicially,  brought  accu- 
sation. (Comp.  V.2;  24: 1.)— Asking  for  them- 
selves justice  against  him.  The  idea  of  con- 
demnation lies  in  against  him,  not  in  justice 
or  judgment.  Tischendorf  decides  against  con- 
demnation (KaTaSUriv).  [In  his  8th  ed.  Tsch. 
gives  this  word,  meaning  condemnation,  and 
Lach.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  the  Anglo-Am. 
Revisers,  with  N  A  B  C  and  many  cursives.— 
A.  H.] 

16.  In  V.  3  the  request  of  the  Jews  was  that 
Paul  might  be  brought  to  Jerusalem ;  and  in 
that  case  the  accusers  and  the  accused  would 
have  met  face  to  face.  Hence  the  reply  of  Fes- 
tus here,  in  order  to  warrant  his  objection,  must 
relate  to  a  different  proposal— viz.  that  he  would 
condemn  Paul  at  once  (see  v.  24)  and  in  his 
absence.  On  his  declaring  that  as  a  Roman 
magistrate  he  could  not  be  guilty  of  such  in- 
justice, the  Jews,  as  it 'would  seem,  changed 
their  tactics.  If  it  was  so  that  tlie  parties  must 
confront  each  other,  they  asked  then  that  he 
would  summon  the  prisoner  to  Jerusalem  and 
have  him  tried  there.  But  this  second  request 
was  a  mere  pretence.  They  knew  the  weak- 
ness of  their  cause  too  well  to  await  the  result 
of  a  trial,  and  wanted  only  to  secure  an  oppor- 
tunity to  waylay  and  kill  the  apostle  on  the 
road.  The  two  proposals  may  have  been  made 
at  different  times,  so  that  in  the  interval  they 
could  have  begun  the  ambuscade  (as  intimated 
in  v.  3),  believing  that,  though  baffled  in  tlie 
first  attempt,  they  could  not  fail  in  the  second. 
— It  is  not  the  manner,  etc.,  better  that  it 
is  not  a  custom,  for  Romans,  if  it  was  for 
Jews.  The  article  (E.  V.)  obscures  the  opposi- 
tion.—Man  (as  generic)  declares  the  rule  to  be 
universal.  The  claim  to  this  impartiality  was 
a  human  right  in  the  eye  of  the  Roman  law.— 
To  die,  after  man  (T.  R.,  and  hence  E.  V.),  is 
unapproved. 


280 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


18  Against  whom  when  the  accusers  stood  up,  they 
brought  none  accusation  of  such  things  as  1  supposed : 

19  "I^ut  had  certain  questions  against  him  of  their 
own  superstition,  and  of  one  Jesus,  which  was  dead, 
whom  I'aul  affirmed  to  be  alive. 

20  And  because  I  doubted  if  such  manner  of  ques- 
tions, I  iisked  him  whether  he  would  go  to  Jerusalem, 
and  there  be  judged  of  these  matters. 

21  But  when  I'aul  had  appealed  to  be  reserved  unto 
the  hearing  of  Augustus,  1  commanded  him  to  be  kept 
till  I  might  send  him  to  Ctesar. 

22  Then  'Agrippa  said  unto  I'estus.  I  would  also 
hear  the  man  myself.  To-morrow,  said  he,  thou  shalt 
hear  him. 

2:i  And  on  the  morrow,  when  Agrippa  was  come,  and 
Bernice,  with  great  pomp,  and  was  entered  into  the 
place  of  hearing,  with  the  chief  captains,  and  principal 
men  of  the  city,  at  Festus'  commandment  Paul  was 
brought  forth. 

24  And  Festus  said.  King  Agrippa,  and  all  men  which 
are  here  present  with  ns,  ye  see  this  man,  about  whom 
•all  the  multitude  of  the  Jews  have  dealt  with  me,  both 


18  and  commanded  the  man  to  be  brought.  Cone  rn- 
ing  whom,  when  the  accusers  stood  up,  they  brought 

19  no  charge  of  such  evil  things  as  1  sllppo^ed;  but  liad 
certain  questions  against  him  of  their  own  'religion, 
and  of  one  Jesus,  who  was  dead,  whom  I'aul  attirmed 

20  to  be  alive.  And  1,  being  i)erplexed  how  to  inquire 
concerning  these  things,  asked  whether  he  would  go 
to  Jerusalem,  and  there  be  judged  of  these  matters. 

21  lut  when  Paul  had  appealed  to  be  kept  for  the 
decision  of  -the  empeior,  1  commanded  him  to  be 

22  kept  till  I  should  send  him  to  C  a;sar.  And  Agrippa 
sdtd  unto  I'estus,  1  also  ^could  wish  to  hear  the  niau 
luyself.     To  morrow,  saith  he,  thou  shalt  hear  him. 

23  !Jo  on  the.  morrow,  when  Agrippa  was  come,  and 
Pernice,  with  great  pomp,  and  they  were  entered 
into  the  place  of  hearing,  with  the  chief  captains, 
and  the  principal  men  of  the  city,  at  the  command 

24  of  Festus  Paul  was  brought  in.  And  testus  saith. 
King  Agrippa,  and  alt  men  who  are  here  present 
with  us,  ye  behold  this  man,  about  whom  all  the 


a  oh.  18  :  15;  23  :  29 h  See  ch.  9  :  15....C  vers.  2,  3,  7. 1  Or,  suptrstition 2  Gr.  the  Augustus 3  Or,  was  wishitig 


18.  Against  whom — lit.  around  whom — 

belongs  to  stood  up(comp.v.  7), not  to  brought. 
The  antecedent  of  whom  (o5)  is  man,  not  the 
remoter  judgment-seat.  Charge  (amW — 
that  is,  TouTmi-,  of  those  things). — Which  {i}i>=  a 
by  attraction)  I  was  suspecting — i.  e.  some 
capital  offence,  as  treason,  murder,  or  tlie  like. 

19.  Concerning  their  own  religion,  not 
suj)erstition.  (Comp.  the  note  on  inure  reliyious, 
not  too  superstitious,  in  17:22.)  Agrippa  was 
known  to  be  a  zealous  Jew,  and  Festus  would 
not  have  been  so  uncourteous  as  to  describe  his 
faitli  by  an  offensive  term.  Own  (iSias)  refers, 
not  to  the  subordinate  whom,  his  own — viz. 
Paul's — but  to  accusers,  the  leading  subject. 
— Concerning  a  certain  Jesus,  etc.  As  to 
Luke's  candor  in  recording  this  contemptuous 
remark,  see  note  on  18  :  15. 

20.  Doubted,  or  perplexed,  uncertain,  as 
Festus  may  have  said  with  truth,  but  could 
not  honestly  assign  as  the  motive  for  his  pro- 
posal. (See  V.  9,  above.) — In  regard  to  the 
dispute  concerning  this  one  —  viz.  Jesus 
(v.  19) — not  this  matter,  as  if  it  were  neuter.  But 
the  best  reading  is  concerning  these  things — viz.  in 
relation  to  their  religion  and  the  resurrection 
of  Jesus. 

21.  But  when  Paul  appealed,  etc. — lit. 
but  Paul  having  appealed  (and  so  de- 
manded)—  that  he  should  be  kept  in  Ro- 
man custody,  instead  of  being  tried  at  Jerusa- 
lem.^— With  a  view  to  the  examination  of 
Augustus.  The  Senate  conferred  this  title  on 
Octavius  in  the  first  instance,  but  it  was  given 
also  to  his  successors. — I  commanded  that 
he  should  still  be  kept  (infinitive  present) 
at  Csesarea.  In  should  be  kept,  just  before, 
the  time  is  entirely  subordinate  to  the  act. — 
Until  I  shall  send  him  (T.  R.),  but  the  surer 


word  is  shall  send  up  (ifaire/ai^w.  Lchm.,  Tsch., 
Mey.).  (Comp.  Luke  23  :  7,  11.)  Festus  would 
intimate  that  he  was  waiting  only  until  a  vessel 
should  sail  for  Italy. 

22.  I  would  also,  or  I  myself  also  could 
wish — i.  e.  were  it  possible.  The  Greeks  em- 
ployed the  imperfect  indicative  to  express  a 
present  wish  which  the  speaker  regarded,  or 
out  of  courtesy  affected  to  regard,  as  one  that 
could  not  be  realized.  (Comp.  Rom.  9:3;  Gal. 
4  :  20.  W.  HI-  2 ;  S.  ?  138.  3  ;  K.  ^  259.  R.  6.) 
It  is  less  correct  to  understand  the  wish  as  one 
long  entertained. 

23-27.  PAUL  IS  BROUGHT  BEFORE 
AGRIPPA. 

23.  With  great — lit.  much — pomp,  dis- 
play, whicli  consisted  jiartly  in  their  personal 
decorations  (comp.  12  :  21),  and  partly  in  the 
retinue  which  attended  them.  —  Unto  the 
place  of  audience,  wliich  the  article  rep- 
resents as  the  customary  one  (Olsh.),  or  as  the 
one  to  which  they  repaired  on  this  occasion 
(Mey.).— With  the  chief  captains — lit.  the 
chiliarchs,  the  connnanders  of  the  cohorts 
stationed  at  Cjesarea,  which  were  five  in  num- 
ber (Jos.,  Bell.  Jud.,  3.  4.  2).  (Comp.  the  note 
on  27  :  1.) 

24.  The  procurator  could  say  all  the  mul> 
titude  of  the  Jcavs,  because  he  had  reason 
to  know  that  tlie  Jewish  rulers  (tt.  2. 15)  who 
had  demanded  the  death  of  Paul  represented 
the  popular  feeling.  Meyer  suggests  tliat  a 
crowd  may  have  gone  witli  them  to  the  pro- 
curator and  enforced  their  application  by  clam- 
oring for  the  same  object. — Dealt  with  me, 
or  interceded  (in  its  bad  sense  here)  with 
me,  against  him.  A  genitive  or  dative  may 
follow  this  verb. — (Some  manuscripts  read  zen 
auton  {iriv  ovTov),  and  others  anion  zen  {a-iiTov  iiji') ; 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


281 


at  Jerusalem,  and  also  here,  crying  that  lie  ought  "not 
to  live  any  longer. 

25  Hut  when  1  found  tl  at  Hie  had  conunitted  noth- 
ing worthy  of  death,  'and  that  he  himself  hath  ap- 
pealed to  Augustus,  I  have  determined  to  send  him. 

26  Of  whoui  1  have  no  eertaiu  thing  to  write  unto 
my  lard.  Wherefore  I  have  brought  him  forth  before 
you,  and  specially  before  thee,  t)  king  .\grlppa,  that, 
after  examination  had,  I  might  have  somewhat  to 
write. 

27  For  it  seeraeth  to  me  unreasonable  to  send  a 
prisoner,  and  not  withal  to  signify  the  crimes  laid 
a^aiust  him. 


multitude  of  the  .lews  made  suit  to  me,  both  at  .Te- 
rns lem  and  here,  crying  that  he  ought  not  to  live 

25  any  longer,  liut  1  found  that  he  had  committed 
i.othing  worthy  ol  d^'uth;  and  as  he  himself  ap- 
pealed to  'the  emperor  I  determined  to  send  him. 

2G»Jf  whom  I  have  no  certain  thing  to  write  unto  my 

lord.     Wherefore  1  have  brought  him  forth  before 

you,  and  specially  before  thee,  king  Agrippa,  that, 

_  after  e.xaminaliou    had,   I  may   have  somewhat   to 

27  write.  For  it  seemeth  to  me  unreasonable,  in  send- 
ing a  prisoner,  not  withal  to  signify  the  charges 
against  him. 


CHAPTER    XXVI. 

THEN  Agrippa  said  unto  Paul,  Thou  art  permitted  to  I     1     And  Agrippa  said  unto  Paul  Thou  art  Dermitfpil 
,      speak  for  thyself.    Then  Paul  stretched  forth  the  |       to  speak  for  thyself.    Then  Paul  sut"tched^Forth  ^^^^ 


hand,  and  answered  for  himself: 


hand,  and  made  his  defence: 


a  ch.  22  :  22 5ch.  23  :  9,  29;  26:  SI. 


vers.  II,  12. 1  Gr.  the  Auijiulus. 


and  so,  in  the  next  verse,  some  read  thanatou 
nnton  {^avirov  aiiTov),  and  otliers  anton  thanatou 
(airrdi/  ^avarov).  Such  transpositions,  which 
liave  no  effect  on  the  sense,  show  how  unim- 
portant are  many  of  the  various  readings  of 
the  sacred  text.)— Crying  against  him,  etc. 
(Sec  on  V.  15.)— Not  any  longer  (MiKeVi).  A 
qualification  like  this  in  a  negative  sentence 
requires  a  compound  containing  the  negative 
(mt  or  ou/c)  which  precedes.  (K.  §318.  6;  B. 
§  148.  6.)— I  have  determined,  rather  I  de- 
cided—viz. at  the  time  of  the  trial  when  he 
appealed.  The  perfect  (E.  V.)  is  less  accurate 
than  tlie  aorist  tense. 

26.  Of  whom,  etc.,  or  concerning  whom, 
I  have  nothing  sure,  definite,  to  write  to 
the  sovereign.  In  such  cases  of  appeal  it 
was  necessary  to  transnut  to  the  emperor  a 
written  account  of  the  offence  charged  as  hav- 
ing been  committed,  and  also  of  all  the  judi- 
cial proceedings  that  may  have  taken  place  in 
relation  to  it.  Documents  of  this  description 
were  called  apostoli,  or  literx  dimissor [x.—hord 
is  the  Greek  for  dominus.  The  writer's  accuracy 
should  be  remarked  here.  It  would  have  been 
a  mistake  to  have  applied  this  term  to  the  em- 
l)eror  a  few  years  earlier  than  this.  Neither 
Augustus  nor  Tiberius  would  allow  himself  to 
be  called  dominus,  because  it  implied  the  rela- 
tion of  master  and  slave.  The  appellation  had 
now  come  into  use  as  one  of  the  imperial  titles. 
—I  may  have  what  (future)  I  shall  write, 
not  u'/tat  to  write  (E.  V.).  Some  repeat  certmu 
after  somewhat  (Mey.),  which  is  not  neces- 
sary. Meyer  leaves  out  the  ellipsis  in  his  new 
edition. 

27.  For  it  seemeth  unreasonable,  or 
it  appears  to  me  absurd.  It  was  illegal 
too;  but  Festus  thinks  of  the  act  as  being  a 
violation,  not  so  much  of  the  law  as  of  the 
propriety  which  dictated  the  law.— To  send, 


etc.,  or  better  that  any  one  (De  Wet.)  send- 
!  ing  a  prisoner  should  not  also  signify 
j  the  charges  (not  crinies)  against  him.  Some 
I  would  make  one  sending  the  subject  of  should 
I  ■"''!/"(/i/,  without  any  ellip.sis.  (K.  g  238.  R.  2.  e.) 
j  Some  supply  /  as  the  subject.  It  is  more  forci- 
i  i)lo  in  such  a  case  to  state  the  general  rule  or 
j  principle  which  controls  the  particular  instance, 
I  Josephus  {Bell.  Jud.,  2.  14.  1)  descriljes  Festus 
I  as  a  reasonable  man,  who  was  not  destitute  of 
j  a  regard  for  justice  and  the  laws,  and  who  ap- 
!  proved  himself  to  such  of  the  Jews  as   were 

willing  to  submit  to  any  foreign  rule.     What 

Luke  relates  of  him  shows  him  to  be  worthy 

of  this  encomium. 


1-23.  PAUL'S  SPEECH  BEFORE  AGRIP- 
PA. 

1.  This  speech  of  the  apostle  is  similar  to 
that  which  he  delivered  on  the  stairs  of  the 
castle  (22 : 1,  sq.).  The  main  topic  is  the  same  in 
each— viz.  the  wonderful  circumstances  of  liis 
conversion;  but  in  this  instance  he  recounts 
them,  not  so  much  for  the  purpose  of  asserting 
his  personal  innocence  as  of  vindicating  the 
divine  origin  of  his  commission  and  the  truth 
of  the  me-ssage  jiroclaimed  by  liim.  So  far  from 
admitting  that  he  had  been  unfaithful  to  Juda- 
ism, he  claims  that  his  Christian  faith  realized 
the  true  idea  of  the  religion  taught  in  tlie  Old 
Testament.  On  the  former  occasion  "he  ad- 
dressed the  infuriated  jiopulace  and  made  his 
defence  against  tlie  charges  with  which  he  was 
hotly  pressed— of  profaning  the  temple  and 
apostatizing  from  the  Mosaic  law.  He  now 
passes  by  these  accusations,  and,  addressing 
himself  to  a  more  intelligent  and  dispassionate 
hearer,  he  takes  the  highest  ground,  and  holds 
himself  up  as  the  apostle  and  messenger  of 
God.    With  this  view,  therefore,  he  paints  iu 


282 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cir.  XXVI. 


2  I  think  myself  happy,  king  Agrippa,  because  I  shall 
answer  for  myself  this"  day  before  thee  touching  all 
the  things  whereof  I  am  accused  of  the  Jews: 

a  Especially  because  1  know  thee  to  be  expert  in  all 
customs  and  questions  which  are  among  the  Jews: 
wherefore  I  beseech  thee  to  hear  me  patiently. 

4  My  manner  of  life  Irom  my  youth,  which  was  at 
the  first  among  mine  own  nation  at  Jerusalem,  know 
all  the  Jews; 

5  Which  knew  me  from  the  beginning,  if  they  would 
testify,  that  after  "tiie  most  strailest  sect  of  our  religion 
I  lived  a  Pharisee. 


2  I  think  myself  happy,  king  Agrippa,  that  I  am  to 
make  my  defei  ce  before  thee  this  day  touching  all 
the   things   whereof   1   am   accused    "by   the  Jews: 

3  ii  specially  because  thou  art  expert  in  all  customs 
,    and  questions  which  are  among  the  Jews;  where- 

4  fore  I  beseech  thee  to  hear  me  i»atiently.  -My 
manner  of  life  then  from  my  youth  up,  which  was 
from  the  beginning  among  mine  own  nation,  and 

5  at  Jerusalem,  know  all  the  Jews ;  having  knowledge 
of  me  from  the  first,  if  they  be  willing  .to  testily, 
how  that  after  the  straitest  sect  of  our  religion 


ach.  22  :3;  2:1  :  6;  24:  15,  21;  Phil.  3:  5.- 


_1  Or,  because  thou  art  especially  expert 


more  striking  colors  the  awful  scene  of  his 
conversion,  and  repeats  more  minutely  that 
heavenly  call  which  was  impossible  for  him  to 
disobey  (v.  i9),  and  in  obeying  which,  though 
he  incurred  the  displeasure  of  his  coimtrymen 
(v.  21),  he  continued  to  receive  the  divine  sup- 
port (v.  22)"  [Humphry,  p,  192).  — Thou  art 
permitted  to  speak,  etc.  It  is  Agrippa  who 
gives  the  permission  to  speak,  because,  as  he 
was  the  guest  on  this  occasion,  and  a  king,  he 
presides  by  right  of  courtesy.  (Comp.  21  :  40.) 
—Stretched  forth  — lit.  having  stretched 
forth— the  hand  is  the  same  as  beckoned 
u'ilh  the  hand,  in  13  :  16  (comp.  21  :  40) 
and  in  19  :  33.  The  gesture  was  the  more 
courteous,  because  the  attention  asked  for 
was  certain,  from  the  known  curiosity  of 
the  hearers.  On  the  arm  which  •  Paul  raised 
hung  one  of  the  chains  to  which  he  alludes 
in  v.  29. 

2.  Of  the  Jews,  simply  by  Jews,  without 
the  article  (comp.  22  :  30),  because  he  would 
represent  the  accusation  as  purely  Jewish  in  its 
character.  The  best  manuscripts  omit  the  be- 
fore the  proi)er  name.— King.  For  Agrippa's 
claim  to  the  title,  see  on  25  :  13. — Some  copies 
place  shall  answer  after  happy ;  others,  after 
before  thee.  The  first  is  the  best  position, 
because  it  secures  a  stronger  emphasis  to  the 
pronoun  (Grsb.,  Tsch.).— The  object  of  I  have 
thought  is  the  same  as  the  subject,  but  the  lat- 
ter, which  is  more  prominent,  controls  the  case 
of  shall  i^eWiov).  This  verb  is  perfect,  have 
thought,  not  think  (E.  V.).  Paul  distin- 
guishes the  tenses  in  Phil.  3:7,  8. 

3.  Especially,  rendered  namely  in  the  older 
versions  (Tynd.,  Cran.,  Gen.),  states  why  Paul 
was  so  eminently  fortunate,  not  how  much 
Agrippa  knew. — Since  thou  art  expert — lit, 
a  knower.  The  accusative  is  anacoluthic,  in- 
stead of  the  genitive  (Mey.,  Win.,  Rob.).  (W. 
g  32.  7.)  Some  explain  it  as  an  instance  of  the 
accusative  absolute ;  but  we  have  no  clear  ex- 
ample of  that  construction  in  the  New  Testa- 


ment. Eyes,  in  Eph.  1  :  18,  has  been  cited  as 
an  example  of  it,  but  stands  really  in  apposi- 
tion with  spirit,  or  depends  on  may  give.  Boza's 
unauthorized  knowing  (whence  because  I  know, 
in  E.  V.)  obviates  the  irregularity.  The  Rab- 
binic writers!  speak  of  Agrijipa  as  having  ex- 
celled in  a  knowledge  of  the  law.  As  the  tra- 
dition which  they  follow  could  not  have  flowed 
from  this  passage,  it  confirms  thereiircscntation 
here  by  an  unexpected  agreement. — Among 
Jews  (not  the  Jews),  of  whom  we  are  led  to 
think  as  existing  in  different  places.  (W.  jJ  53. 
d.) — Therefore  (6t6).  In  the  presence  of  such 
a  judge  he  propo-es  to  speak  at  length,  and  re- 
quests a  patient  hearing. 

4.  Therefore  {ovv) — i.  e.  encouraged  thus,  he 
will  proceed.  [This  word  is  not  re])resented  in 
the  Common  English  Version. — A.  H.]  The 
apostle  enters  here  on  his  defence. — From  my 
youth.  (See  on  22  :  3.)  — At  first,  rather 
from  the  beginning,  refers  to  the  same 
period  of  his  life,  but  marks  it  more  strongly 
as  an  early  period.  It  will  be  observed  that, 
while  the  apostle  repeats  tliis  idea  in  the  suc- 
cessive clauses,  he  brings  forward  in  each  case 
a  new  circumstance  in  connection  with  it.  He 
states,  first,  hoiv  long  the  Jews  had  known  him  ; 
secondly,  wlicre  they  had  known  him  so  long 
(among  mine  own  nation  and  in  Jeru- 
salem); and  thirdly,  irhat  (that  after  the 
strictest  sect,  etc.)  they  had  known  of  him 

'  so  long  and  in  that  place. 

5.  Which  knew  me  from  the  beginning, 
rather  knowing  me  before— ;".  e.  the  inescnt 
time.— If  they  would  be  willing  to  testify, 
as  he  had  not  the  confidence  in  their  honesty  to 
expect.— That  according  to  the  strictest 
sect,  in  regard  both  to  doctrine  and  manner 
of  life.  (See  22  :  3.)  Josephus  describes  this 
peculiarity  of  the  Pharisees  in  similar  lan- 
guage :  "  A  sect  that  seem  to  be  more  religious 
than  others,  and  to  interpret  the  laws  more 
strictly"  {Bell.  Jud.,  1.  5.  2).  That  reaches 
back  to  know  (v.  4). 


1  Sepp  gives  the  testimonies  in  his  Das  Leben  Christi,  vol.  iv.  p.  138. 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


283 


6  "And  now  I  stand  and  am  judged  for  the  hope  of 
*the  promise  made  of  God  unto  our  fathers: 

7  Unto  which  promise.  'o\it  twelve  tribes,  instantly 
serving  Gud  ''day  and  night.  «hope  to  come.  Kor 
which  hope's  sake,  king  Agrippa,  I  am  accused  of 
the  Jews. 

8  Why  should  it  be  thought  a  thing  incredible  with 
you,  thattiod  .should  raise  liie  dead? 

9  fl  verily  thought  with  myself,  that  I  ought  to  do 
many  things  contrary  to  toe  name  of  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth. 

10  *Which  thing  I  also  did  in  Jerusalem:  and  many 


6  I  lived  a  Pharisee.  And  now  \  stand  here  to  be 
judged  for  the  hope  of  the  promise  made  of  (iod 

7  unto  our  fathers;  unto  which  /n-ontixe  our  twelve 
tribes,  earnestly  serving  God  uight  and  day,  hope  to 
attain.     And  concerning  this  hope  1  am  accused  by 

8  the  Jews,  <J  king:    Why  is  it  judged  incredible  with 
9you,  if  liod  doth  raise  the  dead.'     I  verily  thought 

with  myself,  that  I  ought  to  do  many  things  con- 
10  trary  to  the  name  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth.    And  this 


acli.  2.1  :  6 b  Gen.  3  :  15;  22  :  18  ;  26  :  4 ;  49  :  10  ;  Deut.  18  :  15;  2  Sam.  7  :  12  ;  Ps.  i:i2  :  11 ;  Isa.  4  •  2  •  7  •  14  •  9    6 

:n  :  14,  15.  16  ;  Ezek.  34  :  23 ;  37  :  24 ;  Dae.  9  :  24  ;  Mic.  7  :  20 ;  ch.   13  :  32  ;  Rom.   15:8;  Tit.  3  :  13. . .  .c  James  I 
1  Thess.  3  :  10;  1  Tim.  5  :  5....«  Phil.  3  :  11..../ John  16:  2;  1  Tim.  1  :  13....g  cli.  8  :  3 ;  Gal.  1  :  13. 


40  :  10  :  Jer.  23  :  5 ; 
l....d  Luke  2  :37; 


6,  And  now  compares  his  present  with  his 
former  position.  If  liis  rigor  as  a  Pharisee  had 
been  a  merit  in  tlie  eyes  of  the  Jews,  his  hope 
as  a  Christian  was  merely  tliat  of  the  true 
Israel,  and  should  as  little  be  imputed  to  him 
as  a  crime. — Of  the  promise — i.  e.  of  a  Mes- 
siah— made  unto  our  fathers  (Kuin.,  Olsh., 
De  Wet.,  Mey.).  The  same  expression  occurs 
in  Paul's  discourse  at  Antioch  (i3 :  32),  where  it 
is  said  that  God  fulfilled  the  promise,  or  showed 
it  to  be  fulhlled,  by  raising  up  Jesus  from  the 
dead.  (See  the  note  on  that  passage.  Comp. 
28  :  20.) — Unto  which — viz.  the  promi.se,  its 
accomplishment.  This  is  the  natural  antece- 
dent, and  n(jt  the  remoter  hope. — The  word 
(Su>SeKa.<j)v\ov)  translated  twelve  tribes  (=Tois 
SiuJexa  ^v\aU,  iu  Jaiiics  1:1)  exists  only  here, 
but  is  formed,  after  the  analogy  of  other  com- 
pounds, from  the  Greek  numeral  twelve  (SiiSeica). 
The  Jewish  nation  consisted  of  those  wlio  were 
descended  from  the  twelve  tribes;  which  fact 
justifies  the  expression  historically,  though  the 
twelve  tribes  had  now  lost  their  separate  exist- 
ence.— Instantly — i.  e.  {ev  tKreveia)  with  earn- 
estness. (See  on  without  ceasing  (exTec^s), 
in  12  :  5.)  The  noun  is  a  later  Grecism.  (Lob., 
Phryn.,  p.  311.)  Such  forms  help  us  to  fix  the 
age  of  tlie  New-Testament  writings.  Wor- 
shipping night  and  day.  This  was  a  phrase 
which  denoted  habitual  worship,  especially  as 
connected  with  fasting  and  prayer.  (See  Luke 
1 :  75 ;  2  :  37  ;  18  :  1 ;  1  Thess.  5  :  17  ;  1  Tim.  5  :  5.) 
7.  For  which  hope's  sake,  or  concern- 
ing which  hope,  I  am  accused.  The  apos- 
tle means  to  say  that  he  was  accused  of  main- 
taining that  this  hope  of  a  Messiah  had  been 
accomplished  in  Jesus,  and  had  been  accom- 
plished in  him  because  God  raised  him  from 
the  dead.  The  presence  of  the  latter  idea  in 
the  mind  of  the  apostle  leads  to  the  interroga- 
tion in  the  next  verse. — Agrippa,  after  king, 
has  decisive  evidence  against  it.  — Of  the 
Jews— lit.  by  Jews— is  reserved  to  the  end 
of  the  sentence,  in  order  to  state  more  strongly 
the  inconsistency  of  such  an  accusation  from 


such  a  source.     Here,  too,  the  article  (E.  V.) 
weakens  the  sense  and  is  incoiTcct. 

8.  What  ?  or  Why  ?  (tC)  is  printed  in  some 
editions  as  a  separate  question  :  What  ?  Is  it 
judged  incredible  ?  Other  editions  connect 
the  interrogative  with  the  verb :  Why  is  it 
judged  incredible?  Griesbach,  Kuinoel. 
De  Wette,  Conybeare  and  Howson,  and  others 
prefer  the  first  mode;  Knapp,  Hahn,  Meyer, 
Tischendorf,  and  others  prefer  tlie  second  mode. 
The  latter  appears  to  me  more  agreeable  to  the 
calm  energy  of  the  apostle's  manner.  ("It  is 
decisive  against  the  other  view,"  says  Meyer  in 
liis  last  edition,  "  that  tc  alone  was  not  so  used ; 
the  expression  would  be  For  what?  What  thenf 
or  What  now  ?  "  The  examples  of  ri  as  inter- 
rogative in  Rom.  3  :  3,  9;  6  :  1.5,  and  Phil.  1  :  18 
agree  with  this  criticism.) — With  you  extends 
the  inquiry  to  all  who  were  present.  The 
speaker  uses  the  singular  number  when  he 
addresses  Agrippa  personally.  (See  vv.  2,  3, 
27.) — If  God  raises  the  dead,  where  if  is 
not  for  that,  but  presents  the  assertion  as  one 
that  the  sceptic  might  controvert.  —  Raises 
(cyeipei)  is  present,  because  it  expresses  a  cha- 
racteristic act.  The  resurreftii:)n  of  Jesus  was 
past,  but  illustrated  a  permanent  attribute  or 
power  on  the  part  of  God. 

9.  This  verse  is  illative,  with  reference  to  the 
preceding  question. — I  verily,  rather  I  indeed 
therefore  —  i.  e.  in  consequence  of  a  spirit 
of  incredulity,  like  that  of  others.  Seemed 
to  myself,  thought.  The  pronoun  opposes  his 
own  to  another  and  higher  judgment.  This 
same  act  in  which  Paul  gloried  at  the  time  ap- 
peared to  him  as  the  crime  of  his  life  after  he 
became  a  Christian.  In  1  Cor.  15 :  9  he  declares 
that  he  "  was  the  least  of  the  apostles,  that  he 
was  not  meet  to  be  called  an  apostle,  because 
he  persecuted  the  church  of  God." — To  the 
name^  or  against  the  name  of  Jesus. 
(Comp.  irpds,  in  Luke  23  :  12.) — Many  things 
contrary — (.  e.  many  things  hostile. 

10.  Which  thing  (5)  refers  to  the  collective 
idea — in  many  things  hostile,  etc. — Also  connects 


284 


THE   ACTS. 


[Cii.  XXVI. 


of  the  saints  (lid  I  shut  up  in  prison,  having  received 
authority  "Croni  llie  chief  priests;  and  when  they  were 
put  to  death,  1  gave  my  voice  against  ihent.. 

11  *And  I  punished  them  olt  in  every  synagogue, 
and  compelled  </«-»/,  to  blaspheme  ;  and  being  exceed- 
ingly mad  against  them,  I  persecuted /A«ot  even  unto 
strange  cities. 


I  also  did  in  Jerusalem:  and  I  both  shut  up  many 
of  the  saints  in  i)risO]is,  having  received  authority 
from  the  chief  priests,  and  when-  they  were  put  to 
11  death,  I  gave  my  vote  against  them.  And  punish- 
ing them  oftentimes  in  all  the  synagogues,  1  strove 
to  make  them  blaspheme ;  and  being  e.\ceedingly 
mad  against  them,  1  persecuted   them  even   unto 


och.  9:  14,  21;  22  :  5 6  ch.  22:  19. 


did  with  thought. — And  tnany,  etc.,  adds 
the  fac;ts  in  iUu.stnitioii  of  wliut  was  stated  in 
general  terms. — The  saints  is  no  doubt  a 
chosen  word  here.  It  does  not  occur  in  Luke's 
account  of  tlie  apostle's  conversion  (9:i,  «j.). 
Paul  himself  avoids  it  in  his  speech  to  the 
Jews  (22: 4,  «<).),  who  wcrc  so  sensitive  in  regard 
to  any  claim  of  merit  in  behalf  of  the  Chri.s- 
tians.  "  liut  here,  before  Agrippa,  wliore  there 
was  no  such  need  of  caution,  the  ai)ostle  in- 
dulges his  own  feelings  by  giving  them  a  title 
of  hf)nor  wiiich  aggravatas  his  own  guilt" 
(Birks,  p.  327). — I,  emphatic.  The  iiiii>ris()iiing 
was  the  si>caker's  act. — The  common  text  omits 
in  l)efore  prisons,  I  shut  up  unto  prisons, 
which  would  be  an  instance  of  the  local  dative 
sometimes  found  after  verl)s  C(jmpounded  with 
«caT<£.  (See  Bernh.,  Si/id.,  p.  243.)  But  Gries- 
bach,  Tischcnd(jrf,  and  others  allege  good  au- 
thority for  reading  in,  prisons,  which  would  be 
the  ordinary  coiistniction.  (Comp.  Luke  3  : 
20.) — From  the  chief  priests.  (See  the  note 
on  9 : 2.) — And  as  they  (which  refers  to  saints 
as  a  cla.ss,  not  to  all  those  imprisoned)  were 
put  to  death,  I  brought,  or  cast,  my  vote 
against  them— t.  e.  encouraged,  ai>proved,  the 
act  (Bng.,  Kuin.,  De  Wet.,  Mey.).  (Comp.  con- 
setUing,  in  22  :  20.)  Some  insist  on  the  literal 
sense  of  the  plinuse,  and  infer  from  it  that  Paid 
was  a  member  of  the  Sanhedrim  and  voted 
with  the  other  judges  to  put  tlie  Christians  to 
death.  But  tlie  Jews  required,  as  a  general 
rule,  that  those  who  held  this  office  should  be 
men  of  years;  and  Paul,  at  the  time  of  Ste- 
phen's martyrdom,  could  hardly  have  attained 
the  proper  age.  It  is  said  too,  on  the  autliority 
of  tlie  later  Jewish  writers,  that  one  of  the 
necessary  q\ialifications  for  l)eing  chosen  into 
t\iQ,  Sanhedrim  was  that  a  man  should  be  the 
father  of  a  family,  l)ecau.se  he  who  is  a  parent 
may  be  expected  to  be  merciful — a  relation 
whicli,  from  the  absence  of  any  allusion  to  it 
in  tlie  apostle's  writings,  we  have  every  reason 
to  believe  that  he  never  sustained.  The  ex- 
pression itself  affords  but  slight  proof  that  Paul 
was  a  voter  in  the  Sanhedrim.  Psephox  (ij>ri<f>o<;), 
a  stone  used  as  a  ballot,  like  our  "  suffrage," 
signified  also  opinion,  assent,  and  accompanied 
various  verbs,  as  to  place  and  to  cast  down,  as 


meaning  to  think,  judge,  sanction,  with  a  fig- 
urative allusion  to  the  act  of  voting.  Plato 
uses  the  term  often  in  that  sense.  (See  R.  and 
1'.,  Lex.,  p.  257G.) — Them  agrees  with  the  inti- 
mation, of  other  passages  (8:3;  9:1;  22:4)  that 
Stei)hen  was  not  the  only  victim  whose  blood 
was  shed  at  this  time. 

11.  Punislicd  them,  etc.,  or  and  punish- 
ing them  often  throughout  ai)  the  syna- 
gogues, in  the  dilferent  places  where  he  pur- 
sued his  work  of  persecution.  (See  22  :  19.) 
"The  chief  rulers  of  the  synagogues,"  says 
Biscoe  (p.  81),  "being  also  the  judges  of  the 
people  in  many  cases,  especially  those  which 
regarded  religion  (comp.  on  9  :  2),  chose  to  give 
sentence  against  offenders  and  see  their  sentence 
executed  in  the  synagogue.  Persons  were  al- 
ways scourged  in  the  presence  of  the  judges 
(Vitr.,  De  Sijnnfj.  Vctt.,  p.  177).  For,  i)imish- 
ment  being  designed  '  in  terrorem,'  what  more 
likely  to  strike  the  mind  with  awe  and  deter 
men  from  falling  into  the  like  errors  than  to 
have  it  e.vecuted  in  their  religious  assemblies 
and  in  the  face  of  the  congregation?  Our  Lord 
foretold  that  his  disciples  should  be  scourged  in 
the  synagogues  (Matt,  lo :  i7;  2.1 :  34) ;  and  we  learn 
here  that  Paul  was  an  instrument  in  fulfilling 
this  prediction,  having  beaten  them  that  be- 
lieved in  every  synagogue." — I  compelled-; 
rather  I  was  constraining  them  (/.  r.  urged 
them  by  threats  and  torture)  to  blaspheme — 
viz.  Jesus  or  the  gospel.  (Comp.  1.'3 :  45  ;  James 
2  :  7.)  The  imperfect  states  the  object,  not  the 
result,  of  the  act.  That,  among  the  many  wlio 
suffered  this  violence,  every  c^ne  preserved  his 
fidelity,  it  would  be  unreasonaljle  to  affirm. 
Wc  learn  from  Pliny's  letter  to  Tnijan  (Lib.  X. 
97)  that  heathen  persecutors  applied  the  same 
test  wliich  Saul  adopted  for  the  jnirpose  of  as- 
certaining who  were  tndy  Christians:  "Pro- 
positus est  libellus  sine  auctore,  nuiltorum 
nomina  continens.  Qui  negabant  esse  se  Chris- 
tianos  aut  fuisse,  cum  praieunte  me  deos  appel- 
larent  et  imagini  ture  (quam  propter  hoc  jus- 
seram  cum  simulacris  numinum  adferri)  tureac 
vino  supplicarcnt,  pneterea  maledicerent  Christo 
— quorum  nihil  posse  cof/i  dicuntur  qui  swit  revera 
Christinin — dimittendos  esse  putavi  "  ["An 
anonymous  note  was  presented,  containing  the 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


285 


12  "Whereupon  as  I  went  to  Damascus  with  authority 
aud  coiniiiis-iori  from  the  chiel'  priests, 

la  At  inidduy,  ()  Iciiij,',  I  saw  in  the  way  a  li(;ht  from 
heaven,  above  the  bri;;htness  of  the  sun,  shiiiiiij^  round 
about  me  and  them  which  journeyed  with  me. 

14  And  wlieii  we  were  all  fallen  to  the  earth,  I  heard 
a  voice  speaking  unto  me,  and  saying  in  the  Hebrew 
t'lngue,  feani,  Saul,  why  persecutest  thou  lae?  U  is  hard 
for  tiiee  to  kick  against  the  pricks. 

15  And  I  said,  Vv'ho  art  thou,  Lord?  And  he  said,  I 
am  Jesus  whom  thou  persecutest. 

16  Hut  rise,  and  stand  upon  thy  feet:  for  I  have  ap- 
peared unto  thee  for  this  purpose.  Ho  make  thee  a 
minister  and  a  witness  both  of  these  things  which 
thou  hast  seen,  and  of  those  things  iu  the  which  I 
will  appear  unto  thee; 


12  foreign  cities.  'Whereupon  as  I  journeyed  to  l)ania»- 
cus  with  the  authority  and  comniis>ion  of  the  chief 

13  priests,  at  midday,  O  king,  1  saw  on  the  way  a  light 
from  heaven,  above  the  brightness  of  the  sun,  »liiu- 
ing  round  about  uie  and  iheni  that  journeyed  with 

14  me.  Aud  when  we  were  all  fallen  to  the  earth, 
]  heard  a  voice  saying  unto  me  in  the  Hebrew 
language,  Saul,  .Saul,  why  persecutest  thou  uie  /  it 

15  is  hard  for  thee  to  kick  against  -the  goad.  And  I 
said,  Who  art  thou,  Lord?    .\nd  the  Lord  said,  1  am 

16. Jesus  whom  thou  persecutest.  Hut  ari.-ic,  and  stand 
upon  thy  feet:  for  to  this  end  have  J  ai)i>tared  unto 
thee,  to  appoint  thee  a  mini.ster  and  a  witness  lK>th 
of  the  things  ^whereiu  thou  hasi  seen  uie,  aud  of 


a  ch.  9  :  3;  22  :  6 b  ch.   22  :  15.- 


-1  Or,   On  which  errand 2  Or.  goad* 3  Many  aDcieot  authorities  read  tcbiek  thou 

ftast  seen. 


names  of  many.    Tho-se  who  denied  that  they  [  (Euripides  {Bacch.,  v.  791)  applies  it  as  here: 


were  or  had  heen  Christians,  when,  after  my  ex- 
ample, they  called  on  the  gods  and  marie  suppli- 
cation witli  inwnseand  winetotlivstatue^wln'ch 
for  this  eanse  I  had  commanded  to  he  hrouglit 
wi!  h  the  images  of  the  gods) — none  of  which  thingn, 
it  is  xaid,  cfin  those  who  are  realhj  Christians  he  com- 
pelled to  do— I  dismissed." — A.  H.]. —  Even 
unto,  etc.,  or  as  far  as  even  unto,  the  for- 
eign cities,  as  those  would  l)e called  which  were 


^vij-ovixevoi    irpb?    Kevrpa    AoxTt^oiAit,    ^yfroi    iiv    detZ. 

Terence  (Phorm.,  1.2. 27)  employs  it  thus :  "  Nam 
qure  inscitia  est,  Advorsum  simuhim  calces?" 
Plautus  (True,  4.  2.  55)  has  it  in  tliis  form: 
"Si  stimulos  pugnis  ciedis,  manihus  plus  do- 
let.")  The  Scholiast  on  Find.  (Pi/th.,  2.  173) 
explains  tlie  origin  of  the  expression :  "  The 
figure  is  from  oxen.  For  those  tliat  are  un- 
trained in    farm-work,    when    goade<]   hy  the 


outof.Judea.    Among  these  Luke  and  Paul. single    ploughman,  kick  the  goad,  and  are  l)C.itcn  the 


out  Damascus,  hecause  a  train  of  such  events 
followed  the  apostle's  expedition  to  tliat  city. 

12.  Whereupon — lit.  in  which  also,  while 
intent  on  this  ohject.  (Comp.  in  ivhich,  in  24  : 
18.)  Also,  so  common  in  Luke  after  the  rela- 
tive, some  of  tlie  hest  copies  omit  here. — Au- 
thority and  commission  (efouo-iat  and  ewirpo- 
fl-^s)  strengthen  each  other ;  he  had  ample 
power  to  execute  his  commission. 


more."  The  same  or  a  .similar  j>roverb  niu.st 
have  been  current  among  the  Hebrews,  though 
this  is  the  only  instance  of  it  found  in  the 
Scriptures.  The  common  plough  in  the  East 
at  present  has  but  one  handle.  The  .same  per- 
son, armed  with  a  goad  six  or  eight  feet  long, 
holds  the  plough  and  drives  his  team  at  the 
same  time.  As  the  driver  follows  the  oxen, 
therefore,  in.stead  of  being  at  their  side  as  with 


13.  At  midday  (J)/ie>a?  m«>')s).     CVeo-rj  iiixipa,    us,  and  applies  the  goad  from  that  position,  a 


pro  meridie  communis  dialecti  est,  at  ficoof 
ijnepas,  aut  (xe<7-T)/n/3pia  (22:6)  clcgantiora."  ^  See 
Lob.,  Ad  Phnjn.,  p.  55.) — In  the  way  =  along 
the  way  (Mey.,  Kob.),  not  on  the  way  (De  Wet.). 
— For  me,  after  shining  round  about,  see 
on  9  :  3. — For  those  journeying  with  me, 
see  on  22  :  9. 

14.  And  when,  etc.— lit.  and  we  all  hav- 
ing fallen  down  upon  the  earth,  from  the 
effect  of  terror,  not  as  an  act  of  reverence. 
(Comp.  9:4;  22  :  17.)  In  regard  to  the  alleged 
inconsistency  between  fliis  statement  and  stood 
tpeechless.  in  9  :  7,  see  the  note  on  that  passage. 
—It  is  hard  for  thee  to  kick  against  the 
pricks,  or  goads.  [The  original  text  has  no 
article  before  (joads.—A.  H.]  The  meaning  is 
that  his  opi)Osition  to  the  cause  and  will  of 
Christ  must  be  unavailing ;  the  continuance 
of  it  would  only  bring  injury  and  ruin  on  him- 
self. Wetstein  has  produced  examples  of  this 
proverb  from  both   Greek  and  Latin  writers. 


refractor^'  animal  of  course  would  kick  against 
the  sharp  iron  wlien  pierced  with  it.  In  early 
times  the  Greeks  and  Romans  used  a  plough  of 
the  like  construction. 

16.  For  this  purpose  prepares  the  mind 
for  what  loUows.  (See  on  9  :  21.)— For  shows 
that  the  command  to  arise  was  equivalent  to 
assuring  him  that  he  had  no  occasion  for  such 
alarm  (v.  u) ;  the  object  of  the  vision  was  to 
summon  him  to  a  new  and  exalted  sphere  of 
effort.— To  appoint  thee  as  a  minister,  call 
him  to  his  destined  work.  The  antecedent  pur- 
pose mast  be  sought  in  the  nature  of  the  act, 
rather  than  in  the  verb.  (See  on  3  :  20.)— 
Understand  of  those  things  (rovruiv),  after  wit- 
ness, as  the  attracting  antecedent  of  which 
(if). — Mv  Tf  h(f>^<Top.ai  <rot  is  an  unusual  construc- 
tion. The  best  solution  is  that  Stv  stands  for  a 
as  a  sort  of  explanaton.'  accusative  (K.  ^  279. 
7.) :  as  to  which,  or  (=  it  a),  on  account  of  which 
(Mey.),  /  will  appear  unto  thee.    (See  W.  ?  39.  3. 


1  [The  apostle  uses  here  a  more  common  form  for  midday,  while  in  ch.  22  :  6  he  employs  one  more  eleganUJ 


286 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVI. 


17  Delivering  thee  from  the  people,  and  Jrom  the 
Gentiles,  "unto  whom  now  1  send  thee, 

IS  'To  open  their  eyes,  and  '\o  turn  lliem  from  dark- 
ness to  light,  and  from  the  power  of  Satan  unto  (jod, 
''that  they  may  receive  forgiveness  of  sins,  and  «inher- 
itaiice  among  them  which  are /sanctified  by  faith  that 
is  in  me. 

ly  Whereupon,  O  king  Agrippa,  I  was  not  disobedient 
unto  the  heavenly  vision  : 

20  but  ^shewed  first  unto  them  of  Damascus,  and  at 
Jerusalem,  and  throughout  all  the  coasts  of  Judeea,  and 


17  the  things  wherein  1  will  appear  unto  thee ;  deliv- 
ering thee  from  the  people,  and  from  the  Oentiles, 

18  unto  whom  I  send  Ihee,  to  open  their  eyes,  that 
they  may  turn  from  darkness  to  light,  and  from  the 
power  of  Satan  unto  God,  that  they  may  receive 
remission  of  sins  and  an  inheritance  among  them 

19 that  are  sanctified  by  faith  in  me.  Wherefore,  O 
king  Agrippa,  I  was  not  disobedient  unto  the  heav- 

20enly  vision  :  but  declared  both  to  them  of  l-iiniascus 
first,  and  at  Jerusalem,  and  tliroughout  all  the  coun- 


l  ch.  22  :  21 6  Isa.  35  :  5  ;  4'2  :  7  ;  Luke  1  :  79  ;  John  8  :  12  ;  2  Cor.  4:4;  Eph.  1  :  18;  1   Thess.  5:5 c  2  Cor.  6  :  14  ;  Eph.  4  :  18; 

5:8;  Col.  1:1?;  1  Pet.  2  :  9,  25 d  Luke  1  :  77 e  Eph.  I  :  11 ;  Col.  1  :  12 /  ch  20  :  32 g  ch.  9  :  20,  22,  29;  11  :  26;  and  chaps. 

13;  14;   16;  17;  18;  19;  20;  21. 1  Or,  to  turn  them 


1.)  Many  commentators  assign  an  active  sense 
to  the  verb  :  which  I  will  cauxe  thee  to  see  or  hww. 
This  use  of  tlie  verb  has  no  warrant  eitlier  in 
classic  or  Hellenistic  Greek.  [Westcott  and 
Hort,  with  the  Anglo-Am.  Revisers,  adopt  a 
reading,  supported  by  B  C*  and  the  Syriac  Ver- 
sions, which  may  be  translated  as  follows :  both 
of  the  things  wherein  thou  hast  seen  me  (the  pronoun 
fxe  being  added  to  the  received  text),  and  of  the 
things  wherein  I  ivill  appear  unto  thee.  Rejecting 
the  pronoun,  the  Bible  Union  revision  and  the 
translation  of  Davidson  agree  in  the  following 
version  :  both  of  the  things  ivhich  thou  saivest,  and 
of  the  things  in  ivhich  I  will  appear  to  thee.  It  is 
difficult  to  decide  upon  the  text,  and  the  mean- 
ing is  not  essentially  changed  by  the  reception 
or  rejection  of  the  pronoun. — A.  H.] 

17.  Delivering  thee  from  the  people — 
i.  e.  of  the  Jews  (see  on  10  :  2)— and  the  Gen- 
tiles =  heathen.  For  this  sense  of  the  partici- 
ple, see  7  :  10 ;  12  :  11 ;  23  :  27.  Such  a  promise 
was  conditional,  from  the  nature  of  the  case. 
It  pledged  to  him  the  security  which  he  needed 
for  the  accomplishment  of  his  work  until  his 
work  was  done.  Some  render  the  words  (e^at- 
povixevos  <re)  Selecting  thee,  so  as  to  find  here 
the  idea  of  a  chosen  vessel,  in  9  :  15  (Kuin.,  Hnr., 
Rob.,  Cony,  and  Hws.).  This  interpretation 
would  suit  from  the  peop>le,  but,  as  De  Wette  and 
^Meyer  remark,  it  is  inapj^roi^riate  to  from  the 
heathen.  Paul  was  not  one  of  the  heathen,  and 
could  not  be  said  to  be  chosen  from  them. — 
Unto  whom  refers  to  both  the  nouns  which 
precede. — The  correct  text  inserts  /  (emphatic) 
before  thee,  and  omits  now. — I  send  is  pres- 
ent, because  his  ministry  is  to  begin  at  once. 

18.  It  is  important  to  observe  the  relation  of 
tlie  different  clauses  to  each  other.  To  open 
their  eyes  states  the  object  of  send. — That 
they  may  turn  derives  its  subject  from  their. 
The  verb  is  intransitive  (.see  v.  20;  14  :  15),  not 
active,  in  order  to  turn  them  (E.  V.).  This  clause 
states  the  designed  effect  of  the  illumination 
which  they  should  receive. — That  they  may 
obtain  forgiveness  of  sins  expresses  the 
direct  object  of  the  second  infinitive  and  the 


ultimate  object  of  the  first. — For  an  inher- 
itance among  the  sanctified,  see  the  note 

on  20  :  32. — By  faith  on  me  our  English 
translators  and  some  others  join  with  sanc- 
tified ;  but  the  words  specify,  evidently,  the 
condition  by  which  believers  obtain  the  pardon 
of  sin  and  an  interest  in  the  heavenly  inher- 
itance. Which  are  sanctified  is  added 
merely  to  indicate  the  spiritual  nature  of  the 
inheritance. 

19.  Whereupon — lit.  whence,  according- 
ly ;  i.  e.  having  been  so  instructed,  and  in  such 
a  manner. — I  was  not=  I  proved  not  dis- 
obedient affirms  the  alacrity  of  his  response 
to  the  call  more  strongly  than  if  the  mode  of 
expression  had  been  positive,  instead  of  nega- 
tive. Disobedient  attaches  itself  to  the  per- 
sonal idea  of  vision,  and  demands  that  ele- 
ment in  the  meaning  of  the  word.  The  service 
required  of  him,  and  so  promptly  rendered, 
evidently  was  that  he  should  preach  the  gospel 
to  Jews  and  Gentiles  (v.  17).  It  is  impossible  to 
reconcile  such  intimations  with  the  idea  that  the 
apostle  after  this  remained  for  years  inactive  in 
Arabia,  or  spent  the  time  there  in  silent  medi- 
tation and  the  gradual  enlargement  of  his  views 
of  the  Christian  system.  I  cannot  agree  with 
Dr.  Davidson  that  "  Paul  was  not  a  preacher  of 
the  gospel  in  Arabia,  but  went  through  a  pro- 
cess of  training  there,  for  the  purj^ose  of  preach- 
ing it."  (See  his  Introduction,  ii.  p.  80.) — The 
heavenly  vision,  manifestation  of  the  Sa- 
viour's person.  (Comp.  Luke  1  :  22 ;  2-t  :  23 ; 
2  Cor.  12  :  1.    See  the  note  on  9  :  7.) 

'ZO,  To  those  in  Damascus  first,  as  stated 
in  9  :  20  and  implied  in  Gal.  1  :  17. — Jerusa- 
lem with  in  repeated,  in  Jerusalem  ;  hardly 
unto  as  a  direct  dative  (Mey.).  [The  best  au- 
thorized text  reads  and  also  Jerusalem. — A.  H.] 
— And  unto  {i.  e.  with  a  union  of  the  local 
idea  with  the  personal,  the  inhabitants  of)  all 
the  region  of  Jutfea.  (Comp.  told  it  in  the 
city,  in  Luke  8  :  34.)  Meyer  extends  them 
from  the  other  clause  into  this:  and  unto  those 
throughout  all  the  region.  But  in  his  last  edition 
he  gives  up  this  analysis  and  approves  the  other. 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


287 


then  to  the  GeutiK-s,  that  they  should  repent  and  turn 
to  liod,  and  do  "works  meet  lor  repentauce. 

21  For  these  causes  'the  .lews  caught  me  in  the  tem- 
ple, and  went  about  to  kill  itif. 

Ti.  Having  therefore  obtaii  ed  helpof  fiod,  I  continue 
unto  this  day,  witnessing  both  to  small  and  great,  say- 
ing none  otlier  things  than  those  'which  the  prophets 
and  ''.Moses  did  say  should  come: 

'lA  "That  Christ  slioulcl  suder,  (f»«//that  he  should  be 
the  first  that  should  rise  from  the  dead,  and  ('should 
shew  light  unto  the  people,  and  to  the  Cientiles. 


try  of  Jiidiea,  and  also  to  the  Gentiles,  that  they 
should  repent  and  turn  to  (iod,  doing  works  worthy 

21  of  'repentance.     I'or  this  cause  the  .lews  seized  me 

22  in  the  temple,  and  assayed  to  kill  nic.  Having 
therefore  obtained  the  help  that  is  from  dod,  1 
stand  unto  this  day  testifying  both  to  snuiU  and 
great,  saying  nothing   but  what  the  prophets   and 

2;j  Closes  did  say  should  come;  -how  that  the  thrist 
3must  sutler,  iind-\wv!  that  he  first  by  the  resurrec- 
tion of  the  dead  should  proclaim  light  both  to  the 
people  and  to  the  oeutiles. 


I  Matt.   3  :  8....6ch.  21  :  .30,   31....cl,uke  24  :  27,   14  ;    ch.  24  :  14  ;    28:  23;    Rom.  3  :  21....(i  John  5:  4B....«  Luke  24  :  26,   46..../ 1 

Cor.    15:20;    Col.   1:18;    Kev.   1:5 g  Luke   2  :  .12. 1  Or,   thtir   repentance 2  Or,   if    Or,  whether 3  Or,   ia    tubjcct  to 

tiiffering 


— The  apostle  during  his  labors  in  Syria  and 
Cilicia,  after  his  first  visit  to  Jerusalem,  was  as 
yet  unknown  in  person  to  the  churches  of 
Judea.  (See  Gal.  1  :  22.)  Hence  he  must  have 
preached  there,  as  intimated  in  that  pa.ssage,  at 
a  later  period.  He  could  have  done  so  when  he 
went  thither  at  the  time  of  the  famine  (see  on 
11  :  30)  or  while  he  was  at  Jerusalem  between 
liis  first  and  second  mission  to  tlie  heathen 
(i8:22). — Works  meet  for  repeutance — i.e. 
deeds  worthy  of  repentance,  such  as 
showed  that  they  were  changed  in  heart  and 
life.  Zeller  charges  that  Paul  would  not  have 
spoken  so,  because  his  doctrine  was  that  of 
justification  by  faith  alone.  The  answer  is 
that  in  Paul's  system  good  works  are  tlie  neces- 
sary evidence  of  such  faith,  and,  further,  that 
by  faith  that  is  in  me,  above  (v.  is),  shows 
that  he  adhered  fully  on  this  occasion  to  his 
well-known  doctrinal  view. — And  do,  or  do- 
ing, deserts  the  case  of  Gentiles  [dat.],  and 
agrees  with  they  (aurous)  as  the  suppressed  sub- 
ject of  the  verbs. 

22.  Having  therefore  obtained  assist- 
ance from  God,  since,  exposed  to  such  dan- 
gers in  the  fulfilment  of  his  ministry  (woii  about 
to  kill  inc,  in  v.  21),  he  must  otherwise  have  per- 
ished. The  assistance  was  an  inference  (oi>v) 
from  his  present  safety. — Testifying  to  both 
small  and  great  (Rev.  ii :  is;  la :  i6;  i9:5),  not 
young  and  old  {i -.10).  The  phrase  admits  eitlier 
sense,  but  the  more  obvious  distinction  here  is 
that  of  rank,  not  of  age.  The  grace  of  God  is 
impartial ;  the  apostle  declared  it  without  re- 
spect of  persons.  It  is  uncertain  whether  this 
(marturo)tienos)  is  the  correct  participle,  or  the 
received  marturoumcnos.  The  latter  would 
mean  attested,  approved,  both  by  small  and  great 
( Bretsch.,  Mey.).  (Comp.  G  :  3 ;  10  :  22  ;  16  :  2.) 
It  is  objected  that  the  sense  with  the  latter  read- 
ing is  impossible,  because  Paul  was  so  notori- 
ously despised  and  persecuted  by  Jews  and 
heathen  (Alf.).  But  the  meaning  might  be 
that,  though  not  openly  approved,  he  had  re- 
ceived  that  verdict  at  the  bar   of  their   con- 


sciences; he  had  not  failed  to  commend  himself 
and  his  doctrine  to  every  man's  better  judg- 
ment. The  avowal  would  imply  no  more  than 
Paul  affirms  to  be  true  of  all  who  preach  faith- 
fully the  system  of  truth  which  he  preached. 
(See  2  Cor.  4:2.)  Some  render  mnrturoumenos 
as  middle,  bearing  wilncsn,  instead  of  passive,  but 
confessedly  without  any  example  of  that  use. 
Knapp,  Hahn,  Tischendorf,  Baumgarten,  and 
others  approve  of  vuirturonienos.  It  has  no  less 
support  than  the  other  word,  and  affords  an 
easier  explanation.  [Rather,  far  more  supjiort ; 
for  this  participle  is  also  accepted  by  Griesb.. 
Litch.,  Treg.,  West,  and  Hort,  and  the  Anglo- 
Am.  Revisers.  Moreover,  it  rests  upon  such 
codices  as  X  A  B  H  L  P,  while  the  other  read- 
ing {ixapTvpoviiivo<;)  has  but  One  gO(id  uncial,  E, 
in  its  favor.  The  case  is  therefore  very  clear. 
—A.  H.] 

23.  This  part  of  the  sentence  attaches  itself 
to  saying  rather  than  to  which  should 
come.  If  the  Messiah  can  suffer  (passi- 
bili.<<  in  Vulg.),  not  so  nuu'li  as  a  possibility  of 
his  nature  as  one  of  the  conditions  of  his  office 
— i.  e.  would  be  appointed  or  allowed  to  suffer, 
and  so  could  be  subject  to  infirmity,  pain, 
death.  (Verbals  in  rdv  express  possibility  and 
correspond  to  Latin  adjectives  in  His.  B.  §  102. 
N.  2.)  The  apostle,  as  I  understand,  approaches 
the  question  on  the  Jewish  side  of  it,  not  on  the 
Christian  ;  and  that  was  whether  the  Messiah, 
being  such  as  many  of  the  Jews  expected,  could 
suffer,  not  whether  he  vuuit  suffer,  in  order  to 
fulfil  the  Scriptures.  If  presents  the  points  as 
questions  which  he  was  wont  to  discuss.  Many 
of  the  Jews  overlooked  or  denied  the  suffering 
character  of  the  Messiah,  and  stumbled  fatally 
at  the  gospel  because  (their  stumbling-block)  it 
required  them  to  accept  a  crucified  Redeemer. 
(Some  make  ei  =  on,  that — ('.  e.  the  sign  of  a 
nioderate<l  assertion.)  —  The  Christ,  the 
niessiah  as  such ;  not  a  personal  name  here. 
— The  first  that  should  rise  from  the 
dead  =  the  first-born  from  the  dead,  in  Col.  1  : 
18.    If  Moses  and  the  prophets  foretold  that 


288 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVI. 


24  And  as  he  thus  spake  for  himseli,  Festus  said  with 
a  loud  voice,  I'aul,  "thou  art  beside  thysell ;  much 
leariiitig  doth  make  thee  mad. 

25  But  he  said,  1  am  not  mad,  most  noble  Festus;  but 
speak  forth  the  words  of  truth  and  soberness. 

26  For  the  king  kiioweth  of  these  things,  before 
whom  also  I  speak  freely:  for  I  am  persuaded  that 
none  of  these  things  are  hidden  from  him ;  for  this 
thing  was  not  done  in  a  corner. 

27  King  Agrippa,  believest  thou  the  prophets?  I 
know  that  thou  believest. 

2«  Then  Agrippa  said  unto  Paul,  Almost  thou  per- 
suadest  me  to  be  a  Christian. 


24  And  as  he  thus  made  his  defence,  Festus  saith 
with  a  loud  voice,  Paul,  thou  art  mad  ;   thy  much 

25  learning  doth  turu  thee  to  madness.  But  Paul 
saith,   1  am   not  mad,  most  excellent  Festus;   but 

26 speak  forth  words  of  truth  and  soberness,  lor  the 
king  knoweth  of  these  things,  uuto  whom  also  I 
speak  freely  :  for  I  am  persuaded  that  none  of  these 
things  is  hidden  from  him  ;  for  this  hath  not  been 

27  done  in  a  corner.     King  Agrippa,  believest  thou  the 

28  prophets?  I  know  that  thou  believest.  And  Agrip- 
pa 6a  tt/  unto  Paul,  'With  but  little  persuasion  thou 


a  2  Kings  9:11;  John  10  :  20  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  23 ;  2  :  13,  14  ;  4  :  10.- 


the  Messiah  would  suffer,  die,  and  rise  from 
the  dead,  it  followed  that  Jesus  was  the  prom- 
ised Saviour  of  men  and  the  Author  of  eternal 
life  to  those  who  believe  on  him.  The  apodosis 
(should  show  light,  etc.)  depends  logically 
on  the  protasis  (if  the  Christ  can  suffer,  etc.). 

24-29.  THE  ANSWER  OF  PAUL  TO 
FESTUS. 

24.  Thus— lit.  these  things— refers  more 
especially  to  the  words  last  spoken  (Mey.),  and 
not  in  the  same  degree  to  the  entire  speech  (De 
Wet.).  The  idea  of  a  resurrection,  which  ex- 
cited the  ridicule  of  the  Athenians  (n:32),  ap- 
peared equally  absurd  to  the  Roman  Festus, 
and  he  could  listen  with  patience  no  longer. 
It  is  evident  that  these  things,  in  v.  2G,  has 
reference  to  should  rise  from  the  dead,  in  v.  23 ; 
and  the  intermediate  these  things  would  not  be 
likely  to  turn  the  mind  to  a  different  subject. 
— The  participle  rendered  spake  for  himself 
may  be  present,  because  Festus  interposed  be- 
fore Paul  had  finished  his  defence  (Mey.). — 
Loud  voice.  (See  on  14  :  10.)  The  "loud 
voice"  was  the  effect  of  his  surprise  and  as- 
tonishment.— Thou  art  mad,  which  he  says 
earnestly,  not  in  jest  (Olsh.),  because  it  really 
appeared  to  him  that  Paul  was  acting  under  an 
infatuation  which  could  spring  only  from  in- 
sanity (Neand.,  Mey.,  De  Wet.).  Bengel: 
"  Videbat  Festus,  naturam  non  agere  in  Paulo ; 
gratiam  non  vidit"  ["Festus  saw  that  nature 
was  not  working  in  Paul ;  grace  he  did  not 
see"].r-[The  words  translated  much  learn- 
ing] {to.  TToKKa.  ypdix/jiaTa)  admit  of  two  scuses  : 
the  many  writings  which  thou  readest  (Kuin., 
Mey.,  Cony,  and  Hws.),  or  the  much  learning 
which  thou  hast  or  art  reputed  to  have  (Neand., 
De  Wet.,  Alf ).  The  latter  is  the  more  natural 
idea  (as  Meyer  now  holds),  and  may  have  been 
suggested  to  the  mind  of  Festus  from  his  hav- 
ing heard  that  Paul  was  distinguisiied  among 
the  Jews  for  his  scholarship.  It  is  less  probable 
that  he  was  led  to  make  the  remark  because  he 
was  struck  with  the  evidence  of  superior  know- 
ledge evinced  in  Paul's  address.     It  was  able 


and  eloquent,  but  would  not  be  characterized 
as  learned  in  any  very  strict  sense  of  the 
term. 

25.  I  am  not  mad,  etc.  This  reply  of  Paul 
is  unsurpassed  as  a  model  of  Cliristian  courtesy 
and  self-command.  Doddridge  takes  occasion 
to  say  here  that  "  if  great  and  good  men  who 
meet  with  rude  and  insolent  treatment  in  the 
defence  of  the  gospel  would  learn  to  behave 
with  such  moderation,  it  would  be  a  great  ac- 
cession of  strength  to  the  Christian  cause." — 
Most  noble  =  most  excellent,  as  in  23  :  26. 
— Of  truth,  as  opposed,  not  to  falseliood  (his 
veracity  was  not  impeached),  but  to  the  fancies, 
hallucinations,  of  a  disordered  intellect. — So- 
berness is  the  opposite  of  mania — i.  c.  a  sound 
mind. 

26.  For  the  king  knows  Avell  concern- 
ing these  things — viz.  the  death  and  resur- 
rection of  Christ.  The  apostle  is  assured  that 
Agrippa  has  heard  of  the  events  connected 
with  the  origin  of  Christianity,  and  could  not 
deny  that  they  were  supijorted  by  evidence  too 
credible  to  make  it  reproachful  to  a  man's  un- 
derstanding to  admit  the  reality  of  the  facts. — 
Before  whom — lit.  unto  Avhom  also  (i.  e. 
while  he  has  this  knowledge  and  on  that  ac- 
count)— I  speak  boldly,  without  fear  of  con- 
tradiction.— In  a  corner,  secretly  (litotes);  on 
the  contrary,  at  Jerusalem,  the  capital  of  the 
nation.  Tlie  expression  was  current  in  this 
sense  (Wetst.).— This  thing  =  these  things, 
just  before.  The  plural  views  the  circum- 
stances in  detail;  the  singular,  as  a  whole. 
(See  the  note  on  5*5.) 

27.  Believest  thou,  etc.  As  Agrippa  pro- 
fessed to  believe  the  Scriptures  which  foretold 
tliat  the  Messiah  would  rise  from  the  dead,  he 
was  bound  to  admit  that  there  was  notliing  ir- 
rational or  improbable  in  the  apostle's  testi- 
mony concerning  an  event  which  accom- 
plished tliat  j)rophecy. 

28.  Almost,  etc.,  or  in  a  little  time  (at 
this  rate),  you  persuade  nve  to  become  a 
Christian  (Wetst.,  Rapli.,  Kuin.,  Neand.,  De 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


289 


29  And  Paul  said,  <"I  would  to  Ood,  that  not  only 
thou,  but  also  all  that  hear  nie  this  day,  were  both 
almost,  and  altogether  such  as  1  am,  except  these 
bonds. 

:l'i  And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  the  king  rose  up, 
and  the  governor,  and  Bernice,  and  they  that  sat  with 
them : 

;11  And  when  they  were  gone  aside,  they  talked  be- 
tween themselves,  saying,  'This  man  doeth  nothing 
worthy  of  death  or  of  bonds. 


29  wouldest  fain  make  me  a  Christian.  And  Paul  xniil, 
I  would  to  tiod,  that  'whether  with  little  or  with 
much,  not  thou  only,  but  also  all  that  hear  me  this 
day,  jnight  become  such  as  I  am,  except  these 
bonds. 

30  And  the  king  rose  up,  and  the  governor,  and 

31  Rernice,  and  they  that  sat  with  them:  and  when 
they  had  withdrawn,  they  spake  one  to  anollior, 
saying,  This  man  doeth  nothing  worthy  of  death  or 


ol  Cor.  7  :  7....6ch.23  :  9.  29 ;  25  :  25  ■ 


-1  Or,  both  in  Utile  and  in  great,  i.  e.,  \a  all  respects. 


Wet.,  Rob.).  It  was  not  itncommon  in  Greek 
to  omit  time  (xpoVos)  after  this  adjective.  Wet- 
stein,  Raphcl(JHHo^<.,  ii.  p.  188),  and  otliers  have 
produced  decisive  examples  of  this  ellipsis.  By 
taking  in  little  (iv  oAiyco)  as  quantitative,  in.stead 
of  temporal,  Meyer  brings  out  this  sense  from 
the  expression  :  With  little — i.  e.  trouble,  effort — 
you  persuade  7)ie  to  become  a  Christian ;  in  other 
words  (said  sarcastically),  You  appeal  to  me  as 
if  you  thought  me  an  easy  convert  to  your  faith. 
This  would  be,  no  doubt,  the  correct  explana- 
tion, if,  with  Meyer,  Tischendorf,  and  otliers, 
we  adopt  in  great  {iv  ixeyaKw)  as  the  correct  read- 
ing in  Paul's  reply,  instead  of  in  much  {iv  noWiZ) ; 
but  the  testimony  for  the  common  text  out- 
weighs that  against  it  (Neand.,  De  Wet.).  [As 
the  evidence  is  now  reported,  this  does  not  ap- 
pear to  be  the  case.  Lach.,  Tsch.,  Treg.,  West, 
and  Hort,  and  Anglo-Am.  Revisers  agree  in 
accepting  iv  neya.\<u,  in  great,  as  the  true  text. 
In  this  they  are  supported  by  X  AB,  the  three 
most  important  uncials,  and  by  the  Vul.,  Syr., 
and  Cop.  Versions. —  A.  H.]  It  is  held,  at  pres- 
ent, to  be  unphilological  to  translate  in  little, 
almost  (Bez.,  Grot.,  E.  V.).  The  Greek  for  that 
sense  would  have  been  of  little  {6\iyov),  it  steeds 

little    (b\Cyov    Sel),   or    by    little    {nap,  b\Cyov).       TilC 

translation  of  the  Common  Version  ai)pears  first 
in  the  Geneva  Version.  Tyndale  and  Crainuer 
render:  "Somewhat  thou  bringest  me  in  mind 
for  to  become  a  Christian."  Agrijjpa  ap' 
pears  to  have  been  moved  by  the  apostle's 
earnest  manner,  but  attempts  to  conceal  his 
emotion  under  the  form  of  a  jest. 

39.  I  could  pray  to  God — i.  e.  if  I  obeyed 
the  impulse  of  my  own  heart,  though  it  may 
be  unavailing.  (For  iv  with  the  optative,  .see 
W.  ?  41.  1.  b  ;  B.  ?  139.  m.  1.5.)— Both  almost, 
and  altogether,  rather  both  in  a  little  and 
in  much  time.  We  may  paraphrase  the  idea 
thus :  "  I  could  wish  tliat  you  might  become  a 
Christian  in  a  short  time,  as  you  say ;  and  if  not 
in  a  short  time,  in  a  long  time.  I  should  rejoice 
in  such  an  event,  could  it  ever  take  place, 
whetlier  it  were  sooner  or  later."  If  we  read 
t>i  great  {iv  tieydktf)  [as  the  evidence — see  above 
—requires.— A.  H.],  the  words  would  then 
19 


mean  whether  by  little  effort  or  by  great,  whether 
he  was  to  be  converted  with  ease  or  ditficulty. 
— Except  these  chains,  which  were  hanging 
upon  his  arms  as  he  made  his  defence.  (See 
note  on  12  :  6.)  Though  separated  from  his 
keepers,  he  must  wear  still  the  l)adges  of  his 
condition.  Iless  writes  (ii.  p.  459)  as  if  the 
soldiers  were  present  and  Paul  was  bound  to 
tliem.  Some  have  taken  the  language  as  figu- 
rative :  except  this  state  of  captivity.  The  literal 
sense  is  not  inconsistent  with  an  occasional 
Roman  usage.  Tacitus  mentions  the  following 
scene  as  having  occurred  in  the  Roman  Senate 
{Ann.,  4.  28) :  "  Reus  pater,  accusator  filius  (no- 
men  utrique  Vibius  Serenus),  in  scnatum  in- 
ducti  sunt.  Ab  exilio  retractus  et  turn  catena 
vinctus,  orante  filio.  At  contra  reus  nihil  in- 
fracto  animo,  obversus  in  filium  quaterc  vincla, 
vocare  ultores  deos,"'  etc.  ["  A  fatiier  the  ac- 
cu.sed,  his  son  the  accuser  (the  name  of  each 
wius  Vibius  Serenus),  were  led  into  the  Senate. 
He  had  been  brought  back  from  exile  and  then 
was  bound  with  n  chain,  the  son  arguing  against 
him.  On  the  other  hand,  the  accused,  his  spirit 
in  no  degree  shaken,  turned  toward  his  son, 
shook  his  chain,  and  called  on  the  gods  as  his 
avengers"]. 

30-32.  AGRIPPA  PRONOUNCES  PAUL 
INNOCENT. 

30.  The  best  authorities  read  rose  up  with- 
out and  when  he  had  thus  spoken. — The 
is  repeated  before  king  and  governor,  be- 
cause they  are  the  titles  of  different  persons. 
— Those  who  sat  with  them  are  the  mili- 
tary officers  and  magistrates  who  are  men- 
tioned in  2')  :  23.  Tiie  parties  are  named  a.s 
rising  and  leaving  the  hall  in  the  order  of 
their  rank. 

31.  And  Avhen,  etc.,  or  and  having  re- 
tired, withdrawn  from  the  place  of  audience 
(see  25  :  23),  not  ai)art  simply  in  the  same  room. 
— Talked  with  one  another.  Tiie  ol)jcct  of 
the  conference  w;us  to  ascertain  Agrippa's  opin- 
ion in  regard  to  the  merit.s  of  the  case.  For 
nothing  worthy  of  death,  etc.,  see  on  23  :  29. 
— Does  nothing,  in  that  he  holds  such  opin- 
ions, pursues  such  a  course.     (See  W.  ^  40.  2.  c.) 


290 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


32  Then  sail  Agrippa  unto  Festus,  This  man  might  |  32 of  bonds.  And  Agrippa  said  unto  Festus,  This  man 
have  been  set  at  liberty,  «if  he  had  not  appealed  uuto  might  have  been  set  at  liberty,  if  he  had  not  ap- 
Cssar.  I       pealed  unto  Ca;sar. 


AND  when  'it  was  determined  that  we  should  sail 
into  Italy,  they  delivered  Paul  and  certain  other 
prisoners  unto  owe  named  Julius,  a  ceuturiou  of  Au- 
gustus' baud. 


CHAPTEE    XXVII. 

1  And  when  it  was  determined  that  we  should  sail 
for  Italy,  they  delivered  Paul  and  certain  other 
prisoners    to    a   centurion    named    Julius,  of  the 


a  ch.  25  :  11 i  ch.  25  :  12,  25. 


It  is  not  an  instance  of  the  i^resent  for  the  per- 
fect (Kiiin.). 

32.  Could  have  been  (not  could  be)  re- 
leased— i.  c.  at  any  previous  time  since  his 
apprehension,  before  his  appeal  to  Caesar.  It 
will  be  seen  that  both  verbs  are  in  tlie  past 
tense.  As  the  appeal  has  been  accepted,  it 
could  not  be  v^^ithdrawn,  even  with  the  consent 
of  the  parties.  The  procurator  had  now  lost  the 
control  of  the  case,  and  had  no  more  power  to 
acquit  the  prisoner  than  to  condemn  him 
(Bottg.,  Grot.).— One  effect  of  Agrippa's  de- 
cision may  have  been  that  Festus  modified  his 
report,  and  commended  Paul  to  the  clemency 
of  the  court  at  Rome.     (See  on  28  :  16.) 


1-5.  PAUL  EMBARKS  AT  C^SAREA 
FOR  ROME,  AND  PROCEEDS  AS  FAR  AS 
MYRA. 

1.  When,  or  as,  presents  it  was  deter- 
mined as  immediately  antecedent  to  deliv- 
ered.— Was  determined  relates  to  the  time 
of  departure,  not  to  the  original  purpose  that 
Paul  should  be  sent.  (See  25  .  21.)— That  we 
should  sail  (toO  anon\e'iv)  is  a  lax  use  of  the 
telic  infinitive,  tlie  conception  being  that  the  de- 
cision took  place  with  a  view  to  the  sailing.  (W. 
?  44.  4.  b.)— We  includes  the  historian  as  one  of 
the  party ;  last  used  in  21 :  18.— Proceeded  to 
deliver  (imperfect  as  related  to  was  deter- 
mined), or  delivered,  as  a  series  of  acts.  The 
plural  subject  of  the  verb  refers  to  tliose  who 
acted  in  this  case  under  the  command  of  tlie 
procurator. — Other — i.  e.  additional — prison- 
ers, not  different  in  character  from  Paul  (viz. 
heathen),  as  ISIeyer  supposes.  (Luke  uses  that 
term  and  5aaos  indiscriminately.  See  15  :  35 ; 
17  :  34.)— The  statement  here  that  not  only 
Paul,  but  certain  other  prisoners,  were  sent  by 
the  same  ship  into  Italy,  implies,  as  Paley  re- 
marks, after  Lardner,  tliat  the  sending  of  per- 
sons from  Judea  to  be  tried  at  Rome  was  a 


common  practice.  Josephus  confirms  this  in- 
timation by  a  variety  of  instances.  Among 
others,  he  mentions  the  following,  which  is 
the  more  pertinent,  as  it  took  place  about  this 
time.  "Felix,"  he  says  (Life,  §  3),  "for  some 
slight  offence,  bound  and  sent  to  Rome  several 
priests  of  his  acquaintance,  honorable  and  good 
men,  to  answer  for  themselves  to  Ctesar." — Of 
Augustus'  band,  or  of  the  Augustan  co- 
hort. It  is  well  established  that  several  legions 
in  tlie  Roman  army,  certainly  the  second,  third, 
and  eighth,  bore  the  above  designation.  No 
ancient  writer,  however,  mentions  that  any 
one  of  these  was  stationed  in  the  East.  Some 
critics  suppose,  notwithstanding  tlie  absence 
of  any  notice  to  tliis  effect,  tliat  such  may  have 
been  the  fact,  and  that  one  of  the  cohorts  be- 
longing to  this  legion,  and  distinguished  by 
the  same  name,  had  its  quarters  at  Ciesarea. 
The  more  approved  opinion  is  that  it  was  an 
independent  cohort  assigned  to  that  particular 
service,  and  known  as  the  Augustan  or  im- 
perial, because,  with  reference  to  its  relation  to 
the  procurator,  it  corresponded  in  some  sense 
to  the  emperor's  life-guard  at  Rome.*  It  may 
have  taken  the  place  of  the  Italian  cohort, 
which  was  mentioned  in  10  •  1,  or  very  possi- 
bly, as  Meyer  suggests,  may  have  been  identi- 
cal with  it.  The  two  names  are  not  inconsist- 
ent with  this  latter  opinion.  Augustan  may 
have  been  the  honorary  appellation  of  the 
cohort,  while  it  was  called  Italian  by  the  peo- 
ple, because  it  consisted  chiefly  of  Italians  or 
Romans.  The  other  four  cohorts  at  Csesarea, 
as  stated  by  Josephus  {Antt.,  20.  8.  7  ;  19.  9.  2.1, 
were  composed  principally  of  Cesareans,  or 
Samaritans.  Hence,  again,  some  explain  the 
words  as  meaning  Sebastenean  or  Samaritan  co- 
hort, since  the  city  of  Samaria  bore  also  the 
Greek  name  Sebaste,  in  honor  of  the  Emi)eror 
Augustus.  But  in  that  case,  as  Winer  {Rcalw., 
ii.  p.  338),  De  Wette,  Meyer,  and  others  decide, 
we  should  have  expected  Sebastene,  instead  of 
Seba^tes,  or  an  adjective  equivalent  in   sense, 


iSuch  exceptions  to  the  general  system  occur  under  every  military  establishment.  Speaking  of  that  of 
England  at  a  certain  period,  Mr.  Macaulay  says  that  "a  troop  of  dragoons,  which  did  not  form  part  of  any 
reu'imeiit,  was  stationed  near  Berwick,  for  the  purpose  of  keeping  the  peace  among  the  moss-troopers  of  the 
border." 


Ch.  XXVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


291 


2  And  entering  into  a  ship  of  Adranivttiuni,  we 
launcht-d,  ineuDitig  to  sail  by  tho  coasts  oi"  Asia;  one 
"Aristarclius,  a  Macedoniau  of  Thessalouica,  being 
with  us. 


2  Augustan  'band.  And  embarking  in  a  ship  of 
Adrauiyttium,  which  was  al^out  to  sail  unto  the 
places  on  the  coast  of  Asia,  we  put  to  sea,  Aris- 
tarchus,  a  Macedonian  of  Thessalouica,  being  with 


formed  like  Italian,  in  10  :  1.  Wieseler  (p.  391) 
lias  proposed  another  view  of  the  expression. 
It  appears  that  Nero  organized  a  body-guard 
which  he  denominated  Augustani  (Suet.,  Ker., 
20.  25)  or  Augustiani  (Tac,  Ann.,  14.  15).  The 
critic  just  named  thinks  tliat  Julius  may  have 
been  a  centurion  in  that  cohort,  whose  sta- 
tion of  course  was  at  Rome,  and  tliat,  having 
been  sent  to  the  East  for  the  execution  of 
some  imblic  service,  he  was  now  returning  to 
Italy  with  these  prisoners  under  his  charge. 
But  that  guard,  as  Wieseler  himself  mentions, 
was  organized  in  the  year  a.  d.  60 ;  and,  ac- 
cording to  his  own  plan  of  chronology  in  the 
Acts,  it  was  in  that  very  year  that  Paul  was 
sent  from  Cresarea  to  Rome.  This  coincidence 
in  point  of  time  leaves  room  for  a  possibility 
that  the  centurion  may  have  left  his  post  of 
duty  thus  early,  but  it  encumbers  the  supposi- 
tion with  a  strong  improbability.  Conybeare 
and  Howson  admit  the  force  of  this  objection. 
The  Roman  discipline,  says  IMeyer,  would  have 
given  the  procurator  no  claim  to  the  service  of 
such  an  officer. 

2.  A  ship,  or  a  vessel,  of  Adramyttinm, 
which  was  a  seaport  of  Mysia,  on  the  eastern 
shore  of  the  .Egean  Sea,  opposite  to  Lesbos.  It 
was  on  a  bay  of  the  same  name,  and  was  then 
a  flourishing  city.  Pliny  speaks  of  it  as  one  of 
the  most  considerable  towns  in  that  vicinity. 
No  antiquities  have  been  found  here  except'a 
few  coins.— Some  critics  prefer  which  {i.  e.  the 
vessel)  ivnx  about  to  sail  to  the  common  menning 
to  sail  (Grsb.,  Mey.,  Tsch.),  though  it  is  doubt- 
ful whether  the  latter  should  be  relinquished 
(De  Wet.).  [Besides  the  critical  editors  men- 
tioned by  Dr.  Hackett,  we  must  now  add  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort,  and  the  Anglo-Am.  Revisers, 
as  accepting  the  former  reading— viz.  tvhich  was 
about  to  sail,  etc.  It  is  supported  by  the  best  MSS. 
—e.  g.  X  A  B.— A.  H.]— To  sail  the  places 
along  (the  coast  of)  Asia— ;.  e.  touch  at  them 
here  and  there  on  the  way  to  their  port.  This 
intransitive  verb  may  govern  an  accusative,  after 


the  analogy  of  to  go  a  way  (7rop«ue(rt»at  bhov)  and 
the  like.     (K.  279.  R.  5.    See  Krug.,  Gr.,  ^  40. 
6.  3.)     Some  regard  places  as  the  place  whither 
(Win.,   De  Wet.),  which   confounds   the  inci- 
dental delays  with  the  end  of  the  Vfiyage.    A 
few  copies  [but  these  the  oldest  and  best.— 
A.  H.]  have  unto  (ei?)  after  to  sail  (itKilv),  which 
was  inserted,  no  doubt,  to  render  the  construc- 
tion easier.     As  Mjt^  was  one  of  the  places 
where  the  ship  .stopped,  Asia  here  may  denote 
Asia  Minor.     Luke's  prevalent  use  of  the  term 
restricts  it  to  the  western  countries  washed  by 
the  .'Egean.— It  would  appear  that  they  em- 
barked in  this  Adramyttian  ship  because  they 
had  no  opportunity  at  this  time  to  sail  directly 
from  Cffisarea  to  Italy.     "The  vessel  was  evi- 
dently bound  for  her  own  port,  and  her  course 
from  Cicsarea  thither  necessarily  led  her  close 
past  the  principal  seaports  of  Asia.     Now,  this 
is  also  the  course  which  a  ship  would  take  in 
making  a  voyage  from  Syria  to  Italy;   they 
would,   therefore,   be  so  far  on   their  voyage 
when  they  reached  the  coast  of  Asia,  and  in 
the  great  commercial  marts  on  that  coast  they 
could  not  foil  to  find  an  opportunity  for  pro- 
ceeding to  their  ulterior  destination." '     The 
opportunity    which  they  expected    presented 
itself  at  Myra  (v.«).  — Aristarchns.      This  is 
the  Aristarchns  named  in  19  :  29 ;    20  :  4.     Our 
English  translators  speak  of  him,  very  strange- 
ly; as  "  one  Aristarchus,"  as  if  he  were  otherwise 
unknown.   That  he  accompanied  Paul  to  Rome 
appears  also  from  Philem.  24 ;  Col.  4 :  10,  which 
Epistles  tiie  apostle  wrote  while  in  that  city.   In 
the  latter  pjissage  he  terms  Aristarchus  fcllotv- 
prisoner,  which,  if  taken  literally,  would  lead 
us  to  suppose  that  he  too  had  been  ajiprehended 
and  was  now  sent  as  a  prisoner  to  Rome.     But 
in  Philem.  24  he  is  called  merely  fellow-laborer, 
and  hence  it  is  more  probable  that  he  went  with 
the  apostle  of  his  own  accord,  and  that  he  re- 
ceived the  other  appellation  merely  as  a  com- 
mendatory one,  because  by  such  devotion  to 
him  he  had  thus  made  Paul's  captivity  as  it 


'^fi'^^Tu""  •^^'■/'"■'•'''•^'  «/  ''^-  P""''  etc.,  by  .Tames  Smith,  Esq.,  of  Jordanhill,  F.  R.  S.,  etc.  (London  18-13 
and  is.,f,.i  I  have  availed  myself  freely  of  the  illustrations  of  this  valuable  treatise  in  the  commentary  on 
this  chapter  and  the  next.  No  work  has  appeared  for  a  long  time  that  has  thrown  so  much  light  upon  "anv 
equal  portion  of  the  .«criptures.  The  author  is  entirely  justified  in  expressing  his  belief  that  the  searching 
examinatim,  to  which  he  has  subjected  the  narrative  has  furnished  a  new  and  distinct  argument  for  establish- 
\"Ll  r'l  '7!'"^?  ^  *'?\'^^^*-  "  "'""'^  "<^'=»*'««  ««o  "'"th  repetition  to  quote  this  work  in  a  formal  manner. 
1  am  indebted  to  Mr.  ^mith  f  .r  nearly  all  the  quotations  from  English  .travellers,  aud  for  most  of  the  explana. 
tions  which  involve  a  knowledge  of  nautical  matters. 


292 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  xxvn. 


3  And  the  next  day  we  touched  at  Sidon.  And  Julius 
"courteously  entreated  Paul,  and  gave  tiiiii  liberty  to  go 
unto  his  friends  to  refresh  himself. 

4  And  when  we  had  launched  from  theTice,  we 
sailed  under  Cyprus,  because  the  winds  were  con- 
trary. 


3  us.    And  the  next  day  we  touched  at  Sidon :  and 
Julius  treated  I'aul  kindly,  and  gave  him  leave  to 

4  go  unto  his  friends  and  'refresh  himself.    And  put- 
ting to  sea  from  theuce,  we  sailed  under  the  lee  of 


o  ch.  24  :  23  ;  28  :  16. 1  Gr. 


were  his  own.  This  is  the  general  opinion  of 
critics.  We  have  every  reason  to  suppose  that 
Luke  also  went  as  the  voluntary  companion  of 
the  apostle. 

3.  We  landed  at  Sidon,  the  modern  Saida. 
This  city  had  anciently  one  of  the  finest  harbors 
in  the  East,  and  was  celebrated  at  this  time  for 
its  wealth  and  commerce.  It  was  tlie  rival  of 
Tyre.  (See  21  :  3.)  The  vessel  stopped  liere, 
perhaps,  for  purposes  of  trade.  They  must  have 
sailed  quite  near  to  the  shore,  and  tlie  views  on 
land  which  passed  under  their  notice  were — 
first,  the  mountains  of  Samaria  in  the  back- 
ground ;  then  the  bold  front  of  Carmel ;  the 
city  of  Ptolemais,  with  the  adjacent  plain  of 
Esdraelon  ;  the  hills  about  Nazareth  ;  ^  and  per- 
haps the  heads  of  Gilboa  and  Tabor,  the  white 
cliffs  of  Cape  Blanco  or  Eas  el-Abiad,  Tyre  with 
its  crowded  port,  and  the  southern  ridges  of 
Lebanon. — Saida  is  now  the  seat  of  a  flourish- 
ing mission  from  this  country,  with  an  outpost 
at  Hasbeiya,  near  the  foot  of  Mount  Hermon. 
— The  distance  from  Csesarea  to  Sidon  was  sixty- 
seven  geographical  miles.  As  they  performed 
the  voyage  in  a  single  day,  they  must  have  had 
a  favorable  wind.  The  prevailing  winds  now 
in  that  part  of  the  Mediterranean,  at  the  period 
of  the  year  then  arrived,  are  the  westerly ;  ^  and 
such  a  wind  would  have  served  their  purpose. 
The  coast-line  between  the  two  places  bears 
north-north-east.  The  season  of  the  year  at 
which  Paul  commenced  the  voyage  is  known 
from  V.  9.  It  must  have  been  near  the  close  of 
summer  or  early  in  September. — Courteously 
entreated.  It  is  interesting  to  observe  that 
the  centurion  manifested  the  same  friendly  dis- 
position toward  the  apostle  throughout  the  voy- 
age. (See  V.  43;  28:16.)  It  is  not  impossible 
that  he  had  been  present  on  some  of  the  occa- 
sions wlien  Paul  defended  himself  before  his 


had  been  led  to  feel  a  personal  interest  in  liis 
character  and  fortunes. — His  friends,  or  the 

friends,  believers,  in  that  place.  Sidon  was  a 
j  Phoenician  city ;  and,  as  we  learn  from  11  :  19, 
the  gospel  had  been  preached  in  Phoenicia  at  an 
early  jjeriod.  (See  on  21  :  4.)  The  narrative 
presupposes  that  Paul  had  informed  the  cen- 
turion that  there  were  Christians  here. — (Tioptv- 
^evra  agrees  with  the  suppressed  subject  of 
Tyx^lv.  Comp.  26  :  20.  K.  ^  307.  R.  2.  It  is 
corrected  in  some  manuscripts  to  wopev&evn, 
agreeing  with  avT<a,  implied  after  eneTpe^l/e.) 

4.  We  sailed  under  Cyprus  because  the 
winds  were  contrary.  It  is  evident  from  the 
next  verse  that  they  left  tliis  island  on  the  left 
hand  and  passed  to  the  north  of  it,  instead  of 
going  to  the  south,  which  would  have  been 
their  direct  course  in  proceeding  from  Sidon  to 
Proconsular  Asia.  The  reason  assigned  for  this 
is  that  the  wiud.-i  were  adverse  to  them.  Such 
would  have  been  the  effect  of  the  westerly 
winds,  wliich,  as  before  stated,  prevail  on  that 
coast  at  this  season,  and  wliich  had  favored 
their  progress  hitherto.  It  may  be  su]iposed, 
therefore,  that,  these  winds  still  continuing, 
they  kept  on  their,  northern  course  after  leav- 
ing Sidon,  instead  of  turning  toward  the  west 
or  north-west,  as  they  would  have  done  under 
favorable  circumstances.  It  is  entirely  consist- 
ent with  this  view  that  they  are  said  to  have 
sailed  under  Oyptiis,  if  we  adopt  the  meaning  of 
this  expression  which  some  of  the  ablest  au- 
thorities attach  to  it.  Wetstein  has  statofl  what 
appears  to  be  the  true  explanation,  as  follows  : 
"Ubi  navis  vento  contrario  cogitur  a  recto 
cursu  decedere,  ita  ut  tunc  insula  sit  inter- 
posita  inter  ventum  et  navem,  dicitur  ferri 
infra  insulam  "  ["  Wlien  a  ship  is  forced  by  a 
contrary  wind  to  depart  from  its  proper  course, 
so  that  an  island  may  then  be  inteqiosed  between 


judges  (see  24  :  1 ;  25  :  23),  and  that  he  was  not    the  wind  and  the  ship,  it  is  said  to  be  carried  M?irfcr 
only  convinced  of  his  prisoner's  innocence,  but  |  (infra)  the  island." — A.  H.].    {Nov.  Test.,  ii.  p. 

1  From  Neby  Ismail,  on  the  hill  behind  Nazareth,  I  could  see  distinctly  Mount  Carmel,  with  its  foot  running 
out  into  the  .sea,  the  entire  sweep  of  the  bay  from  Carmel  to  Akka,  the  plain  of  Akka  and  the  town  itself,  with 
glimpses  of  the  Mediterranean  at  other  points  up  and  down  the  coast  between  the  opening  hills.  It  is  not  cer- 
tain that  Tabor  can  be  made  out  at  sea,  though  the  sea  can  be  distinguished  as  a  blue  line  along  the  edge  of  the 
horizon  from  the  summit  of  Tabor. 

2  An  English  naval  otBcer,  at  sea  near  Alexandria  under  date  of  July  4,  179S,  writes  thus:  "The  wind  con- 
tinues to  the  westward.  I  am  sorry  to  find  it  almost  as  prevailing  as  the  trade-winds."  Again,  on  the  19th  of 
the  next  month,  he  says :  "  We  have  just  gained  sight  of  Cyprus,  nearly  the  track  we  followed  six  weeks  ago,  so 
invariably  do  the  westerly  winds  prevail  at  this  season." 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


293 


5  And  when  we  had  sailed  over  the  sea  of  Cilicia  and 
Paniphylia,  we  came  to  -Myra,  (i  ciii/  of  I>ytia. 

i")  And  there  the  eeuturion  found  a  ship  of  Alexan- 
dria sailing  into  Italy  ;  and  he  put  us  therein. 


5  Cyprus,  because  the  winds  were  contrary.  And 
when  we  had  sailed  across  the  sea  which  is  olf 
Cilicia  and   Paniphylia,   we  came   to   Myra,  a   <i'y 

6 of  Lycia.  And  there  the  centurion  found  a  ship 
of   Alexandria   sailing   for   Italy ;    and    he   put   us 


637).  According  to  this  opinion,  irrd  (  =  infra) 
in  the  vorh  affirms  nicrcly  tliat  the  ship  was  on 
tiiat  side  of  tiie  island  from  which  the  wind  was 
hlowing — i.  e.  to  use  a  sea  phrase,  on  the  lee- 
side.  It  decides  nothing  of  itself  with  respect 
to  their  vicinity  to  the  island,  though,  from  the 
nature  of  the  case,  it  would  ntjt  be  natural  to 
Si)eak  of  sailing  under  a  land,  or  being  on  the  lee 
of  it,  unless  the  land  was  somewhere  near, 
rather  than  remote.  In  this  instance  they 
passed  within  sight  of  Cyprus,  since  that  isl- 
and was  visible  from  the  Syrian  coast.  (See 
the  note  on  13  :  4.)  Many  commentators,  on 
the  other  hand,  rendered  the  expression  ive 
sdiled  near  Ci/prns — as  it  were,  under  its  project- 
ing shore.  In  this  case  they  must  have  had  a 
different  wind  from  that  supposed  above,  in 
order  to  enable  them  to  cross  from  the  coast 
of  Palestine  to  that  of  Cyprus;  but,  having 
gained  that  position,  they  must  then  have 
gone  around  to  the  north  of  that  island,  in 
accordance  precisely  with  the  other  represen- 
tation. 

5.  The  sea  of,  or  better  the  sea  along, 
Cilicia  and  Pamphylia— /.  e.  the  coast  of 
those  countries.  The  Cilician  Sea  extended  so 
far  south  as  to  include  even  Cyprus.  That  pass 
the  Greeks  called  also  Aidon  Ciliciiim.^  The 
Pamphylian  Sea  lay  directly  west  of  the  Ci- 
lician. Luke  says  nothing  of  any  delay  in 
these  seas,  and  the  presumption  is  that  the 
voyage  here  was  a  prosperous  one.  This 
agrees  perfectly  with  what  would  be  expected 
under  that  coast  at  that  season  of  the  year. 
Instead  of  the  westerly  winds  which  had  been 
opposed  to  them  since  their  departure  from 
Sidon,  they  would  be  favored  now  by  a  land- 
breeze^  which  prevails  there  during  the  sum- 
mer months,  as  well  as  by  a  current  which  con- 


stantly runs  to  the  westward  along  the  coast 
of  Asia  Minor.^  Their  object  in  standing  so 
far  to  the  nortii  was  no  doubt  to  take  advantage 
of  these  circumstances,  which  were  well  known 
to  ancient  mariners. — Myra  ...  of  Lycia. 
Mi/rn  was  in  the  the  south  Lycia,  two  or  three 
miles  from  the  coast  (Forbg.,  Ilandb.,  ii.  p.  25(3). 
The  vicinity  abounds  still  in  magnificent  ruins, 
though  some  of  them,  especially  the  rock- 
tombs,  denote  a  later  age  tlian  that  of  the 
apostle.*  The  ancient  port  of  Myra  was  An- 
driaca,  which  was  identified  l)y  Caittain  Beau- 
fort at  the  bay  of  Andraki,  "  where  the  boats 
trading  with  the  district  still  anchor,  or  find 
shelter  in  a  deep  river  opening  into  it." 

6-12.  INCIDENTS  OF  THE  VOYAGE 
FROM  MYRA  TO  CRETE. 

6.  An  Alexandrian  ship  about  sailing. 
The  participle  describes  a  proximati:  future,  as 
in  21  :  2,  3,  etc.  This  ship  was  bound  directly 
for  Italy,  having  a  cargo  of  wheat,  as  we  learn 
from  V.  38.  (See  the  note  there.)  Egypt  at 
this  time,  it  is  well  known,  was  one  of  the 
granaries  of  Rome,  and  the  vessels  employe<i 
for  the  transportation  of  corn  from  that  coini- 
try  were  equal  in  size  to  the  largest  merchant- 
vessels  of  modern  times.  Hence  tliis  ship  was 
able  to  accommodate  the  centurion  and  his  nu- 
merous party,  in  addition  to  its  own  crew  and 
lading.  Josephus  states  {Life,  ?  3)  tiiat  the  ship 
in  whicli  he  was  wrecked  in  liis  voyage  to  Italy 
contained  six  hundred  persons.  Myra  was  al- 
most due  north  from  Alexandria,  and  it  is  not 
improbable  that  the  same  westerly  winds  which 
forced  the  Adramyttian  ship  to  the  cast  of  Cy- 
prus drove  the  Alexandrian  ship  to  Myra.  The 
usual  course  from  Alexandria  to  Italy  was  by 
the  south  of  Crete;  but  when  this  was  imprac- 
ticable, vessels  sailing  from  that  port  were  ac- 


1  Ilotrniann's  Griechenlnnd  und  die  Griechen,  vol.  ii.  p.  1385. 

2  >r.  de  Pages,  a  French  navigator,  who  was  making  a  voyage  from  Syria  to  Marseilles,  took  the  same  course, 
for  which  he  assigns  also  the  reason  which  influenced,  prohably,  the  commander  of  Pauls  shij).  "The  winds 
from  the  west,"  he  says—"  and  conseiiuenily  contrary— which  i)revail  in  these  places  in  the  summer  forced  us 
to  run  to  the  north.  We  made  for  tile  coast  of  Caraniania  (Cilicia),  in  order  to  meet  the  northerly  winds,  and 
which  we  found  accordingly." 

3  "  From  Syria  to  ihe  .\rchipelago,  there  is  a  constant  current  to  the  westward"  (Peauforfs  Description  of  the 
South  ChaM  of  Asia  Minor,  \i.:Vi).  Pocock  found  this  current  running  so  strong  between  Rhodes  and  the  conti- 
nent that  it  broke  into  the  cabin  windows  even  in  calm  weather  (Descriplion  of  iIik  East,  vol.  ii.  p.  2.'i(>  . 

♦"The  village  of  Pembra  the  Turkish  name  of  the  modern  Myra)  occupies  a  small  part  of  the  site  of  the 
ancient  city  of  Myra.  The  acropolis  crowns  the  bold  precipice  above.  We  commenced  the  ascent  to  the  acrop- 
olis, at  first  t'xceediiigly  difficult  until  we  found  an  ancient  road  cut  out  of  the  rock,  with  steps  lea<ling  tn  the 
summit.  The  walls  of  the  acropolis  are  entirely  built  of  small  stones  with  mortar.  We  saw  no  remains  of  any 
nioresubstantially  or  solidly  built  structures;  but  it  is  evidently  the  bill  alluded  to  by  Strabo,  upon  which 'Myra 
is  said  to  have  been  situated'"  (Spratt  and  Forbes,  vol.  i.  p.  13'2). 


294 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  xxvir. 


7  And  when  we  had  sailed  slowly  many  days,  and  |    7  therein.     And  when  we  had  sailed  slowly  many 


scarce  were  come  over  against  Cuidus,  the  wind  not 
suffering  us,  wc  sailed  under  Crete,  over  against  Sal 
mone ; 


days,  and  were  come  with  difficulty  over  against 
Cnidus,  the  wind  not  ifurther  suffering  us,  we  sailed 


1  Or,  suffering  us  to  get  there 


customed  to  stand  to  the  north  till  they  reached 
the  coast  of  Asia  Minor,  and  then  proceed  to 
Italy  through  the  southern  part  of  the  yEgean. 
(See  the  proofs  of  this  statement  in  Wetstein.) 
The  Alexandrian  ship  was  not,  therefore,  out 
of  her  course  at  Myra,  even  if  she  had  no  call 
to  touch  there  for  the  purposes  of  commerce. 
It  may  be  added  that  "the  land-breeze  on  the 
Cilician  coast  ajJi^ears  to  be  quite  local,  and 
consequently  might  enable  Paul's  ship  to  reach 
Myra,  although  the  prevalent  wind  did  not  ad- 
mit of  the  ships  in  that  harbor  fjroceeding  on 
their  voyage." — This  vessel  must  have  reached 
Myra  in  August  or  early  in  September,  accord- 
ing to  V.  9,  below.  That  an  Alexandrian  wheat 
ship  now  should  have  been  here,  just  at  this 
time,  suggests  a  coincidence  which  may  be 
worth  pointing  out.  At  the  present  day  the 
active  shipping  season  at  Alexandria  com- 
mences about  the  1st  of  August.  The  rise  of 
the  Nile  is  then  so  far  advanced  that  the  pro- 
duce of  the  interior  can  be  brought  to  that 
city,  where  it  is  shipped  at  once  and  sent  to 
different  parts  of  Europe.  At  the  beginning 
of  August  in  1852,  as  I  saw  it  statet^l  in  the  cir- 
cular of  a  conmiercial  house  at  Alexandria, 
there  were  twelve  vessels  then  taking  on  board 
grain  cargoes,  just  received  from  Upper  Egypt. 
Thus  it  appears  that  the  Alexandrian  ship  men- 
tioned by  Luke  may  have  left  Egypt  not  only 
after  the  grain  harvest  of  the  year  had  been  gath- 
ered (it  is  ripe  at  theend  of  March),  but  just  at  tlie 
time  when  cargoes,  or  the  earliest  cargoes  of  that 
kind,  could  Ije  obtained  there ;  and,  further,  tliat 
the  ship  would  have  had,  after  this,  just  about  the 
time  requisite  for  reaching  Myra  when  Paul's 
ship  arrived  at  the  same  place. — He  put  us  on 
board  of  it  (eyepi/Saaei/,  etc.,  avoxnautica).  It  will 
be  noticed  that  Luke  emjiloys  such  terms  with 
great  frequency  and  with  singular  precision. 
He  uses,  for  example,  not  less  than  thirteen 
different  verbs  which  agree  in  this — that  they 
mark  in  some  way  the  progression  of  the  ship, 
but  which  differ  inasmuch  as  they  indicate  its 
distance  from  the  land,  rate  of  movement,  di- 
rection of  the  wind,  or  some  such  circumstance. 
With  the  exception  of  three  of  them,  they  are 
all  nautical  expressions. 


7.  And  when  Ave  had  sailed  slowly 
many  days.  The  distance  from  Myra  to 
Cnidus  is  not  more  than  a  hundred  and  thirty 
geographical  miles.  They  occupied,  therefore, 
"  many  days  "  in  gomg  a  distance  which  with 
a  decidedly  fair  wind  they  could  have  gone  in 
a  single  day.  We  must  conclude  from  this 
that  they  were  retarded  b^'  an  unfavorable 
wind.  Such  a  wind  would  have  been  one  from 
the  north-west,  and  it  is  precisely  such  a  wind, 
as  we  learn  from  the  Sailing  Directions  for  the 
Mediterranean^  that  prevails  in  that  i)art  of  the 
Archipelago  during  the  summer  months.  Ac- 
cording to  Pliny,  it  begins  in  August  and  blows 
for  forty  days.  Sailing-vessels  almost  invari- 
ably experience  more  or  less  delay  in  proceed- 
ing to  the  west  in  this  jiart  of  the  Mediterra- 
nean at  that  season  of  the  year.  But  with 
north-west  winds,  says  Mr.  Smith,  the  ship 
could  work  up  from  Myra  to  Cnidus,  because, 
until  she  reached  that  point,  she  had  the  ad- 
vantage of  a  weather  shore,  under  the  lee  of 
which  she  would  have  smooth  water,  and,  as 
formerly  mentioned,  a  westerly  current;  but  it 
would  be  slowly  and  with  difficulty.  Scarce 
=  with  difficulty  refers,  evidently,  to  this  la- 
borious progress,  and  not  (E.  V.)  to  the  fact 
of  their  having  advanced  barely  so  far. — 
Cnidus.  Cnidus  was  the  name  both  of  a 
peninsula  on  the  Carian  coast,  between  Cos  on 
the  north  and  Rhodes  on  the  south,  and  of  a 
town  on  the  Triopian  promontory  whidi 
formed  the  end  of  this  peninsula.  It  is  the 
town  that  is  intended  here.  It  was  situated 
partly  on  the  mainland  and  partly  on  an  island, 
with  which  it  was  connected  by  a  causeway, 
on  each  side  of  which  was  an  artificial  harbor 
(Forbg.,  Hand.,  ii.  p.  221).  "The  small  one," 
says  Captain  Beaufort,  "  has  still  a  narrow  en- 
trance between  high  piers,  and  was  evidently 
a  closed  basin  for  triremes.  The  southern  and 
largest  port  is  formed  by  two  transverse  moles ; 
these  noble  works  were  carried  into  the  sea  at 
the  depth  of  nearly  a  hundred  feet.  One  of 
them  is  almost  jierfect;  the  other,  which  is 
more  exposed  to  the  south-west  swell,  can  only 
be  seen  under  water."  i — The  wind  not  per- 
mitting us  unto  it — i.  e.  to  apprDach  Cnidus, 


1  Caramnnia ;  or,  A  Brief  Description  of  the.  South  Coast  of  Asia  Minor,  p.  ICi:  "Few  places  bear  more  incontest- 
able proofs  of  former  magnificence.  The  whole  area  of  the  city  is  one  promiscuous  mass  of  ruins,  among  which 
may  be  traced  streets  and  gateways,  porticos  and  theatres." 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


295 


8  And,  hardly  passing  it,  came  unto  a  place  which 
is  called  The  lair  havens;  nigh  whereiiuto  was  the  city 
of  I-isea. 

9  Now  when  niiieh  time  was  spent,  and  when  sailing 
was  uow  dangerous,  "because  the  last  was  now  already 
past,  I'aul  admonished  tliem. 


8  under  the  lee  of  Crete,  over  against  Saliuone ;  and 
with  ditticnity  coasting  along  it  we  came  unto  a  cer- 
tain place  called  i'air  ilaveus;  nigh  whereunlo  was 
the  city  of  Lasea. 

9  And  when  much  time  was  spent,  and  the  voyage 
was  now  dangerous,  because  the  I'ast  was  now  ai- 


a  Ler.  23  :  27,  : 


to  take  shelter  in  the  harbor  there,  which  would 
liave  been  their  llrst  preference.  They  U(loi)te(l, 
therefore,  the  only  otlier  alternative  which  was 
left  to  them.  The  word  rendered  to  permit 
(irpoo-toUi)  does  not  occur  in  the  classics.  In  this 
the  preposition  (irp<«)  cannot  well  mean  further, 
as  some  allege,  since  tliey  would  have  had  no 
motive  to  continue  the  voyage  in  that  direc- 
tion, even  if  tlie  weather  IkuI  not  opposed  it.' 
We  sailed  under  (/.  e.  to  the  leeward  of) 
Crete  against  Saimune,  a  promontory 
which  forms  the  e;istern  extremity  of  tJiat 
island  and  bears  still  the  same  name.  An  in- 
spection of  the  map  will  show  that  their  course 
hither  from  Cnitius  must  liave  been  nearly 
south.  The  wind  drove  them  in  this  direc- 
tion. It  has  been  said  that  they  avoided  the 
northern  side  of  Crete,  because  it  furnished  no 
good  ports ;  but  such  is  not  the  fact.  Soudra 
and  Longa  Spina  are  e.Ycellent  harbors  on  tliat 
side  of  the  island.  Having  passed  around 
Salmone,  they  would  find  a  north-west  wind 
as  mucli  opposed  to  them  in  navigating  to  the 
westward  ius  it  had  been  between  Myra  and 
Cnidus ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  they  would 
have  for  a  time  a  similar  advantage:  the  south 
side  of  Crete  is  a  weatlier  sliore,  and  with  a 
north-west  wind  they  could  advance  along  the 
coast  until  they  readied  that  part  of  it  whicii 
turns  decidedly  toward  the  north.  Here  they 
would  be  obliged  to  seek  a  harbor  and  wait 
until  tlie  wind  changed.  The  course  of  move- 
ment indic^tted  by  Luke  tallies  exactly  with 
these  conditions. 

8.  And  with  ditficulty  coasting  along  it 
— viz.  Crete,  not  Salmone,  since  the  former, 
thougli  not  so  near,  is  the  principal  word.  Be- 
sides, Salimme  v,'as  not  so  much  an  extended 
shore  as  a  single  point,  and,  at  all  events,  did 
not  extend  so  far  as  the  place  where  they 
stopped.  This  ]yarticiple  is  a  nautical  word. — 
Unto  a  certain  place  called  Fair  Ha- 
vens. No  ancient  writer  mentions  this  Itar- 
bor,  but  no  one  doubts  that  it  is  Identical  with 


tlie  place  known  still  under  the  same  name, 
on  the  south  of  Crete,  a  fow  miles  to  the  east 
of  Cape  Matiila.  This  harbor  consists  of  an 
oj)en  roadstead,  or  rather  two  roadsteacLs  con- 
tigiKjus  to  each  other,  which  may  account  for 
the  plural  designation.  It  is  adapted,  al.so,  by 
its  situation,  to  afford  the  shelter  in  north-west 
winds  which  the  anchorage  mentioned  by  Luke 
afforded  to  Paul's  vessel.  Nautical  authorities 
assure  us  that  this  place  is  the  farthest  point  to 
which  an  ancient  ship  could  have  atUiined  with 
north-westerly  winds,  because  here  the  land 
turns  suddenly  to  tlie  north. — Nigh  where- 
unto  =  near  to  which  was  the  city  Lasea. 
The  vicinity  of  tliis  i)lace  appears  to  be  men- 
tioned because  it  was  better  known  than  Fair 
Havens.  In  the  first  edition  I  wrote  that  all 
trace  of  Lasea  was  sup])(jsed  to  be  lost.  Since 
then  an  English  traveller  in  Crete  reports  that 
the  name  is  applied  by  the  natives  to  the  site 
of  an  ancient  town  on  the  coast,  about  five 
miles  east  of  Fair  Havens.  Two  white  pillars, 
masses  of  masonry,  and  other  ruins  occur  on 
the  spot."'*  Here  near  (t'yyu?)  governs  which 
(<S)  as  an  adverl).  Was  incorporates  the  notice 
with  the  history  without  excluding  the  present. 
(Comp.  17  :  21,  23.     K.  ?  250.  4.  a.) 

9.  Now  when  much  time,  or,  lit.,  now  a 
long  time  having  elapsed — (.  e.  since  the 
embarkation  at  Cajsarea.  The  expre^ssion  is  to 
be  taken  in  a  relative  .sense.  On  leaving  Pales- 
tine they  expected  to  reach  Italy  before  the  ar- 
rival of  the  stormy  season,  and  would  have 
accomplished  their  object  had  it  not  boon  for 
unforeseen  delays. — .\nd  when  the  sailing, 
etc.,  or  the  navigation,  being  now  unsafe 
— i.  e.  at  this  particular  ])oriod  of  the  year. 
(>rAo<k  is  a  later  Greek  form  for  nkov.  W.  iJ  S. 
2.  b;  S.  ?  22.  2.)— Because  also  the  fast 
was  now  past.  Also  adds  this  clause  to 
the  one  immediatelv  preceding,  in  order  to  fix 
more  ]>recisely  tiie  limits  of  the  already  there 
by  informing  tis  how  far  the  se^ison  was  ad- 
vanced.   (See  W.  ?  53.  3.  c.)— The  fast  denotes 


»  Mr.  Smith  supposes  that  the  winds  did  not  permit  their  proceedi"g  oti  their  course,  and  in  his  second  edition 
(p.  761  urges  against  me  the  authority  of  Admiral  Penrose  as  maintaining  the  same  view.  It  is  not  claimed  that 
the  Greek  word  is  at  all  decisive,  but  that  the  nautical  reason  demands  their  interpretation.  It  does  not  become 
me  to  urge  my  opinion  on  such  a  point  in  opposition  to  that  of  experienced  I'avigators.  One  would  say  as  a 
critic  that  7rpo<T«irTo?  in  such  proximity  to  Kara  rijv  Kvl&ov  would  have  natuially  the  same  local  direction. 

*  Mr.  Smith  inserts  an  interesting  account  of  this  discovery    p.  JO:)  in  his  edition  of  1S50. 


296 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIl. 


10  And  said  unto  them,  Sirs,  I  perceive  iliat  tiiis 
voyage  will  be  with  hurt  ai  d  much  damage,  not  only 
of  the  lading  and  ship,  but  also  ot  our  lives. 

11  Nevertlieless  the  centurion  believed  the  master 
and  the  owner  of  the  ship,  more  than  those  things 
which  wer>'  spoken  by  Paul. 

12  And  because  the  haveu  was  not  commodious  to 


10  ready  gone  by,  Paul  admonished  them,  and  said 
unto  them,  tirs,  I  perceive  that  the  voyage  will 
be   with   injury   and   much   loss,   not  only   of   the 

11  lading  and  the  ship,  but  also  of  our  lives.  Kut 
the  centurion  gave  more  heed  to  tlie  master  and 
to  the  owner  of  the  ship,  than  to  ti  ose  things  which 

12  were  spoken  by  I'aul.    And  because  the  haven  was 


the  fast  by  pre-eminence  ((car'  cfoxj/c),  which  the 
Jews  observed  on  the  great  day  of  expiation, 
which  fell  on  the  10th  of  the  month  Tisri, 
about  the  time  of  the  autumnal  equinox.  (See 
Lev.  16  :  29 ;  23  :  27.  Jahn's  ArchxoL,  I  357.) 
Philo  also  saj^s  that  no  prudent  man  thought 
of  putting  to  sea  after  this  season  of  the  year. 
The  Greeks  and  Romans  considered  the  period 
of  safe  navigation  as  closing  in  October  and 
recommencing  about  the  middle  of  March. 
Luke's  familiarity  with  the  Jewish  designa- 
tions of  time  rendered  it  entirely  natural  for 
him  to  describe  the  progress  Of  the  year  in  this 
manner.  It  was  not  on  account  of  the  storms, 
merely,  that  ancient  mariners  dreaded  so  nmch 
a  voyage  in  winter,  but  because  the  rains  pre- 
vailed then,  and  the  clouds  obscured  the  sun 
and  stars,  on  which  they  were  so  dependent  for 
the  direction  of  their  course.  (See  the  note  on 
V.  20.) — Admonished,  or  exhorted,  them — viz. 
to  remain  here  and  not  continue  the  voyage.  It 
is  not  stated  in  so  many  words  that  this  was  his 
object,  but  it  may  be  inferred  from  the  argu- 
ment which  he  employs,  and  from  the  repre- 
sentation in  the  next  two  verses,  that  tliey  re- 
newed the  voyage  in  opi^osition  to  his  advice. 
(See  also  v.  21.) 

10.  I  perceive,  have  reason  to  think.  This 
verb  expresses  a  judgment  which  he  had  formed 
in  view  of  what  they  had  already  experienced, 
as  well  as  the  probabilities  of  the  case,  looking 
at  the  future.  The  revelation  which  he  after- 
ward received  respecting  their  fate  he  announces 
in  very  different  terms.  (See  v.  23.)  He  may 
be  understood  as  declaring  his  own  personal 
conviction  that  if  they  now  ventured  to  sea 
again  the  ship  would  certainly  be  wrecked,  and 
that  among  so  many  some  of  them  at  least 
would  lose  their  lives.  None  lost  their  lives, 
in  fact,  and  hence  Paul  could  not  speak  as 
a  prophet  here.  The  apostles  were  not  infalli- 
ble, except  in  their  sphere  as  religious  teachers. 
— In  that  with  hurt,  etc.,  we  have  \'u\  the 
original]  a  union  of  two  different  modes  of 
expression.  The  sentence  begins  as  if  this 
voyage  will  be  was  to  follow,  but  on  reach- 
ing that  verl)  tlie  construction  changes  to  the 
infinitive  with  its  subject,  as  if  that  had  not 


preceded.  (See  W.  g  63.  2.  c.)  Such  variations 
are  so  common,  even  in  the  best  writers,  that 
they  are  hardly  to  be  reckoned  as  anacoluthic. — 
With  violence  (lit.  insolence — i.  e.  of  tlje 
whids  and  waves)  and  much  loss.  The  .sec- 
ond noun  states  an  eifect  of  the  first,  wliich  is 
applied  here  in  a  sort  of  poetic  way,  like  our 
"sport"  or  "riot"  of  the  elements.  Kinnoel 
quotes  keeping  off  the  heat  and  the  violence  from 
the  rains,  in  Josephus  (Antt.,  3. 6.  4),  as  showing 
this  sense.  Horace  has  the  same  idea  in  liis 
"ventis  debes  ludibrium"  (Od.,  1.  11.  14).  To 
render  the  words  injury  and  loss  does  violence 
to  the  first  of  them  and  makes  them  tautologi- 
cal. Some  have  relied  for  this  meaning  on 
Pindar  {Pi/th.,  i.  140) ;  but  the  poet  is  speaking, 
says  Professor  Vomel,'  not  of  a  shipwreck,  but 
a  sea-fight,  and  insolence  is  used  there  in  its 
strictest  sense.  Meyer  understands  it  of  the 
rashness,  the  presumption,  which  tliey  would 
evince  in  committing  themselves  again  to  the 
deep.  If  we  assume  that  meaning  here,  we  are 
to  retain  it  naturally  in  v.  21 ;  and  it  would  be 
there  a  term  of  reproach,  which  we  should  not 
expect  the  apostle  to  employ  in  such  an  ad- 
dress. 

11.  The  centurion.  In  regard  to  the  ter- 
mination, see  on  10  :  1. — The  master,  or  the 
steersman,  whose  authority  in  ancient  ships 
corresponded  very  nearly  with  that  of  the  cap- 
tain in  our  vessels. — The  owner,  to  whom  the 
sliip  belonged.  The  jiroprietor,  instead  of  cliar- 
tering  his  vessel  to  another,  fretjuently  went 
himself  in  her,  and  received  as  his  share  of  the 
profit  the  money  paid  for  carrjing  merchandise 
and  passengers.  The  owners  of  the  cargo  hired 
the  captain  and  tlie  mariners. — Those  things 
spoken  by  Paul  changes  the  object  of  the 
verb  (helieved)  from  that  of  a  person  to  a  thing. 
(Comp.  26  :  20.) 

12.  Not  commodious,  or  not  well  situ- 
ated, inconvenient.  The  harbor  deserved  its 
name,  undoubtedly  (see  v.  8),  for  niany  pur- 
poses, but  in  the  judgment  of  those  to  whose 
opinion  it  was  most  natural  that  the  centurion 
Tshould  defer  it  was  not  considered  a  desirable 
place  for  wintering  (wpos  7r<ip(ixetMa<r4aF).  The 
question  was  not  whether  they  sliould  attempt 


'  Qf  the  Gymnasium  at  Frankfort  on-the-Main. 
chapter  of  the  Acts,  with  some  critical  remarks. 


In  his  Programme  for  1850  he  inserts  a  translation  of  (hia 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


297 


winter  in,  the  more  part  advised  to  depart  thence  also, 
if  by  any  means  they  might  attain  to  I'henice.  ami  llicre 
to  winter;  which  iv  an  have.i  of  Crete,  and  lieth  toward 
the  south-west  and  north-west. 


not  commodious  to  winter  in,  the  more  part  advised 
to  put  to  sea  from  tlience,  if  by  any  means  they 
could  reach  I'hu'iiix,  and  winter  thei-f  :  u-hivh  i.i  a 
haven  of  Crete,  looking  i north-east  and  south-east. 


1  Gr.  down  the  south-west  wind  and  down  the  north-viest  wind. 


to  proceed  to  Italy  during  tlie  present  season, 
but  whether  they  should  remain  here  in  prefer- 
ence to  seeking  some  other  harbor  where  they 
might  hope  to  be  more  secure.     In  this  choice 
of  evils,  the  advice  of  Paul  was  that  they  should 
remain  here;  and  the  event  justified  his  dis- 
cernment.i — The  more  part,  or  the  major- 
ity.    Their  situation   had   become  so  critical 
that  a  general  consultation  was  held  as  to  what 
should  be  done. — Thence  also,  or  also  from 
there,  a-s  they  had  sailed  {)reviously  from  other 
jilaces.     (See  vv.  4,  6;   (Kd&fv   (Lelim.)   is  less 
correct.) — Unto   Phuenix,  which   must  have 
been  a  tc^wn  and  harbor  in  the  south  of  Crete, 
a  little  to  the  west  of  Fair  Havens.     (Comp.  on 
v.  13.)     The  palm  trees  in  that  region  are  sup- 
posed  to   have  given  occasion  to  the    name. 
Strabo  mentions  a  harbor  with  this  name  on 
the  south  of  Crete,  and   Ptolemy  mentions  a 
town   called   Phoeni.x,  with  a  port   which   he 
terms  Plicenicus.     On  the  contrary,  Stephanus 
Byzantinus  calls  the  town    Phtenicus,  which 
Hierocles,  again,  calls  Phocnice.     (See  Hoffm., 
Gn'acltcnland,  ii.  p.  1334.)     The  best  way  to  liar- 
nionize   these  notices  is  to  suppose  tliat  the 
different  names  were  at  times  applied  promis- 
cuously to  the  tfjwn   and   the  harbor.     It  is 
tuicertain  with  what  modern   port  we  are  to 
identify  the  ancient  Phoenix.     Anapolis,  Lutro 
(unless  the  places  differ  merely  as  town  and 
liarbor),    Sphakia,    Franco    Castello,    Phineka, 
liave  each  been  sujiposed  to  Ite  that  port. — If 
by  any  means  they  might   be  able,  etc.  ■ 
Those  who  advise  the  step  consider  it  perilous.  ' 
—A    harbor    looking    toward    Lips   and  j 
toward    Corns—/,  e.  tlie  points  from  wliich 
tiie  winds  so  called  blew;  viz.  the  south-west  , 
and  the  north-west.     The  intermediate  point  j 
between  these  winds  is  west,  so  that  the  harl)or 
would  have  faced  in  that  direction,  while  the 
opposite  shores  receded  from  each  other  toward 
tlie  south  and  north.     This  mode  of  employ-  i 
ing  the  names  of  the  winds  is  a  constant  usage  i 
in  the  ancient  writers  to  designate,  as  we  say,  , 


the  points  of  the  compass.     Such  is  tlie  general 
view  of  the  meaning  of  this  expression,  and 
there  can  be  no  doubt  of  its  correctness. — Mr. 
Smith  (p.  80)  maintains  that  the   Phoinix  of 
Luke  is  the  present  Lutro.     That  harbor,  how- 
ever, opens  to  the  cast.    To  reconcile  Luke's 
statement   with   this  circumstance,  he  under- 
stands toward  Lipn  and  toward  Vorus  to  mean 
accordmg  to  the  direction  in  which  those  winds 
blew,  and  not,  as  is  generally  supposed,  wlience 
they  blew.     "  Now  this  is  exactly  the  descrii> 
tion  of  Lutro,  which  looks  or  is  open  to  the 
cast;    but,   having  an   island   in   front  which 
shelters  it,  it  has  two  entrances— one  looking 
to  the  north-east,  which  is  Kara,  .upa,  and  the 
other  to  the  south-east,  Kara.  Xwpoi-."     But  it  is 
unsafe  to  give  up  the  common  interpretation 
for  the  sake  of  such  a  coincidence ;  it  rests  upon 
a  usage  of  the  Greek  too  well  established  to 
justify  such  a  departure  from  it.     This  mode 
of  explaining  toivard  Lips  (xara  Ai/3a)  involves,  I 
think,  two  incongruities:  first,  it  assigns  oppo- 
site senses  to  the  same  term — viz.  south-ivent  as 
the  name  of  a  wind,  and  north-eaat  as  the  name 
of  a  quarter  of  the  heavens ;  ami  secondly,  it 
destroys  the  force  of  looking,  which  implies, 
certainly,  that  the  wind  and   tlie  harbor  con- 
fronted each   other,  and  not  that  they   were 
turned  from  each  other.     Mr.  Smith   adduces 
according  to  T<vt2;e  and  wind  from  Herodotus  (4. 
110);  but  the  expression  is  not  parallel  as  re- 
gards either  the  preposition  or  the  noun.    The 
preposition  denotes  there  conformity  of  motion, 
and  not  of  situation  where  the  olyects  are  at 
rest,  and  wind  does  not  belong  to  the  class  of 
proper  names,  like  Li|«  and  Corns,  which  the 
Greeks  employed  in  sui'h  geographical  designa- 
tions.   "There  is  a  passage  in  Arrian,"  he  .says, 
"  still  more  apposite  to  this  point.     In  his  Peri- 
plus  of  the  Euxine,  he  tells  us  that,  when  navi- 
gating the  south  coast  of  that  sea  toward  the 
east,  he  observed  during  a  calm  a  cloud  sud- 
denly arise,  which  was  driven  before  the  east 
wind.     Here  there  can  be  no  mistake;    the 


'  Paul's  di.ssent  from  the  general  opinion  has  appeared  to  some  very  singular;  for  the  bay  at  Fair  Havens, 
open  to  nearly  one-half  of  the  compass,  was  ill  adapted,  it  was  thought,  to  furnish  a  permanent  shelter.  But 
recent  and  more  exact  observations  establi-h  the  interesting  fact  that  "Fair  Havens  is  so  well  protected  by 
islands  and  reefs  that,  though  nut  e(|ual  to  I.utro,  it  must  be  a  very  fair  winter  liarbor;  and  that,  considering 
the  suddenness,  the  frequency,  and  the  violence  with  which  gales  of  northerly  wind  .spring  up,  and  the 
certainly  that  if  such  a  pale  sprung  up  in  the  passage  from  Fair  Havens  to  I.utro "(Phu-nixi.  the  ship  must  be 
drive'i  off  to  sea,  the  prtulencr  of  the  advice  given  by  tlie  master  and  owner  was  extremely  questionable,  and 
that  the  advice  given  by  St.  Paul  may  possibly  be  sujiportcd  eveu  on  nautical  grounds"  tSmith,  p.  88,  1856). 


298 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIL 


13  And  when  the  south  wind  blew  softly,  supposing 
that  they  had  obtairied  Iheir  purpose,  loosing  thence, 
they  sailed  close  by  Crete. 

U  But  not  long  after  there  arose  against  it  a  tem- 
pestuous wiud,  called  Euroclydou. 


13  And  when  the  south  wind   blew  softly,  supposing 
that  they  hid  obtained  their  purpose,  they  weighed 

14  anchor  and  sailed  along  Crete,  close  in  shore.    But 
after  no  long  time  there  beat  down  from  it  a  tem- 


cloud  must  have  been  driven  to  the  west." 
But  to  translate  toward  the  east  {Kar  evpov)  in 
that  manner  assumes  the  point  in  dispute. 
The  context  presents  no  reason  why  we 
should  not  adopt  the  ordinary  sense  of  such 
phrases — viz.  toward  the  east;  i.  e.  tlie  cloud  ap- 
peared in  that  quarter.  In  tliis  expression, 
therefore,  Eurus  would  denote  the  point  from 
which  the  east  wind  blows,  and  not  whither.' 
[In  his  last  ed.  Meyer  refers  to  the  discussion 
of  Dr.  Hackett  and  adheres  to  his  view ;  but, 
as  will  be  noticed,  the  Revisers  appear  to  have 
been  convinced  that  the  view  of  Mr.  Smith  is 
correct. — A.  H.] 

13-16.  A  STORM  RAGES,  AND  DRIVES 
THE  VESSEL  TO  CLAUDE. 

13.  And  when,  etc.,  now  when  a  south 
wind  blew  moderately.  After  passing  Cape 
Matala,  the  extreme  southern  point  of  Crete, 
and  only  four  or  five  miles  to  the  west  of  Fair 
Havens,  the  coast  turns  suddenly  to  the  north  ; 
and  hence,  for  the  rest  of  the  way  up  to  Phce- 
nix,  a  south  wind  was  as  favorable  a  one  as 
they  could  desire.— Supposing  that,  etc.,  or 
thinking  to  have  gained  their  purpose, 
regarding  it  as  already  secured.     It  was  some- 


what less  than  forty  miles  from  Fair  HaA'ens 
to  Phoenix.  With  a  soitthern  breeze,  therefore, 
they  could  expect  to  reach  their  destination  in 
a  few  hours. — Loosing  thence,  more  correct- 
ly havimj  weighed — /.  e.  anchor. — They  coasted 
along  Crete  nearer^sc.  than  usnal ;  ?.  e.  quite 
near.  This  clause,  as  we  see  from  the  next 
verse,  describes  their  progress  immediately  af- 
ter their  anchorage  at  Fair  Havens.  It  applies, 
therefore,  to  the  first  few  miles  of  their  course. 
During  this  distance,  as  has  been  suggested  al- 
ready, the  coast  continues  to  stretch  toward  tlie 
west;  and  it  was  not  until  they  had  turned 
Cape  Matala  that  they  would  have  the  full 
benefit  of  the  southern  breeze  which  had 
sprung  up.  With  such  a  wind  they  would  be 
able  just  to  weather  that  point,  provided  they 
kept  near  to  the  shore.  We  have,  therefore,  a 
perfectly  natural  explanation  of  their  proceed- 
ing in  the  manner  that  Luke  has  stated. 

14.  Not  long  after,  strictly  after  not 
long,  shortly.  (Comp.  28  :  6.)  The  tempest, 
therefore,  came  upon  them  before  tliey  had  ad- 
vanced far  from  their  recent  anchorage.  They 
were  still  much  nearer  to  that  place  tlian  they 
were  to  Phcenix.     It  is  important  to  observe 


1  The  writer  published  some  remarks  on  Mr.  Smith's  explanation  of  kotA  Ai0o  Kai  Kara  Xiopov  in  the 
BiUiolhem  Sacra,  1850,  p.  751.  Mr.  Smith  has  had  the  kindness  to  address  to  me  a  letter,  stating  some  additional 
facts  ascertained  since  the  publication  of  his  work  on  T/ie  Voi/ar/e  ami  Sfii/nn-f^h  of  Pan/.  In  this  letter  he 
reaffirms  his  view  of  the  expression  referretl  to,  and  calls  my  attention  again  to  the  passage  in  Airian  as 
conclusive  in  support  of  his  position.  A  distinguished  Hellenist  (Professor  Felton  of  the  university  at 
Cambridge)  has  favored  me  with  the  following  remarks  on  that  passage:  "  It  is  true  that  the  cloud  of  which 
Arrian  speaks  was  borne  toward  the  west;  but  that  is  not  expressed  by  Kar  evpov,  but  must  be  inferred  from 
the  circumstances  of  the  case.  The  course  of  the  voyage  they  were  making  was  eastward  ;  after  a  calm,  during 
which  they  used  their  oars  alone,  'suddenly  a  cloud  springing  up  broke  out  nearly  east  of  us'  (atpyoi  ve<t>f\r) 
i-rravaaTiaa.  i^eppiyri  KaT  evpov  p.d\i<TTa\,  and  brought  upon  them  a  violent  wind.  The  wind,  of  course,  was  an 
easterly  wind,  because  it  made  their  further  progress  toward  the  east  slow  and  difficult.  But  the  navigator  in 
the  phrase  xar'  evpov  is  speaking  of  the  direction  in  which  he  saw  the  cloud,  not  in  which  the  cloud  ivas 
moving.  If  he  had  been  simply  describing  the  direction  in  which  the  cloud  was  moving,  as  Herodotus  is 
describing  the  motion  of  the  ship  (and  not  the  direction  in  which  the  ship  is  seen  from  another  point),  then 
KaT  evpov  would  mean  wi/h  the  Eiiriis  or  hffijre  the  Earns.  ...  If  a  person  is  floating  on  the  wind,  or  driven  by 
the  wind,  if  he  is  in  motion  according  to  the  wind,  then,  of  course,  his  direction  is  determined  by  that  of  the 
wind.  But  if  he  is  at  rest  and  looking  according  to  the  wind,  he  is  looking  where  the  wind  is  the  most 
prominent  object— that  is,  he  is  facing  the  wind,  as  Arrians  crew  were  facing  the  cloud  and  the  wind,  and  not 
turning  his  back  upon  it."  As  this  question  has  excited  some  interest,  it  may  be  well  to  mention  how  it  is 
viewed  in  works  published  since  the  preceding  note  was  written.  Humphry  ( IHot)  says  (p. 202)  that  Mr.  Snnth;s 
passages  are  not  quite  conclusive  as  to  3Ae7roi'TaicaT<l  Ai3a.  He  .supposes  Phwnix  to  be  the  modern  Phineka, 
which  opens  to  the  west,  and  thus  adopts  the  common  explanation  of  the  phrase.  Alford  (1852i  agrees  with 
Smith  that  (cara  Ai|3a  and  similar  combinations  denote  whither,  and  not  whence,  the  winds  blow,  but  intimates  ix 
purpose  to  fortify  his  ground  against  objections  in  a  future  edition.  Conybeare  and  Howson  (ii.  p.  4001  would 
admit  an  instance  of  that  usage  in  Jos.,  Anii.  15.  9.  G  (sip),  but  say  that  the  other  alleged  proofs  are  untenable 
or  ambiguous.  They  mediate  between  the  two  opinions  by  suggesting  that  the  point  of  view  (^Aeworrai  is  from 
the  sea,  and  not  the  land  ;  so  that  Kara  Mfia  would  have  its  usual  meaning  and  yet  the  harlmr  open  toward  the 
east,  like  Lutro.  AVordsworth  (p.  120)  has  a  copious  note  on  this  question.  He  reviews  the  arguments  on  both 
sides,  and  sums  up  with  the  result  that  we  should  "  not  abandon  the  ancient  interpretation,"  or,  at  all  events 
should  "suspend  our  decision  till  we  have  more  complete  topographical  details  for  forming  it." 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


299 


15  And   when  the  ship  was  caught,  and   could  not  '  lopcstuous   wind,    which    is    called    Euiaquilo:    and 
bear  up  iuto  the  wind,  we  let  her  drive.  I       when  the  ship  was  caught,  and  could  not  (ace  the 


this  fact,  because  it  shows  what  course  the  ship 
took  in  going  from  Crete  to  Claude. — There 
arose,  etc. — lit.  a  typhouic  wind  struck 
against  it ;  i.  c.  the  sliij). — Struck  may  im{)ly 
it.ulf,  or  bo  intransitive.  Luke  employs  it — lit. 
her — because  t  lie  mental  antecedent  is.s/i()>  (fem.), 
which  actually  occurs  in  v.  41,  though  his  ordi- 
nary word  is  vessel  (neut.).  It  would  be  quite 
accidental  which  of  the  terms  would  shape  the 
pronoun  at  this  moment,  as  they  were  both  so 
familiar.  (Sec  W.  §47.  5.  k.)  Against  (Kara) 
tukes  the  genitive,  because  the  wind  was  un- 
friendly, hostile,  as  in  the  Attic  phrase  to  smite 
the  head  (Bernh.,  Sjnt,,  p.  238).  Some  critics, 
as  Kuinoel,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  refer  it  to  Crete, 
and  render  drove  its  or  the  ship  against  it.  Sim- 
ilar is  the  Geneva  Version :  "  There  arose 
agaynste  Candie  a  stormye  wynd  out  of  the 
north-east."  But  how  can  we  understand  it 
in  this  way,  when  we  are  told  in  the  next  verse 
that  they  yielded  to  the  force  of  the  wind  and 
were  driven  by  it  toward  Claude,  which  is 
south-west  from  Fair  Havens  ?  We  must  dis- 
card that  view,  uidess  we  suppose  that  the 
wind  ill  the  course  of  a  few  minutes  blew 
from  precisely  opposite  quarters.  Luther  re- 
fers it  to  purpose  (v.  13) :  struck  against  it,  defeat- 
ed their  purpose.  Tyndale  lived  for  a  time  with 
the^erman  Reformer  at  Wittenberg,  and  took 
his  translation,  perhaps,  from  that  source; 
"  Anone  after  ther  arose  agaynste  their  pur- 
pose a  flawe  of  wynd  out  of  the  north-easte." 
The  Greek  expression  is  awkward  for  such  an 
idea,  and  is  unsupported  by  proper  examples. 
Some  recent  commentators  refer  it,  as  before,  to 
the  island,  but  vary  the  preposition :  struck 
down  from  it — viz.  Crete ;  i.  e.  from  its  moun- 
tains, its  lofty  shores  (Alf.,  Cony,  and  Hws., 
Hmph.,  Wdsth.).  The  preposition  admits  con- 
fessedly of  this  sense ;  but  does  the  verb  ?  Was 
it  used  of  winds,  unless  the  object  struck  was 
added  or  implied  after  it?  And  if  the  striking 
was  in  the  writer's  mind  liere  and  led  to  the 
choice  of  this  particular  verb,  how  can  kot'  aur^? 
(i.  e.  the  ship)  fail  to  be  this  object?  It  is  ques- 
tionable whether  "to  strike  down,"  as  said  of 
a  wind,  and  "  to  blow,  come,  rush  down,"  are 
convertible  terms,  and,  unless  they  are  so,  arose 
in  :Matt.  8  :  24,  descended  in  Matt.  7  :  25,  and 
ariseth  (R.  V.)  in  Mark  4  :  37  do  not  bear  spe- 
cially  on  the  case.    In  the  Greek   Thesaurus 


(Paris  ed.,  ii.  p.  90)  it  is  said  of  the  verb 
(/SaAAeiv) :  "  It  is  uscd  in  the  sense  of  striking 
of  the  sun,  of  light,  of  a  voice,  of  any  sound 
whatsoever,  approaching  a  body."  It  occurs 
of  winds  in  11.,  23,  217,  but  with  the  accusative 
of  the  object  struck.^  Ty phonic  describes  the 
wind  with  reference  to  the  whirling  of  tlie 
clouds  occasioned  by  the  meeting  of  opposite 
currents  of  the  air.  Pliny  (2  :  48),  in  sjieaking 
of  sudden  blasts,  says  that  they  cause  a  vortex 
which  is  called  "  typhoon,"  and  Aulus  Gellius 
(19  :  1)  mentions  certain  figures  or  appearances 
of  the  clouds  in  violent  tempests  which  it  was 
customary  to  call  "typhoons."  This  term  is 
intended  to  give  us  an  idea  of  the  fury  of  the 
gale ;  and  its  name — EupoKvAwf,  as  the  word 
should  most  probably  be  written — denotes  the 
point  from  which  it  came ;  i.  e.  Euroaquilo,  as 
in  the  Vulgate,  a  north-cast  wind.  This  reading 
occurs  in  A  and  B,  which  are  two  of  the  oldest 
manuscripts,  and  in  some  other  authorities. 
It  is  approved  by  Grotius,  Mill,  Bcngel,  Bent- 
ley,  De  Wette,  and  others.  Laehmann  inserts  it 
in  his  edition  of  the  text  [as  also  Tsch.,  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort,  and  the  Anglo-Am.  Revisers. 
Tsch.  adduces  for  this  reading  X  A  B*  in  his 
8th  ed.— A.  H.].  This  word,  says  Green  (p.ll7), 
"  which  simply  Grecizes  EuroarpiiJo,  demands  the 
preference  among  the  various  shapes  of  the 
name."  The  internal  evidence  favors  that 
form  of  the  word.  A  north-east  storm  accounts 
most  perfectly  for  the  course  of  the  ship,  and 
for  the  means  employed  to  control  it,  men- 
tioned or  intimated  in  the  .sequel  of  tlio  narra- 
tive. (The  other  principal  readings  are  EOpo- 
Kkv&iav  (T.  R.,  Tsch.''),  compounded  of  tupo?  and 
K\v&mv,  Eurus  flacfus  crcifaits,  or,  as  De  Wette 
thinks  more  correct,  fliictus  Euro  excitafus;  and 
EiipvKXvSuiv,  from  ei'pv^  and  kM&iov,  broad  wave.) 
It  appears,  therefore,  that  the  gentle  soutliern 
breeze  with  which  they  started  changwl  sud- 
denly to  a  violent  north  or  north-east  wind. 
Such  a  sudden  change  is  a  very  common  oc- 
currence in  those  seas.  An  English  naval  of- 
ficer, in  his  Eemartt  on  the  Archipelago,  says  : 
"  It  is  always  safe  to  anchor  under  the  lee  of 
an  island  with  a  northern  wind,  as  it  dies  away 
gradually ;  but  it  would  be  extremely  danger- 
ous with  southerly  winds,  as  they  almost  inva- 
riably shift  to  a  violent  nortlierly  wind." 
15.  Being  seized,  caught  by  the  wind.— 


»  This  criticism  may  not  be  useless  if  it  should  serve  to  elicit  further  inquiry  before  discarding  the  common 
view.    :My  means  do  not  allow  nie  to  treat  the  subject  more  fully  at  present. 

[But  Tsch.  changed  his  opinion  and  adopted  EOpaKv\iav.    See  statement  in  brackets  above.— A.  H.] 


300 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIL 


Ifi  And  running  under  a  certain  island  which  is 
called  Clauda,  we  had  much  work  to  come  by  the 
boa  I : 

17  Which  wl>eu  they  had  taken  up,  they  used  helps, 
undergirdiiig  the  ship ;  and,  fearing  lest  they  should 


16  wind,  we  gave  way  io  it,  and  were  driven.  And 
running  under  the  lee  of  a  small  island  called 
ilauda,  we  were  able,  with  difficulty,  to  secure  the 

17  boat:  and  when  they  had  hoisted  it  up,  they  used 
helps,   uuder-girding    the  ship ;    and,  fearing  lest 


I  Mau;  anoient  authorities  read  Clauda. 


To  look  in  the  face,  withstand.  It  is  said 
tliat  the  ancients  often  painted  an  eye  on  each 
side  of  the  prow  of  their  ships.  It  may  not  be 
ea-sy  to  determine  wliether  the  personification 
implied  in  this  mode  of  spealving  arose  from 
tliat  practice,  or  whetlier  the  practice  arose  from 
the  ijersoniiicatiou. — Giving  up,  the  vessel  to 
the  wind.  Some  supply  ourselves  as  the  object 
of  the  participle,  in  anticipation  of  the  next 
verb.  The  idea  is  the  same  in  both  cases. — We 
were  borne,  not  hither  and  thither,  but  at 
the  mercy  of  the  wind,  the  direction  of  which 
we  know  from  the  next  verse. 

IG.  Running  under  a  certain  small  isl- 
and called  Claude.  Tliis  island  Ptolemy 
calls  Claudos.  It  bears  now  the  name  of  Gozzo. 
As  the  gale  commenced  blowing  soon  after  the 
departure  from  Fair  Havens,  the  ship,  in  order 
to  reach  Claude,  must  have  been  driven  to  the 
south-west.  Their  course,  had  tliey  been  near 
Phoeni.x  at  the  commencement  of  the  storm, 
would  have  been  due  south.  The  effect  which 
the  wind  produced  shows  what  the  direction  of 
the  wind  was;  it  must  liave  been  from  the 
north  or  north-oast,  which  agrees,  as  we  have 
seen,  with  the  probable  import  of  the  name 
which  Luke  has  employed  to  designate  the 
wind.  Running  under  implies,  first,  that 
they  went  before  the  wind  (see  on  16  :  11) ;  and 
secondly,  according  to  the  view  suggested  on 
V.  4,  that  they  passed  Claude,  so  as  to  have  the 
wind  between  them  and  that  island — that  is, 
since  the  direction  of  the  wind  has  been  already 
determined,  they  went  to  the  south-east  of  it 
instead  of  the  north.  That  they  approached 
near  to  the  island  at  the  same  time  may  be 
inferred  from  their  being  able  to  accomplish  the 
object  mentioned  in  the  next  clause.  Others  in- 
fer their  vicinity  to  the  island  from  the  preposi- 
tion, wliich  they  take  to  mean  under  the  coast ; 
but,  as  in  the  other  case,  they  suppose  that  this 
Wiis  the  southern  coast,  from  the  direction  in 
which  such  a  wind  must  liave  driven  the  ship. 
— We  had  much  work,  or  we  were  able 
with  difficulty,  to  secure  the  boat.  Luke 
includes  liimself,  perhaps  not  from  sympathy 
merely,  but  because  lie  took  pai't  in  this  labor. 
The  preservation  of  the  boat  was  important,  as 
affording  the  last  means  of  escape.  (See  v.  30.) 
They  may  have  begun  already  to  have  forebod- 
ings of  the  result.    Those  expert  in  maritime 


affairs  say  that  while  a  vessel  is  scudding  be- 
fore a  strong  gale  her  boat  cannot  be  taken  on 
board  or  lashed  to  the  side  of  the  vessel  (see  on 
v.  32)  without  extreme  danger.  Hence  it  is 
probable  that  wlien  on  tlie  southern  side  of 
Claude  they  were  sheltered  somewhat  against 
the  storm,  and  were  able  to  arrest  the  progress 
of  the  ship  sufficiently  to  enable  them  to  ac- 
complish this  object.  Yet  the  sea  even  here 
was  still  apparently  so  tempestuous  as  to  render 
this  a  difficult  operation.  It  may  have  added 
to  the  difficuUy  that  the  boat  having  been  towed 
more  than  twenty  miles  through  a  raging  sea 
could  hardly  fail  to  have  been  filled  with  water. 
They  had  omitted  this  precaution  at  the  outset, 
because  the  weather  was  mild  and  they  had  ex- 
pected to  be  at  sea  but  a  few  hours.  It  will  be 
observed  that  Luke  has  not  stated  why  they 
found  it  so  difficult  to  secure  the  boat.  We  are 
left  to  conjecture  the  reasons. 

17-20.  THEY  UNDERGIRD  AND  LIGHT- 
EN THE  SHIP,  BUT  DESPAIR  OF  SAFETY. 

17.  They  used  helps — i.  e.  ropes,  cliains, 
and  the  like — for  the  purpose  specified  in  the 
next  clause;  viz.  that  of  undergirding  dthe 
ship.  Most  scholars  take  this  view  of  the 
meaning,  and  it  is  doubtless  the  correct  one. 
De  Wette  would  extend  helps  so  as  to  include 
other  similar  expedients :  they  itsed  heljjs,  of 
which  undergirding  the  ship  was  an  example. 
Helps  cannot  denote  the  services  of  the  pas- 
sengers, as  some  have  said ;  for  we  have  no 
such  limiting  term  annexed  as  that  sense  of 
the  expression  would  require.  The  "  helps " 
here  are  the  hypozomata  (uirofco/aaTa),  which  He- 
sychius  defines  as  "  cables  binding  ships  round 
the  middle."  It  is  probable  that  ships  were  oc- 
casionally undergirded  with  planks ;  but  that 
could  only  be  done  in  the  harbor,  and  was  a  dif- 
ferent thing  from  performing  the  process  at  sea. 
But  how,  the  question  arises  next,  were  the 
cables  applied  so  as  to  accomplish  the  proposed 
object?  Falconer,  in  liis  Marine  Dictionary,  de-' 
scribes  the  mode  of  undergirding  ships,  as  prac- 
tised in  modern  navigation,  in  the  following 
terms :  "  To  frap  a  ship  (ceintrer  nn  vaissean)  is 
to  pass  four  or  five  turns  of  a  large  cable-laid 
rope  round  the  hull  or  frame  of  a  ship  to 
support  her  in  a  great  storm  or  otherwise, 
when  it  is  apprehended  that  she  is  not  strong 
enough  to  resist  the  violent  efforts  of  the  sea. 


Ch.  XXVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


301 


fall   into  the  quicksands,  strake    sail,  and    so  were  |       they  should  be  cast  upon  the  Syrtis,  they  lowered  the 
driven. 


This  expedient,  however,  is  rarely  put  in  prac- 
tice." In  ancient  times  it  was  not  uncommon 
to  resort  to  this  process.  The  larger  ships  on 
their  more  extended  voyages  carried  with  them 
hypozomata  or  rf)pes  for  undergirding,  so  as  to 
be  prepared  for  any  emergency  which  might 
require  them.  The  Attic  arsenals  kept  a  sup- 
ply of  them  always  on  hand  for  public  use. 
This  mode  of  strengthening  a  ship  at  sea, 
although  not  adopted  so  often  as  it  was  an- 
ciently, is  not  unknown  in  the  experience  of 
modern  navigators.  In  1815,  Mr.  Henry  Hart- 
ley was  employed  to  pilot  the  Russian  fleet  from 
England  to  the  Baltic.  One  of  the  ships  under 
his  escort,  the  Jupiter,  was  frapped  round  the 
middle  by  three  or  four  turns  of  a  steam-cable. 
Sir  George  Back,  on  his  return  from  his  Arctic 
voyage  in  1837,  was  forced,  in  consequence  of 
tlie  shattered  and  leaking  condition  of  his  ship, 
to  undergird  her.  The  Albion,  a  British  frigate, 
in  1846  encountered  a  hurricane  on  her  voyage 
from  India,  and  was  under  the  necessity  of 
frapping  her  hull  together  to  prevent  her  from 
sinking.  To  these  more  recent  instances  many 
others  of  an  earlier  date  might  be  added. i  The 
common  representation  in  regard  to  the  ancient 
mode  of  ajiplying  the  hypozomata  to  a  ship 
makes  it  ditferent  from  the  modern  usage. 
Boeckh's  view  is  the  one  followed  in  most  of 
the  recent  works.  According  to  his  investiga- 
tions, tlie  ropes,  instead  of  being  passed  under 
the  bottom  and  fastened  on  deck,  "ran  in  a 
horizontal  direction  around  the  ship  from  the 
stern  to  the  prow.  They  ran  round  the  vessel 
in  several  circles,  and  at  certain  distances  from 
one  another.  The  length  of  these  tormenta,  as 
they  are  called  in  Latin,  varied  accordingly  as 
they  ran  around  the  higher  or  lower  part  of 
the  ship,  the  latter  being  naturally  shorter  than 
the  former.  Their  number  varied  according  to 
the  size  of  Ihe  ship."  ^  Mr.  Smith,  in  his  Dis- 
sertation on  the  Ships  of  the  Ancients  (p.  173,  sq.), 
controverts  the  foregoing  opinion,  as  being 
founded  on  a  misapprehension  of  the  passages 
in  the  ancient  writers  which  have  been  sup- 
posed to  prove  it.      He  maintains    that    the 


cables,  instead  of  being  applied  lengthways, 
were  drawn  around  the  middle  at  right  angles 
to  the  ship,  and  not  parallel  to  it.*  The  other 
mode,  he  says,  "  must  have  been  a.s  impractica- 
ble as  it  would  have  been  unavailing  for  the 
purpose  of  strengthening  the  ship."  Luke 
states  a  fact  simply  in  relation  to  this  matter; 
he  does  not  describe  the  mode.  The  question, 
therefore,  is  one  of  archteological  interest 
merely;  it  does  not  affect  tiie  writer's  accuracy. 
— Lest  they  should  fall  into,  etc.,  lest 
they  should  be  stranded  upon  the  Syr- 
tis. The  verb  literally  means  to  fall  out — i.  e. 
from  the  sea  or  deep  water  upon  the  land  or 
rocks.  (Comp.  vv.  26,  29.)  Syrtis  Major  is  liere 
meant,  which  was  on  the  coast  of  Africa,  south- 
west from  Crete.  This  gulf  was  an  object  of 
great  dread  to  mariners,  on  account  of  its  dan- 
gerous shoals.  The  other  Syrtis  was  too  far  to 
the  west  to  have  been  the  one  to  which  they 
would  feel  exposed  in  their  jiresent  situation. 
Some  have  taken  Syrtis  to  denote  a  sand-bank 
near  Claude ;  but,  as  any  such  bank  there  must 
have  been  comparatively  unknown,  the  writer 
with  that  allusion  would  more  naturally  have 
left  out  the  article. — Strake  sail,  or  having 
lowered  the  sail.  The  word  rendered  sail 
(o-iceCos)  is  indefinite,  and  may  be  applied  to 
almost  any  of  the  ship's  appurtenances,  as 
sails,  masts,  anchors,  and  the  like.  Many  have 
supposed  it  to  refer  here  to  the  mast,  or,  if 
there  was  more  than  one  in  tliis  case,  to  tlie 
principal  mast ;  but  it  would  seem  to  put  that 
supposition  out  of  the  question  that,  accord- 
ing to  all  probability,  the  masts  of  the  larger 
sailing-ships  among  the  ancients  were  not 
movable,  like  those  of  the  smaller  vessels,  but 
were  fixed  in  their  position,  and  would  re- 
quire to  be  cut  awaj' — a  mode  of  removal 
which  the  accompanying  participle  shows 
could  not  have  been  adopted  in  the  present 
instance.  The  surprising  opinion  of  some, 
that  [the  part  here  referred  to]  is  the  anchor, 
is  contradicted  by  the  following  so  were 
driven.  Of  the  other  applications  of  the  word, 
the  only  one  which  the  circumstances  of  the 


1  Some  suppose  that  Horace  alludes  to  this  practice  in  0<l.,  1.  14.  6:  "Sine  funibus  Vix  durare  carinse  Possint 
iniperiosius  ^Equor."  I  was  once  explaining  this  passage  to  a  college  class  according  to  that  view,  when  one 
of  the  members  who  had  been  at  sea  stated  that  he  himself  had  assisted  iu  such  an  operation  on  board  a  vessel 
approaching  our  own  coast. 

2  This  is  quoted  from  the  Dictionary  of  Greek  and  Roman  Antiquities,  Art.  "Ships."  The  account  rests  on 
Boeckh's  authority.  The  writer  of  the  article  on  "  Navis  "  in  Pauly's  Real-Encyklopadie  der  classinclien  Alter- 
thmnstri.fsenschafl  follows  the  same  authority. 

'  The  mode  of  executing  this  raanwuvre,  as  I  am  informed,  or  at  least  one  mode,  is  to  sink  th3  ropes  over  the 
prow,  and  then  draw  theoi  toward  the  middle  of  the  ship,  fastening  the  euds  on  deck. 


302 


THE  ACTS. 


18  And  we  being  exceedinglj'  tossed  with  a  tempest, 
the  next  day  they  lighteued  the  ship; 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


18  gear,  and    so  were  driven.     And    as  we    labored 
exceedingly  with    the   storm,  the  next  day  they 


ship  at  this  juncture  naturally  suggest  is  that 
it  refers  to  the  sail.  It  is  not  certain  how  we 
are  to  take  the  article  here.  It  leads  us  to 
think  most  directly,  perhaps,  of  the  large, 
square  sail  which  was  attached  to  the  principal 
mast.  The  ancients  had  vessels  with  one,  two, 
and  three  masts. ^  The  would  then  jioint  out 
that  sail  by  way  of  eminence.  The  presump- 
tion is  that  if  the  ship  carried  other  sails,  as 
cannot  well  be  doubted,  they  had  taken  them 
down  before  this ;  and  now,  having  lowered 
the  only  one  which  they  had  continued  to  use, 
they  let  the  vessel  "scud  under  bare  poles." 
This  is  the  general  view  of  the  meaning.  It 
would  follow  from  this  that  the  wind  must 
have  changed  its  direction  before  they  were 
wrecked,  on  Melita;  for  some  thirteen  days 
elapsed  before  that  event,  during  which  the 
storm  continued  to  rage,  and  within  that  time, 
had  they  been  constantly  driven  before  a  north- 
east wind,  they  must  have  realized  their  fear  of 
being  stranded  on  the  African  coast.— But  an 
eastern  gale  in  the  Levant,  at  this  season  of  the 
year,  is  apt  to  be  lasting;  the  wind  maintains 
itself,  though  with  unequal  violence,  for  a  con- 
siderable time  in  the  same  quarter.  Profes- 
sor Newman  of  the  London  University  states 
the  following  fact^  in  his  own  experience :  "We 
sailed  from  Larnica,  in  Cyprus,  in  a  small  Ne- 
apolitan shij)  with  a  Turkish  crew  on  the  2d  of 
December,  1830.  We  were  bound  for  Latika, 
in  Syria,  the  course  almost  due  east,  but  were 
driven  back  and  forced  to  take  refuge  in  the 
port  of  Famagousta,  the  ancient  Salamis.  Here 
we  remained  wind-bound  for  days.  Owing  to 
our  frequent  remonstrances,  the  captain  sailed 
three  times,  but  was  always  driven  back,  and 
once  after  encountering  very  heavy  seas  and  no 
small  danger.  It  was  finally  the  1st  of  January, 
if  my  memory  does  not  deceive  me,  when  we 
reached  the  Syrian  coast."  It  was  probably 
such  a  gale  which  Paul's  ship  encountered— 
that  is,  a  series  of  gales  from  the  east,  but  not  a 
constant  hurricane ;  for  the  seamen  were  able 
to  anchor  and  to  let  down  their  boat,  and  a  part 
of  the  crew  to  attempt  to  escape  in  it  to  the 
shore.  If,  then,  we  assume  that  the  wind  blew 
from  the  same  point  during  the  continuance  of 
the  storm,  we  must  suppose  that  they  adopted 
some  precaution  against  being  driven  upon  the 
African  coast,  which  Luke  does  not  mention, 


although  his  narrative  may  imply  it.  The  only 
such  precaution,  according  to  the  opinion  of 
nautical  men,  which  they  could  have  adopted 
in  their  circumstances,  was  to  lie-to — i.  e.  turn 
the  head  of  the  vessel  as  near  to  the  wind  as 
possible,  and  at  the  same  time  keep  as  much 
sail  spread  as  they  could  carry  in  so  severe  a 
gale.  For  this  purpose  they  would  need  the 
Ijrincipal  sail ;  and  the  sail  lowered  is  most 
likely  to  have  been  the  sail  above  it — i.  e.  the 
topsail,  or  supparum,  as  the  Romans  termed  it. 
By  the  adoption  of  these  means  they  would 
avoid  the  shore  on  which  they  were  so  fearful 
of  being  cast,  and  drift  in  the  direction  of  the 
island  on  which  they  were  finally  wrecked. 
The,  according  to  this  sujiposition,  would  refer 
to  the  sail  as  definite  in  the  conceptions  of  the 
writer,  or  as  presumptively  well  known  to  the 
reader. — So  were  driven,  thus  (/.  e.  with  the 
ship  undergirded,  and  with  the  mainsail  low- 
ered, or,  it  may  be,  with  the  topsail  lowered  and 
the  stormsail  set)  they  were  borne  on  at  the 
mercy  of  the  elements.  Here  closes  the  account 
of  the  first  fearful  day. 

18.  And  we,  etc.,  now  we  being  vio- 
lently tempest-tossed. — On  the  follow- 
ing day — i.  e.  after  their  attempt  to  reach  the 
I)ort  of  Phoenix.  The  night  brought  to  them 
no  relief.  The  return  of  day  disclosed  to  them 
new  dangers.  The  precaution  of  undergirding 
had  accomplished  less  than  they  ho}ied.  It  was 
evident  that  the  ship  must  be  lightened  or  foun- 
der at  sea.  Their  next  step,  therefore,  was  to 
try  the  effect  of  this  measure.- — Lightened  the 
ship,  proceeded  to  throw  overboard,  is 
one  of  the  sea-phrases  which  Julius  I'ollux 
mentions  as  used  by  the  ancients  to  denote  the 
lightening  of  a  ship  at  sea.  The  noun  omits 
the  article,  because  they  cast  out  only  a  part  of 
what  the  vessel  contained.  We  are  not  told 
wliat  it  was  that  they  sacrificed  at  this  time; 
it  may  have  been  their  stipernumerarj'  si>ars 
and  rigging,  and  some  of  the  heavier  and  more 
accessible  articles  of  merchandise  with  which 
the  ship  was  laden.  It  appears  from  v.  38  that 
the  bulk  of  the  cargo  consisted  of  wheat,  and 
they  reserved  that  until  the  last.  The  seamen 
in  the  vessel  in  which  Jonah  embarked  had 
recourse  to  the  same  expedient.  "There  was  a 
mighty  tempest  in  the  sea,  so  that  the  ship  was 
like  to  be  broken.    Then  the  mariners  were 


1  See  Pauly's  Real- Encyklopadie  der  dassischen  AUevlhumsivissenschaft,  vol.  v.  p.  463. 
*  Mentioned  in  Mr.  Smith's  letter  alluded  to  on  p.  297. 


Ch.  XXVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


303 


19  And  the  third  ilnij  "we  cast  out  with  our  owu 
hands  tlie  tackling  of  tlie  sliip. 

20  And  when  neither  sun  nor  stars  in  many  days  ap- 
peared, and  no  .small  tempest  lay  on  ».v,  all  hope  that 
■Nve  should  be  saved  was  then  taken  away. 


I'Jbepan  to  throw  the,  freif/lif  oyerhoavd;  and  the  third 
day  they  cast  out  with  their  own  hands  the  'tack- 

2U  ling  of  tlie  sliip.  And  when  neither  sun  nor  stars 
shone  upon  ii.s  for  many  days,  and  no  snuill  tempest 
lay  on  ««,  all  hope  that  we  should  be  saved  was  now 


-1  Or,  furniture 


afraid,  and  cried  every  man  unto  his  god,  and 
cast  forth  the  wares  that  were  in  the  ship  into 
the  sea,  to  lighten  it  of  them  "  (Jon.  i :  4, 5). 

19.  The  third  day  arrives,  and  the  storm 
has  not  abated.  Tliey  are  obliged  to  lighten 
the  ship  still  more.  This  renewed  necessity 
appears  to  indicate  that  the  ship  was  in  a  leak- 
ing condition,  and  that  the  danger  from  this 
cause  was  becoming  more  and  more  imminent. 
It  was  one  of  the  great  perils  to  which  ancient 
vessels  were  exposed.  Tiieir  style  of  architec- 
ture was  inferior  to  that  of  modern  vessels ; 
they  were  soon  shattered  in  a  storm,  "  sprang 
leaks"  more  easily,  and  had  fewer  means  for 
repairing  tlie  injury.  "  In  the  accounts  of  ship- 
wrecks that  have  come  down  to  us  from  an- 
cient times,  the  loss  of  the  ship  must  in  a  great 
number  of  instances  be  ascribed  to  this  cause. 
Josephus  tells  us  that  on  his  voyage  to  Italy 
the  ship  sunk  in  the  midst  of  the  Adriatic  Sea 

(/SaTTTKriJei'TOS    ydp    ijfjLutv    Tov    n\oiov    Kara   y-iaov    toc 

'Mpiav).  He  and  some  of  his  companions  saved 
themselves  by  swimming ;  the  ship,  therefore, 
did  not  go  down  during  the  gale,  but  in  conse- 
quence of  the  damage  she  sustained  during  its 
continuance.  One  of  St.  Paul's  shipwrecks  must 
have  taken  place  under  the  same  circumstances ; 
for  he  tells  us,  A  day  and  a  night  I  have  been  in 
the  deep  (2  Cor.  11 :  25),  supported,  no  doubt,  on 
spars  or  fragments  of  tlie  wreck.  In  Virgil's 
description  of  the  casualties  of  the  ships  of 
-Eneas,  some  are  driven  on  rocks ;  others,  on 
quicksands ;  but 

'laxis  lateruni  conipagibiis  omnes 
Act'ipiunt  iniinicum  imbrem,  reinisque  fatiscunt.'t 

The  fact  that  the  ships  of  the  ancients  were 
l)rovided  with  hi/pozomata,  or  cables  ready  fitted 
for  undergirding,  as  a  neces.sary  part  of  their 
stores,  proves  how  liable  they  were  to  such  cas- 
iialties."  It  is  easy  to  see,  therefore,  what  must 
have  been  the  fate  of  Paul's  ship  had  they  not 
discovered  land  so  providentially :  she  must 
have  foundered  at  sea  and  all  on  board  have 
perished.  —  We  cast  out  with  our  hands 
the  furniture  of  the  ship,  such  as  tables, 
beds,  cliests,  and  the  like  (Mey.,  De  Wet.,  Lng., 
Alf.,  Wdsth.).  The  self-inflicted  loss  in  this 
case  (auToxeipes),  which  aflfected  so  much   the 


personal  convenience  of  each  one,  showed  how 
urgent  was  the  danger.  Yet  furniture,  or 
tackling  (o-Keu^i/),  is  a  very  doubtful  word. 
Some  understand  it  of  the  masts,  yards,  sails, 
and  other  equipments  of  the  ship  similar  to 
tliese.  With  this  interpretation,  we  must  re- 
gard the  term  as  applying  to  that  class  of  ob- 
jects in  a  general  way ;  for  we  see  from  v.  29 
that  they  retained  at  least  some  of  their  anchors, 
and  from  v.  44  that  at  the  last  moment  they 
had  boards  and  spars  at  command  to  assist 
them  in  reaching  the  shore.  According  to 
some,  again,  as  Wetstein,  Kuinoel,  Winer,  it 
denotes  the  baggage  of  the  passengers.  With 
our  own  hands  is  more  significant  with  that 
sense,  but  ship,  as  genitive  of  the  container, 
the  baggage  on  board  the  ship,  is  very  harsh. 
The  expression  means,  saj's  Smith,  "  the  main- 
yard,  an  immense  spar,  probably  as  long  as 
the  ship,  and  which  would  require  the  united 
efforts  of  passengers  and  crew  to  launch  over- 
board. The  relief  which  a  ship  would  thus  ex- 
perience would  be  of  the  same  kind  as  in  a 
modern  ship  when  the  guns  are  thrown  over- 
board."— Some  read  we  cast  out ;  some,  they 
cast  out.  Tischendorf  retains  the  former,  as  in 
T.  R.  [Not  in  his  8th  ed.,  which  gives  the 
third  person  plural  of  the  verb,  as  do  Treg., 
West,  and  Hort,  the  Anglo- Am.  Revisers,  ac- 
cording to  preponderating  evidence. — A.  H.] 
Meyer  is  too  positive  tliat  the  first  person  be- 
trays its  origin  in  with  our  own  hands  (avToxeipei). 
[The  critical  note  in  Me.yer's  last  ed.  reads : 
"  They  cast  out,  approved  by  Griesb.,  adopted 
by  Lach.  and  Born.,  after  A  B  C  K,  min.  vulg. 
The  recepta  is  xve  cast  out.  As  tliis  might  just 
as  easily  be  inserted  on  accoxnit  of  aurdxeipes,  as 
the  third  pi.  on  account  of  enoiovvTo,  the  pre- 
ponderance of  witnesses  has  alone  to  decide, 
and  tliat  in  favor  of  the  tliird  person."  Yet  in 
his  note  on  the  verse  he  still  says :  "  With  our 
ou'n  hands  gives  to  the  description  a  sad  vivid- 
ness," etc. — A.  H.] 

20.  Now  neither  sun  nor  stars  shining 
upon  us  for  many  days,  and  a  storm  not 
slight  pressing  upon  us.  Observe  the  force 
of  the  compounds.  The  absence  of  the  sun 
and  stars  increased  their  danger,  since  it  de- 
prived tliem  of  their  only  means  of  observa- 


»  ["  TJie  jaiats  of  their  sides  being  loosed,  all  the  ships  receive  the  hostile  flood  and  gape  with  chinks."] 


304 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


21  But  after  long  abstinence,  Paul  stood  forth  In  the 
midst  of  them,  and  said,  Sirs,  ye  should  have  heark- 
ened unto  me,  and  not  have  loosed  from  Crete,  and  to 
have  gained  this  harm  and  loss. 

22  And  now  1  exhort  you  to  be  of  good  cheer:  for 
there  shall  be  no  loss  of  any  man's  life  among  you,  but 
of  the  ship. 

23  "lor  there  stood  by  me  this  night  the  angel  of 
God,  whose  I  am,  and  'whom  I  serve, 

24  Saying,  1-ear  not,  Paul ;  thou  must  be  brought  be- 


21  taken  away.  And  when  they  had  been  long  with- 
out food,  then  Paul  stood  forth  in  the  midst  of 
them,  and  said,  Mrs,  ye  should  have  hearkened 
unto  me,  and  not  have  set  sail  from  C  rete,  and  have 

22  gotten  this  injury  and  loss.  And  now  1  exhort  you 
to  be  of  good  cheer:   for  there  shall  be  no  loss  of 

23 life  among   you,  but  on/y  of  the  ship,     lor  there 

stood  by  me  this  night  an  angel  of  the  (iod  whose 

241  am,  whom  also  1  serve,  saying,  lear  not,  Paul; 


ach.  23:  n....6  Dan.  6:  16;  Rom.  1  :9;  2  Tim.  1  :  3. 


tion.  The  Greeks  and  Romans,  in  the  most 
improved  state  of  navigation  among  them,  were 
reluctant  to  venture  out  to  sea  beyond  tlie  sight 
of  land.  During  the  day  they  kept  the  high 
lands  on  shore,  or  some  island,  in  view,  to 
direct  them,  and  at  night  dei^ended,  for  the 
same  purpose,  on  the  position,  the  rising  and 
setting,  of  different  stars  (Diet,  of  Antt.,  Art. 
"Ship").  The  many  or  several  days  include, 
probably,  the  three  days  which  have  been 
mentioned,  but  how  many  of  the  eleven  days 
which  followed  (v.  27)  before  the  final  disaster 
is  uncertain.  We  do  not  know  how  long  the 
interval  was  'between  Paul's  address  and  that 
event.  The  expression  would  be  inappropriate, 
however,  unless  it  comprehended  the  greater 
part  of  them. — Then—/,  e.  for  the  future,  thence- 
forth {Koinov).  They  relinquish  now  their  last 
hope  of  escape ;  destruction  seemed  to  be  in- 
evitable. In  their  condition  they  must  have 
felt  that  their  only  resource  was  to  run  the 
vessel  ashore.  But  the  state  of  the  weather 
rendered  it  impossible  for  them  to  distinguish 
in  what  direction  the  shore  lay ;  and  thus  they 
were  unable  to  make  the  only  further  effort  for 
their  preservation  which  was  left  to  them.  In 
judging  of  the  dangers  which  menaced  them, 
we  must  take  into  account  the  state  of  the  ves- 
sel, as  well  as  the  violence  of  the  storm.  The 
verb  rendered  was  taken  away  means  was 
utterly  taken  away. — Of  being  saved  depends 
on  hope  as  a  genitive  construction.  (Comp. 
14  :  9.) 

21-26.  THE  APOSTLE  CHEERS  THEM 
WITH  THE  HOPE  OF  DELIVERANCE. 

21.  Long  abstinence  denotes  much  absti- 
nence as  to  time  and  degree — i.  e.  both  long- 
continued  and  severe,  but  not  entire.  (See  on 
V.  33.)  This  abstinence  was  not  owing  to  their 
want  of  provisions  (see  v.  33),  but  was  the  ef- 
fect— in  part,  at  least — of  their  fears  and  dejec- 
tion of  mind  (see  vs.  22,  36) ;  and  in  part,  also, 
of  the  difficulty  of  preparing  food  under  such 
circumstances,  and  of  the  constant  requisition 
made  upon  them  for  labor.  "  The  hardships 
which  the  crew  endured  during  a  gale  of  such 
continuance,  and  their  exhaustion  from  labor 


at  the  piimps,  and  hunger,  may  be  imagined, 
but  are  not  described." — You  ought  (past,  as  a 
violated  duty),  having  obeyed  me,  because 
the  counsel  was  wise,  not  authoritative  as  from 
an  apostle. — And  not  to  have  set  sail.  The 
verb  {avdyeu^ai)  IS  present,  because  they  were 
still  at  sea.  Note  the  aorist  wliich  follows. — 
Paul  recalls  to  mind  their  former  mistake  in 
disregarding  his  advice,  not  to  reproach  them, 
but  in  order  to  show  his  claim  to  their  confi- 
dence with  reference  to  the  present  conmiuni- 
cation.  (fie>  is  unattended  here  by  any  rcspdud- 
ing  Se). — And  to  have  escaped — lit.  gained 
— this  violence  and  loss.  (See  on  v.  10.) 
Lucrari  was  used  in  the  same  manner.  An 
evil  shunned  is  a  gain  as  well  as  a  good  secured. 
As  violence  refers  to  something  actually  suffered, 
it  cannot  mean  harm  to  their  persons  (Cony, 
and  Hws.) ;  for  the  exemption  from  such  in- 
jury, of  which  Paul  assures  them  in  the  next 
verse,  and  still  more  emphatically  in  v.  34,  ap- 
plies, imdoubtedly,  to  the  whole  voyage. 

22.  But  of  the  ship.  There  shall  be  no 
loss  except  of  the  ship.  This  limitation 
qualifies,  not  the  entire  clause  wliich  precedes, 
but  only  there  shall  be  no  loss,  which  we 
are  to  repeat  before  the  words  here.  Only 
(fiovov)  would  have  marked  tlie  connection 
more  precisely.  (See  W.  ?  66.  1.  e.)  As  to 
the  rest,  compare  the  remarks  on  I  perceive,  in 
V.  10. 

23.  Stood  by  me.  Whether  the  angel  ap- 
peared io  the  apostle  in  a  vision  or  a  dream,  the 
mode  of  statement  does  not  enable  us  to  decide. 
(See  on  16  :  9.)— This  night,  just  passed,  or 
that  which  was  i)assing.  Most  think  it  prob- 
able that  Paul  did  not  communicate  the  revela- 
tion to  those  in  the  ship  until  the  return  of 
day. — Whose  I  am,  to  whom  I  belong  as  his 
property  ;  in  other  words,  whose  servant  I  am, 
— Whom  also  I  worship,  to  whom  I  offer 
religious  service  and  homage.  This  verb  refers 
to  external  acts  of  worship,  and  not  to  religious 
life  in  general,  except  as  the  latter  may  be  a 
concomitant  of  the  former. 

24.  Thou  must  be  brought,  etc.,  or  thou 
must  stand,  before  Caesar.    (See  on  23  :  11.) 


Ch.  XXVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


305 


fore  Caesar:  and.  lo,  God  hath  given  thee  all  them  that 
sail  with  thee. 

2o  Wherefore,  sirs,  be  of  good  cheer:  "for  I  believe 
God,  that  it  shall  be  even  as  it  was  told  me. 

21')  Howbeit  'we  nuist  be  cast  upon  a  certain  island. 

27  But  when  tlu'  fourteenth  night  was  come,  as  we 
were  driven  up  and  down  in  Adria,  about  midnight 
the  sliipnien  deemed  that  they  drew  near  to  some 
country ; 


thou  must  stand   before  Cresar:    and  lo,  God  hath 

25  granted  thee  all  them  that  sail  wiili  thee.     Where- 

lore,  sirs,  be  of  good  cheer:  for  I  believe  God,  that 

it  shall  be  even  so  as  it  hath  been  spoken  unto  me. 

2(i  Howbeit  we  must  be  cast  upon  a  certain  island. 

27     But  when  the  fourteenth  night  was  come,  as  we 

were  driven  to  and  fro  in  the  xea  oj  Adria,  about 

midnight  the  sailors  surmised  that  they  were  draw* 


;  Luke  I  :  43 ;  Rom.  4  :  20,  21  ;  2  Tim.  \  :  VI 6  ch.  28  :  1. 


To  remind  the  apostle  of  this  still  unfulfilled 
purpose  of  God  was  the  same  tiling  as  to  assure 
iiiiu  that  lie  would  escape  the  present  danger. — 
Ciod  has  given  to  thee  all  those  who  sail 
with  thee.  They  should  be  preserved  for  his 
sake.  No  one  supposes  the  declaration  here  to 
affirm  less  than  this.  Many  think  that  it  im- 
plies also  that  Paul  had  prayed  for  the  safety 
of  those  in  the  ship  with  him,  and  that  he  re- 
ceives now  the  assurance  that  his  prayer  in 
their  behalf  has  prevailed.  "  For  I  hojie,"  says 
Paul  in  Philem.  22,  "  that  through  your  prayers 
I  shall  be  given  unto  you."  Such  is  the  view  of 
Calv.,  Bug.,  Olsh.,  De  Wet.,  Lange,  and  others. 
Bcngel  remarks  here :  "  Facilius  multi  mali  cum 
])aucis  piis  servantur,  quam  unus  pius  cum 
niultis  reis  perit.  Navi  huic  similis  mnndus" 
["  More  easy  is  it  that  many  of  the  wicked  are 
saved  with  one  ]>ious  man  than  that  one  pious 
man  perishes  with  many  of  the  guilty.  The 
world  is  like  this  ship  "]. 

25.  I  believe,  etc.  It  is  evident  from  v.  '61 
that  tlie  apostle  had  acquired  a  strong  ascend- 
ency over  the  minds  of  the  pas.sengers  in  the 
sliip,  if  not  of  the  others.  He  could  very  prop- 
jK'rly,  therefore,  urge  his  own  confidence  in  God 
as  a  reason  (for)  why  they  should  dismiss  their 
fears  (be  of  good  cheer) — so  far,  at  least,  as 
the  preservation  of  their  lives  was  concerned. 

26.  Upon  a  certain  island — (.  e.  upon 
some  island.  More  than  this  was  not  re- 
vealed to  him.  Paul  was  as  ignorant  of  the 
name  of  the  place  where  they  were  wrecked 
as  the  rest  of  them.  (See  v.  39.) — Howbeit 
(  =  hut)  (Si)  opposes  what  they  must  suffer  to 
what  they  would  escape.  —  Must  in  such  a 
communication  may  represent  the  event  as 
not  merely  certain,  but  certain  because  it  was 
fixed  by  the  divine  purpose. — Be  cast  away. 
(See  the  remark  on  v.  17.) 

27-32.  THE  DISCOVERY  OF  LAND,  AND 
THE  FRUSTRATED  ATTEMPT  OF  THE 
MARINERS  TO  DESERT  THE  SHIP. 

27.  The  fourteenth  night,  since  their  de- 
parture from  Fair  Havens. — As  we  were  borne 
through  (sc.  the  waters;  conip.  v.  5)  in  the 
Adriatic.  They  may  have  been  driven  hither 
and  thither  or  onward  in  one  direction ;  the 
participle  is  indefinite.    Mr.  Smith's  calculation 

20 


assumes  a  uniform  drift  toward  Melita.  It  has 
been  said  that  the  modern  Malta  lies  too  far 
south  to  be  embraced  in  the  sea  so  designated. 
The  statement  is  erroneous.  In  its  restricted 
sense  the  Adriatic  was  the  sea  between  Italy 
and  Greece,  but  in  a  wider  sense  it  compre- 
hended also  the  Ionian  Sea  around  Sicily,  near 
which  was  Melita.  (Forbg.,  Ilaiulh.,  ii.  p.  19; 
Win.,  Realw.,  i.  p.  23.)  The  later  Greek  and 
Roman  writers,  as  Biscoe  has  shown,  gave  the 
name  to  the  entire  sea  as  far  south  as  Africa. 
— The  shipnien,  etc.,  the  mariners  sus- 
pected that  some  land  was  approaching 
them.  As  Mr.  Smith  remarks,  Luke  uses  liere 
the  graphic  language  of  seamen,  tcf  whom  the 
ship  is  the  principal  object,  whilst  the  land 
rises  and  sinks,  iiears  and  recedes.  The  nar- 
rator does  not  state  on  what  ground  they  sus- 
pected their  vicinity  to  the  land.  It  was,  no 
doubt,  the  noise  of  the  breakers.  This  is  usu- 
ally the  first  notice  of  their  danger  which 
mariners  have  in  coming  upon  a  coast  in  a 
dark  night.  This  circumstance  furnishes  rea- 
son for  believing  that  the  traditionary  scene  of 
the  shipwreck  is  the  actual  one.  It  is  impos- 
sible to  enter  St.  Paul's  Bay  from  the  east  with- 
out passing  near  the  point  of  Koura  ;  and  while 
the  land  there,  as  navigators  inform  us,  is  too 
low  to  be  seen  in  a  stormy  night,  the  breakers 
can  be  heard  at  a  considerable  distance,  and  in 
a  nortli-eastcrly  gale  are  so  violent  as  to  form 
on  charts  the  distinctive  feature  of  that  head- 
land. On  the  10th  of  August,  1810,  the  British 
frigate  Lively  fell  upon  these  breakers  in  a  dark 
night,  and  was  lost.  The  quartermaster,  who 
first  observed  them,  stated  in  his  evidence  at 
the  court-martial  that  at  the  distance  of  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  the  land  could  not  be  seen, 
btit  that  he  saw  the  surf  on  the  shore. — The 
distance  from  Claude  to  the  point  of  Koura 
is  four  hundred  seventy-six  and  six-tenths 
miles.  Ltike's  narrative  allows  a  fraction  over 
thirteen  days  for  the  performance  of  this  voy- 
age. It  must  have  occupietl  a  day,  or  the  greater 
part  of  a  day,  to  have  reached  Claude  after  they 
left  Fair  Havens.  (See  vv.  13-10.)  According 
to  the  judgment  of  experienced  seamen,  "the 
mean  rate  of  drift  of  a  ship  circumstanced  like 
that  of  Paul "  {i.  e.  working  its  way  in  such  a 


306 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch  XXVII. 


28  And  sounded,  and  found  U  twenty  fathoms:  and 
■when  they  had  gone  a  little  further,  they  sounded 
again,  and  found  tt  fifteen  fathoms. 

29  Then  fearing  lest  we  should  have  fallen  upon 
rocks,  they  cast  four  anchors  out  of  the  stern,  and 
wished  for  the  day. 


28  ing  near  to  some  country ;  and  they  sounded,  and 
found  twenty  fathoms:  and  alter  a  little  space,  they 

29  sounded  again,  and  found  tifieen  fathoms.  And 
fearing  lest  haply  we  should  be  cast  ashore  on  rocky 
ground,  they  let  go  four  anchors  Irom  the  stern,  and 


direction  in  a  gale  of  moderate  severity,  against 
a  north-east  wind)  would  be  thirty-six  and  a 
half  miles  in  twenty-four  hours.  "  Hence,  ac- 
cording to  these  calculations,"  says  Mr.  Smith 
(p.  122,  sq.),  "  a  ship  starting  late  in  the  evening 
from  Claude  would,  by  midnight  on  the  four- 
teenth, be  less  than  three  miles  from  the  en- 
trance of  St.  Paul's  Bay.  I  admit  that  a  coin- 
cidence so  very  close  as  this  is,  is  to  a  certain 
extent  accidental ;  but  it  is  an  accident  which 
could  not  have  happened  had  there  been  any 
great  inaccuracy  on  the  part  of  the  author  of 
the  narrative  with  regard  to  the  numerous  in- 
cidents upon  which  the  calculations  are  found- 
ed, or  had  the  ship  been  wrecked  anywhere  but 
at  Malta." 

28;  And  when  they  had  gone  a  little 
further.  There  was  but  a  short  distance,  it 
will  be  observed,  between  the  two  soundings ; 
and  the  rate  of  decrease  in  the  dei:)th  of  the 
water — viz.  first  twenty  fathoms,  and  then 
fifteen — is  such  as  would  not  be  found  to  exist 
on  every  coast.  It  is  said  that  a  vessel  approach- 
ing Malta  from  the  same  direction  finds  the 
same  soundings  at  the  present  day. — The  Greek 
word  meaning  fathom  (opyuia,  from  hpiyut,  to 
stretch)  signifies  "  the  extension  of  the  hands 
with  the  breadth  of  the  breast"  {Etym. 
Magn.). 

29.  Upon  rocks — lit.  upon  rough — i.  e. 
roc^•)/— places.  Their  apprehension  arose,  not 
from  what  they  saw,  but  from  what  they  had 
reason  to  fear  in  a  dark  night  on  an  unknown 
coast.  The  alarm  was  well  founded;  for  "the 
fifteen-fathom  depth  here  is  as  nearly  as  possible 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  only  from  the  shore,  which 
is  girt  with  mural  precipices,  and  upon  which 
the  sea  must  have  been  breaking  with  great 
violence." — They  cast,  etc.,  or  having  cast, 
out  four  anchors  from  the  stern.  "To 
anchor  successfully  in  a  gale  of  wind  on  a  lee- 
shore  requires  holding-ground  of  extraordinary 
tenacity.  In  St.  Paul's  Bay,  the  traditionary 
locality  of  the  shipwreck,  the  anchorage  is  thus 
described  in  the  Sailint/  Directions:  "The  har- 
bor of  St.  Paul  is  open  to  easterly  and  north- 
east winds.  It  is,  notwithstanding,  safe  for 
small  ships,  the  ground  generally  being  very 
good;  and  while  the  cables  hold  there  is  no 
danger,  as  the  anchors  will  never  start.'' "  The 
ancient  vessels  did  not  carry,  in  general,  so 


large  anchors  as  those  which  we  employ  ;  and 
hence  they  had  often  a  greater  number.  Ath- 
enseus  nxentions  a  ship  which  had  eight  iron 
anchors.  Paul's  ship,  as  we  see  from  tlie  next 
verse,  had  other  anchors  besides  those  which 
were  dropped  from  the  stern.  One  object  of 
anchoring  in  that  way  was  to  arrest  the  prog- 
ress of  the  ship  more  speedily.  No  time  was 
to  be  lost,  as  they  knew  not  that  they  might 
not  founder  the  next  moment  u})on  the  shoals 
where  the  breakers  were  dashing.  Had  they 
anchored  by  the  l)ow,  we  are  told,  there  was 
reason  for  apprehending  that  the  vessel  would 
swing  round  and  strike  upon  the  rocks.  The 
ancient  sliips  were  so  constructed  that  they 
could  anchor  readily  by  the  prow  or  the  stern, 
as  circumstances  might  require.  Another  ad- 
vantage of  the  course  here  taken  was  that  the 
head  of  the  vessel  was  turned  tcjward  the  land, 
which  was  their  best  position  for  running  her 
ashore.  That  purpose  they  had,  no  doubt, 
formed  already.  "  By  cutting  away  the  an- 
chors (tos  i-yKvptK  nepLfXovm),  loosiiig  the  bands 
of  the  rudders  (a^VTes  ra^  ^evKTrjpias),  and  hoist- 
ing the  artemon  {endpavTis  to;'  aprip-ova) — all  of 
which  could  be  done  simultaneously — the  ship 
was  immediately  under  command,  and  could 
be  directed  with  precision  to  any  part  of  the 
shore  which  offered  any  prospect  of  safety." — 
The  English  ships-of-war  were  anchored  by 
the  stern  in  the  battle  of  Copenhagen,  and 
rendered  very  effective  service  in  that  posi- 
tion. Conybeare  and  Howson  mention  the 
singular  fact  that  Lord  Nelson  stated  af- 
ter the  battle  that  he  was  led  to  adopt  that 
plan  because  he  had  just  been  reading  this 
twenty-seventh  chapter  of  the  Acts. — They 
wished  for  day,  or,  lit.,  desired  that  day 
might  come.  The  remark  is  full  of  signifi- 
cance. In  the  darkness  of  the  night  they 
could  not  tell  the  full  extent  of  the  dangers 
which  surrounded  them.  They  must  have 
longed  for  returning  day  on  that  account.  In 
the  mean  time  it  must  have  been  difficult  to 
preserve  a  vessel  which  had  been  so  long  tem- 
pest-tossed from  sinking.  Their  only  chance  of 
escape  was  to  strand  the  ship  as  soon  as  the 
light  enabled  them  to  select  a  place  which  ad- 
mitted of  it.  It  is  evident  that  every  moriient's 
delay  must  have  been  one  of  fearful  suspense, 
as  well  as  of  peril,  to  them. 


Ch.  XXVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


307 


30  And  as  the  shipmen  were  about  to  flee  out  of  the 
ship  when  they  had  let  down  the  boat  into  the  sea, 
under  color  as  though  they  would  have  cast  anchors 
out  of  the  foreship, 

31  Paul  said  to  the  centurion  and  to  the  soldiers, 
Except  these  abide  in  the  ship,  ye  cannot  be  saved. 

32  Then  the  soldiers  cut  ott' the  ropes  of  the  boat,  and 
let  her  fall  off. 

33  And  while  the  day  was  coming  on,  Paul  besought 
them  all  to  take  meat,  saying.  This  day  is  the  fourteenth 
day  that  ye  have  tarried  and  continued  fasting,  having 
taken  nothing. 

34  Wherefore  I  pray  you  to  take  xome  meat:  for  this 
is  for  your  health:  for  "there  shall  not  au  hair  fall 
from  the  head  of  any  of  you. 


30  'wished  for  the  day.  And  as  the  sailors  were  seek- 
ing to  Hee  out  of  the  ship,  and  had  lowered  the  boat 
into   the  sea,    under  color  as   though   they    would 

31  lay  out  anchors  from  the  foreship,  i  aul  said  to  the 
centurion  and  to  the  soldiers,  Except  these  abide  in 

32  the  ship,  ye  cannot  be  saved.  Then  the  soldiers  cut 
away  the  ropes  of  the  boat,  and  let  her  fall  otf. 

33  And  while  the  day  was  coming  on,  Paul  besought 
them  all  to  take  some  food,  saying.  This  day  is  the 
fourteenth  day  that  ye  wait  and  continue  fasting, 

34  having  taken  nothing.  Wherefore  I  beseech  yoii 
to  take  some  food:  for  this  is  for  your  safety  :"for 
there  shall  not  a  hair  perish  from  the  head  cif  any 


o  1  Kings  1  :  52 ;  Matt.  10  :  30  ;  Luke  12  :  7  ;  21  :  18.- 


-1  Or,  prayed 


30.  And  as  the  shipmen,  etc.  This  un- 
generous attempt  of  the  seamen  to  escape  con- 
firms the  remark  before  made — that  the  ship 
was  probably  in  so  shattered  a  state  as  to  ren- 
der it  uncertain  whether  it  could  outride  the 
storm  until  morning.  They  may  have  had  an- 
other motive  for  the  act.  The  shore  might 
prove  to  be  one  on  which  they  could  not  drive 
the  vessel  with  any  hope  of  safety,  and  they 
may  have  deemed  it  more  prudent  to  trust 
themselves  to  the  boat  than  to  remain  and 
await  the  issue  of  that  uncertainty. — When 
they  had  let  down,  etc.,  having  lowered 
down,  the  boat,  which  they  had  previously 
lioisted  on  board.  (See  vv.  IG,  17.)--Out  of 
the  foreship,  or  from  the  prow,  since  it 
W£us  nearer  thence  to  the  shore,  and  [itj  was  there 
only  that  they  could  pretend  to  need  anchors, 
the  stern  being  already  secure. — Cast  an- 
chors, not  to  cast  out(E.  V.),  but  stretch 
out,  anchors.  The  idea  of  extending  the 
cables  runs  into  that  of  carrying  out  and 
drojiping  the  anchors.  Favored  by  the  dark- 
ness, and  under  color  of  the  pretext  assumed, 
they  would  have  accomplished  their  object, 
had  not  Paul's  watchful  eye  penetrated  their 
design. 

31.  Said  to  the  centurion,  etc.  Paul  ad- 
dressed himself  to  the  centurion  and  the 
soldiers,  becau.se  the  officers  of  the  ship  were 
implicated  in  the  plot,  or,  in  consequence  of 
the  general  de.sertion,  had  no  longer  any  power 
to  enforce  their  orders.  The  soldiers  are  those 
who  had  charge  of  the  different  prisoners  (r.  i), 
subject,  proliably,  to  the  comtnand  of  the  cen- 
turion who  had  the  particular  care  of  the  apos- 
tle.—These,  viz.  the  mariners.— Ye,  or  you, 
cannot  be  saved.  The  pronoun  is  emphatic. 
The  soldiers  were  destitute  of  the  skill  which 
the  management  of  the  ship  required.  It  could 
not  be  brought  successfully  to  land  without  the 
help  of  the  mariners.  This  remark  of  Paul 
proves  that  the  plan  to  abandon  the  vessel  was 


not  confined  to  a  portion  of  the  crew,  but  waS 
a  general  one. 

32.  Cut  off  the  ropes  of  the  boat,  which 
fastened  it  to  the  vessel;  not  tiiose  by  which 
they  were  lowering  it,  as  that  was  already  done 
(v.  3o).  The  short  sword  of  the  soldiers  fur- 
nished a  ready  instrument  for  the  summary 
blow.— Lether— t'.e.  theboat— orletit,falloff 
(('.  e.  from  the  side  of  the  vessel),  go  adrift.  The 
next  billow  may  have  swamped  the  frail  craft. 

33-35.  PAUL  ASSURES  THEM  AGAIN" 
THAT  THEIR  LIVES  WOULD  BE  SAVED. 

33.  And  while  the  day,  etc.,  or  now  un- 
til it  should  be  day—/,  e.  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  midnight  mentioned  in  v.  27  and  the 
subsequent  morning.— This  day  is  apposition- 
al  in  sense  with  day  in  the  first  clause. — Tar- 
ried—lit. waiting— for  the  cessation  of  the 
storm  (De  Wet.). — And  continued  fasting, 
rather  ye  continue  fasting,  where  the  adjec- 
tive supplies  the  place  of  a  participle.  (W.  g  45. 
4.)— Having  taken  nothing,  adequate  to  their 
proper  nourishment,  no  regular  food,  during  nil 
this  time.  (See  v.  21.)  "Appian,"  says  Dod- 
dridge, "speaks  of  an  army  which  for  twenty 
days  together  had  neither  food  nor  sleep;  by 
which  he  must  mean  that  they  neither  made  full 
meals  nor  slept  whole  nights  together.  The  same 
interpretation  must  be  given  to  this  phrase."  The 
apostle's  language  could  not  be  mistaken  by  tliose 
to  whom  it  was  addressed.     (Comp.  v.  21.) 

34.  For  this  (viz.  that  they  should  partake 
of  food)  is  important  for  your  preserva- 
tion. (For  jrpov  (fruin)  with  this  sense,  see  W. 
?47.  5.  f.)  ["  For  your  deliverance,  strictly,  is  on 
the  side,  as  it  were,  of  your  deliverance.'' — 
A.  H.]  They  would  have  to  submit  to  much 
fatigue  and  labor  before  they  reached  the  shore, 
and  needed,  therefore,  to  recruit  their  strength. 
—For  there  shall  not  a  hair  fall,  etc.  This 
was  a  proverbial  expression,  employed  to  con- 
vey an  assurance  of  entire  .safetv.  (See  1  Kings 
1  :  52;  Luke  21  :  18.) 


308 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIL 


35  And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  he  took  bread, 
and  "gave  thanks  to  God  in  presence  of  them  all :  and 
when  he  had  broken  il,  he  liegan  to  eat. 

36  Then  were  they  all  of  good  cheer,  and  they  also 
took  some  meat. 

*  37  And  we  were  in  all  in  the  ship  two  hundred  three- 
score and  si.xteen  'souls. 

38  And  when  they  had  eaten  enough,  they  lightened 
the  ship,  and  cast  out  the  wheat  into  the  sea. 


35  of  you.    And  when  he  had  said  this,  and  had  taken 
bread,  he  gave  thanks  to  iiod  in  the  presence  of  all : 

36  and  he  brake  it,  and  began  to  eat.    Then  were  they 
all  of  good  cheer,  and  themselves  also  took  food. 

37  And  we  were  in  all  in  the  .ship  two  hundred  three- 

38  score  and  sixteen  souls.     And  when  they  had  eaten 
enough,  they  lightened  the  ship,  throwing  out  the 


Sam.  9  :  13  ;  .Malt.  13  ;  36 ;  Mark  8:6;  John  6:11;  1  Tim.  4  :  3,  4 6  ch.  2  :  41  ;  7  :  1* ;  Rom.  13:1:  1  Pet.  3  :  20. 


35.  Bread.  This  word,  by  a  Hebraistic 
usage,  often  signifies  food  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment ;  but  broken,  wliich  follows,  appears  to 
exclude  that  sense  here.  Yet  the  present  meal 
had,  no  doubt,  its  other  accompaniments,  the 
bread  only  being  mentioned  because  that,  ac- 
cording to  the  Hebrew  custom,  was  broken  and 
distributed  among  the  guests  after  the  giving  of 
thanks.  The  apostle  i)erformed  on  this  occa- 
sion the  ustial  office  of  the  head  of  a  Hebrew 
family.  Olshausen  exj^resses  the  fanciful  opin- 
ion— as  it  seems  to  me — that  the  Christians 
among  them  regarded  this  act  as  commemora- 
tive of  the  Lord's  Supper,  though  the  others 
did  not  understand  Paul's  design.  The  lan- 
guage employed  liere,  it  is  true,  more  frequent- 
ly describes  that  ordinance,  but  it  is  used  also 
of  an  ordinary  meal.     (Sec  Luke  24  :  30.) 

36-38.  THEY  PARTAKE  OF  FOOD  AND 
AGAIN  LIGHTI:N  THE  SHIP. 

36.  Then,  etc. — lit.  having — all  now  be- 
come cheerful.  It  is  not  accidental  that  the 
writer  makes  this  remark  in  connection  witli 
they  took  some  meat.  In  their  despair  they 
had  lost  their  inclination  to  eat ;  btit  the  retttrn 
of  hope  brought  with  it  a  keener  sense  of  their 
wants,  and  they  could  now  think  of  satisfying 
their  hunger.  (See  on  vv.  21,  33.)  —  They 
also  themselves  as  well  as  he.  The  apostle 
had  set  them  the  example  (began  to  eat),  and 
they  all  followed  it. 

37.  The  emphatic  all,  in  v.  3G,  leads  the 
writer  to  specify  the  number. — All  the  sonls 
together.  For  this  adverbial  use  of  all  (wa?), 
see  the  note  on  19  :  7.  For  this  use  of  souls, 
see  on  2  :  41. — Two  hundred  and  seventy- 
six.  The  nitmber  of  persons  on  board  shows 
that  the  vessel  must  have  been  one  of  tlie 
larger  size.  In  the  reign  of  Commodus  one  of 
the  Alexandrian  wheat-ships  was  driven  by 
stress  of  weather  into  the  Pineus,  and  excited 
great  curiosity  on  the  part  of  the  Athenians. 
Lucian  visited  this  vessel,  and  has  laid  the 
scene  of  one  of  his  Dialogues  (jtAoioi'  j)  dxai)  on 
board  of  her.  From  the  information  furnished 
by  him  it  has  been  estimated  that  the  keel  of 
this  ship  was  about  one  hundred  feet  in  length, 
and  that  she  would  measure  between  eleven 
and  twelve  hundred  tons.     Her  dimensions. 


therefore,  although  inferior  to  those  of  many 
modern  vessels,  "  were  quite  equal  to  those  of 
the  largest  class  of  modern  mercliantnien." 
Luke's  ship  was  engaged  in  the  same  commerce 
(being,  to  use  Lucian's  language,  one  of  the  sltips 
transjMrting  grain  from  Eiji/pt  into  Italy) ;  and  we 
have  no  reason  to  be  surprised  at  her  contain- 
ing such  a  number  of  men.  (See  further  on 
V.  6.) 

38.  Lightened  the  ship.  Among  the 
nautical  terms  of  Julius  Pollux  we  find  to 
lighten  the  ship.  (See  on  v.  18.)  Luke  states 
merely  the  fact  that  thetj  lightened  the  ship  again 
(it  is  the  tliird  time),  but  gives  no  exi)lanation 
of  it.  The  object  may  have  been  to  diminish 
the  depth  of  water  which  the  ship  drew,  so  as 
to  enaljle  them  to  aitproach  nearer  to  the  shore 
before  striking.  It  has  been  conjectured,  also, 
that  the  vessel  may  have  been  leaking  so  fast 
that  the  measvire  was  necessary,  in  order  to 
keep  iier  from  sinking. —  Casting  out  the 
wheat,  or  grain,  corn,  since  tlie  term  lias 
frequently  that  wider  sense.  As  suggestetl  on  v. 
18,  we  are  to  understand  here  that  they  threw 
into  the  sea  the  grain  which  constituted  the 
cargo,  or  the  bulk  of  the  cargo,  which  the  ship 
carried.  The  fact  that  the  sliip  belonged  to 
Alexandria  is  presumptive  proof  that  she  was 
loaded  with  grain,  since  that  was  the  ])rinci]>al 
commodity  expcjrted  from  Egypt  to  Italy.  The 
explicit  notice  liere  that  they  lightened  the 
ship  by  throwing  the  grain  into  the  sea  liar- 
monizes  with  that  i)resumption  and  tends  to 
confirm  it.  Some  liave  thought  that  Avheat 
may  denote  the  ship's  provisions ;  but  tlicse 
would  have  consisted  of  various  different  arti- 
cles, and  would  not  naturally  be  described  by 
so  specific  a  term  as  this.  Tlie  connection, 
which  has  been  said  to  favor  the  opinion  last 
stated,  agrees  equally  well  with  the  other. 
Having  tlieir  hopes  revived  by  the  spectacle 
of  Paul's  undisturbefl  serenity  and  by  liis  an- 
imating address,  and  being  reinvigorated  after  so 
long  a  fast  by  the  food  of  which  they  had  par- 
taken, they  were  now  in  a  cjmdition  both  of 
mind  and  body  to  address  tliemselves  to  tlie 
labors  which  their  safety  required.  This  view, 
therefore,  places  tlieir  lightening  of  the  ship  in 
a  perfectly  natural  connection  with  the  circum- 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


309 


39  And  when  it  was  day,  they  knew  not  the  land: 
but  they  discovered  a  certain  creek  with  a  shore,  into 
the  which  they  were  minded,  if  it  were  possible,  to 
thrust  in  the  ship. 

W  And  when  they  had  taken  up  the  anchors,  they 
coiuiuitted  t/wiiiselves  unto  the  sea,  and  loosed  the  rud- 


39  wheat  into  the  sea.  And  when  it  was  day,  they 
knew  not  the  land:  but  they  perceived  a  certain 
bay  with  a  beach,  and  they  took  counsel  whether 

40  they  could  'drive  the  ship  u|)on  it.  And  casting  otf 
the  anchors,  they  left  theui  in  the  sea,  at  the  same 


1  Some  ancieot  autbarities  read  briitg  the  ahip  >a/e  to  shore. 


stances  related  just  before.  In  addition  to  this, 
as  Hemsen  urge.s,  their  remaining  .stock  of  pro- 
visions, after  so  protracted  a  voyage,  must  have 
been  already  so  reduced  that  it  could  have  had 
little  or  no  effect  on  the  ship  whether  they  were 
thrown  away  or  retained. — Mr.  Blunt  (p.  326) 
lias  very  properly  called  attention  to  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  narrative  discloses  to  us  the 
nature  of  the  sliip's  cargo.  In  the  fiftli  verse 
we  are  infornied  that  the  vessel  "  into  which 
the  centurion  removed  Paul  and  the  other 
prisoners  at  Myra  belonged  to  Alexandria  and 
was  sailing  into  Italy.  From  the  tenth  verse  we 
learn  that  it  was  a  merchant-vessel,  for  mention 
is  made  of  its  lading,  but  the  nature  of  the  lad- 
ing is  not  di>ec%  stated.  In  this  verse,  at  a  dis- 
tance of  some  thirty  verses  from  the  last,  wc  find, 
by  the  merest  chance,  of  what  its  cargo  consisted. 
The  freight  was  naturally  enough  kept  till  it 
could  be  kept  no  longer,  and  then  we  discover  for 
the  first  time  that  it  was  wheat — the  very  article 
which  such  vessels  were  accustomed  to  carry 
from  Egypt  to  Italy.  These  notices,  so  detached 
from  each  other,  tell  a  continuous  story,  but  it 
is  not  perceived  till  they  are  brought  together. 
The  circumstances  drop  out  one  liy  one  in  the 
course  of  the  narrative,  unarranged,  unpre- 
meditated, thoroughly  incidental ;  so  that  the 
chapter  might  be  read  twetity  times  and  their 
agreement  with  one  another  and  with  con- 
temporary liistory  be  still  overlooked." 

39-44.'  THE  SHIPWRECK.— THOSE  OX 
BOARD  ESCAPE  TO  THE  SHORE  BY 
SWIMMING,  OR  ON  FRAGMENTS  OF  THE 
VESSEL. 

39.  They  knew  not,  or  they  recognized 
not,  the  land  within  view.  The  day  has 
dawned,  and  tliey  could  now  distinguisli  it. 
It  lias  appeared  to  some  surprising  that  none 
c*f  those  on  board  should  liave  known  a  place 
with  wliich  those  at  least  who  were  accustomed 
to  the  sea  might  be  expected  to  have  been  so 
well  acquainted.  The  answer  is  that  the  scene 
of  the  shipwreck  was  remote  from  the  principal 
harbor,  and,  as  those  who  have  been  on  the 
spot  testify,  distinguished  by  no  marked  feature 
which  would  render  it  known  even  to  a  native. 


if  he  came  unexpectedly  upon  it.  The  bay  so 
justly  known  as  St.  Paul's  Bay  is  at  the  north- 
West  extremity  of  the  island,  and  is  formed  by 
the  main  shore  on  the  south,  and  the  island  of 
Salmonetta  on  the  north.  It  extends  from  east 
to  west,  two  miles  long  and  one  broad  at  the 
entrance,  and  at  the  inner  end  is  nearly  land- 
locked on  three  sides.  It  is  several  miles  north 
of  Valetta,  the  famous  rock-bound  harbor  of 
Malta.'  They  perceived  a  certain  inlet, 
creek,  having  a  shore,  one  open  or  smooth  (see 
on  21  :  5),  on  whicli  they  could  run  the  ship 
with  a  hope  of  saving  their  lives.  "  Luke  uses 
here  the  correct  hydrographical  term."  The 
remark  implies  that  the  coast  generallj'  was 
unsafe  for  such  an  attempt.  The  iiresent  con- 
formation of  the  coa^t  on  that  side  of  Malta 
confirms  Luke's  accuracy  in  this  particular. 
The  shore  there  presents  an  unbroken  chain 
of  rocks,  interrupted  at  only  two  points. — 
Into  which  they  determined,  if  they 
could,  to  thrust  forth  (/.  r.  from  tlie  sea), 
to  drive  asluire,  the  ship.  (For  efwo-ai,  from 
efw^eco,  see  W.  ^  15 ;  K.  g  165.  7.)  The  wind  must 
have  forced  them  to  the  west  side  of  the  bay, 
which  is  rocky,  but  has  two  creeks.  One  of 
these,  Mestara  Valley,  has  a  shore.  The  other 
has  no  longer  a  sandy  beach,  but  must  have 
had  one  formerly,  which  has  evidently  been 
worn  away  by  the  action  of  the  sea.  The  ves- 
sel grounded  (v. «)  before  they  reached  the 
point  on  shore  at  whicli  they  aimed,  though 
they  may  have  entered  tlie  creek. 

40.  And  when,  etc.,  may  be  translated 
and  having  entirely  cut  away  the  anchors 
they  abandoned  them  unto  the  sea.  On 
this  force  of  the  preposition  in  the  Greek  j)arti- 
ciple  (irepicAdi'Tes),  cotiip.  was  taken  away  (Trepijj- 
peiTo),  in  V.  20.  It  has  been  referred  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  anchors  as  being  aroiuid  the  sliip  ; 
but  they  had  all  been  drojiped  from  the  stern 
(v.  29),  and,  as  the  strain  would  be  mainly  in  one 
direction,  they  would  not  be  likely  to  be  found 
on  different  sides  of  the  vessel.  Our  English 
translators  followed  the  Vulgate  in  their  inac- 
curate version  of  this  clause. — At  the  same 
time  having  unfastened  the  bands  of  the 


'  Smith's  chart  of  St.  Paul's  Bay  is  copied  in  Conybeare  and  Howson,  with  the  necessary  explanations.  I  had 
the  gratification  of  a  hurried  visit  to  this  locality  on  my  way  to  .Alexandria.  It  appeared  to  me  to  fulfil  every 
condition  of  the  narrative  as  the  scene  of  the  apostle's  shipwreck. 


310 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


der  bands,  and  hoised  up  the  mainsail  to  the  wind,  and 
made  toward  shore. 

41  And  falling  into  a  place  where  two  seas  met,  "they 
ran  the  ship  aground  ;  and  the  forepart  stuck  fast,  and 
remained  unmoveable,  but  the  hinder  part  was  broten 
with  the  violence  of  the  waves. 


time  loosing  the  bands  of  the  rudders;  and  hoisting 
up  the  foresail  to  the  wind,  they  made  for  the  boach. 
41  Hut  lighting  upon  a  place  where  two  .seas  met,  they 
ran  the  vessel  aground  ;  and  the  foreship  struck  and 
remained  unmoveable,  but  the  stern  began  to  break 


a  2  Cor.  11  :  25. 


rudders.  Most  of  the  ancient  vessels  were 
furnished  with  two  rudders.  No  sea-going  ves- 
sel had  less  than  two,  although  small  boats  and 
river-craft,  such  as  those  on  the  Nile,  were  some- 
times steered  by  one.  The  rudders  (TrrjSaAia)  were 
more  like  oars  or  paddles  than  our  modern 
helm.  They  were  attached  to  the  stern,  one  on 
each  quarter,  distinguished  as  the  right  and  the 
left  rudder.  In  the  larger  ships  the  extremities 
of  the  rudders  were  joined  by  a  pole,  which  was 
moved  by  one  man  and  kept  the  rudders  always 
parallel.  (See  Diet,  of  Antt.,  Art.  "  Gubernacu- 
lum.")  When  a  vessel  was  anchored  by  the 
Btern,  as  was  the  case  here,  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  lift  the  rudders  out  of  the  water  and  to 
secure  them  by  bands.  These  bands  it  would 
be  necessary  to  unfasten  when  the  ship  was 
again  got  under  weigh.  (aveVres  is  the  second 
aorist  imrticiple  in  the  active  from  an^/ut.  K. 
§  180.  See  on  IG  :  26.)— Having  hoisted  the 
foresail  to  the  Avind.  The  word  rendered 
foresail  (apT^niov)  has  been  taken  by  different 
writers  as  the  name  of  almost  every  sail  which 
a  vessel  carries — e.  g.  mainsail,  topsail,  jib,  etc. 
We  have  no  ancient  definition  of  the  term 
wliich  throws  any  certain  light  upon  its 
meaning.  It  passed  into  some  of  the  modern 
languages,  wliere  it  is  variously  applied,  but  oc- 
curs in  no  ancient  Greek  author  out  of  Luke's 
account  of  this  voyage.  Most  commentators, 
without  any  attempt  to  substantiate  their  opin- 
ion, put  it  down  as  the  "  mainsail."  The  nauti- 
cal argument  is  said  to  be  in  favor  of  the  fore- 
sail— i.  e.  the  sail  attached  to  the  mast  nearest 
the  prow,  or,  if  there  was  but  one  mast,  fixed 
to  a  spar  or  yard  near  the  prow.  "As  the  an- 
cients depended  for  speed  chiefly  upon  one 
principal  sail,  an  appendage  or  additional  sail 
at  the  bow  of  the  ship  was  required  for  the 
purpose  of  directing  the  vessel  when  in  the  act 
of  putting  about ;  for,  although  there  could  be 
no  diflftculty  in  bringing  the  ship's  head  to  the 
wind  with  the  great  sail  alone,  a  small  sail  at 
the  bow  would  be  indispensable  for  making  her 
'pay  off' — that  is,  bringing  her  liead  round; 
otherwise,  she  would  acquire  stern-way,  and 
thereby  endanger  the  rudders,  if  not  the  ship 
itself."    The  vessels  on  coins  and  in  other  an- 


cient representations  exhibit  a  sail  of  this  de- 
scription. With  this  sail  raised,  it  is  said  that 
a  ship  situated  like  that  of  Paul  would  move 
toward  the  shore  with  more  precision  and  ve- 
locity than  with  any  other.  "  A  sailor  will  at 
once  see  that  the  foresail  was  the  best  possible 
sail  that  could  be  set  under  the  circumstances." 
41.  And  having  fallen  into  a  place  hav- 
ing two  seas.  This  has  been  supposed  by 
many  commentators  to  have  been  a  concealed 
shoal  or  sand-bank,  formed  by  the  acti(m  of 
two  opposite  currents.  In  the  course  of  time 
such  a  bank,  as  is  frequently  the  case  at  the 
niouth  of  rivers  or  near  the  shore,  may  have 
been  worn  away  ;  i  so  that  the  absence  of  any 
such  obstruction  there  at  the  present  time  de- 
cides nothing  against  that  supposition.  It  has 
also  been  understood  to  have  been  a  tongue  of 
land  or  promontory,  against  the  shores  of  wliich 
the  sea  beat  strongly  from  opposite  quarters.  It 
is  not  stated  that  any  projection  exists  there 
now  to  which  Luke's  description,  if  exjilained 
in  that  manner,  would  apply.  INIr.  Smith  is 
of  the  opinion  that  a  place  having  two  seas 
may  refer  to  the  channel,  not  more  tlian  a  hun- 
dred yards  in  breadth,  which  separates  the  small 
island  Salmonetta  from  Malta,  and  which  might 
very  properly  be  called  a  place  where  "two  seas 
meet,"  on  account  of  the  communication  which 
it  forms  between  the  sea  in  the  interior  of  the 
bay  and  the  sea  outside.  He  would  place  the 
scene  of  the  shipwreck  near  that  channel,  and, 
according  to  the  representation  on  his  map,  a 
little  to  the  north  of  the  place  to  whicli  tradi- 
tion has  generally  assigned  it.  The  creek  near 
here,  at  present  without  a  beach  (see  v.  39),  may 
be  the  one  which  they  attempted  to  enter. — 
The  final  shock  now  ensues.  And  the  proAV, 
sticking  fast,  remained  immovable,  but 
the  stern  was  broken  by  the  violence  of 
the  waves.  "  This  is  a  remarkable  circum- 
.stance,  which,  but  for  the  peculiar  nature  of 
the  bottom  of  St.  Paul's  Bay,  it  would  be  diflJ- 
cult  to  account  for.  The  rocks  of  Malta  dis- 
integrate into  extremely  minute  particles  of 
sand  and  clay,  which  when  r  cted  upon  by  the 
currents  or  surface  agitation  form  a  deposit  of 
tenacious  clay,  but  in  still  water,  where  these 


1  For  examples  of  this,  see  Lyell's  Principles  of  Geology,  p.  285,  sq.  (8th  ed.,  1850). 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


311 


42  And  the  soldiers' counsel  was  to  kill  the  prison- 
ers, lest  any  of  them  should  swim  out,  and  escape. 

4;{  Hut  the  centurion,  willing  to  save  Paul,  kept  them 
tioni  l/ifir  purpose;  and  commanded  that  they  which 
could  swim  sliould  cast  t/iems<;lies  tirst  inlo  the  sea,  ai.d 
get  to  land : 


42  up  by  the  violence  nf  (he  imres.  And  the  soldiers' 
counsel  was  to  kill  the  prisoners,  lest  any  ',/  t/i'-m 

4o should  swim  out,  and  e.-cape.  Hut  the  centurion, 
desiring  to  save  I'aul,  stayed  them  from  their  pur- 
pose:  and  commanded  tluit  those  who  could  swim 
should  cast  themselves  overboard,  and  get  tiist  to 


causes  do  not  act,  mud  is  formed ;  but  it  is  only 
in  the  creeks  where  are  no  currents,  and  at  such 
a  depth  as  to  be  undisturbed  by  the  waves,  that 
the  mud  occurs.  In  Captain  Smyth's  chart  of 
the  bay  the  nearest  soundings  to  the  mud  indi- 
cate a  depth  of  about  three  fathoms,  which  is 
about  what  a  large  ship  would  draw.  A  ship, 
therefore,  imp        1         I  ;  force  of  a  gale  into  a 


infinitive.  (W.  §  44.  8 ;  S.  ?  162.  3.  2.)  Meyer, 
after  Fritsche,  never  admits  this  use,  but  insists 
on  that  {'iva.)  as  telle  even  here. — Of  the  rigor 
with  which  those  were  liable  to  be  punished 
who  were  charged  with  the  custody  of  prison- 
ers, if  the  latter  escaped  from  them  in  any  way, 
we  have  had  proof  in  12  :  19  and  IG  :  27. 

43,  It  will  be  recollected  tliat,  according  to 


BAY    OF   ST.    PAUL    FROM    THK    >(HTH. 


creek  with  a  bottom  such  as  has  been  described, 
would  strike  a  bottom  of  mud,  into  which  the 
fore-part  would  fix  itself  and  be  held  fast, 
whilst  the  stern  was  exposed  to  the  force  of 
the  waves." — Meyer  defends  of  the  Avaves 
(tuik  KVfjLOiTuyv)  with  good  reason  against  Tischen- 
dorf  and  others. 

42.  It  is  the  soldiers  who  initiate  this  scheme, 
since  they  oiily,  and  not  the  mariners,  were  in- 
terested in  the  fate  of  the  prisoners. — Counsel, 
better,  plan,  resolution,  not  coitnsel  merely. 
(Comp.  purpose,  below.) — To  kill=that  they 
should  kill  the  prisoners  defines  ])lan,  and 
circumscribes  the  declarative  or  supplementary 


the  Roman  custom,  each  of  the  prisoners  was 
chained  to  a  particular  soldier,  who  was  his 
keeper.  As  to  the  relation  of  these  soldiers 
to  the  centurion,  see  on  v.  31. — Kept,  or  re- 
strained, them  from  their  purpose.  Thtis 
it  hapjiened  again  (see  v.  24)  that  Paul's  com- 
panions were  indebted  to  their  connection  M'ith 
him  for  the  preservation  of  their  lives.  And 
connects  this  clause  with  tlie  next,  because  of 
their  co-ordinate  relation  to  willing. — The  par- 
ticiple {aTToppitj/avTa's)  translated  "  cast  them- 
selves "  has  a  reciprocal  sense. — Get,  etc. — 
lit.  to  go  forth,  not,  from  the  ship,  which  is 
the  force  of  fruiti  (and)   in  the  participle  just 


312 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


44  And  the  rest,  some  on  boards,  and  some  on  broken  I  44  the  land :  and  the  rest,  some  on  planks,  and  some  on 
pieces  of  the  ship.     Aid  so  it  came  to  pass,  "that  they  other  things  Irom  the  ship.     And  .so  it  came  to  pass, 

escaped  all  safe  to  land.  I       that  they  all  escaped  sale  to  the  land. 


CHAPTER    XXVIII. 


AND  when  they  were  escaped,  then  they  knew  that 
Hhe  island  was  called  Melita. 
2  And  the   'barbarous  pe.  pie  shewed  iis  no  little 
kindness:    for   they  kindled   a   fire,  and   received   us 


1  And  when  we  were  escaped,  then  we  knew  that 

2  the  i-land  was  called  'Aielita.    And  the  barbarians 
showed  us  no  common  kindness:  for  they  kindled  a 


I  ver.  22 b  ch. 


:  Kom.  1  :  14  ;  1  Cor.  U  :  11  ;  Col.  3  :  11. 


-1  Some  ancient  autho 


I  read  Udelitene. 


before,  but  from  the  sea  (upon,  or  to,  the 

44.  The  rest  is  the  subject  of  to  go  forth 
(E.  V.  get),  repeated  from  the  j^receding  clause. 
— Upon  boards,  such,  j^robably,  as  were  in 
use  about  the  ship,  but  not  parts  of  it,  which 
would  confound  this  clause  with  the  next. — 
Upon  some  of  the  pieces  from  the  ship, 
which  they  themtrelves  tore  away  or  which  the 
surge  had  broken  off.  jSIost  critics  distinguish 
the  two  expressions  in  this  manner.  Kuinoel 
renders  boards  (o-avtViv)  tables.  A  few  understand 
that  term  of  the  permanent  parts  of  the  vessel, 
and  some  of  the  pieces  from  the  shijy  (tivioi'  dn-d  toO 
tAoi'ov)  of  such  things  as  seats,  barrels,  and  the 
like,  which  were  floating  away  from  the  wrec^k. 
But  articles  of  this  description  they  would  be 
likely  to  have  lost  or  to  have  thrown  into  the 
sea  before  this  time. — So,  thus — ;'.  e.  in  the 
two  ways  that  have  been  mentioned. — Es- 
caped safe — lit.  were  saved.  This  was  not 
the  tirst  peril  of  the  kind  from  which  the 
apostle  had  been  delivered.  In  2  Cor.  11  : 
25  he  says,  "Thrice  I  suffered  shipwreck,  a 
night  and  a  day  have  I  si)ent  in  the  deep;" 
and  he  recorded  that  statement  several  years 
before  the  present  disaster.  [Meyer  says :  "  This 
shipwreck  was  at  least  the  fourth  (2  Cor.  11 .  25) 
which  Paul  suffered."  He  also  remarks: 
"  Hackett  treats  chap,  xxvii.  with  special  care, 
having  made  use  of  many  accounts  of  travels 
and  notes  of  navigation." — A.  H.] 


1-10.  THEIR  ABODE  DURING  THE  WIN- 
TER AT  MELITA. 
1.  They    knew  =  they   ascertained    (by 

intercourse,  probably,  with  the  inhabitants) 
that  the  island  is  called  Melita.  That 
this  was  the  modern  Malta  cannot  well  be 
doubted.  An  island  with  the  same  name,  now 
Meleda.  lies  up  the  Adriatic,  on  the  coast  of 
Dalmatia,  which  some  have  maintained  to  be 
the  one  where  Paul  was  wrecked.  Bryant  de- 
fended that  opinion.  It  is  advocated  still  in 
Valpy's  Notes  on  the  New  Testament.    The  argu- 


ment for  that  opinion  founded  on  the  name 
Adriatic  has  been  already  refuted  in  the  re- 
marks on  27  :  27.  It  has  also  been  alleged  for 
it  that  no  poisonous  serpents  are  found  at  pres- 
ent on  Malta.  Mr.  Smith  mentions  Coleridge 
{Table  Talk,  p.  185)  as  urging  that  difficulty. 
The  more  populous  and  cultivated  state  of  the 
island  accounts  for  the  disappearance  of  such 
reptiles.  Natitralists  inform  us  that  these  ani- 
mals become  e.xtinct  or  disappear  as  the  abo- 
riginal forests  of  a  country  are  cleared  up,  or 
as  the  soil  is  otherwise  brought  under  cultiva- 
tion. (See  note  on  v.  3.)  It  would  be  difficult 
to  find  a  surface  of  ecjual  extent  in  so  artificial 
a  state  as  that  of  Malta  at  the  present  day.  The 
positive  reasons  for  the  common  belief  as  to  the 
place  of  the  shipwreck  are— that  the  traditional 
evidence  sustains  it ;  that  Malta  lies  in  the  track 
of  a  vessel  driven  by  a  ncirth-east  wind ;  that 
the  reputed  locality  of  the  wreck  agrees  with 
Luke's  account ;  that  the  Alexandrian  ship  in 
which  they  re-embarked  would  verj'  naturally 
winter  there,  but  not  at  Meleda ;  and  that  the 
subsec|uent  course  of  the  voj'age  to  Puteoli  is 
that  which  a  vessel  would  pursue  in  going  from 
Malta,  but  not  from  the  other  place.  Malta  is 
sixty  miles  from  Cape  Passero,  the  southern 
l^oint  of  Sicily,  and  two  hundred  miles  from 
the  African  coast.  It  is  farther  from  the  main 
land  than  any  other  island  in  the  ^Mcditerra- 
nean.  It  is  seventeen  miles  in  length,  nine 
miles  in  its  greatest  breath,  and  sixty  miles  in 
circumference.  It  is  nearly  equidistant  between 
the  two  ends  of  the  Mediterranean.  Its  highest 
point  is  said  to  be  six  hundred  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea. 

2.  And  the  barbarous  people.  The  in- 
habitants are  called  barbarians  with  reference 
to  their  language — which  was  not  that  either 
of  the  Greeks  or  Romans— not  because  they 
were  rude  and  degraded.  It  is  strange  that 
Coleridge  should  say  tliat  the  Melita;ans  can- 
not be  meant  here,  because  they  were  highly 
civilized.  These  islanders  belonged  to  the 
Phoenician  race  and  spoke  a  Semitic  dialect, 
most  probably  the  Punic — ('.  e.  the  Phoenician 
as  spoken  by  the  people  of  Carthage.     "  The 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


313 


every  one,  because  of  the  present  rain,  and  because 
of  the  cold. 

:■!  And  when  Paul  hart  gathered  a  bundle  of  sticks, 
and  laid  tlift)!  on  the  lire,  tiifre  came  a  viper  out  of  the 
beat,  and  fastened  on  his  hand. 


fire,  and  received  us  all,  because  of  the  present  rain, 
Sand  because  of  the  cold.     i5ut  when  i^aul  had  gath- 
ered a  bundle  of  sticks,  and  laid  them  on  the  lire,  a 
viper  came  out  'by  reason  of  the  heat,  and  fastened 


1  Or,  from  the  heat 


Hebrew  language,"  in  its  widest  extent,  says 
Hupfeld,  "  was  the  language,  not  nierelj'  of 
tlie  Hebrews,  but  of  the  other  nations  tliat 
inhabited  Canaan^  or  Palxstina,  especially  of 
the  riicenifians,  so  renowned  as  a  commercial 
people  in  the  ancient  world,  and  of  the  Car- 
thaginians descended  from  them.  This  is 
proved  especially  by  the  proper  names  of  the 
Canaaiiites  in  the  Bible,  and  of  the  Phoenicians 
and  Cartliaginians  in  the  classic  writers,  which 
are  all  formed  in  the  Hebrew  manner,  and 
also  by  the  remains  of  the  Phoenician  and  the 
Punic  language  on  Phoenician  monuments 
and  in  the  classics,  so  far  as  these  have  been 
as  yet  deciphered."!  The  Greeks  and  Romans 
who  settled  on  the  island  at  different  times 
never  introduced  to  any  great  extent  their  lan- 
guage or  customs.— No  little  ^  no  ordinary.  (See 
on  19  :  11.)— Received  to  themselves,  or  to 
their  regard.  (Comp.  Rom.  14  : 1 ;  De  Wet.), 
not  to  their  fire  (Mey.).  [In  his  last  ed.  Meyer 
agrees  with  Dr.  Hackett.— A.  H.]— On  ac- 
count of  the  rain  Avhich  came  upon  us 
(De  Wet.,  Rob.) ;  the  present  rain  (Wetst.,  E. 
v.).  They  would  suffer  the  more  from  this 
inclement  weather  after  so  much  exposure 
and  fatigue.  This  remark  in  regard  to  the 
rain  and  cold  disproves  the  assumption  of 
some  critics  that  it  was  a  sirocco  wind— j.  e. 
from  the  south-east— which  Paul's  ship  en- 
countered. That  wind  does  not  continue  to 
blow  more  than  two  or  three  daj's,  and  is 
hot  and  sultry  even  as  late  as  the  month  of 
November. 

3.  And  when  Paul,  etc.— lit.  now  Paul 
—having  collected  a  great  number  (a 
heap)  of  dry  sticks,  such  as  would  nat- 
urally be  found  among  the  rocks  around  tlie 
shore.— A  viper  i^xiSva).  The  Greeks  applied 
this  term  to  that  reptile  in  distinctit)n   from 


other  serpents,  as  is  evident  from  Aristotle 
(Lib.  I.  c.  G) :  "The  other  serpents  produce 
eggs;  the  echidna  only  is  viviparous."  Vipera 
are  the  only  viviparous  serpents  in  Europe.  It 
was  remarked  aljovc  that  tiie  viper  is  unknown 
in  Malta  at  the  jtresent  day.  "  No  person," 
says  Mr.  Smith,  "  who  has  studied  the  changes 
which  the  operations  of  man  have  produced 
on  the  fauna  (animals)  ol  any  country  will  be 
surprised  that  a  particular  species  f)f  reptiles 
should  have  disappeared  from  that  of  Malta. 
My  friend  the  Rev.  jSIr.  Landsb(jrongli,  in  his 
interesting  excursions  in  Arran,  has  rojieatedly 
noticed  the  gradual  disappearance  of  the  viper 
from  that  island  since  it  has  become  more  fre- 
quented. Mr.  Lyell,2  in  quoting  the  travels  of 
Spix  and  Martins  in  Brazil,  observes:  'They 
speak  of  the  dangers  to  which  they  were  ex- 
posed from  the  jaguar,  the  j^oiaonous  serpents, 
crocodiles,  scorpions,  centipedes,  and  spiders. 
But  with  the  increasing  population  and  cul- 
tivation of  the  country,  say  tliese  naturalists, 
these  evils  will  gradually  diminisli ;  when  tlie 
inhabitants  liavc  cut  down  the  woods,  drained 
the  mar.shes,  made  roads  in  all  directions,  and 
founded  villages  and  towns,  man  will  by  de- 
grees triumpli  over  the  rank  vegetation  and 
the  noxious  animals."  "—Out  of,  or  from,  the 
heat,  tlie  effect  of  it  (De  Wet.),  or  (less  appro- 
priate to  the  noun,  from  the  place  of  it,  as  ex- 
plained by  Winer  Q  47.  5.  b.)  and  otliers.  But 
the  best  manuscripts  read  iwo  (Lchm.,  Tsch., 
Mey.),  and  tlie  sense  then  is  (comp.  20:9; 
Luke  19  :  3)  on  account  of  the  heat.  The  viper 
liad  evidently  been  taken  up  among  the  sticks 
which  Paul  had  gathered ;  and,  as  may  be 
inferred  from  laid  on  the  fire,  had  been 
thrown  witli  them  into  the  fire.  This  latter 
supposition  is  required  by  the  local  sense  of 
out  of  the  heat,  and  is  entirely  consistent  Avith 


It  has  been  frequently  asserted  that  the  ancient  Punic  is  the  basis  of  the  language  spoken  by  the  native 
Maltese  of  tlie  present  day.  That  opinion  is  incorrect.  Malta,  at  the  time  of  the  Saracer.  irruption,  was  over- 
run by  Arabs,  from  whom  the  common  people  of  the  island  derive  their  origin.  The  dialect  spoken  by  them 
IS  a  corrupt  Aral>ic,  agreeing  essentially  with  that  of  the  Moors,  but  intermixed  to  a  gr  ater  extent  wiili  words 
from  the  Italian,  Spanish,  and  other  European  languages.  The  Maltese  language  approaches  so  nearlv  to  the 
Arabic  that  the  islanders  are  readily  understood  in  all  the  ports  of  Africa  and  Syria.  Gesenius  first  inves- 
tigated thoroughly  this  dialect  in  his  f'ersuch  iit»r  die  maltesische  Sprache,  etc.  (Leipzig,  ISIO'.  He  has  given  the 
results  of  this  investigation  in  his  article  on  "Arabien"  in  Ersch  ,m,i  (h-i.bn',  Encvktopwiie.  In  his  ffi.slon/  of 
the  Hebrew  Lmujmige  he  remarks  that,  although  the  ancestral  pride  of  the  Maltese  themselves  may  dispo^ 
them  to  traee  b.ick  their  language  lo  the  old  Punic,  yet  it  contains  nothing  which  is  not  e.xplained'far  more 
niiturally  out  of  the  modern  Arabic  than  as  the  product  of  so  ancient  a  tongue. 
2  Principles  of  (Jeulor/y  (7th  ed.;,  p.  655. 


314 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIIL 


4  And  when  the  barbarians  saw  the  renmions  beast 
hai  g  on  his  hand,  they  said  among  themselves,  N" 
doubt  this  man  is  a  murderer,  \vh"m,  though  he  hath 
escaped  the  sea,  yet  vengeance  suflereth  not  to  live. 

r<  And  he  shook  off  the  beast  into  the  tire,  and  "felt 
no  harm. 

6  Howbeit  they  loolted  when  he  should  have  swollen, 
or  fallen  down  dead  suddenly:  but  after  they  had 
looked  a  great  while,  and  saw  no  harm  come  to  him, 
they  changed  their  minds,  and  'said  that  he  was  a  god. 

7  In  the   same    quarters    were   possessions  of  the 


4  on  his  hand.  And  when  the  barbarians  saw  the 
beast  hanging  from  his  hand,  they  said  one  to  an- 
other, No  doubt  this  man  is  a  murderer,  whom, 
though  he  hath  escaped  from  the  sea,  yet  Justice 

5  hath  not  suHered  to  live.     Howbeit  he  shook  olf  the 
6 beast   into  the  tire,  and   took   no  harm.     But  they 

e.xpected  that  he  would  have  swollen,  or  fallen 
down  dead  suddenly :  but  when  they  were  long 
in  expectation,  and  beheld  nothing  amiss  crme 
to  him,  they  changed  their  minds,  and  said  that 
he  was  a  god. 
7     Now  in  the  neighborhood  of  that  place  were  lands 


:  Mark  16  :  18  ;  Luke  10  :  19 b  ch.  14:11. 


the  causal  sense.    The  viper  was  probably  in  i 
a  torpid  state,  and  was  suddenly  restored  to  , 
activity  by  the  heat.     It  was  now  cold,  in  con-  i 
sequence  both  of  the  storm  and  the  lateness  of  | 
the  season  (v.  2) ;  and  sucli  reptiles  become  tor-  j 
pid  as  soon  as  the  temperature  falls  sensibly 
below    the    mean    temperature   of  the    place 
wliich    tliey    inhabit.      Vipers,    too,    lurk    in 
rocky  places,  and  that  is  the  character  of  the 
region  where  the  incident  occurred.     They  are 
accustomed,   also,   to  dart    at    their    enemies, 
sometimes  several  feet  at  a  bound ;  and  hence 
the  one  mentioned  here  could   have  reached 
the  hand  of  Paul  as  he  stood  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  fire.i     Instead  of  having  come  forth 
(«|eA,}oOo-a,  T.  R.),  the  more  descriptive  Uf^^x^ovaa. 
(Tsch,   Mey.)   represents    the  viper   as   having 
come  forth   (from  the  fire)   through  the  sticks 
among  which   it  was   taken  up. — Fastened 
itself,   in    the    sense    of   the    middle.      This 
reflexive  use  of  the  active  occurs  only  here, 
which  accounts  for  the  middle  form,  as  read 
in  some  copies. 

4.  Now  as  the  barbarians  saAV  the  ani- 
mal hanging  from  his  hand,  to  which  it 
clung  by  the  mouth.  Aristotle  also  uses  animal 
{■^piov)  of  the  viper.  That  it  was  "  venomous  " 
(E.  V.)  results,  not  from  this  mode  of  designa- 
tion, but  from  echidna.  .Luke  does  not  say  ex- 
pressly that  Paul  was  bitten,  but  the  nature  of 
the  reptile,  the  leap,  the  clinging  to  his  hand, 
leave  us  to  infer  that  with  almost  entire  cer- 
tainty. Those  who  stood  near  and  witnessed 
the  occurrence  supposed,  evidently,  that  such 
was  the  fact.  That  lie  should  have  escaped 
being  bitten  under  such  circumstances  would 
have  been  hardly  less  miraculous  than  that  the 
ordinary  effect  of  the  poison  should  liave  been 
counteracted.  We  seem  to  be  justified,  accord- 
ing to  either  view,  in  regarding  his  preservation 
as  a  fulfilment  of  the  promise  of  Christ  in  Mark 
16  :  17,  18.  On  the  form  of  the  participle 
(Kpend^tpov),  see  K.  §  179.  5.— This  man  is  a 
murderer.     They  perceived  from  his  chain. 


perhaps,  or  some  other  indication,  that  Paul 
was  a  prisoner.  The  attack  of  the  viper  proved 
to  them  that  he  must  have  committed  some 
atrocious  crime.  Murderer  points,  not  to  a 
specific  off"ence,  but  to  the  class  of  olfenders  to 
which  they  supposed  he  might  belong. — Jus- 
tice suffered  not  to  live.  Observe  the  past 
tense.  They  considered  his  doom  as  sealed. 
Vengeance,  in  their  view,  had  already  smitten 
his  victim. 

5.  Suffered  no  evil.  This  statement  agrees 
with  the  supposition  either  that  he  had  not 
been  bitten  or  that  the  poison  had  produced  no 
effect  upon  him. 

6.  When  he  should  have  swollen,  or 
that  he  Avould  be  inflamed  (lit.  burn), 
since  inflammation  is  attended  witli  heat. — 
Or  that  he  would  suddenly  fall  down 
dead.  Sudden  C(jllai)se  and  death  ensue  often 
from  the  bite  of  serpents.  Shakesi)eare  speaks 
as  a  naturalist  when  he  says  of  the  asp-bitten 
Cleopatra, 

"  Trembling  she  stood,  and  on  the  sudden  dropped." 

— No  harm — lit.  nothing  bad,  injurions;  in 

a  moral  sense  in  Luke  23  :  41.— Changed  may 
take  after  it  their  mind  or  omit  it. — That  he 
was  a  god.  Bengel :  ''Aut  latro,  inquiunt,  aut 
deus;  sic  modo  tauri,  modo.lapides  (u  ;  in,  19). 
Datur  tertium :  homo  Dei  "  ["  Either  a  robber, 
or  a  god;  thus  now  bullocks,  now  .stones  (u  : 
13,  19).     There  is  a  tliird  :  man  of  God." — A.  H.]. 

7.  Around  that  place,  the  one  where  they 
were  wrecked.  Tradition  places  the  residence 
of  Publius  at  Citta  Veccliia,  the  Medina  of  the 
Saracens,  which,  though  in  the  centre  of  Malta, 
is  but  a  few  miles  froin  the  coast.  (Sec  on  v.  1.) 
—There  can  be  no  doubt  that  Publius  is 
called  the  first  (or  chief)  of  the  island  be- 
cause he  was  the  Roman  governor.  Melita 
was  first  conquered  by  the  Romans  during  the 
Punic  wars,  and  in  the  time  of  Cicero  (4  Ver. 
c.  18)  was  annexed  to  the  pnetorship  of  Sicily. 
The  prifitor  of  that  island  would  naturally  have 


1  For  the  information  in  this  note  concerning  the  habits  of  the  viper,  I  am  ii.debted  chiefly  to  Professor 
cassiz  of  Cambridge. 


Agassiz  of  Cambridge, 


Ch.  XXVIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


315 


chief  man  of  the  island,  whose  name  was  Publius; 
who  received  us,  and  lodged  us  three  days  courteously. 

8  And  it  cauie  to  jtass,  that  the  father  of  I'ublius  lay 
sick  of  a  fever  and  of  a  bloody  llux :  to  whom  I'aul  en- 
tered in,  and  "prayed,  and  'laid  his  hands  upon  him, 
and  healed  him. 

9  So  when  this  was  done,  others  also,  which  had  dis- 
eases in  the  island,  came,  and  were  healed : 

10  Who  also  hon(»red  us  with  many  •'honors;  and 
when  we  departed,  they  laded  us  with  such  things  as 
were  necessary. 


belonging  to  the  chief  man  of  the  island,  named  Pub- 
lius; who  received  us,  and  entertained  us  three  days 
8 courteously.     And  it  was  so,  that  the  father  of  I'ub- 
lius  lay  sick  of  fever  and  dysentery  :    unto  whom 
Paul  entered  in,  and  prayed,  and  laying  his  hands 
9  on  him  healed  him.     And  wlien  this  was  done,  the 
rest  also  who  had  diseases  in  the  island  came,  and 
10  were  cured:  who  also  honored  us  with  many  hon- 
ors; and  when  we  sailed,  they  put  on  board  such 
things  as  we  needed. 


a  James  5  :  14,  15 b  Mark  6:5;  T  :  32;  16:  18;  Luke  4  :  40;  cb.  19:  11,  12;  1  Cor.  12  :  9,  28 c  Matt.  15:6;  I  Tim.  5  :  17. 


a  legate  or  deputy  at  this  place.  The  title  first 
(rrpuiTot),  under  which  he  is  mentioned  here, 
has  been  justly  cited  by  apologetic  writers,  as 
Tlioluck,  Ebrard,  Krabbe,  Baumgarten,  Lard- 
ner,  Paley,  Conybeare  and  Howson,  as  a  strik- 
ing proof  of  Luke's  accuracy.  No  other  ancient 
Avriter  happens  t(j  have  given  his  official  desig- 
nation ;  but  two  inscrii)tions,  one  in  Greek  and 
the  other  in  Latin,  have  been  discovered  in 
Malta,  in  which  we  meet  with  the  same  title 
employed  by  Luke  in  this  passage.^  It  is  im- 
possible to  believe  that  Publius  or  any  other 
single  individual  would  be  called  the  first  man 
in  the  island,  except  by  way  of  official  emi- 
nence.    It  will  be  observed  that  the  fiither  of 


8.  Sick   of  a  fever— lit.  of  fevers.    The 

plural  has  been  suppose<l  to  describe  the  fever 
with  reference  to  its  recurrent  attacks  or  par- 
oxysms. This  is  one  of  those  expressions  in 
Luke's  writings  that  have  been  supposed  to 
indicate  his  professional  training  as  a  phy- 
sician. (See  also  12  :  23 ;  13  :  11 ;  and  espe- 
cially the  comparison  {His  sweat  was  as  it  were 
great  drops  of  blood  falling  down,  etc.)  in  his 
Gospel  (22:44).)  It  is  correct  to  attach  to  them 
that  significancy.  No  other  Avriter  of  the  New 
Testament  exhibits  this  sort  of  technical  pre- 
cision in  speaking  of  diseases.  The  disorder 
with  which  the  father  of  Publius  was  affected 
was  dvsenterv  combined  with   fever.    It  was 


Publius  was  still  living,  and  during  his  lifetime  >  formerly  asserted  that  a  dry  climate  like  that 
he  would  naturally  have  taken  precedence  of  i  of  Malta  -would  not  produce  such  a  disorder, 


the  son,  had  the  distinction  in  this  case  been 
one  which  belonged  to  the  family .^ — Lodged, 
or  better  entertained,  us — viz.  Luke,  Paul, 
Aristarchus  (27 : 2),  and  no  doubt  the  noble- 
hearted  Julius;  not  the  entire  two  hundred 
and  seventy-six  (Bmg.),  as  so  indiscriminate  a 
hospitality  would  be  uncalled  for  and  without 
any  sufficient  motive. 


but  we  have  now  the  testimony  of  i>hysicians 
resident  in  that  island  that  it  is  by  no  means 
uncommon  there  at  the  present  day. 

10.  Who  also,  on  their  part — i.  e.  while 
they  came  and  were  healed  of  their  maladies. 
— Honored  us  (viz.  Paul  and  his  companions) 
Avith  many  honors,  courtesies.  They  Avere 
entertained  with  a  generous  hospitality,  and 

1  "  The  one  in  Greek  is  supposed  to  form  a  votive  iiiscriptjon  by  a  Roman  knight,  named  Aulus  Castricius, '  first 
of  the  Melitans'  (Trpirot  Mi\iTai<ov\  to  the  emperor.  Tlie  Latin  inscription  im  the  pedestal  of  a  column  was 
discovered  at  Citta  Vecchia,  in  excavating  tlie  foundation  of  the  Casa  del  Magistrato,  in  1747." 

-  I  have  allowed  this  note  to  remain  as  it  stood  in  the  other  edition,  as  it  represents  the  general  opinion 
of  scholars  respecting  the  official  rank  of  Publius.  Yet  it  is  possible  that  they  have  erred  in  assigning  this 
precise  import  to  the  title.  I  insert,  with  thanks  for  the  suggestion,  the  lollowing  criticism  of  President 
Woolsey  on  this  point:  "The  best  information  whicli  wo  can  obtain  respecting  the  situation  of  Malta  at  the 
time  of  Pauls  visit  renders  it  doubtful,  to  say  the  least,  whether  the  interpreters  are  in  the  right  as  it  regards 
the  station  of  Publius.  In  a  Greek  iuscription  of  an  earlier  date  we  find  mention  made  of  two  persons  holding 
the  office  of  arc/ion  or  magistrate  in  the  island.  A  later  inscription  of  the  times  of  the  emperors  may  be 
translated  as  follows:  'Lucius  Pudens,  son  of  Claudius,  of  the  tribe  Quirina,  a  Roman  eque^.  first  [jrpuToV,  as 
in  -Vets]  and  patron  of  the  .Meliteans,  after  being  magistrate  and  having  held  the  post  of  flamen  to  Augustus, 
erected  this.'  Here  it  appears  that  the  person  named  was  still  chiel  man  of  the  island,  although  his  magistracy 
had  expired.  From  this  inscription  and  others  in  Latin  found  at  (io^^o,  it  is  probable  that  the  inhabita' ts 
of  both  islands  had  received  the  privilege  of  Ronia-i  citizenship  and  were  enrolled  in  the  tribe  Quirina.  The 
magistracy  was,  no  doubt,  that  of  the  Duumvirs,  the  usual  municipal  chief  officers.  The  other  titles  correspond 
with  titles  to  be  met  with  on  marbles  relating  to  towns  in  Italy.  Thus  the  title  of  c/iirf  corresponds  to  that 
of  princeps  in  the  colony  of  Pisa,  and  is  probably  no  more  a  name  of  office  than  the  title  of  /xi/ron.  For  no 
such  officer  is  known  to  have  existed  in  the  colonies  or  in  the  «s»»;c//<iV(,  and  the  primeps  o/onits  o(  Pisa  is 
mentioned  at  a  time  when  it  is  said  that,  owing  to  a  contention  between  candidates,  there  were  no  magis- 
trates." 

The  difference  does  not  affect  the  value  of  the  alleged  proof  of  the  narrator's  accuracy ;  for  in  either  case  the 
term  is  a  Roman  title,  and  is  applied  by  Luke  to  a  person  who  bears  it  at  the  right  time  and  in  the  right 
place.  Indeed,  the  appellation  of  princr  or palnm  would  be  more  striking  than  that  of  m'l./ixfnile,  inasmuch  as 
the  range  of  its  application  is  narrower,  and  a  writer  who  was  not  stati  g  the  truth  would  be  more  liable  to 
introduce  it  under  circumstances  that  would  render  it  inadmissible. 


31(5 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


11  And  after  three  months  we  departed  in  a  ship  of 
Alexandria,  which  had  wintered  in  the  isle,  whose  sign 
was  Castor  and  1  ollux. 

12  And  landing  at  Syracuse,  we  tarried  there  three 
days. 

13  And  from  thence  we  fetched  a  compass,  and  came 
to  Khegium :  and  alter  one  day  the  south  wind  blew, 
and  we" came  the  next  day  to  Futeoli: 


11      And  after  three  months  we  set  sail  in  a  ship  of 
Alexandria,    which    had   wintered    in    the    island, 
12wh(]se  sign  was  I'l'he  Twin  iJrothers.     And  touch- 
13ing  at  Syracuse,  we  tarried  there  three  days.     And 
from  thence  we  ^made  a  circuit,  and  arrived  at  Khe- 
gium :  and  after  oue  day  a  south  wind  sprang  up, 


1  Gr.  Dioscuri 'Z  Some  nncient  authorities  read  cast  loose. 


distinguished  by  marks  of  special  regard  and 
kindness.  Some  render  the  Greek  word  {riixaU) 
rewards  or  presents ;  but  tlie  next  clause  appears 
to  limit  their  reception  of  the  favors  in  ques- 
tion to  the  time  of  their  departure  and  to  the 
relief  of  their  necessary  wants.  It  is  certain 
that  they  did  not  even  then  accept  the  gifts 
which  were  proffered  to  them  as  a  reward  for 
their  services;  for  that  would  have  been  at 
variance  with  the  command  of  Christ  in 
Matt.  10  :  8. 

11-16.  PROSECUTION  OF  THE  JOUR- 
NEY  TO   ROME. 

11.  After  three  months.  The  three  months 
are  the  time  that  they  remained  on  the  island. 
They  were  probably  the  months  of  November, 
December,  and  January.  The  season  may  have 
admitted  of  their  putting  to  sea  earlier  than 
usual.  The  arrival  at  Melita  could  not  have 
been  later  than  October,  for  a  brief  interval 
only  lay  between  the  fast  (27 : 9)  and  the  begin- 
ning of  the  storm  {■n -.i-j). — In  a  ship  which 
had  wintered  there.  Luke  does  not  state 
why  tliis  vessel  liad  wintered  here.  It  is  a 
circumstance  which  shows  the  consistency  of 
the  narrative.  The  storm  which  occasioned 
the  wreck  of  Paul's  vessel  had  delayed  this 
one  so  long  that  it  was  necessary,  on  reach- 
ing Melita,  to  suspend  the  voyage  until  spring. 
This  vessel  had  been  during  the  winter  at  Va- 
letta,  which  must  always  have  been  the  prin- 
cii^al  harbor  of  Malta. — With  the  sign  Dios- 
curi, or  distinguished  by  Dioscuri — i.  e. 
having  images  of  Castor  and  Pollux  painted  or 
carved  on  the  prow,  from  which  images  the 
vessel  may  have  been  named.  This  use  of 
figure-heads  on  ancient  ships  was  very  com- 
mon. (See  Diet,  of  Antt.,  Art.  "  Insigne.") 
Castor  and  Pollux  were  the  favorite  gods  of 
seamen,  the  winds  and  waves  being  supposed 
to  be  specially  subject  to  their  control.  It  is  of 
them  that  Horace  says  (Od.,  1.  12.  27-32;  see, 
also,  Od.,  1.  3.  2) : 


"  Quorum  simul  alba  nautis 

Stella  refiilsit, 
Defluit  saxis  agitatus  humor; 
Concidunt  venti,  fugiuntque  nubes, 
Et  minax  (quod  sic  voluere)  poiito 

Unda  recumbit."  1 

The  sign  (napacr^fia))  may  be  a  noun  or  an  ad- 
jective. The  former  appears  to  have  been  most 
common  in  this  aiiplication.  The  other  con- 
struction is  easier  as  regards  the  dative,  and  is 
preferred  by  De  Wette. 

VZ.  At  Syracuse.  This  city,  the  capital  of 
Sicilj',  on  the  south-eastern  coast  of  that  island, 
was  about  eighty  miles  north  from  Melita.  It 
was  built  partly  on  the  adjacent  island  of  Or- 
tygia,  and  from  that  circumstance,  or,  as  others 
say,  because  it  included  at  length  several  vil- 
lages, may  have  received  its  plural  name.  The 
modern  Siracusa,  or  Siragossa,  occupies  only 
a  part  of  the  ancient  city — viz.  Ortygia  (Forbg.). 
— We  tarried.  They  may  have  stopped  here 
for  trade,  or  in  the  hope  of  a  better  wind. 

13,  Fetched  a  compass  —  lit.  having 
come  around,  or  about.  The  sense  of  the 
preposition  it  is  impossible  to  determine  with 
certainty.  One  supposition  is  that  it  refers  to 
their  frequent  alteration  of  the  ship's  course; 
in  other  words,  to  their  tacking,  because  the 
wind  was  unfavorable.  So  Smitli,  Conybeare 
and  Howson,  and  others  explain  the  word.  Mr. 
Lewin  thinks  that  "  as  the  wind  was  westerly, 
and  they  were  under  the  shelter  of  the  high 
mountainous  range  of  Etna,  tJiey  were  obliged 
to  stand  out  to  sea,  in  order  to  fill  their  sails, 
and  so  come  to  Rhegium  by  a  circuitous 
sweep."  2  Another  view  is  that  they  were 
compelled  by  the  wind  to  follow  closely  the 
sinuosities  of  the  -coast,  to  proceed  circuitously. 
De  Wette  says — whicli  is  much  less  probable — 
that  they  may  have  gone  around  Sicily,  or  the 
southern  extremity  of  Italy.— Unto  Rhegium, 
now  Reggio,  which  was  an  Italian  seaport  op- 
posite to  the  north-eastern  point  of  Sicily.   Here 


1  ["  As  soon  as  their  propitious  star  has  shone  out  upon  the  mariners,  the  heaving  water  flows  down  from  the 
roclcs,  the  winds  fall,  the  clouds  flee  away,  and  the  threatening  wave  (for  so  have  they  willed)  sinks  down  upon 
the  sea."] 

2  "  I  was  informed  by  a  friend  many  years  ago  that  when  he  made  the  voyage  himself  from  Syracuse  to  Ehe- 
gium,  the  vessel  in  which  he  sailed  took  a  nimilar  circuit,  for  a  similar  reason  "  (Leiiin,  ii.  p.  736). 


Ch.  XXVIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


317 


they  remained  a  day,  when  the  wind,  which  had 
been  adverse  since  their  leavinj^  Syracuse,  be- 
came fair,  and  they  resumed  the  voyage.  Tlie 
steamers  between  Naples  and  Malta  touch  at 
Messina,  and  Reggio  appears  in  full  view  on 
the  Italian  side.     If  Paul  pjissed  here  in  Feb- 


nals  is  classical.  (K.  §  2G4. 3.  b.) — To  Puteoli. 
Puteoli,  now  Puzzuoli,  was  eight  miles  north- 
west from  Neapolis,  the  modern  Naples.  It  de- 
rived its  name  from  tlie  springs  (piUei)  wliich 
abound  there,  or  from  the  odor  of  the  waters 
(a  putendo)}    Its  earlier  Greek  name  was  iVt- 


THE    MOLE   OF    PUTEOLI. 


ruary  (v.  11,  above),  the  mountains  on  the 
island  and  on  the  main  land  were  still  cov- 
ered with  snow,  and  presented  to  the  eye  a 
dreary  aspect. — A  south  wind  having  arisen 
on  them.  (Comp.  the  compound  participle  in 
V.  2  and  in  27  :  20.  The  dative  of  the  person  is 
often  expressed  after  ini  with  tliis  force.  See 
Herod.,  8.  13.) — On  the  second  day.  (Comp. 
John  11  :  39.)     This  adverbial  use  of  the  ordi- 


knirnrcheia.  It  was  the  ])rincipal  port  south  of 
Rome.  Nearly  all  tlie  Alexandrian  and  a  great 
part  of  the  Spanish  trade  with  Italy  was 
brought  hither.  The  seventy-seventh  Letter 
of  Seneca  gives  a  lively  description  of  the  in- 
terest which  the  arrival  of  tlie  corn-sliips  from 
Egypt  was  accustomed  to  excite  among  the  in- 
habitants of  that  time.  A  mole  with  twenty- 
five  arches  stretched  itself  into  the  sea  at  the 


1  As  examples,  travellers  will  recollect  the  Grotto  del  Cane  near  Cumse,  and  the  Eaths  of  Nero  at  Eaia. 


318 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


entrance  of  this  bay,  alongside  of  which  the 
vessels  as  they  arrived  cast  anchor  for  the  de- 
livery of  their  freight  and  passengers.  Thirteen 
of  the  piers  which  upheld  this  immense  struc- 
ture show  their  forms  still  above  the  water,  and 
point  out  to  us  as  it  were  the  very  footsteps  of 
the  apostle  as  he  passed  from  the  ship  to  the 
land. — The  voyage  from  Rhegium  to  Puteoli, 
which  the  Castor  and  Pollux  accomplished  in 
less  than  two  days,  was  about  one  hundred 


mentions  several  voyages  which  would  be  con- 
sidered very  good  in  modern  times.  He  says 
that  the  prefects  Galerius  and  Babilius  arrived 
at  Alexandria,  the  former  on  the  seventh,  the 
latter  on  the  sixth,  day  after  leaving  the  Straits 
of  Messina.  He  states,  also,  that  passages  were 
made,  under  favorable  circumstances,  from  the 
Straits  of  Hercules  to  Ostia,  in  seven  days  ;  from 
the  nearest  port  of  Spain,  in  four;  from  the 
province  of   Narbonne,   in  three;    and    from 


KOUTE   OF   P.iUL    ALONG    THE    VIA    APPIA    FROM    PUTEOLI   TO    ROME. 


and  eighty  miles.  The  passage,  therefore,  was 
a  rapid  one,  but,  as  examples  of  the  ancient 
rate  of  sailing  show,  not  unprecedented.  He- 
rodotus states  that  a  ship  could  sail  seven  hun- 
dred stadia  in  a  day  and  six  hundred  in  a  night 
— (■.  c.  thirteen  hundred  in  twenty-four  hours — 
which  would  be  at  the  rate  of  about  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  English  miles  a  day.  Strabo 
says  that  a  voyage  could  be  made  from  Sammo- 
nium  to  Egypt  in  four  days,  reckoning  the  dis- 
tance at  five  thousand  stadia,  or  about  five  hun- 
dred and  seventy-three  miles.  This  would  be 
sailing  one  hundred  and  forty-three  miles  in 
twenty-four  hours,  or  six  miles  an  hour.    Pliny 


Africa,  in  two.  Probably  the  most  rapid  run 
mentioned  by  any  ancient  writer  is  that  of 
Arrian,  in  his  Periplus  of  the  Euxine,  who  says 
that  "  they  got  under  way  about  daybreak,"  and 
that  by  midday  they  had  come  more  than  five 
hundred  stadia— that  is,  more  than  fifty  geo- 
graphical miles,  which  is  at  least  eight  miles 
an  hour.i  xhe  mean  of  the  foregoing  exam- 
ples is  seven  miles  an  hour ;  and  if  we  suppose 
that  the  Castor  and  Pollux  sailed  at  that  rate, 
the  passage  would  have  required  only  about 
twenty-six  hours.  This  result  agrees  perfectly 
with  Luke's  account ;  for  he  states  that  they 
left  Rhegium  on  one  day  and  arrived  at  Puteoli 


1  I  have  relied  for  these  statements  partly  on  Forbiger,  and  partly  on  Biscoe  and  Smith. 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE   ACTS. 


319 


14  Where  we  found  brethren,  and  were  des'red  to 
tarry  with  them  seven  days:  and  so  we  went  toward 

Konie.  ,     ,       ,         ■        J    r 

15  And  from  thence,  when  the  brethren  heard  of  us, 
they  came  to  meet  us  as  far  as  Appii  forum,  and  The 
three  taverns :  whom  when  Paul  saw,  he  thanked  God, 
and  took  courage. 

16  And  when  we  came  to  Rome,  the  centurion  de- 
livered the  prisoners  to  the  captain  of  the  guard :  but 


14  and  on  the  second  day  we  came  to  Puteoli :  where 
we  found  brethren,  and  were  intreated  to  tarry 
with  them  seven  days:  and  so  we  came  to  home. 

15  And  from  thence  the  brethren,  when  they  heard  of 
us,  came  to  meet  us  as  far  as  The  Market  of  Appius, 
and  The  Three  Taverns :  whom  when  Paul  saw,  he 
thanked  (iod,  and  took  courage. 

16  And  when  we  entered  into  Kome,  iPaul  was  suf* 


1  Some  ancient  authorities  insert  the  centurion  delivered  the  prisoners  to  the  captain  of  the  pratorian  guard:  but. 


on  the  next.  Their  course,  it  will  be  observed, 
was  nearly  due  north,  and  they  were  favored 
with  a  south  wind. 

14.  With  (lit.  upon)  them.  (Comp.  21  :  4.) 
The  local  idea  blends  itself  with  the  personal. 
(See  W.  ^  48.  c.)— Seven  days,  or  a  week.  (Sec 
on  20  :  6.)  They  had  an  opportunity  to  spend 
a  Sabbath  with  the  Christians  tliere.  The  cen- 
turion granted  this  delay,  not  improbably,  in 
order  to  gratify  the  wishes  of  Paul.  After  such 
events  the  prisoner  would  have  a  power  over 
his  keeper  well  nigh  unbounded.  In  the  mean 
time,  the  news  of  the  apostle's  arrival  would 
travel  to  Rome,  and  thus  prepare  the  way  for 
what  we  read  in  the  next  verse. — And  so,  afier 
the  interval  thus  spent,  Ave  went  unto  Rome, 
not  came,  unless  the  remark  be  proleptic.  The 
incidents  in  v.  15  occur  on  tlie  way  thither.  On 
leaving  Puteoli,  Julius  and  his  party  would  pro- 
ceed naturally  to  Capua,  about  twelve  miles, 
the  nearest  point  for  intersecting  the  Appian 
Way.  The  distance  from  Capua  to  Rome  by 
this  road  was  about  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
five  miles. 1 

15.  Two  companies  of  the  Christians  at  Rome 
went  forth  to  meet  the  apostle,  but  separately 
and  at  different  times.  Hence  the  advanced 
party  reached  Appii  Forum,  about  forty  miles 
from  Rome,  before  Paul  appeared;  the  later 
party  met  him  at  Tres  Tabernse  (E.  V.  Three 
Taverns),  which  was  thirty  miles  from  Rome 
{Itiner.  Antonin.).  Other  estimates  (Iliner.  Hi- 
eros.)  place  Appii  Forum  a  few  miles  nearer  to 
Rome.  This  town  was  named  from  Appius 
Claudius  Ctecus,  who  built  the  Appian  Way. 
It  lay  on  the  northern  border  of  the  Pontine 
Marshes,  at  the  end  of  the  canal  which  ex- 
tended thither  from  a  point  a  few  miles  above 
Anxur  or  Terracina.  Horace  (Sat.,  1.  5.  4) 
speaks  of  Appii  Forum  as  "  full  of  boatmen," 
who  were  engaged  in  forwarding  passengers 
over  this  canal,  a  distance  of  twenty  miles. 
The  Appian  Way  ran  near  the  canal,  and  it 
would  depend  on  circumstances  unknown  to 


us  whether  the  centurion  travelled  in  one  moda 
or  the  other.  Strabo  mentions  that  night-trav- 
ellers (as  in  the  case  of  Horace)  usually  pre- 
ferred the  boat.  The  present  Locanda  di  Foro 
Appio,  a  wretched  inn,  marks,  probably,  the 
site  of  Appii  Forum.  It  is  almost  tiie  only 
human  shelter  in  the  midst  of  a  solitude  en- 
livened once  by  incessant  commerce  and  travel. 
—  Three  Taverns,  as  appears  from  one  of 
Cicero's  letters  to  Atticus  (2 :  12),  must  Ijave  been 
near  where  the  cross-road  from  Antium  fell  into 
the  Appian  Way.  It  is  thought  to  have  been 
not  far  from  the  modern  Cisterna,  the  bulk  of 
which  lies  on  the  traveller's  left  in  going  from 
Rome  to  Naples,  under  the  shadow  of  tlie 
Volscian  hills.— Whom  Paul  seeing  gave 
thanks  to  God  and  took  courage.  He 
may  have  met  a  few  of  the  Roman  Christians 
in  foreign  lands,  but  was  a  stranger  to  nearly 
all  of  them  except  in  name,  and  would  ap- 
proach the  city  with  the  natural  anxiety  of  one 
who  had  yet  to  learn  what  feelings  they  enter- 
tained toward  him.  Such  a  cordial  reception, 
such  impatience  to  see  him  and  welcome  liim 
to  their  hearts,  would  scatter  all  his  doubts  and 
thrill  his  bosom  with  gratitude  and  ji:)y.  The 
church  at  Rome  contained  heathen  converts  as 
well  as  Jewish.  The  apostle  of  the  Gentiles 
would  see  a  special  cause  for  encouragement 
and  thanksgiving  in  the  presence  of  such  wit- 
nesses of  the  success  of  the  gospel  in  the  great 
metropolis. 

16.  As  Paul  travelled  on  the  Apjnan  Way,  he 
must  have  entered  Rome  through  theCapenian 
Gate,  not  far  from  the  modern  Porta  San  Se- 
bastiano.  —  The  centurion  delivered  the 
prisoners  to  the  commander  of  the  camp 
— i.  e.  the  pra?torian  camp,  where  the  emperor's 
body-guard  was  quartered.  (See  Pliil.  1  :  13.) 
This  caiup,  or  garrison,  liad  been  built  by  Se- 
janus,  the  favorite  of  Tiberius,  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  Porta  Nomentana  (Win.).  The  exact  spot 
is  known  to  be  that  within  the  projection  at 
the  north-east  corner  of  the  present  city  wall. 


1  Conybeare  and  Howson's  map  of  this  journey  to  the  city  will  enable  the  reader  to  follow  the  apostle's  course 
very  distinctly.  [It  gives  the  Campanian  or  Consular  road  from  Puteoli  to  Capua.  Lewin  'Life  and  Epli/les  of 
Paul,  whose  map  is  given)  thinks  he  went  by  the  coast  road  from  Cumae  to  Sinuessa,  and  there  struck  the  Ap- 
pian Way.] 


320 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


"Paul  was  suffered  to  dwell  by  himself  with  a  soldier 
that  kept  him. 


fered  to  abide  by   himself   with  the  soldier  that 
guarded  him. 


och.  24  :  25;  '27  :  3 


Nearly  all  critics  at  present,  as  Olshausen, 
Anger,  De  Wette,  Meyer,  "Wieseler,  suppose 
this  officer— i.  e.  the  prsefectus  jyrxtorio— to  be 
meant  here.  The  prisoners  wlio  were  sent  to 
Rome  from  tlie  provinces  were  committed  to  his 
custody.  There  is  a  difference  of  opinion  in  re- 
gard to  the  article.  The  command  of  the  prte- 
torian   guard  was  originally  divided    between 


sole  prefect  at  that  time,  and  he  urges  the  ex- 
pression as  a  reason  for  assigning  tlie  apostle's 
arrival  to  a.  d.  62.  or  the  year  preceding.  It  is 
very  possible  that  this  view  is  the  correct  one. 
It  would  furnish  a  striking  coincidence  between 
Luke's  narrative  and  the  history  of  the  times. 
Yet,  in  speaking  of  the  prefect,  the  writer  may 
have  meant  the  one  who  actdl  in  this  particular 


FIFTH    MILE   OF   THE    VIA    AI'PIA,    RESTOKED. 


two  prefects  ;  but  during  the  reign  of  Claudius, 
Burrus  Afranius,  a  distinguished  Roman  gen- 
eral, was  appointed  sole  prsqfectus  prxtorio,  and 
retained  this  office  as  late,  certainly,  as  the  be- 
ginning of  A.  D.  62.  On  his  death  the  command 
was  committed  again  to  two  prefects,  as  it  had 
been  at  first ;  and  this  continued  to  be  the  ar- 
rangement until  a  late  period  of  the  empire. 
The  time  of  Paul's  arrival  at  Rome  could  not 
have  been  far  from  a.  n.  62,  as  admits  of  being 
shown  by  an  independent  calculation.  (See 
Introd.,  ?  6.  5.)  Wieseler  (p.  86)  supposes  the 
commander  of  the  camp  to  refer  to  Burrus,  as 
1  [This  clause  is  uow  omitted  by 


case,  the  one  who  took  into  his  charge  the  pris- 
oners whom  the  centurion  transferred  to  liim, 
whether  he  was  sole  prefect  or  had  a  colleague 
with  him.  (Comp.  24  :  23.)  De  Wette  assents 
to  Meyer  in  this  explanation  of  the  article. 
The  expression,  as  so  understood,  does  not  af- 
firm that  there  was  but  one  prefect,  or  deny  it.^ 
—But  Paul  was  suffered— lit.  but  it  Avas 
permitted  to  Paul  (i.  e.  by  the  prefect  to 
whom  he  liad  been  consigned) — to  dwell  by 
himself,  instead  of  being  confined  with  tlie 
other  prisoners.  This  was  a  favor  which  the 
Roman  laws  often  granted  to  those  who  were 
the  best  editors.— A.  H.] 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


321 


17  And  it  came  to  pass,  that  after  three  days  Paul 
called  the  chief  of  the  Jews  together:  and  when  they 
were  come  together,  he  said  unto  them,  Men  and 
brethren,  "though  I  have  committed  nothing  against 
the  people,  or  customs  of  our  fathers,  yet  'was  I  deliv- 
ered prisoner  from  Jerusalem  into  the  hands  of  the 
Romans. 

18  Who,  'when  they  had  examined  me,  would  have 
let  me  go,  because  there  was  no  cause  of  death  in  nie. 

19  But  when  the  Jews  spake  against  it,  i*!  was  con- 
strained to  appeal  nntoCa;sar;  not  that  I  had  ought 
to  accuse  my  nation  of. 

20  For  this  cause  therefore  have  I  called  for  you,  to 
see  you,  and  to  speak  with  you :  because  that  "for  the 
hope  of  Israel  I  am  bound  with  /this  chain. 


17  And  it  came  to  pass,  that  after  three  days  he 
called  together  'those  that  were  the  chief  of  the 
Jews :  and  when  they  were  come  together,  he  said 
unto  them,  I,  brethren,  though  I  had  done  nothing 
against  the  people,  or  the  customs  of  our  fathers, 
yet  was  delivered  prisoner  from  Jerusalem  into  the 

18  hands  of  the  Konians:  who,  when  they  had  exam- 
ined me,  desired  to  set  me  at  liberty,  because  there 

19  was  no  cause  of  death  in  nie.  But  when  the  Jews 
spake  against  it,  I  was  constrained  to  appeal  unto 
Cuisar ;  not  that  I  had  aught  to  accuse  my  nation  of. 

"20  For  this  cause  therefore  did  I  ^intreat  you  to  see 
and  to  speak  with  me:  for  because  of  the  hope  of 


och.  24  :  12,  13;   25  :  8 5  ch.  21  :  33 c  ch.  22  :  24  ;    24  :  10  ;   25  :  8  ;   26  :  31 d  ch.  25  :  11 e  ch.  26  :  6,  7 /  ch.  26  :  29:   Eph. 

:i  1  1 :  4  :  I  ;  6  :  20 ;  2  Tim.  I  :  16 ;  2  ;  S» ;  Fhilem.  10,  13. 1  Or,  those  that  were  of  the  Jews  first 2  Or,  call  far  you,  to  see  and  to 

apeak  with  you 


not  suspected  of  any  very  serious  offence.  The 
centurion,  wlio  had  already  sliown  himself  so 
friendly  to  the  apostle,  may  have  interceded  for 
him,  or  the  terms  in  which  Festus  had  reported 
the  case  (see  on  26  :  32)  may  have  conciliated 
the  prefect.  In  the  use  of  this  liberty,  Paul  re- 
paired first  to  the  house  of  some  friend  (v.  23), 
and  afterward  rented  an  apartment  for  his  own 
use  (v.  30). — With  the  soldier  who  guarded 
him,  and  to  whom  he  was  fastened  by  acliain. 
Different  soldiers  relieved  each  other  in  the  per- 
formance of  tliis  office.  Hence,  as  Paul  states 
in  Phil.  1  :  13,  he  became  in  the  course  of  time 
personally  known  to  a  great  number  of  the 
praitorian  soldiers,  and  through  tliem  to  their 
comrades.  The  notoriety  which  lie  tlius  ac- 
quired served  to  make  his  cliaracter  as  a  pris- 
oner for  the  sake  of  the  gospel  more  widely 
known,  and  tlms  to  aid  him  in  his  efforts  to 
extend  the  knowledge  of  Christ.  To  this  re- 
sult the  apostle  refers  in  Phil.  1  :  12,  sq. 

17-22.  PAUL  HAS  AN  INTERVIEW 
WITH  THE  CHIEF  MEN  OF  THE  JEWS 
AT   ROME. 

17.  After  three  days,  on  the  third  from 
his  arrival.  (Comp.  25  : 1.)  The  apostle's  un- 
tiring activity  is  manifest  to  the  last. — The 
Jews  are  the  unbelieving  Jeivs,  not  the  Jew- 
ish Christians.  Their  first  men  would  be  the 
rulers  of  the  synagogue,  or  would  include 
them. — Against  {ivavrCov)  governs  the  dative 
here,  as  in  1  Thess.  2:15.  (Comp.  2G:9.)— 
Though  I  have  committed,  better  though 
I  had  done. — From  Jerusalem,  whence 
he  had  been  sent  to  C;esarea. — Into  the  hands 
of  the  Romans— viz.  Felix  and  Festus,  who 
represented  their  countrymen.  The  remark 
applies  to  them,  as  is  evident  from  examined, 
in  the  next  verse. 

19.  Spake  against,  or  objecting,  describes 
very  mildly  tlie  opposition  of  the  .lews  to  the 
apostle's  acquittal.  Brethren,  the  people, 
21 


our  fathers,  Israel,  which  follow  so  rapid- 
ly breathe  the  same  conciliatory  spirit.  Such 
expressions  show  how  self-forgetting  Paul 
was,  how  ready  to  acknowledge  what  was 
common  to  his  opponents  and  himself.  —  I 
was  compelled  to  appeal  unto  Caesar, 
as  his  only  resort,  in  order  to  save  himself 
from  assassination  or  judicial  murder.  (Comp. 
25  :  9,  sq.)^Sot  that  I  had,  or  not  as  hav- 
ing  {i.  e.  because  I  had)  anything  (as  the 
motive  for  this  appeal)  to  charge  against 
my  nation — viz.  before  the  emperor.  The 
apostle  would  repel  a  su.spicion  which  he 
supposed  it  not  unnatural  for  the  Roman 
Jews  to  entertain,  or  po.ssibly  would  deny 
an  imputation  with  which  the  Jews  in  Pales- 
tine had  actually  aspersed  him  (Wiesl.).  Paul 
says  my  nation  {i^vov<:  ^ou),  and  not  peopU 
(see  Aacp  above),  because  the  word  Csesar,  just 
before,  distinguishes  the  Romans  and  the  Jews 
from  each  other. 

20.  On  this  account  therefore — viz.  that 
his  feelings  toward  the  Jews  were  so  friendly. — 
I  called,  invited,  you  that  I  might  see  you. 
Some  supi)ly  me  as  the  object  of  to  sec  [/.  e. 
called  you  to  see  me],  which  destroys  the  unity 
of  the  sentence. — For  on  account  of  the 
hope  of  Israel — (.  c.  the  hope  of  a  Messiah 
which  the  nation  entertained.  (Comp.  20  :  6.) 
This  clause  is  co-ordinate  with  the  one  which 
precedes.  It  states  an  additional  reason  why 
he  had  sought  the  present  interview. — I  am 
compassed  with  this  chain,  have  my  arm 
bound  with  it.  So,  also,  when  the  apostle 
wrote  in  Phil.  4:4,"  Rejoice  in  the  Lord 
always ;  and,  again,  I  say,  Rejoice,"  he  was 
manacled  as  a  felon,  and  was  liable  at  any 
moment  to  be  condemned  to  the  wild  beasts 
or  the  block.  The  construction  is  similar  to 
that  of  the  accusative  after  passive  verbs. 
(Comp.  is  compassed  with  infirmity — irspi'iceiToi 
aa&evfiav — in  Heb.  5  :  2.) 


822 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


21  And  they  said  rnito  him,  We  neither  received 
letters  out  of  Judsea  concerning  thee,  neither  any  of 
the  brethren  that  came  shewed  or  spake  any  harm  of 
thee. 

22  But  we  desire  to  hear  of  thee  what  thou  thinkest: 
for  as  concerning  this  sect,  we  know  that  everywhere 
"it  is  spoken  against. 


21  Israel  I  am  bound  with  this  chain.  And  they  said 
unto  him.  We  neither  received  letters  from  Judcea 
concerning  thee,  nor  did  any  of  the  brethren  come 

22  hither  and  report  or  speak  any  harm  of  thee.  But 
we  desire  to  hear  of  thee  what  thou  thinkest:  for 
as  concerning  this  sect,  it  is  known  to  us  that  every- 
where it  is  spoken  against. 


!  Luke  2  :  34  ;  ch.  24  :  5,  14  ;  1  Pet.  2:12;  4  :  U. 


21.  We  received  neither  letters,  etc.  This 
statement  refers  to  their  having  received  no  of- 
ficial information,  either  written  or  oral,  in  re- 
gard to  the  circumstances  tinder  which  Paul 
had  been  sent  to  Rome.  Some  have  supposed 
the  Jews  to  be  insincere  in  this  declaration,  as 
if  it  was  improbable  that  they  should  have  been 
uninformed  in  regard  to  so  important  an  event. 
But  we  have  no  sufficient  reason  for  calling  in 
question  their  veracity.  The  Palestine  jews 
could  hardly  have  foreseen  the  issue  to  whicli 
the  case  was  so  suddenly  brought,  and  hence, 
before  the  apostle's  appeal,  would  have  deemed 
it  unnecessary  to  apprise  the  Jews  at  Rome  of 
the  progress  of  the  trial.  It  is  barely  possible 
that  they  could  have  forwarded  intelligence 
since  the  appeal  had  taken  place.  Paul  de- 
parted for  Italy  evidently  soon  after  he  had  ap- 
pealed, and  must  have  availed  himself  of  one 
of  the  last  opportunities  for  such  a  voyage 
which  the  season  of  the  year  allowed.  Hav- 
ing spent  the  winter  at  Melita,  he  had  proceed- 
ed to  Rome  at  the  earliest  moment  in  the 
spring;  so  that  in  the  ordinary  course  of 
things  he  must  have  arrived  there  in  advance 
of  any  ship  that  might  liave  left  Palestine  after 
the  reopening  of  navigation. — Repeat  from 
Jndea  after  that  came. — Any  one  of  the 
brethren,  of  our  countrymen — i.  e.  as  a  spe- 
cial messenger,  as  a  complainant. 

22,  But  (though  in  the  absence  of  such  in- 
formation we  offer  no  complaint)  we  deem  it 
proper  (Mey.,  Rob.)  to  hear  from  thee. 
(Comp.  15  :  38.)  The  verb  may  also  mean  ive 
desire  (De  Wet.,  E.  V.),  but  is  less  common  in 
that  sense. — For  concerning  this  sect,  of 
which  Paul  was  known  to  be  an  adlierent; 
and,  as  that  circumstance  (for)  was  not  in  his 
favor,  they  intimate  that  he  was  bound  to  vin- 
dicate himself  from  the  reproach  of  such  a 
connection.  The  Jews,  it  will  be  observed,  in 
their  reply  to  the  apostle,  abstain  from  any  al- 
lusion to  the  Christians  at  Rome ;  indeed,  they 
might  have  expressed  themselves  in  the  same 
manner  had  no  church  existed  there  at  this 
time,  or  had  they  been  entirely  ignorant  of  its 


existence.  To  understand  them,  however,  as 
affirming  that  they  had  heard  of  the  sect  only 
by  report,  that  they  possessed  no  personal 
knowledge  of  any  who  were  connected  with 
it,  is  certainly  unauthorized.  Baur^  proceeds 
on  this  false  assumption,  and  then  represents 
the  passage  as  inconsistent  with  the  Epistle  to 
the  Romans,  which  was  written  several  years 
before  this,  and  exhibits  to  us  a  flourishing 
church  in  the  Roman  metropolis.  Zeller  says 
the  same  thing.  The  peculiarity  in  tlie  case  is 
not  by  any  means  that  the  Jews  denied  that 
they  were  acquainted  with  those  who  held  the 
Christian  faith,  but  that  they  avoided  so  care- 
fully any  reference  to  the  fact ;  what  they  knew 
was  matter  of  general  notoriety  (everywhere 
it  is  spoken  against) ;  they  decline  the  re- 
sponsibility of  asserting  anything  on  the 
ground  of  their  own  personal  knowledge. 
Various  explanations  have  been  given  of  tliis 
reserve  on  the  part  of  the  Jews.  Olshausen's 
hypothesis  is  tliat  the  opposition  between  the 
Jewish  Christians  and  the  Jews  had  become 
such,  before  Claudius  banished  the  latter  from 
Rome,  as  to  separate  them  entirely  from  each 
other,  and  consequently  that  the  Christians 
there  remained,  in  fact,  unknown  to  the  Jews 
who  returned  to  Rome  after  the  decree  of  ban- 
ishment ceased  to  be  in  force.  This  view  is 
improbable,  and  has  found  no  supporters.  The 
opinion  of  many  of  the  older  critics,  to  which 
Tholuck^  also  has  returned,  is  that  the  chief 
of  the  Jews  affected  to  be  thus  ignorant  in 
regard  to  the  Roman  Christians — that  they 
wished  to  deceive  the  apostle,  and  uttered  a 
direct  folsehood  when  they  told  him  that  they 
had  received  no  information  concerning  him 
from  the  Palestine  Jews.  The  best  account  of 
this  peculiarity,  it  appears  to  me,  is  tliat  which 
Philippi  has  suggested  in  his  recent  commen- 
tary on  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans.^  The  situa- 
tion of  the  Jews  at  Rome,  after  their  recent 
banishment  by  Claudius,  was  still  critical  and 
insecure.  It  was  very  important  for  them  to 
avoid  the  displeasure  of  the  government — to 
abstain   from  any  act  or  attitude  that  would 


1  Paulus,  der  Aposlel,  sein  Leben  und  Wirken,  seine  Briefe  tmd  seine  Lehre,  p.  368,  sg. 

2  CommeiUar  zum  Briefe  Patdi  an  die  Rbmer  (1842),  p.  14. 

*  Commentar  iiber  den  Brief  Pauli  an  die  Rbmer,  von  Friedrich  A.  Philippi  (1848),  p.  xv. 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


323 


23  And  when  they  had  appointed  him  a  day,  there 
came  many  to  him  into  /its  lodging;  "to  whom  lie  ex- 
pounded and  testitied  the  kingdom  of  God,  persuading 
them  concerning  Jesus,  'both  out  of  the  law  of  Moses, 
and  out  of  the  prophets,  from  morning  till  evening. 

24  And  'some  hclieved  the  things  which  were  spoken, 
and  some  believed  not. 

25  And  when  they  agreed  not  among  themselves, 
they  de|)arted,  after  that  Paul  had  spoken  one  word, 
Well  spake  the  Holy  (jhost  by  Esaias  the  prophet  unto 
our  fathers, 

26  Saying,  ''Go  unto  this  people,  and  say.  Hearing  ye 
shall  hear,  and  shall  not  understand;  and  seeing  ye 
shall  see,  and  not  perceive : 

27  For  the  heart  of  this  people  is  waxed  gross,  and 
their  ears  are  dull  of  hearing,  and  their  eyes  have 
they  closed ;  lest  they  should  see  with  tfteir  eyes,  and 


23  And  when  they  had  appointed  him  a  day,  they 
came  to  him  into  his  lodging  in  great  number;  to 
whom  he  expounded  thf  muflvr,  testifying  the  king- 
dom of  God,  and  persuading  them  concerning  Je- 
sus, both  from  the  law  of  Moses  and  from  the  proph- 

24ets,  from  morning  till  evening.  And  some  believed 
the  things  which  were  spoken,  and  some  disbelieved. 

25  And  when  they  agreed  not  among  themselves,  they 
departed,  after  that  i'aul  had  spoken  one  word.  Well 
spake  the  Holy  Spirit  through  Isaiah  the  prophet 

26  unto  your  fathers,  saying, 

Go  thou  unto  this  people,  and  say. 

By  hearing  ye  shall  hear,  and  shall  in  no  wise 

understand  ; 
And  seeing  ye  shall  see,  and  shall  in  no  wise 

perceive : 

27  For  this  people's  heart  is  waxed  gross, 
And  their  ears  are  dull  of  hearing, 
And  their  eyes  they  have  closed  ; 

Lest  haply  they  should  perceive  with  their  eyes, 


a  Luke  24:27;  ch.  17  :  3  ;  19:  8....*  See  on  ch.  26  :  6,  22....cch.  14:4;  17  :  4  ;  lS»:9....d  Isa.  6:9;  Jer.  5:21;  Eiek.  12:2; 
Matt.  13  :  14,  15  ;  Mark  4  :  12  ;  Luke  8  :  10 ;  Joba  12  :  40 ;  Rom.  11:8. 


revive  the  old  charge  against  them  of  being 
quarrelsome  or  factious.  They  saw  that  Paul 
was  regarded  with  evident  favor  by  the  Roman 
officers;  they  had  heard  from  him  that  the 
procurator  would  have  acquitted  him,  but  the 
obstinate  Jews  had  compelled  him  to  appeal  to 
Caesar.  Having  had  no  intelligence  from  Judea, 
they  might  fear  that  their  countrymen  there  had 
gone  too  far,  and  had  placed  it  in  the  power  of 
Paul  to  use  the  circumstance  to  the  disadvan- 
tage of  the  Jewish  cause  at  Rome.  Hence  they 
considered  it  advisable  for  the  i^resent  to  con- 
ciliate the  apostle,  to  treat  him  mildly,  to  keep 
out  of  sight  their  own  relations  to  the  Chris- 
tian sect.  They  say  what  was  true.  No  special 
and  express  information  had  been  forwarded 
to  them  respecting  his  person  and  the  occur- 
rence mentioned  by  him,  and  they  knew  that 
the  sect  had  everywhere  an  evil  name.  But 
they  suppress  their  own  view  in  regard  to  the 
Christian  faith  as  something  they  do  not  con- 
sider it  necessary  and  expedient  to  avow,  and, 
out  of  fear  of  the  Roman  magistrates,  would 
draw  as  little  attention  as  possible  to  their  hos- 
tile position  toward  the  Christians. 

23-29.  HIS  SECOND  INTERVIEW  WITH 
THE  JEWS. 

23.  And  when  they  had  appointed,  etc., 
or  now  having  appointed  for  him  a  day,  at 
his  own  suggestion,  perhaps,  since  by  leaving  it 
to  them  to  designate  the  time  he  would  be  more 
sure  of  their  presence. — Unto  his  lodging. 
The  term  implies  (Hesych.)  that  it  was  a  place 
where  he  was  entertained  as  a  guest  (comp. 
Philem.  22) ;  and  those  critics  are  right  who 
distinguish  it  from  the  "hired  house"  men- 
tioned in  V.  30.  The  apostle,  at  first,  as  would 
be  natural,  was  received  into  some  one  of  the 
Christian  families  at  Rome;  but  after  a  time, 
for  the  sake  of  greater  convenience  or  inde- 


pendence, he  removed  to  apartments  which 
would  be  more  entirely  subject  to  his  own 
control.  That  Aquila  (Rom.  i6 : 3)  became  his 
host  again,  as  he  had  been  at  Corinth  (i8:3), 
is  not  impossible. — Many,  strictly  more  than 
on  the  former  occasion. — And  persuading 
them  of  the  things  concerning  Jesus. 
For  the  double  accusative,  see  on  19  :  8.  Here, 
too,  the  act  of  the  participle  refers  to  the  speak- 
er's aim  or  object,  without  including  the  result. 
It  may  be  inferred  from  what  follows  that  the 
greater  part  of  those  whom  Paul  addressed 
withstood  his  efforts  to  win  them  to  the  truth. 
(Comp.  V.  25.) 

24.  Some  (oi  ^iv)  and  some  (oi  Se)  distribute 
the  Jews  into  opposite  parties.  The  proportion 
which  the  convinced  bore  to  the  unbelieving 
we  must  gather  from  the  drift  of  the  narra- 
tive. 

25.  Agreed  not,  etc.— lit.  and  being  dis- 
cordant among  one  another.  This  variance 
they  may  be  supposed  to  have  evinced  by  an 
open  declaration  of  their  different  views,  by 
the  expression  of  dissent  and  objection  on  the 
part  of  those  who  disbeheved. — After  that 
Paul,  or  Paul  having  said  one  word,  at 
the  time  of  their  departure  (De  Wet.),  not  as 
the  occasion  of  it  (Mey.).  It  was  one  final, 
significant  word,  as  opposed  to  many  words. 
(Comp.  Luke  20  :  3.)  —  Through  Isaiah. 
(See  on  2  :  16.) 

26.  Saying — viz.  Isa.  6  : 9,  sq.,  cited  accord- 
ing to  the  Seventy.  The  pa.ssage  is  quoted  also 
in  Matt.  13  :  14,  sq.,  and  .Tolin  12  :  40.— For  the 
Hebraistic  hearing  ye  shall  hear,  see  the 
note  on  4  :  17. — And  shall  not  understand 
(ou  fill)  o-vi-^Te)  may  express  the  future  result 
with  more  certainty  than  the  future  indica- 
tive. (See  on  13  :  41.) — For  seeing  ye  shall 
see  (/SAtiroiTtt  /SAe^ere),  see  on  7  :  34. 


324 


THE   ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


hear  with  their  ears,  and  understand  with  their  heart, 
and  should  be  i  on  verted,  and  I  should  heal  them. 

2H  Be  it  known  therefore  unto  you,  that  the  salva- 
tion of  (lod  is  sent  "unto  the  (jentiles,  and  that  they 
will  hear  it. 

29  And  when  he  had  said  these  words,  the  Jews  de- 
parted, and  had  great  reasoning  among  themselves. 

3U  And  Paul  dwelt  two  whole  years  in  his  own  hired 
house,  and  received  all  that  came  in  unto  him, 

31  ''Preaching  the  kingdom  of  God,  and  teaching 
those  things  which  concern  the  Lord  .lesus  Christ, 
with  all  confidence,  uo  man  forbidding  him. 


And  hear  with  their  ears. 

And  understand  with  their  heart, 

And  should  turn  again. 

And  I  should  heal  them. 
28  Be  it  known  therefore  unto  you,  that  this  salva- 
tion of  God  is  sent  unto  the  Gentiles:  they  will  also 
hear.' 

30  And  he  abode  two  whole  years  in  his  own  hired 
dwelling,  and  received  all  that  went  in  unto  him, 

31  preaching  the  kingdom  of  (jod,  and  teaching  the 
things  concerning  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  with  all 
boldness,  none  forbidding  him. 


aMatt.    21:41,   43;   ch.    13:46,  47;   18:6;   sa  :  21 ;   26:17,    18;  Rom.   11:11 5  ch.   4:31;   Eph.  6  :  19. 1  Some  ancient 

authorities  insert  ver.  29    And  when  he  had  said  these  words,  the  Jews  departed,  having  much  disputing  among  themselves. 


28.  Therefore— i.  e.  since  they  are  so  hard- 
ened and  incorrigible.— That  to the  Gentiles 
the  salvation  was  sent — /.  e.  by  God,  in  the 
coming  of  the  apostle  to  Eome.— They  (em- 
phatic), although  they  are  heathen. — Also  will 
hear  it— viz.  the  message  of  this  salvation. 
The  object  of  the  verb  is  implied  in  was  sent 
(aTrecTToAjjj.- Also  (koi)  coiinects  the  reception 
with  the  offer  of  the  gospel.— Our  eyes  trace 
here  the  last  words  in  Luke's  record  which  fell 
from  the  lips  of  Paul.  It  is  remarkable  that 
they  are  precisely  such  words.  The  apostle  of 
the  Gentiles  points  again  to  his  commission  to 
preach  to  all  nations,  and  declares  that  the 
heathen,  to  whom  he  was  sent,  shall  accept 
the  Saviour  whom  the  Jews  disowned. 

29.  This  verse  in  the  common  text  repeats 
what  has  been  said  in  the  eighteenth  verse. 
It  appears  to  be  not  genuine.  Its  principal 
witnesses  are  G  H,  the  Ethiopic,  and  some  of 
the  later  Fathers.  It  is  wanting  in  ABE,  the 
Syriac,  and  the  best  Latin  authorities.  Lead- 
ing critics,  as  Mill,  Lachmann,  Tischendorf, 
Green,  reject  the  verse.  [Also  West,  and  Hort, 
Treg.,  and  the  Anglo-Am.  Revisers.— A.  H.] 

30.  31.  THE  CONDITION  OF  THE  APOS- 
TLE DURING  HIS  CAPTIVITY. 

30.  Dwelt— lit.  remained  two  whole 
years  ;  i.  e.  in  the  state  mentioned,  with  the 
evident  implication  that  at  the  end  of  that 
time  his  condition  changed.    Some  critics  deny 


the  correctness  of  this  inference,  but  the  better 
opinion  affirms  it.  Had  the  apostle  been  still 
in  confinement,  the  writer  would  have  em- 
ployed more  naturally  the  present  tense  or  the 
perfect  {remains  or  has  remained),  instead  of  the 
aorist.  The  reader's  conclusion  is  that  the  two 
years  completed  the  term  of  the  apostle's  cap- 
tivity, and  that  when  Luke  penned  the  sen- 
tence the  prisoner  was  either  at  liberty  or  else 
was  no  longer  living.  Lekebusch  (p.  415)  pro- 
nounces this  view  an  inevitable  one.  (See  on 
next  verse.)— The  two  whole  years  would 
bring  the  narrative  down  to  a.  d.  64.  Some 
months  lay  between  the  commencement  of 
this  year  and  the  outbreak  of  Nero's  persecu- 
tion. (See  Introd.,  p.  27.)— In  his  OAvn  hired 
house — i.  e.  hired  at  his  own  expense.  In  the 
bosom  of  a  Christian  church,  the  apostle  could 
not  have  been  destitute  of  the  means  of  pro- 
{  viding  for  such  an  expense.  We  learn  also, 
I  from  Phil.  4  :  14,  18,  that  during  this  captivity 
I  Paul  received  supplies  from  the  church  at 
!  Philippi.  —  Received,  in  its  special  sense, 
I  received  gladly,  because  it  alTorded  him 
such  joy  to  preach  the  gospel.  (Comp.  15  :  4 ; 
18:  27.) 

31.  Teaching — i.  e.  them.  The  construc- 
tion is  similar  to  that  in  v.  23.  —  Without 
molestation,  on  the  part  of  the  Roman  Gov- 
ernment.*  According  to  the  Roman  laws,  a 
citizen  under  arrest,  in  ordinary  cases,  could 


J  Agrippa  I.  was  imprisoned  in  early  life  at  Borne.  The  account  of  his  captivity  confirms  so  entirely  Luke's 
account  of  the  manner  in  which  Paul  was  treated  as  a  Roman  prisoner  (so  unlike  our  modern  usages)  that  it 
may  not  be  amiss  to  mention  some  of  the  circumstances.  We  obtain  the  information  from  Josephus  (Antl.,  18. 
6.  5,  sq.).  Agrippa,  on  being  arrested,  was  committed  to  Macro,  the  praetorian  prefect,  and  confined  in  the  priE- 
tori'an  camp.  He  was  there  kept  under  a  guard  of  soldiers,  to  one  of  whom  he  was  chained  called  his  avvUTot). 
A  particular  centurion  had  the  oversight  of  the  prisoner  and  the  soldiers  who  guarded  him.  Put  the  condition 
of  those  confined  in  this  manner  depended  very  much  on  the  character  of  those  who  had  the  immediate 
charge  of  them.  The  soldiers  who  watched  Agrippa  treated  him  at  first  with  great  severity.  Hence,  Antonia, 
a  sister-in-law  of  Tiberius  and  a  friend  of  Agrippa,  interceded  with  Macro  and  induced  him  to  appoint  a  guard 
known  to  be  of  a  milder  disposition.  The  situation  of  Agrippa  was  now  improved.  His  friends,  who  had  been 
excluded  from  him,  were  permitted  to  visit  him  and  to  supply  his  necessary  wants.  (Comp.  24  :  2.'5.)  But  dur- 
ing this  time,  about  six  months,  he  was  still  confined  in  the  prstorian  camp.  On  the  death  of  Tiberius  the 
mode  of  his  captivity  was  changed  again,  (aligula  ordered  him  to  be  removed  from  the  prtetoriuni  to  the 
house  which  he  had  occupied  before  he  was  bound.  Here  he  was  still  guarded  as  a  prisoner,  but  was  subject  to 
80  much  less  restraint  that  his  condition  was  one  of  comparative  liberty.  His  cantivity,  in  this  last  form  of  it, 
•was  doubtless  like  that  of  Paul  during  the  two  years  that  he  "  dwelt  in  his  own  hired  house  "  at  Borne. 


Ch.  XXVIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


325 


give  security  or  bail,  and  thus  enjoy  his  per- 
sonal liberty  until  he  was  brought  to  trial.  The 
freedom  granted  to  Paul  was  so  ample  that  one 
might  almost  suppose  that  he  was  permitted  to 
exercise  that  right ;  but  it  is  rendered  certain  by 
Phil.  1  :  13,  16  that  he  continued  to  be  guarded 
by  a  Roman  soldier. — Among  the  friends  with 
Paul  during  this  confinement  who  have  been 
mentioned  in  our  narrative  were  Luke,  Tim- 
othy, Epaphras,  Mark,  Aristarchus,  and  Tychi- 
cus.  Tlie  interruption  of  his  personal  inter- 
course with  the  churches  caused  the  apostle  to 
address  them  by  letter,  and  thus  the  restraint 
on  his  liberty  proved  the  means  of  opening  to 
him  a  sphere  of  activity  which  has  given  him 
access  to  all  nations,  which  makes  him  the  con- 
temporary of  every  age.  As  nearly  all  critics 
allow,  he  wrote  during  this  captivity  his  Epistles 
to  the  Ephesians,  the  Colossians,  the  Philip- 
pians,  and  Phifemon. — It  must  suffice  to  allude 
merely  to  the  subsequent  history  of  the  great 
apostle.  I  cannot  hesitjite  to  agree  with  those 
who  believe  that  Paul,  on  being  brought  to 
trial  under  his  appeal  to  the  emperor,  was  ac- 
quitted, and,  casting  aside  his  chains,  went 
forth  to  labor  again  for  the  spread  of  the  gos- 
pel. We  see  from  his  letters  written  while  he 
was  a  captive  that  he  was  expecting  to  regain 
his  liberty.  (See,  for  example,  Phil.  1  :  25 ;  2  : 
23,  24;  Philem.  22.)  Even  if  Paul  entertained 
this  belief  as  a  matter  of  judgment  merely,  and 
not  in  the  exercise  of  a  faith  warranted  by  a 
special  revelation,  we  must  allow,  at  all  events, 
that  he  liad  good  means  for  forming  a  correct 
opinion  of  his  prospects,  and  should  be  sup- 
posed, tlierefore,  to  have  realized  his  hope,  and 
not  to  have  been  condemned  contrary  to  such 
manifest  intimations  of  a  different  result.  The 
journeys  and  labors  indicated  in  the  Pastoral 
Epistles  make  the  supposition  of  an  interval 
between  a  first  and  second  imprisonment  im- 
portant, if  not  indispensable,  as  a  means  of 
reconciling  Luke's  account  with  this  part  of 
the  apostle's  correspondence.  The  facts  men- 
tioned in  the  letters  to  Titus  and  Timothy  have 
no  natural  place  in  the  portion  of  Paul's  history 
recorded  in  the  Acts.  The  style  too  and  the 
circle  of  ideas  in  these  Epistles  indicate  a  later 
period  in  the  life  of  the  writer  and  in  the  prog- 
ress of  the  churches  than  that  of  the  conclusion 
of  Luke's  narrative.     Finally,  the  historical 


testimony,  as  derived  from  the  earliest  sources, 
asserts  a  second  Roman  captivity  in  the  most 
explicit  manner.  Clemens,  the  disciple  and 
companion  of  Paul,  affirms  that  the  apostle, 
before  his  martyrdom,  travelled  "  to  the  bound- 
ary of  the  West" — an  expression  which  the 
Roman  writers  in  that  age  applied  to  the  trans- 
Alpine  countries ;  and  the  Canon  of  Muratori 
(a.  d.  170)  represents  "  a  journey  into  Spain  " 
as  a  well-known  event  in  Paul's  history.  Euse- 
bius  states  the  common  belief  of  the  early 
churches  in  these  words:  "After  defending 
himself  successfully  it  is  currently  reported 
that  the  apostle  again  went  forth  to  proclaim 
the  gospel,  and  afterward  came  to  Rome  a 
second  time  and  was  martyred  under  Nero." — 
Hints  in  the  Epistles  and  traditions  supply  all 
that  is  known  or  conjectured  respecting  this 
last  stage  of  the  apostle's  ministry.  It  is  sup- 
posed that  on  being  liberated  (writers  do  not 
agree  as  to  the  precise  order)  he  visited  again 
parts  of  Asia  Minor  and  Greece ;  went  to  Crete 
and  founded,  or  more  probably  strengthened, 
the  churches  there ;  made  his  long-contemplated 
journey  to  Spain ;  wrote  his  First  Epistle  to 
Timothy  and  his  Epistle  to  Titus ;  after  several 
years  of  effective  labor  was  apprehended  again 
as  a  leader  of  the  Christian  sect;  was  brought 
a  second  time  as  a  prisoner  of  Christ  to  Rome ; 
was  tried  there,  and  condemned  to  suffer  death. 
His  Roman  citizenship  exempted  him  from  the 
ignominy  of  crucifixion,  and  hence,  according 
to  the  universal  tradition,  he  was  beheaded  by 
the  axe  of  the  lictor.  The  same  testimony 
places  his  martyrdom  in  the  year  a.  d.  68,  the 
last  year  of  Nero's  reign.  It  was  in  the  daily 
expectation  of  this  event  that  he  wrote  the  last 
of  his  Epistles,  the  Second  to  Timothy.  It  is 
in  that  Epistle — written  as  the  aged  servant  of 
Christ  looked  back  to  liis  trials  all  surmounted, 
forward  to  the  hour  when  he  should  soon  "  be 
for  ever  with  the  Lord,"  yet  amid  his  own  joy 
still  mindful  of  the  welfare  of  others — that  we 
hear  his  exultant  voice :  "  I  am  now  ready  to 
be  offered,  and  the  time  of  my  departure  is  at 
hand.  I  have  fought  a  good  fight,  I  have  fin- 
ished my  course,  I  have  kept  the  faith.  Hence- 
forth there  is  laid  up  for  me  a  crown  of  right- 
eousness, which  the  Lord,  the  righteous  judge, 
shall  give  me  at  that  day  ;  and  not  to  me  only, 
but  unto  all  them  also  that  love  his  appearing." 


ABBKEVIATIONS. 


NAMES  OF  WRITERS  ABBREVIATED  IN  THE  NOTES. 

The  works  of  those  referred  to  in  the  following  list  aie  mostly  commentaries,  and  may  be 
presumed  to  be  well  known.  The  titles  of  some  of  those  which  are  less  common  have  been 
given  at  the  foot  of  the  page  where  they  occur  for  the  first  time. 


Alf. 

Ang 

Bez 

Blmf.      .    .    .    . 

Bmg 

Bng 

Bottg 

Bretsch.     .    .    . 

Brud 

Calv 

Chryst 

Cony,  and  Hws. 
DeWet.     .    .    . 

Doddr 

Ebr 

Forbg 

Frtz 

Gesen 

Grot 

Grsb 

Hems 

Heng 

Herz.  .  .  .  . 
Hesych.  .  .  . 
Hmph 


Alford. 

Anger. 

Beza. 

Bloomfield. 

Baumgarten. 

Bengel. 

Bottger. 

Bretschneider. 

Bruder. 

Calvin. 

Chrysostom. 

Conybeare  and  Howson. 

De  Wette. 

Doddridge. 

Ebrard. 

Forbiger. 

Fritzsche. 

Gesenius. 

Grotius. 

Griesbach. 

Hemsen. 

Hengstenberg. 

Herzog. 

Hesychius. 

Humphry. 


Hnr 

Kriig.     .    .    .    . 

Kuin 

Kyp 

Lchm 

Light 

Lng 

Mey 

Neand 

Olsh 

Raph 

Rob 

Schottg.     .    .    . 

Str 

Suid 

Thol 

Treg 

Tsch 

Vitr 

Wdsth 

West,  and  Hort. 

Wetst 

Whl.  .    .    .    ■    - 

Wiesl 

Win 


Helnrichs. 

Kriiger. 

Kuinoel. 

Kypke. 

Lachmann. 

Lighlfoot. 

Lange. 

Meyer. 

Neander. 

Olshausen. 

Raphael. 

Robinsoii. 

Schottgen. 

Stier. 

Suidas. 

ThoHick. 

Tregelles. 

Tischendorf. 

Vitringa. 

Wordsworth. 

Westcott  and  Hort. 

Wetstein. 

Wahl. 

Wieseler. 

Winer. 


OTHER  ABBREVIATIONS. 


Cranm Cranmer's  Version  of  N.  T. 

E.  V Common  English  Version. 

Genv Geneva  Version. 

Tynd Tyndale's  Version. 


T.  R Received  Greek  Text. 

Vulg Vulgate  N.  Testament. 

Wicl Wiclif's  Version. 

327 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


VIEWS. 

PAGE 

Mount  of  Olives 34 

Place  of  Stoning 105 

Ruins  op  Colonnade  of  Samaria 108 

C^SAREA 116 

Damascus,  Straight  Street     120 

Tarsus 124 

Exterior  op  supposed  House  of  Simon 129 

Eastern  Housetop 129 

Neapolis 184 

In  the  Stocks 189 

Thessalonica 194 

Athens 198 

Areopagus,  Athens 203 

Corinth  and  Acrocorinthus 210 

Assos,  from  the  Sea 235 

MiTYLENE 236 

Miletus,  View  of  Theatre  in  Ancient     237 

Bay  of  St.  Paul,  from  the  South 311 

PuTEOLT,  Mole  of     317 

Via  Appia,  Fifth  Mile  op,  Restored 320 


MAPS. 

Eastern    Portion   op   the    Mediterranean,    with   the   Countries    Adjacent, 
Illustrating  the  Apostolic  History Fronlixpiece.. 

Route  of  Paul  along  the  Via  Appia  from  Puteoli  to  Rome 318 

329 


INDEX    I. 


TO    THE    HISTORY. 


CHAP. 

VERSE 

I. 

1-3 

" 

4,5 

" 

6-11 

" 

12-14 

" 

15-22 

" 

23-26 

II. 

1^ 

" 

5-13 

" 

14-36 

" 

37-42 

" 

43-47 

III. 

1-10 

" 

11-26 

IV. 

1-4 

" 

5-7 

" 

8-12 

" 

13-18 

" 

19-22 

" 

23-31 

" 

32-37 

V. 

1-11 

" 

12-16 

" 

17-25 

11 

26-28 

u 

29-32 

" 

34-39 

" 

40^2 

VI. 

1-7 

" 

8-15 

VII. 

1-53 

" 

1-16 

" 

17-46 

" 

47-53 

" 

54-^ 

VIII. 

1-3 

PAGE 

Relation  of  the  Acts  to  the  Gospel  of  Luke 29 

Promise  of  the  Saviour  to  send  the  Spirit 31 

His  last  Interview  with  the  Disciples,  and  his  Ascension 32 

Return  of  the  Disciples  to  Jerusalem 34 

Address  of  Peter  on  the  Choice  of  a  new  Apostle 36 

Appointment  of  Matthias  as  an  Apostle 39 

Descent  of  the  Holy  Spirit 41 

Impression  of  the  Miracle  on  the  Multitude 43 

The  Discourse  of  Peter      46 

Effect  of  the  Discourse  in  the  Conversion  of  Three  Thousand 53 

Benevolence  of  the  First  Christians  ;  their  Joy,  their  Increase 55 

Healing  of  the  Lame  Man  by  Peter  and  John 57 

Testimony  of  Peter  after  the  Miracle 59 

The  Imprisonment  of  Peter  and  John 65 

Their  Arraignment  before  the  Sanhedrim 66 

Testimony  of  Peter  before  the  Council 67 

Decision  of  the  Sanhedrim 69 

The  Answer  of  Peter  and  John      70 

The  Apostles  return  to  the  Disciples,  and  unite  with  them  in  Prayer  and  Praise.  71 

The  Believers  are  of  one  Mind,  and  have  all  Things  common 72 

Tlie  Falsehood  of  Ananias  and  Sapphira,  and  their  Death 74 

The  Apostles  still  preach,  and  confirm  their  Testimony  by  Miracles     ....  77 

Renewed  Imprisonment  of  the  Apostles,  and  tlieir  Escape 78 

They  are  arrested  again,  and  brought  before  the  Council 80 

The  Answer  of  Peter,  and  its  Effect 80 

The  Advice  of  Gamaliel 81 

• 

The  Apostles  suffer  joyfully  for  Christ,  and  depart  to  preach  him  anew  ...  84 

Appointment  of  Alms-Distributei-s  in  the  Church  at  Jerusalem 85 

The  Zeal  of  Stephen,  and  his  Violent  Apprehension 87 

Discourse  of  Stephen  before  the  Sanhedrim 89 

History  of  the  Patriarchs,  or  Age  of  the  Promises 90 

A.ge  of  Moses,  or  the  Jews  under  the  Law      96 

Period  of  the  Temple  and  the  Prophets 103 

The  Death  of  Stephen 104 

The  Burial  of  Stephen 106 

331 


INDEX  I. 


XI. 


XII. 


:HAP.         verse  '  PAGE 

VIII.        4-8  The  Gospel  is  preached  in  Samaria 107 

"          9-13  Simon  the  Sorcerer,  and  his  Professed  Belief 108 

"        14-17  Peter  and  John  are  sent  to  Samaria 109 

"        18-24  The  Hypocrisy  of  Simon,  and  its  Exposure 110 

"        25-35  Conversion  of  the  Ethiopian 112 

"        36-40  Baptism  of  the  Eunuch 115 

IX.  1-9  Christ  appears  to  Saul  on  the  Way  to  Damascus 117 

"        10-18  Ananias  is  sent  to  Saul,  and  baptizes  him 120 

"        19-22  Labors  of  Paul  at  Damascus 122 

"        23-25  The  Flight  of  Paul  from  Damascus 122 

"        26-30  Paul  returns  to  Jerusalem,  and  goes  thence  to  Tarsus 123 

"        31-35  Peter  preaches  at  Lydda,  and  heals  a  Paralytic 125 

"        36-43  Peter  visits  Joppa 126 

X.  1-8  Vision  of  Cornelius  the  Centurion 127 

9-16  The  Vision  of  Peter 129 

"        17-22  The  ^lessengers  arrive  at  Joppa 130 

"        23-33  Peter  proceeds  to  Csesarea 131 

34-43  The  Address  of  Peter 134 

<•       44-48  Cornelius  and  others  receive  the  Spirit,  and  are  baptized 136 

1-18  Peter  justifies  himself  at  Jerusalem  for  his  Visit  to  Cornelius 137 

19-24  The  Gospel  is  preached  at  Antioch 139 

25,  26  Paul  arrives  at  Antioch,  and  labors  there 140 

27-30  Barnabas  and  Saul  are  sent  with  Alms  to  Jerusalem 141 

1,  2  Renewed  Persecution  at  Jerusalem,  and  Death  of  James 142 

"           3-5  The  Imprisonment  of  Peter 143 

"          6-11  Miraculous  Liberation  of  Peter 144 

"        12-17  Peter  repairs  to  the  House  of  Mary,  where  some  of  the  Believers  had  assem- 
bled for  Prayer 145 

"        18, 19  Trial  and  Execution  of  the  Soldiers     146 

"        20-24  Death  of  Herod  Agrippa  at  Ciesarea 147 

"              25  Barnabas  and  Saul  return  to  Antioch 148 

XIII.  1-3  Barnabas  and  Saul  are  sent  to  preach  to  the  Heathen 148 

"          4-12  The  Journey  to  Cyprus,  and  its  Results 150 

"        13-15  They  proceed  to  Perga,  and  thence  to  Antioch  in  Pisidia     153 

"        16-41  Discourse  of  Paul  at  Antioch      155 

"        42-49  They  preach  a  second  Time  at  Antioch 161 

"        50-52  They  are  persecuted,  and  depart  to  Iconium      163 

XIV.  1-7  They  preach  at  Iconium,  but  are  persecuted,  and  flee  to  Lystra 163 

*'          8-13  Paul  heals  a  Lame  Man  at  Lystra     165 

14-18  Speech  of  Paul  to  the  Lystrians 167 

"        19-28  They  proceed  to  Derbe,  and  then  retrace  their  Way  to  Antioch  in  Syria     .    .  168 

XV.  1-5  Paul  and  Barnabas  are  sent  as  Delegates  to  Jerusalem 171 

"          6-12  Speech  of  Peter  in  the  Assembly 173 

"        13-21  Speech  of  the  Apostle  James 175 

"        22-29  They  appoint  Messengers  to  the  Churches,  and  send  a  Letter  by  them     .    .    .  177 

"        30-35  Paul  and  Barnabas  return  to  Antioch 178 

"        36-41  Paul  and  Barnabas  resume  their  Work  in  different  Fields  of  Labor     ....  179 

XVI.  1-5  Paul  and  Silas  revisit  the  Churches  and  deliver  the  Decrees 181 

"         &-10  They  prosecute  their  Journey  to  Troas 182 

"       11-15  Paul  and  his  Associates  arrive  in  Europe,  and  preach  at  Philippi 183 


INDEX  I.  333 

PAGE 

Healing  of  a  Demoniac  Woman 187 

In'prissonment  of  Paul  and  Silas 188 

An  Earthquake  shakes  the  Prison 190 

Conversion  of  the  Jailer  and  his  Family 190 

They  are  set  at  Liberty,  and  depart  from  Pliilippi 192 

They  proceed  to  Thessalonica,  and  preach  there 194 

The  Jews  accuse  Paul  and  Silas  before  the  Magistrates 195 

Paul  and  Silas  proceed  to  Berea 19G 

Paul  advances  to  Athens 197 

How  he  was  affected  by  the  Idolatry  at  Athens 197 

Paul  repairs  to  Mars'  Hill  to  explain  his  Doctrine 200 

Speech  of  Paul  on  Mars'  Hill     202 

Paul  is  interrupted,  and  leaves  the  Assembly 209 

Arrival  of  Paul  at  Corinth,  and  his  Labors  there      210 

Paul  is  arraigned  before  Gallio 213 

Paul  proceeds  by  the  Way  of  Ephesus  and  Coesarea  to  Jerusalem,  and 

thence  to  Antioch 215 

Departure  of  Paul  on  his  third  Missionary -Tour     217 

Apollos  comes  to  Ephesus,  and  is  more  fully  instructed  in  the  Gospel     .    .  217 

Paul  comes  to  Ephesus,  and  rebaptizes  certain  Disciples  of  John 218 

Paul  preaches  at  Ephesus,  and  confirms  the  Word  by  Miracles 220 

The  Defeat  of  certain  Jewish  Exorcists 221 

Many  are  converted,  and  confess  their  Sins 222 

The  Apostle  proposes  to  leave  Ephesus 223 

Demetrius  excites  a  Tumult  at  Ephesus 224 

The  Mob  seize  two  of  Paul's  Companions  and  rush  to  tlie  Theatre    ....  225 
Speech  of  the  City  Recorder,  who  quells  the  LTproar  and  disperses  tlie 

Multitude 227 

Paul  proceeds  a  second  Time  to  Greece,  and  returns  from  there  to  Troas     .  229 

Paul  preaches  at  Troas,  and  administers  the  Sacrament 232 

They  prosecute  the  Journey  to  Miletus 234 

Address  of  Paul  to  the  Ephesian  Elders  at  Miletus 237 

He  prays  with  the  Elders,  and  embarks  again 243 

They  continue  the  Voyage  to  Tyre 244 

From  Tyre  they  proceed  to  Ptolemais,  and  thence  to  Ca^sarea  and  Jerusalem.  246 

Paul  assumes  a  Vow  to  conciliate  the  Jewish  Believers 248 

He  is  seized  by  the  Jews,  and  dragged  from  the  Temple 252 

The  Roman  Commander  rescues  Paul  from  the  Hands  of  the  Jews  ....  253 

Paul's  Speech  on  the  Stairs  of  the  Castle 255 

He  pleads  his  Roman  Citizenship,  and  escapes  the  Torture 259 

He  is  examined  before  the  Sanhedrim 262 

Paul's  Speech  before  the  Jewish  Council 262 

A  Conspiracy  of  the  Jews  to  slay  Paul 265 

The  Plot  is  made  known  to  the  Roman  Commander 206 

The  Letter  of  Lysias  to  Felix      267 

Paul  is  sent  to  Felix  at  Csesarea     268 

TertuUus  accuses  Paul  before  Felix 270 

Paul's  Defence  before  Felix 272 

Paul  testifies  before  Felix  and  Drusilla 275 

Festus  refuses  to  bring  Paul  to  Jerusalem 27G 


CHAP. 

XVI. 


XVII. 


XVIII. 


XIX. 


XX. 


XXL 


XXIL 


XXIII. 


XXIV. 


XXV. 


VERSE 

16-18 
19-24 
25-29 
30-34 
35-40 
1-4 
5-9 
10-13 
14,15 
16-18 
19-21 
22-31 
32-34 
1-11 
12-17 
18-22 

23 

24-28 
1-7 
,  8-12 
13-17 
18-20 
21,22 
23-27 
28-34 
35-40 

1-6 

7-12 

13-16 

17-35 

36-38 

1-6 

7-16 

17-26 

27-30 

31-40 

1-21 

22-29 

30 

1-10 

11-15 

16-22 

23-30 

31-35 

1-9 

10-23 

24-27 

1-5 


334 


INDEX  I. 

PAGE 

Paul  appeals  from  Festus  to  Caesar 277 

Festus  confers  with  Agrippa  concerning  Paul 278 

Paul  is  brouglit  before  Agrippa 280 

Paul's  Speech  before  Agrippa 281 

Answer  of  Paul  to  Festus 288 

Agrippa  pronounces  Paul  Innocent 289 

Paul  embarks  at  Csesarea  for  Rome,  and  proceeds  as  far  as  Myra 290 

Incidents  of  the  Voyage  from  Myra  to  Crete 293 

A  Storm  rages,  and  drives  the  Vessel  to  Claude 298 

They  undergird  and  lighten  the  Ship,  but  despair  of  Safety 300 

The  Apostle  cheers  them  with  the  Hope  of  Deliverance 304 

The  Discovery  of  Land,  and  the  frustrated  Attempt  of  the  Mariners  to 

desert  the  Ship 305 

Paul  assures  them  again  that  their  Lives  would  be  saved     307 

They  partake  of  Food  and  again  lighten  the  Ship 308 

The  Shipwreck.    Those  on  Board  escape  to  the  Shore 309 

Their  Abode  during  the  Winter  at  Melita 312 

Prosecution  of  the  Journey  to  Rome 316 

Paul  meets  with  the  Chief  Men  of  the  Jews  at  Rome 321 

His  second  Interview  with  the  Jews 323 

Condition  of  the  Apostle  during  his  Captivity     324 


CHAP. 

VERSE 

XXV. 

6-12 

" 

13-22 

" 

23-27 

XXVI. 

1-23 

" 

24-29 

" 

30-32 

XXVII. 

,      1-5 

" 

6-12 

" 

13-16 

" 

17-20 

" 

21-26 

« 

27-32 

(i 

33-35 

l( 

36-38 

" 

39-44 

XXVIII 

.    1-10 

" 

11-16 

u 

17-22 

It 

23-29 

(( 

30,31 

INDEX     II. 


TO  THE  NOTES. 


Abbot,  Ezra,  On  the  Reading  "  Church  of  God," 
241. 

Abraham  not  the  oldest  son  of  Terah,  92. 

Aceldama,  38. 

Achaia,  how  applied  by  Luke,  210,  213 ;  inter- 
changed with  Hellas,  231. 

Acre,  or  Akka,  formerly  Ptolemais,  and  more  an- 
ciently Accho,  246. 

Acropolis  of  Athens  and  of  Corinth,  210. 

Acts  of  the  Apostles,  by  whom  written,  13,  sq. ; 
authenticity  of  the  book,  16,  sq. ;  its  object 
and  plan,  18  ;  when  and  where  written,  19 ; 
why  closed  so  abruptly,  19 ;  its  relation  to 
Luke's  Gospel,  29. 

Adramyttium,  its  situation  and  its  present  state, 
291. 

Adriatic,  how  extensively  applied,  305. 

Agabus,  141,  247. 

Agrippa  I.,  year  of  his  death,  21 ;  his  family, 
143 ;  his  character,  143 ;  circumstances  of 
his  death,  147,  sq. ;  account  of  his  im- 
prisonment at  Rome,  324. 

Agrippa  II.,  his  history,  278,  sq. ;  object  of  his 
visit  to  Ctesarea,  279 ;  turns  off  Paul's  ap- 
peal with  a  jest,  288. 

Ain  Haniyey,  Philip's  fountain,  115. 

Akerman,  Numismatic  Illustrations,  128,  197. 

Akka,  246. 

Alexander,  of  whom  the  apologist,  226. 

Alexandrian  corn-ships,  317. 

Alms-distributers,  cause  of  their  appointment, 
85;  not  called  deacons,  86. 

Amphipolis,  on  the  military  road  through  the 
•    north  of  Greece,  194. 

Ananias,  nature  of  his  crime,  75 ;  why  punished 
with  such  severity,  76. 

Ananias  (high  priest)  to  be  distinguished  from 
Annas,  262;  was  the  actual  high  priest, 
262. 


Andriaca,  port  of  Myra,  293. 

Angels,  import  of  their  address  in  1 :  11  obscure, 
33,  sq. ;  gave  the  law,  104 ;  were  supposed 
to  be  the  guardians  of  men,  145. 

Annas  (the  high  priest),  66,  78. 

Anointing,  its  import  as  a  symbol,  71. 

Antioch  in  Syria,  by  whom  built,  the  seat  of 
missionary  operations,  139 ;  its  harbor,  150 ; 
visited  by  Paul  four  times,  216. 

Antioch  in  Pisidia,  on  the  central  table-land  of 
Asia  Minor,  154 ;  discourse  of  Paul  in  the 
synagogue,  155,  sq. ;  may  have  been  visited 
on  Paul's  second  missionary-tour,  182. 

Antipatris,  supposed  to  be  the  modern  Kefr  Saba, 
269 ;  night-journey  thither,  269. 

Antonia,  castle  of,  253  ;  Paul's  speech  from  the 
stairs,  255. 

Aorist,  peculiar  form,  49;  mistranslated  often, 
70,  99,  281 ;  epistolary  use,  268. 

Apollonia,  on  the  way  from  Philippi  to  Thessa- 
lonica,  194. 

ApoUos  at  Ephesus,  217 ;  his  talents,  217 ;  at 
Corinth,  218. 

Aposiopesis,  instances  of,  265. 

Apostates,  how  treated  by  the  Jews,  263,  266. 

Apostles,  what  was  necessary  to  their  office,  30, 
33  ;  main  point  of  their  testimonj^  39 ;  not 
limited  to  twelve,  40 ;  were  not  ignorant 
that  the  gospel  was  to  be  preached  to  the 
heathen,  54 ;  miracles  through  the,  55 ;  re- 
linquished the  Jewish  rites  by  degrees,  57 ; 
acknowledged  a  higher  law  than  that  of 
men,  70,  80,  189,  sq. ;  did  not  insist  on  a 
community  of  goods,  75 ;  in  Jerusalem 
during  the  persecution,  107  ;  were  empow- 
ered to  confer  the  Spirit,  110 ;  aimed  in 
their  missionary  policy  to  secure  the  chief 
towns,  182,  210 ;  how  far  they  were  infal- 
lible, 296. 

Appeal,  judicial,  how  limited,  278. 

335 


336 


INDEX  II. 


Appian  Way,  319. 

Appii  Forum,  319. 

AppoiJited  unto  life,  162. 

Aqulla,  where  he  was  converted,  210 ;  his  fre- 
quent change  of  residence,  210  ;  why  men- 
tioned after  Priscilla,  215 ;  his  connection 
with  Apollos,  218. 

Aramxan,  38,  255. 

Aratus,  a  poet,  208. 

Areopagus,  in  what  part  of  Athens,  200 ;  Paul 
not  tried  before  the  court  of  this  name,  200, 
sq. ;  outline  of  his  speech  there,  202,  sq. 

Aretas  toolc  possession  of  Damascus,  20 ;  as- 
sisted the  Jews  to  capture  Paul,  123. 

Aristarchus  accompanied  Paul  to  Jerusalem, 
231;  in  what  sense  his  "fellow-prisoner," 
291. 

Arrian,  the  Periplus  of,  297,  298. 

Artemis.     See  Diana. 

Artemon,  what  sail  intended,  310 ;  its  effect  on 
a  vessel,  310. 

Article,  with  proper  names,  30 ;  before  partitives, 
78 ;  Middleton's  rule,  110 ;  force  of,  65,  137, 
275,  320;  disregarded  in  E.  V.,  126,  137; 
for  the  pronoun,  208 ;  wrong  in  E.  V.,  282, 
283. 

Ashdod,  its  present  site,  116. 

Asia,  how  much  it  included,  in  the  Acts,  221 ; 
rapid  extension  of  the  gospel  there,  221 ; 
may  denote  Asia  Minor,  291. 

Asiarchs,  their  office,  and  occasion  of  their 
friendship  for  Paul,  226. 

Assembly,  lawful,  228. 

Assos,  its  situation,  234 ;  why  Paul  went  thither 
on  foot,  234. 

Astrology  among  the  Orientals,  151. 

Athens,  how  far  from  Berea,  197  ;  extent  of  its 
idolatry,  198 ;  had  but  one  agora,  199 ;  cha- 
racter of  its  inhabitants,  199,  sq. ;  origin  of 
its  altar  "  to  an  unknown  god,"  204,  sq. ; 
visited  by  the  apostle  but  once,  210. 

Attaleia,  distance  from  Perga,  154 ;  its  site  de- 
scribed by  Beaufort,  171. 

Augustan  cohort,  290. 

Azotus,  the  ancient  Ashdod,  116. 

B. 

Bahr's  Symbolik,  71. 

Baptism  administered  in  the  name  of  Christ, 
53;  that  of  Cornelius  and  other  heathen, 
137;  that  of  Lydia  and  her  household, 
186 ;  infant,  187  ;  how  it  was  performed  in 
the  jail  at  Philippi,  191  ;  words  relating  to, 
191 ;  how  that  of  John  differed  from  that 
of  the  apostles,  218 ;  was  repeated  in  the 
case  of  certain  disciples  at  Ephesus,  219, 
sq. ;  mode  of,  258 ;  was  the  sign  of  re- 
pentance and  faith,  258 ;  proselyte,  45. 


Barbarian,  how  applied,  312. 

Barnabas,  signification  of  his  name,  73 ;  his  in- 
fluence at  Jerusalem,  123 ;  his  interview 
with  Paul  at  Tarsus,  140  ;  accompanies  the 
apostle  in  his  first  missionary-tour,  149; 
in  what  sense  called  an  apostle,  164 ;  why 
he  was  called  Jupiter  at  Lystra,  166 ;  went 
as  a  delegate  to  Jerusalem,  171,  sq. ;  his  dis- 
agreement with  Paul,  and  their  subsequent 
relations  to  each  other,  180;  the  letter  as- 
cribed to  him  not  genuine,  180. 

Basket,  123. 

Batlis,  swimming,  191 ;  of  Nero,  317. 

Baumgarten,  his  theory  of  the  design  of  the 
Acts,  29. 

Bengel,  quoted,  305. 

Berea,  its  distance  from  Thessalonica,  on  what 
river,  present  name,  196. 

Bernice,  facts  in  her  history,  279. 

Bethany,   the  scene  of  the  ascension,  34. 

Beth-horon,  269. 

Bethzur,  fountain  there,  115. 

Birks,  his  Horje  Apostolica;,  257. 

Biscoe  on  the  Acts,  95. 

Bishops,  the  same  as  presbyters,  170. 

Bithynia  not  entered  by  Paul,  182 ;  the  persecu- 
tion there  under  Trajan,  284. 

Blasphemy,  88. 

Blunt,  his  Undesigned  Coincidences,  etc.,  275. 

Boeckh  on  the  mode  of  undergirding  ancient 
ships,  300. 

Body  with  which  Christ  arose,  31,  119. 

Bolingbroke,  remark  of,  114. 

Breaking  of  Bread,  55. 

Brethren,  in  what  sense,  121 ;  how  constructed, 
157 ;  conciliatory  use,  60,  98,  256,  321. 

Burial,  hastened  in  the  East,  76, 

Burrus,  prefect  at  Rome,  320. 

Buttniann  on  the  meaning  and  use  of  Iva,  50. 


Csesar,  appeals  to,  278. 

Csesarea,  its  importance  in  Jewish  history,  116 ; 

the  seaport  of  Judea,  216  ;  how  often  Paul 

was  there,  246. 
Calf,  why  worshipped  by  the  Hebrews,  101. 
Ca7ial  through  the  Pontine  Marshes,  319. 
Candace,  mentioned   in  the  classics,   113 ;   the 

name  of  a  dynasty,  113. 
Candor  of  the  sacred  writers,  135,  226,  280. 
Canon  of  Muratori,  325. 
Capenian  Gate,  319. 
Captain  of  the  temple,  65. 
Captivity,  Paul's  second,  at  Rome,  325. 
Capua,  how  far  from  Rome,  319. 
Caramania,  294. 
Carriage,  sense  of,  in  N.  T.,  248. 


INDEX  11. 


337 


Castor  and  Pollux,  name  of  a  ship,  316,  318. 

Cayster,  a  river,  216. 

Cemetery,  signification  of  the  word,  106;  first 

used  by  Christians,  106. 
Cenchrese,  215. 

Centurio7is  always  mentioned  favorably,  128. 
Chains,  how  fastened  to  prisoners,  144. 
Chaldeans,  land  of  the,  91. 
Charran,  in  Mesopotamia,  91. 
Chios  (now  Scio),  an  island  in  the  iEgean,  235. 
Chrestiis,  an  instigator  of  the  Jews  at  Rome, 

210,  sq. 
Christ  made  his  resurrrection  certain  to  his  dis- 
ciples, 30;  the  "brethren"  of,  35;  was  om- 
niscient, 39 ;  in  what  capacity  he  reigns  as 
Mediator,  52 ;  miracles  were  wrought  in  his 
name,  58,  68,  127 ;  is  the  author  of  natural 
and  spiritual  life,  60 ;  his  final  coming  de- 
scribed as  near,  because  near  to  a  true  Chris- 
tian consciousness,  61,  sq. ;  was  worshipped 
by  the  first  disciples,  106,  121,  132 ;  is  the 
final  Judge  of  men,  136,  209 ;  fulfilled  the 
prophecies,  156, 194 ;  was  destined  to  suffer, 
287. 
Christians,    origin   and    import  of  the  name, 

141. 
Chronology,  why  that  of  the  Acts  still  difficult, 
20 ;  dates  that  may  be  established,  21,  sq. ; 
computed  by  the  Jews  in  different  ways, 
93 ;  on  what  principle  we  are  to  judge  of 
the  accuracy  of  chronological  designations, 
155,  sq. 
Chryses,  priest  of  Apollo,  prayer  of,  206. 
Chrysostom,  255. 
Church,  biblical  uses  of  the  word,  100 ;  Meyer 

on  the  unity  of  the,  125. 
Church-officers,  election  of,  169. 
Cicero,  his  letters,  216. 

Cilicia,  why  named  always  after  Syria,   125; 
tent-making  a  common  trade  in,  211 ;  sea 
of,  293. 
Circumcision,  covenant  of  the,  93. 
Citizenship,  Roman,  immunities  which  it  secured, 
192 ;  seldom  claimed  falsely,  261 ;  how  ac- 
quired by  foreigners,  261. 
Citta  Vecchia,  in  Malta,  314. 
Claude,  now  Gozzo,  300 ;  distance  from  the  point 

of  Koura,  305. 
Claudius,  the  famine  in  his  reign,  141,  sq. ;  his 
banishment    of   the   Jews,    210;    restored 
Achaia  to  the  Senate,  213. 
Clemens,  his  letter,  325. 
Clergy,  origin  of  the  term,  36. 
Climate  in  Palestine,  79. 
Cnidus,  name  of  a  town  and  a  peninsula,  294 ; 

ruins  which  exist  there,  294. 
Coincidences  between  the  Acts  and  the  Epistles, 


164,  168,  177,  223,  230,  239,  240,  241,  242, 
259,  273 ;  between  the  Acts  and  Josephus, 
83,  91,  104,  132,  143,  147,  264,  271,  275,  276, 
290 ;  between  the  Acts  and  Philo,  91,  104, 
266;   between  the  Acts  and  the  classical 
writers,  113,  152,  186,  192,  198,  202,  204,  210, 
213,  221,  275,  281,  289. 
Coins  still  extant :  of  Cyprus,  152 ;  of  Philippi, 
185 ;  of  Berea,  197 ;  of  Ephesus,  227,  228 ; 
of  Tarsus,  255 ;  of  Adramyttium,  291. 
Coleridge,  his  singular  opinion,  312. 
Colonnade  at  Damascus,  120. 
Colosse,  whether  visited  by  Paul,  182. 
Coming,  final,  of  Christ,  34,  62 ;  when  expected, 

63. 
Communion,  when  first  used  of  the  Lord's  Sup- 
per, 55. 
Community  of  goods  in   the  first  church,  56, 

73. 
Conder's  Tent- Work  in  Palestine,  105. 
Conspiracy  against  Paul,  265. 
Copenhagen,  battle  of,  306. 

Corinth,  how  far  distant  from  Athens,  210 ;  how 
long  Pa,ul  remained  there,  213  ;  made  a  sec- 
ond journey  thither  which  is  not  recorded, 
229;  his  third  journey,  231. 
Corinthians,  Epistles  to,  223,  230. 
Cornelius  not  a  Jewish  proselyte,  128;   nature 
of  the  homage  which  he  offered  to  Peter, 
131 ;  time  of  his  conversion,  138 ;  in  what 
sense  he  was  the  first  convert  from  heathen- 
ism, 173. 
Cos,  or  Co,  its  situation,  244 ;  why  now  called 

Stanchio,  244. 
Council,  Jewish.     See  Sanhedrim. 
Council  at  Jerusalem,  173. 
Council  of  Trent,  decree  of,  220. 
Crete,  295 ;  has  good  harbors  on  the  north  side, 

295. 
Crispus,  Bishop  of  ^gina,  212. 
Cumx,  317,  319. 
Curtiss,  Samuel  Ives,  Jr.,  on  the  Levitical  priests, 

74. 
Custodia  libera,  276. 
Cydnus,  a  river,  125. 

Cyprus  visited  by  Paul  on  his  first  tour,  150; 
traversed  by  a  good  road,  151;  governed 
by  a  proconsul,  152 ;  left  to  the  windward 
on  Paul's  voyage  to  Rome,  292. 
Gyrene,  44. 


Damascus,   its  situation,   117;    labors  of   Paul 

there,  122. 
David,  his  tomb,  51 ;  was  inspired,  52 ;  would 

build  the  temple,  103. 
Davidson,  his  Introduction  to  the  New  Testa- 


338 


INDEX  II. 


ment  cited,  14,  16,  96,  286 ;  his  Lectures  on 
Biblical  Criticism,  241. 

Day  commenced  early  in  the  East,  79. 

Deacons,  86.     See  Alms-distributers. 

Death  as  viewed  by  Christians,  106. 

Dembra,  modern  name  of  Myra,  293. 

Demetrius,  his  occupation,  224;  his  artful  speech, 
225. 

Demons,  their  testimony  to  Christ,  108. 

Derbe,  near  the  base  of  the  Black  Mountain, 
165;  remarkable  ruins  still  found  there, 
165 ;  why  not  mentioned  in  the  Second 
Epistle  to  Timothy,  168;  why  named  be- 
fore Lystra,  181. 

Diana,  use  made  of  her  shrines,  224 ;  her  tem- 
ple in  Paul's  time,  225 ;  how  extensively 
worshipped,  225,  sq. ;  repeating  her  name  a 
religious  act,  227 ;  tradition  as  to  the  origin 
of  her  image,  228. 

Dioscuri,  an  image  and  a  name,  316. 

Diospolitans,  an  Egyptian  dynasty,  96. 

Dominies,  its  Roman  use,  281. 

Drachm,  Attic,  its  value,  222. 

Di~usiUa,  her  family,  and  facts  in  her  history, 
275. 

Dust  thrown  into  the  air,  260. 

Duumviri,  188,  315. 

E. 

Egyptian  impostor  referred  to  by  Lysias,  254; 
how  Luke's  account  of  him  may  be  recon- 
ciled with  that  of  Josephus,  254,  sq. 

Egyptian  history  obscure,  96. 

Elam,  or  Elamais,  where  situated,  44. 

Elders,  Christian.     See  Presbyters. 

Elders,  Jewish,  66,  79,  88. 

Elymas,  the  Magian,  introduced  so  as  to  present 
a  true  picture  of  the  times,  151 ;  origin  of 
his  name,  152. 

Ephesus,  Paul's  first  visit  there,  216  ;  his  return, 
218 ;  the  theatre  at,  225 ;  residence  of  the 
proconsul,  228 ;  Wood's  discoveries  at,  229. 

Epicureans,  the  "  minute  philosophers  of  their 
day,"  199 ;  their  principles,  199. 

Epistles  of  Paul,  when  and  where  written  :  those 
which  he  sent  from  Rome,  25,  325 ;  the  First 
and  Second  to  the  Thessalonians,  215 ;  that 
to  the  Galatians,  220 ;  the  First  to  the  Cor- 
inthians, 223 ;  the  Second  to  the  Corinth- 
ians, 230 ;  that  to  the  Romans,  231. 

Erastus,  224. 

Esdud,  116. 

Ethiopia,  of  what  country  the  name,  113 ;  the 
gospel  preached  there  at  an  early  period, 
116. 

Ethiopian  eunuch,  his  country  and  rank,  113; 
why  he  was  reading  the  prophecies,  113; 


traditional  scene  of  his  baptism,  115;  his 

reputed  name,  116. 
Eucharist,  how  observed,  55. 
Eunuch,  where  baptized,  115. 
Eurodydon,  Euroaquilo,  299. 
Eutychus,  whether  restored  to  life,  234. 
Evangelist,  application  of  this  term,  246. 
Exorcism  at  Ephesus,  221. 

P. 

Faith  an  act  of  divine  power,  60,  218 ;  its  puri- 
fying efficacy,  174;  the  condition  of  par- 
don, 286 ;  repentance  and  good  works,  the 
evidence  of,  287. 

Fair  Havens,  on  the  south  of  Crete,  295;  the 
Council  held  there,  296. 

Famine  foretold  by  Agabus,  141 ;  how  exten- 
sive, and  when  it  occurred,  141,  sq. 

Fasting  as  a  Christian  exercise,  149. 

Fdix,  when  recalled  from  office,  22 ;  his  charac- 
ter, 267,  271 ;  how  long  he  was  procurator, 
272 ;  sought  a  bribe  from  Paul,  276. 

Felton,  Prof.,  his  opinion  on  a  passage  in  Arrian, 
298. 

Ferasches,  their  office,  263. 

Festus,  when  appointed  procurator,  22  ;  his  cha- 
racter, 276 ;  why  he  wished  to  send  Paul  to 
Jerusalem,  277  ;  wliy  he  conferred  with  his 
council,  278  ;  Luke  describes  him  in  accord- 
ance with  history,  281. 

Foreknowledge  of  God  as  related  to  his  purpose, 
49,  285. 

Forgiveness  of  sins,  53. 

Or. 

Gaius,  diflFerent  persons  of  this  name,  226,  231. 

Galatia  not  visited  on  Paul's  first  mission,  165 ; 
how  bounded,  182;  when  the  gospel  was 
first  preached  there,  182;  why  named  be- 
fore Phrygia,  217. 

Galatians,  Epistle  to,  220. 

Gall,  of  what  the  figure.  111. 

Gallio,  his  character  correctly  drawn,  213 ;  car- 
ried his  impartiality  too  far,  214. 

Gamalid,  how  described  in  the  Talmud,  82; 
alleged  anachronism  in  his  speech,  82,  sq. ; 
singular  character  of  his  advice,  84. 

Gangas,  a  stream  near  Philippi,  185. 

Garlands  used  in  sacrifice,  166. 

Garrison,  Roman,  at  Jerusalem,  263 ;  Turkish, 
253 ;  at  Rome,  319. 

Gate,  the  Beautiful,  its  situation,  57,  sq. ;  Cape- 
nian,  through  which  Paul  entered  Rome, 
319;  Nomentana,  near  the  prefect's  camp, 
319  ;  San  Sebastiano,  319. 

Gates,  Cilician,  169. 

Gaza,  when  destroyed  by  the  Romans,  112 ;  the 
roads  which  lead  thither,  112. 


INDEX  II. 


339 


Gazith,  hall  of  council,  262. 

Gehenna,  how  understood  by  the  Jews,  40. 

Geib  on  Roman  law,  270. 

Genitive  of  relationship,  35. 

Gentiles,  their  acceptance  of  the  gospel  foretold 

by  the  prophets,  53,  175. 
Gesenius,  his  view  of  the  Maltese  language,  313. 
Gift  of  tongues,  how  conferred  on  the  day  of 
Pentecost,  41;   object  of  the  endowment, 
42;   the  miracle  unquestionable,  43;  why 
described  so  concisely,  137. 
Goad,  285. 
Gophna,  269. 

Gospel,  universality  of  its   design,   134;    first 
preached  to  the  hea'then,  139;   character- 
ized as  a  system  of  grace,  162 ;  why  sub- 
verted by  the  Jewish  attachment  to  cir- 
cumcision, 172. 
Gozzo,  an  island,  300. 
Green,  his  Developed  Criticism,  72. 
Greek    language    used    with    great    purity    by 
Luke,  15 ;  spoken  extensively  in  Palestine, 
90 ;  furnished  a  medium  of  intercourse  be- 
tween different  nations,  166,  254. 
Grenna,  ancient  Cyrene,  44. 
Grotto  del  Cane,  317. 

H. 

Hades  personified,  50. 

Saliacmon,  a  river  at  whose  mouth  Paul  em- 
barked for  Athens,  197. 

Harvest,  when  ripe  in  Egypt,  294. 

Hauran,  east  of  the  Jordan,  117. 

Heathen  described  as  those  "afar  off,"  53  ;  have 
sufficient  light  to  create  obligation,  167, 207  ; 
acknowledged  blindly  the  existence  of  God,' 
205 ;  have  no  excuse  for  their  idolatry,  207  \ 
must  repent  to  be  prepared  for  the  jud"-- 
ment,  208.  ° 

Heathenism,  its  immorality,  176. 

Hebraisms,  33,  39,  62,  64,  75,  81,  97,  99,  121  175 
etc.  '        '       ' 

Hebrew  language,  Hupfeld  on  the,  313. 

Hebrews,  Epistle  to,  25. 

Hebron,  whether  confounded  by  Stephen  with 
Sychem,  95. 

Hellenists,  how  distinguished  from  Greeks.  85, 
139;  why  Paul  labored  specially  for  them' 
124.  ' 

Herod  Antipas,  his  war  with  Aretas,  20;  his 
exile  on  the  banks  of  the  Rhone   149 

Hess,  his  History  of  the  Apostles,  44. 

Holy  Spirit,  why  expressed  often  without  the 
article,  30;  baptism  in  the,  32;  inspired 
those  who  wrote  the  Scriptures,  36-  de- 
scent of  the,  41 ;  "  filled  with  "  the',  42  • 
his  agency  characteristic  of  the  New  Econ- 


omy, 47 ;  bestowed  on  the  apostles,  72,  74 ; 
resisted  by  the  Jews,  103;  in  what  sense 
unknown  to  John's  disciples,  219 ;  qualified 
religious  teachers  for  their  office,  181,  240  ; 
peculiar  sphere  of,  in  Acts,  183. 

Horace  quoted,  247,  301,  310. 

Horeb,  why  interchanged  with  "Sinai"  as  an 
equivalent  designation,  98. 

Hoxise  to  house,  worshipping  from,  56,  84. 

Hoxisetop,  129. 

Humiliation  of  Christ,  114. 

Humphry,  his  Commentary  on  the  Acts,  29. 

Hupfeld  on  the  prevalence  of  the  Hebrew  lan- 
guage, 313. 

I. 

Iconium,  how  far  from  Antioch,  163 ;  described 
by  Leake,  163. 

Illiterate  in  the  Jewish  sense,  69. 

lllyricum,  when  visited  by  Paul,  230. 

Imperative,  dehortatory  use,  106,  130. 

Impluvium  in  ancient  houses,  191. 

Indich,  name  of  the  eunuch,  116. 

Lifant  baptism  founded  on  no  sure  proof-text 
in  N.  T.,  186  ;  opinion  of  scholars  concern- 
ing, 186,  sq. ;  confessed  to  be  not  scriptural 
186. 

Infinitive,  as  used  with  the  article,  58 ;  not  pleo- 
nastic, 58 ;  how  constructed,  231. 

Inscriptions  that  corroborate  Luke's  history: 
one  given  by  Gruter,  128 ;  one  found  at 
Thyatira,  186;  two  in  Malta,  315. 

Italian  cohort,  why  so  named,  128;  why  sta- 
tioned at  CiBsarea,  128 ;  may  be  identical 
with  the  Augustan,  290. 

J. 

Jacob,  where  buried,  95 ;  the  number  of  his 
family  on  his  descent  into  Egypt,  94 ;  his 
bridge  over  the  Jordan,  117. 

Jailer  at  Philippi,  how  we  may  view  the  cir- 
cumstances of  his  convei-sion,  190. 

James  the  Elder,  143. 

James  the  Younger,  pastor  at  Jerusalem,  146, 
249 ;  his  advice  to  Paul,  250. 

Jenisalem,  destruction  of,  a  type,  48 ;  how  often 
visited  by  Paul  after  his  conversion,  216, 
248 ;  why  supposed  to  be  his  proper  field 
of  labor,  259. 

Jest,  that  of  Agrippa,  289. 

Jews  desired  to  die  at  Jerusalem,  43;  could  not 
inflict  capital  punisliment,  104  ;  numerous 
in  Cyprus,  151 ;  way  in  which  they  insti- 
gated the  heathen  against  the  Christians. 
163,  164 ;  enjoyed  religious  toleration,  188, 
214;  expelled  from  Rome,  210;  were  hated 
by  the  Greeks,  214  ;  held  that  the  end  justi- 


340 


INDEX  11. 


fies  the  means,  266 ;  their  singular  reserve 
in  the  interview  with  Paul  at  Rome,  322. 

Joel,  his  prophecy  (3  :  1-5)  explained,  46. 

John  the  Baptist,  his  disciples,  219 ;  his  confessed 
inferiority  to  Clirist,  157 ;  nature  of  his  bap- 
tism, 218,  219 ;  by  whom  slain,  275. 

Joppa,  how  far  from  Lydda,  126 ;  its  present 
name,  126. 

Josephus,  his  account  of  Drusilla,  275 ;  his  ship- 
wreck in  the  Adriatic,  303. 

Judas  the  Galilean,  the  place  of  his  birth,  83  ; 
ground  of  his  opposition  to  the  Roman 
Government,  83. 

Judas  the  traitor,  his  end  well  known  at  Jeru- 
salem, 36 ;  no  inconsistency  in  the  different 
accounts  of  his  death,  37. 

Judgment,  day  of,  62 ;  to  be  universal,  136,  209 ; 
for  the  righteous  and  the  wicked,  273 ;  moral 
effect  of  looking  for,  273. 

Julius,  his  kindness  to  Paul,  292.    . 

Justin  Martyr,  his  testimony  concerning  the  Sab- 
bath, 233. 

K. 

Ke/r  Saba,  the  supposed  site  of  Antipatris,  269. 

Kikries,  ancient  Cenchre£e,  215. 

Kingdom  of  God,  sense  of  the  phrase,  169,  240. 

Kingdom  of  Christ  as  Mediator  temporary,  53. 

Kirchhofer,  his  work  on  the  New  Testament 
Canon,  13. 

Kishon,  river  near  Carmel,  246. 

Knobel,  his  Volkertafel,  91. 

Konieh,  the  ancient  Iconium,  163. 

Koura,  a  point  at  the  entrance  of  St.  Paul's 
Bay,  305 ;  the  scene  of  a  modern  ship- 
wreck, 305. 

Kurtz,  his  article  on  "  The  Angel  of  the  Lord," 
98. 


Laity  denied  the  cup  by  Catholics,  55. 

Lange,  his  Leben  Jesu,  232. 

Lasea,  its  site  identified,  295. 

Latin  not  used  in  the  courts,  270. 

Latinisms  in  the  Greek  of  the  New  Testament, 
141,  221,  255. 

Law,  the  higher.  80. 

Laying  on  of  hands,  its  significance,  86. 

Levites  as  a  temple-guard,  65;  their  right  of 
property,  74. 

Lewin,  his  Life  and  Epistles  of  Paul,  262. 

Liberality  of  the  first  Christians,  56 ;  of  the  be- 
lievers at  Antioch  for  those  in  Judea,  142  ; 
true  rule  of,  142. 

Libertines,  who  they  were,  87. 

Libya,  44. 

Lictors  ("Serjeants"),  192. 

Lie-to,  a  sea-phrase,  302. 


Lightfoot,  Canon,  on  "lawful  assemblies"  at 
Ephesus,  228. 

Lord,  meaning  and  uses  of  the  title,  106. 

Lot,  36,  40. 

Lucian,  his  account  of  the  ship  driven  into  the 
Piraius,  308. 

Lud,  or  Lid,  ancient  Lydda,  126. 

Luke,  the  writer  of  the  Acts,  13 ;  peculiarities 
of  his  style,  14  ;  sketch  of  his  life,  15 ;  value 
of  his  testimony  as  a  physician,  15 ;   ex- 
amples of  his  accuracy  as  a  historian,  128, 
143,  152,  188,  195,  198,  213,  270,  273 ;  has  not 
shown  himself  ignorant  of  Jewish  customs, 
132;    his  first  connection  with  Paul,  183 
writes   as    an  eye-witness,   189,   233,  245 
abounds  in  the  use  of  nautical  terms,  294 
traces  of  his  medical  profession,  315. 

Luthard,  his  review  of  Meyer,  156. 

Lutro,  perhaps  Phoenix  in  Crete,  297. 

Lycaonia,  its  extent,  164. 

Lycaonian  dialect,  what  is  known  of  it,  166. 

Lydda,  modern  Lud,  or  Lid,  126. 

Lydia,  her  name,  186 ;  members  of  her  house- 
hold, 186. 

Lysias,  why  he  favored  Paul,  266,  268 ;  his  letter, 
268 ;  his  misrepresentation,  268. 

Lystra,  its  bearing  from  Iconium,  165 ;  its  exact 
position  not  fixed,  165. 

M. 

Macaulay  quoted,  290. 

Macedonia,  how  applied  by  the  Greeks,  184;  its 
Roman  signification,  211. 

Macro,  the  prefect,  324. 

3Iadiavi,  or  Midian,  where  situated,  98. 

3Ialta,  312. 

Ilaltese  language,  313. 

Manaen,  in  what  sense  "  brought  up  with 
Herod,"  149. 

Marches,  how  rapidly  performed  by  ancient 
armies,  269. 

Mark,  his  relationship  to  Barnabas,  148;  in 
what  capacity  he  attended  Paul,  151 ;  his 
abrupt  return  from  the  mission,  154;  re- 
gained the  apostle's  confidence,  180. 

Markets  the  resort  of  loungers,  195  ;  courts  held 
in  them,  195,  228. 

Martyr,  how  distinguished  in  sense  from  witness, 
258. 

Mdrubah,  a  stream  near  which  Philip  may  have 
met  the  Ethiopian,  115. 

Matala,  cape  of,  298. 

Matthias,  his  appointment  as  an  apostle,  40,  85. 

Media,  44. 

Medina,  314. 

Meleda  not  the  island  where  Paul  was  wrecked, 
312. 


INDEX  II. 


341 


Melita,  why  not  recognized  by  the  mariners, 
309 ;  the  island  where  Paul  was  wrecked, 
312;  its  extent,  312;  annexed  to  the  priBtor- 
ship  of  Sicily,  314. 

Mestara  Valley,  309. 

Meyer  on  the  unity  of  the  Church,  125 ;  mis- 
translated, 79. 

Middle  voice,  how  used,  258. 

Miletian  speech  attested  as  genuine,  243. 

Miletus,  how  far  from  Ephesus,  236 ;  address  of 
Paul  there  to  the  Ephesian  elders,  237 ;  how 
far  from  the  sea,  244. 

Milton,  208,  244. 

Ministered,  New-Testament  meaning  of,  149. 

Miracles,  how  designated,  and  import  of  the 
term,  49;  through  the  apostles,  55;  what 
rendered  those  at  Ephesus  remarkable,  221. 

Mitylene,  235. 

Mohammedan  monks,  227. 

Mole  at  Pozzuoli,  317. 

Moloch,  how  to  be  understood  in  Stephen's 
speech,  101. 

Morier,  his  Travels,  263. 

Moses,  how  a  mediator  like  Christ,  63 ;  his  age, 
98 ;  his  eloquence,  97 ;  how  regarded  by 
Stephen,  100. 

Mosque  of  Omar,  253. 

Movers,  his  explanation  of  Remphan,  101. 

Myra,  its  situation,  the  ruins  found  there,  293. 

N. 

Name  of  the  Lord,  meaning  of,  48,  53. 

Names  used  among  the  Jews,  152 ;  of  places, 
permanent,  244. 

Navigation,  in  what  part  of  the  year  commenced 
and  closed  by  the  ancients,  294,  296 ;  how 
regulated  at  a  distance  from  the  land, 
303,  sq. 

Nazarene,  how  applied  to  Christ,  49,  58,  68. 

Nazarites,  rules  to  which  they  were  subject, 
215,  250 ;  their  expenses  defrayed  often  by 
others,  250. 

Nazorasans,  219. 

Neander  on  the  election  to  church  offices,  169 ; 
on  the  legal  "yoke,"  174;  on  infant  bap- 
tism, 187. 

Neapolis,  whether  Paul  landed  there,  184. 

Neby  Dauid,  a  mosque,  51 ;  that  of  Ismail,  view 
from,  292. 

Negatives  not  confounded,  119. 

Nelson,  Lord,  306. 

Nicopolis,  269. 

Numerals,  indefinite  use  of,  267. 


Obedience  to  God  the  first  law,  80. 
Olivet,  origin  of  the  name,  34. 


Omissions  in  the  Acts  show  the  history  to  be  in- 
dependent of  the  Epistles,  189. 

Oracles  abolished,  244. 

Ordination  of  Timothy,  181. 

Oriental  Customs :  laying  gifts  at  the  feet  of  kings, 
73 ;  imposition  of  hands,  86 ;  uncovering 
the  feet,  99;  shaking  off  the  dust  of  the 
feet,  163;  rending  the  garments,  167  ;  throw- 
ing dust  into  the  air,  260 ;  silence  enjoined 
by  striking  on  the  mouth,  202,  sq. 

Orontes  connected  Antioch  with  the  sea,  150. 

Ortijgia,  316. 

Overseer  same  as  bishop,  237. 


Paley  on  the  apostles'  testimony  to  the  resur- 
rection of  Christ,  135 ;  on  Luke's  accuracy, 
143 ;  on  the  historic  agreement  of  the  Acts 
and  the  Epistles,  164 ;  his  comparison  of 
Acts  19  :  21  with  Rom.  1  :  11,  14,  223. 

Pamphylia,  44  ;  sea  of,  293. 

Paphos,  what  place  of  this  name  intended, 
151. 

Paronomasia,  a  striking  case,  113. 

Participle,  past,  with  a  past  verb,  246. 

Parthia,  its  boundaries,  44. 

Pastoral  Epistles,  when  written,  325. 

Patara,  244. 

Paul,  year  of  his  conversion,  20 ;  how  old  then, 
106;  early  life  and  training,  103  ;  how  long 
he  remained  in  Arabia,  122 ;  his  first  jour- 
ney to  Jerusalem,  123;  mode  of  his  jour- 
ney from  Caisarea  to  Tarsus,  125  ;  how  long 
he  remained  in  Syria  and  Cilicia,  125  ;  why 
he  says  nothing  of  his  alms-visit  to  Jeru- 
salem, 142 ;  in  what  year  he  made  his  sec- 
ond journey  to  Jerusalem,  148;  why  his 
name  was  changed  from  Saul  to  Paul,  152 ; 
encountered  "perils  of  rivers"  and  "perils 
of  robbers"  in  the  Pisidian  highlands,  154; 
how  long  he  was  absent  on  his  first  mis- 
sion, 171 ;  his  relation  to  Barnabas  after 
their  separation,  180 ;  year  in  which  he  de- 
parted on  his  second  mission,  180;  on  what 
principle  he  circumcised  Timothy,  181 ; 
why  he  neglected  to  plead  his  Roman  citi- 
zenship at  Philippi,  192;  whether  he  was 
tried  before  the  court  of  the  Areopagus, 
200,  sq. ;  why  he  did  not  revisit  Athens, 
210;  the  trade  at  which  he  wrought,  211 ; 
his  vow  at  Cenchreaj,  215  ;  how  long  he  wa.s 
absent  on  his  second  tour,  216 ;  his  mode 
of  preaching  at  Ephesus,  228 ;  his  unrecord- 
ed visit  to  Corinth,  229 ;  characteristic  of 
him  that  he  refers  so  often  to  his  own  ex- 
ample, 238  ;  duration  of  his  third  mission- 
ary-tour, 248 ;  liis  attempt  to  conciliate  the 


342 


INDEX  II. 


Jewish  believers  justifiable,  249,  251 ;  at 
what  age  he  entered  the  school  of  Gamaliel, 
256 ;  his  zeal  as  a  Pharisee,  256 ;  how  he 
acquired  his  Roman  citizenship,  261;  his 
eyesight,  263;  noble-minded  confession  of 
his  error,  264 ;  how  he  viewed  his  persecu- 
tion of  the  church,  283  ;  his  politic  appeal, 
265;  was  not  a  member  of  the  Sanhedrim, 
284 ;  when  he  preached  in  Judea,  286 ;  man- 
ner in  which  he  replied  to  the  charge  of 
insanity,  288 ;  his  judgment  vindicated,  297 ; 
his  calmness  amid  the  tempest,  304;  his 
ascendency  over  others,  305,  319 ;  how  he 
felt  on  approaching  Rome,  319 ;  how  he 
became  known  to  the  praetorians,  321 ;  his 
last  words  recorded  by  Luke,  324 ;  his  con- 
dition while  he  was  a  prisoner  at  Rome, 
324;  his  companions  at  that  time,  325; 
whether  he  was  released,  325;  his  subse- 
quent labors,  325 ;  his  joy  in  the  prospect 
of  death,  325. 

Pausanias,  204. 

Pentecost,  of  what  commemorative,  41 ;  how 
long  it  continued,  252. 

Perga,  Paul's  course  thither,  154;  its  site  de- 
scribed by  Sir  C.  Fellows,  154. 

Peter,  an  affinity  between  his  speeches  and  his 
Epistles,  17  ;  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit,  67  ; 
why  he  represented  the  pardon  of  Simon 
as  doubtful.  111 ;  had  not  the  ordinary 
Jewish  prejudices,  127 ;  how  he  regarded 
the  homage  of  Cornelius,  132 ;  devolved 
baptism  on  his  assistants,  137 ;  manner  in 
which  he  was  chained,  144  ;  his  journey  to 
Rome,  146 ;  posture  in  which  he  was  cru- 
cified, 146 ;  in  what  sense  he  first  preached 
to  the  heathen,  173 ;  his  last  recorded  act, 
175 ;  at  what  time  he  arrived  at  Antioch, 
217. 

Peutinger''s  Tables,  151. 

Pfanner's  Systema  Theologise  Gentilis  Puri- 
oris,  204. 

Pharaoh,  his  policy  toward  the  Hebrews,  96. 

Pharisees,  their  opinions,  264 ;  represented  as 
strict  by  Joseph  us,  282. 

Philip,  in  what  city  of  Samaria  he  preached, 
108;  his  residence  at  Cajsarea,  116;  why  he 
was  called  an  evangelist,  246. 

Philippi,  its  port,  184 ;  its  rank  as  a  city,  184 ; 
few  Jews  resided  there,  186 ;  why  its  mag- 
istrates were  called  proetors,  188 ;  character 
of  the  church  there,  193. 

Philippi,  Prof.,  his  mode  of  accounting  for  the 
silence  of  the  Jews  in  regard  to  the  Roman 
Cliristians,  322. 

Philipjnans,  Epistle  to,  325. 

Phiio  on  the  punishment  of  apostate  Jews,  266. 


Philostratus  quoted,  204. 

Phineka,  298. 

Phoenicia,  how  extensive,  139. 

Phoenix,  its  situation,  297 ;  direction  in  which 
its  harbor  opened,  297 ;  Mr.  Smith's  view, 
298. 

Phrygia,  how  bounded,  44 ;  little  known,  182. 

Place  of  Prayer,  185. 

Pliny,  his  letters,  221,  284. 

Plough  used  in  the  East,  285. 

Plumptre  on  the  preposition  "  eis,"  116. 

Politarcfis  accurately  used,  195. 

Pools  around  Jerusalem,  54. 

Porta  Nomentana,  319  ;  San  Sebastiano,  319. 

Portress  among  the  Jews,  145. 

Possession,  demoniac,  distinguished  from  ordi- 
nary disease,  78,  108. 

Potter's  Field,  its  situation,  38. 

Pozzuoli,  317. 

Prxtorium  at  Caesarea,  270  ;  at  Rome,  319. 

Prayer,  at  what  hours  offered  by  the  Jews,  46, 
57;  was  addressed  to  Christ  by  the  first 
disciples,  39,  121 ;  a  part  of  tlie  preacher's 
work,  86  ;  whether  uttered  in  concert,  71 ; 
the  attitude  in  which  it  was  offered,  243 ; 
was  the  means  of  saving  Paul's  compan- 
ions in  the  ship,  305. 

Preaching  the  word,  107. 

Precipices  south  of  Jerusalem,  37. 

Preposition  "en,"  32;  "eis,"  116. 

Presbyters,  how  elected,  169;  Neander's  view, 
169;  origin  of  the  term,  170;  same  as 
bishops,  170 ;  their  functions,  170. 

Priests  divided  into  classes,  65 ;  distinguished 
from  Levites,  74 ;  many  converted,  87. 

Prisoners,  in  what  manner  they  were  chained, 
144 ;  were  subject  to  different  degrees  of 
rigor,  275,  276,  280 ;  sometimes  wore  their 
chains  when  on  trial,  289 ;  were  often  sent 
to  Rome  from  the  provinces,  290;  were 
committed  to  the  praetorian  prefect,  324. 

Proconsuls,  how  distinguished  from  propraetors, 
152. 

Prodigies,  how  precursors  of  calamity,  48. 

Prophesying,  Scripture  sense  of,  47. 

Prophets,  sons  of  the,  64  ;  how  related  to  teach- 
ers, 148. 

Proseuche  at  Philippi,  185. 

Proselytes,  different  classes  of,  45;  initiatory 
ceremonies,  45. 

Proselyte  baptism,  45 ;  conveniences  for,  in  Jeru- 
salem, 54, 

Protestants,  their  view  of  the  gospel,  87. 

Proverbs,  examples  of,  256,  285,  307. 

Provinces  divided  into  imperial  and  senatorian, 
152. 

Psalim  explained :  (69  :  25),  38 ;  (109  :  8),  38 ;  (16 : 


INDEX  11. 


343 


8-11),  50 ;  (118  :  22),  68  ;  (2  :  1,  2),  71 ;  why 

the  second  Psalm  is  called  the  first,  158. 
Plolemais,  situation  and  modern  name,  24G. 
Fublius,    his    title    confirmed    by  inscriptions 

lately   found,   315:    a  question   as  to  his 

rank,  315. 
Purpose  of  God  in  saving  men,  175. 
Pateoli,  its  situation,   317;    entry -port  of  the 

wheat-ships,  317. 

Q. 

Quaternion,  143. 

Quatuorviri,  where  found,  188. 

Queen,  Candace,  113 ;  of  Adiabene,  142. 

Q>d  faclt,  etc.,  a  law-phrase,  37. 

Quirina,  a  Roman  tribe,  315. 

Quotations  from  the  Old  Testament,  how  applied 
sometimes  in  the  New,  38;  with  what  de- 
gree of  verbal  accuracy  made,  40,  63,  sq., 
102,  160,  sq.,  175;  why  conformed  to  the 
Septuagint,  175. 

R. 

Ras-el-Abiad,  a  cape,  292. 

Readings,  various,  occur  in  the  Acts,  44,  64,  115, 
118,  179,  240,  247,  271,  299 ;  many  of  them 
unimportant,  281. 

Recorder  at  Ephesus,  227 ;  his  speech  adroit, 
229. 

Redemption  effected  chiefly  by  the  death  of 
Christ,  241. 

Refreshing,  times  of,  61. 

Remphan,  101. 

Repent,  61. 

Repentance  a  divine  gift,  81,  139,  186;  required 
of  those  who  received  baptism,  156. 

Reservoirs,  how  used  in  the  East,  54. 

Restoration,  what  intended  by,  63. 

Resurrection,  that  of  Christ  ascertained  confi- 
dently by  his  disciples,  30 ;  proved  the 
Saviour's  mission,  39;  denied  by  the  Sad- 
ducees,  65 ;  excited  the  ridicule  of  the  Athe- 
nians, 209 ;  an  article  of  the  Jewish  belief, 
264 ;  view  of  Josephus,  264 ;  effect  of  the 
belief  of,  on  the  mind  of  Paul,  273. 

Reuss,  his  Histoire  de  la  Tiieologie,  183. 

Rcvcaler,  under  the  ancient  dispensation,  iden- 
tical with  the  Logos,  98. 

Revelation,  important  law  of,  42. 

Rhegium,  now  Reggio,  316 ;  distance  to  Puteoli, 
318. 

Rheinis  translation,  whence  made,  228. 

Rhodes,  244 ;  journey  thither  from  Beirut,  245. 

Road  between  Bethlehem  and  Hebron,  115. 

Roads  from  Jerusalem  to  Gaza,  112. 

Robi7ison,  his  description  oT  Mars'  Hill,  200 ; 
of  the  castle  of  Antonia,  253. 


Roofs,  how  built,  129. 
Romans,  Epistle  to,  231. 
Rudders  in  ancient  vessels,  310. 

S. 

Sabbath,  Christian,  traces  of  its  observance  in 
the  New  Testament,  233 ;  rests  on  apostolic 
institution,  233. 

Sacrifices,  their  tj'pical  import,  57. 

Sadducees,  their  principles,  65,  264. 

Salamis,  the  scenery  tiiere,  151. 

Salmone,  the  eastern  promontory  of  Crete,  295. 

Salmonetta,  an  island  in  St.  Paul's  Bay,  309. 

Salvation  gratuitous,  172. 

Samaria,  108,  109. 

Samaritan  Codex,  its  critical  value,  92. 

Samothrace,  183. 

Sandal,  99. 

Sanhedrim,  its  organization,  66 ;  its  proceetlings 
public,  69;  place  of  session,  88;  different 
modes  of  designation,  71,  117 ;  extent  of 
its  power,  117;  qualification  of  its  mem- 
bers, 284. 

Saron,  126. 

ScUalia,  site  of  ancient  Attaleia,  171. 

Schneider,  Rev.  B.,  extract  from  his  journal, 
246. 

Scio,  ancient  Chios,  235. 

Scorpion  a  peculiar  scourge,  84. 

Scribes,  the  Jewish  scholars,  66,  88,  265 

Sect,  various  applications  of  the  word,  78. 

Seleucia,  the  great  seaport  of  nortliern  Syria,  150; 
appearance  of  the  country  from  the  bay, 
150. 

Seneca,  317. 

Sepp,  his  Loben  Jesu,  123,  282. 

Sergius  Pauhis,  his  office,  152 ;  his  title  confirmed 
as  correct,  152. 

Servant,  a  title  of  the  Messiah,  59. 

Shekinah,  what  it  was,  91. 

Shijjs,  ancient,  their  size,  293,  308;  how  they 
were  undergirded,  300 ;  were  easily  shat- 
tered, 303  ;  could  anchor  by  the  stern,  306; 
were  steered  with  two  rudders,  310;  de- 
pended for  speed  chiefly  on  one  sail,  310 ; 
had  figure-heads,  316;  how  rapidly  they 
could  sail,  318. 

Shipwreck,  scene  of  Paul's,  310. 

Sicarii,  255. 

Sidon,  its  harbor,  its  distance  from  Csesarea, 
292. 

Simon  the  Magian,  character  of  his  pretensions, 
109 ;  exposure  of  his  hypocrisy,  1 10 ;  whether 
identical  with  a  certain  other  Simon,  111. 

Simony,  how  tlie  word  arose,  110. 

Sitiai.    See  Horeh. 

Smith,  E.,  his  visit  to  Antipatris,  269. 


344 


INDEX  II. 


Smith,  J.,  his  work  on  The  Voyage  and  Ship- 
wreck of  St.  Paul,  291,  297. 

Soa-ates,  80.     " 

Solomon^ s  Porch,  why  so  called,  59. 

Sonntag,  his  explanation  of  the  difficulty  in 
regard  to  Theudas,  82. 

Spain,  Paul's  journey  to,  325. 

Spirit.    See  Holy  Spirit. 

Spratt  and  Forbes  quoted,  244. 

St.  Paul's  Bay  described,  309;  place  of  the 
apostle's  shipwreck,  310. 

St.  Philij)'s  Fountain,  115. 

Stephanas,  his  family,  187. 

Stephen,  his  doctrines,  88;  nature  of  the  accusa- 
tion against  him,  88 ;  analysis  of  his  speech, 
89 ;  Neander's  analysis,  89 ;  that  of  Luger 
and  Baur,  90;  was  probably  a  Hellenist, 
90 ;  difficulties  in  his  discourse  examined, 
92,  93,  94,  95,  101 ;  the  "  Place  of  Stoning," 
105;  his  dying  prayer,  106;  not  the  only 
witness  whose  blood  was  shed,  284. 

Stier  on  the  discourses  of  the  apostles,  66. 

Stocks,  189. 

Stoics,  the  tendency  of  their  philosophy,  199. 

Straight,  the  street  so  called,  120. 

Striking,  as  said  of  winds,  299. 

Stuart,  Prof.,  his  interpretation  of  the  sixteenth 
Psalm,  50 ;  his  view  of  Christ  as  Mediator, 
52. 

Sun,  darkening  of,  a  prophetic  symbol,  48. 

Synagogues,  how  numerous  at  Jerusalem,  87 ; 
their  officers,  117 ;  punishment  inflicted  in 
them,  284. 

Syracuse,  how  far  from  Melita,  316. 


Toftor,  sea  visible  there,  292. 

Tarsus,  its  literary  eminence,  125;  its  political 
importance,  255 ;  did  not  possess  the  rights 
of  Roman  citizenship,  261. 

Tell  el-Hasy,  115. 

Te)nple,  how  its  services  were  performed,  65; 
its  destruction  foretold  by  Stephen,  88; 
constructed  so  as  to  shadow  forth  spiritual 
truths,  102;  regarded  with  excessive  ven- 
eration by  the  Jews,  103  ;  portion  of  it  iii- 
terdicted  to  foreigners,  252. 

Temple-sweeper,  227. 

Terracina,  319. 

Tertullus,  his  gross  flattery,  271. 

Testament,  Old,  as  divided  by  the  Jews,  154. 

Theatres  used  among  the  Greeks  for  public 
business,  147,  225. 

Theophilus  a  representative  of  those  for  whom 
Luke  wrote,  18  ;  his  rank  and  country,  29. 

The.isaloninns,  Epistles  to,  215. 

Thessalonica,  its  distance  from  Philippi,  194 ;  re- 


sult of  Paul's  labors  there,  195,  sq. ;  how 
long  he  remained,  196. 

Tfieudas,  why  not  mentioned  by  Josephus,  82 ; 
may  have  been  referred  to  under  a  different 
name,  82. 

Tholuck  on  the  influence  of  heathenism,  176 ; 
on  Paul's  speeches  as  compared  with  his 
Epistles,  237 ;  on  Paul's  appeals  to  his  ex- 
emplary life,  238 ;  his  mode  of  reconciling 
Luke's  account  of  the  Egyptian  impostor 
with  that  of  Josephus,  254. 

Tfiomson's  Tlie  Land  and  the  Book,  115. 

Timothy  was  a  native  of  Lystra,  181 ;  why  re- 
quired to  be  circumcised,  181 ;  whether  lie 
rejoined  Paul  at  Athens,  197  ;  why  he  was 
sent  from  Ephesus  into  Macedonia,  223 ; 
could  not  have  written  any  part  of  the 
Acts,  232 ;  Epistles  to,  325. 

Titus,  Epistle  to,  325. 

Toleration  granted  by  the  Romans  to  the  Jews, 
262. 

Traditions  among  the  Jews  sanctioned  as  true : 
in  regard  to  Abraham's  first  call,  92 ;  in 
regard  to  the  tomb  of  the  patriarchs,  95 ;  in 
regard  to  the  age  of  Moses,  98 ;  tlie  giving 
of  the  law  by  the  agency  of  angels,  104 ; 
the  length  of  Saul's  reign,  156. 

Tres  Tabernse,  319. 

Troas  correctly  distinguished  from  Mysia,  183. 

Trogyllium,  name  of  a  town  or  an  island,  235. 

Tyndale  at  Wittenberg,  299. 

Tyre,  the  emporium  of  Phoenicia,  245 ;  its  ruins 
beneath  the  sea,  245 ;  the  gospel  preached 
there  at  an  early  period,  245,  sq. 

Tyropoeon,  262. 

U. 

Undergirding  of  vessels,  how  performed,  300. 

Unity  of  the  human  race  asserted  by  Paul, 
206. 

Unknown  God  at  Athens,  204. 

Upper  room,  its  use,  35,  127,  233. 

Ur  of  the  Chaldees,  91. 

Urfa,  a  modern  city,  91. 

Usher,  his  chronology,  92. 


Valetta,  316. 

Validity  of  the  choice  of  Matthias  as  an  apostle, 

40. 
Valpy,  Notes  on  N.  T..  312. 
Vengeance    not  imprecated  on  Simon  by  the 

apostles,  110. 
Verbals  in  His,  287. 
Via  Appia,  319. 
View  from  the  Acropolis  at  Corinth,  210;  of 

ruins  at  Tyre,  245 ;  from  Nazareth,  292. 
Vintage,  time  of,  in  Palestine,  45. 


INDEX  II. 


345 


Viper,  why  extinct  in  Malta,  312 ;    its  habits, 

314. 
Virgil  on  the  dangers  of  the  sea,  303. 
Vizier,  Joseph's  office  in  Egypt,  94. 
Volscian  Hills,  319. 
Vojnel,  his  translation  of  the  twenty-seventh 

chapter,  296. 
Vuw,  whether  that  mentioned  in  18  :  18  was 

Paul's  or  Aquila's,  215 ;  how  long  that  of 

a  Nazarite  continued,  250. 
Voyages,  how  rapidly  made  in  ancient  times, 

318. 

"W. 

Wadij  Surar,  115. 

Wailing,  Oriental  mode  of,  107. 

Walch,  his  Dissertationes,  etc.,  69. 

Way,  Appian,  319. 

Way,  those  of  the,  118,  273. 

Westcott  and  Hort,  The  New  Testament  in 
Greek,  241. 

Wetstein  quoted,  292. 

Wiclif,  source  of  his  translation,  228. 

Wiesehr,  his  view  of  the  duration  of  Pentecost, 
252;  his  mode  of  reckoning  the  twelve 
days,  272. 

Windows,  how  made  in  Eastern  houses  l'>3- 
233. 

Winds  which  prevailed  in  the  Mediterranean 
near  the  end  of  summer,  292 ;  which  blow 
off  the  land  on  the  coast  of  Cilicia,  293 ;  as 
denoting  points  of  the  compass,  297  ;  change 
suddenly  from  the  south  to  the  north,  299; 
those  from  the  east  apt  to  be  lasting,  302  • 


at  what  rate  they  would  drive  a  ship  situ- 
ated like  that  of  Paul  on  the  voyage  to 
Rome,  305. 

Wine,  "  new,"  or  "sweet,"  45. 

Winer  on  the  use  of  the  article,  30 ;  limits  as- 
signed by  him  to  Proconsular  Asia,  44  ;  on 
the  inscription  to  an  "  unknown  god,"  204; 
his  opinion  of  the  night-journey  to  Anti- 
patris,  269. 

Witness,  inward,  of  the  Spirit,  81. 

Women,  heathen,  converts  to  Judaism,  163. 

Wood,  J.  T.,  F.  A.  S.,  quoted,  229. 

Wonders  and  signs,  48. 

Woolsey,  President,  suggestions  of,  195,  315. 

Wordsworth,  his  Notes  on  the  Acts,  140. 

Worship  began  at  dawn  in  the  temple,  79;  na- 
ture of  Sabaism,  101 ;  that  of  the  temple 
emblematical,  102;  performed  at  the  river- 
side by  the  Jews,  185. 

Y. 

Year  of  Paul's  conversion,  20. 

Yoke,  Jewish,  174. 

Young  man,  as  said  of  Saul,  105. 

z. 

Zahiam  held  that  John  was  the  Massiah,  219. 

Zealots  unknown  as  a  sect  till  after  the  time  of 
Christ,  35 ;  designated  those  in  the  church 
who  contended  for  Jewish  rites,  249. 

Zeal  of  Paul  as  a  Pharisee,  256. 

Zeller,  nature  of  his  objections,  67. 

Zion,  Mount,  a  burial-place,  51. 


THE   END. 


^-       ^      -»('        JT 


^^ 


M       >        '^■ 


#<        ^. 


DATE  DUE 


fjfT  it  ■>• 


GAYLORD 


PRINTED  IN  US 


-l^'  :JF 


^r  -X  ^'  -^ 


■^  ->■ 


V     >  v^ 


^       > 


t  ". 


-*■  ^' 


>•         y         jr         jk 


Jtr        M         .>■  >  i»  >•>>- 


iw         /«         Jr 


V  >»  -^  >-         ^^  J» 


>'         >- 


.-  ^  -A  A 


jr        >       > 


4P»         ^         >- 


>-       J^ 


BS2341.A512V.4 

Commentary  on  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans 

Princeton  Theological  Seminary-Speer  Library 


1    1012  00056  0328 


